summaryrefslogtreecommitdiff
path: root/Master/texmf-dist
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2013-05-06 22:17:47 +0000
committerKarl Berry <karl@freefriends.org>2013-05-06 22:17:47 +0000
commit97be36944506368e0d4ceba9aac964bdb09df0ab (patch)
tree7f237115f9857f5690a59db4854af8388998356d /Master/texmf-dist
parent9c014b016ad2023abb6061e05ab16b2c4c3e4a3c (diff)
babel 3.9a (at long last)
git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@30253 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751
Diffstat (limited to 'Master/texmf-dist')
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.heb605
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.txt77
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/GreekFonts.txt28
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/announce.txt39
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/athnum.pdfbin102016 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/babel.pdfbin2061761 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbcompat.pdfbin32528 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbidxglo.pdfbin33412 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bugs.txt81
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/changes.txt2822
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/fixes.txt29
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-fdd.pdfbin69924 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdfbin82191 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grmath.pdfbin40329 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grsymb.pdfbin38721 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/howtoget.txt33
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-485
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-pre4123
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.txt157
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.dat12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.skeleton221
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/legal.bbl37
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/manifest.bbl105
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1202.pdfbin112581 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1401.pdfbin42919 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1604.pdfbin77202 -> 0 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/todo.txt32
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/CONTRIB31
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/README53
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/babel.pdfbin0 -> 581339 bytes
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/blplain.tex (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/blplain.tex)9
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/bplain.tex (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bplain.tex)9
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist1
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist1
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.dtx302
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.ins149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/athnum.dtx277
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.dtx5900
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.ins252
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.dtx286
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.ins149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasam.dtx297
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.dtx390
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.dtx365
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.dtx1039
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.dtx712
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.dtx226
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.dtx1157
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.dtx337
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.dtx560
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.dtx451
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.dtx343
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.dtx468
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.dtx363
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.dtx3117
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.ins155
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.dtx2437
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.ins151
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/german.ins149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/germanb.dtx557
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.dtx864
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.fdd651
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.ins163
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grmath.dtx168
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grsymb.dtx131
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/heb209.dtx165
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebinp.dtx550
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.dtx3329
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.fdd1297
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.ins215
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.dtx749
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.dtx207
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.dtx218
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.dtx876
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.ins155
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.dtx401
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/language.dat12
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.dtx670
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.ins150
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/lsorbian.dtx265
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.dtx1411
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ngermanb.dtx359
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.dtx453
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.dtx563
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.dtx475
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.dtx232
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.dtx1238
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.ins147
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.dtx232
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.dtx209
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.dtx312
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.dtx1310
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.dtx302
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/sorbian.ins149
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.dtx2758
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.ins150
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.dtx442
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1202.tex961
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1401.tex266
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1604.tex448
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.dtx309
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.dtx1158
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.ins147
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usage.tex243
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usorbian.dtx400
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.dtx207
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.ins148
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx7306
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/base.ins)54
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbcompat.dtx)2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbidxglo.dtx (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbidxglo.dtx)2
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbplain.dtx (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbplain.dtx)103
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbunicode.dtx180
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/8859-8.def171
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.ldf136
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/athnum.sty102
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def1201
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty436
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasai.ldf137
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.ldf140
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.ldf151
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.ldf181
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.ldf365
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.ldf263
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp1255.def190
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp862.def166
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.ldf100
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.ldf452
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.ldf126
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.ldf186
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.ldf202
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.ldf133
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.ldf187
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.ldf132
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.cfg15
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.ldf1217
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.ldf845
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.ldf196
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glbst.tex103
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glromidx.tex216
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.ldf274
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grmath.sty84
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grsymb.sty67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8OmegaHebrew.fd80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8aharoni.fd86
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmr.fd97
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmss.fd97
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmtt.fd97
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8david.fd87
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8drugulin.fd85
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8enc.def138
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8frankruehl.fd85
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8miriam.fd86
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8nachlieli.fd85
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8yad.fd85
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebcal.sty441
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebfont.sty129
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.ldf297
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_newcode.sty73
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_p.sty73
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg384
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.ldf267
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.ldf104
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.ldf104
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.ldf244
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/kurmanji.ldf164
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.ldf229
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmr.fd73
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmro.fd66
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmss.fd66
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmtt.fd67
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmss.fd99
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmtt.fd72
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmr.fd133
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmro.fd99
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmss.fd112
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmtt.fd63
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheclas.fd89
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmr.fd97
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmss.fd101
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmtt.fd95
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecrml.fd89
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheenc.def113
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhefr.fd101
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheredis.fd109
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshold.fd80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshscr.fd80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshstk.fd80
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.ldf129
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/luababel.def113
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.ldf640
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.ldf162
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/nil.ldf (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_oldcode.sty)49
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.ldf185
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def51
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.ldf228
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf185
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/rlbabel.def812
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.ldf105
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanidx.sty215
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.ldf327
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.ldf111
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.ldf103
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.ldf140
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/si960.def75
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.ldf520
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.ldf121
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.ldf799
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.ldf160
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def338
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.ldf150
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.ldf321
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.ldf183
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.ldf104
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty3
-rw-r--r--Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/xebabel.def (renamed from Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrenc.def)49
294 files changed, 9308 insertions, 74130 deletions
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.heb b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.heb
deleted file mode 100644
index b4ae253092a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.heb
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,605 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
- Hebrew Package for babel system and LaTeX2e
-
-This new support package for Hebrew language is based on the old LaTeX 2.09
-hebrew.sty and is backward compatible with it. A new babel-based language
-switching interface is also supported.
-
-Bi-directional support uses TeX--XeT or newer e-TeX engine.
-
-The package is available on-line at http://www.dsg.technion.ac.il/heblatex/
-or at ftp://tochna.technion.ac.il/pub/staff/lavva/heblatex/. It consists of:
-
- 1. Hebrew package for babel/LaTeX 2e: heblatex.tar.gz or heblatex.zip.
- 2. Hebrew fonts (available also on CTAN or ftp.cc.huji.ac.il):
- hebfonts.tar.gz or hebfonts.zip.
- 3. Examples of hebrew documents: hebexmpl.tar.gz or hebexmpl.zip.
- 4. This README.html file, available also in plain text format as
- README.txt.
-
-The babel/LaTeX 2e edition of the hebrew package, as well as documentation
-(including this README file) was developed and will be supported by Boris
-Lavva, lavva@tx.technion.ac.il. Please direct your additions, modifications,
-bug fixes and comments to this address.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Table of contents
-
- Acknowledgement
- Copyright
- Installation
- Hebrew package usage
- Input code pages
- Font encodings
- Bi-directional sectioning commands
- Table of contents, List of figures, List of tables
- Hebrew calendar
- Document class for preparing Hebrew/English or English/Hebrew thesis
- Compatibility with LaTeX 2.09 style
- Future work
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Acknowledgment
-
-The following people have contributed to Hebrew package in one way or
-another, knowingly or unknowingly. In alphabetical order:
-Irina Abramovici, Yaniv Bargury, Yael Dubinsky, Sergio Fogel, Dan Haran,
-Rama Porrat, Michail Rozman, Alon Ziv.
-
-Johannes Braams is the author of babel - a multilingual support for LaTeX.
-
-Tatiana Samoilov and Vitaly Surazhsky found a number of serious bugs in
-preliminary version of Hebrew package.
-
-A number of other people have contributed comments and information. Specific
-contributions are acknowledged within the documentation.
-
-I want to thank my wife, Vita, and son, Mishka, for their infinite love and
-patience.
-
-If you made a contribution and I haven't mentioned it, don't worry, it was
-an accident. I'm sorry. Just tell me and I will add you to the next version.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Copyright
-
-The copyright similar to other LaTeX 2e packages is added to prevent
-inconsistency in version numbers and wide-spread distribution of unsupported
-macro files (which was common with the old distributions).
-
-Changes, bug fixes and additions are always welcome, but they should be or
-distributed under other name, or incorporated in this package (by mailing
-me).
-
- --------------------------------------------------
-
- Copyright 1997-1998 Boris Lavva and any individual authors listed
- elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
- For further copyright information, and conditions for modification and
- distribution, see any other copyright notices in this file.
-
- This file is contributed to the Babel system, release 3.6.
-
- --------------------------------------------------
- This system is distributed in the hope that
- it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied
- warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
-
- For error reports concerning UNCHANGED versions of this file no more
- than one year old, see bugs.txt.
-
- Please do not request updates from me directly. Primary distribution
- will be through the CTAN archives.
-
- IMPORTANT COPYRIGHT NOTICE:
-
- You are NOT ALLOWED to distribute this file alone.
-
- You are allowed to distribute this file under the condition that it
- is distributed together with all the files listed in manifest.txt.
-
- If you receive only some of these files from someone, complain!
-
- Permission is granted to customize the declarations in this file to
- serve the needs of your installation, provided that you comply with the
- conditions in the file legal.txt.
-
- However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version of
- this file under its original name.
-
- MODIFICATION ADVICE:
- If you want to customize this file, it is best to make a copy of the
- source file(s) from which it was produced. Use a different name for your
- copy(ies) and modify the copy(ies); this will ensure that your modifications
- do not get overwritten when you install a new release of the standard system.
-
- You can then easily distribute your modifications by distributing the
- modified and renamed copy of the source file, together with a suitable
- .ins file, taking care to observe the conditions in legal.txt; this will
- ensure that other users can safely use your modifications.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Installation
-
- 1. Full LaTeX 2e distribution should be installed, including TeX--XeT or
- e-TeX. Known such distributions include:
- o teTeX 0.9 for UNIX with e-TeX
- (ftp://ftp.informatik.uni-hannover.de/home/te/private/.0.9/)
- o NTeX for UNIX with TeX--XeT
- (http://darfnix.mathematik.uni-stuttgart.de/pub/tex/ntex/)
- o Web2C for Windows 95 and NT (see at CTAN:systems/win32, for
- example, ftp://ftp.dante.de/tex-archive/systems/win32/)
- o TeX Live CD-ROMs distributed by TeX Users Group (TUG), see details
- at http://www.tug.org.
- 2. If e-TeX is installed, check if its format is available in extended
- mode, by running elatex or latex on some .tex file:
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- This is e-TeX, Version 3.14159-1.1 (Web2c 7.0)
- entering extended mode
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- The second line should be "entering extended mode".
- 3. If TeX--XeT is installed, it will use a LaTeX 2e format file, called
- laxet.fmt from the formats directory. This directory is commonly
- located at texmf/web2c or texmf/web2c/ini subdirectories. To produce
- format file, run initexxet program on the following laxet.ini file:
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- % Prevent dumping of LaTeX2e
- \let\xxdump=\dump
- \let\dump=\endinput
- % LaTeX2e format
- \input latex.ltx
- % Read latex2e.add
- \openin1=latex2e.add
- \ifeof1\closein1\message{latex2e.add not found}
- \else\closein1\input latex2e.add
- \fi
- % dump
- \let\dump=\xxdump
- \let\xxdump=\undefined
- \dump
- -----------------------------------------------------------------------
-
- Put the resulting file laxet.fmt to the formats directory and link (or
- copy) the virtexxet program as laxet.
- 4. Download the babel sources from the CTAN sites, directory
- macros/latex/packages/babel. This version of Hebrew package is tested
- with babel version 3.6.
- 5. Apply the following changes to the standard babel sources:
- o babel.dtx -- after the line 916 (greek) add:
- \DeclareOption{hebrew}{\input{rlbabel.def}\input{hebrew.ldf}}
- o bbcompat.dtx -- after the line 134 (welsh) add:
- %<+hebrew>\input rlbabel.def\input hebrew.ldf\relax
- o babel.ins -- after the line 346 (bahasa) add:
- \generate{\compatfile{hebrew}}
- 6. Download the hebrew package, fonts and examples from the above
- mentioned place.
- 7. Open heblatex to the babel sources directory.
- 8. Run latex babel.ins and then latex hebrew.ins.
- 9. Move all *.cls, *.sty, *.def, *.fd, *.ldf to the babel directory
- searchable by TeX (run MakeTeXls-R or similar program). Usually, babel
- is located at TEXROOT/share/texmf/tex/latex/packages/babel or
- TEXROOT/share/texmf/tex/generic/babel.
- 10. Install hebrew fonts from hebfonts as following:
- o Find your public font sources directory, it is usually:
- TEXROOT/share/texmf/fonts/source/public.
- o Unpack hebfonts file into the abovenamed public directory. It will
- create a new directory called hebrew inside public.
- o Find your special.map file - it is usually found at
- TEXROOT/share/texmf/fontname/special.map and add the following
- lines at the end of this file:
- @c Hebrew fonts
- jerus10 public hebrew
- deads10 public hebrew
- oldjaf10 public hebrew
- telav10 public hebrew
- crml10 public hebrew
- crmlsl10 public hebrew
- fr public hebrew
- frbx public hebrew
- frsl public hebrew
- hclassic public hebrew
- hcaption public hebrew
- redis7 public hebrew
- redis8 public hebrew
- redis9 public hebrew
- redis10 public hebrew
- redis12 public hebrew
- redis17 public hebrew
- redisb10 public hebrew
- rediss8 public hebrew
- rediss9 public hebrew
- rediss10 public hebrew
- rediss12 public hebrew
- shold10 public hebrew
- shscr10 public hebrew
- shstk10 public hebrew
- o Run REHASH from texconfig utility or program MakeTeXls-R or newer
- mktexlsr (if available) to build a new ls-R database in
- TEXROOT/share/texmf directory. You can add inserted file names
- manually to ls-R if you cannot find abovenamed programs.
- o Note that only 7-bit (old code) fonts are used by new Hebrew
- package.
- 11. You can check if your installation succeed by LaTeXing examples from
- hebexmpl file.
-
-Finally, you can prepare the LaTeX documentation of all components of the
-new Hebrew package by running:
-
- ------------------------------------
-
- latex hebrew.dtx
- makeindex -s bbind.ist hebrew.idx
- makeindex -s bbglo.ist -o hebrew.gls hebrew.glo
- latex hebrew.dtx
- latex hebrew.dtx
-
- ------------------------------------
-
-The same procedure can be applied on babel.dtx (or babel.drv) to create the
-babel documentation. Files bbind.ist and bbglo.ist are included with babel
-installation.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Hebrew package usage
-
-The usage is simple, for example:
-
-\documentclass[12pt,twoside]{book}
-\usepackage[hebrew,english,russian,danish,greek,...]{babel}
-
-LaTeX 2.09 style is also supported (in compatibility mode) to process
-existing documents, for example:
-
-\documentstyle[12pt,hebrew_newcode]{article}
-
-Languages can be switched by the following macros:
-
- 1. \sethebrew or \unsethebrew
- 2. \selectlanguage{hebrew}, \selectlanguage{english}, etc.
- 3. \begin{otherlanguage}{hebrew} ... \end{otherlanguage}, or any other
- language
- 4. \R{hebrew text} inside the latin text
- 5. \L{latin text} inside the hebrew text
-
-First three commands are equivalent: first one provides switching interface,
-compatible with LaTeX 2.09 hebrew style, while second and third ---
-babel-based interface.
-
-Last two commands are used for language and direction switching inside
-paragraph.
-
-hmbox and embox macros should be used for inserting Hebrew and English text
-(respectively) inside a mathematical formula.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Input code pages
-
-Hebrew package supports the following input code pages:
-
- 1. 7-bit hebrew encoding, also known as old code, defined by Israeli
- Standard 960 (si960)
- 2. IBM PC code page also known as pc code (cp862)
- 3. WINDOWS code page also known as new code (cp1255)
- 4. ISO 8859-8 Hebrew/Latin code page commonly used in UNIX, also known as
- new code (8859-8 also known as new code)
-
-The default input encoding can be set using option defined above in
-parentheses with inputenc style (but *before* babel), for example :
-
-\usepackage[cp1255]{inputenc}
-
-Input encoding can be changed also inside the document by the \inputencoding
-command, for example:
-
-\inputencoding{cp862}
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Font encodings
-
-Various font encodings can be used, including, of course, Local Hebrew
-Encoding (LHE), with the aid of fontenc style (but *before* babel), for
-example:
-
-\usepackage[LHE,OT2,LCY,T1]{fontenc}
-
-Many useful font-switching commands are provided in hebfont package which
-can be included *after* the babel:
-
-\usepackage{hebfont}
-
-These commands are in format \text<font>{Hebrew text}, for example:
-\textoj{Text printed with Old Jaffa font}, \textredis{Text printed with
-redis font}.
-
-In addition, for backward compatibility in LaTeX 2.09 documents, the four
-old font-switching commands are supported:
-{\jm ...}, {\oj ...}, {\ds ...} and {\ta ...} for Jerusalem, Old Jaffa, Dead
-Sea and Tel-Aviv fonts respectively.
-
-The following TeX fonts are supported:
-
- * Jerusalem (used as default font)
- * Dead Sea (used as bold font)
- * Tel-Aviv (used as sans-serif or typewriter font)
- * Old Jaffa (used as italic or slanted font and for emphasize)
- * Hebrew classic normal and slanted (command \textclas)
- * Shalom Old Style (command \textshold)
- * Shalom Script (command \textshscr)
- * Shalom Stick (command \textshstk)
- * Carmel normal and slanted (command \textcrml)
- * Frank Ruehl normal, bold and slanted (command \textfr)
- * Redis normal, bold and slanted (command \textredis)
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Bi-directional sectioning commands
-
-These commands inserts both Hebrew title to the RL table of contents or list
-of figures/tables, and English (or other LR language) title to the LR table
-of contents or list of figures/tables.
-
- 1. \bpart{hebrew}{english}
- 2. \bchapter{hebrew}{english}
- 3. \bsection{hebrew}{english}
- 4. \bsubsection{hebrew}{english}
- 5. \bsubsubsection{hebrew}{english}
- 6. \bcaption{hebrew}{english}
- 7. \bchapternn{hebrew}{english} - replaces \chapter*
- 8. \bsectionnn{hebrew}{english} - replaces \section*
-
-A number of additional bi-directional commands are defined in the
-hebtech.cls - thesis document class file, described below.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Table of contents, List of figures, List of tables
-
-Both Right-to-Left and Left-to-Right versions of the tables (toc, lof and
-lot) can be generated simultaneously. The LR files have the default
-extensions (.toc, .lof and .lot), while the RL files have reversed
-extensions (.cot, .fol and .tol). For example, to include RL tables at the
-beginning and LR tables before the end of the document:
-
- ------------------------------------
-
- \begin{document}
- \sethebrew
- \tableofcontents % Generates .cot file
- \listoffigures % Generates .fol file
- \listoftables % Generates .tol file
- ...
- \unsethebrew
- \tableofcontents % Generates .toc file
- \listoffigures % Generates .lof file
- \listoftables % Generates .lot file
- \end{document}
-
- ------------------------------------
-
-All 6 files are generated simultaneously in two latex passes !
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Hebrew calendar
-
-Original Hebrew calendar style was created by Michail Rozman, and corrected
-by Rama Porrat, Michail Rozman and Dan Haran.
-
-This style was adjusted to LaTeX 2e by Boris Lavva, and provided in hebcal
-package. It can be included *after* the babel:
-
-\usepackage{hebcal}
-
-The following 2 user-level commands are provided with the package:
-
-\newcount\hd \newcount\hm \newcount\hy
-
-\hd=10 \hm=3 \hy=1992
-
-\HebrewDate{\hd}{\hm}{\hy}
-
-which converts the requested Gregorian date to Hebrew calendar date and
-prints it in Hebrew or English (depends on the current language) and:
-
-\HebrewToday or \hebrewtoday
-
-which prints the current Hebrew date (today) .
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Document class for preparing Hebrew/English or English/Hebrew thesis
-
-A useful document class file hebtech for preparing M.Sc. and Ph.D. theses
-for the Technion (English/Hebrew and Hebrew/English) is included with this
-package too. I believe that it can be adjusted for the needs of other
-academic institutions in Israel too. This class automatically includes babel
-with hebrew and english option, hebfont and hebcal packages.
-
-The original version for LaTeX 2.09 and old code Hebrew was created in 1994
-by Irina Abramovici, at Taub Computer Center, Technion.
-
-How to use this document class?
-
-\documentclass[12pt]{hebtech}
-
-The following parameters should be included in thesis preamble (before
-\begin{document}):
-
- 1. Thesis title
- \title{hebrew}{english}
- 2. Thesis author
- \author{hebrew}{english}
- 3. Department name, e.g. Electrical Engineering Department
- \dept{hebrew}{english}
- 4. Domain of research, e.g. Food Processing
- \dom{hebrew}{english}
- 5. Main advisor
- \advisori{hebrew}{english}
- 6. Second advisor, if exists
- \advisorii{hebrew}{english}
- 7. Main sponsor
- \donori{hebrew}{english}
- 8. Additional sponsor, if exists
- \donorii{hebrew}{english}
- 9. Set thestype counter to:
- o 1 --- for a research thesis
- o 2 --- for a project thesis
- o 3 --- for a final paper
-
- \setcounter{thestype}{1}
- 10. Set grade counter to:
- o 1 --- for master of science
- o 2 --- for master
- o 3 --- for master of technology
- o 4 --- for doctor of science
-
- \setcounter{grade}{1}
- 11. Date is optional, if not included, today's date will be used. The
- Gregorian date entered will be printed and get converted the Jewish
- date.
- \date{28}{2}{1998}
- 12. Page style is optional too, if not included, plain will be used.
- \pagestyle{thesis}
-
-In the main document the following additional commands and environments can
-be used:
-
- 1. \makecover - creates Hebrew or English cover page, depending on the
- current language.
- 2. \maketitle - creates Hebrew or English title page, depending on the
- current language.
- 3. \begin{acknowledgment} ... \end{acknowledgment} - builds the
- acknowledgment page and adds inserted customized acknowledgment in
- Hebrew or English, depending on the current language.
- 4. \begin{dedication} ... \end{dedication} - builds the dedication page in
- Hebrew or English, depending on the current language.
- 5. \tableofcontents, \listoffigures, \listoftables - builds tables
- depending on the current language (all 6 tables can be used
- simultaneously).
- 6. \begin{abstract} ... \end{abstract} - builds the abstract pages in
- Hebrew or English, depending on the current language, adds contents
- line to the 2 tables of contents.
- 7. \frontmatter, \mainmatter, \backmatter - should be inserted at the
- beginning, before the main part, and at the ending of the thesis to
- change numbering and other style parameters.
- 8. \bibliography{...} - now adds "References" line to the 2 tables of
- contents: English and Hebrew.
-
-Some useful bi-directional commands, for figures and tables provided in this
-file too:
-
- 1. \bcaptionf{hebrew}{english} - similar to \bcaption but answers to
- thesis formatting requirements at the Technion, used for figures.
- 2. \bcaptionff{to RL lof}{to LR lof}{hebrew}{english} - a customized one
- for figures.
- 3. \bcaptiont{hebrew}{english} - similar to \bcaption but answers to
- thesis formatting requirements at the Technion, used for tables.
- 4. \bcaptiontt{to RL lot}{to LR lot}{hebrew}{english} - a customized one
- for tables.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Compatibility with LaTeX 2.09 style
-
-Generally, the new package is compatible with LaTeX 2.09 style file
-hebrew.sty, i.e. in most cases one can use the new package on old documents
-without any errors. Howver, it does not support Plain TeX, please use
-heb_macros.tex, or other TeX macro file for Hebrew instead.
-
-A few incompatibilities are described below:
-
- * The macros with Hebrew names are not provided, for example, macro
- \hadgesh when the command name "hadgesh" is given in Hebrew is not
- supported. The reason is that in new LaTeX 2e it is forbidden to use
- 8-bit macros, because all characters 128-255 became to be "active".
- However, the following English-coded equivalents are supported for
- backward compatibility with LaTeX 2.09 style and can be used even in
- the new documents:
- 1. \hebday (replaced "hayom").
- 2. \hebcopy (for use in letter style)
- 3. \hebincl (for use in letter style)
- 4. \hebpage (for use in letter style)
- 5. \hebto (for use in letter style)
- 6. \hadgesh (produces ``poor man's bold'' - heavy printout, it is
- advisable to use real bold fonts, e.g. DeadSea instead)
- 7. \piska (can be used only in compatibility mode)
- 8. \piskapiska (can be used only in compatibility mode)
- 9. \makafgadol (=\textendash)
- 10. \makafanak (=\textemdash)
- 11. \geresh (=\textquoteright)
- 12. \opengeresh (=\textquoteright)
- 13. \closegeresh (=\textquoteleft)
- 14. \openquote (=\textquotedblright)
- 15. \closequote (=\textquotedblleft)
- 16. \leftquotation (=\textquotedblright)
- 17. \rightquotation (=\textquotedblleft)
- 18. \undertext (=\underline, can be used only in compatibility mode)
- * In \documentstyle line the following 3 styles can be used in Hebrew
- documents:
- 1. \documentstyle[hebrew_oldcode,...]{...} in old 7-bit documents
- (instead of "hebrew"!).
- 2. \documentstyle[hebrew_newcode,...]{...} in 8-bit UNIX or Windows
- documents.
- 3. \documentstyle[hebrew_p,...]{...} in 8-bit DOS documents.
- * hebcal style should always be used (instead of older hebcal_p and
- hebcal_newcode).
- * Font names for the included 7-bit fonts were renamed (for the sake of
- multiplatform support) to lowercase names with no more than 8
- characters as following:
- o jerus10.mf - for Jerusalem (10pt)
- o deads10.mf - for Dead Sea (10pt)
- o telav10.mf - for TelAviv (10pt)
- o oldjaf10.mf - for Old Jaffa (10pt)
- o shold10.mf - for Shalom Old Style (10pt)
- o shscr10.mf - for Shalom Script (10pt)
- o shstk10.mf - for Shalom Stick (10pt)
- o Some other font-related files were renamed too (to lowercase and <
- 8 characters):
- + frank_ruehl.mf became frruehl.mf
- + redisfont.mf became redisfnt.mf
- + redisbx10.mf became redisb10.mf
- o All other font names remain unchanged
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Future work
-
- 1. Visual enviroments i.e. tabular, tabbing and array have to be supported
- for hebrew. Now only left-to-right direction of lines is supported.
- 2. Update hebrew package for the future babel-3.7 release.
- 3. Hebrew points and dots ("nikud") support should be added, so it can be
- used in font-independent way.
- Currently, nikud can be used only on font-dependent way: only shalom
- and classic families of fonts provide nikud, and hebrew point glyphs
- are located in different places.
- 4. Machintosh Hebrew/English input code page support should be added.
- 5. Type1/TrueType Hebrew fonts should be supported.
-
-------------------------------------------------------
-Created by Boris Lavva, lavva@tx.technion.ac.il
-Last modified March 1, 1998
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9fd45ef96df..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/00readme.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,77 +0,0 @@
- Babel Distribution Guide
-
- 17 March 2008
-
-
-Welcome to the Babel system!
-
-This file contains the distribution guide for version 3.8 of the
-Babel system. The Babel system is distributed under the terms of
-the LaTeX Project Public License version 1.3 or later. A copy of
-the LPPL can be found in the LaTeX distribution.
-
-The Babel system supports multilingual typesetting.
-This version of the Babel system is compatible with LaTeX2e.
-Whenever the instructions talk about LaTeX, read LaTeX2e.
-
-This system is maintained by Johannes Braams in cooperation with
-various people around the world.
-
-The Babel system is described in:
-
- * The LaTeX Companion 2nd edn., Mittelbach and Goossens et al, Addison-Wesley
-
-
-This distribution is described in the files ending with .txt. You
-should read install.txt before starting to install Babel.
-
- * 00readme.txt is this file.
-
- * changes.txt is a chronological list of the changes to babel
-
- * install.txt describes how to install Babel.
- * install.OzTeX-4 describes how to install Babel on a Mac with a
- recent OzTeX distribution (4.0+).
- * install.OzTeX-pre4 describes how to install Babel on a Mac with an
- old OzTeX distribution (before 4.0).
-
- * manifest.bbl lists all the files in the Babel distribution.
-
- * bugs.txt describes how to submit a bug report for Babel.
-
- * todo.txt lists a few things that haven't been done yet
-
- * howtoget.txt lists the places where to get the Babel system and
- other related software.
-
-You are not allowed to change the files in this distribution.
-
-If you want to add your own options to extend Babel with local
-language definitions you can do that by adding \DeclareOption
-statements to a configuration file, bblopt.cfg.
-
-If you like the babel system, please send me a postcard with a nice
-postage stamp for my collection!
-
-Please do not request updates from me. Distribution is done only
-through mail servers and TeX organisations.
-
-
-Please send bug reports to the LaTeX bug reporting address,
-latex-bugs@latex-project.org. Please read the file bugs.txt in this
-distribution and follow the guidelines.
-
-WARNINGS:
----------
-- The file wnhyphen.tex (russian hyphenation pattern file) contains
- changes of uppercase and lowercase codes. Amongst these is
- \uccode`\~=`\^ which may lead to unexpected results when the ~
- occurs in the argument of \uppercase
-
-Send any suggestions, additions, complaints, to me:
-e-mail: babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-address: Kersengaarde 33
- 2723 BP Zoetermeer
- The Netherlands
-Note that I am more likely to respond to e-mail.
---- Copyright 1997,2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/GreekFonts.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/GreekFonts.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 4bc082f60e6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/GreekFonts.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,28 +0,0 @@
-
- The Greek fonts
-
-
- The latest version of the "babel" package supports the Greek language. In
- order to be able to use the "greek" option correctly someone must have
- the correct fonts properly installed. The "greek" option uses the new
- fonts designed by Claudio Beccari (beccari@polito.it). The fonts are
- complete, i.e., there are shapes for every possible combination. Moreover,
- the fonts include the big slide size fonts, which were missing in the
- previous font bundle.
-
- Where to find them
-
- All the necessary Greek fonts reside in any of the CTAN nodes. They
- reside in the directory languages/greek/cb. The font bundle includes
- hyphenation patterns plus usage information for the greek option.
-
- October 15, 1997
-
- Apostolos Syropoulos
-
- snail mail: 366, 28th October Str.
- GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE
-
- electronic
- mail: apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr or
- apostolo@obelix.ee.duth.gr
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/announce.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/announce.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 04541542785..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/announce.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,39 +0,0 @@
- Hi,
-
- This is the announcement of babel release 3.8,
-
- What's new in release 3.8?
- Actually babel 3.8 is very much like the later releases of
- babel 3.7. Support for a number of languages has been added.
- Here is a list of the changes since babel 3.7h:
- - Shorthands are expandable again. The disadvantage is that
- one has to type '{}a when the acute accent is used as a
- shorthand character. The advantage is that a number of other
- problems (such as the breaking of ligatures, etc.) have
- vanished.
- - Two new commands, \shorthandon and \shorthandoff have
- been introduced to enable to temporarily switch off one or more
- shorthands.
- - The support for Hebrew has been updated by Tzafrir Cohen
- - Support for Slovak has been extended with shorthand
- definitions.
- - Support for typesetting Sanskrit in transliteration will
- be made available in a later release of babel.
- - Support for typesetting Kannada, Devnagari and Tamil will
- be made available in a later release of babel.
- - Support for typesetting interlingua is now available, thanks to
- Peter Kleiweg <kleiweg@let.rug.nl>.
-
- The last remark: where can you get babel 3.8?
- It is available in the directory
- /tex-archive/macros/latex/rewuired/babel on CTAN.
-
- Happy LaTeXing!
-
- Johannes Braams
-
-TeXniek, Kersengaarde 33,
-2723 BP Zoetermeer The Netherlands.
-Phone : +31 79 352 28 19 E-mail : johannes at braams.cistron.nl
-Fax : +31 70 343 41 85
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/athnum.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/athnum.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index b379bd29057..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/athnum.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/babel.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/babel.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d5c85f6dc8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/babel.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbcompat.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbcompat.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 668d93608d7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbcompat.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbidxglo.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbidxglo.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index e200f1898e7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bbidxglo.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bugs.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bugs.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index d5a4b8c715a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/bugs.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,81 +0,0 @@
- Babel Error Reports
-
- 20 February 2004
-
-ERROR REPORTS
-
-Before you report an error please check that:
-
- * The error has not already been reported. If you have WWW
- access, you can search the LaTeX bugs database using this URL:
-
- http://www.latex-project.org/bugs.html
-
- * The error is not caused by software other than the Babel software
- that is produced and maintained by me (please report problems with
- other software to the authors or suppliers of that software).
-
- * The error is not caused by using an obsolete version of any file or
- of other software.
-
- * You are using the original version of all files, not one that has
- been modified elsewhere.
-
-If you think you have found a genuine bug in a recent version of the
-Babel software please report it in the same way as bugs for LaTeX2e
-are reported:
-
- * Prepare a *short* test file that clearly demonstrates your
- problem; see below for a discussion of `short'.
-
- * Run this file through latex to obtain the transcript file
- (often .log) since you will need to submit this file also.
-
- * Generate a bug report template by running the file
- latexbug.tex through LaTeX2e.
-
- * Fill in the spaces in the generated template file. Please note that
- the reporting language is *English* irregardless of the fact, that
- the address you are sending the bug report to, might not be in an
- English speaking country. Reports received in a language other than
- English might not be understandable for the person currently
- looking at bug reports!
-
- * Include all necessary information, especially a complete input
- file, a complete transcript file, and all other files used (if they
- are not standard).
-
- Please check carefully to ensure that any non-standard files are
- essential to the bug; and remember that I cannot debug files not
- supplied by me.
-
- Any such non-standard files should be included in a `filecontents'
- environment at the start of your input file. This allows me to
- run your test file without a lot of manual preparation; this is
- essential since we have to deal with many reports, not just with
- the one written by you.
-
- * Please note that it is important to make the input file as small
- as possible since this will enable me to find and fix the error
- quickly. It also helps me because then I can often use it as test
- file for future releases.
-
- I would expect most files to be less than 60 lines, and very
- rarely to be longer than 100 lines.
-
- This can often be achieved by defining a command to be some
- arbitrary text and using this several times if it is necessary to
- generate longer bits of text.
-
-Error reports concerning UNCHANGED versions of Babel files should be
-sent by E-mail to:
-
- latex-bugs@latex-project.org
-
-You will receive an acknowledgement by E-mail containing at the
-beginning of its subject line a problem reference of the form
-category/number, e.g. babel/1234. Please use this subject line in ALL
-further E-mails concerning the problem. Otherwise your reply will be
-categorized and filed separately.
-
---- Copyright 2004 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/changes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/changes.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 20ece3262ff..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/changes.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2822 +0,0 @@
-
-This file lists changes to the Babel files in reverse chronological order.
-NOTE: This file is based on the developers' personal change-log files
-and is provided for convenience only. It therefore makes no claims to
-completeness or accuracy and it contains some references to files that
-are not part of the distribution.
-
-==========================================================================
-
-
-2009-09-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.ins: Added a line for kurmanji
-
-2009-09-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * kurmanji/kurmanji.dtx: Added the support provided by Jörg
- Knappen.
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx: New version (2.3d) from Daniel
-
- * danish/danish.dtx: The shorthand "/ introduced in version 1.3q
- was still a dutch shorthand. found by Lars Madsen (daleif @
- imf.au.dk)
-
-2009-09-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * estonian/estonian.dtx: Received a new version of estonian.dtx
- from Jaan Vajakas (jv at ut.ee) with the follwoing changes:
- - the commands \~o and \~O now work properly in T1 encoding (before,
- words containing the commands \~o or \~O were not hyphenated and
- with the times package the tilde was placed incorrectly (through
- the letter o))
- - in UTF-8 encoding (\usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}) now õ and Õ
- work properly (before, words containing the letter õ or Õ
- were not hyphenated and with the timesi package, the tilde was
- placed incorrectly, probably due to the bug with \~o and \~O),
- i. e. the bug
- http://www.latex-project.org/cgi-bin/ltxbugs2html?pr=babel/4029
- was fixed
- - the command \~ now makes tilde to all letters except š, ž, Š
- ja Ž, as in other languages (before, \~ made caron to all letters
- except õ and Õ)
- - because of this, now e.g. the letter ñ is displayed correctly
- with \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc}
- - now, letters like õ and ñ can be copied and pasted from
- Acrobat Reader (before, e.g. õ made with the command \~o became
- ~o when copied; the same also with letter õ made directly with
- the UTF-8 character õ with \usepackage[utf8]{inputenc})
- - when switching from Estonian to another language, high umlaut is
- now restored (e.g. in English OT1-encoding the umlaut of the
- letters öäü is higher than in Estonian, but before, if the
- command \selectlanguage{english} was used after Estonian text, the
- umlaut remained low in the following English text)
- - words containing the commands ~s, ~z, ~o, "a, "o, "u, ~S, ~Z,
- ~O, "A, "O, "U are now also hyphenated in OT1 encoding (before,
- words containing the commands ~o, "a, "o, "u were not hyphenated);
- words containing letters made directly with characters
- šžäöüŠŽÄÖÜ or commands \~s, \~z, \"a, \"o, \"u,
- \~S, \~Z, \"A, \"O, \"U are still not hyphenated in OT1 encoding
- (also e.g. the German package allows hyphenation in words
- containing the command "a but it OT1 encoding it does not allow
- hyphenation in words containing directly the charcater ä or
- command \"a)
- - minor regression: now words containing directly characters õ or
- Õ or commands \~o or \~O are not hyphenated any more in OT1
- encoding (this regression is really marginal because firstly,
- words containing any other Estonian accented letter were not
- hyphenated in OT1 encoding, secondly, the Estonian hyphenation
- rules do not work absolutely correctly in OT1 encoding anyway and
- thirdly, with e. g. the German package the situation is similar)
-
-2008-07-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * estonian/estonian.dtx : Added the translation for Glossary,
- provided by Jaan Vajakas.
-
-2008-07-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): The value of
- \languagename, as dumped in the format needs to be the name of the
- language in register 0, not the last language loaded. (PR
- 4039). Now temporarily store the wanted name to be restored after
- all pattern files have been loaded.
-
-2008-07-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * estonian/estonian.dtx : Replaced the translation of "Proof" (PR
- 4030)
-
-2008-07-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * latin/latin.dtx: Added two missing \end{macro}'s found while
- compliling babel.drv
-
- * danish/danish.dtx: Fixed a small typo
-
- * galician/galician.dtx: Fixed a small typo
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a new
- macro (\bbl@patterns) to enable usig encoding specific hyphenation
- patterns as is the case for the Czech ans Slovak support;
- requested by Petr Tesarik, the current maintainer of those files.
-
- * slovak/slovak.dtx: New file received from Petr Tesarik (already
- in 2006)
-
- * czech/czech.dtx: New file received from Petr Tesarik (already in
- 2006)
-
- * base/bbcompat.dtx: two lines were missing for latin.sty; added,
- found by Catalin David
-
- * german/ngermanb.dtx : Corrected a typo found by Daniel
- Winkelmann
-
- * spanish/spanish.dtx : Corrected the Checksum for compilation as
- part of Babel and corrected a couple of typos found by Heiko
- Oberdiek (PR 4037)
- Two consecutive right quotes should be turned into one right
- double quote. Found by Takao Nakagawa
-
- * greek/greek.fdd: New version from Claudio Beccari
-
- * greek/greek.ins: New version from Claudio Beccari
-
-2008-06-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * german/germanb.dtx : Fixed a type (\coptions...) found by Daniel
- Flipo
-
- * french/frenchb.dtx : New versino from Daniel Flipo
-
- * spanish/spanishb.dtx : New version from Javier, fixing a couple
- of bugs.
-
-2008-03-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * latin/latin.dtx (section{Latin shortcuts} : The way the category
- code for the equals sign and the caret was being handled was
- broken. The restoration of the right catcodes ended up inside the
- definition of \ProsodicMarks (PR 3976). Also made
- \LatinMarks... aliases for \ProsedicMarks...
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added an extra
- \begingroup ... \endgroup in order to protect the current
- lowercase cide of the tilde (PR 3851)
- (subsection{marks}): Added the check for the value of \@mkboth. If
- it is equal to \markboth we need to redefine it too. (PR 3826)
-
- * bulgarian/bulgarian.dtx : Small documentation fix (remove
- superfluous double quotes from table) signalled by Michail
- Vidiassov (master at iaas dot msu dot ru)
-
- * cyrillic/russianb.dtx : Small documentation fix (remove
- superfluous double quotes from table) signalled by Michail
- Vidiassov (master at iaas dot msu dot ru)
-
-2008-03-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * portuges/portuges.dtx : Adde the translation for Glossary from
- Luiz Carlos Guidolin
-
- * galician/galician.dtx: New version from Javier Múgica de Rivera
-
- * spanish/spanish.dtx: New version from Javier Bezos; now at
- version 5.0
-
-2008-03-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * danish/danish.dtx : Set the \lefthyphenmin parameter to 2 by
- default on request by the Danish users through Palle Jørgensen
- Also added definitions for"/ and \- (copied from dutch.ldf) as per
- the same request.
-
- * german/germanb.dtx: When the option germanb needs to work like
- german it is not sufficient to just change the value of
- \CurrentOption. It also needs the setting of \l@germanb and the
- four definiing macros. (PR 3992)
-
- * sorbian/usorbian.dtx : When the lowercase code of the character
- ^Y is to be changed we need to make sure that the caret has
- category code 7. (PR 3992)
-
-2008-03-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}}): Added some code
- to let hyphenref swith the shorthands to system level (PR4006)
- (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the setting of the
- hyphenmin parameters to the \hyphenrules command (PR3997)
-
-2008-03-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bahasa/bahasam.dtx: New version from Bob Margolis with corrected
- translations.
-
-2008-03-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * italian/italian.dtx : New version from Claudio, fixing a
- cllubpenalty bug
-
-2008-03-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * latin/latin.dtx: New version from Claudio Beccari, merged with
- master source.
-
- * french/french.dtx New version from Daniel Flipo (2.0e)
-
-2007-10-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * latin/latin.dtx: The line with
- \addtoextraslanguage{\LatinMarksOff} contained a typo; fixing that
- brought to light that it needed to be removed as it generated an
- error from \begin{document} PR 3960 by David Kastrup
-
-2007-10-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * sorbian/usorbian.dtx: The Babel option uppersorbian wasn't
- supported, reported (PR 3982) by Uwe Stoehr
-
- * sorbian/lsorbian.dtx: The Babel option lowersorbian wasn't
- supported, reported (PR 3982) by Uwe Stoehr
-
-2006-06-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * esperanto/esperanto.dtx: The macros \esper and \Esper were
- missing the letter 'r'; (PR3866), found by Paul Ebermann
-
- * finnish/finnish.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from
- Heik Oberdiek.
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from
- Heik Oberdiek.
-
- * base/bbcompat.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from
- Heiko Oberdiek.
-
- * albanian/albanian.dtx: Small documentation fix (PR3871) from
- Heiko Oberdiek.
-
-2005-12-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * cyrillic/ukraineb.dtx: removed the comment character before the
- definition of "` on request from Andrij M. Shvaika
-
-2005-11-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bahasa/bahasam.dtx: New language added to the distribution
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the option
- albanian and malay, meyalu and bahasam for Bahasa Malaysia, added
- the options bahasai, indonesian and indon for Bahasa Indonesia.
-
- * albanian/albanian.dtx: New language added to the distribution
-
-2005-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * latin/latin.dtx (section{Latin shortcuts}\label{s:shrtcts}):
- Claudio changed \allowhyphens to \bbl@allowhyphens to have the
- same behaviour with T1 and OT1.
- (section{Latin shortcuts}\label{s:shrtcts}): Claudio added
- \LatinMarksOn and \LatinMarksOff
- (section{Etymological hyphenation}): Claudio added a \nobreak in
- the definition of \lt@allowhyphens
-
- * italian/italian.dtx (subsection{Support for etymological
- hyphenation}): Claudio replaced a \it@next with \it@@next and
- added a \nobreak in \it@@cwm
-
-2005-05-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{\pkg{varioref}}): The varioref
- \Ref needs to be able to expand \ref; in order to make this work
- we now redefine \Ref_ to call \org@ref (found by Frank Mitelbach).
-
-2005-05-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * hebrew/hebrew.fdd: Typo's in the docstrip guards prevented the
- command \ProvidesFile to appear in HE8nachlieli.fd (PR3774), the
- file HE8frankruehl.fd was completely useless
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): The way Babel dealt with
- adding language information to the marks appeared to rely on
- LaTeX's definition of \markboth and \markright, but broke with
- classes such as amsart that contain a different definition (PR
- 3750 and 3756). Also, the use of \noexpand broke with fancyhdr;
- replaced with \protect (found by Frank Mitelbach)
-
- * italian/italian.dtx: Received a new version of italian.dtx from
- Claudio Beccari
-
-2005-03-31 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * welsh/welsh.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by Owen
- Thomas (owen at llambed.freeserve.co.uk); he also informed me that
- the string `a viz' should not be part of the definition for
- \today.
-
-2005-03-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * latin/latin.dtx: Added a comment character in the definition of
- \today to prevent an unwanted space in the output. Reported by
- Richard Verhoeven (richard.verhoeven at web.de).
-
-2005-03-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx: Andrew Youn (aty at mintaka.sdsu.edu) and
- Hillmar Preusse (hille42 web.de) supplied many error corrections
- and enhancements to the text.
-
-2005-03-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : Received a new version from Daniel flipo
-
-2004-11-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * cyrillic/russianb.dtx : Removed the comment character that
- disabled the copde line in which the shorthand ", is declared. PR
- 3669 requested this shorthand to be activated. Reported by ichail
- Vidiassov (master at iaas.msu.ru)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added an error message
- for the case where \aliasshorthand is used in a document without
- prio declaration in the preamble of the new shorthand
- character. PR 3590, reported by Igor A. Kotelnikov (i.a.kotelnikov
- at inp.nsk.su)
-
-2004-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx : Added a numer of comment characters after
- PR3720 reported a spurious space in the output. The PR was
- reported by Zoltan Gotthardt (gotty at freemail.hu).
-
-2004-06-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * english/english.dtx : The selection of hyphenation patters was
- biased towards the American patterns. Removed this bias. This
- change was prompted by comments from Walter Schmidt (w.a.schmidt\
- at gmx.net).
-
-2004-06-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx: Added support for Australian and New
- Zealand spelling.
- * english/english.dtx: Added support for Australian and New
- Zealand spelling upon request from Harald Harders (h.harders at
- tu-bs.de)
-
-2004-05-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): When the mark commands are
- used with empty argumetns, we don't want to add anything to the
- marks. PR3674, found by Ulrich Dirr ud at art-satz.de, stated
- that empty marks were no longer empty.
-
-2004-05-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * russianb.dtx, ukraineb.dtx, bulgarian.dtx : The command for tanh
- (\th) conflicts with the T1 definition of \th (the letter
- thorn). Therefore changed the definition to be valid only for the
- respective language and in math mode only. (PR 3649, found by
- Benjamin BAYART (bayartb at jmpl.fr.eu.org))
-
-2004-05-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}): Now
- use \ProvideTextCommand and friends instead of
- \DeclareRobustCommand to define the quotation marks in order to
- keep kerning working (PR3482, 3661, both reported by Harald
- Harders, h.harders at tu-bs.de).
-
-2004-04-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx : The code that is executed when the hhline
- package is loaded needed an extra \string before the colon to
- prevent unwanted expansion of the colon in some circumstances.
-
-2004-04-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : Received a new version from Daniel flipo
-
-2004-02-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * hebrew/hebrew.dtx: Updated distribution with new files from
- Tzafrir Cohen from his ivritex package
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx : Use \nobreakspace indefinition of
- fnum@figure and fnum@table
-
- * slovak/slovak.dtx : Tobias Schlemmer (Tobias.Schlemmer at
- web.de) provided an extension to the support for Slovak with
- shorthand definitions.
-
-2004-02-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.dtx : Commented out the redefinitions of
- \fnum@figure and \fnum@tabel as they are no longer necessary and
- proved to be a problem together with the koma class. Pointed out
- by Markus Kohm (komascript at gmx.info) and "Matthias M. Weber"
- (mmw at aretaios.de)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Umlauts and trema's}): PR 3603
- mentions a problem in \LaTeX when \add@accent occurs in vertical
- mode; this problem can occur with \umlauthigh and \umlatlow as
- well. Implemented the same fix: add \leavevemode. Reported by:
- Gianfranco Boggio-Togna (gbt at acm.org).
-
- * polish/polish.dtx : The double closing quote was defined using
- \textquotedblleft, it should be \textquotedblright according to
- Zbigniew Jedrzejewski-Szmek (zjed@ at tempac.okwf.fuw.edu.pl)
-
-2004-02-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * czech/czech.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- (tonda.misek at post.cz) (PR 3610)
-
-2003-11-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Since the equal
- sign may be used in TeX programming it needs to have it's default
- category code during language definition file processing. When
- turkish is loaded this isn't the case. Therefor the macros
- Ldfinit, ldf@quit and ldf@finish have been changed accordingly.
- Problem reported in PR 3398 by myself as occuring with latin.
-
-2003-11-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan/catalan.dtx : Fixed a typo,
- found by Ignasi Furió (ignasi.furio at uib.es) \AtBeginDocuemnt
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- franciszek holop (fred at pentacom.sk)
-
-2003-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * danish/danish.dtx : The default setting of the hyphenmin
- parameters was missing; noticed by Arne Glenstrup
- (panic at com.dtu.dk).
-
- * catalan/catalan.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- (antispam at wanadoo.es)
-
- * bahasa/bahasa.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- (Jörg Knappen) (joerg.knappen at uni-mainz.de)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Changed the definition
- of \active@prefix to take \@unexpandable@rotect into account in
- order to make sure that the showkeys package shows the correct
- label (PR3547 by Cyril Carrez (cyril.carrez at enst.fr)
-
- * english/english.dtx : The default setting of the hyphenmin
- parameters was missing.
-
-2003-11-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a
- seperate error message for the case where the hyphenation patterns
- where loade, but the option wasn't specified. (PR 3329 by
- was at VR-Web.de (Walter Schmidt))
-
-2003-11-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): Added the command
- \bbl@resotre@actives to markright and and markboth. This is needed
- for the situation when the output routine kicks in while
- \@safe@actives is in effect. PR3335 from Werner Lemberg
- (wl@gnu.org) shows that this can happen while LaTeX is processing
- a bibitem.
-
-2003-11-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * spanish/spanish.dtx: Received a new version from Javier Bezos
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : Received a new version from Daniel flipo
-
-2003-11-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): removed a line
- with \let\bbl@pop@language\relax as it prevents the stack
- mechanism from working (PR3583, Daniel Flipo)
- (subsection{Language options}): Added the interlingua option,
- support provided by Peter Kleiweg (kleiweg at let.rug.nl) and Alberto
- Mardegan (mardy at despammed.com)
-
-2003-10-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx : When \l@magyar and \l@hungarian were both
- undefined to begin with \l@hungarian staied undefined. Fixed this.
-
-2003-10-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * hebrew/hebrwe.dtx: Fixed \hebr and \gim which gave missing
- endcsname errors; added two \fi to \@@gim which were missing
-
-2003-09-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx : Added \def\@safe@activesfalse{} to
- \hun@tempadef to fix PR3426, submitted by Bálint Aradi
- (aradi at surphy.fat.bme.hu)
-
-2003-09-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan/catalan.dtx: The commands \l and \L didn't work when the
- package fontenc with encoding T1 was loaded after
- babel. Postponing them to \begin{document} helps.
-
-2003-09-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx: The \if-\else-\fi construction which checks
- the existnece of \l@magyar and \l@hungarian was malformed, in
- effect making l@hungarian undefined when hte patterns were loaded
- under that name
-
-2003-09-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The fix for PR 3383
- didn't make it into the code corretly. \aliasshorthand was broken
- as well, the new shorthand was not "deactivated" by verbatim.
-
-2003-08-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/athnum.dtx: Received a new version from Apostolos
- Syropoulos
- * french/french.dtx: Received a new version from Daniel flipo
-
-2003-06-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Create fd file
- with fontfamily substitutes with a lowerase filename
-
-2003-06-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bulgarian/bulgarian.dtx (section{The Bulgarian language}): Added
- missing closing brace in definition of \@alph@eng; found by Hilmar
- Preusse (hille42 at web.de); reported as PR3533
-
-2003-06-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * romanian/romanian.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- Costin Stroie (thubi at med.pub.ro)
-
-2003-06-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): No longer load
- Bernard Gaulle french.ldf when the option `french' was specified;
- always load frencb.ldf instead. This change was made after reports
- that documents are no longer portable when the option `french' is
- used.
-
-2003-05-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{General}): Now define
- \FOREIGNLANGUAGE unconditonally as it might turn up in the
- argument of \MakeUpperCase (PR3438)
-
- * galician/galician.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- Xoán Pedracova (xpedra at com.uvigo.es)
-
- * portuges/portuges.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- Camilo Yamauchi Campo (ccampo at icmc.sc.usp.br) and Xoán Pedracova
- (xpedra at com.uvigo.es)
-
-2003-04-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * italian/italian.dtx: Received a new version of italian.dtx from
- Claudio Beccari, removing functionality that has become available
- in the LaTeX Kernel.
-
- * latin/latin.dtx: Received a new version of latin.dtx from
- Claudio Beccari; solving PR 3523.
-
-2003-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.dtx : When loading polutoniko greek after frenchb
- LaTeX crashes because frenchb makes the `!' an active
- charcter. Found by christian at justen-mack.de (Christian Justen)
- (PR 3505)
-
-2003-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bulgarian/bulgarian.dtx : Fixed typo which prevented \@SS to be
- defined. Found by "Dimitar Vandev" (vandev at math.bas.bg)
-
- * danish/danish.dtx : Translation for `Glossary' provided by
- Morten H{\o}gholm (moho01ab at student.cbs.dk) in PR 3500
-
-2003-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.6b) from Daniel which now
- takes guillemets in OT1 from OT4, no longer from OT2/wncyr, thus
- providing better cooperation between franch and russian.
-
-2003-03-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues (part 1)}): the
- command \textlatin needs to start with \leavevmode in order to
- start a paraghraph before the group instead of inside it. found by
- Frank Mittelbach.
- * greek/greek.dtx (subsection{Greek numbering}): Similar change
- for \textgreek.
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.6a) from Daniel which
- offers the possibility of having footnotes typeset as required by
- the French `Imprimerie Nationale'.
-
-2003-03-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Use a stack
- mechanism to keep track of nested languages. When more than one
- level of nesting occurs TeX's grouping mechanism no longer works
- as needed. Problem first mentioned by Daniel Flipo
- (Daniel.Flipo at univ-lille1.fr) in july 2002.
-
-2002-01-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * icelandic/icelandic.dtx : Added translation for Glossary as
- supplied by Erlendur S Þorsteinsson (esth at erlendur.com)
-
-2002-01-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * esperanto/esperanto.dtx : Added translation for Glossary as
- supplied by Dominique Unruh (dominique at unruh.de)
-
- * basque/basque.dtx : Received a new version from Juan
- Aguirregabiria, change the ur;'s for the patterns file, translated
- Glossary, revised definition of "-.
-
-2001-11-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * swedish/swedish.dtx : Fixed a changes entry (reported by Frederic
- Boulanger (Frederic.Boulanger at supelec.fr))
- * hebrew/hebrew.dtx : Fixed a changes entry (reported by Frederic
- Boulanger (Frederic.Boulanger at supelec.fr))
-
-2001-11-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx: Corrected checksum. (reported by Frederic
- Boulanger (Frederic.Boulanger at supelec.fr))
-
-2001-11-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * finnish/finnish.dtx : According to Niilo Siljamo
- (Niilo.Siljamo at fmi.fi) and Matti Rintala (matti.rintala at tut.fi)
- the definition of "= should use \bbl@allowhyphens instead of
- \allowhyphens. (PR 3378)
-
-2001-11-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The user level
- shorthands were broken. Fixed this by using the \lccode
- trick. PR 3383 found by Nicolae-Alexandru Nicorovici
- (nicolae at physics.usyd.edu.au).
-
-2001-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * swedish/swedish.dtx, finnish/finnish.dtx : Translations for
- `Glossary' were provided by Martin Vermeer mv at liisa.pp.fi
-
-2001-03-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * magyar/magyar.dtx : Make sure the the `-character has catcode
- 12 when the .aux file is being read in the second time. (see also
- change to catalan.dtx d.d. 1999-11-29.
- Found by Gyori Sandor (gyori at szit.bme.hu)
-
-2001-03-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx (subsection{Caption names}): Added a missing
- comment character.
-
- * base/babel.dtx: Added a number of missing comment characters
- which could produce spurious whitespace in documents.
- Found by Daniel Flipo (flipo at univ-lille1.fr).
-
-2001-02-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * cyrillic/{russianb,ukraineb}.dtx : commented out the code that
- was copied from amsmath as it genereated a textfont 7 error. This
- was reported in PR3226 and PR3245
-
-2001-02-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * galician/galician.dtx : Added translation for Proof, provided by
- "Emilio Perez Gonzalez" (eperez at cesatel.net).
-
-2001-02-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan/catalan.dtx : Added setting of hyphenation parameters to
- two as required by the Catalan hyphenation patterns cahyph.tex.
-
-2001-02-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * portuges/portuges.dtx : According to the Portuguese hyphenation
- pattern file the \righthyphenmin value should be set to 3 instead
- of 2.
- Reported by "Walter Schmidt" (was at VR-Web.de) (PR3303)
-
- * greek/grmath.dtx: New version of this file from Apostolo with
- two new options, grlog and enlog.
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.5d) from Daniel which makes
- french the internal name instead of frenchb.
-
-2001-02-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * cyrillic/ukraineb.dtx : Added the translation for "glossary" as
- provided by Andrij Shvaika (ashv at icmp.lviv.ua) in PR3306
-
-2001-02-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added options
- canadien and acadian.
- (subsection{Multiple languages}): The CJK package adds an extra
- level of grouping to the document through a redefinition of the
- \documentclass macro.
- Found by Daniel FLIPO (flipo at univ-lille1.fr).
- (subsubsection{\pkg{fancyhdr}}): In order to prevent unexpected
- results in documents that use fancyhdr combined with the book
- class we need to define \FOREIGNLANGUAGE.
- Found by Piet van Oostrum (piet at cs.uu.nl) (PR3238)
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx : New version (1.5) from Daniel Flipo;
- Added support for canadien and acadian on request from "Garst
- R. Reese" (reese at isn.net) and the LyX developpers.
-
-2001-02-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the
- canadian option on request from "Garst R. Reese" (reese at isn.net)
- and the LyX developpers.
-
- * english/english.dtx : Added support for loading with the option
- canadian.
-
-2001-02-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * german/ngermanb.dtx : Made the option ngermanb act as if ngerman
- was specified.
-
- * greek/greek.dtx : Regression testing revealed that ^^9f can't be
- fed to \initiate@active@char as such. It seemed to work, but made
- the caret active and brok in combination with a language that
- already had made the caret active. To circumvent this greek now
- uses the decimal number notation (159) instead of ^^9f where
- possible and makes the tilde act as ^^9f for the purpose of
- declaring it active.
-
-2001-01-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * german/(n)germanb.dtx : Added \frenchspacing to extrasgerman as
- it is in german.sty. Reported in PR3090 by Heiko Oberdiek
- (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de).
-
-2001-01-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/bbcompat.dtx: Added options for USenglish and UKenglish and
- made sure that the right files are created from bbcompat for plain
- TeX users. British.sty (and the others) were missing. Found by
- Bernard Treves Brown (mcnbjtb at fs4.in.umist.ac.uk).
-
-2001-01-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * norsk/norsk.dtx : Changed \ccname and \alsoname according to a
- message from Dag Langmyhr (dag at ifi.uio.no) and Karl Ove
- Hufthammer (huftis at bigfoot.com)
-
-2000-12-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * italian/italian.dtx : Added the translation for Glossary as
- provided by Claudio Beccari (Beccari at polito.it).
-
-2000-10-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * norsk/norsk.dtx: Replaced Glossary with its translation from
- Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no)
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx: Daniel Flipo added
- \ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers
-
-2000-10-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.fdd : Added more font sizes to make the CB fonts
- compatible with the EC fonts as suggested by Ken Smith
- (kgs at maths.uq.edu.au)
-
-2000-10-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.dtx: The final sigma in all names should appear as
- `s' instead of `c'
-
-2000-10-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * samin/samin.dtx: Replaced the word `Glossary' with its
- translation supplied by Regnor Jernsletten
- (Regnor.Jernsletten at sami.uit.no)
-
-2000-10-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): When the acute has been
- made active for one language, an it gets switched to 'non-active'
- for a second language we get a "double superscript" error. using
- \textormath prevents this.
- Found by Javier Bezos (jbezos at wanadoo.es) (PR3266)
-
- * base/bbplain.dtx: Added \textquotedblleft and \textquoteleft
- after PR 3263, found by Enn Saar, (saar at aai.ee)
-
-2000-10-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): The
- optional argument of \cite is used for typesetting. Therefor the
- shorthands need only to be turned off in the second
- argument. Redefinition of \@citex changed accordingly, also taking
- care of natbib and cite.sty versions of it.
- Found by Javier Bezos (jbezos at wanadoo.es) (PR3262)
-
-2000-09-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the
- samin option; support was provided by Regnor Jernsletten
- (Regnor.Jernsletten at sami.uit.no)
-
-2000-09-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Use
- the \cs{aftergroup} mechanism to keep the language grouping
- correct in auxiliary files ; this involves an extra level of
- expansion with \bbl@set@language.
- PR3091, found by Igor A. Kotelnikov (kotelnikov at nsu.ru)
-
-2000-09-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * all relevant language files: Now use \providehyphenmins in order
- to provide default values instead of overruling any settings from
- the hyphenation patterns file.
-
-2000-09-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the
- bulgarian option; support was provided by Georgi Boshnakov
- (mcbssgb2 at fs2.umist.ac.uk)
-
-2000-09-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * all language files: Added \glossaryname with the default
- translation of "Glossary" after a suggestion from Thomas Henlich
- (henlich at mmers1.mw.tu-dresden.de)
-
- * polish/polish.dtx: according to "Adalbert Jahnz"
- (ad_jahnz at hotmail.com) the definitions of \refname and \bibname
- were swapped. Corrected.
-
- * finnish/finnish.dtx: The definition of \- still used
- \allowhyphens instead of bbl@allowhyphens; found by Matti Hollberg
- (hollberg at arska.fys.utu.fi) and Rintala Matti (bitti at cs.tut.fi)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Macros common to a number of
- languages}): The macro \save@fs@q starts a paragraph inside a
- group when called in vertical mode.It shouldn't do that. Donald
- Arseneau (ASND at erich.triumf.ca) proposed a different
- implementation in PR3219
-
-2000-06-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsubsection{\pkg{ifthen}}): When babel changes
- the definition of \ifthenelse in order to give \pageref it's
- original definition it needs to revert \pageref to its babel
- version inside the 2nd and 3rd arguments; not after the
- \ifthenelse instruction.
- PR 3224, found by Heiko Oberdiek (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de)
-
-2000-02-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * norsk/norsk.dtx: The shorthands are the same for both spelling
- variants; no need to use \CurrentOption in \declare@shorthand. The
- way it was done didn't work anyway,
- Found by Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no)
-
-2000-02-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the
- command \providehyphenmins to be used in the .ldf files. It will
- check whether the hyphenmin parameters were set by the hypheantion
- pattern file.
-
-2000-02-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.dtx : After \selectlanguage{polutonikogreek} the
- fonts were not reset when returning to an english environment
- PR3168, found by Maarten Wisse, (mwisse at theo.uu.nl)
-
-2000-01-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * norsk/norsk.dtx : In the definition of "- we should use
- \bbl@allowhyphens instead of \allowhyphens.
- Found by Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no)
-
-2000-01-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * english/english.dtx : When the option USenglish was used the
- format of the date was *not* american. Also, in some cases the
- control sequence \l@<\Currentoption> was not properly
- defined. Found by Walter Schmidt (walter.schmidt at arcormail.de)
-
-2000-01-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * swedish/swedish.dtx: Additions from Erik Östhols
- (erik_osthols at yahoo.com):
- - The unnecessary version of "=, which I really only included at
- the time because it was there in germanb.dtx, from whence I stole
- most (all?) of my ideas then, has been modified to something that
- is actually useful for typesetting Swedish, and which was (again)
- stolen from the finnish.dtx file.
- - The likewise unnecessary "~, again stolen from germanb without
- my having a clear idea of why it would be useful, has been
- deleted.
- - The new and *very* useful version of \- as found in
- e. g. finnish.dtx has been included.
- - The definitions of "a, "A, "o etc. have been changed to allow
- subsequent hyphenation, as in current versions of germanb.
- - As typesetting the date as "20 januari 2000" is, if not
- uncommon, then at least much less common than some other varieties
- of formatting of dates in Sweden, two commands have been added to
- provide for the much more common "20/1 2000" and "2000-01-20".
-
-2000-01-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * polish/polish.dtx : The definition of \datepolish contained an
- unwanted space which appeared in the output., Found by Ilya Beylin
- (ilya at cs.chalmers.se).
-
-1999-12-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Introduced an extra
- level of expansion in the definition of an active caret
-
- * esperant/esperant.dtx : Moved the check for math mode in the
- definition of the ^ to babel.def in case some other language needs
- to have ^ as a shorthand character as well.
-
-1999-12-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan/catalan.dtx : Make sure that the shorthand characters
- are turned off outside of catalan. Found by Javier Bezos
- (jbezos at arrakis.es)
- This also holds for other language definitions: basque.dtx,
- breton.dtx, danish.dtx, finnish.dtx, galician.dtx, german.dtx,
- icelandic.dtx, ngerman.dtx, norsk.dtx, polish.dtx, portuges.dtx,
- serbian.dtx, slovene.dtx, swedish.dtx, usorbian.dtx.
-
-1999-12-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Need to redefine
- \prim@s as well as \pr@m@s as plain TeX uses \next and LaTeX uses
- \@let@token. Found by Javier Bezos (jbezos at arrakis.es)
-
-1999-11-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan/catalan.dtx : Make sure the the `-character has catcode
- 12 when the .aux file is being read in the second time. If it is
- active when \catcode``\active is read errors result. Found by
- Javier Bezos (jbezos at arrakis.es)
-
-1999-11-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * basque/basque.dtx: fixed a few doc errors as suggested by
- Jean-François Mertens (jfm at core.ucl.ac.be)
-
- * norsk/norsk.dtx : Added the french double quotes, changed the
- definition of "f based on the german definition; enhanced
- documentation; all by Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no)
-
-1999-09-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * esperant/esperant.dtx : Added a chack for math mode to the
- definition of the active ^.
-
-1999-09-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.dtx : The greek language support now makes use of
- the language attribute feature. But in order not to break older
- documents some extra code is needed to make the option
- polutonikogreek work.
-
-1999-09-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/bbplain.dtx (section{Support for formats based on
- \textsc{plain}\TeX}): Added the command \@ifundefined which is
- used in the definition of active charcters since Babel 3.6Z
-
-1999-09-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The change from 08/27
- was rubbish; now use \let instead of \edef
-
-1999-08-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * cyrillic/{russianb,ukraineb}.dtx : Made not using the inputenc
- package a warning rather than an Error message after user
- requests.
-
-1999-08-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): The proposed fix for
- PR3050 doesn't work; use \strip@prefix\meaning.
-
-1999-08-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb/frenchb.dtx (subsection{Date and clean up}): No longer
- use \edef to define \today; the accent commands are not expandable
- and generate error messaages. (PR 3083, found by Thomas Esser
- (te at informatik.uni-hannover.de))
-
-1999-06-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): When the shorthand
- character is already active make sure it gets expanded once
- instead of fully when \normal@char<char> is defined. This can be
- acheived by using \expandafter\noexpand (PR 3050, found by Joachim
- Becker (jbecker1 at gwdg.de))
-
-1999-04-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Only realy initiate a
- shorthand once (suggested by Javier Bezos)
-
- * italian/italian.dtx : Claudio Beccari introduced the " as a
- shorthand to insert the compound word mark (when the encoding is
- T1) and added support for ISO 31/XI regulations
-
-1999-04-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.fdd (section{The encoding definition file}): Removed
- the refinition of \& from the encoding file as it doesn't belong
- there.
-
- * greek/greek.dtx : Now switch the definition of \& via
- \extrasgreek (removed from the font encoding file); the greek
- fonts do not contain an &-sign.
-
-1999-04-22 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): In some
- situations \lefthyphenmin remained equal to -1. This setting is
- now inside the group in which patterns are read. Also added the
- explicit setting of the hyphenmin paramters for language=0 as this
- didn't happen when the first pattern file changes \lefthyphenmin.
- For synonym languages the hyphenmin parameters were not set, this
- is now accomplished by storing the \languagename in \process@line
- Suggested by Vladimir Volovich (vvv at vvv.vsu.ru)
-
-1999-04-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): It was
- reported by Richard Walker (Richard.Walker at cs.anu.edu.au)
- (PR 3023) and "Igor A. Kotelnikov" (kotelnikov at nsu.ru) that babel
- brok the cite package This could be solved by *not* redefining
- \bibcite when the cite package is loaded.
- During testing it became clear that running the document the first
- time produced an error; solved by adding an \AtBeginDocument
- action. (babel 3.6v)
-
-1999-04-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * base/bbcompat.dtx: Added code to issue a sensible error when the
- .sty files are loaded from LaTeXe; but made sure the document can
- be processed without complaints about \ProvidesLanguage not defined.
- (PR3020, Richard Walker (Richard.Walker at cs.anu.edu.au))
- Made sure the .sty and .ldf files can be used from plain TeX
- without hyphen.cfg preloaded.
-
- * base/babel.dtx (section{The Kernel of Babel}): When plain.def is
- loaded from switch.def we need to define \adddialect first in
- order to access the second part. (babel 3.6u)
-
-1999-04-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Removed the braces again
- (PR3022) as the cure poses more problems than it solves. Will
- need to find a different solution for the active ^ in esperanto.
-
-1999-04-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * turkish/turkish.dtx : Incorporated corrections received quite
- some time ago from "H. Turgut Uyar" (uyar at cs.itu.edu.tr)
-
-1999-04-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.dtx, babel.dtx : Moved redefinition of \@roman and \@Roman
- back the the greek language support because of the problems it
- causes with the AMS document classes. This problem needs to be
- solved in a different way; \@roman needs to be used in expansion
- only places.
- Reported by Jean-Francois Mertens (jfm at core.ucl.ac.be)(PR 3017)
-
-1999-04-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): The
- redefinition of \bibcite didn't work for the natbib package; a
- redefinition that works for natbib doesn't work without it.
- Now bibcite defines itself during the processing of the .aux file
- which is done *before* the \AtBeginDocument commands are executed.
- Found by Niilo Siljamo (siljamo at sateenkaari.meteo.helsinki.fi)
- (PR 3011) (babel 3.6s)
-
-1999-04-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Re-instated the
- loading of babel.def right at the begining of babel.sty as it is
- needed to define \ProvidesLanguage. The need for postponing it has
- gone, because \bbl@redefine is no longer used as a warning
- mechanism against missing options (changed in 3.6p dd 9/4/99)
- Found by Werner Struckmann (struck at ips.cs.tu-bs.de) (PR 3006) and
- "Walter Schmidt" (wschmi at ibm.net) (PR 3014) babel 3.6r
-
-1999-04-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues (part 1)}): The parsing of
- \@filelist to determine the latinencoding turend out to fail when a
- file with (default) extension .tex has been loaded. Now use
- \@ifl@aded, assuming all encoding .def files have a ProvidesFile
- entry. Found by "Igor A. Kotelnikov" (kotelnikov at nsu.ru),
- suggesion by Vladimir Volovich (vvv at vvv.vsu.ru) babel 3.6q
-
-1999-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * polish.dtx : Replaced the word `Proof' with its translation
- supplied by Andrzej Komisarski (andkom at kki.net.pl)
-
-1999-04-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Language options}): Added the options
- ngerman and naustrian to support the new german orthography, as
- supplied by "Walter Schmidt" (wschmi at ibm.net)
-
-1999-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): The solution for PR2990 wasn't
- perfect; the arguments to the \mark... commands need to be stored
- in a token register prior to using \edef.
- (subsection{Language options}): Now check for the existence of
- \bbl@main@language instead of redefining \bbl@redefine to detect
- missing options.
-
-1999-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bahasa.dtx : February should be Pebruari according to
- Mohammad DAMT (mdamt at cakraweb.com)
-
- * babel.dtx : Changed the argument handlling of \process@line in
- order to prevent a trailing space from becoming part of a control
- sequence when defining a synonym
- (from a line such as `=english %')
- Found by Thomas Esser (te at informatik.uni-hannover.de), (PR 2851)
-
-1999-04-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{marks}): Removed th use of \head@lang in
- passing the current language into the marks. This didn't work for
- amsart.cls. Found a new solution wich works for the stansdard
- document classes as well as for amsart.
- Reported by Vittorio Coti Zelati (zelati at cds.unina.it) (PR 2990)
-
-1999-04-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues}): Needed to move the
- \AtBeginDocument test for the loading of fontenc right up front of
- babel.sty; also added a test for `manual' selection of T1 without
- loading fontenc (via \renewcommand\encodingdefault{T1}) as
- suggested by Claudio Beccari (Beccari at polito.it)
-
-1999-04-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx : Had to implement a diferent way to check for fontenc
- with T1 encoding; now pare \@filelst (PR 3002)
-
-1999-04-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Need to set
- default values for lefthyphenmin and righthyphenmin globally now
- that the patterns are read in a group.
-
- * catalan.dtx, danish.dtx, dutch.dtx, estonian.dtx, finnish.dtx,
- galician.dtx, polish.dtx, portuges.dtx, spanish.dtx, germanb.dtx,
- swedish.dtx usorbian.dtx : changed the definition of "- as
- \allowhyphens is a no-op with T1 now. That is alright for accented
- letters but *not* for "- in these files.
- Found by Niilo Siljamo (siljamo at sateenkaari.meteo.helsinki.fi)
- (PR 2993, 2995)
-
-1999-04-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek/greek.dtx : Made \greeknumeral accept a counter as its
- argument. found by Andreas Schwab
- (schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de) (PR 3000)
-
- * greek/greek.fdd : Got a new version from Apostolos; repaired a
- few typo's found by Andreas Schwab
- (schwab at issan.informatik.uni-dortmund.de) (PR 2997)
-
- * cyrillic/ukraineb.dtx (section{The Ukrainian language}):
- Replaced \CYRUKRI with \CYRII in \authorname, typo, found by
- Andrij Shvaika (ashv at icmp.lviv.ua)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Don't load babel.def from
- babel.sty, but rather define \LdfInit temporarily in order to load
- babel.def at the right time, preventing problems with the
- temporary definition of \bbl at redefine; found by
- Walter Schmidt (wschmi at ibm.net), PR 2987 and
- Andreas Schwab (schwab at issan.cs.uni-dortmund.de), PR 2998
-
-1999-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * croatian.dtx : Changed an occurence of \od into \or; found by
- Damir Medak (medak at geoinfo.tuwien.ac.at) (PR 2918)
-
- * bahasa.dtx : February is Pebruary in bahasa Indonesia according
- to Mohammad DAMT (mdamt at cakraweb.com)
-
-1999-03-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx : added the ukrainian option, provided by Vladimir
- Volovich (TeX at vvv.vsu.ru) and Andrij Shvaika (ashv at icmp.lviv.ua)
-
-1999-02-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * slovak.dtx : repaired a few spelling mistakes found by
- Peter Kral (Peter.Kral at swh.sk)
-
-1998-07-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Language attributes}): Added support for
- language attributes.
-
- * bbplain.dtx : Added defintion of \in@, needed for language
- attributes.
-
-1998-06-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added a definition of
- \bbl@redefine before the call to \ProcessOptions. The idea is to
- generate a sensible error message when the user forgets to
- specifiy a language option.
-
-1998-06-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * norsk.dtx : Added the suggestions from Rune Kleveland
- (runekl at math.uio.no) for the " shorthand.
-
-1998-06-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * germanb.dtx : Updated the coding for "f from german.dtx version
- 2.5d after a discussion about this subject with Heiko Obrerdiek
- (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de)
-
-1998-06-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed definition
- of \iflanguage using \bbl@afterelse, \@fristoftwo and
- \@secondoftwo in order to evaluate the selected argument *after*
- the \fi's have been seen by TeX. (PR 2800)
- (oberdiek at ruf.uni-freiburg.de) Heiko Oberdiek)
-
-1998-06-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * install.txt: Changed installation instructions, *not*
- advising them to rename hyphen.tex, but to use bplain.tex as a
- replacement for plain.tex.
-
- * bbplain.dtx: Added the source for the format replacement wrapper
- files bplain.tex and blplain.tex. This is the result of a
- discussion with a number of people about the permissabillity of
- renaming hyphen.tex. Don Knuth doesn't allow it.
-
- * germanb.dtx, polish.dtx, usorbian.dtx: changed the definition of
- \mdqon and \mdqoff to use the new commands \shorthandon and
- \shorthandoff.
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The user interface}: Added two commands,
- \shorthandon and \shorthandoff as a more general solution to
- PR2627.
-
-1998-03-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * all language definition files: use \def to define \today, in
- order to prevent expansions at the wrong time.
-
-1998-03-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Changed the
- redefenition of \bibcite to include \@safe@activesfalse in the
- definition of the reference.
-
-1998-03-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Removed
- \@safeactivesfalse from #3 of \@newl@bel and \@testdef
-
-1998-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Now also execute
- \originalTeX from \foreignlanguage in order to reset a possibly
- changed output encoding.
-
-1998-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues}): Added the redefinition
- of \TeX and \LaTeX to make them encoding independant.
-
-1998-03-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Encodig issues}): Use the T1 encoding when
- it is a known encoding, otherwise use OT1 as latin encoding.
-
-1997-12-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Call
- \@safe@activestrue instead of \set@display@protect which casued
- errors.
-
-1997-11-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Removed the check for \write
- being primitive. Problem solved in seminar.
-
-1997-11-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.dtx : Received a new version from Apostolous; replaced the
- \greeknumeral coding with an expandable solution
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the option
- polutonikogreek for typesetting greek text with all accents.
-
-1997-11-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx : Removed the braces around #1 of \bbl@tempa in the
- redefinition of \ProvidesFile in hyphen.cfg (PR 2659)
- clase at mathematik.uni-freiburg.de ( Matthias Clasen )
-
-1997-10-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb.dtx: Received a new frenchb.dtx from Daniel Flippo
-
-1997-10-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * dutch.dtx : Added "/ for words written together, indicating a
- choice as in uitdrukking/opmerking
-
-1997-10-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * all language definition files: use \edef to define \today; this
- save memory, see classses.dtx for the motivation.
-
-1997-09-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * turkish.dtx : Added and modified a number of translation as
- provided by "H. Turgut Uyar" (uyar at cs.itu.edu.tr)
-
-1997-09-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb.dtx: Received a new frenchb.dtx from Daniel Flippo.
-
-1997-09-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added a check for \write
- still being primitive. If not it might have been redefined as
- \immediate\write and in such a case \protected@write needs to set
- \protect to \noexpand instead of making it \@unexpandable@protect
- in order to prevent a \protet kreeping in the .aux file. This
- problem cropped op with the use of seminar.cls and was found by
- Daniel FLIPO (flipo at univ-lille1.fr)
-
-1997-09-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * polish.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' and changed
- translation of contents from `Spis rzeczy' as suggested by
- Tomasz Michniewski (tomekm at ias.wat.waw.pl)
-
- * bbplain.dtx : repaired a type (\expoandafter) and added missing
- \endcsname (PR 2553, found by Nicolai Langfeldt (janl at math.uio.no))
-
- * croatian.dtx : Replaced a number of translations with better
- ones, provided by Kresimir Fresl (fresl at grad.hr)
-
-1997-04-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.dtx : Selecting the greek language produced unwanted
- whitespace because of lines such as \babel@save`\".
- Found a few typos in the process.
-
-1997-04-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}): The
- definitions of \grq and \grqq should be dependent on the
- fontencoding. Taken the code from german.sty (and adapted it to
- babel). Found by: Stefan Illy (illy at itpgyro1.fzk.de) and
- Bjoern Lorenz (lorenz at rz.charite.hu-berlin.de)
-
-1997-04-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.dtx : made \greek@alph a synonym for \greeknumeral instead
- of having it's own definition.
-
-1997-04-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx: Make multiple loading of babel.def impossible by
- adding a check for the existence of \bbl@afterfi. This was
- triggered by PR 2447 where french.sty loaded babel.def for a
- second time.
-
-1997-04-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * dutch.dtx (and others): remove empty groups after quote
- characters in the shorthand definitions (such as \quotedblbase) in
- order to keep possible kerning.
- (PR 2454, found by S\o ren Sandmann (sandmann at daimi.aau.dk))
-
-1997-04-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * dutch.dtx : The definition of "~ was faulty, (forgot to replace
- `german' with `dutch'.
- Found by Maarten Gelderman (mgelderman at econ.vu.nl)
-
-1997-03-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): The option
- KeepShorthandsActive no longer defines a control sequence. This
- didn't always work because of the order in which options are
- processed. The presence of the option is now tested in babel.def
- with \@ifpackagewith. (PR 2452)
-
-1997-03-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): Added the macro
- \ProvidesLanguage to identify language definition files instead of
- using \ProvidesFile. This is done to prevent problems with the
- dummy definition of \ProvidesFile for plain based formats. Some
- other packages are confused by it. Now make sure that
- \ProvidesFile remains undefined in plain based packages. (PR 2444)
-
-1997-03-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the possibilty to
- add option declarations in a file called bblopts.cfg.
-
- * kannada.dtx: Extended the user documentation with a description
- of the various font changing commands.
-
- * russianb.dtx : Removed the commands \textlatin, \latintext and
- \latinencoding as they are now defined by babel.def.
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Encoding issues}): Added the commands
- \textlatin, \latintext and \latinencoding to better support
- languages that need a different fontencoding. These commands used
- to be in russianb.dtx and greek.dtx.
- (subsection{marks}): Added redefinition of \markright and
- \markboth in order to be able to pass the language attribute to
- the headlines.
-
- * greek.dtx : Removed the commands \textlatin, \latintext and
- \latinencoding as they are now defined by babel.def.
- Removed the redefinition of \@roman and \@Roman which is also
- moved to babel.def
-
-1997-03-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added a default option
- that loads the file \CurrentOption.ldf if it exists. If not an
- error is signalled.
-
-1997-03-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.dtx : Added the \greeknumeral and \Greeknumeral macros to
- support (old) greek conventions for number notation.
-
-1997-03-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.dtx : Also change some uppercase codes to get ridd of
- accents and breathings in uppercase. (from kdgreek.sty)
-
-1997-03-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Make shorthands active
- during the processing of the .aux file; this is at least needed to
- get citations correct. (PR2428)
- (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added a redefinition of
- \@newl@bel, which replaces the redefinitions of \@lbibitem and
- \newlabel. This needed to make the handling of citations correct.
- Changed the definition of \@testdef to match \@newl@bel
-
-
-1997-02-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added the
- setting of the @safe@actives switch in \@testdef; shorthands might
- occure in the first or second argument.
-
-1997-02-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Now reset the
- safe@actives switch *inside* the second and third arguments of
- \ifthenelse in order to be able to use shorthands there.
- Suggested by Olaf Kummer (kummer at informatik.uni-hamburg.de) in
- PR 2421.
-
-1997-02-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * estonian.dtx : One \changes entry was mistakenly pointing to
- dutch.
-
- * magyar.dtx : One \changes entry was mistakenly pointing to
- dutch.
-
- * dutch.dtx : Changed a \changes entry, replace "\~ with "\~{} to
- prevent error messages.
- (found by Ingo Saitz (ingo at baer.schneiderberg6.de), PR 2426)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Now always start the user
- group of shorthands with the name `user' because of the provided
- definition for the case with an empty argument.
-
-1997-02-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): commented out \peek@token
- and \test@token because shorthands are made expandable again.
- (subsection{Shorthands}): Changed \@decl@short in such a way that
- the control sequence that is constructed is different for a
- shorthand with no argument and for a shorthand with an empty
- argument.
-
-1997-02-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Made \bbl@afterelse and
- \bbl@afterfi \long in order to be able to handle \par
- as the argument of a shorthand. This is needed in order to make
- shorthands fully expandable again.
-
-1997-02-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.dtx : Added command \greek@tilde to stand for the tilde
- character; change definition of \~ to produce the tilde character
- when in greek typesetting. This is necessary to produce the
- desired ligature effect.
- Found by Rizos Sakellariou (rizos at cs.man.ac.uk) and by
- David Kastrup (dak at neuroinformatik.ruhr-uni-bochum.de) as PR 2422.
-
-1997-02-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * spanish.dtx : Metion in the user documentation that the
- '-character is only active when the option `activeacute' is
- specified.
- Found by Josep Maria Font (font at cerber.mat.ub.es)
-
- * catalan.dtx : Added \l.l and \L.L to the table listing the
- special definitions for catalan.
- Found by Josep Maria Font (font at cerber.mat.ub.es)
-
-1997-02-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * english.dtx : fixed small documentation bug
- Found by Josep Maria Font (font at cerber.mat.ub.es)
-
-1997-02-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx : Added sanskrit to the driver files
-
- * bbcompat.dtx: Added sanskrit
-
- * babel.ins: Added the processing of sanskrit.dtx
-
-1997-02-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * croatian.dtx : sijev{c}nja should be seij\v{c}nja and there
- should be a period after the year.
- Found by Ivo Batistic (ivo at ifs.hr)
-
-1997-01-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * sanskrit.dtx : Update Jan Takashima's original file to babel
- release 3.6
-
-1997-01-23 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a couple of
- \expandafters to the end of hyphen.cfg as \toks8 is now cleared by
- LaTeX (release 1996/12/01), now copy contents of \toks into
- \everyjob instead of reference.
- (found by Richard Walker (Richard.Walker at cs.anu.edu.au) PR 2382
- Ulrik Vieth (vieth at thphy.uni-duesseldorf.de) PR 2385 and
- Vincent Jalby (jalby at unilim.fr))
-
- * babel.ins: Added missing \usepreamble\mainpreamble line; changed
- 1996 in 1997.
-
- * finnish.dtx: Forgot to remove the code that is now part of
- \LdfInit; hence babel.def was loaded twice which led to TeX fatal
- errors.
- (found by Niilo Siljamo (Niilo.Siljamo at Helsinki.FI) PR 2386)
-
-1997-01-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx : Got the order of cs's wrong in the definition of
- \@tempcntb (found by Ricardo S. C\'armenes
- (carmenes at biosun.quimica.uniovi.es) PR 2376)
-
-1997-01-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx: Somehow a lonely '+' had found its way into babel.dtx
- on a line of its own. Removed
- (found by Maarten Gelderman (mgelderman at ECON.VU.NL))
-
-1997-01-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Optionally disable the
- restoration of the category code of shorthand characters for those
- who want to have them available in the preamble of the document.
- (suggested by Tomas Bautista (bautista at cma.ulpgc.es))
-
- * dutch.dtx : Added the "~ shorthand (copied from germanb.dtx) as
- suggested on TEX-NL at nic.surfnet.nl
-
- * bbplain.dtx : missing \@undefined added to definition of
- \@begindocumenthook; \newcount is an \outer macro, so it can't be
- used directly inside an \if test.
- (found by Daniel Flippo)
-
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added
- \bbl@redefine@long to be able to redefine \ifthenelse as a
- \long-command (PR2372)
- Changed redefinition of \ifthenelse to make it a \long-command
- (PR2372)
-
-1997-01-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb.dtx : allow \l@french and \l@francais to be the `name'
- of the hyphenation patterns; make \l@frenchb an alias for that.
- Use frenchb.cfg as the name of the .cfg file, regardless of the
- option that was used.
- (subsection{Formatting numbers}): New macros \nombre \decimalsep
- and \thousandsep added to format numbers
- (subsection{Extra utilities}): Removed \AllTeX, \fup, \french and
- \english
-
- * babel.ins: Added .fd files to instructions at the end
- (found by Piet van Oostrum (piet at cs.ruu.nl) PR 2367)
-
- * greek.fdd (section{The encoding definition file}): Added
- (re)definitins of the \TeX and \LaTeX commands to make them
- encoding independant; added LGR versions of \copyright,
- \texttrademark, \textregistered and \ss
-
- * cyrillic.fdd (section{The encoding definition files}): Added
- (re)definitins of the \TeX and \LaTeX commands to make them
- encoding independant; added LCY/LWN versions of \copyright,
- \texttrademark, \textregistered and \ss
- (found by J"org Knappen (tex at dzdmza.zdv.uni-mainz.de), PR 2357)
-
-1997-01-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * spanish.dtx,galician.dtx : Added \leavevmode to the definitinos
- of "a and "o because TeX generated an error when they were used in
- vertical mode.
- (found by Eric Gamess (eric at borabora.univalle.edu.co), PR 2363)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the options
- frenchb, UKenglish and USenglish (all aliases)
- (found by Daniel Flippo and Vincent Jalby (jalby at unilim.fr))
-
-1997-01-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * galician.dtx : Removed unwanted space tokens by adding a
- %-token at the end of the lines with babel@save in the definition
- of \extrasgalician. They turned up in the output. (just like for
- spanish.dtx)
-
- * catalan.dtx : Removed unwanted space tokens by adding a
- %-token at the end of the lines with babel@save in the definition
- of \extrascatalan. They turned up in the output. (just like for
- spanish.dtx)
-
-1997-01-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * greek.fdd (section{The font definition files}): In some font
- substitutions kdgr hadn't been replaced with cmr.
- (found by J"org Knappen, PR2358)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Introduced
- \foreign@language for the shared code between the otherlanguage*
- environment and the \foreignlanguage command.
- Switch off language shorthands before activating the extras (to
- prevent that the shorthands from one language are still available
- in the other.
- Add \relax after the setting of the hyphenmin parameters to
- prevent the disappearance of a token (when it happens to be a
- digit, such as \number\day).
- (found by Daniel Hempel (daniel at math.uni-hamburg.de) PR2362)
-
- * spanish.dtx : Removed two unwanted space tokens by adding a
- %-token at the end of the lines with babel@save in the definition
- of \extrasspanish. They turned up in the output.
- (found by Daniel Hempel (daniel at math.uni-hamburg.de) PR2362)
-
- * bbplain.dtx (section{Support for formats based on
- \textsc{plain}\TeX}): add definition of \@begindocumenthook to the
- LaTeX2.09 format; otherwise it won't function without one of the
- languages loaded.
- (found by Olaf Weber (Olaf.Weber at cwi.nl))
-
-1997-01-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * dutch.dtx (section{The Dutch language}): Use Bew"ys instead of
- Bewijs (PR 2360, J"org Knappen)
-
- * esperant.dtx (section{The Esperanto language}): Fixed typo in
- table caption (funtion -) function) (PR 2360, Knappen)
-
- * tb1202.tex, tb1401.tex: fixed a few typos found by Ulrik Vieth,
- (vieth at thphy.uni-duesseldorf.de) (PR 2356)
-
-1997-01-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): When \LdfInit is
- undefined we need to load babel.def from babel.sty.
- When \file{hyphen.cfg} is not loaded in the format \cs{l@english}
- might not be defined; assume english is language 0 before calling
- \main@language{english}.
- (found by J"org Knappen (tex at mzdmza.zdv.uni-mainz.de) PR2354)
-
-1997-01-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx : The redefinition of \dump tried to detect
- LaTeX2.09; it did that with \document; that cs is also defined by
- AMSTeX, hence an error occured building a Babel-AMSTeX format.
- Now use \@ztryfc to detect LaTeX2.09 (Hope that is obscure
- enough). (Found by Thomas Esser)
-
-1996-12-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for extending macros}): Added a
- check for an expansion of \relax to the definition of \addto;
- \addto\x{...} yields \x -> {\x ...} when \x expands to \relax.
- This results in a stack overflow when \x is called.
-
-1996-12-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * italian.dtx, russian.dtx : Added braces around second argument
- of \LdfInit
- (found by (tim at maths.tcd.ie) (Timothy Murphy), PR 2384)
-
- --------------------------------------------------------
-1996-12-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- Release 3.6
-
-1996-12-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the option
- `welsh'.
-
-1996-11-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): \selectlanguage now
- checks for the existence of \date<lang> instead of \l@<lang>. The
- latter might be defined, without the language definition file
- being loaded.
-
-1996-10-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Renamed \init@ldf
- and \finish@ldf to \LdfInit, \ldf@finish and introduce
- \quit@ldf. The second argument of \ldf@init can now be either a
- control sequence or a string to be passed to \csname.
- (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added (conditional)
- redefinition of \@@vpageref (varioref internal macro) to prevent
- problems with active characters (PR 2292)
-
-1996-10-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the commands
- \init@ldf and \finish@ldf to ease the maintenance of the
- .ldf-files.
-
-1996-10-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): \main@language now
- also sets \languagename and \l@<languagename> for use by other
- packages in the preamble of a document
- (suggested by Jan Vroonhof (vroonhof at math.ethz.ch))
-
-1996-10-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx : Make this file be processed twice, once during
- format generation, but only a small portion of the file is loaded
- into the format, the second time the file is processed is when it
- is loaded from babel.def. This way some code that is not needed in
- the format gets removed and the plain format with babel is no
- longer incompatible with german.sty.
-
-1996-10-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * dutch.dtx: Merged in the definitions for `afrikaans' as supplied
- by Stoffel Lombard (lombc at b31pc87.up.ac.za)
-
- * bbcompat.dtx: Added support for `afrikaans'
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added option `afrikaans'
-
-1996-09-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * slovene.dtx : removed shorthand for \texttt{"L} as it is not
- needed for slovenian according to Primoz Peterlin
- (peterlin at biofiz.mf.uni-lj.si).
-
-1996-09-20 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan.dtx : Added a check for mathmode to the definitino of
- \lgem and \Lgem, as the use of these in mathmode makes no sense
- according to Goncal Badenes. Not having the check led to an error
- message (PR 2261)
-
-1996-08-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * polish.dtx : The macros \sob, \spb and \skb need to call
- \leavevmode; when they are encountered in vertical mode TeX issues
- an error about \lower not being allowed in vertical mode. (found
- by Wlodzimierz Macewicz (macewicz at ia.pw.edu.pl))
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): In order to
- prevent problems while reading .fd files in the middle of a
- document we need to add the " and ' characters to \nfss@catcodes
- untill LaTeX does that herself. (found by Tomas Bautista
- (bautista at cma.ulpgc.es))
-
-1996-08-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx : Added default (semi-NFSS2) definition of \ss and
- \i because german.sty in combination with a babel format creates
- an endless lopp on those glyphs. (Found by Bernd Raichle)
-
- * danish.dtx : According to Peter Busk Laursen the shorthand "'
- needs to typeset the german closing double quote (``). He also
- suggested to add the definitions for "~ and "=
-
-1996-08-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Top level expansion of
- \normal@char<char> where the shorthand character is already active
- should be the expansion of the active character, not the active
- character itself as this causes an endless loop (found by Tomas
- Bautista (bautista at cma.ulpgc.es))
-
-1996-08-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Redefinition
- of \ifthenelse added to circumvent problems with \pageref in the
- argument of \isodd (PR's 947, 2053, 2150, 2225)
-
-1996-08-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bahasa.dtx: Added the setting of the hyphenmin parameters
- (PR2232)
-
-1996-07-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbcompat.dtx: Added .sty files and definition of \CurrentOption
- for language definition files that are loaded by more than one
- option
-
-1996-07-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * frenchb.dtx: moved support for multiple options using the same
- .ldf file out of babel.sty into .ldf file.
- Rearranged .dtx file to remove long lines of documentation and
- code.
-
-1996-07-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Moved all code necessary
- to support multiple options to load the same language definition
- file into those language definition files. (PR2213)
-
- * portuges.dtx, norsk.dtx, magyar.dtx: moved support for multiple
- options using the same .ldf file out of babel.sty into .ldf
- files.
-
-1996-07-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx : Added the definition of \scriptsize,
- \textquoteright and \textquotedblright (PR 2216)
-
- * language definition files : Consistently use \@undefined instead
- of \undefined and \@empty instead of \empty (PR 2213)
-
- * english.dtx, german.dtx : moved support for multiple options
- using the same .ldf file out of babel.sty into .ldf files.
-
-1996-07-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx : Consistently use \@undefined instead of \undefined
- and remove the use of \patterns@loaded (PR 2213)
- Added definition of \@empty; use it instead of \empty
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Removed the use of
- the control sequence \bbl@eq@ (PR 2213)
- (section{Identification}): Save a few csnames by using \bbl@tempa
- instead of \@ProvidesFile store the \everyjob message immediately
- in \toks8 (PR 2213)
- Consistently use \@undefined instead of \undefined (PR 2213)
- Use \@empty instead of \empty to be consistent with \LaTeX
- (PR 2133)
-
- * bahasa.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by
- knappen at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de (J"org Knappen) (PR 2214)
-
- ** released Babel 3.6-beta **
-
-1996-07-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dst: Added the generation of the font description files to
- the main installation file. (PR 2208)
-
- * babel.dtx : added greek to the driver files, input russianb.dtx
- instead of russian.dtx, define \Babel in driver file (PR 2209)
- Removed an extra closing brace in changes entry for \dj (PR 2208)
-
- * esperant.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by
- knappen at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de (J"org Knappen) (PR 2207)
-
-1996-05-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * germanb.dtx : added \allowhyphens in the definitions of "a, "o,
- "u, "A, "O, "U, because the underlying macro \lower@umlaut can not
- cntain a \allowhyphens. The reason is that for *dutch* we need to
- use discretionaries for these same characters in order to make the
- trema disappear at a word break. A \allowhyphens inside one of the
- arguments of \discretiionary leads to a TeX error.
-
-1996-05-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added an environment
- otherlanguage* wich does not switch the captions and date strings,
- only hyphenation and extras.
-
-1996-04-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * magyar.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by
- Alexin Zoltan (alexin at sol.cc.u-szeged.hu) and changed some of the
- translations as suggested by Peter Rajczy (rajczy at caesar.elte.hu).
-
-1996-04-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}):
- \bbl@redefinerobust made non-robust macros; fixed adding \space in
- the final line of code.
-
-1996-04-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Umlauts and trema's}): Added a
- \allowhyphens in the definition of \lower@umlaut
-
-1996-04-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * norsk.dtx : Added translation of `Proof' as suggested by
- Orjan Johansen (oerjan at matstat.unit.no)
-
-1996-03-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Letters}): Replaced the definitions of
- \dj@ and \DJ@ with the ones found in PR 2058 (contributed by
- Sime Ungar (ungar at math.hr) and David Carlisle)
-
-1996-03-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Added a system level
- shorthand for the ` to prevent an endless loop when the user
- enters `{}blah in his document.
-
- * catalan.dtx : Added `` as a shorthand for the double left quote;
- getting a single quote and an accented letter from the input ``a
- is not quit what would be expected.
-
-1996-02-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * czech.dtx (section{The Czech language}): Fixed tow errors found
- by Petr Sojka (sojka at daeron.fi.muni.cz) (PR #2082) and added
- translation for `Proof'
-
-1996-01-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Store and restore the lccode
- of the ~-character so it remains unchanged by
- \initiate@active@char
-
-1996-01-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}):
- Moved \german@dq@disc, \usorbian@dq@disc and \swedish@dq@disc to
- babel.def, changing the name to \bbl@disc
-
-1996-01-21 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Revert the
- previous change; \@setref gets expanded too late which results in
- TeX errors because the active character isn't redefined when TeX
- tries to use it in constructing a csname.
-
-1996-01-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Redefine
- \@setref instead of \ref and \pageref for LaTeX2e. This (partly)
- solves PR0947 which complains about pageref being used in the
- argument of \ifthenelse. This now works as long as the label
- doesn't contain active characters.
-
-1996-01-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * croatian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' and changed
- the definition of \datecroatian according to the suggestion by
- Sime Ungar (ungar at math.hr) in bug report 2060.
-
-1996-01-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Use
- \strip@prefix only on bbl@tempa (in \@testdef) when \bbl@tempa <>
- \relax!
-
-1996-01-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx: Added the code that implements \newcommand (or
- enough of it to make \ProvideTextCommandDefault and friends
- work).
-
-1996-01-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Now use frenchb.dtx from
- Daniel Flipo as the source for french support in Babel.
-
-1996-01-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Deal with charcters that are
- already active: define the top level expansion inside the \if
- branch of the category code test; define all lower level expansion
- macros needed for the shorthand stuff after of the \else branch
- (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Complete rewrite of
- \@testdef using meaning to prevent endless complaints from LaTeX
- about possibly changed labels.
-
-1995-12-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands}): Reset the category code of a
- shorthand char at the end of the package and re-activate it at
- begin document.
-
-1995-11-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * tb1202.tex, tb1401.tex: Made it possible to run it through LaTeX
- without having ltugboat.cls available; also updated address
- information.
-
- * portuges.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof' for both
- Portuguese and Brazilian
-
-1995-11-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx: Add execution of the begin document hook to
- \@preamblecmds for LaTeX2.09
-
-1995-11-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx: Added \@onlypreamble and handling of this
-
-1995-11-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed the
- definition of \selectlanguage and \selectlanguage_; the former no
- longer processes its argument, that task is now performed by
- \selectlanguage_
-
-1995-11-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Added the
- commands \bbl@redefine and \bbl@redefinerobust and used them to
- redefine \newlabel, \@testdef, \ref, \pageref, \label, \@citex,
- \nocite, \bibcite, \@bibitem, \@lbibitem
-
-1995-11-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * francais.dtx : Added setting of the lowercase code of the ' to
- improve hyphenation
-
-1995-11-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * galician.dtx : Added '' as shorthand to produce the expected
- effect.
-
-1995-11-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan.dtx : Added setting of the lowercase code of the ' to
- improve hyphenation
- (As suggested by Claudio Beccari (BECCARI at polito.it))
-
- * italian.dtx : Added setting of the lowercase code of the ' to
- improve hyphenation
- (As suggested by Claudio Beccari (BECCARI at polito.it))
-
- * romanian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof'
-
-1995-11-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bbplain.dtx: Added the code that `snatched' \dump as it is still
- needed for LaTeX 2.09
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Removed the code
- that `snatched' \dump as it is no longer needed for LaTeX.
-
-1995-11-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): No longer use
- \bblref_ as a cs; instead use \ref_ and check if it isn't defined
- already. (PR 1851)
-
-1995-11-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * slovene.dtx : New translation of Index; replaced slovanian with
- slovenian.
-
- * swedish.dtx : Added translation of Proof (PR 1904)
-
-1995-09-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * germanb.dtx : Use \glqq, \grqq, \flqq and \frqq in the
- definitions of "` "' "< and ">
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}): Use
- \textormath in the definitions; added some kerning for german
- right quotation marks.
-
- * catalan.dtx: Added '| to disable the accent when an apostrophe
- is wanted.
-
-1995-08-31 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * germanb.dtx : Added \allowhyphens to the accent producing
- shorthands. Not having it prevented hyphenation for accented words
- in OT1 encoding. Having it means that TeX possibly misses a
- possible breakpoint. Putting \allowhyphens into the definition of
- \lower@umlaut (which would make it not appear at all in T1
- encoding) is a no-no because it leads to improper discretionary
- errors for dutch (were trema's have to disappear when the word is
- hyphenated next to the trema). (PRs 1118, 1147, 1714, 1846)
-
-1995-08-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added a missing
- %-character in the definition of \selectlanguage (PR1841)
-
- * francais.dtx : Added a missing %-character in the definition of
- \captionsfrancais (PR1841)
-
-1995-08-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * spanish.dtx, catalan.dtx, galician.dtx: Combining
- \initiate@active@char and \bbl@activate in one \@ifpackagewith
- statement leads to an error message about an \inaccessible control
- sequence from \select@language. For now split these statements.
-
-1995-08-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}):
- Corrected the spelling of \quil... to \guil...
-
-1995-07-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * francais.dtx : Removed the \space from the definition of the
- shorthands. It is not necessary.
-
-1995-07-27 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * esperant.dtx: Added a few ^-shorthands
-
- * estonian.dtx : Removed the code to change category and oher
- codes.
-
- * italian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof'
-
- * estonian.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof'; fixed bug
- where the second argument of \DeclareShorthand was missing.
-
-1995-07-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * slovene.dtx,finnish.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof'
-
- * irish.dtx : load irish.cfg instead of danish.cfg
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Use \empty instead
- of \@empty in the test for the hyphenation exception file; \@empty
- is undefined in plain.
-
- * bbplain.dtx: Added definition of \loadlocalcfg for plain (found
- by Enn Saar)
-
-1995-07-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan.dtx : Added translation of the word `Proof'
-
-1995-07-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * spanish.dtx, galician.dtx: made the use of the active acute
- accent optional.
-
-1995-07-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * catalan.dtx: Removed support for ~n; add `` and '' as
- shorthands.
-
-1995-07-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * francais.dtx, breton.dtx: Postpone the declaration of the
- TextCompositeCommands untill \AtBeginDocument
-
-1995-07-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the options
- activegrave and activeacute.
-
- * catalan.dtx: Made the activation of the grave and acute accents
- optional
-
- * esperant.dtx, dutch.dtx, english.dtx, germanb.dtx, breton.dtx,
- irish.dtx, scottish.dtx, italian.dtx, portuges.dtx, swedish.dtx,
- magyar.dtx, croatian.dtx, czech.dtx, estonian.dtx, polish.dtx,
- romanian.dtx, slovak.dtx, slovene.dtx, turkish.dtx, lsorbian.dtx,
- usorbian.dtx, bahas.dtx: Added \proofname to captions and added
- loading local configuration file.
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Use a
- different control sequence for making \ref and \pageref robust to
- prevent a clash with the showkeys package.
-
-1995-07-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * galician.dtx: Changed behaviour of 'a etc. to expand to
- "^{\prime} a" in mathmode.
-
- * spanish.dtx: Changed behaviour of 'a etc. to expand to
- "^{\prime} a" in mathmode; added \proofname to captions; added
- loading local configuration file.
-
- * catalan.dtx: Added Goncal's changes; changed behaviour of 'a
- etc. to expand to "^{\prime} a" in mathmode; added \proofname to
- captions; added \llgem and \Lgem; added loading local
- configuration file.
-
-1995-07-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * galician.dtx: Added comments from Manual Carriba, added
- \proofname to captions; added seting of \frenchspacing and added
- loading local configuration file.
-
- * francais.dtx: Also allow the hyphenation patterns to be loaded
- for `french', added \proofname to captions; and added loading
- local configuration file.
-
- * finnish.dtx: Now also has active double quote; added by Niilo
- Siljamo (siljamo at cc.helsinki.fi), added \proofname to captions;
- and added loading local configuration file.
-
- * danish.dtx : Added \proofname to captions; added seting of
- \frenchspacing and added loading local configuration file.
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Load language definition
- files *after* manipulating with the identifaction of the
- hyphenation patterns; load french.ldf (from Bernard Gaulle's
- french package) if it exists.
-
-1995-06-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added missing brace
- in definition of \@activated for plain TeX, found by
- te at informatik.uni-hannover.de
-
-1995-06-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * estonian.dtx: corrected typos
-
-1995-06-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx : Changed the order of typesetting the documentation
- for the various languages (PR1652)
-
- * scottish, irish.dtx, esperant.dtx, spanish.dtx, babel.dtx,
- glyphs.dtx: corrected typos (PR1652)
-
- * language.dat: finally corrected typo langauge (PR1656)
-
- * babel.dst: corrected typos (ldfle -> style, PR1654)
-
- * install.txt: corrected typo (PR1653)
-
-1995-06-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * danish.dtx: Added active double quote character as suggested by
- Peter Busk Laursen.
-
-1995-06-06 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * estonian.dtx: New language definition file, provided by Enn
- Saar, updated for Babel release 3.5
-
- * scottish.dtx: New language definition file
-
-1995-06-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * polish.dtx: Update for babel release 3.5
-
- * slovene.dtx : Introduced the active " for this language; used
- for accessing hacek characters and other common usage.
-
- * portuges.dtx: Added brasilian captions, the usage of
- "-shorthands and macros for ordinals.
-
- * dutch.dtx : added "" shorthand
-
-1995-06-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * francais.dtx : Added system level shorthands for the active
- characters to prevent them from gobbling up a following space
-
-1995-06-02 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * swedish.dtx: Use \finnishhyphenmins to store the correct values
- of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin as suggested in PR1606.
-
-1995-05-29 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * swedish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
-
-1995-05-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * swedish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
-
- * usorbian.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
-
- * italian.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
-
-1995-05-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Added the option
- brazilian as an alternative for brazil; added the copying of
- \<lang>hyphenmins when alternatives are provided.
-
- * romanian.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
-
-1995-05-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * turkish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
-
- * finnish.dtx: Added setting of \frenchspacing for finnish text
-
-1995-05-13 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * finnish.dtx: Use \finnishhyphenmins to store the correct values
- of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin as suggested in PR1606;
- also set a number of hyphenation parameters, as suggested in
- PR1027.
-
- * germanb.dtx: Use \germanhyphenmins to store the correct values
- of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin.
-
- * dutch.dtx: Use \dutchhyphenmins to store the correct values of
- \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin.
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed
- \selectlanguage to first store the name of the current language in
- a control sequence and then passing the contents of the control
- sequence to \selectlanguage_ instead of passing the entire
- construct which strips the optional escape character.
- Seperated the setting of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin, using
- the new macro \set@hyphenmins. The values shoud be stored in
- \<language>hyphenmins.
- No longer store the values of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin
- which were set in the pattern file through code in
- \extras<language>, but store them in \<language>hyphenmins.
-
-1995-05-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * finnish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
- * bahasa.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
-
-1995-05-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * tb1401.tex: Changed name from babel-new.tex and updated the
- coding to make it processable with LaTeX2e
-
- * tb1202.tex: Changed name from tb-article.tex and updated the
- coding to make it processable with LaTeX2e
-
-1995-04-28 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the
- possibility to add a the name of a file with hyphenation
- exceptions to the configuration file language.dat. Now also
- support `synonyms' for languages. Both on request from Bernard
- Gaulle.
-
-1995-03-14 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{The Package File}): Changed the extension of
- the languages definition files to .ldf to clearly distinguish them
- for the files in the previous release.
-
- * magyar.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
- * galician.dtx: Updated for release 3.5, using the new active
- character handling mechanism.
- * catalan.dtx: Updated for release 3.5, using the new active
- character handling mechanism.
- * spanish.dtx: Updated for release 3.5, using the new active
- character handling mechanism.
- * portuges.dtx: Updated for release 3.5
- * lsorbian.dtx: new file in release 3.5
- * languages.skeleton: Updated for release 3.5
-
-1995-03-10 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for active characters}): Added a
- check for the ' in \initiate@active@char
- Replaced 16 system level shorthands to deal with hexadecimal
- numbers by one.
- Added a system shorthand for the '; when it is active its usage in
- mathmode needs special care.
-
-1995-03-07 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Made \ref and
- \pageref robust to prevent the problem reported in PR 1353.
-
-1995-03-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Changed the name of
- \p@selectlanguage to \csname selectlanguage \endcsname;
- Rewrote the entire handling of active chars.
-
-1995-02-17 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added \main@language
- to be able to postpone the execution of \selectlanguage. It now
- also happens only once, not for every language loaded.
-
-1995-02-16 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsubsection{Support for active `hat'}): this
- section added.
-
-1995-02-15 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * germanb.dtx: Removed a lot of code that is now present in
- babel.def (things like \flqq, the double quote mechanism, etc.);
- Use \Declaredq now.
- Brought up to date with german.sty version 2.5b
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added the command
- \@activated to be used for logging when characters are made
- active. Introduced the \if@safe@actives switch which should be
- checked on the highest level expansion of an active
- character. This first expansion is defined by \UseActive.
- (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Removed the meaning trick
- and introduced the use of the \if@safe@actives switch. Not all
- cross referencing macros need to be aware of this switch.
-
- * dutch.dtx: Moved the definition of the opening quote character
- and \ij and \IJ to glyphs.dtx
-
- * glyphs.dtx (section{Making glyphs available}): New file to
- collect all definitions of missing glyphs for all languages. The
- code will be part of babel.def
-
-1995-02-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for active characters}): Added
- \Activate and \Deactivate instead of \Activatedq and \Deactivatedq
- as this form is more generic.
-
-1995-02-11 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * english.dtx: Moved identification code to the top.
-
-1995-02-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * esperant.dtx: Moved identification code to the top.
-
-1995-02-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * dutch.dtx: Updated this language definition file to make use of
- the new support macros. Also implemented support for both OT1 and
- T1 encoding. Changed the kerning in the faked ij-characters to
- match the dc-versions more closely.
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Support for active double quote}): Added
- this section with generic macros to support making the double
- quote character active. A language definition file now only needs
- call \Activatedq and use \Declaredq{}{}{} to define its actions.
-
-1995-02-01 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * english.dtx (section{The English language}): Only define
- american as a dialect when no patterns have been loaded for it.
- (PR #735)
-
-1995-01-31 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * polish.dtx (section{The Polish language}): The definition of "C
- incorrectly used \'c instead of \'C. (PR #1401)
-
- * turkish.dtx (section{The Turkish language}): removed an extra
- closing brace and added a missing \def (PR #1397)
- \mont should be \month (PR #1398)
-
-1995-01-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): lthyphen.cfg has changed
- its name; now called hyphen.cfg.
- (section{The Package File}): Added a warning about using T1
- fontencoding giving unexpected results.
-
-1994-11-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * galician.dtx (section{The Catalan language}): Added a few
- missing translations and corrected marzal to marzo in the date.
-
- * catalan.dtx (section{The Catalan language}): Added a few
- missing translations.
-
- * portuges.dtx (section{The Portuguese language}): Added a few
- missing translations.
-
-1994-08-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Cross referencing macros}): Moved the last
- %</def> inside the macrocode environment. Noted by Frank Poppe
- (poppe at swov.nl)
-
-1994-08-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dst: fixed typo (lhyphen -> lthyphen)
-
-1994-07-12 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * finnish.dtx: Added a `.' after the day in the output of \today
- for finnish
-
-1994-07-03 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): The line with \ProvidesFile
- was missing from both babel.drv and user.drv.
- Added code to \process@language to detect whether the patterns
- file also contains assignments to \left- and \righthyphenmin. When
- it doesn't supply a default setting of 2 and 3; store the setting
- in \extras<language>. Added \@nopatterns, to be used in the
- language specific files.
- Also use \PackageError and \PackageWarning when they are
- available.
-
- * language.dat : Commented out dutch, used the default name for
- the american english hyphenation patterns, hyphen.tex. Added a
- (commented out) line showing ukhyphen.tex.
-
-1994-06-30 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * language.skeleton: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * slovak.dtx: Removed the references to babel.com
-
- * finnish.dtx: Removed the references to babel.com
-
-1994-06-26 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * bahasa.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * turkish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * slovene.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * romanian.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * polish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * czech.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * magyar.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * finnish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * swedish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * norsk.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * danish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * galician.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
- Renamed \acute and \tilde to \texacute and \texttilde because of a
- clash with \mathaccent's
-
- * catalan.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
- Renamed \acute and \tilde to \texacute and \texttilde because of a
- clash with \mathaccent's
-
- * spanish.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * portuges.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * italian.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * francais.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * germanb.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * english.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * dutch.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
-1994-06-25 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * esperant.dtx: Removed the use of \filedate, moved the
- identification after the loading of babel.def and use \@nopatterns
- to produce the warning
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added \@nopatterns,
- to be used in the language specific files. Also use \PackageError
- and \PackageWarning when they are available.
-
-1994-06-24 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx (section{Identification}): redid this bit and made
- sure the files are processable with plain TeX. Supply a dummy
- definition of \ProvidesFile.
- (subsection{Multiple languages}): Added code to
- \process@language to detect whether the patterns file also
- contains assignments to left- and righthyphenmin. When it doesn't
- supply a default setting of 2 and 3; store the setting in
- \extras<language>.
-
-
-1994-06-09 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * esperant.dtx: Removed a superfluous | from the code that
- activates the ^
-
-1994-06-08 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * Makefile: added install.txt
-
-1994-06-05 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * babel.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entries (`babel~' was
- missing.
-
- * italian.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entry (`italian-' was
- missing.
-
- * danish.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entry (`danish-' was
- missing.
-
- * swedish.dtx: Repaired mal-formed changes entry (`swedish-' was
- missing).
-
- * babel.dst: Added a few missing }
-
- * install.txt: Added a remark about producing the full source
- listing.
-
- * babel.dst: Added the production if bbidx.ist and bbglo.ist
-
- * Makefile: Added bbidxglo
-
- * slovene.dtx (section{The Slovanian language}): Removed < and >
- from a \changes entry to prevent a problem when generating the
- glossary file.
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Identification}): Wrong docstrip guard
- nesting resulted in a superfluous line in lthyphen.cfg
- Updated Checksum
-
-1994-06-04 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * language.skeleton: Updated for LaTeX2e; included the small
- driver.
-
- * czech.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * croatian.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * slovene.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
- (section{The Slovanian language}): Added extra tranlations from
- Josef Leydold, (leydold at statrix2.wu-wien.ac.at
-
- * romanian.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * turkish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
- (section{The Turkish language}): Added braces behind the use of \i
- to prevent a lot of undefined macros.
-
- * norsk.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * swedish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * babel.ins: lhyphen.cfg has now to be called lthyphen.cfg.
-
- * babel.dtx (subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}):
- An end of line ended up in the middle of a || expression.
-
- * slovak.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
- Added setting of \lefthyphenmin and \righthyphenmin.
-
- * finnish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * magyar.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * polish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
- Changed the table describing the conventions to really describe
- what is iomplemented.
- Tried to initialize polish letters by calling \texptl; this should
- have been \textpl.
-
- * danish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
- (section{The Danish language}): Peter Busk Larsen proposed a few
- changes to the translations.
-
-1994-05-19 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * galician.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * catalan.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * spanish.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * portuges.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * italian.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode. Added some of the
- suggestions from Claudio Beccari. The others wil have to wait.
-
- * francais.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * germanb.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
-1994-05-18 Johannes Braams (babel at latex-project.org)
-
- * dutch.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * esperant.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * bahasa.dtx: Added a small driver to the top of the file.
- Added missing \begin{macrocode}.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
- * babel.dtx (driver): use the ltxdoc class
- Added a small driver to the top of the file as an addition to the
- large drivers.
- Removed the use of \wlog from native mode.
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/fixes.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/fixes.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e0397caa9d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/fixes.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,29 +0,0 @@
- Fixes since last major release (3.8a)
-
- 23 November 2005
-
-November 23, 2005 Added support for Albanian (submitted by Adi Zaimi)
- and Bahasa Malaysia (submitted by Bob Margolis). The
- original option bahasa was for Bahasa Indonesia;
- that support can now also be loaded with the options
- bahasai, indon and indonesian. The new version is
- loaded with the options malay, meyalu or bahasam.
-
-November 17, 2005 New version of latin.dtx and italian.dtx by Clausio
- Beccari
-
-May 21, 2005 Fixed PR's3750 and 3756 and a compatibility problem
- with the package fancyhdr
-
-March 31, 2005 Welsh Translation for Glossary
-
-March 24, 2005 May enhancements to the documentation
-
-June 12, 2004 Added the options australian, newzealand
-
-May 26, 2004 Make sure that an empty mark stays empty
-
-May 2, 2004 Made the definitions of \glq, \grqq, \flq, \frq,
- \flqq, \frqq font encoding dependant
-
-April 19, 2004 Internal changes to the shorthand mechanism
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-fdd.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-fdd.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index cccbf09ad32..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-fdd.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 95ab1227ad6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/greek-usage.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grmath.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grmath.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index c862ea489be..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grmath.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grsymb.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grsymb.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 86d7350913c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/grsymb.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/howtoget.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/howtoget.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index deb4194359b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/howtoget.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,33 +0,0 @@
- Babel Distribution Guide
-
- 17 March 2008
-
-
-This file gives you some information as to where to get the latest
-version of Babel and other related software.
-
-The main distribution of Babel is done through the Comprehensive TeX
-Archive Network (CTAN). The main CTAN hosts are:
- ftp://ftp.dante.de/
- ftp://ftp.tex.ac.uk/
-In order to reduce network load, it is recommended that you use the
-CTAN host or mirror which is located in the closest proximity to your
-site. See /tex-archive/CTAN.sites for a list of CTAN mirrors.
-
-You can find the latest version of Babel in:
- /tex-archive/macros/latex/required/babel/
-
-Hyphenation pattern files are not normally part of the Babel distribution.
-You can find hyphenation pattern files on CTAN, in the directory:
- /tex-archive/language/hyphenation/
-
-OTHER RELATED PACKAGES
-For the french language Benard Gaulle distributes his french package.
-It provides extensive support for typesetting french documents.
-
-For the german language Bernd Raichle maintains `German-Style'. It is
-located in:
- /tex-archive/language/german/
-
-In one of the directories below /tex-archive/language you can
-sometimes find support for languages not (yet) supported by Babel.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-4 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-4
deleted file mode 100644
index 615c989009a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-4
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-Babel installation guide for the Mac with OzTeX.
-These instructions apply for OzTeX versions 4.0+
-Filedate: september 26, 2000
-
-(Originally provided by Andrew Trevorrow <akt@netspace.net.au>)
-
-
-This document explains how to install Babel from the files provided in
-the OzTeX distribution. See install.txt if you need more information.
-(Ignore the old install.OzTeX-pre4 file!)
-
-Copy the following folders from the OzTeX Distribution to corresponding
-locations in your local texmf folder:
-
- :texmf:source:generic:babel: (*.ins, *.dtx, etc)
- :texmf:tex:generic:hyphen: (hyphenation files)
-
-If you prefer to use a different folder structure then you'll need to
-make suitable changes to the search paths in "Add Babel" (included below).
-
-Copy the "Add Babel" config file to your config folder (eg. myconfigs),
-make any necessary changes, then add this line at the start of your
-Local config file:
-
- load_config = ":myconfigs:Add Babel"
-
-"Add Babel" increases some TeX parameters, so you'll also need to
-increase OzTeX's preferred memory size to at least 4500K.
-
-Start up OzTeX, tick the LaTeX format in the TeX menu, then TeX the
-babel.ins file in the :texmf:source:generic:babel: folder.
-Answer "y" to any request to overwrite an existing file.
-Lots of files will be generated (*.ldf, *.sty, *.def, *.cfg, *.fd).
-There is no need to move these files into another folder; it makes
-life simpler if the files are kept in :texmf:source:generic:babel:
-(that's where "Add Babel" assumes they'll be kept).
-
-Edit the language.dat file in :texmf:source:generic:babel: and
-create an entry for each language that you want to hyphenate.
-See the example entries and use the names of hyphenation files
-provided in the :texmf:tex:generic:hyphen: folder.
-
-Now you need to generate a new LaTeX format file. This needs to
-be done in the :texmf:source:generic:babel: folder so that INITEX
-will use the hyphen.cfg file created in the above step.
-Select "TeX..." and make sure the open dialog shows files in
-the :texmf:source:generic:babel: folder, then hit Cancel.
-Select INITEX and type "LaTeX.ltx" in response to the ** prompt.
-
-You can save LaTeX.fmt in the default location for format files
-(:TeX:Formats:) but it is better if you put it in a new folder
-called something like :texmf:formats: and then set
-
- format_folder = :texmf:formats:
-
-in the OzTeX-only section of your Local config file. (You'll
-also need to move the other format files into this folder.)
-That way you will avoid clobbering your own formats when you
-install a new version OzTeX.
-
-You are now ready to use Babel (see user.dvi).
-
--------------------------------------------
-Save the text below as the file 'Add Babel
--------------------------------------------
-% This config file installs the Babel macros for use with OzTeX 4.0 and later.
-% Copy this file to your own config folder (eg. myconfigs), make any necessary
-% changes, then add this line at the start of your Local file:
-%
-% load_config = ":myconfigs:Add Babel"
-
-current_app = OzTeX OzTtH
-input_folders = $c :texmf:source:generic:babel: |
- :texmf:tex:generic:hyphen:
-
-current_app = OzTeX
-% Babel needs some larger TeX parameters. You'll also need to increase
-% OzTeX's preferred memory size to at least 4500K.
-trie_size = 65000
-trie_op_size = 5000
-% If you need to increase other TeX parameters then do it here.
-
-% Best to restore all apps when finished.
-current_app = OzTeX OzMF OzMP OzTtH
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-pre4 b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-pre4
deleted file mode 100644
index f0d7e4de8cf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.OzTeX-pre4
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,123 +0,0 @@
-
-Babel installation guide for the Mac with OzTeX.
-These instructions apply for OzTeX versions 2.1 as well as 3.0.
-Filedate: April 30, 1999
-
-(Originally provided by Jan Geenen, <geenenjw@cobweb.nl> for OzTeX 1.9;
- updated for 2.1 by Giuseppe P. Cavarretta, <gc@gea.geo.uniroma1.it>)
-
- 1. To create a workable babel package, first create a folder named Babel
- and put it in the TeX-inputs folder; in this new folder you must
- download from a CTAN site the following files:
- a. babel.dtx
- b. babel.ins
- c. language.dat
- d. <language>.dtx; For every <language> you want to use in your
- documents, ie. dutch.dtx, english.dtx, etc.
- e. hyphenation files; You need these for every language for which
- you want to produce the right hyphenation.
- ie. nehyph2.tex.
- f. bbidxglo.dtx
- g. documentation files. 00readme, install.txt, tb-article.tex, etc,
- see manifest.txt
-
- If you are in doubt, you have much hard-disk space and low-cost
- connection to the internet, get the entire babel directory (a good
- practice anyway). Remember that the hyphenation files, i.e. ithyph.tex
- or nehyph.tex, are not included in the babel package; you have to
- get them from ctan/tex-archive/language/<your_language>.
-
- 2. Read the documentation:
- a. install.txt
- b. 00readme
- c. OzTeX User Guide version 2.1
-
- 3. Check your files if they obey the Mac-conventions for end of line.
- If not, then edit them and save as same with the option LF Macintosh.
- If you got them by dowloading directly from CTAN into the Mac they
- should be OK.
-
- 4. Open the file language.dat and for every language that you will
- hyphenate make an entrance, for example:
-
- % Any comment you like
- dutch nehyph2.tex %nederlands
- latin lahyph.tex %latin
- english hyphen.tex %english
-
- 5. Put the file nehyph.tex (and/or whateverhyph.tex) in the folder Plain.
-
- 6. TeX the file babel.ins. A lot of files will be generated !
- Eventually, delete those related to languages that you think you
- will never use (never say never !). The following files should be
- produced by this:
- a. babel.sty
- b. babel.def
- c. switch.def
- d. hyphen.cfg
- e. plain.def
- f. For all the languages for which you downloaded a .dtx-file the
- run will produce a .ldf-file and a .sty-file.
- If you didn't download them all, the installation process will
- stop, telling you it can't find a .dtx-file; after the prompt
- type: r and hit the Return-key. The install program will resume
- ie. dutch.dtx gives dutch.ldf and dutch.sty
- g. the bbind.ist and bbglo.ist files are for printing the
- documentation.
-
- 7. The install-run ends with these remarks:
- a. To finish the installation you have to move all the files with
- names ending in .ldf, .sty, .def or.fd into a directory
- searched by TeX.
- Action: If you hadn't done it before, create a new folder, call it
- Babel and put in the files ending with the mentioned suffixes.
- Drag and drop the Babel-folder into the TeX-inputs-folder.
- b. For making a format the following files have to be in a
- directory which is searched by Initex: hypen.cfg, language.dat
- and files with the hyphenation patterns.
- Action: Create a new folder, call it InitexBabel and put in it the
- recommended files. Drag and drop the InitexBabel folder into
- the TeX-inputs folder.
- The language.sty files which you do not need throw them in the
- thrashcan.
-
- 8. The goal is to generate a new latex-format file. To gain some
- experience in generating such a format file use only one
- hyphenation by disableing the others by putting in front of every
- line a %-sign in the file language.dat. Relax, if you follow the
- instructions listed here it should work immediately. You may get
- an out of memory error during format building when you trie to
- load many languages: if this happens, try to increase the
- trie_size in the file Configs:Default. After that, run INITeX
- anew.
-
- 9. Disable the file hyphen.ltx by adding a %-sign in front of the filename.
- :TeX-inputs:LaTeX:hyphen.ltx.
- (LaTeX will search for another. cfg file)
-
- 8. Choose in the TeX menu LaTeX
-
- 9. Choose in the TeX-menu INITEX and after the two ** type
- latex.ltx and push the <return> button. You will readily notice if
- the hyphenation files you selected have been used.
- You will now be asked into which folder you want to save the new
- format file you created: choose the folder TeX-formats.
- Rename the new format file from latex.fmt to LaTeX.fmt;
- this will overwrite the pre-existing LaTeX.fmt.
- If you wish to keep the original LaTeX.fmt file,
- choose a different name or rename the pre-existing LaTeX.fmt to
- whatever_name.fmt you like. Remember that if you want to use format
- files having new names, you must add such new names into the file
- Configs:Default as follows:
-
- format_files = LaTeX AMSTeX Plain Your_new_format
-
-10. Start using babel.
- a. Put the command \usepackage[your language]{babel} in the
- preamble of your production file product.tex
- b. TeX product.tex
-
-Good luck!
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index ee83d65b9d8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/install.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,157 +0,0 @@
- Babel Installation Guide
-
- 20 February 2004
-
-
- When you install the babel system you have first to decide
- whether you want to make a new format file. If you don't, you
- miss some of the functionality of the babel system, but you
- can then skip steps 2 through 6 . If you do want to build a
- new format, start with step 1.
-
- When you want to produce the full listing of all the source
- files in the babel system run babel.drv through LaTeX, then
- use MakeIndex to produce babel.ind using the command:
- makeindex -s bbind.ist babel
- and use MakeIndex to produce babel.gls using the command:
- makeindex -s bbglo.ist -o babel.gls babel.glo
- Then run LaTeX on babel.drv again.
-
- 1 Make sure that you have the Docstrip (version 2) program
- available (it is part of the LaTeX2e distribution); then
- run the file babel.ins through TeX.
- This strips all the .dtx files of the comments and produces
- fast loadable versions of the files.
- The installation files that are part of the babel
- distribution all contain \usedir{tex/generic/babel}
- commands. The effect of this is that TeX will attempt to
- write the files it produces into your TDS compliant
- directory tree. If you have a different tree you should
- either change these commands or comment them out. Using the
- file docstrip.cfg you can instruct docstrip about the `root'
- of the TDS tree. On my Win95 TeX-Live installation I have:
-\BaseDirectory{D:/TeX-Local/texmf}
-%\BaseDirectory{D:/TeX-Live/texmf}
-\UseTDS
- whereas on my Linux installation I use:
-\BaseDirectory{/usr/local/TeX}
-%\BaseDirectory{/usr/TeX/texmf}
-\UseTDS
- If all of these are correct and TeX still complains about
- not being able to store the files it is possible that the
- file texmf.cnf prohibits writing into the system trees.
- Look for the line with openout_any; if it's value is 'p'
- (paranoid) change it to 'r' (restricted).
- If all of the above doesn't work for you (or you commented
- out the \usedir lines) you will have to move the resulting
- .ldf, .sty, .def, .cfg and .fd files yourself into a
- directory where TeX can find them.
- Do that now.
- On some operating systems you might get an error message
- such as:
-
-! I can't write on file `./catalan.sty'.
-<to be read again>
- \edef
-l.455 }
-
-Please type another output file name:
-
- In such a case you have run into a maximum number of open
- files limit in your computer. You can get around this by
- telling docstrip to open less files at a time (from bug
- report Babel/2592, answer by David Carlisle):
-
- As long as you have a reasonably new copy of docstrip,
- you can make a docstrip.cfg file at your site to tell
- docstrip that you have operating system limits on the
- number of open files.
- Make a file docstrip.cfg with the two lines:
-
-\maxfiles{8}
-\maxoutfiles{8}
-
- and docstrip will keep below 8 the number of files it has
- open. (You may need to experiment to see how large your
- system lets you make these numbers, the default is 16)
- See docstrip.dtx
- % \subsection{Setting maximum numbers of streams}
- for more details.
-
- Docstrip also produces two files called babel.drv and
- user.drv. You can use babel.drv to produce the full
- documented source listing of the babel system. (Which is
- also provided as babel.dvi) You can use user.drv to produce
- a short document that describes the features of each
- language specific file.
-
- 2 Make sure you have the hyphenation patterns available for
- the languages that you intend to use. If you don't have
- them, you may be able to find them in CTAN, in the directory:
- /tex-archive/language/hyphenation.
- If you happen to have a set of patterns that is not
- available there you could make it available by either
- putting it in the /incoming directory or sending it to me.
-
- 3 The docstripping process will have produced a file called
- hyphen.cfg. This file will be loaded when you build a
- LaTeX format. To build a plain format with the babel system
- preloaded you can use the file bplain.tex as a wrapper for
- plain.tex. When you run it through iniTeX plain.tex will be
- loaded, as well as hyphen.cfg. When you type \dump at the
- end you will get bplain.fmt which you can use as your
- plain TeX format. Renaming hyphen.tex to something else is
- not permitted by Don Knuth.
-
- 4 Check the hyphenation patterns that you have available and
- want to load into the format. For each language that you
- want to hyphenate correctly you need a hyphenation pattern.
- List them all in the file `language.dat'. The file that is
- in the distribution serves as an example of what you have to
- put in there.
- The files containing hyphenation patterns should be found
- somewhere on TeX's `input path'. What that means depends on
- the implementation of TeX you use:
- - With emTeX there is an environment variable TEXINPUT in
- which you can list the directories to search through,
- adding a ! to a directory will make emTeX do a recursive
- search through the directory tree.
- - With Unix TeX the `system directories' do not need to be
- specified in the environment variable TEXINPUTS; there
- adding a double / to a directory name means recursive
- searching of the directory tree.
-
- 5 Run iniTeX, telling it to load your favorite macro package
- (ie plain or latex).
- When you build a LaTeX format iniTeX will find the file
- hyphen.cfg (provided that you have stored it in the
- correct place).
- When you build a plain TeX format using the supplied file
- bplain.tex iniTeX will also find hyphen.cfg.
-
- *Beware*: some implementations of TeX only look in the
- current directory when the \openin primitive is used. If
- your TeX does that you need to put the file `languages.dat'
- in the same directory where you build your format.
-
- 6 When the iniTeX run in step 5 stops with a message about
- not enough memory (trie_size = ...) and "you can ask a
- wizard to enlarge me" You have tried to load more
- hyphenation patterns into TeX's memory then it has room for.
- In that case you can either remove one or more languages
- from the file language.dat or be your own wizard and enlarge
- TeX. I can not tell you how to do that for all
- implementations of TeX as it differs with each
- implementation. Your distribution should contain a
- description of what to.
- - With emTeX you can influence the size of some of the
- memory arrays with command line switches (/mt:65000 for
- the trie_size).
- - With Unix TeX you have to change a file called tex.ch and
- rebuild TeX using the supplied Makefile. The change you
- need to make is to enlarge the trie_size and
- trie_op_size.
- - With Web2C TeX (version 7 and newer) you can change the
- value of the trie_size in the file web2c/texmf.cnf.
-
---- Copyright 2004 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved ---
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.dat
deleted file mode 100644
index 75141062f8c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.dat
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-% File : language.dat
-% Purpose : specify which hypenation patterns to load
-% while running iniTeX
-=USenglish
-american ushyphen.tex
-=english
-UKenglish ukhyphen.tex
-=british
-french frhyphen.tex
-dutch nehyph2.tex
-german dehypht.tex
-ngerman dehyphn.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.skeleton b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.skeleton
deleted file mode 100644
index fab9bffd259..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/language.skeleton
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,221 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{0}
-%%% docstring = " This file can act as a template for
-%%% people who want to provide extra
-%%% languages to be included in the babel
-%%% distribution.
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{<language>.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{<language>}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{<language>.dtx}
- [2008/03/17 v1.6 <Language> support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for
-% the <Language> language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{<language>.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{<language>.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{v1.1}{1994/02/27}{Rearranged the file a little}
-% \changes{v1.2}{1994/06/04}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{v1.3}{1995/05/13}{Update for \babel\ release 3.5}
-% \changes{v1.4}{1996/10/30}{Update for \babel\ release 3.6}
-% \changes{v1.5}{1997/03/18}{Update for \babel\ release 3.7}
-% \changes{v1.6}{2004/02/20}{Update for \babel\ release 3.8}
-%
-% \section{The <Language> language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% <Language> languagee.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{<language>}{captions<language>}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{<language>} could be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@<language>| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\l@<language>
- \@nopatterns{<Language>}
- \adddialect\l@<language>0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For the <Dialect> version of these definitions we just add a
-% ``dialect''. Also, the macros |\captions<dialect>| and
-% |\extras<dialect>| are |\let| to their \texttt{<language>}
-% counterparts when these parts are defined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\adddialect\l@<dialect>\l@<language>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the <Language> language.
-%
-% Now we declare the |<attrib>| language attribute.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{<language>}{<attrib>}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This code adds the expansion of |\extras<attrib><language>| to
-% |\extras<language>|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extras<language>
- \expandafter{\extras<attrib><language>}%
- \let\captions<language>\captions<attrib><language>
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\<language>hyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{<language>}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captions<language>}
-% The macro |\captions<language>| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\captions<language>{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captions<dialect>}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\captions<dialect>\captions<language>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\date<language>}
-% The macro |\date<language>| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce <Language> dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\date<language>{%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\date<dialect>}
-% The macro |\date<dialect>| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce <Dialect> dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\date<dialect>{%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extras<language>}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextras<language>}
-% The macro |\extras<language>| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the <Language> language. The macro
-% |\noextras<language>| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extras<language>|. For the moment these macros are empty but
-% they are defined for compatibility with the other
-% language definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extras<language>{}
-\addto\noextras<language>{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extras<dialect>}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextras<dialect>}
-% Also for the ``<dialect>'' variant no extra definitions are
-% needed at the moment.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\extras<dialect>\extras<language>
-\let\noextras<dialect>\noextras<language>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{<language>}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/legal.bbl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/legal.bbl
deleted file mode 100644
index b786a435846..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/legal.bbl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,37 +0,0 @@
- Babel Copyright, Warranty and Distribution Restrictions
-
- 29 March 2005
-
-
-COPYRIGHT
-=========
-
-This distribution is
-Copyright 1993 1994 1995 1996 1997 1998 1999 2000 2002 2003 2004 2005
-Johannes L. Braams and the individual authors listed in the
-language definition files.
-
-
-License
-=======
-
-Babel is free software that can be redistributed and/or modified
-under the terms of the LaTeX Project Public License as specified
-in the file lppl.txt.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-The use of Babel is unrestricted.
-
-This Work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution
-is given in the file `manifest.bbl'.
-
-Files generated by means of unpacking the distribution (using, for
-example, the docstrip program) may be distributed at the distributor's
-discretion. However if they are distributed then a copy of the base
-system must be distributed together with them.
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/manifest.bbl b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/manifest.bbl
deleted file mode 100644
index 9a8eb0003d5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/manifest.bbl
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-%
-% CONTENTS OF THE Babel DISTRIBUTION (3.8m, 2009/09/19)
-% ====================================================
-%
-% Documentation:
-% --------------
-%
-% 00readme.txt -- The distribution guide.
-% announce.txt -- A short announcement of the release
-% 00readme.heb -- Information about the hebrew support
-% fixes.txt -- A list of fixes since the last release (2004/02/20)
-% howtoget.txt -- How and where to get Babel and related software
-% install.txt -- How to install Babel.
-% install.OzTeX-4 -- How to install Babel on a Mac with OzTeX 4.0+.
-% install.OzTeX-pre4-- How to install Babel on a Mac with older OzTeX.
-% GreekFonts.txt -- How to get the fonts on which the current
-% support for Greek typesetting is absed.
-% manifest.bbl -- This file.
-% bugs.txt -- How to submit a bug report for babel.
-% todo.txt -- A list of things that need to be done for a
-% future release of the babel system.
-% changes.txt -- List of changes in reverse chronological order.
-% tb1202.tex -- The source of the original article that appeared
-% in TUGboat, Volume 12 (1991), No. 2
-% tb1401.tex -- The source of an update article that appeared in
-% TUGboat, Volume 14 (1993), No. 1
-% tb1604.tex -- The source of an update article that never
-% appeared in TUGboat, but was presented at
-% EuroTeX 1995, Arnhem.
-%
-% Kernel files:
-% -------------
-%
-% babel.dtx -- The source for the common parts of Babel
-% base.ins -- Unpacks the kernel files of Babel
-% babel.ins -- Unpacks all the source files
-% bbcompat.dtx -- The source for compatibility mode files
-% bbplain.dtx -- The source for plain compatibility
-% bbidxglo.dtx -- The source for MakeIndex files needed to
-% typeset the documentation
-%
-% Language specific files:
-% ------------------------
-% albanian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Albanian language
-% bahasa.dtx -- Support for the Bahasa Indonesia language
-% bahasam.dtx -- Support for the Bahasa Malaysia language
-% bahasa.ins -- Installation script for the Bahasa languages
-% basque.dtx/ins -- Support for the Basque language
-% breton.dtx/ins -- Support for the Breton language
-% bulgarian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Bulgarian language
-% catalan.dtx/ins -- Support for the Catalan language
-% croatian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Croatian language
-% czech.dtx/ins -- Support for the Czech language
-% danish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Danish language
-% dutch.dtx/ins -- Support for the Dutch language
-% english.dtx/ins -- Support for the English language
-% esperanto.dtx/ins -- Support for the Esperanto language
-% estonian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Estonian language
-% finnish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Finnish language
-% frenchb.dtx/ins -- Support for the French language
-% galician.dtx/ins -- Support for the Galician language
-% germanb.dtx/ins -- Support for the German language
-% ngermanb.dtx -- Support for the German language (new orthography)
-% greek.dtx/ins -- Support for the Greek language
-% greek.fdd -- Font definitions for typesetting Greek texts
-% grmath.dtx -- Defines greek names for math operators
-% grsymb.dtx -- Provides acces to old Greek symbols in the cb fonts
-% usage.tex -- Describes the use of the Greek support
-% athnum.dtx -- Implementes Athenian Numerals
-% heb209.dtx -- Hebrew in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode
-% hebinp.dtx -- Input encoding file for Hebrew
-% hebrew.dtx/ins/fdd-- Support for the Hebrew language
-% hebtech.dtx -- Technion thesis class
-% icelandic.dtx/ins -- Support for the Icelandic language
-% interlingua.dtx/ins -- Support for the Interlingua language
-% irish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Irish Gaelic language
-% italian.dtx /ins -- Support for the Italian language
-% kurmanji.dtx/ins -- Support for the Kurmanji language
-% latin.dtx/ins -- Support for the Latin language
-% lsorbian.dtx -- Support for the Lower Sorbian language
-% sorbian.ins -- Installation script for the Sorbian languages
-% magyar.dtx/ins -- Support for the Hungarian language
-% norsk.dtx/ins -- Support for the Norwegian languages
-% polish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Polish language
-% portuges.dtx/ins -- Support for the Portuguese language
-% romanian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Rumanian language
-% russianb.dtx/ins -- Support for the Russian language
-% samin.dtx/ins -- Support for the North Sami language
-% scottish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Scottish Gaelic language
-% serbian.dtx/ins -- Support for the Serbian language
-% slovak.dtx/ins -- Support for the Slovakian language
-% slovene.dtx/ins -- Support for the Slovenian language
-% spanish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Spanish language
-% swedish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Swedish language
-% turkish.dtx/ins -- Support for the Turkish language
-% ukraineb.dtx/ins -- Support for the Ukrainian language
-% usorbian.dtx -- Support for the Upper Sorbian language
-% welsh.dtx/ins -- Support for the Welsh language
-%
-% Example files:
-% --------------
-% language.dat -- an example file which show how to specify
-% hyphenation files
-% language.skeleton -- An example file that can be used to build new
-% language definition files from scratch.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1202.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1202.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index 23aa4052c1b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1202.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1401.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1401.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index d10f1e87a75..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1401.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1604.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1604.pdf
deleted file mode 100644
index fcba890a048..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/tb1604.pdf
+++ /dev/null
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/todo.txt b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/todo.txt
deleted file mode 100644
index 687b7401c07..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/generic/babel/todo.txt
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,32 +0,0 @@
-Things that still need to be done (2008/03/17) :
-================================================
-
-- The language attribute mechanism is not completely mature yet. It is
- currently not possible to switch attibutes on and off in the middle
- of a document. This restriction might be lifted in a future release.
-
-- I started work on support for hyphenation patterns depending on
- the encoding. So far this only works when loading the pattern file.
- The encoding information isn't then subsequently stored as an
- attribute for that hyphenation register.
-
-- An interface is needed to be able to change the definition of
- things like \figurename and keep the change over language
- switches. (PR3291)
-
-- Jean-François Mertens <jfm@core.ucl.ac.be> has developped a fully
- expandable way of `sanitizing' active characters. It needs thorough
- testing by a larger number of users before it could be included in
- the ditribution.
-
-- A suggestion has been made by Ole Laursen <olau@hardworking.dk> to
- make the comma active to be used as decimal delimiter instead of the
- dot. This could be provided as an option as more European languages
- need the comma for that purpose.
-
-- I have a contribution wich provides support for typesetting the
- Serbian language in the Cyrillic alphabet; this is not yet
- integrated.
-
-- I have a contribution with support for the Thai language which also
- needs attention to integrate it with babel \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/CONTRIB b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/CONTRIB
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..0cbafdd1ffb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/CONTRIB
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+Guidelines for contributed languages
+------------------------------------
+
+Now language files are "outsourced" and are located in a separate
+directory, so that they are contributed directly to CTAN (please, do
+not send to me language styles just to upload them to CTAN). Of
+course, placing your style files in this directory is not mandatory,
+but if you want to do it, here are a few guidelines.
+
+- Do not hesitate stating on the file heads you are the author and the
+ maintainer, if you actually are. There is no need to state the babel
+ maintainer(s) as authors if they have not contributed significantly
+ to your language files.
+- Fonts are not strictly part of a language, so they are best placed
+ in the corresponding TeX tree. This includes not only tfm, vf, ps1,
+ otf, mf files and the like, but also fd ones.
+- Font and input encodings are usually best placed in the
+ corresponding tree, too, but sometimes they belong more naturally to
+ the babel style. Note you may also need to define a LICR.
+- Babel ldf files may just interface a framework, as it happens often
+ with Oriental language/scripts. This framework is best placed in its
+ own directory.
+- And do not forget providing a manual (as a stand-alone document).
+
+If your need further assistance and technical advice in the
+development of language styles, I am willing to help you. And of
+course, you can make any suggestion you like.
+
+------------
+Javier Bezos
+2013/03/25
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/README b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/README
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..4a7aca9979e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/README
@@ -0,0 +1,53 @@
+Babel 3.9e
+----------
+
+This is Babel 3.9e.
+
+Version 3.9a fixed lots of bugs and added some new features, intended
+mainly to make it compatible somehow with Unicode engines. Some bugs
+have not been fixed to avoid backward incompatibilities, but they have
+been documented. Most of the new features (like package options) are
+intended to overcome issues in previous releases without changing
+significantly the behaviour of Babel.
+
+Languages are not part of the Babel core any more; in particular, it
+shall be no longer necessary to synchronize Babel core releases with
+releases of Babel language files. See CONTRIB for further details
+about contributing a language.
+
+To install it, just tex babel.ins and move the generated files to the
+corresponding place in your TeX distribution. Unlike former releases,
+formats must not be recreated, but it is recommended, at least the
+first time Babel is updated from 3.8 (or previous versions).
+
+Changes are described in babel.pdf with the label "New 3.9". The
+manual has been expanded to include tips and tricks, but it will be
+improved in next releases.
+
+Please, report bugs and suggestions to:
+
+http://latex-project.org/bugs-upload.html
+
+You may also report them to the author more informally on:
+
+http://www.tex-tipografia.com/contact.html
+
+New
+---
+* babel.dtx
+3.9b - Fixed an idiot slip in hyphen.cfg: a \def instead of \let
+3.9c - Added the "modifiers" mechanism
+ - Option shorthands accepts t for ~ and c for ,
+ - \foreinglanguage inserted a par (because of an empty line
+ in the doc part)
+3.9d - Fixed undefined \@expandtwoargs in Plain
+ - Code reorganized (just an "internal" change)
+3.9e - Fixed a bug introduced in 3.9c which mangled key=value
+ options.
+* bbunicode.dtx
+1.0b - Improvements by Elie Roux for LuaTeX.
+
+------------
+Javier Bezos
+2013-04-22
+
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/babel.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/babel.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..db6652a0e48
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/babel.pdf
Binary files differ
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/blplain.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/blplain.tex
index e80adaa89fa..4c03de82a1a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/blplain.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/blplain.tex
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbplain.dtx (with options: `blplain')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -40,8 +41,10 @@
%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
%% by Johannes Braams
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
\catcode`\{=1 % left brace is begin-group character
\catcode`\}=2 % right brace is end-group character
\catcode`\#=6 % hash mark is macro parameter character
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bplain.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/bplain.tex
index ca43c2c328d..982620aa760 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bplain.tex
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/babel/bplain.tex
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbplain.dtx (with options: `bplain')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -40,8 +41,10 @@
%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
%% by Johannes Braams
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
\catcode`\{=1 % left brace is begin-group character
\catcode`\}=2 % right brace is end-group character
\catcode`\#=6 % hash mark is macro parameter character
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist
index 09dff7636a4..86a4f9bef48 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbglo.ist
@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@
%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
%% ---------------------------------------------------------
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved.
%%
%% This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist
index 31d43c8abb4..774aae454e5 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/makeindex/babel/bbind.ist
@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@
%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
%% ---------------------------------------------------------
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved.
%%
%% This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index e1f0952ee11..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,302 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{251}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{albanian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{albanian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{albanian.dtx}
- [2007/10/20 v1.0c albanian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007
-% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-% babel at braamsdot xs4all dot nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the albanian language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Adi Zaimi (adizaimi at yahoo.com).
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{albanian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{albanian.dtx}
-% \changes{albanian-1.0a}{2005/11/21}{Started first version of the file}
-% \changes{albanian-1.0b}{2005/12/10}{A number of corrections in the
-% translations from Adi Zaimi}
-% \changes{albanian-1.0c}{2006/06/05}{Small documentation fix}
-%
-% \section{The Albanian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% Albanian language.
-%
-% Albanian is written in a latin script, but it has 36 letters,
-% 9 which are diletters (dh, gj, ll, nj, rr, sh, th, xh, zh),
-% and two extra special characters.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:albanian-quote} an overview is given of its
-% purpose.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"c| & |\"c|, also implemented for the uppercase \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\
-% |"`| & for Albanian left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |"'| & for Albanian right double quotes. \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{albanian.ldf}}\label{tab:albanian-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Apart from defining shorthands we need to make sure that the
-% first paragraph of each section is intended. Furthermore the
-% following new math operators are defined (|\tg|, |\ctg|,
-% |\arctg|, |\arcctg|, |\sh|, |\ch|, |\th|, |\cth|, |\arsh|,
-% |\arch|, |\arth|, |\arcth|, |\Prob|, |\Expect|, |\Variance|).
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{albanian}\captionsalbanian
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{albanian} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@albanian| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@albanian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Albanian}
- \adddialect\l@albanian0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Albanian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsalbanian}
-% The macro |\captionsalbanian| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsalbanian{%
- \def\prefacename{Parathenia}%
- \def\refname{Referencat}%
- \def\abstractname{P\"ermbledhja}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitulli}%
- \def\appendixname{Shtesa}%
- \def\contentsname{P\"ermbajta}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurat}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabelat}%
- \def\indexname{Indeksi}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Pjesa}%
- \def\enclname{Lidhja}%
- \def\ccname{Kopja}%
- \def\headtoname{P\"er}%
- \def\pagename{Faqe}%
- \def\seename{shiko}%
- \def\alsoname{shiko dhe}%
- \def\proofname{V\"ertetim}%
- \def\glossaryname{P\"erhasja e Fjal\"eve}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datealbanian}
-% The macro |\datealbanian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Albanian dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datealbanian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Janar\or Shkurt\or Mars\or Prill\or Maj\or
- Qershor\or Korrik\or Gusht\or Shtator\or Tetor\or N\"entor\or
- Dhjetor\fi \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasalbanian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasalbanian}
-% The macro |\extrasalbanian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Albanian language. The macro
-% |\noextrasalbanian| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasalbanian|.
-%
-% For Albanian the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the
-% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the albanian group of shorthands
-% should be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasalbanian{\languageshorthands{albanian}}
-\addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we define shorthands to facilitate the occurence of letters
-% such as \v{c}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"e}{\textormath{\v e}{\check e}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"E}{\textormath{\v E}{\check E}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar
-% to the german and french quotation marks.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation
-% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}
-% In albanian the first paragraph of each section should be indented.
-% Add this code only in \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\fmtname plain \else
- \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse
- \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI
- \@afterindentfalse}
- \addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@frenchindent}
- \addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mathalbanian}
-% Some math functions in Albanian math books have other names:
-% e.g. |sinh| in Albanian is written as |sh| etc. So we define a
-% number of new math operators.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh
-\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth
-\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits}
-\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits}
-\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits}
-\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{albanian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 07d34783ec4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/albanian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2005/11/21}
-\def\batchfile{albanian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{albanian.ldf}{\from{albanian.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/athnum.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/athnum.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 3ea1f5325aa..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/athnum.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,277 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-%% \CheckSum{125}
-%\iffalse
-%
-%% This is file `athnum.dtx'
-%% (c) 1997-2007 Apostolos Syropoulos.
-%% All rights reserved.
-%
-% Please report errors or suggestions for improvement to
-%
-% Apostolos Syropoulos
-% 366, 28th October Str.
-% GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE
-% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr
-%
-%\fi
-%
-% \iffalse
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\def\PiIt#1{{%
- \newdimen\boxW \newdimen\boxH
- \settowidth{\boxW}{#1}%
- \settoheight{\boxH}{#1}%
- \addtolength{\boxW}{0.8pt}
- \vbox{%
- \hrule width\boxW\hbox{%
- \vrule height\boxH\mbox{#1}%
- \vrule height\boxH}}\kern.5pt}}
-\GetFileInfo{athnum.drv}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{athnum.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \fi
-%
-%\title{Athenian Numerals II\footnote{The documentation of this
-% package is essentially the same as that of the package `grnumalt'.
-% The `II' serves as a means to distinguish the two documents.}}
-% \author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\366, 28th October Str.\\
-% GR-671 00 Xanthi, HELLAS\\ Email:\texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}}
-% \date{2003/08/24}
-%\maketitle
-%
-%\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-%
-%\section{Introduction}
-%
-% This \LaTeX\ package implements the macro
-% \DescribeMacro{\athnum}
-% |\athnum|. The macro transforms an Arabic numeral, i.e., the kind
-% of numerals we all use (e.g., 1, 5, 789 etc), to the corresponding
-% {\itshape Athenian} numeral. Athenian numerals were in use only in
-% ancient Athens. The package can be used only in conjunction with the
-% |greek| option of the |babel| package.
-%
-%\section{The Numbering System}
-%
-% The athenian numbering system, like the roman one, employs
-% letters to denote important numbers. Multiple occurrence of a letter denote
-% a multiple of the ``important'' number, e.g., the letter I denotes 1, so
-% III denotes 3. Here are the basic digits used in the Athenian numbering
-% system:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item I denotes the number one (1)
-% \item $\Pi$ denotes the number five (5)
-% \item $\Delta$ denotes the number ten (10)
-% \item H denotes the number one hundred (100)
-% \item X denotes the number one thousand (1000)
-% \item M denotes the number ten thousands (10000)
-%\end{itemize}
-% Moreover, the letters $\Delta$, H, X, and M under the letter $\Pi$,
-% denote five times their original value, e.g., the symbol
-% \PiIt{X}, denotes the number 5000, and the symbol
-% \PiIt{$\Delta$}, denotes the number 50. It must be noted that
-% the numbering system does not provide negative numerals or a symbol for
-% zero.
-%
-% The Athenian numbering system is described, among others, in an article in
-% Encyclopedia $\Delta o\mu\acute{\eta}$, Vol. 2, page 280, 7th edition,
-% Athens, October 2, 1975.
-%
-% \section{The Code}
-% Before we do anything further, we have to identify the package.
-% \StopEventually
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*package>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/01/01]
-\ProvidesPackage{athnum}[2003/08/24\space v1.1]
-\typeout{Package: `athnum' v1.1\space <2003/08/24> (A. Syropoulos)}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Next we check to see if the |babel| package is loaded with at least
-% the |greek| option. In case it isn't, we opt to produce an error message.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{%
- \PackageError{athnum}{%
- `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak
- package hasn't been loaded}{%
- The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak
- are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak
- typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak
- it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax
- }}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% As it is mentioned in the introduction, the Athenian numerals employ
-% some special digits. These digits are included in the |cb| fonts of
-% Claudio Beccari, and so we must provide access commands.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiDelta}{LGR}{\char"02\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiEta}{LGR}{\char"03\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiChi}{LGR}{\char"04\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiMu}{LGR}{\char"05\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%\begin{macro}{\@@athnum}
-% Now, we turn our attention to the definition of the macro
-% |\@@athnum|. This macro uses one integer variable (or counter in
-% \TeX's jargon.)
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\@ath@num
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The macro |\@@athnum| is also defined as a robust command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\@@athnum}[1]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% After assigning to variable |\@ath@num| the value of the macro's argument,
-%we make sure that the argument is in the expected range, i.e., it is greater
-% than zero, and less or equal to $249999$. In case it isn't, we simply
-% produce a |\space|, warn the user about it and quit. Although, the
-% |\athnum| macro is capable to produce an Athenian numeral for even greater
-% intergers, the following argument by Claudio Beccari convised me to place
-% this above upper limit:
-% \begin{quote}
-% According to psychological perception studies (that ancient Athenians
-% and Romans perfectly knew without needing to study Freud and Jung)
-% living beings (which includes at least all vertebrates, not only
-% humans) can perceive up to four randomly set objects of the same kind
-% without the need of counting, the latter activity being a specific
-% acquired ability of human kind; the biquinary numbering notation
-% used by the Athenians and the Romans exploits this natural
-% characteristic of human beings.
-% \end{quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ath@num#1\relax
- \ifnum\@ath@num<\@ne%
- \space%
- \PackageWarning{athnum}{%
- Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}%
- \else\ifnum\@ath@num>249999%
- \space%
- \PackageWarning{athnum}{%
- Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Having done all the necessary checks, we are now ready to do the actual
-% computation. If the number is greater than $49999$, then it certainly
-% has at least one \PiIt{M} ``digit''. We find all such digits by continuously
-% subtracting $50000$ from |\@ath@num|, until |\@ath@num| becomes less than
-% $50000$.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>49999\do{%
- \PiMu\advance\@ath@num-50000}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We now check for tens of thousands.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>9999\do{%
- M\advance\@ath@num-\@M}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Since a number can have only one \PiIt{X} ``digit'' (equivalent to 5000), it
-% is easy to check it out and produce the corresponding numeral in case it does
-% have one.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\@ath@num>4999%
- \PiChi\advance\@ath@num-5000%
- \fi\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Next, we check for thousands, the same way we checked for tens of thousands.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>999\do{%
- Q\advance\@ath@num-\@m}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Like the five thousands, a numeral can have at most one \PiIt{H} ``digit''
-% (equivalent to 500).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\@ath@num>499%
- \PiEta\advance\@ath@num-500%
- \fi\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% It is time to check hundreds, which follow the same pattern as thousands
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>99\do{%
- H\advance\@ath@num-100}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% A numeral can have only one \PiIt{$\Delta$} ``digit'' (equivalent to 50).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\@ath@num>49%
- \PiDelta\advance\@ath@num-50%
- \fi\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Let's check now decades.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>9\do{%
- D\advance\@ath@num by-10}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We check for five and, finally, for the digits 1, 2, 3, and 4.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>4\do{%
- P\advance\@ath@num-5}%
- \ifcase\@ath@num\or I\or II\or III\or IIII\fi%
- \fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-%\begin{macro}{\@athnum}
-% The command |\@athnum| has one argument, which
-% is a counter. It calls the command |\@@athnum| to process the value of
-% the counter.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@athnum#1{%
- \expandafter\@@athnum\expandafter{\the#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%\begin{macro}{\athnum}
-% The command |\athnum| is a wrapper that declares
-% a new counter in a local scope, assigns to it the argument of the command
-% and calls the macro |\@athnum|. This way the command can process correctly
-% either a number or a counter.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\athnum#1{%
- \@ath@num#1\relax
- \@athnum{\@ath@num}}
-%</package>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%\end{macro}
-%
-% \section*{Acknowledgment}
-% I would like to thank Claudio Beccari for reading the documentation
-% and for his very helpful suggestions. In addition, Antonis Tsolomitis
-% spotted a bug in the first version, which is corrected in the present
-% version.
-% \section*{Dedication}
-% I would like to dedicate this piece of work to my son
-% \begin{center}Demetrios-Georgios.\end{center}
-% \Finale
-%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 1abb084a20b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,5900 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{3882}
-%%
-% \def\filename{babel.dtx}
-% \let\thisfilename\filename
-%
-%\iffalse
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/10}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from
-% December 1994}
-% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/18}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from
-% June 1998}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<+package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%% File 'babel.dtx'
-%\fi
-%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package]
-%\iffalse
-%
-% Babel DOCUMENT-STYLE option for LaTeX version 2.09 or plain TeX;
-%% Babel package for LaTeX2e.
-%
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% all rights reserved.
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\usepackage{supertabular}
-\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
-\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\Babel{\textsf{Babel}}
-\newcommand*\m[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{\m{lang}}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\bsl{\protect\bslash}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\Lenv[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*\cls[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{babel.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/16}{Make multiple loading of
-% \file{babel.def} impossible}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core>
-\ifx\bbl@afterfi\@undefined
-\else
- \bbl@afterfi\endinput
-\fi
-%</core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%\fi
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{babel.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{babel~2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added text about \file{german.sty}}
-% \changes{babel~2.0b}{1990/04/18}{Changed order of code to prevent
-% plain \TeX from seeing all of it}
-% \changes{babel~2.1}{1990/04/24}{Modified user interface,
-% \cs{langTeX} no longer necessary}
-% \changes{babel~2.1a}{1990/05/01}{Incorporated Nico's comments}
-% \changes{babel~2.1b}{1990/05/01}{rename \cs{language} to
-% \cs{current@language}}
-% \changes{babel~2.1c}{1990/05/22}{abstract for report fixed, missing
-% \texttt{\}}, found by Nicolas Brouard}
-% \changes{babel~2.1d}{1990/07/04}{Missing right brace in definition of
-% abstract environment, found by Werenfried Spit}
-% \changes{babel~2.1e}{1990/07/16}{Incorporated more comments from
-% Nico}
-% \changes{babel~2.2}{1990/07/17}{Renamed \cs{newlanguage} to
-% \cs{addlanguage}}
-% \changes{babel~2.2a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation
-% somewhat}
-% \changes{babel~3.0}{1991/04/23}{Moved part of the code to hyphen.doc
-% in preparation for \TeX~3.0}
-% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/21}{Updated comments in various places}
-% \changes{babel~3.0b}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change log}
-% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} and
-% \file{latexhax.sty} to \file{.com}}
-% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{Added the support for active
-% characters and for extending a macro}
-% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed the need for
-% \file{latexhax}}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Some Changes by br}
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1992/02/15}{Fixups of the code and
-% documentation}
-% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/06}{Included driver file, and prepared
-% for distribution}
-% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/01/30}{Updated for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/28}{Added language definition file for
-% bahasa}
-% \changes{babel~3.4b}{1994/05/18}{Added a small driver to be able to
-% process just this file}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/03}{Provided common code to handle the
-% active double quote}
-% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{corrected a few typos (PR1652)}
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Merged glyphs.dtx into this file}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/13}{repaired a typo}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{replaced \cs{tmp}, \cs{bbl@tmp} and
-% \cs{bbl@temp} with \cs{bbl@tempa}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} to be consistent with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{babel~3.7d}{1999/05/05}{Fixed a few typos in \cs{changes}
-% entries which made typesetting the code impossible}
-% \changes{babel~3.7h}{2001/03/01}{Added a number of missing comment
-% characters which caused spurious white space}
-% \changes{babel~3.8e}{2005/03/24}{Many enhancements to the text by
-% Andrew Young}
-%
-% \title {Babel, a multilingual package for use with \LaTeX's standard
-% document classes\thanks{During the development ideas from Nico
-% Poppelier, Piet van Oostrum and many others have been used.
-% Bernd Raichle has provided many helpful suggestions.}}
-%
-% \author{Johannes Braams\\
-% Kersengaarde 33\\
-% 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\
-% The Netherlands\\
-% \texttt{babel\char64 braams.xs4all.nl}}
-%
-% \date{Printed \today}
-%
-% \maketitle
-%
-% \begin{abstract}
-% The standard distribution of \LaTeX\ contains a number of
-% document classes that are meant to be used, but also serve as
-% examples for other users to create their own document classes.
-% These document classes have become very popular among \LaTeX\
-% users. But it should be kept in mind that they were designed for
-% American tastes and typography. At one time they contained a
-% number of hard-wired texts. This report describes \babel{}, a
-% package that makes use of the new capabilities of \TeX\ version 3
-% to provide an environment in which documents can be typeset in
-% a language other than US English, or in more than one language.
-% \end{abstract}
-%
-% \tableofcontents
-%
-% \section{The user interface}\label{U-I}
-%
-% The user interface of this package is quite simple. It consists
-% of a set of commands that switch from one language to another, and
-% a set of commands that deal with shorthands. It is also possible
-% to find out what the current language is.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\selectlanguage}
-% When a user wants to switch from one language to another he can
-% do so using the macro |\selectlanguage|. This macro takes the
-% language, defined previously by a language definition file, as
-% its argument. It calls several macros that should be defined in
-% the language definition files to activate the special definitions
-% for the language chosen.
-%
-% \DescribeEnv{otherlanguage}
-% The environment \Lenv{otherlanguage} does basically the same as
-% |\selectlanguage|, except the language change is local to the
-% environment. This environment is required for intermixing
-% left-to-right typesetting with right-to-left typesetting.
-% The language to switch to is specified as an
-% argument to |\begin{otherlanguage}|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\foreignlanguage}
-% The command |\foreignlanguage| takes two arguments; the second
-% argument is a phrase to be typeset according to the rules of the
-% language named in its first argument. This command only switches
-% the extra definitions and the hyphenation rules for the language,
-% \emph{not} the names and dates.
-%
-% \DescribeEnv{otherlanguage*}
-% In the environment \Lenv{otherlanguage*} only the typesetting
-% is done according to the rules of the other language, but the
-% text-strings such as `figure', `table', etc. are left as they
-% were set outside this environment.
-%
-% \DescribeEnv{hyphenrules}
-% The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select
-% \emph{only} the hyphenation rules to be used. This can for
-% instance be used to select `nohyphenation', provided that in
-% \file{language.dat} the `language' nohyphenation is defined by
-% loading \file{serohyph.tex}.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\languagename}
-% The control sequence |\languagename| contains the name of the
-% current language.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\iflanguage}
-% If more than one language is used, it might be necessary to know
-% which language is active at a specific time. This can be checked
-% by a call to |\iflanguage|. This macro takes three arguments.
-% The first argument is the name of a language; the second and
-% third arguments are the actions to take if the result of the test
-% is \texttt{true} or \texttt{false} respectively.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\useshorthands}
-% The command |\useshorthands| initiates the definition of
-% user-defined shorthand sequences. It has one argument, the
-% character that starts these personal shorthands.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\defineshorthand}
-% The command |\defineshorthand| takes two arguments: the first
-% is a one- or two-character shorthand sequence, and the second is
-% the code the shorthand should expand to.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\aliasshorthand}
-% The command |\aliasshorthand| can be used to let another
-% character perform the same functions as the default shorthand
-% character. If one prefers for example to use the character |/|
-% over |"| in typing polish texts, this can be achieved by entering
-% |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|. \emph{Please note} that the substitute
-% shorthand character must have been declared in the preamble of
-% your document, using a command such as |\useshorthands{/}| in this
-% example.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\languageshorthands}
-% The command |\languageshorthands| can be used to switch the
-% shorthands on the language level. It takes one argument, the
-% name of a language. Note that for this to work the language
-% should have been specified as an option when loading the \babel\
-% package.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\shorthandon}
-% \DescribeMacro{\shorthandoff}
-% It is sometimes necessary to switch a shorthand
-% character off temporarily, because it must be used in an
-% entirely different way. For this purpose, the user commands
-% |\shorthandoff| and |\shorthandon| are provided. They each take a
-% list of characters as their arguments. The command |\shorthandoff|
-% sets the |\catcode| for each of the characters in its argument to
-% other (12); the command |\shorthandon| sets the |\catcode| to
-% active (13). Both commands only work on `known'
-% shorthand characters. If a character is not known to be a
-% shorthand character its category code will be left unchanged.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\languageattribute}
-% This is a user-level command, to be used in the preamble of a
-% document (after |\usepackage[...]{babel}|), that declares which
-% attributes are to be used for a given language. It takes two
-% arguments: the first is the name of the language; the second,
-% a (list of) attribute(s) to used.
-% The command checks whether the language is known in this document
-% and whether the attribute(s) are known for this language.
-%
-% \subsection{Languages supported by \Babel}
-%
-% In the following table all the languages supported by \Babel\ are
-% listed, together with the names of the options with which you can
-% load \babel\ for each language.
-%
-% \begin{center}
-% \tablehead{Language & Option(s)\\\hline}
-% \tabletail{\hline}
-% \begin{supertabular}{l p{8cm}}
-% Afrikaans & afrikaans\\
-% Bahasa & bahasa, indonesian, indon, bahasai,
-% bahasam, malay, meyalu\\
-% Basque & basque\\
-% Breton & breton\\
-% Bulgarian & bulgarian\\
-% Catalan & catalan\\
-% Croatian & croatian\\
-% Czech & czech\\
-% Danish & danish\\
-% Dutch & dutch\\
-% English & english, USenglish, american, UKenglish,
-% british, canadian, australian, newzealand\\
-% Esperanto & esperanto\\
-% Estonian & estonian\\
-% Finnish & finnish\\
-% French & french, francais, canadien, acadian\\
-% Galician & galician\\
-% German & austrian, german, germanb, ngerman, naustrian\\
-% Greek & greek, polutonikogreek \\
-% Hebrew & hebrew \\
-% Hungarian & magyar, hungarian\\
-% Icelandic & icelandic \\
-% Interlingua & interlingua \\
-% Irish Gaelic & irish\\
-% Italian & italian\\
-%^^A Kannada & kannada \\
-% Latin & latin \\
-% Lower Sorbian & lowersorbian\\
-%^^A Devnagari & nagari \\
-% North Sami & samin \\
-% Norwegian & norsk, nynorsk\\
-% Polish & polish\\
-% Portuguese & portuges, portuguese, brazilian, brazil\\
-% Romanian & romanian\\
-% Russian & russian\\
-%^^A Sanskrit & sanskrit\\
-% Scottish Gaelic & scottish\\
-% Spanish & spanish\\
-% Slovakian & slovak\\
-% Slovenian & slovene\\
-% Swedish & swedish\\
-% Serbian & serbian\\
-%^^A Tamil & tamil \\
-% Turkish & turkish\\
-% Ukrainian & ukrainian\\
-% Upper Sorbian & uppersorbian\\
-% Welsh & welsh\\
-% \end{supertabular}
-% \end{center}
-%
-% For some languages \babel\ supports the options
-% \Lopt{activeacute} and \Lopt{activegrave}; for typestting Russian
-% texts, \babel\ knows about the options \Lopt{LWN} and \Lopt{LCY}
-% to specify the fontencoding of the cyrillic font used. Currently
-% only \Lopt{LWN} is supported.
-%
-% \subsection{Workarounds}
-%
-% If you use the document class \cls{book} \emph{and} you use
-% |\ref| inside the argument of |\chapter|,
-% \LaTeX\ will keep complaining about an undefined
-% label. The reason is that the argument of |\ref| is passed through
-% |\uppercase| at some time during processing. To prevent such
-% problems, you could revert to using uppercase labels, or you can
-% use |\lowercase{\ref{foo}}| inside the argument of |\chapter|.
-%
-% \section{Changes for \LaTeXe}
-%
-% With the advent of \LaTeXe\ the interface to \babel\ in the
-% preamble of the document has changed. With \LaTeX2.09 one used to
-% call up the \babel\ system with a line such as:
-%
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\documentstyle[dutch,english]{article}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% which would tell \LaTeX\ that the document would be written in
-% two languages, Dutch and English, and that English would be the
-% first language in use.
-%
-% The \LaTeXe\ way of providing the same information is:
-%
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\documentclass{article}
-%\usepackage[dutch,english]{babel}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% or, making \Lopt{dutch} and \Lopt{english} global options in
-% order to let other packages detect and use them:
-%
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\documentclass[dutch,english]{article}
-%\usepackage{babel}
-%\usepackage{varioref}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% In this last example, the package \texttt{varioref} will also see
-% the options and will be able to use them.
-%
-% \section{Changes in \Babel\ version 3.7}
-%
-% In \Babel\ version 3.7 a number of bugs that were found in
-% version~3.6 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions
-% have occurred:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Shorthands are expandable again. The disadvantage is that
-% one has to type |'{}a| when the acute accent is used as a
-% shorthand character. The advantage is that a number of other
-% problems (such as the breaking of ligatures, etc.) have
-% vanished.
-% \item Two new commands, |\shorthandon| and |\shorthandoff| have
-% been introduced to enable to temporarily switch off one or more
-% shorthands.
-%^^A \item Support for typesetting Sanskrit in transliteration is now
-%^^A available, thanks to Jun Takashima.
-%^^A \item Support for typesetting Kannada, Devnagari and Tamil is now
-%^^A available thanks to Jun Takashima.
-% \item Support for typesetting Greek has been enhanced. Code from
-% the \pkg{kdgreek} package (suggested by the author) was added
-% and |\greeknumeral| has been added.
-% \item Support for typesetting Basque is now available thanks to
-% Juan Aguirregabiria.
-% \item Support for typesetting Serbian with Latin script is now
-% available thanks to Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c} and Jankovic
-% Slobodan.
-% \item Support for typesetting Hebrew (and potential support for
-% typesetting other right-to-left written languages) is now
-% available thanks to Rama Porrat and Boris Lavva.
-% \item Support for typesetting Bulgarian is now available thanks to
-% Georgi Boshnakov.
-% \item Support for typesetting Latin is now available, thanks to
-% Claudio Beccari and Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski.
-% \item Support for typesetting North Sami is now available, thanks
-% to Regnor Jernsletten.
-% \item The options \Lopt{canadian}, \Lopt{canadien} and
-% \Lopt{acadien} have been added for Canadian English and French
-% use.
-% \item A language attribute has been added to the |\mark...|
-% commands in order to make sure that a Greek header line comes
-% out right on the last page before a language switch.
-% \item Hyphenation pattern files are now read \emph{inside a
-% group}; therefore any changes a pattern file needs to make to
-% lowercase codes, uppercase codes, and category codes are kept
-% local to that group. If they are needed for the language, these
-% changes will need to be repeated and stored in |\extras...|
-% \item The concept of language attributes is introduced. It is
-% intended to give the user some control over the
-% features a language-definition file provides. Its
-% first use is for the Greek language, where the user can choose
-% the $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$
-% (``Polutoniko'' or multi-accented) Greek way of typesetting
-% texts. These attributes will possibly find wider use in future
-% releases.
-% \item The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} is introduced.
-% \item The syntax of the file \file{language.dat} has been
-% extended to allow (optionally) specifying the font
-% encoding to be used while processing the patterns file.
-% \item The command |\providehyphenmins| should now be used in
-% language definition files in order to be able to keep any
-% settings provided by the pattern file.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \section{Changes in \Babel\ version 3.6}
-%
-% In \Babel\ version 3.6 a number of bugs that were found in
-% version~3.5 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions
-% have occurred:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item A new environment \Lenv{otherlanguage*} is introduced. it
-% only switches the `specials', but leaves the `captions'
-% untouched.
-% \item The shorthands are no longer fully expandable. Some
-% problems could only be solved by peeking at the token following
-% an active character. The advantage is that |'{}a| works as
-% expected for languages that have the |'| active.
-% \item Support for typesetting french texts is much enhanced; the
-% file \file{francais.ldf} is now replaced by \file{frenchb.ldf}
-% which is maintained by Daniel Flipo.
-% \item Support for typesetting the russian language is again
-% available. The language definition file was originally
-% developed by Olga Lapko from CyrTUG. The fonts needed to
-% typeset the russian language are now part of the \babel\
-% distribution. The support is not yet up to the level which is
-% needed according to Olga, but this is a start.
-% \item Support for typesetting greek texts is now also
-% available. What is offered in this release is a first attempt;
-% it will be enhanced later on by Yannis Haralambous.
-% \item in \babel\ 3.6j some hooks have been added for the
-% development of support for Hebrew typesetting.
-% \item Support for typesetting texts in Afrikaans (a variant of
-% Dutch, spoken in South Africa) has been added to
-% \file{dutch.ldf}.
-% \item Support for typesetting Welsh texts is now available.
-% \item A new command |\aliasshorthand| is introduced. It seems
-% that in Poland various conventions are used to type the
-% necessary Polish letters. It is now possible to use the
-% character~|/| as a shorthand character instead of the
-% character~|"|, by issuing the command |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|.
-% \item The shorthand mechanism now deals correctly with characters
-% that are already active.
-% \item Shorthand characters are made active at |\begin{document}|,
-% not earlier. This is to prevent problems with other packages.
-% \item A \emph{preambleonly} command |\substitutefontfamily| has
-% been added to create \file{.fd} files on the fly when the font
-% families of the Latin text differ from the families used for
-% the Cyrillic or Greek parts of the text.
-% \item Three new commands |\LdfInit|, |\ldf@quit| and
-% |\ldf@finish| are introduced that perform a number of standard
-% tasks.
-% \item In babel 3.6k the language Ukrainian has been added and the
-% support for Russian typesetting has been adapted to the package
-% 'cyrillic' to be released with the December 1998 release of
-% \LaTeXe.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \section{Changes in \Babel\ version 3.5}
-%
-% In \Babel\ version 3.5 a lot of changes have been made when
-% compared with the previous release. Here is a list of the most
-% important ones:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item the selection of the language is delayed until
-% |\begin{document}|, which means you must
-% add appropriate |\selectlanguage| commands if you include
-% |\hyphenation| lists in the preamble of your document.
-% \item \babel\ now has a \Lenv{language} environment and a new
-% command |\foreignlanguage|;
-% \item the way active characters are dealt with is completely
-% changed. They are called `shorthands'; one can have three
-% levels of shorthands: on the user level, the language level, and
-% on `system level'. A consequence of the new way of handling
-% active characters is that they are now written to auxiliary
-% files `verbatim';
-% \item A language change now also writes information in the
-% \file{.aux} file, as the change might also affect typesetting
-% the table of contents. The consequence is that an .aux file
-% generated by a LaTeX format with babel preloaded gives errors
-% when read with a LaTeX format without babel; but I think this
-% probably doesn't occur;
-% \item \babel\ is now compatible with the \pkg{inputenc} and
-% \pkg{fontenc} packages;
-% \item the language definition files now have a new extension,
-% \file{ldf};
-% \item the syntax of the file \file{language.dat} is extended to
-% be compatible with the \pkg{french} package by Bernard Gaulle;
-% \item each language definition file looks for a configuration
-% file which has the same name, but the extension \file{.cfg}. It
-% can contain any valid \LaTeX\ code.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \section{The interface between the core of \babel{} and the language
-% definition files}
-%
-% In the core of the \babel{} system, several macros are defined
-% for use in language definition files. Their purpose
-% is to make a new language known.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\addlanguage}
-% The macro |\addlanguage| is a non-outer version of the macro
-% |\newlanguage|, defined in \file{plain.tex} version~3.x. For
-% older versions of \file{plain.tex} and \file{lplain.tex} a
-% substitute definition is used.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\adddialect}
-% The macro |\adddialect| can be used when two
-% languages can (or must) use the same hyphenation
-% patterns. This can also be useful for
-% languages for which no patterns are preloaded in the format. In
-% such cases the default behaviour of the \babel{} system is to
-% define this language as a `dialect' of the language for which the
-% patterns were loaded as |\language0|.
-%
-% The language definition files must conform to a number of
-% conventions, because these files have to fill
-% in the gaps left by the common code in \file{babel.def}, i.\,e.,
-% the definitions of the macros that produce texts. Also the
-% language-switching possibility which has been built into the
-% \babel{} system has its implications.
-%
-% The following assumptions are made:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Some of the language-specific definitions might be used by
-% plain \TeX\ users, so the files have to be coded so that they
-% can be read by both \LaTeX\ and plain \TeX. The current
-% format can be checked by looking at the value of the macro
-% |\fmtname|.
-%
-% \item The common part of the \babel{} system redefines a number
-% of macros and environments (defined previously in the document
-% style) to put in the names of macros that replace the previously
-% hard-wired texts. These macros have to be defined in the
-% language definition files.
-%
-% \item The language definition files define five macros, used to
-% activate and deactivate the language-specific definitions. These
-% macros are |\|\langvar|hyphenmins|, |\captions|\langvar,
-% |\date|\langvar, |\extras|\langvar\ and |\noextras|\langvar; where
-% \langvar\ is either the name of the language definition file or
-% the name of the \LaTeX\ option that is to be used. These
-% macros and their functions are discussed below.
-%
-% \item When a language definition file is loaded, it can define
-% |\l@|\langvar\ to be a dialect of |\language0| when
-% |\l@|\langvar\ is undefined.
-%
-% \item The language definition files can be read in the preamble of
-% the document, but also in the middle of document processing. This
-% means that they have to function independently of the current
-% |\catcode| of the \texttt{@}~sign.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\providehyphenmins}
-% The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language
-% definition files to set the |\lefthyphenmin| and
-% |\righthyphenmin|. This macro will check whether these parameters
-% were provided by the hyphenation file before it takes any action.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\langhyphenmins}
-% The macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is used to store the values of
-% the |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\captionslang}
-% The macro |\captions|\langvar\ defines the macros that
-% hold the texts to replace the original hard-wired texts.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\datelang}
-% The macro |\date|\langvar\ defines |\today| and
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\extraslang}
-% The macro |\extras|\langvar\ contains all the extra definitions
-% needed for a specific language.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\noextraslang}
-% Because we want to let the user switch
-% between languages, but we do not know what state \TeX\ might be in
-% after the execution of |\extras|\langvar, a macro that brings
-% \TeX\ into a predefined state is needed. It will be no surprise
-% that the name of this macro is |\noextras|\langvar.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@declare@ttribute}
-% This is a command to be used in the language definition files for
-% declaring a language attribute. It takes three arguments: the
-% name of the language, the attribute to be defined, and the code
-% to be executed when the attribute is to be used.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\main@language}
-% To postpone the activation of the definitions needed for a
-% language until the beginning of a document, all language
-% definition files should use |\main@language| instead of
-% |\selectlanguage|. This will just store the name of the language,
-% and the proper language will be activated at the start of the
-% document.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\ProvidesLanguage}
-% The macro |\ProvidesLanguage| should be used to identify the
-% language definition files. Its syntax is similar to the syntax
-% of the \LaTeX\ command |\ProvidesPackage|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\LdfInit}
-% The macro |\LdfInit| performs a couple of standard checks that
-% must be made at the beginning of a language definition file,
-% such as checking the category code of the @-sign, preventing
-% the \file{.ldf} file from being processed twice, etc.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\ldf@quit}
-% The macro |\ldf@quit| does work needed
-% if a \file{.ldf} file was processed
-% earlier. This includes resetting the category code
-% of the @-sign, preparing the language to be activated at
-% |\begin{document}| time, and ending the input stream.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\ldf@finish}
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| does work needed
-% at the end of each \file{.ldf} file. This
-% includes resetting the category code of the @-sign,
-% loading a local configuration file, and preparing the language
-% to be activated at |\begin{document}| time.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\loadlocalcfg}
-% After processing a language definition file,
-% \LaTeX\ can be instructed to load a local configuration
-% file. This file can, for instance, be used to add strings to
-% |\captions|\langvar\ to support local document
-% classes. The user will be informed that this
-% configuration file has been loaded. This macro is called by
-% |\ldf@finish|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\substitutefontfamily}
-% This command takes three arguments, a font encoding and two font
-% family names. It creates a font description file for the first
-% font in the given encoding. This \file{.fd} file will instruct
-% \LaTeX\ to use a font from the second family when a font from the
-% first family in the given encoding seems to be needed.
-%
-% \subsection{Support for active characters}
-%
-% In quite a number of language definition files, active characters
-% are introduced. To facilitate this, some support macros are
-% provided.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\initiate@active@char}
-% The internal macro |\initiate@active@char| is used in language
-% definition files to instruct \LaTeX\ to give a character the
-% category code `active'. When a character has been made active it
-% will remain that way until the end of the document. Its
-% definition may vary.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@activate}
-% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@deactivate}
-% The command |\bbl@activate| is used to change the way an active
-% character expands. |\bbl@activate| `switches on' the active
-% behaviour of the character. |\bbl@deactivate| lets the active
-% character expand to its former (mostly) non-active self.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\declare@shorthand}
-% The macro |\declare@shorthand| is used to define the various
-% shorthands. It takes three arguments: the name for the collection
-% of shorthands this definition belongs to; the character
-% (sequence) that makes up the shorthand, i.e.\ |~| or |"a|; and the
-% code to be executed when the shorthand is encountered.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@add@special}
-% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@remove@special}
-% The \TeX book states: ``Plain \TeX\ includes a macro called
-% |\dospecials| that is
-% essentially a set macro, representing the set of all characters
-% that have a special category code.'' \cite[p.~380]{DEK} It is
-% used to set text `verbatim'. To make this work if more
-% characters get a special category code, you have to add this
-% character to the macro |\dospecial|. \LaTeX\ adds another macro
-% called |\@sanitize| representing the same character set, but
-% without the curly braces. The macros
-% |\bbl@add@special|\meta{char} and
-% |\bbl@remove@special|\meta{char} add and remove the character
-% \meta{char} to these two sets.
-%
-% \subsection{Support for saving macro definitions}
-%
-% Language definition files may want to \emph{re}define macros that
-% already exist. Therefor a mechanism for saving (and restoring)
-% the original definition of those macros is provided. We provide
-% two macros for this\footnote{This mechanism was introduced by
-% Bernd Raichle.}.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\babel@save} To save the current meaning of any
-% control sequence, the macro |\babel@save| is provided. It takes
-% one argument, \meta{csname}, the control sequence for which the
-% meaning has to be saved.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\babel@savevariable} A second macro is provided to
-% save the current value of a variable. In this context, anything
-% that is allowed after the |\the| primitive is considered to be a
-% variable. The macro takes one argument, the \meta{variable}.
-%
-% The effect of the preceding macros is to append a piece of code
-% to the current definition of |\originalTeX|. When
-% |\originalTeX| is expanded, this code restores the previous
-% definition of the control sequence or the previous value of the
-% variable.
-%
-% \subsection{Support for extending macros}
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\addto}
-% The macro |\addto{|\meta{control sequence}|}{|\meta{\TeX\
-% code}|}| can be used to extend the definition of a macro. The
-% macro need not be defined. This macro can, for instance, be used
-% in adding instructions to a macro like |\extrasenglish|.
-%
-% \subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\allowhyphens}
-% In a couple of European languages compound words are used. This
-% means that when \TeX\ has to hyphenate such a compound word, it
-% only does so at the `\texttt{-}' that is used in such words. To
-% allow hyphenation in the rest of such a compound word, the macro
-% |\allowhyphens| can be used.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\set@low@box}
-% For some languages, quotes need to be lowered to the baseline. For
-% this purpose the macro |\set@low@box| is available. It takes one
-% argument and puts that argument in an |\hbox|, at the
-% baseline. The result is available in |\box0| for further
-% processing.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\save@sf@q}
-% Sometimes it is necessary to preserve the |\spacefactor|. For
-% this purpose the macro |\save@sf@q| is available. It takes one
-% argument, saves the current spacefactor, executes the argument,
-% and restores the spacefactor.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-% \DescribeMacro{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% The commands |\bbl@frenchspacing| and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| can
-% be used to properly switch French spacing on and off.
-%
-% \section{Compatibility with \file{german.sty}}\label{l-h}
-%
-% The file \file{german.sty} has been
-% one of the sources of inspiration for the \babel{}
-% system. Because of this I wanted to include \file{german.sty} in
-% the \babel{} system. To be able to do that I had to allow for
-% one incompatibility: in the definition of the macro
-% |\selectlanguage| in \file{german.sty} the argument is used as the
-% {$\langle \it number \rangle$} for an |\ifcase|. So in this case
-% a call to |\selectlanguage| might look like
-% |\selectlanguage{\german}|.
-%
-% In the definition of the macro |\selectlanguage| in
-% \file{babel.def} the argument is used as a part of other
-% macronames, so a call to |\selectlanguage| now looks like
-% |\selectlanguage{german}|. Notice the absence of the escape
-% character. As of version~3.1a of \babel{} both syntaxes are
-% allowed.
-%
-% All other features of the original \file{german.sty} have been
-% copied into a new file, called \file{germanb.sty}\footnote{The
-% `b' is added to the name to distinguish the file from Partls'
-% file.}.
-%
-% Although the \babel{} system was developed to be used with
-% \LaTeX, some of the features implemented in the language
-% definition files might be needed by plain \TeX\ users. Care has
-% been taken that all files in the system can be processed by plain
-% \TeX.
-%
-% \section{Compatibility with \file{ngerman.sty}}
-%
-% When used with the options \Lopt{ngerman} or \Lopt{naustrian},
-% \babel{} will provide all features of the package \pkg{ngerman}.
-% There is however one exception: The commands for special
-% hyphenation of double consonants (|"ff| etc.) and ck (|"ck|),
-% which are no longer required with the new German orthography, are
-% undefined. With the \pkg{ngerman} package, however, these
-% commands will generate appropriate warning messages only.
-%
-% \section{Compatibility with the \pkg{french} package}
-%
-% It has been reported to me that the package \pkg{french} by
-% Bernard Gaulle (\texttt{gaulle@idris.fr}) works
-% together with \babel. On the other hand, it seems \emph{not} to
-% work well together with a lot of other packages. Therefore I have
-% decided to no longer load \file{french.ldf} by default. Instead,
-% when you want to use the package by Bernard Gaulle, you will have
-% to request it specifically, by passing either \Lopt{frenchle} or
-% \Lopt{frenchpro} as an option to \babel.
-%
-%\StopEventually{%
-% \clearpage
-% \let\filename\thisfilename
-% \section{Conclusion}
-%
-% A system of document options has been presented that enable the
-% user of \LaTeX\ to adapt the standard document classes of \LaTeX\
-% to the language he or she prefers to use. These options offer the
-% possibility of switching between languages in one document. The
-% basic interface consists of using one option, which is the same
-% for \emph{all} standard document classes.
-%
-% In some cases the language definition files provide macros that
-% can be useful to plain \TeX\ users as well as to \LaTeX\ users.
-% The \babel{} system has been implemented so that it
-% can be used by both groups of users.
-%
-% \section{Acknowledgements}
-%
-% I would like to thank all who volunteered as $\beta$-testers for
-% their time. I would like to mention Julio Sanchez who supplied
-% the option file for the Spanish language and Maurizio Codogno who
-% supplied the option file for the Italian language. Michel Goossens
-% supplied contributions for most of the other languages. Nico
-% Poppelier helped polish the text of the documentation and
-% supplied parts of the macros for the Dutch language. Paul
-% Wackers and Werenfried Spit helped find and repair bugs.
-%
-% During the further development of the babel system I received
-% much help from Bernd Raichle, for which I am grateful.
-%
-% \begin{thebibliography}{9}
-% \bibitem{DEK} Donald E. Knuth,
-% \emph{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley, 1986.
-% \bibitem{LLbook} Leslie Lamport,
-% \emph{\LaTeX, A document preparation System}, Addison-Wesley,
-% 1986.
-% \bibitem{treebus} K.F. Treebus.
-% \emph{Tekstwijzer, een gids voor het grafisch verwerken van
-% tekst.}
-% SDU Uitgeverij ('s-Gravenhage, 1988). A Dutch book on layout
-% design and typography.
-% \bibitem{HP} Hubert Partl,
-% \emph{German \TeX}, \emph{TUGboat} 9 (1988) \#1, p.~70--72.
-% \bibitem{LLth} Leslie Lamport,
-% in: \TeXhax\ Digest, Volume 89, \#13, 17 February 1989.
-% \bibitem{BEP} Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout and Nico Poppelier,
-% \emph{The development of national \LaTeX\ styles},
-% \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#3, p.~401--406.
-% \bibitem{ilatex} Joachim Schrod,
-% \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use},
-% \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90.
-% \end{thebibliography}
-% }
-%
-% \section{Identification}
-%
-% The file \file{babel.sty}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section is called \texttt{\filename}, has version
-% number~\fileversion\ and was last revised on~\filedate.} is meant
-% for \LaTeXe, therefor we make sure that the format file used is
-% the right one.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesLanguage}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/18}{Added macro to prevent problems
-% with unexpected \cs{ProvidesFile} in plain formats because of
-% \babel.}
-% The identification code for each file is something that was
-% introduced in \LaTeXe. When the command |\ProvidesFile| does not
-% exist, a dummy definition is provided temporarily. For use in the
-% language definition file the command |\ProvidesLanguage| is
-% defined by \babel.
-% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Redid the identification code,
-% provided dummy definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for plain \TeX}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/26}{Store version in \cs{fileversion}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/18}{Need to temporarily change the
-% definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for December 1995 release}
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Save a few csnames; use
-% \cs{bbl@tempa} instead of \cs{\@ProvidesFile} and store message
-% in \cs{toks8}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!package>
-\ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined
- \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
- \wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}%
-%<*kernel&patterns>
- \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }%
-%</kernel&patterns>
- \let\ProvidesFile\@undefined
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% As an alternative for |\ProvidesFile| we define
-% |\ProvidesLanguage| here to be used in the language definition
-% files.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*kernel>
- \def\ProvidesLanguage#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
- \wlog{Language: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}%
- }
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In this case we save the original definition of |\ProvidesFile| in
-% |\bbl@tempa| and restore it after we have stored the version of
-% the file in |\toks8|.
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/11/04}{Removed superfluous braces}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*kernel&patterns>
- \let\bbl@tempa\ProvidesFile
- \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
- \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }%
- \bbl@tempa#1[#2 #3 #4]%
- \let\ProvidesFile\bbl@tempa}
-%</kernel&patterns>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When |\ProvidesFile| is defined we give |\ProvidesLanguage| a
-% similar definition.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\ProvidesLanguage#1{%
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\ 10 %
- \@makeother\/%
- \@ifnextchar[%]
- {\@provideslanguage{#1}}{\@provideslanguage{#1}[]}}
- \def\@provideslanguage#1[#2]{%
- \wlog{Language: #1 #2}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.ldf\endcsname{#2}%
- \endgroup}
-%</kernel>
-\fi
-%</!package>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Identify each file that is produced from this source file.
-% \changes{babel~3.4c}{1995/04/28}{lhyphen.cfg has become
-% lthyphen.cfg}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/01/25}{lthyphen.cfg has become hyphen.cfg}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<+package>\ProvidesPackage{babel}
-%<+core>\ProvidesFile{babel.def}
-%<+kernel&patterns>\ProvidesFile{hyphen.cfg}
-%<+kernel&!patterns>\ProvidesFile{switch.def}
-%<+driver&!user>\ProvidesFile{babel.drv}
-%<+driver&user>\ProvidesFile{user.drv}
- [2008/07/08 v3.8m %
-%<+package> The Babel package]
-%<+core> Babel common definitions]
-%<+kernel> Babel language switching mechanism]
-%<+driver>]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The Package File}
-%
-% In order to make use of the features of \LaTeXe, the \babel\
-% system contains a package file, \file{babel.sty}. This file
-% is loaded by the |\usepackage| command and defines all the
-% language options known in the \babel\ system. It also takes care
-% of a number of compatibility issues with other packages.
-%
-% \subsection{Language options}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \cs{LdfInit} is undefined we
-% need to load \file{babel.def} from \file{babel.sty}}
-% \changes{babel~3.6l}{1999/04/03}{Don't load \file{babel.def} now,
-% but rather define \cs{LdfInit} temporarily in order to load
-% \file{babel.def} at the right time, preventing problems with the
-% temporary definition of \cs{bbl@redefine}}
-% \changes{babel~3.6r}{1999/04/12}{We \textbf{do} need to load
-% \file{babel.def} right now as \cs{ProvidesLanguage} needs to be
-% defined before the \file{.ldf} files are read and the reason for
-% for 3.6l has been removed}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*package>
-\ifx\LdfInit\@undefined\input babel.def\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For all the languages supported we need to declare an option.
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/14}{Changed extension of language
-% definition files to \texttt{ldf}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load language definition files
-% \emph{after} the check for the hyphenation patterns}
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/04}{Added option \Lopt{afrikaans}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{acadian}}
-% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added option \Lopt{australian}}
-% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{Added option \Lopt{albanian}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{acadian}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{albanian}{\input{albanian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\input{dutch.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{american}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{australian}{\input{english.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Austrian is really a dialect of German.
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Added the \Lopt{Basque} option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{austrian}{\input{germanb.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added synonyms \Lopt{indonesian},
-% \Lopt{indon} and \Lopt{bahasai} for the original bahasa
-% (indonesia) support}
-% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added \Lopt{malay}, \Lopt{meyaluy}
-% and \Lopt{bahasam} for the Bahasa Malaysia support}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{indon}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{malay}{\input{bahasam.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\input{bahasam.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\input{bahasam.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{basque}{\input{basque.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{brazil}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/25}{Added \Lopt{brazilian} as
-% alternative for \Lopt{brazil}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{breton}{\input{breton.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Added \Lopt{british} as an
-% alternative for \Lopt{english} with a preference for british
-% hyphenation}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/21}{Added the \Lopt{bulgarian} option}
-% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/07}{Added option \Lopt{canadian}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{canadien}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{british}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{bulgarian}{\input{bulgarian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{canadian}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{canadien}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{catalan}{\input{catalan.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{croatian}{\input{croatian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{czech}{\input{czech.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{danish}{\input{danish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{dutch}{\input{dutch.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/06}{Added the \Lopt{estonian} option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{english}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{esperanto}{\input{esperanto.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{estonian}{\input{estonian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{finnish}{\input{finnish.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The \babel\ support or French used to be stored in
-% \file{francais.ldf}; therefor the \LaTeX2.09 option used to be
-% \Lopt{francais}. The hyphenation patterns may be loaded as either
-% `french' or as `francais'.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/10}{Now use the file \file{frenchb.ldf}
-% from Daniel Flipo for french support}
-% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added option \Lopt{frenchb} an
-% alias for \Lopt{francais}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{francais}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{frenchb}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% With \LaTeXe\ we can now also use the option \Lopt{french} and
-% still call the file \file{frenchb.ldf}.
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load \file{french.ldf} when it is
-% found instead of \file{frenchb.ldf}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/07}{\emph{only} load
-% \file{frenchb.ldf}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{french}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}%
-\DeclareOption{galician}{\input{galician.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{german}{\input{germanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{germanb}{\input{germanb.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/31}{Added the \Lopt{greek} option}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{polutonikogreek}
-% option}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{set the correct language attribute
-% for polutoniko greek}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{greek}{\input{greek.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{%
- \input{greek.ldf}%
- \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Added the \Lopt{hebrew} option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{hebrew}{%
- \input{rlbabel.def}%
- \input{hebrew.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \Lopt{hungarian} is just a synonym for \Lopt{magyar}
-%^^A \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/21}{Added the \Lopt{kannada} option}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/05/21}{Added the \Lopt{icelandic} option}
-%^^A \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/30}{{Added the \Lopt{nagari} option}
-% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/25}{Added the \Lopt{latin} option}
-% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{interlingua}
-% option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\input{magyar.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{icelandic}{\input{icelandic.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{interlingua}{\input{interlingua.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{irish}{\input{irish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{italian}{\input{italian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{latin}{\input{latin.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\input{lsorbian.ldf}}
-%^^A\DeclareOption{kannada}{\input{kannada.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{magyar}{\input{magyar.ldf}}
-%^^A\DeclareOption{nagari}{\input{nagari.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% `New' German orthography, including Austrian variant:
-% \changes{babel~3.6p}{1999/04/10}{Added the \Lopt{ngerman} and
-% \Lopt{naustrian} options}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/26}{Added the \Lopt{samin} option}
-% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added the \Lopt{newzealand} option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{norsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{samin}{\input{samin.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For Norwegian two spelling variants are provided.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{polish}{\input{polish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{portuges}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{romanian}{\input{romanian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{russian}{\input{russianb.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%^^A \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/02/07}{Added the \Lopt{sanskrit} option}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/21}{Added the \Lopt{ukrainian} option}
-%^^A \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/30}{Added the \Lopt{tamil} option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%^^A\DeclareOption{sanskrit}{\input{sanskrit.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{scottish}{\input{scottish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{serbian}{\input{serbian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{slovak}{\input{slovak.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{slovene}{\input{slovene.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{spanish}{\input{spanish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{swedish}{\input{swedish.ldf}}
-%^^A\DeclareOption{tamil}{\input{tamil.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{turkish}{\input{turkish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\input{ukraineb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\input{usorbian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{welsh}{\input{welsh.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added options \Lopt{UKenglish} and
-% \Lopt{USenglish}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\input{english.ldf}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For all those languages for which the option name is the same as
-% the name of the language specific file we specify a default
-% option, which tries to load the file specified. If this doesn't
-% succeed an error is signalled.
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/12}{Added default option}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption*{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.ldf}{}{%
- \PackageError{babel}{%
- Language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf not found}{%
- Maybe you misspelled the language option?}}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Another way to extend the list of `known' options for \babel\ is
-% to create the file \file{bblopts.cfg} in which one can add
-% option declarations.
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added the possibility to have a
-% \file{bblopts.cfg} file with option declarations.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}{%
- \typeout{*************************************^^J%
- * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J%
- *}%
- }{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Apart from all the language options we also have a few options
-% that influence the behaviour of language definition files.
-%
-% The following options don't do anything themselves, they are just
-% defined in order to make it possible for language definition
-% files to check if one of them was specified by the user.
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{Added options to influence
-% behaviour of active acute and grave accents}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{activeacute}{}
-\DeclareOption{activegrave}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next option tells \babel\ to leave shorthand characters
-% active at the end of processing the package. This is \emph{not}
-% the default as it can cause problems with other packages, but for
-% those who want to use the shorthand characters in the preamble of
-% their documents this can help.
-% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Added option
-% \Lopt{KeepShorthandsActive}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{No longer define the control
-% sequence \cs{KeepShorthandsActive}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{KeepShorthandsActive}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The options have to be processed in the order in which the user
-% specified them:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProcessOptions*
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/03/13}{Added an error message for when no
-% language option was specified}
-% In order to catch the case where the user forgot to specify a
-% language we check whether |\bbl@main@language|, has become
-% defined. If not, no language has been loaded and an error
-% message is displayed.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{No longer us a redefinition of an
-% internal macro, just check \cs{bbl@main@language} and load
-% \file{babel.def}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\bbl@main@language\@undefined
- \PackageError{babel}{%
- You haven't specified a language option}{%
- You need to specify a language, either as a global
- option\MessageBreak
- or as an optional argument to the \string\usepackage\space
- command; \MessageBreak
- You shouldn't try to proceed from here, type x to quit.}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% To prevent undefined command errors when the user insists on
-% continuing we load \file{babel.def} here. He should expect more
-% errors though.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \input{babel.def}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\substitutefontfamily}
-% The command |\substitutefontfamily| creates an \file{.fd} file on
-% the fly. The first argument is an encoding mnemonic, the second
-% and third arguments are font family names.
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/15}{create file with lowercase name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{%
- \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}%
- \immediate\write15{%
- \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}%
- [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day}
- \space generated font description file]^^J
- \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J
- }%
- \closeout15
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</package>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The Kernel of Babel}
-%
-% The kernel of the \babel\ system is stored in either
-% \file{hyphen.cfg} or \file{switch.def} and \file{babel.def}. The
-% file \file{hyphen.cfg} is a file that can be loaded into the
-% format, which is necessary when you want to be able to switch
-% hyphenation patterns. The file \file{babel.def} contains some
-% \TeX\ code that can be read in at run time. When \file{babel.def}
-% is loaded it checks if \file{hyphen.cfg} is in the format; if
-% not the file \file{switch.def} is loaded.
-%
-% Because plain \TeX\ users might want to use some of the features
-% of the \babel{} system too, care has to be taken that plain \TeX\
-% can process the files. For this reason the current format will
-% have to be checked in a number of places. Some of the code below
-% is common to plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX, some of it is for the
-% \LaTeX\ case only.
-%
-% When the command |\AtBeginDocument| doesn't exist we assume that
-% we are dealing with a plain-based format. In that case the file
-% \file{plain.def} is needed.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*kernel|core>
-\ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-% But we need to use the second part of \file{plain.def} (when we
-% load it from \file{switch.def}) which we can do by defining
-% |\adddialect|.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/20}{define \cs{adddialect} before
-% loading \file{plain.def} here}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<kernel&!patterns> \def\adddialect{}
- \input plain.def\relax
-\fi
-%</kernel|core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Check the presence of the command |\iflanguage|, if it is
-% undefined read the file \file{switch.def}.
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core>
-\ifx\iflanguage\@undefined
- \input switch.def\relax
-\fi
-%</core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/02}{Removed \cs{babel@core@loaded}, no
-% longer needed with the advent of \cs{LdfInit}}
-%
-% \subsection{Encoding issues (part 1)}
-%
-% The first thing we need to do is to determine, at
-% |\begin{document}|, which latin fontencoding to use.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from
-% \file{.ldf} files}
-% When text is being typeset in an encoding other than `latin'
-% (\texttt{OT1} or \texttt{T1}), it would be nice to still have
-% Roman numerals come out in the Latin encoding.
-% So we first assume that the current encoding at the end
-% of processing the package is the Latin encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core>
-\AtEndOfPackage{\edef\latinencoding{\cf@encoding}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% But this might be overruled with a later loading of the package
-% \pkg{fontenc}. Therefor we check at the execution of
-% |\begin{document}| whether it was loaded with the \Lopt{T1}
-% option. The normal way to do this (using |\@ifpackageloaded|) is
-% disabled for this package. Now we have to revert to parsing the
-% internal macro |\@filelist| which contains all the filenames
-% loaded.
-% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/15}{Use T1 encoding when it is a known
-% encoding}
-% \changes{babel~3.6m}{1999/04/06}{Can't use \cs{@ifpackageloaded}
-% need to parse \cs{@filelist}}
-% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{moved checking for fontenc right to
-% the top of \file{babel.sty}}
-% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{Added a check for `manual' selection
-% of \texttt{T1} encoding, without loading \pkg{fontenc}}
-% \changes{babel~3.6q}{1999/04/12}{Better solution then parsing
-% \cs{@filelist}, use \cs{@ifl@aded}}
-% \changes{babel~3.6u}{1999/04/20}{Moved this code to
-% \file{babel.def}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \gdef\latinencoding{OT1}%
- \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one
- \xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}%
- \else
- \@ifl@aded{def}{t1enc}{\xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}}{}%
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\latintext}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from
-% \file{.ldf} files}
-% Then we can define the command |\latintext| which is a
-% declarative switch to a latin font-encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{%
- \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textlatin}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from
-% \file{.ldf} files}
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/19}{added \cs{leavevmode} to prevent a
-% paragraph starting \emph{inside} the group}
-% \changes{babel~3.7k}{2003/10/12}{Use \cs{DeclareTextFontComand}}
-% This command takes an argument which is then typeset using the
-% requested font encoding. In order to avoid many encoding switches
-% it operates in a local scope.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\@undefined\DeclareTextFontCommand
- \DeclareRobustCommand{\textlatin}[1]{\leavevmode{\latintext #1}}
-\else
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext}
-\fi
-%</core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We also need to redefine a number of commands to ensure that the
-% right font encoding is used, but this can't be done before
-% \file{babel.def} is loaded.
-% \changes{babel~3.6o}{1999/04/07}{Moved the rest of the font encoding
-% related definitions to their original place}
-%
-% \subsection{Multiple languages}
-%
-% With \TeX\ version~3.0 it has become possible to load hyphenation
-% patterns for more than one language. This means that some extra
-% administration has to be taken care of. The user has to know for
-% which languages patterns have been loaded, and what values of
-% |\language| have been used.
-%
-% Some discussion has been going on in the \TeX\ world about how to
-% use |\language|. Some have suggested to set a fixed standard,
-% i.\,e., patterns for each language should \emph{always} be loaded
-% in the same location. It has also been suggested to use the
-% \textsc{iso} list for this purpose. Others have pointed out that
-% the \textsc{iso} list contains more than 256~languages, which
-% have \emph{not} been numbered consecutively.
-%
-% I think the best way to use |\language|, is to use it
-% dynamically. This code implements an algorithm to do so. It uses
-% an external file in which the person who maintains a \TeX\
-% environment has to record for which languages he has hyphenation
-% patterns \emph{and} in which files these are stored\footnote{This
-% is because different operating systems sometimes use \emph{very}
-% different file-naming conventions.}. When hyphenation exceptions
-% are stored in a separate file this can be indicated by naming
-% that file \emph{after} the file with the hyphenation patterns.
-%
-% This ``configuration file'' can contain empty lines and comments,
-% as well as lines which start with an equals (\texttt{=})
-% sign. Such a line will instruct \LaTeX\ that the hyphenation
-% patterns just processed have to be known under an alternative
-% name. Here is an example:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% % File : language.dat
-% % Purpose : tell iniTeX what files with patterns to load.
-% english english.hyphenations
-% =british
-%
-% dutch hyphen.dutch exceptions.dutch % Nederlands
-% german hyphen.ger
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% As the file \file{switch.def} needs to be read only once, we
-% check whether it was read before. If it was, the command
-% |\iflanguage| is already defined, so we can stop processing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*kernel>
-%<*!patterns>
-\expandafter\ifx\csname iflanguage\endcsname\relax \else
-\expandafter\endinput
-\fi
-%</!patterns>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\language}
-% Plain \TeX\ version~3.0 provides the primitive |\language| that
-% is used to store the current language. When used with a pre-3.0
-% version this function has to be implemented by allocating a
-% counter.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\language\@undefined
- \csname newcount\endcsname\language
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\last@language}
-% Another counter is used to store the last language defined. For
-% pre-3.0 formats an extra counter has to be allocated,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined
- \csname newcount\endcsname\last@language
-% \end{macrocode}
-% plain \TeX\ version 3.0 uses |\count 19| for this purpose.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \countdef\last@language=19
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\addlanguage}
-%
-% To add languages to \TeX's memory plain \TeX\ version~3.0
-% supplies |\newlanguage|, in a pre-3.0 environment a similar macro
-% has to be provided. For both cases a new macro is defined here,
-% because the original |\newlanguage| was defined to be |\outer|.
-%
-% For a format based on plain version~2.x, the definition of
-% |\newlanguage| can not be copied because |\count 19| is used for
-% other purposes in these formats. Therefor |\addlanguage| is
-% defined using a definition based on the macros used to define
-% |\newlanguage| in plain \TeX\ version~3.0.
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added a \texttt{\%}, removed
-% \texttt{by}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined
- \def\addlanguage#1{%
- \global\advance\last@language \@ne
- \ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi
- \else
- \errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}%
- \fi
- \global\chardef#1\last@language
- \wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For formats based on plain version~3.0 the definition of
-% |\newlanguage| can be simply copied, removing |\outer|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\adddialect}
-% The macro |\adddialect| can be used to add the name of a dialect
-% or variant language, for which an already defined hyphenation
-% table can be used.
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added \cs{relax}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\adddialect#1#2{%
- \global\chardef#1#2\relax
- \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\iflanguage}
-% Users might want to test (in a private package for instance)
-% which language is currently active. For this we provide a test
-% macro, |\iflanguage|, that has three arguments. It checks
-% whether the first argument is a known language. If so, it
-% compares the first argument with the value of |\language|. Then,
-% depending on the result of the comparison, it executes either the
-% second or the third argument.
-% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and
-% \cs{@esphack}}
-% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/07/21}{Added comment character after
-% \texttt{\#2}}
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous
-% \cs{expandafter}}
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Removed space hacks and use of
-% \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Rephrased \cs{ifnum} test}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/10}{Now evaluate the \cs{ifnum} test
-% \emph{after} the \cs{fi} from the \cs{ifx} test and use
-% \cs{@firstoftwo} and \cs{@secondoftwo}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/29}{Slight enhancement: added braces
-% around first argument of \cs{bbl@afterfi}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\iflanguage#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi{\ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\selectlanguage}
-% The macro |\selectlanguage| checks whether the language is
-% already defined before it performs its actual task, which is to
-% update |\language| and activate language-specific definitions.
-%
-% To allow the call of |\selectlanguage| either with a control
-% sequence name or with a simple string as argument, we have to use
-% a trick to delete the optional escape character.
-%
-% To convert a control sequence to a string, we use the |\string|
-% primitive. Next we have to look at the first character of this
-% string and compare it with the escape character. Because this
-% escape character can be changed by setting the internal integer
-% |\escapechar| to a character number, we have to compare this
-% number with the character of the string. To do this we have to
-% use \TeX's backquote notation to specify the character as a
-% number.
-%
-% If the first character of the |\string|'ed argument is the
-% current escape character, the comparison has stripped this
-% character and the rest in the `then' part consists of the rest of
-% the control sequence name. Otherwise we know that either the
-% argument is not a control sequence or |\escapechar| is set to a
-% value outside of the character range~$0$--$255$.
-%
-% If the user gives an empty argument, we provide a default
-% argument for |\string|. This argument should expand to nothing.
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/06/06}{Made \cs{selectlanguage}
-% robust}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Modified to allow arguments that
-% start with an escape character}
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Simplified the modification to
-% allow the use in a \cs{write} command}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Store the name of the current
-% language in a control sequence instead of passing the whole macro
-% construct to strip the escape character in the argument of
-% \cs{selectlanguage }.}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/30}{Added a missing percent character}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/16}{Moved check for escape character
-% one level down in the expansion}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\selectlanguage{%
- \noexpand\protect
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Because the command |\selectlanguage| could be used in a moving
-% argument it expands to \verb*=\protect\selectlanguage =.
-% Therefor, we have to make sure that a macro |\protect| exists.
-% If it doesn't it is |\let| to |\relax|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% As \LaTeX$\:$2.09 writes to files \textit{expanded} whereas
-% \LaTeXe\ takes care \textit{not} to expand the arguments of
-% |\write| statements we need to be a bit clever about the way we
-% add information to \file{.aux} files. Therefor we introduce the
-% macro |\xstring| which should expand to the right amount of
-% |\string|'s.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
- \def\xstring{\string\string\string}
-\else
- \let\xstring\string
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/04}{Changed the name of the internal
-% macro to \cs{selectlanguage }.}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/05}{Added an extra level of expansion to
-% separate the switching mechanism from writing to aux files}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Use \cs{aftergroup} to keep the
-% language grouping correct in auxiliary files {PR3091}}
-% Since version 3.5 \babel\ writes entries to the auxiliary files in
-% order to typeset table of contents etc. in the correct language
-% environment.
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language}
-% \emph{But} when the language change happens \emph{inside} a group
-% the end of the group doesn't write anything to the auxiliary
-% files. Therefor we need \TeX's |aftergroup| mechanism to help
-% us. The command |\aftergroup| stores the token immediately
-% following it to be executed when the current group is closed. So
-% we define a temporary control sequence |\bbl@pop@language| to be
-% executed at the end of the group. It calls |\bbl@set@language|
-% with the name of the current language as its argument.
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Introduce the language stack
-% mechanism}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@language@stack}
-% The previous solution works for one level of nesting groups, but
-% as soon as more levels are used it is no longer adequate. For
-% that case we need to keep track of the nested languages using a
-% stack mechanism. This stack is called |\bbl@language@stack| and
-% initially empty.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\xdef\bbl@language@stack{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When using a stack we need a mechanism to push an element on the
-% stack and to retrieve the information afterwards.
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@push@language}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language}
-% The stack is simply a list of languagenames, separated with a `+'
-% sign; the push function can be simple:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@push@language{%
- \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Retrieving information from the stack is a little bit less simple,
-% as we need to remove the element from the stack while storing it
-% in the macro |\languagename|. For this we first define a helper function.
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@lang}
-% This macro stores its first element (which is delimited by the
-% `+'-sign) in |\languagename| and stores the rest of the string
-% (delimited by `-') in its third argument.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{%
- \def\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% The reason for the somewhat weird arrangement of arguments to the
-% helper function is the fact it is called in the following way:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@pop@language{%
- \expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This means that before |\bbl@pop@lang| is executed \TeX\ first
-% \emph{expands} the stack, stored in |\bbl@language@stack|. The
-% result of that is that the argument string of |\bbl@pop@lang|
-% contains one or more language names, each followed by a `+'-sign
-% (zero language names won't occur as this macro will only be
-% called after something has been pushed on the stack) followed by
-% the `-'-sign and finally the reference to the stack.
-% \begin{macrocode}$$
- \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Once the name of the previous language is retrieved from the stack,
-% it is fed to |\bbl@set@language| to do the actual work of
-% switching everything that needs switching.
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Now use the language stack mechanism}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{%
- \bbl@push@language
- \aftergroup\bbl@pop@language
- \bbl@set@language{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/12}{Removed the superfluous empty
-% definition of \cs{bbl@pop@language}}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@set@language}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/16}{Now also define \cs{languagename}
-% at this level}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Macro \cs{bbl@set@language}
-% introduced}
-% The macro |\bbl@set@language| takes care of switching the language
-% environment \emph{and} of writing entries on the auxiliary files.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@set@language#1{%
- \edef\languagename{%
- \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty
- \else \string#1\@empty\fi}%
- \select@language{\languagename}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We also write a command to change the current language in the
-% auxiliary files.
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{write the language change to the
-% auxiliary files}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@filesw
- \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% First, check if the user asks for a known language. If so,
-% update the value of |\language| and call |\originalTeX|
-% to bring \TeX\ in a certain pre-defined state.
-% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and
-% \cs{@esphack}}
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous
-% \cs{expandafter}}
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Removed space hacks and use of
-% \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added \cs{relax} as first command
-% to stop an expansion if \cs{protect} is empty}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/07}{Check for the existence of
-% \cs{date...} instead of \cs{l@...}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Check for the existence of both
-% \cs{l@...} and \cs{date...}}
-% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\select@language#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \expandafter\ifx\csname date#1\endcsname\relax
- \@noopterr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- \originalTeX
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The name of the language is stored in the control sequence
-% |\languagename|. The contents of this control sequence could be
-% tested in the following way:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \edef\tmp{\string english}
-% \ifx\languagename\tmp
-% ...
-% \else
-% ...
-% \fi
-% \end{verbatim}
-% The construction with |\string| is necessary because
-% |\languagename| returns the name with characters of category code
-% \texttt{12} (other). Then we have to \emph{re}define
-% |\originalTeX| to compensate for the things that have been
-% activated. To save memory space for the macro definition of
-% |\originalTeX|, we construct the control sequence name for the
-% |\noextras|\langvar\ command at definition time by expanding the
-% |\csname| primitive.
-% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/06/06}{Replaced \cs{gdef} with \cs{def}}
-% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{\cs{originalTeX} should only be
-% executed once}
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added three \cs{expandafter}s
-% to save macro space for \cs{originalTeX}}
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Moved definition of
-% \cs{originalTeX} before \cs{extras\langvar}}
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to
-% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX
- \expandafter{\csname noextras#1\endcsname
- \let\originalTeX\@empty}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{set the language shorthands to
-% `none' before switching on the extras}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \babel@beginsave
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now activate the language-specific definitions. This is done by
-% constructing the names of three macros by concatenating three
-% words with the argument of |\selectlanguage|, and calling these
-% macros.
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Separated the setting of the
-% hyphenmin values}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \csname captions#1\endcsname
- \csname date#1\endcsname
- \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The switching of the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and
-% |\righthyphenmin| is somewhat different. First we save their
-% current values, then we check if |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is
-% defined. If it is not, we set default values (2 and 3), otherwise
-% the values in |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| will be used.
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/05}{Addedd default setting of hyphenmin
-% parameters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin
- \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage}
-% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment can be used as an
-% alternative to using the |\selectlanguage| declarative
-% command. When you are typesetting a document which mixes
-% left-to-right and right-to-left typesetting you have to use this
-% environment in order to let things work as you expect them to.
-%
-% The first thing this environment does is store the name of the
-% language in |\languagename|; it then calls
-% \verb*=\selectlanguage = to switch on everything that is needed for
-% this language The |\ignorespaces| command is necessary to hide
-% the environment when it is entered in horizontal mode.
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{environment added}
-% \changes{babel~3.5e}{1995/07/07}{changed name}
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{rely on \cs{selectlanguage } to
-% keep track of the nesting}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\otherlanguage#1{%
- \csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}%
- \ignorespaces
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The |\endotherlanguage| part of the environment calls
-% |\originalTeX| to restore (most of) the settings and tries to
-% hide itself when it is called in horizontal mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\endotherlanguage{%
- \originalTeX
- \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-%
-% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage*}
-% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment is meant to be used when a
-% large part of text from a different language needs to be typeset,
-% but without changing the translation of words such as `figure'.
-%
-% This environment makes use of |\foreign@language|.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/29}{environment added}
-% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{%
- \foreign@language{#1}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% At the end of the environment we need to switch off the extra
-% definitions. The grouping mechanism of the environment will take
-% care of resetting the correct hyphenation rules.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname{%
- \csname noextras\languagename\endcsname
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\foreignlanguage}
-% The |\foreignlanguage| command is another substitute for the
-% |\selectlanguage| command. This command takes two arguments, the
-% first argument is the name of the language to use for typesetting
-% the text specified in the second argument.
-%
-% Unlike |\selectlanguage| this command doesn't switch
-% \emph{everything}, it only switches the hyphenation rules and the
-% extra definitions for the language specified. It does this within
-% a group and assumes the |\extras|\langvar\ command doesn't make
-% any |\global| changes. The coding is very similar to part of
-% |\selectlanguage|.
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Macro added}
-% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Added executing \cs{originalTeX}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\foreignlanguage{\protect\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname}
-\expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{%
- \begingroup
- \originalTeX
- \foreign@language{#1}%
- #2%
- \csname noextras#1\endcsname
- \endgroup
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\foreign@language}
-% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{New macro}
-% This macro does the work for |\foreignlanguage| and the
-% \Lenv{otherlanguage*} environment.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\foreign@language#1{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we need to store the name of the language and check that it
-% is a known language.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\languagename{#1}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If it is we can select the proper hyphenation table and switch on
-% the extra definitions for this language.
-% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{set the language shorthands to
-% `none' before switching on the extras}
-% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{use \cs{bbl@patterns}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we set the left- and right hyphenmin variables.
-% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Added \cs{relax} to prevent
-% disappearance of the first token after this command.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \csname extras#1\endcsname
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@patterns}
-% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Macro added}
-% This macro selects the hyphenation patterns by changing the
-% \cs{language} register. If special hyphenation patterns
-% are available specifically for the current font encoding,
-% use them instead of the default.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@patterns#1{%
- \language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
- \csname l@#1\endcsname
- \else
- \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname
- \fi\relax
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{hyphenrules}
-% \changes{babel~3.7e}{2000/01/28}{Added environment hyphenrules}
-% The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select
-% \emph{just} the hyphenation rules. This environment does
-% \emph{not} change |\languagename| and when the hyphenation rules
-% specified were not loaded it has no effect.
-% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Also set the hyphenmin paramters to
-% the correct value (PR3997)}
-% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hyphenrules#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\@undefined
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@patterns{#1}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- }
-\def\endhyphenrules{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\providehyphenmins}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{added macro}
-% The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language
-% definition files to provide a \emph{default} setting for the
-% hyphenation parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. If
-% the macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is already defined this command
-% has no effect.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\providehyphenmins#1#2{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\set@hyphenmins}
-% This macro sets the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and
-% |\righthyphenmin|. It expects two values as its argument.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\righthyphenmin#2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LdfInit}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added}
-% This macro is defined in two versions. The first version is to be
-% part of the `kernel' of \babel, ie. the part that is loaded in
-% the format; the second version is defined in \file{babel.def}.
-% The version in the format just checks the category code of the
-% ampersand and then loads \file{babel.def}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\LdfInit{%
- \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@
- \catcode`\@=11\relax
- \input babel.def\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The category code of the ampersand is restored and the macro
-% calls itself again with the new definition from
-% \file{babel.def}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
- \LdfInit}
-%</kernel>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The second version of this macro takes two arguments. The first
-% argument is the name of the language that will be defined in the
-% language definition file; the second argument is either a control
-% sequence or a string from which a control sequence should be
-% constructed. The existence of the control sequence indicates that
-% the file has been processed before.
-%
-% At the start of processing a language definition file we always
-% check the category code of the ampersand. We make sure that it is
-% a `letter' during the processing of the file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core>
-\def\LdfInit#1#2{%
- \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@
- \catcode`\@=11\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Another character that needs to have the correct category code
-% during processing of language definition files is the equals sign,
-% `=', because it is sometimes used in constructions with the
-% |\let| primitive. Therefor we store its current catcode and
-% restore it later on.
-% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{make sure the equals sign has its
-% default category code}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \chardef\eqcatcode=\catcode`\=
- \catcode`\==12\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now we check whether we should perhaps stop the processing of
-% this file. To do this we first need to check whether the second
-% argument that is passed to |\LdfInit| is a control sequence. We
-% do that by looking at the first token after passing |#2| through
-% |string|. When it is equal to |\@backslashchar| we are dealing
-% with a control sequence which we can compare with |\@undefined|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\bbl@tempa\relax
- \expandafter\if\expandafter\@backslashchar
- \expandafter\@car\string#2\@nil
- \ifx#2\@undefined
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If so, we call |\ldf@quit| (but after the end of this |\if|
-% construction) to set the main language, restore the category code
-% of the @-sign and call |\endinput|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}}
- \fi
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When |#2| was \emph{not} a control sequence we construct one and
-% compare it with |\relax|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}}
- \fi
- \fi
- \bbl@tempa
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Finally we check |\originalTeX|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\originalTeX\@undefined
- \let\originalTeX\@empty
- \else
- \originalTeX
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ldf@quit}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Macro added}
-% This macro interrupts the processing of a language definition file.
-% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of
-% the equals sign}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ldf@quit#1{%
- \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}%
- \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
- \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax
- \endinput
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ldf@finish}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added}
-% This macro takes one argument. It is the name of the language
-% that was defined in the language definition file.
-%
-% We load the local configuration file if one is present, we set
-% the main language (taking into account that the argument might be
-% a control sequence that needs to be expanded) and reset the
-% category code of the @-sign.
-% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of
-% the equals sign}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ldf@finish#1{%
- \loadlocalcfg{#1}%
- \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}%
- \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
- \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% After the preamble of the document the commands |\LdfInit|,
-% |\ldf@quit| and |\ldf@finish| are no longer needed. Therefor
-% they are turned into warning messages in \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@onlypreamble\LdfInit
-\@onlypreamble\ldf@quit
-\@onlypreamble\ldf@finish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\main@language}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{\cs{main@language} now also sets
-% \cs{languagename} and \cs{l@languagename} for use by other
-% packages in the preamble of a document}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@main@language}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added}
-% This command should be used in the various language definition
-% files. It stores its argument in |\bbl@main@language|; to be used
-% to switch to the correct language at the beginning of the
-% document.
-% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\main@language#1{%
- \def\bbl@main@language{#1}%
- \let\languagename\bbl@main@language
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The default is to use English as the main language.
-% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \file{hyphen.cfg} is not
-% loaded in the format \cs{l@english} might not be defined; assume
-% english is language 0}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@english\@undefined
- \let\l@english\z@
-\fi
-\main@language{english}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We also have to make sure that some code gets executed at the
-% beginning of the document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\bbl@main@language}}
-%</core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\originalTeX}
-% The macro|\originalTeX| should be known to \TeX\ at this moment.
-% As it has to be expandable we |\let| it to |\@empty| instead of
-% |\relax|.
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to
-% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*kernel>
-\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Because this part of the code can be included in a format, we
-% make sure that the macro which initialises the save mechanism,
-% |\babel@beginsave|, is not considered to be undefined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@nolanerr}
-% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Use \cs{PackageError} in \LaTeXe\
-% mode}
-% \begin{macro}{\@nopatterns}
-% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Macro added}
-% The \babel\ package will signal an error when a documents tries
-% to select a language that hasn't been defined earlier. When a
-% user selects a language for which no hyphenation patterns were
-% loaded into the format he will be given a warning about that
-% fact. We revert to the patterns for |\language|=0 in that case.
-% In most formats that will be (US)english, but it might also be
-% empty.
-% \begin{macro}{\@noopterr}
-% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Macro added}
-% When the package was loaded without options not everything will
-% work as expected. An error message is issued in that case.
-%
-% When the format knows about |\PackageError| it must be \LaTeXe,
-% so we can safely use its error handling interface. Otherwise
-% we'll have to `keep it simple'.
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Added a percent sign to remove
-% unwanted white space}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/15}{Added \cs{@activated} to log active
-% characters}
-% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/19}{Added missing closing brace}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\PackageError\@undefined
- \def\@nolanerr#1{%
- \errhelp{Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}%
- \errmessage{You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}}
- \def\@nopatterns#1{%
- \message{No hyphenation patterns were loaded for}%
- \message{the language `#1'}%
- \message{I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0
- instead}}
- \def\@noopterr#1{%
- \errmessage{The option #1 was not specified in \string\usepackage}
- \errhelp{You may continue, but expect unexpected results}}
- \def\@activated#1{%
- \wlog{Package babel Info: Making #1 an active character}}
-\else
- \newcommand*{\@nolanerr}[1]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}%
- {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
- \newcommand*{\@nopatterns}[1]{%
- \PackageWarningNoLine{babel}%
- {No hyphenation patterns were loaded for\MessageBreak
- the language `#1'\MessageBreak
- I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0
- instead}}
- \newcommand*{\@noopterr}[1]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {You haven't loaded the option #1\space yet}%
- {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}}
- \newcommand*{\@activated}[1]{%
- \PackageInfo{babel}{%
- Making #1 an active character}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The following code is meant to be read by ini\TeX\ because it
-% should instruct \TeX\ to read hyphenation patterns. To this end
-% the \texttt{docstrip} option \texttt{patterns} can be used to
-% include this code in the file \file{hyphen.cfg}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*patterns>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Removed the use of
-% \cs{patterns@loaded} altogether}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\process@line}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro}
-% Each line in the file \file{language.dat} is processed by
-% |\process@line| after it is read. The first thing this macro does
-% is to check whether the line starts with \texttt{=}.
-% When the first token of a line is an \texttt{=}, the macro
-% |\process@synonym| is called; otherwise the macro
-% |\process@language| will continue.
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Simplified code, removing
-% \cs{bbl@eq@}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{added an extra argument in order to
-% prevent a trailing space from becoming part of the control
-% sequence when defining a synonym (PR 2851)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\process@line#1#2 #3/{%
- \ifx=#1
- \process@synonym#2 /
- \else
- \process@language#1#2 #3/%
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\process@synonym}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro}
-% This macro takes care of the lines which start with an
-% \texttt{=}. It needs an empty token register to begin with.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\toks@{}
-\def\process@synonym#1 /{%
- \ifnum\last@language=\m@ne
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When no languages have been loaded yet, the name following the
-% \texttt{=} will be a synonym for hyphenation register 0.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname0\relax
- \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language0}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% As no hyphenation patterns are read in yet, we can not yet set
-% the hyphenmin parameters. Therefor a command to do so is stored
-% in a token register and executed when the first pattern file has
-% been processed.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Use a token register to temporarily
-% store a command to set hyphenmin parameters for the synonym which
-% is defined \emph{before} the first pattern file is processed}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@
- \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Otherwise the name will be a synonym for the language loaded last.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname\last@language
- \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We also need to copy the hyphenmin parameters for the synonym.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Now also store hyphenmin parameters
-% for language synonyms}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\process@language}
-% The macro |\process@language| is used to process a non-empty line
-% from the `configuration file'. It has three arguments, each
-% delimited by white space. The third argument is optional,
-% so a |/| character is expected to delimit the last
-% argument. The first argument is the `name' of a language; the
-% second is the name of the file that contains the patterns. The
-% optional third argument is the name of a file containing
-% hyphenation exceptions.
-%
-% The first thing to do is call |\addlanguage| to allocate a
-% pattern register and to make that register `active'.
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous
-% \cs{expandafter}}
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/21}{Reinserted \cs{expandafter}}
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/27}{Added the collection of pattern
-% names.}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Also store \cs{languagename} for
-% possible later use in \cs{process@synonym}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\process@language#1 #2 #3/{%
- \expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname
- \expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname
- \def\languagename{#1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then the `name' of the language that will be loaded now is
-% added to the token register |\toks8|. and finally
-% the pattern file is read.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \global\toks8\expandafter{\the\toks8#1, }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Allow for the encoding to be used
-% as part of the language name}
-% For some hyphenation patterns it is needed to load them with a
-% specific font encoding selected. This can be specified in the
-% file \file{language.dat} by adding for instance `\texttt{:T1}' to
-% the name of the language. The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the
-% font encoding from the language name and stores it in
-% |\bbl@hyph@enc|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begingroup
- \bbl@get@enc#1:\@@@
- \ifx\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty
- \else
- \fontencoding{\bbl@hyph@enc}\selectfont
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Added code to detect assignments to
-% left- and righthyphenmin in the patternfile.}
-% Some pattern files contain assignments to |\lefthyphenmin| and
-% |\righthyphenmin|. \TeX\ does not keep track of these
-% assignments. Therefor we try to detect such assignments and
-% store them in the |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| macro. When no
-% assignments were made we provide a default setting.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \lefthyphenmin\m@ne
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Some pattern files contain changes to the |\lccode| en |\uccode|
-% arrays. Such changes should remain local to the language;
-% therefor we process the pattern file in a group; the |\patterns|
-% command acts globally so its effect will be remembered.
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Read pattern files in a group}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/05}{need to set hyphenmin values
-% globally}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Set \cs{lefthyphenmin} to \cs{m@ne}
-% \emph{inside} the group; explicitly set the hyphenmin parameters
-% for language 0}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \input #2\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now we globally store the settings of |\lefthyphenmin| and
-% |\righthyphenmin| and close the group.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/25}{Only set hyphenmin values when the
-% pattern file changed them}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\lefthyphenmin=\m@ne
- \else
- \expandafter\xdef\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname{%
- \the\lefthyphenmin\the\righthyphenmin}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If the counter |\language| is still equal to zero we set the
-% hyphenmin parameters to the values for the language loaded on
-% pattern register 0.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\the\language=\z@
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now execute the contents of token register zero as it may
-% contain commands which set the hyphenmin parameters for synonyms
-% that were defined before the first pattern file is read in.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Added the execution of the contents
-% of \cs{toks@}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \the\toks@
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Empty the token register after use.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \toks@{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the hyphenation patterns have been processed we need to see
-% if a file with hyphenation exceptions needs to be read. This is
-% the case when the third argument is not empty and when it does
-% not contain a space token.
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{Added optional reading of file with
-% hyphenation exceptions}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/25}{Use \cs{empty} instead of
-% \cs{@empty} as the latter is unknown in plain}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bbl@tempa{#3}%
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty
- \else
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\space
- \else
- \input #3\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@get@enc}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Added macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@hyph@enc}
-% The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the font encoding from the
-% language name and stores it in |\bbl@hyph@enc|. It uses delimited
-% arguments to achieve this.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2\@@@{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First store both arguments in temporary macros,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bbl@tempa{#1}%
- \def\bbl@tempb{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then, if the second argument was empty, no font encoding was
-% specified and we're done.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty
- \let\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% But if the second argument was \emph{not} empty it will now have
-% a superfluous colon attached to it which we need to remove. This
-% done by feeding it to |\bbl@get@enc|. The string that we are
-% after will then be in the first argument and be stored in
-% |\bbl@tempa|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \bbl@get@enc#2\@@@
- \edef\bbl@hyph@enc{\bbl@tempa}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\readconfigfile}
-% The configuration file can now be opened for reading.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\openin1 = language.dat
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% See if the file exists, if not, use the default hyphenation file
-% \file{hyphen.tex}. The user will be informed about this.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifeof1
- \message{I couldn't find the file language.dat,\space
- I will try the file hyphen.tex}
- \input hyphen.tex\relax
- \def\l@english{0}%
- \def\languagename{english}%
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Pattern registers are allocated using count register
-% |\last@language|. Its initial value is~0. The definition of the
-% macro |\newlanguage| is such that it first increments the count
-% register and then defines the language. In order to have the
-% first patterns loaded in pattern register number~0 we initialize
-% |\last@language| with the value~$-1$.
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/05/21}{Removed use of \cs{toks0}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \last@language\m@ne
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We now read lines from the file until the end is found
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \loop
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% While reading from the input, it is useful to switch off
-% recognition of the end-of-line character. This saves us stripping
-% off spaces from the contents of the control sequence.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \endlinechar\m@ne
- \read1 to \bbl@line
- \endlinechar`\^^M
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Empty lines are skipped.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\bbl@line\@empty
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we add a space and a |/| character to the end of
-% |\bbl@line|. This is needed to be able to recognize the third,
-% optional, argument of |\process@language| later on.
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{Now add a \cs{space} and a /
-% character}
-% \changes{babel~3.8m}{2008/07/08}{Store the name of the language
-% loaded in register 0 (PR 4039)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space/}%
- \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line
- \ifx\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined
- \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\languagename
- \fi
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Check for the end of the file. To avoid a new \texttt{if}
-% control sequence we create the necessary |\iftrue| or |\iffalse|
-% with the help of |\csname|. But there is one complication with
-% this approach: when skipping the \texttt{loop...repeat} \TeX\ has
-% to read |\if|/|\fi| pairs. So we have to insert a `dummy'
-% |\iftrue|.
-% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{Removed the extra \texttt{if}
-% control sequence}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \iftrue \csname fi\endcsname
- \csname if\ifeof1 false\else true\fi\endcsname
- \repeat
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Reactivate the default patterns,
-% \changes{babel~3.8m}{2008/07/08}{Also restore the name of the
-% language in \cs{languagenme} (PR 4039)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \language=0
- \let\languagename\bbl@defaultlanguage
- \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and close the configuration file.
-% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Free macro space for
-% \cs{process@language}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\closein1
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Also remove some macros from memory
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\process@language\@undefined
-\let\process@synonym\@undefined
-\let\process@line\@undefined
-\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined
-\let\bbl@tempb\@undefined
-\let\bbl@eq@\@undefined
-\let\bbl@line\@undefined
-\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/08}{Moved the fiddling with \cs{dump}
-% to \file{bbplain.dtx} as it is no longer needed for \LaTeX}
-% We add a message about the fact that babel is loaded in the
-% format and with which language patterns to the \cs{everyjob}
-% register.
-% \changes{babel~3.6h}{1997/01/23}{Added a couple of \cs{expandafter}s
-% to copy the contents of \cs{toks8} into \cs{everyjob} instead of
-% the reference}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\addto@hook\@undefined
-\else
- \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\the\toks8 loaded.}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Here the code for ini\TeX\ ends.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</patterns>
-%</kernel>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Support for active characters}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@special}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
-% The macro |\bbl@add@special| is used to add a new character (or
-% single character control sequence) to the macro |\dospecials|
-% (and |\@sanitize| if \LaTeX\ is used).
-%
-% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we
-% redefine the macros |\do| and |\@makeother| to add themselves and
-% the given character without expansion.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core|shorthands>
-\def\bbl@add@special#1{\begingroup
- \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
- \def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% To add the character to the macros, we expand the original macros
-% with the additional character inside the redefinition of the
-% macros. Because |\@sanitize| can be undefined, we put the
-% definition inside a conditional.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
- \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}%
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The macro |\x| contains at this moment the following:\\
-% |\endgroup\def\dospecials{|\textit{old contents}%
-% |\do|\meta{char}|}|.\\
-% If |\@sanitize| is defined, it contains an additional definition
-% of this macro. The last thing we have to do, is the expansion of
-% |\x|. Then |\endgroup| is executed, which restores the old
-% meaning of |\x|, |\do| and |\@makeother|. After the group is
-% closed, the new definition of |\dospecials| (and |\@sanitize|) is
-% assigned.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \x}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@remove@special}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
-% The companion of the former macro is |\bbl@remove@special|. It
-% is used to remove a character from the set macros |\dospecials|
-% and |\@sanitize|.
-%
-% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we define
-% a help macro |\x|, which expands to empty if the characters
-% match, otherwise it expands to its nonexpandable input. Because
-% \TeX\ inserts a |\relax|, if the corresponding |\else| or |\fi|
-% is scanned before the comparison is evaluated, we provide a `stop
-% sign' which should expand to nothing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@remove@special#1{\begingroup
- \def\x##1##2{\ifnum`#1=`##2\noexpand\@empty
- \else\noexpand##1\noexpand##2\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% With the help of this macro we define |\do| and |\make@other|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\do{\x\do}%
- \def\@makeother{\x\@makeother}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The rest of the work is similar to |\bbl@add@special|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
- \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
- \fi}%
- \x}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Shorthands}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\initiate@active@char}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/03}{Renamed macro}
-% A language definition file can call this macro to make a
-% character active. This macro takes one argument, the character
-% that is to be made active. When the character was already active
-% this macro does nothing. Otherwise, this macro defines the
-% control sequence |\normal@char|\m{char} to expand to the
-% character in its `normal state' and it defines the active
-% character to expand to |\normal@char|\m{char} by default
-% (\m{char} being the character to be made active). Later its
-% definition can be changed to expand to |\active@char|\m{char}
-% by calling |\bbl@activate{|\m{char}|}|.
-%
-% For example, to make the double quote character active one could
-% have the following line in a language definition file:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \initiate@active@char{"}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterelse}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterfi}
-% Because the code that is used in the handling of active
-% characters may need to look ahead, we take extra care to `throw'
-% it over the |\else| and |\fi| parts of an
-% |\if|-statement\footnote{This code is based on code presented in
-% TUGboat vol. 12, no2, June 1991 in ``An expansion Power Lemma''
-% by Sonja Maus.}. These macros will break if another |\if...\fi|
-% statement appears in one of the arguments.
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Made \cs{bbl@afterelse} and
-% \cs{bbl@afterfi} \cs{long}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1}
-\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/02/23}{Commented out \c{peek@token} and
-% \cs{test@token} as shorthands are made expandable again}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\peek@token}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/06}{macro added}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1998/03/10}{Renamed \cs{test@token} to
-% \cs{bbl@test@token} to prevent a clash with Arab\TeX}
-% To prevent error messages when a shorthand, which
-% normally takes an argument, sees a |\par|, or |}|, or similar
-% tokens, we need to be able to `peek' at what is coming up next in
-% the input stream. Depending on the category code of the token
-% that is seen, we need to either continue the code for the active
-% character, or insert the non-active version of that character in
-% the output. The macro |\peek@token| therefore takes two
-% arguments, with which it constructs the control sequence to
-% expand next. It |\let|'s |\bbl@nexta| and |\bbl@nextb| to the two
-% possible macros. This is necessary for |\bbl@test@token| to take
-% the right decision.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\def\peek@token#1#2{%
-% \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@nexta\csname #1\string#2\endcsname
-% \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@nextb
-% \csname system@active\string#2\endcsname
-% \futurelet\bbl@token\bbl@test@token}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@test@token}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/06}{macro added}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1998/03/10}{renamed \cs{bbl@token} to
-% \cs{bbl@test@token} to prevent a clash with Arab\TeX}
-% When the result of peeking at the next token has yielded a token
-% with category `letter', `other' or `active' it is safe to proceed
-% with evaluating the code for the shorthand. When a token is found
-% with any other category code proceeding is unsafe and therefor
-% the original shorthand character is inserted in the output. The
-% macro that calls |\bbl@test@token| needs to setup |\bbl@nexta|
-% and |\bbl@nextb| in order to achieve this.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\def\bbl@test@token{%
-% \let\bbl@next\bbl@nexta
-% \ifcat\noexpand\bbl@token a%
-% \else
-% \ifcat\noexpand\bbl@token=%
-% \else
-% \ifcat\noexpand\bbl@token\noexpand\bbl@next
-% \else
-% \let\bbl@next\bbl@nextb
-% \fi
-% \fi
-% \fi
-% \bbl@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%^^A
-%^^A Tekens met mathcode >"8000 zorgen voor problemen.
-%^^A hier kan op getest worden door ze catcode13 te geven
-%^^A en te vragen of er een undefined macro ontstaat:
-%^^A \ifx#1\undefined{matchcode<"8000}\else get active definition
-%^^A using \let \fi
-%^^A
-% The macro |\initiate@active@char| takes all the necessary actions
-% to make its argument a shorthand character. The real work is
-% performed once for each character.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/30}{Only execute
-% \cs{initiate@active@char} once for each character}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\initiate@active@char#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string##1\endcsname\relax
- \bbl@afterfi{\@initiate@active@char{#1}}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Note that the definition of |\@initiate@active@char| needs an
-% active character, for this the |~| is used. Some of the changes
-% we need, do not have to become available later on, so we do it
-% inside a group.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\~\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@initiate@active@char##1{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If the character is already active we provide the default
-% expansion under this shorthand mechanism.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{Deal correctly with already active
-% characters, provide top level expansion and define all lower
-% level expansion macros outside of the \cs{else} branch.}
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/13}{Top level expansion of
-% \cs{normal@char char} where char is already active, should be the
-% expansion of the active character, not the active character
-% itself as this causes an endless loop}
-% \changes{babel~3.7d}{1999/08/19}{Make sure the active character
-% doesn't get expanded more then once by the \cs{edef} by adding
-% \cs{expandafter}\cs{strip@prefix}\cs{meaning}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/06}{previous change was rubbish; use
-% \cs{let} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifcat\noexpand##1\noexpand~\relax
- \@ifundefined{normal@char\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname##1%
- \expandafter\gdef
- \expandafter##1%
- \expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1%
- \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}{}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Otherwise we write a message in the transcript file,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@activated{##1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and define |\normal@char|\m{char} to expand to the character in
-% its default state.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{##1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If we are making the right quote active we need to change
-% |\pr@m@s| as well.
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added a check for right quote and
-% adapt \cs{pr@m@s} if necessary}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{The redefinition needs to take
-% place one level higher, \cs{prim@s} needs to be redefined.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx##1'%
- \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Also, make sure that a single |'| in math mode `does the right
-% thing'.
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Insert a check for math mode in the
-% definition of \cs{normal@char'}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/02}{use \cs{textormath} to get rid of
-% the \cs{fi} (PR 3266)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{%
- \textormath{##1}{^\bgroup\prim@s}}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If we are using the caret as a shorthand character special care
-% should be taken to make sure math still works. Therefor an extra
-% level of expansion is introduced with a check for math mode on
-% the upper level.
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Introduced an extra level of
-% expansion in the definition of an active caret}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx##1^%
- \gdef\bbl@act@caret{%
- \ifmmode
- \csname normal@char\string^\endcsname
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- {\if@safe@actives
- \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \fi}
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% To prevent problems with the loading of other packages after
-% \babel\ we reset the catcode of the character at the end of the
-% package.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/01}{Restore the category code of a
-% shorthand char at end of package}
-% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Made restoring of the category code
-% of shorthand characters optional}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{Use \cs{@ifpackagewith} to
-% determine whether shorthand characters need to remain active}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}{}{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\catcode`\noexpand##1\the\catcode`##1}%
- \expandafter\AtEndOfPackage\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now we set the lowercase code of the |~| equal to that of the
-% character to be made active and execute the rest of the code
-% inside a |\lowercase| `environment'.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{store the \cs{lccode} of the tie
-% before changing it}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@tempcnta=\lccode`\~
- \lccode`~=`##1%
- \lowercase{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make the character active and add it to |\dospecials| and
-% |\@sanitize|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \catcode`~\active
- \expandafter\bbl@add@special
- \csname \string##1\endcsname
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Also re-activate it again at |\begin{document}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \catcode`##1\active
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We also need to make sure that the shorthands are active during
-% the processing of the \file{.aux} file. Otherwise some citations
-% may give unexpected results in the printout when a shorthand was
-% used in the optional argument of |\bibitem| for example.
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Make shorthands active during
-% \file{.aux} file processing}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{%
- \string\catcode`##1\string\active}%
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Define the character to expand to
-% \begin{center}
-% |\active@prefix| \m{char} |\normal@char|\m{char}
-% \end{center}
-% (where |\active@char|\m{char} is \emph{one} control sequence!).
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{restore the \cs{lccode} of the tie}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\gdef
- \expandafter~%
- \expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1%
- \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}%
- \lccode`\~\@tempcnta
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For the active caret we first expand to |\bbl@act@caret| in order
-% to be able to handle math mode correctly.
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Make an exception for the active
-% caret which needs an extra level of expansion}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx##1^%
- \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{\bbl@act@caret}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We define the first level expansion of |\active@char|\m{char} to
-% check the status of the |@safe@actives| flag. If it is set to
-% true we expand to the `normal' version of this character,
-% otherwise we call |\@active@char|\m{char}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{%
- \if@safe@actives
- \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next level of the code checks whether a user has defined a
-% shorthand for himself with this character. First we check for a
-% single character shorthand. If that doesn't exist we check for a
-% shorthand with an argument.
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Skip the user-level active char
-% with argument if no shorthands with arguments were defined}
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{user@active\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\user@group##1%
- {user@active@arg\string##1}{language@active\string##1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When there is also no user-level shorthand with an argument we
-% will check whether there is a language defined shorthand for
-% this active character. Before the next token is absorbed as
-% argument we need to make sure that this is safe. Therefor
-% |\peek@token| is called to decide that.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/07}{use \cs{peek@token} to check whether
-% it is safe to proceed}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Remove the use of \cs{peek@token}
-% again and make the \cs{...active@arg...} commands \cs{long}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{pass the argument on with braces in
-% order to prevent it from breaking up}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{remove the braces again}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \long\@namedef{user@active@arg\string##1}####1{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse
- \csname language@active\string##1\endcsname####1%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@%
- \endcsname
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In order to do the right thing when a shorthand with an argument
-% is used by itself at the end of the line we provide a definition
-% for the case of an empty argument. For that case we let the
-% shorthand character expand to its non-active self.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{\user@group @sh@\string##1@@}{%
- \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Like the shorthands that can be defined by the user, a language
-% definition file can also define shorthands with and without an
-% argument, so we need two more macros to check if they exist.
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Skip the language-level active char
-% with argument if no shorthands with arguments were defined}
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{language@active\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\language@group##1%
- {language@active@arg\string##1}{system@active\string##1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/07}{use \cs{peek@token} to check whether
-% it is safe to proceed}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Remove the use of \cs{peek@token}
-% again}
-% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{pass the argument on with braces in
-% order to prevent it from breaking up}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{remove the braces again}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \long\@namedef{language@active@arg\string##1}####1{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse
- \csname system@active\string##1\endcsname####1%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@%
- \endcsname
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And the same goes for the system level.
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{system@active\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\system@group##1%
- {system@active@arg\string##1}{normal@char\string##1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When no shorthands were found the `normal' version of the active
-% character is inserted.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/07}{use \cs{peek@token} to check whether
-% it is safe to proceed}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Remove the use of \cs{peek@token}
-% again}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \long\@namedef{system@active@arg\string##1}####1{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname####1%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When a shorthand combination such as |''| ends up in a heading
-% \TeX\ would see |\protect'\protect'|. To prevent this from
-% happening a shorthand needs to be defined at user level.
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/09}{Added an extra shorthand
-% combination on user level to catch an interfering \cs{protect}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{user@sh@\string##1@\string\protect@}{%
- \csname user@active\string##1\endcsname}%
- }%
- }\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@sh@select}
-% This command helps the shorthand supporting macros to select how
-% to proceed. Note that this macro needs to be expandable as do all
-% the shorthand macros in order for them to work in expansion-only
-% environments such as the argument of |\hyphenation|.
-%
-% This macro expects the name of a group of shorthands in its first
-% argument and a shorthand character in its second argument. It
-% will expand to either |\bbl@firstcs| or |\bbl@scndcs|. Hence two
-% more arguments need to follow it.
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Added command}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@sh@select#1#2{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\relax
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@scndcs
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\active@prefix}
-% The command |\active@prefix| which is used in the expansion of
-% active characters has a function similar to |\OT1-cmd| in that it
-% |\protect|s the active character whenever |\protect| is
-% \emph{not} |\@typeset@protect|.
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{\cs{@protected@cmd} has vanished
-% from \file{ltoutenc.dtx}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/17}{Added handling of the situation
-% where \cs{protect} is set to \cs{@unexpandable@protect}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\active@prefix#1{%
- \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When |\protect| is set to |\@unexpandable@protect| we make sure
-% that the active character is als \emph{not} expanded by inserting
-% |\noexpand| in front of it. The |\@gobble| is needed to remove
-% a token such as |\activechar:| (when the double colon was the
-% active character to be dealt with).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterfi\noexpand#1\@gobble
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterfi\protect#1\@gobble
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\if@safe@actives}
-% In some circumstances it is necessary to be able to change the
-% expansion of an active character on the fly. For this purpose the
-% switch |@safe@actives| is available. The setting of this switch
-% should be checked in the first level expansion of
-% |\active@char|\m{char}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@safe@actives
-\@safe@activesfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@restore@actives}
-% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{New macro added}
-% When the output routine kicks in while the
-% active characters were made ``safe'' this must be undone in
-% the headers to prevent unexpected typeset results. For this
-% situation we define a command to make them ``unsafe'' again.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@restore@actives{\if@safe@actives\@safe@activesfalse\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@activate}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro}
-%
-% This macro takes one argument, like |\initiate@active@char|. The
-% macro is used to change the definition of an active character to
-% expand to |\active@char|\m{char} instead of
-% |\normal@char|\m{char}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@activate#1{%
- \expandafter\def
- \expandafter#1\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix
- \expandafter#1\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@deactivate}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro}
-% This macro takes one argument, like |\bbl@activate|. The macro
-% doesn't really make a character non-active; it changes its
-% definition to expand to |\normal@char|\m{char}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@deactivate#1{%
- \expandafter\def
- \expandafter#1\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix
- \expandafter#1\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@firstcs}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@scndcs}
-% These macros have two arguments. They use one of their arguments
-% to build a control sequence from.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@firstcs#1#2{\csname#1\endcsname}
-\def\bbl@scndcs#1#2{\csname#2\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\declare@shorthand}
-% The command |\declare@shorthand| is used to declare a shorthand
-% on a certain level. It takes three arguments:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item a name for the collection of shorthands, i.e. `system', or
-% `dutch';
-% \item the character (sequence) that makes up the shorthand,
-% i.e. |~| or |"a|;
-% \item the code to be executed when the shorthand is encountered.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Make a `note' when a shorthand with
-% an argument is defined.}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/23}{Make it possible to distinguish the
-% constructed control sequences for the case with argument}
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{We need to support shorthands with
-% and without argument in different groups; added the name of the
-% group to the storage macro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\declare@shorthand#1#2{\@decl@short{#1}#2\@nil}
-\def\@decl@short#1#2#3\@nil#4{%
- \def\bbl@tempa{#3}%
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty
- \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@scndcs
- \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@}{#4}%
- \else
- \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@firstcs
- \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{#4}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textormath}
-% Some of the shorthands that will be declared by the language
-% definition files have to be usable in both text and mathmode. To
-% achieve this the helper macro |\textormath| is provided.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\textormath#1#2{%
- \ifmmode
- \bbl@afterelse#2%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi#1%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\user@group}
-% \begin{macro}{\language@group}
-% \begin{macro}{\system@group}
-% The current concept of `shorthands' supports three levels or
-% groups of shorthands. For each level the name of the level or
-% group is stored in a macro. The default is to have a user group;
-% use language group `english' and have a system group called
-% `system'.
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/24}{Have a user group called `user' by
-% default}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\user@group{user}
-\def\language@group{english}
-\def\system@group{system}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\useshorthands}
-% This is the user level command to tell \LaTeX\ that user level
-% shorthands will be used in the document. It takes one argument,
-% the character that starts a shorthand.
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2001/11/11}{When \TeX\ has seen a character
-% its category code is fixed; need to use a `stand-in' for the
-% call of \cs{bbl@activate}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\useshorthands#1{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First note that this is user level.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\user@group{user}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then initialize the character for use as a shorthand character.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \initiate@active@char{#1}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now that \TeX\ has seen the character its category code is
-% fixed, but for the actions of |\bbl@activate| to succeed we need
-% it to be active. Hence the trick with the |\lccode| to circumvent
-% this.
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/09/11}{The change from 11/112001 was
-% incomplete}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@tempcnta\lccode`\~
- \lccode`~=`#1%
- \lowercase{\catcode`~\active\bbl@activate{~}}%
- \lccode`\~\@tempcnta}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\defineshorthand}
-% Currently we only support one group of user level shorthands,
-% called `user'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\defineshorthand{\declare@shorthand{user}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\languageshorthands}
-% A user level command to change the language from which shorthands
-% are used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\languageshorthands#1{\def\language@group{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\aliasshorthand}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{New command}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\aliasshorthand#1#2{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First the new shorthand needs to be initialized,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax
- \ifx\document\@notprerr
- \@notshorthand{#2}
- \else
- \initiate@active@char{#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we need to use the |\lccode| trick to make the new shorthand
-% behave like the old one. Therefore we save the current |\lccode|
-% of the |~|-character and restore it later. Then we |\let| the new
-% shorthand character be equal to the original.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@tempcnta\lccode`\~
- \lccode`~=`#2%
- \lowercase{\let~#1}%
- \lccode`\~\@tempcnta
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@notshorthand}
-% \changes{v3.8d}{2004/11/20}{Error message added}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@notshorthand#1{%
- \PackageError{babel}{%
- The character `\string #1' should be made
- a shorthand character;\MessageBreak
- add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to
- the preamble.\MessageBreak
- I will ignore your instruction}{}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\shorthandon}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command}
-% \begin{macro}{\shorthandoff}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command}
-% The first level definition of these macros just passes the
-% argument on to |\bbl@switch@sh|, adding |\@nil| at the end to
-% denote the end of the list of characters.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{on}#1\@nil}
-\newcommand*\shorthandoff[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{off}#1\@nil}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command}
-% The macro |\bbl@switch@sh| takes the list of characters apart one
-% by one and subsequently switches the category code of the
-% shorthand character according to the first argument of
-% |\bbl@switch@sh|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2#3\@nil{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% But before any of this switching takes place we make sure that
-% the character we are dealing with is known as a shorthand
-% character. If it is, a macro such as |\active@char"| should
-% exist.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{active@char\string#2}{%
- \PackageError{babel}{%
- The character '\string #2' is not a shorthand character
- in \languagename}{%
- Maybe you made a typing mistake?\MessageBreak
- I will ignore your instruction}}{%
- \csname bbl@switch@sh@#1\endcsname#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now that, as the first character in the list has been taken care
-% of, we pass the rest of the list back to |\bbl@switch@sh|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx#3\@empty\else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh{#1}#3\@nil
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh@off}
-% All that is left to do is define the actual switching
-% macros. Switching off is easy, we just set the category code to
-% `other' (12).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@switch@sh@off#1{\catcode`#112\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh@on}
-% But switching the shorthand character back on is a bit more
-% tricky. It involves making sure that we have an active character
-% to begin with when the macro is being defined. It also needs the
-% use of |\lowercase| and |\lccode| trickery to get everything to
-% work out as expected. And to keep things local that need to
-% remain local a group is opened, which is closed as soon as |\x|
-% gets executed.
-% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/21}{Added a group in order to protect
-% the current lowercase code of the tilde (PR 3851)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\~\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\bbl@switch@sh@on##1{%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`~=`##1%
- \lowercase{\endgroup
- \catcode`~\active
- }%
- }%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% The next operation makes the above definition effective.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\x
-%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% To prevent problems with constructs such as |\char"01A| when the
-% double quote is made active, we define a shorthand on
-% system level.
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Replaced 16 system shorthands to
-% deal with hex numbers by one}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{"}{\csname normal@char\string"\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When the right quote is made active we need to take care of
-% handling it correctly in mathmode. Therefore we define a
-% shorthand at system level to make it expand to a non-active right
-% quote in textmode, but expand to its original definition in
-% mathmode. (Note that the right quote is `active' in mathmode
-% because of its mathcode.)
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added a system shorthand for the
-% right quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{'}{%
- \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}%
- {\sp\bgroup\prim@s}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When the left quote is made active we need to take care of
-% handling it correctly when it is followed by for instance an open
-% brace token. Therefore we define a shorthand at system level to
-% make it expand to a non-active left quote.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/03/06}{Added a system shorthand for the
-% left quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{`}{\csname normal@char\string`\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@prim@s}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/01}{Need to redefine \cs{prim@s} as
-% well as plain \TeX's definition uses \cs{next}}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pr@m@s}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added macro}
-% One of the internal macros that are involved in substituting
-% |\prime| for each right quote in mathmode is |\prim@s|. This
-% checks if the next character is a right quote. When the right
-% quote is active, the definition of this macro needs to be adapted
-% to look for an active right quote.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@prim@s{%
- \prime\futurelet\@let@token\bbl@pr@m@s}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\'\active\let'\relax
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\bbl@pr@m@s{%
- \ifx'\@let@token
- \expandafter\pr@@@s
- \else
- \ifx^\@let@token
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\pr@@@t
- \else
- \egroup
- \fi
- \fi}%
- }
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</core|shorthands>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Normally the |~| is active and expands to \verb*=\penalty\@M\ =.
-% When it is written to the \file{.aux} file it is written
-% expanded. To prevent that and to be able to use the character |~|
-% as a start character for a shorthand, it is redefined here as a
-% one character shorthand on system level.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/02}{No need to reset the category code
-% of the tilde as \cs{initiate@active@char} now correctly deals
-% with active characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core>
-\initiate@active@char{~}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{~}{\leavevmode\nobreak\ }
-\bbl@activate{~}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\OT1dqpos}
-% \begin{macro}{\T1dqpos}
-% The position of the double quote character is different for the
-% OT1 and T1 encodings. It will later be selected using the
-% |\f@encoding| macro. Therefor we define two macros here to store
-% the position of the character in these encodings.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\csname OT1dqpos\endcsname{127}
-\expandafter\def\csname T1dqpos\endcsname{4}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the macro |\f@encoding| is undefined (as it is in plain
-% \TeX) we define it here to expand to \texttt{OT1}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\f@encoding\@undefined
- \def\f@encoding{OT1}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Language attributes}
-%
-% Language attributes provide a means to give the user control over
-% which features of the language definition files he wants to
-% enable.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1998/07/02}{Added support for language
-% attributes}
-% \begin{macro}{\languageattribute}
-% The macro |\languageattribute| checks whether its arguments are
-% valid and then activates the selected language attribute.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand\languageattribute[2]{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First check whether the language is known.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Than process each attribute in the list.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@for\bbl@attr:=#2\do{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We want to make sure that each attribute is selected only once;
-% therefor we store the already selected attributes in
-% |\bbl@known@attribs|. When that control sequence is not yet
-% defined this attribute is certainly not selected before.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined
- \in@false
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now we need to see if the attribute occurs in the list of
-% already selected attributes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-\bbl@attr,}%
- {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}%
- \bbl@tempa
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the attribute was in the list we issue a warning; this might
-% not be the users intention.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifin@
- \PackageWarning{Babel}{%
- You have more than once selected the attribute
- '\bbl@attr'\MessageBreak for language #1}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When we end up here the attribute is not selected before. So, we
-% add it to the list of selected attributes and execute the
-% associated \TeX-code.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\bbl@tempa{%
- \noexpand\bbl@add@list\noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{#1-\bbl@attr}}%
- \bbl@tempa
- \edef\bbl@tempa{#1-\bbl@attr}%
- \expandafter\bbl@ifknown@ttrib\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}\bbl@attributes%
- {\csname#1@attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}%
- {\@attrerr{#1}{\bbl@attr}}%
- \fi
- }
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@onlypreamble\languageattribute
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The error text to be issued when an unknown attribute is
-% selected.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}%
- {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@declare@ttribute}
-% This command adds the new language/attribute combination to the
-% list of known attributes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@declare@ttribute#1#2#3{%
- \bbl@add@list\bbl@attributes{#1-#2}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then it defines a control sequence to be executed when the
-% attribute is used in a document. The result of this should be
-% that the macro |\extras...| for the current language is extended,
-% otherwise the attribute will not work as its code is removed from
-% memory at |\begin{document}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifattributeset}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/12}{macro added}
-% This internal macro has 4 arguments. It can be used to interpret
-% \TeX\ code based on whether a certain attribute was set. This
-% command should appear inside the argument to |\AtBeginDocument|
-% because the attributes are set in the document preamble,
-% \emph{after} \babel\ is loaded.
-%
-% The first argument is the language, the second argument the
-% attribute being checked, and the third and fourth arguments are
-% the true and false clauses.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@ifattributeset#1#2#3#4{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we need to find out if any attributes were set; if not
-% we're done.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined
- \in@false
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The we need to check the list of known attributes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-#2,}%
- {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}%
- \bbl@tempa
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When we're this far |\ifin@| has a value indicating if the
-% attribute in question was set or not. Just to be safe the code to
-% be executed is `thrown over the |\fi|'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifin@
- \bbl@afterelse#3%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi#4%
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@list}
-% This internal macro adds its second argument to a comma
-% separated list in its first argument. When the list is not
-% defined yet (or empty), it will be initiated
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@add@list#1#2{%
- \ifx#1\@undefined
- \def#1{#2}%
- \else
- \ifx#1\@empty
- \def#1{#2}%
- \else
- \edef#1{#1,#2}%
- \fi
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifknown@ttrib}
-% An internal macro to check whether a given language/attribute is
-% known. The macro takes 4 arguments, the language/attribute, the
-% attribute list, the \TeX-code to be executed when the attribute
-% is known and the \TeX-code to be executed otherwise.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@ifknown@ttrib#1#2{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We first assume the attribute is unknown.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\bbl@tempa\@secondoftwo
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we loop over the list of known attributes, trying to find a
-% match.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@for\bbl@tempb:=#2\do{%
- \expandafter\in@\expandafter{\expandafter,\bbl@tempb,}{,#1,}%
- \ifin@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When a match is found the definition of |\bbl@tempa| is changed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Finally we execute |\bbl@tempa|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \bbl@tempa
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@clear@ttribs}
-% This macro removes all the attribute code from \LaTeX's memory at
-% |\begin{document}| time (if any is present).
-% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{When \cs{bbl@attributes} is
-% undefined this should be a no-op}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@clear@ttribs{%
- \ifx\bbl@attributes\@undefined\else
- \@for\bbl@tempa:=\bbl@attributes\do{%
- \expandafter\bbl@clear@ttrib\bbl@tempa.
- }%
- \let\bbl@attributes\@undefined
- \fi
- }
-\def\bbl@clear@ttrib#1-#2.{%
- \expandafter\let\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname\@undefined}
-\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@clear@ttribs}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Support for saving macro definitions}
-%
-% To save the meaning of control sequences using |\babel@save|, we
-% use temporary control sequences. To save hash table entries for
-% these control sequences, we don't use the name of the control
-% sequence to be saved to construct the temporary name. Instead we
-% simply use the value of a counter, which is reset to zero each
-% time we begin to save new values. This works well because we
-% release the saved meanings before we begin to save a new set of
-% control sequence meanings (see |\selectlanguage| and
-% |\originalTeX|).
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\babel@savecnt}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\babel@beginsave}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
-% The initialization of a new save cycle: reset the counter to
-% zero.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\babel@beginsave{\babel@savecnt\z@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Before it's forgotten, allocate the counter and initialize all.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\babel@savecnt
-\babel@beginsave
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\babel@save}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
-% The macro |\babel@save|\meta{csname} saves the current meaning of
-% the control sequence \meta{csname} to
-% |\originalTeX|\footnote{\cs{originalTeX} has to be
-% expandable, i.\,e.\ you shouldn't let it to \cs{relax}.}.
-% To do this, we let the current meaning to a temporary control
-% sequence, the restore commands are appended to |\originalTeX| and
-% the counter is incremented.
-% \changes{babel~3.2c}{1992/03/17}{missing backslash led to errors
-% when executing \cs{originalTeX}}
-% \changes{babel~3.2d}{1992/07/02}{saving in \cs{babel@i} and
-% restoring from \cs{@babel@i} doesn't work very well...}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\babel@save#1{%
- \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname #1\relax
- \begingroup
- \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX \let#1=}%
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \expandafter\noexpand
- \csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname\relax}}%
- \x
- \advance\babel@savecnt\@ne}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\babel@savevariable}
-% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
-% The macro |\babel@savevariable|\meta{variable} saves the value of
-% the variable. \meta{variable} can be anything allowed after the
-% |\the| primitive.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\babel@savevariable#1{\begingroup
- \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX #1=}%
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \the#1\relax}}%
- \x}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% Some languages need to have |\frenchspacing| in effect. Others
-% don't want that. The command |\bbl@frenchspacing| switches it on
-% when it isn't already in effect and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing|
-% switches it off if necessary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@frenchspacing{%
- \ifnum\the\sfcode`\.=\@m
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax
- \else
- \frenchspacing
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing
- \fi}
-\let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Support for extending macros}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\addto}
-% For each language four control sequences have to be defined that
-% control the language-specific definitions. To be able to add
-% something to these macro once they have been defined the macro
-% |\addto| is introduced. It takes two arguments, a \meta{control
-% sequence} and \TeX-code to be added to the \meta{control
-% sequence}.
-%
-% If the \meta{control sequence} has not been defined before it is
-% defined now.
-% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Added macro}
-% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/04}{Changed to use toks register}
-% \changes{babel~3.6b}{1996/12/30}{Also check if control sequence
-% expands to \cs{relax}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\addto#1#2{%
- \ifx#1\@undefined
- \def#1{#2}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The control sequence could also expand to |\relax|, in which case
-% a circular definition results. The net result is a stack overflow.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx#1\relax
- \def#1{#2}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Otherwise the replacement text for the \meta{control sequence} is
-% expanded and stored in a token register, together with the
-% \TeX-code to be added. Finally the \meta{control sequence} is
-% \emph{re}defined, using the contents of the token register.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}%
- \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}%
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\allowhyphens}
-% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language
-% definition files}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \cs{allowhyphens} a no-op for
-% T1 fontencoding}
-% This macro makes hyphenation possible. Basically its definition
-% is nothing more than |\nobreak| |\hskip| \texttt{0pt plus
-% 0pt}\footnote{\TeX\ begins and ends a word for hyphenation at a
-% glue node. The penalty prevents a linebreak at this glue node.}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@t@one{T1}
-\def\allowhyphens{%
- \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi}
-\def\bbl@allowhyphens{\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\set@low@box}
-% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language
-% definition files}
-% The following macro is used to lower quotes to the same level as
-% the comma. It prepares its argument in box register~0.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}%
- \dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@%
- \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\save@sf@q}
-% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language
-% definition files}
-% The macro |\save@sf@q| is used to save and reset the current
-% space factor.
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/19}{PR3119, don't start a paragraph in
-% a local group}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\save@sf@q #1{\leavevmode
- \begingroup
- \edef\@SF{\spacefactor \the\spacefactor}#1\@SF
- \endgroup
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@disc}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/24}{Macro moved from language
-% definition files}
-% For some languages the macro |\bbl@disc| is used to ease the
-% insertion of discretionaries for letters that behave `abnormally'
-% at a breakpoint.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@disc#1#2{%
- \nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{Repaired a typo (itlaic, PR1652)}
-%
-% \subsection{Making glyphs available}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion, and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} makes a number of glyphs available that either do not
-% exist in the \texttt{OT1} encoding and have to be `faked', or
-% that are not accessible through \file{T1enc.def}.
-%
-% \subsection{Quotation marks}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\quotedblbase}
-% In the \texttt{T1} encoding the opening double quote at the
-% baseline is available as a separate character, accessible via
-% |\quotedblbase|. In the \texttt{OT1} encoding it is not
-% available, therefor we make it available by lowering the normal
-% open quote character to the baseline.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\quotedblbase}{OT1}{%
- \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquotedblright\/}%
- \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
-% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotedblbase}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotedblbase}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\quotesinglbase}
-% We also need the single quote character at the baseline.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\quotesinglbase}{OT1}{%
- \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquoteright\/}%
- \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
-% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotesinglbase}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotesinglbase}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\guillemotleft}
-% \begin{macro}{\guillemotright}
-% The guillemet characters are not available in \texttt{OT1}
-% encoding. They are faked.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode
- \ll
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\allowhyphens}%
- \fi}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode
- \gg
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\allowhyphens}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
-% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotleft}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotleft}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotright}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotright}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglleft}
-% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglright}
-% The single guillemets are not available in \texttt{OT1}
-% encoding. They are faked.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglleft}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode
- <%
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\allowhyphens}%
- \fi}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode
- >%
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\allowhyphens}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
-% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglleft}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglleft}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglright}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglright}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Letters}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ij}
-% \begin{macro}{\IJ}
-% The dutch language uses the letter `ij'. It is available in
-% \texttt{T1} encoded fonts, but not in the \texttt{OT1} encoded
-% fonts. Therefor we fake it for the \texttt{OT1} encoding.
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Changed the kerning in the faked ij
-% to match the dc-version of it}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{OT1}{%
- \allowhyphens i\kern-0.02em j\allowhyphens}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{OT1}{%
- \allowhyphens I\kern-0.02em J\allowhyphens}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{T1}{\char188}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{T1}{\char156}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
-% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\ij}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ij}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\IJ}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\IJ}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dj}
-% \begin{macro}{\DJ}
-% The croatian language needs the letters |\dj| and |\DJ|; they are
-% available in the \texttt{T1} encoding, but not in the
-% \texttt{OT1} encoding by default.
-%
-% Some code to construct these glyphs for the \texttt{OT1} encoding
-% was made available to me by Stipcevic Mario,
-% (\texttt{stipcevic@olimp.irb.hr}).
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/03/28}{New definition of \cs{dj}, see PR
-% 2058}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\crrtic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.3em}
-\def\crttic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.33em}
-%
-\def\ddj@{%
- \setbox0\hbox{d}\dimen@=\ht0
- \advance\dimen@1ex
- \dimen@.45\dimen@
- \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@
- \advance\dimen@ii.5ex
- \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crrtic@}}}}
-\def\DDJ@{%
- \setbox0\hbox{D}\dimen@=.55\ht0
- \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@
- \advance\dimen@ii.15ex % correction for the dash position
- \advance\dimen@ii-.15\fontdimen7\font % correction for cmtt font
- \dimen\thr@@\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen7\font\dimen@
- \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crttic@}}}}
-%
-\DeclareTextCommand{\dj}{OT1}{\ddj@ d}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\DJ}{OT1}{\DDJ@ D}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
-% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\dj}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\dj}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\DJ}{%
- \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\DJ}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SS}
-% For the \texttt{T1} encoding |\SS| is defined and selects a
-% specific glyph from the font, but for other encodings it is not
-% available. Therefor we make it available here.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\SS}{OT1}{SS}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\SS}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\SS}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}
-%
-% Shorthands are provided for a number of different quotation
-% marks, which make them usable both outside and inside mathmode.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\glq}
-% \begin{macro}{\grq}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grq}
-% dependent on the font encoding}
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{glq} fontencoding
-% dependent as well}
-% The `german' single quotes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{OT1}{%
- \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The definition of |\grq| depends on the fontencoding. With
-% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{OT1}{%
- \save@sf@q{\kern-.0125em%
- \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}%
- \kern.07em\relax}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\glqq}
-% \begin{macro}{\grqq}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grqq}
-% dependent on the font encoding}
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{grqq} fontencoding
-% dependent as well}
-% The `german' double quotes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{OT1}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The definition of |\grqq| depends on the fontencoding. With
-% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{OT1}{%
- \save@sf@q{\kern-.07em%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}%
- \kern.07em\relax}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\flq}
-% \begin{macro}{\frq}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of
-% \cs{quilsingl...}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these
-% definitions}
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flq} and \cs{frq}
-% fontencoding dependent}
-% The `french' single guillemets.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{OT1}{%
- \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{OT1}{%
- \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\flqq}
-% \begin{macro}{\frqq}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of
-% \cs{quillemot...}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these
-% definitions}
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flqq} and \cs{frqq}
-% fontencoding dependent}
-% The `french' double guillemets.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{OT1}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{OT1}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{T1}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Umlauts and trema's}
-%
-% The command |\"| needs to have a different effect for different
-% languages. For German for instance, the `umlaut' should be
-% positioned lower than the default position for placing it over
-% the letters a, o, u, A, O and U. When placed over an e, i, E or I
-% it can retain its normal position. For Dutch the same glyph is
-% always placed in the lower position.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\umlauthigh}
-% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to
-% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.}
-% \begin{macro}{\umlautlow}
-% To be able to provide both positions of |\"| we provide two
-% commands to switch the positioning, the default will be
-% |\umlauthigh| (the normal positioning).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\umlauthigh{%
- \def\bbl@umlauta##1{\leavevmode\bgroup%
- \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname
- ##1\allowhyphens\egroup}%
- \let\bbl@umlaute\bbl@umlauta}
-\def\umlautlow{%
- \def\bbl@umlauta{\protect\lower@umlaut}}
-\def\umlautelow{%
- \def\bbl@umlaute{\protect\lower@umlaut}}
-\umlauthigh
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lower@umlaut}
-% The command |\lower@umlaut| is used to position the |\"| closer
-% the the letter.
-%
-% We want the umlaut character lowered, nearer to the letter. To do
-% this we need an extra \meta{dimen} register.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname U@D\endcsname\relax
- \csname newdimen\endcsname\U@D
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The following code fools \TeX's \texttt{make\_accent} procedure
-% about the current x-height of the font to force another placement
-% of the umlaut character.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lower@umlaut#1{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we have to save the current x-height of the font, because
-% we'll change this font dimension and this is always done
-% globally.
-% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to
-% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \leavevmode\bgroup
- \U@D 1ex%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we compute the new x-height in such a way that the umlaut
-% character is lowered to the base character. The value of
-% \texttt{.45ex} depends on the \MF\ parameters with which the
-% fonts were built. (Just try out, which value will look best.)
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{%
- \expandafter\char\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname}%
- \dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If the new x-height is too low, it is not changed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Finally we call the |\accent| primitive, reset the old x-height
-% and insert the base character in the argument.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/02}{Added a \cs{allowhyphens}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/06/25}{removed \cs{allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname
- \fontdimen5\font\U@D #1%
- \egroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For all vowels we declare |\"| to be a composite command which
-% uses |\bbl@umlauta| or |\bbl@umlaute| to position the umlaut
-% character. We need to be sure that these definitions override the
-% ones that are provided when the package \pkg{fontenc} with
-% option \Lopt{OT1} is used. Therefor these declarations are
-% postponed until the beginning of the document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{a}{\bbl@umlauta{a}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{e}{\bbl@umlaute{e}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{\i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{o}{\bbl@umlauta{o}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{u}{\bbl@umlauta{u}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{A}{\bbl@umlauta{A}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{E}{\bbl@umlaute{E}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{I}{\bbl@umlaute{I}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{O}{\bbl@umlauta{O}}%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{U}{\bbl@umlauta{U}}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The redefinition of the style commands}
-%
-% The rest of the code in this file can only be processed by
-% \LaTeX, so we check the current format. If it is plain \TeX,
-% processing should stop here. But, because of the need to limit
-% the scope of the definition of |\format|, a macro that is used
-% locally in the following |\if|~statement, this comparison is done
-% inside a group. To prevent \TeX\ from complaining about an
-% unclosed group, the processing of the command |\endinput| is
-% deferred until after the group is closed. This is accomplished by
-% the command |\aftergroup|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-{\def\format{lplain}
-\ifx\fmtname\format
-\else
- \def\format{LaTeX2e}
- \ifx\fmtname\format
- \else
- \aftergroup\endinput
- \fi
-\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now that we're sure that the code is seen by \LaTeX\ only, we
-% have to find out what the main (primary) document style is
-% because we want to redefine some macros. This is only necessary
-% for releases of \LaTeX\ dated before December~1991. Therefor
-% this part of the code can optionally be included in
-% \file{babel.def} by specifying the \texttt{docstrip} option
-% \texttt{names}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*names>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The standard styles can be distinguished by checking whether some
-% macros are defined. In table~\ref{styles} an overview is given of
-% the macros that can be used for this purpose.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
-% \begin{tabular}{|lcp{8cm}|}
-% \hline
-% article & : & both the \verb+\chapter+ and \verb+\opening+
-% macros are undefined\\
-% report and book & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is defined and
-% the \verb+\opening+ is undefined\\
-% letter & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is undefined and
-% the \verb+\opening+ is defined\\
-% \hline
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{How to determine the main document style}\label{styles}
-% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \noindent The macros that have to be redefined for the
-% \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles happen to be
-% the same, so there is no need to distinguish between those two
-% styles.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\doc@style}
-% First a parameter |\doc@style| is defined to identify the current
-% document style. This parameter might have been defined by a
-% document style that already uses macros instead of hard-wired
-% texts, such as \file{artikel1.sty}~\cite{BEP}, so the existence of
-% |\doc@style| is checked. If this macro is undefined, i.\,e., if
-% the document style is unknown and could therefore contain
-% hard-wired texts, |\doc@style| is defined to the default
-% value~`0'.
-% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\@undefined\doc@style
- \def\doc@style{0}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This parameter is defined in the following \texttt{if}
-% construction (see table~\ref{styles}):
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\@undefined\opening
- \ifx\@undefined\chapter
- \def\doc@style{1}%
- \else
- \def\doc@style{2}%
- \fi
- \else
- \def\doc@style{3}%
- \fi%
-\fi%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed definition of
-% \cs{if@restonecol}}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Redefinition of macros}
-%
-% Now here comes the real work: we start to redefine things and
-% replace hard-wired texts by macros. These redefinitions should be
-% carried out conditionally, in case it has already been done.
-%
-% For the \texttt{figure} and \texttt{table} environments we have
-% in all styles:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{figurename}{\def\fnum@figure{\figurename{} \thefigure}}{}
-\@ifundefined{tablename}{\def\fnum@table{\tablename{} \thetable}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The rest of the macros have to be treated differently for each
-% style. When |\doc@style| still has its default value nothing
-% needs to be done.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifcase \doc@style\relax
-\or
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This means that \file{babel.def} is read after the
-% \texttt{article} style, where no |\chapter| and |\opening|
-% commands are defined\footnote{A fact that was pointed out to me
-% by Nico Poppelier and was already used in Piet van Oostrum's
-% document style option~\texttt{nl}.}.
-%
-% First we have the |\tableofcontents|,
-% |\listoffigures| and |\listoftables|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{contentsname}%
- {\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname\@mkboth
- {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}%
- \@starttoc{toc}}}{}
-
-\@ifundefined{listfigurename}%
- {\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth
- {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}%
- \@starttoc{lof}}}{}
-
-\@ifundefined{listtablename}%
- {\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename\@mkboth
- {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}%
- \@starttoc{lot}}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then the |\thebibliography| and |\theindex| environments.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{refname}%
- {\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname
- \@mkboth{\uppercase{\refname}}{\uppercase{\refname}}}%
- \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%
- \leftmargin\labelwidth
- \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
- \usecounter{enumi}}%
- \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}%
- \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{}
-
-\@ifundefined{indexname}%
- {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
- \columnseprule \z@
- \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
- \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@\let\item\@idxitem}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The |abstract| environment:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{abstractname}%
- {\def\abstract{\if@twocolumn
- \section*{\abstractname}%
- \else \small
- \begin{center}%
- {\bf \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}%
- \end{center}%
- \quotation
- \fi}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And last but not least, the macro |\part|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{partname}%
-{\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart
- \hspace{1em}#1}\else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi
- {\parindent\z@ \raggedright
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \Large \bf \partname{} \thepart
- \par \nobreak
- \fi
- \huge \bf
- #2\markboth{}{}\par}%
- \nobreak
- \vskip 3ex\@afterheading}%
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This is all that needs to be done for the \texttt{article} style.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\or
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next case is formed by the two styles \texttt{book} and
-% \texttt{report}. Basically we have to do the same as for the
-% \texttt{article} style, except now we must also change the
-% |\chapter| command.
-%
-% The tables of contents, figures and tables:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{contentsname}%
- {\def\tableofcontents{\@restonecolfalse
- \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth
- {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}%
- \@starttoc{toc}%
- \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn
- \csname fi\endcsname}}{}
-
-\@ifundefined{listfigurename}%
- {\def\listoffigures{\@restonecolfalse
- \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth
- {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}%
- \@starttoc{lof}%
- \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn
- \csname fi\endcsname}}{}
-
-\@ifundefined{listtablename}%
- {\def\listoftables{\@restonecolfalse
- \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
- \fi\chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth
- {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}%
- \@starttoc{lot}%
- \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn
- \csname fi\endcsname}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Again, the |bibliography| and |index| environments; notice that
-% in this case we use |\bibname| instead of |\refname| as in the
-% definitions for the \texttt{article} style. The reason for this
-% is that in the \texttt{article} document style the term
-% `References' is used in the definition of |\thebibliography|. In
-% the \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles the term
-% `Bibliography' is used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{bibname}%
- {\def\thebibliography#1{\chapter*{\bibname
- \@mkboth{\uppercase{\bibname}}{\uppercase{\bibname}}}%
- \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%
- \leftmargin\labelwidth \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
- \usecounter{enumi}}%
- \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}%
- \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty
- \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{}
-
-\@ifundefined{indexname}%
- {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
- \columnseprule \z@
- \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]%
- \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}%
- \thispagestyle{plain}%
- \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@ \let\item\@idxitem}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here is the |abstract| environment:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{abstractname}%
- {\def\abstract{\titlepage
- \null\vfil
- \begin{center}%
- {\bf \abstractname}%
- \end{center}}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And last but not least the |\chapter|, |\appendix| and
-% |\part| macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{chaptername}{\def\@chapapp{\chaptername}}{}
-%
-\@ifundefined{appendixname}%
- {\def\appendix{\par
- \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
- \setcounter{section}{0}%
- \def\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
- \def\thechapter{\Alph{chapter}}}}{}
-%
-\@ifundefined{partname}%
- {\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart
- \hspace{1em}#1}\else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi
- \markboth{}{}%
- {\centering
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \huge\bf \partname{} \thepart
- \par
- \vskip 20pt \fi
- \Huge \bf
- #1\par}\@endpart}}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\or
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we address the case where \file{babel.def} is read after the
-% \texttt{letter} style. The \texttt{letter} document style
-% defines the macro |\opening| and some other macros that are
-% specific to \texttt{letter}. This means that we have to redefine
-% other macros, compared to the previous two cases.
-%
-% First two macros for the material at the end of a letter, the
-% |\cc| and |\encl| macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{ccname}%
- {\def\cc#1{\par\noindent
- \parbox[t]{\textwidth}%
- {\@hangfrom{\rm \ccname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{}
-
-\@ifundefined{enclname}%
- {\def\encl#1{\par\noindent
- \parbox[t]{\textwidth}%
- {\@hangfrom{\rm \enclname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The last thing we have to do here is to redefine the
-% \texttt{headings} pagestyle:
-% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifundefined{headtoname}%
- {\def\ps@headings{%
- \def\@oddhead{\sl \headtoname{} \ignorespaces\toname \hfil
- \@date \hfil \pagename{} \thepage}%
- \def\@oddfoot{}}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This was the last of the four standard document styles, so if
-% |\doc@style| has another value we do nothing and just close the
-% \texttt{if} construction.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Here ends the code that can be optionally included when a version
-% of \LaTeX\ is in use that is dated \emph{before} December~1991.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</names>
-%</core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Cross referencing macros}
-%
-% The \LaTeX\ book states:
-% \begin{quote}
-% The \emph{key} argument is any sequence of letters, digits, and
-% punctuation symbols; upper- and lowercase letters are regarded as
-% different.
-% \end{quote}
-% When the above quote should still be true when a document is
-% typeset in a language that has active characters, special care
-% has to be taken of the category codes of these characters when
-% they appear in an argument of the cross referencing macros.
-%
-% When a cross referencing command processes its argument, all
-% tokens in this argument should be character tokens with category
-% `letter' or `other'.
-%
-% The only way to accomplish this in most cases is to use the trick
-% described in the \TeX book~\cite{DEK} (Appendix~D, page~382).
-% The primitive |\meaning| applied to a token expands to the
-% current meaning of this token. For example, `|\meaning\A|' with
-% |\A| defined as `|\def\A#1{\B}|' expands to the characters
-% `|macro:#1->\B|' with all category codes set to `other' or
-% `space'.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added}
-% To redefine a command, we save the old meaning of the macro.
-% Then we redefine it to call the original macro with the
-% `sanitized' argument. The reason why we do it this way is that
-% we don't want to redefine the \LaTeX\ macros completely in case
-% their definitions change (they have changed in the past).
-%
-% Because we need to redefine a number of commands we define the
-% command |\bbl@redefine| which takes care of this. It creates a
-% new control sequence, |\org@...|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core|shorthands>
-\def\bbl@redefine#1{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1
- \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine@long}
-% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Macro added}
-% This version of |\babel@redefine| can be used to redefine |\long|
-% commands such as |\ifthenelse|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1
- \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
-\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefinerobust}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added}
-% For commands that are redefined, but which \textit{might} be
-% robust we need a slightly more intelligent macro. A robust
-% command |foo| is defined to expand to |\protect|\verb*|\foo |. So
-% it is necessary to check whether \verb*|\foo | exists.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname \bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1
- \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}%
- \else
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The result of the code above is that the command that is being
-% redefined is always robust afterwards. Therefor all we need to do
-% now is define \verb*|\foo |.
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/09}{Define \cs*{foo } instead of
-% \cs{foo}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\newlabel}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
-% The macro |\label| writes a line with a |\newlabel| command
-% into the |.aux| file to define labels.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\bbl@redefine\newlabel#1#2{%
-% \@safe@activestrue\org@newlabel{#1}{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@newl@bel}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Now redefine \cs{@newl@bel} instead
-% of \cs{@lbibitem} and \cs{newlabel}}
-% We need to change the definition of the \LaTeX-internal macro
-% |\@newl@bel|. This is needed because we need to make sure that
-% shorthand characters expand to their non-active version.
-%
-%^^A The following lines commented out in preparation for a change
-%^^A in the LaTeX definition of \@enwl@bel... JLB 2000/10/01
-%^^A
-%^^A To play it safe when redefining a \LaTeX-internal command we
-%^^A first check whether its definition didn't change.
-%^^A \begin{macrocode}
-%^^A\CheckCommand*\@newl@bel[3]{%
-%^^A \@ifundefined{#1@#2}%
-%^^A \relax
-%^^A {\gdef \@multiplelabels {%
-%^^A \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}%
-%^^A \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}}%
-%^^A \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}}
-%^^A \end{macrocode}
-%^^A Then we give the new definition.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we open a new group to keep the changed setting of
-% |\protect| local and then we set the |@safe@actives| switch to
-% true to make sure that any shorthand that appears in any of the
-% arguments immediately expands to its non-active self.
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/12/19}{Call \cs{@safe@activestrue}
-% directly}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {%
- \@safe@activestrue
- \@ifundefined{#1@#2}%
- \relax
- {%
- \gdef \@multiplelabels {%
- \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}%
- \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}%
- }%
- \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}%
- }%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@testdef}
-% An internal \LaTeX\ macro used to test if the labels that have
-% been written on the |.aux| file have changed. It is called by
-% the |\enddocument| macro. This macro needs to be completely
-% rewritten, using |\meaning|. The reason for this is that in some
-% cases the expansion of |\#1@#2| contains the same characters as
-% the |#3|; but the character codes differ. Therefor \LaTeX\ keeps
-% reporting that the labels may have changed.
-% \changes{babel~3.4g}{1994/08/30}{Moved the \cs{def} inside the
-% macrocode environment}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{Complete rewrite of this macro as
-% the same character ended up with different category codes in the
-% labels that are being compared. Now use \cs{meaning}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/16}{Use \cs{strip@prefix} only on
-% \cs{bbl@tempa} when it is not \cs{relax}}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/28}{Make sure that shorthands don't get
-% expanded at the wrong moment.}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{\cs{@safe@activesfalse} is now
-% part of the label definition}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/13}{Removed \cs{@safe@activesfalse}
-% from the label definition}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{%
- \def\reserved@a{#3}%
- \expandafter \ifx \csname #1@#2\endcsname \reserved@a
- \else
- \@tempswatrue
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now that we made sure that |\@testdef| still has the same
-% definition we can rewrite it. First we make the shorthands
-% `safe'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@testdef #1#2#3{%
- \@safe@activestrue
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we use |\bbl@tempa| as an `alias' for the macro that
-% contains the label which is being checked.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we define |\bbl@tempb| just as |\@newl@bel| does it.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bbl@tempb{#3}%
- \@safe@activesfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the label is defined we replace the definition of
-% |\bbl@tempa| by its meaning.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax
- \else
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We do the same for |\bbl@tempb|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If the label didn't change, |\bbl@tempa| and |\bbl@tempb| should
-% be identical macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx \bbl@tempa \bbl@tempb
- \else
- \@tempswatrue
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ref}
-% \begin{macro}{\pageref}
-% The same holds for the macro |\ref| that references a label
-% and |\pageref| to reference a page. So we redefine |\ref| and
-% |\pageref|. While we change these macros, we make them robust as
-% well (if they weren't already) to prevent problems if they should
-% become expanded at the wrong moment.
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/07}{Made \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref}
-% robust (PR1353)}
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{use a different control sequence
-% while making \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} robust}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/06}{redefine \cs*{ref } if it exists
-% instead of \cs{ref}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefinerobust}}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/19}{redefine \cs{\@setref} instead of
-% \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} in \LaTeXe.}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/21}{Reverse the previous change as it
-% inhibits the use of active characters in labels}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
-\bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@citex}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
-% The macro used to cite from a bibliography, |\cite|, uses an
-% internal macro, |\@citex|.
-% It is this internal macro that picks up the argument(s),
-% so we redefine this internal macro and leave |\cite| alone. The
-% first argument is used for typesetting, so the shorthands need
-% only be deactivated in the second argument.
-% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/01}{The shorthands need to be
-% deactivated for the second argument of \cs{@citex} only.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{%
- \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse
- \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Unfortunately, the packages \pkg{natbib} and \pkg{cite} need a
-% different definition of |\@citex|...
-% To begin with, \pkg{natbib} has a definition for |\@citex| with
-% \emph{three} arguments... We only know that a package is loaded
-% when |\begin{document}| is executed, so we need to postpone the
-% different redefinition.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Notice that we use |\def| here instead of |\bbl@redefine| because
-% |\org@@citex| is already defined and we don't want to overwrite
-% that definition (it would result in parameter stack overflow
-% because of a circular definition).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
- \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#3}\@safe@activesfalse
- \org@@citex[#1][#2]{\@tempa}}%
- }{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The package \pkg{cite} has a definition of |\@citex| where the
-% shorthands need to be turned off in both arguments.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{%
- \def\@citex[#1]#2{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}%
- }{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\nocite}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
-% The macro |\nocite| which is used to instruct BiB\TeX\ to
-% extract uncited references from the database.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@redefine\nocite#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bibcite}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
-% The macro that is used in the |.aux| file to define citation
-% labels. When packages such as \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{cite} are not
-% loaded its second argument is used to typeset the citation
-% label. In that case, this second argument can contain active
-% characters but is used in an environment where
-% |\@safe@activestrue| is in effect. This switch needs to be reset
-% inside the |\hbox| which contains the citation label. In order to
-% determine during \file{.aux} file processing which definition of
-% |\bibcite| is needed we define |\bibcite| in such a way that it
-% redefines itself with the proper definition.
-% \changes{babel~3.6s}{1999/04/13}{Need to determine `online' which
-% definition of \cs{bibcite} is needed}
-% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Also check for \pkg{cite} it can't
-% handle \cs{@safe@activesfalse} in its second argument}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@redefine\bibcite{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We call |\bbl@cite@choice| to select the proper definition for
-% |\bibcite|. This new definition is then activated.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \bbl@cite@choice
- \bibcite}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@bibcite}
-% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@bibcite} added}
-% The macro |\bbl@bibcite| holds the definition of |\bibcite|
-% needed when neither \pkg{natbib} nor \pkg{cite} is loaded.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{%
- \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@cite@choice}
-% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@cite@choice} added}
-% The macro |\bbl@cite@choice| determines which definition of
-% |\bibcite| is needed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@cite@choice{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we give |\bibcite| its default definition.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then, when \pkg{natbib} is loaded we restore the original
-% definition of |\bibcite| .
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For \pkg{cite} we do the same.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure this only happens once.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When a document is run for the first time, no \file{.aux} file is
-% available, and |\bibcite| will not yet be properly defined. In
-% this case, this has to happen before the document starts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@bibitem}
-% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
-% One of the two internal \LaTeX\ macros called by |\bibitem|
-% that write the citation label on the |.aux| file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{marks}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\markright}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added redefinition of \cs{mark...}
-% commands}
-% Because the output routine is asynchronous, we must
-% pass the current language attribute to the head lines, together
-% with the text that is put into them. To achieve this we need to
-% adapt the definition of |\markright| and |\markboth| somewhat.
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/08}{Removed the use of \cs{head@lang}
-% (PR 2990)}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{Avoid expanding the arguments by
-% storing them in token registers}
-% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to
-% the mark}
-% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to
-% an empty mark; prevented this by checking the contents of the
-% argument}
-% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of
-% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing
-% it into the token registers}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@redefine\markright#1{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First of all we temporarily store the language switching command,
-% using an expanded definition in order to get the current value of
-% |\languagename|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect
- \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then, we check whether the argument is empty; if it is, we
-% just make sure the scratch token register is empty.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bbl@arg{#1}%
- \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty
- \toks@{}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Next, we store the argument to |\markright| in the scratch token
-% register, together with the expansion of |\bbl@tempb| (containing
-% the language switching command) as defined before. This way
-% these commands will not be expanded by using |\edef| later
-% on, and we make sure that the text is typeset using the
-% correct language settings. While doing so, we make sure that
-% active characters that may end up in the mark are not disabled by
-% the output routine kicking in while \cs{@safe@activestrue} is in
-% effect.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{%
- \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we define a temporary control sequence using |\edef|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\bbl@tempa{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When |\bbl@tempa| is executed, only |\languagename| will be
-% expanded, because of the way the token register was filled.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \noexpand\org@markright{\the\toks@}}%
- \bbl@tempa
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\markboth}
-% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
-% The definition of |\markboth| is equivalent to that of
-% |\markright|, except that we need two token registers. The
-% documentclasses \cls{report} and \cls{book} define and set the
-% headings for the page. While doing so they also store a copy of
-% |\markboth| in |\@mkboth|. Therefor we need to check whether
-% |\@mkboth| has already been set. If so we neeed to do that again
-% with the new definition of |\makrboth|.
-% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to
-% the mark}
-% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to
-% an empty mark, prevented this by checking the contents of the
-% arguments}
-% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of
-% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing
-% it into the token registers}
-% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/21}{Added setting of \cs{@mkboth} (PR
-% 3826)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\bbl@tempc{\let\@mkboth\markboth}
-\else
- \def\bbl@tempc{}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now we can start the new definition of |\markboth|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@redefine\markboth#1#2{%
- \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect
- \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}%
- \def\bbl@arg{#1}%
- \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty
- \toks@{}%
- \else
- \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{%
- \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}%
- \fi
- \def\bbl@arg{#2}%
- \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty
- \toks8{}%
- \else
- \expandafter\toks8\expandafter{%
- \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#2}}%
- \fi
- \edef\bbl@tempa{%
- \noexpand\org@markboth{\the\toks@}{\the\toks8}}%
- \bbl@tempa
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and copy it to |\@mkboth| if necesary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@tempc
-%</core|shorthands>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Encoding issues (part 2)}
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/16}{Removed redefinition of \cs{@roman}
-% and \cs{@Roman}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\TeX}
-% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ logos
-% encoding-independent}
-% Because documents may use font encodings other than one of the
-% latin encodings, we make sure that the logos of \TeX\ and
-% \LaTeX\ always come out in the right encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core>
-\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}}
-\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}}
-%</core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Preventing clashes with other packages}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\pkg{ifthen}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ifthenelse}
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/11}{Redefinition of \cs{ifthenelse}
-% added to circumvent problems with \cs{pageref} in the argument of
-% \cs{isodd}}
-% Sometimes a document writer wants to create a special effect
-% depending on the page a certain fragment of text appears on. This
-% can be achieved by the following piece of code:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \ifthenelse{\isodd{\pageref{some:label}}}
-% {code for odd pages}
-% {code for even pages}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% In order for this to work the argument of |\isodd| needs to be
-% fully expandable. With the above redefinition of |\pageref| it is
-% not in the case of this example. To overcome that, we add some
-% code to the definition of |\ifthenelse| to make things work.
-%
-% The first thing we need to do is check if the package
-% \pkg{ifthen} is loaded. This should be done at |\begin{document}|
-% time.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*package>
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we can redefine |\ifthenelse|:
-% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{\cs{ifthenelse} needs to be long}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We want to revert the definition of |\pageref| to its original
-% definition for the duration of |\ifthenelse|, so we first need to
-% store its current meaning.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\bbl@tempa\pageref
- \let\pageref\org@pageref
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we can set the |\@safe@actives| switch and call the original
-% |\ifthenelse|. In order to be able to use shorthands in the
-% second and third arguments of |\ifthenelse| the resetting of the
-% switch \emph{and} the definition of |\pageref| happens inside
-% those arguments.
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/25}{Now reset the @safe@actives switch
-% inside the 2nd and 3rd arguments of \cs{ifthenelse}}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/06/29}{\cs{pageref} needs to have its
-% babel definition reinstated in the second and third arguments}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@safe@activestrue
- \org@ifthenelse{#1}{%
- \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
- \@safe@activesfalse
- #2}{%
- \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
- \@safe@activesfalse
- #3}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the package wasn't loaded we do nothing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- }{}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\pkg{varioref}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@vpageref}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Redefinition of \cs{@@vpageref}
-% added to circumvent problems with active \texttt{:} in the
-% argument of \cs{vref} when \pkg{varioref} is used}
-% \begin{macro}{\vrefpagenum}
-% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/18}{Added redefinition of
-% \cs{vrefpagenum} which deals with ranges of pages}
-% \begin{macro}{\Ref}
-% \changes{babel~3.8g}{2005/05/21}{We also need to adapt \cs{Ref}
-% which needs to be able to uppercase the first letter of the
-% expansion of \cs{ref}}
-% When the package varioref is in use we need to modify its
-% internal command |\@@vpageref| in order to prevent problems when
-% an active character ends up in the argument of |\vref|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{%
- \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{%
- \@safe@activestrue
- \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}%
- \@safe@activesfalse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The same needs to happen for |\vrefpagenum|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{%
- \@safe@activestrue
- \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}%
- \@safe@activesfalse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The package \pkg{varioref} defines |\Ref| to be a robust command
-% wich uppercases the first character of the reference text. In
-% order to be able to do that it needs to access the exandable form
-% of |\ref|. So we employ a little trick here. We redefine the
-% (internal) command \verb*|\Ref | to call |\org@ref| instead of
-% |\ref|. The disadvantgage of this solution is that whenever the
-% derfinition of |\Ref| changes, this definition needs to be updated
-% as well.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{%
- \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa}
- }{}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\pkg{hhline}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hhline}
-% Delaying the activation of the shorthand characters has introduced
-% a problem with the \pkg{hhline} package. The reason is that it
-% uses the `:' character which is made active by the french support
-% in \babel. Therefor we need to \emph{reload} the package when
-% the `:' is an active character.
-%
-% So at |\begin{document}| we check whether \pkg{hhline} is loaded.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we check whether the expansion of |\normal@char:| is not
-% equal to |\relax|.
-% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{added \cs{string} to prevent
-% unwanted expansion of the colon}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In that case we simply reload the package. Note that this happens
-% \emph{after} the category code of the @-sign has been changed to
-% other, so we need to temporarily change it to letter again.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \makeatletter
- \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother
- \fi}%
- {}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\pdfstringdefDisableCommands}
-% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Inform \pkg{hyperref} to use
-% shorthands at system level (PR4006)}
-% Although a number of interworking problems between \pkg{babel}
-% and \pkg{hyperref} are tackled by \pkg{hyperref} itself we need
-% to take care of correctly handling the shorthand characters.
-% When they get expanded inside a bookmark a warning will appear in
-% the log file which can be prevented. This is done by informing
-% \pkg{hyperref} that it should the shorthands as defined on the
-% system level rather than at the user level.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}%
- {}%
- {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
- \languageshorthands{system}}%
- }%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{General}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}
-% The package \pkg{fancyhdr} treats the running head and fout lines
-% somewhat differently as the standard classes. A symptom of this is
-% that the command |\foreignlanguage| which \babel\ adds to the
-% marks can end up inside the argument of |\MakeUppercase|. To
-% prevent unexpected results we need to define |\FOREIGNLANGUAGE|
-% here.
-% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/05/23}{Define \cs{FOREIGNLANGUAGE}
-% unconditionally}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{%
- \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}}
-%</package>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\nfss@catcodes}
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/18}{Need to add the double quote and
-% acute characters to \cs{nfss@catcodes} to prevent problems when
-% reading in .fd files}
-% \LaTeX's font selection scheme sometimes wants to read font
-% definition files in the middle of processing the document. In
-% order to guard against any characters having the wrong
-% |\catcode|s it always calls |\nfss@catcodes| before loading a
-% file. Unfortunately, the characters |"| and |'| are not dealt
-% with. Therefor we have to add them until \LaTeX\ does that
-% herself.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core|shorthands>
-\ifx\nfss@catcodes\@undefined
-\else
- \addto\nfss@catcodes{%
- \@makeother\'%
- \@makeother\"%
- }
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%</core|shorthands>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{Local Language Configuration}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\loadlocalcfg}
-% At some sites it may be necessary to add site-specific actions to
-% a language definition file. This can be done by creating a file
-% with the same name as the language definition file, but with the
-% extension \file{.cfg}. For instance the file \file{norsk.cfg}
-% will be loaded when the language definition file \file{norsk.ldf}
-% is loaded.
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Added macro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For plain-based formats we don't want to override the definition
-% of |\loadlocalcfg| from \file{plain.def}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\loadlocalcfg\@undefined
- \def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
- \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg}
- {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
- * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J%
- *}%
- }
- {}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Just to be compatible with \LaTeX$\:$2.09 we add a few more lines
-% of code:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\@unexpandable@protect\@undefined
- \def\@unexpandable@protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}
- \long\def \protected@write#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup
- \let\thepage\relax
- #2%
- \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
- \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
- \reserved@a
- \endgroup
- \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
- }
-\fi
-%</core>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \clearpage
-% \section{Driver files for the documented source code}
-%
-% Since \babel\ version 3.4 all source files that are part of the
-% \babel\ system can be typeset separately. But to typeset
-% them all in one document, the file \file{babel.drv} can be used.
-% If you only want the information on how to use the \babel\ system
-% and what goodies are provided by the language-specific files, you
-% can run the file \file{user.drv} through \LaTeX\ to get a user
-% guide.
-%
-% \changes{babel~3.4b}{1994/05/18}{Use the ltxdoc class instead of
-% article}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/05/21}{Now need packages t1enc and
-% supertabular to be loaded; the documentation for icelandic needs
-% its \file{.ldf} file to be present}
-% \changes{babel~3.8a}{2004/02/20}{Also load package url}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\usepackage{url,t1enc,supertabular}
-\usepackage[icelandic,english]{babel}
-\DoNotIndex{\!,\',\,,\.,\-,\:,\;,\?,\/,\^,\`,\@M}
-\DoNotIndex{\@,\@ne,\@m,\@afterheading,\@date,\@endpart}
-\DoNotIndex{\@hangfrom,\@idxitem,\@makeschapterhead,\@mkboth}
-\DoNotIndex{\@oddfoot,\@oddhead,\@restonecolfalse,\@restonecoltrue}
-\DoNotIndex{\@starttoc,\@unused}
-\DoNotIndex{\accent,\active}
-\DoNotIndex{\addcontentsline,\advance,\Alph,\arabic}
-\DoNotIndex{\baselineskip,\begin,\begingroup,\bf,\box,\c@secnumdepth}
-\DoNotIndex{\catcode,\centering,\char,\chardef,\clubpenalty}
-\DoNotIndex{\columnsep,\columnseprule,\crcr,\csname}
-\DoNotIndex{\day,\def,\dimen,\discretionary,\divide,\dp,\do}
-\DoNotIndex{\edef,\else,\@empty,\end,\endgroup,\endcsname,\endinput}
-\DoNotIndex{\errhelp,\errmessage,\expandafter,\fi,\filedate}
-\DoNotIndex{\fileversion,\fmtname,\fnum@figure,\fnum@table,\fontdimen}
-\DoNotIndex{\gdef,\global}
-\DoNotIndex{\hbox,\hidewidth,\hfil,\hskip,\hspace,\ht,\Huge,\huge}
-\DoNotIndex{\ialign,\if@twocolumn,\ifcase,\ifcat,\ifhmode,\ifmmode}
-\DoNotIndex{\ifnum,\ifx,\immediate,\ignorespaces,\input,\item}
-\DoNotIndex{\kern}
-\DoNotIndex{\labelsep,\Large,\large,\labelwidth,\lccode,\leftmargin}
-\DoNotIndex{\lineskip,\leavevmode,\let,\list,\ll,\long,\lower}
-\DoNotIndex{\m@ne,\mathchar,\mathaccent,\markboth,\month,\multiply}
-\DoNotIndex{\newblock,\newbox,\newcount,\newdimen,\newif,\newwrite}
-\DoNotIndex{\nobreak,\noexpand,\noindent,\null,\number}
-\DoNotIndex{\onecolumn,\or}
-\DoNotIndex{\p@,par, \parbox,\parindent,\parskip,\penalty}
-\DoNotIndex{\protect,\ps@headings}
-\DoNotIndex{\quotation}
-\DoNotIndex{\raggedright,\raise,\refstepcounter,\relax,\rm,\setbox}
-\DoNotIndex{\section,\setcounter,\settowidth,\scriptscriptstyle}
-\DoNotIndex{\sfcode,\sl,\sloppy,\small,\space,\spacefactor,\strut}
-\DoNotIndex{\string}
-\DoNotIndex{\textwidth,\the,\thechapter,\thefigure,\thepage,\thepart}
-\DoNotIndex{\thetable,\thispagestyle,\titlepage,\tracingmacros}
-\DoNotIndex{\tw@,\twocolumn,\typeout,\uppercase,\usecounter}
-\DoNotIndex{\vbox,\vfil,\vskip,\vspace,\vss}
-\DoNotIndex{\widowpenalty,\write,\xdef,\year,\z@,\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here |\dlqq| is defined so that an example of |"'| can be
-% given.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\makeatletter
-\gdef\dlqq{{\setbox\tw@=\hbox{,}\setbox\z@=\hbox{''}%
- \dimen\z@=\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@-\ht\tw@
- \setbox\z@=\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@\box\z@}\ht\z@=\ht\tw@
- \dp\z@=\dp\tw@ \box\z@\kern-.04em}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The code lines are numbered within sections,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!user>
-\@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{section}
-\renewcommand\theCodelineNo{%
- \reset@font\scriptsize\thesection.\arabic{CodelineNo}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% which should also be visible in the index; hence this
-% redefinition of a macro from \file{doc.sty}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\codeline@wrindex[1]{\if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@indexfile
- {\string\indexentry{#1}%
- {\number\c@section.\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The glossary environment is used or the change log, but its
-% definition needs changing for this document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
- \glossary@prologue%
- \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
- {}
-%</!user>
-\makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A few shorthands used in the documentation
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/06}{Added definition of \cs{Babel}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
-\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\Babel{\textsf{Babel}}
-\newcommand*\m[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{\m{lang}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some more definitions needed in the documentation.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\newcommand*\note[1]{\textbf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\bsl{\protect\bslash}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\Lenv[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*\cls[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*\langdeffile[1]{%
-%<-user> \clearpage
- \DocInput{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When a full index should be generated uncomment the line with
-% |\EnableCrossrefs|. Beware, processing may take some time.
-% Use |\DisableCrossrefs| when the index is ready.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \EnableCrossrefs
-\DisableCrossrefs
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Inlude the change log.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<-user>\RecordChanges
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The index should use the linenumbers of the code.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<-user>\CodelineIndex
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Set everything in |\MacroFont| instead of |\AltMacroFont|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\setcounter{StandardModuleDepth}{1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For the user guide we only want the description parts of all the
-% files.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<+user>\OnlyDescription
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Here starts the document
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begin{document}
-\DocInput{babel.dtx}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% All the language definition files.
-% \changes{babel~3.2e}{1992/07/07}{Added slovak}
-% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{Added catalan and galician}
-% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{Added turkish}
-% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/28}{Added bahasa}
-% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/16}{Added breton, irish, scottish}
-% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/19}{Added lsorbian, usorbian}
-% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{Changed the order of including the
-% language files somewhat (PR1652)}
-% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/06}{Added greek}
-% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/12/14}{Added welsh}
-%^^A \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/07}{Added sanskrit}
-% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/22}{Added basque}
-^^A% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/22}{Added kannada}
-% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/05/21}{Added icelandic}
-% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/25}{Added Latin}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/03/09}{Added ukrainian}
-% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/05/09}{Added hebrew and serbian}
-% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/11/22}{Added missing hebrew files}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/21}{Added bulgarian}
-% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/26}{Added samin}
-% \changes{babel~3.8a}{2004/02/20}{Added interlingua}
-% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{Added albanian and bahasam}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<+user>\clearpage
-\langdeffile{esperanto.dtx}
-\langdeffile{interlingua.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{dutch.dtx}
-\langdeffile{english.dtx}
-\langdeffile{germanb.dtx}
-\langdeffile{ngermanb.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{breton.dtx}
-\langdeffile{welsh.dtx}
-\langdeffile{irish.dtx}
-\langdeffile{scottish.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{greek.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{frenchb.dtx}
-\langdeffile{italian.dtx}
-\langdeffile{latin.dtx}
-\langdeffile{portuges.dtx}
-\langdeffile{spanish.dtx}
-\langdeffile{catalan.dtx}
-\langdeffile{galician.dtx}
-\langdeffile{basque.dtx}
-\langdeffile{romanian.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{danish.dtx}
-\langdeffile{icelandic.dtx}
-\langdeffile{norsk.dtx}
-\langdeffile{swedish.dtx}
-\langdeffile{samin.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{finnish.dtx}
-\langdeffile{magyar.dtx}
-\langdeffile{estonian.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{albanian.dtx}
-\langdeffile{croatian.dtx}
-\langdeffile{czech.dtx}
-\langdeffile{polish.dtx}
-\langdeffile{serbian.dtx}
-\langdeffile{slovak.dtx}
-\langdeffile{slovene.dtx}
-\langdeffile{russianb.dtx}
-\langdeffile{bulgarian.dtx}
-\langdeffile{ukraineb.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{lsorbian.dtx}
-\langdeffile{usorbian.dtx}
-\langdeffile{turkish.dtx}
-%
-\langdeffile{hebrew.dtx}
-\DocInput{hebinp.dtx}
-\DocInput{hebrew.fdd}
-\DocInput{heb209.dtx}
-\langdeffile{bahasa.dtx}
-\langdeffile{bahasam.dtx}
-%\langdeffile{sanskrit.dtx}
-%\langdeffile{kannada.dtx}
-%\langdeffile{nagari.dtx}
-%\langdeffile{tamil.dtx}
-\clearpage
-\DocInput{bbplain.dtx}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Finally print the index and change log (not for the user guide).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*!user>
-\clearpage
-\def\filename{index}
-\PrintIndex
-\clearpage
-\def\filename{changes}
-\PrintChanges
-%</!user>
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 707152523f1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/babel.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,252 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-%% Copyright 2009 Johannes L. Braams
-%%
-%% This file is part of the `babel' system.
-%%
-\def\filedate{2009/09/25}
-\def\batchfile{babel.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\ifx\askonceonly\undefined
- \let\OriginalAsk\Ask
- \def\askonceonly{%
- \def\Ask##1##2{%
- \OriginalAsk{##1}{##2}%
- \global\let\Ask\OriginalAsk
- \Ask\noprompt{%
- By default you will be asked this question for every file.^^J%
- If you enter `y' now,^^J%
- I will asssume `y' for all future questions^^J%
- without prompting.}%
- \ifx\y\noprompt\let\noprompt\yes\fi
- \ifx\yes\noprompt\gdef\Ask####1####2{\def####1{y}}\fi}}
- }
-\fi
-%% This is the preamble that will be placed on
-%% unpacked files
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-\askonceonly
-%
-% Make some arrangements to use docstrip files in subdirectories
-% unchanged...
-% To do this I need to insert a path in front of the source file
-% name, for this purpose I need to save the definition of an
-% internal docstrip macro:
-\let\ds@@from\@from
-%
-% Then it is convenient to have a special command to load docstrip
-% files in subdirectories, it takes the directory path in the first
-% argument, the name of the file in the second:
-\def\BblInstallSubDir#1#2{%
- \def\@from##1{\ds@@from{#1/##1}}
- \batchinput{#1/#2.ins}
- \let\@from\ds@@from}
-%
-% When a flat distribution is used a much simpler command
-% is needed.
-\def\BblInstallFlat#1#2{%
- \batchinput{#2.ins}}
-
-% Now choose which installation to use.
-\let\BblInstall\BblInstallFlat %% For now...
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-%
-% First produce the base files for the babel system
-%
-\BblInstall{base}{base}
-%
-% Languages have their own subdirectory
-%
-\BblInstall{albanian}{albanian}
-\BblInstall{bahasa}{bahasa}
-\BblInstall{basque}{basque}
-\BblInstall{breton}{breton}
-\BblInstall{bulgarian}{bulgarian}
-\BblInstall{catalan}{catalan}
-\BblInstall{croatian}{croatian}
-\BblInstall{cyrillic}{russianb}
-\BblInstall{cyrillic}{ukraineb}
-\BblInstall{czech}{czech}
-\BblInstall{danish}{danish}
-\BblInstall{dutch}{dutch}
-\BblInstall{english}{english}
-\BblInstall{esperanto}{esperanto}
-\BblInstall{estonian}{estonian}
-\BblInstall{finnish}{finnish}
-\BblInstall{frenchb}{frenchb}
-\BblInstall{galician}{galician}
-\BblInstall{german}{german}
-\BblInstall{greek}{greek}
-\BblInstall{hebrew}{hebrew}
-\BblInstall{icelandic}{icelandic}
-\BblInstall{interlingua}{interlingua}
-\BblInstall{irish}{irish}
-\BblInstall{italian}{italian}
-%\BblInstall{kannada}{kannada}
-\BblInstall{kurmanji}{kurmanji}
-\BblInstall{latin}{latin}
-\BblInstall{magyar}{magyar}
-%\BblInstall{nagari}{nagari}
-\BblInstall{norsk}{norsk}
-\BblInstall{polish}{polish}
-\BblInstall{portuges}{portuges}
-\BblInstall{romanian}{romanian}
-%\BblInstall{tamil}{tamil}
-\BblInstall{samin}{samin}
-%\BblInstall{sanskrit}{sanskrit}
-\BblInstall{scottish}{scottish}
-\BblInstall{serbian}{serbian}
-\BblInstall{slovak}{slovak}
-\BblInstall{slovene}{slovene}
-\BblInstall{sorbian}{sorbian}
-\BblInstall{spanish}{spanish}
-\BblInstall{swedish}{swedish}
-\BblInstall{turkish}{turkish}
-\BblInstall{welsh}{welsh}
-
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move all the files}
-\Msg{* with names ending in .ldf, .sty, .def or .fd into a}
-\Msg{* directory searched by TeX}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* For making a format the following files have to be in a}
-\Msg{* directory which is searched by IniTeX:}
-\Msg{* \space\space hyphen.cfg}
-\Msg{* \space\space language.dat}
-\Msg{* \space\space and files with hyphenation patterns}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce source listings you can run files with names}
-\Msg{* ending in .dtx and/or .drv through LaTeX}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the complete source listing MakeIndex needs to be}
-\Msg{* able to find the following files}
-\Msg{* \space\space bbind.ist}
-\Msg{* \space\space bbglo.ist}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 51e20f9571c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,286 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{148}
-%\iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{bahasa.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{bahasa}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{bahasa.dtx}
- [2008/03/15 v1.0l Bahasa Indonesia support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `bahasa.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Bahasa Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008
-%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de)
-% Terry Mart (mart at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de)
-% Institut f\"ur Kernphysik
-% Johannes Gutenberg-Universit\"at Mainz
-% D-55099 Mainz
-% Germany
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J"org Knappen
-%% knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the bahasa indonesia / bahasa melayu language definition
-% file. The original version of this file was written by Terry
-% Mart (mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de) and J"org Knappen
-% (knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{bahasa.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{bahasa.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Bahasa Indonesian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% Bahasa Indonesia / Bahasa Melayu language. Bahasa just means
-% `language' in Bahasa Indonesia / Bahasa Melayu. Since both
-% national versions of the language use the same writing, although
-% differing in pronounciation, this file can be used for both
-% languages.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \changes{bahasa-v1.0k}{2005/11/23}{Make it possible that this file
-% is loaded by variuos options}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{bahasa} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@bahasa| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% For both Bahasa Indonesia and Bahasa Malaysia the same set of
-% hyphenation patterns can be used which are available in the file
-% \file{inhyph.tex}. However it could be loaded using any of the
-% possible Babel options fot the Indonesian and Malaysian
-% languase. So first we try to find out whether this is the case.
-%
-% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@patterns} to produce
-% the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indon\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined
- \ifx\l@malay\@undefined
- \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Bahasa Indonesia}
- \adddialect\l@bahasa0\relax
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@meyalu
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@malay
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasam
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@indonesian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@indon
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasai
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now that we are sure the |\l@bahasa| has some valid definition we
-% need to make sure that a name to access the hyphenation patterns,
-% corresponding to the option used, is available.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname
- \l@bahasa
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Bahasa language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsbahasa}
-% The macro |\captionsbahasa| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/09}{Replaced `Proof' by `Bukti'
-% (PR2214)}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0i}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Pendahuluan}%
- \def\refname{Pustaka}%
- \def\abstractname{Ringkasan}% (sometime it's called 'intisari'
- % or 'ikhtisar')
- \def\bibname{Bibliografi}%
- \def\chaptername{Bab}%
- \def\appendixname{Lampiran}%
- \def\contentsname{Daftar Isi}%
- \def\listfigurename{Daftar Gambar}%
- \def\listtablename{Daftar Tabel}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Gambar}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Bagian}%
-% Subject: Subyek
-% From: Dari
- \def\enclname{Lampiran}%
- \def\ccname{cc}%
- \def\headtoname{Kepada}%
- \def\pagename{Halaman}%
-% Notes (Endnotes): Catatan
- \def\seename{lihat}%
- \def\alsoname{lihat juga}%
- \def\proofname{Bukti}%
- \def\glossaryname{Daftar Istilah}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datebahasa}
-% The macro |\datebahasa| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Bahasa Indonesian dates.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}}
-% \changes{bahasa~1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0g}{1999/03/12}{Februari should be spelled as
-% Pebruari}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Januari\or Pebruari\or Maret\or April\or Mei\or Juni\or
- Juli\or Agustus\or September\or Oktober\or Nopember\or Desember\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasbahasa}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbahasa}
-% The macro |\extrasbahasa| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Bahasa language. The macro |\extrasbahasa| is used
-% to cancel the actions of |\extrasbahasa|. For the moment these
-% macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility with the
-% other language definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bahasahyphenmins}
-% The bahasa hyphenation patterns should be used with
-% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/08/07}{use \cs{bahasahyphenmins} to store
-% the correct values}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 954122314c9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasa.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2005/11/23}
-\def\batchfile{bahasa.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{bahasai.ldf}{\from{bahasa.dtx}{code}}
- \file{bahasam.ldf}{\from{bahasam.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasam.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasam.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b55a397746..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bahasam.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,297 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{148}
-%\iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{bahasam.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{bahasam}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{bahasam.dtx}
- [2008/01/27 v1.0k Bahasa Malaysia support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `bahasam.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Bahasa Malaysia Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008
-%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de)
-% Terry Mart (mart at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de)
-% Institut f\"ur Kernphysik
-% Johannes Gutenberg-Universit\"at Mainz
-% D-55099 Mainz
-% Germany
-%
-%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008
-%% by Bob Margolis, (bob.margolis at ntlworld.com)
-% derived from J"ork Knappen's work - see above.
-%% [With help from Awangku Merali Pengiran Mohamed (Sarawak)]
-% gratefully acknowledged.
-% Yateley,
-% UK
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Bob Margolis
-%% bob.margolis at ntlworld.com
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Bahasa Malaysia language definition
-% file. The original version of this file was written by Terry
-% Mart (mart@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de) and J"org Knappen
-% (knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{bahasam.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{bahasam.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-% \changes{bahasam-0.9f}{2005/11/22}{A number of changes to make this
-% specific to Bahasa Mayasia}
-%
-% \section{The Bahasa Malaysia language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% Bahasa Malaysia language. Bahasa just means
-% `language' in Bahasa Malaysia. A number of terms differ from those used
-% in bahasa indonesia.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \changes{bahasam-v1.0j}{2005/11/23}{Make it possible that this file
-% is loaded by variuos options}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{bahasa} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@bahasa| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% For both Bahasa Malaysia and Bahasa Indonesia the same set of
-% hyphenation patterns can be used which are available in the file
-% \file{inhyph.tex}. However it could be loaded using any of the
-% possible Babel options fot the Malaysian and Indonesian
-% languase. So first we try to find out whether this is the case.
-%
-% \changes{bahasa-0.9c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@patterns} to produce
-% the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@malay\@undefined
- \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indon\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Bahasa Malaysia}
- \adddialect\l@malay0\relax
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@indonesian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@indon
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@bahasai
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@bahasa
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@bahasam
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@meyalu
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now that we are sure the |\l@malay| has some valid definition we
-% need to make sure that a name to access the hyphenation patterns,
-% corresponding to the option used, is available.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname
- \l@malay
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Bahasa language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsbahasam}
-% The macro |\captionsbahasam| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0d}{1996/07/09}{Replaced `Proof' by `Bukti'
-% (PR2214)}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0i}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for Glossary}
-% \changes{bahasam-1.0k}{2008/01/27}{Inserted changes from Awangku Merali }
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Prakata}%
- \def\refname{Rujukan}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrak}% (sometime it's called 'intisari'
- % or 'ikhtisar')
- \def\bibname{Bibliografi}%
- \def\chaptername{Bab}%
- \def\appendixname{Lampiran}%
- \def\contentsname{Kandungan}%
- \def\listfigurename{Senarai Gambar}%
- \def\listtablename{Senarai Jadual}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Gambar}%
- \def\tablename{Jadual}%
- \def\partname{Bahagian}%
-% Subject: Perkara
-% From: Dari
- \def\enclname{Lampiran}%
- \def\ccname{sk}% (short form for 'Salinan Kepada')
- \def\headtoname{Kepada}%
- \def\pagename{Halaman}%
-% Notes (Endnotes): Catatan
- \def\seename{sila rujuk}%
- \def\alsoname{rujuk juga}%
- \def\proofname{Bukti}%
- \def\glossaryname{Istilah}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datebahasam}
-% The macro |\datebahasam| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Bahasa Malaysian dates.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}}
-% \changes{bahasa~1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0g}{1999/03/12}{Februari should be spelled as
-% Pebruari}
-% \changes{bahasam-1.0k}{2008/01/27}{Februari restored to BM spelling;
-% see Collins Kamus Dwibahasa 2005}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Januari\or Februari\or Mac\or April\or Mei\or Jun\or
- Julai\or Ogos\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Disember\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasbahasam}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbahasam}
-% The macro |\extrasbahasa| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Bahasa language. The macro |\extrasbahasa| is used
-% to cancel the actions of |\extrasbahasa|. For the moment these
-% macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility with the
-% other language definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bahasamhyphenmins}
-% The bahasam hyphenation patterns should be used with
-% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/08/07}{use \cs{bahasamhyphenmins} to store
-% the correct values}
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{bahasa-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 33789ccdfd4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,390 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{193}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{basque.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{basque}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{basque.dtx}
- [2005/03/29 v1.0f Basque support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `Basque.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Basque Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2005
-%% by Juan M. Aguirregabiria
-% The University of the Basque Country
-% Dept. of Theoretical Physics
-% Apdo. 644
-% E-48080 Bilbao
-% Spain
-% tel: +34 946 012 593
-% fax: +34 944 648 500
-% e-mail: wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es
-% WWW: http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma.html
-% based on the
-% Spanish Language Definition File
-% Copyright (C) 1991 - 1998
-% by Julio Sanchez
-% GMV, SA
-% c/ Isaac Newton 11
-% PTM - Tres Cantos
-% E-28760 Madrid
-% Spain
-% tel: +34 1 807 21 85
-% fax +34 1 807 21 99
-% jsanchez at gmv.es
-%
-% Acknowledgements: I am indebted to Zunbeltz Izaola,
-% who suggested the use of \discretionary in "-
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Juan M. Aguirregabiria <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es>
-%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl>)
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the basque language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{basque.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{basque.dtx}
-%
-% \section{The Basque language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. The original author is Juan M. Aguirregabiria,
-% (\texttt{wtpagagj@lg.ehu.es}) and is based on the Spanish file
-% by Julio S\'anchez,
-% (\texttt{jsanchez@gmv.es}).} defines all the language definition
-% macro's for the Basque language.
-%
-% For this language the characters |~| and |"| are made
-% active. In table~\ref{tab:basque-quote} an overview is given of
-% their purpose.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.\\
-% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |~n| & a n with tilde. Works for uppercase too.
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{basque.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:basque-quote}
-% \end{table}
-% These active accent characters behave according to their original
-% definitions if not followed by one of the characters indicated in
-% that table.
-%
-% \changes{basque-1.0f}{2002/01/07}{Changed url's for the patterns
-% file}
-% This option includes support for working with extended, 8-bit
-% fonts, if available. Support is based on
-% providing an appropriate definition for the accent macros on
-% entry to the Basque language. This is automatically done by
-% \LaTeXe\ or NFSS2. If T1 encoding is chosen, and provided that
-% adequate hyphenation patterns\footnote{One source for such
-% patterns is the archive at \texttt{tp.lc.ehu.es} that can be
-% accessed by anonymous FTP or in
-% \texttt{http://tp.lc.ehu.es/jma/basque.html}} are available.
-% The easiest way to use the new encoding with \LaTeXe{} is
-% to load the package \texttt{t1enc} with |\usepackage|. This must
-% be done before loading \babel.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{basque}\captionsbasque
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{basque} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@basque| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@basque\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Basque}
- \adddialect\l@basque0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Basque language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsbasque}
-% The macro |\captionsbasque| defines all strings used in
-% the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{basque-1.0e}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{basque-1.0f}{2002/01/07}{Added translation for Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsbasque{%
- \def\prefacename{Hitzaurrea}%
- \def\refname{Erreferentziak}%
- \def\abstractname{Laburpena}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitulua}%
- \def\appendixname{Eranskina}%
- \def\contentsname{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
- \def\listfigurename{Irudien Zerrenda}%
- \def\listtablename{Taulen Zerrenda}%
- \def\indexname{Kontzeptuen Aurkibidea}%
- \def\figurename{Irudia}%
- \def\tablename{Taula}%
- \def\partname{Atala}%
- \def\enclname{Erantsia}%
- \def\ccname{Kopia}%
- \def\headtoname{Nori}%
- \def\pagename{Orria}%
- \def\seename{Ikusi}%
- \def\alsoname{Ikusi, halaber}%
- \def\proofname{Frogapena}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glosarioa}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datebasque}
-% The macro |\datebasque| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Basque
-% \changes{basque-1.0b}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{basque-1.0b}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{basque-1.0c}{1999/11/22}{fixed typo in April's name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datebasque{%
- \def\today{\number\year.eko\space\ifcase\month\or
- urtarrilaren\or otsailaren\or martxoaren\or apirilaren\or
- maiatzaren\or ekainaren\or uztailaren\or abuztuaren\or
- irailaren\or urriaren\or azaroaren\or
- abenduaren\fi~\number\day}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasbasque}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbasque}
-% The macro |\extrasbasque| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Basque language. The macro |\noextrasbasque| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasbasque|. For Basque, some
-% characters are made active or are redefined. In particular, the
-% \texttt{"} character and the |~| character receive new
-% meanings. Therefore these characters have to be treated as
-% `special' characters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbasque{\languageshorthands{basque}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\initiate@active@char{~}
-\addto\extrasbasque{%
- \bbl@activate{"}%
- \bbl@activate{~}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{basque-1.0d}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Basque}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasbasque{
- \bbl@deactivate{"}\bbl@deactivate{~}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Apart from the active characters some other macros get a new
-% definition. Therefore we store the current one to be able to
-% restore them later.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbasque{%
- \babel@save\"%
- \babel@save\~%
- \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}%
- \def\~{\protect\@tilde}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\basquehyphenmins}
-% Basque hyphenation uses |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|
-% both set to~2.
-% \changes{basque-1.0e}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dieresia}
-% \begin{macro}{\texttilde}
-% The original definition of |\"| is stored as |\dieresia|, because
-% the we do not know what is its definition, since it depends on
-% the encoding we are using or on special macros that the user
-% might have loaded. The expansion of the macro might use the \TeX\
-% |\accent| primitive using some particular accent that the font
-% provides or might check if a combined accent exists in the font.
-% These two cases happen with respectively OT1 and T1 encodings.
-% For this reason we save the definition of |\"| and use that in
-% the definition of other macros. We do likewise for |\'| and
-% |\~|. The present coding of this option file is incorrect in that
-% it can break when the encoding changes. We do not use
-% |\tilde| as the macro name because it is already defined as
-% |\mathaccent|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\dieresia\"
-\let\texttilde\~
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@umlaut}
-% \begin{macro}{\@tilde}
-% We check the encoding and if not using T1, we make the accents
-% expand but enabling hyphenation beyond the accent. If this is the
-% case, not all break positions will be found in words that contain
-% accents, but this is a limitation in \TeX. An unsolved problem
-% here is that the encoding can change at any time. The definitions
-% below are made in such a way that a change between two 256-char
-% encodings are supported, but changes between a 128-char and a
-% 256-char encoding are not properly supported. We check if T1 is
-% in use. If not, we will give a warning and proceed redefining the
-% accent macros so that \TeX{} at least finds the breaks that are
-% not too close to the accent. The warning will only be printed to
-% the log file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined
- \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens}
-\else
- \edef\bbl@next{T1}
- \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@next
- \let\@umlaut\dieresia
- \let\@tilde\texttilde
- \else
- \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space
- instead of T1.}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define our shorthands: the french quotes,
-% \changes{basque-1.0b}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% guillemot characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% ordinals\footnote{The code for the ordinals was taken from the
-% answer provided by Raymond Chen
-% (\texttt{raymond@math.berkeley.edu}) to a question by Joseph Gil
-% (\texttt{yogi@cs.ubc.ca}) in \texttt{comp.text.tex}.},
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{basque}{''}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% tildes,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{~n}{\textormath{\~n}{\@tilde n}}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{~N}{\textormath{\~N}{\@tilde N}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands.
-%
-% The shorthand |"-| should be used in places where a word contains
-% an explictit hyphenation character. According to the Academy of
-% the Basque language, when a word break occurs at an explicit
-% hyphen it must appear \emph{both} at the end of the first line
-% \emph{and} at the beginning of the second line.
-% \changes{changes-1.0f}{2002/01/07}{The hyphen char needs to appear
-% at the beginning of the line as well.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{"-}{%
- \nobreak\discretionary{-}{-}{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{basque}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index ccebb561bae..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/basque.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{basque.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{basque.ldf}{\from{basque.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index e87500aaf14..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{263}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{breton.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{breton}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{breton.dtx}
- [2005/03/29 v1.0h Breton support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `breton.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Breton Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005
-%% by Christian Rolland
-% Universite de Bretagne occidentale
-% Departement d'informatique
-% 6, avenue Le Gorgeu
-% BP 452
-% 29275 Brest Cedex -- FRANCE
-% Christian.Rolland at univ-brest.fr (Internet)
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Breton language definition file. It is based on the
-% language definition file for french, version 4.5c
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{breton.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{breton.dtx}
-% \changes{breton-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \changes{breton-1.0}{1994/09/21}{First release}
-%
-% \section{The Breton language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macros for the Breton
-% language.
-%
-% There are not really typographic rules for the Breton
-% language. It is a local language (it's one of the celtic
-% languages) which is spoken in Brittany (West of France). So we
-% have a synthesis between french typographic rules and english
-% typographic rules. The characters \texttt{:}, \texttt{;},
-% \texttt{!} and \texttt{?} are made active in order to get a
-% whitespace automatically before these characters.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{breton-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{breton}\captionsbreton
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{breton} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@breton| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@breton\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Breton}
- \adddialect\l@breton0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the
-% English language. The reason for this is that a user might want
-% to switch back and forth between languages.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsbreton}
-% The macro |\captionsbreton| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{breton-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{breton-1.0h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsbreton{%
- \def\prefacename{Rakskrid}%
- \def\refname{Daveenno\`u}%
- \def\abstractname{Dvierra\~n}%
- \def\bibname{Lennadurezh}%
- \def\chaptername{Pennad}%
- \def\appendixname{Stagadenn}%
- \def\contentsname{Taolenn}%
- \def\listfigurename{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
- \def\listtablename{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
- \def\indexname{Meneger}%
- \def\figurename{Figurenn}%
- \def\tablename{Taolenn}%
- \def\partname{Lodenn}%
- \def\enclname{Diello\`u kevret}%
- \def\ccname{Eilskrid da}%
- \def\headtoname{evit}
- \def\pagename{Pajenn}%
- \def\seename{Gwelout}%
- \def\alsoname{Gwelout ivez}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datebreton}
-% The macro |\datebreton| redefines the command
-% |\today| to produce Breton dates.
-% \changes{breton-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{breton-1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datebreton{%
- \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$\else
- \number\day\fi \space a\space viz\space\ifcase\month\or
- Genver\or C'hwevrer\or Meurzh\or Ebrel\or Mae\or Mezheven\or
- Gouere\or Eost\or Gwengolo\or Here\or Du\or Kerzu\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasbreton}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasbreton}
-% The macro |\extrasbreton| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Breton language. The macro
-% |\noextrasbreton| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasbreton|.
-%
-% The category code of the characters \texttt{:}, \texttt{;},
-% \texttt{!} and \texttt{?} is made |\active| to insert a little
-% white space.
-% \changes{breton-1.0b}{1995/03/07}{Use the new mechanism for dealing
-% with active chars}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{:}
-\initiate@active@char{;}
-\initiate@active@char{!}
-\initiate@active@char{?}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We specify that the breton group of shorthands should be used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbreton{\languageshorthands{breton}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may
-% vary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbreton{%
- \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}%
- \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{breton-1.0g}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of Breton}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasbreton{%
- \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}%
- \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The last thing |\extrasbreton| needs to do is to make sure that
-% |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the
-% execution of |\noextrasbreton| will switch it of again.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbreton{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasbreton{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@;@}
-% We have to reduce the amount of white space before \texttt{;},
-% \texttt{:} and \texttt{!} when the user types a space in front of
-% these characters. This should only happen outside mathmode, hence
-% the test with |\ifmmode|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{;}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string;\space
- \else\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In horizontal mode we check for the presence of a `space' and
-% replace it by a |\thinspace|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string;\space
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@:@}
-% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@!@}
-% Because these definitions are very similar only one is displayed
-% in a way that the definition can be easily checked.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{:}{%
- \ifmmode\string:\space
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi
- \fi
- \string:\space
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{!}{%
- \ifmmode\string!\space
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi
- \fi
- \string!\space
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\breton@sh@?@}
-% For the question mark something different has to be done. In this
-% case the amount of white space that replaces the space character
-% depends on the dimensions of the font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{?}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string?\space
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip
- \kern\fontdimen2\font
- \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font
- \fi
- \fi
- \string?\space
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% All that is left to do now is provide the breton user with some
-% extra utilities.
-%
-% Some definitions for special characters.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{OT1}{64}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{OT1}{92}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{T1}{16}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\boi}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{OT1}{94}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{2}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{OT1}{126}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{3}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{23}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{6}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\degre}{OT1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following macros are used in the redefinition of |\^| and
-% |\"| to handle the letter i.
-% \changes{breton-1.0c}{1995/07/07}{Postpone the
-% \cs{DeclareTextCompositeCommand}s untill \cs{AtBeginDocument}}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\^}{OT1}{i}{\^\i}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\"\i}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And some more macros for numbering.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\kentan{1\/${}^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$}
-\def\eil{2\/${}^{\rm l}$}
-\def\re{\/${}^{\rm re}$}
-\def\trede{3\re}
-\def\pevare{4\re}
-\def\vet{\/${}^{\rm vet}$}
-\def\pempvet{5\vet}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{breton-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{breton}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 595e0cba1bd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/breton.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{breton.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{breton.ldf}{\from{breton.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 313018acd81..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1039 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{1268}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{bulgarian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{bulgarian}
- [2008/03/21 v1.0g Bulgarian support from the babel system]
-%
-%% File `bulgarian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989-2008
-%% by Johannes Braams,TeXniek
-%
-%% Bulgarian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1995-2008
-%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk>
-%% Johannes Braams,TeXniek
-%
-%% Adapted from russianb.dtx
-%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk>
-%
-%% Please report errors to:J.L.Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand\langvar{$\langle\it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand\note[1]{}
-\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{bulgarian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{bulgarian.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{bulgarian-0.99}{2000/06/10}{%
-% This is a prerelease version of this file.
-% Features needing further testing are removed.}
-%
-% \section{The Bulgarian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. This file was initially derived from the August-1998
-% version of \file{russianb.dtx}.
-%
-% It is (reasonably) backward compatible with the 1994/1996
-% (non-babel) bulgarian style (bulgaria.sty) by Georgi
-% Boshnakov---files prepared for that style should compile
-% successfully (with vastly improved appearance due to usage of
-% standard fonts).} provides the language-specific macros for the
-% Bulgarian language.
-%
-% Users should take note of the vaious ``cyrillic'' dashes
-% available now (see below). These should remove many causes of
-% headache. Also, although by default the Bulgarian quotation marks
-% will appear automatically when typesetting in Bulgarian, it is
-% better to use the new commands \cs{"'} and \cs{"'} which
-% explicitly typeset them.
-% Note: automatic switch to Bulgarian quotation is withdrawn
-% for the moment and may not be reintroduced at all.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:bulgarian-quote} an overview is given of its
-% purpose.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |"---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\
-% |"--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\
-% |"--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compound words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|
-% or some other signs as ``disable/enable''). \\
-% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\
-% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing
-% hyphenation in the composing words. \\
-% |",| & thinspace for initials with a breakpoint
-% in following surname. \\
-% |"`| & for German left double quotes
-% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\
-% |"'| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A''
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$).\\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$).\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by\file{bulgarian}}\label{tab:bulgarian-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:bulgarian-quote} can also be typeset
-% by using the commands in table~\ref{tab:bmore-quote}.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |\cdash---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\
-% |\cdash--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\
-% |\cdash--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\
-% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes
-% (looks like,\kern-0.08em,). \\
-% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``).\\^^A%''
-% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$).\\
-% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$).\\
-% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|).
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined
-% by \babel}\label{tab:bmore-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% The French quotes are also available as ligatures `|<<|' and
-% `|>>|' in 8-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{LCY},
-% \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2*}) and as `|<|' and `|>|' characters in
-% 7-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{OT2} and \texttt{LWN}).
-%
-% The quotation marks traditionally used in Bulgarian were borrowed
-% from German o they keep their original names. French quotation
-% marks may be seen as well in older books.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{bulgarian}{captionsbulgarian}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{bulgarian} will be an `unknown' language, in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@bulgarian| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@bulgarian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Bulgarian}
- \adddialect\l@bulgarian0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding}
-%
-% We need to know the encoding for text that is supposed to be
-% which is active at the end of the \babel\ package. If the
-% \pkg{fontenc} package is loaded later, then \ldots too bad!
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The user may choose between different available Cyrillic
-% encodings---e.g., \texttt{X2}, \texttt{LCY}, or \texttt{LWN}.
-% If the user wants to use a font encoding other than the default
-% (\texttt{T2A}), he has to load the corresponding file
-% \emph{before} \file{bulgarian.sty}.
-% This may be done in the following way:
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \usepackage[LCY,OT1]{fontenc} %overwrite the default encoding;
-% \usepackage[english,bulgarian]{babel}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \unskip
-%
-% Note: most people would prefer the \texttt{T2A} to \texttt{X2},
-% because \texttt{X2} does not contain Latin letters, and users
-% should be very careful to switch the language every time they
-% want to typeset a Latin word inside a Bulgarian phrase or vice
-% versa. On the other hand, switching the language is a good
-% practice anyway. With a decent text processing program it does
-% not involve more work than switching between the Bulgarian and
-% English keyboard. Moreover that the far most common disruption
-% occurs as a result of forgetting to switch back to cyrillic
-% keyboard.
-%
-% We parse the |\cdp@list| containing the encodings known to
-% \LaTeX\ in the order they were loaded. We set the
-% |\cyrillicencoding| to the \emph{last} loaded encoding in the
-% list of supported Cyrillic encodings: \texttt{OT2}, \texttt{LWN},
-% \texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2C}, \texttt{T2B},
-% \texttt{T2A}, if any.
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
- \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
- \edef\reserved@c{#2}%
- \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c
- \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c
- \fi}
-\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
- \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{X2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}}
-\cdp@list
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, if |\cyrillicencoding| is undefined, then the user did not
-% load any of supported encodings. So, we have to set
-% |\cyrillicencoding| to some default value. We test the presence
-% of the encoding definition files in the order from less
-% preferable to more preferable encodings. We use the lowercase
-% names (i.e., \file{lcyenc.def} instead of \file{LCYenc.def}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If |\cyrillicencoding| is still undefined, then the user seems
-% not to have a properly installed distribution. A fatal error.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}%
- {Your installation is incomplete. \MessageBreak
- You need at least one of the following files: \MessageBreak
- \space\space
- x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def, \MessageBreak
- \space\space
- lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We avoid |\usepackage[\cyrillicencoding]{fontenc}| because we
-% don't want to force the switch of |\encodingdefault|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \lowercase
- \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}%
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \PackageInfo{babel}
-% {Using `\cyrillicencoding' as a default Cyrillic encoding}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \unskip
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\Bulgarian}{%
- \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\bulgarianhyphenmins
- \language\l@bulgarian}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{%
- \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins
- \language\l@english}
-\let\Bul\Bulgarian
-\let\Bg\Bulgarian
-\let\cyrillictext\Bulgarian
-\let\cyr\Bulgarian
-\let\Eng\English
-\def\selectenglanguage{\selectlanguage{english}}
-\def\selectbglanguage{\selectlanguage{bulgarian}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Since the \texttt{X2} encoding does not contain Latin letters,we
-% should make some redefinitions of \LaTeX\ macros which implicitly
-% produce Latin letters.
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We put |\latinencoding| in braces to avoid problems with |\@alph|
-% inside minipages (e.g., footnotes inside minipages) where
-% |\@alph| is expanded and we get for example `|\fontencoding OT1|'
-% (|\fontencoding| is robust).
-%
-% \changes{bulgarian-1.0c}{2003/06/14}{Added missing closing brace}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\@Alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or
- K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or
- X\or Y\or Z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \def\@alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
- k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or
- x\or y\or z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \let\@Alph\@Alph@eng
- \let\@alph\@alph@eng
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Unfortunately, the commands |\AA| and |\aa| are not encoding
-% dependent in \LaTeX\ (unlike e.g., |\oe| or |\DH|). They are
-% defined as |\r{A}| and |\r{a}|. This leads to unpredictable
-% results when the font encoding does not contain the Latin letters
-% `A' and `a' (like \texttt{X2}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following block redefines the character class of uppercase
-% Greek letters and some accents, if it is equal to 7 (variable
-% family), to avoid incorrect results if the font encoding in some
-% math family does not contain these characters in places of OT1
-% encoding. The code was taken from |amsmath.dtx|. See comments and
-% further explanation there.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup\catcode`\"=12
-% uppercase greek letters:
-\def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax
- "0000\@nil#1}
-\def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{%
-\ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax
-\ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi
- \fi}
-\@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi
-\@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi
-\@tempa\Omega
-% some accents:
-\def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent}
-\expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil
-\ifx\@tempb\@tempc
-\def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}%
-\def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}%
-\def\do#1"#2{}
-\def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil
- \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF
- \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}%
- \fi}
-\@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave
-\@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar
-\fi
-\endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The user should use the \pkg{inputenc} package when any 8-bit
-% Cyrillic font encoding is used, selecting one of the Cyrillic
-% input encodings. We do not assume any default input encoding, so
-% the user should explicitly call the \pkg{inputenc} package by
-% |\usepackage{inputenc}|. We also removed |\AtBeginDocument|, so
-% \pkg{inputenc} should be used before \babel.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{%
-\def\reserved@a{LWN}%
-\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
-\def\reserved@a{OT2}%
-\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
-\PackageWarning{babel}%
-{No input encoding specified for Bulgarian language}\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch
-% between Cyrillic and Roman encodings.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cyrillictext}
-% \begin{macro}{\latintext}
-%
-% The command |\cyrillictext| will switch from Latin font encoding
-% to the Cyrillic font encoding, the command |\latintext| switches
-% back. This assumes that the `normal' font encoding is a Latin
-% one. These commands are \emph{declarations}, for shorter peaces
-% of text the commands |\textlatin| and |\textcyrillic| can be
-% used.
-%
-% We comment out |\latintext| since it is defined in the core of
-% babel (babel.def). We add the shorthand |\lat| for |\latintext|.
-% Note that |\cyrillictext| has been defined above.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{%
-% \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
-% \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}}
-\let\lat\latintext
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textcyrillic}
-% \begin{macro}{\textlatin}
-%
-% These commands take an argument which is then typeset using the
-% requested font encoding.
-% |\textlatin| is commented out since it is defined in the core of
-% babel. (It is defined there with |\DeclareRobustCommand| instead.)
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext}
-% \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Bulgarian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsbulgarian}
-%
-% The macro |\captionsbulgarian| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. The two
-% commands |\cyr| and |\lat| activate Cyrillic resp. Latin encoding.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsbulgarian{%
- \def\prefacename{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrg\cyro\cyrv\cyro\cyrr}}%
- \def\refname{%
- {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\abstractname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrb\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrk\cyrt}}%
- \def\bibname{%
- {\cyr\CYRB\cyri\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyro\cyrg\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\chaptername{%
- {\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}%
- \def\appendixname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
- \def\contentsname{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
- \def\listfigurename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
- \def\listtablename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
- \def\indexname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrz\cyrb\cyru\cyrch\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}%
- \def\authorname{%
- {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}%
- \def\figurename{%
- {\cyr\CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\tablename{%
- {\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}%
- \def\partname{%
- {\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt}}%
- \def\enclname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\ccname{%
- {\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\headtoname{%
- {\cyr\CYRZ\cyra}}%
- \def\pagename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrt\cyrr.}}%
- \def\seename{%
- {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.}}%
- \def\alsoname{%
- {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.\ \cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrshch\cyro\ \cyri}}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- Needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%%
-% \begin{macro}{\datebulgarian}
-%
-% The macro |\datebulgarian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Bulgarian dates.
-% It also provides the command |\todayRoman| which produces the
-% date with the month in capital roman numerals, a popular format
-% for dates in Bulgarian.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datebulgarian{%
- \def\month@bulgarian{\ifcase\month\or
- \cyrya\cyrn\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\or
- \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrishrt\or
- \cyryu\cyrn\cyri\or
- \cyryu\cyrl\cyri\or
- \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\or
- \cyrs\cyre\cyrp\cyrt\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyro\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrn\cyro\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\fi}%
- \def\month@Roman{\expandafter\@Roman\month}%
- \def\today{\number\day~\month@bulgarian\ \number\year~\cyrg.}%
- \def\todayRoman{\number\day.\,\month@Roman.\,\number\year~\cyrg.}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\todayRoman}
-%
-% The month is often written with roman numbers in Bulgarian dates.
-% Here we define date in this format:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Romannumeral#1{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral #1}}
-\def\todayRoman{\number\day.\Romannumeral{\month}.\number\year~\cyrg.}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasbulgarian}
-%
-% The macro |\extrasbulgarian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Bulgarian language.
-% The macro |\noextrasbulgarian| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasbulgarian|.
-%
-% The first action we define is to switch on the selected Cyrillic
-% encoding whenever we enter `bulgarian'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\cyrillictext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When the encoding definition file was processed by \LaTeX\ the
-% current font encoding is stored in |\latinencoding|, assuming
-% that \LaTeX\ uses \texttt{T1} or \texttt{OT1} as
-% default. Therefore we switch back to |\latinencoding| whenever
-% the Bulgarian language is no longer `active'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\latintext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For Bulgarian the \texttt{"} character also is made active.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need extra active
-% characters. The character |"| is used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:bulgarian-quote}. We specify that the Bulgarian
-% group of shorthands should be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\languageshorthands{bulgarian}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may
-% vary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The \texttt{X2} and \texttt{T2*} encodings do not contain
-% |spanish_shriek| and |spanish_query| symbols; as a consequence,
-% the ligatures `|?`|' and `|!`|' do not work with them (these
-% characters are useless for Cyrillic texts anyway). But we define
-% the shorthands to emulate these ligatures (optionally).
-%
-% We do not use |\latinencoding| here (but instead explicitly use
-% \texttt{OT1}) because the user may choose \texttt{T2A} to be the
-% primary encoding, but it does not contain these characters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*spanishligs>
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{?`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textquestiondown}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{!`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textexclamdown}
-%</spanishligs>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% To be able to define the function of `|"|', we first define a
-% couple of `support' macros.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-%
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it
-% available, the math accent |\"|can now be typed as `|"|'.
-% \changes{bulgarian-1.0c}{2003/04/10}{repaired typo}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\reserved@a{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019}
- \def\dq{"}}
-\reserved@a
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: german and french
-% quotes. We use definitions of these quotes made in babel.sty.
-% The french quotes are contained in the \texttt{T2*} encodings.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{">}{\frqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some additional commands:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"|}{%
-\textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
-\allowhyphens}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next two macros for |"-| and |"---| are somewhat different.
-% We must check whether the second token is a hyphen character:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"-}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If the next token is `|-|', we typeset an emdash, otherwise a
-% hyphen sign:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bulgarian@sh@tmp{%
- \if\bulgarian@sh@next-\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@emdash
- \else\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@hyphen\fi
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \TeX\ looks for the next token after the first `|-|': the meaning
-% of this token is written to |\bulgarian@sh@next| and
-% |\bulgarian@sh@tmp| is called.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \futurelet\bulgarian@sh@next\bulgarian@sh@tmp}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here are the definitions of hyphen and emdash. First the hyphen:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bulgarian@sh@hyphen{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For the emdash definition, there are the two parameters: we must
-% `eat' two last hyphen signs of our emdash \dots :
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bulgarian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cdash}
-%
-% \dots\ these two parameters are useful for another macro:
-% |\cdash|:
-%
-% \changes{bulgarian-1.0e}{2006/03/31}{Two occurences of \cmd{temp}
-% were changed into tab followed by emp}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier
-\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}%
-\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}%
- \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else
- \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% second parameter (or third for |\cdash|) shows what kind of emdash
-% to create in next step
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"---| & ordinary (plain) Cyrillic emdash inside text:
-% an unbreakable thinspace will be inserted before only in case of
-% a \textit{space} before the dash (it is necessary for dashes after
-% display maths formulae: there could be lists, enumerations etc.\
-% started with ``---where $a$ is ...'' i.e., the dash starts a line).
-% (Firstly there were planned rather soft rules for user:he may put
-% a space before the dash or not. But it is difficult to place this
-% thinspace automatically, i.e., by checking modes because after
-% display formulae \TeX{} uses horizontal mode. Maybe there is a
-% misunderstanding? Maybe there is another way?) After a dash
-% a breakable thinspace is always placed; \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% What is more grammatically: .2em or .2\fontdimen6\font?
-\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi
-\cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"--~| & emdash in compound names or surnames
-% (like Mendeleev--Klapeiron); this dash has no space characters
-% around; after the dash some space is added
-% |\exhyphenalty| \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"--*| & for denoting direct speech (a space like |\enskip|
-% must follow the emdash); \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode
- \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}%
-%\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cyrdash}
-%
-% Finally the macro for ``body'' of the Cyrillic emdash.
-% The |\cyrdash| macro will be defined in case this macro hasn't
-% been defined in a fontenc file. For T2*fonts, cyrdash will be
-% placed in the code of the English emdash thus it uses ligature
-% |---|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% Is there an IF necessary?
-\ifx\cyrdash\undefined
-\def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here a really new macro---to place thinspace between initials.
-% This macro used instead of |\,| allows hyphenation in the
-% following surname.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The Bulgarian hyphenation patterns can be used with
-% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{bulgarian-1.0b}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now the action |\extrasbulgarian| has to execute is to make sure
-% that the command |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not
-% the case the execution of |\noextrasbulgarian| will switch it off
-% again.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Make the double quotes produce the traditional quotes
-% used in Bulgarian texts (these are the German quotes).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \initiate@active@char{`}
-% \initiate@active@char{'}
-% \addto\extrasbulgarian{%
-% \bbl@activate{`}}
-% \addto\extrasbulgarian{%
-% \bbl@activate{'}}
-% \addto\noextrasbulgarian{%
-% \bbl@deactivate{`}}
-% \addto\noextrasbulgarian{%
-% \bbl@deactivate{'}}
-% \def\mlron{\bbl@activate{`}\bbl@activate{'}}
-% \def\mlroff{\bbl@deactivate{`}\bbl@deactivate{'}}
-% \declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{``}{\glqq}
-% \declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{''}{\grqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Next we add a new enumeration style for Bulgarian manuscripts with
-% Cyrillic letters,and later on we define some math operator names in
-% accordance with Bulgarian typesetting traditions.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@Alph@bul}
-%
-% We begin by defining |\@Alph@bul| which works like |\@Alph|, but
-% produces (uppercase) Cyrillic letters intead of Latin ones. The
-% letters ISHRT, HRDSN and SFTSN are skipped, as usual for such
-% enumeration.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\enumBul{\let\@Alph\@Alph@bul \let\@alph\@alph@bul}
-\def\enumEng{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng}
-\def\enumLat{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\enumBul}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\enumLat}
-\def\@Alph@bul#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- \CYRA\or \CYRB\or \CYRV\or \CYRG\or \CYRD\or \CYRE\or \CYRZH\or
- \CYRZ\or \CYRI\or \CYRK\or \CYRL\or \CYRM\or \CYRN\or \CYRO\or
- \CYRP\or \CYRR\or \CYRS\or \CYRT\or \CYRU\or \CYRF\or \CYRH\or
- \CYRC\or \CYRCH\or \CYRSH\or \CYRSHCH\or \CYRYU\or \CYRYA\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-\def\@Alph@eng#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or
- N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or Y\or Z\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@alph@bul}
-%
-% The macro |\@alph@bul| is similar to |\@Alph@bul|;
-% it produces lowercase Bulgarian letters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@alph@bul#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- \cyra\or \cyrb\or \cyrv\or \cyrg\or \cyrd\or \cyre\or \cyrzh\or
- \cyrz\or \cyri\or \cyrk\or \cyrl\or \cyrm\or \cyrn\or \cyro\or
- \cyrp\or \cyrr\or \cyrs\or \cyrt\or \cyru\or \cyrf\or \cyrh\or
- \cyrc\or \cyrch\or \cyrsh\or \cyrshch\or \cyryu\or \cyrya\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-\def\@alph@eng#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or
- n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Set up default Cyrillic math alphabets. To use Cyrillic letters
-% in math mode user should load the |textmath| package
-% \emph{before} loading fontenc package (or \babel). Note,that by
-% default Cyrillic letters are taken from upright font in math mode
-% (unlike Latin letters).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\RequirePackage{textmath}
-\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{%
-\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And we need a few commands to be able to switch to different
-% variants.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding
- \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some math functions in Bulgarian math books have other names:
-% e.g., \texttt{sinh} in Bulgarian is written as \texttt{sh}
-% etc. So we define a number of new math operators.
-%
-% |\sinh|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\cosh|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\tan|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\arctan|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\arccot|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following macro conflicts with |\th| defined in Latin~1
-% encoding:
-% |\tanh|:
-% \changes{bulgarian-1.0d}{2004/05/21}{Change definition of \cs{th}
-% only for this language}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
- \babel@save{\th}%
- \let\ltx@th\th
- \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}%
- {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\cot|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\coth|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\csc|:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This is for compatibility with older Bulgarian packages.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{%
- \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration
-% file, setting the main language to be switched on at
-% |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of \texttt{@}
-% to its original value.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{bulgarian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 467e11c6ff9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bulgarian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2000/09/21}
-\def\batchfile{bulgarian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{bulgarian.ldf}{\from{bulgarian.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index b8185af4df8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,712 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{517}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{catalan.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{catalan}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{catalan.dtx}
- [2005/03/29 v2.2p Catalan support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `catalan.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Catalan Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2005
-%% by Goncal Badenes <badenes at imec.be>
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Catalan language definition file.
-% This file was developped out of spanish.sty and suggestions by
-% Goncal Badenes <badenes at imec.be> and Joerg Knappen
-% <knappen at vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de>.
-%
-% The file spanish.sty was written by Julio Sanchez,
-% (jsanchez@gmv.es) The code for the catalan language has been
-% removed and now is in this file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{catalan.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{catalan.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.0b}{1993/09/23}{Incorporated the changes from
-% \file{spanish.sty}}
-% \changes{catalan-2.1}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/04}{Made the activation of the grave
-% and acute accents optional}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{Removed the use of the tilde for
-% catalan}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2f}{1996/07/13}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2g}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2k}{1999/05/05}{A wrong \cs{changes} entry made
-% typesetting impossible}
-%
-% \section{The Catalan language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macro's for the
-% Catalan language.
-%
-% For this language only the double quote character (|"|) is made
-% active by default. In table~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-def} an
-% overview is given of the new macros defined and the new meanings
-% of |"|. Additionally to that, the user can explicitly activate
-% the acute accent or apostrophe (|'|) and/or the grave accent
-% (|`|) characters by using the \Lopt{activeacute} and
-% \Lopt{activegrave} options. In that case, the definitions shown
-% in table~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-opt} also become
-% available\footnote{Please note that if the acute accent character
-% is active, it is necessary to take special care of coding
-% apostrophes in a way which cannot be confounded with
-% accents. Therefore, it is necessary to type \texttt{l'\{\}estri}
-% instead of \texttt{l'estri}.}.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |\l.l| & geminated-l digraph (similar to
-% l$\cdot$l). |\L.L| produces the uppercase version.\\
-% |\lgem| & geminated-l digraph (similar to
-% l$\cdot$l). |\Lgem| produces the uppercase version.\\
-% |\up| & Macro to help typing raised ordinals, like {1\raise
-% 1ex\hbox{\small er}}. Takes one argument.\\
-% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |"i| & i with diaeresis, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. Valid for the following vowels:
-% i, u (both lowercase and uppercase).\\
-% |"c| & c-cedilla (\c{c}). Valid for both uppercase and
-% lowercase c.\\
-% |"l| & geminated-l digraph (similar to
-% l$\cdot$l). Valid for both uppercase and lowercase l.\\
-% |"<| & French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\
-% |">| & French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |"-| & explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.\\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{catalan.ldf}
-% (activated by default)}
-% \label{tab:catalan-quote-def}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |'e| & acute accented a, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. Valid for the following
-% vowels: e, i, o, u (both lowercase and uppercase).\\
-% |`a| & grave accented a, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. Valid for the following
-% vowels: a, e, o (both lowercase and uppercase).
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{catalan.ldf}
-% (activated only when using the options \Lopt{activeacute} and
-% \Lopt{activegrave})}
-% \label{tab:catalan-quote-opt}
-% \end{table}
-% These active accents characters behave according to their original
-% definitions if not followed by one of the characters indicated in
-% that table.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Removed code to load
-% \file{latexhax.com}}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{catalan}\captionscatalan
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{catalan} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@catalan| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@catalan\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Catalan}
- \adddialect\l@catalan0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Catalan language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\catalanhyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2n}{2001/02/19}{Set the hyphenation parameters
-% both to two as required by \texttt{cahyph.tex}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{catalan}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionscatalan}
-% The macro |\captionscatalan| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{catalan-1.1}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Added some names}
-% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/11/09}{Added a few missing translations}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/03}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2d}{1995/07/10}{added translation of Proof}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2d}{1995/11/15}{Translations revised}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2m}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2p}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for
-% Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionscatalan{%
- \def\prefacename{Pr\`oleg}%
- \def\refname{Refer\`encies}%
- \def\abstractname{Resum}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tol}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\`endix}%
- \def\contentsname{\'Index}%
- \def\listfigurename{\'Index de figures}%
- \def\listtablename{\'Index de taules}%
- \def\indexname{\'Index alfab\`etic}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Taula}%
- \def\partname{Part}%
- \def\enclname{Adjunt}%
- \def\ccname{C\`opies a}%
- \def\headtoname{A}%
- \def\pagename{P\`agina}%
- \def\seename{Vegeu}%
- \def\alsoname{Vegeu tamb\'e}%
- \def\proofname{Demostraci\'o}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossari}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datecatalan}
-% The macro |\datecatalan| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Catalan dates. Months are written in
-% lowercase\footnote{This seems to be the common practice. See for
-% example: E.~Coromina, \emph{El 9 Nou: Manual de redacci\'o i
-% estil}, Ed.~Eumo, Vic, 1993}.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/06/18}{Month names in lowercase}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datecatalan{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- de gener\or de febrer\or de mar\c{c}\or d'abril\or de maig\or
- de juny\or de juliol\or d'agost\or de setembre\or d'octubre\or
- de novembre\or de desembre\fi
- \space de~\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrascatalan}
-% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Macro completely rewritten}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2a}{1995/03/11}{Handling of active characters
-% completely rewritten}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrascatalan}
-% \changes{catalan-2.0}{1993/07/11}{Macro completely rewritten}
-%
-% The macro |\extrascatalan| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Catalan language. The macro |\noextrascatalan| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrascatalan|.
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1995/11/10}{Now give the apostrophe a
-% lowercase code}
-% To improve hyphenation we give the grave character (\texttt{'}) a
-% non-zero lower case code; when we do that \TeX\ will find more
-% breakpoints in words that contain this character in its r\^ole as
-% apostrophe.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrascatalan{%
- \lccode`'=`'}
-\addto\noextrascatalan{%
- \lccode`'=0}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For Catalan, some characters are made active or are redefined. In
-% particular, the \texttt{"} character receives a new meaning; this
-% can also happen for the \texttt{'} character and the \texttt{`}
-% character when the options \Lopt{activegrave} and/or
-% \Lopt{activeacute} are specified.
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/07}{Make activating the accent
-% characters optional}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1995/08/17}{Need to split up the
-% \cs{@ifpackagewith} statements}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrascatalan{\languageshorthands{catalan}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Because the grave character is being used in constructs such as
-% |\catcode``=\active| it needs to have it's original category code%''
-% when the auxiliary file is being read. Note that this file is
-% read twice, once at the beginning of the document; then there is
-% no problem; but the second time it is read at the end of the
-% document to check whether any labels changes. It's this second
-% time round that the actived grave character leads to error
-% messages.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2l}{1999/11/29}{Make sure that the grave accent
-% has catcode 12 \emph{before} it is made \cs{active}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi}
- \initiate@active@char{`}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{`}}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \initiate@active@char{'}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{'}}%
- }{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now make sure that the characters that have been turned into
-% shorthanfd characters expand to `normal' characters outside the
-% catalan environment.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2l}{1999/12/16}{Don't forget do deactivate the
-% shorthands}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{`}}}{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{'}}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.2a}{1995/03/11}{All the code for handling active
-% characters is now moved to \file{babel.def}}
-%
-% Apart from the active characters some other macros get a new
-% definition. Therefore we store the current ones to be able
-% to restore them later.
-% When their current meanings are saved, we can safely redefine
-% them.
-%
-% We provide new definitions for the accent macros when one or
-% both of the options \Lopt{activegrave} or \Lopt{activeacute}
-% were specified.
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.2h}{1997/01/08}{Added some comment signs to
-% prevent unwanted spaces in the output}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrascatalan{%
- \babel@save\"%
- \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}}%
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \babel@save\`%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\def\`{\protect\@grave}}
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \babel@save\'%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\def\'{\protect\@acute}}
- }{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% All the code above is necessary because we need a few extra
-% active characters. These characters are then used as indicated in
-% tables~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-def}
-% and~\ref{tab:catalan-quote-opt}.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dieresis}
-% \begin{macro}{\textacute}
-% \changes{catalan-2.1d}{1994/06/26}{Renamed from \cs{acute} as that
-% is a \cs{mathaccent}}
-% \begin{macro}{\textgrave}
-%
-% The original definition of |\"| is stored as |\dieresis|, because
-% the definition of |\"| might not be the default plain \TeX\
-% one. If the user uses \textsc{PostScript} fonts with the Adobe
-% font encoding the \texttt{"} character is not in the same
-% position as in Knuth's font encoding. In this case |\"| will not
-% be defined as |\accent"7F 1|, but as |\accent'310 #1|. Something
-% similar happens when using fonts that follow the Cork
-% encoding. For this reason we save the definition of |\"| and use
-% that in the definition of other macros. We do likewise for |\`|,
-% and |\'|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\dieresis\"
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{\let\textgrave\`}{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\let\textacute\'}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@umlaut}
-% \begin{macro}{\@acute}
-% \begin{macro}{\@grave}
-% We check the encoding and if not using T1, we make the accents
-% expand but enabling hyphenation beyond the accent. If this is the
-% case, not all break positions will be found in words that contain
-% accents, but this is a limitation in \TeX. An unsolved problem
-% here is that the encoding can change at any time. The definitions
-% below are made in such a way that a change between two 256-char
-% encodings are supported, but changes between a 128-char and a
-% 256-char encoding are not properly supported. We check if T1 is
-% in use. If not, we will give a warning and proceed redefining the
-% accent macros so that \TeX{} at least finds the breaks that are
-% not too close to the accent. The warning will only be printed to
-% the log file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined
- \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
-\else
- \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one
- \let\@umlaut\dieresis
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \let\@acute\textacute}{}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \let\@grave\textgrave}{}
- \else
- \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space
- instead of T1.}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If the user setup has extended fonts, the Ferguson macros are
-% required to be defined. We check for their existance and, if
-% defined, expand to whatever they are defined to. For instance,
-% |\'a| would check for the existance of a |\@ac@a| macro. It is
-% assumed to expand to the code of the accented letter. If it is
-% not defined, we assume that no extended codes are available and
-% expand to the original definition but enabling hyphenation beyond
-% the accent. This is as best as we can do. It is better if you
-% have extended fonts or ML-\TeX{} because the hyphenation
-% algorithm can work on the whole word. The following macros are
-% directly derived from ML-\TeX{}.\footnote{A problem is perceived
-% here with these macros when used in a multilingual environment
-% where extended hyphenation patterns are available for some but
-% not all languages. Assume that no extended patterns exist at some
-% site for French and that \file{french.sty} would adopt this
-% scheme too. In that case, \mbox{\texttt{'e}} in French would
-% produce the combined accented letter, but hyphenation around it
-% would be suppressed. Both language options would need an
-% independent method to know whether they have extended patterns
-% available. The precise impact of this problem and the possible
-% solutions are under study.}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{catalan-2.2a}{1995/03/14}{All the code to deal with active
-% characters is now in \file{babel.def}}
-%
-% Now we can define our shorthands: the diaeresis and ``ela
-% geminada'' support,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"i}{\textormath{\@umlaut\i}{\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"l}{\lgem{}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"u}{\textormath{\@umlaut u}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"I}{\textormath{\@umlaut I}{\ddot I}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"L}{\Lgem{}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"U}{\textormath{\@umlaut U}{\ddot U}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% cedille,
-% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{cedile now produced by double
-% quote shorthand}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"c}{\textormath{\c c}{^{\prime} c}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"C}{\textormath{\c C}{^{\prime} C}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% `french' quote characters,
-% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{Added shorthands for guillemets}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2i}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% guillemot characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% grave accents,
-% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1996/03/05}{Added `{}` as an axtra shorthand}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`a}{\textormath{\@grave a}{\grave a}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`e}{\textormath{\@grave e}{\grave e}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`o}{\textormath{\@grave o}{\grave o}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`A}{\textormath{\@grave A}{\grave A}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`E}{\textormath{\@grave E}{\grave E}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`O}{\textormath{\@grave O}{\grave O}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{``}{\textquotedblleft}%''
- }{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% acute accents,
-% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/07/03}{Changed mathmode definition of
-% acute shorthands to expand to a single prime followed by the next
-% character in the input}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1995/09/05}{Added vertical bar as argument to
-% active acute}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'a}{\textormath{\@acute a}{^{\prime} a}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'e}{\textormath{\@acute e}{^{\prime} e}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'i}{\textormath{\@acute\i{}}{^{\prime} i}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'o}{\textormath{\@acute o}{^{\prime} o}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'u}{\textormath{\@acute u}{^{\prime} u}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'A}{\textormath{\@acute A}{^{\prime} A}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'E}{\textormath{\@acute E}{^{\prime} E}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'I}{\textormath{\@acute I}{^{\prime} I}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'O}{\textormath{\@acute O}{^{\prime} O}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'U}{\textormath{\@acute U}{^{\prime} U}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'|}{%
- \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}{^{\prime}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% the acute accent,
-% \changes{catalan-2.2c}{1995/07/08}{Added '{}' as an axtra shorthand,
-% removed 'n as a shorthand}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{''}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}}
- }{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and finally, some support definitions
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\-}
-%
-% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version
-% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while
-% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated
-% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is
-% unfortunate for Catalan but not as much as for Dutch or German,
-% where long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a
-% means to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the
-% ones that \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation
-% patterns. However, the average length of words in Catalan makes
-% this desirable and so it is kept here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrascatalan{%
- \babel@save{\-}%
- \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lgem}
-% \begin{macro}{\Lgem}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/06/18}{Added support for typing the
-% catalan ``ela geminada'' with the macros \cs{lgem} and \cs{Lgem}}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2f}{1996/09/20}{Added a check for math mode as
-% the use of \cs{lgem} and \cs{Lgem} in math mode is not sensible.}
-%
-% Here we define a macro for typing the catalan ``ela geminada''
-% (geminated l). The macros |\lgem| and |\Lgem| have been chosen
-% for its lowercase and uppercase representation,
-% respectively\footnote{The macro names \cs{ll} and \cs{LL} were
-% not taken because of the fact that \cs{ll} is already used in
-% mathematical mode.}.
-%
-% The code used in the actual macro used is a combination of the
-% one proposed by Feruglio and Fuster\footnote{G.~Valiente and
-% R.~Fuster, Typesetting Catalan Texts with \TeX, \emph{TUGboat}
-% \textbf{14}(3), 1993.} and the proposal\footnote{G. Valiente,
-% Modern Catalan Typographical Conventions, \emph{TUGboat}
-% \textbf{16}(3), 1995.} from Valiente presented at the \TeX\ Users
-% Group Annual Meeting in 1995. This last proposal has not been
-% fully implemented due to its limitation to CM fonts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newdimen\leftllkern \newdimen\rightllkern \newdimen\raiselldim
-\def\lgem{%
- \ifmmode
- \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname l%
- \else
- \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt%
- \setbox0\hbox{l}\setbox1\hbox{l\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}%
- \advance\raiselldim by \the\fontdimen5\the\font
- \advance\raiselldim by -\ht2%
- \leftllkern=-.25\wd0%
- \advance\leftllkern by \wd1%
- \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0%
- \rightllkern=-.25\wd0%
- \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1%
- \advance\rightllkern by \wd0%
- \allowhyphens\discretionary{l-}{l}%
- {\hbox{l}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}%
- \kern\rightllkern\hbox{l}}\allowhyphens
- \fi
- }
-\def\Lgem{%
- \ifmmode
- \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname L%
- \else
- \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt%
- \setbox0\hbox{L}\setbox1\hbox{L\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}%
- \advance\raiselldim by .5\ht0%
- \advance\raiselldim by -.5\ht2%
- \leftllkern=-.125\wd0%
- \advance\leftllkern by \wd1%
- \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0%
- \rightllkern=-\wd0%
- \divide\rightllkern by 6%
- \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1%
- \advance\rightllkern by \wd0%
- \allowhyphens\discretionary{L-}{L}%
- {\hbox{L}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}%
- \kern\rightllkern\hbox{L}}\allowhyphens
- \fi
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l.l}
-% \begin{macro}{\L.L}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1996/06/26}{Added redefinition of \cs{l} and
-% \cs{L}}
-% It seems to be the most natural way of entering the ``ela
-% geminda'' to use the sequences |\l.l| and |\L.L|. These are not
-% really macro's by themselves but the macros |\l| and |\L| with
-% delimited arguments. Therefor we define two macros that check if
-% the next character is a period. If not the ``polish l'' will be
-% typeset, otherwise a ``ela geminada'' will be typeset and the
-% next two tokens will be `eaten'.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2o}{2003/09/19}{Postpone the redefinition of
-% \cs{l} and \cs{L} until begin document to prevent overwriting by
-% fontenc}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \let\lslash\l
- \let\Lslash\L
- \DeclareRobustCommand\l{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@l\lslash}
- \DeclareRobustCommand\L{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@L\Lslash}}
-\def\bbl@l#1#2{\lgem}
-\def\bbl@L#1#2{\Lgem}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\up}
-%
-% A macro for typesetting things like 1\raise1ex\hbox{\small er} as
-% proposed by Raymon Seroul\footnote{This macro has been borrowed
-% from francais.dtx}.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2b}{1995/06/18}{Added definition of macro
-% \cs{up}, which can be used to type ordinals}
-% \changes{catalan-2.2e}{1996/02/29}{Now use \cs{textsuperscript} and
-% make \cs{up} robust}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{catalan-2.2g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{catalan}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 982e9b8bbaf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/catalan.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{catalan.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{catalan.ldf}{\from{catalan.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 3389033b0b4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,226 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{87}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{croatian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{croatian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{croatian.dtx}
- [2005/03/29 v1.3l Croatian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `croatian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Croatian language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Alan Pai\'{c} (paica@cernvm.cern.ch)
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{croatian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{croatian.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{croatian-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{croatian-1.0c}{1992/01/25}{Removed some typos}
-% \changes{croatian-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3g}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Croatian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Alan Pai\'{c}
-% (\texttt{paica@cernvm.cern.ch}).} defines all the
-% language definition macros for the Croatian language.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{croatian-1.3g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{croatian}\captionscroatian
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{croatian} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@croatian| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{croatian-1.0b}{1991/10/07}{Removed use of
-% \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{croatian-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no
-% hyphenation patterns were loaded.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@croatian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Croatian}
- \adddialect\l@croatian0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Croatian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionscroatian}
-% The macro |\captionscroatian| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{croatian-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename},
-% \cs{alsoname} and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{croatian-1.2}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3d}{1995/05/08}{Added a few translations}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3e}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3f}{1996/01/18}{Added translation of Proof}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3i}{1997/09/11}{Replaced some of the
-% translations with `better' words}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3k}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3l}{2003/11/17}{Inserted translation for Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionscroatian{%
- \def\prefacename{Predgovor}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografija}%
- \def\chaptername{Poglavlje}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatak}%
- \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
- \def\listfigurename{Popis slika}%
- \def\listtablename{Popis tablica}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Slika}%
- \def\tablename{Tablica}%
- \def\partname{Dio}%
- \def\enclname{Prilozi}%
- \def\ccname{Kopije}%
- \def\headtoname{Prima}%
- \def\pagename{Stranica}%
- \def\seename{Vidjeti}%
- \def\alsoname{Vidjeti i}%
- \def\proofname{Dokaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Kazalo}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datecroatian}
-% The macro |\datecroatian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Croatian dates.
-% \changes{croatian-1.3f}{1996/01/18}{in croatian language, the
-% genitive for the name of the month has to be used}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3h}{1997/02/06}{\texttt{sijev\{c\}nja} should be
-% \texttt{seij\cs{v}\{c\}nja} and there should be a period after
-% the year}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{croatian-1.3j}{1999/03/12}{changed \cs{od} into \cs{or}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datecroatian{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- sije\v{c}nja\or velja\v{c}e\or o\v{z}ujka\or travnja\or svibnja\or
- lipnja\or srpnja\or kolovoza\or rujna\or listopada\or studenog\or
- prosinca\fi \space \number\year.}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrascroatian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrascroatian}
-% The macro |\extrascroatian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Croatian language. The macro
-% |\noextrascroatian| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrascroatian|. For the moment these macros are empty but
-% they are defined for compatibility with the other language
-% definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrascroatian{}
-\addto\noextrascroatian{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{croatian-1.3g}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{croatian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index babb296ae01..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/croatian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{croatian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{croatian.ldf}{\from{croatian.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index e4ae1a91aa0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1157 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{1142}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{czech.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<+code>\ProvidesLanguage{czech}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{czech.dtx}
- [2008/07/06 v3.1a Czech support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `czech.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008
-%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz)
-%%
-%% Czech Language Definition File
-% This file is also based on CSLaTeX
-% by Ji\v r\'i Zlatu\v ska, Zden\v ek Wagner,
-% Jaroslav \v Snajdr and Petr Ol\v s\'ak.
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik
-%% babel at tesarici.cz
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Czech language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{czech.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \def\CS{$\cal C\kern-.1667em
-% \lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal S$}\kern-.075em$}
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{czech.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{czech-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com}
-% \changes{czech-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{czech-1.2}{1993/07/11}{Included some features from Kasal's
-% czech.sty}
-% \changes{czech-1.3}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{czech-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{czech-1.3h}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-% \changes{czech-3.0}{2005/09/10}{Implemented the functionality of
-% \CS\LaTeX's czech.sty. The version number was bumped to 3.0
-% to minimize confusion by being higher than the last version
-% of \CS\LaTeX.}
-%
-% \section{The Czech Language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. It was rewritten by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik
-% (\texttt{babel@tesarici.cz}).} defines all the language definition
-% macros for the Czech language. It is meant as a replacement of
-% \CS\LaTeX, the most-widely used standard for typesetting Czech
-% documents in \LaTeX.
-%
-% \subsection{Usage}
-% For this language |\frenchspacing| is set.
-%
-% Additionally, two macros are defined |\q| and |\w| for easy
-% access to two accents are defined.
-%
-% The command |\q| is used with the letters (\texttt{t},
-% \texttt{d}, \texttt{l}, and \texttt{L}) and adds a \texttt{'} to
-% them to simulate a `hook' that should be there. The result looks
-% like t\kern-2pt\char'47. The command |\w| is used to put the
-% ring-accent which appears in \aa ngstr\o m over the letters
-% \texttt{u} and \texttt{U}.
-%
-% \subsection{Compatibility}
-%
-% Great care has been taken to ensure backward compatibility with
-% \CS\LaTeX. In particular, documents which load this file with
-% |\usepackage{czech}| should produce identical output with no
-% modifications to the source. Additionally, all the \CS\LaTeX{}
-% options are recognized:
-%
-% \label{tab:czech-options}
-% \begin{list}{}
-% {\def\makelabel#1{\sbox0{\Lopt{#1}}%
-% \ifdim\wd0>\labelwidth
-% \setbox0\vbox{\box0\hbox{}} \wd0=0pt \fi
-% \box0\hfil}
-% \setlength{\labelwidth}{2\parindent}
-% \setlength{\leftmargin}{2\parindent}
-% \setlength{\rightmargin}{\parindent}}
-% \item[IL2, T1, OT1]
-% These options set the default font encoding. Please note
-% that their use is deprecated. You should use the |fontenc|
-% package to select font encoding.
-%
-% \item[split, nosplit]
-% These options control whether hyphenated words are
-% automatically split according to Czech typesetting rules.
-% With the \Lopt{split} option ``je-li'' is hyphenated as
-% ``je-/-li''. The \Lopt{nosplit} option disables this behavior.
-%
-% The use of this option is strongly discouraged, as it breaks
-% too many common things---hyphens cannot be used in labels,
-% negative arguments to \TeX{} primitives will not work in
-% horizontal mode (use \cs{minus} as a workaround), and there are
-% a few other peculiarities with using this mode.
-%
-% \item[nocaptions]
-%
-% This option was used in \CS\LaTeX{} to set up Czech/Slovak
-% typesetting rules, but leave the original captions and dates.
-% The recommended way to achieve this is to use English as the main
-% language of the document and use the environment |otherlanguage*|
-% for Czech text.
-%
-% \item[olduv]
-% There are two version of \cs{uv}. The older one allows the use
-% of \cs{verb} inside the quotes but breaks any respective kerning
-% with the quotes (like that in \CS{} fonts). The newer one honors
-% the kerning in the font but does not allow \cs{verb} inside the
-% quotes.
-%
-% The new version is used by default in \LaTeXe{} and the old version
-% is used with plain \TeX. You may use \Lopt{olduv} to override the
-% default in \LaTeXe.
-%
-% \item[cstex]
-% This option was used to include the commands \cs{csprimeson} and
-% \cs{csprimesoff}. Since these commands are always included now,
-% it has been removed and the empty definition lasts for compatibility.
-% \end{list}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \subsection{Implementation}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{czech-1.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{czech} might be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@czech| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{czech-1.0b}{1991/10/27}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{czech-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no hyphenation
-% patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{czech-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to produce
-% the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@czech\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Czech}
- \adddialect\l@czech0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We need to define these macros early in the process.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@iltw@{IL2}
-\newif\ifcs@splithyphens
-\cs@splithyphensfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If Babel is not loaded, we provide compatibility with \CS\LaTeX.
-% However, if macro \cs{@ifpackageloaded} is not defined, we assume
-% to be loaded from plain and provide compatibility with csplain.
-% Of course, this does not work well with \LaTeX$\:$2.09, but I
-% doubt anyone will ever want to use this file with \LaTeX$\:$2.09.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined
- \let\cs@compat@plain\relax
- \message{csplain compatibility mode}
-\else
- \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{%
- \let\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \message{cslatex compatibility mode}}
-\fi
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \ProvidesPackage{czech}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Czech style]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Declare \CS\LaTeX{} options (see also the descriptions on page
-% \pageref{tab:czech-options}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}}
- \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}}
- \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}}
- \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse}
- \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue}
- \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Make |IL2| encoding the default. This can be overriden with
-% the other font encoding options.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, process the user-supplied options.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ProcessOptions
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Standard \LaTeXe{} does not include the IL2 encoding in the format.
-% The encoding can be loaded later using the fontenc package, but
-% \CS\LaTeX{} included IL2 by default. This means existing documents
-% for \CS\LaTeX{} do not load that package, so load the encoding
-% ourselves in compatibility mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \input il2enc.def
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Restore the definition of \cs{CurrentOption}, clobbered by processing
-% the options.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\CurrentOption{czech}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Czech language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsczech}
-% The macro \cs{captionsczech} defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-%
-% \changes{czech-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{czech-1.3f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{czech-1.3g}{1996/02/12}{Fixed two errors and provided
-% translation for `proof'}
-% \changes{czech-1.3j}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{czech-1.3k}{2004/02/18}{Added translation for Glossary}
-% \changes{czech-3.0}{2005/11/25}{Updated some translations. Former
-% translations were: `Dodatek' for \cs{appendixname} and `Index'
-% for \cs{indexname}. Also removed spurious colon at the end of
-% \cs{ccname}.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{P\v{r}edmluva}%
- \def\refname{Reference}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitola}%
- \def\appendixname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}%
- \def\contentsname{Obsah}%
- \def\listfigurename{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
- \def\listtablename{Seznam tabulek}%
- \def\indexname{Rejst\v{r}\'{\i}k}%
- \def\figurename{Obr\'azek}%
- \def\tablename{Tabulka}%
- \def\partname{\v{C}\'ast}%
- \def\enclname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}%
- \def\ccname{Na v\v{e}dom\'{\i}}%
- \def\headtoname{Komu}%
- \def\pagename{Strana}%
- \def\seename{viz}%
- \def\alsoname{viz tak\'e}%
- \def\proofname{D\r{u}kaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateczech}
-% The macro \cs{dateczech} redefines the command \cs{today}
-% to produce Czech dates.
-%
-% \CS\LaTeX{} allows line break between the day and the month.
-% However, this behavior has been agreed upon to be a bad thing by
-% the csTeX mailing list in December 2005 and has not been adopted.
-%
-% \changes{czech-1.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{czech-1.3i}{1998/03/28}{Use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or ledna\or \'unora\or
- b\v{r}ezna\or dubna\or kv\v{e}tna\or \v{c}ervna\or \v{c}ervence\or
- srpna\or z\'a\v{r}\'\i\or \v{r}\'{\i}jna\or listopadu\or
- prosince\fi \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasczech}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasczech}
-% The macro |\extrasczech| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Czech language. The macro |\noextrasczech| is used
-% to cancel the actions of |\extrasczech|. This means saving the
-% meaning of two one-letter control sequences before defining them.
-%
-% For Czech texts \cs{frenchspacing} should be in effect. Language
-% group for shorthands is also set here.
-% \changes{czech-1.3e}{1995/03/14}{now use \cs{bbl@frenchspacing} and
-% \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}}
-% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{move \cs{languageshorthands} here,
-% so that the language group is always initialized correctly}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing
- \languageshorthands{czech}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{czech-1.1a}{1992/07/07}{Removed typo, \cs{q} was restored
-% twice, once too many.}
-% \changes{czech-1.3e}{1995/03/15}{Use \LaTeX's \cs{v} and \cs{r}
-% accent commands}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\q\let\q\v
- \babel@save\w\let\w\r}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sq}
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original single and double quote characters in
-% \cs{sq} and \cs{dq} to make them available later.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\sq{'}
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{czech-3.0}{2005/12/10}{Added default for setting hyphenmin
-% parameters. Values taken from \CS\LaTeX.}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\v}
-% \LaTeX's normal |\v| accent places a caron over the letter that
-% follows it (\v{o}). This is not what we want for the letters d,
-% t, l and L; for those the accent should change shape. This is
-% acheived by the following.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{%
- t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{%
- d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lcaron}
-% \begin{macro}{\Lcaron}
-% For the letters \texttt{l} and \texttt{L} we want to disinguish
-% between normal fonts and monospaced fonts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em%
- \else
- l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-\def\Lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}%
- \else
- L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Initialize active quotes. \CS\LaTeX{} provides a way of
-% converting English-style quotes into Czech-style ones. Both
-% single and double quotes are affected, i.e. |``text''| is
-% converted to something like |,,text``| and |`text'| is converted
-% to |,text`|. This conversion can be switched on and off with
-% \cs{csprimeson} and \cs{csprimesoff}.\footnote{By the way, the
-% names of these macros are misleading, because the handling of
-% primes in math mode is rather marginal, the most important thing
-% being the handling of quotes\ldots}
-%
-% These quotes present various troubles, e.g. the kerning is broken,
-% apostrophes are converted to closing single quote, some primitives
-% are broken (most notably the |\catcode`\|\meta{char} syntax will
-% not work any more), and writing them to \file{.aux} files cannot
-% be handled correctly. For these reasons, these commands are only
-% available in \CS\LaTeX{} compatibility mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s
- \def\csprimeson{%
- \catcode`\`\active \catcode`\'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s}
- \def\csprimesoff{%
- \catcode`\`12 \catcode`\'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s}
- \begingroup\catcode`\`\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote}
- \def\cs@openquote{%
- \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq
- \else \expandafter\clq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \begingroup\catcode`\'\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote}
- {^\bgroup\prim@s}}
- \def\cs@closequote{%
- \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq
- \else \expandafter\crq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= }
- \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The way I recommend for typesetting quotes in Czech documents
-% is to use shorthands similar to those used in German.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \initiate@active@char{"}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
- \expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"`}{\clqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"'}{\crqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"<}{\flqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{">}{\frqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\clqq}
-% This is the CS opening quote, which is similar to the German
-% quote (\cs{glqq}) but the kerning is different.
-%
-% For the OT1 encoding, the quote is constructed from the right
-% double quote (i.e. the ``Opening quotes'' character) by moving
-% it down to the baseline and shifting it to the right, or to the
-% left if italic correction is positive.
-%
-% For T1, the ``German Opening quotes'' is used. It is moved to
-% the right and the total width is enlarged. This is done in an
-% attempt to minimize the difference between the OT1 and T1
-% versions.
-%
-% \changes{3.0}{2006/04/20}{Added \cs{leavevmode} to allow an opening
-% quote at the beginning of a paragraph}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{%
- \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}%
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne
- \leavevmode
- \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em
- \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1}
- {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\crqq}
-% For OT1, the CS closing quote is basically the same as
-% \cs{grqq}, only the \cs{textormath} macro is not used, because
-% as far as I know, \cs{grqq} does not work in math mode anyway.
-%
-% For T1, the character is slightly wider and shifted to the
-% right to match its OT1 counterpart.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\clq}
-% \begin{macro}{\crq}
-%
-% Single CS quotes are similar to double quotes (see the
-% discussion above).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1}
- {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1}
- {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\uv}
-% There are two versions of \cs{uv}. The older one opens a group
-% and uses \cs{aftergroup} to typeset the closing quotes. This
-% version allows using \cs{verb} inside the quotes, because the
-% enclosed text is not passed as an argument, but unfortunately
-% it breaks any kerning with the quotes. Although the kerning
-% with the opening quote could be fixed, the kerning with the
-% closing quote cannot.
-%
-% The newer version is defined as a command with one parameter.
-% It preserves kerning but since the quoted text is passed as an
-% argument, it cannot contain \cs{verb}.
-%
-% Decide which version of \cs{uv} should be used. For sake
-% of compatibility, we use the older version with plain \TeX{}
-% and the newer version with \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi
-\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}}
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes
- \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=}
- \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@wordlen}
-% Declare a counter to hold the length of the word after the
-% hyphen.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\cs@wordlen
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@endash}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@emdash}
-% Store the original hyphen in a macro. Ditto for the ligatures.
-%
-% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{ensure correct catcode for the
-% saved hyphen}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup\catcode`\-12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@hyphen{-}
- \def\cs@endash{--}
- \def\cs@emdash{---}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@boxhyphen}
-% Provide a non-breakable hyphen to be used when a compound word
-% is too short to be split, i.e. the second part is shorter than
-% \cs{righthyphenmin}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@splithyphen}
-% The macro \cs{cs@splithyphen} inserts a split hyphen, while
-% allowing both parts of the compound word to be hyphenated at
-% other places too.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@
- \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@}
-}\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{-}
-% To minimize the effects of activating the hyphen character,
-% the active definition expands to the non-active character
-% in all cases where hyphenation cannot occur, i.e. if not
-% typesetting (check \cs{protect}), not in horizontal mode,
-% or in inner horizontal mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{-}
-\declare@shorthand{czech}{-}{%
- \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
- \ifhmode
- \ifinner
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyphen}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyph@n}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyphen}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyph@n}
-% If we encounter a hyphen, check whether it is followed
-% by a second or a third hyphen and if so, insert the
-% corresponding ligature.
-%
-% If we don't find a hyphen, the token found will be placed
-% in \cs{cs@token} for further analysis, and it will also stay
-% in the input.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup\catcode`\-\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n}
- \def\cs@firsthyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen
- \fi}
- \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{%
- \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n}
- \def\cs@secondhyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash
- \fi}
-}\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkhyphen}
-% Check that hyphenation is enabled, and if so, start analyzing
-% the rest of the word, i.e. initialize \cs{cs@word} and \cs{cs@wordlen}
-% and start processing input with \cs{cs@scanword}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@checkhyphen{%
- \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\-
- \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword
- \else
- \cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@scanword}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@continuescan}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@gettoken}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@gett@ken}
-% Each token is first analyzed with \cs{cs@scanword}, which expands
-% the token and passes the first token of the result to
-% \cs{cs@gett@ken}. If the expanded token is not identical to the
-% unexpanded one, presume that it might be expanded further and
-% pass it back to \cs{cs@scanword} until you get an unexpandable
-% token. Then analyze it in \cs{cs@examinetoken}.
-%
-% The \cs{cs@continuescan} macro does the same thing as
-% \cs{cs@scanword}, but it does not require the first token to be
-% in \cs{cs@token} already.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken}
-\def\cs@gett@ken{%
- \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}%
- \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{cs@examinetoken}
-% Examine the token in \cs{cs@token}:
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% If it is a letter (catcode 11) or other (catcode 12), add it
-% to \cs{cs@word} with \cs{cs@addparam}.
-%
-% \item
-% If it is the \cs{char} primitive, add it with \cs{cs@expandchar}.
-%
-% \item
-% If the token starts or ends a group, ignore it with
-% \cs{cs@ignoretoken}.
-%
-% \item
-% Otherwise analyze the meaning of the token with
-% \cs{cs@checkchardef} to detect primitives defined with
-% \cs{chardef}.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@examinetoken{%
- \ifcat A\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifcat 0\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifx\char\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}%
- \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}%
- \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}%
- \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkchardef}
-% Check the meaning of a token and if it is a primitive defined
-% with \cs{chardef}, pass it to \cs{\cs@examinechar} as if it were
-% a \cs{char} sequence. Otherwise, there are no more word characters,
-% so do the final actions in \cs{cs@nosplit}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{%
- \def\cs@token{#1}%
- \ifx\cs@token\@empty
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@ignoretoken}
-% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} but do not update the \cs{cs@wordlen}
-% counter. This is mainly useful for group starting and ending
-% primitives, which need to be preserved, but do not affect the word
-% boundary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{cs@addparam}
-% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode. Note that
-% this macro can only be used for tokens which can be passed as
-% a parameter.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@addparam#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@expandchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@examinechar}
-% Add a \cs{char} sequence to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode.
-% The charcode is first parsed in \cs{cs@expandchar} and then the
-% resulting \cs{chardef}-defined sequence is analyzed in
-% \cs{cs@examinechar}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=}
-\def\cs@examinechar{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkcode}
-% Check the lccode of a character. If it is zero, it does not count
-% to the current word, so finish it with \cs{cs@nosplit}. Otherwise
-% update the \cs{cs@wordlen} counter and go on scanning the word
-% with \cs{cs@continuescan}. When enough characters are gathered in
-% \cs{cs@word} to allow word break, insert the split hyphen and
-% finish.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@checkcode#1{%
- \ifnum0=#1
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \else
- \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne
- \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}%
- \else
- \cs@splithyphen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@word}%
- \fi
- \fi \cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@nosplit}
-% Insert a non-breakable hyphen followed by the saved word.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen}
-% The \cs{minus} sequence can be used where the active hyphen
-% does not work, e.g. in arguments to \TeX{} primitives in outer
-% horizontal mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\minus\cs@hyphen
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\standardhyphens}
-% \begin{macro}{\splithyphens}
-% These macros control whether split hyphens are allowed in Czech
-% and/or Slovak texts. You may use them in any language, but the
-% split hyphen is only activated for Czech and Slovak.
-%
-% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{activate with split hyphens and
-% deactivate with standard hyphens, not vice versa}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens}
-\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@splitattr}
-% Now we declare the |split| language attribute. This is
-% similar to the |split| package option of cslatex, but it
-% only affects Czech, not Slovak.
-%
-% \changes{czech-3.1}{2006/10/07}{attribute added}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{czech}{split}{%
- \addto\extrasczech{\cs@splitattr}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@activatehyphens}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@deactivatehyphens}
-% These macros are defined as \cs{relax} by default to prevent
-% activating/deactivating the hyphen character. They are redefined
-% when the language is switched to Czech/Slovak. At that moment
-% the hyphen is also activated if split hyphens were requested with
-% \cs{splithyphens}.
-%
-% When the language is de-activated, de-activate the hyphen and
-% restore the bogus definitions of these macros.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
-\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}%
- \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}%
- \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \cs@deactivatehyphens
- \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
- \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@looseness}
-% \begin{macro}{\looseness}
-% One of the most common situations where an active hyphen will not
-% work properly is the \cs{looseness} primitive. Change its definition
-% so that it deactivates the hyphen if needed.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\cs@looseness\looseness
-\def\looseness{%
- \ifcs@splithyphens
- \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi
- \cs@looseness}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@selectlanguage}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@main@language}
-% Specifying the |nocaptions| option means that captions and dates
-% are not redefined by default, but they can be switched on later
-% with \cs{captionsczech} and/or \cs{dateczech}.
-%
-% We mimic this behavior by redefining \cs{selectlanguage}. This
-% macro is called once at the beginning of the document to set the
-% main language of the document. If this is \cs{cs@main@language},
-% it disables the macros for setting captions and date. In any
-% case, it restores the original definition of \cs{selectlanguage}
-% and expands it.
-%
-% The definition of \cs{selectlanguage} can be shared between Czech
-% and Slovak; the actual language is stored in \cs{cs@main@language}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else
- \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption}
- \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined
- \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage
- \def\selectlanguage{%
- \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect
- \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language
- \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage
- \else
- \expandafter\selectlanguage
- \fi}
- \def\cs@selectlanguage{%
- \cs@tempdisable{captions}%
- \cs@tempdisable{date}%
- \selectlanguage}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@tempdisable}
-% \cs{cs@tempdisable} disables a language setup macro temporarily,
-% i.e. the macro with the name of \meta{\#1}|\bbl@main@language|
-% just restores the original definition and purges the saved macro
-% from memory.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\cs@tempdisable#1{%
- \def\@tempa{cs@#1}%
- \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname
- \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{%
- \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \noexpand\@undefined}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% These macros are not needed, once the initialization is over.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language
- \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect
- \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage
- \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The encoding of mathematical fonts should be changed to IL2. This
-% allows to use accented letter in some font families. Besides,
-% documents do not use CM fonts if there are equivalents in CS-fonts,
-% so there is no need to have both bitmaps of CM-font and CS-font.
-%
-% \cs{@font@warning} and \cs{@font@info} are temporarily redefined
-% to avoid annoying font warnings.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined
-\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else
- \def\cs@check@enc{
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble
- \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined
- \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined
- \fi
- \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined}
- \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc}
-\fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{cs@undoiltw@}
-%
-% The thing is that \LaTeXe{} core only supports the T1 encoding
-% and does not bother changing the uc/lc/sfcodes when encoding
-% is switched. :( However, the IL2 encoding \emph{does} change
-% these codes, so if encoding is switched back from IL2, we must
-% also undo the effect of this change to be compatible with
-% \LaTeXe. OK, this is not the right\textsuperscript{TM} solution
-% but it works. Cheers to Petr Ol\v s\'ak.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@undoiltw@{%
- \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000
- \sfcode159=1000
- \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000
- \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000
- \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000
- \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000
- \uccode181=149
- \uccode185=153
- \uccode187=155
- \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0
- \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000
- \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{@@enc@update}
-%
-% Redefine the \LaTeXe{} internal function \cs{@@enc@update} to
-% change the encodings correctly.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined
-\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else
- \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update
- \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi
- \cs@enc@update
- \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename
- \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname
- \fi
- \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-\fi\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{czech-1.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 587a0a8f89f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/czech.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{czech.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{czech.ldf}{\from{czech.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index ba05ec2f826..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,337 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{160}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{danish.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{danish}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{danish.dtx}
- [2009/09/19 v1.3r Danish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `danish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Danish language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{danish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-% A contribution was made by Henning Larsen (larsen@cernvm.cern.ch)
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{danish.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{danish-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{danish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{danish-1.3}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{danish-1.3f}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{danish-1.3g}{1995/06/08}{Added the active double quote
-% character as suggested by Peter Busk Laursen}
-% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Danish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Henning Larsen
-% (\texttt{larsen@cernvm.cern.ch})} defines all the
-% language definition macros for the Danish language.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:danish-quote} an overview is given of its purpose.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.\\
-% |""| & like \verb="-=, but producing no hyphen sign (for
-% words that should break at some sign such as
-% ``entrada/salida.''\\
-% |"`| & lowered double left quotes (looks like ,,)\\
-% |"'| & normal double right quotes\\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{danish.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:danish-quote}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{danish}\captionsdanish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{danish} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@danish| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{danish-1.0b}{1991/10/27}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{danish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no hyphenation
-% patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{danish-1.3f}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@danish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Danish}
- \adddialect\l@danish0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\englishhyphenmins}
-% \changes{danish-1.3p}{2003/11/17}{Added default for setting of
-% hyphenmin parameters}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \changes{danish-1.3q}{2008/03/17}{Set lefthyphenmin to two}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Danish language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsdanish}
-% The macro |\captionsdanish| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{danish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{danish-1.2}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{danish-1.2b}{1993/10/23}{Added a few translations}
-% \changes{danish-1.3c}{1994/06/04}{Included some revisions from Peter
-% Busk Larsen}
-% \changes{danish-1.3h}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{danish-1.3i}{1995/07/13}{Added translation of `Proof'}
-% \changes{danish-1.3n}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{danish-1.3o}{2003/04/10}{Added translation of `Glossary'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsdanish{%
- \def\prefacename{Forord}%
- \def\refname{Litteratur}%
- \def\abstractname{Resum\'e}%
- \def\bibname{Litteratur}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Bilag}%
- \def\contentsname{Indhold}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurer}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabeller}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Vedlagt}%
- \def\ccname{Kopi til}% or Kopi sendt til
- \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Side}%
- \def\seename{Se}%
- \def\alsoname{Se ogs{\aa}}%
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Gloseliste}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datedanish}
-% The macro |\datedanish| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Danish dates.
-% \changes{danish-1.3a}{1994/03/23}{Added `.' to definition of
-% \cs{today}}
-% \changes{danish-1.3k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{danish-1.3k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datedanish{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or marts\or april\or maj\or juni\or
- juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasdanish}
-% \changes{danish-1.3h}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{bbl@frenchspacing}}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasdanish}
-% \changes{danish-1.3h}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}}
-% The macro |\extrasdanish| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Danish language. The macro |\noextrasdanish| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasdanish|.
-%
-% Danish typesetting requires |\frenchspacing| to be in effect.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For Danish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is
-% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in
-% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the danish group of shorthands
-% should be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasdanish{\languageshorthands{danish}}
-\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{danish-1.3m}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Danish}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% First we define access to the low opening double quote and
-% guillemets for quotations,
-% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/08/15}{Changed definition of \texttt{"'}
-% to print \texttt{``} instead of \texttt{''}}
-% \changes{danish-1.3k}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after double
-% quote and guillemot characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then we define commands to be able to specify hyphenation
-% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|.
-% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/08/15}{Added definition of
-% \texttt{"\char126} and \texttt{"\char61}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% To enable hyphenation in two words, written together but
-% separated by a slash, as in `uitdrukking/opmerking' we define the
-% command |"/|.
-% \changes{danish-1.3q}{2008/03/17}{Added definition of \texttt{"/}
-% from \texttt{dutch.ldf}}
-% \changes{danish-1.3r}{2009/09/19}{Made "/ a real Danish shorthand}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"/}{\textormath
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\-}
-% \changes{danish-1.3q}{2008/03/17}{Added redefinition of \cs{-} from
-% \texttt{dutch.ldf}}
-% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version
-% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while
-% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated
-% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is
-% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch and German, where
-% long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a means
-% to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that
-% \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{danish-1.3j}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{danish}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 5b113c61593..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/danish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{danish.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{danish.ldf}{\from{danish.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 24e2031922d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,560 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{300}
-%\iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{dutch.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{dutch}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{dutch.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v3.8i Dutch support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `dutch.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Dutch Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Dutch language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\makeatletter
-\gdef\dlqq{{\setbox\tw@=\hbox{,}\setbox\z@=\hbox{''}%
- \dimen\z@=\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@-\ht\tw@
- \setbox\z@=\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@\box\z@}\ht\z@=\ht\tw@
- \dp\z@=\dp\tw@ \box\z@\kern-.04em}}
-\makeatother
-\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
-\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{dutch.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-% \fi
-% \GetFileInfo{dutch.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{dutch-2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added checking of format}
-% \changes{dutch-2.0b}{1990/04/02}{Added extrasdutch}
-% \changes{dutch-2.0c}{1990/04/18}{Added grqq macros}
-% \changes{dutch-2.1}{1990/04/24}{reflect change to version 2.1 in
-% babel and changes in german v2.3}
-% \changes{dutch-2.1a}{1990/05/01}{Incorporated Nico's comments}
-% \changes{dutch-2.1b}{1990/07/04}{Incorporated more comments by Nico}
-% \changes{dutch-2.1c}{1990/07/16}{Fixed some typos}
-% \changes{dutch-2.2}{1990/07/16}{Fixed problem with the use of
-% \texttt{"} in moving arguments while \texttt{"} is active}
-% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{When using PostScript fonts with the
-% Adobe font-encoding, the dieresis-accent is located elsewhere,
-% modified code}
-% \changes{dutch-2.3a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation somewhat}
-% \changes{dutch-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0}
-% \changes{dutch-3.0a}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change log}
-% \changes{dutch-3.1}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3}{1991/10/31}{Rewritten parts of the code to use
-% the new features of babel version 3.1}
-% \changes{dutch-3.6}{1994/02/02}{Update or LaTeX2e}
-% \changes{dutch-3.6c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate},
-% moved identification after the loading of babel.def}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{Moved identification code to the
-% top of the file}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Rewrote the code with respect to
-% the active double quote character}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7f}{1996/07/11}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{Merged in the definitions for
-% `afrikaans'}
-%
-% \section{The Dutch language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion, and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macros for the Dutch
-% language and the `Afrikaans' version\footnote{contributed by
-% Stoffel Lombard (\texttt{lombc@b31pc87.up.ac.za})} of it.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:dutch-quote} an overview is given of its purpose.
-% One of the reasons for this is that in the Dutch language a word
-% with a dieresis can be hyphenated just before the letter with the
-% umlaut, but the dieresis has to disappear if the word is broken
-% between the previous letter and the accented letter.
-%
-% In~\cite{treebus} the quoting conventions for the Dutch language
-% are discussed. The preferred convention is the single-quote
-% Anglo-American convention, i.e. `This is a quote'. An
-% alternative is the slightly old-fashioned Dutch method with
-% initial double quotes lowered to the baseline, \dlqq This is a
-% quote'', which should be typed as \texttt{"`This is a quote"'}.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"a| & |\"a| which hyphenates as |-a|;
-% also implemented for the other letters. \\
-% |"y| & puts a negative kern between \texttt{i} and \texttt{j}\\
-% |"Y| & puts a negative kern between \texttt{I} and \texttt{J}\\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |"~| & to produce a hyphencharcter without the following
-% |\discretionary{}{}{}|.\\
-% |""| & to produce an invisible `breakpoint'.\\
-% |"`| & lowered double left quotes (see example below).\\
-% |"'| & normal double right quotes. \\
-% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{dutch.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:dutch-quote}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \changes{dutch-3.2c}{1991/10/22}{Removed code to load
-% \file{latexhax.com}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2a}{1991/07/15}{Added reset of catcode of @ before
-% \cs{endinput}.}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2c}{1991/10/22}{removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{Moved code to the beginning of the
-% file and added \cs{selectlanguage} call}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{made check dependant on
-% \cs{CurrentOption}}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{dutch} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@dutch| or |l@afrikaans| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% First we try to establish with which option we are being
-% processed.
-%
-% \changes{dutch-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if language
-% undefined}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2c}{1991/10/22}{removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{Added warning, if no dutch patterns
-% loaded}
-% \changes{dutch-3.6c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to produce
-% the warning}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{this needs a more complicated check
-% as `afrikaans' may or may not have its own hyphenation patterns}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{dutch}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If it is \Lopt{dutch} then we first check if the Dutch
-% hyphenation patterns wer loaded,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\l@dutch\undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-% if no we issue a warning and make dutch a `dialect' of either the
-% hyphenation patterns that were loaded in slot 0 or of `afrikaans'
-% when it is available.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@nopatterns{Dutch}
- \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined
- \adddialect\l@dutch0
- \else
- \adddialect\l@dutch\l@afrikaans
- \fi
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Dutch language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsdutch}
-% The macro |\captionsdutch| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be
-% \cs{headpagename}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{added \cs{seename} and
-% \cs{alsoname}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{added \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.5}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7c}{1995/06/08}{We need the \texttt{"} to be active
-% while defining \cs{captionsdutch}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7d}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8b}{1997/01/06}{Use \texttt{Bew"ys} instead of
-% \texttt{Bewijs}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8h}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\"\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\captionsdutch{%
- \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}%
- \def\refname{Referenties}%
- \def\abstractname{Samenvatting}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\chaptername{Hoofdstuk}%
- \def\appendixname{B"ylage}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgave}%
- \def\listfigurename{L"yst van figuren}%
- \def\listtablename{L"yst van tabellen}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Figuur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Deel}%
- \def\enclname{B"ylage(n)}%
- \def\ccname{cc}%
- \def\headtoname{Aan}%
- \def\pagename{Pagina}%
- \def\seename{zie}%
- \def\alsoname{zie ook}%
- \def\proofname{Bew"ys}%
- \def\glossaryname{Verklarende Woordenl"yst}%
- }
- }\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datedutch}
-% The macro |\datedutch| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Dutch dates.
-% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\datedutch{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- januari\or februari\or maart\or april\or mei\or juni\or
- juli\or augustus\or september\or oktober\or november\or
- december\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% When the option with which this file is being process was not
-% \Lopt{dutch} we assume it was \Lopt{afrikaans}. We perform a
-% similar check on the availability of the hyphenation paterns.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined
- \@nopatterns{Afrikaans}
- \ifx\l@dutch\undefined
- \adddialect\l@afrikaans0
- \else
- \adddialect\l@afrikaans\l@dutch
- \fi
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsafrikaans}
-% Now is the time to define the words for `Afrikaans'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\captionsafrikaans{%
- \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}%
- \def\refname{Verwysings}%
- \def\abstractname{Samevatting}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\chaptername{Hoofstuk}%
- \def\appendixname{Bylae}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgawe}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lys van figure}%
- \def\listtablename{Lys van tabelle}%
- \def\indexname{Inhoud}%
- \def\figurename{Figuur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Deel}%
- \def\enclname{Bylae(n)}%
- \def\ccname{a.a.}%
- \def\headtoname{Aan}%
- \def\pagename{Bladsy}%
- \def\seename{sien}%
- \def\alsoname{sien ook}%
- \def\proofname{Bewys}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateafrikaans}
-% Here is the `Afrikaans' version of the date macro.
-% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\dateafrikaans{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Januarie\or Februarie\or Maart\or April\or Mei\or Junie\or
- Julie\or Augustus\or September\or Oktober\or November\or
- Desember\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasdutch}
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasafrikaans}
-% \changes{dutch-3.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to prevent
-% white space}
-% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/6}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2}{1991/07/02}{Save all redefined macros}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3}{1991/10/31}{Macro complete rewritten}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{modified handling of
-% \cs{dospecials} and \cs{@sanitize}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasdutch}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasafrikaans}
-% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{Added \cs{dieresis}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to prevent
-% white space}
-% \changes{dutch-3.1a}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2}{1991/07/02}{Try to restore everything to its
-% former state}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3}{1991/10/31}{Macro complete rewritten}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3b}{1992/01/25}{modified handling of \cs{dospecials}
-% and \cs{@sanitize}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/04}{Made all definitions dependant on
-% \cs{CurrentOption}}
-%
-% The macros |\extrasdutch| and |\captionsafrikaans| will perform
-% all the extra definitions needed for the Dutch language. The
-% macros |\noextrasdutch| and |noextrasafrikaans| is used
-% to cancel the actions of |\extrasdutch| and |\captionsafrikaans|.
-%
-% For Dutch the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the
-% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the dutch group of shorthands should
-% be used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Both version of the language use the same set of shorthand
-% definitions althoug the `ij' is not used in Afrikaans.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{dutch}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The `umlaut' character should be positioned lower on \emph{all}
-% vowels in Dutch texts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \umlautlow\umlautelow}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{%
- \umlauthigh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dutchhyphenmins}
-% \begin{macro}{\afrikaanshyphenmins}
-% The dutch hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin|
-% set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~3.
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/05/13}{use \cs{dutchhyphenmins} to store
-% the correct values}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{Added \cs{save@sf@q} macro from
-% germanb and rewrote all quote macros to use it}
-% \changes{dutch-3.4b}{1991/02/16}{moved definition of
-% \cs{allowhyphens}, \cs{set@low@box} and \cs{save@sf@q} to
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Removed \cs{dlqq}, \cs{@dlqq},
-% \cs{drqq}, \cs{@drqq} and \cs{dieresis}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/15}{moved the definition of the double
-% quote character at the baseline to \file{glyhps.def}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@trema}
-% In the Dutch language vowels with a trema are treated
-% specially. If a hyphenation occurs before a vowel-plus-trema, the
-% trema should disappear. To be able to do this we could first
-% define the hyphenation break behaviour for the five vowels, both
-% lowercase and uppercase, in terms of |\discretionary|. But this
-% results in a large |\if|-construct in the definition of the
-% active |"|. Because we think a user should not use |"| when he
-% really means something like |''| we chose not to distinguish
-% between vowels and consonants. Therefore we have one macro
-% |\@trema| which specifies the hyphenation break behaviour for all
-% letters.
-%
-% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{\cs{dieresis} instead of
-% \cs{accent127}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.3a}{1991/11/11}{renamed \cs{@umlaut} to
-% \cs{@trema}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@trema#1{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{#1}{\"{#1}}\allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/15}{Moved the definition of \cs{ij} and
-% \cs{IJ} to \file{glyphs.def}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{The support macros for the active
-% double quote have been moved to \file{babel.def}}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the tremas,
-%
-% \changes{dutch-2.3}{1990/07/30}{\cs{dieresis} instead of
-% \cs{accent127}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2}{1991/07/02}{added case for \texttt{"y} and
-% \texttt{"Y}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.2b}{1991/07/16}{removed typo (allowhpyhens)}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{Now use \cs{Declaredq{dutch}} to
-% define the functions of the active double quote}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/03}{Use \cs{ddot} instead of
-% \cs{@MATHUMLAUT}}
-% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/03/05}{Use more general mechanism of
-% \cs{declare@shorthand}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"a}{\textormath{\@trema a}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"e}{\textormath{\@trema e}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"i}{\textormath
- {\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{i}{\"{\i}}\allowhyphens}%
- {\ddot \imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"o}{\textormath{\@trema o}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"u}{\textormath{\@trema u}{\ddot u}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% dutch quotes,
-% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after double
-% quote characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \changes{dutch-3.7b}{1995/06/04}{Added \texttt{""} shorthand}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8c}{1997/01/14}{Added the \texttt{"\~{}} shorthand}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/04/01}{Forgot to replace `german' by
-% `dutch' when copying definition for \texttt{"\~{}}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"y}{\textormath{\ij{}}{\ddot y}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"Y}{\textormath{\IJ{}}{\ddot Y}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% To enable hyphenation in two words, written together but
-% separated by a slash, as in `uitdrukking/opmerking' we define the
-% command |"/|.
-% \changes{dutch-3.8e}{1997/10/03}{Added a shorthand with the slash
-% character}
-% \changes{dutch-3.8i}{2003/09/15}{\texttt{"/} should use
-% \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"/}{\textormath
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\-}
-%
-% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version
-% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while
-% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated
-% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is
-% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch and German, where
-% long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a means
-% to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that
-% \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns.
-% \changes{dutch-3.8i}{2003/09/15}{\cs{-} should use
-% \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{dutch-3.8a}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 1437c660a7e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/dutch.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{dutch.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{dutch.ldf}{\from{dutch.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 9054cc2957b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,451 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{360}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{english.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{english}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{english.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v3.3o English support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File 'english.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the English language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{english.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{english.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{english-2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added checking of format}
-% \changes{english-2.1}{1990/04/24}{Reflect changes in babel 2.1}
-% \changes{english-2.1a}{1990/05/14}{Incorporated Nico's comments}
-% \changes{english-2.1b}{1990/05/14}{merged \file{USenglish.sty} into
-% this file}
-% \changes{english-2.1c}{1990/05/22}{fixed typo in definition for
-% american language found by Werenfried Spit (nspit@fys.ruu.nl)}
-% \changes{english-2.1d}{1990/07/16}{Fixed some typos}
-% \changes{english-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0}
-% \changes{english-3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer}
-% \changes{english-3.0c}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{english-3.1}{1991/11/05}{Rewrote parts of the code to use
-% the new features of babel version 3.1}
-% \changes{english-3.3}{1994/02/08}{Update or \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{english-3.3c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved the identification after the loading of
-% \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{english-3.3h}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The English language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% English language as well as for the American and Australian
-% version of this language. For the Australian version the British
-% hyphenation patterns will be used, if available, for the Canadian
-% variant the American patterns are selected.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{english-3.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{english} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@english| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{english-3.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if
-% language undefined}
-% \changes{english-3.0d}{1991/10/22}{removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{english-3.3c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Allow british as the name of the
-% UK patterns}
-% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/01/21}{Also allow american english
-% hyphenation patterns to be used for `english'}
-% We allow for the british english patterns to be loaded as either
-% `british', or `UKenglish'. When neither of those is
-% known we try to define |\l@english| as an alias for |\l@american|
-% or |\l@USenglish|.
-% \changes{english-3.3k}{2001/02/07}{Added support for canadian}
-% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Added support for australian and
-% newzealand}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@english\@undefined
- \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined
- \ifx\l@british\@undefined
- \ifx\l@american\@undefined
- \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined
- \ifx\l@canadian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@australian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{English}
- \adddialect\l@english0
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@newzealand
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@australian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@canadian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@USenglish
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@american
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@british
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@UKenglish
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Because we allow `british' to be used as the babel option we need
-% to make sure that it will be recognised by |\selectlanguage|. In
-% the code above we have made sure that |\l@english| was defined.
-% Now we want to make sure that |\l@british| and |\l@UKenglish| are
-% defined as well. When either of them is we make them equal to
-% each other, when neither is we fall back to the default,
-% |\l@english|.
-% \changes{english-3.3o}{2004/06/14}{Make sure that british patterns
-% are used if they were loaded}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@british\@undefined
- \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@british\l@english
- \adddialect\l@UKenglish\l@english
- \else
- \let\l@british\l@UKenglish
- \fi
-\else
- \let\l@UKenglish\l@british
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% `American' is a version of `English' which can have its own
-% hyphenation patterns. The default english patterns are in fact
-% for american english. We allow for the patterns to be loaded as
-% `english' `american' or `USenglish'.
-% \changes{english-3.0}{1990/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} for
-% american}
-% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{english-3.3d}{1995/02/01}{Only define american as a
-% dialect when no separate patterns have been loaded}
-% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Allow USenglish as the name of
-% the american patterns}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@american\@undefined
- \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the patterns are not know as `american' or `USenglish' we
-% add a ``dialect''.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \adddialect\l@american\l@english
- \else
- \let\l@american\l@USenglish
- \fi
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Make sure that USenglish is known, even if the patterns were
-% loaded as `american'.
-% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/01/21}{Ensure that \cs{l@USenglish} is
-% alway defined}
-% \changes{english-3.3l}{2001/04/15}{Added missing backslash}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined
- \let\l@USenglish\l@american
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-
-% \changes{english-3.3k}{2001/02/07}{Added support for canadian}
-% `Canadian' english spelling is a hybrid of British and American
-% spelling. Although so far no special `translations' have been
-% reported we allow this file to be loaded by the option
-% \Lopt{candian} as well.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@canadian\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@canadian\l@american
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Added support for australian and
-% newzealand}
-% `Australian' and `New Zealand' english spelling seem to be the
-% same as British spelling. Although so far no special
-% `translations' have been reported we allow this file to be loaded
-% by the options \Lopt{australian} and \Lopt{newzealand} as well.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@australian\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@australian\l@british
-\fi
-\ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@newzealand\l@british
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-
-% \begin{macro}{\englishhyphenmins}
-% \changes{english-3.3m}{2003/11/17}{Added default for setting of
-% hyphenmin parameters}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the English language.
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsenglish}
-% The macro |\captionsenglish| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be
-% \cs{headpagename}}
-% \changes{english-3.1a}{1991/11/11}{added \cs{seename} and
-% \cs{alsoname}}
-% \changes{english-3.1b}{1992/01/26}{added \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{english-3.2}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{english-3.3e}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence on the
-% fly}
-% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Preface}%
- \def\refname{References}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstract}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliography}%
- \def\chaptername{Chapter}%
- \def\appendixname{Appendix}%
- \def\contentsname{Contents}%
- \def\listfigurename{List of Figures}%
- \def\listtablename{List of Tables}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Figure}%
- \def\tablename{Table}%
- \def\partname{Part}%
- \def\enclname{encl}%
- \def\ccname{cc}%
- \def\headtoname{To}%
- \def\pagename{Page}%
- \def\seename{see}%
- \def\alsoname{see also}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateenglish}
-% In order to define |\today| correctly we need to know whether it
-% should be `english', `australian', or `american'. We can find
-% this out by checking the value of |\CurrentOption|.
-% \changes{english-3.3j}{2000/01/21}{Make sure that the value of
-% \cs{today} is correct for both options `american' and
-% `USenglish'}
-% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Added support for `Australian'
-% and `Newzealand'}
-% \changes{english-3.3o}{2004/06/14}{Explicitly choose the UK form of
-% date}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{british}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{UKenglish}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{american}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{USenglish}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{canadian}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{australian}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{newzealand}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\dateenglish| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce English dates.
-% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence on the
-% fly}
-% \changes{english-3.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{english-3.3i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{UK}
-\ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\ifcase\day\or
- 1st\or 2nd\or 3rd\or 4th\or 5th\or
- 6th\or 7th\or 8th\or 9th\or 10th\or
- 11th\or 12th\or 13th\or 14th\or 15th\or
- 16th\or 17th\or 18th\or 19th\or 20th\or
- 21st\or 22nd\or 23rd\or 24th\or 25th\or
- 26th\or 27th\or 28th\or 29th\or 30th\or
- 31st\fi~\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or
- December\fi\space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateaustralian}
-% Now, test for `australian' or `american'.
-% \changes{english-3.3n}{2004/06/12}{Add australian date}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\dateaustralian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Australian resp.\ New Zealand dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bbl@tempa{AU}
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or
- December\fi\space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateamerican}
-% The macro |\dateamerican| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce American dates.
-% \changes{english-3.0b}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{english-3.3i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{english-3.3i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \else
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or
- December\fi \space\number\day, \number\year}}
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasenglish}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasenglish}
-% The macro |\extrasenglish| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the English language. The macro |\noextrasenglish| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasenglish|. For the moment
-% these macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility
-% with the other language definition files.
-%
-% \changes{english-3.3g}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequences on
-% the fly}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{english-3.3h}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 67c897423da..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/english.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{english.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{english.ldf}{\from{english.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 41ba9465429..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,343 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{261}
-%\iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{esperanto.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{esperanto}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{esperant.dtx}
- [2007/10/20 v1.4t Esperanto support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File 'esperanto.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Esperanto language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Ruiz-Altaba Marti (ruizaltb@cernvm.cern.ch) Code from
-% esperant.sty version 1.1 by Joerg Knappen
-% (\texttt{knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}) was included in
-% version 1.2.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{esperanto.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{esperanto.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{esperanto-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with
-% babel~3.2a}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.2}{1992/02/18}{Included code from
-% \texttt{esperant.sty}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4a}{1994/02/04}{Updated for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4d}{1994/06/25}{Removed the use of
-% \cs{filedate}, moved Identification after loading of
-% \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4e}{1995/02/09}{Moved identification code to
-% the top of the file}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4f}{1995/06/14}{Corrected typos (PR1652)}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Esperanto language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Ruiz-Altaba Marti
-% (\texttt{ruizaltb@cernvm.cern.ch}). Code from the file
-% \texttt{esperant.sty} by J\"org Knappen
-% (\texttt{knappen@vkpmzd.kph.uni-mainz.de}) was included.} defines
-% all the language-specific macros for the Esperanto language.
-%
-% For this language the character |^| is made active.
-% In table~\ref{tab:esp-act} an overview is given of its purpose.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4j}{1997/01/06}{fixed typo in table caption
-% (funtion instead of function)}
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |^c| & gives \^c with hyphenation in the rest of the word
-% allowed, this works for c, C, g, G, H, J, s, S, z, Z\\
-% |^h| & prevents h\llap{\^{}} from becoming too tall\\
-% |^j| & gives \^\j\\
-% |^u| & gives \u u, with hyphenation in the rest of the word
-% allowed\\
-% |^U| & gives \u U, with hyphenation in the rest of the word
-% allowed\\
-% \verb=^|= & inserts a |\discretionary{-}{}{}|\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The functions of the active character for Esperanto.}
-% \label{tab:esp-act}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{esperanto}\captionsesperanto
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{esperanto} will be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@esperanto| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \changes{esperanto-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of
-% \cs{makeatletter}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no
-% hyphenation patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4d}{1994/06/25}{Use \cs{@nopatterns} for the
-% warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@esperanto\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Esperanto}
- \adddialect\l@esperanto0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the
-% Esperanto language. The reason for this is that a user might want
-% to switch back and forth between languages.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsesperanto}
-% The macro |\captionsesperanto| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename},
-% \cs{alsoname} and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.3}{1993/07/10}{Repaired a number of mistakes,
-% indicated by D. Ederveen}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.3}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4a}{1994/02/04}{added missing closing brace}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/07/06}{Replaced `Proof' by `Pruvo'
-% PR 2207}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4p}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4q}{2002/01/07}{Added translation for Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsesperanto{%
- \def\prefacename{Anta\u{u}parolo}%
- \def\refname{Cita\^\j{}oj}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografio}%
- \def\chaptername{{\^C}apitro}%
- \def\appendixname{Apendico}%
- \def\contentsname{Enhavo}%
- \def\listfigurename{Listo de figuroj}%
- \def\listtablename{Listo de tabeloj}%
- \def\indexname{Indekso}%
- \def\figurename{Figuro}%
- \def\tablename{Tabelo}%
- \def\partname{Parto}%
- \def\enclname{Aldono(j)}%
- \def\ccname{Kopie al}%
- \def\headtoname{Al}%
- \def\pagename{Pa\^go}%
- \def\subjectname{Temo}%
- \def\seename{vidu}% a^u: vd.
- \def\alsoname{vidu anka\u{u}}% a^u vd. anka\u{u}
- \def\proofname{Pruvo}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glosaro}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateesperanto}
-% The macro |\dateesperanto| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Esperanto dates.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.3}{1993/07/10}{Removed the capitals from
-% \cs{today}}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4k}{1998/03/27}{Removed Rthe use of \cs{edef}
-% again}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateesperanto{%
- \def\today{\number\day{--a}~de~\ifcase\month\or
- januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or
- julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or
- decembro\fi,\space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasesperanto}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasesperanto}
-% The macro |\extrasesperanto| performs all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Esperanto language. The macro |\noextrasesperanto|
-% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrasesperanto|.
-%
-% For Esperanto the |^| character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{^}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Because the character |^| is used in math mode with quite a
-% different purpose we need to add an extra level of evaluation to
-% the definition of the active |^|. It checks whether math mode is
-% active; if so the shorthand mechanism is bypassed by a direct
-% call of |\normal@char^|.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4n}{1999/09/30}{Added a check for math mode to
-% the definition of the shorthand character}
-% \changes{esperant0-1.4o}{1999/12/18}{Moved the check for math to
-% babel.def}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasesperanto{\languageshorthands{esperanto}}
-\addto\extrasesperanto{\bbl@activate{^}}
-\addto\noextrasesperanto{\bbl@deactivate{^}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% In order to prevent problems with the active |^| we add a
-% shorthand on system level which expands to a `normal |^|.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4l}{1999/04/11}{Added a shorthand definition on
-% system level}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And here are the uses of the active |^|:
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4h}{1995/07/27}{Added a few shorthands}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^c}{\^{c}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^C}{\^{C}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^g}{\^{g}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^G}{\^{G}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^h}{h\llap{\^{}}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^H}{\^{H}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^j}{\^{\j}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^J}{\^{J}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^s}{\^{s}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^S}{\^{S}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^u}{\u u\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^U}{\u U\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Esper}
-% \begin{macro}{\esper}
-% In \file{esperant.sty} J\"org Knappen provides the macros
-% |\esper| and |\Esper| that can be used instead of |\alph| and
-% |\Alph|. These macros are available in this file as well.
-%
-% Their definition takes place in two steps. First the toplevel.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\esper#1{\@esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}}
-\def\Esper#1{\@Esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then the second level.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4q}{2002/01/08}{Removed the extra level of
-% expansion for more than five items, as was done in \LaTeX}
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4t}{2006/06/05}{Added the missing `r' in these
-% macros}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@esper#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or \^c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or \^g\or
- h\or h\llap{\^{}}\or i\or j\or \^\j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or
- p\or r\or s\or \^s\or t\or u\or \u{u}\or v\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\def\@Esper#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or \^C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or \^G\or
- H\or \^H\or I\or J\or \^J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or
- P\or R\or S\or \^S\or T\or U\or \u{U}\or V\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hodiau}
-% \begin{macro}{\hodiaun}
-% In \file{esperant.sty} J\"org Knappen provides two alternative
-% macros for |\today|, |\hodiau| and |\hodiaun|. The second macro
-% produces an accusative version of the date in Esperanto.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\dateesperanto{\def\hodiau{la \today}}
-\def\hodiaun{la \number\day --an~de~\ifcase\month\or
- januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or
- julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or
- decembro\fi, \space \number\year}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{esperanto-1.4i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{esperanto}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 89776ece1d5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/esperanto.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2000/09/26}
-\def\batchfile{esperanto.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{esperanto.ldf}{\from{esperanto.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 48a39bfac0d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,468 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{327}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{estonian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{estonian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{estonian.dtx}
- [2009/03/08 v1.0k Estonian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `estonian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Estonian language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2009
-%% by Enn Saar, Tartu Astrophysical Observatory
-% Tartu Astrophysical Observatory
-% EE-2444 T\~oravere
-% Estonia
-% tel: +372 7 410 267
-% fax: +372 7 410 205
-% saar@aai.ee
-%
-% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Jaan Vajakas jv at ut.ee
-%% (or Enn Saar saar at aai.ee
-%% or J. L. Braams babel at braams.xs4all.nl)
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Estonian language definition file. The original
-% version of this file was written by Enn Saar (saar@aai.ee).
-% Modified by Jaan Vajakas (jv@ut.ee).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{estonian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \changes{estonian-1.0b}{1995/06/16}{corrected typos}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/03/07}{corrected documentation of the
-% commands |"-| and |\-|}
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{estonian.dtx}
-%
-% \section{The Estonian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. The original author is Enn Saar,
-% (\texttt{saar@aai.ee}).} defines the language definition macro's
-% for the Estonian language.
-%
-% This file was written as part of the TWGML project, and borrows
-% heavily from the \babel\ German and Spanish language files
-% \file{germanb.ldf} and \file{spanish.ldf}.
-%
-% Estonian has the same umlauts as German (\"a, \"o, \"u), but in
-% addition to this, we have also \~o, and two recent characters
-% \v s and \v z, so we need at least two active characters.
-% We shall use |"| and |~| to type Estonian accents on ASCII
-% keyboards (in the 7-bit character world). Their use is given in
-% table~\ref{tab:estonian-quote}.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |~o| & |\~o|, (and uppercase); \\
-% |"a| & |\"a|, (and uppercase); \\
-% |"o| & |\"o|, (and uppercase); \\
-% |"u| & |\"u|, (and uppercase); \\
-% |~s| & |\v s|, (and uppercase); \\
-% |~z| & |\v z|, (and uppercase); \\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position;\\
-% |"-| & like |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word;\\
-% |"`| & for Estonian low left double quotes (same as German);\\
-% |"'| & for Estonian right double quotes;\\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (also rather popular)\\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes.\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{estonian.ldf}}\label{tab:estonian-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-% These active accent characters behave according to their original
-% definitions if not followed by one of the characters indicated in
-% that table; the original quote character can be typed using the
-% macro |\dq|.
-%
-% We support also the T1 output encoding (and Cork-encoded text
-% input). You can choose the T1 encoding by the command
-% |\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}|. This package must be loaded before
-% \babel. As the standard Estonian hyphenation file
-% \file{eehyph.tex} is in the Cork encoding, choosing this encoding
-% will give you better hyphenation.
-%
-% As mentioned in the Spanish style file, it may happen that some
-% packages fail (usually in a \cs{message}). In this case you
-% should change the order of the \cs{usepackage} declarations
-% or the order of the style options in \cs{documentclass}.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \subsection{Implementation}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0e}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{estonian}\captionsestonian
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If Estonian is not included in the format file (does not have
-% hyphenation patterns), we shall use English hyphenation.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@estonian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Estonian}
- \adddialect\l@estonian0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now come the commands to switch to (and from) Estonian.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsestonian}
-% The macro |\captionsestonian| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-%
-% \changes{estonian-1.0c}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0d}{1995/07/27}{Added translation of `Proof'}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0h}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0j}{2008/07/07}{Replaced the translation of
-% `Proof'}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{Added translation of
-% `Glossary'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsestonian{%
- \def\prefacename{Sissejuhatus}%
- \def\refname{Viited}%
- \def\bibname{Kirjandus}%
- \def\appendixname{Lisa}%
- \def\contentsname{Sisukord}%
- \def\listfigurename{Joonised}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabelid}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Joonis}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Osa}%
- \def\enclname{Lisa(d)}%
- \def\ccname{Koopia(d)}%
- \def\headtoname{}%
- \def\pagename{Lk.}%
- \def\seename{vt.}%
- \def\alsoname{vt. ka}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% These captions contain accented characters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
-\addto\captionsestonian{%
- \def\abstractname{Kokkuv~ote}%
- \def\chaptername{Peat"ukk}%
- \def\proofname{T~oestus}%
- \def\glossaryname{S~onastik}%
-}}\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateestonian}
-% The macro |\dateestonian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Estonian dates.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\month@estonian{\ifcase\month\or
- jaanuar\or veebruar\or m"arts\or aprill\or mai\or juuni\or
- juuli\or august\or september\or oktoober\or november\or
- detsember\fi}}
-\x
-\def\dateestonian{%
- \def\today{\number\day.\space\month@estonian
- \space\number\year.\space a.}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Some useful macros, copied from the spanish package (and renamed |es@...| to |et@...|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\et@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1}
-
-\@ifundefined{documentclass}
- {\let\ifet@latex\iffalse}
- {\let\ifet@latex\iftrue}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasestonian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasestonian}
-% The macro |\extrasestonian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for Estonian. The macro |\noextrasestonian| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasestonian|. For Estonian,
-% |"| is made active and has to be treated as `special' (|~| is
-% active already).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\initiate@active@char{~}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\languageshorthands{estonian}}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@activate{"}\bbl@activate{~}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{estonian-1.0d}{1995/07/27}{Removed the code that changes
-% category, lower case, uper case and space factor codes }
-%
-% Estonian does not use extra spaces after sentences.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasestonian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\estonianhyphenmins}
-% For Estonian, |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| are
-% both~2.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The standard \TeX\ accents are too high for Estonian typography,
-% we have to lower them (following the \babel\ German style).
-% For umlauts, we can use |\umlautlow| in \file{babel.ldf}.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{use \cs{umlauthigh} to restore
-% umlauts (before, |\babel@save\"| was used but that did not work)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\umlautlow}
-\addto\noextrasestonian{\umlauthigh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Redefine tilde (as in \file{spanish.ldf}). In case of \LaTeX, we
-% redefine the internal macro for the OT1 encoding because in case of
-% T1, the display and hyphenation of words containing |\~o| works
-% better without redefining it (e. g. words containing |\et@gentilde|
-% are not hyphenated unless |\allowhyphens| is used; when copied from
-% Acrobat Reader, pasting an \~o generated using |\et@gentilde{o}|
-% gives |~o| rather than \~o; when the times package is used with T1
-% encoding, |\et@gentilde| places the tilde through the letter o).
-% In plain \TeX\ there is no encoding infrastructure, so we just
-% redefine |\~|.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{redefine
-% |\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname| instead of |\~| (before,
-% redefining |\~| resulted in no hyphenation of words containing
-% |\~o| in T1 and incorrect display of |\~o| with the times package)}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifet@latex
- \addto\extrasestonian{%
- \expandafter\et@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\et@gentilde}}
-\else
- \addto\extrasestonian{\et@sdef\~{\et@gentilde}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\et@gentilde}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{use tilde for all letters except
-% s and z (instead of using caron for all letters except o), like
-% other \babel\ language packages do (this fixes the display of \~n
-% when using the utf8 package)}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{do not redefine caron any
-% more because the default one looks good enough}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{renamed macros \cs{gentilde} and
-% \cs{newtilde} to \cs{et@gentilde} and \cs{et@newtilde}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\et@gentilde#1{%
- \if#1s\v{#1}\else\if#1S\v{#1}\else%
- \if#1z\v{#1}\else\if#1Z\v{#1}\else%
- \et@newtilde{#1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\et@newtilde}
-% For a detailed explanation of the following code see the
-% definition of \cs{lower@umlaut} in \file{babel.dtx}.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/04}{merged updates in the definition
-% \cs{lower@umlaut} into \cs{et@newtilde}: removed \cs{allowhyphens}
-% and added \cs{bgroup}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\et@newtilde#1{%
- \leavevmode\bgroup\U@D 1ex%
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{\char126}\dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@
- \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}%
- \accent126\fontdimen5\font\U@D #1%
- \egroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We save the double quote character in |\dq|, and tilde in |\til|.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{removed macros \cs{dieresis} and
-% \cs{texttilde} that were used to store the original definitions of
-% |\"| and |\~|, as they would have no purpose now}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\dq{"}
- \def\noexpand\til{~}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If the encoding is T1, we have to tell \TeX\ about our redefined
-% accents.
-%
-% \changes{estonian-1.0g}{1999/04/11}{use \cs{bbl@t@one} instead of
-% \cs{bbl@next}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{s}{178}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{S}{146}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{z}{186}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{Z}{154}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{'}{17}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{`}{18}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{<}{19}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{>}{20}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If the encoding differs from T1, we expand the accents, enabling
-% hyphenation beyond the accent. In this case \TeX\ will not find
-% all possible breaks, and we have to warn people.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/03}{removed definitions of macros
-% |\@umlaut| and |\@tilde| as they seemed to have no purpose}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \wlog{Warning: Hyphenation would work better for the T1 encoding.}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we define the shorthands: umlauts,
-% \changes{estonian-1.0d}{1995/07/27}{The second argument was missing
-% in the definition of some of the double-quote shorthands}
-% \changes{estonian-1.0k}{2009/02/08}{use \cs{allowhyphens} to allow hyphenation in words containing |"a|, |"A|, |"o|, |"O|, |"u| or |"U|}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% German and French quotes,
-% \changes{estonian-1.0f}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% double quote and guillemot characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% tildes and carons
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~o}{\textormath{\~{o}\allowhyphens}{\tilde o}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~O}{\textormath{\~{O}\allowhyphens}{\tilde O}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check s}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check S}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check z}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check Z}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{""}{\dq}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~~}{\til}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{estonian-1.0e}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{estonian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 8032b81de79..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/estonian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{estonian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{estonian.ldf}{\from{estonian.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index c8a019bd0a5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,363 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{172}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{finnish.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{finnish}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{finnish.dtx}
- [2007/10/20 v1.3q Finnish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `finnish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Finnish language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Mikko KANERVA (KANERVA@CERNVM) and Keranen Reino
-% (KERANEN@CERNVM).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{finnish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{finnish.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{finnish-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1991/02/15}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{finnish-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3d}{1994/06/30}{Removed a few references to
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3q}{2006/06/05}{Small documentation fix}
-%
-% \section{The Finnish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Mikko KANERVA
-% (\texttt{KANERVA@CERNVM}) and Keranen Reino
-% (\texttt{KERANEN@CERNVM}).} defines all the language definition
-% macros for the Finnish language.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:finnish-quote} an overview is given of its purpose.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.\\
-% |"=| & an explicit hyphen sign for expressions such as
-% ``pakastekaapit ja -arkut''.\\
-% |""| & like \verb="-=, but producing no hyphen sign (for
-% words that should break at some sign such as
-% ``entrada/salida.''\\
-% |"`| & lowered double left quotes (looks like ,,)\\
-% |"'| & normal double right quotes\\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{finnish.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:finnish-quote}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{finnish}\captionsfinnish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{finnish} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@finnish| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{finnish-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added a warning when no hyphenation
-% patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@finnish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Finnish}
- \adddialect\l@finnish0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the
-% Finnish language. The reason for this is that a user might want
-% to switch back and forth between languages.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsfinnish}
-% The macro |\captionsfinnish| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1992/02/15}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.1.2}{1993/09/16}{Added translations}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3g}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3h}{1995/07/25}{Added finnish word for `Proof'}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3o}{2001/03/12}{Provided translation for
-% Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsfinnish{%
- \def\prefacename{Esipuhe}%
- \def\refname{Viitteet}%
- \def\abstractname{Tiivistelm\"a}
- \def\bibname{Kirjallisuutta}%
- \def\chaptername{Luku}%
- \def\appendixname{Liite}%
- \def\contentsname{Sis\"alt\"o}% /* Could be "Sis\"allys" as well */
- \def\listfigurename{Kuvat}%
- \def\listtablename{Taulukot}%
- \def\indexname{Hakemisto}%
- \def\figurename{Kuva}%
- \def\tablename{Taulukko}%
- \def\partname{Osa}%
- \def\enclname{Liitteet}%
- \def\ccname{Jakelu}%
- \def\headtoname{Vastaanottaja}%
- \def\pagename{Sivu}%
- \def\seename{katso}%
- \def\alsoname{katso my\"os}%
- \def\proofname{Todistus}%
- \def\glossaryname{Sanasto}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datefinnish}
-% The macro |\datefinnish| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Finnish dates.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3e}{1994/07/12}{Added a`.' after the number of
-% the day}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}
-% to save memory}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datefinnish{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- tammikuuta\or helmikuuta\or maaliskuuta\or huhtikuuta\or
- toukokuuta\or kes\"akuuta\or hein\"akuuta\or elokuuta\or
- syyskuuta\or lokakuuta\or marraskuuta\or joulukuuta\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasfinnish}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasfinnish}
-% Finnish has many long words (some of them compound, some not).
-% For this reason hyphenation is very often the only solution in
-% line breaking. For this reason the values of |\hyphenpenalty|,
-% |\exhyphenpenalty| and |\doublehyphendemerits| should be
-% decreased. (In one of the manuals of style Matti Rintala noticed
-% a paragraph with ten lines, eight of which ended in a hyphen!)
-%
-% Matti Rintala noticed that with these changes \TeX\ handles
-% Finnish very well, although sometimes the values of |\tolerance|
-% and |\emergencystretch| must be increased. However, I don't think
-% changing these values in \file{finnish.ldf} is appropriate, as
-% the looseness of the font (and the line width) affect the correct
-% choice of these parameters.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3f}{1995/05/13}{Added the setting of more
-% hyphenation parameters, according to PR1027}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{%
- \babel@savevariable\hyphenpenalty\hyphenpenalty=30%
- \babel@savevariable\exhyphenpenalty\exhyphenpenalty=30%
- \babel@savevariable\doublehyphendemerits\doublehyphendemerits=5000%
- \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits=5000%
- }
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Another thing |\extrasfinnish| needs to do is to ensure that
-% |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the
-% execution of |\noextrasfinnish| will switch it of again.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3f}{1995/05/15}{Added the setting of
-% \cs{frenchspacing}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For Finnish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is
-% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in
-% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the finnish group of shorthands
-% should be used.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3g}{1995/07/02}{Added the active double quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\languageshorthands{finnish}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{1999/12/16}{Deactive shorthands ouside of Finnish}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% The `umlaut' character should be positioned lower on \emph{all}
-% vowels in Finnish texts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\umlautlow\umlautelow}
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{\umlauthigh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% First we define access to the low opening double quote and
-% guillemets for quotations,
-% \changes{finnish-1.3k}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% double quote and guillemot characters}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3m}{1999/04/13}{Added misisng closing brace}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation
-% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3p}{2001/11/13}{\texttt{\symbol{34}\symbol{61}}
-% should also use \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\-}
-%
-% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version
-% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while
-% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated
-% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is
-% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch, Finnish and German,
-% where long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a
-% means to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the
-% ones that \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3g}{1995/07/02}{Added change of \cs{-}}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{2000/09/19}{\cs{allowhyphens} should have
-% been \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\babel@save\-}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\finishhyphenmins}
-% The finnish hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin|
-% set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3f}{1995/05/13}{use \cs{finnishhyphenmins} to
-% store the correct values}
-% \changes{finnish-1.3n}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{finnish-1.3i}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{finnish}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 849e124a163..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/finnish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{finnish.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{finnish.ldf}{\from{finnish.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index ffdf03fcc99..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3117 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{2599}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript. Nothing to write to the .cfg file, if generated.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{frenchb.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-% \changes{v2.1d}{2008/05/04}{Argument of \cs{ProvidesLanguage} changed
-% from `french' to `frenchb', otherwise \cs{listfiles} prints
-% no date/version information. The bug with \cs{listfiles}
-% (introduced in v.1.5!), was pointed out by Ulrike Fischer.}
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{frenchb}
-%\ProvidesFile{frenchb.dtx}
-%<*!cfg>
- [2010/08/21 v2.5a French support from the babel system]
-%</!cfg>
-%<*cfg>
-%% frenchb.cfg: configuration file for frenchb.ldf
-%% Daniel Flipo daniel.flipo at free.fr
-%</cfg>
-%% File `frenchb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%<*!cfg>
-%% Frenchb language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg
-%% daniel.flipo at free.fr
-%</!cfg>
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the French language definition file.
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass[a4paper]{ltxdoc}
-\DeclareFontEncoding{T1}{}{}
-\DeclareFontSubstitution{T1}{lmr}{m}{n}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%
- {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{lmr}\selectfont\char19}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%
- {\fontencoding{T1}\fontfamily{lmr}\selectfont\char20}}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
-\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
-\begin{center}
- \textbf{\Large A Babel language definition file for French}\\[3mm]^^A\]
- Daniel \textsc{Flipo}\\
- \texttt{daniel.flipo@free.fr}
-\end{center}
- \RecordChanges
- \DocInput{frenchb.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-% \fi
-% \GetFileInfo{frenchb.dtx}
-%
-% \section{The French language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.}, defines all the language definition macros for the
-% French language.
-%
-% Customisation for the French language is achieved following the
-% book ``Lexique des r\`egles typographiques en usage \`a
-% l'Imprimerie nationale'' troisi\`eme \'edition (1994),
-% ISBN-2-11-081075-0.
-%
-% First version released: 1.1 (1996/05/31) as part of
-% \babel-3.6beta.
-%
-% |frenchb| has been improved using helpful suggestions from many
-% people, mainly from Jacques Andr\'e, Michel Bovani, Thierry Bouche,
-% and Vincent Jalby. Thanks to all of them!
-%
-% This new version (2.x) has been designed to be used with \LaTeXe{}
-% and Plain\TeX{} formats only. \LaTeX-2.09 is no longer supported.
-% Changes between version 1.6 and \fileversion{} are listed in
-% subsection~\ref{ssec-changes} p.~\pageref{ssec-changes}.
-%
-% An extensive documentation is available in French here:\\
-% |http://daniel.flipo.free.fr/frenchb|
-%
-% \subsection{Basic interface}
-%
-% In a multilingual document, some typographic rules are language
-% dependent, i.e. spaces before `double punctuation' (|:| |;| |!|
-% |?|) in French, others concern the general layout (i.e. layout of
-% lists, footnotes, indentation of first paragraphs of sections) and
-% should apply to the whole document.
-%
-% Starting with version~2.2, |frenchb| behaves differently according
-% to \babel's \emph{main language} defined as the \emph{last}
-% option\footnote{Its name is kept in \texttt{\textbackslash
-% bbl@main@language}.} at \babel's loading. When French is
-% not \babel's main language, |frenchb| no longer alters the global
-% layout of the document (even in parts where French is the current
-% language): the layout of lists, footnotes, indentation of first
-% paragraphs of sections are not customised by |frenchb|.
-%
-% When French is loaded as the last option of \babel, |frenchb|
-% makes the following changes to the global layout, \emph{both in
-% French and in all other languages}\footnote{%
-% For each item, hooks are provided to reset standard
-% \LaTeX{} settings or to emulate the behavior of former versions
-% of \texttt{frenchb} (see command
-% \texttt{\textbackslash frenchbsetup\{\}},
-% section~\ref{ssec-custom}).}:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item the first paragraph of each section is indented
-% (\LaTeX{} only);
-% \item the default items in itemize environment are set to `--'
-% instead of `\textbullet', and all vertical spacing and glue
-% is deleted; it is possible to change `--' to something else
-% (`---' for instance) using |\frenchbsetup{}|;
-% \item vertical spacing in general \LaTeX{} lists is
-% shortened;
-% \item footnotes are displayed ``\`a la fran\c{c}aise''.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% Regarding local typography, the command |\selectlanguage{french}|
-% switches to the French language\footnote{%
-% \texttt{\textbackslash selectlanguage\{francais\}}
-% and \texttt{\textbackslash selectlanguage\{frenchb\}} are kept
-% for backward compatibility but should no longer be used.},
-% with the following effects:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item French hyphenation patterns are made active;
-% \item `double punctuation' (|:| |;| |!| |?|) is made
-% active%\footnote{Actually, they are active in the whole
-% document, only their expansions differ in French and
-% outside French.} for correct spacing in French;
-% \item |\today| prints the date in French;
-% \item the caption names are translated into French
-% (\LaTeX{} only);
-% \item the space after |\dots| is removed in French.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% Some commands are provided in |frenchb| to make typesetting
-% easier:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item French quotation marks can be entered using the commands
-% |\og| and |\fg| which work in \LaTeXe and Plain\TeX,
-% their appearance depending on what is available to draw
-% them; even if you use \LaTeXe{} \emph{and} |T1|-encoding,
-% you should refrain from entering them as
-% |<<~French quotation marks~>>|: |\og| and |\fg| provide
-% better horizontal spacing.
-% |\og| and |\fg| can be used outside French, they typeset
-% then English quotes `` and ''.
-% \item A command |\up| is provided to typeset superscripts like
-% |M\up{me}| (abbreviation for ``Madame''), |1\up{er}| (for
-% ``premier''). Other commands are also provided for
-% ordinals: |\ier|, |\iere|, |\iers|, |\ieres|, |\ieme|,
-% |\iemes| (|3\iemes| prints 3\textsuperscript{es}).
-% \item Family names should be typeset in small capitals and never
-% be hyphenated, the macro |\bsc| (boxed small caps) does
-% this, e.g., |Leslie~\bsc{Lamport}| will produce
-% Leslie~\mbox{\textsc{Lamport}}. Note that composed names
-% (such as Dupont-Durant) may now be hyphenated on explicit
-% hyphens, this differs from |frenchb|~v.1.x.
-% \item Commands |\primo|, |\secundo|, |\tertio| and |\quarto|
-% print 1\textsuperscript{o}, 2\textsuperscript{o},
-% 3\textsuperscript{o}, 4\textsuperscript{o}.
-% |\FrenchEnumerate{6}| prints 6\textsuperscript{o}.
-% \item Abbreviations for ``Num\'ero(s)'' and ``num\'ero(s)''
-% (N\textsuperscript{o} N\textsuperscript{os}
-% n\textsuperscript{o} and n\textsuperscript{os}~)
-% are obtained via the commands |\No|, |\Nos|, |\no|, |\nos|.
-% \item Two commands are provided to typeset the symbol for
-% ``degr\'e'': |\degre| prints the raw character and
-% |\degres| should be used to typeset temperatures (e.g.,
-% ``|20~\degres C|'' with an unbreakable space), or for
-% alcohols' strengths (e.g., ``|45\degres|'' with \emph{no}
-% space in French).
-% \item In math mode the comma has to be surrounded with
-% braces to avoid a spurious space being inserted after it,
-% in decimal numbers for instance (see the \TeX{}book p.~134).
-% The command |\DecimalMathComma| makes the comma be an
-% ordinary character \emph{in French only} (no space added);
-% as a counterpart, if |\DecimalMathComma| is active, an
-% explicit space has to be added in lists and intervals:
-% |$[0,\ 1]$|, |$(x,\ y)$|. |\StandardMathComma| switches back
-% to the standard behaviour of the comma.
-% \item A command |\nombre| was provided in 1.x versions to easily
-% format numbers in slices of three digits separated either
-% by a comma in English or with a space in French; |\nombre|
-% is now mapped to |\numprint| from \file{numprint.sty}, see
-% \file{numprint.pdf} for more information.
-% \item |frenchb| has been designed to take advantage of the |xspace|
-% package if present: adding |\usepackage{xspace}| in the
-% preamble will force macros like |\fg|, |\ier|, |\ieme|,
-% |\dots|, \dots, to respect the spaces you type after them,
-% for instance typing `|1\ier juin|' will print
-% `1\textsuperscript{er} juin' (no need for a forced space
-% after |1\ier|).
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% \subsection{Customisation}
-% \label{ssec-custom}
-%
-% Up to version 1.6, customisation of |frenchb| was achieved
-% by entering commands in \file{frenchb.cfg}. This possibility
-% remains for compatibility, but \emph{should not longer be used}.
-% Version 2.0 introduces a new command |\frenchbsetup{}| using
-% the \file{keyval} syntax which should make it easier to choose
-% among the many options available. The command |\frenchbsetup{}|
-% is to appear in the preamble only (after loading \babel).
-%
-% \vspace{.5\baselineskip}
-% |\frenchbsetup{ShowOptions}| prints all available options to
-% the \file{.log} file, it is just meant as a remainder of the
-% list of offered options. As usual with \file{keyval} syntax,
-% boolean options (as |ShowOptions|) can be entered as
-% |ShowOptions=true| or just |ShowOptions|, the `|=true|' part
-% can be omitted.
-%
-% \vspace{.5\baselineskip}
-% The other options are listed below. Their default value is shown
-% between brackets, sometimes followed be a `\texttt{*}'.
-% The `\texttt{*}' means that the default shown applies when
-% |frenchb| is loaded as the \emph{last} option of \babel{}
-% ---\babel's \emph{main language}---, and is toggled otherwise:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item |StandardLayout=true [false*]| forces |frenchb| not to
-% interfere with the layout: no action on any kind of lists,
-% first paragraphs of sections are not indented (as in English),
-% no action on footnotes. This option replaces the former
-% command |\StandardLayout|. It can be used to avoid conflicts
-% with classes or packages which customise lists or footnotes.
-% \item |GlobalLayoutFrench=false [true*]| can be used, when French
-% is the main language, to emulate what prior versions of
-% |frenchb| (pre-2.2) did: lists, and first paragraphs
-% of sections will be displayed the standard way in other
-% languages than French, and ``\`a la fran\c{c}aise'' in French.
-% Note that the layout of footnotes is language independent
-% anyway (see below |FrenchFootnotes| and |AutoSpaceFootnotes|).
-% This option replaces the former command |\FrenchLayout|.
-% \item |ReduceListSpacing=false [true*]|; |frenchb| normally
-% reduces the values of the vertical spaces used in the
-% environment |list| in French; setting this option to |false|
-% reverts to the standard settings of |list|. This option
-% replaces the former command |\FrenchListSpacingfalse|.
-% \item |CompactItemize=false [true*]|; |frenchb| normally
-% redefines the |itemize| environment to
-% suppresse any vertical space between items of |itemize| lists
-% in French; setting this option to |false| reverts to the
-% standard settings of |itemize| lists. This option replaces
-% the former command |\FrenchItemizeSpacingfalse|.
-% \item |StandardItemLabels=true [false*]| when set to |true| this
-% option stops |frenchb| from changing the labels in |itemize|
-% lists in French.
-% \item |ItemLabels=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|,
-% \dots, |[\textendash*]|; when |StandardItemLabels=false| (the
-% default), this option enables to choose the label used in
-% |itemize| lists for all levels. The next three options do
-% the same but each one for one level only. Note that the
-% example |\ding{43}| requires |\usepackage{pifont}|.
-% \item |ItemLabeli=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|,
-% \dots,|[\textendash*]|
-% \item |ItemLabelii=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|,
-% \dots, |[\textendash*]|
-% \item |ItemLabeliii=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|,
-% \dots, |[\textendash*]|
-% \item |ItemLabeliv=\textemdash|, |\textbullet|, |\ding{43}|,
-% \dots, |[\textendash*]|
-% \item |StandardLists=true [false*]| forbids |frenchb| to
-% customise any kind of list. Do activate the option
-% |StandardLists| when using classes or packages that customise
-% lists too (|enumitem|, |paralist|, \dots{}) to avoid conflicts.
-% This option is just a shorthand for |ReduceListSpacing=false|
-% and |CompactItemize=false| and |StandardItemLabels=true|.
-% \item |IndentFirst=false [true*]|; |frenchb| normally forces
-% indentation of the first paragraph of sections.
-% When this option is set to |false|, the first paragraph of
-% will look the same in French and in English (not indented).
-% \item |FrenchFootnotes=false [true*]| reverts to the standard
-% layout of footnotes. By default |frenchb| typesets leading
-% numbers as `1.\hspace{.5em}' instead of `$\hbox{}^1$', but
-% has no effect on footnotes numbered with symbols (as in the
-% |\thanks| command). The former commands |\StandardFootnotes|
-% and |\FrenchFootnotes| are still there, |\StandardFootnotes|
-% can be useful when some footnotes are numbered with letters
-% (inside minipages for instance).
-% \item |AutoSpaceFootnotes=false [true*]| ; by default |frenchb|
-% adds a thin space in the running text before the number or
-% symbol calling the footnote. Making this option |false|
-% reverts to the standard setting (no space added).
-% \item |FrenchSuperscripts=false [true]| ; then
-% |\up=\textsuperscript| (option added in version 2.1).
-% Should only be made |false| to recompile older documents.
-% By default |\up| now relies on |\fup| designed to produce
-% better looking superscripts.
-% \item |AutoSpacePunctuation=false [true]|; in French, the user
-% \emph{should} input a space before the four characters `|:;!?|'
-% but as many people forget about it (even among native French
-% writers!), the default behaviour of |frenchb| is to
-% automatically add a |\thinspace| before `|;|' `|!|' `|?|' and a
-% normal (unbreakable) space before~`|:|' (this is recommended by
-% the French Imprimerie nationale). This is convenient in most
-% cases but can lead to addition of spurious spaces in URLs or in
-% MS-DOS paths but only if they are no typed using |\texttt| or
-% verbatim mode. When the current font is a monospaced
-% (typewriter) font, |AutoSpacePunctuation| is locally switched
-% to |false|, no spurious space is added in that case, so the
-% default behaviour of of |frenchb| in that area should be fine
-% in most circumstances.
-%
-% Choosing |AutoSpacePunctuation=false| will ensure that
-% a proper space will be added before `|:;!?|' \emph{if and only
-% if} a (normal) space has been typed in. Those who are unsure
-% about their typing in this area should stick to the default
-% option and type |\string;| |\string:| |\string!| |\string?|
-% instead of |;| |:| |!| |?| in case an unwanted space is
-% added by |frenchb|.
-% \item |ThinColonSpace=true [false]| changes the normal
-% (unbreakable) space added before the colon `:' to a thin space,
-% so that the same amount of space is added before any of the
-% four double punctuation characters. The default setting is
-% supported by the French Imprimerie nationale.
-% \item |LowercaseSuperscripts=false [true]| ; by default |frenchb|
-% inhibits the uppercasing of superscripts (for instance when they
-% are moved to page headers). Making this option |false|
-% will disable this behaviour (not recommended).
-% \item |PartNameFull=false [true]|; when true, |frenchb| numbers
-% the title of |\part{}| commands as ``Premi\`ere partie'',
-% ``Deuxi\`eme partie'' and so on. With some classes which change
-% the|\part{}| command (AMS and SMF classes do so), you will get
-% ``Premi\`ere partie~I'', ``Deuxi\`eme partie~II'' instead;
-% when this occurs, this option should be set to |false|,
-% part titles will then be printed as ``Partie I'', ``Partie II''.
-% \item |SuppressWarning=true [false]|; when true |frenchb| issues
-% no warnings if |\@makecaption| has been redefined or if the
-% bigfoot package is in use.
-% \item |og=|\texttt{\guillemotleft}, |fg=|\texttt{\guillemotright};
-% when guillemets characters are available on the keyboard
-% (through a compose key for instance), it is nice to use them
-% instead of typing |\og| and |\fg|. This option tells |frenchb|
-% which characters are opening and closing French guillemets
-% (they depend on the input encoding), then you can type either
-% \texttt{\guillemotleft{} guillemets \guillemotright}, or
-% \texttt{\guillemotleft{}guillemets\guillemotright} (with or
-% without spaces), to get properly typeset French quotes.
-% This option requires \file{inputenc} to be loaded with the
-% proper encoding, it works with 8-bits encodings (latin1,
-% latin9, ansinew, applemac,\dots) and multi-byte encodings
-% (utf8 and utf8x).
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \subsection{Hyphenation checks}
-% \label{ssec-hyphen}
-%
-% Once you have built your format, a good precaution would be to
-% perform some basic tests about hyphenation in French. For
-% \LaTeXe{} I suggest this:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item run the following file, with the encoding suitable for
-% your machine (\textit{my-encoding} will be |latin1| for
-% \textsc{unix} machines, |ansinew| for PCs running~Windows,
-% |applemac| or |latin1| for Macintoshs, or |utf8|\dots\\[3mm]^^A\]
-% |%%% Test file for French hyphenation.|\\
-% |\documentclass{article}|\\
-% |\usepackage[|\textit{my-encoding}|]{inputenc}|\\
-% |\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} % Use LM fonts|\\
-% |\usepackage{lmodern} % for French|\\
-% |\usepackage[frenchb]{babel}|\\
-% |\begin{document}|\\
-% |\showhyphens{signal container \'ev\'enement alg\`ebre}|\\
-% |\showhyphens{|\texttt{signal container \'ev\'enement
-% alg\`ebre}|}|\\
-% |\end{document}|
-% \item check the hyphenations proposed by \TeX{} in your log-file;
-% in French you should get with both 7-bit and 8-bit encodings\\
-% \texttt{si-gnal contai-ner \'ev\'e-ne-ment al-g\`ebre}.\\
-% Do not care about how accented characters are displayed in the
-% log-file, what matters is the position of the `|-|' hyphen
-% signs \emph{only}.
-% \end{itemize}
-% If they are all correct, your installation (probably) works fine,
-% if one (or more) is (are) wrong, ask a local wizard to see what's
-% going wrong and perform the test again (or e-mail me about what
-% happens).\\
-% Frequent mismatches:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item you get |sig-nal con-tainer|, this probably means that the
-% hyphenation patterns you are using are for US-English, not for
-% French;
-% \item you get no hyphen at all in \texttt{\'ev\'e-ne-ment}, this
-% probably means that you are using CM fonts and the macro
-% |\accent| to produce accented characters.
-% Using 8-bits fonts with built-in accented characters avoids
-% this kind of mismatch.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \textbf{Options' order} -- Please remember that options are read
-% in the order they appear inside the |\frenchbsetup| command.
-% Someone wishing that |frenchb| leaves the layout of lists
-% and footnotes untouched but caring for indentation of first
-% paragraph of sections could choose
-% |\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout,IndentFirst}| and get the expected
-% layout. Choosing |\frenchbsetup{IndentFirst,StandardLayout}|
-% would not lead to the expected result: option |IndentFirst| would
-% be overwritten by |StandardLayout|.
-%
-% \subsection{Changes}
-% \label{ssec-changes}
-%
-% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.0?}
-%
-% Here is the list of all changes:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Support for \LaTeX-2.09 and for \LaTeXe{} in compatibility
-% mode has been dropped. This version is meant for \LaTeXe{} and
-% Plain based formats (like \file{bplain}). \LaTeXe{} formats
-% based on ml\TeX{} are no longer supported either (plenty of
-% good 8-bits fonts are available now, so T1 encoding should
-% be preferred for typesetting in French). A warning is issued
-% when OT1 encoding is in use at the |\begin{document}|.
-% \item Customisation should now be handled by command
-% |\frenchbsetup{}|, \file{frenchb.cfg} (kept for compatibility)
-% should no longer be used. See section~\ref{ssec-custom} for
-% the list of available options.
-% \item Captions in figures and table have changed in French: former
-% abbreviations ``Fig.'' and ``Tab.'' have been replaced by full
-% names ``Figure'' and ``Table''. If this leads to formatting
-% problems in captions, you can add the following two commands to
-% your preamble (after loading \babel) to get the former captions\\
-% |\addto\captionsfrench{\def\figurename{{\scshape Fig.}}}|\\
-% |\addto\captionsfrench{\def\tablename{{\scshape Tab.}}}|.
-% \item The |\nombre| command is now provided by the \file{numprint}
-% package which has to be loaded \emph{after} \babel{} with the
-% option |autolanguage| if number formatting should depend on the
-% current language.
-% \item The |\bsc| command no longer uses an |\hbox| to stop
-% hyphenation of names but a |\kern0pt| instead. This change
-% enables \file{microtype} to fine tune the length of the
-% argument of |\bsc|; as a side-effect, compound names like
-% Dupont-Durand can now be hyphenated on explicit hyphens.
-% You can get back to the former behaviour of |\bsc| by adding\\
-% |\renewcommand*{\bsc}[1]{\leavevmode\hbox{\scshape #1}}|\\
-% to the preamble of your document.
-% \item Footnotes are now displayed ``\`a la fran\c caise'' for the
-% whole document, except with an explicit\\
-% |\frenchbsetup{AutoSpaceFootnotes=false,FrenchFootnotes=false}|.\\
-% Add this command if you want standard footnotes. It is still
-% possible to revert locally to the standard layout of footnotes
-% by adding |\StandardFootnotes| (inside a |minipage| environment
-% for instance).
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.1?}
-%
-% New command |\fup| to typeset better looking superscripts.
-% Former command |\up| is now defined as |\fup|, but an option
-% |\frenchbsetup{FrenchSuperscripts=false}| is provided for
-% backward compatibility. |\fup| was designed using ideas from
-% Jacques Andr\'e, Thierry Bouche and Ren\'e Fritz, thanks to them!
-%
-% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.2?}
-%
-% Starting with version~2.2a, |frenchb| alters the layout of
-% lists, footnotes, and the indentation of first paragraphs of
-% sections) \emph{only if} French is the ``main language''
-% (i.e. babel's last language option). The layout is global for
-% the whole document: lists, etc. look the same in French and in
-% other languages, everything is typeset ``\`a la fran\c caise''
-% if French is the ``main language'', otherwise |frenchb| doesn't
-% change anything regarding lists, footnotes, and indentation of
-% paragraphs.
-%
-% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.3?}
-%
-% Starting with version~2.3a, |frenchb| no longer inserts spaces
-% automatically before `|:;!?|' when a typewriter font is in use;
-% this was suggested by Yannis Haralambous to prevent
-% spurious spaces in computer source code or expressions like
-% \texttt{C\string:/foo}, \texttt{http\string://foo.bar},
-% etc. An option (|OriginalTypewriter|) is provided to get back
-% to the former behaviour of |frenchb|.
-%
-% Another probably invisible change: lowercase conversion in
-% |\up{}| is now achieved by the \LaTeX{} command |\MakeLowercase|
-% instead of \TeX's |\lowercase| command. This prevents error
-% messages when diacritics are used inside |\up{}| (diacritics
-% should \emph{never} be used in superscripts though!).
-%
-% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.4?}
-%
-% A new option |SuppressWarning| has been added (desactivated by
-% default) to suppress warnings if |\@makecaption| has been
-% redefined or if the bigfoot package is in use.
-%
-% French hyphenation patterns are now coded in Unicode, see file
-% \file{hyph-fr.tex}. Extra code has been added to deal with
-% hyphenation of the French ``apostrophe'' with XeTeX and LuaTeX
-% engines.
-%
-% Better compatibility with the enumitem package.
-%
-% When typewriter fonts are in use (hence in verbatim mode) no
-% space is added after `\guillemotleft' and before
-% `\guillemotright' when they are entered as characters
-% (see |\frenchbsetup|).
-%
-% \subsubsection*{What's new in version 2.5?}
-%
-% The main change is that active characters are no longer used
-% in French with (recent) Xe\TeX-based engines (they still are
-% with \TeX-based engines). All the functionalities (automatic
-% insertion of missing spaces before |:;!?| or bare replacement
-% of typed spaces with suitable unbreabable ones, tuning of the
-% spaces width) remain available and the user interface is
-% unchanged. The use of active characters is replaced by the
-% |\XeTeXinterchartoks| mechanism (as in package
-% \file{polyglossia}).
-%
-% A new command |\NoAutoSpacing| has been added. It should be used
-% \emph{inside a group} instead of |\shorthandoff{;:!?}| whenever
-% active characters or automatic spacing of French punctuation or
-% quote characters conflict with other packages; it is designed to
-% work with \TeX- and Xe\TeX-based engines.
-%
-% Bug correction: \file{frenchb.ldf} no longer messes up
-% |\frenchspacing| and |\nonfrenchspacing| in other languages.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \subsection{File frenchb.cfg}
-% \label{sec-cfg}
-%
-% \file{frenchb.cfg} is now a dummy file just kept for compatibility
-% with previous versions.
-%
-% \iffalse
-%<*cfg>
-% \fi
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%%%%%%%% WARNING: THIS FILE SHOULD NO LONGER BE USED %%%%%%%%%
-%% If you want to customise frenchb, please DO NOT hack into the code!
-%% Do no put any code in this file either, please use the new command
-%% \frenchbsetup{} with the proper options to customise frenchb.
-%%
-%% Add \frenchbsetup{ShowOptions} to your preamble to see the list of
-%% available options and/or read the documentation.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \iffalse
-%</cfg>
-% \fi
-%
-% \subsection{Initial setup}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1d}{2008/05/02}{Argument of \cs{ProvidesLanguage} changed
-% above from `french' to `frenchb' (otherwise \cs{listfiles} prints
-% no date/version information). The real name of current language
-% (french) as to be corrected before calling \cs{LdfInit}.}
-%
-% \iffalse
-%<*code>
-% \fi
-%
-% While this file was read through the option \Lopt{frenchb} we make
-% it behave as if \Lopt{french} was specified.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\CurrentOption{french}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption\datefrench
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1d}{2008/05/04}{Avoid warning ``\cs{end} occurred
-% when \cs{ifx} ... incomplete'' with LaTeX-2.09.}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ifLaTeXe}
-% No support is provided for late \LaTeX-2.09: issue a warning
-% and exit if \LaTeX-2.09 is in use. Plain is still supported.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifLaTeXe
-\let\bbl@tempa\relax
-\ifx\magnification\@undefined
- \ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined
- \PackageError{frenchb.ldf}
- {LaTeX-2.09 format is no longer supported.\MessageBreak
- Aborting here}
- {Please upgrade to LaTeX2e!}
- \let\bbl@tempa\endinput
- \else
- \LaTeXetrue
- \fi
-\fi
-\bbl@tempa
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Check if hyphenation patterns for the French language have been
-% loaded in language.dat; we allow for the names `french',
-% `francais', `canadien' or `acadian'. The latter two are both
-% names used in Canada for variants of French that are in use in
-% that country.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@french\@undefined
- \ifx\l@francais\@undefined
- \ifx\l@canadien\@undefined
- \ifx\l@acadian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{French}
- \adddialect\l@french0
- \else
- \let\l@french\l@acadian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@french\l@canadien
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@french\l@francais
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now |\l@french| is always defined.
-%
-% The internal name for the French language is |french|;
-% |francais| and |frenchb| are synonymous for |french|:
-% first let both names use the same hyphenation patterns.
-% Later we will have to set aliases for |\captionsfrench|,
-% |\datefrench|, |\extrasfrench| and |\noextrasfrench|.
-% As French uses the standard values of |\lefthyphenmin| (2)
-% and |\righthyphenmin| (3), no special setting is required here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@francais\@undefined
- \let\l@francais\l@french
-\fi
-\ifx\l@frenchb\@undefined
- \let\l@frenchb\l@french
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When this language definition file was loaded for one of the
-% Canadian versions of French we need to make sure that a suitable
-% hyphenation pattern register will be found by \TeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@canadien\@undefined
- \let\l@canadien\l@french
-\fi
-\ifx\l@acadian\@undefined
- \let\l@acadian\l@french
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This language definition can be loaded for different variants of
-% the French language. The `key' \babel\ macros are only defined
-% once, using `french' as the language name, but |frenchb| and
-% |francais| are synonymous.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datefrancais{\datefrench}
-\def\datefrenchb{\datefrench}
-\def\extrasfrancais{\extrasfrench}
-\def\extrasfrenchb{\extrasfrench}
-\def\noextrasfrancais{\noextrasfrench}
-\def\noextrasfrenchb{\noextrasfrench}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasfrench}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasfrench}
-% The macro |\extrasfrench| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the French language.
-% The macro |\noextrasfrench| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasfrench|.\\
-% In French, character ``apostrophe'' is a letter in expressions
-% like |l'ambulance| (French hyphenation patterns provide entries
-% for this kind of words). This means that the |\lccode| of
-% ``apostrophe'' has to be non null in French for proper hyphenation
-% of those expressions, and has to be reset to null when exiting
-% French.
-%
-% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{Added a new `if' \cs{FBunicode} and
-% some \cs{lccode} definitions to \cs{extrasfrench} and
-% \cs{noextrasfrench}.}
-%
-% French hyphenation patterns are now coded in Unicode, see file
-% \file{hyph-fr.tex}. XeTeX and LuaTeX engines require some extra
-% code to deal with the French ``apostrophe''.
-% Let's define a new `if' |\FBunicode| which will be true for XeTeX
-% and LuaTeX engines and false for 8-bits engines.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFBunicode
-\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname luatexversion\endcsname\relax
-\else
- \FBunicodetrue
-\fi
-\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXrevision\endcsname\relax
-\else
- \FBunicodetrue
-\fi
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=`\'
- \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019="2019\fi}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=0
- \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019=0\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% One more thing |\extrasfrench| needs to do is to make sure that
-% ``Frenchspacing'' is in effect. |\noextrasfrench| will switch
-% ``Frenchspacing'' off again if necessary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Punctuation}
-% \label{sec-punct}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/10}{Punctation is no longer made active
-% with XeTeX-based engines.}
-%
-% As long as no better solution is available, the `double
-% punctuation' characters (|;| |!| |?| and |:|) have to be made
-% |\active| for an automatic control of the amount of space to
-% insert before them. Xe\TeX{} provides an alternative to active
-% characters and Lua\TeX{} will hopefully do so as well in the
-% (near?) future.
-%
-% Before doing so, we have to save the standard definition of
-% |\@makecaption| (which includes two ':') to compare it later to
-% its definition at the |\begin{document}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\STD@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip
- \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}%
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
- #1: #2\par
- \else
- \global \@minipagefalse
- \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- \fi
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/10}{Define \cs{Fthinspace} for those who want
-% to customise the width of the space before ; ! and ?.}
-%
-% According to the I.N. specifications, the `:' requires a normal
-% space before it, but some people prefer a |\thinspace| (just
-% like the other three). We define |\Fcolonspace| to hold the
-% required amount of space (user customisable). In case some users
-% are not satisfied with |\thinspace|'s width, it is also
-% customisable.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\space}
-\newcommand*{\Fthinspace}{\thinspace}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Check the availability of |\XeTeXinterchartokenstate| and decide
-% whether the `double punctuation' characters (|;| |!| |?| and |:|)
-% have to be made |\active| or not.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFB@active@punct \FB@active@puncttrue
-\newif\ifFB@xetex@punct
-\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXinterchartokenstate\endcsname\relax
-\else
- \FB@xetex@puncttrue\FB@active@punctfalse
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If |\XeTeXinterchartokenstate| is available, we use the
-% ``inter char'' mechanism (as in polyglossia, see
-% \file{gloss-french.ldf}) to provide correct spacing in French
-% before the four characters |;| |!| |?| and |:| and for French
-% quotes (\texttt{\guillemotleft} and \texttt{\guillemotright}).
-%
-% It is assumed that for every character used in French text-mode
-% (except spaces), |\XeTeXcharclass| value is 0 before entering
-% French. |\XeTeXcharclass| value for spaces is assumed to be 255.
-% Otherwise, the spacing before the `double punctuation' characters
-% will not be correct.
-%
-% We switch |\XeTeXinterchartokenstate| to 1 and change the
-% |\XeTeXcharclass| values of |;| |!| |?| |:| |(| |]|
-% \texttt{\guillemotleft} and \texttt{\guillemotright} when
-% entering French. Special care is taken to restore them to their
-% inital values when leaving French.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue
-\ifFB@xetex@punct
- \PackageInfo{frenchb.ldf}{No need for active punctuation characters
- \MessageBreak with this version of XeTeX! reported}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We will need the following code (borrowed from
-% \file{zhsusefulmacros.sty}) for loops:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{@for}{%
- \def\@nnil{\@nil}%
- \def\@empty{}%
- \def\@fornoop#1\@@#2#3{}%
- \long\def\@for#1:=#2\do#3{%
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%
- \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else
- \expandafter\@forloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}%
- \long\def\@forloop#1,#2,#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else
- #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforloop #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}%
- \long\def\@iforloop#1,#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
- \expandafter\@fornoop \else
- #4\relax\expandafter\@iforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}%
- \def\@tfor#1:={\@tf@r#1 }%
- \long\def\@tf@r#1#2\do#3{\def\@fortmp{#2}\ifx\@fortmp\space\else
- \@tforloop#2\@nil\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}%
- \long\def\@tforloop#1#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
- \expandafter\@fornoop \else
- #4\relax\expandafter\@tforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}%
- }{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% New character classes,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcount\FB@interchartokenstateORI
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthick
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthin
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctnul
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilo
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilf
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We define a command to store the |\XeTeXcharclass| values which
-% will be modified for French (as a comma separated list) and a
-% command to retrieve them.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \newcommand*{\FB@charclassesORI}{}
- \def\FB@charclassesORI{}
- \def\empty{}
- \def\FB@parse#1,#2\endparse{\def\FB@class{#1}%
- \def\FB@charclassesORI{#2}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following command will be executed when entering French, it
-% first saves the values to be modified, then fits them to our
-% needs. It also redefines |\shorthandoff| and |\shorthandon|
-% (locally) to avoid error messages with XeTeX-based engines.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@french}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Saving must not be repeated if saved values are already in.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty
- \FB@interchartokenstateORI=\XeTeXinterchartokenstate
- \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do
- {\edef\FB@charclassesORI{\FB@charclassesORI%
- \the\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char,}}%
- \let\shorthandonORI\shorthandon
- \let\shorthandoffORI\shorthandoff
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Set the classes and interactions between classes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=1
- \XeTeXcharclass `\: = \FB@punctthick
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthick = {%
- \ifhmode\FDP@colonspace\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthick = {%
- \FDP@colonspace}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthick = {%
- \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace\fi}%
- \@for\FB@char:={`\;,`\!,`\?}\do
- {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctthin}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthin = {%
- \ifhmode\FDP@thinspace\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthin = {%
- \FDP@thinspace}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthin = {%
- \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This avoids spurious spaces in (!), (???), etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@for\FB@char:={`\[,`\(}\do
- {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctnul}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctnul \FB@punctthin = {}%
- \XeTeXcharclass"00AB = \FB@punctguilo
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo \z@ = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo 255 = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\ignorespaces\fi}%
- \XeTeXcharclass"00BB = \FB@punctguilf
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctguilf = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctthin \FB@punctguilf = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctguilf = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\unskip\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% With Xe(La)TeX, French defines no active shorthands.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\shorthandoff##1{%
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{\protect\shorthandoff{;:!?} is
- helpless with XeTeX,\MessageBreak use \protect\NoAutoSpacing
- \space *inside a group* instead;\MessageBreak reported}%
- }%
- \def\shorthandon##1{}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following command will be executed when leaving French for
-% restoring values and commands modified in French.
-% When French is not the main language, |\noextrasfrench| is
-% executed `AtBeginDocument', so the test on
-% |\FB@charclassesORI| is mandatory.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench}{%
- \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty
- \else
- \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do
- {\expandafter\FB@parse\FB@charclassesORI\endparse
- \XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@class}%
- \def\FB@charclassesORI{}%
- \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=\FB@interchartokenstateORI
- \let\shorthandon\shorthandonORI
- \let\shorthandoff\shorthandoffORI
- \fi
- }
- \addto\extrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@french}
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Otherwise we need to make the four characters |;| |!| |?| and |:|
-% `active' and provide their definitions.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifFB@active@punct
- \initiate@active@char{:}%
- \initiate@active@char{;}%
- \initiate@active@char{!}%
- \initiate@active@char{?}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We first tune the amount of space before \texttt{;}
-% \texttt{!} \texttt{?} and \texttt{:}. This should only happen
-% in horizontal mode, hence the test |\ifhmode|.
-%
-% In horizontal mode, if a space has been typed before `;' we
-% remove it and put an unbreakable |\thinspace| instead. If no
-% space has been typed, we add |\FDP@thinspace| which will be
-% defined, up to the user's wishes, as an automatic added
-% thin space, or as |\@empty|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{french}{;}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now we can insert a |;| character.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \string;}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next three definitions are very similar.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{french}{!}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string!}
- \declare@shorthand{french}{?}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string?}
- \declare@shorthand{french}{:}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace
- \else
- \FDP@colonspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string:}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the active characters appear in an environment where their
-% French behaviour is not wanted they should give an `expected'
-% result. Therefore we define shorthands at system level as well.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;}
-%}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We specify that the French group of shorthands should be used when
-% switching to French.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \addto\extrasfrench{%
- \languageshorthands{french}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may
-% vary. Don't misunderstand the following code: they keep being
-% active all along the document, even when leaving French.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}%
- \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}%
- }
- \addto\noextrasfrench{%
- \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}%
- \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A new `if' |\FBAutoSpacePunctuation| needs to be defined now.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/10/10}{\cs{NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP} and
-% \cs{AutoSpaceBeforeFDP} now set the flag
-% \cs{ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation} accordingly (LaTeX only).}
-%
-% \changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/10}{Execute \cs{AutoSpaceBeforeFDP}
-% also in LaTeX to define \cs{FDP@colonspace}: needed for
-% tex4ht, pointed out by MPG.}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP}
-% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP}
-% |\FDP@thinspace| and |\FDP@colonspace| are defined as unbreakable
-% spaces by |\autospace@beforeFDP| or as |\@empty| by
-% |\noautospace@beforeFDP| (internal commands), user commands
-% |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| and |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| do the same and
-% take care of the flag |\ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation| in \LaTeX{}.
-% Set the default now for Plain (done later for \LaTeX).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\autospace@beforeFDP{%
- \def\FDP@thinspace{\penalty\@M\Fthinspace}%
- \def\FDP@colonspace{\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace}}
-\def\noautospace@beforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty
- \let\FDP@colonspace\@empty}
-\ifLaTeXe
- \def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\autospace@beforeFDP
- \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue}
- \def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\noautospace@beforeFDP
- \FBAutoSpacePunctuationfalse}
-\else
- \let\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP\autospace@beforeFDP
- \let\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP\noautospace@beforeFDP
- \fi
-\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/10/10}{In LaTeX, frenchb no longer adds spaces
-% before `double punctuation' characters in computer code.
-% Suggested by Yannis Haralambous.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.3c}{2009/02/07}{Commands \cs{ttfamily}, \cs{rmfamily}
-% and \cs{sffamily} have to be robust. Bug introduced in 2.3a,
-% pointed out by Manuel P\'egouri\'e-Gonnard.}
-%
-% In \LaTeXe{} |\ttfamily| (and hence |\texttt|) will be redefined
-% `AtBeginDocument' as |\ttfamilyFB| so that no space
-% is added before the four |; : ! ?| characters, even if
-% |AutoSpacePunctuation| is true. |\rmfamily| and |\sffamily| need
-% to be redefined also (|\ttfamily| is not always used inside a
-% group, its effect can be cancelled by |\rmfamily| or |\sffamily|).
-%
-% These redefinitions can be canceled if necessary, for instance to
-% recompile older documents, see option |OriginalTypewriter| below.
-%
-% \changes{v2.4c}{2010/05/23}{In \cs{ttfamilyFB}, also cancel
-% automatic spaces inside French guillemets entered as characters
-% (see \cs{frenchbsetup}).}
-%
-% To be consistent with what is done for `double punctuation'
-% characters, |\ttfamilyFB| also switches off insertion of spaces
-% inside French guillemets \emph{when they are typed in as
-% characters} with the `og'/`fg' option in |\frenchbsetup{}|.
-% This is also a workaround for the weird behaviour of these
-% characters in verbatim mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifLaTeXe
- \let\ttfamilyORI\ttfamily
- \let\rmfamilyORI\rmfamily
- \let\sffamilyORI\sffamily
- \DeclareRobustCommand\ttfamilyFB{%
- \FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse
- \noautospace@beforeFDP\ttfamilyORI}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\rmfamilyFB{%
- \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue
- \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation
- \autospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI
- \else
- \noautospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI
- \fi}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\sffamilyFB{%
- \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue
- \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation
- \autospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI
- \else
- \noautospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI
- \fi}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/14}{New command \cs{NoAutoSpacing},
-% suggested by MPG.}
-%
-% The following command will switch off active punctuation
-% characters (if any) and disable automatic spacing for French quote
-% characters. It is engine independent (works for \TeX{} and
-% Xe\TeX{} based engines) and is meant to be used inside a group.
-% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpacing}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\NoAutoSpacing}{\FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse
- \ifFB@active@punct\shorthandoff{;:!?}\fi
- \ifFB@xetex@punct\XeTeXinterchartokenstate=0\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Commands for French quotation marks}
-% \label{sec-quotes}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\og}
-% \begin{macro}{\fg}
-% The top macros for quotation marks will be called |\og|
-% (``\underline{o}uvrez \underline{g}uillemets'') and |\fg|
-% (``\underline{f}ermez \underline{g}uillemets'').
-% Another option for typesetting quotes in multilingual texts
-% is to use the package \file{csquotes.sty} and its command
-% |\enquote|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\og}{\@empty}
-\newcommand*{\fg}{\@empty}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\guillemotleft}
-% \begin{macro}{\guillemotright}
-% \begin{macro}{\textquoteddblleft}
-% \begin{macro}{\textquoteddblright}
-% \LaTeX{} users are supposed to use 8-bit output encodings (T1,
-% LY1,\dots) to typeset French, those who still stick to OT1 should
-% call |aeguill.sty| or a similar package. In both cases the
-% commands |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright| will print the
-% French opening and closing quote characters from the output font.
-% For XeLaTeX, |\guillemotleft| and |\guillemotright| are defined
-% by package \file{xunicode.sty}.
-% We will check `AtBeginDocument' that the proper output encodings
-% are in use (see end of section~\ref{sec-keyval}).
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{Change \cs{guillemotleft} and
-% \cs{guillemotright} definitions for Unicode anf provide
-% definitions for \cs{textquotedblleft} and
-% \cs{textquotedbright}. Insures correct printing of quotes
-% by \cs{og} and \cs{fg} in French and outside.}
-
-% We give the following definitions for non-LaTeX users only as a
-% fall-back, they are welcome to change them for anything better.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifLaTeXe
-\else
- \ifFBunicode
- \def\guillemotleft{\char"00AB}
- \def\guillemotright{\char"00BB}
- \def\textquotedblleft{\char"201C}
- \def\textquotedblright{\char"201D}
- \else
- \def\guillemotleft{\leavevmode\raise0.25ex
- \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}
- \def\guillemotright{\raise0.25ex
- \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}
- \def\textquotedblleft{``}
- \def\textquotedblright{''}
- \fi
- \let\xspace\relax
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The next step is to provide correct spacing after |\guillemotleft|
-% and before |\guillemotright|: a space precedes and follows
-% quotation marks but no line break is allowed neither \emph{after}
-% the opening one, nor \emph{before} the closing one.
-% |\FBguill@spacing| which does the spacing, has been fine tuned by
-% Thierry Bouche. French quotes (including spacing) are printed by
-% |\FB@og| and |\FB@fg|, the expansion of the top level commands
-% |\og| and |\og| is different in and outside French.
-% We'll try to be smart to users of David~Carlisle's \file{xspace}
-% package: if this package is loaded there will be no need for |{}|
-% or |\ | to get a space after |\fg|, otherwise |\xspace| will be
-% defined as |\relax| (done at the end of this file).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\FBguill@spacing}{\penalty\@M\hskip.8\fontdimen2\font
- plus.3\fontdimen3\font
- minus.8\fontdimen4\font}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@og}{\leavevmode\guillemotleft
- \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi
- \guillemotright\xspace}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The top level definitions for French quotation marks are switched
-% on and off through the |\extrasfrench| |\noextrasfrench|
-% mechanism. Outside French, |\og| and |\fg| will typeset standard
-% English opening and closing double quotes.
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{\cs{og} and \cs{fg} do not print
-% correctly in English when using XeTeX, fixed by using
-% \cs{textquotedblleft} and \cs{textquotedblright} defined above.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifLaTeXe
- \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\FB@og}%
- \renewcommand*{\fg}{\FB@fg}}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\textquotedblleft}%
- \renewcommand*{\fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \textquotedblright}}
-\else
- \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\let\og\FB@og
- \let\fg\FB@fg}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\def\og{\textquotedblleft}%
- \def\fg{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi\textquotedblright}}
-\fi
-\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchguillemets}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Date in French}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datefrench}
-% The macro |\datefrench| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce French dates.
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{2 '\cs{relax}' added in
-% \cs{today}'s definition.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/25}{\cs{today} changed (correction in 2.0
-% was wrong: \cs{today} was printed without spaces in toc).}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{Replaced \cs{'}e and \cs{\char94}u
-% by c.s. to work with XeTeX.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{{\number\day}\ifnum1=\day {\ier}\fi \space
- \ifcase\month
- \or janvier\or f{\FBeacute}vrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or
- juin\or juillet\or ao{\FBucirconflexe}t\or septembre\or
- octobre\or novembre\or d{\FBeacute}cembre\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Extra utilities}
-%
-% Let's provide the French user with some extra utilities.
-%
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/24}{Command \cs{fup} added to produce
-% better superscripts than \cs{textsuperscript}.}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\up}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1c}{2008/04/29}{Provide a temporary definition
-% (hyperref safe) of \cs{up} in case it has to be expanded in
-% the preamble (by beamer's \cs{title} command for instance).}
-%
-% \changes{v2.4d}{2010/07/28}{Command \cs{up} defined with
-% \cs{providecommand} instead of \cs{newcommand} as \cs{up} may be
-% defined elsewhere (catalan.ldf).
-% Bug pointed out by Felip Many\'e i Ballester.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the
-% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE.
-% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing
-% \cs{realsuperscript}.}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fup}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1b}{2008/04/02}{Command \cs{fup} changed to use
-% real superscripts from fourier v. 1.6.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{\cs{newif} and \cs{newdimen} moved
-% before \cs{ifLaTeXe} to avoid an error with plainTeX.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/09/30}{\cs{lowercase} changed to
-% \cs{MakeLowercase} as the former doesn't work for non ASCII
-% characters in encodings like applemac, utf-8,\dots}
-%
-% |\up| eases the typesetting of superscripts like
-% `1\textsuperscript{er}'. Up to version 2.0 of |frenchb| |\up| was
-% just a shortcut for |\textsuperscript| in \LaTeXe, but several
-% users complained that |\textsuperscript| typesets superscripts
-% too high and too big, so we now define |\fup| as an attempt to
-% produce better looking superscripts. |\up| is defined as |\fup|
-% but can be redefined by |\frenchbsetup{FrenchSuperscripts=false}|
-% as |\textsuperscript| for compatibility with previous versions.
-%
-% When a font has built-in superscripts, the best thing to do is
-% to just use them, otherwise |\fup| has to simulate superscripts
-% by scaling and raising ordinary letters. Scaling is done using
-% package \file{scalefnt} which will be loaded at the end of
-% \babel's loading (|frenchb| being an option of babel, it cannot
-% load a package while being read).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFB@poorman
-\newdimen\FB@Mht
-\ifLaTeXe
- \AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{scalefnt}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\FB@up@fake| holds the definition of fake superscripts.
-% The scaling ratio is 0.65, raising is computed to put the top of
-% lower case letters (like `m') just under the top of upper case
-% letters (like `M'), precisely 12\% down. The chosen settings
-% look correct for most fonts, but can be tuned by the end-user
-% if necessary by changing |\FBsupR| and |\FBsupS| commands.
-%
-% |\FB@lc| is defined as |\MakeLowercase| to inhibit the uppercasing
-% of superscripts (this may happen in page headers with the standard
-% classes but is wrong); |\FB@lc| can be redefined to do nothing
-% by option |LowercaseSuperscripts=false| of |\frenchbsetup{}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand*{\FBsupR}{-0.12}
- \newcommand*{\FBsupS}{0.65}
- \newcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{\MakeLowercase{#1}}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up@fake}[1]{%
- \settoheight{\FB@Mht}{M}%
- \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{\FBsupR \FB@Mht}%
- \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{-\FBsupS ex}%
- \raisebox{\FB@Mht}{\scalefont{\FBsupS}{\FB@lc{#1}}}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The only packages I currently know to take advantage of real
-% superscripts are a) \file{xltxtra} used in conjunction with
-% XeLaTeX and OpenType fonts having the font feature
-% 'VerticalPosition=Superior' (\file{xltxtra} defines
-% |\realsuperscript| and |\fakesuperscript|) and b) \file{fourier}
-% (from version 1.6) when Expert Utopia fonts are available.
-%
-% |\FB@up| checks whether the current font is a Type1 `Expert'
-% (or `Pro') font with real superscripts or not (the code works
-% currently only with \file{fourier-1.6} but could work with any
-% Expert Type1 font with built-in superscripts, see below), and
-% decides to use real or fake superscripts.
-% It works as follows: the content of |\f@family| (family name of
-% the current font) is split by |\FB@split| into two pieces, the
-% first three characters (`|fut|' for Fourier, `|ppl|' for Adobe's
-% Palatino, \dots) stored in |\FB@firstthree| and the rest stored
-% in |\FB@suffix| which is expected to be `|x|' or `|j|' for expert
-% fonts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\FB@split#1#2#3#4\@nil{\def\FB@firstthree{#1#2#3}%
- \def\FB@suffix{#4}}
- \def\FB@x{x}
- \def\FB@j{j}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up}[1]{%
- \bgroup \FB@poormantrue
- \expandafter\FB@split\f@family\@nil
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then |\FB@up| looks for a \file{.fd} file named \file{t1fut-sup.fd}
-% (Fourier) or \file{t1ppl-sup.fd} (Palatino), etc. supposed to
-% define the subfamily (|fut-sup| or |ppl-sup|, etc.) giving access
-% to the built-in superscripts. If the \file{.fd} file is not found
-% by |\IfFileExists|, |\FB@up| falls back on fake superscripts,
-% otherwise |\FB@suffix| is checked to decide whether to use fake or
-% real superscripts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \edef\reserved@a{\lowercase{%
- \noexpand\IfFileExists{\f@encoding\FB@firstthree -sup.fd}}}%
- \reserved@a
- {\ifx\FB@suffix\FB@x \FB@poormanfalse\fi
- \ifx\FB@suffix\FB@j \FB@poormanfalse\fi
- \ifFB@poorman \FB@up@fake{#1}%
- \else \FB@up@real{#1}%
- \fi}%
- {\FB@up@fake{#1}}%
- \egroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\FB@up@real| just picks up the superscripts from the subfamily
-% (and forces lowercase).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand*{\FB@up@real}[1]{\bgroup
- \fontfamily{\FB@firstthree -sup}\selectfont \FB@lc{#1}\egroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\fup| is now defined as |\FB@up| unless |\realsuperscript| is
-% defined (occurs with XeLaTeX calling \file{xltxtra.sty}).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\fup}[1]{%
- \@ifundefined{realsuperscript}%
- {\FB@up{#1}\let\realsuperscript\undefined}%
- {\bgroup\let\fakesuperscript\FB@up@fake
- \realsuperscript{\FB@lc{#1}}\egroup}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Temporary definition of |\up|, redefined `AtBeginDocument'as
-% |\fup| or |\textsuperscript| later on while processing the options
-% of |\frenchbsetup{}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \providecommand*{\up}{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Poor man's definition of |\up| for Plain.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \providecommand*{\up}[1]{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\sevenrm #1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ieme}
-% \begin{macro}{\ier}
-% \begin{macro}{\iere}
-% \begin{macro}{\iemes}
-% \begin{macro}{\iers}
-% \begin{macro}{\ieres}
-% Some handy macros for those who don't know how to abbreviate ordinals:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ieme{\up{\lowercase{e}}\xspace}
-\def\iemes{\up{\lowercase{es}}\xspace}
-\def\ier{\up{\lowercase{er}}\xspace}
-\def\iers{\up{\lowercase{ers}}\xspace}
-\def\iere{\up{\lowercase{re}}\xspace}
-\def\ieres{\up{\lowercase{res}}\xspace}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1c}{2008/04/29}{Added commands \cs{Nos} and \cs{nos}.}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\No}
-% \begin{macro}{\no}
-% \begin{macro}{\Nos}
-% \begin{macro}{\nos}
-% \begin{macro}{\primo}
-% \begin{macro}{\fprimo)}
-% And some more macros relying on |\up| for numbering,
-% first two support macros.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchEnumerate}[1]{%
- #1\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.3em}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchPopularEnumerate}[1]{%
- #1\up{\lowercase{o}})\kern+.3em}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Typing |\primo| should result in `$1^{\rm o}$\kern+.3em',
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\primo{\FrenchEnumerate1}
-\def\secundo{\FrenchEnumerate2}
-\def\tertio{\FrenchEnumerate3}
-\def\quarto{\FrenchEnumerate4}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% while typing |\fprimo)| gives `1$^{\rm o}$)\kern+.3em.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\fprimo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate1}
-\def\fsecundo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate2}
-\def\ftertio){\FrenchPopularEnumerate3}
-\def\fquarto){\FrenchPopularEnumerate4}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Let's provide four macros for the common abbreviations
-% of ``Num\'ero''.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\No}{N\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\no}{n\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Nos}{N\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\nos}{n\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bsc}
-% As family names should be written in small capitals and never be
-% hyphenated, we provide a command (its name comes from Boxed Small
-% Caps) to input them easily. Note that this command has changed
-% with version~2 of |frenchb|: a |\kern0pt| is used instead of |\hbox|
-% because |\hbox| would break microtype's font expansion; as a
-% (positive?) side effect, composed names (such as Dupont-Durand)
-% can now be hyphenated on explicit hyphens.
-% Usage: |Jean~\bsc{Duchemin}|.
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{\cs{hbox} dropped, replaced by
-% \cs{kern0pt}.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bsc}[1]{\leavevmode\begingroup\kern0pt
- \scshape #1\endgroup}
-\ifLaTeXe\else\let\scshape\relax\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Some definitions for special characters. We won't define |\tilde|
-% as a Text Symbol not to conflict with the macro |\tilde| for math
-% mode and use the name |\tild| instead. Note that |\boi| may
-% \emph{not} be used in math mode, its name in math mode is
-% |\backslash|. |\degre| can be accessed by the command |\r{}|
-% for ring accent.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifLaTeXe
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64}
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{94}
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{126}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{T1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{T1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{T1}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\boi}{\textbackslash}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degre}{\r{}}
-\else
- \def\T@one{T1}
- \ifx\f@encoding\T@one
- \newcommand*{\degre}{\char6}
- \else
- \newcommand*{\degre}{\char23}
- \fi
- \newcommand*{\at}{\char64}
- \newcommand*{\circonflexe}{\char94}
- \newcommand*{\tild}{\char126}
- \newcommand*{\boi}{$\backslash$}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{New definitions needed for XeTeX to print
-% properly some dates and captions: using c.s. like \cs{'e} do not
-% work with XeTeX (OK with XeLaTeX).}
-%
-% French dates and captions make use of four non-ascii characters
-% (\texttt{\`a}, \texttt{\`e}, \texttt{\'e} and \texttt{\^u}).
-% This is fine except for (plain) XeTeX (|\accent| commands are not
-% implemented), so we define four new commands to deal with this
-% issue; we also redefine |\degre| (it is an accent in LaTeX).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\FBagrave}{\`a}
-\newcommand*{\FBegrave}{\`e}
-\newcommand*{\FBeacute}{\'e}
-\newcommand*{\FBucirconflexe}{\^u}
-\ifFBunicode
- \ifLaTeXe
- \else
- \def\degre{\char"00B0}
- \def\FBagrave{\char"00E0}
- \def\FBegrave{\char"00E8}
- \def\FBeacute{\char"00E9}
- \def\FBucirconflexe{\char"00FB}
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\degres}
-% We now define a macro |\degres| for typesetting the abbreviation
-% for `degrees' (as in `degrees Celsius'). As the bounding box of
-% the character `degree' has \emph{very} different widths in CM/EC
-% and PostScript fonts, we fix the width of the bounding box of
-% |\degres| to 0.3\,em, this lets the symbol `degree' stick to the
-% preceding (e.g., |45\degres|) or following character
-% (e.g., |20~\degres C|).
-%
-% If the \TeX{} Companion fonts are available (\file{textcomp.sty}),
-% we pick up |\textdegree| from them instead of using emulating
-% `degrees' from the |\r{}| accent. Otherwise we overwrite the
-% (poor) definition of |\textdegree| given in \file{latin1.def},
-% \file{applemac.def} etc. (called by \file{inputenc.sty}) by
-% our definition of |\degres|. We also advice the user (once only)
-% to use TS1-encoding.
-%
-% \changes{v2.1c}{2008/04/29}{Provide a temporary definition (hyperref
-% safe) of \cs{degres} in case it has to be expanded in the preamble
-% (by beamer's \cs{title} command for instance).}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifLaTeXe
- \newcommand*{\degres}{\degre}
- \def\Warning@degree@TSone{%
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{%
- Degrees would look better in TS1-encoding:
- \MessageBreak add \protect
- \usepackage{textcomp} to the preamble.
- \MessageBreak Degrees used}}
- \ifFBunicode\global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax\fi
- \AtBeginDocument{\expandafter\ifx\csname M@TS1\endcsname\relax
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{%
- \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}%
- \Warning@degree@TSone
- \global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax}%
- \let\textdegree\degres
- \else
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{%
- \hbox{\UseTextSymbol{TS1}{\textdegree}}}%
- \fi}
-\else
- \newcommand*{\degres}{%
- \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Formatting numbers}
-% \label{sec-numbers}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DecimalMathComma}
-% \begin{macro}{\StandardMathComma}
-% As mentioned in the \TeX{}book p.~134, the comma is of type
-% |\mathpunct| in math mode: it is automatically followed by a
-% space. This is convenient in lists and intervals but
-% unpleasant when the comma is used as a decimal separator
-% in French: it has to be entered as |{,}|.
-% |\DecimalMathComma| makes the comma be an ordinary character
-% (of type |\mathord|) in French \emph{only} (no space added);
-% |\StandardMathComma| switches back to the standard behaviour
-% of the comma.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\std@mcc
-\newcount\dec@mcc
-\std@mcc=\mathcode`\,
-\dec@mcc=\std@mcc
-\@tempcnta=\std@mcc
-\divide\@tempcnta by "1000
-\multiply\@tempcnta by "1000
-\advance\dec@mcc by -\@tempcnta
-\newcommand*{\DecimalMathComma}{\iflanguage{french}%
- {\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}{}%
- \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}}
-\newcommand*{\StandardMathComma}{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc
- \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc}}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\nombre}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{\cs{nombre} requires now numprint.sty.}
-%
-% The command |\nombre| is now borrowed from \file{numprint.sty} for
-% \LaTeXe. There is no point to maintain the former tricky code
-% when a package is dedicated to do the same job and more.
-% For Plain based formats, |\nombre| no longer formats numbers,
-% it prints them as is and issues a warning about the change.
-%
-% Fake command |\nombre| for Plain based formats, warning users of
-% |frenchb| v.1.x. of the change.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\nombre}[1]{{#1}\message{%
- *** \noexpand\nombre no longer formats numbers\string! ***}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The next definitions only make sense for \LaTeXe. Let's cleanup
-% and exit if the format in Plain based.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\FBstop@here\relax
-\def\FBclean@on@exit{\let\ifLaTeXe\undefined
- \let\LaTeXetrue\undefined
- \let\LaTeXefalse\undefined}
-\ifx\magnification\@undefined
-\else
- \def\FBstop@here{\let\STD@makecaption\relax
- \FBclean@on@exit
- \ldf@quit\CurrentOption\endinput}
-\fi
-\FBstop@here
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% What follows now is for \LaTeXe{} \emph{only}.
-% We redefine |\nombre| for \LaTeXe. A warning is issued
-% at the first call of |\nombre| if |\numprint| is not
-% defined, suggesting what to do. The package \file{numprint}
-% is \emph{not} loaded automatically by |frenchb| because of
-% possible options conflict.
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the
-% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE.
-% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing
-% \cs{numprint}.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand*{\nombre}[1]{\Warning@nombre\numprint{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\Warning@nombre}{%
- \@ifundefined{numprint}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{%
- \protect\nombre\space now relies on package numprint.sty,
- \MessageBreak add \protect
- \usepackage[autolanguage]{numprint}\MessageBreak
- to your preamble *after* loading babel, \MessageBreak
- see file numprint.pdf for other options.\MessageBreak
- \protect\nombre\space called}%
- \global\let\Warning@nombre\relax
- \global\let\numprint\undefined
- }{}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0c}{2007/06/25}{There is no need to define here
-% numprint's command \cs{npstylefrench}, it will be redefined
-% `AtBeginDocument' by \cs{FBprocess@options}.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0c}{2007/06/25}{\cs{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers} added
-% for compatibility with frenchb-1.x.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}{%
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{%
- Type \protect\frenchbsetup{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}
- \MessageBreak Command \protect\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers\space
- is no longer\MessageBreak defined in frenchb v.2,}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Caption names}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining the French equivalents for
-% the \LaTeX{} caption names.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsfrench}
-% Let's first define |\captionsfrench| which sets all strings used
-% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{`Fig.' changed to `Figure' and
-% `Tab.' to `Table'.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/12/15}{Set \cs{CaptionSeparator} in
-% \cs{extrasfrench} now instead of \cs{captionsfrench}
-% because it has to be reset when leaving French.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/16}{\cs{emph} deleted in \cs{seename}
-% and \cs{alsoname} to match what is done for the other languages.
-% Suggested by Marc Baudoin.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/20}{Replaced \cs{'e}, \cs{`e} and \cs{`a}
-% by c.s. to work with XeTeX.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\refname{R{\FBeacute}f{\FBeacute}rences}%
- \def\abstractname{R{\FBeacute}sum{\FBeacute}}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliographie}%
- \def\prefacename{Pr{\FBeacute}face}%
- \def\chaptername{Chapitre}%
- \def\appendixname{Annexe}%
- \def\contentsname{Table des mati{\FBegrave}res}%
- \def\listfigurename{Table des figures}%
- \def\listtablename{Liste des tableaux}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}%
- \def\tablename{{\scshape Table}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% ``Premi\`ere partie'' instead of ``Part I''.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\partname{\protect\@Fpt partie}%
- \def\@Fpt{{\ifcase\value{part}\or Premi{\FBegrave}re\or
- Deuxi{\FBegrave}me\or Troisi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Quatri{\FBegrave}me\or Cinqui{\FBegrave}me\or
- Sixi{\FBegrave}me\or Septi{\FBegrave}me\or Huiti{\FBegrave}me\or
- Neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or Dixi{\FBegrave}me\or Onzi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Douzi{\FBegrave}me\or Treizi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Quatorzi{\FBegrave}me\or Quinzi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Seizi{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-septi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Dix-huiti{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Vingti{\FBegrave}me\fi}\space\def\thepart{}}%
- \def\pagename{page}%
- \def\seename{voir}%
- \def\alsoname{voir aussi}%
- \def\enclname{P.~J. }%
- \def\ccname{Copie {\FBagrave} }%
- \def\headtoname{}%
- \def\proofname{D{\FBeacute}monstration}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossaire}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% As some users who choose |frenchb| or |francais| as option of
-% \babel, might customise |\captionsfrenchb| or |\captionsfrancais|
-% in the preamble, we merge their changes at the |\begin{document}|
-% when they do so.
-% The other variants of French (canadien, acadian) are defined by
-% checking if the relevant option was used and then adding one extra
-% level of expansion.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{\let\captions@French\captionsfrench
- \@ifundefined{captionsfrenchb}%
- {\let\captions@Frenchb\relax}%
- {\let\captions@Frenchb\captionsfrenchb}%
- \@ifundefined{captionsfrancais}%
- {\let\captions@Francais\relax}%
- {\let\captions@Francais\captionsfrancais}%
- \def\captionsfrench{\captions@French
- \captions@Francais\captions@Frenchb}%
- \def\captionsfrancais{\captionsfrench}%
- \def\captionsfrenchb{\captionsfrench}%
- \iflanguage{french}{\captionsfrench}{}%
- }
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{canadien}{%
- \def\captionscanadien{\captionsfrench}%
- \def\datecanadien{\datefrench}%
- \def\extrascanadien{\extrasfrench}%
- \def\noextrascanadien{\noextrasfrench}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{acadian}{%
- \def\captionsacadian{\captionsfrench}%
- \def\dateacadian{\datefrench}%
- \def\extrasacadian{\extrasfrench}%
- \def\noextrasacadian{\noextrasfrench}%
- }{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\CaptionSeparator}
-% Let's consider now captions in figures and tables.
-% In French, captions in figures and tables should be printed with
-% endash (`--') instead of the standard `:'.
-%
-% The standard definition of |\@makecaption| (e.g., the one provided
-% in article.cls, report.cls, book.cls which is frozen for \LaTeXe{}
-% according to Frank Mittelbach), has been saved in
-% |\STD@makecaption| before making `:' active
-% (see section~\ref{sec-punct}). `AtBeginDocument' we compare it to
-% its current definition (some classes like koma-script classes,
-% AMS classes, ua-thesis.cls\dots change it).
-% If they are identical, |frenchb| just adds a hook called
-% |\CaptionSeparator| to |\@makecaption|, |\CaptionSeparator|
-% defaults to `: ' as in the standard |\@makecaption|, and will be
-% changed to ` -- ' in French.
-% If the definitions differ, |frenchb| doesn't overwrite the changes,
-% but prints a message in the .log file.
-%
-% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{\cs{PackageWarning} changed to
-% \cs{FBWarning} (in case \cs{@makecaption} has been customized).
-% \cs{FBWarning} is defined as \cs{PackageWarning} by default but
-% can be made silent using \cs{frenchbsetup}, (suggested by MPG).}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\PackageWarning{#1}{#2}}
-\def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space}
-\long\def\FB@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip
- \sbox\@tempboxa{#1\CaptionSeparator #2}%
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
- #1\CaptionSeparator #2\par
- \else
- \global \@minipagefalse
- \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- \fi
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \ifx\@makecaption\STD@makecaption
- \global\let\@makecaption\FB@makecaption
- \else
- \@ifundefined{@makecaption}%
- {\let\@makecaption\undefined}%
- {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {The definition of \protect\@makecaption\space
- has been changed,\MessageBreak
- frenchb will NOT customise it;\MessageBreak reported}%
- }%
- \fi
- \let\FB@makecaption\relax
- \let\STD@makecaption\relax
-}
-\addto\extrasfrench{%
- \def\CaptionSeparator{\space\textendash\space}}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{%
- \def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{French lists}
-% \label{sec-lists}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\listFB}
-% \begin{macro}{\listORI}
-% Vertical spacing in general lists should be shorter in French
-% texts than the defaults provided by \LaTeX.
-% Note that the easy way, just changing values of vertical spacing
-% parameters when entering French and restoring them to their
-% defaults on exit would not work; as most lists are based on
-% |\list| we will define a variant of |\list| (|\listFB|) to
-% be used in French.
-%
-% The amount of vertical space before and after a list is given by
-% |\topsep| + |\parskip| (+ |\partopsep| if the list starts a new
-% paragraph). IMHO, |\parskip| should be added \emph{only} when
-% the list starts a new paragraph, so I subtract |\parskip| from
-% |\topsep| and add it back to |\partopsep|; this will normally
-% make no difference because |\parskip|'s default value is 0pt, but
-% will be noticeable when |\parskip| is \emph{not} null.
-%
-% |\endlist| is not redefined, but |\endlistORI| is provided for
-% the users who prefer to define their own lists from the original
-% command, they can code: |\begin{listORI}{}{} \end{listORI}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\listORI\list
-\let\endlistORI\endlist
-\def\FB@listsettings{%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}%
- \setlength{\topsep}{0.8ex plus 0.4ex minus 0.4ex}%
- \setlength{\partopsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\parskip| is of type `skip', its mean value only (\emph{not
-% the glue}) should be subtracted from |\topsep| and added to
-% |\partopsep|, so convert |\parskip| to a `dimen' using
-% |\@tempdima|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@tempdima=\parskip
- \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}%
- \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}%
-\def\listFB#1#2{\listORI{#1}{\FB@listsettings #2}}%
-\let\endlistFB\endlist
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\itemizeFB}
-% \begin{macro}{\itemizeORI}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchlabelitems}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}
-% Let's now consider French itemize lists. They differ from those
-% provided by the standard \LaTeXe{} classes:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item vertical spacing between items, before and after
-% the list, should be \emph{null} with \emph{no glue} added;
-% \item the item labels of a first level list should be vertically
-% aligned on the paragraph's first character (i.e. at
-% |\parindent| from the left margin);
-% \item the `\textbullet' is never used in French itemize-lists,
-% a long dash `--' is preferred for all levels. The item label
-% used in French is stored in |\FrenchLabelItem}|, it defaults
-% to `--' and can be changed using |\frenchbsetup{}| (see
-% section~\ref{sec-keyval}).
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{\textendash}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\bbl@frenchlabelitems| saves current itemize labels and changes
-% them to their value in French. This code should never be executed
-% twice in a row, so we need a new flag that will be set and reset
-% by |\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems| and |\bbl@frenchlabelitems|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFB@enterFrench \FB@enterFrenchtrue
-\def\bbl@frenchlabelitems{%
- \ifFB@enterFrench
- \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi
- \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii
- \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii
- \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv
- \let\labelitemi\Frlabelitemi
- \let\labelitemii\Frlabelitemii
- \let\labelitemiii\Frlabelitemiii
- \let\labelitemiv\Frlabelitemiv
- \FB@enterFrenchfalse
- \fi
-}
-\let\itemizeORI\itemize
-\let\enditemizeORI\enditemize
-\let\enditemizeFB\enditemize
-\def\itemizeFB{%
- \ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
- \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
- \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
- \expandafter
- \listORI
- \csname\@itemitem\endcsname
- {\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
- \ifnum\@listdepth=0
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\parindent}%
- \else
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\parindent}%
- \fi
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\parskip| is of type `skip', its mean value only (\emph{not
-% the glue}) should be subtracted from |\topsep| and added to
-% |\partopsep|, so convert |\parskip| to a `dimen' using
-% |\@tempdima|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@tempdima=\parskip
- \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}%
- \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The user's changes in labelitems are saved when leaving French for
-% further use when switching back to French. This code should never
-% be executed twice in a row (toggle with |\bbl@frenchlabelitems|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems{%
- \ifFB@enterFrench
- \else
- \let\Frlabelitemi\labelitemi
- \let\Frlabelitemii\labelitemii
- \let\Frlabelitemiii\labelitemiii
- \let\Frlabelitemiv\labelitemiv
- \let\labelitemi\@ltiORI
- \let\labelitemii\@ltiiORI
- \let\labelitemiii\@ltiiiORI
- \let\labelitemiv\@ltivORI
- \FB@enterFrenchtrue
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{French indentation of sections}
-% \label{sec-indent}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}
-% In French the first paragraph of each section should be indented,
-% this is another difference with US-English. This is controlled by
-% the flag |\if@afterindent|.
-%
-% \changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/16}{Bug correction: previous versions of
-% frenchb set the flag \cs{if@afterindent} to false outside
-% French which is correct for English but wrong for some languages
-% like Spanish. Pointed out by Juan Jos\'e Torrens.}
-%
-% We will need to save the value of the flag |\if@afterindent|
-% `AtBeginDocument' before eventually changing its value.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
-\def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI
- \@afterindentfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Formatting footnotes}
-% \label{sec-footnotes}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{Footnotes are now printed
-% by default `\`a la fran\c caise' for the whole document.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0b}{2007/04/18}{Footnotes: Just do nothing
-% (except warning) when the bigfoot package is loaded.}
-%
-% The \file{bigfoot} package deeply changes the way footnotes are
-% handled. When |bigfoot| is loaded, we just warn the user that
-% |frenchb| will drop the customisation of footnotes.
-%
-% The layout of footnotes is controlled by two flags
-% |\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes| and |\ifFBFrenchFootnotes| which are
-% set by options of |\frenchbsetup{}| (see section~\ref{sec-keyval}).
-% Notice that the layout of footnotes \emph{does not depend} on the
-% current language (just think of two footnotes on the same page
-% looking different because one was called in a French part, the
-% other one in English!).
-%
-% When |\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes| is true, |\@footnotemark| (whose
-% definition is saved at the |\begin{document}| in order to include
-% any customisation that packages might have done) is redefined to
-% add a thin space before the number or symbol calling a footnote
-% (any space typed in is removed first). This has no effect on
-% the layout of the footnote itself.
-%
-% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{\cs{PackageWarning} changed to
-% \cs{FBWarning} (when bigfoot package in use).}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}%
- {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {bigfoot package in use.\MessageBreak
- frenchb will NOT customise footnotes;\MessageBreak
- reported}}%
- {\let\@footnotemarkORI\@footnotemark
- \def\@footnotemarkFB{\leavevmode\unskip\unkern
- \,\@footnotemarkORI}%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes
- \let\@footnotemark\@footnotemarkFB
- \fi}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We then define |\@makefntextFB|, a variant of |\@makefntext|
-% which is responsible for the layout of footnotes, to match the
-% specifications of the French `Imprimerie Nationale': footnotes
-% will be indented by |\parindentFFN|, numbers (if any) typeset on
-% the baseline (instead of superscripts) and followed by a dot
-% and an half quad space. Whenever symbols are used to number
-% footnotes (as in |\thanks| for instance), we switch back to the
-% standard layout (the French layout of footnotes is meant for
-% footnotes numbered by Arabic or Roman digits).
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{\cs{parindentFFN} not changed if
-% already defined (required by JA for cah-gut.cls).}
-%
-% \changes{v2.3b}{2008/12/06}{New commands \cs{dotFFN} and
-% \cs{kernFFN} for more flexibility (suggested by JA).}
-%
-% The value of |\parindentFFN| will be redefined at the
-% |\begin{document}|, as the maximum of |\parindent| and 1.5em
-% \emph{unless} it has been set in the preamble (the weird value
-% 10in is just for testing whether |\parindentFFN| has been set
-% or not).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\dotFFN}{.}
-\newcommand*{\kernFFN}{\kern .5em}
-\newdimen\parindentFFN
-\parindentFFN=10in
-\def\ftnISsymbol{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}
-\long\def\@makefntextFB#1{\ifx\thefootnote\ftnISsymbol
- \@makefntextORI{#1}%
- \else
- \parindent=\parindentFFN
- \rule\z@\footnotesep
- \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\@thefnmark}%
- \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\z@
- \llap{\@thefnmark}\dotFFN\kernFFN
- \fi #1
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We save the standard definition of |\@makefntext| at the
-% |\begin{document}|, and then redefine |\@makefntext| according to
-% the value of flag |\ifFBFrenchFootnotes| (true or false).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}{}%
- {\ifdim\parindentFFN<10in
- \else
- \parindentFFN=\parindent
- \ifdim\parindentFFN<1.5em\parindentFFN=1.5em\fi
- \fi
- \let\@makefntextORI\@makefntext
- \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
- \ifFBFrenchFootnotes
- \@makefntextFB{#1}%
- \else
- \@makefntextORI{#1}%
- \fi}%
- }%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For compatibility reasons, we provide definitions for the commands
-% dealing with the layout of footnotes in |frenchb| version~1.6.
-% |\frenchbsetup{}| (see in section \ref{sec-keyval}) should be
-% preferred for setting these options. |\StandardFootnotes| may
-% still be used locally (in minipages for instance), that's why the
-% test |\ifFBFrenchFootnotes| is done inside |\@makefntext|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\AddThinSpaceBeforeFootnotes}{\FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotestrue}
-\newcommand*{\StandardFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotesfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Global layout}
-% \label{sec-global}
-%
-% In multilingual documents, some typographic rules must depend
-% on the current language (e.g., hyphenation, typesetting of
-% numbers, spacing before double punctuation\dots), others should,
-% IMHO, be kept global to the document: especially the layout of
-% lists (see~\ref{sec-lists}) and footnotes
-% (see~\ref{sec-footnotes}), and the indentation of the first
-% paragraph of sections (see~\ref{sec-indent}).
-%
-% From version 2.2 on, if |frenchb| is \babel's ``main language''
-% (i.e. last language option at \babel's loading), |frenchb|
-% customises the layout (i.e. lists, indentation of the first
-% paragraphs of sections and footnotes) in the whole document
-% regardless the current language. On the other hand, if |frenchb|
-% is \emph{not} \babel's ``main language'', it leaves the layout
-% unchanged both in French and in other languages.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FrenchLayout}
-% \begin{macro}{\StandardLayout}
-% The former commands |\FrenchLayout| and |\StandardLayout| are kept
-% for compatibility reasons but should no longer be used.
-%
-% \changes{v2.0g}{2008/03/23}{Flag \cs{ifFBStandardLayout} not checked
-% by \cs{FBprocess@options}, low-level flags have to be set
-% one by one.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchLayout}{%
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {\protect\FrenchLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak
- \protect\frenchbsetup{GlobalLayoutFrench} instead.}%
-}
-\newcommand*{\StandardLayout}{%
- \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
- \FBIndentFirstfalse
- \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {\protect\StandardLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak
- \protect\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout} instead.}%
-}
-\@onlypreamble\FrenchLayout
-\@onlypreamble\StandardLayout
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Dots\dots}
-% \label{sec-dots}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FBtextellipsis}
-% \LaTeXe's standard definition of |\dots| in text-mode is
-% |\textellipsis| which includes a |\kern| at the end;
-% this space is not wanted in some cases (before a closing brace
-% for instance) and |\kern| breaks hyphenation of the next word.
-% We define |\FBtextellipsis| for French (in \LaTeXe{} only).
-%
-% The |\if| construction in the \LaTeXe{} definition of |\dots|
-% doesn't allow the use of |xspace| (|xspace| is always followed
-% by a |\fi|), so we use the AMS-\LaTeX{} construction of |\dots|;
-% this has to be done `AtBeginDocument' not to be overwritten
-% when \file{amsmath.sty} is loaded after \babel.
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{Added special case for LY1 encoding,
-% see bug report from Bruno Voisin (2004/05/18).}
-%
-% LY1 has a ready made character for |\textellipsis|, it should be
-% used in French too (pointed out by Bruno Voisin).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\FBtextellipsis}{LY1}{133}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\FBtextellipsis}{%
- .\kern\fontdimen3\font.\kern\fontdimen3\font.\xspace}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\Mdots@| and |\Tdots@ORI| hold the definitions of |\dots| in
-% Math and Text mode. They default to those of amsmath-2.0, and
-% will revert to standard \LaTeX{} definitions `AtBeginDocument',
-% if amsmath has not been loaded. |\Mdots@| doesn't change when
-% switching from/to French, while |\Tdots@| is |\FBtextellipsis|
-% in French and |\Tdots@ORI| otherwise.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\Tdots@ORI}{\@xp\textellipsis}
-\newcommand*{\Tdots@}{\Tdots@ORI}
-\newcommand*{\Mdots@}{\@xp\mdots@}
-\AtBeginDocument{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\dots}{\relax
- \csname\ifmmode M\else T\fi dots@\endcsname}%
- \@ifundefined{@xp}{\let\@xp\relax}{}%
- \@ifundefined{mdots@}{\let\Tdots@ORI\textellipsis
- \let\Mdots@\mathellipsis
- \let\mdots@\undefined}{}}
-\def\bbl@frenchdots{\let\Tdots@\FBtextellipsis}
-\def\bbl@nonfrenchdots{\let\Tdots@\Tdots@ORI}
-\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchdots}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchdots}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Setup options: keyval stuff}
-% \label{sec-keyval}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/11/06}{New command \cs{frenchbsetup} added
-% for global customisation.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0c}{2007/06/25}{Option ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers added.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0d}{2007/07/15}{Options og and fg changed: limit
-% the definition to French so that quote characters can be used
-% in German.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0e}{2007/10/05}{New option: StandardLists.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2008/03/23}{Two typos corrected in
-% option StandardLists: [false] $\to$ [true] and
-% StandardLayout $\to$ StandardLists.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0f}{2008/03/23}{StandardLayout option had no
-% effect on lists. Test moved to \cs{FBprocess@options}.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0g}{2008/03/23}{Revert previous change to
-% StandardLayout. This option must set the three flags
-% \cs{FBReduceListSpacingfalse}, \cs{FBCompactItemizefalse},
-% and \cs{FBStandardItemLabeltrue} instead of
-% \cs{FBStandardListstrue}, so that later options can still
-% change their value before executing \cs{FBprocess@options}.
-% Same thing for option StandardLists.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/24}{New option: FrenchSuperscripts
-% to define \cs{up} as \cs{fup} or as \cs{textsuperscript}.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1a}{2008/03/30}{New option: LowercaseSuperscripts.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{The global layout of the document is
-% no longer changed when frenchb is not the last option of babel
-% (\cs{bbl@main@language}). Suggested by Ulrike Fischer.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{Values of flags
-% \cs{ifFBReduceListSpacing}, \cs{ifFBCompactItemize},
-% \cs{ifFBStandardItemLabels}, \cs{ifFBIndentFirst},
-% \cs{ifFBFrenchFootnotes}, \cs{ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes} changed:
-% default now means `StandardLayout', it will be changed to
-% `FrenchLayout' AtEndOfPackage only if french is
-% \cs{bbl@main@language}.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.2a}{2008/05/08}{When frenchb is babel's last option,
-% French becomes the document's main language, so
-% GlobalLayoutFrench applies.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.3a}{2008/10/10}{New option: OriginalTypewriter. Now
-% frenchb switches to \cs{noautospace@beforeFDP} when a tt-font is
-% in use. When OriginalTypewriter is set to true, frenchb behaves
-% as in pre-2.3 versions.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.4a}{2009/11/23}{New option SuppressWarning.}
-%
-% We first define a collection of conditionals with their defaults
-% (true or false).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifFBStandardLayout \FBStandardLayouttrue
-\newif\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse
-\newif\ifFBReduceListSpacing \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
-\newif\ifFBCompactItemize \FBCompactItemizefalse
-\newif\ifFBStandardItemLabels \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
-\newif\ifFBStandardLists \FBStandardListstrue
-\newif\ifFBIndentFirst \FBIndentFirstfalse
-\newif\ifFBFrenchFootnotes \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse
-\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse
-\newif\ifFBOriginalTypewriter \FBOriginalTypewriterfalse
-\newif\ifFBThinColonSpace \FBThinColonSpacefalse
-\newif\ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers \FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbersfalse
-\newif\ifFBFrenchSuperscripts \FBFrenchSuperscriptstrue
-\newif\ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts \FBLowercaseSuperscriptstrue
-\newif\ifFBPartNameFull \FBPartNameFulltrue
-\newif\ifFBSuppressWarning \FBSuppressWarningfalse
-\newif\ifFBShowOptions \FBShowOptionsfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The defaults values of these flags have been set so that |frenchb|
-% does not change anything regarding the global layout.
-% |\bbl@main@language| (set by the last option of babel) controls
-% the global layout of the document. We check the current language
-% `AtEndOfPackage' (it is |\bbl@main@language|); if it is French,
-% the values of some flags have to be changed to ensure a French
-% looking layout for the whole document (even in parts written in
-% languages other than French); the end-user will then be able to
-% customise the values of all these flags with |\frenchbsetup{}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iflanguage{french}{\FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \FBIndentFirsttrue
- \FBFrenchFootnotestrue
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue}%
- {}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\frenchbsetup}
-% From version 2.0 on, all setup options are handled by \emph{one}
-% command |\frenchbsetup| using the keyval syntax.
-% Let's now define this command which reads and sets the options
-% to be processed later (at |\begin{document}|) by
-% |\FBprocess@options|. It can only be called in the preamble.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\frenchbsetup}[1]{%
- \setkeys{FB}{#1}%
-}%
-\@onlypreamble\frenchbsetup
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |frenchb| being an option of babel, it cannot load a package
-% (keyval) while |frenchb.ldf| is read, so we defer the loading of
-% \file{keyval} and the options setup at the end of \babel's loading.
-%
-% |StandardLayout| resets the layout in French to the standard layout
-% defined par the \LaTeX{} class and packages loaded. It deals with
-% lists, indentation of first paragraphs of sections and footnotes.
-% Other keys, entered \emph{after} |StandardLayout| in
-% |\frenchbsetup|, can overrule some of the |StandardLayout|
-% settings.
-%
-% When French is the main language, |GlobalLayoutFrench| forces the
-% layout in French and (as far as possible) outside French to meet
-% the French typographic standards.
-%
-% \changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/16}{Warning added to \cs{GlobalLayoutFrench}
-% when French is not the main language.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \RequirePackage{keyval}%
- \define@key{FB}{StandardLayout}[true]%
- {\csname FBStandardLayout#1\endcsname
- \ifFBStandardLayout
- \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
- \FBIndentFirstfalse
- \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse
- \else
- \FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \FBIndentFirsttrue
- \FBFrenchFootnotestrue
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue
- \fi}%
- \define@key{FB}{GlobalLayoutFrench}[true]%
- {\csname FBGlobalLayoutFrench#1\endcsname
- \ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \iflanguage{french}%
- {\FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \FBIndentFirsttrue
- \FBFrenchFootnotestrue
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Option `GlobalLayoutFrench' skipped:
- \MessageBreak French is *not*
- babel's last option.\MessageBreak}%
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse}%
- \fi}%
- \define@key{FB}{ReduceListSpacing}[true]%
- {\csname FBReduceListSpacing#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{CompactItemize}[true]%
- {\csname FBCompactItemize#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{StandardItemLabels}[true]%
- {\csname FBStandardItemLabels#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabels}{%
- \renewcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeli}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabelii}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliii}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliv}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{StandardLists}[true]%
- {\csname FBStandardLists#1\endcsname
- \ifFBStandardLists
- \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
- \else
- \FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \fi}%
- \define@key{FB}{IndentFirst}[true]%
- {\csname FBIndentFirst#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{FrenchFootnotes}[true]%
- {\csname FBFrenchFootnotes#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{AutoSpaceFootnotes}[true]%
- {\csname FBAutoSpaceFootnotes#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{AutoSpacePunctuation}[true]%
- {\csname FBAutoSpacePunctuation#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{OriginalTypewriter}[true]%
- {\csname FBOriginalTypewriter#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{ThinColonSpace}[true]%
- {\csname FBThinColonSpace#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}[true]%
- {\csname FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{FrenchSuperscripts}[true]%
- {\csname FBFrenchSuperscripts#1\endcsname}
- \define@key{FB}{LowercaseSuperscripts}[true]%
- {\csname FBLowercaseSuperscripts#1\endcsname}
- \define@key{FB}{PartNameFull}[true]%
- {\csname FBPartNameFull#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{SuppressWarning}[true]%
- {\csname FBSuppressWarning#1\endcsname
- \ifFBSuppressWarning
- \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\relax}%
- \else
- \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{%
- \PackageWarning{##1}{##2}}%
- \fi}
- \define@key{FB}{ShowOptions}[true]%
- {\csname FBShowOptions#1\endcsname}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Inputing French quotes as \emph{single characters} when they are
-% available on the keyboard (through a compose key for instance)
-% is more comfortable than typing |\og| and |\fg|.
-% The purpose of the following code is to map the French quote
-% characters to |\og\ignorespaces| and |{\fg}| respectively when
-% the current language is French, and to |\guillemotleft| and
-% |\guillemotright| otherwise (think of German quotes); thus correct
-% unbreakable spaces will be added automatically to French quotes.
-% The quote characters typed in depend on the input encoding,
-% it can be single-byte (latin1, latin9, applemac,\dots) or
-% multi-bytes (utf-8, utf8x). We first check whether XeTeX is used
-% or not, if not the package \file{inputenc} has to be loaded before
-% the |\begin{document}| with the proper coding option, so we check
-% if |\DeclareInputText| is defined.
-%
-% \changes{v2.4c}{2010/05/23}{In \cs{ttfamilyFB}, also cancel
-% automatic spaces inside French guillemets coded as characters
-% (see \cs{frenchbsetup}).}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the
-% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE.
-% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing
-% \cs{XeTeXrevision}, \cs{DeclareInputText}, \cs{uc@dclc},
-% \cs{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}, \cs{mule@def} in \cs{og} and
-% \cs{fg}.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \define@key{FB}{og}{%
- \newcommand*{\FB@@og}{%
- \iflanguage{french}%
- {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@og\ignorespaces
- \else\guillemotleft
- \fi}%
- {\guillemotleft}}%
- \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}%
- {\AtBeginDocument
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Option `og' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}%
- \let\DeclareInputText\undefined
- }%
- {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% if |\uc@dclc| is undefined, utf8x is not loaded\dots
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% if |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter| is undefined, utf8 is not loaded
-% either, we assume 8-bit character input encoding.
-% Package \file{MULEenc.sty} (from CJK) defines |\mule@def| to map
-% characters to control sequences.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\@tempcnta`#1\relax
- \@ifundefined{mule@def}%
- {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{\FB@@og}%
- \let\mule@def\undefined}%
- {\mule@def{11}{{\FB@@og}}}%
- \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% utf8 loaded, use |\DeclareUnicodeCharacter|,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\FB@@og}}%
- \let\uc@dclc\undefined
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% utf8x loaded, use |\uc@dclc|,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\uc@dclc{171}{default}{\FB@@og}}%
- }%
- }%
- \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% XeTeX in use,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- {\ifFB@xetex@punct
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |XeTeXinterchartokenstate| is defined, nothing to do here, see
-% subsection~\ref{sec-punct}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then an old XeTeX in use, the following trick for defining the
-% active quote character is borrowed from \file{inputenc.dtx}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \catcode`#1=\active
- \bgroup
- \uccode`\~`#1%
- \uppercase{%
- \egroup
- \def~%
- }{\FB@@og}%
- \fi
- }%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Same code for the closing quote.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \define@key{FB}{fg}{%
- \newcommand*{\FB@@fg}{%
- \iflanguage{french}%
- {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@fg
- \else\guillemotright
- \fi}%
- {\guillemotright}}%
- \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}%
- {\AtBeginDocument
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Option `fg' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}%
- \let\DeclareInputText\undefined
- }%
- {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}%
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}%
- {\@tempcnta`#1\relax
- \@ifundefined{mule@def}%
- {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{{\FB@@fg}}%
- \let\mule@def\undefined
- }%
- {\mule@def{27}{{\FB@@fg}}}%
- \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined
- }%
- {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{{\FB@@fg}}%
- }%
- \let\uc@dclc\undefined
- }%
- {\uc@dclc{187}{default}{{\FB@@fg}}}%
- }%
- }%
- \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined
- }%
- {\ifFB@xetex@punct
- \else
- \catcode`#1=\active
- \bgroup
- \uccode`\~`#1%
- \uppercase{%
- \egroup
- \def~%
- }{{\FB@@fg}}%
- \fi
- }%
- }%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FBprocess@options}
-% |\FBprocess@options| processes the options, it is called \emph{once}
-% at |\begin{document}|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\FBprocess@options}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Nothing has to be done here for |StandardLayout| and
-% |StandardLists| (the involved flags have already been set in
-% |\frenchbsetup{}| or before (at babel's EndOfPackage).
-%
-% The next three options deal with the layout of lists in French.
-%
-% |ReduceListSpacing| reduces the vertical spaces between list
-% items in French (done by changing |\list| to |\listFB|).
-% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true (the default), the same is
-% done outside French except for languages that force a different
-% setting.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBReduceListSpacing
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listFB
- \let\endlist\endlistFB}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \let\list\listFB
- \let\endlist\endlistFB
- \else
- \let\list\listORI
- \let\endlist\endlistORI
- \fi}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listORI
- \let\endlist\endlistORI}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\list\listORI
- \let\endlist\endlistORI}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |CompactItemize| suppresses the vertical spacing between list
-% items in French (done by changing |\itemize| to |\itemizeFB|).
-% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true the same is done outside French.
-%
-% \changes{v2.4b}{2010/04/30}{Set flag CompactItemize=false when the
-% enumitem package is loaded (ensures compatibility).}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{enumitem}{%
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Setting CompactItemize=false for compatibility\MessageBreak
- with enumitem package,}}%
- {}%
- \ifFBCompactItemize
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeFB
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \let\itemize\itemizeFB
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB
- \else
- \let\itemize\itemizeORI
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI
- \fi}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |StandardItemLabels| resets labelitems in French to their
-% standard values set by the \LaTeX{} class and packages loaded.
-% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true labelitems are identical inside
-% and outside French.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBStandardItemLabels
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchlabelitems}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \bbl@frenchlabelitems
- \else
- \bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems
- \fi}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |IndentFirst| forces the first paragraphs of sections to be
-% indented just like the other ones in French.
-% When |GlobalLayoutFrench| is true, the same is done outside French
-% except for languages that force a different setting.
-% |\bbl@nonfrenchindent| has been designed to be smart with other
-% languages (like Spanish) who also indent every first paragraphs of
-% sections (see section~\ref{sec-indent}).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBIndentFirst
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchindent}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \bbl@frenchindent
- \else
- \bbl@nonfrenchindent
- \fi}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The layout of footnotes is handled at the |\begin{document}|
-% depending on the values of flags |FrenchFootnotes|
-% and |AutoSpaceFootnotes| (see section~\ref{sec-footnotes}),
-% nothing has to be done here for footnotes.
-%
-% |AutoSpacePunctuation| adds an unbreakable space (in French only)
-% before the four active characters (:;!?) even if none has been
-% typed before them.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation
- \autospace@beforeFDP
- \else
- \noautospace@beforeFDP
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When |OriginalTypewriter| is set to |false| (the default),
-% |\ttfamily|, |\rmfamily| and |\sffamily| are redefined as
-% |\ttfamilyFB|, |\rmfamilyFB| and |\sffamilyFB| respectively
-% to prevent addition of automatic spaces before the four active
-% characters in computer code.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBOriginalTypewriter
- \else
- \let\ttfamily\ttfamilyFB
- \let\rmfamily\rmfamilyFB
- \let\sffamily\sffamilyFB
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |ThinColonSpace| changes the normal unbreakable space typeset in
-% French before `:' to a thin space.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBThinColonSpace\renewcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\Fthinspace}\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When |true|, |ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers| redefines |numprint.sty|'s
-% command |\npstylefrench| to set |\npthousandsep| to |\,|
-% (thinspace) instead of |~| (default) . This option has no effect
-% if package \file{numprint.sty} is not loaded with `|autolanguage|'.
-% As old versions of \file{numprint.sty} did not define
-% |\npstylefrench|, we have to provide this command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackageloaded{numprint}%
- {\ifnprt@autolanguage
- \providecommand*{\npstylefrench}{}%
- \ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers
- \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{%
- \npthousandsep{\,}%
- \npdecimalsign{,}%
- \npproductsign{\cdot}%
- \npunitseparator{\,}%
- \npdegreeseparator{}%
- \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}%
- }%
- \else
- \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{%
- \npthousandsep{~}%
- \npdecimalsign{,}%
- \npproductsign{\cdot}%
- \npunitseparator{\,}%
- \npdegreeseparator{}%
- \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}%
- }%
- \fi
- \npaddtolanguage{french}{french}%
- \fi}{}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |FrenchSuperscripts|: if |true| |\up=\fup|, else
-% |\up=\textsuperscript|. Anyway |\up*=\FB@up@fake|. The star-form
-% |\up*{}| is provided for fonts that lack some superior letters:
-% Adobe Jenson Pro and Utopia Expert have no ``g superior'' for
-% instance.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBFrenchSuperscripts
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}{\fup}}%
- \else
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}%
- {\textsuperscript}}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |LowercaseSuperscripts|: if |true| let |\FB@lc| be |\lowercase|,
-% else |\FB@lc| is redefined to do nothing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts
- \else
- \renewcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{##1}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |PartNameFull|: if |false|, redefine |\partname|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBPartNameFull
- \else\addto\captionsfrench{\def\partname{Partie}}\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |ShowOptions|: if |true|, print the list of all options to the
-% \file{.log} file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifFBShowOptions
- \GenericWarning{* }{%
- * **** List of possible options for frenchb ****\MessageBreak
- [Default values between brackets when frenchb is loaded *LAST*]%
- \MessageBreak
- ShowOptions=true [false]\MessageBreak
- StandardLayout=true [false]\MessageBreak
- GlobalLayoutFrench=false [true]\MessageBreak
- StandardLists=true [false]\MessageBreak
- IndentFirst=false [true]\MessageBreak
- ReduceListSpacing=false [true]\MessageBreak
- CompactItemize=false [true]\MessageBreak
- StandardItemLabels=true [false]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabels=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabeli=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabelii=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabeliii=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabeliv=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- FrenchFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak
- AutoSpaceFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak
- AutoSpacePunctuation=false [true]\MessageBreak
- OriginalTypewriter=true [false]\MessageBreak
- ThinColonSpace=true [false]\MessageBreak
- ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers=true [false]\MessageBreak
- FrenchSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak
- LowercaseSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak
- PartNameFull=false [true]\MessageBreak
- SuppressWarning=true [false]\MessageBreak
- og= <left quote character>, fg= <right quote character>
- \MessageBreak
- *********************************************
- \MessageBreak\protect\frenchbsetup{ShowOptions}}
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/12/15}{AtBeginDocument, save again the
-% definitions of the `list' and `itemize' environments and the
-% values of labelitems. As of frenchb v.1.6, `ORI' values were
-% set when reading frenchb.ldf, later changes were ignored.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.0}{2006/12/06}{Added warning for OT1 encoding.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.1b}{2008/04/07}{Disable some commands in bookmarks.}
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/21}{Test \cs{@ifundefined} leaves the
-% tested control sequence defined as \cs{relax} when TRUE.
-% Changed \cs{relax} to \cs{undefined} when testing
-% \cs{pdfstringdefDisableCommands} AtBeginDocument.}
-%
-% At |\begin{document}| we save again the value of |\if@afterindent|
-% and definitions of the `list' and `itemize' environments and the
-% values of labelitems so that all changes made in the preamble are
-% taken into account in languages other than French and in French
-% with the StandardLayout option.
-% We also have to provide an |\xspace| command in case the
-% \file{xspace.sty} package is not loaded.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \ifx\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \let\@aifORI\@afterindenttrue
- \else \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse
- \fi
- \let\listORI\list
- \let\endlistORI\endlist
- \let\itemizeORI\itemize
- \let\enditemizeORI\enditemize
- \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi
- \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii
- \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii
- \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv
- \providecommand*{\xspace}{\relax}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Let's redefine some commands in \file{hyperref}'s bookmarks.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}{}%
- {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
- \let\up\relax
- \def\ieme{e\xspace}%
- \def\iemes{es\xspace}%
- \def\ier{er\xspace}%
- \def\iers{ers\xspace}%
- \def\iere{re\xspace}%
- \def\ieres{res\xspace}%
- \def\FrenchEnumerate#1{#1\degre\space}%
- \def\FrenchPopularEnumerate#1{#1\degre)\space}%
- \def\No{N\degre\space}%
- \def\no{n\degre\space}%
- \def\Nos{N\degre\space}%
- \def\nos{n\degre\space}%
- \def\og{\guillemotleft\space}%
- \def\fg{\space\guillemotright}%
- \let\bsc\textsc
- \let\degres\degre
- }%
- \let\pdfstringdefDisableCommands\undefined}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% It is time to process the options set with |\frenchboptions{}|.
-% Then we need to execute either |\extrasfrench| and
-% |\captionsfrench| or |\noextrasfrench| according to the current
-% language at the |\begin{document}| (these three commands have been
-% updated by |\FBprocess@options|). \emph{But}, when French is the
-% main language, |\extrasfrench| is executed \emph{again} now
-% (French has been switched on `AtBeginDocument' some time before).
-% This is harmless, except for |\bbl@frenchspacing| which will
-% redefine |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| to |\relax|, this will be
-% wrong if the user switches to English.
-% When French is \emph{not} the main language, |\noextrasfrench|
-% executes |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| (=|\nonfrenchspacing|), thus
-% eventually overwriting a |\frenchspacing| command issued by the
-% main language (German, Spanish, etc.).
-% So we have to define |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| as |\relax| here
-% and restore it's meaning afterwards.
-%
-% \changes{v2.5a}{2010/08/15}{Define \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing} locally
-% as \cs{relax}, otherwise the \cs{bbl@frenchspacing} command
-% included in germanb.ldf is overwritten here by
-% \cs{noextrasfrench}. Bug pointed out by Ulrike Fischer.}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \FBprocess@options
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI\bbl@nonfrenchspacing
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax
- \iflanguage{french}{\extrasfrench\captionsfrench}{\noextrasfrench}%
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Some warnings are issued when output font encodings are not
-% properly set. With XeLaTeX, \file{fontspec.sty} and
-% \file{xunicode.sty} should be loaded; with (pdf)\LaTeX, a warning
-% is issued when OT1 encoding is in use at the |\begin{document}|.
-% Mind that |\encodingdefault| is defined as `long', defining
-% |\FBOTone| with |\newcommand*| would fail!
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}%
- {\begingroup \newcommand{\FBOTone}{OT1}%
- \ifx\encodingdefault\FBOTone
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {OT1 encoding should not be used for French.
- \MessageBreak
- Add \protect\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} to the
- preamble\MessageBreak of your document,}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
- \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined
- }%
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareUTFcharacter}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Add \protect\usepackage{xltxtra} to the\MessageBreak
- preamble of your document,}%
- \let\DeclareUTFcharacter\undefined}%
- {}%
- }%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Clean up and exit}
-%
-% Load |frenchb.cfg| (should do nothing, just for compatibility).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\loadlocalcfg{frenchb}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Final cleaning.
-% The macro |\ldf@quit| takes care for setting the main language
-% to be switched on at |\begin{document}| and resetting the
-% category code of \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% The config file searched for has to be |frenchb.cfg|, and
-% |\CurrentOption| has been set to `french', so
-% |\ldf@finish\CurrentOption| cannot be used: we first load
-% |frenchb.cfg|, then call |\ldf@quit\CurrentOption|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\FBclean@on@exit
-\ldf@quit\CurrentOption
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \iffalse
-%</code>
-%<*dtx>
-% \fi
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-% \iffalse
-%</dtx>
-% \fi
-%
-% \Finale
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 6bf6dd29fb8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/frenchb.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/10/30}
-\def\batchfile{frenchb.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{frenchb.ldf}{\from{frenchb.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\nopreamble
-\nopostamble
-\generate{\file{frenchb.cfg}{\from{frenchb.dtx}{cfg}}
- }
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 3e7e5c4d999..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2437 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{2264}
-% \ProvidesFile{galician.dtx}
-% [2008/07/06 v4.3c Galician support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `galician.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Galcian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006
-%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008
-%% by Javier A. M\'ugica
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably)
-%% jmugica at digi21.net
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Galician language definition file.
-% The original version of the file spanish.dtx was written by Javier Bezos.
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass[galician,a4paper]{ltxdoc}
-\usepackage[activeacute]{babel}
-%Small suport for the input encoding
-\catcode`\á=\active \defá{\'a}
-\catcode`\é=\active \defé{\'e}
-\catcode`\í=\active \defí{\'\i}
-\catcode`\ó=\active \defó{\'o}
-\catcode`\ú=\active \defú{\'u}
-\catcode`\ñ=\active \defñ{\~n}
-%end
-
-%\usepackage{ps}
-
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-
-\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{2\arrayrulewidth}
-\newcommand\toprule{\cline{1-2}\\[-2ex]}
-\newcommand\botrule{\\[.6ex]\cline{1-2}}
-\newcommand\hmk{$\string|$}
-
-\newcommand\New[1]{%
- \leavevmode\marginpar{\raggedleft\sffamily Novo en #1}}
-
-\newcommand\nm[1]{\unskip\,$^{#1}$}
-\newcommand\nt[1]{\quad$^{#1}$\,\ignorespaces}
-
-\makeatletter
- \renewcommand\@biblabel{}
-\makeatother
-
-\newcommand\DOT[1]{\msc{DOT},~#1}
-\newcommand\DTL[1]{\msc{DTL},~#1}
-\newcommand\MEA[1]{\msc{MEA},~#1}
-
-\raggedright
-\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-2pc}
-\addtolength{\textwidth}{2pc}
-\setlength{\parindent}{1em}
-
-\OnlyDescription
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{galician.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \begingroup
-%
-% \catcode`\{=11
-% \catcode`\[=1
-%
-% \gdef\ignoringuser[^^A
-% \bgroup
-% \let\end{userdtx\fi
-% \let\end{userdrv\fi
-% \aftergroup\endgroup
-% \catcode`\{=11
-% \catcode`f=14 ^^A kills \if... and \fi
-% \catcode`l=14 ^^A kills \else
-% \catcode`o=14 ^^A kills \or
-% \catcode`p=14 ^^A kills \repeat
-% \iffalse}
-%
-% \endgroup
-%
-% ^^A\def\langdeffile{}
-% \newenvironment{userdtx}
-% {\ifx\langdeffile\undefined
-% \else\expandafter\ignoringuser
-% \fi}{}
-%
-% \newenvironment{userdrv}
-% {\ifx\langdeffile\undefined
-% \expandafter\ignoringuser
-% \else\fi}{}
-%
-% \begin{userdtx}
-%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by galician.dtx =========
-%
-% \title{Estilo \textsf{galician} para o sistema \babel\\[10pt]
-% \large Versión 4.3, de 29 de xaneiro do 2007}
-%
-% \author{Javier Múgica\footnote{O autor orixinal foi Javier Bezos.
-% Foi traduciro por min do castelán en xaneiro do 2007, e desde
-% entón e mantido e actualizado por min.}}
-%
-% \date{} ^^A@#
-%
-% \maketitle
-%
-% {\small\tableofcontents}
-%
-%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal}
-%
-% En \babel{} considérase que a última lingua citada en |\usepackage| e |\documentclass|,
-% por esta orde, é a lingua principal. Se a lingua principal é |galician|, actívase o grupo
-% |\layoutgalician| que adapta varios elementos ós usos tipogr'aficos galegos do seguinte modo:
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |enumerate| e |itemize|\vadjust{\nobreak}\\[1ex]
-%
-% O primeiro usa a seguinte secuencia:\vadjust{\nobreak}\\
-% \quad 1.\\
-% \qquad \emph{a})\\
-% \quad\qquad 1)\\
-% \qquad\qquad \emph{a$'$})\\
-% O segundo a seguinte:\\
-% \quad\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex
-% {\hss\vrule height .95ex width .8ex depth -.15ex\hss}\\
-% \qquad\textbullet\\
-% \quad\qquad $\circ$\\
-% \qquad\qquad $\diamond$
-%
-% Dúas órdenes permiten outros estilos en |itemize|: con |\galiciandashitems| cámbiase a raias en tódo-los niveis
-% e con |\galiciansignitems|, a \textbullet{} $\circ$
-% $\diamond$ $\triangleright$.
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\alph| e |\Alph|\\[1ex]
-%
-% Inclúen o e'ne, pero non k, j, w nin y.
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\fnsymbol|\\[1ex]
-%
-% Empréganse un, dous, tres... asteriscos (*, **, ***, etc.),
-% en lugar da sucesi'on angloamericana de cruces, barras,
-% etc.\footnote{\DOT{162}.}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\guillemotleft| e |\guillemotright|\\[1ex]
-%
-% As comiñas latinas para |OT1| son menos angulosas e xenéranse cunhas puntas de frecha |lasy|.
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\roman|\\[1ex]
-%
-% Os números romanos en minúscula son propios das obras inglesas e non se empregan no continente.
-% Por iso se redefine |\roman| para que produza versalitas.
-%
-% \begin{quote}\small
-% \textbf{Nota.} MakeIndex non pode entender a forma na que
-% |\roman| escribe o n'umero de p'axina, polo que
-% elimina as liñas afectadas. Por iso o aquivo |.idx|
-% ten que ser convertido antes de ser procesado con MakeIndex.
-% Con este paquete proporciónase a utilidade |glromidx.tex| que se
-% encarga diso. Simplemente componse ese arquivo con \LaTeX{}
-% e a continuaci'on respóndese ás preguntas que se formulan.
-% Este proceso non é necesario se non se introduciu ningunha
-% entrada de 'indice en p'axinas numeradas con |\roman| (o que ser'a
-% o máis normal). Se un s'imbolo propio de \emph{MakeIndex} xenerara
-% problemas, debe encerrarse entre chaves: \verb={"|}=.
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\section|, |\subsection|, etc.\\[1ex]
-%
-% Os n'umeros nos t'itulos est'an seguidos dun punto tanto no texto coma
-% no 'indice. Adem'ais, o primeiro parágrafo tra-lo título non elimina a sangr'ia
-% (de novo, un costume angloamericano).
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% Estes cambios funcionan coas clases est'andar ~---con otras
-% tal vez algún deles non teña efecto--- e persisten durante
-% todo o documento (non se poden desactivar). Ningún deles é
-% necesario para compoñer o documento, aínda que naturalmente
-% o resultado ser'a distinto.
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\selectgalician*|\vadjust{\nobreak}\\[1ex]
-%
-% Se non se desexan estes cambios, chega con usar no
-% pre'ambulo |\selectgalician*| (con asterisco) ou <<borralos>> con:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \let\layoutgalician\relax
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \section{Descripci'on}
-%
-% \subsection{Traduccións}
-%
-% Certas ordes defínense para proporcionar traduccións
-% ó galego dalgúns términos, tal e como se describe no cadro 1.
-%
-% \begin{table}
-% \center\small
-% \caption{Traduccións}
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l}
-% \toprule
-% |\refname| & Referencias\\
-% |\abstractname| & Resumo\\
-% |\bibname| & Bibliograf'ia\\
-% |\chaptername| & Cap'itulo\\
-% |\appendixname| & Ap'endice\\
-% |\contentsname| & 'Indice xeral\nm{a}\\
-% |\listfigurename| & 'Indice de figuras\\
-% |\listtablename| & 'Indice de cadros\\
-% |\indexname| & 'Indice alfab'etico\\
-% |\figurename| & Figura\\
-% |\tablename| & Cadro\\
-% |\partname| & Parte\\
-% |\enclname| & Adxunto\\
-% |\ccname| & Copia a\\
-% |\headtoname| & A\\
-% |\pagename| & P'axina\\
-% |\seename| & v'exase\\
-% |\alsoname| & v'exase tam'en\\
-% |\proofname| & Demostraci'on
-% \botrule
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-%
-% \begin{minipage}{6cm}\footnotesize
-% \nt{a} Pero s'olo <<'Indice>> en \textsf{article}.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Non existe para o índice unha terminolox'ia unificada. Tal vez
-% \emph{'Indice xeral} é o que m'ais se usa, as'i que a
-% iso me ateño salvo en |article|, onde se compón coma secci'on
-% e polo tanto resulta algo ostentoso.\footnote{\'O contrario que en
-% ingl'es, en galego o 'indice por antonomasia é o xeral.}
-%
-% Para o 'indice alfab'etico tense proposto \emph{'Indice de materias}
-% ou \emph{'Indice anal'itico}, aínda que estes 'indices non soamente
-% adoitan incluír materias, mais tamén nomes; \emph{'Indice alfab'etico}
-% é m'ais preciso.\footnote{\'E a usada en \DOT{300} as'i coma na meirande
-% parte dos libros que consultei ó azar nunha biblioteca. (J.B.)}
-%
-% En canto ós de cadros e figuras, tam'en é posible dicir
-% \emph{lista}, pero paréceme preferible \emph{'indice}, que
-% implica a correspondencia coas p'axinas.
-%
-% \emph{Table} debe traducirse por \emph{cadro}, xa que \emph{táboa}
-% é un \emph{falso amigo};\,\footnote{V'exanse as definicións
-% do \msc{DGII} e \DTL{67 ss.}} esa é a pr'actica tradicional.
-% (Por exemplo, <<cadro de estados medievais>> frente a <<táboa de logaritmos>>.)
-%
-% As traducción escríbense con min'usculas, salvo a inicial. Evítase
-% o anglicismo de comenzar con mai'usculas os substantivos.\footnote{\DOT{197}.}
-%
-% A orde |\today| dá a data actual. Con |\galiciandatedo| e |\galiciandatede|
-% óptase por \textit{do} (predeterminado) ou \textit{de}.
-%
-% \subsection{Abreviacións}
-%
-% (O que en \babel{} denomínase `shorthands'.) A lista completa
-% pódese atopar no cadro~2. Nos seguintes apartados daranse máis
-% detalles sobre algunhas delas.
-%
-% \begin{table}[!t]
-% \center\small
-% \caption{Abreviacións}
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l}
-% \toprule
-% |'a 'e 'i 'o 'u| & 'a 'e 'i 'o 'u\\
-% |'A 'E 'I 'O 'U| & 'A 'E 'I 'O 'U\\
-% |'n 'N| & 'n 'N\nm{a}\\
-% |"u "U| & "u "U\\
-% |"i "I| & "i "I\\
-% |"a "A "o "O| & Ordinais: 1"a, 1"A, 1"o, 1"O\\
-% |"rr "RR| & rr, pero -r cando se divide\\
-% |"-| & Coma |\-|, pero permite m'ais divisións\\
-% |"=| & Coma |-|, pero permite máis divisións\nm{b}\\
-% |"~| & Gui'on estil'istico\nm{c}\\
-% |~- ~-- ~---| & Coma |-|, |--| e |---|, pero sen divisi'on\\
-% |""| & Permite máis divisións antes e despois\nm{d}\\
-% |"/| & Unha barra algo m'ais baixa\\
-% \verb+"|+ & Divide un logotipo\nm{e}\\
-% |<< >>| & << >>\\
-% |"< ">| & |\begin{quoting}| |\end{quoting}|\nm{f}\\
-% |?` !`| & ?` !`\nm{g}\\
-% |"? "!| & "? "! aliñados coa liña base\nm{h}
-% \botrule
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-%
-% \begin{minipage}{11cm}
-% \footnotesize
-% \nt{a} A forma |~n| debe considerarse en extinci'on.
-% \nt{b} |"=| ven a ser o mesmo que |""-""|.
-% \nt{c} Esta abreviaci'on ten un uso distinto noutras
-% linguas. \nt{d} Coma en <<entrada/saída>>.
-% \nt{e} Carece de uso en galego. \nt{f} V'exase sec.~2.7.
-% \nt{g} Non proporcionadas por este paquete, mais por cada tipo;
-% figuran aqu'i coma simple recordatorio. \nt{h} 'Utiles en
-% r'otulos en mai'usculas.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Para poder usar ap'ostrofos coma abreviacións de acentos
-% é necesaria a opci'on |activeacute| en |\usepackage|.
-% Pode cambiarse este comportamento coa orde |\gl@acuteactive|
-% no arquivo de configuraci'on |galician.cfg|; nese caso os
-% ap'ostrofos actívanse sempre.
-%
-% Os caracteres usados coma abreviacións compórtanse coma
-% outras ordes de \TeX{} e polo tanto faise caso omiso
-% dos espacios que poidan seguir: \verb*|' a| é o mesmo que |'a|.
-% Eso tam'en implica que tras eses caracteres non pode vir unha
-% chave de peche e que deber'a escribirse |{... '{}}| en lugar
-% de |{... '}|; en modo matem'atico non hai problema e |$x^{a'}$|
-% ($x^{a'}$) é v'alido.
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$]
-% |\deactivatetilden|\\[1ex]
-%
-% Esta orde desactiva as abreviacións |~n| e |~N| debido ós problemas
-% que presentan. Pode usarse no arquivo de configuraci'on (v'exase
-% m'ais abaixo).
-%
-% % \item[$\diamond$]
-% |\galiciandeactivate{<caracteres>}|\\[1ex]
-%
-% Permite desactivar as abreviacións correspondentes ós caracteres dados.
-% Para evitar entrar en conflicto con outras linguas, ó sair de |galician|
-% reactívanse,\footnote{O punto para os decimais non é estrictamente
-% unha abreviaci'on e non se reactiva.} polo que se se desexa que
-% persista cómpre engadi-la orde a |\shorthandsgalician| con |\addto|.
-% A orde |\renewcommand\shorthandsgalician{}| é unha variante optimizada de
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \addto\shorthandsgalician{\galiciandeactivate{.'"~<>}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% e é o recomendado se se desea prescindir do mecanismo de abreviacións.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \subsection{Coma decimal}
-%
-% En \textsf{galician} tómase partido, coma en castelán, por separar
-% a parte enteira e a parte decimal mediante unha coma. O punto é
-% tradicional en inglés, non en galego, e ademáis chegouse a unha
-% normalización internacional pola que os milleiros sepáranse por
-% un espacio fino e os decimais con coma.
-%
-% Dado que \TeX\ usa a coma coma separador en intervalos ou expresións
-% similares, o que engade un espacio fino, \textsf{galician} converte
-% todo punto en modo matem'atico nunha coma sempre que estea seguido
-% dunha cifra, pero non notras circunstancias:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |$1\,234.567\,890$| \quad \= $1\,234.567\,890$\\
-% |$f(1,2)=12.34.$| \> $f(1,2)=12.34.$\\
-% |$1{.}000$| \> $1{.}000$, mais\\
-% |1.000| \> 1.000, pois non é modo matem'atico.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-%
-% As ordes |\decimalcomma| e |\decimalpoint| establecen se se usa
-% unha coma, que é o valor predeterminado, ou un punto, mentras que
-% |\galiciandecimal{<math>}| permite darlle unha definici'on
-% arbitraria.\footnote{Internamente o mecanismo é o dunha abreviaci'on,
-% e pódese desactivar coma as outras.}
-%
-% \subsection{Divisi'on de palabras}
-%
-% \textsf{Galician} comproba a codificaci'on no momento no que se
-% emprega un acento: se a codificaci'on é |OT1| tómanse medidas para
-% facilitar a divisi'on, que pese a todo nunca ser'a perfecta, mentres
-% que con |T1| accédese directamente ó car'acter correspondente.
-%
-% Para matizar a divisi'on de palabras hai catro posibilidades, dúas
-% delas co m'etodo de abreviacións:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item a orde |\-| é un gui'on opcional que non permite m'ais
-% divisións (coma en \TeX),
-%
-% \item |"-| é similar pero permite m'ais divisións,
-%
-% \item un |-| é un gui'on que non permite m'ais divisións nin
-% antes nin despois (coma en \TeX), e
-%
-% \item |"=| é o equivalente que s'i as permite,\footnote{Non
-% é unha boa idea usar esta orde, pero en medidas moi curtas
-% puede resultar necesario.}
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-% Por exemplo (coas posibles divisións marcadas con \hmk):
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |Zaragoza-Barcelona|\qquad \= Zaragoza-\hmk Barcelona\\
-% |Zaragoza"=Barcelona| \>
-% Za\hmk ra\hmk go\hmk za-\hmk Bar\hmk ce\hmk lo\hmk na\\
-% |semi\-aperto| \> semi\hmk aperto\\
-% |semi"-aperto| \> se\hmk mi\hmk aper\hmk to.\footnotemark
-% \end{tabbing}\footnotetext{Xusto antes e despóis de
-% {\ttfamily\string"\string-} e {\ttfamily\string"\string=}
-% aplícanse os correspondentes valores de
-% {\ttfamily\string\...hyphenmin}, o que implica que a
-% divis'on semia\hmk perto non é posible.
-% Este é un comportamento correcto.}
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% Adem'ais hai abreviacións que evitan divisións: |~-|, que resulta
-% 'util para expresar unha serie de n'umeros sen que o gui'on os
-% divida (12~-14, |12~-14|), e |~---|, que é a forma que debe usarse
-% para abrir incisos con raias, xa que do contrario pode haber unha
-% divisi'on entre a raia de abrir e a palabra que lle sigue:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |Os concertos ~---ou academias--- que organiz'ou...|
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-% Mentras que este gui'on evita toda posible divisi'on nos elementos
-% que une, a raia (---) e a semirraia (--) permítenas nas palabras
-% que a precedan ou sigan.
-%
-% A abreviaci'on |"~| úsase cando se quere que o gui'on tam'en apareza
-% ó comienzo da seguinte liña. Por exemplo:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |infra"~vermello| \quad \= in\hmk fra-ver\hmk mello, pero infra-\hmk-vermello.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-%
-% Outra abreviaci'on é |"rr| que sirve para o 'unico cambio de escritura do
-% castelán en caso de haber divisi'on.\footnote{En galego non atopei un
-% pronunciamento ó respecto. A \msc{RAE} indica que ó a'nadir un prefixo
-% que reamta en vocal a unha palabra que comenza con \emph{r}, esta 'ultima debe
-% dobrarse a menos que se unan por un gui'on. Por exemplo:
-% |extra"{}rradio| divídese en ex\hmk trarra\hmk dio, mais extra-\hmk radio.}
-%
-% \subsection{Ordinais}
-%
-% As abreviaturas sempre levan punto, salvo algunhas nas que se
-% substitúe por unha barra (e salvo as siglas e s'imbolos, naturalmente),
-% que precede ás letras voladitas.\footnote{\DTL{196}. V'exase tam'en \DOT{222 e 227}.}
-% Por ello, \textsf{galician} proporciona a orde |\sptext| que facilita a
-% creaci'on destas abreviaturas. Por exemplo: |adm\sptext{'on}|, que dá
-% adm\sptext{'on}. Hai catro abreviacións asociadas a ordinais:
-% |"a|, |"A|, |"o| e |"O| que equivalen a |\sptext{a}|, etc.\footnote{Moitos
-% tipos engaden un pequeno subliñado que debe evitarse, e polo tanto non se debe
-% escribi-los ordinais con \textsf{inputenc}.}
-%
-% Para axustar o tamano o mellor posible, úsase o de 'indices en curso.
-% Esto funciona ben salvo para tama'nos moi grandes ou moi pequenos, onde
-% os resultados son meramente aceptables.
-%
-% En Plain \TeX{} execútase a orde |\sptextfont| para a letra voladita,
-% de xeito que |{\bf\let\sptextfont\bf 1"o}| dá o resultado correcto
-% (|\mit| se é para cursiva). Para usar un tipo novo con |\sptext| hai
-% que definir tam'en as variantes matem'aticas con |\newfam|.
-%
-% \subsection{Funcións matem'aticas}
-%
-% En castelán, tradicionalmente formáronse as abreviacións
-% do que en \TeX\ coñecense coma operadores a partir do nome castelán,
-% o que implica a presencia do acento en l'im, m'ax, m'in, 'inf e m'od.
-% Parece que isto e tamén o máis adecuado para o galego.
-%
-% Con |galician| pódense seguir varios criterios por medio das seguintes
-% ordes:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\accentedoperators| |\unaccentedoperators|\\[1ex]
-% Activa ou desactiva os acentos.
-% Por omisi'on acent'uanse, coma por exemplo: $\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$
-% (|$\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$|).
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\spacedoperators| |\unspacedoperators|\\[1ex]
-% Activa ou desactiva o espacio entre "<arc"> e la funci'on. Por omisi'on
-% non se espacia.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% O i sen punto tam'en é accesible directamente en modo matem'atico
-% coa orde |\dotlessi|, de forma que se pode escribir |\acute{\dotlessi}|.
-% Por exemplo,
-% |$V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$| dá $V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$.
-%
-% Tam'en engádense |\sen|, |\cosec|, |\arcsen|, |\tx|, |\arctx|, e |senh|,
-% que dan as funcións respectivas. Ademáis |\sin|,\New{galician~4.3}
-% |sinh| e |arcsin| producen os mesmos resultados que |\sen|, |\senh|
-% e |\arcsen| respectivamente. Outras funcións trigonom'etricas
-% atópanse almacenadas no par'ametro |\galicianoperators|,
-% que inicialmente inclúe cotx e txh. Deste xeito pódense cambiar por
-% outras e engadir máis, coma por exemplo:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \renewcommand{\galicianoperators}{cotan arc\,ctx tanh}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% (separadas con espacio). Cando se selecciona |galician| créanse
-% ordes con eses nomes e que dan esas funcións (sempre con |\nolimits|).
-% Adem'ais das letras sen acentuar acéptanse as ordes |\,| e |\acute|, que
-% se pasan por alto para forma-lo nome. Por exemplo, |arc\,ctg| escribirase
-% no documento coma |\arcctg|, |M\acute{a}x| coma |\Max| e |cr\acute{i}t|
-% coma |\crit| (hai que usar |i| e non |\dotlessi|). A orde |\,| responde
-% a |\|(|un|)|spacedoperators|, e |\acute| a |\|(|un|)|accentedoperators|.
-%
-% |\renewcommand{\galicianoperators}| haberá de estar no pre'ambulo do documento,
-% despois de |\sepackage[galician]{babel}| e antes de |\selectgalician| ou de
-% |\begin{document}|.
-%
-% \subsection{Entrecomiñados}
-%
-% O entorno |quoting| entrecomiña un texto, engadindo comiñas de seguir ó
-% comienzo de cada parágrafo ou no seu interior.\footnote{Pódese atopar unha
-% detallada exposici'on das comiñas en \DTL{44 ss.} De alí tomouse alg'un exemplo.}
-% Tam'en pódense empregrar as abreviacións |"<| e |">| que se limitan a chamar
-% a |quoting|, que por ser entorno considera os seus cambios internos coma locais.
-% (É dicir, |"< ... ">| implica |{"< ... ">}|.) As abreviacións |<<| e |>>|
-% contin'uan dando sen m'ais os caracteres de comiñas de abrir e pechar.
-%
-% Por exemplo:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% "<Chámanse "<comiñas de seguir"> as que son de peche, pero colócanse
-% ó comenzo de cada parágrafo cando se transcribe un texto
-% entrecomiñado con m'ais dun par'agrafo.
-%
-% No seu interior, coma de costume, úsanse as inglesas.">
-%\end{verbatim}
-% que ten por resultad:
-% \begin{quotation}\small
-% "<Chámanse "<comillas de seguir"> as que son de peche, pero colócanse
-% ó comenzo de cada par'agrafo cando se transcribe un texto
-% entrecomiñado con m'ais dun par'agrafo.
-%
-% No seu interior, coma de costume, úsanse as inglesas.">
-% \end{quotation}
-%
-% Este entorno pódese redefinir. Por exemplo:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \renewenvironment{quoting}{\itshape}{}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% pero non implica un novo par'agrafo, xa que est'a pensado
-% para ser usado tam'en no texto.
-%
-% En caso de incluír uns entornos |quoting| dentro doutros, modifícanse
-% as comiñas dos niveis interiores, que tam'en engadense ás de seguir:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% "<O di'alogo desenvolveuse desta forma:
-%
-% "<---Eu no fun ---grit'ou Antonio.
-%
-% ---Mais colaboraches ---asegur'ou Rafael">.
-%
-% Mais al'i ningúen se aclarou.">
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{quotation}\small
-% "<O di'alogo desenvolveuse desta forma:
-%
-% "<---Eu no fun ---grit'ou Antonio.
-%
-% ---Mais colaboraches ---asegur'ou Rafael">.
-%
-% Mais al'i ningúen se aclarou.">
-% \end{quotation}
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[$\diamond$]
-% |\lquoti| |\rquoti| |\lquotii| |\rquotii| |\lquotiii|
-% |\rquotiii|\\[1ex]
-%
-% Controlan as comiñas en |quoting|, segundo o nivel no que nos
-% atopemos. |\lquoti| son as comiñas de abrir m'ais exteriores,
-% |\lquotii| as de segundo nivel, etc., e o mesmo para as de pechar
-% con |\rquoti|... Para as de seguir sempre se usan as de pechar.
-% Os valores predefinidos est'an no cadro 3.
-% \begin{table}
-% \center\small
-% \caption{Entrecomiñados}
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{5em}}l}
-% \toprule
-% |\lquoti| &|<<|\\
-% |\rquoti| &|>>|\\
-% |\lquotii| &|``|\\
-% |\rquotii| &|''|\\
-% |\lquotiii| &|`|\\
-% |\rquotiii| &|'|
-% \botrule
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \newenvironment{dialog}
-% {\def\lquoti{}\begin{quoting}---\ignorespaces}
-% {\def\rquoti{}\end{quoting}}
-%
-% As comiñas de seguir tam'en empréganse en di'alogos, incluso
-% se non as hai de abrir e pechar. Coa axuda do seguinte entorno,
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \newenvironment{dialog}
-% {\def\lquoti{}\begin{quoting}---\ignorespaces}
-% {\def\rquoti{}\end{quoting}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% podemos obter
-% \begin{quotation}\small
-% \begin{dialog}%
-% O di'alogo desenvolveuse deste xeito:
-%
-% "<---Eu non fun ---grit'ou Antonio.
-%
-% ---Mais colaboraches ---asegur'ou Rafael">.
-%
-% Mais al'i ninguén se aclarou.
-% \end{dialog}
-% \end{quotation}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$]
-% |\activatequoting \deactivatequoting|\\[1ex]
-%
-% As incompatibilidades potenciais destas abreviacións son enormes.
-% Por exemplo, en \textsf{ifthen} cancélanse as comparacións entre
-% n'umeros;\,\footnote{E en |\string\ifnum|, etc. usado polos
-% desenroladores nos paquetes.} tam'en resultan inoperantes |@>>>|
-% e |@<<<| de \textsf{amstex}.\footnote{Aínda que neste caso cabe
-% empregar os sin'onimos |@)))| e |@(((|.} Por iso, dase a posibilidade
-% de cancelalas e reactivalas con estas ordes, aínda que se se
-% est'a a usar con \textsf{xmltex} xa se desactivan por completo de
-% modo autom'atico. O entorno |quoting| sempre permanece disponible.
-% \footnote{Algúns tipos posúen as ligaduras |<{}<| e |>{}>| de
-% forma interna para xenerar os caracteres de comiñas, polo que
-% neles tamb'en podemos usalos siempre.}
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \subsection{Espaciado}
-%
-% O espaciado en galego afástase relativamente pouco do ingl'es;
-% Non obstante, o espacio tra-los signos de puntuaci'on debe
-% de ser o mesmo que o que hai entre palabras. Ou dito en
-% t'erminos de \TeX, |\frenchspacing| est'a activo.
-%
-% Tam'en noutros dous sitios hai diferencias. O primero son os
-% puntos suspensivos, para os que se redefine |\dots| e |\cdots|,\New{galician 4.3}
-% que os dan menos espaciados, e para |\dots| no texto engádese a
-% continuación un espacio igual que o que seguiría a un punto.
-% Por exemplo:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |\dots non sei se canta\dots ou chora.|\quad \dots non sei se canta\dots ou chora.\\
-% |$f(x_1,\dots,x_n,y_1,\ldots,y_m)$|\quad $f(x_1,\dots,x_n,y_1,\ldots,y_m)$\\
-% |$1+2+\cdots+n$|\quad $1+2+\cdots+n$
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-% Tam'en poder'ianse escribir os tres puntos sen m'ais... , e na
-% pr'actica non hai diferencia. |galician| realiza as modificacións
-% a moi baixo nivel, para que sexan compatibles cos cambios que tamén
-% introduce |amsmath| nestes comandos.
-%
-% O segundo sitio é un espacio fino antes do signo |\%| (que m'ais
-% exactamente é |\,|, logo pódese <<recuperar>> co seu oposto |\!|,
-% se |\%| no segue a unha cifra).
-%
-% \subsection{Pequenas e medianas versais}
-%
-% |\lsc| pódese empregar para letras en versalitas. Tamén existe
-% |\msc|,\New{galician 4.3} que selecciona un tipo lixeiramente maior.
-% Por exemplo:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |\lsc{DOG}, \lsc{RenFe}| \quad \= No \lsc{DOG} publicouse que \lsc{ReNFe} deber'a...\\
-% |\msc{DOG}, \msc{ReNFe}| \quad \= No \msc{DOG} publicouse que \msc{ReNFe} deber'a...
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-% Tam'en pode ser 'util para alguns usos dos n'umeros romanos:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |s'eculo \msc{XVII}| \quad \= s'eculo \msc{XVII}\\
-% |cap'itulo \msc{II}| \quad \= cap'itulo \msc{II}.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-%
-% Para evitar que con un tipo que carece de versalitas acabe
-% aparecendo (por substituci'on) un texto de min'usculas inténtase
-% usar nestes casos as versais \emph{reais} dun tama'no menor.
-% Queda simplemente aceptable, pero é mellor que nada. (\LaTeX{}
-% tende a substituír versalitas por versalitas, pero hai
-% excepcións, como coas negritas.)
-%
-% \subsection{Miscel'anea}
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[$\bullet$] Pódese escribir |\'i| para |\'{\i}|.
-%
-% \item[$\bullet$] Hai unha abreviaci'on adicional como utilidade
-% tipogr'afica m'ais que especificamente galega. En certos
-% tipos, coma Times, o extremo inferior da barra est'a na liña
-% de base e expresións coma <<am/pm>> resultan pouco est'eticas.
-% |"/| produce unha barra que, de ser necesario, báixase lexeiramente.
-% Computer Modern ten unha barra ben dese'nada e non é posible
-% ilustrar aqu'i este punto, pero en todo caso escribir'iase |am"/pm|.^^A
-% \footnote{En \MEA{141} recórrese a unha soluci'on que é a 'unica
-% sinxela en programas de maquetaci'on: usar un corpo menor. Pero
-% con \TeX{} é moito m'ais doado automatiza-las tareas.}
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \section{Selecci'on da lingua}
-%
-% Por omisi'on, \babel{} deixa <<dormidas>> as linguas ata que se
-% chega a |\begin{document}| co fin de evitar conflictos polas
-% abreviacións; a cambio, prívase da posibilidade de usar as linguas
-% no pre'ambulo en ordes coma |\savebox|, |\title|, |\newtheorem|, etc.
-%
-% A orde |\selectgalician| permite activar |galician| coas súas
-% extensións e abreviacións antes de |\begin{document}|.\footnote{^^A
-% Algúns detalles, que apenas afectan a \texttt{galician}, seguen sen
-% activarse ata o comenzo do documento.}
-% Deste xeito, poder'iamos dicir
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \documentclass{book}
-% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% \usepackage[galician]{babel}
-% \usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
-% \usepackage[centerlast]{caption2}
-% ... % M'ais paquetes
-%
-% \selectgalician
-%
-% \title{T'itulo}
-% \author{Autor}
-% \newcommand{\pste}{para"-psicoloxicamente}
-% \newsavebox{\mybox}
-% \savebox{\mybox}{m'ais cosas}
-% ... % M'ais definicións
-%
-% \begin{document}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \section{Adaptaci'on}
-% \subsection{Configuraci'on}
-%
-% Nas súas 'ultimas versions, \babel{} proporciona a posibilidade
-% de cargar autom'aticamente un arquivo co mesmo nome que o
-% principal, pero con extensi'on |.cfg|. \textsf{Galician}
-% proporciona unhas poucas ordes para seren usadas neste arquivo:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@activeacute|\\[1ex]
-% Activa as abreviacións con ap'ostrofos, sen que sexa
-% necesario incluír |activeacute| coma opci'on en |\usepackage|.
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@enumerate{<leveli>}|%
-% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\\[1ex]
-% Cambia os valores preestablecidos por |galician| para
-% |enumerate|. \textit{leveln} consiste nunha letra, que
-% indica qu'e formato ter'a o n'umero, seguida de cualquera
-% texto. A letra ten que ser: |1| (ar'abigo), |a|
-% (min'uscula \emph{cursiva}\,\footnote{A letra é cursiva
-% mais non os signos que a poidan seguir. M'ais ben debera
-% dicirse destacada, xa que se usa |\string\emph|. V'exase
-% \DTL{11}.}), |A| (versal), |i| (romano \emph{versalita},
-% con |\msc|), |I| (romano versal) ou finalmente |o| (ordinal\,
-% \footnote{O normal é non engadir ning'un signo tras ordinal.}).
-%
-% Esta orde non est'a pensada para facer cambios elaborados, se
-% non solamente para meros reaxustes. Os valores preestablecidos
-% equivalen a
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \gl@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$)}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@itemize{<leveli>}|%
-% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\\[1ex]
-% O mesmo para |itemize|, s'olo que os argumentos úsanse
-% de forma literal. Os valores orixinais de \LaTeX{} son
-% similares a
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \gl@itemize{\textbullet}{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash}
-% {\textasteriskcentered}{\textperiodcentered}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \item[$\diamond$] |\gl@operators|\\[1ex]
-% Todo o relativo a operadores cancélase con
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \let\gl@operators\relax
-%\end{verbatim}
-% É boa idea incluílo se no se van usar, xa que aforra memoria.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% Outros axustes 'utiles neste contexto son |\galicianoperators|,
-% |\selectgalician| e |\deactivatequoting|.
-%
-%
-% Recordemos que tódo-los cambios operados dende este arquivo
-% restan compatibilidade ó documento, polo que se se distribúe
-% conven adxuntarlo co entorno |filecontents|.
-%
-% \subsection{Outros cambios}
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item A orde |\addto| permite
-% cambiar algunha das convencións internas. Esto resulta
-% interesante coas traduccións, xa que as formas proporcionadas
-% poden non ser as desexadas. Para iso é necesario que
-% |galician| non estea seleccionado. Por exemplo, para cambiar
-% \emph{'Indice de figuras} por \emph{Lista de figuras}:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \addto\captionsgalician{%
-% \def\listfigurename{Lista de figuras}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \item Para voltar elimina-la sangr'ia tra-la secci'on:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \def\@afterindentfalse{\let\if@afterindent\iffalse}
-% \@afterindentfalse
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \item Para que |\roman| proporcione n'umeros romanos en
-% min'uscula, segundo a forma inglesa:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \def\@roman#1{\romannumeral #1};
-%\end{verbatim}
-% e para que emprege |\lsc| en troques de |\msc|:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \def\gl@roman##1{\protect\gl@lsc{\romannumeral##1}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \item
-% Os extras atópanse organizados en varios grupos:
-% |\textgalician|, |\mathgalician|, |\shorthandsgalician|
-% e |\layoutgalician|. Poden cancelarse con:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \renewcommand\textgalician{}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \section{Formatos distintos a \LaTeXe}
-%
-% O estilo |galician| funciona con outros formatos, aínda que con un
-% subconxunto das funcións disponibles en \LaTeXe{}. Con Plain hai
-% que facer
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \input galician.sty
-%\end{verbatim}
-% e con \LaTeX2.09, incluir |galician| entre as opcións de estilo.
-%
-% Inclúense: traduccións, case todas as abreviacións, coma decimal,
-% utilidades para a divisi'on de palabras, ordinais nunha versi'on
-% simplificada (e non moi elegante), funcións matem'aticas,
-% entrecomiñados en \LaTeX2.09, espaciado e |\'i|.
-% A selecci'on da lingua é inmediata ó cargar o arquivo.
-%
-% En cambio non est'an disponibles: entrecomiñados en Plain,
-% |\lsc|, |\msc| nin as adaptacións proporcionadas por |\layoutgalician|.
-%
-% A partir desta versi'on, o arquivo de configuraci'on lese sempre,
-% polo que aqueles que xa estean escritos espec'ificamante para \LaTeXe{}
-% poden presentar problemas se se usan con outros formatos. Se as
-% versións que se usan non son moi antigas, pódese comprobar o formato
-% coa variable |\fmtname|, que vale |LaTeX2e| ou |plain|. Por exemplo,
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \def\temp{LaTeX2e}
-% \ifx\temp\fmtname
-% ...
-% \fi
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \section{Bibliograf'ias}
-%
-% O arquivo |glbst.tex| que se xenera con \textsf{galician}
-% serve para que a utilidade \textsf{custom-bib} traballe en
-% conxunci'on con \babel. Define unha serie de ordes, que poden
-% consultarse no propio arquivo, que se utilizan para as
-% traduccións se se selecciona |babel| coma lingua ó xenerar un
-% estilo bibliogr'afico.
-%
-% \section{Incompatibilidades con versións anteriores}
-%
-% ^^A\begin{itemize}
-%
-% O t'ermino correspondente a |\tablename| estaba traducido
-% incorrectamente coma <<Táboa>>. Coma queira que <<táboa>> é a
-% palabra con que pode aparecer no propio texto, ou ben pode
-% haber un artigo feminino ante |\tablename|, pode reponerse o
-% valor antigo con:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \addto\captionsgalician{%
-% \def\tablename{Táboa}%
-% \def\listtablename{\'Indice de táboas}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% ^^A\end{itemize}
-%
-% \section*{Referencias}
-% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Referencias}
-%
-% \begingroup
-% \small
-% \leftskip1.5cm \parindent-1.5cm
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{DGII}}\textit{Diccionario de galego},
-% Ir Indo. Vigo, 2004.
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{DOT}}Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Diccionario de ortograf'ia t'ecnica},
-% Germ'an S'anchez Ruip'erez/Pir'amide. Madrid, 1987.
-% (Biblioteca del libro.)
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{DTL}}Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Diccionario de tipograf'ia y del libro},
-% Paraninfo. Madrid, 3"a ed., 1992.
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{MEA}}Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Manual de edici'on y autoedici'on},
-% Pir'amide. Madrid 1994.
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\msc{OELG}}Xos'e Feix'o Cid,
-% \textit{Ortografía e estilo da lingua galega},
-% Pir'amide. Vigo, 2002.
-%
-% \leftskip0pt \parindent0pt \vspace{6pt}
-%
-% {\itshape
-% Como normalmente o primeiro contacto con \TeX{} é por unha tesis,
-% cito libros que est'an relacionados co tema ós que tiven acceso.
-% Est'an por orde de preferencia; en particular, os dous 'ultimos
-% parécenme pouco recomendables. (J. B.)}
-%
-% \parindent-1.5pc \leftskip1.5pc \vspace{3pt}
-%
-% Umberto Eco,
-% \textit{C'omo se hace una tesis}, Gedisa.
-% Barcelona 1982.
-%
-% Antonia Rigo Arnavat e Gabriel Genesc\`a Due'nas,
-% \textit{C'omo presentar una tesis y trabajos de investigaci'on},
-% Eumo-Octaedro. Barcelona, 2002.
-%
-% Prudenci Comes,
-% \textit{Gu'ia para la redacci'on y presentaci'on de trabajos
-% cient'ificos, informes t'ecnicos y tesinas},
-% Oikos-Tau. Barcelona, 1971.
-%
-% Javier Lasso de la Vega,
-% \textit{C'omo se hace una tesis doctoral},
-% Fundacion Universitaria Espa~nola. Madrid, 1977.
-%
-% Jos'e Romera Castillo e outros,
-% \textit{Manual de estilo},
-% Universidad Nacional de Educaci'on a Distancia. Madrid, 1996.
-%
-% Restituto Sierra Bravo,
-% \textit{Tesis doctorales y trabajos de investigaci'on cient'ifica},
-% Paraninfo. Madrid, 1986.
-%
-% \parindent0pc \leftskip0pc \vspace{6pt}
-%
-% {\itshape
-% Para outras cuestións tipogr'aficas, as referencias
-% usadas son, entre outras:}
-%
-% \parindent-1.5pc \leftskip1.5pc \vspace{3pt}
-%
-% Javier Bezos,
-% \textit{Tipograf'ia espa'nola con \TeX}, documento electr'onico
-% disponible en
-% \textsf{http://perso.wanadoo.es/jbezos/tipografia.html}.
-%
-% Ra'ul Cabanes Mart'inez,
-% <<El sistema internacional de unidades: ese desconocido>>,
-% \textit{Mundo Electr'onico}, n"o 142, p'axs.~119~-125. 1984.
-%
-% \textit{The Chicago Manual of Style}, University of Chicago
-% Press, 14"a~ed., esp.~p'axs.~333~-335. Chicago, 1993.
-%
-% Jos'e Fern'andez Castillo,
-% \textit{Normas para correctores y compositores tip'ografos},
-% Espasa-Calpe. Madrid, 1959.
-%
-% IRANOR [AENOR], Normas \msc{UNE} n'umeros 5010 (<<Signos
-% matem'aticos>>), 5028 (<<S'imbolos
-% geom'etricos>>) e 5029 (<<Impresi'on de los
-% s'imbolos de magnitudes y unidades y de los n'umeros>>).
-% [Obsoletas.]
-%
-% Real Academia Espa'nola,
-% \textit{Esbozo de una nueva gram'atica de la
-% lengua espa'nola}, Espasa-Calpe. Madrid, 1973.
-%
-% V.\ Mart'inez Sicluna,
-% \textit{Teor'ia y pr'actica de la tipograf'ia},
-% Gustavo Gili. Barcelona, 1945.
-%
-% Jos'e Mart'inez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Diccionario de ortograf'ia de la lengua espa'nola},
-% Paraninfo. Madrid, 1996.
-%
-% Juan Mart'inez Val, \textit{Tipograf'ia pr'actica},
-% Laberinto. Madrid, 2002.
-%
-% Juan Jos'e Morato, \textit{Gu'ia pr'actica del compositor
-% tipogr'afico}, Hernando, 2"a ed. Madrid, 1908 (1"a ed., 1900,
-% 3"a ed., 1933).
-%
-% Marion Neubauer,
-% <<Feinheiten bei wissenschaftlichen Publikationen>>,
-% \textit{Die \TeX nisches Kom\"odie}, parte I, vol. 8, n"o 4,
-% p'axs. 23-40. 1996; parte II, vol. 9, n"o 1, p'axs.~25~-44. 1997.
-%
-% Jos'e Polo,
-% \textit{Ortograf'ia y ciencia del lenguaje}, Paraninfo. Madrid, 1974.
-%
-% Pedro Valle,
-% \textit{C'omo corregir sin ofender}, Lumen. Buenos Aires, 1998.
-%
-% Hugh C. Wolfe, <<S'imbolos, unidades y nomenclatura>>,
-% \textit{Enciclopedia de F'isica}, t.~2, p'axs.~1423~-1451.
-% dir. Rita G. Lerner e George L. Trigg, Alianza. Madrid, 1987,
-%
-% \endgroup
-%
-% \end{userdtx}
-%
-% \begin{userdrv}
-%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by user.drv =========
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{galician.dtx}
-%
-% \section{This file}
-%
-% This file defines all the language-specific macros for the
-% Galician language. The file galician.dtx was translated in
-% January 2007 by Javier A. M\'ugica from spanish.dtx. It was
-% given the version number 4.3, based on the version for spanish.dtx
-% at those times, that was 4.2b. The original author from
-% v4.0 to 4.2b was Javier Bezos. Previous versions were written
-% by Julio S\'anchez.
-
-% I decided to make \emph{tabula rasa} of all |\changes|
-% logs. Only changes from spanish 4.2b to galician 4.3 and thereafter
-% are documented. The change history for the original spanish.dtx
-% can be found in that file.
-%
-% \section{The Galcian language}
-%
-% Custumization is made following mainly the books on the subject
-% by Jos\'e Mart\'\i nez de Sousa and Xos\'e Feix\'o Cid.
-% By typesetting |galician.dtx| directly you will get the full
-% documentation (regrettably is in Galician only, but it is
-% pretty long). References in this part refers to that document.
-% There are several aditional features documented in the Galician
-% version only.
-%
-% This style provides:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Translations following the International \LaTeX{}
-% conventions, as well as |\today|.
-%
-% \item Shorthands listed in Table~\ref{tab:galician-quote-def}.
-% Examples in subsection~3.4 are illustrative. Note that
-% |"~| has a special meaning in \textsf{galician}
-% different to other languages, and is used mainly in linguistic
-% contexts.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |'a| & acute accented a. Also for: e, i, o, u (both
-% lowercase and uppercase).\\
-% |'n| & \~n (also uppercase).\\
-% |~n| & \~n (also uppercase). Deprecated.\\
-% |"u| & \"u (also uppercase).\\
-% |"i| & \"i (also uppercase).\\
-% |"a| & Ordinal numbers (also |"A|, |"o|, |"O|).\\
-% |"rr| & rr, but -r when hyphenated\\
-% |"-| & Like |\-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest
-% the word.\\
-% |"=| & Like |-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest
-% the word.\\
-% |"~| & The hyphen is repeated at the very beginning of
-% the next line if the word is hyphenated at this
-% point.\\
-% |""| & Like |"-| but producing no hyphen sign.\\
-% |~-| & Like |-| but with no break after the hyphen. Also for:
-% en-dashes (|~--|) and em-dashes (|~---|). \\
-% |"/| & A slash slightly lowered, if necessary.\\
-% \verb+"|+ & disable ligatures at this point.\\
-% |<<| & Left guillemets.\\
-% |>>| & Right guillemets.\\
-% |"<| & |\begin{quoting}|. (See text.)\\
-% |">| & |\end{quoting}|. (See text.)
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{galician.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:galician-quote-def}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \item |\deactivatetilden| deactivates the |~n| and |~N| shorthands.
-%
-% \item \emph{In math mode} a dot followed by a digit is replaced
-% by a decimal comma.
-%
-% \item Galicians ordinals and abbeviations with |\sptext|
-% as, for instance, |1\sptext{o}|. The
-% preceptive dot is included.
-%
-% \item Accented functions: l\'\i m, m\'ax, m\'\i n, m\'od. You may
-% globally omit the accents with |\unaccentedoperators|. Spaced
-% functions: arc\,cos, etc. You may globally kill that space with
-% |\unspacedoperators|. |\dotlessi| is provided for use in math mode.
-%
-% \item A |quoting| environment and a related pair of shorthands |<<|
-% and |>>|. The command
-% |\deactivatequoting| deactivates these shorthand in case
-% you want to use |<| and |>| in some AMS commands and numerical
-% comparisons.
-%
-% \item The command |\selectgalician| selects the |galician| language
-% \emph{and} its shorthands. (Intended for the preamble.)
-%
-% \item |\frenchspacing| is used.
-%
-% \item |\dots| is redefined. It is now equal to typing tree points
-% in a row (it preserves the space following).
-%
-% \item There is a small space before |\%|.
-%
-% \item |\msc| provides lowercase small caps. (See subsection~3.10.)
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% Just in case |galician| is the main language, the group
-% |\layoutgalician| is activated, which modifies the standard
-% classes through the whole document (it cannot be deactivated)
-% in the following way:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Both |enumerate| and |itemize| are adapted to Galician rules.
-%
-% \item Both |\alph| and |\Alph| include \textit{\~n} after \textit{n}.
-%
-% \item Symbol footmarks are one, two, three, etc., asteriscs.
-%
-% \item |OT1| guillemets are generated with two |lasy| symbols instead
-% of small |\ll| and |\gg|.
-%
-% \item |\roman| is redefined to write small caps roman numerals, since
-% lowercase roman numerals are not allowed. However, \textit{MakeIndex}
-% rejects entries containing pages in that format. The |.idx| file must
-% be preprocessed if the document has this kind of entries with
-% the provided |romanidx.tex| tool---just \TeX{} it and follow the
-% instructions.
-%
-% \item There is a dot after section numbers in titles and toc.
-% \end{itemize}
-% This group is ignored if you write |\selectgalician*| in the
-% preamble.
-%
-% Some additional commands are provided to be used in the
-% |galician.cfg| file:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item With |\gl@activeacute| acute accents are always active,
-% overriding the default \textsf{babel} behaviour.
-%
-% \item |\gl@enumerate| sets the labels to be used by |enumerate|. The
-% same applies to |\gl@itemize| and |itemize|.
-%
-% \item |\gl@operators| stores the operator commands.
-% All of them are canceled with
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \let\gl@operators\relax
-%\end{verbatim}
-% \end{itemize}
-% The commands |\deactivatequoting|, |\deactivatetilden| and
-% |\selectgalician| may be used in this file, too.
-%
-% A subset of these commands is provided for
-% use in Plain \TeX{} (with |\input galician.sty|).
-%
-% \end{userdrv}
-%
-%\StopEventually{}
-%
-%^^A ========== End of manual ===============
-%
-% \begin{userdtx}
-% \section{The Code}
-% \end{userdtx}
-%
-% \begin{userdrv}
-% \subsection{The Code}
-% \end{userdrv}
-%
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/22}{Reversed "<, "> and <<, >>.}
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/22}{Removed the Spanish et sign.}
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/26}{Removed the shorthand for \c{c}. It
-% existed in medieval galician-portuguese, but that does not seem a
-% reason to be included here.}
-%
-% This file provides definition for both \LaTeXe{} and non
-% \LaTeXe{} formats.
-%
-% Identify the |ldf| file.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\ProvidesLanguage{galician.ldf}
- [2008/07/06 v4.3c Galician support from the babel system]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{galician} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@galician| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\LdfInit{galician}\captionsgalician
-\ifx\undefined\l@galician
- \@nopatterns{Galician}
- \adddialect\l@galician0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We define some tools which will be used in that style file:
-% (1) we make sure that |~| is active, (2) |\gl@delayed| delays
-% the expansion of the code in conditionals (in fact, quite similar
-% to |\bbl@afterfi|).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\edef\gl@savedcatcodes{%
- \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~
- \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\"}
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\catcode`\"=12
-\long\def\gl@delayed#1\then#2\else#3\fi{%
- #1%
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
- {#2}{#3}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Two tests are introduced. The first one tells us if the format is
-% \LaTeXe{}, and the second one if the format is Plain or any other.
-% If both are false, the format is \LaTeX2.09{}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\gl@delayed
-\expandafter\ifx\csname documentclass\endcsname\relax\then
- \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iffalse
-\else
- \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iftrue
-\fi
-\gl@delayed
-\expandafter\ifx\csname newenvironment\endcsname\relax\then
- \let\ifes@plain\iftrue
-\else
- \let\ifes@plain\iffalse
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Translations for captions.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsgalician{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefacio}%
- \def\refname{Referencias}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\'endice}%
- \def\listfigurename{\'Indice de figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{\'Indice de cadros}%
- \def\indexname{\'Indice alfab\'etico}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Cadro}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Adxunto}%
- \def\ccname{Copia a}%
- \def\headtoname{A}%
- \def\pagename{P\'axina}%
- \def\seename{v\'exase}%
- \def\alsoname{v\'exase tam\'en}%
- \def\proofname{Demostraci\'on}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glosario}}
-
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
- \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice}}
-\else
- \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice xeral}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And the date.
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/21}{Set the default to \textit{do}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dategalician{%
- \def\today{\the\day~de \ifcase\month\or xaneiro\or febreiro\or
- marzo\or abril\or maio\or xu\~no\or xullo\or agosto\or
- setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or decembro\fi
- \ \ifnum\year>1999\gl@yearl\else de\fi~\the\year}}
-\def\galiciandatedo{\def\gl@yearl{do}}
-\def\galiciandatede{\def\gl@yearl{de}}
-\galiciandatedo
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The basic macros to select the language, in the preamble or the
-% config file. Use of |\selectlanguage| should be avoided at this
-% early stage because the active chars are not yet
-% active. |\selectgalician| makes them active.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\selectgalician{%
- \def\selectgalician{%
- \def\selectgalician{%
- \PackageWarning{galician}{Extra \string\selectgalician ignored}}%
- \gl@select}}
-
-\@onlypreamble\selectgalician
-
-\def\gl@select{%
- \let\gl@select\@undefined
- \selectlanguage{galician}%
- \catcode`\"\active\catcode`\~=\active}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Instead of joining all the extras directly in |\extrasgalician|,
-% we subdivide them in three further groups.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\extrasgalician{%
- \textgalician
- \mathgalician
- \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty
- \galiciandeactivate{."'~<>}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \else
- \shorthandsgalician
- \fi}
-\def\noextrasgalician{%
- \ifx\textgalician\@empty\else
- \notextgalician
- \fi
- \ifx\mathgalician\@empty\else
- \nomathgalician
- \fi
- \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty\else
- \noshorthandsgalician
- \fi
- \gl@reviveshorthands}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And the first of these sub-groups is defined.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\sptext
- \def\sptext{\protect\gl@sptext}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The definition of |\sptext| is more elaborated than that of
-% |\textsuperscript|. With uppercase superscript text
-% the scriptscriptsize is used. The mandatory dot is already
-% included. There are two versions, depending on the
-% format.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{%
- {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.15ex
- \else
- \fontsize\ssf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.5ex
- \fi
- \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \let\sptextfont\rm
- \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{%
- {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \advance\dimen@-0.75ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \else
- \advance\dimen@-0.8ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \fi}}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, lowercase small caps. First, we test if there are actual
-% small caps for the current font. If not, faked small caps are
-% used. |\msc| tries a slightly larger font.
-% Javier B. wrote: ``The \cs{selectfont} in \cs{gl@lsc} could
-% seem redundant, but it's not''. I cannot see how it can't be
-% redundant (it is the last thing executed by |\scshape|), but
-% I keep it.
-%
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/00/26}{Added \cs{msc}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\lsc
- \def\lsc{\protect\gl@lsc}
- \babel@save\msc
- \def\msc{\protect\gl@msc}}
-
- \def\gl@@msc{\expandafter\@tempdima\f@size pt \divide\@tempdima by 200 \multiply\@tempdima by 219
- \edef\f@size{\strip@pt\@tempdima}\selectfont}
- \def\gl@msc{\let\gl@do@msc\gl@@msc\lsc}
- \let\gl@do@msc\relax
-
- \def\gl@lsc#1{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox{\gl@do@msc\scshape\selectfont
- \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series
- /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont
- \PackageInfo{galician}{Replacing undefined sc font\MessageBreak
- shape by faked small caps}%
- \MakeUppercase{#1}%
- \else
- \MakeLowercase{#1}%
- \fi}\let\gl@do@msc\relax}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The |quoting| environment. This part is not available
-% in Plain, hence the test. Overriding the default |\everypar| is
-% a bit tricky.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifgl@listquot
-
-\ifes@plain\else %<<<<<<
- \csname newtoks\endcsname\gl@quottoks
- \csname newcount\endcsname\gl@quotdepth
-
- \ifx\quoting\c@undefined\def\next{\let\next\relax\newenvironment}
- \else\def\next{\PackageInfo{galician}{Redefining quoting}\let\next\relax\renewenvironment}
- \fi
- \next{quoting}
- {\leavevmode
- \advance\gl@quotdepth1
- \csname lquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname%
- \ifnum\gl@quotdepth=\@ne
- \gl@listquotfalse
- \let\gl@quotpar\everypar
- \let\everypar\gl@quottoks
- \everypar\expandafter{\the\gl@quotpar}%
- \gl@quotpar{\the\everypar
- \ifgl@listquot\global\gl@listquotfalse\else\gl@quotcont\fi}%
- \fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\gl@quotcont}%
- \edef\gl@quotcont{\the\toks@
- \expandafter\noexpand
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname}}
- {\csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname}
-
- \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}}
- \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}}
- \def\lquotii{``}
- \def\rquotii{''}
- \def\lquotiii{`}
- \def\rquotiii{'}
-
- \let\gl@quotcont\@empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If there is a margin par inside quoting, we don't add the
-% quotes. |\gl@listqout| stores the quotes to be used before
-% item labels; otherwise they could appear after the labels.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \addto\@marginparreset{\let\gl@quotcont\@empty}
-
- \def\gl@listquot{%
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname
- \global\gl@listquottrue}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, the |\frenchspacing|, followed by |\...dots| and |\%|
-% Instead of redefining |\ldots| and |\cdots|, we redefine |\ldotp|
-% and |\cdotp|, so that this is compatible with amsmath.
-% In LaTeX we also redefine |\textellipsis|, and for plain or
-% other we redefine |\dots|.
-%
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/27}{\cs{...} is removed and instead
-% \cs{dots} and \cs{dots} are changed, by redefining \cs{ldotc},
-% \cs{dotc} and \cs{textellipsis} or \cs{dots}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\textgalician{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\notextgalician{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-
-\mathchardef\gl@cdot="0201
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
-\addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\textellipsis
- \babel@save\ldotp
- \babel@save\cdotp%
- \def\textellipsis{\hbox{...}\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} }%
- \mathchardef\ldotp="013A%
- \mathchardef\cdotp="0201%
-}
-\else %<<<<<<
-\addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\dots
- \babel@save\ldotp
- \babel@save\cdotp
- \mathchardef\ldotp="013A%
- \mathchardef\cdotp="0201%
- \def\dots{\ifmmode\ldots\else...\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} \fi}%
-}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \addto\textgalician{%
- \let\percentsign\%%
- \babel@save\%%
- \def\%{\unskip\,\percentsign{}}}
-\else
- \addto\textgalician{%
- \let\percentsign\%%
- \babel@save\%%
- \def\%{\unskip\ifmmode\,\else$\m@th\,$\fi\percentsign{}}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We follow with the math group. It's not easy to add an accent
-% in an operator. The difficulty is that we must avoid using
-% text (that is, |\mbox|) because we have no control on font
-% and size, and at time we should access |\i|, which is a text
-% command forbidden in math mode. |\dotlessi| must be
-% converted to uppercase if necessary in \LaTeXe. There are
-% two versions, depending on the format.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\mathgalician{%
- \babel@save\dotlessi
- \def\dotlessi{\protect\gl@dotlessi}}
-
-\let\nomathgalician\relax %% Unused, but called
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@texti{\i}
- \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\gl@texti}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@dotlessi{%
- \ifmmode
- {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne
- \imath
- \else
- \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
- \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil
- \escapechar=\count@
- \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}%
- {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}%
- \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname
- \advance\count@"7000
- \mathchar\count@
- \fi}%
- \else
- \i
- \fi}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@dotlessi{%
- \ifmmode
- \mathchar"7010
- \else
- \i
- \fi}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The switches for accents and spaces in math.
-%
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/21}{Set the default to \cs{unspacedoperators}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\accentedoperators{%
- \def\gl@op@ac##1{\acute{##1}}%
- \def\gl@op@i{\acute{\dotlessi}}}
-\def\unaccentedoperators{%
- \def\gl@op@ac##1{##1}%
- \def\gl@op@i{i}}
-\accentedoperators
-
-\def\spacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\,}
-\def\unspacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\@empty}
-\unspacedoperators
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The operators are stored in |\gl@operators|, which in turn is
-% included in the math group. Since |\operator@font| is
-% defined in \LaTeXe{} only, we need to define them in the plain variant.
-%
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/21}{\cs{sin}, \cs{arcsin} and \cs{sinh}
-% are set to produce the same as \cs{sen}, \cs{arcsen} and \cs{senh}}
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/27}{cosec and senh moved from
-% \cs{galicianoperators} to the main group}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\mathgalician{%
- \gl@operators}
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe\else %<<<<<<
- \let\operator@font\rm
- \def\@empty{}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\def\gl@operators{%
- \babel@save\lim \def\lim{\mathop{\operator@font l\protect\gl@op@i m}}%
- \babel@save\limsup \def\limsup{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,sup}}%
- \babel@save\liminf \def\liminf{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,inf}}%
- \babel@save\max \def\max{\mathop{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac ax}}%
- \babel@save\inf \def\inf{\mathop{\operator@font \protect\gl@op@i nf}}%
- \babel@save\min \def\min{\mathop{\operator@font m\protect\gl@op@i n}}%
- \babel@save\bmod
- \def\bmod{%
- \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu%
- \mathbin{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu%
- \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}%
- \babel@save\pmod
- \def\pmod##1{%
- \allowbreak\mkern18mu({\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\,\,##1)}%
- \def\gl@a##1 {%
- \gl@delayed
- \if^##1^\then % is it empty? do nothing and continue
- \gl@a
- \else
- \gl@delayed
- \if&##1\then % is it &? do nothing and finish
- \else
- \begingroup
- \let\,\@empty % \, is ignored when def'ing the macro name
- \let\acute\@firstofone % same
- \edef\gl@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}%
- \def\,{\noexpand\gl@op@sp}%
- \def\acute####1{%
- \if i####1%
- \noexpand\gl@op@i
- \else
- \noexpand\gl@op@ac####1%
- \fi}%
- \edef\gl@a{\endgroup
- \noexpand\babel@save\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b
- \def\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b{%
- \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\nolimits}}%
- \gl@a % It restores itself
- \gl@a
- \fi
- \fi}%
- \let\gl@b\galicianoperators
- \addto\gl@b{ }%
- \expandafter\gl@a\gl@b sen tx cosec arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tx senh & %\, will be set to \gl@op@sp
- %
- \babel@save\sin \let\sin\sen
- \babel@save\arcsin \let\arcsin\arcsen
- \babel@save\sinh \let\sinh\senh
-}
-
-\def\galicianoperators{cotx txh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now comes the text shorthands. They are grouped in
-% |\shorthandsgalician| and this style performs some
-% operations before the babel shortands are called.
-% The goals are to allow espression like |$a^{x'}$|
-% and to deactivate the shorthands making them of
-% category `other'. After providing a |\'i| shorthand,
-% the new macros are defined.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}}
-
-\def\gl@set@shorthand#1{%
- \expandafter\edef\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname
- {\the\catcode`#1}%
- \initiate@active@char{#1}%
- \catcode`#1=\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname gl@math\string#1\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\gl@use@shorthand{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifx\thepage\relax\then
- \string
- \else{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect\then
- \noexpand
- \else
- \gl@use@sh
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-
-\def\gl@text@sh#1{\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}
-\def\gl@math@sh#1{\csname gl@math\string#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\gl@use@sh{%
- \gl@delayed
- \if@safe@actives\then
- \string
- \else{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifmmode\then
- \gl@math@sh
- \else
- \gl@text@sh
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-
-\gdef\gl@activate#1{%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \def~{\gl@use@shorthand~}}}
-
-\def\galiciandeactivate#1{%
- \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\gl@spdeactivate\@tempa}}
-
-\def\gl@spdeactivate#1{%
- \if.#1%
- \mathcode`\.=\gl@period@code
- \else
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \expandafter\let\expandafter~%
- \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- \catcode`#1\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-
-\def\gl@reviveshorthands{%
- \gl@restore{"}\gl@restore{~}%
- \gl@restore{<}\gl@restore{>}%
- \gl@quoting}
-
-\def\gl@restore#1{%
- \catcode`#1=\active
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \bbl@deactivate{~}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% But \textsf{galician} allows two category codes for |'|,
-% so both should be taken into account in \cs{bbl@pr@m@s}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\'=12
-\lccode`~=`' \lccode`'=`'
-\lowercase{%
-\gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifx~\@let@token\then
- \pr@@@s
- \else
- {\gl@delayed
- \ifx'\@let@token\then
- \pr@@@s
- \else
- {\gl@delayed
- \ifx^\@let@token\then
- \pr@@@t
- \else
- \egroup
- \fi}%
- \fi}%
- \fi}}
-\endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @tabacckludge\endcsname\relax
- \let\gl@tak\a
-\else
- \let\gl@tak\@tabacckludge
-\fi
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\expandafter\gl@tak\string#1}
- \let\a\@tabacckludge
-\else\ifes@plain %<<<<<<
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname a\string#1\endcsname}
-\fi\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\expandafter\ifx\csname add@accent\endcsname\relax
- \def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Instead of redefining |\'|, we redefine the internal macro for the OT1 encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{%
- \expandafter\@text@composite
- \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3%
- \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}%
- \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 }
-\fi %<<<<<<
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The shorthands are activated in the aux file. Now, we begin
-% the shorthands group.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\shorthandsgalician{\languageshorthands{galician}}
-\let\noshorthandsgalician\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% First, decimal comma.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\galiciandecimal#1{\def\gl@decimal{{#1}}}
-\def\decimalcomma{\galiciandecimal{,}}
-\def\decimalpoint{\galiciandecimal{.}}
-\decimalcomma
-
-\gl@set@shorthand{.}
-
-\@namedef{gl@math\string.}{%
- \@ifnextchar\egroup
- {\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax}%
- {\gl@text@sh.}}
-
-\declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \mathchardef\gl@period@code\the\mathcode`\.%
- \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}%
- \mathcode`\.="8000 %
- \gl@activate{.}}
-
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \catcode`\.=12
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{%
- \string\catcode`\string\.=12}%
- \fi}
-
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.1}{\gl@decimal1}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.2}{\gl@decimal2}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.3}{\gl@decimal3}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.4}{\gl@decimal4}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.5}{\gl@decimal5}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.6}{\gl@decimal6}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.7}{\gl@decimal7}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.8}{\gl@decimal8}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.9}{\gl@decimal9}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.0}{\gl@decimal0}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now accents and tools
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\gl@set@shorthand{"}
-\def\gl@umlaut#1{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We override the default |"| of babel, intended for german.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \gl@activate{"}%
- \gl@activate{~}%
- \babel@save\bbl@umlauta
- \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut
- \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname
- \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\gl@accent\~{126}}%
- \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname
- \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\gl@accent\'{19}}}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \gl@activate{"}%
- \gl@activate{~}%
- \babel@save\bbl@umlauta
- \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut
- \babel@save\~%
- \def\~{\gl@accent\~{126}}%
- \babel@save\'%
- \def\'#1{\if#1i\gl@accent\'{19}\i\else\gl@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{galician~4.3}{07/01/22}{Removed the shorthands "er and "ER,
-% they don't exist in galician.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"a}{\protect\gl@sptext{a}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"A}{\protect\gl@sptext{A}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"o}{\protect\gl@sptext{o}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"O}{\protect\gl@sptext{O}}
-
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"u}{\"u}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"U}{\"U}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"i}{\"i}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"I}{\"I}
-
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"<}{\begin{quoting}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{">}{\end{quoting}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"=}%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\char\hyphenchar\font\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"~}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}%
- {\char\hyphenchar\font}{\char\hyphenchar\font}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"r}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}%
- {}{r}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"R}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}%
- {}{R}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"/}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}%
- \dimen@\ht\z@
- \advance\dimen@-1ex
- \advance\dimen@\dp\z@
- \dimen@.31\dimen@
- \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@
- \ifdim\dimen@>0pt
- \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em
- \else
- \box\z@
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"?}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"!}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-
-\gl@set@shorthand{~}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{~n}{\~n}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{~N}{\~N}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{~-}{%
- \leavevmode
- \bgroup
- \let\@sptoken\gl@dashes % This assignation changes the
- \@ifnextchar-% \@ifnextchar behaviour
- {\gl@dashes}%
- {\hbox{\char\hyphenchar\font}\egroup}}
-\def\gl@dashes-{%
- \@ifnextchar-%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}}
-
-\def\deactivatetilden{%
- \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The shorthands for |quoting|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname XML@catcodes\endcsname\relax
- \addto\gl@select{%
- \catcode`\<\active\catcode`\>=\active
- \gl@quoting}
-
- \gl@set@shorthand{<}
- \gl@set@shorthand{>}
-
- \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname}
-
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \gl@activate{<}%
- \gl@activate{>}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \gl@quoting
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\gl@quoting}%
- \fi}%
- \fi %<<<<<<
-
- \def\activatequoting{%
- \catcode`>=\active \catcode`<=\active
- \let\gl@quoting\activatequoting}
- \def\deactivatequoting{%
- \catcode`>=12 \catcode`<=12
- \let\gl@quoting\deactivatequoting}
-
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{<<}{\guillemotleft{}}
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{>>}{\guillemotright{}}
-\fi
-
-\let\gl@quoting\relax
-\let\deactivatequoting\relax
-\let\activatequoting\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The acute accents are stored in a macro. If |activeacute| was set
-% as an option it's executed. If not is not deleted for a possible
-% later use in the |cfg| file. In non \LaTeXe{} formats is always
-% executed.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gl@activeacute{%
- \gl@set@shorthand{'}%
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{\gl@activate{'}}%
- \addto\gl@reviveshorthands{\gl@restore{'}}%
- \addto\gl@select{\catcode`'=\active}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'a}{\@tabacckludge'a}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'A}{\@tabacckludge'A}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'e}{\@tabacckludge'e}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'E}{\@tabacckludge'E}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'i}{\@tabacckludge'i}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'I}{\@tabacckludge'I}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'o}{\@tabacckludge'o}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'O}{\@tabacckludge'O}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'u}{\@tabacckludge'u}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'U}{\@tabacckludge'U}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'n}{\~n}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'N}{\~N}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{''}{\textquotedblright}%
- \let\gl@activeacute\relax}
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\gl@activeacute}{}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \gl@activeacute
-\fi %<<<<<<%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And the customization. By default these macros only
-% store the values and do nothing.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gl@enumerate#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\gl@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-
-\def\gl@itemize#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\gl@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The part formerly in the |.lld| file comes here. It performs
-% layout adaptation of \LaTeX{} to ``orthodox'' Galician rules.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
-
-\gl@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$}
-\def\galiciandashitems{\gl@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}}
-\def\galiciansymbitems{%
- \gl@itemize
- {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex
- {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}%
- {\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}}
-\def\galiciansignitems{%
- \gl@itemize
- {\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}%
- {$\m@th\triangleright$}}
-\galiciansymbitems
-
-\def\gl@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{%
- \if#21%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2a%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}%
- \else\if#2A%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2i%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2I%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2o%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\protect\gl@sptext{o}}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname}
- \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname
- {\noexpand\gl@listquot\the\toks@#3}}
-
-\addto\layoutgalician{%
- \def\gl@enumerate##1##2##3##4{%
- \gl@enumdef{i}##1\@empty\@empty\@@
- \gl@enumdef{ii}##2\@empty\@empty\@@
- \gl@enumdef{iii}##3\@empty\@empty\@@
- \gl@enumdef{iv}##4\@empty\@empty\@@}%
- \def\gl@itemize##1##2##3##4{%
- \def\labelitemi{\gl@listquot##1}%
- \def\labelitemii{\gl@listquot##2}%
- \def\labelitemiii{\gl@listquot##3}%
- \def\labelitemiv{\gl@listquot##4}}%
- \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}%
- \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi\theenumii}%
- \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}%
- \expandafter\gl@enumerate\gl@enum
- \expandafter\gl@itemize\gl@item
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode\ll
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M
- \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}%
- \char40 \kern-0.19em\char40 }}%
- \fi}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode\gg
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M
- \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}%
- \char41 \kern-0.19em\char41 }}%
- \fi}%
- \def\@fnsymbol##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or
- *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or
- l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or
- x\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@Alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or
- L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or
- X\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue
- \def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname.\quad}%
- \def\numberline##1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{##1\if&##1&\else.\fi\hfil}}%
- \def\@roman##1{\protect\gl@roman{\number##1}}%
- \def\gl@roman##1{\protect\gl@msc{\romannumeral##1}}%
- \def\glromanindex##1##2{##1{\protect\gl@msc{##2}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We need to execute the following code when babel has been
-% run, in order to see if |galician| is the main language.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \let\gl@activeacute\@undefined
- \def\bbl@tempa{galician}%
- \ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa
- \AtBeginDocument{\layoutgalician}%
- \addto\gl@select{%
- \@ifstar{\let\layoutgalician\relax}%
- {\layoutgalician\let\layoutgalician\relax}}%
- \fi
- \selectgalician}
-
-\fi %<<<<<<
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% After restoring the catcode of |~| and setting the minimal
-% values for hyphenation, the |.ldf| is finished.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\gl@savedcatcodes
-
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \ldf@finish{galician}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \gl@select
- \ldf@finish{galician}
- \csname activatequoting\endcsname
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% That's all in the main file. Now the file with
-% \textsf{custom-bib} macros.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*bblbst>
-\def\bbland{e}
-\def\bbleditors{directores} \def\bbleds{dirs.\@}
-\def\bbleditor{director} \def\bbled{dir.\@}
-\def\bbledby{dirixido por}
-\def\bbledition{edici\'on} \def\bbledn{ed.\@}
-\def\bbletal{e outros}
-\def\bblvolume{volumen} \def\bblvol{vol.\@}
-\def\bblof{de}
-\def\bblnumber{n\'umero} \def\bblno{n\sptext{o}}
-\def\bblin{en}
-\def\bblpages{p\'axinas} \def\bblpp{p\'axs.\@}
-\def\bblpage{p\'axina} \def\bblp{p\'ax.\@}
-\def\bblchapter{cap\'itulo} \def\bblchap{cap.\@}
-\def\bbltechreport{informe t\'ecnico}
-\def\bbltechrep{inf.\@ t\'ec.\@}
-\def\bblmthesis{proxecto de fin de carreira}
-\def\bblphdthesis{tesis doutoral}
-\def\bblfirst {primeira} \def\bblfirsto {1\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblsecond{segunda} \def\bblsecondo{2\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblthird {terceira} \def\bblthirdo {3\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblfourth{cuarta} \def\bblfourtho{4\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblfifth {quinta} \def\bblfiftho {5\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblth{\sptext{a}}
-\let\bblst\bblth \let\bblnd\bblth \let\bblrd\bblth
-\def\bbljan{xaneiro} \def\bblfeb{febreiro} \def\bblmar{marzo}
-\def\bblapr{abril} \def\bblmay{maio} \def\bbljun{xu\~no}
-\def\bbljul{xullo} \def\bblaug{agosto} \def\bblsep{setembro}
-\def\bbloct{outubro}\def\bblnov{novembro}\def\bbldec{decembro}
-%</bblbst>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The |galician| option writes a macro in the page field of
-% \textit{MakeIndex} in entries with medium caps number, and they
-% are rejected. This program is a preprocessor which moves this
-% macro to the entry field.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*indexgl>
-\makeatletter
-
-\newcount\gl@converted
-\newcount\gl@processed
-
-\def\gl@encap{`\|}
-\def\gl@openrange{`\(}
-\def\gl@closerange{`\)}
-
-\def\gl@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1}
-\def\gl@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2}
-
-\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J%
- (extension por omision .idx):}
-
-\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
-\ifin@
- \edef\gl@input@file{\expandafter\gl@split@file\answer\@@}
- \edef\gl@input@ext{\expandafter\gl@split@ext\answer\@@}
-\else
- \edef\gl@input@file{\answer}
- \def\gl@input@ext{idx}
-\fi
-
-\typein[\answer]{^^JArquivo de destino^^J%
- (arquivo por omision: \gl@input@file.eix,^^J%
- extension por omision .eix):}
-\ifx\answer\@empty
- \edef\gl@output{\gl@input@file.eix}
-\else
- \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
- \ifin@
- \edef\gl@output{\answer}
- \else
- \edef\gl@output{\answer.eix}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\typein[\answer]{%
- ^^J?Usouse algun esquema especial de controles^^J%
- de MakeIndex para encap, open_range ou close_range?^^J%
- [s/n] (n por omision)}
-
-\if s\answer
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J%
- (\string| por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\gl@encap{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J%
- (\string( por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\gl@openrange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J%
- (\string) por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\gl@closerange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\newwrite\gl@indexfile
-\immediate\openout\gl@indexfile=\gl@output
-
-\newif\ifgl@encapsulated
-
-\def\gl@roman#1{\romannumeral#1 }
-\edef\gl@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\}
-
-\def\indexentry{%
- \begingroup
- \@sanitize
- \gl@indexentry}
-
-\begingroup
-
-\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\gl@encap\relax
-\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\gl@openrange\relax
-\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\gl@closerange\relax
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@indexentry#1{%
- \endgroup
- \advance\gl@processed\@ne
- \gl@encapsulatedfalse
- \gl@bar@idx#1|\@@
- \gl@idxentry}%
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@idxentry#1{%
- \in@{\gl@roman}{#1}%
- \ifin@
- \advance\gl@converted\@ne
- \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\gl@b|\ifgl@encapsulated\gl@p\fi glromanindex%
- {\ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@slash\gl@a\fi}}{#1}}%
- \else
- \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\gl@b\ifgl@encapsulated|\gl@p\gl@a\fi}{#1}}%
- \fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{%
- \def\gl@b{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}%
- \ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@encapsulatedtrue\gl@bar@eat#2\fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\gl@p{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}%
- \edef\gl@t{(}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p
- \else\edef\gl@t{)}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p
- \else
- \edef\gl@a{\gl@p\gl@a}\let\gl@p\@empty%
- \fi\fi}
-}
-
-\endgroup
-
-\input \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext
-
-\immediate\closeout\gl@indexfile
-
-\typeout{*****************}
-\typeout{procesouse: \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext }
-\typeout{Li'nas lidas: \the\gl@processed}
-\typeout{Li'nas convertidas: \the\gl@converted}
-\typeout{Resultado en: \gl@output}
-\ifnum\gl@converted>\z@
- \typeout{Xenere o 'indice a partir deste arquivo}
-\else
- \typeout{Non se realizou ning'un tipo de conversi'on}
- \typeout{P'odese xenerar o arquivo directamente^^J%
- de \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext}
-\fi
-\typeout{*****************}
-\@@end
-%</indexgl>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 215b447ea06..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/galician.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\batchfile{galician.ins}
-\def\filedate{2007/01/29}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
- \Msg{**********************************************}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
- \Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{**********************************************}
- \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
- \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
- \batchmode
- \csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{galician.ldf}{\from{galician.dtx}{code}}%
- \file{glbst.tex}{\from{galician.dtx}{bblbst}}%
- \file{glromidx.tex}{\from{galician.dtx}{indexgl}}}
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/german.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/german.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index b7b7db1c49e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/german.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{german.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{germanb.ldf}{\from{germanb.dtx}{code}}
- \file{ngermanb.ldf}{\from{ngermanb.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/germanb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/germanb.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index ab3b7956fdd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/germanb.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,557 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{366}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{germanb.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{germanb}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{germanb.dtx}
- [2008/06/01 v2.6m German support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `germanb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Germanb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-% This file is based on german.tex version 2.5d,
-% by Bernd Raichle, Hubert Partl et.al.
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
-\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{germanb.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{germanb.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{germanb-1.0a}{1990/05/14}{Incorporated Nico's comments}
-% \changes{germanb-1.0b}{1990/05/22}{fixed typo in definition for
-% austrian language found by Werenfried Spit
-% \texttt{nspit@fys.ruu.nl}}
-% \changes{germanb-1.0c}{1990/07/16}{Fixed some typos}
-% \changes{germanb-1.1}{1990/07/30}{When using PostScript fonts with
-% the Adobe fontencoding, the dieresis-accent is located elsewhere,
-% modified code}
-% \changes{germanb-1.1a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation
-% somewhat}
-% \changes{germanb-2.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0}
-% \changes{germanb-2.0a}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change
-% log}
-% \changes{germanb-2.1}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer}
-% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/11}{Removed global assignments,
-% brought uptodate with \file{german.tex} v2.3d}
-% \changes{germanb-2.2a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.3}{1991/11/05}{Rewritten parts of the code to use
-% the new features of babel version 3.1}
-% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Brought up-to-date with
-% \file{german.tex} v2.3e (plus some bug fixes) [br]}
-% \changes{germanb-2.5}{1994/02/08}{Update or \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{germanb-2.5c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved the identification after the loading of
-% \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Moved the identification to the
-% top of the file}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Rewrote the code that handles the
-% active double quote character}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The German language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% German language as well as for the Austrian dialect of this
-% language\footnote{This file is a re-implementation of Hubert
-% Partl's \file{german.sty} version 2.5b, see~\cite{HP}.}.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:german-quote} an overview is given of its
-% purpose. One of the reasons for this is that in the German
-% language some character combinations change when a word is broken
-% between the combination. Also the vertical placement of the
-% umlaut can be controlled this way.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"a| & |\"a|, also implemented for the other
-% lowercase and uppercase vowels. \\
-% |"s| & to produce the German \ss{} (like |\ss{}|). \\
-% |"z| & to produce the German \ss{} (like |\ss{}|). \\
-% |"ck|& for |ck| to be hyphenated as |k-k|. \\
-% |"ff|& for |ff| to be hyphenated as |ff-f|,
-% this is also implemented for l, m, n, p, r and t\\
-% |"S| & for |SS| to be |\uppercase{"s}|. \\
-% |"Z| & for |SZ| to be |\uppercase{"z}|. \\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\
-% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\
-% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing
-% hyphenation in the composing words. \\
-% |"`| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |"'| & for German right double quotes. \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{german.ldf}}\label{tab:german-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:german-quote} can also be typeset by
-% using the commands in table~\ref{tab:more-quote}.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\
-% |\glq| & for German left single quotes (looks like ,). \\
-% |\grq| & for German right single quotes (looks like `). \\
-% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |\flq| & for (French) left single quotes (similar to $<$). \\
-% |\frq| & for (French) right single quotes (similar to $>$). \\
-% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined
-% by \file{german.ldf}}\label{tab:more-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% When this file was read through the option \Lopt{germanb} we make
-% it behave as if \Lopt{german} was specified.
-% \changes{german-2.6l}{2008/03/17}{Making germanb behave like german
-% needs some more work besides defining \cs{CurrentOption}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6m}{2008/06/01}{Correted a typo}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{germanb}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \def\CurrentOption{german}
- \ifx\l@german\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{German}
- \adddialect\l@german0
- \fi
- \let\l@germanb\l@german
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \let\captionsgermanb\captionsgerman
- \let\dategermanb\dategerman
- \let\extrasgermanb\extrasgerman
- \let\noextrasgermanb\noextrasgerman
- }
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{german} will be an `unknown' language, so we
-% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@german| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{germanb-2.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if
-% language undefined}
-% \changes{germanb-2.2d}{1991/10/27}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added warning, if no german
-% patterns loaded}
-% \changes{germanb-2.5c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@german\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{German}
- \adddialect\l@german0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For the Austrian version of these definitions we just add another
-% language.
-% \changes{germanb-2.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} for
-% austrian}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\adddialect\l@austrian\l@german
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the German language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsgerman}
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsaustrian}
-% Either the macro |\captionsgerman| or the macro
-% |\captionsaustrian| will define all strings used in the four
-% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-%
-% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be
-% \cs{headpagename}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added \cs{prefacename},
-% \cs{seename} and \cs{alsoname}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.4}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence on the
-% fly}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6j}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Vorwort}%
- \def\refname{Literatur}%
- \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}%
- \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Anhang}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt
- \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Abbildung}%
- \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel
- \def\partname{Teil}%
- \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n)
- \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an
- \def\headtoname{An}%
- \def\pagename{Seite}%
- \def\seename{siehe}%
- \def\alsoname{siehe auch}%
- \def\proofname{Beweis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossar}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dategerman}
-% The macro |\dategerman| redefines the command
-% |\today| to produce German dates.
-% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added \cs{month@german}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\month@german{\ifcase\month\or
- Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or
- Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi}
-\def\dategerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@german
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateaustrian}
-% The macro |\dateaustrian| redefines the command
-% |\today| to produce Austrian version of the German dates.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month
- J\"anner\else \month@german\fi \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasgerman}
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasaustrian}
-% \changes{germanb-2.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to
-% prevent white space}
-% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/11}{Save all redefined macros}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasgerman}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasaustrian}
-% \changes{germanb-1.1}{1990/07/30}{Added \cs{dieresis}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.0b}{1991/05/29}{added some comment chars to
-% prevent white space}
-% \changes{germanb-2.2}{1991/06/11}{Try to restore everything to its
-% former state}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/07/10}{Construct control sequence
-% \cs{extrasgerman} or \cs{extrasaustrian} on the fly}
-%
-% Either the macro |\extrasgerman| or the macros |\extrasaustrian|
-% will perform all the extra definitions needed for the German
-% language. The macro |\noextrasgerman| is used to cancel the
-% actions of |\extrasgerman|.
-%
-% For German (as well as for Dutch) the \texttt{"} character is
-% made active. This is done once, later on its definition may vary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \languageshorthands{german}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6i}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% German}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasgerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{All the code to handle the active
-% double quote has been moved to \file{babel.def}}
-%
-% In order for \TeX\ to be able to hyphenate German words which
-% contain `\ss' (in the \texttt{OT1} position |^^Y|) we have to
-% give the character a nonzero |\lccode| (see Appendix H, the \TeX
-% book).
-% \changes{germanb-2.6c}{1996/04/08}{Use decimal number instead of
-% hat-notation as the hat may be activated}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}%
- \lccode25=25}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Removeed \cs{3} as it is no
-% longer in \file{german.ldf}}
-%
-% The umlaut accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the umlaut dots.
-% The redefinition is done with the help of |\umlautlow|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The german hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin|
-% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/05/13}{use \cs{germanhyphenmins} to store
-% the correct values}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6j}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For German texts we need to make sure that |\frenchspacing| is
-% turned on.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6k}{2001/01/26}{Turn frenchspacing on, as in
-% \texttt{german.sty}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{\cs{umlautlow} and
-% \cs{umlauthigh} moved to \file{glyphs.dtx}, as well as
-% \cs{newumlaut} (now \cs{lower@umlaut}}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active
-% character. This character is then used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:german-quote}.
-%
-% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a
-% couple of `support' macros.
-%
-% \changes{germanb-2.3e}{1991/11/10}{Added \cs{save@sf@q} macro and
-% rewrote all quote macros to use it}
-% \changes{germanb-2.3h}{1991/02/16}{moved definition of
-% \cs{allowhyphens}, \cs{set@low@box} and \cs{save@sf@q} to
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Moved all quotation characters to
-% \file{glyphs.dtx}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep
-% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \changes{germanb-2.6c}{1996/01/24}{Moved \cs{german@dq@disc} to
-% babel.def, calling it \cs{bbl@disc}}
-%
-% \changes{germanb-2.6a}{1995/02/15}{Use \cs{ddot} instead of
-% \cs{@MATHUMLAUT}}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts,
-% \changes{germanb-2.6c}{1996/05/30}{added the \cs{allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% tremas,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}%
- {\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% german es-zet (sharp s),
-% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1997/05/08}{use \cs{SS} instead of
-% \texttt{SS}, removed braces after \cs{ss}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"S}{\SS}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"Z}{SZ}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% german and french quotes,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{">}{\frqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% discretionary commands
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We need to treat |"f| a bit differently in order to preserve the
-% ff-ligature.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/06/15}{Copied the coding for \texttt{"f}
-% from german.dtx version 2.5d}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}}
-\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M
- \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= }
-\def\bbl@insertff{%
- \if f\bbl@nextff
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
- {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}}
-\let\bbl@nextff=f
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqon}
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff}
-% \begin{macro}{\ck}
-% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands
-% for reasons of compatibility with \file{german.sty}.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6f}{1998/06/07}{Now use \cs{shorthandon} and
-% \cs{shorthandoff}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{germanb-2.6d}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 0e878bf22d4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,864 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{636}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{greek.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{greek}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{greek.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v1.3l Greek support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `greek.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Greek language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997, 2005
-%% by Apostolos Syropoulos
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Apostolos Syropoulos
-%% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or
-%% apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr
-%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl)
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the greek language definition file. The original
-% version of this file was written by Apostolos Syropoulos.
-% It was then enhanced by adding code from kdgreek.sty from David
-% Kastrup <dak@neuroinformatik.ruhr-uni-bochum.de> with his
-% consent.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{greek.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{greek.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/07/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning}
-% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Classical Greek is now a dialect}
-% \changes{greek-1.2b}{1997/11/01}{Classical Greek is now called
-% ``Polutoniko'' Greek. The previous name was at least misleading}
-% \changes{greek-1.2c}{1998/06/26}{This version conforms to version
-% 2.0 of the CB fonts and consequently we added a few new
-% symbol-producing commands}
-% \changes{greek-1.3a}{1998/07/04}{polutoniko is now an attribute to
-% Greek, no longer a `dialect'}
-%
-% \section{The Greek language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. The original author is Apostolos Syropoulos
-% (\texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}), code from
-% \file{kdgreek.sty} by David Kastrup
-% \texttt{dak@neuroinformatik.ruhr-uni-bochum.de} was used to
-% enhance the support for typesetting greek texts.} defines all the
-% language definition macros for the Greek language, i.e.,
-% as it used today with only one accent, and the attribute
-% $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$ (``Polutoniko'')
-% for typesetting greek text with all accents. This separation
-% arose out of the need to simplify things, for only very few
-% people will be really interested to typeset polytonic Greek
-% text.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\greektext
-% \DescribeMacro\latintext
-% The commands |\greektext| and |\latintext| can be used to switch
-% to greek or latin fonts. These are declarations.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\textgreek
-% \DescribeMacro\textlatin
-% The commands |\textgreek| and |\textlatin| both take one argument
-% which is then typeset using the requested font encoding.
-% \DescribeMacro\textol
-% The command |\greekol| switches to the greek outline font family,
-% while the command |\textol| typests a short text in outline font.
-% A number of extra greek characters are made available through the
-% added text commands |\stigma|, |\qoppa|, |\sampi|, |\ddigamma|,
-% |\Digamma|, |\euro|, |\permill|, and |\vardigamma|.
-%
-% \subsection{Typing conventions}
-%
-% Entering greek text can be quite difficult because of the many
-% diacritical signs that need to be added for various purposes.
-% The fonts that are used to typeset Greek make this a lot
-% easier by offering a lot of ligatures. But in order for this to
-% work, some characters need to be considered as letters. These
-% characters are |<|, |>|, |~|, |`|, |'|, |"| and
-% \verb=|=. Therefore their |\lccode| is changed when Greek is in
-% effect. In order to let |\uppercase| give correct results, the
-% |\uccode| of these characters is set to a non-existing character
-% to make them disappear. Of course not all characters are needed
-% when typesetting ``modern'' $\mu o\nu o\tau o\nu
-% \iota\kappa\acute{o}$. In that case we only need the |'| and |"|
-% symbols which are treated in the proper way.
-%
-% \subsection{Greek numbering}
-%
-% The Greek alphabetical numbering system, like the Roman one, is
-% still used in everyday life for short enumerations. Unfortunately
-% most Greeks don't know how to write Greek numbers bigger than 20 or
-% 30. Nevertheless, in official editions of the last century and
-% beginning of this century this numbering system was also used for
-% dates and numbers in the range of several thousands. Nowadays
-% this numbering system is primary used by the Eastern Orthodox
-% Church and by certain scholars. It is hence necessary to be able
-% to typeset any Greek numeral up to \hbox{999\,999}. Here are the
-% conventions:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item There is no Greek numeral for any number less than or equal
-% to $0$.
-% \item Numbers from $1$ to $9$ are denoted by letters alpha, beta,
-% gamma, delta, epsilon, stigma, zeta, eta, theta, followed by a
-% mark similar to the mathematical symbol ``prime''. (Nowadays
-% instead of letter stigma the digraph sigma tau is used for number
-% $6$. Mainly because the letter stigma is not always available, so
-% people opt to write down the first two letters of its name as an
-% alternative. In our implementation we produce the letter stigma,
-% not the digraph sigma tau.)
-% \item Decades from $10$ to $90$ are denoted by letters iota,
-% kappa, lambda, mu, nu, xi, omikron, pi, qoppa, again followed by
-% the numeric mark. The qoppa used for this purpose has a special
-% zig-zag form, which doesn't resemble at all the original
-% `q'-like qoppa.
-% \item Hundreds from $100$ to $900$ are denoted by letters rho,
-% sigma, tau, upsilon, phi, chi, psi, omega, sampi, followed by the
-% numeric mark.
-% \item Any number between $1$ and $999$ is obtained by a group of
-% letters denoting the hundreds decades and units, followed by a
-% numeric mark.
-% \item To denote thousands one uses the same method, but this time
-% the mark is placed in front of the letter, and under the baseline
-% (it is inverted by 180 degrees). When a group of letters denoting
-% thousands is followed by a group of letters denoting a number
-% under $1000$, then both marks are used.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% Using these conventions one obtains numbers up to \hbox{999\,999}.
-% \DescribeMacro{\greeknumeral}
-% The command |\greeknumeral| makes it possible to typeset Greek
-% numerals. There is also an
-% \DescribeMacro{\Greeknumeral}
-% ``uppercase'' version of this macro: |\Greeknumeral|.
-%
-% Another system which was in wide use only in Athens, could
-% express any positive number. This system is implemented in
-% package |athnum|.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When the option \Lopt{polutonikogreek} was used, redefine
-% |\CurrentOption| to prevent problems later on.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\gdef\CurrentOption{greek}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{greek} could be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@greek| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@greek\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{greek}
- \adddialect\l@greek0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we declare the |polutoniko| language attribute.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{greek}{polutoniko}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This code adds the expansion of |\extraspolutonikogreek| to
-% |\extrasgreek| and changes the definition of |\today| for Greek
-% to produce polytonic month names.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extrasgreek
- \expandafter{\extraspolutonikogreek}%
- \let\captionsgreek\captionspolutonikogreek
- \let\gr@month\gr@c@month
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We need to take some extra precautions in order not to break
-% older documents which still use the old \Lopt{polutonikogreek}
-% option.
-% \changes{greek-1.3f}{1999/09/29}{Added some code to make older
-% documents work}
-% \changes{greek-1.3g}{2000/02/04}{\cs{noextraspolutonikogreek} was
-% missing}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\l@polutonikogreek\l@greek
- \let\datepolutonikogreek\dategreek
- \let\extraspolutonikogreek\extrasgreek
- \let\noextraspolutonikogreek\noextrasgreek
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Typesetting Greek texts implies that a special set of fonts needs
-% to be used. The current support for greek uses the |cb| fonts
-% created by Claudio Beccari\footnote{Apostolos Syropoulos wishes
-% to thank him for his patience, collaboration, cooments and
-% suggestions.}. The |cb| fonts provide all sorts of \textit{font
-% combinations}. In order to use these fonts we define the Local
-% GReek encoding (LGR, see the file \file{greek.fdd}). We make sure
-% that this encoding is known to \LaTeX, and if it isn't we abort.
-% \changes{greek-1.2a}{1997/10/31}{filename \file{lgrenc.def} now
-% lowercase}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\InputIfFileExists{lgrenc.def}{%
- \message{Loading the definitions for the Greek font encoding}}{%
- \errhelp{I can't find the lgrenc.def file for the Greek fonts}%
- \errmessage{Since I do not know what the LGR encoding means^^J
- I can't typeset Greek.^^J
- I stop here, while you get a suitable lgrenc.def file}\@@end
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch
-% between Greek and Roman encodings.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\greektext}
-% The command |\greektext| will switch from Latin font encoding to
-% the Greek font encoding. This assumes that the `normal' font
-% encoding is a Latin one. This command is a \emph{declaration},
-% for shorter pieces of text the command |\textgreek| should be
-% used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\greektext}{%
- \fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont
- \def\encodingdefault{LGR}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textgreek}
-% This command takes an argument which is then typeset using the
-% requested font encoding. In order to avoid many encoding switches
-% it operates in a local scope.
-% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/09/23}{Added a level of braces to keep
-% encoding change local}
-% \changes{greek-1.3k}{2003/03/19}{Added \cs{leavevmode} as was done
-% with \cs{latintext}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\textgreek}[1]{\leavevmode{\greektext #1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textol}
-% A last aspect of the set of fonts provided with this version of
-% support for typesetting Greek texts is that it contains an
-% outline family. In order to make it available we define the command
-% |\textol|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\outlfamily{\usefont{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n}}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textol}{\outlfamily}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The next step consists in defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Greek language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\greekhyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \changes{greek-1.3h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% Yannis Haralambous has suggested this value
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\@ne\@ne}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Added caption name for proof}
-% \changes{greek-1.3d}{1999/08/28}{Fixed typo, \texttt{bl'epe ep'ishc}
-% instead of \texttt{bl'pe ep'ishc}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsgreek}
-% The macro |\captionsgreek| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{greek-1.3h}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{greek-1.3i}{2000/10/02}{The final sigma in all names appears
-% as `s' instead of `c'.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsgreek{%
- \def\prefacename{Pr'ologos}%
- \def\refname{Anafor'es}%
- \def\abstractname{Per'ilhyh}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliograf'ia}%
- \def\chaptername{Kef'alaio}%
- \def\appendixname{Par'arthma}%
- \def\contentsname{Perieq'omena}%
- \def\listfigurename{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
- \def\listtablename{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
- \def\indexname{Euret'hrio}%
- \def\figurename{Sq'hma}%
- \def\tablename{P'inakas}%
- \def\partname{M'eros}%
- \def\enclname{Sunhmm'ena}%
- \def\ccname{Koinopo'ihsh}%
- \def\headtoname{Pros}%
- \def\pagename{Sel'ida}%
- \def\seename{bl'epe}%
- \def\alsoname{bl'epe ep'ishs}%
- \def\proofname{Ap'odeixh}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glwss'ari}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added caption names for
-% \cs{polutonikogreek}}
-% \changes{greek-1.3d}{1999/08/28}{Fixed typo, \texttt{bl'epe >ep'ishc}
-% instead of \texttt{bl'pe >ep'ishc}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionspolutonikogreek}
-% For texts written in the $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau
-% o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$ (polytonic greek) the translations are
-% the same as above, but some words are spelled differently. For
-% now we just add extra definitions to |\captionsgreek| in order to
-% override the earlier definitions.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\captionspolutonikogreek\captionsgreek
-\addto\captionspolutonikogreek{%
- \def\refname{>Anafor`es}%
- \def\indexname{E<uret'hrio}%
- \def\figurename{Sq~hma}%
- \def\headtoname{Pr`os}%
- \def\alsoname{bl'epe >ep'ishs}%
- \def\proofname{>Ap'odeixh}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@month}
-% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Macro added}
-% \begin{macro}{\dategreek}
-% The macro |\dategreek| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce greek dates. The name of the month is now produced
-% by the macro |\gr@month| since it is needed in the definition
-% of the macro |\Grtoday|.
-% \changes{greek-1.1a}{1997/03/03}{Fixed typo, \texttt{Oktwbr'iou}
-% instead of \texttt{Oktobr'iou}}
-% \changes{greek-1.1d}{1997/10/12}{Macro \cs{gr@month} now produces
-% the name of the month}
-% \changes{greek-1.2a}{1997/10/31}{Use \cs{edef} to define \cs{today}}
-% \changes{greek-1.2b}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gr@month{%
- \ifcase\month\or
- Ianouar'iou\or Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or April'iou\or
- Ma'"iou\or Ioun'iou\or Ioul'iou\or Augo'ustou\or
- Septembr'iou\or Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi}
-\def\dategreek{%
- \def\today{\number\day \space \gr@month\space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@c@greek}
-% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added macro \cs{gr@cl@month}}
-% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added macro
-% \cs{datepolutonikogreek}}
-% \changes{greek-1.3a}{1997/10/28}{removed macro
-% \cs{datepolutonikogreek}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gr@c@month{%
- \ifcase\month\or >Ianouar'iou\or
- Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or >April'iou\or Ma"'iou\or
- >Ioun'iou\or >Ioul'iou\or A>ugo'ustou\or Septembr'iou\or
- >Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Grtoday}
-% \changes{greek-1.1}{1996/10/28}{Added macro \cs{Grtoday}}
-% The macro |\Grtoday| produces the current date, only that the
-% month and the day are shown as greek numerals instead of arabic
-% as it is usually the case.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Grtoday{%
- \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\day}\space
- \gr@c@month \space
- \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasgreek}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasgreek}
-% The macro |\extrasgreek| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Greek language. The macro |\noextrasgreek| is used
-% to cancel the actions of |\extrasgreek|. For the moment these
-% macros switch the fontencoding used and the definition of the
-% internal macros |\@alph| and |\@Alph| because in Greek we do use
-% the Greek numerals.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasgreek{\greektext}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{\latintext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@ill@value}
-% When the argument of |\greeknumeral| has a value outside of the
-% acceptable bounds ($0 < x < 999999$) a warning will be issued
-% (and nothing will be printed).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gr@ill@value#1{%
- \PackageWarning{babel}{Illegal value (#1) for greeknumeral}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\anw@true}
-% \begin{macro}{\anw@false}
-% \begin{macro}{\anw@print}
-% When a a large number with three \emph{trailing} zero's is to be
-% printed those zeros \emph{and} the numeric mark need to be
-% discarded. As each `digit' is processed by a separate macro
-% \emph{and} because the processing needs to be expandable we need
-% some helper macros that help remember to \emph{not} print the
-% numeric mark (|\anwtonos|).
-%
-% The command |\anw@false| switches the printing of the numeric
-% mark off by making |\anw@print| expand to nothing. The command
-% |\anw@true| (re)enables the printing of the numeric marc. These
-% macro's need to be robust in order to prevent improper expansion
-% during writing to files or during |\uppercase|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@false{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@true{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{\anwtonos}}
-\anw@true
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\greeknumeral}
-% The command |\greeknumeral| needs to be \emph{fully} expandable
-% in order to get the right information in auxiliary
-% files. Therefore we use a big |\if|-construction to check the
-% value of the argument and start the parsing at the right level.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\greeknumeral#1{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If the value is negative or zero nothing is printed and a warning
-% is issued.
-% \changes{greek-1.3b}{1999/04/03}{Added \cs{expandafter} and
-% \cs{number} (PR3000) in order to make a counter an acceptable
-% argument}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum#1<\@ne\space\gr@ill@value{#1}%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<10\expandafter\gr@num@i\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<100\expandafter\gr@num@ii\number#1%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We use the available shorthands for 1.000 (|\@m|) and 10.000
-% (|\@M|) to save a few tokens.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum#1<\@m\expandafter\gr@num@iii\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<\@M\expandafter\gr@num@iv\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<100000\expandafter\gr@num@v\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<1000000\expandafter\gr@num@vi\number#1%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If the value is too large, nothing is printed and a warning
-% is issued.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \space\gr@ill@value{#1}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Greeknumeral}
-% The command |\Greeknumeral| prints uppercase greek numerals.
-% The parsing is performed by the macro |\greeknumeral|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Greeknumeral#1{%
- \expandafter\MakeUppercase\expandafter{\greeknumeral{#1}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\greek@alph}
-% \begin{macro}{\greek@Alph}
-% In the previous release of this language definition the
-% commands |\greek@aplh| and |\greek@Alph| were kept just for
-% reasons of compatibility. Here again they become meaningful macros.
-% They are definited in a way that even page numbering with greek
-% numerals is possible. Since the macros |\@alph| and |\@Alph| will
-% lose their original meaning while the Greek option is active, we
-% must save their original value.
-% macros |\@alph|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\latin@alph\@alph
-\let\latin@Alph\@Alph
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we define the Greek versions; the additional |\expandafter|s
-% are needed in order to make sure the table of contents will be
-% correct, e.g., when we have appendixes.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\greek@alph#1{\expandafter\greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}}
-\def\greek@Alph#1{\expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we can set up the switching.
-% \changes{greek-1.1a}{1997/03/03}{removed two superfluous @'s which
-% made \cs{@alph} undefined}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \let\@alph\greek@alph
- \let\@Alph\greek@Alph}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{%
- \let\@alph\latin@alph
- \let\@Alph\latin@Alph}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\greek@roman}
-% \begin{macro}{\greek@Roman}
-% \changes{greek-1.2e}{1999/04/16}{Moved redefinition of \cs{@roman}
-% back to the language specific file}
-% \changes{greek-1.3d}{1999/08/27}{\cs{@roman} and \cs{@Roman} need to
-% be added to \cs{extraspolutonikogreek}}
-% \changes{greek-1.3e}{1999/09/24}{\cs{@roman} and \cs{@Roman} need
-% \emph{not} be in \cs{extraspolutonikogreek} when they are already
-% in \cs{extrasgreek}}
-%
-% To prevent roman numerals being typeset in greek letters we need
-% to adopt the internal \LaTeX\ commands |\@roman| and
-% |\@Roman|. \textbf{Note that this may cause errors where
-% |\@roman| ends up in a situation where it needs to be expanded;
-% problems are known to exist with the AMS document classes.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\latin@roman\@roman
-\let\latin@Roman\@Roman
-\def\greek@roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@roman{#1}}}
-\def\greek@Roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@Roman{#1}}}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \let\@roman\greek@roman
- \let\@Roman\greek@Roman}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{%
- \let\@roman\latin@roman
- \let\@Roman\latin@Roman}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\greek@amp}
-% \begin{macro}{\ltx@amp}
-% The greek fonts do not contain an ampersand, so the \LaTeX\
-% command |\&| dosn't give the expected result if we do not do
-% something about it.
-% \changes{greek-1.2f}{1999/04/25}{Now switch the definition of
-% \cs{\&} from \cs{extrasgreek}}
-% \changes{greek-1.3c}{1999/05/17}{Added a missing opening brace}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\ltx@amp\&
-\def\greek@amp{\textlatin{\ltx@amp}}
-\addto\extrasgreek{\let\&\greek@amp}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{\let\&\ltx@amp}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% What is left now is the definition of a set of macros to produce
-% the various digits.
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@i}
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@ii}
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@iii}
-% \changes{greek-1.2b}{1997/11/13}{No longer use \cs{\let} in the
-% expansion of the \cs{gr@num@x} macros as they ned to be
-% expandable}
-% As there is no representation for $0$ in this system the zeros
-% are simply discarded. When we have a large number with three
-% \emph{trailing} zero's also the numeric mark is discarded.
-% Therefore these macros need to pass the information to each other
-% about the (non-)translation of a zero.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gr@num@i#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\anw@print}
-\def\gr@num@ii#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@i}
-\def\gr@num@iii#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi
- \ifnum#1=\z@\anw@false\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@ii}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@iv}
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@v}
-% \begin{macro}{\gr@num@vi}
-% The first three `digits' always have the numeric mark, except
-% when one is discarded because it's value is zero.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\gr@num@iv#1{%
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi
- \gr@num@iii}
-\def\gr@num@v#1{%
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi
- \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi
- \gr@num@iv}
-\def\gr@num@vi#1{%
- \katwtonos
- \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi
- \gr@num@v}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\greek@tilde}
-% \changes{greek-1.0c}{1997/02/19}{Added command}
-% In greek typesetting we need a number of characters with more
-% than one accent. In the underlying family of fonts (the
-% |cb| fonts) this is solved using Knuth's ligature
-% mechanism.
-% Characters we need to have ligatures with are the tilde, the
-% acute and grave accent characters, the rough and smooth breathings,
-% the subscript, and the double quote character.
-% In text input the |~| is normaly used to produce an
-% unbreakable space. The command |\~| normally produces a tilde
-% accent. For polytonic Greek we change the definition of |\~|
-% to produce the tilde character itself, making sure it has category
-% code 12.
-% \changes{greek-1.3k}{2003/04/10}{Make sure the character `!' is not
-% active during the definition of \cs{greek@tilde}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
- \@ifundefined{active@char\string!}{}{\catcode`!=12\relax}
- \catcode`\~=12
- \lccode`\!=`\~
- \lowercase{\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\greek@tilde{!}}\x}
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{%
- \babel@save\~\let\~\greek@tilde}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% In order to get correct hyphenation we need to set the lower case
-% code of a number of characters. The `v' character has a special
-% usage for the |cb| fonts: in fact this ligature mechanism detects
-% the end of a word and assures that a final sigma is typeset with
-% the proper sign wich is different from that of an initial or
-% medial sigma; the `v 'after an \textit{isolated} sigma fools
-% the ligature mechanism in order to typeset $\sigma$ in place of
-% $\varsigma$. Because of this we make sure its lowercase code is
-% not changed. For ``modern'' greek we have to deal only with |'|
-% and |"| and so things are easy.
-% \changes{greek-1.1c}{1997/04/30}{fixed two typos}
-% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Added lowercase code for v}
-% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Definitions for ``modern'' Greek are
-% now the definitions of ``Polutoniko'' Greek}
-% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added lowercase codes for ``modern''
-% greek}
-% \changes{greek-1.3e}{1999/09/24}{\cs{extrasgreek} and
-% \cs{extraspolutonikogreek} should be complementary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`v}\lccode`v=`v%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\'}\lccode`\'=`\'%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\"}\lccode`\"=`\"}
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\<}\lccode`\<=`\<%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\>}\lccode`\>=`\>%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\~}\lccode`\~=`\~%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\|}\lccode`\|=`\|%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\`}\lccode`\`=`\`}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And in order to get rid of all accents and breathings when a
-% string is |\uppercase|d we also change a number of uppercase
-% codes.
-% \changes{greek-1.1b}{1997/03/06}{Added setting of \cs{uccode}s
-% (after \file{kdgreek.sty})}
-% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Added uppercase code for special
-% letter ``v''. Uppercase code for accents is now \texttt{9f},
-% instead of \texttt{ff}}
-% \changes{greek-1.2}{1997/10/28}{Added uppercase codes for ``modern''
-% Greek. The old codes are now for ``Polutoniko'' Greek}
-% \changes{greek-1.3e}{1999/09/24}{\cs{extrasgreek} and
-% \cs{extraspolutonikogreek} should be complementary}
-% {\catcode`|=12\relax\gdef\indexbar{\cs{|}}}
-% \changes{greek-1.3g}{1999/11/17}{uc code of \indexbar{} is now just
-% \indexbar{} to reflect recent changes in the cb fonts}
-% \changes{greek-1.3i}{2000/10/02}{uc code of `v' is switched to V
-% so that mixed text appears correctly in headers.}
-% \changes{greek-1.3j}{2001/02/03}{Because other languages might
-% make the caret active, we can't use the double caret notation
-% here}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\"}\uccode`\"=`\"%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\'}\uccode`\'=159} %% 159 == ^^9f
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\~}\uccode`\~=159%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\>}\uccode`\>=159%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\<}\uccode`\<=159%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\|}\uccode`\|=`\|%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\`}\uccode`\`=159}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For this to work we make the character |^^9f| a shorthand that
-% expands to nothing. In order for this to work we need to make a
-% character look like |^^9f| in \TeX's eyes. The trick is to have
-% another character and assign it a different lowercase code. The
-% execute the macros needed in a |\lowercase| environment. Usually
-% the tile |~| character is used for such purposes. Before we do
-% this we save it's original lowercase code to restore it once
-% we're done.
-% \changes{greek-1.1b}{1997/03/06}{Added shorthand for \cs{char255}}
-% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Shorthand is changed. Active
-% character is now \cs{char159}}
-% \changes{greek-1.2a}{1997/10/31}{Need shorthand to exist for
-% ``monotoniko'' Greek, not ``polutoniko'' Greek}
-% \changes{greek-1.3j}{2001/02/03}{Ues the tilde as an alias for
-% character 159}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@tempcnta=\lccode`\~
-\lccode`\~=159
-\lowercase{%
- \initiate@active@char{~}%
- \declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{}}
-\lccode`\~=\@tempcnta
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We can also make the tilde character itself expand to a tilde with
-% category code 12 to make the typing of texts easier.
-% \changes{greek-1.1b}{1997/03/06}{Made tilde expand to a tilde with
-% \cs{catcode 12}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{\languageshorthands{greek}}%
-\declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{\greek@tilde}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-%
-% \changes{greek-1.1c}{1997/03/10}{Added a couple of symbols, needed
-% for \cs{greeknumeral}}
-% \changes{greek-1.1e}{1997/10/12}{Most symbols are removed and are
-% now defined in package grsymb}
-% \changes{greek-1.2c}{1998/06/26}{Package grsymb has been eliminated
-% because the CB fonts v2.0 do not inlcude certain symbols and so
-% the remaining symbol definitions have been moved here}
-% We now define a few symbols which are used in the typesetting of
-% greek numerals, as well as some other symbols which are usefull,
-% such as the $\epsilon\upsilon\rho\omega$ symbol, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\anwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FE\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\katwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FF\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\qoppa}{LGR}{\char"12\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\stigma}{LGR}{\char"06\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\sampi}{LGR}{\char"1B\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Since the |~| cannot be used to produce an unbreakable white
-% space we must redefine at least the commands |\fnum@figure| and
-% |\fnum@table| so they do not produce a |~| instead of white
-% space.
-% \changes{greek-1.3l}{2004/02/19}{Commented these lines out as this
-% change has made it into \LaTeX{} itself.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\def\fnum@figure{\figurename\nobreakspace\thefigure}
-%\def\fnum@table{\tablename\nobreakspace\thetable}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{greek-1.0b}{1996/11/02}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.fdd
deleted file mode 100644
index ab884f0b51a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.fdd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,651 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{183}
-%
-% \iffalse This is a META comment
-%
-%<*fdd>
-\ProvidesFile{greek.fdd}
-%</fdd>
-%
-%<LGRenc, >\ProvidesFile{lgrenc.def}
-%<LGRcmr, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmr.fd}
-%<LGRcmro, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmro.fd}
-%<LGRcmtt, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmtt.fd}
-%<LGRcmss, >\ProvidesFile{lgrcmss.fd}
-%<LGRlcmss, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmss.fd}
-%<LGRlcmtt, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmtt.fd}
-%<LGRlmr, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmr.fd}
-%<LGRlmro, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmro.fd}
-%<LGRlmss, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmss.fd}
-%<LGRlmtt, >\ProvidesFile{lgrlmtt.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
-%<LGRenc, > Greek Encoding]
-%<LGRcmr, > Greek Computer Modern]
-%<LGRcmro, > Greek Computer Modern Outline]
-%<LGRcmtt, > Greek Computer Modern Typewriter]
-%<LGRcmss, > Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif]
-%<LGRlcmss, > Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif slide sizes]
-%<LGRlcmtt, > Greek Computer Modern Typewriter slide sizes]
-%<LGRlmr, > Greek Latin Modern]
-%<LGRlmro, > Greek Latin Modern Outline]
-%<LGRlmtt, > Greek Latin Modern Typewriter]
-%<LGRlmss, > Greek Latin Modern Sans Serif]
-%<*fdd>
-]
-%</fdd>
-%
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\GetFileInfo{greek.fdd}
-\providecommand\dsc{\expandafter{\normalfont\scshape docstrip}}
-\title{The file \texttt{greek.fdd} for use with
- \LaTeXe.\thanks{This file has version
- number \fileversion, dated \filedate.}}
-\date{\filedate}
-\author{Claudio Beccari, Apostolos Syropoulos and Johannes Braams}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\begin{document}
-\maketitle
-\DocInput{greek.fdd}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-%
-%\fi
-%
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.0}{1997/10/12}{Changed to use Claudio Beccari's
-% fonts}
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.1}{1997/10/31}{Produce files with lowercase
-% names}
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.2}{1998/05/16}{Added support for CB fonts v2.xx}
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.3}{2008/06/17}{Added support for CB fonts v2.xx
-% with extra families and Latin Modern compatibility}
-%
-% \section{Introduction}
-%
-% The file `greek.fdd' provides font definitions for typesetting
-% greek texts. This version of the file has been updated, since
-% now the official fonts for the \Lopt{greek} option of the
-% \textsf{babel} package are the |cb| fonts.
-%
-% The font definition files prduced from this documented source
-% make the |cb| fonts compatible with both the Computer Modern
-% collection (both CM and EC) and the Latin Modern one.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \section{The \texttt{docstrip} modules}
-% The following modules are used to direct \texttt{docstrip} in
-% generating external files:
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\
-% LGRenc & The encoding definition file\\
-% LGRcmr & The Roman font shapes\\
-% LGRcmro & The Outline Roman font shapes\\
-% LGRcmss & The Sans Serif font shapes\\
-% LGRcmtt & The typewriter font shapes\\
-% LGRlcmss & The slide size Sans Serif font shapes\\
-% LGRlcmtt & The slide size typewriter fonts\\
-% LGRlmr & The Roman font shapes\\
-% LGRlmro & The Outline Roman font shapes\\
-% LGRlmss & The Sans Serif font shapes\\
-% LGRlmtt & The typewriter font shapes\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% A typical \dsc\ command file would then have entries like:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\generateFile{lgrcmr.fd}{t}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmr}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \section{The encoding definition file}
-%
-% This file defines the fontencoding \texttt{LGR} for greek
-% text. Moreover, it provides the |\EC@family| macro, since the
-% Greek fonts have the same naming conventions as the Latin
-% ones produced by J\"{o}rg Knappen that are now the official
-% fonts of \LaTeXe. It also makes some definitions to ensure
-% that commands such as |\TeX|, |\copyright| give ``expected
-% results'' (\TeX, \copyright).
-%
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.1}{1997/10/31}{Removed some unwanted spaces}
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.2e}{2000/10/26}{Added more font sizes to make
-% the CB fonts compatible with the EC fonts}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRenc>
-\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}
-\DeclareFontSubstitution{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\DeclareErrorFont{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we define a few commands in the \texttt{LGR} encoding.
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.2c}{1999/04/05}{Fixed typos, \cs{textrademark}
-% misses a `t', \cs{copyright} should be \cs{textcopyright}}
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.2d}{1999/04/25}{removed redefinition of \cs{\&}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LGR}{%
- \textcircled{\textlatin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LGR}{%
- \textcircled{\textlatin{\textsc r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LGR}{%
- \textsuperscript{\textlatin{TM}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\SS}{LGR}{%
- \textlatin{SS}}
-%</LGRenc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section{The font definition files}
-%
-% In the previous release of the greek option we used
-% the \texttt{kd} family of fonts, which were made by
-% K.J.~Dryllerakis. Now, we have switched to the |cb| fonts by
-% Claudio Beccari, mainly because these fonts are complete, in any
-% sense of the word, and moreover fit nicely with the Computer
-% Modern font family.
-%
-% We begin with the definitions for the Greek Computer Modern fonts.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRcmr>
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmr}{}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} {grmn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sl} {grmo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{it} {grmi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sc} {grmc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ui} {grmu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{li} {grml}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{rs} {gmmn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ro} {gmmo}
-%
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sc} {grxc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n} {grxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sl} {grxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{it} {grxi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ui} {grxu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{li} {grxl}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{rs} {gmxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ro} {gmxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{b}{li} {grbl}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{n}
- {<->ssub*cmr/bx/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{sc}
- {<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{}
-%</LGRcmr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The greek outline family is now complete with the same five
-% shapes and the two series as the roman family.
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.2b}{1999/04/03}{grmu should be gomu here...}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRcmro>
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmro}{}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n} {gomn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sl} {gomo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{it} {gomi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sc} {gomc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{ui} {gomu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sc} {goxc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{n} {goxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sl} {goxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{it} {goxi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{ui} {goxu}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{n}
- {<->ssub*cmro/bx/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{sc}
- {<->ssub*cmro/bx/sc}{}
-%</LGRcmro>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then we have the \texttt{typewriter} fonts...
-%
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.1}{1997/10/31}{Set the \cs{hyphenchar} of the tt
-% font to $-1$}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRcmtt>
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}% \hyphenchar = -1
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{n} {gttn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sl} {gtto}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sc} {gttc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{it} {gtti}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{ui} {gttu}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sl}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sl}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sc}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{ui}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/ui}{}
-%</LGRcmtt>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we come to the Sans Serif font to be used in greek
-% texts.
-% \changes{greekfdd-2.2b}{1999/04/03}{the last two lines had m instead
-% of x in the fontname}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRcmss>
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmss}{}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{n} {gsmn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sl} {gsmo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sc} {gsmc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{it} {gsmi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{ui} {gsmu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{iv} {gsme}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{uv} {gsma}
-%
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{n} {gsxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sl} {gsxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sc} {gsxc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{it} {gsxi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{ui} {gsxu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{iv} {gsxe}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{uv} {gsxa}
-%</LGRcmss>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We have finished with the ``regular'' fonts. We now provide the fonts
-% definition files for the fonts used only in slides. First comes the
-% typewriter font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRlcmtt>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gltn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{In}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gljn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glto}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Iit}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gljo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- ssub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- ssub * lcmtt/m/Iit}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gltc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gljc}{}
-%</LGRlcmtt>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And then the Sans Serif font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRlcmss>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmss}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{n}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{In}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glin}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glio}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{ui}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmu}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Iit}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glic}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwc}{}
-%</LGRlcmss>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And now come the font definition files compatible with the Latin
-% Modern family names and sizes; notice that the Latin Modern fonts
-% are available only as scalable PostScript fonts, therefore they
-% cope with continuous scaling; also the |cb| fonts are distributed
-% as scalable PostScript fonts, so it makes sense to use the same
-% size and family specifications as the LM fonts.
-%
-% We start with the Latin Modern Regular.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRlmr>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmr}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{n}%
- {<-5.5> grmn0500 <5.5-6.5> grmn0600
- <6.5-7.5> grmn0700 <7.5-8.5> grmn0800
- <8.5-9.5> grmn0900 <9.5-11> grmn1000
- <11-15> grmn1200 <15-> grmn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{rs}%
- {<-5.5> gmmn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmmn0600
- <6.5-7.5> gmmn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmmn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gmmn0900 <9.5-11> gmmn1000
- <11-15> gmmn1200 <15-> gmmn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sl}%
- {<-8.5> grmo0800 <8.5-9.5> grmo0900
- <9.5-11> grmo1000 <11-15> grmo1200
- <15-> grmo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ro}%
- {<-8.5> gmmo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmmo0900
- <9.5-11> gmmo1000 <11-15> gmmo1200
- <15-> gmmo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{it}%
- {<-7.5> grmi0700
- <7.5-8.5> grmi0800 <8.5-9.5> grmi0900
- <9.5-11> grmi1000 <11-15> grmi1200
- <15-> grmi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{li}%
- {<-7.5> grml0700
- <7.5-8.5> grml0800 <8.5-9.5> grml0900
- <9.5-11> grml1000 <11-15> grml1200
- <15-> grml1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ui}%
- {<-7.5> grmu0700
- <7.5-8.5> grmu0800 <8.5-9.5> grmu0900
- <9.5-11> grmu1000 <11-15> grmu1200
- <15-> grmu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> grmc0700
- <7.5-8.5> grmc0800 <8.5-9.5> grmc0900
- <9.5-11> grmc1000 <11-15> grmc1200
- <15-> grmc1728}{}
-% slanted CSC is changed to unslanted CSC
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{scsl}%
- {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{}
-%%%%%%%% bold and bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{n}
- {<-5.5> grxn0500 <5.5-6.5> grx0600
- <6.5-7.5> grxn0700 <7.5-8.5> grxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> grxn0900 <9.5-11> grxn1000
- <11-15> grxn1200 <15-> grxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{rs}
- {<-5.5> gmxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmx0600
- <6.5-7.5> gmxn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gmxn0900 <9.5-11> gmxn1000
- <11-15> gmxn1200 <15-> gmxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{it}
- {<-7.5> grxi0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxi0800 <8.5-9.5> grxi0900
- <9.5-11> grxi1000 <11-15> grxi1200
- <15-> grxi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{b}{li}
- {<-7.5> grbl0700
- <7.5-8.5> grbl0800 <8.5-9.5> grbl0900
- <9.5-11> grbl1000 <11-15> grbl1200
- <15-> grbl1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{li}
- {<-7.5> grxl0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxl0800 <8.5-9.5> grxl0900
- <9.5-11> grxl1000 <11-15> grxl1200
- <15-> grxl1728
- }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ui}
- {<-7.5> grxu0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxu0800 <8.5-9.5> grxu0900
- <9.5-11> grxu1000 <11-15> grxu1200
- <15-> grxu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sl}
- {<-8.5> grxo0800 <8.5-9.5> grxo0900
- <9.5-11> grxo1000 <11-15> grxo1200
- <15-> grxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ro}
- {<-8.5> gmxo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmxo0900
- <9.5-11> gmxo1000 <11-15> gmxo1200
- <15-> gmxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> grxc0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxc0800 <8.5-9.5> grxc0900
- <9.5-11> grxc1000 <11-15> grxc1200
- <15-> grxc1728}{}
-%</LGRlmr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then the Latin Modern Regular Outline
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRlmro>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmro}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{n}%
- {<-5.5> gomn0500 <5.5-6.5> gomn0600
- <6.5-7.5> gomn0700 <7.5-8.5> gomn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gomn0900 <9.5-11> gomn1000
- <11-15> gomn1200 <15-> gmr1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sl}%
- {<-8.5> gomo0800 <8.5-9.5> gomo0900
- <9.5-11> gomo1000 <11-15> gomo1200
- <15-> gomo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{it}%
- {<-7.5> gomi0700
- <7.5-8.5> gomi0800 <8.5-9.5> gomi0900
- <9.5-11> gomi1000 <11-15> gomi1200
- <15-> gomi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{ui}%
- {<-7.5> gomu0700
- <7.5-8.5> gomu0800 <8.5-9.5> gomu0900
- <9.5-11> gomu1000 <11-15> gomu1200
- <15-> gomu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> gomc0700
- <7.5-8.5> gomc0800 <8.5-9.5> gomc0900
- <9.5-11> gomc1000 <11-15> gomc1200
- <15-> gomc1728}{}
-% slanted CSC is changed to unslanted CSC
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{scsl}%
- {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{}
-%%%%%%%% bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{n}
- {<-5.5> goxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gox0600
- <6.5-7.5> goxn0700 <7.5-8.5> goxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> goxn0900 <9.5-11> goxn1000
- <11-15> goxn1200 <15-> goxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{it}
- {<-7.5> goxi0700
- <7.5-8.5> goxi0800 <8.5-9.5> goxi0900
- <9.5-11> goxi1000 <11-> goxi1200
- <15-> goxi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{ui}
- {<-7.5> goxu0700
- <7.5-8.5> goxu0800 <8.5-9.5> goxu0900
- <9.5-11> goxu1000 <11-> goxu1200
- <15-> goxu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sl}
- {<-8.5> goxo0800 <8.5-9.5> goxo0900
- <9.5-11> goxo1000 <11-15> goxo1200
- <15-> goxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> goxc0700
- <7.5-8.5> goxc0800 <8.5-9.5> goxc0900
- <9.5-11> goxc1000 <11-15> goxc1200
- <15-> goxc1728}{}
-%</LGRlmro>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now the Latin Modern Sans Serif
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRlmss>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmss}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{n}
- {<-8.5> gsmn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmn0900 <9.5-11> gsmn1000
- <11-15.5> gsmn1200 <15.5-> gsmn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{it}
- {<-8.5> gsmi0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmi0900 <9.5-11> gsmi1000
- <11-15.5> gsmi1200 <15.5-> gsmi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{iv}
- {<-8.5> gsme0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsme0900 <9.5-11> gsme1000
- <11-15.5> gsme1200 <15.5-> gsme1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{ui}
- {<-8.5> gsmu0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmu0900 <9.5-11> gsmu1000
- <11-15.5> gsmu1200 <15.5-> gsmu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{uv}
- {<-8.5> gsma0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsma0900 <9.5-11> gsma1000
- <11-15.5> gsma1200 <15.5-> gsma1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sl}
- {<-8.5> gsmo0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmo0900 <9.5-11> gsmo1000
- <11-15.5> gsmo1200 <15.5-> gsmo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sc}
- {<-8.5> gsmc0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmc0900 <9.5-11> gsmc1000
- <11-15.5> gsmc1200 <15.5-> gsmc1728}{}
-%%%%%%%% semibold condensed series substituted with medium series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{n}
-{<-> ssub*lmss/m/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{sl}
-{<-> ssub*/lmss/m/sl}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{it}
-{<->ssub*lmss/m/sl}{}
-%%%%%%%%% bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{n}
- {<-8.5> gsxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxn0900 <9.5-11> gsxn1000
- <11-15.5> gsxn1200 <15.5-> gsxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sl}
- {<-8.5> gsxo0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxo0900 <9.5-11> gsxo1000
- <11-15.5> gsxo1200 <15.5-> gsxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{it}
- {<-8.5> gsxi0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxi0900 <9.5-11> gsxi1000
- <11-15.5> gsxi1200 <15.5-> gsxi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{iv}
- {<-8.5> gsxe0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxe0900 <9.5-11> gsxe1000
- <11-15.5> gsxe1200 <15.5-> gsxe1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{ui}
- {<-8.5> gsxu0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxu0900 <9.5-11> gsxu1000
- <11-15.5> gsxu1200 <15.5-> gsxu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{uv}
- {<-8.5> gsxa0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxa0900 <9.5-11> gsxa1000
- <11-15.5> gsxa1200 <15.5-> gsxa1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sc}
- {<-8.5> gsxc0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxc0900 <9.5-11> gsxc1000
- <11-15.5> gsxc1200 <15.5-> gsxc1728}{}
-%</LGRlmss>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And finally the Latin Modern typewriter font.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LGRlmtt>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{n}
- {<-8.5> gttn0800 <8.5-9.5> gttn0900
- <9.5-11> gttn1000 <11-15> gttn1200
- <15-> gttn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{it}
- {<-> ssub*lgr/lmtt/m/sl}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sl}
- {<-8.5> gtto0800 <8.5-9.5> gtto0900
- <9.5-11> gtto1000 <11-15> gtto1200
- <15-> gtto1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sc}
- {<-8.5> gttc0800 <8.5-9.5> gttc0900
- <9.5-11> gttc1000 <11-15> gttc1200
- <15-> gttc1728}{}
-% shape undefined, substituted with unslanted
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{scsl}{<-> ssub*lmtt/m/sc}{}
-%</LGRlmtt>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The slide fonts have not been mapped to the Latin Modern
-% families and sizes, because there are no slide fonts in the LM
-% collection. Moreover nowadays the traditional slide fonts are
-% very seldom used, since slides are produced with other classes
-% different from the class |slides|, and they use different fonts.
-%
-% The next line goes into all files and in addition prevents \dsc{}
-% from adding any further code from the main source file (such as a
-% character table.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\endinput
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 69e4a247c2c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/greek.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,163 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2008/07/06}
-\def\batchfile{greek.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{greek.ldf}{\from{greek.dtx}{code}}
- \file{athnum.sty}{\from{athnum.dtx}{package}}
- \file{grmath.sty}{\from{grmath.dtx}{package}}
- \file{grsymb.sty}{\from{grsymb.dtx}{package}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-\generate{\file{lgrenc.def}{\from{greek.fdd}{LGRenc}}
- \file{lgrcmr.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmr}}
- \file{lgrcmro.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmro}}
- \file{lgrcmtt.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmtt}}
- \file{lgrcmss.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRcmss}}
- \file{lgrlcmtt.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlcmtt}}
- \file{lgrlcmss.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlcmss}}
- \file{lgrlmr.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmr}}
- \file{lgrlmro.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmro}}
- \file{lgrlmtt.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmtt}}
- \file{lgrlmss.fd}{\from{greek.fdd}{fd,LGRlmss}}
- }
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grmath.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grmath.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 000daadcd86..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grmath.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,168 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-%% \CheckSum{126}
-%
-%\iffalse
-%
-%% This is file `grmath.sty'
-%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos.
-%% All rights reserved.
-% You are allowed to modify this file as long the initial copyright notice
-% appears in the modified file.
-%
-% Please report errors or suggestions for improvement to
-%
-% Apostolos Syropoulos
-% 366, 28th October Str.
-% GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE
-%
-% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr
-%
-%\fi
-%\iffalse
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\GetFileInfo{grmath.drv}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{grmath.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%
-% \changes{grmath-1.2}{2001/02/12}{Package provides options ``grlog''
-% (default) and ``enlog'' that create Greek and Latin names
-% log functions}
-%
-% \title{Greek log-like Operators}
-% \author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\
-% 366, 28th October Str.\\
-% GR-671 00 Xanthi, HELLAS\\
-% E-mail: \texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}}
-% \date{2001/02/12}
-% \maketitle
-%
-% \MakeShortVerb{|}
-% \section{What is this all about?}
-%
-% In Greece, until recently, it was common practice to write down most
-% log-like functions as abbreviations of their Greek names. Consequently,
-% high school students and even university freshmen were not familiar with
-% the Latin names employed in international literature. However, this practice
-% is fading away in universities but it is still in wide use in books for
-% high schools, mainly because the Latin names would produce nothing but
-% confusion. The package |grmath| redefines most log-like definitions
-% so that they produce the Greek name, instead of the Latin one. The package
-% can be used only in conjunction with the |greek| option of the |babel|
-% package. The new option |enlog| allows one to keep the Latin names for
-% the log functions.
-% \StopEventually
-%
-% \section{The Implementation}
-%
-% As usual we must first identify ourselves.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*package>
-\ProvidesPackage{grmath}[2001/02/12\space v1.2]
-\typeout{Package: `grmath' v1.2\space <2001/02/12> (A. Syropoulos)}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next thing we do is to process the options. The default option
-% ``grlog'' generates Greek names for log functions and the ``enlog''
-% option generates Latin names for log functions.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareOption{grlog}{%
- \def\log{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_{10}}\nolimits}
- \def\ln{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_%
- {\mathgroup\symoperators e}}\nolimits}
-}
-\DeclareOption{enlog}{%
- \def\log{\mathop{\operator@font log}\nolimits}
- \def\ln{\mathop{\operator@font ln}\nolimits}
-}
-\ExecuteOptions{grlog}
-\ProcessOptions
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we check to see if the |babel| package is loaded with at least
-% the |greek| option. In case it isn't, we opt to produce an error message.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{%
- \PackageError{grmath}{%
- `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak
- package hasn't been loaded}{%
- The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak
- are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak
- typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak
- it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax
- }}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We define the mathematical font which will be used to typeset
-% the log-like functions.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareSymbolFont{groperators}{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\SetSymbolFont{groperators}{bold}{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We are now ready to proceed with the redefinitions of the log-like
-% operator names.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators hm}\nolimits}
-\def\cos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sun}\nolimits}
-\def\tan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators ef}\nolimits}
-\def\arcsin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxhm}\nolimits}
-\def\arccos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsun}\nolimits}
-\def\arctan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxef}\nolimits}
-\def\cot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sf}\nolimits}
-\def\sec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators tem}\nolimits}
-\def\csc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators stem}\nolimits}
-\def\gcd{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators MKD}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In the standard \LaTeX\ distribution there is no provision for a
-% Least Common Multiple (lcm) log-like operator. Since, this operator
-% appears quite often in greek literature we opt to include it. Moreover,
-% we include three more log-like functions: |\arccot|, |\arcsec| and
-% |\arccsc|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lcm{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators EKP}\nolimits}
-\def\arccot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsf}\nolimits}
-\def\arcsec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxtem}\nolimits}
-\def\arccsc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxstem}\nolimits}
-%</package>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section*{Dedication}
-% I would like to dedicate this piece of work to my son
-% \begin{center}Demetrios-Georgios.\end{center}
-% \Finale
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grsymb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grsymb.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 189ca4afe5c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/grsymb.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,131 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-%% \CheckSum{55}
-%
-%\iffalse
-%
-%% This is file `grsymb.sty'
-%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos.
-%% All rights reserved.
-% You are allowed to modify this file as long the initial copyright notice
-% appears in the modified file.
-%
-% Please report errors or suggestions for improvement to
-%
-% Apostolos Syropoulos
-% 366, 28th October Str.
-% GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE
-%
-% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr
-%
-%\fi
-%\iffalse
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\GetFileInfo{grsymb.drv}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{grsymb.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%\fi
-%
-% \title{Greek Symbols}
-% \author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\
-% 366, 28th October Str.\\
-% GR-671 00 Xanthi, HELLAS\\
-% E-mail: \texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}}
-% \date{1997/09/21}
-% \maketitle
-%
-% \MakeShortVerb{|}
-% \section{Introduction}
-%
-% There are certain symbols which were in use in ancient Greece and which
-% are of use to scholars even today. These symbols are various forms of
-% qoppa and stigma, and the letter digamma. These special symbols are
-% provided by the \texttt{cb} fonts which are now the official fonts for
-% the \texttt{greek} option of the \texttt{babel} package. Moreover, these
-% fonts provide a few more symbols such as a symbol for Euro, etc. The `tao'
-% symbol although is not a greek symbol, survives mainly for reasons of
-% compatibility. This little package provides access commands for these
-% symbols. The package can be used only in conjunction with the |greek|
-% option of the |babel| package.
-%
-% \StopEventually
-%
-% \section{The Implementation}
-%
-% First comes the identification part.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*package>
-\ProvidesPackage{grsymb}[1997/09/21\space v1.0]
-\typeout{Package: `grsymb' v1.0\space <1997/09/21> (A. Syropoulos)}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Next we check to see if the |babel| package is loaded with at least
-% the |greek| option. In case it isn't, we opt to produce an error message.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{%
- \PackageError{grsymb}{%
- `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak
- package hasn't been loaded}{%
- The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak
- are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak
- typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak
- it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now, we proceed with the definitions of the various symbols. Please note
-% that |\ddigamma| is intensionally spelled erroneously, in order to avoid
-% conflicts with the command |\digamma| that is defined by the package
-% |amssymb|. Although the tao symbol is not a greek symbol, it is included
-% mainly for reasons of compatibility.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\tao}{LGR}{\char"01\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Qoppa}{LGR}{\char"14\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\varqoppa}{LGR}{\char"13\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Sampi}{LGR}{\char"1A\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Stigma}{LGR}{\char"08\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\VarQoppa}{LGR}{\char"15\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax}
-%</package>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \section*{Dedication}
-% I would like to dedicate this piece of work to my son
-% \begin{center}Demetrios-Georgios.\end{center}
-% \Finale
-\endinput \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/heb209.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/heb209.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 69101ca7660..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/heb209.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,165 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{8}
-%
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva.
-%
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-%\fi
-% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}}
-% \providecommand\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-% \GetFileInfo{heb209.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{heb209~1.0a}{1998/01/06}{%
-% Initial version. Provides hebrew\_newcode, hebrew\_oldcode and
-% hebrew\_p style files for \LaTeX~2.09 (by Boris Lavva)}
-%
-% \section{Hebrew in \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility mode}\label{sec:heb209}
-%
-% |\documentstyle| command in the preamble of \LaTeX\ document
-% indicates that it is a \LaTeX~2.09 document, and should be processed
-% in \emph{compatibility mode}. In such documents, one of the following
-% three Hebrew style options can be included:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item \texttt{hebrew\_newcode} indicates that document will use UNIX
-% ISO 8859-8 or Windows cp1255 input encoding, i.e.\ \emph{Alef}
-% letter will be represented as 224.
-% \item \texttt{hebrew\_p} indicates that document is encoded with IBM
-% PC cp862 encoding, i.e.\ \emph{Alef} letter will be represented as
-% 128.
-% \item \texttt{hebrew\_oldcode} indicates that document uses old 7-bit
-% encoding, as defined in Israeli Standard 960, i.e.\ \emph{Alef} is
-% character number 96.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% Note, that other hebrew-related styles, such as \texttt{hebcal} can
-% be included \emph{after} the abovenamed Hebrew style option, for
-% example:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\documentstyle[12pt,hebrew_p,hebcal]{report}|.
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% Any Hebrew document which compiled under \LaTeX~2.09 should compile
-% under compatibility mode, unless it uses low-level commands such as
-% |\tenrm|.
-%
-% \subsection{The {\normalfont\dst{}} modules}
-%
-% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
-% \dst{} in generating the external files:
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{ll}
-% newcode & produce \texttt{hebrew\_newcode.sty} \\
-% pccode & produce \texttt{hebrew\_p.sty} \\
-% oldcode & produce \texttt{hebrew\_oldcode.sty}
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% \subsection{A driver for this document}
-%
-% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
-% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you
-% are currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by
-% the \dst{} program.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\title{Hebrew \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility style files}
-\author{Boris Lavva}
-\date{Printed \today}
-\begin{document}
- \maketitle
- \DocInput{heb209.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \fi
-%
-% \subsection{Obsolete style files}
-%
-% For each of the Hebrew \LaTeX~2.09 Hebrew styles, we produce a
-% file which uses correct input encoding and calls \babel\ with
-% Hebrew and English language options.
-% This means that any styles which say |\input hebrew_newcode.sty|
-% or |\documentstyle[|\ldots|hebrew_newcode|\ldots|]{|\ldots|}|
-% should still work.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*newcode|pccode|oldcode>
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-%</newcode|pccode|oldcode>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*newcode>
-\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_newcode.sty}
-\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc}
-%</newcode>
-%<*pccode>
-\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_p.sty}
-\RequirePackage[cp862]{inputenc}
-%</pccode>
-%<*oldcode>
-\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_oldcode.sty}
-\RequirePackage[si960]{inputenc}
-%</oldcode>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*newcode|pccode|oldcode>
-\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel}
-%</newcode|pccode|oldcode>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebinp.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebinp.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index a6a9d60c394..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebinp.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,550 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{446}
-%
-% \iffalse
-%<si960> \ProvidesFile{si960.def}
-%<8859-8> \ProvidesFile{8859-8.def}
-%<cp862> \ProvidesFile{cp862.def}
-%<cp1255> \ProvidesFile{cp1255.def}
-%<*driver>
-\ProvidesFile{hebinp.drv}
-%</driver>
-% \fi
-% \ProvidesFile{hebinp.dtx}
- [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file]
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-% \fi
-%
-% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}}
-% \GetFileInfo{hebinp.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{hebinp~1.0a}{1997/12/07}{%
-% Initial version. Provides 8859-8, cp862, cp1255, and old 7-bit
-% input encodings (by Boris Lavva)}
-% \changes{hebinp~1.1}{2001/02/27}{%
-% Renamed hebrew letters: \cs{alef} to \cs{hebalef} etc.
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebinp~1.1a}{2001/07/22}{%
-% Renamed CP1255 nikud \cs{patah} to \cs{hebpatah etc}.
-% Added the macro \cs{DisableNikud} - may not be a good idea
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-%
-% \section{Hebrew input encodings}\label{sec:hebinp}
-%
-% Hebrew input encodings defined in file |hebinp.dtx|\footnote{The
-% files described in this section have version number \fileversion\
-% and were last revised on \filedate.} should be used with |inputenc|
-% \LaTeXe{} package. This package allows the user
-% to specify an input encoding from this file (for example, ISO
-% Hebrew/Latin 8859-8, IBM Hebrew codepage 862 or MS Windows
-% Hebrew codepage 1255) by saying:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\usepackage[|\emph{encoding name}|]{inputenc}|
-% \end{quote}
-% The encoding can also be selected in the document with:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\inputencoding{|\emph{encoding name}|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% The only practical use of this command within a document is when
-% using text from several documents to build up a composite work such
-% as a volume of journal articles. Therefore this command will be
-% used only in vertical mode.
-%
-% The encodings provided by this package are:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item |si960| 7-bit Hebrew encoding for the range 32--127. This
-% encoding also known as ``old-code'' and defined by Israeli
-% Standard SI-960.
-% \item |8859-8| ISO 8859-8 Hebrew/Latin encoding commonly used in
-% UNIX systems. This encoding also known as ``new-code'' and
-% includes hebrew letters in positions starting from 224.
-% \item |cp862| IBM 862 code page commonly used by DOS on
-% IBM-compatible personal computers. This encoding also known as
-% ``pc-code'' and includes hebrew letters in positions starting
-% from 128.
-% \item |cp1255| MS Windows 1255 (hebrew) code page which is similar to
-% 8859-8. In addition to hebrew letters, this encoding contains
-% also hebrew vowels and dots (nikud).
-% \end{itemize}
-% Each encoding has an associated |.def| file, for example
-% |8859-8.def| which defines the behaviour of each input character,
-% using the commands:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\DeclareInputText{|\emph{slot}|}{|\emph{text}|}| \\
-% |\DeclareInputMath{|\emph{slot}|}{|\emph{math}|}|
-% \end{quote}
-% This defines the input character \emph{slot} to be the
-% \emph{text} material or \emph{math} material respectively.
-% For example, |8859-8.def| defines slots |"EA| (letter hebalef)
-% and |"B5| ($\mu$) by saying:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef}
-% \DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% Note that the \emph{commands} should be robust, and should not be
-% dependent on the output encoding. The same \emph{slot} should not
-% have both a text and a math declaration for it. (This restriction
-% may be removed in future releases of inputenc).
-%
-% The |.def| file may also define commands using the declarations:\\
-% |\providecommand| or |\ProvideTextCommandDefault|.
-% For example, |8859-8.def| defines:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
-% \DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% The use of the `provide' forms here will ensure that a
-% better definition will not be over-written; their use is
-% recommended since, in general, the best defintion depends on the
-% fonts available.
-%
-% See the documentation in |inputenc.dtx| for details of how to
-% declare input definitions for various encodings.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% \subsection{A driver for this document}
-%
-% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
-% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you
-% are currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by
-% the \dst{} program.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\title{Hebrew input encodings for use with \LaTeXe}
-\author{Boris Lavva}
-\date{Printed \today}
-\begin{document}
- \maketitle
- \DocInput{hebinp.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \fi
-%
-% \subsection{Default definitions for characters}
-%
-% First, we insert a |\makeatletter| at the beginning of all |.def|
-% files to use |@| symbol in the macros' names.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<-driver>\makeatletter
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some input characters map to internal functions which are not in
-% either the |T1| or |OT1| font encoding. For this reason default
-% definitions are provided in the encoding file: these will be
-% used unless some other output encoding is used which supports
-% those glyphs. In some cases this default defintion has to be
-% simply an error message.
-%
-% Note that this works reasonably well only because the encoding
-% files for both |OT1| and |T1| are loaded in the standard LaTeX
-% format.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*8859-8|cp862|cp1255>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
-%</8859-8|cp862|cp1255>
-%<*8859-8|cp1255>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}}
-%</8859-8|cp1255>
-%<*cp862|cp1255>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}}
-%</cp862|cp1255>
-%<*cp862>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textpeseta}{Pt}
-%</cp862>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The name |\textblacksquare| is derived from the AMS symbol name
-% since Adobe seem not to want this symbol. The default
-% definition, as a rule, makes no claim to being a good design.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*cp862>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textblacksquare}
- {\vrule \@width .3em \@height .4em \@depth -.1em\relax}
-%</cp862>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some commands can't be faked, so we have them generate an error
-% message.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*8859-8|cp862|cp1255>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen}
-%</8859-8|cp862|cp1255>
-%<*8859-8>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency}
-%</8859-8>
-%<*cp1255>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\newsheqel}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\newsheqel}
-%</cp1255>
-%<*8859-8|cp1255>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar}
-%</8859-8|cp1255>
-%<*cp1255>
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textperthousand}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textperthousand}
-%</cp1255>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Characters that are supposed to be used only in math will be defined
-% by |\providecommand| because \LaTeXe{} assumes that the font
-% encoding for math fonts is static.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*8859-8|cp1255>
-\providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}}
-\providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}}
-%</8859-8|cp1255>
-%<*8859-8|cp862|cp1255>
-\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
-%</8859-8|cp862|cp1255>
-%<*cp862>
-\providecommand{\mathordmasculine}{{^o}}
-\providecommand{\mathordfeminine}{{^a}}
-%</cp862>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The SI-960 encoding}
-%
-%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the
-%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file.
-%
-% \subsection{The ISO 8859-8 encoding and the MS Windows cp1255 encoding}
-%
-% The |8859-8.def| encoding file defines the characters in the ISO
-% 8859-8 encoding.
-%
-% The MS Windows Hebrew character set incorporates the Hebrew
-% letter repertoire of ISO 8859-8, and uses the same code points
-% (starting from 224). It has also some important additions in the
-% 128--159 and 190--224 ranges.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*cp1255>
-\DeclareInputText{130}{\quotesinglbase}
-\DeclareInputText{131}{\textflorin}
-\DeclareInputText{132}{\quotedblbase}
-\DeclareInputText{133}{\dots}
-\DeclareInputText{134}{\dag}
-\DeclareInputText{135}{\ddag}
-\DeclareInputText{136}{\^{}}
-\DeclareInputText{137}{\textperthousand}
-\DeclareInputText{139}{\guilsinglleft}
-\DeclareInputText{145}{\textquoteleft}
-\DeclareInputText{146}{\textquoteright}
-\DeclareInputText{147}{\textquotedblleft}
-\DeclareInputText{148}{\textquotedblright}
-\DeclareInputText{149}{\textbullet}
-\DeclareInputText{150}{\textendash}
-\DeclareInputText{151}{\textemdash}
-\DeclareInputText{152}{\~{}}
-\DeclareInputText{153}{\texttrademark}
-\DeclareInputText{155}{\guilsinglright}
-%</cp1255>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*8859-8|cp1255>
-\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
-\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
-\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
-%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
-%<+cp1255>\DeclareInputText{164}{\newsheqel}
-\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen}
-\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar}
-\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
-\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
-\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright}
-%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputMath{170}{\times}
-\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
-\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot}
-\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
-\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered}
-\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
-\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
-\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
-\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
-\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
-\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
-\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
-\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
-\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
-%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
-\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior}
-%<+8859-8>\DeclareInputMath{186}{\div}
-\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
-\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
-\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
-\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters}
-%</8859-8|cp1255>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Hebrew vowels and dots (nikud) are included only to MS Windows cp1255
-% page and start from the position 192.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*cp1255>
-\DeclareInputText{192}{\hebsheva}
-\DeclareInputText{193}{\hebhatafsegol}
-\DeclareInputText{194}{\hebhatafpatah}
-\DeclareInputText{195}{\hebhatafqamats}
-\DeclareInputText{196}{\hebhiriq}
-\DeclareInputText{197}{\hebtsere}
-\DeclareInputText{198}{\hebsegol}
-\DeclareInputText{199}{\hebpatah}
-\DeclareInputText{200}{\hebqamats}
-\DeclareInputText{201}{\hebholam}
-\DeclareInputText{203}{\hebqubuts}
-\DeclareInputText{204}{\hebdagesh}
-\DeclareInputText{205}{\hebmeteg}
-\DeclareInputText{206}{\hebmaqaf}
-\DeclareInputText{207}{\hebrafe}
-\DeclareInputText{208}{\hebpaseq}
-\DeclareInputText{209}{\hebshindot}
-\DeclareInputText{210}{\hebsindot}
-\DeclareInputText{211}{\hebsofpasuq}
-\DeclareInputText{212}{\hebdoublevav}
-\DeclareInputText{213}{\hebvavyod}
-\DeclareInputText{214}{\hebdoubleyod}
-%</cp1255>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Hebrew letters start from the position 224 in both encodings.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*8859-8|cp1255>
-\DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef}
-\DeclareInputText{225}{\hebbet}
-\DeclareInputText{226}{\hebgimel}
-\DeclareInputText{227}{\hebdalet}
-\DeclareInputText{228}{\hebhe}
-\DeclareInputText{229}{\hebvav}
-\DeclareInputText{230}{\hebzayin}
-\DeclareInputText{231}{\hebhet}
-\DeclareInputText{232}{\hebtet}
-\DeclareInputText{233}{\hebyod}
-\DeclareInputText{234}{\hebfinalkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{235}{\hebkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{236}{\heblamed}
-\DeclareInputText{237}{\hebfinalmem}
-\DeclareInputText{238}{\hebmem}
-\DeclareInputText{239}{\hebfinalnun}
-\DeclareInputText{240}{\hebnun}
-\DeclareInputText{241}{\hebsamekh}
-\DeclareInputText{242}{\hebayin}
-\DeclareInputText{243}{\hebfinalpe}
-\DeclareInputText{244}{\hebpe}
-\DeclareInputText{245}{\hebfinaltsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{246}{\hebtsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{247}{\hebqof}
-\DeclareInputText{248}{\hebresh}
-\DeclareInputText{249}{\hebshin}
-\DeclareInputText{250}{\hebtav}
-%</8859-8|cp1255>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Special symbols which define the direction of symbols explicitly.
-% Currently, they are not used in \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*cp1255>
-\DeclareInputText{253}{\lefttorightmark}
-\DeclareInputText{254}{\righttoleftmark}
-%</cp1255>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The IBM code page 862}
-%
-% The |cp862.def| encoding file defines the characters in the IBM
-% codepage 862 encoding. The DOS graphics `letters' and a few
-% other positions are ignored (left undefined).
-%
-% Hebrew letters start from the position 128.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*cp862>
-\DeclareInputText{128}{\hebalef}
-\DeclareInputText{129}{\hebbet}
-\DeclareInputText{130}{\hebgimel}
-\DeclareInputText{131}{\hebdalet}
-\DeclareInputText{132}{\hebhe}
-\DeclareInputText{133}{\hebvav}
-\DeclareInputText{134}{\hebzayin}
-\DeclareInputText{135}{\hebhet}
-\DeclareInputText{136}{\hebtet}
-\DeclareInputText{137}{\hebyod}
-\DeclareInputText{138}{\hebfinalkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{139}{\hebkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{140}{\heblamed}
-\DeclareInputText{141}{\hebfinalmem}
-\DeclareInputText{142}{\hebmem}
-\DeclareInputText{143}{\hebfinalnun}
-\DeclareInputText{144}{\hebnun}
-\DeclareInputText{145}{\hebsamekh}
-\DeclareInputText{146}{\hebayin}
-\DeclareInputText{147}{\hebfinalpe}
-\DeclareInputText{148}{\hebpe}
-\DeclareInputText{149}{\hebfinaltsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{150}{\hebtsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{151}{\hebqof}
-\DeclareInputText{152}{\hebresh}
-\DeclareInputText{153}{\hebshin}
-\DeclareInputText{154}{\hebtav}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareInputText{155}{\textcent}
-\DeclareInputText{156}{\pounds}
-\DeclareInputText{157}{\textyen}
-\DeclareInputText{158}{\textpeseta}
-\DeclareInputText{159}{\textflorin}
-\DeclareInputText{160}{\@tabacckludge'a}
-\DeclareInputText{161}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
-\DeclareInputText{162}{\@tabacckludge'o}
-\DeclareInputText{163}{\@tabacckludge'u}
-\DeclareInputText{164}{\~n}
-\DeclareInputText{165}{\~N}
-\DeclareInputMath{166}{\mathordfeminine}
-\DeclareInputMath{167}{\mathordmasculine}
-\DeclareInputText{168}{\textquestiondown}
-\DeclareInputMath{170}{\lnot}
-\DeclareInputText{171}{\textonehalf}
-\DeclareInputText{172}{\textonequarter}
-\DeclareInputText{173}{\textexclamdown}
-\DeclareInputText{174}{\guillemotleft}
-\DeclareInputText{175}{\guillemotright}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareInputMath{224}{\alpha}
-\DeclareInputText{225}{\ss}
-\DeclareInputMath{226}{\Gamma}
-\DeclareInputMath{227}{\pi}
-\DeclareInputMath{228}{\Sigma}
-\DeclareInputMath{229}{\sigma}
-\DeclareInputMath{230}{\mu}
-\DeclareInputMath{231}{\tau}
-\DeclareInputMath{232}{\Phi}
-\DeclareInputMath{233}{\Theta}
-\DeclareInputMath{234}{\Omega}
-\DeclareInputMath{235}{\delta}
-\DeclareInputMath{236}{\infty}
-\DeclareInputMath{237}{\phi}
-\DeclareInputMath{238}{\varepsilon}
-\DeclareInputMath{239}{\cap}
-\DeclareInputMath{240}{\equiv}
-\DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm}
-\DeclareInputMath{242}{\ge}
-\DeclareInputMath{243}{\le}
-\DeclareInputMath{246}{\div}
-\DeclareInputMath{247}{\approx}
-\DeclareInputText{248}{\textdegree}
-\DeclareInputText{249}{\textperiodcentered}
-\DeclareInputText{250}{\textbullet}
-\DeclareInputMath{251}{\surd}
-\DeclareInputMath{252}{\mathnsuperior}
-\DeclareInputMath{253}{\mathtwosuperior}
-\DeclareInputText{254}{\textblacksquare}
-\DeclareInputText{255}{\nobreakspace}
-%</cp862>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DisableNikud}
-% A utility macro to ignore any nikud character that may appear in the
-% input. This allows you to ignore cp1255 nikud characters that happened to
-% appear in the input.
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*8859-8>
-\newcommand{\DisableNikud}{%
- \DeclareInputText{192}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{193}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{194}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{195}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{196}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{197}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{198}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{199}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{200}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{201}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{203}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{204}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{205}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{206}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{207}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{208}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{209}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{210}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{211}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{212}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{213}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{214}{}%
-}
-%</8859-8>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Finally, we reset the category code of the |@| sign at the end of
-% all |.def| files.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<-driver>\makeatother
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 19f0fbf0fc8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,3329 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{3345}
-%
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-%<*calendar>
-%% TeX & LaTeX macros for computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one
-%% Copyright (C) 1991 by Michail Rozman, misha@iop.tartu.ew.su
-%%
-%</calendar>
-% \fi
-%
-%
-% \iffalse
-%<hebrew>\ProvidesFile{hebrew.ldf}
-%<rightleft>\ProvidesFile{rlbabel.def}
-%<calendar>\ProvidesPackage{hebcal}
-%<*driver>
-\ProvidesFile{hebrew.drv}
-%</driver>
-% \fi
-% \ProvidesFile{hebrew.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v2.3h %
-% \iffalse
-%<hebrew> Hebrew language definition from the babel system
-%<rightleft> Right-to-Left support from the babel system
-%<calendar> Hebrew calendar
-%<driver> Driver file for hebrew support
-% \fi
- Hebrew language support from the babel system]
-%
-% \iffalse
-% \subsection{A driver for this document}
-%
-% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
-% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
-% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the \dst{}
-% program.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\providecommand\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\providecommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\makeatletter
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The code lines are numbered within sections,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@addtoreset{CodelineNo}{section}
-\renewcommand\theCodelineNo{%
- \reset@font\scriptsize\thesection.\arabic{CodelineNo}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% which should also be visible in the index; hence this
-% redefinition of a macro from \file{doc.sty}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand\codeline@wrindex[1]{\if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@indexfile
- {\string\indexentry{#1}%
- {\number\c@section.\number\c@CodelineNo}}\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The glossary environment is used or the change log, but its
-% definition needs changing for this document.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewenvironment{theglossary}{%
- \glossary@prologue%
- \GlossaryParms \let\item\@idxitem \ignorespaces}%
- {}
-\makeatother
-\DisableCrossrefs
-\CodelineIndex
-\RecordChanges
-\title{Hebrew language support from the \babel\ system}
-\author{Boris Lavva}
-\date{Printed \today}
-\begin{document}
- \maketitle
- \tableofcontents
- \DocInput{hebrew.dtx}
- \DocInput{hebinp.dtx}
- \DocInput{hebrew.fdd}
- \DocInput{heb209.dtx}
- \clearpage
- \def\filename{index}
- \PrintIndex
- \clearpage
- \def\filename{changes}
- \PrintChanges
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \fi
-%
-% \providecommand\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}}
-% \providecommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \providecommand\XeT{X\kern-.125em\lower.5ex\hbox{E}\kern-.1667emT\@}
-% \providecommand\scrunch{\setlength{\itemsep}{-.05in}}
-% \GetFileInfo{hebrew.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{hebrew~0.1}{??/??/??}{%
-% Preliminary \LaTeX\ Hebrew option (by Sergio Fogel)}
-% \changes{hebrew~0.2}{??/??/??}{%
-% Corrections and additions (by Rama Porrat)}
-% \changes{hebrew~0.6}{??/??/??}{Additions (by Yael Dubinsky)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.2}{??/??/??}{%
-% Bilingual tables, penalties, documentation and more changes
-% (by Yaniv Bargury)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.30}{1992/05/15}{%
-% Font selection, various (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.31}{1993/02/22}{Bug fixes (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.32}{1993/03/10}{Made font-change command
-% for numbers `\cs{protect}'ed (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.33}{1993/03/11}{%
-% Made \cs{refstepcounter} work using \cs{@ltor} (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.34}{1993/03/22}{%
-% Moved font loading to another file. Added \cs{mainsec}.
-% Made all text strings be produced by control codes (similar to
-% \LaTeX 2.09 Mar '92). Fixed \cs{noindent} (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.35}{1993/03/22}{%
-% Moved the texts to a file selected by the current encoding
-% (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.36}{1993/03/24}{Use \TeX\ tricks to redefine
-% \cs{theXXXX} without keeping old definitions.
-% Use only \cs{@eng} for direction/font change (removed \cs{@ltor}).
-% Switched from use of \cs{mainsec} to code taken from \babel\
-% system (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.37}{1993/03/28}{%
-% Use \cs{add@around} in defining font size commands. Small bug
-% fixes (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.38}{1993/04/20}{%
-% \cs{everypar} changed so that \cs{noindent} works unmodified
-% (by Alon Ziv, thanks to Chris Rowley)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.39}{1993/08/10}{%
-% Redefined primitive sectioning commands. Changed \cs{include} so
-% it finds \texttt{.h}, \texttt{.xet}, and \texttt{.ltx} files (no
-% extension needed). Reinstated use of \cs{@ltor} (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.40}{1993/09/01}{Added the \cs{@brackets} hack
-% (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.41}{1993/09/09}{%
-% Reworked towards using NFSS2. Changed some macro names to be more
-% logical: renamed \cs{@ltor} to \cs{@number}, \cs{@eng} to
-% \cs{@latin}, and (in \texttt{hebrew.ldf}) \cs{@heb} to
-% \cs{@hebrew} (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~1.42}{1993/09/22}{%
-% Made list environments work better. Fixed thebibliography
-% environment (by Alon Ziv)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.0a}{1998/01/01}{%
-% Completely rewritten for \LaTeXe\ and \babel\ support. Various
-% input and font encodings (with NFSS2) are supported too. The
-% original \pkg{hebrew.sty} is divided to a number of packages and
-% definition files for better readability and extensibility. Added
-% some user- and code-level documentation inside the \texttt{.dtx}
-% and \texttt{.fdd} files, and \LaTeX -driven installation with
-% \pkg{hebrew.ins} (by Boris Lavva)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.1}{2000/11/23}{%
-% corrections from Sivan Toledo: sender name in letter, and section name in
-% headings. (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.2}{2000/12/11}{%
-% renamed hebrew letters to heb* (e.g.: alef renamed to hebalef)
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3}{2001/02/27}{
-% added several \cs{@ifclassloaded}\{slides\} to allow the use of the
-% slides class. (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3a}{2001/07/09}{
-% The documentation should now be built fine (broken since at least
-% 2.1, and probably 2.0) (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3b}{2001/08/16}{
-% minor clean-ups. The documentation builds now with no warnings.
-% Also removed \cs{R} from the caption macro (added in 2.1)
-% Added internal \cs{@ensure@L} and \cs{@ensure@R}
-% (Is there a real need for them? Maybe should they be exposed?)
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3c}{2001/10/05}{
-% a temporary fix to the \cs{gim} macro. Should be replaced by stuff
-% from hebcal.
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3d}{2002/01/04}{
-% Initial support for the prosper class. Added \cs{arabicnorl} .
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3e}{2002/08/09}{
-% Removing hebtech from this distriution (not relevant to babel),
-% added \cs{HeblatexEncoding}. some docs cleanup
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3f}{2002/12/26}{
-% redefined \cs{list} instead of redefining every environment
-% that uses it. some pscolor handling, removed HeblatexEncoding
-% (don't use 2.3e) (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebrew~2.3g}{2003/06/05}{
-% Reimplemented the printing of Hebrew numerals and Hebrew
-% counters; modified \pkg{hebcal.sty} to use this implementation
-% when typesetting Hebrew dates; added option |full| to package
-% \pkg{hebcal}; also removed some gratuitous
-% spaces inserted by \pkg{hebcal.sty} by adding comment marks.
-% CAUTION: the changes to \pkg{hebcal.sty} make it dependent on
-% \pkg{babel} and not useable as a stand-alone package. Is this a
-% problem? (by Ron Artstein)}
-%
-% \section{The Hebrew language}\label{sec:hebrew}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The Hebrew language support
-% files described in this section have version number \fileversion\
-% and were last revised on \filedate.} provides the following
-% packages and files for Hebrew language support:
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[\file{hebrew.ldf}] file defines all the language-specific
-% macros for the Hebrew language.
-% \item[\file{rlbabel.def}] file is used by |hebrew.ldf| for
-% bidirectional versions of the major \LaTeX{} commands and
-% environments. It is designed to be used with other right-to-left
-% languages, not only with Hebrew.
-% \item[\pkg{hebcal.sty}] package defines a set of macros for
-% computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one.
-% \end{description}
-%
-% Additional Hebrew input and font encoding definition files that
-% should be included and used with \file{hebrew.ldf} are:
-% \begin{description}
-% \item[\file{hebinp.dtx}] provides Hebrew input encodings, such as
-% ISO 8859-8, MS Windows codepage 1255 or IBM PC codepage 862
-% (see Section~\ref{sec:hebinp} on page~\pageref{sec:hebinp}).
-% \item[\file{hebrew.fdd}] contains Hebrew font encodings, related
-% font definition files and \pkg{hebfont} package that
-% provides Hebrew font switching commands (see
-% Section~\ref{sec:hebfdd} on page~\pageref{sec:hebfdd} for
-% further details).
-% \end{description}
-%
-% \LaTeX~2.09 compatibility files are included with
-% \file{heb209.dtx} and gives possibility to compile existing
-% \LaTeX~2.09 Hebrew documents with small (if any) changes (see
-% Section~\ref{sec:heb209} on page~\pageref{sec:heb209} for
-% details).
-%
-% Finally, optional document class \pkg{hebtech} may be useful for
-% writing theses and dissertations in both Hebrew and English (and
-% any other languages included with \babel). It designed to meet
-% requirements of the Graduate School of the Technion --- Israel
-% Institute of Technology.
-%
-% \emph{As of version 2.3e hebtech is no longer distributed together
-% with heblatex. It should be part of a new "hebclasses" package}
-%
-% \subsection{Acknowledgement}
-%
-% The following people have contributed to Hebrew package in one
-% way or another, knowingly or unknowingly. In alphabetical order:
-% Irina Abramovici, Yaniv Bargury, Yael Dubinsky, Sergio Fogel,
-% Dan Haran, Rama Porrat, Michail Rozman, Alon Ziv.
-%
-% Tatiana Samoilov and Vitaly Surazhsky found a number of serious
-% bugs in preliminary version of Hebrew package.
-%
-% A number of other people have contributed comments and
-% information. Specific contributions are acknowledged within the
-% document.
-%
-% I want to thank my wife, Vita, and son, Mishka, for their
-% infinite love and patience.
-%
-% If you made a contribution and I haven't mentioned it, don't
-% worry, it was an accident. I'm sorry. Just tell me and I will add
-% you to the next version.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \subsection{The {\normalfont\dst{}} modules}
-%
-% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
-% \dst{} in generating external files:
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll}
-% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\[4pt]
-% hebrew & produce Hebrew language support file\\
-% rightleft & create right-to-left support file\\
-% calendar & create Hebrew calendar package
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% A typical \dst{} command file would then have entries like:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\generateFile{hebrew.ldf}{t}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{hebrew}}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \subsection{Hebrew language definitions}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the |@|
-% sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hebrew>
-\LdfInit{hebrew}{captionshebrew}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage|
-% command, |hebrew| will be an `unknown' language, in which case we
-% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@hebrew| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@hebrew\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Hebrew}%
- \adddialect\l@hebrew0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hebrewencoding}
-% \emph{FIX DOCS REGARDING 8BIT}
-%
-% Typesetting Hebrew texts implies that a special input and output
-% encoding needs to be used. Generally, the user may choose
-% between different available Hebrew encodings provided. The
-% current support for Hebrew uses all available fonts from the
-% Hebrew University of Jerusalem encoded in `old-code' 7-bit
-% encoding also known as Israeli Standard SI-960. We define for
-% these fonts the Local Hebrew Encoding |LHE| (see the file
-% |hebrew.fdd| for more details), and the |LHE| encoding definition
-% file should be loaded by default.
-%
-% Other fonts are available in windows-cp1255 (a superset of ISO-8859-8
-% with nikud). For those, the encoding |HE8| should be used. Such fonts
-% are, e.g., windows' TrueType fonts (once cnverted to Type1 or MetaFont)
-% and IBM's Type1 fonts.
-%
-% However, if an user wants to use another font encoding, for
-% example, cyrillic encoding T2 and extended latin encoding T1, ---
-% he/she has to load the corresponding file \emph{before} the
-% \pkg{hebrew} package. This may be done in the following way:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\usepackage[LHE,T2,T1]{fontenc}|\\
-% |\usepackage[hebrew,russian,english]{babel}|
-% \end{quote}
-% We make sure that the |LHE| encoding is known to \LaTeX{} at end
-% of this package.
-%
-% Also note that if you want to use the encoding |HE8| , you should define
-% the following in your document, \emph{before loading babel}:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\def\HeblatexEncoding{HE8}|\\
-% |\def\HeblatexEncodingFile{he8enc}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \changes{hebrew-2.3h}{2004/02/20}{Make LHE the default encoding for
-% compatibility reasons}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providecommand{\HeblatexEncoding}{LHE}%
-\providecommand{\HeblatexEncodingFile}{lheenc}%
-\newcommand{\heblatex@set@encoding}[2]{
-}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{fontenc}{%
- \@ifl@aded{def}{%
- \HeblatexEncodingFile}{\def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}}{}%
- }{%
- \input{\HeblatexEncodingFile.def}%
- \def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}%
- }}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We also need to load inputenc package with one of the Hebrew
-% input encodings. By default, we set up the |8859-8| codepage.
-% If an user wants to use many input encodings in the same
-% document, for example, the MS Windows Hebrew codepage |cp1255|
-% and the standard IBM PC Russian codepage |cp866|, he/she has to
-% load the corresponding file \emph{before} the hebrew package
-% too. This may be done in the following way:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\usepackage[cp1255,cp866]{inputenc}|\\
-% |\usepackage[hebrew,russian,english]{babel}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% An user can switch input encodings in the document using the
-% command |\inputencoding|, for example, to use the |cp1255|:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\inputencoding{cp1255}|
-% \end{quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Hebrew language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hebrewhyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. They are set
-% to~2.
-% \changes{hebrew~2.0b}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionshebrew}
-% The macro |\captionshebrew| replaces all captions used in the four
-% standard document classes provided with \LaTeXe with their Hebrew
-% equivalents.
-% \changes{hebrew-2.0b}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionshebrew{%
- \def\prefacename{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebbet\hebvav\hebalef}}%
- \def\refname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
- \hebmem\hebqof\hebvav\hebresh\hebvav\hebtav}}%
- \def\abstractname{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebqof\hebtsadi\hebyod\hebresh}}%
- \def\bibname{\@ensure@R{\hebbet\hebyod\hebbet\heblamed\hebyod\hebvav%
- \hebgimel\hebresh\hebpe\hebyod\hebhe}}%
- \def\chaptername{\@ensure@R{\hebpe\hebresh\hebqof}}%
- \def\appendixname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun\hebsamekh\hebpe\hebhet}}%
- \def\contentsname{\@ensure@R{%
- \hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
- \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
- \def\listfigurename{\@ensure@R{%
- \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
- \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
- \def\listtablename{\@ensure@R{%
- \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
- \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
- \def\indexname{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebpe\hebtav\hebhet}}%
- \def\figurename{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh}}%
- \def\tablename{\@ensure@R{\hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebhe}}%
- \def\partname{\@ensure@R{\hebhet\heblamed\hebqof}}%
- \def\enclname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}}%
- \def\ccname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof\hebyod%
- \hebfinalmem}}%
- \def\headtoname{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\heblamed}}%
- \def\pagename{\@ensure@R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}}%
- \def\psname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun.\hebbet.}}%
- \def\seename{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe}}%
- \def\alsoname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe \hebgimel%
- \hebmemesof}}%
- \def\proofname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebvav\hebkaf\hebhet\hebhe}}
- \def\glossaryname{\@ensure@L{Glossary}}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\slidelabel}
-% Here we fix the macro |slidelabel| of the seminar package. Note
-% that this still won't work well enough when overlays will be
-% involved
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{seminar}{%
- \def\slidelabel{\bf \if@rl\R{\hebshin\hebqof\hebfinalpe{} \theslide}%
- \else\L{Slide \theslide}%
- \fi}%
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here we provide an user with translation of Gregorian dates
-% to Hebrew. In addition, the \pkg{hebcal} package can be used
-% to create Hebrew calendar dates.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hebmonth}
-% The macro |\hebmonth{|\emph{month}|}| produces month names in
-% Hebrew.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hebmonth#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or \hebyod\hebnun\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or %
- \hebpe\hebbet\hebresh\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or %
- \hebmem\hebresh\hebfinaltsadi\or %
- \hebalef\hebpe\hebresh\hebyod\heblamed\or %
- \hebmem\hebalef\hebyod\or \hebyod\hebvav\hebnun\hebyod\or %
- \hebyod\hebvav\heblamed\hebyod\or %
- \hebalef\hebvav\hebgimel\hebvav\hebsamekh\hebtet\or %
- \hebsamekh\hebpe\hebtet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or %
- \hebalef\hebvav\hebqof\hebtet\hebvav\hebbet\hebresh\or %
- \hebnun\hebvav\hebbet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or %
- \hebdalet\hebtsadi\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hebdate}
-% The macro |\hebdate{|\emph{day}|}{|\emph{month}|}{|\emph{year}|}|
-% translates a given Gregorian date to Hebrew.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hebdate#1#2#3{%
- \beginR\beginL\number#1\endL\ \hebbet\hebmonth{#2}
- \beginL\number#3\endL\endR}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hebday}
-% The macro |\hebday| will replace |\today| command when in Hebrew
-% mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hebday{\hebdate{\day}{\month}{\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datehebrew}
-% The macro |\datehebrew| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Gregorian dates in Hebrew. It uses the macro |\hebday|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datehebrew{\let\today=\hebday}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\extrashebrew| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Hebrew language. The macro |\noextrashebrew|
-% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrashebrew|.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrashebrew}
-% We switch font encoding to Hebrew and direction to
-% right-to-left. We cannot use the regular language switching
-% commands (for example, |\sethebrew| and |\unsethebrew| or
-% |\selectlanguage{hebrew}|), when in restricted horizontal mode,
-% because it will result in \emph{unbalanced} |\beginR| or
-% |\beginL| primitives.
-% Instead, in \TeX 's restricted horizontal mode, the
-% |\L{|\emph{latin text}|}| and |\R{|\emph{hebrew text}|}|, or
-% |\embox{|\emph{latin text}|}| and |\hmbox{|\emph{hebrew text}|}|
-% should be used.
-%
-% Hence, we use |\beginR| and |\beginL| switching commands only
-% when not in restricted horizontal mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrashebrew{%
- \tohebrew%
- \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginR\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrashebrew}
-% The macro |\noextrashebrew| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrashebrew|. We switch back to the previous font encoding and
-% restore left-to-right direction.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrashebrew{%
- \fromhebrew%
- \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginL\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Generally, we can switch to- and from- Hebrew by means of
-% standard \babel -defined commands, for example,
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\selectlanguage{hebrew}|
-% \end{quote}
-% or
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\begin{otherlanguage}{hebrew}|\\
-% \hspace*{1.5em} some Hebrew text\\
-% |\end{otherlanguage}|
-% \end{quote}
-% Now we define two additional commands that offer the possibility
-% to switch to and from Hebrew language. These commands are
-% backward compatible with the previous versions of
-% \pkg{hebrew.sty}.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sethebrew}
-% \begin{macro}{\unsethebrew}
-% The command |\sethebrew| will switch from the current font encoding
-% to the hebrew font encoding, and from the current direction of
-% text to the right-to-left mode. The command |\unsethebrew| switches
-% back.
-%
-% Both commands use standard right-to-left switching macros
-% |\setrllanguage{|\emph{ r2l language name}|}| and
-% |\unsetrllanguage{|\emph{r2l language name}|}|, that
-% defined in the \file{rlbabel.def} file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sethebrew{\setrllanguage{hebrew}}
-\def\unsethebrew{\unsetrllanguage{hebrew}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hebrewtext}
-% \begin{macro}{\nohebrewtext}
-% The following two commands are \emph{obsolete} and work only
-% in \LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode. They are synonyms of
-% |\sethebrew| and |\unsethebrew| defined above.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@compatibility
- \let\hebrewtext=\sethebrew
- \let\nohebrewtext=\unsethebrew
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tohebrew}
-% \begin{macro}{\fromhebrew}
-% These two commands change only the current font encoding to- and
-% from- Hebrew encoding. Their implementation uses
-% |\@torl{|\emph{language name}|}| and |\@fromrl| macros defined in
-% \file{rlbabel.def} file. Both commands may be useful \emph{only}
-% for package and class writers, not for regular users.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tohebrew{\@torl{hebrew}}%
-\def\fromhebrew{\@fromrl}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@hebrew}
-% Sometimes we need to preserve Hebrew mode without knowing in
-% which environment we are located now. For these cases, the
-% |\@hebrew{|\emph{hebrew text}|}| macro will be useful. Not that
-% this macro is similar to the |\@number| and |\@latin| macros
-% defined in \file{rlbabel.def} file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@hebrew#1{\beginR{{\tohebrew#1}}\endR}
-\def\@hebrew{\protect\@@hebrew}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew numerals}
-%
-% We provide commands to print numbers in the traditional
-% notation using Hebrew letters. We need commands that print
-% a Hebrew number from a decimal input, as well as commands
-% to print the value of a counter as a Hebrew number.
-% \begin{macro}{\if@gim@apost}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@gim@final}
-% Hebrew numbers can be written in various styles: with or without
-% apostrophes, and with the letters kaf, mem, nun, pe, tsadi as either
-% final or initial forms when they are the last letters in the
-% sequence. We provide two flags to set the style options.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@gim@apost % whether we print apostrophes
-\newif\if@gim@final % whether we use final or initial letters
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\hebrewnumeral}
-% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewnumeral}
-% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewnumeralfinal}
-% The commands that print a Hebrew number
-% must specify the style locally: relying on a global style
-% option could cause a counter to
-% print in an inconsistent manner---for instance, page numbers
-% might appear in different styles if the global style option
-% changed mid-way through a document.
-% The commands only allow three of the four possible flag
-% combinations (I do not know of a use that requires the
-% combination of final letters and no apostrophes --RA).
-%
-% Each command sets the style flags and calls |\@hebrew@numeral|.
-% Double braces are used in order to protect the values of
-% |\@tempcnta| and |\@tempcntb|, which are changed by this call;
-% they also keep the flag assignments local (this is not important
-% because the global values are never used).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\hebrewnumeral}[1] % no apostrophe, no final letters
- {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@apostfalse\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}}
-\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeral}[1] % apostrophe, no final letters
- {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}}
-\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeralfinal}[1] % apostrophe, final letters
- {{\@gim@finaltrue\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\alph}
-% \begin{macro}{\@alph}
-% \begin{macro}{\Alph}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Alph}
-% \begin{macro}{\Alphfinal}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Alphfinal}
-% Counter-printing commands are based on the above commands. The
-% natural name for the counter-printing commands is |\alph|, because
-% Hebrew numerals are the only way to represent numbers with
-% Hebrew letters (kaf always means~20, never~11). Hebrew has no
-% uppercase letters, hence no need for the familiar meaning of |\Alph|;
-% we therefore define |\alph| to print counters as Hebrew numerals
-% without apostrophes, and |\Alph| to print with apostrophes. A third
-% form, |\Alphfinal|, is provided to print with apostrophes and final
-% letters, as is required for Hebrew year designators. The commands
-% |\alph| and |\Alph| are defined in \pkg{latex.ltx}, and we only
-% need to redefine the internal commands |\@alph| and
-% |\@Alph|; for |\Alphfinal| we need to provide both a wrapper and
-% an internal command.
-% The counter printing commands are made semi-robust: without the
-% |\protect|, commands like |\theenumii| break (I'm not quite clear
-% on why this happens, --RA); at the same time, we cannot make the
-% commands too robust (e.g.~with |\DeclareRobustCommand|) because
-% this would enter the command name rather than its value into
-% files like |.aux|, |.toc| etc\@.
-% The old meanings of meaning of |\@alph| and |\@Alph| are saved
-% upon entering Hebrew mode and restored upon exiting it.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrashebrew{%
- \let\saved@alph=\@alph%
- \let\saved@Alph=\@Alph%
- \renewcommand*{\@alph}[1]{\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}%
- \renewcommand*{\@Alph}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}%
- \def\Alphfinal#1{\expandafter\@Alphfinal\csname c@#1\endcsname}%
- \providecommand*{\@Alphfinal}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeralfinal{\number#1}}}
-\addto\noextrashebrew{%
- \let\@alph=\saved@alph%
- \let\@Alph=\saved@Alph}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Note that |\alph| (without apostrophes) is already the
-% appropriate choice for the second-level enumerate label, and
-% |\Alph| (with apostrophes) is an appropriate choice for appendix;
-% however, the default \LaTeX\ labels need to be redefined for
-% appropriate cross-referencing, see below.
-% \LaTeX\ default class files specify |\Alph| for
-% the fourth-level enumerate level, this should probably be changed.
-% Also, the way labels get flushed left by default looks inappropriate
-% for Hebrew numerals, so we should redefine |\labelenumii| as well
-% as |\labelenumiv| (presently not implemented).
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\theenumii}
-% \begin{macro}{\theenumiv}
-% \begin{macro}{\label}
-% Cross-references to counter labels need to be printed according
-% to the language environment in which a label was issued, not
-% the environment in which it is called: for example, a label~(1b)
-% issued in a Latin environment should be referred to as~(1b) in a
-% Hebrew text, and label~(2dalet) issued in a Hebrew environment
-% should be referred to as~(2dalet) in a Latin text. This was the
-% unanimous opinion in a poll sent to the Ivri\TeX\ list.
-% We therefore redefine |\theenumii| and |\theenumiv|, so that an
-% explicit language instruction gets written to the |.aux| file.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\renewcommand{\theenumii}
- {\if@rl\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumii}%
- \else\protect\L{\protect\@@alph{\number\c@enumii}}\fi}
-\renewcommand{\theenumiv}
- {\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumiv}%
- \else\protect\L{\protect\@@Alph{\number\c@enumiv}}\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We also need to control for the font and direction in which a
-% counter label is printed. Direction is straightforward: a Latin
-% label like~(1b) should be written left-to-right when called in a
-% Hebrew text, and a Hebrew label like~(2dalet) should be written
-% right-to-left when called in a Latin text. The font question is
-% more delicate, because we should decide whether the numerals
-% should be typeset in the font of the language enviroment in which
-% the label was issued, or that of the environment in which it is
-% called.
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% A purely numeric label like~(23) looks best if it is set in the
-% font of the surrounding language.
-% \item
-% But a mixed alphanumeric label like~(1b) lookes weird if
-% the~`1' is taken from the Hebrew font; likewise, (2dalet) looks
-% weird if the~`2' is taken from a Latin font.
-% \item
-% Finally, mixing the two possibilities is worst, because a
-% single Hebrew sentence referring to examples~(1b) and~(2) would
-% take the~`1' from the Latin font and the~`2' from the Hebrew
-% font, and this looks really awful. (It is also very hard to
-% implement).
-% \end{itemize}
-% In light of the conflicting considerations it seems like there's
-% no perfect solution. I have chosen to implement the top option,
-% where numerals are taken from the font of the surrounding
-% language, because it seems to me that reference to purely numeric
-% labels is the most common, so this gives a good solution to the
-% majority of cases and a mediocre solution to the minority.
-%
-% We redefine the |\label| command which writes to the
-% |.aux| file. Depending on the language environment we issue
-% appropriate |\beginR/L|$\cdots$|\endR/L| commands to control the
-% direction without affecting the font. Since these commands do not
-% affect the value of |\if@rl|, we cannot use the macro
-% |\@brackets| to determine the correct brackets to be used with
-% |\p@enumiii|; instead, we let the language environment determine an
-% explicit definition.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\label#1{\@bsphack
- \if@rl
- \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii)\theenumii(}%
- \protected@write\@auxout{}%
- {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginR\@currentlabel\endR}{\thepage}}}%
- \else
- \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii(\theenumii)}%
- \protected@write\@auxout{}%
- {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginL\@currentlabel\endL}{\thepage}}}%
- \fi
- \@esphack}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% NOTE: it appears that the definition of |\label| is
-% language-independent and thus belongs in \pkg{rlbabel.def}, but
-% this is not the case. The decision to typeset label numerals
-% in the font of the surrounding language is reasonable for Hebrew,
-% because mixed-font (1b) and (2dalet) are somewhat acceptable. The
-% same may not be acceptable for Arabic, whose numeral glyphs are
-% radically different from those in the Latin fonts. The decision
-% about the direction may also be different for Arabic, which is
-% more right-to-left oriented than Hebrew (two examples: dates like
-% 15/6/2003 are written left-to-right in Hebrew but right-to-left
-% in Arabic; equations like $1+2=3$ are written left-to-right in
-% Hebrew but right-to-left in Arabic elementary school textbooks
-% using Arabic numeral glyphs). My personal hunch is that a label
-% like~(1b) in an Arabic text would be typeset left-to-right if
-% the~`1' is a Western glyph, but right-to-left if the~`1' is an
-% Arabic glyph. But this is just a guess, I'd have to ask Arab
-% typesetters to find the correct answer. --RA.
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% The following code provides for the proper printing of appendix
-% numbers in tables of contents. Section and chapter headings are
-% normally bilingual: regardless of the text language, the author
-% supplies each section/chapter with two headings---one for the
-% Hebrew table of contents and one for the Latin table of contents.
-% It makes sense that the label should be a Latin letter in the
-% Latin table of contents and a Hebrew letter in the Hebrew table
-% of contents. The definition is similar to that of |\theenumii|
-% and |\theenumiv| above, but additional |\protect| commands ensure
-% that the entire condition is written the |.aux| file. The
-% appendix number will therefore be typeset according to the
-% environment in which it is used rather than issued: a Hebrew
-% number (with apostrophes) in a Hebrew environment and a Latin
-% capital letter in a Latin environment (the command
-% |\@@Alph| is set in \pkg{rlbabel.def} to hold the default meaning
-% of \LaTeX\ [latin] |\@Alph|, regardless of the mode in which it is
-% issued). The net result is that
-% the second appendix will be marked with~`B' in the Latin table of
-% contents and with `bet' in the Hebrew table of contents; the mark
-% in the main text will depend on the language of the appendix itself.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{%
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{%
- \let\@@appendix=\appendix%
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
- \renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix%
- \renewcommand\thesection
- {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@section}%
- \protect\else\@@Alph\c@section\protect\fi}}}
- {\renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix%
- \renewcommand\thechapter
- {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@chapter}%
- \protect\else\@@Alph\c@chapter\protect\fi}}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% QUESTION: is this also the appropriate way to refer to an
-% appendix in the text, or should we retain the original label the
-% same way we did with |enumerate| labels?
-% ANOTHER QUESTION: are similar redefinitions needed for other
-% counters that generate texts in bilingual lists like |.lof/.fol|
-% and |.lot/.tol|? --RA.
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@hebrew@numeral}
-% The command |\@hebrew@numeral| prints a Hebrew number. The groups
-% of thousands, millions, billions are separated by apostrophes and
-% typeset without apostrophes or final letters; the remainder
-% (under 1000) is typeset conventionally, with the selected styles
-% for apostrophes and final letters.
-% The function calls on |\gim@no@mil| to typeset each
-% three-digit block. The algorithm
-% is recursive, but the maximum recursion depth is~4 because \TeX\
-% only allows numbers up to $2^{31}-1 = 2{,}147{,}483{,}647$.
-% The typesetting routine is wrapped in |\@hebrew| in order to
-% ensure that numbers are always typeset in Hebrew mode.
-%
-% Initialize: |\@tempcnta| holds the value, |\@tempcntb| is used for
-% calculations.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\@hebrew@numeral}[1]
-{\@hebrew{\@tempcnta=#1\@tempcntb=#1\relax
- \divide\@tempcntb by 1000
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If we're under 1000, call |\gim@nomil|
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\@tempcntb=0\gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If we're above 1000 then force no apostrophe and no final letter
-% styles for the value above~1000, recur for the value above~1000,
-% add an apostrophe, and call |\gim@nomil| for the remainder.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \else{\@gim@apostfalse\@gim@finalfalse\@hebrew@numeral\@tempcntb}'%
- \multiply\@tempcntb by 1000\relax
- \advance\@tempcnta by -\@tempcntb\relax
- \gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax
- \fi
-}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% NOTE: is it the case that 15,000 and 16,000 are written as
-% yod-he and yod-vav, rather than tet-vav and tet-zayin? This
-% vaguely rings a bell, but I'm not certain. If this is the case,
-% then the current behavior is incorrect and should be changed. --RA.
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\gim@nomil}
-% The command |\gim@nomil| typesets an integer between 0~and~999
-% (for~0 it typesets nothing). The code has been modified from the
-% old |hebcal.sty|
-% (appropriate credits---Boris Lavva and Michail Rozman ?).
-% |\@tempcnta| holds the total value that remains to be typeset.
-% At each stage we find the highest valued letter that is
-% less than or equal to |\@tempcnta|, and call on |\gim@print| to
-% subtract this value and print the letter.
-%
-% Initialize: |\@tempcnta| holds the value, there is no previous
-% letter.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\gim@nomil}[1]{\@tempcnta=#1\@gim@prevfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Find the hundreds digit.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 100\relax % hundreds digit
- \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no hundreds
- \or\gim@print{100}{\hebqof}%
- \or\gim@print{200}{\hebresh}%
- \or\gim@print{300}{\hebshin}%
- \or\gim@print{400}{\hebtav}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{500}{\hebqof}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{600}{\hebresh}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{700}{\hebshin}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{800}{\hebtav}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\hebtav\gim@print{900}{\hebqof}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Find the tens digit. The numbers 15 and 16 are traditionally
-% printed as tet-vav ($9+6$) and tet-zayin ($9+7$) to avoid
-% spelling the Lord's name.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 10\relax % tens digit
- \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no tens
- \or % number between 10 and 19
- \ifnum\@tempcnta = 16 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-zayin
- \else\ifnum\@tempcnta = 15 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-vav
- \else \gim@print{10}{\hebyod}%
- \fi % \@tempcnta = 15
- \fi % \@tempcnta = 16
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Initial or final forms are selected according to the current
-% style option; |\gim@print| will force a non-final letter in
-% non-final position by means of a local style change.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \or\gim@print{20}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalkaf\else\hebkaf\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{30}{\heblamed}%
- \or\gim@print{40}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalmem\else\hebmem\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{50}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalnun\else\hebnun\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{60}{\hebsamekh}%
- \or\gim@print{70}{\hebayin}%
- \or\gim@print{80}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalpe\else\hebpe\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{90}{\if@gim@final\hebfinaltsadi\else\hebtsadi\fi}%
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Print the ones digit.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifcase\@tempcnta % print nothing if no ones
- \or\gim@print{1}{\hebalef}%
- \or\gim@print{2}{\hebbet}%
- \or\gim@print{3}{\hebgimel}%
- \or\gim@print{4}{\hebdalet}%
- \or\gim@print{5}{\hebhe}%
- \or\gim@print{6}{\hebvav}%
- \or\gim@print{7}{\hebzayin}%
- \or\gim@print{8}{\hebhet}%
- \or\gim@print{9}{\hebtet}%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\gim@print}
-% \begin{macro}{\if@gim@prev}
-% The actual printing routine typesets a digit with the appropriate
-% apostrophes: if a number sequence consists of a
-% single letter then it is followed by a single apostrophe, and if
-% it consists of more than one letter then a double
-% apostrophe is inserted before the last letter.
-% We typeset the letters one at a time, keeping a flag that tells
-% us if any previous letters had been typeset.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@gim@prev % flag if a previous letter has been typeset
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For each letter, we
-% first subtract its value from the total. Then,
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% if the result is zero then this is the last letter; we check
-% the flag to see if this is the only letter and print it with
-% the appropriate apostrophe;
-% \item
-% if the result is not zero then there remain additional letters
-% to be typeset; we print without an apostrophe and set the
-% `previous letter' flag.
-% \end{itemize}
-% |\@tempcnta| holds the total value that remains to be typeset.
-% We first deduct the letter's value from |\@tempcnta|,
-% so |\@tempcnta| is zero if and only if this is the last letter.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\gim@print}[2]{% #2 is a letter, #1 is its value.
- \advance\@tempcnta by -#1\relax% deduct the value from the remainder
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If this is the last letter, we print with the appropriate
-% apostrophe (depending on the style option):
-% if there is a preceding letter, print |"x| if the style calls for
-% apostrophes, |x| if it doesn't;
-% otherwise, this is the only letter: print |x'| if the style calls
-% for apostrophes, |x| if it doesn't.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifnum\@tempcnta=0% if this is the last letter
- \if@gim@prev\if@gim@apost"\fi#2%
- \else#2\if@gim@apost'\fi\fi%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If this is not the last letter: print a non-final form (by
-% forcing a local style option) and set the `previous letter' flag.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \else{\@gim@finalfalse#2}\@gim@prevtrue\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hebr}
-% \begin{macro}{\gim}
-% The older Hebrew counter commands |\hebr| and |\gim| are retained
-% in order to keep older documents from breaking. They are set to
-% be equivalent to |\alph|, and their use is deprecated. Note that
-% |\hebr| gives different results than it had in the past---it
-% now typesets 11 as yod-alef rather than kaf.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\hebr=\alph
-\let\gim=\alph
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For backward compatibility with `older' \pkg{hebrew.sty}
-% packages, we define Hebrew equivalents of some useful \LaTeX\
-% commands. Note, however, that 8-bit macros defined in Hebrew
-% are no longer supported.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hebcopy{\protect\R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof}}
-\def\hebincl{\protect\R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}}
-\def\hebpage{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}}
-\def\hebto{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebdalet}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\hadgesh| produce ``poor man's bold'' (heavy printout), when
-% used with normal font glyphs. It is advisable to use bold font
-% (for example, \emph{Dead Sea}) instead of this macro.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hadgesh#1{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
- \kern-.025em\copy0\kern-\wd0
- \kern.05em\copy0\kern-\wd0
- \kern-.025em\raise.0433em\box0 }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\piska| and |\piskapiska| sometimes used in `older' hebrew
-% sources, and should not be used in \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@compatibility
- \def\piska#1{\item{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent}
- \def\piskapiska#1{\itemitem{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The following commands are simply synonyms for the standard ones,
-% provided with \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\makafgadol=\textendash
-\let\makafanak=\textemdash
-\let\geresh=\textquoteright
-\let\opengeresh=\textquoteright
-\let\closegeresh=\textquoteleft
-\let\openquote=\textquotedblright
-\let\closequote=\textquotedblleft
-\let\leftquotation=\textquotedblright
-\let\rightquotation=\textquotedblleft
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We need to ensure that Hebrew is used as the default
-% right-to-left language at |\begin{document}|. The mechanism of
-% defining the |\@rllanguagename| is the same as in \babel 's
-% |\languagename|: the last right-to-left language in the
-% |\usepackage{babel}| line is set as the default right-to-left
-% language at document beginning.
-%
-% For example, the following code:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\usepackage[russian,hebrew,arabic,greek,english]{babel}|
-% \end{quote}
-% will set the Arabic language as the default right-to-left
-% language and the English language as the default language.
-% As a result, the commands |\L{}| and |\embox{}| will use English
-% and |\R{}| and |\hmbox{}| will use Arabic by default. These
-% defaults can be changed with the next |\sethebrew| or
-% |\selectlanguage{|\emph{language name}|}| command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{\def\@rllanguagename{hebrew}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration
-% file, setting the main language to be switched on at
-% |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of |@| to its
-% original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{hebrew}
-%</hebrew>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Right to left support}
-%
-% This file \pkg{rlbabel.def} defines necessary bidirectional macro
-% support for \LaTeXe. It is designed for use not only with Hebrew,
-% but with any Right-to-Left languages, supported by \babel. The
-% macros provided in this file are language and encoding
-% independent.
-%
-% Right-to-left languages will use \TeX\ extensions, namely \TeX\
-% primitives |\beginL|, |\endL| and |\beginR|, |\endR|, currently
-% implemented only in $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ and in \TeX{-}{-}\XeT.
-%
-% If $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ is used, we should switch it to the
-% \emph{enhanced} mode:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*rightleft>
-\ifx\TeXXeTstate\undefined\else%
- \TeXXeTstate=1
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Note, that $\varepsilon$-\TeX 's format file should be created
-% for \emph{extended} mode. Mode can be checked by running
-% $\varepsilon$-\TeX\ on some \TeX{} file, for example:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |This is e-TeX, Version 3.14159-1.1 (Web2c 7.0)|\\
-% |entering extended mode|
-% \end{quote}
-% The second line should be \texttt{entering extended mode}.
-%
-% We check if user uses Right-to-Left enabled engine instead of
-% regular Knuth's \TeX:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\beginL\@undefined%
- \newlinechar`\^^J
- \typeout{^^JTo avoid this error message,^^J%
- run TeX--XeT or e-TeX engine instead of regular TeX.^^J}
- \errmessage{Right-to-Left Support Error: use TeX--XeT or e-TeX
- engine}%
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Switching from LR to RL mode and back}
-%
-% \cs{@torl} and \cs{@fromrl} are called each time the horizontal
-% direction changes. They do all that is necessary besides changing
-% the direction. Currently their task is to change the encoding
-% information and mode (condition \cs{if@rl}). They should not
-% normally be called by users: user-level macros, such as
-% \cs{sethebrew} and \cs{unsethebrew}, as well as \babel 's
-% \cs{selectlanguage} are defined in language-definition files and
-% should be used to change default language (and direction).
-%
-% Local direction changing commands (for small pieces of text):
-% |\L{}|, |\R{}|, |\embox{}| and |\hmbox{}| are defined below in
-% this file in language-independent manner.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\if@rl}
-% \begin{description}\scrunch
-% \item[|\@rltrue|] means that the main mode is currently
-% Right-to-Left.
-% \item[|\@rlfalse|] means that the main mode is currently
-% Left-to-Right.
-% \end{description}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@rl
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\if@rlmain}
-% This is the main direction of the document. Unlike |\if@rl|
-% it is set once and never changes.
-% \begin{description}\scrunch
-% \item[|\@rltrue|] means that the document is Right-to-Left.
-% \item[|\@rlfalse|] means that the document is Left-to-Right.
-% \end{description}
-% Practically |\if@rlmain| is set according to the value of |\if@rl|
-% in the beginning of the run.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{% Here we set the main document direction
- \newif\if@rlmain%
- \if@rl% e.g: if the options to babel were [english,hebrew]
- \@rlmaintrue%
- \else% e.g: if the options to babel were [hebrew,english]
- \@rlmainfalse%
- \fi%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@torl}
-% Switches current direction to Right-to-Left: saves current
-% Left-to-Right encoding in |\lr@encodingdefault|, sets required
-% Right-to-Left language name in |\@rllanguagename| (similar to
-% \babel 's |\languagename|) and changes derection.
-%
-% The Right-to-Left language encoding should be defined in |.ldf|
-% file as special macro created by concatenation of the language
-% name and string \texttt{encoding}, for example, for Hebrew it
-% will be |\hebrewencoding|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\@torl}[1]{%
- \if@rl\else%
- \let\lr@encodingdefault=\encodingdefault%
- \fi%
- \def\@rllanguagename{#1}%
- \def\encodingdefault{\csname#1encoding\endcsname}%
- \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}%
- \selectfont%
- \@rltrue}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@fromrl}
-% Opposite to |\@torl|, switches current direction to
-% Left-to-Right: restores saved Left-to-Right encoding
-% (|\lr@encodingdefault|) and changes direction.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\@fromrl}{%
- \if@rl%
- \let\encodingdefault=\lr@encodingdefault%
- \fi%
- \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}%
- \selectfont%
- \@rlfalse}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\selectlanguage}
-% This standard \babel 's macro should be redefined to support
-% bidirectional tables. We divide |\selectlanguage| implementation
-% to two parts, and the first part calls the second
-% |\@@selectlanguage|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{%
- \edef\languagename{%
- \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty
- \else \string#1\@empty\fi}%
- \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@selectlanguage}
-% This new internal macro redefines a final part of the standard
-% \babel 's |\select|\-|language| implementation.
-%
-% Standard \LaTeX\ provides us with 3 tables: Table of Contents
-% (|.toc|), List of Figures (|.lof|), and List of Tables
-% (|.lot|). In multi-lingual texts mixing Left-to-Right languages
-% with Right-to-Left ones, the use of various directions in one
-% table results in very ugly output. Therefore, these 3 standard
-% tables will be used now only for Left-to-Right languages, and we
-% will add 3 Right-to-Left tables (their extensions are simply
-% reversed ones): RL Table of Contents (|.cot|), RL List of Figures
-% (|.fol|), and RL List of Tables (|.lof|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@selectlanguage#1{%
- \select@language{#1}%
- \if@filesw
- \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{#1}}%
- \if@rl%
- \addtocontents{cot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{fol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{tol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \else%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \fi%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\setrllanguage}
-% \begin{macro}{\unsetrllanguage}
-% The |\setrllanguage| and |\unsetrllanguage| pair of macros is
-% proved to very useful in bilingual texts, for example, in
-% Hebrew-English texts. The language-specific commands, for example,
-% |\sethebrew| and |\unsethebrew| use these macros as basis.
-%
-% Implementation saves and restores other language in
-% |\other@languagename| variable, and uses internal macro
-% |\@@selectlanguage|, defined above, to switch between languages.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\other@languagename=\languagename
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\setrllanguage}[1]{%
- \if@rl\else%
- \let\other@languagename=\languagename%
- \fi%
- \def\languagename{#1}%
- \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\unsetrllanguage}[1]{%
- \if@rl%
- \let\languagename=\other@languagename%
- \fi
- \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\L}
-% \begin{macro}{\R}
-% \begin{macro}{\HeblatexRedefineL}
-% Macros for changing direction, originally taken from TUGboat.
-% Usage: |\L{|\emph{Left to Right text}|}| and |\R{|\emph{Right to
-% Left text}|}|. Numbers should also be enclosed in |\L{}|, as in
-% |\L{123}|.
-%
-% Note, that these macros do not receive language name as
-% parameter. Instead, the saved |\@rllanguagename| will be
-% used. We assume that each Right-to-Left language defines
-% |\to|\emph{languagename} and |\from|\emph{languagename} macros in
-% language definition file, for example, for Hebrew: |\tohebrew|
-% and |\fromhebrew| macros in \pkg{hebrew.ldf} file.
-%
-% The macros \cs{L} and \cs{R} include `protect' to to make them robust and
-% allow use, for example, in tables.
-%
-% Due to the fact that some packages have different definitions for \cs{L}
-% the macro |\HeblatexRedefineL| is provided to overide them. This may
-% be required with hyperref, for instance.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\next=\
-\def\HeblatexRedefineL{%
- \def\L{\protect\pL}%
-}
-\HeblatexRedefineL
-\def\pL{\protect\afterassignment\moreL \let\next= }
-\def\moreL{\bracetext \aftergroup\endL \beginL\csname
- from\@rllanguagename\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\R{\protect\pR}
-\def\pR{\protect\afterassignment\moreR \let\next= }
-\def\moreR{\bracetext \aftergroup\endR \beginR\csname
- to\@rllanguagename\endcsname}
-\def\bracetext{\ifcat\next{\else\ifcat\next}\fi
- \errmessage{Missing left brace has been substituted}\fi \bgroup}
-\everydisplay{\if@rl\aftergroup\beginR\fi }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@R}
-% \begin{macro}{\@ensure@L}
-% Two small internal macros, a-la |\ensuremath|
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@ensure@R#1{\if@rl#1\else\R{#1}\fi}
-\def\@ensure@L#1{\if@rl\L{#1}\else#1\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Take care of Right-to-Left indentation in every paragraph.
-% Originally, \cs{noindent} was redefined for right-to-left by
-% Yaniv Bargury, then the implementation was rewritten by Alon Ziv
-% using an idea by Chris Rowley: \cs{noindent} now works
-% unmodified.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\rl@everypar{\if@rl{\setbox\z@\lastbox\beginR\usebox\z@}\fi}
-\let\o@everypar=\everypar
-\def\everypar#1{\o@everypar{\rl@everypar#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hmbox}
-% \begin{macro}{\embox}
-% Useful vbox commands. All text in math formulas is best enclosed
-% in these: LR text in |\embox| and RL text in |\hmbox|. |\mbox{}|
-% is useless for both cases, since it typesets in Left-to-Right
-% even for Right-to-Left languages (additions by Yaniv Bargury).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\hmbox}[1]{\mbox{\R{#1}}}
-\newcommand{\embox}[1]{\mbox{\L{#1}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@brackets}
-% When in Right-to-Left mode, brackets should be swapped. This
-% macro receives 3 parameters: left bracket, content, right
-% bracket. Brackets can be square brackets, braces, or
-% parentheses.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@brackets#1#2#3{\protect\if@rl #3#2#1\protect\else
- #1#2#3\protect\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@number}
-% \begin{macro}{\@latin}
-% \cs{@number} preserves numbers direction from Left to Right.
-% \cs{@latin} in addition switches current encoding to the latin.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@number#1{\ifmmode\else\beginL\fi#1\ifmmode\else\endL\fi}
-\def\@@latin#1{\@@number{{\@fromrl#1}}}
-\def\@number{\protect\@@number}
-\def\@latin{\protect\@@latin}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Counters}
-%
-% To make counter references work in Right to Left text, we need
-% to surround their original definitions with an
-% |\@number{|\ldots|}| or |\@latin{|\ldots|}|. Note, that
-% language-specific counters, such as \cs{hebr} or \cs{gim} are
-% provided with language definition file.
-%
-% We start with saving the original definitions:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@arabic=\@arabic
-\let\@@roman=\@roman
-\let\@@Roman=\@Roman
-\let\@@alph=\@alph
-\let\@@Alph=\@Alph
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@arabic}
-% \begin{macro}{\@roman}
-% \begin{macro}{\@Roman}
-% Arabic and roman numbers should be from Left to Right. In
-% addition, roman numerals, both lower- and upper-case should be in
-% latin encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@arabic#1{\@number{\@@arabic#1}}
-\def\@roman#1{\@latin{\@@roman#1}}
-\def\@Roman#1{\@latin{\@@Roman#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\arabicnorl}
-% This macro preserves the original definition of |\arabic|
-% (overrides the overriding of |\@arabic|)
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\arabicnorl#1{\expandafter\@@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\make@lr}
-% In Right to Left documents all counters defined in the standard
-% document classes \emph{article}, \emph{report} and \emph{book}
-% provided with \LaTeXe, such as |\thesection|, |\thefigure|,
-% |\theequation| should be typed as numbers from left to right. To
-% ensure direction, we use the following
-% |\make@lr{|\emph{counter}|}| macro:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\make@lr#1{\begingroup
- \toks@=\expandafter{#1}%
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand#1{\noexpand\@number{\the\toks@}}}%
- \x}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{%
- \@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{%
- \make@lr\thesection
- \make@lr\thesubsection
- \make@lr\thesubsubsection
- \make@lr\theparagraph
- \make@lr\thesubparagraph
- \make@lr\thefigure
- \make@lr\thetable
- }
- \make@lr\theequation
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Preserving logos}
-%
-% Preserve \TeX, \LaTeX\ and \LaTeXe\ logos.
-% \begin{macro}{\TeX}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@TeX\TeX
-\def\TeX{\@latin{\@@TeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@LaTeX\LaTeX
-\def\LaTeX{\@latin{\@@LaTeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LaTeXe}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@LaTeXe\LaTeXe
-\def\LaTeXe{\@latin{\@@LaTeXe}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{List environments}
-%
-% List environments in Right-to-Left languages, are ticked and
-% indented from the right instead of from the left. All the
-% definitions that caused indentation are revised for Right-to-Left
-% languages. \LaTeX\ keeps track on the indentation with the
-% \cs{leftmargin} and \cs{rightmargin} values.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{list}
-% Thus we need to override the definition of the |\list| macro: when
-% in RTL mode, the right margins are the begining of the line.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\list#1#2{%
- \ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax
- \@toodeep
- \else
- \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne
- \fi
- \rightmargin\z@
- \listparindent\z@
- \itemindent\z@
- \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
- \def\@itemlabel{#1}%
- \let\makelabel\@mklab
- \@nmbrlistfalse
- #2\relax
- \@trivlist
- \parskip\parsep
- \parindent\listparindent
- \advance\linewidth -\rightmargin
- \advance\linewidth -\leftmargin
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The only change in the macro is the |\if@rl| case:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \if@rl
- \advance\@totalleftmargin \rightmargin
- \else
- \advance\@totalleftmargin \leftmargin
- \fi
- \parshape \@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
- \ignorespaces}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\labelenumii}
-% \begin{macro}{\p@enumiii}
-% The \cs{labelenumii} and \cs{p@enumiii} commands use
-% \emph{parentheses}. They are revised to work Right-to-Left with
-% the help of \cs{@brackets} macro defined above.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\labelenumii{\@brackets(\theenumii)}
-\def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\@brackets(\theenumii)}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Tables of moving stuff}
-%
-% Tables of moving arguments: table of contents (|toc|), list of
-% figures (|lof|) and list of tables (|lot|) are handles here. These
-% three default \LaTeX\ tables will be used now exclusively for
-% Left to Right stuff.
-%
-% Three additional Right-to-Left tables: RL table of contents
-% (|cot|), RL list of figures (|fol|), and RL list of tables
-% (|tol|) are added.
-% These three tables will be used exclusively for Right to
-% Left stuff.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\@listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\@listoftables}
-% We define 3 new macros similar to the standard \LaTeX\ tables,
-% but with one parameter --- table file extension. These macros
-% will help us to define our additional tables below.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article
- \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{%
- \section*{\contentsname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}}
- \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{%
- \section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}}
- \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{%
- \section*{\listtablename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}}}%
- {% else report or book
- \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{%
- \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn%
- \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
- \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{%
- \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn%
- \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
- \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{%
- \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\else\@restonecolfalse\fi%
- \chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lrtableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\lrlistoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\lrlistoftables}
-% Left-to-Right tables are called now |\lr|\emph{xxx} and defined
-% with the aid of three macros defined above (extensions |toc|,
-% |lof|, and |lot|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand\lrtableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{toc}}%
- \newcommand\lrlistoffigures{\@listoffigures{lof}}%
- \newcommand\lrlistoftables{\@listoftables{lot}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\rltableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\rllistoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\rllistoftables}
-% Right-to-Left tables will be called |\rl|\emph{xxx} and defined
-% with the aid of three macros defined above (extensions |cot|,
-% |fol|, and |tol|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \newcommand\rltableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{cot}}%
- \newcommand\rllistoffigures{\@listoffigures{fol}}%
- \newcommand\rllistoftables{\@listoftables{tol}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tableofcontents}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoffigures}
-% \begin{macro}{\listoftables}
-% Let |\|\emph{xxx} be |\rl|\emph{xxx} if the current direction is
-% Right-to-Left and |\lr|\emph{xxx} if it is Left-to-Right.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \renewcommand\tableofcontents{\if@rl\rltableofcontents%
- \else\lrtableofcontents\fi}
- \renewcommand\listoffigures{\if@rl\rllistoffigures%
- \else\lrlistoffigures\fi}
- \renewcommand\listoftables{\if@rl\rllistoftables%
- \else\lrlistoftables\fi}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@dottedtocline}
-% The following makes problems when making a Right-to-Left tables,
-% since it uses \cs{leftskip} and \cs{rightskip} which are both
-% mode dependent.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
- \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
- {\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi #2\relax
- \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@tocrmarg \parfillskip
- -\if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi
- \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \leavevmode
- \@tempdima #3\relax
- \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi \@tempdima
- \null\nobreak\hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi
- {#4}\nobreak
- \leaders\hbox{$\m@th
- \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep
- mu$}\hfill
- \nobreak
- \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor \beginL#5\endL}%
- \par}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@part}
-% This standard macro was redefined for table of contents since it
-% uses \cs{rightskip} which is mode dependent.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
-\renewcommand*\l@part[2]{%
- \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
- \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
- \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}%
- \begingroup
- \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
- \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth
- \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
- {\leavevmode
- \large \bfseries #1\hfil \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}}\par
- \nobreak
- \global\@nobreaktrue
- \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
- \endgroup
- \fi}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% Part is redefined to support new Right-to-Left table of contents
-% (|cot|) as well as the Left-to-Right one (|toc|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{% article class
- \def\@part[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}%
- \fi
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
- \interlinepenalty \@M
- \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \Large\bfseries \partname~\thepart
- \par\nobreak
- \fi
- \huge \bfseries #2%
- \markboth{}{}\par}%
- \nobreak
- \vskip 3ex
- \@afterheading}%
-}{% report and book classes
- \def\@part[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}%
- \fi
- \markboth{}{}%
- {\centering
- \interlinepenalty \@M
- \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \huge\bfseries \partname~\thepart
- \par
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \Huge \bfseries #2\par}%
- \@endpart}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% Section was redefined from the \pkg{latex.ltx} file. It is
-% changed to support both Left-to-Right (|toc|) and Right-to-Left
-% (|cot|) table of contents simultaneously.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
- \let\@svsec\@empty
- \else
- \refstepcounter{#1}%
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
- \fi
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup
- #6{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
- \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{%
- #6{\hskip #3\relax
- \@svsec #8}%
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}}%
- \fi
- \@xsect{#5}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
-% Caption was redefined from the \pkg{latex.ltx} file. It is
-% changed to support Left-to-Right list of figures and list of
-% tables (|lof| and |lot|) as well as new Right-to-Left lists
-% (|fol| and |tol|) simultaneously.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
- \par
- \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #2}}%
- \def\@fignm{figure}
- \ifx#1\@fignm\addcontentsline{fol}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi%
- \def\@tblnm{table}
- \ifx#1\@tblnm\addcontentsline{tol}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi%
- \begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \if@minipage
- \@setminipage
- \fi
- \normalsize
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
- \endgroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@chapter}
-% This standard macro was redefined for table of contents since it
-% uses \cs{rightskip} which is mode dependent.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{%
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{%
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{}{%
- \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
- \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
- \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
- \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
- \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
- \begingroup
- \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth
- \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
- \leavevmode \bfseries
- \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi\@tempdima
- \hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi
- #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}\par
- \penalty\@highpenalty
- \endgroup
- \fi}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\l@section}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@subsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@subsubsection}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@paragraph}
-% \begin{macro}{\l@subparagraph}
-% The toc entry for section did not work in article style.
-% Also it does not print dots, which is funny when most of your
-% work is divided into sections.
-%
-% It was revised to use |\@dottedtocline| as in \pkg{report.sty}
-% (by Yaniv Bargury) and was updated later for all kinds of
-% sections (by Boris Lavva).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{%
-\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Two-column mode}
-%
-% This is the support of \texttt{twocolumn} option for the standard
-% \LaTeXe\ classes.
-% The following code was originally borrowed from the Arab\TeX\
-% package, file \pkg{latexext.sty}, copyright by Klaus Lagally,
-% Institut fuer Informatik, Universitaet Stuttgart. It was updated
-% for this package by Boris Lavva.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@outputdblcol}
-% \begin{macro}{\set@outputdblcol}
-% \begin{macro}{rl@outputdblcol}
-% First column is \cs{@leftcolumn} will be shown at the right side,
-% Second column is \cs{@outputbox} will be shown at the left side.
-%
-% |\set@outputdblcol| IS CURRENTLY DISABLED. TODO: REMOVE IT [tzafrir]
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol
-%\def\set@outputdblcol{%
-% \if@rl\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{\rl@outputdblcol}%
-% \else\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{\@@outputdblcol}\fi}
-\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{%
- \if@rlmain%
- \rl@outputdblcol%
- \else%
- \@@outputdblcol%
- \fi%
-}
-\newcommand{\rl@outputdblcol}{%
- \if@firstcolumn
- \global \@firstcolumnfalse
- \global \setbox\@leftcolumn \box\@outputbox
- \else
- \global \@firstcolumntrue
- \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {\hb@xt@\textwidth {%
- \hskip\columnwidth%
- \hfil\vrule\@width\columnseprule\hfil
- \hb@xt@\columnwidth {%
- \box\@leftcolumn \hss}%
- \hb@xt@\columnwidth {%
- \hskip-\textwidth%
- \box\@outputbox \hss}%
- \hskip\columnsep%
- \hskip\columnwidth}}%
- \@combinedblfloats
- \@outputpage
- \begingroup
- \@dblfloatplacement
- \@startdblcolumn
- \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi
- {\@outputpage
- \@startdblcolumn}%
- \endgroup
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Footnotes}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\footnoterule}
-% The Right-to-Left footnote rule is simply reversed default
-% Left-to-Right one. Footnotes can be used in RL or LR main
-% modes, but changing mode while a footnote is pending is still
-% unsolved.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@footnoterule=\footnoterule
-\def\footnoterule{\if@rl\hb@xt@\hsize{\hss\vbox{\@@footnoterule}}%
- \else\@@footnoterule\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Headings and two-side support}
-%
-% When using \texttt{headings} or \texttt{myheadings} modes, we
-% have to ensure that the language and direction of heading is the
-% same as the whole chapter/part of the document. This is
-% implementing by setting special variable \cs{headlanguage} when
-% starting new chapter/part.
-%
-% In addition, when selecting the \texttt{twoside} option (default in
-% \texttt{book} document class), the LR and RL modes need to be set
-% properly for things on the heading and footing. This is done
-% here too.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{ps@headings}
-% \begin{macro}{ps@myheadings}
-% \begin{macro}{headeven}
-% \begin{macro}{headodd}
-% First, we will support the standard \pkg{letter} class:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{%
- \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\headtoname{}
- \ignorespaces\toname
- \hfil \@date
- \hfil \pagename{} \thepage\protect\if@rl\endR\fi}
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}
- \let\@evenhead\@oddhead}
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}}
- \fi
- \def\headfirst{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\fromlocation \hfill %
- \telephonenum\protect\if@rl\endR\fi}
- \def\ps@firstpage{%
- \let\@oddhead\@empty
- \def\@oddfoot{\raisebox{-45\p@}[\z@]{%
- \hb@xt@\textwidth{\hspace*{100\p@}%
- \ifcase \@ptsize\relax
- \normalsize
- \or
- \small
- \or
- \footnotesize
- \fi
- \select@language{\headlanguage}\headfirst}}\hss}}
-%
- \renewcommand{\opening}[1]{%
- \let\headlanguage=\languagename%
- \ifx\@empty\fromaddress%
- \thispagestyle{firstpage}%
- {\raggedleft\@date\par}%
- \else % home address
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- {\raggedleft
- \if@rl\begin{tabular}{@{\beginR\csname%
- to\@rllanguagename\endcsname}r@{\endR}}\ignorespaces
- \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]%
- \@date \end{tabular}\par%
- \else\begin{tabular}{l}\ignorespaces
- \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]%
- \@date \end{tabular}\par%
- \fi}%
- \fi
- \vspace{2\parskip}%
- {\raggedright \toname \\ \toaddress \par}%
- \vspace{2\parskip}%
- #1\par\nobreak}
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then, the \pkg{article}, \pkg{report} and \pkg{book} document
-% classes are supported. Note, that in one-sided mode
-% \cs{markright} was changed to \cs{markboth}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-{% article, report, book
- \def\headeven{\protect\if@rl\beginR\thepage\hfil\rightmark\endR
- \protect\else\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark}
- \protect\fi}
- \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\leftmark\hfil\thepage\endR
- \protect\else{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage
- \protect\fi}
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article
- \if@twoside % two-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}%
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\subsectionmark##1{%
- \markright{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
- \thesubsection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}
- \else % one-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thesection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thesection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
- \fi
-%
- \def\ps@myheadings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}%
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \let\sectionmark\@gobble
- \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
- }}{% report and book
- \if@twoside % two-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
- \else % one-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
- \fi
- \def\ps@myheadings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}%
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \let\chaptermark\@gobble
- \let\sectionmark\@gobble
- }}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Postscript Porblems}
-% Any command that is implemented by PostScript directives, e.g
-% commands from the ps-tricks package, needs to be fixed, because the
-% PostScript directives are being interpeted after the document has been
-% converted by \TeX to visual Hebrew (DVI, PostScript and PDF have visual
-% Hebrew).
-%
-% For instance: Suppose you wrote in your document:
-%
-% |\textcolor{cyan}{some ltr text}|
-%
-% This would be interpeted by \TeX to something like:
-%
-% |[postscript:make color cyan]some LTR text[postscript:make color black]|
-%
-%
-% However, with the bidirectionality support we get:
-%
-% |\textcolor{cyan}{\hebalef\hebbet}|
-%
-% Translated to:
-%
-% |[postscript:make color black]{bet}{alef}[postscript:make color cyan]|
-%
-% While we want:
-%
-% |[postscript:make color cyan]{bet}{alef}[postscript:make color black]|
-%
-% The following code will probably work at least with code that stays in the
-% same line:
-% \begin{macro}{@textcolor}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- %I assume that \@textcolor is only defined by the package color
- \ifx\@textcolor\@undefined\else%
- % If that macro was defined before the beginning of the document,
- % that is: the package was loaded: redefine it with bidi support
- \def\@textcolor#1#2#3{%
- \if@rl%
- \beginL\protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}\beginR#3\endR}\endL%
- \else%
- \protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}#3}%
- \fi%
- }%
- \fi%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\thetrueSlideCounter}
-% This macro probably needs to be overriden for when using |prosper|,
-% (waiting for feedback. Tzafrir)
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{prosper}{%
- \def\thetrueSlideCounter{\arabicnorl{trueSlideCounter}}
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Miscellaneous internal \LaTeX\ macros}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedright}
-% \begin{macro}{\raggedleft}
-% \cs{raggedright} was changed from \pkg{latex.ltx} file to support
-% Right-to-Left mode, because of the bug in its implementation.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\raggedright{%
- \let\\\@centercr
- \leftskip\z@skip\rightskip\@flushglue
- \parindent\z@\parfillskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Swap meanings of \cs{raggedright} and \cs{raggedleft} in
-% Right-to-Left mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@raggedleft=\raggedleft
-\let\@@raggedright=\raggedright
-\renewcommand\raggedleft{\if@rl\@@raggedright%
- \else\@@raggedleft\fi}
-\renewcommand\raggedright{\if@rl\@@raggedleft%
- \else\@@raggedright\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\author}
-% \cs{author} is inserted with \texttt{tabular} environment, and
-% will be used in restricted horizontal mode. Therefore we have to
-% add explicit direction change command when in Right-to-Left
-% mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@author=\author
-\renewcommand{\author}[1]{\@@author{\if@rl\beginR #1\endR\else #1\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeUppercase}
-% \begin{macro}{\MakeLowercase}
-% There are no uppercase and lowercase letters in most
-% Right-to-Left languages, therefore we should redefine
-% \cs{MakeUppercase} and \cs{MakeLowercase} \LaTeXe\ commands.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@MakeUppercase=\MakeUppercase
-\def\MakeUppercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeUppercase{#1}\fi}
-\let\@@MakeLowercase=\MakeLowercase
-\def\MakeLowercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeLowercase{#1}\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\underline}
-% We should explicitly use \cs{L} and \cs{R} commands in
-% \cs{underline}d text.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\@@@underline=\underline
-\def\underline#1{\@@@underline{\if@rl\R{#1}\else #1\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \cs{undertext} was added for \LaTeX 2.09 compatibility mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@compatibility
- \let\undertext=\underline
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@xnthm}
-% \begin{macro}{\@opargbegintheorem}
-% The following has been inserted to correct the appearance of the
-% number in \cs{newtheorem} to reorder theorem number components. A
-% similar correction in the definition of \cs{@opargbegintheorem}
-% was added too.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
- \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
- {\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\noexpand\@number
- {\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
- \@thmcounter{#1}}}%
- \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
- \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
-%
-\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{%
- \trivlist
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\
- \@brackets({#3})}]\itshape}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% \begin{macro}{\@schapter}
-% The following was added for pretty printing of the chapter
-% numbers, for supporting Right-to-Left tables (\texttt{cot},
-% \texttt{fol}, and \texttt{tol}), to save \cs{headlanguage}
-% for use in running headers, and to start two-column mode
-% depending on chapter's main language.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{}{%
- % For pretty priniting
- \def\@@chapapp{Chapter}
- \def\@@thechapter{\@@arabic\c@chapter}
- \def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
- \let\headlanguage=\languagename%
- %\set@outputdblcol%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \refstepcounter{chapter}%
- \typeout{\@@chapapp\space\@@thechapter.}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}
- \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \chaptermark{#1}
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{fol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{tol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}
- %
- \def\@schapter#1{%
- \let\headlanguage=\languagename%
- %\set@outputdblcol%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
- \else
- \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\appendix}
-% Changed mainly for pretty printing of appendix numbers, and to
-% start two-column mode with the right language (if needed).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article
- \renewcommand\appendix{\par
- \setcounter{section}{0}%
- \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
- \renewcommand\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}}
- }{% report and book
- \renewcommand\appendix{\par
- %\set@outputdblcol%
- \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
- \setcounter{section}{0}%
- \renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
- % For pretty priniting
- \def\@@chapapp{Appendix}%
- \def\@@thechapter{\@@Alph\c@chapter}
- \renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Bibliography and citations}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@cite}
-% \begin{macro}{\@biblabel}
-% \begin{macro}{\@lbibitem}
-% Citations are produced by the macro
-% |\@cite{|\emph{LABEL}|}{|\emph{NOTE}|}|. Both the citation label
-% and the note is typeset in the current direction. We have to use
-% \cs{@brackets} macro in \cs{@cite} and \cs{@biblabel} macros. In
-% addition, when using \emph{alpha} or similar bibliography style,
-% the \cs{@lbibitem} is used and have to be update to support bot
-% Right-to-Left and Left-to-Right citations.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@cite#1#2{\@brackets[{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}]}
-\def\@biblabel#1{\@brackets[{#1}]}
-\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}\hfill]\if@filesw
- {\let\protect\noexpand
- \immediate
- \if@rl\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\R{#1}}}%
- \else\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\L{#1}}}\fi%
- }\fi\ignorespaces}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{environment}{thebibliography}
-% Use \cs{rightmargin} instead of \cs{leftmargin} when in RL mode.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{%
- \renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]
- {\section*{\refname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\refname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\refname}}%
- \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
- \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth
- \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep
- \@openbib@code
- \usecounter{enumiv}%
- \let\p@enumiv\@empty
- \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- \sloppy
- \clubpenalty4000
- \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
- \widowpenalty4000%
- \sfcode`\.\@m}
- {\def\@noitemerr
- {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
- \endlist}}%
-{\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
- \chapter*{\bibname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\bibname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\bibname}}%
- \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
- \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth
- \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep
- \@openbib@code
- \usecounter{enumiv}%
- \let\p@enumiv\@empty
- \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- \sloppy
- \clubpenalty4000
- \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
- \widowpenalty4000%
- \sfcode`\.\@m}
- {\def\@noitemerr
- {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
- \endlist}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{environment}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@verbatim}
-% All kinds of verbs (\cs{verb},\cs{verb*},\texttt{verbatim} and
-% \texttt{verbatim*}) now can be used in Right-to-Left mode. Errors
-% in latin mode solved too.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@verbatim{%
- \let\do\@makeother \dospecials%
- \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
-% Captions are set always centered. This allows us to use bilingual
-% captions, for example: |\caption{\R{RLtext} \\ \L{LRtext}}|,
-% which will be formatted as:
-% \begin{center}
-% Right to left caption here (RLtext) \\
-% Left to right caption here (LRtext)
-% \end{center}
-% See also \cs{bcaption} command below.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip%
- \begin{center}%
- #1: #2%
- \end{center} \par%
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Additional bidirectional commands}
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Section headings are typeset with the default global
-% direction.
-% \item Text in section headings in the reverse language \emph{do
-% not} have to be protected for the reflection command, as in:
-% |\protect\L{|\emph{Latin Text}|}|, because \cs{L} and \cs{R} are
-% robust now.
-% \item Table of contents, list of figures and list of tables
-% should be typeset with the \cs{tableofcontents},
-% \cs{listoffigures} and \cs{listoftables} commands respectively.
-% \item The above tables will be typeset in the main direction (and
-% language) in effect where the above commands are placed.
-% \item Only 2 tables of each kind are supported: one for
-% Right-to-Left and another for Left-to-Right directions.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% How to include line to both tables? One has to use bidirectional
-% sectioning commands as following:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item Use the |\b|\emph{xxx} version of the sectioning commands
-% in the text instead of the |\|\emph{xxx} version (\emph{xxx} is
-% one of: \texttt{part}, \texttt{chapter}, \texttt{section},
-% \texttt{subsection}, \texttt{subsubsection}, \texttt{caption}).
-% \item Syntax of the |\b|\emph{xxx} command is
-% |\b|\emph{xxx}|{|\emph{RL text}|}{|\emph{LR text}|}|.
-% Both arguments are typeset in proper direction by default (no
-% need to change direction for the text inside).
-% \item The section header inside the document will be typeset in
-% the global direction in effect at the time. i.e. The |{|\emph{RL
-% text}|}| will be typeset if Right-to-Left mode is in effect and
-% |{|\emph{LR text}|}| otherwise.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bpart}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bpart}[2]{\part{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bchapter}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bchapter}[2]{\chapter{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bsection}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bsection}[2]{\section{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bsubsection}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bsubsection}[2]{\subsection{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bsubsubsection}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bsubsubsection}[2]{\subsubsection{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bcaption}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bcaption}[2]{%
- \caption[\protect\if@rl \R{#1}\protect\else \L{#2}\protect\fi]{%
- \if@rl\R{#1}\protect\\ \L{#2}
- \else\L{#2}\protect\\ \R{#1}\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The following definition is a modified version of \cs{bchapter}, meant
-% as a bilingual twin for \cs{chapter*} and \cs{section*}
-% (added by Irina Abramovici).
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bchapternn}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bchapternn}[2]{\chapter*{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bsectionnn}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand{\bsectionnn}[2]{\section*{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Finally, at end of \babel\ package, the \cs{headlanguage} and
-% two-column mode will be initialized according to the current
-% language.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfPackage{\rlAtEndOfPackage}
-%
-\def\rlAtEndOfPackage{%
- \global\let\headlanguage=\languagename%\set@outputdblcol%
-}
-%</rightleft>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Hebrew calendar}
-%
-% The original version of the package \pkg{hebcal.sty}\footnote{The
-% following description of \pkg{hebcal} package is based on the
-% comments included with original source by the author, Michail
-% Rozman.} for \TeX\ and \LaTeX2.09, entitled ``\TeX{} \& \LaTeX{}
-% macros for computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one'' was created
-% by Michail Rozman, |misha@iop.tartu.ew.su|\footnote{Please direct
-% any comments, bug reports, questions, etc. about the package to
-% this address.}
-%
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}lr@{}c@{}ll}
-% Released: &Tammuz 12, 5751&--&June 24, 1991 &\\
-% Corrected:&Shebat 10, 5752&--&January 15, 1992&by Rama Porrat\\
-% Corrected:&Adar II 5, 5752&--&March 10, 1992 &by Misha\\
-% Corrected:&Tebeth, 5756 &--&January 1996 &Dan Haran\\
-% &&&&(haran@math.tau.ac.il)
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% The package was adjusted for \babel{} and \LaTeXe{} by Boris
-% Lavva.
-%
-% Changes to the printing routine (only) by Ron Artstein, June 1,
-% 2003.
-%
-% This package should be included \emph{after} the \pkg{babel} with
-% \pkg{hebrew} option, as following:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\documentclass[|\ldots|]{|\ldots|}|\\
-% |\usepackage[hebrew,|\ldots|,|\emph{other languages}|,|
-% \ldots|]{babel}|\\
-% |\usepackage{hebcal}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% Two main user-level commands are provided by this package:
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Hebrewtoday}
-% Computes today's Hebrew date and prints it. If we are presently
-% in Hebrew mode, the date will be printed in Hebrew, otherwise ---
-% in English (like Shebat 10, 5752).
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{\Hebrewdate}
-% Computes the Hebrew date from the given Gregorian date and
-% prints it. If we are presently in Hebrew mode, the date will be
-% printed in Hebrew, otherwise --- in English (like Shebat 10,
-% 5752). An example of usage is shown below:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\newcount\hd \newcount\hm \newcount\hy|\\
-% |\hd=10 \hm=3 \hy=1992|\\
-% |\Hebrewdate{\hd}{\hm}{\hy}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \DescribeMacro{full}
-% The package option |full| sets the flag |\@full@hebrew@year|,
-% which causes years from the current millenium to be printed with
-% the thousands digit (he-tav-shin-samekh-gimel). Without this
-% option, thousands are not printed for the current millenium.
-% NOTE: should this be a command option rather than a package
-% option? --RA.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Introduction}
-%
-% The Hebrew calendar is inherently complicated: it is lunisolar --
-% each year starts close to the autumn equinox, but each month must
-% strictly start at a new moon. Thus Hebrew calendar must be
-% harmonized simultaneously with both lunar and solar events. In
-% addition, for reasons of the religious practice, the year cannot
-% start on Sunday, Wednesday or Friday.
-%
-% For the full description of Hebrew calendar and for the list of
-% references see:
-% \begin{quote}
-% Nachum Dershowitz and Edward M. Reingold,
-% \emph{``Calendarical Calculations''}, Software--Pract.Exper.,
-% vol. 20 (9), pp.899--928 (September 1990).
-% \end{quote}
-% |C| translation of |LISP| programs from the above article
-% available from Mr. Wayne Geiser, |geiser%pictel@uunet.uu.net|.
-%
-% The 4\textsuperscript{th} distribution (July 1989) of hdate/hcal
-% (Hebrew calendar programs similar to UNIX date/cal) by Mr. Amos
-% Shapir, |amos@shum.huji.ac.il|, contains short and very clear
-% description of algorithms.
-%
-% \subsubsection{Registers, Commands, Formatting Macros}
-%
-% The command |\Hebrewtoday| produces today's date for Hebrew
-% calendar. It is similar to the standard \LaTeXe{} command
-% |\today|. In addition three numerical registers |\Hebrewday|,
-% |\Hebrewmonth| and |\Hebrewyear| are set.
-% For setting this registers without producing of date string
-% command |\Hebrewsetreg| can be used.
-%
-% The command
-% |\Hebrewdate{|\emph{Gday}|}{|\emph{Gmonth}|}{|\emph{Gyear}|}|
-% produces Hebrew calendar date corresponding to Gregorian date
-% |Gday.Gmonth.Gyear|. Three numerical registers |\Hebrewday|,
-% |\Hebrewmonth| and |\Hebrewyear| are set.
-%
-% For converting arbitrary Gregorian date |Gday.Gmonth.Gyear|
-% to Hebrew date |Hday.Hmonth.Hyear| without producing date string
-% the command:
-% \begin{center}
-% |\HebrewFromGregorian{|\emph{Gday}|}{|\emph{Gmonth}|}{|%
-% \emph{Gyear}|}{|\emph{Hday}|}{|\emph{Hmonth}|}{|\emph{Hyear}|}|
-% \end{center}
-% can be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*calendar>
-\newif\if@full@hebrew@year
-\@full@hebrew@yearfalse
-\DeclareOption{full}{\@full@hebrew@yeartrue}
-\ProcessOptions
-\newcount\Hebrewday \newcount\Hebrewmonth \newcount\Hebrewyear
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewdate}
-% Hebrew calendar date corresponding to Gregorian date
-% |Gday.Gmonth.Gyear|. If Hebrew (right-to-left) fonts \& macros
-% are not loaded, we have to use English format.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Hebrewdate#1#2#3{%
- \HebrewFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3}
- {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}%
- \ifundefined{if@rl}%
- \FormatForEnglish{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}%
- \else%
- \FormatDate{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewtoday}
-% Today's date in Hebrew calendar.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Hebrewtoday{\Hebrewdate{\day}{\month}{\year}}
-\let\hebrewtoday=\Hebrewtoday
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Hebrewsetreg}
-% Set registers: today's date in hebrew calendar.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Hebrewsetreg{%
- \HebrewFromGregorian{\day}{\month}{\year}
- {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FormatDate}
-% Prints a Hebrew calendar date |Hebrewday.Hebrewmonth.Hebrewyear|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\FormatDate#1#2#3{%
- \if@rl%
- \FormatForHebrew{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \else%
- \FormatForEnglish{#1}{#2}{#3}
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% To prepare another language version of Hebrew calendar commands,
-% one should change or add commands here.
-%
-% We start with Hebrew language macros.
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewYearName}
-% Prints Hebrew year as a Hebrew number. Disambiguates strings by
-% adding lamed-pe-gimel to years of the first Jewish millenium and
-% to years divisible by 1000. Suppresses the thousands digit in the
-% current millenium unless the package option |full| is selected.
-% NOTE: should this be provided as a command option rather than a
-% package option? --RA.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewYearName#1{{%
- \@tempcnta=#1\divide\@tempcnta by 1000\multiply\@tempcnta by 1000
- \ifnum#1=\@tempcnta\relax % divisible by 1000: disambiguate
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(%
- \else % not divisible by 1000
- \ifnum#1<1000\relax % first millennium: disambiguate
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<5000
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<6000 % current millenium, print without thousands
- \@tempcnta=#1\relax
- \if@full@hebrew@year\else\advance\@tempcnta by -5000\fi
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{\@tempcnta}%
- \else % #1>6000
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewMonthName}
-% The macro |\HebrewMonthName{|\emph{month}|}{|\emph{year}|}|
-% returns the name of month in the `year'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewMonthName#1#2{%
- \ifnum #1 = 7 %
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}%
- \if@HebrewLeap \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'%
- \else \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \ifcase#1%
- % nothing for 0
- \or\hebtav\hebshin\hebresh\hebyod%
- \or\hebhet\hebshin\hebvav\hebfinalnun%
- \or\hebkaf\hebsamekh\heblamed\hebvav%
- \or\hebtet\hebbet\hebtav%
- \or\hebshin\hebbet\hebtet%
- \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebalef'%
- \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'%
- \or\hebnun\hebyod\hebsamekh\hebfinalnun%
- \or\hebalef\hebyod\hebyod\hebresh%
- \or\hebsamekh\hebyod\hebvav\hebfinalnun%
- \or\hebtav\hebmem\hebvav\hebzayin%
- \or\hebalef\hebbet%
- \or\hebalef\heblamed\hebvav\heblamed%
- \fi%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewDayName}
-% Name of day in Hebrew letters (gimatria).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewDayName#1{\Hebrewnumeral{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FormatForHebrew}
-% The macro |\FormatForHebrew{|\emph{hday}|}{|\emph{hmonth}
-% |}{|\emph{hyear}|}| returns the formatted Hebrew date in Hebrew
-% language.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\FormatForHebrew#1#2#3{%
- \HebrewDayName{#1}~\hebbet\HebrewMonthName{#2}{#3},~%
- \HebrewYearName{#3}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We continue with two English language macros for Hebrew calendar.
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish}
-% The macro |\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish{|\emph{month}|}{|%
-% \emph{year}|}| is similar to |\Hebrew|\-|Month|\-|Name| described
-% above. It returns the name of month in the Hebrew `year' in
-% English.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish#1#2{%
- \ifnum #1 = 7%
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}%
- \if@HebrewLeap Adar II\else Adar\fi%
- \else%
- \ifcase #1%
- % nothing for 0
- \or Tishrei%
- \or Heshvan%
- \or Kislev%
- \or Tebeth%
- \or Shebat%
- \or Adar I%
- \or Adar II%
- \or Nisan%
- \or Iyar%
- \or Sivan%
- \or Tammuz%
- \or Av%
- \or Elul%
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FormatForEnglish}
-% The macro |\FormatForEnglish{|\emph{hday}|}{|\emph{hmonth}
-% |}{|\emph{hyear}|}| is similar to |\Format|\-|For|\-|Hebrew|
-% macro described above and returns the formatted Hebrew date in
-% English.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\FormatForEnglish#1#2#3{%
- \HebrewMonthNameInEnglish{#2}{#3} \number#1,\ \number#3}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Auxiliary Macros}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\@common
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\Remainder}
-% |\Remainder{|\emph{a}|}{|\emph{b}|}{|\emph{c}|}| calculates
-% $c = a\%b == a-b\times\frac{a}{b}$
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Remainder#1#2#3{%
- #3 = #1% % c = a
- \divide #3 by #2% % c = a/b
- \multiply #3 by -#2% % c = -b(a/b)
- \advance #3 by #1}% % c = a - b(a/b)
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@Divisible
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\CheckIfDivisible}
-% |\CheckIfDivisible{|\emph{a}|}{|\emph{b}|}| sets
-% |\@Divisibletrue| if $a\%b == 0$
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\CheckIfDivisible#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmp = 0% \tmp == \count0 - temporary variable
- \Remainder{#1}{#2}{\tmp}%
- \ifnum \tmp = 0%
- \global\@Divisibletrue%
- \else%
- \global\@Divisiblefalse%
- \fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ifundefined}
-% From the \TeX book, ex. 7.7:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\ifundefined{|\emph{command}|}<true text>\else<false text>\fi|
-% \end{quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ifundefined#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Gregorian Part}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@GregorianLeap
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\IfGregorianLeap}
-% Conditional which is true if Gregorian `year' is a leap year:
-% $((year\%4==0)\wedge(year\%100\neq 0))\vee(year\%400==0)$
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\IfGregorianLeap#1{%
- \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{4}%
- \if@Divisible%
- \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{100}%
- \if@Divisible%
- \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{400}%
- \if@Divisible%
- \@GregorianLeaptrue%
- \else%
- \@GregorianLeapfalse%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \@GregorianLeaptrue%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \@GregorianLeapfalse%
- \fi%
- \if@GregorianLeap}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths}
-% The macro |\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths{|\emph{month}|}{|^^A
-% \emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}| calculates the number of days in
-% months prior to `month' in the `year'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{%
- {%
- #3 = \ifcase #1%
- 0 \or% % no month number 0
- 0 \or%
- 31 \or%
- 59 \or%
- 90 \or%
- 120 \or%
- 151 \or%
- 181 \or%
- 212 \or%
- 243 \or%
- 273 \or%
- 304 \or%
- 334%
- \fi%
- \IfGregorianLeap{#2}%
- \ifnum #1 > 2% % if month after February
- \advance #3 by 1% % add leap day
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \global\@common = #3}%
- #3 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\GregorianDaysInPriorYears}
-% The macro |\GregorianDaysInPriorYears{|\emph{year}|}{|^^A
-% \emph{days}|}| calculates the number of days in years prior to
-% the `year'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\GregorianDaysInPriorYears#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpc = 4% % \tmpc==\count4
- \countdef\tmpb = 2% % \tmpb==\count2
- \tmpb = #1% %
- \advance \tmpb by -1% %
- \tmpc = \tmpb% % \tmpc = \tmpb = year-1
- \multiply \tmpc by 365% % Days in prior years =
- #2 = \tmpc% % = 365*(year-1) ...
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \divide \tmpc by 4% % \tmpc = (year-1)/4
- \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus Julian leap days ...
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \divide \tmpc by 100% % \tmpc = (year-1)/100
- \advance #2 by -\tmpc% % ... minus century years ...
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \divide \tmpc by 400% % \tmpc = (year-1)/400
- \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus 4-century years.
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AbsoluteFromGregorian}
-% The macro |\AbsoluteFromGregorian{|\emph{day}|}{|\emph{month}^^A
-% |}{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{absdate}|}| calculates the absolute date
-% (days since $01.01.0001$) from Gregorian date |day.month.year|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\AbsoluteFromGregorian#1#2#3#4{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpd = 0% % \tmpd==\count0
- #4 = #1% % days so far this month
- \GregorianDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{\tmpd}%
- \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior months
- \GregorianDaysInPriorYears{#3}{\tmpd}%
- \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior years
- \global\@common = #4}%
- #4 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew Part}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@HebrewLeap
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\CheckLeapHebrewYear}
-% Set |\@HebrewLeaptrue| if Hebrew `year' is a leap year, i.e.\ if
-% $(1+7\times year)\%19 < 7$ then \emph{true} else \emph{false}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\CheckLeapHebrewYear#1{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0
- \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1
-%
- \tmpa = #1%
- \multiply \tmpa by 7%
- \advance \tmpa by 1%
- \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}%
- \ifnum \tmpb < 7% % \tmpb = (7*year+1)%19
- \global\@HebrewLeaptrue%
- \else%
- \global\@HebrewLeapfalse%
- \fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewElapsedMonths}
-% The macro |\HebrewElapsedMonths{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{months}|}|
-% determines the number of months elapsed from the Sunday prior to
-% the start of the Hebrew calendar to the mean conjunction of
-% Tishri of Hebrew `year'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewElapsedMonths#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0
- \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1
- \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2
-%
- \tmpa = #1% %
- \advance \tmpa by -1% %
- #2 = \tmpa% % #2 = \tmpa = year-1
- \divide #2 by 19% % Number of complete Meton cycles
- \multiply #2 by 235% % #2 = 235*((year-1)/19)
-%
- \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}% \tmpa = years%19-years this cycle
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \multiply \tmpb by 12% %
- \advance #2 by \tmpb% % add regular months this cycle
-%
- \multiply \tmpc by 7% %
- \advance \tmpc by 1% %
- \divide \tmpc by 19% % \tmpc = (1+7*((year-1)%19))/19 -
-% % number of leap months this cycle
- \advance #2 by \tmpc% % add leap months
-%
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewElapsedDays}
-% The macro |\HebrewElapsedDays{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}|
-% determines the number of days elapsed from the Sunday prior to
-% the start of the Hebrew calendar to the mean conjunction of
-% Tishri of Hebrew `year'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewElapsedDays#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0
- \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1
- \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2
-%
- \HebrewElapsedMonths{#1}{#2}%
- \tmpa = #2% %
- \multiply \tmpa by 13753% %
- \advance \tmpa by 5604% % \tmpa=MonthsElapsed*13758 + 5604
- \Remainder{\tmpa}{25920}{\tmpc}% \tmpc == ConjunctionParts
- \divide \tmpa by 25920%
-%
- \multiply #2 by 29%
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \advance #2 by \tmpa% % #2 = 1 + MonthsElapsed*29 +
-% % PartsElapsed/25920
- \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek
- \ifnum \tmpc < 19440%
- \ifnum \tmpc < 9924%
- \else% % New moon at 9 h. 204 p. or later
- \ifnum \tmpa = 2% % on Tuesday ...
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% of a common year
- \if@HebrewLeap%
- \else%
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \ifnum \tmpc < 16789%
- \else% % New moon at 15 h. 589 p. or later
- \ifnum \tmpa = 1% % on Monday ...
- \advance #1 by -1%
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% at the end of leap year
- \if@HebrewLeap%
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \advance #2 by 1% % new moon at or after midday
- \fi%
-%
- \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek
- \ifnum \tmpa = 0% % if Sunday ...
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \else% %
- \ifnum \tmpa = 3% % Wednesday ...
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \else%
- \ifnum \tmpa = 5% % or Friday
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\DaysInHebrewYear}
-% The macro |\DaysInHebrewYear{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}|
-% calculates the number of days in Hebrew `year'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\DaysInHebrewYear#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpe = 12% % \tmpe==\count12
-%
- \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{\tmpe}%
- \advance #1 by 1%
- \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{#2}%
- \advance #2 by -\tmpe%
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths}
-% The macro |\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{|\emph{month}|}{|^^A
-% \emph{year}|}{|\emph{days}|}| calculates the nu\-mber of days in
-% months prior to `month' in the `year'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpf= 14% % \tmpf==\count14
-%
- #3 = \ifcase #1% % Days in prior month of regular year
- 0 \or% % no month number 0
- 0 \or% % Tishri
- 30 \or% % Heshvan
- 59 \or% % Kislev
- 89 \or% % Tebeth
- 118 \or% % Shebat
- 148 \or% % Adar I
- 148 \or% % Adar II
- 177 \or% % Nisan
- 207 \or% % Iyar
- 236 \or% % Sivan
- 266 \or% % Tammuz
- 295 \or% % Av
- 325 \or% % Elul
- 400% % Dummy
- \fi%
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}%
- \if@HebrewLeap% % in leap year
- \ifnum #1 > 6% % if month after Adar I
- \advance #3 by 30% % add 30 days
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \DaysInHebrewYear{#2}{\tmpf}%
- \ifnum #1 > 3%
- \ifnum \tmpf = 353% %
- \advance #3 by -1% %
- \fi% % Short Kislev
- \ifnum \tmpf = 383% %
- \advance #3 by -1% %
- \fi% %
- \fi%
-%
- \ifnum #1 > 2%
- \ifnum \tmpf = 355% %
- \advance #3 by 1% %
- \fi% % Long Heshvan
- \ifnum \tmpf = 385% %
- \advance #3 by 1% %
- \fi% %
- \fi%
- \global\@common = #3}%
- #3 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AbsoluteFromHebrew}
-% The macro |\AbsoluteFromHebrew{|\emph{day}|}{|\emph{month}^^A
-% |}{|\emph{year}|}{|\emph{absdate}|}| calculates the absolute date
-% of Hebrew date |day.month.year|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\AbsoluteFromHebrew#1#2#3#4{%
- {%
- #4 = #1%
- \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{#1}%
- \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior months this year
- \HebrewElapsedDays{#3}{#1}%
- \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior years
- \advance #4 by -1373429% % Subtract days before Gregorian
- \global\@common = #4}% % 01.01.0001
- #4 = \@common}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\HebrewFromGregorian}
-% The macro |\HebrewFromGregorian{|\emph{Gday}|}{|\emph{Gmonth}^^A
-% |}{|\emph{Gyear}|}{|\emph{Hday}|}{|\emph{Hmonth}|}|\-|{|^^A
-% \emph{Hyear}|}| evaluates Hebrew date |Hday|, |Hmonth|, |Hyear|
-% from Gregorian date |Gday|, |Gmonth|, |Gyear|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\HebrewFromGregorian#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpx= 17% % \tmpx==\count17
- \countdef\tmpy= 18% % \tmpy==\count18
- \countdef\tmpz= 19% % \tmpz==\count19
-%
- #6 = #3% %
- \global\advance #6 by 3761% approximation from above
- \AbsoluteFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
- \tmpz = 1 \tmpy = 1%
- \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}%
- \ifnum \tmpx > #4% %
- \global\advance #6 by -1% Hyear = Gyear + 3760
- \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}%
- \fi% %
- \advance #4 by -\tmpx% % Days in this year
- \advance #4 by 1% %
- #5 = #4% %
- \divide #5 by 30% % Approximation for month from below
- \loop% % Search for month
- \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#5}{#6}{\tmpx}%
- \ifnum \tmpx < #4%
- \advance #5 by 1%
- \tmpy = \tmpx%
- \repeat%
- \global\advance #5 by -1%
- \global\advance #4 by -\tmpy}}
-%</calendar>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.fdd b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.fdd
deleted file mode 100644
index f61d06f430e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.fdd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1297 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{610}
-%
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-% \fi
-% \iffalse
-%<LHEenc>\ProvidesFile{lheenc.def}
-%<LHEcmr>\ProvidesFile{lhecmr.fd}
-%<LHEcmss>\ProvidesFile{lhecmss.fd}
-%<LHEcmtt>\ProvidesFile{lhecmtt.fd}
-%<LHEclas>\ProvidesFile{lheclas.fd}
-%<LHEshold>\ProvidesFile{lheshold.fd}
-%<LHEshscr>\ProvidesFile{lheshscr.fd}
-%<LHEshstk>\ProvidesFile{lheshstk.fd}
-%<LHEfr>\ProvidesFile{lhefr.fd}
-%<LHEcrml>\ProvidesFile{lhecrml.fd}
-%<LHEredis>\ProvidesFile{lheredis.fd}
-%<HE8enc>\ProvidesFile{HE8enc.def}
-%<HE8cmr>\ProvidesFile{HE8cmr.fd}
-%<HE8cmss>\ProvidesFile{HE8cmss.fd}
-%<HE8cmtt>\ProvidesFile{HE8cmtt.fd}
-% The recoded Omega font (only Hebrew glyphs. Lacks other glyphs)
-%<HE8OmegaHebrew>\ProvidesFile{HE8OmegaHebrew.fd}
-% The culmus fonts:
-%<HE8aharoni>\ProvidesFile{HE8aharoni.fd}
-%<HE8david>\ProvidesFile{HE8david.fd}
-%<HE8drugulin>\ProvidesFile{HE8drugulin.fd}
-%<HE8ellinia>\ProvidesFile{HE8ellinia.fd}
-%<HE8frankruehl>\ProvidesFile{HE8frankruehl.fd}
-%<HE8yad>\ProvidesFile{HE8yad.fd}
-%<HE8miriam>\ProvidesFile{HE8miriam.fd}
-%<HE8nachlieli>\ProvidesFile{HE8nachlieli.fd}
-% The IBM Type1 fonts (not freely distributable
-%<HE8CourierShalom>\ProvidesFile{HE8CourierShalom.fd}
-%<HE8HelveticaNarkissTam>\ProvidesFile{HE8HelveticaNarkissTam.fd}
-%<HE8TimesNarkissim>\ProvidesFile{HE8TimesNarkissim.fd}
-% Placeholders for windows fonts:
-%<HE8mfdavid>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfdavid.fd}
-%<HE8mffrank>\ProvidesFile{HE8mffrank.fd}
-%<HE8mffrankthick>\ProvidesFile{HE8mffrankthick.fd}
-%<HE8mffrankthin>\ProvidesFile{HE8mffrankthin.fd}
-%<HE8mfmiriam>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfmiriam.fd}
-%<HE8mfmiriamwide>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfmiriamwide.fd}
-%<HE8mfnarkistam>\ProvidesFile{HE8mfnarkistam.fd}
-%<hebfont>\ProvidesPackage{hebfont}
-%<*driver>
-\ProvidesFile{hebrew.drv}
-%</driver>
-% \fi
-% \ProvidesFile{hebrew.fdd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
-% \iffalse
-%<LHEenc> 7-bit Hebrew font encoding
-%<LHEcmr> Hebrew default font
-%<LHEcmss> Hebrew sans-serif font
-%<LHEcmtt> Hebrew typewriter font
-%<LHEclas> Hebrew classic font (by Joel M. Hoffman)
-%<LHEshold> Hebrew shalom old font (by Jonathan Brecher)
-%<LHEshscr> Hebrew shalom script font (by Jonathan Brecher)
-%<LHEshstk> Hebrew shalom stick font (by Jonathan Brecher)
-%<LHEfr> Hebrew frank-ruehl font
-%<LHEcrml> Hebrew carmel font (by Dr. Samy Zafrany)
-%<LHEredis> Hebrew redis font (by Prof. Jacques J. Goldberg)
-%<HE8enc> 8-bit Hebrew font encoding
-%<HE8cmr> Hebrew default font
-%<HE8cmss> Hebrew sans-serif font
-%<HE8cmtt> Hebrew typewriter font
-%<HE8OmegaHebrew> Hebrew font from the Omega project (by ???)
-%<HE8aharoni> Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)
-%<HE8david> Hebrew serif font (Culmus)
-%<HE8drugulin> Hebrew old serif font (Culmus)
-%<HE8ellinia> Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)
-%<HE8frankruehl> Hebrew serif font (Culmus)
-%<HE8yad> Hebrew handwriting font (Culmus)
-%<HE8miriam> Hebrew monospaced font (Culmus)
-%<HE8nachlieli> Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)
-%<HE8CourierShalom> Hebrew Shalom (Courier) font (by IBM)
-%<HE8HelveticaNarkissTam> Hebrew NarkisTam (Helvetica) (by Zvi Narkis)
-%<HE8TimesNarkissim> Hebrew Narkissim (Times) (by Zvi Narkis)
-%<HE8mfdavid> Hebrew David font (by ???)
-%<HE8mffrank> Hebrew Frank-Ruehl font (by ??)
-%<HE8mffrankthick> Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thick) font (by ??)
-%<HE8mffrankthin> Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thin) font (by ??)
-%<HE8mfmiriam> Hebrew Miriam font (by ???)
-%<HE8mfmiriamwide> Hebrew Miriam (wide) font (by ???)
-%<HE8mfnarkistam> Hebrew Narkis Tam font (by ???)
-%<hebfont> Hebrew font switching commands
-%<driver> Driver file for hebrew.fdd file
-% \fi
-% Hebrew font encodings support
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-%
-% \font\manual=logo10
-% \providecommand\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
-% \providecommand\PS{\textsc{PostScript}}
-% \providecommand\dst{\textsc{docstrip}}
-% \providecommand\LHE{\texttt{LHE}}
-% \providecommand\HEH{\texttt{HE8}}
-% \providecommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \providecommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-% \GetFileInfo{hebrew.fdd}
-%
-% \changes{hebfdd-1.0a}{1998/01/01}{%
-% Initial version. Supports only 7-bit LHE font encoding and all
-% available Hebrew \TeX\ fonts (by Boris Lavva)}
-% \changes{hebfdd-1.0b}{2001/08/16}{%
-% fixed lhecmr.fd to use oldjaf10 for a slanted font
-% available Hebrew \TeX\ fonts (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebfdd-1.1a}{2001/08/16}{%
-% Adding 8-bit HE8 fonts. Note that most of them cannot be distributed
-% with heb\LaTeX\ (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebfdd-1.2a}{2003/08/19}{%
-% Adding configurations for the Culmus fonts, currently 0.90
-% (by Tzafrir Cohen)}
-% \changes{hebfdd-1.2b}{2004/02/20}{Reinstated the test whether LHE or
-% HE8 is to be used}
-%
-% \changes{hebrew-1.2c}{2005/05/18}{Typo's in the docstrip guards made
-% HE8nachlieli.fd unusable}
-% \section{Hebrew font encodings}\label{sec:hebfdd}
-%
-% % Don't forget to update the docs...
-% \subsection{THIS SECTION IS OUT OF DATE. UPDATE DOCS TO MATCH HE8
-% ENCODING}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The files described in this
-% section have version number \fileversion{} and were last revised
-% on \filedate.} contains the Local Hebrew Encoding (\LHE)
-% definition, the external font information needed to use the
-% Hebrew 7-bit fonts (old code fonts) and \pkg{hebfont} package
-% that provides Hebrew font switching commands.
-%
-% Using this file as an input, |lheenc.def| encoding definition
-% file, all |.fd| files (font definition files) and font switching
-% package for available Hebrew fonts are generated. We chose to use
-% 7-bit encoding as default font encoding, because:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item There are many 7-bit encoded Hebrew fonts available, more
-% then for any other encoding.
-% \item Available \TeX{} Hebrew fonts do not include latin
-% alphabet, and we can safely map Hebrew glyphs to the
-% \texttt{ASCII} positions (0 -- 127).
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% Current definition of the \LHE{} encoding supports only Hebrew
-% letters (|\hebalef|--|\hebtav|), but not Hebrew points, such as
-% |\hebdagesh|, |\hebqamats|, |\hebpatah|, |\hebshindot|, etc. We
-% are working now on such addition.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% \subsection{A driver for this document}
-%
-% The next bit of code contains the documentation driver file for
-% \TeX{}, i.e., the file that will produce the documentation you are
-% currently reading. It will be extracted from this file by the \dst{}
-% program.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*driver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\title{Hebrew font encodings for use with \LaTeXe}
-\author{Boris Lavva}
-\date{Printed \today}
-\begin{document}
- \maketitle
- \DocInput{hebrew.fdd}
-\end{document}
-%</driver>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \fi
-%
-% \subsection{The {\normalfont\dst{}} modules}
-%
-% The following modules are used in the implementation to direct
-% \dst{} in generating external files:
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}ll}
-% driver & produce a documentation driver file \\[4pt]
-% HE8enc & produce the encoding definition for CodePage 1255
-% (\HEH)\\[4pt]
-% HE8cmr & make Hebrew default font in \HEH\\
-% HE8cmss & make Hebrew sans-serif font in \HEH\\
-% HE8cmtt & make Hebrew typewriter font in \HEH\\
-% HE8OmegaHebrew & Hebrew font from the Omega project (by ???)\\
-% HE8aharoni & Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)\\
-% HE8david & Hebrew serif font (Culmus)\\
-% HE8drugulin & Hebrew old serif font (Culmus)\\
-% HE8ellinia & Hebrew isans-serif font (Culmus)\\
-% HE8frankruehl & Hebrew serif font (Culmus)\\
-% HE8KtavYad & Hebrew handwriting font (Culmus)\\
-% HE8MiriamMono & Hebrew monospaced font\\
-% HE8Nachlieli & Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)\\
-% HE8CourierShalom & Hebrew Shalom (Courier) font (by IBM)\\
-% HE8HelveticaNarkissTam &Hebrew NarkisTam (Helvetica) (by Zvi Narkis)\\
-% HE8TimesNarkissim & Hebrew Narkissim (Times) (by Zvi Narkis) \\
-% HE8mfdavid & Hebrew David font (by ???)\\
-% HE8mffrank & Hebrew Frank-Ruehl font (by ??)\\
-% HE8mffrankthick & Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thick) font (by ??)\\
-% HE8mffrankthin & Hebrew Frank-Ruehl (thin) font (by ??)\\
-% HE8mfmiriam & Hebrew Miriam font (by ???)\\
-% HE8mfmiriamwide & Hebrew Miriam (wide) font (by ???)\\
-% HE8mfnarkistam & Hebrew Narkis Tam font (by ???)\\
-% LHEenc & produce the encoding definition for Local Hebrew
-% Encoding (\LHE)\\[4pt]
-% LHEcmr & make Hebrew default font in \LHE\\
-% LHEcmss & make Hebrew sans-serif font in \LHE\\
-% LHEcmtt & make Hebrew typewriter font in \LHE\\
-% LHEclas & make Hebrew classic font (by Joel M.~Hoffman) in \LHE\\
-% LHEshold & make Hebrew shalom old font (by Jonathan Brecher)
-% in \LHE\\
-% LHEshscr & make Hebrew shalom script font (by Jonathan Brecher)
-% in \LHE\\
-% LHEshstk & make Hebrew shalom stick font (by Jonathan Brecher)
-% in \LHE\\
-% LHEfr & make Hebrew frank-ruehl font in \LHE\\
-% LHEcrml & make Hebrew carmel font (by Dr. Samy Zafrany) in \LHE\\
-% LHEredis & make Hebrew redis font (by Prof. Jacques J.~Goldberg)
-% in \LHE\\[4pt]
-% nowarn & option for font definition files, that used\\
-% & to produce ``silent'' font substitutions without
-% giving warnings\\[4pt]
-% hebfont & create Hebrew font switching commands package
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% A typical \dst{} command file would then have entries like:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\generateFile{lhecmr.fd}{t}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmr,nowarn}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \subsection{The \LHE encoding definition file}
-%
-% The Hebrew font encoding \LHE{} is based upon the old-code encoding
-% also known as the Israeli Standard SI-960. Many Hebrew \TeX{}
-% fonts from the Hebrew University of Jerusalem are encoded
-% in this encoding. It only uses the lower 128 positions of the font
-% table. As local encoding its name start with the letter `L'.
-%
-% First we define the Local Hebrew Encoding; specify a default
-% for the font substitution process for the \LHE{} encoding and
-% supply a font to be used when all else fails.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEenc>
-\DeclareFontEncoding{LHE}{}{}
-\DeclareFontSubstitution{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\DeclareErrorFont{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
-%</LHEenc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we define a few commands in the \LHE{} encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEenc>
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LHE}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LHE}{\textcircled{\scshape%
- \@latin{r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LHE}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}}
-%</LHEenc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Because not everyone can input Hebrew input text directly from
-% the keyboard we need to define control sequences for all the
-% Hebrew glyphs in the fonts. In addition, we want to support
-% many input encodings for Hebrew and to keep the language
-% definition file (|hebrew.ldf|) independent of the
-% encoding. Therefore, we exploit the standard \LaTeXe{} font
-% encoding mechanism to define control sequences for all the Hebrew
-% glyphs in the fonts in encoding-specific way. The language
-% definition file uses only the control sequences and doesn't need
-% to check the current font or input encoding.
-%
-% In the \LHE{} encoding (7-bit encoding) all the Hebrew glyphes
-% reside in the \emph{lower} half of the font. Currently, only the
-% Hebrew letters are supported. They use the same positions as the
-% latin small letters in |ASCII| encoding and the position of |`|.
-%
-% The symbol |`| (glyph 96) is used by Hebrew letter \emph{Alef},
-% so we need to define its |lccode| to allow hyphenation. All other
-% letters retain the same |lccode|s as their latin counterparts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<+LHEenc>\lccode``=``
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Hebrew letters occupy the positions 96--122 in \LHE{} encoding:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEenc>
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{LHE}{96}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{LHE}{97}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{LHE}{98}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{LHE}{99}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{LHE}{100}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{LHE}{101}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{LHE}{102}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{LHE}{103}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{LHE}{104}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{LHE}{105}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{LHE}{106}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{LHE}{107}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{LHE}{108}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{LHE}{109}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{LHE}{110}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{LHE}{111}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{LHE}{112}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{LHE}{113}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{LHE}{114}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{LHE}{115}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{LHE}{116}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{LHE}{117}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{LHE}{118}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{LHE}{119}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{LHE}{120}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{LHE}{121}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{LHE}{122}
-%</LHEenc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Letter |\hebsin| is defined as a synonym of |\hebshin|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<+LHEenc>\let\hebsin=\hebshin
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The font definition files (in \LHE{} encoding)}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew default font}
-%
-% It uses \emph{Jerusalem} font for regular font, \emph{Old
-% Jaffa} font for italic shape and small-caps, \emph{Dead Sea}
-% font for bold face, and \emph{Tel-Aviv} for bold-italic
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEcmr>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}
- {<-> jerus10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{it}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sl}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sc}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{b}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-%</LHEcmr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew sans-serif font}
-%
-% We use \emph{Tel Aviv} font for the Sans family. \emph{Old
-% Jaffa} font is used for italic shape and \emph{Dead Sea}
-% used for bold face.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEcmss>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{n}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sc}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/m/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{it}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sl}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/m/it}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/m/it}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{b}{n}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{sl}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%</LHEcmss>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew typewriter font}
-%
-% We use \emph{Tel Aviv} font as the typewriter font. \emph{Old
-% Jaffa} font is used for italic shape and \emph{Dead Sea}
-% used for bold face.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEcmtt>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sc}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmtt/m/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmtt/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{it}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sl}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmtt/m/it}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmtt/m/it}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * cmtt/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * cmtt/bx/n}{}
-%</LHEcmtt>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew classic font}
-%
-% \emph{Hclassic} and \emph{hcaption} fonts are distributed freely
-% from |CTAN| sites and copyrighted by Joel M.~Hoffman, of 19
-% Hillcrest Lane, Rye, NY 10580 USA, e-mail:
-% |72700.402@compuserve.com|.
-%
-% Hclassic is a modernized Classical Hebrew font (in the same way
-% that Knuth's |cmr| family is a modernized Roman font --- but his
-% fonts are much nicer). Hcaption is a slanted version of hclassic
-% font. Both fonts contain all of the Hebrew consonants,
-% the (rarely used) ligature \emph{alef-lamed} and two versions of
-% the letter \emph{ayin} for use with and without
-% vowels. Hclassic also contains all of the vowels found in Hebrew,
-% a symbol for \emph{meteg}, and dots for use as a \emph{dagesh}
-% and for differentiating \emph{shin} and \emph{sin} letters.
-%
-% Currently, only the Hebrew consonants (\emph{hebalef} -- \emph{hebtav})
-% from these fonts are supported by \LaTeXe{}, however one can use
-% vowels and dots directly with \PlainTeX{} macros. We are working
-% on generic vowels and dots support for \LaTeXe.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEclas>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{clas}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{n}
- {<-> s * [0.83345] hclassic }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sc}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * clas/m/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * clas/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sl}
- {<-> s * [0.69389] hcaption }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * clas/m/sl}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * clas/m/sl}{}
-%</LHEclas>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew shalom fonts}
-%
-% All three shalom fonts (\emph{ShalomScript10},
-% \emph{ShalomStick10} and \emph{ShalomOldStyle10}) have been
-% created by Jonathan Brecher, of 9 Skyview Road, Lexington, MA
-% 02173-1112 USA, e-mail: |brecher@husc.harvard.edu|.
-%
-% All shalom fonts have been written in \PS{} via Fontographer on a
-% Mac. The fonts have been converted to \MF{} by Rama Porrat
-% (e-mail: |rama@cc.huji.ac.il|), using
-% the utility typo, a font editor + converter between font formats
-% (a commercial product). |ShalomScript10.mf| is the \MF{}
-% equivalent of |ShalomScript.ps|, |ShalomStick10.mf| came from
-% |ShalomStick.ps| and |ShalomOldStyle10.mf| originated in
-% |ShalomOldStyle.ps|.
-%
-% The fonts differ in the letters' style. ShalomScript10 contains
-% hand writing Hebrew letters; ShalomStick10 contains sans-serif
-% letters, and ShalomOldStyle10 contains old style letters. All
-% three fonts contain vowels and dots (nikud). While converting to
-% \MF{}, letters and symbols within the fonts have been arranged
-% so as to get a usable font for writing Hebrew documents in \TeX{}
-% or \LaTeX{}, with as well as without vowels.
-%
-% Currently, only the Hebrew consonants (\emph{hebalef} -- \emph{hebtav})
-% from these fonts are supported by \LaTeXe{}, however one can use
-% vowels and dots directly with \PlainTeX{} macros. We are working
-% on generic vowels and dots support for \LaTeXe.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEshold>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shold}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shold}{m}{n}
- {<-> shold10 }{}
-%</LHEshold>
-%<*LHEshscr>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shscr}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shscr}{m}{n}
- {<-> shscr10 }{}
-%</LHEshscr>
-%<*LHEshstk>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shstk}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shstk}{m}{n}
- {<-> shstk10 }{}
-%</LHEshstk>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew frank-ruehl font}
-%
-% \emph{Frank Ruehl} font was written in \MF{} and includes three
-% shapes: regular, bold extaneded and slanted.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEfr>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{fr}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{n}
- {<-> fr }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sc}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/m/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sl}
- {<-> frsl }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/m/sl}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/m/sl}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{n}
- {<-> frbx }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{b}{n}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{sl}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%</LHEfr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew carmel font}
-%
-% \emph{Carmel} font includes regular and slanted shapes. It was
-% created by Dr.~Samy Zafrany of the Technion, Haifa, Israel with
-% the intention of making nice fonts for headers and emphasized
-% text.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEcrml>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{crml}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{n}
- {<-> crml10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sc}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * crml/m/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * crml/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sl}
- {<-> crmlsl10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * crml/m/sl}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * crml/m/sl}{}
-%</LHEcrml>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew redis font}
-%
-% \emph{Redis} font has been created by Prof.~Jacques J.~Goldberg
-% of the Technion. Haifa, Israel. The font is available in regular,
-% slanted and bold extanded shapes. This font contains a full set
-% of Hebrew letters in a ``sans-serif vectorized'' style, and
-% selected punctuation.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*LHEredis>
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{redis}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{n}{%
- <5> <6> redis7
- <7> <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * redis
- <10.95> redis10
- <14.4> redis12
- <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redis17}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sc}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/m/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sl}{%
- <5> <6> <7> rediss8
- <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * rediss
- <10.95> rediss10
- <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> rediss12}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/m/sl}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/m/sl}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{n}{%
- <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <10> <10.95> <12>
- <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redisb10}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{b}{n}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{sl}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{it}
-%<-nowarn> {<->sub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%<+nowarn> {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%</LHEredis>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The \HEH encoding definition file}
-%
-% The Hebrew font encoding \HEH{} is based upon an extention by
-% Microsoft to the ISO-8859-8 standard. This is an 8bit encoding. The
-% extentions include hebrew points (``Nikud'').
-%
-% First we define the Codepage 1255; specify a default
-% for the font substitution process for the \HEH{} encoding and
-% supply a font to be used when all else fails.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8enc>
-\DeclareFontEncoding{HE8}{}{}
-\DeclareFontSubstitution{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\DeclareErrorFont{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
-%</HE8enc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we define a few commands in the \HEH{} encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8enc>
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape%
- \@latin{r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}}
-%</HE8enc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{CHECK HERE FOR HE8 UPDATES}
-%
-% Because not everyone can input Hebrew input text directly from
-% the keyboard we need to define control sequences for all the
-% Hebrew glyphs in the fonts. In addition, we want to support
-% many input encodings for Hebrew and to keep the language
-% definition file (|hebrew.ldf|) independent of the
-% encoding. Therefore, we exploit the standard \LaTeXe{} font
-% encoding mechanism to define control sequences for all the Hebrew
-% glyphs in the fonts in encoding-specific way. The language
-% definition file uses only the control sequences and doesn't need
-% to check the current font or input encoding.
-%
-% % In the \LHE{} encoding (7-bit encoding) all the Hebrew glyphes
-% % reside in the \emph{lower} half of the font. Currently, only the
-% % Hebrew letters are supported. They use the same positions as the
-% % latin small letters in |ASCII| encoding and the position of |`|.
-%
-% Some general symbols:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8enc>
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape%
- \@latin{r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}}
-%</HE8enc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The hebrew points:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8enc>
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\sheva}{HE8}{192}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafsegol}{HE8}{193}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafpatah}{HE8}{194}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafqamats}{HE8}{195}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hiriq}{HE8}{196}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\tsere}{HE8}{197}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\segol}{HE8}{198}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\patah}{HE8}{199}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\qamats}{HE8}{200}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\holam}{HE8}{201}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\qubuts}{HE8}{203}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\dagesh}{HE8}{204}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\meteg}{HE8}{205}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\maqaf}{HE8}{206}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\rafe}{HE8}{207}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\paseq}{HE8}{208}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\shindot}{HE8}{209}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\sindot}{HE8}{210}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\sofpasuq}{HE8}{211}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\doublevav}{HE8}{212}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\vavyod}{HE8}{213}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\doubleyod}{HE8}{214}
-%</HE8enc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Hebrew letters occupy the positions 224--250 in \HEH{} encoding [WHAT
-% ABOUT OTHER MARKS]:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8enc>
-% \lccode``=`` % probably not needed (Tzafrir)
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{HE8}{224}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{HE8}{225}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{HE8}{226}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{HE8}{227}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{HE8}{228}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{HE8}{229}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{HE8}{230}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{HE8}{231}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{HE8}{232}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{HE8}{233}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{HE8}{234}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{HE8}{235}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{HE8}{236}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{HE8}{237}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{HE8}{238}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{HE8}{239}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{HE8}{240}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{HE8}{241}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{HE8}{242}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{HE8}{243}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{HE8}{244}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{HE8}{245}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{HE8}{246}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{HE8}{247}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{HE8}{248}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{HE8}{249}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{HE8}{250}
-%</HE8enc>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Letter |\hebsin| is defined as a synonym of |\hebshin|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<+HE8enc>\let\hebsin=\hebshin
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{The font definition files (in \HEH{} encoding)}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew default font}
-%
-% It uses \emph{OmegaHebrew} font for regular font, \emph{Old
-% Jaffa} font for italic shape and small-caps, \emph{Dead Sea}
-% font for bold face, and \emph{Tel-Aviv} for bold-italic
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8cmr>
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}
- {<-> david }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{it}
- {<-> davidi }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sl}
- {<-> davidi }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sc}
- {<-> david }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- {<-> davidb }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{b}{n}
- {<-> davidb }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> davidbi }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- {<-> davidbi }{}
-%</HE8cmr>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew sans-serif font}
-%
-% Until we have a real sans-serif font in this distribution, this file
-% will remain a copy of the roman fonts definitons above.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8cmss>
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{n}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{it}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sl}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sc}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{b}{n}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{it}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%</HE8cmss>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew typewriter font}
-%
-% Until we have a real sans-serif font in this distribution, this file
-% will remain a copy of the roman fonts definitons above.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8cmtt>
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{it}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sl}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sc}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{b}{n}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%</HE8cmtt>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit OmegaHebrew font}
-%
-% \emph{OmegaHebrew} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8OmegaHebrew>
-\def\OmegaHebrewscale{0.9}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{m}{n}{<-> [\OmegaHebrewscale] OmegaHebrew }{}
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8OmegaHebrew>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit Aharoni font}
-%
-% \emph{Aharoni} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8aharoni>
-\def\Aharoniscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{aharoni}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharoni}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{b}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonibi}{}
-
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8aharoni>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit David font}
-%
-% \emph{David} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8david>
-\def\Davidscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{david}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] david}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{b}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidbi}{}
-
-
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8david>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit Drugulin font}
-%
-% \emph{Drugulin} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8drugulin>
-\def\Drugulinscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{drugulin}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{b}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{}
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8drugulin>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit Ellinia font}
-%
-% \emph{Ellinia} is a sans-serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8ellinia>
-\def\Elliniascale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{ellinia}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{m}{n} {<-> [\Elliniascale] ellinia}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{m}{it} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniai}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniai}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{b}{n} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniab}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniab}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{ellinia}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Elliniascale] elliniabi}{}
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8ellinia>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit FrankRuehl font}
-%
-% \emph{FrankRuehl} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8frankruehl>
-\def\FrankRuehlscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{frank}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frank}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{sl} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{b}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankbi}{}
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8frankruehl>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit KtavYad font}
-%
-% \emph{KtavYad} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8yad>
-\def\KtavYadscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{yad}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{sl} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{b}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{}
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8yad>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit MiriamMono font}
-%
-% \emph{MiriamMono} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8miriam>
-\def\MiriamMonoscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{miriam}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriam}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{sl} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{b}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriambi}{}
-
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8miriam>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{8Bit Nachlieli font}
-%
-% \emph{Nachlieli} is a serif hebrew font created by the omega project
-% [FILL IN CREDITS]
-% [FILL IN GENERAL SHAPE DESCRIPTION]
-% shapes: [FILL IN]
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*HE8nachlieli>
-\def\Nachlieliscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{nachlieli}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlieli}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{b}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielibi}{}
-%\endinput % is it needed [tzafrir]
-%</HE8nachlieli>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsubsection{Hebrew font switching commands}
-%
-% The \pkg{hebfont} package defines a number of high-level commands
-% (all starting with |\text..| similar to the standard \LaTeXe{}
-% font-change commands, for example |\textbf|) that have one
-% argument and typeset this argument in the requested way. These
-% commands are defined for all available Hebrew fonts defined above
-% and change only font parameters but not direction.
-%
-% For example, to use Hebrew Classic font family, the following
-% sequence of commands should be included in a \LaTeXe{} document:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\sethebrew|\\
-% |\textclas{Hebrew text printed with Classic fonts}|
-% \end{quote}
-% or to use Hebrew with Classic fonts locally:
-% \begin{quote}
-% |\R{\textclas{Hebrew text printed with Classic fonts}}|
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% \begin{table}[t]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lll}
-% \textit{Command} & \textit{Corresponds to} &
-% \textit{Font family} \\[4pt]
-% |\textjm{..}| & |\rmfamily| & Jerusalem font \\
-% |\textds{..}| & |\bfseries| & Dead Sea font \\
-% |\textoj{..}| & |\itshape| & Old Jaffa font \\
-% & |\slshape| & \\
-% & |\emph| & \\
-% |\textta{..}| & |\sffamily| & Tel-Aviv font \\
-% & |\ttfamily| & \\[2pt]
-% |\textcrml{..}| & |\fontfamily{crml}| & Carmel fonts \\[2pt]
-% |\textfr{..}| & |\fontfamily{fr}| & Frank-Ruehl fonts \\[2pt]
-% |\textredis{..}| & |\fontfamily{redis}| & Redis fonts \\[2pt]
-% |\textclas{..}| & |\fontfamily{redis}| & Classic fonts \\[2pt]
-% |\textshold{..}| & |\fontfamily{shold}| & Shalom Old Style font \\
-% |\textshscr{..}| & |\fontfamily{shscr}| & Shalom Script font \\
-% |\textshstk{..}| & |\fontfamily{shstk}| & Shalom Stick font
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \caption{Hebrew font-change commands with arguments}
-% \label{tab:fntcmds}
-% \begin{quote}
-% The font change commands provided here all start with |\text..|
-% to emphasize that they are for use in normal text and to be
-% easily memorable.
-% \end{quote}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% We declare \LaTeXe{} font commands, e.g.\ |\textjm{|\ldots|}|
-% for all available fonts. Table~\ref{tab:fntcmds} shows the
-% meanings of all these new high-level commands.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textjm}
-% Switches to \emph{Jerusalem} font which is default regular Hebrew
-% font (``roman'' family). Commands |\textrm{|\ldots|}| and
-% old-style |{\rm |\ldots|}| will produce the same result.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*hebfont>
-\def\ivritex@tmp{HE8}
-\ifx\ivritex@tmp\HeblatexEncoding %
- % compatibility with hebfonts:
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont}
-
- % an attempt to give some replacements to the original hebfonts:
- %
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont}
- % note that redis is larger than shstk
-
-
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textaha}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdav}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdru}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textel} {\fontfamily{ellinia}\selectfont}
- % \textfr is already declared above
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textmir}{\fontfamily{miriam}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textna} {\fontfamily{nachlieli}\selectfont}
- % is this necessary:
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textyad} {\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont}
-
-\else%
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textds}
-% Switches to \emph{Dead Sea} font which is default bold font in
-% Hebrew. Commands |\textbf{|\ldots|}| and old-style
-% |{\bf |\ldots|}| will produce the same result.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textoj}
-% Switches to \emph{Old Jaffa} font which is default italic font in
-% Hebrew. Commands |\textit{|\ldots|}|, |\textsl{|\ldots|}|,
-% |\emph{|\ldots|}| and old-style |{\it |\ldots|}| or
-% |{\em |\ldots|}| will produce the same result.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textta}
-% Switches to \emph{Tel-Aviv} font which is default sans-serif font
-% in Hebrew. Commands |\textsf{|\ldots|}|, |\texttt{|\ldots|}| and
-% old-style |{\sf |\ldots|}| or |{\tt |\ldots|}| will produce the
-% same result (because sans-serif is used as typewriter font when
-% in Hebrew mode).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textcrml}
-% Switches to \emph{Carmel} font. Regular and slanted variants of
-% carmel font will be used..
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{crml}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textfr}
-% Switches to \emph{Frank-Ruehl} font family. Regular, bold and
-% slanted frank ruehl fonts will be used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{fr}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textredis}
-% Switches to \emph{Redis} font family. Regular, bold and slanted
-% redis fonts of various sizes will be used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{redis}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textclas}
-% Switches to \emph{Classic} font family. The normal font will be
-% hclassic and slanted --- hcaption.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{clas}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textshold}
-% Switches to \emph{Shalom Old Style} font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{shold}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textshscr}
-% Switches to \emph{Shalom Script} font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{shscr}\selectfont}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textshstk}
-% Switches to \emph{Shalom Stick} font.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{shstk}\selectfont}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Finally, for backward compatibility with \LaTeX2.09. four old
-% font commands, e.g.\ |{\jm |\ldots|}| are defined too (see
-% Table~\ref{tab:oldcmds}).
-% \begin{table}[t]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lll}
-% \textit{Old font command} & \textit{Font name} &
-% \textit{Comment}\\[4pt]
-% |{\jm ..}| & Jerusalem & default regular (roman) font \\
-% |{\ds ..}| & Dead Sea & default bold font \\
-% |{\oj ..}| & Old Jaffa & default italic and slanted font \\
-% & & used also to emphasize text \\
-% |{\ta ..}| & Tel-Aviv & default sans-serif and typewriter font\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \caption{Hebrew old font-change commands for compatibility mode}
-% \label{tab:oldcmds}
-% \end{table}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@compatibility
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\jm}{\normalfont\rmfamily\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\jm}
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ds}{\normalfont\bfseries\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\ds}
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\oj}{\normalfont\itshape\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\oj}
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ta}{\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\ta}
-\fi
-%</hebfont>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 80f35a41eca..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/hebrew.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,215 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-%%
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 1998 Boris Lavva.
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is contributed to the `babel' system.
-%%
-%% You are allowed to distribute this file together with all files
-%% mentioned in manifest.bbl.
-%%
-%% You are not allowed to modify its contents.
-%%
-\def\filedate{2004/02/20}
-\def\batchfile{hebrew.ins}
-\input docstrip
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\Msg{*** Generating hebrew font encoding files ***}
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-\generate{\file{lheenc.def}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEenc}}
- \file{lhecmr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmr,nowarn}}
- \file{lhecmss.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmss,nowarn}}
- \file{lhecmtt.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcmtt,nowarn}}
- \file{lheclas.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEclas,nowarn}}
- \file{he8enc.def}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8enc}}
- \file{he8cmr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8cmr,nowarn}}
- \file{he8cmss.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8cmss,nowarn}}
- \file{he8cmtt.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8cmtt,nowarn}}
- \file{he8aharoni.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8aharoni,nowarn}}
- \file{he8david.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8david,nowarn}}
- \file{he8drugulin.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8drugulin,nowarn}}
- \file{he8frankruehl.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8frankruehl,nowarn}}
- \file{he8yad.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8yad,nowarn}}
- \file{he8miriam.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8miriam,nowarn}}
- \file{he8nachlieli.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8nachlieli,nowarn}}
- \file{he8OmegaHebrew.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{HE8OmegaHebrew,nowarn}}
- \file{lheshold.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEshold,nowarn}}
- \file{lheshscr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEshscr,nowarn}}
- \file{lheshstk.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEshstk,nowarn}}
- \file{lhefr.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEfr,nowarn}}
- \file{lhecrml.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEcrml,nowarn}}
- \file{lheredis.fd}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{LHEredis,nowarn}}
- \file{hebfont.sty}{\from{hebrew.fdd}{hebfont}}
- }
-
-\Msg{*** Generating hebrew input encoding files ***}
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{8859-8.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{8859-8}}
- \file{cp1255.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{cp1255}}
- \file{cp862.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{cp862}}
- \file{si960.def}{\from{hebinp.dtx}{si960}}
- }
-
-\Msg{*** Generating hebrew language support files ***}
-\generate{\file{hebrew.ldf}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{hebrew}}
- \file{rlbabel.def}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{rightleft}}
- \file{hebcal.sty}{\from{hebrew.dtx}{calendar}}
- }
-
-\Msg{*** Generating hebrew 2.09 compatibility files ***}
-\generate{\file{hebrew_newcode.sty}{\from{heb209.dtx}{newcode}}
- \file{hebrew_p.sty}{\from{heb209.dtx}{pccode}}
- \file{hebrew_oldcode.sty}{\from{heb209.dtx}{oldcode}}
- }
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{*************************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.cls, *.sty, *.ldf, *.fd and *.def}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run `hebrew.dtx' through LaTeX}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{*************************************************************}
-}
-
-\endbatchfile
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 7b4be56c383..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,749 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{546}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{icelandic.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{icelandic}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{icelandic.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v1.1g Icelandic support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File iceland.dtx
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989--2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Icelandic Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1996--2005
-%% by Einar \'Arnason <einar@lif.hi.is>
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Einar \'Arnason
-%% einar at lif.hi.is
-%% or to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%%
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\usepackage{t1enc}
-\usepackage[icelandic,english]{babel}
-\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
-\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
-\begin{center}
- \textbf{\Large A Babel language definition file for
- Icelandic}\\[3mm]^^A\]
- Einar \'Arnason\\
- \texttt{einar@lif.hi.is}
-\end{center}
- \DocInput{icelandic.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{iceland.dtx}
-%
-%
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1c}{1997/05/21}{Removed code already present in
-% \file{babel.def}}
-%
-% \section{The Icelandic language}
-%
-% \subsection{Overview}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. } defines all the language definition macros for
-% the Icelandic language
-%
-% Customization for the Icelandic language was made following
-% several official and semiofficial publications~\cite{74:_augl,
-% 77:_augl,88:_reglur,94:_si,97:_forst_fs}. These publications do
-% not always agree and we indicate those instances.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:icelandic-extras} an overview is given of its
-% purpose.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{otherlanguage*}{icelandic}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\
-% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\
-% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing
-% hyphenation in the composing words. \\
-% |"`| & for Icelandic left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |"'| & for Icelandic right double quotes. \\
-% |">| & for Icelandic `french' left double quotes
-% (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |"<| & for Icelandic `french' right double quotes
-% (similar to $<<$).\\
-% |"o| & for old Icelandic "o \\
-% |"O| & for old Icelandic "O \\
-% |"ó| & for old Icelandic "ó \\
-% |"Ó| & for old Icelandic "Ó \\
-% |"e| & for old Icelandic "e \\
-% |"E| & for old Icelandic "E \\
-% |"é| & for old Icelandic "é \\
-% |"É| & for old Icelandic "É \\
-% |\tala| & for typesetting numbers\\
-% |\grada| & for the `degree' symbol\\
-% |\gradur| & for `degrees', e.g. 5~\gradur C\\
-% |\upp| & for textsuperscript \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{otherlanguage*}
-% \caption{The shorthands and extra definitions made
-% by \file{icelandic.ldf}}\label{tab:icelandic-extras}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-% The shorthands in table~\ref{tab:icelandic-extras} can also be
-% typeset by using the commands in
-% table~\ref{tab:icelandic-commands}.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{otherlanguage*}{icelandic}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |\ilqq| & for Icelandic left double quotes
-% (looks like ,,). \\
-% |\irqq| & for Icelandic right double quotes
-% (looks like ``). \\
-% |\ilq| & for Icelandic left single quotes
-% (looks like ,). \\
-% |\irq| & for Icelandic right single quotes
-% (looks like `). \\
-% |\iflqq| & for Icelandic `french' left double quotes
-% (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |\ifrqq| & for Icelandic `french' right double quotes
-% (similar to $<<$).\\
-% |\ifrq| & for Icelandic `french' right single quotes
-% (similar to $<$).\\
-% |\iflq| & for Icelandic `french' left single quotes
-% (similar to $>$). \\
-% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\
-% |\oob| & for old Icelandic "o \\
-% |\Oob| & for old Icelandic "O \\
-% |\ooob| & for old Icelandic "ó \\
-% |\OOob| & for old Icelandic "Ó \\
-% |\eob| & for old Icelandic "e \\
-% |\Eob| & for old Icelandic "E \\
-% |\eeob| & for old Icelandic "é \\
-% |\EEob| & for old Icelandic "É \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{otherlanguage*}
-% \caption{Commands which produce quotes and old Icelandic
-% diacritics, defined by
-% \file{icelandic.ldf}}\label{tab:icelandic-commands}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \begin{thebibliography}{1}
-%
-% \bibitem{88:_reglur}
-% Alþingi.
-% \newblock {\em Reglur um frágang þingskjala og prentun umræðna},
-% 1988.
-%
-% \bibitem{74:_augl}
-% Auglýsing um greinarmerkjasetningu.
-% \newblock Stj.tíð B, nr. 133/1974, 1974.
-%
-% \bibitem{77:_augl}
-% Auglýsing um breyting auglýsingu nr. 132/1974 um íslenska
-% stafsetningu.
-% \newblock Stj.tíð B, nr. 261/1977, 1977.
-%
-% \bibitem{unknown72:_first_gramm_treat}
-% Einar Haugen, editor.
-% \newblock {\em First Grammatical Treatise}.
-% \newblock Longman, London, 2 edition, 1972.
-%
-% \bibitem{97:_forst_fs}
-% Staðlaráð Íslands og Fagráð í upplýsingatækni, Reykjavík.
-% \newblock {\em Forstaðall FS 130:1997}, 1997.
-%
-% \bibitem{94:_si}
-% STRÍ Staðlaráð Íslands.
-% \newblock {\em SI - kerfið}, 2 edition, 1994.
-%
-% \end{thebibliography}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{\TeX{}nical details}
-%
-% When this file was read through the option \Lopt{icelandic} we make
-% it behave as if \Lopt{icelandic} was specified.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{icelandic}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \def\CurrentOption{icelandic}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{icelandic} will be an `unknown' language, so we
-% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@icelandic| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@icelandic\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Icelandic}
- \adddialect\l@icelandic0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\if@Two@E}
-% We will need a new `if' : |\if@Two@E| is true if and only if
-% \LaTeXe{} is running \emph{not} in compatibility mode. It is
-% used in the definitions of the command |\tala| and |\upp|.
-% The definition is somewhat complicated, due to the fact that
-% |\if@compatibility| is not recognized as a |\if| in
-% \LaTeX-2.09 based formats.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@Two@E \@Two@Etrue
-\def\@FI@{\fi}
-\ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined
- \@Two@Efalse \def\@FI@{\relax}
-\else
- \if@compatibility \@Two@Efalse \fi
-\@FI@
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasicelandic}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasicelandic}
-%
-% The macro |\extrasicelandic|
-% will perform all the extra definitions needed for the Icelandic
-% language. The macro |\noextrasicelandic| is used to cancel the
-% actions of |\extrasicelandic|.
-%
-% For Icelandic the \texttt{"} character is
-% made active. This is done once, later on its definition may vary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \languageshorthands{icelandic}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1e}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Icelandic}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasicelandic{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The icelandic hyphenation patterns can be used with
-% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1f}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins}
-% to provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active
-% character. This character is then used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:icelandic-commands}.
-%
-% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a
-% couple of `support' macros.
-%
-% \subsection{Captionnames and date}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining the Icelandic equivalents for
-% the \LaTeX{} captionnames.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsicelandic}
-% The macro |\captionsicelandic| will define all strings used
-% used in the four standard document classes provided
-% with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1f}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1g}{2002/01/00}{Only use 7-bit ASCII characters
-% in order to keep the texts input encoding independant}
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1g}{2002/01/09}{Added translation for Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Form\'{a}li}%
- \def\refname{Heimildir}%
- \def\abstractname{\'{U}tdr\'{a}ttur}%
- \def\bibname{Heimildir}%
- \def\chaptername{Kafli}%
- \def\appendixname{Vi{\dh}auki}%
- \def\contentsname{Efnisyfirlit}%
- \def\listfigurename{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
- \def\listtablename{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
- \def\indexname{Atri{\dh}isor{\dh}askr\'{a}}%
- \def\figurename{Mynd}%
- \def\tablename{Tafla}%
- \def\partname{Hluti}%
- \def\enclname{Hj\'{a}lagt}%
- \def\ccname{Samrit}%
- \def\headtoname{Til:}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Bla{\dh}s\'{\i}{\dh}a}%
- \def\seename{Sj\'{a}}%
- \def\alsoname{Sj\'{a} einnig}%
- \def\proofname{S\"{o}nnun}%
- \def\glossaryname{Or{\dh}alisti}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateicelandic}
-% The macro |\dateicelandic| redefines the command |\today|
-% to produce Icelandic dates.
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1c}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1c}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateicelandic{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- jan\'{u}ar\or febr\'{u}ar\or mars\or apr\'{\i}l\or ma\'{\i}\or
- j\'{u}n\'{\i}\or j\'{u}l\'{\i}\or \'{a}g\'{u}st\or september\or
- okt\'{o}ber\or n\'{o}vember\or desember\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Icelandic quotation marks}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep
-% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the icelandic and icelandic `french' quotes.
-% The icelandic `french' guillemets are the reverse of french
-% guillemets. We define single icelandic `french' quotes for
-% compatibility. Shorthands are provided for a number of different
-% quotation marks, which make them useable both outside and
-% inside mathmode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\ilq\grq
-\let\irq\grq
-\let\iflq\frq
-\let\ifrq\flq
-\let\ilqq\glqq
-\let\irqq\grqq
-\let\iflqq\frqq
-\let\ifrqq\flqq
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"<}{\flqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \subsection{Old Icelandic}
-% \label{oldicelandic}
-%
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1}{1997/04/24}{Added definitions for old
-% icelandic.}
-%
-% In old Icelandic some letters have special diacritical marks,
-% described for example in \emph{First Grammatical
-% Treatise}~\cite{unknown72:_first_gramm_treat,97:_forst_fs}. We
-% provide these in the \texttt{T1} encoding with the `ogonek'. The
-% ogonek is placed with the letters `o', and `O', `ó' and `Ó', `e'
-% and `E', and `é' and `É'. Shorthands are provided for these as
-% well.
-%
-% The following code by Leszek Holenderski lifted from
-% \texttt{polish.dtx} is designed to position the diacritics
-% correctly for every font in every size. These macros need a
-% few extra dimension variables.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newdimen\pl@left
-\newdimen\pl@down
-\newdimen\pl@right
-\newdimen\pl@temp
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sob}
-% The macro |\sob| is used to put the `ogonek' in the right
-% place.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\k{}}\setbox2\hbox{p}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\oob}
-% \begin{macro}{\Oob}
-% \begin{macro}{\ooob}
-% \begin{macro}{\OOob}
-% \begin{macro}{\eob}
-% \begin{macro}{\Eob}
-% \begin{macro}{\eeob}
-% \begin{macro}{\EEob}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\oob}{T1}{\sob {o}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Oob}{T1}{\sob {O}{.7}{0}{0}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ooob}{T1}{\sob {ó}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\OOob}{T1}{\sob {Ó}{.7}{0}{0}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\sob {e}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\sob {E}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eeob}{T1}{\sob {é}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\EEob}{T1}{\sob {É}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"o}{\oob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"O}{\Oob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"ó}{\ooob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"Ó}{\OOob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"e}{\eob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"E}{\Eob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"é}{\eeob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"É}{\EEob}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \subsection{Formatting numbers}
-% \label{numbers}
-%
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1a}{1997/04/26}{Added definitions for
-% formatting numbers in Icelandic and some extra utilities.}
-% This section is lifted from \texttt{frenchb.dtx} by D. Flipo.
-% In English the decimal part starts with a point and thousands
-% should be separated by a comma: an approximation of $1000\pi$
-% should be inputed as |$3{,}141.592{,}653$| in math-mode and
-% as |3,141.592,653| in text.
-% \changes{icelandic-1.1b}{1997/05/05}{Added references to various
-% publications used}
-%
-% In Icelandic the decimal part starts with a comma and thousands
-% should be separated by a space~\cite{88:_reglur} or by a
-% period~\cite{97:_forst_fs}; we have the space. The above
-% approximation of $1000\pi$ should be inputed as
-% |$3\;141{,}592\;653$| in math-mode and as something like
-% |3~141,592~653| in text. Braces are mandatory around the comma in
-% math-mode, the reason is mentioned in the \TeX{}book p.~134:
-% the comma is of type |\mathpunct| (thus normally followed by a
-% space) while the point is of type |\mathord| (no space added).
-%
-% Thierry Bouche suggested that a second type of comma, of type
-% |\mathord| would be useful in math-mode, and proposed to
-% introduce a command (named |\decimalsep| in this package),
-% the expansion of which would depend on the current language.
-%
-% Vincent Jalby suggested a command |\nombre| to conveniently
-% typeset numbers: inputting |\nombre{3141,592653}| either in
-% text or in math-mode will format this number properly according
-% to the current language (Icelandic or non-Icelandic). We use
-% |\nombre| to define command |\tala| in Icelandic.
-%
-% |\tala| accepts an optional argument which happens to be
-% useful with the extension `dcolumn', it specifies the decimal
-% separator used in the \emph{source code}:
-% |\newcolumntype{d}{D{,}{\decimalsep}{-1}}| \\
-% |\begin{tabular}{|d|}\hline | \\
-% | 3,14 \\ | \\
-% | \tala[,]{123,4567} \\ | \\
-% | \tala[,]{9876,543}\\\hline| \\
-% |\end{tabular} | \\
-% will print a column of numbers aligned on the decimal point
-% (comma or point depending on the current language), each slice
-% of 3 digits being separated by a space or a comma according to
-% the current language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\decimalsep}
-% \begin{macro}{\thousandsep}
-% We need a internal definition, valid in both text and math-mode,
-% for the comma (|\@comma@|) and another one for the unbreakable
-% fixed length space (no glue) used in Icelandic (|\f@thousandsep|).
-%
-% The commands |\decimalsep| and |\thousandsep| get default
-% definitions (for the English language) when |icelandic| is loaded;
-% these definitions will be updated when the current language is
-% switched to or from Icelandic.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\mathchardef\m@comma="013B \def\@comma@{\ifmmode\m@comma\else,\fi}
-\def\f@thousandsep{\ifmmode\mskip5.5mu\else\penalty\@M\kern.3em\fi}
-\newcommand{\decimalsep}{.} \newcommand{\thousandsep}{\@comma@}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\decimalsep{\@comma@}%
- \def\thousandsep{\f@thousandsep}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\decimalsep{.}%
- \def\thousandsep{\@comma@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\tala}
-% The decimal separator used when \emph{inputing} a number
-% with |\tala| \emph{has to be a comma}.
-% |\tala| splits the inputed number into two parts: what
-% comes before the first comma will be formatted by
-% \cs{@integerpart} while the rest (if not empty) will be
-% formatted by \cs{@decimalpart}. Both parts, once formatted
-% separately will be merged together with between them, either
-% the decimal separator \cs{decimalsep} or (in \LaTeXe{}
-% \emph{only}) the optional argument of |\tala|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@Two@E
- \newcommand{\tala}[2][\decimalsep]{%
- \def\@decimalsep{#1}\@tala#2\@empty,\@empty,\@nil}
-\else
- \newcommand{\tala}[1]{%
- \def\@decimalsep{\decimalsep}\@tala#1\@empty,\@empty,\@nil}
-\fi
-\def\@tala#1,#2,#3\@nil{%
- \ifx\@empty#2%
- \@integerpart{#1}%
- \else
- \@integerpart{#1}\@decimalsep\@decimalpart{#2}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The easiest bit is the decimal part:
-% We attempt to read the first four digits of the decimal part, if
-% it has less than 4 digits, we just have to print them, otherwise
-% |\thousandsep| has to be appended after the third digit, and the
-% algorithm is applied recursively to the rest of the decimal part.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@decimalpart#1{\@@decimalpart#1\@empty\@empty\@empty}
-\def\@@decimalpart#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3%
- \ifx\@empty#4%
- \else
- \thousandsep\expandafter\@@decimalpart\expandafter#4%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Formatting the integer part is more difficult because the slices
-% of 3 digits start from the \emph{bottom} while the number is
-% read from the top!
-% This (tricky) code is borrowed from David Carlisle's comma.sty.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@integerpart#1{\@@integerpart{}#1\@empty\@empty\@empty}
-\def\@@integerpart#1#2#3#4{%
- \ifx\@empty#2%
- \@addthousandsep#1\relax
- \else
- \ifx\@empty#3%
- \@addthousandsep\@empty\@empty#1#2\relax
- \else
- \ifx\@empty#4%
- \@addthousandsep\@empty#1#2#3\relax
- \else
- \@@integerpartafterfi{#1#2#3#4}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-\def\@@integerpartafterfi#1\fi\fi\fi{\fi\fi\fi\@@integerpart{#1}}
-\def\@addthousandsep#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3%
- \if#4\relax
- \else
- \thousandsep\expandafter\@addthousandsep\expandafter#4%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Extra utilities}
-%
-% We now provide the Icelandic user with some extra utilities.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\upp}
-% |\upp| is for typesetting superscripts. |\upp| relies on
-% \begin{macro}{\upp@size}
-% The internal macro |\upp@size| holds the size at which the
-% superscript will be typeset. The reason for this is that we have
-% to specify it differently for different formats.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\sevenrm\@undefined
- \ifx\@ptsize\@undefined
- \let\upp@size\small
- \else
- \ifx\selectfont\@undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In this case the format is the original \LaTeX-2.09:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifcase\@ptsize
- \let\upp@size\ixpt\or
- \let\upp@size\xpt\or
- \let\upp@size\xipt
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When |\selectfont| is defined we probably have NFSS available:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \else
- \ifcase\@ptsize
- \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@ixpt{10pt}\selectfont}\or
- \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xpt{11pt}\selectfont}\or
- \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xipt{12pt}\selectfont}
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If we end up here it must be a plain based \TeX{} format, so:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\upp@size\sevenrm
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% Now we can define |\upp|. When \LaTeXe{} runs in
-% compatibility mode (\LaTeX-2.09 emulation), |\textsuperscript| is
-% also defined, but does no good job, so we give two different
-% definitions for |\upp| using |\if@Two@E|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\if@Two@E
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{%
- \leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\upp@size#1}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Some definitions for special characters.
-% |\grada| needs a special treatment: it is |\char6|
-% in T1-encoding and |\char23| in OT1-encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\fmtname\LaTeXeFmtName
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{T1}{6}
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{OT1}{23}
-\else
- \def\T@one{T1}
- \ifx\f@encoding\T@one
- \newcommand{\grada}{\char6}
- \else
- \newcommand{\grada}{\char23}
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\gradur}
-% Macro for typesetting the abbreviation for `degrees' (as in
-% `degrees Celsius'). As the bounding box of the character `degree'
-% has \emph{very} different widths in CMR/DC and PostScript fonts,
-% we fix the width of the bounding box of |\gradur| to 0.3\,em,
-% this lets the symbol `degree' stick to the preceding
-% (e.g., |45\gradur|) or following character (e.g., |20~\gradur C|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\gradur}{%
- \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\grada\hss}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 21ba5daade9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/icelandic.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2000/09/26}
-\def\batchfile{icelandic.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{icelandic.ldf}{\from{icelandic.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 56b109fdca7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{85}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{interlingua.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{interlingua}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{interlingua.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v1.6 Interlingua support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for
-% the Interlingua language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\usepackage{url}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{interlingua.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{interlingua.dtx}
-%
-% \section{The Interlingua language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% Interlingua language. This file was contributed by Peter
-% Kleiweg, kleiweg at let.rug.nl.
-%
-% Interlingua is an auxiliary language, built from the common
-% vocabulary of Spanish/Portuguese, English, Italian and French,
-% with some normalisation of spelling. The grammar is very easy,
-% more similar to English's than to neolatin languages. The site
-% \url{http://www.interlingua.com} is mostly written in interlingua
-% (as is \url{http://interlingua.altervista.org}), in case you want
-% to read some sample of it.
-%
-% You can have a look at the grammar at
-% \url{http://www.geocities.com/linguablau}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{interlingua}{captionsinterlingua}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{interlingua} could be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@interlingua| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\l@interlingua
- \@nopatterns{Interlingua}
- \adddialect\l@interlingua0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Interlingua language.
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\interlinguahyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{interlingua}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsinterlingua}
-% The macro |\captionsinterlingua| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\captionsinterlingua{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefacio}%
- \def\refname{Referentias}%
- \def\abstractname{Summario}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliographia}%
- \def\chaptername{Capitulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Appendice}%
- \def\contentsname{Contento}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lista de figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{Lista de tabellas}%
- \def\indexname{Indice}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabella}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Incluso}%
- \def\ccname{Copia}%
- \def\headtoname{A}%
- \def\pagename{Pagina}%
- \def\seename{vide}%
- \def\alsoname{vide etiam}%
- \def\proofname{Prova}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossario}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-
-% \begin{macro}{\dateinterlingua}
-% The macro |\dateinterlingua| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Interlingua dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateinterlingua{%
- \def\today{le~\number\day\space de \ifcase\month\or
- januario\or februario\or martio\or april\or maio\or junio\or
- julio\or augusto\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or
- decembre\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasinterlingua}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasinterlingua}
-% The macro |\extrasinterlingua| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Interlingua language. The macro
-% |\noextrasinterlingua| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasinterlingua|. For the moment these macros are empty but
-% they are defined for compatibility with the other
-% language definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasinterlingua{}
-\addto\noextrasinterlingua{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{interlingua}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 679af1e10c4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/interlingua.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2003/11/13}
-\def\batchfile{interlingua.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{interlingua.ldf}{\from{interlingua.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 221c08f91a5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,218 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{122}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{irish.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{irish}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{irish.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v1.0h Irish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `irish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Irish language definition file.
-%
-% The Gaeilge or Irish Gaelic terms were tranlated from those
-% provided by Fraser Grant \texttt{FRASER@CERNVM} by Marion Gunn.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{irish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{irish.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{irish-1.0b}{1995/06/14}{Corrected typo (PR1652)}
-% \changes{irish-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Irish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Marion Gunn.} defines all
-% the language definition macros for the Irish language.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{irish-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{irish}\captionsirish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{irish} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@irish| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@irish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{irish}
- \adddialect\l@irish0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Irish language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\irishhyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1998/06/08}{Added definition of
-% \cs{hyphenmins}}
-% \changes{irish-1.0h}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsirish}
-% The macro |\captionsirish| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{irish-1.0c}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1998/06/08}{Added missing translations provided
-% in PR 2719}
-% \changes{irish-1.0h}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsirish{%
- \def\prefacename{R\'eamhr\'a}% <-- also "Brollach"
- \def\refname{Tagairt\'{\i}}%
- \def\abstractname{Achoimre}%
- \def\bibname{Leabharliosta}%
- \def\chaptername{Caibidil}%
- \def\appendixname{Aguis\'{\i}n}%
- \def\contentsname{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
- \def\listfigurename{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
- \def\listtablename{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
- \def\indexname{Inn\'eacs}%
- \def\figurename{L\'ear\'aid}%
- \def\tablename{T\'abla}%
- \def\partname{Cuid}%
- \def\enclname{faoi iamh}%
- \def\ccname{cc}% abrv. `c\'oip chuig'
- \def\headtoname{Go}%
- \def\pagename{Leathanach}%
- \def\seename{f\'each}%
- \def\alsoname{f\'each freisin}%
- \def\proofname{Cruth\'unas}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateirish}
-% The macro |\dateirish| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Irish dates.
-% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{irish-1.0f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateirish{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or
- Ean\'air\or Feabhra\or M\'arta\or Aibre\'an\or
- Bealtaine\or Meitheamh\or I\'uil\or L\'unasa\or
- Me\'an F\'omhair\or Deireadh F\'omhair\or
- M\'{\i} na Samhna\or M\'{\i} na Nollag\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasirish}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasirish}
-% The macro |\extrasirish| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Irish language. The macro |\noextrasirish| is used
-% to cancel the actions of |\extrasirish|. For the moment these
-% macros are empty but they are defined for compatibility with the
-% other language definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasirish{}
-\addto\noextrasirish{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{irish-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{irish}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 33a3172ee2b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/irish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{irish.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{irish.ldf}{\from{irish.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index d054726438b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,876 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{424}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{italian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{italian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{italian.dtx}
- [2008/03/14 v1.2t Italian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `italian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%% Claudio Beccari
-%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Italian language definition file.
-% The original version of this file was written by Maurizio
-% Codogno, (mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it). Several features were added
-% by Claudio Beccari, (beccari@polito.it).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{italian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{italian.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{italian-0.99}{1990/07/11}{First version, from english.doc}
-% \changes{italian-1.0}{1991/04/23}{Modified for babel 3.0}
-% \changes{italian-1.0a}{1991/05/23}{removed typo}
-% \changes{italian-1.0b}{1991/05/29}{Removed bug found by van der Meer}
-% \changes{italian-1.0e}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{italian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{italian-1.2}{1994/02/09}{Update for\ LaTeXe}
-% \changes{italian-1.2e}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{italian-1.2f}{1995/05/28}{Updated for babel 3.5}
-% \changes{italian-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-% \changes{italian-1.2l}{1999/04/24}{Added \cs{unit}, \cs{ap}, and
-% \cs{ped} macros}
-% \changes{italian-1.2m}{2000/01/05}{Added support for etymological
-% hyphenation}
-% \changes{italian-1.2n}{2000/02/02}{Completely modified etymological
-% hyphenation facility}
-% \changes{italian-1.2n}{2000/05/28}{Added several commands for the
-% caporali double quotes and for simplifying the accented vowel input}
-% \changes{italian-1.2o}{2000/12/12}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{italian-1.2p}{2002/07/10}{Removed redefinition of
-% \cs{add@acc} since its functionality has been introduced into the
-% kernel of LaTeX 2001/06/01}
-% \changes{italian-1.2q}{2005/02/05}{Added test for avoiding conflict
-% with package units.sty; adjusted caporali functionality, since
-% the previous one did not work with the standard (although obsolete)
-% slides class file}
-% \changes{italian-1.2s}{2007/01/12}{Corrected email of CB}
-% \section{The Italian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. The original author is Maurizio Codogno,
-% (\texttt{mau@beatles.cselt.stet.it}). It has been largely revised
-% by Johannes Braams and Claudio Beccari} defines all the
-% language-specific macros for the Italian language.
-%
-% The features of this language definition file are the following:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item The Italian hyphenation is invoked, provided that file
-% \texttt{ithyph.tex} was loaded when the \LaTeXe\ format was
-% built; in case it was not, read the information coming with your
-% distribution of the \TeX\ software, and the \babel\
-% documentation.
-% \item The language dependent fixed words to be inserted by such
-% commands as |\chapter|, |\caption|, |\tableofcontents|,
-% etc. are redefined in accordance with the Italian
-% typographical practice.
-% \item Since Italian can be easily hyphenated and Italian practice
-% allows to break a word before the last two letters, hyphenation
-% parameters have been set accordingly, but a very high demerit
-% value has been set in order to avoid word breaks in the
-% penultimate line of a paragraph. Specifically the |\clubpenalty|,
-% and the |\widowpenalty| are set to rather high values and
-% |\finalhyphendemerits| is set to such a high value that
-% hyphenation is prohibited between the last two lines of a
-% paragraph. In orer to make it consistent, also |\@clubpenalty|
-% is set to the same value; actualy the latter value is the
-% reset value after every sectioning command, so that after the
-% first section, |\clubpenalty| is reset to the low default value.
-% Thanks to Enrico Gregorio for spotting this serious bug.
-% \item Some language specific shortcuts have been defined so as to
-% allow etymological hyphenation, specifically |"| inserts a
-% break point in any word boundary that the typesetter chooses,
-% provided it is not followed by and accented letter (very unlikely
-% in Italian, where compulsory accents fall only on the last and
-% ending vowel of a word, but may take place with compound words
-% that include foreign roots), and \verb="|= when the desired break
-% point falls before an accented letter.
-% \item The shortcut |""| introduces the raised (English) opening
-% double quotes; this shortcut proves its usefulness when one
-% reminds that the Italian keyboard misses the backtick key, and
-% the backtick on a Windows based platform may be obtained only by
-% pressing the \texttt{Alt} key while inputting the numerical code
-% 0096; very, very annoying!
-% \item The shortcuts |"<| and |">| insert the French guillemots,
-% sometimes used in Italian typography; with the T1 font encoding
-% the ligatures |<<| and |>>| should insert such signs directly,
-% but not all the virtual fonts that claim to follow the T1 font
-% encoding actually contain the guillemots; with the OT1 encoding
-% the guillemots are not available and must be faked in some
-% way. By using the |"<| and |">| shortcuts (even with the T1
-% encoding) the necessary tests are performed and in case the
-% suitable glyphs are taken from other fonts normally available
-% with any good, modern \LaTeX\ distribution.
-% \item Three new specific commands |\unit|, |\ped|, and |\ap| are
-% introduced so as to enable the correct composition of technical
-% mathematics according to the ISO~31/XI recommendations. |\unit|
-% does not get redefined if the \babel\ package is loaded \emph{after}
-% the package \texttt{units.sty} whose homonymous command plays
-% a different role and follows a different syntax.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% For this language a limited number of shortcuts has been defined,
-% table~\ref{t:itshrtct}, some of which are used to overcome
-% certain limitations of the Italian keyboard; in
-% section~\ref{s:itkbd} there are other comments and hints in order
-% to overcome some other keyboard limitations.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]\centering
-% \begin{tabular}{cp{80mm}}
-% |"| & inserts a compound word mark where hyphenation is legal;
-% it allows etymological hyphenation which is recommended
-% for technical terms, chemical names and the like; it
-% does not work if the next character is represented with
-% a control sequence or is an accented character.\\
-% \texttt{\string"\string|}
-% & the same as the above without the limitation on
-% characters represented with control sequences or accented
-% ones.\\
-% |""| & inserts open quotes ``.\\ %^^A'' emacs matching
-% |"<| & inserts open guillemots.\\
-% |">| & inserts closed guillemots.\\
-% |"/| & equivalent to |\slash|
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Shortcuts for the Italian language}\label{t:itshrtct}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{%
-% \begin{thebibliography}{1}
-% \bibitem{CBec} Beccari C., ``Computer Aided Hyphenation for
-% Italian and Modern Latin'', \textsf{TUGboat} vol.~13, n.~1,
-% pp.~23-33 (1992).
-% \bibitem{Becc2} Beccari C., ``Typesetting mathematics for science
-% and technology according to ISO\,31/XI'', \textsf{TUGboat}
-% vol.~18, n.~1, pp.~39-48 (1997).
-% \end{thebibliography}}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{italian-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \changes{italian-1.2j}{1996/12/29}{Added braces around second arg of
-% \cs{LdfInit}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{italian}{captionsitalian}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{italian} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@italian| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.0}{1991/04/23}{Now use \cs{adddialect} if
-% language undefined}
-% \changes{italian-1.0h}{1991/10/08}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{italian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no
-% hyphenation patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{italian-1.2e}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@italian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Italian}%
- \adddialect\l@italian0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Italian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsitalian}
-% The macro |\captionsitalian| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{italian-1.0c}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \changes{italian-1.0c}{1991/06/06}{\cs{pagename} should be
-% \cs{headpagename}}
-% \changes{italian-1.0d}{1991/07/01}{`contiene' substitued by `Allegati'
-% as suggested by Marco Bozzo (\texttt{BOZZO@CERNVM}).}
-% \changes{italian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{italian-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Changed some of the words
-% following suggestions from Claudio Beccari}
-% \changes{italian-1.2g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{italian-1.2h}{1995/07/27}{Added translation of `Proof'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsitalian{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefazione}%
- \def\refname{Riferimenti bibliografici}%
- \def\abstractname{Sommario}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Capitolo}%
- \def\appendixname{Appendice}%
- \def\contentsname{Indice}%
- \def\listfigurename{Elenco delle figure}%
- \def\listtablename{Elenco delle tabelle}%
- \def\indexname{Indice analitico}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabella}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Allegati}%
- \def\ccname{e~p.~c.}%
- \def\headtoname{Per}%
- \def\pagename{Pag.}% % in Italian the abbreviation is preferred
- \def\seename{vedi}%
- \def\alsoname{vedi anche}%
- \def\proofname{Dimostrazione}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossario}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateitalian}
-% The macro |\dateitalian| redefines the command
-% |\today| to produce Italian dates.
-% \changes{italian-1.0c}{1991/06/06}{Removed \cs{global} definitions}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateitalian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- gennaio\or febbraio\or marzo\or aprile\or maggio\or giugno\or
- luglio\or agosto\or settembre\or ottobre\or novembre\or
- dicembre\fi\space \number\year}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\italianhyphenmins}
-% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Added setting of left and
-% righthyphenmin according to Claudio Beccari's suggestion}
-%
-% The italian hyphenation patterns can be used with both
-% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{italian-1.2m}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasitalian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasitalian}
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Added setting of club- and
-% widowpenalty}
-% Lower the chance that clubs or widows occur.
-% \changes{italian-1.2t}{2007/12/10}{Added \cs{@clubpenalty} to the
-% italian specific settings, otherwise any sectioning command restores
-% it to the default value valid for english and most other languages}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty
- \clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000\@clubpenalty\clubpenalty}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2b}{1994/05/19}{Added setting of
-% finalhyphendemerits}
-%
-% Never ever break a word between the last two lines of a paragraph
-% in italian texts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits
- \finalhyphendemerits50000000}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2h}{1995/11/10}{Now give the apostrophe a
-% lowercase code}
-% \changes{italian-1.2l}{1999/04/5}{Changed example ``begl'italiani''
-% (obsolete spelling) with another, ``nell'altezza'', that behaves
-% the same way}
-% In order to enable the hyphenation of words such as
-% ``nell'altezza'' we give the \texttt{'} a non-zero lower case
-% code. When we do that \TeX\ finds the following hyphenation
-% points |nel-l'al-tez-za| instead of none.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \lccode`'=`'}%
-\addto\noextrasitalian{%
- \lccode`'=0}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2m}{2000/01/05}{Support for etymological
-% hyphenation}
-%
-% \subsection{Support for etymological hyphenation}
-%
-% In his article on Italian hyphenation \cite{CBec} Beccari pointed
-% out that the Italian language gets hyphenated on a phonetic
-% basis, although etymological hyphenation is allowed; this is in
-% contrast with what happens in Latin, for example, where
-% etymological hyphenation is always used. Since the patterns for
-% both languages would become too complicated in order to cope with
-% etymological hyphenation, in his paper Beccari proposed the
-% definition of an active character `|_|' such that it could insert
-% a ``soft'' discretionary hyphen at the compound word
-% boundary. For several reasons that idea and the specific active
-% character proved to be unpractical and was abandoned.
-%
-% This problem is so important with the majority of the European
-% languages, that \babel\ from the very beginning developed
-% the tradition of making the |"| character active so as to perform
-% several actions that turned useful with every language.
-% One of these actions consisted in defining the shortcut \verb="|=
-% that was extensively used in German and in many other languages
-% in order to insert a discretionary hyphen such that hyphenation
-% would not be precluded in the rest of the word as it happens with
-% the standard \TeX\ command |\-|.
-%
-% Meanwhile the \texttt{ec} fonts with the double Cork encoding
-% (thus formerly called the \texttt{dc} fonts) have become more or
-% less standard and are widely used by virtually all Europeans that
-% write languages with many special national characters; by so
-% doing they avoid the use of the |\accent| primitive which would
-% be required with the standard \texttt{cm} fonts; with the latter
-% fonts the primitive command |\accent| is such that hyphenation
-% becomes almost impossible, in any case strongly impeached.
-%
-% The \texttt{ec} fonts contain a special character, named
-% ``compound word mark'', that occupies position 23 in the font
-% scheme and may be input with the sequence |^^W|. Up to now,
-% apparently, this special character has never been used in a
-% practical way for the typesetting of languages rich of compound
-% words; also it has never been inserted in the hyphenation pattern
-% files of any language. Beccari modified his pattern file
-% \file{ithyph.tex v4.8b} for Italian so as to contain five new
-% patterns that involve |^^W|, and he tried to give the
-% \babel\ active character |"| a new shortcut definition,
-% so as to allow the insertion of the ``compound word mark'' in the
-% proper place within any word where two semantic fragments join
-% up. With such facility for marking the compound word boundaries,
-% etymological hyphenation becomes possible even if the patterns
-% know nothing about etymology (but the typesetter hopefully
-% does!).
-% In Italian such etymological hyphenation is desirable with
-% technical terms, chemical names, and the like.
-%
-% Even this solution proved to be inconvenient on certain UN*X
-% platforms, so Beccari resorted to another approach that uses the
-% \babel\ active character |"| and relies on the category
-% code of the character that follows |"|.
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2n}{2000/02/02}{Completely new etymological
-% hyphenation facility}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}%
-\addto\extrasitalian{\bbl@activate{"}\languageshorthands{italian}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\it@cwm}
-% The active character |"| is now defined for language |italian| so
-% as to perform different actions in math mode compared to text
-% mode; specifically in math mode a double quote is inserted so as
-% to produce a double prime sign, while in text mode the temporary
-% macro |\it@next| is defined so as to defer any further action
-% until the next token category code has been tested.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{italian}{"}{%
-\ifmmode
- \def\it@next{''}%
-\else
- \def\it@next{\futurelet\it@temp\it@cwm}%
-\fi
-\it@next
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\it@cwm}
-% The \cs{it@next} service control sequence is such that upon its
-% execution a temporary variable \cs{it@temp} is made equivalent to
-% the next token in the input list without actually removing
-% it. Such temporary token is then tested by the macro \cs{it@cwm}
-% and if it is found to be a letter token, then it introduces a
-% compound word separator control sequence \cs{it@allowhyphens}
-% whose expansion introduces a discretionary hyphen and an
-% unbreakable space; in case the token is not a letter, then it is
-% tested against \verb=|=$_{12}$: if so a compound word separator
-% is inserted and the \verb=|= token is removed, otherwise another
-% test is performed so as to see if another double quote sign
-% follows: in this case a double open quote mark is inserted,
-% otherwise two other tests are performed so as to see if
-% guillemets have to be inserted, otherwise nothing is done.
-% The double quote shortcut for inserting a double open quote sign
-% is useful for people who are inputting Italian text by means of
-% an Italian keyboard that unfortunately misses the grave or
-% backtick key.
-% By this shortcut |""| becomes equivalent to |``| for inserting
-% raised open high double quotes.
-% \changes{italian-1.2r}{2005/11/17}{Added \cs{nobreak} to
-% \cs{it@@cwm} and corrected \cs{it@next}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\it@@cwm{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}%
-\def\it@@ocap#1{\it@ocap}\def\it@@ccap#1{\it@ccap}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@cwm}{\let\it@@next\relax
-\ifcat\noexpand\it@temp a%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm}%
-\else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp \string|%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm\@gobble}%
- \else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp \string<%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@ocap}%
- \else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp \string>%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@ccap}%
- \else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp\string/%
- \def\it@@next{\slash\@gobble}%
- \else
- \ifx\it@temp"%
- \def\it@@next{``\@gobble}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-\it@@next}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{sloppypar}
-% By this definition of |"| if one types |macro"istruzione| the
-% possible break points become \textsf{ma-cro-istru-zio-ne}, while
-% without the |"| mark they would be \textsf{ma-croi-stru-zio-ne},
-% according to the phonetic rules such that the |macro| prefix is
-% not taken as a unit.
-% A chemical name such as \texttt{des"clor"fenir"amina"cloridrato}
-% is breakable as \textsf{des-clor-fe-nir-ami-na-clo-ri-dra-to}
-% instead of \textsf{de-sclor-fe-ni-ra-mi-na-...}
-%
-% In other language description files a shortcut is defined so as
-% to allow a break point without actually inserting any hyphen
-% sign; examples are given such as \mbox{entrada/salida}; actually
-% if one wants to allow a breakpoint after the slash, it is much
-% clearer to type |\slash| instead of |/| and \LaTeX\ does
-% everything by itself; here the shortcut |"/| was introduced to
-% stand for |\slash| so that one can type |input"/output| and allow
-% a line break after the slash.
-% This shortcut works only for the slash, since in Italian such
-% constructs are extremely rare.
-% \end{sloppypar}
-%
-% Attention: the expansion of |"| takes place before the actual
-% expansion of OT1 or T1 accented sequences such as |\`{a}|;
-% therefore this etymological hyphenation facility works as it
-% should only when the semantic word fragments \textit{do not
-% start} with an accented letter; this in Italian is always
-% avoidable, because compulsory accents fall only on the last
-% vowel, but it may be necessary to mark a compound word where one
-% or more components come from a foreign language and contain
-% diacritical marks according to the spelling rules of that
-% language. In this case the special shorthand \verb!"|! may be
-% used that performs exactly as |"| normally does, except that the
-% \verb!|! sign is removed from the token input list:
-% \verb!kilo"|{\"o}rsted! gets hyphenated as
-% \texttt{ki-lo-\"or-sted}.
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2l}{1999/04/05}{Added useful macros for
-% fulfilling ISO 31/XI regulations}
-%
-% \subsection{Facilities required by the ISO 31/XI regulations}
-% The ISO 31/XI regulations require that units of measure are
-% typeset in upright font in any circumstance, math or text, and
-% that in text mode they are separated from the numerical
-% indication of the measure with an unbreakable (thin) space.
-% The command |\unit| that was defined for achieving this
-% goal happened to conflict with the homonymous command defined by
-% the package \texttt{units.sty}; we therefore need to test if that
-% package has already been loaded so as to avoid conflicts; we assume
-% that if the user loads that package, s/he wants to use that package
-% facilities and command syntax.
-%
-% The same regulations require also that super and subscripts
-% (apices and pedices) are in upright font, \emph{not in math
-% italics}, when they represent ``adjectives'' or appositions to
-% mathematical or physical variables that do not represent
-% countable or measurable entities such as, for example,
-% $V_{\mathrm{max}}$ or $V_{\mathrm{rms}}$ for a maximum or a root
-% mean square voltage, compared to $V_i$ or $V_T$ as the $i$-th
-% voltage in a set, or a voltage that depends on the thermodynamic
-% temperature $T$. See \cite{Becc2} for a complete description of
-% the ISO regulations in connection with typesetting.
-%
-% More rarely it happens to use superscripts that are not
-% mathematical variables, such as the notation
-% $\mathbf{A}^{\!\mathrm{T}}$ to denote the transpose of matrix
-% $\mathbf{A}$; text superscripts are useful also as ordinals or
-% in old fashioned abbreviations in text mode; for example the
-% feminine ordinal $1^{\mathrm{a}}$ or the old fashioned obsolete
-% abbreviation F$^{\mathrm{lli}}$ for \mbox{Fratelli} in company
-% names (compare with ``Bros.'' for \underline{bro}ther\underline{s}
-% in American English); text subscripts are mostly used in logos.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\unit}
-% \begin{macro}{\ap}
-% \begin{macro}{\ped}
-% First we define the new (internal) commands |\bbl@unit|, |\bbl@ap|,
-% and |\bbl@ped| as robust ones.
-% \changes{italian-1.2q}{2005/02/05}{Added testing for avoiding conflicts
-% with the units.sty package}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@unit}[1]{%
- \textormath{\,\mbox{#1}}{\,\mathrm{#1}}}%
- }%
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ap}[1]{%
- \textormath{\textsuperscript{#1}}{^{\mathrm{#1}}}}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ped}[1]{%
- \textormath{$_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \selectfont#1}}$}{_\mathrm{#1}}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we can use |\let| to define the user level commands, but in
-% case the macros already have a different meaning before entering
-% in Italian mode typesetting, we first memorize their meaning so
-% as to restore them on exit.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{%
- \addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@save\unit\let\unit\bbl@unit}%
- }%
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@save\ap\let\ap\bbl@ap
- \babel@save\ped\let\ped\bbl@ped
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Accents}\label{s:itkbd}
-% Most of the other language description files introduce a number
-% of shortcuts for inserting accents and other language specific
-% diacritical marks in a more comfortable way compared with the
-% lengthy standard \TeX\ conventions. When an Italian keyboard is
-% being used on a Windows based platform, it exhibits such
-% limitations that up to now no convenient shortcuts have been
-% developed; the reason lies in the fact that the Italian keyboard
-% lacks the grave accent (also known as ``backtick''), which is
-% compulsory on all accented vowels except the `e', but, on the
-% opposite, it carries the keys with all the accented lowercase
-% vowels; the keyboard lacks also the tie |~| (tilde) key, while
-% the curly braces require pressing three keys simultaneously.
-%
-% The best solution Italians have found so far is to use a smart
-% editor that accepts shortcut definitions such that, for example,
-% by striking |"(| one gets directly |{| on the screen and the same
-% sign is saved into the \file{.tex} file; the same smart editor
-% should be capable of translating the accented characters into the
-% standard \TeX\ sequences when writing a file to disk (for the
-% sake of file portability), and to transform the standard \TeX\
-% sequences into the corresponding signs when loading a \file{.tex}
-% file from disk to memory. Such smart editors do exist and can be
-% downloaded from the \textsc{ctan} archives.
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2p}{2002/07/10}{Removed redefinition of \cs{add@acc} since its
-% functionality has been introduced into the kernel of LaTeX 2001/06/01}
-%
-% For what concerns the missing backtick key,
-% which is used also for inputting the open quotes, it must be
-% noticed that the shortcut |""| described above completely solves
-% the problem for \textit{double} raised open quotes; according to
-% the traditions of particular publishing houses, since there are
-% no compulsory regulations on the matter, the French guillemets
-% may be used; in this case the T1 font encoding solves the problem
-% by means of its built in ligatures |<<| and |>>|. But\dots
-%
-% \subsection{\emph{Caporali} or French double quotes}
-% Although the T1 font encoding ligatures solve the problem, there
-% are some circumstances where even the T1 font encoding cannot be
-% used, either because the author\slash typesetter wants to use the
-% OT1 encoding, or because s/he uses a font set that does
-% not comply completely with the T1 font encoding; some virtual
-% fonts, for example, are supposed to implement the double Cork
-% font encoding but actually miss some glyphs; one such virtual
-% font set is given by the \texttt{ae} virtual fonts, because they
-% are supposed to implement such double font encoding simply using
-% the \texttt{cm} fonts, of which the type~1 PostScript version
-% exists and is freely available. Since guillemets (in Italian
-% \emph{caporali}) do not exist in any \texttt{cm} latin font,
-% their glyphs must be substituted with something else that
-% approaches them.
-%
-% \changes{italian-1.2q}{2005/02/05}{Redefined the caporali machinery
-% so as to avoid incompatibilities with the slides class, as there
-% are no Cyrillic slides fonts as there are for Latins script}
-%
-% Since in French typesetting guillemets are compulsory, the French
-% language definition file resorts to a clever font substitution;
-% such file exploits the \LaTeXe\ font selection machinery so as to
-% get the guillemets from the Cyrillic fonts, because it suffices
-% to locally change the default encoding. There are several sets of
-% Cyrillic fonts, but the ones that obey the OT2 font encoding are
-% generally distributed with all recent implementations of the
-% \TeX\ software; they are part of the American Mathematical
-% Society fonts and come both as \textsf{METAFONT} source files and
-% Type~1 PostScript \texttt{.pfb} files. The availability of such
-% fonts should be guaranteed by the presence of the
-% \texttt{OT2cmr.fd} font description file. Actually the presence
-% of this file does not guarantee the completeness of your \TeX\
-% implementation; should \LaTeX\ complain about a missing Cyrillic
-% \texttt{.tfm} file (that kind of file that contains the font
-% metric parameters) and/or about missing Cyrillic \texttt(.mf)
-% files, then your \TeX\ system is \emph{incomplete} and you should
-% download such fonts from the \textsc{ctan} archives. Temporarily
-% you may issue the command |\LtxSymbCaporali| so as to approximate
-% the missing glyphs with the \LaTeX\ symbol fonts. In some case
-% warning messages are issued so as to inform the typesetter about
-% the necessity of resorting to some \emph{poor man} solution.
-%
-% In spite of these alternate fonts, we must avoid invoking unusual
-% fonts if the available encoding allows to use built in caporali.
-% As far as I know (CB) the only T1-encoded font families that miss
-% the guillemets are the AE ones; we therefore first test if the
-% default encoding id the T1 one and in this case if the AE families
-% are the default ones; in order for this to work properly it is
-% necessary to load these optional packages \emph{before} \babel.
-% If the T1 encoding is not the default one when the Italian language
-% is specified, then some substitutions must be done.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LtxSymbCaporali}
-% \begin{macro}{\it@ocap}
-% \begin{macro}{\it@ccap}
-% We define some macros for substituting the default guillemets; first the
-% emulation by means of the \LaTeX\ symbols; each one of these macro sets
-% actually redefines the control sequences |\it@ocap| and |\it@ccap| that
-% are the ones effectively activated by the shortcuts |"<| and |">|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\LtxSymbCaporali{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{\mbox{%
- \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont(\kern-0.20em(}%
- \ignorespaces}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \mbox{%
- \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont)\kern-0.20em)}}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then the substitution with any specific font that contains such
-% glyphs; it might be the CBgreek fonts, the Cyrillic one, the
-% super-cm ones, the lm ones, or any other the user might prefer
-% (the code is adapted from the one that appears in the
-% \texttt{frenchb.ld} file; thanks to Daniel Flipo).
-% By default if the user did not select the T1 encoding, the
-% existence of the CBgreek fonts is tested; if they exist the
-% guillemets are taken from this font, and since its families are a
-% superset of the default CM ones and they apply also to typeset
-% slides with the standard class \texttt{slides}. If the CBgreek
-% fonts are not found, then the existence of the Cyrillic ones is
-% tested, although this choice is not suited for typesetting
-% slides; otherwise the poor man solution of the \LaTeX\ special
-% symbols is used. In any case the user can force the use of the
-% Cyrillic guillemets substitution by issuing the declaration
-% |\CyrillicCaporali| just before the |\begin{document}| statement;
-% in alternative the user can specify with
-% \begin{flushleft}
-% |\CaporaliFrom|\marg{encoding}\marg{family}\marg{opening number}\marg{closing number}
-% \end{flushleft}
-% the encoding and family of the font s/he prefers, and the slot
-% numbers of the opening and closing guillemets respectively. For
-% example if the T1-encoded Latin Modern fonts are desired the
-% specific command should be
-% \begin {flushleft}
-% |\CaporaliFrom{T1}{lmr}{19}{20}|
-% \end{flushleft}
-% These user choices might be necessary for assuring the correct
-% typesetting with fonts that contain the required glyphs and are
-% available also in PostScript form so as to use them directly with
-% \texttt{pdflatex}, for example.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\CaporaliFrom#1#2#3#4{%
- \DeclareFontEncoding{#1}{}{}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{T1}{%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{T1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{OT1}{%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{OT1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Then we set a boolean variable and test the default family;
-% if such family has a name that starts with the letters ``ae''
-% then we have no built in guillemets; of course if the AE font
-% family is chosen after the \babel\ package is loaded, the test
-% does not perform as required.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\get@ae#1#2#3!{\def\bbl@ae{#1#2}}%
-\def\@ifT@one@noCap{\expandafter\get@ae\f@family!%
-\def\bbl@temp{ae}\ifx\bbl@ae\bbl@temp\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We set another couple of boolean variables for testing the
-% existence of the CBgreek or the Cyrillic fonts
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\if@CBgreekEncKnown
-\IfFileExists{lgrcmr.fd}%
- {\@CBgreekEncKnowntrue}{\@CBgreekEncKnownfalse}
-\newif\if@CyrEncKnown
-\IfFileExists{ot2cmr.fd}%
- {\@CyrEncKnowntrue}{\@CyrEncKnownfalse}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin {macro}{\CBgreekCaporali}
-% \begin {macro}{\CyrillicCaporali}
-% \begin {macro}{\T@unoCaporali}
-% Next we define the macros |\CBgreekCaporali|, |\T@unoCaporali|,
-% and |\CyrillicCaporali|; with the latter one we test the loaded
-% class, and if it's \texttt{slides} nothing gets done. In any case
-% each one of these declarations, if used, must be specified in the
-% preamble.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\CBgreekCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{%
- \IfFileExists{lgrlcmss.fd}{\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}%
- {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- {\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}%
- {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}%
- {\LtxSymbCaporali}}%
- {\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}%
- {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip
- \fi{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}%
- {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}%
- }%
-\def\CyrillicCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{\relax}%
- {\DeclareFontEncoding{OT2}{}{}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}%
- {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- {\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char62\relax}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}%
- {{\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char60\relax}\ignorespaces}}}%
-\@onlypreamble{\CBgreekCaporali}\@onlypreamble{\CyrillicCaporali}%
-\def\T@unoCaporali{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{<<\ignorespaces}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi>>}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% Now we can do some real setting; first we start testing the encoding;
-% if the encoding is T1 we test if the font family is the AE one; if so,
-% we further test for other possibilities
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one
- \@ifT@one@noCap{%
- \if@CBgreekEncKnown
- \CBgreekCaporali
- \else
- \if@CyrEncKnown
- \CyrilicCaporali
- \else
- \LtxSymbCaporali
- \fi
- \fi}%
- {\T@unoCaporali}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% But if the default encoding is not the T1 one, then the
-% substitutions must be performed.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \if@CBgreekEncKnown
- \CBgreekCaporali
- \else
- \if@CyrEncKnown
- \CyrilicCaporali
- \else
- \LtxSymbCaporali
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \subsection{Finishing commands}
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{italian-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{italian}%
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 4ea2ac191dd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/italian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,155 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-%%
-%% Questo file serve per generare dal file italian.dtx il file
-%% italian.ldf mediante il programma LaTeX/docstrip che toglie
-%% praticamente tutti i commenti e ne rende il caricamento molto
-%% veloce. La documentazione puo' essere ottenuta passando a
-%% LaTeX2e il file sorgente italian.dtx
-%%
-\def\filedate{2001/01/19}
-\def\batchfile{italian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{italian.ldf}{\from{italian.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index f4587a51186..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,401 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{344}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{kurmanji.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{kurmanji}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{kurmanji.dtx}
- [2009/06/25 v1.1 Kurmanji support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2009
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for
-% the Kurmanji language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{kurmanji.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{kurmanji.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Removed old changes from
-% language.skeleton}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Corrected some typographical errors
-% in the documentation}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Added documentation about the date}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Rewrote the code for Kurmanji date}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Set both hyphenmins to two}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Use frenchspacing}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Make month > 12 an error}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Documentation of hyphenmins}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Added three numerical date formats}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Page, Chapter, and Apppendix inflected}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Added Makro \cs{ontoday}}
-%
-% \section{The Kurmanji language}
-%
-% The Kurmanji language belongs to the Kurdish languages.
-% Of the Kurdish languages, Kurmanji has the largest
-% number of speakers and is written with the turkish based latin alphabet
-% by Mir Celadet Bedirxan. Kurmanji is spoken in Turkey, Syria and by
-% the majority of the Kurdish diaspora in Europe.
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% Kurmanji language. Versions 1.0 and 1.1 of this file were
-% contributed by
-% J\"org Knappen and Medeni Shemd\^e. The code for the active |^|
-% was lifted from esperanto.dtx.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |^c| & gives \c c with hyphenation in the rest of the word
-% allowed, this works for c, C, s, S\\
-% |^e| & gives \^e, with hyphenation in the rest of the word
-% allowed, this works for e, E, i, I, u, U\\
-% \verb=^|= & inserts a |\discretionary{-}{}{}|\\
-% |"`| & gives lower left double german style quotes, like~,,\\
-% |"'| & gives upper right double igerman style quotes, like~``\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The functions of the active character for Kurmanji.}
-% \label{tab:kur-act}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \subsection{The date in Kurmanji}
-%
-% Currently, there is no agreed set of month names for the gregorian calendar
-% in Kurmanji. We provide two lists of month names, |\datekurmanji| selects
-% month names based on traditional sources, |\datekurmanjialternate| gives
-% another selection. In addition, we provide macros |\januaryname| to
-% |\decembername| allowing the user to redefine each single month name
-% according to their preferences.
-%
-% The predefinded month names can be found in table~\ref{tab:kur-mon}.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{tabular}{lll}
-% English & Kurmanji (traditional) & Kurmanji (alternate) \\ \hline
-% January & \c{C}ileya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n & R\^ebendan\\
-% February & Sibat & Re\c{s}emih\\
-% March & Adar & Adar\\
-% April & N{\^\i}san & Cotan\\
-% May & Gulan & Gulan\\
-% June & Hez{\^\i}ran & P\^u\c{s}per\\
-% July & T{\^\i}rmeh & T{\^\i}rmeh\\
-% August & Tebax & Gelav\^ej\\
-% September& \^Ilon & Gelarezan\\
-% Oktober & \c{C}iriya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n & Kew\c{c}\^er\\
-% November & \c{C}iriya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n & Sermawez\\
-% December & \c{C}ileya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n & Berfandar
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Month names in Kurmanji.}
-% \label{tab:kur-mon}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Added Makro \cs{ontoday}}
-% The macro \cs{ontoday} gives the date in the inflected form. This form is
-% used in the head of a letter and looks like 25'\^e Hez{\^\i}ran\^e 2009.
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Added three numerical date formats}
-% In addition to the date formats with month names we provide three
-% numerical date formats: \cs{datesymd} provides the date in the swedish style
-% YYYY-MM-DD, \cs{datesdmy} provides the date in the style D/M YYYY (also
-% popular in sweden), and \cs{dategdmy} provides the date in the style
-% D. M. YYYY (popular in germany and many other countries).
-% These commands should be issued after \cs{begin{document}}.
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{kurmanji}{captionskurmanji}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{kurmanji} could be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@kurmanji| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\l@kurmanji
- \@nopatterns{Kurmanji}
- \adddialect\l@kurmanji0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Kurmanji language.
-%
-% Now we declare the |<attrib>| language attribute.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{kurmanji}{<attrib>}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% This code adds the expansion of |\extras<attrib>kurmanji| to
-% |\extraskurmanji|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraskurmanji
- \expandafter{\extras<attrib>kurmanji}%
- \let\captionskurmanji\captions<attrib>kurmanji
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Set both hyphenmins to two}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Documentation of hyphenmins}
-% The kurmanji hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin|
-% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \begin{macro}{\kurmanjihyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{kurmanji}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Page, Chapter, and Apppendix inflected}
-% \begin{macro}{\captionskurmanji}
-% The macro |\captionskurmanji| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\captionskurmanji{%
- \def\prefacename{Pe\c{s}gotin}% % Gotina Pe\c{s}\^i
- \def\refname{Pirtuken bijart{\^\i}}%
- \def\abstractname{Kurteb{\^\i}r}% % En\c{c}am
- \def\bibname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya Pirtukan}%
- \def\chaptername{Ser\^e}%
- \def\appendixname{Teb{\^\i}n{\^\i}ya}%
- \def\contentsname{Nav\^erok}% % Navedank
- \def\listfigurename{Hejmara Dimena}%
- \def\listtablename{Hejmara Kevalen}%
- \def\indexname{Endeks}%
- \def\figurename{Dimen\^e}% % Weney\^e
- \def\tablename{Kevala}%
- \def\partname{B\^e\c{s}a}%
- \def\enclname{Dumahik}% % Duvik
- \def\ccname{Belavker}%
- \def\headtoname{Ji bo}% % Ji ... re
- \def\pagename{R\^upel\^e}%
- \def\seename{bin\^era}% % bala xwe bida
- \def\alsoname{le v\^eya ji bin\^era}%
- \def\proofname{Del{\^\i}l}%
- \def\glossaryname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya l\^ekol{\^\i}n\^e}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Rewrote the code for Kurmanji date}
-% \begin{macro}{\datekurmanji}
-% \begin{macro}{\datekurmanjialternate}
-% The macro |\datekurmanji| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Kurmanji dates. We choose the traditional names for the months.
-% The macro |\datekurmanjialternate|
-% defines an alternate set of month names. It is
-% also very common to use numbers for the month.
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/06/25}{Added Makro \cs{ontoday}}
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Make month > 12 an error}
-% We define the general date format in terms of macros |\januaryname| to
-% |\decembername| which can be redefined by the user.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datekurmanji{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or
- \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or
- \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or
- \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi~\number\year}%
- \def\ontoday{\number\day'\^e~\ifcase\month\or
- \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or
- \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or
- \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or
- \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi\^e~\number\year}%
- \def\januaryname{\c{C}ileya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
- \def\februaryname{Sibat}%
- \def\marchname{Adar}%
- \def\aprilname{N\^{\i}san}%
- \def\mayname{Gulan}%
- \def\junename{Hez{\^\i}ran}%
- \def\julyname{T{\^\i}rmeh}%
- \def\augustname{Tebax}%
- \def\septembername{\^Ilon}%
- \def\octobername{\c{C}iriya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
- \def\novembername{\c{C}iriya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
- \def\decembername{\c{C}ileya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
-}
-\def\datekurmanjialternate{%
- \datekurmanji
- \def\januaryname{R\^ebendan}%
- \def\februaryname{Re\c{s}emih}%
- \def\aprilname{Cotan}% % Avr\^el
- \def\junename{P\^u\c{s}per}%
- \def\augustname{Gelav\^ej}%
- \def\septembername{Gelarezan}% % Rezber
- \def\octobername{Kew\c{c}\^er}%
- \def\novembername{Sermawez}%
- \def\decembername{Berfandar}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/05/11}{Added three numerical date formats}
-% \begin{macro}{\datesymd}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{Command added}
-% The macro |\datesymd| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, common in Sweden.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datesymd{%
- \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datesdmy}
-% The macro |\datesdmy| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Swedish dates in the format DD/MM YYYY, also common in
-% Sweden.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datesdmy{%
- \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\dategdmy}
-% The macros |\dategdmy| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% german style dates in the format D. M. YYYY.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dategdmy{%
- \def\today{\number\day.\space\number\month.\space\number\year}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extraskurmanji}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextraskurmanji}
-% The macro |\extraskurmanji| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Kurmanji language. The macro
-% |\noextraskurmanji| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extraskurmanji|.
-%
-% For Kurmanji the |^| character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{^}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Because the character |^| is used in math mode with quite a
-% different purpose we need to add an extra level of evaluation to
-% the definition of the active |^|. It checks whether math mode is
-% active; if so the shorthand mechanism is bypassed by a direct
-% call of |\normal@char^|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraskurmanji{\languageshorthands{kurmanji}}
-\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@activate{^}}
-\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@deactivate{^}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% In order to prevent problems with the active |^| we add a
-% shorthand on system level which expands to a `normal |^|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And here are the uses of the active |^|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^c}{\c{c}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^C}{\c{C}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^e}{\^e\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^E}{\^E\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^i}{{\^\i}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^I}{\^I\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^s}{\c{s}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^S}{\c{S}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^u}{\^u\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^U}{\^U\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{kurmanji-1.1}{2009/02/13}{Use frenchspacing}
-% For typesetting Kurmanji text, frenchspacing is preferred.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{kurmanji}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index ca18be14cba..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/kurmanji.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2009/09/19}
-\def\batchfile{kurmanji.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{kurmanji.ldf}{\from{kurmanji.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/language.dat b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/language.dat
deleted file mode 100644
index 75141062f8c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/language.dat
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,12 +0,0 @@
-% File : language.dat
-% Purpose : specify which hypenation patterns to load
-% while running iniTeX
-=USenglish
-american ushyphen.tex
-=english
-UKenglish ukhyphen.tex
-=british
-french frhyphen.tex
-dutch nehyph2.tex
-german dehypht.tex
-ngerman dehyphn.tex
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 138c6771271..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,670 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{454}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{latin.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesFile{latin.ldf}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{latin.dtx}%
- [2008/07/06 v2.0l Latin support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `latin.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%% Claudio Beccari
-%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Latin language definition file.
-% The original version of this file was written by
-% Claudio Beccari, (claudio.beccari@polito.it) and includes contributions
-% by Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski, (\texttt{kkz@alfa.mimuw.edu.pl}).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\providecommand*\pkg[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{latin.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{latin.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{latin-0.99}{1999/12/06}{First version, from italian.dtx (CB)}
-% \changes{latin-0.99}{1999/12/06}{Added shortcuts for breve, macron,
-% and etymological hyphenation (CB)}
-% \changes{latin-1.2}{2000/01/31}{Added suggestions from Krzysztof
-% Konrad \.Zelechowski (CB)}
-% \changes{latin-2.0}{2000/02/10}{Completely new etymological
-% hyphenation (CB)}
-% \changes{latin-2.0a}{2000/10/15}{Revised by JB}
-% \changes{latin-2.0b}{2000/12/13}{Simplified shortcuts for
-% etymological hyphenation; modified breve and macro shortcuts;
-% language attribute medieval declared}
-% \changes{latin-2.0c}{2001/06/04}{Restored caret and equals sign
-% category codes before exiting}
-% \changes{latin-2.0d}{2001/06/04}{Restored caret and equals sign
-% category codes before exiting}
-% \changes{latin-2.0e}{2003/04/11}{Introduced the language attribute
-% `withprosodicmarks'; modified use of breve and macron shortcuts
-% in order to avoid possible conflicts with other packages}
-% \changes{latin-2.0i}{2008/02/17}{Corrected the \cs{@clubpenalty}
-% problem}
-% \changes{latin-2.0j}{2008/03/17}{Added a missing comment char and a
-% missing closing brace}
-% \changes{latin-2.0l}{2008/07/06}{Added two missing \cs{end} macro's}
-%
-% \section{The Latin language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. The original author is Claudio Beccari with
-% contributions by Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski,
-% (\texttt{kkz@alfa.mimuw.edu.pl})} defines all the
-% language-specific macros for the Latin language both in modern
-% and medieval spelling.
-%
-% For this language the |\clubpenalty|, |\widowpenalty| are set to
-% rather high values and |\finalhyphendemerits| is set to such a
-% high value that hyphenation is prohibited between the last two
-% lines of a paragraph.
-%
-% For this language two ``styles'' of typesetting are implemented:
-% ``regular'' or modern-spelling Latin, and medieval Latin.
-% The medieval Latin specific commands can be activated by means of
-% the language attribute |medieval|; the medieval spelling differs
-% from the modern one by the systematic use of the lower case `u'
-% also where in modern spelling the letter `v' is used; when
-% typesetting with capital letters, on the opposite, the letter 'V'
-% is used also in place of 'U'.
-% Medieval spelling also includes the ligatures |\ae| (\ae), |\oe|
-% (\oe), |\AE| (\AE), and |\OE| (\OE) that are not used in modern
-% spelling, nor were used in the classical times.
-%
-% Furthermore a third typesetting style |withprosodicmarks| is
-% defined in order to use special shortcuts for inserting breves
-% and macrons when typesetting grammars, dictionaries, teaching
-% texts, and the like, where prosodic marks are important for the
-% complete information on the words or the verses. The shortcuts,
-% listed in table~\ref{t:lashrtct} and described in
-% section~\ref{s:shrtcts}, may interfere with other packages;
-% therefore by default this third style is off and no interference
-% is introduced. If this third style is used and interference is
-% experienced, there are special commands for turning on and off
-% the specific short hand commands of this style.
-%
-% For what concerns \textsf{babel} and typesetting with \LaTeX, the
-% differences between the two styles of spelling reveal themselves
-% in the strings used to name for example the ``Preface'' that
-% becomes ``Praefatio'' or ``Pr\ae fatio'' respectively.
-% Hyphenation rules are also different, but the hyphenation pattern
-% file \file{lahyph.tex} takes care of both versions of the
-% language. Needless to say that such patterns must be loaded in
-% the \LaTeX\ format by running |initex| (or whatever the name
-% if the initializer) on |latex.ltx|.
-%
-% The name strings for chapters, figures, tables, etcetera, are
-% suggested by prof. Raffaella Tabacco, a classicist of the
-% University of Turin, Italy, to whom we address our warmest
-% thanks. The names suggested by Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski,
-% when different, are used as the names for the medieval variety,
-% since he made a word and spelling choice more suited for this
-% variety.
-%
-% For this language some shortcuts are defined according to
-% table~\ref{t:lashrtct}; all of them are supposed to work with
-% both spelling styles, except where the opposite is explicitly
-% stated.
-% \begin{table}[htb]\centering
-% \begin{tabular}{cp{80mm}}
-% |^i| & inserts the breve accent as \u{\i}; valid also for the
-% other lowercase vowels, but it does not operate on the
-% medieval ligatures \ae\ and \oe.\\
-% |=a| & inserts the macron accent as \=a; valid also for the
-% other lowercase vowels, but it does not operate on the
-% medieval ligatures \ae\ and \oe.\\
-% |"| & inserts a compound word mark where hyphenation is legal;
-% the next character must not be a medieval ligature \ae\
-% or \oe, nor an accented letter (foreign names).\\
-% \texttt{\string"\string|}
-% & same as above, but operates also when the next character
-% is a medieval ligature or an accented letter.
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption[]{Shortcuts defined for the Latin language. The
-% characters \texttt{\string^} and \texttt{\string=} are
-% active only when the language attribute
-% \texttt{withprosodicmarks} has been declared,
-% otherwise they are disabled; see
-% section~\ref{s:shrtcts} for more details.}%
-% \label{t:lashrtct}
-% \end{table}
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{latin}{captionslatin}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{latin} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@latin| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@latin\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Latin}
- \adddialect\l@latin0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% Now we declare the |medieval| language attribute.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{medieval}{%
- \addto\captionslatin{\def\prefacename{Pr{\ae}fatio}}%
- \def\november{Nouembris}%
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin
- \expandafter{\extrasmedievallatin}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The third typesetting style |withprosodicmarks| is defined here
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{withprosodicmarks}{%
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin
- \expandafter{\extraswithprosodicmarks}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% It must be remembered that the |medieval| and the |withprosodicmarks|
-% styles may be used together.
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Latin language\footnote{Most of these names were
-% kindly suggested by Raffaella Tabacco.}.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionslatin}
-% The macro |\captionslatin| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captionslatin}{%
- \def\prefacename{Praefatio}%
- \def\refname{Conspectus librorum}%
- \def\abstractname{Summarium}%
- \def\bibname{Conspectus librorum}%
- \def\chaptername{Caput}%
- \def\appendixname{Additamentum}%
- \def\contentsname{Index}%
- \def\listfigurename{Conspectus descriptionum}%
- \def\listtablename{Conspectus tabularum}%
- \def\indexname{Index rerum notabilium}%
- \def\figurename{Descriptio}%
- \def\tablename{Tabula}%
- \def\partname{Pars}%
- \def\enclname{Adduntur}% Or " Additur" ? Or simply Add.?
- \def\ccname{Exemplar}% Use the recipient's dative
- \def\headtoname{\ignorespaces}% Use the recipient's dative
- \def\pagename{Charta}%
- \def\seename{cfr.}%
- \def\alsoname{cfr.}% R.Tabacco never saw "cfr. atque" or similar forms
- \def\proofname{Demonstratio}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossarium}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% In the above definitions there are some points that might change
-% in the future or that require a minimum of attention from the
-% typesetter.
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item the \cs{enclname} is translated by a passive verb, that
-% literally means ``(they) are being added''; if just one
-% enclosure is joined to the document, the plural passive is not
-% suited any more; nevertheless a generic plural passive might be
-% incorrect but suited for most circumstances. On the opposite
-% ``Additur'', the corresponding singular passive, might be more
-% correct with one enclosure and less suited in general: what
-% about the abbreviation ``Add.'' that works in both cases, but
-% certainly is less elegant?
-% \item The \cs{headtoname} is empty and gobbles the possible
-% following space; in practice the typesetter should use the
-% dative of the recipient's name; since nowadays not all such
-% names can be translated into Latin, they might result
-% indeclinable. The clever use of an appellative by the
-% typesetter such as ``Domino'' or ``Dominae'' might solve the
-% problem, but the header might get too impressive. The typesetter
-% must make a decision on his own.
-% \item The same holds true for the copy recipient's name in the
-% ``Cc'' field of \cs{ccname}.
-% \end{enumerate}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datelatin}
-% The macro |\datelatin| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Latin dates; the choice of faked small caps Latin numerals is
-% arbitrary and may be changed in the future. For medieval latin
-% the spelling of `Novembris' should be \textit{Nouembris}. This is
-% taken care of by using a control sequence which can be redefined
-% when the attribute `medieval' is selected.
-% \changes{latin-2.0f}{2005/03/30}{Added a comment character to
-% prevent unwanted space}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datelatin{%
- \def\november{Novembris}%
- \def\today{%
- {\check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont
- \uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\day}}~\ifcase\month\or
- Ianuarii\or Februarii\or Martii\or Aprilis\or Maii\or Iunii\or
- Iulii\or Augusti\or Septembris\or Octobris\or \november\or
- Decembris\fi
- \space{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\year}}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\romandate}
-% Thomas Martin Widmann (\texttt{viralbus@daimi.au.dk}) developed a
-% macro originally named |\latindate| (but to be renamed
-% |\romandate| so as not to conflict with the standard \babel\
-% conventions) that should compute and translate the current date
-% into a date \textit{ab urbe condita} with days numbered according
-% to the kalendae and idus; for the moment this is a placeholder
-% for Thomas' macro, waiting for a self standing one that keeps
-% local all the intermediate data, counters, etc. If he succeeds,
-% here is the place to add his macro.
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\latinhyphenmins}
-% The Latin hyphenation patterns can be used with both
-% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{latin-2.0a}{2000/10/15}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extraslatin}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextraslatin}
-% Lower the chance that clubs or widows occur.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraslatin{%
- \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty
- \clubpenalty3000\@clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Never ever break a word between the last two lines of a paragraph
-% in latin texts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraslatin{%
- \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits
- \finalhyphendemerits50000000}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% With medieval Latin we need the suitable correspondence between
-% upper case V and lower case u, since in that spelling there is
-% only one sign, and the u shape is the (uncial) version of the
-% capital V. Everything else is identical with Latin.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasmedievallatin{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\V}%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\u}%
- \lccode`\V=`\u \uccode`\u=`\V}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\SetLatinLigatures}
-% We need also the lccodes for \ae\ and \oe; since they occupy
-% different positions in the OT1 \TeX-fontencoding compared to the
-% T1 one, we must save the lc- and the uccodes for both encodings,
-% but we specify the new lc- and uccodes separately as it appears
-% natural not to change encoding while typesetting the same
-% language. The encoding is assumed to be set before starting to
-% use the Latin language, so that if Latin is the default language,
-% the font encoding must be chosen before requiring the \pkg{babel}
-% package with the |latin| option, in any case before any
-% |\selectlanguage| or |\foreignlanguage| command.
-%
-% All this fuss is made in order to allow the use of the medieval
-% ligatures \ae\ and \oe\ while typesetting with the medieval
-% spelling; I have my doubts that the medieval spelling should be
-% used at all in modern books, reports, and the like; the uncial
-% `u' shape of the lower case `v' and the above ligatures were
-% fancy styles of the copyists who were able to write faster with
-% those rounded glyphs; with typesetting there is no question of
-% handling a quill penn\dots Since my (CB) opinion may be wrong, I
-% managed to set up the instruments and it is up to the typesetter
-% to use them or not.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasmedievallatin{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^c6}% T1 \AE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^f7}% T1 \oe
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^f7}% T1 \OE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^d7}% T1 \OE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1d}% OT1 \AE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \oe
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \OE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1e}% OT1 \OE
- \SetLatinLigatures}
-\providecommand\SetLatinLigatures{%
- \def\@tempA{T1}\ifx\@tempA\f@encoding
- \catcode`\^^e6=11 \lccode`\^^e6=`\^^e6 \uccode`\^^e6=`\^^c6 % \ae
- \catcode`\^^c6=11 \lccode`\^^c6=`\^^e6 % \AE
- \catcode`\^^f7=11 \lccode`\^^f7=`\^^f7 \uccode`\^^f7=`\^^d7 % \oe
- \catcode`\^^d7=11 \lccode`\^^d7=`\^^f7 % \OE
- \else
- \catcode`\^^1a=11 \lccode`\^^1a=`\^^1a \uccode`\^^1a=`\^^1d % \ae
- \catcode`\^^1d=11 \lccode`\^^1d=`\^^1a % \AE (^^])
- \catcode`\^^1b=11 \lccode`\^^1b=`\^^1b \uccode`\^^1b=`\^^1e % \oe
- \catcode`\^^1e=11 \lccode`\^^1e=`\^^1b % \OE (^^^)
- \fi
- \let\@tempA\@undefined
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% With the above definitions we are sure that |\MakeUppercase|
-% works properly and |\MakeUppercase{C{\ae}sar}| correctly `yields
-% `C{\AE}SAR''; correspondingly |\MakeUppercase{Heluetia}|
-% correctly yields ``HELVETIA''.
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \section{Latin shortcuts}\label{s:shrtcts}
-% For writing dictionaries or didactic texts (in modern spelling
-% only) we defined a third language attribute, or a third
-% typesetting style, a couple of other active characters are
-% defined: |^| for marking a vowel with the breve sign, and |=| for
-% marking a vowel with the macro sign. Please take notice that
-% neither the OT1 font encoding, nor the T1 one for most vowels,
-% contain directly the marked vowels, therefore hyphenation of
-% words containing these ``accents'' may become problematic; for
-% this reason the above active characters not only introduce the
-% required accent, but also an unbreakable zero skip that in
-% practice does not introduce a discretionary break, but allows
-% breaks in the rest of the word.
-%
-% It must be remarked that the active characters |^| and |=| may
-% have other meanings in other contexts. For example the equals
-% sign is used by the graphic extensions for specifying keyword
-% options for handling the graphic elements to be included in the
-% document. At the same time, as mentioned in the previous
-% paragraph, diacritical marking in Latin is used only for
-% typesetting certain kind of documents, such as grammars and
-% dictionaries. It is reasonable that the breve and macron active
-% characters are switched on and off at will, and in particular
-% that they are off by default if the attribute |withprosodicmarks|
-% has not been set.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ProsodicMarksOn}
-% \begin{macro}{\ProsodicMarksOff}
-% We begin by adding to the normal typesetting style the
-% definitions of the new commands |\ProsodicMarksOn| and
-% |\ProsodicMarksOff| that should produce error messages when the
-% third style is not declared:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraslatin{\def\ProsodicMarksOn{%
- \GenericError{(latin)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}%
- {Latin language error: \string\ProsodicMarksOn\space
- is defined by setting the\MessageBreak
- language attribute to `withprosodicmarks'\MessageBreak
- If you continue you are likely to encounter\MessageBreak
- fatal errors that I can't recover}%
- {See the Latin language description in the babel
- documentation for explanation}{\@ehd}}}
-\addto\extraslatin{\let\ProsodicMarksOff\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then we temporarily set the caret and the equals sign to active
-% characters so that they can receive their definitions. But first
-% we store their current category codes to restore them later on.
-% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Save current category codes of
-% equals sign and caret in order to restore them later}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@tempcnta=\catcode`\=
-\@tempcntb=\catcode`\^
-\catcode`\= \active
-\catcode`\^ \active
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Now we can add the necessary declarations to the macros that are
-% being activated when the Latin language and its typesetting
-% styles are declared:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraslatin{\languageshorthands{latin}}%
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{^}}%
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{=}}%
-\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{^}}%
-\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{=}}%
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\ProsodicMarks}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ProsodicMarks}
-% Next we define the defining macro for the active characters
-% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Use \cs{active} instead of 13}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ProsodicMarks{%
- \def\ProsodicMarksOn{\catcode`\^ \active\catcode`\= \active}%
- \def\ProsodicMarksOff{\catcode`\^ 7\catcode`\= 12\relax}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Notice that with the above redefinitions of the commands
-% |\ProsodicMarksOn| and |\ProsodicMarksOff|, the operation of the
-% newly defined shortcuts may be switched on and off at will, so
-% that even if a picture has to be inserted in the document by
-% means of the commands and keyword options of the |graphicx|
-% package, it suffices to switch them off before invoking the
-% picture including command, and switched on again afterwards; or,
-% even better, since the picture very likely is being inserted
-% within a |figure| environment, it suffices to switch them off
-% within the environment, being conscious that their deactivation
-% remains local to the environment.
-% \changes{latin-2.0g}{2005/11/17}{changed \cs{allowhyphens} to
-% \cs{bbl@allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \initiate@active@char{^}%
- \initiate@active@char{=}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^a}{%
- \textormath{\u{a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{a}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^e}{%
- \textormath{\u{e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{e}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^i}{%
- \textormath{\u{\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{\imath}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^o}{%
- \textormath{\u{o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^u}{%
- \textormath{\u{u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{u}}}%
-%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=a}{%
- \textormath{\={a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{a}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=e}{%
- \textormath{\={e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{e}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=i}{%
- \textormath{\={\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{\imath}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=o}{%
- \textormath{\={o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{o}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=u}{%
- \textormath{\={u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{u}}}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Notice that the short hand definitions are given only for lower
-% case letters; it would not be difficult to extend the set of
-% definitions to upper case letters, but it appears of very little
-% use in view of the kind of documents where prosodic marks are
-% supposed to be used. Nevertheless in those rare cases when it's
-% required to set some uppercase letters with their prosodic
-% marks, it is always possible to use the standard \LaTeX\ commands
-% such as |\u{I}| for typesetting \u{I}, or |\={A}| for
-% typesetting~\=A.
-%
-% Finally we restore the caret and equals sign initial default
-% category codes.
-% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Restore category codes rather then
-% return them to their \TeX\ default values. \emph{And} do that
-% outside of the command definition}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\catcode`\= \@tempcnta
-\catcode`\^ \@tempcntb
-% \end{macrocode}
-% so as to avoid conflicts with other packages or other \babel\
-% options.
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\LatinMarksOn}
-% \begin{macro}{\LatinMarksOff}
-% \changes{latin-2.0g}{2005/11/17}{Added two commands}
-% \changes{latin-2.0h}{2007/10/19}{Added missing backslash}
-% We define two new commands so as to switch on and off the breve
-% and macron shortcuts.
-% \changes{latin-2.0h}{2007/10/20}{Removed the setting of
-% \cs{LatinMarksOff} from \cs{extraslatin}}
-% \changes{latin-2.0k}{2008/03/21}{Set the \cs{LatinMarks...} commands
-% equal to the \cs{ProsodicMarks..} commands for compatibility}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOn\ProsodicMarksOn}
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOff\ProsodicMarksOff}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% It must be understood that by using the above prosodic marks,
-% line breaking is somewhat impeached; since such prosodic marks
-% are used almost exclusively in dictionaries, grammars, and poems
-% (only in school textbooks), this shouldn't be of any importance
-% for what concerns the quality of typesetting.
-%
-% \section{Etymological hyphenation}
-% In order to deal in a clean way with prefixes and compound words
-% to be divided etymologically, the active character |"| is given
-% a special definition so as to behave as a discretionary break
-% with hyphenation allowed after it.
-% Most of the code for dealing with the active |"| is already
-% contained in the core of \babel, but we are going to use it as a
-% single character shorthand for Latin.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}%
-\addto\extraslatin{\bbl@activate{"}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% A temporary macro is defined so as to take different actions in math
-% mode and text mode: specifically in the former case the macro inserts a
-% double quote as it should in math mode, otherwise another delayed macro
-% comes into action.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{latin}{"}{%
- \ifmmode
- \def\lt@@next{''}%
- \else
- \def\lt@@next{\futurelet\lt@temp\lt@cwm}%
- \fi
- \lt@@next
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% In text mode the \cs{lt@next} control sequence is such that upon
-% its execution a temporary variable \cs{lt@temp} is made
-% equivalent to the next token in the input list without actually
-% removing it. Such temporary token is then tested by the macro
-% \cs{lt@cwm} and if it is found to be a letter token, then it
-% introduces a compound word separator control sequence
-% \cs{lt@allowhyphens} whose expansion introduces a discretionary
-% hyphen and an unbreakable space; in case the token is not a
-% letter, the token is tested again to find if it is the character
-% \texttt{\string|}, in which case it is gobbled and a
-% discretionary break is introduced.
-% \changes{latin-2.0g}{2005/11/17}{Added a \cs{nobreak}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lt@allowhyphens{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
-\newcommand*{\lt@cwm}{\let\lt@n@xt\relax
- \ifcat\noexpand\lt@temp a%
- \let\lt@n@xt\lt@allowhyphens
- \else
- \if\noexpand\lt@temp\string|%
- \def\lt@n@xt{\lt@allowhyphens\@gobble}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \lt@n@xt}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Attention: the category code comparison does not work if the
-% temporary control sequence \cs{lt@temp} has been let equal to an
-% implicit character, such as |\ae|; therefore this etymological
-% hyphenation facility does not work with medieval Latin spelling
-% when |"| immediately precedes a ligature. In order to overcome
-% this drawback the shorthand \verb!"|! may be used in such cases;
-% it behaves exactly as |"|, but it does not test the implicit
-% character control sequence. An input such as
-% \verb!super"|{\ae}quitas!\footnote{This word does not exist in
-% ``regular'' Latin, and it is used just as an example.} gets
-% hyphenated as \texttt{su-per-{\ae}qui-tas} instead of
-% \texttt{su-pe-r\ae-qui-tas}.
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{latin}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 763ed018ff2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/latin.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{latin.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-
-Copyright 1999-2007 Claudio Beccari All rights reserved.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{latin.ldf}{\from{latin.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/lsorbian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/lsorbian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index f5adbe47631..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/lsorbian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,265 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{152}
-% \iffalse
-%
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{lsorbian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{lsorbian.dtx}
- [2008/03/17 v1.0g Lower Sorbian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `lsorbian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Lower Sorbian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008
-%% by Eduard Werner
-% Werner, Eduard",
-% Serbski institut z. t.,
-% Dw\'orni\v{s}\'cowa 6
-% 02625 Budy\v{s}in/Bautzen
-% Germany",
-% (??)3591 497223",
-% edi at kaihh.hanse.de",
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de
-%%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Lower Sorbian definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{lsorbian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{lsorbian.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{lsorbian-0.1}{1994/10/10}{First version}
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0d}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Lower Sorbian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. It was written by Eduard Werner
-% (\texttt{edi@kaihh.hanse.de}).} It defines all the
-% language-specific macros for Lower Sorbian.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{This file can be loaded under
-% more than one name.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{lsorbian} will be an `unknown' language, in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@lsorbian| to see whether we have to do something here.
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{This file can be loaded under
-% more than one name.}
-% As
-% \babel\ also knwos the option \Lopt{lowersorbian} we have to
-% check that as well.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@lowersorbian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@lsorbian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Lsorbian}
- \adddialect\l@lsorbian\z@
- \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian
- \else
- \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian
- \fi
-\else
- \let\l@lsorbian\l@lowersorbian
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Lower Sorbian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionslsorbian}
-% The macro |\captionslsorbian| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0f}{2000/09/22}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Zawod}%
- \def\refname{Referency}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitl}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodawki}%
- \def\contentsname{Wop\'simje\'se}%
- \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}%
- \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Wobraz}%
- \def\tablename{Tabulka}%
- \def\partname{\'Z\v el}%
- \def\enclname{P\'si\l oga}%
- \def\ccname{CC}%
- \def\headtoname{Komu}%
- \def\pagename{Strona}%
- \def\seename{gl.}%
- \def\alsoname{gl.~teke}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\newdatelsorbian}
-% The macro |\newdatelsorbian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Lower Sorbian dates.
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or maja\or
- junija\or julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or
- nowembra\or decembra\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\olddatelsorbian}
-% The macro |\olddatelsorbian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce old-style Lower Sorbian dates.
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- wjelikego ro\v zka\or
- ma\l ego ro\v zka\or
- nal\v etnika\or
- jat\v sownika\or
- ro\v zownika\or
- sma\v znika\or
- pra\v znika\or
- \v znje\'nca\or
- po\v znje\'nca\or
- winowca\or
- nazymnika\or
- godownika\fi \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The default will be the new-style dates.
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extraslsorbian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextraslsorbian}
-% The macro |\extraslsorbian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the lsorbian language. The macro
-% |\noextraslsorbian| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extraslsorbian|. For the moment these macros are empty but
-% they are defined for compatibility with the other language
-% definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \changes{lsorbian-1.0g}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index febd734ad76..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1411 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{1538}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{magyar.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{magyar}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{magyar.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v1.4j Magyar support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `magyar.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Magyar Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% \'Arp\'ad B\'IR\'O
-%% J\'ozsef B\'ERCES
-%
-% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams babel braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Hungarian language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Attila Koppanyi (attila@cernvm.cern.ch).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{magyar.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{magyar.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{magyar-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{magyar-1.1d}{1994/02/08}{Further spelling corrections}
-% \changes{magyar-1.1e}{1994/02/09}{Still more spelling corrections}
-% \changes{magyar-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{magyar-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{magyar-1.3g}{1996/07/12}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4a}{1998/06/04}{order inverting in
-% headings/titles/captions; definite article handling; active char
-% for special hyphenation}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4d}{2001/11/15}{Corrected checksum}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4j}{2004/11/17}{Added missing comment characters
-% in the redefinitions of \cs{ps@headings} to prevent spurious
-% spaces}
-%
-% \section{The Hungarian language}
-%
-% The file option \file{\filename} defines all the
-% language definition macros for the Hungarian language.
-%
-% The \babel{} support for the Hungarian language until file
-% version 1.3i was essentially changing the English document
-% elements to Hungarian ones, but because of the differences
-% between these too languages this was actually unusable (`Part I'
-% was transferred to `R\'esz I' which is not usable instead of `I.\
-% r\'esz'). To enhance the typesetting facilities for Hungarian
-% the following should be considered:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item In Hungarian documents there is a period after
-% the part, section, subsection \mbox{etc.} numbers.
-%
-% \item In the part, chapter, appendix name the number
-% (or letter) goes before the name, so `Part I' translates to
-% `I.\ r\'esz'.
-%
-% \item The same is true with captions
-% (`Table 2.1' goes to `2.1.\ t\'abl\'azat').
-%
-% \item There is a period after the caption name instead of a colon.
-% (`Table 2.1:' goes to `2.1.\ t\'abl\'azat.')
-%
-% \item There is a period at the end of the title in a run-in head
-% (when |afterskip<0| in |\@startsection|).
-%
-% \item Special hyphenation rules must be applied
-% for the so-called long double consonants (ccs, ssz,\dots).
-%
-% \item The opening quotation mark is like the German one
-% (the closing is the same as in English).
-%
-% \item In Hungarian figure, table, \mbox{etc.}
-% referencing a definite article is also incorporated.
-% The Hungarian definite articles behave like the English
-% indefinite ones (`a/an'). `a' is used for words beginning
-% with a consonant and `az' goes for a vowel.
-% Since some numbers begin with a vowel some others
-% with a consonant some commands should be provided for
-% automatic definite article generation.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% Until file version 1.3i\footnote{That file was
-% last revised on 1996/12/23 with a contribution by the next
-% authors: Attila Kopp\'anyi (\texttt{attila@cernvm.cern.ch}),
-% \'Arp\'ad B\'{\i}r\'o (\texttt{JZP1104@HUSZEG11.bitnet}),
-% Istv\'an Hamecz (\texttt{hami@ursus.bke.hu)} and
-% Dezs\H{o} Horv\'ath (\texttt{horvath@pisa.infn.it}).}
-% the special typesetting rules of the Hungarian language
-% mentioned above were not taken into consideration.
-% This version (\fileversion)\footnote{It was written by J\'ozsef
-% B\'erces (\texttt{jozsi@docs4.mht.bme.hu}) with some help from
-% Ferenc Wettl (\texttt{wettl@math.bme.hu}) and an idea from David
-% Carlisle (\texttt{david@dcarlisle.demon.co.uk}).}
-% enables \babel{} to typeset `good-looking' Hungarian texts.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\ontoday
-% The |\ontoday| command works like |\today| but
-% produces a slightly different date format used in expressions such
-% as `on February 10th'.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\Az
-% The commands |\Az#1| and |\az#1| write the correct
-% definite article for the argument and the argument itself
-% (separated with a |~|). The star-forms (|\Az*| and |\az*|)
-% produce the article only.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\Azr
-% |\Azr#1| and |\azr#1| treat the argument as a label so expand
-% it then write the definite article for |\r@#1|, a non-breakable
-% space then the label expansion. The star-forms do not print
-% the label expansion. |\Azr(#1| and |\azr(#1| are used for
-% equation referencing with the syntax |\azr(|\textit{label}|)|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\Aref
-% There are two aliases |\Aref| and |\aref| for |\Azr| and |\azr|,
-% respectively. During the preparation of a document it is not
-% known in general, if the code `|a~\ref{|\textit{label}|}|' or the code
-% `|az~\ref{|\textit{label}|}|' is the grammatically correct one. Writing
-% `|\aref{|\textit{label}|}|' instead of the previous ones solves the
-% problem.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\Azp
-% |\Azp#1| and |\azp#1| also treat the argument as a label but
-% use the label's page for definite article determination.
-% There are star-forms giving only the definite article without
-% the page number.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\Apageref
-% There are aliases |\Apageref| and |\apageref| for |\Azp| and
-% |\azp|, respectively. The code |\apageref{|\textit{label}|}|
-% is equivalent either to |a~\pageref{|\textit{label}|}| or
-% to |az~\pageref{|\textit{label}|}|.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\Azc
-% |\Azc| and |\azc| work like the |\cite| command but
-% (of course) they insert the definite article. There can be
-% several comma separated cite labels and in that case the
-% definite article is given for the first one.
-% They accept |\cite|'s optional argument.
-% There are star-forms giving the definite article only.
-%
-% \DescribeMacro\Acite
-% There are aliases |\Acite| and |\acite| for
-% |\Azc| and |\azc|, respectively.
-%
-% For this language the character |`| is made active.
-% Table~\ref{tab:hun-actives} shows the shortcuts.
-% The main reason for the activation of the |`| character
-% is to handle the special hyphenation of the long double
-% consonants.
-% \begin{table}
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{45mm}p{47mm}}
-% shortcut & explanation & example \\
-% \hline
-% |``| & same as |\glqq| in \babel{}, or
-% |\quotedblbase| in T1
-% (opening quotation mark, like ,,)
-% & |``id\'ezet''|$\longrightarrow$,,id\'ezet'{}' \\
-% |`c|, |`C| & ccs is hyphenated as cs-cs
-% & |lo`ccsan|$\longrightarrow$locs-csan \\
-% |`d|, |`D| & ddz is hyphenated as dz-dz
-% & |e`ddz\"unk|$\longrightarrow$edz-dz\"unk \\
-% |`g|, |`G| & ggy is hyphenated as gy-gy
-% & |po`ggy\'asz|$\longrightarrow$pogy-gy\'asz \\
-% |`l|, |`L| & lly is hyphenated as ly-ly
-% & |Kod\'a`llyal|$\longrightarrow$Kod\'aly-lyal \\
-% |`n|, |`N| & nny is hyphenated as ny-ny
-% & |me`nnyei|$\longrightarrow$meny-nyei \\
-% |`s|, |`S| & ssz is hyphenated as sz-sz
-% & |vi`ssza|$\longrightarrow$visz-sza \\
-% |`t|, |`T| & tty is hyphenated as ty-ty
-% & |po`ttyan|$\longrightarrow$poty-tyan \\
-% |`z|, |`Z| & zzs is hyphenated as zs-zs
-% & |ri`zzsel|$\longrightarrow$rizs-zsel \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The shortcuts defined in \file{magyar.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:hun-actives}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{magyar-1.3h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{magyar}{caption\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{magyar} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@magyar| or |\l@hungarian| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \changes{magyar-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no hyphenation
-% patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{magyar-1.3c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4d}{2003/09/18}{The \cs{else} clause got outside
-% of the \cs{if} statement, breaking the Hungarian support}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4g}{2003/10/07}{Further change to make it work
-% when neither \cs{l@magyar} nor \cs{l@hugarian} are defined}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@magyar\@undefined
- \ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Magyar}
- \adddialect\l@magyar0
- \else
- \let\l@magyar\l@hungarian
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The statement above makes sure that |\l@magyar| is always
-% defined; if |\l@hungarian| is still undefined we make it equal to
-% |\l@magyar|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined
- \let\l@hungarian\l@magyar
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Hungarian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsmagyar}
-% The macro |\captionsmagyar| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{magyar-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{magyar-1.1c}{1994/01/05}{Added translations, fixed typos}
-% \changes{magyar-1.3e}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{magyar-1.3f}{1996/04/18}{translated Proof and replaced some
-% translations}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4a}{1998/06/04}{the initial letter of fejezet,
-% t\'abl\'azat, r\'esz, l\'asd changed to lowercase}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{El\H osz\'o}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For the list of references at the end of an article we have a
-% choice between two words, `Referenci\'ak' (a Hungarian version of
-% the English word) and `Hivatkoz\'asok'. The latter seems to
-% be in more widespread use.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\refname{Hivatkoz\'asok}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If you have a document with a summary instead of an abstract you
-% might want to replace the word `Kivonat' with
-% `\"Osszefoglal\'o'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\abstractname{Kivonat}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The Hungarian version of `Bibliography' is `Bibliogr\'afia', but
-% a more natural word to use is `Irodalomjegyz\'ek'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\bibname{Irodalomjegyz\'ek}%
- \def\chaptername{fejezet}%
- \def\appendixname{F\"uggel\'ek}%
- \def\contentsname{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
- \def\listfigurename{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
- \def\listtablename{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
- \def\indexname{T\'argymutat\'o}%
- \def\figurename{\'abra}%
- \def\tablename{t\'abl\'azat}%
- \def\partname{r\'esz}%
- \def\enclname{Mell\'eklet}%
- \def\ccname{K\"orlev\'el--c\'\i mzettek}%
- \def\headtoname{C\'\i mzett}%
- \def\pagename{oldal}%
- \def\seename{l\'asd}%
- \def\alsoname{l\'asd m\'eg}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Besides the Hungarian word for Proof, `Bizony\'\i t\'as' we can
-% also name Corollary (K\"ovetkezm\'eny), Theorem (T\'etel) and
-% Lemma (Lemma).
-% \changes{magyar-1.4b}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4h}{2003/11/20}{Inserted translation for Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\proofname{Bizony\'\i t\'as}%
- \def\glossaryname{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datemagyar}
-% The macro |\datemagyar| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Hungarian dates.
-% \changes{magyar-1.1d}{1994/02/08}{Rewritten to produce the correct
-% date format}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4a}{1998/06/10}{Use \cs{number}\cs{day} instead of
-% \cs{ifcase} construct}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or
- janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or
- \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or
- j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or
- okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi
- \space\number\day.}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ondatemagyar}
-% The macro |\ondatemagyar| produces Hungarian dates which have the
-% meaning `\emph{on this day}'. It does not redefine the command
-% |\today|.
-% \changes{magyar-1.1c}{1994/01/05}{The date number should not be
-% followed by a dot.}
-% \changes{magyar-1.1d}{1994/02/08}{Renamed from \cs{datemagyar};
-% nolonger redefines \cs{today}.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{ondate\CurrentOption}{%
- \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or
- janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or
- \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or
- j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or
- okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi
- \space\ifcase\day\or
- 1-j\'en\or 2-\'an\or 3-\'an\or 4-\'en\or 5-\'en\or
- 6-\'an\or 7-\'en\or 8-\'an\or 9-\'en\or 10-\'en\or
- 11-\'en\or 12-\'en\or 13-\'an\or 14-\'en\or 15-\'en\or
- 16-\'an\or 17-\'en\or 18-\'an\or 19-\'en\or 20-\'an\or
- 21-\'en\or 22-\'en\or 23-\'an\or 24-\'en\or 25-\'en\or
- 26-\'an\or 27-\'en\or 28-\'an\or 29-\'en\or 30-\'an\or
- 31-\'en\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasmagyar}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasmagyar}
-% The macro |\extrasmagyar| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Hungarian language. The macro |\noextrasmagyar| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasmagyar|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\ontoday
- \csname ondate\CurrentOption\endcsname}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\let\ontoday\@undefined}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we redefine some commands included into \file{latex.ltx}.
-% The original form of a command is always saved with
-% |\babel@save| and the changes are added to |\extrasmagyar|.
-% This ensures that the Hungarian version of a macro is alive
-% \emph{only} if the Hungarian language is active.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@figure}
-% \begin{macro}{\fnum@table}
-% In figure and table captions the order of the figure/table
-% number and |\figurename|\hspace{0pt}/|\tablename| must be changed.
-% To achieve this |\fnum@figure| and |\fnum@table| are
-% redefined and added to |\extrasmagyar|.
-% \changes{magyar-1.4i}{2004/02/20}{Use \cs{nobreakspace} instead of
-% tilde}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\fnum@figure
- \def\fnum@figure{\thefigure.\nobreakspace\figurename}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\fnum@table
- \def\fnum@table{\thetable.\nobreakspace\tablename}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@makecaption}
-% The colon in a figure/table caption must be replaced by a dot
-% by redefining |\@makecaption|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@makecaption
- \def\@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip
- \sbox\@tempboxa{#1. #2}%
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
- {#1. #2\csname par\endcsname}
- \else
- \global \@minipagefalse
- \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- \fi
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@caption}
-% There should be a dot after the figure/table number in lof/lot,
-% so |\@caption| is redefined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@caption
- \long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
- \csname par\endcsname
- \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}{\ignorespaces #2}}%
- \begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \if@minipage
- \@setminipage
- \fi
- \normalsize
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #3}\csname par\endcsname
- \endgroup}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@seccntformat}
-% In order to have a dot after the section number
-% |\@seccntformat| is redefined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@seccntformat
- \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@sect}
-% Alas, |\@sect| must also be redefined to have that dot in toc too.
-% On the other hand, we include a dot after a run-in head.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@sect
- \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
- \let\@svsec\@empty
- \else
- \refstepcounter{#1}%
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
- \fi
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup
- #6{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
- \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{%
- #6{\hskip #3\relax
- \@svsec #8.}%
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}%
- \fi
- #7}}%
- \fi
- \@xsect{#5}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@ssect}
-% In order to have that dot after a run-in head when the star form of the
-% sectioning commands is used, we have to redefine |\@ssect|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@ssect
- \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \@tempskipa #3\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup
- #4{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}%
- \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}%
- \endgroup
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5.}}%
- \fi
- \@xsect{#3}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@begintheorem}
-% \begin{macro}{\@opargbegintheorem}
-% Order changing and dot insertion in theorem by redefining
-% |\@begintheorem| and |\@opargbegintheorem|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@begintheorem
- \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1.}]\itshape}%
- \babel@save\@opargbegintheorem
- \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1\ (#3).}]\itshape}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The next step is to redefine some macros included into the
-% class files. It is determined which class file is loaded
-% then the original form of the macro is saved and the changes
-% are added to |\extrasmagyar|.
-%
-% First we check if the \file{book.cls} is loaded.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{book}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
-% The look of the headings is changed: we have to insert some dots
-% and change the order of chapter number and |\chaptername|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@part}
-% At the beginning of a part we need \mbox{eg.} `I.\ r\'esz'
-% instead of `Part I' (in toc too).
-% To achieve this |\@part| is redefined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@part
- \def\@part[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart.\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
- \fi
- \markboth{}{}%
- {\centering
- \interlinepenalty \@M
- \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \huge\bfseries \thepart.\nobreakspace\partname
- \csname par\endcsname
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \Huge \bfseries #2\csname par\endcsname}%
- \@endpart}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% The same changes are made to chapter.
-% First the screen typeout and the toc are changed by
-% redefining |\@chapter|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@chapter
- \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \refstepcounter{chapter}%
- \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \chaptermark{#1}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
-% Then the look of the chapter-start is modified by redefining
-% |\@makechapterhead|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@makechapterhead
- \def\@makechapterhead#1{%
- \vspace*{50\p@}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{}
- \csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \fi
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 40\p@
- }}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% This the end of the book class modification.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we check if \file{report.cls} is loaded.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{report}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
-% First the headings are modified just in case of the book class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@chapter}
-% Chapter-start modification with |\@chapter|
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@chapter
- \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \refstepcounter{chapter}%
- \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \chaptermark{#1}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@makechapterhead}
-% and |\@makechapterhead|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@makechapterhead
- \def\@makechapterhead#1{%
- \vspace*{50\p@}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{}
- \csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 40\p@
- }}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% End of report class modification.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Checking if \file{article.cls} is loaded.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
-% Changing headings by redefining |\ps@headings|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection.\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\subsectionmark##1{%
- \markright {%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
- \thesubsection.\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}%
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thesection.\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% No more necessary changes specific to the article class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And now this is the turn of \file{letter.cls}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\ps@headings}
-% In the headings the page number must be followed by a dot
-% and then |\pagename|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname
- \hfil \@date
- \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}%
- \let\@evenhead\@oddhead}
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname
- \hfil \@date
- \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}}
- \fi}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% End of letter class.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% After making the changes to the \LaTeX{}
-% macros we define some new ones to handle the problem
-% with definite articles.
-% \begin{macro}{\az}
-% |\az| is a user-level command which decides if the next
-% character is a star. |\@az| is called for |\az*| and
-% |\az@| for |\az|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\az{a\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\Az}
-% |\Az| is used at the beginning of a sentence. Otherwise it behaves
-% the same as |\az|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Az{A\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\az@}
-% |\az@| is called if there is no star after |\az| or |\Az|.
-% It calls |\@az| and writes |#1| separating with a non-breakable
-% space.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\az@#1{\@az{#1}\nobreakspace#1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@az}
-% This macro calls |\hun@tempadef| to remove the accents from
-% the argument then calls |\@@az| that determines if a `z'
-% should be written after a/A (written by |\az|/|\Az|).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@az#1{%
- \hun@tempadef{relax}{relax}{#1}%
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hun@tempadef}
-% The macro |\hun@tempadef| has three tasks:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Accent removal. Accented letters confuse
-% |\@@az|, the main definite article determinator
-% macro, so they must be changed to their non-accented
-% counterparts. Special letters must also be changed,
-% \mbox{eg.} \oe$\,\rightarrow\,$o.
-% \item Labels must be expanded.
-% \item To handle Roman numerals correctly, commands starting
-% with |\hun@| are defined for labels containing Roman
-% numbers with the Roman numerals
-% replaced by their Arabic representation.
-% This macro can check if there is a |\hun@| command.
-% \end{itemize}
-% There are three arguments:
-% \begin{enumerate}
-% \item The primary command that should be expanded if it exists.
-% This is usually the |\hun@| command for a label.
-% \item The secondary command which is used if the first one
-% is |\relax|. This is usually the original \LaTeX{}
-% command for a label.
-% \item This is used if the first two is |\relax|. For this one
-% no expansion is carried out but the accents are still
-% removed and special letters are changed.
-% \end{enumerate}
-% \changes{magyar-1.4f}{2003/09/29}{Added
-% \cs{def}\cs{safe@activesfalse{}} as a fix for PR3426}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hun@tempadef#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup
- \def\@safe@activesfalse{}%
- \def\setbox ##1{}% to get rid of accents and special letters
- \def\hbox ##1{}%
- \def\accent ##1 ##2{##2}%
- \def\add@accent ##1##2{##2}%
- \def\@text@composite@x ##1##2{##2}%
- \def\i{i}\def\j{j}%
- \def\ae{a}\def\AE{A}\def\oe{o}\def\OE{O}%
- \def\ss{s}\def\L{L}%
- \def\d{}\def\b{}\def\c{}\def\t{}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
- \xdef\@tempa{#3}%
- \else
- \xdef\@tempa{\csname #2\endcsname}%
- \fi
- \else
- \xdef\@tempa{\csname #1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- \endgroup}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The following macros are used to determine the definite
-% article for a label's expansion.
-% \begin{macro}{\aref}
-% |\aref| is an alias for |\azr|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\aref{\azr}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\Aref}
-% |\Aref| is an alias for |\Azr|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Aref{\Azr}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azr}
-% |\azr| calls |\@azr| if the next character is a star,
-% otherwise it calls |\azr@|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azr{a\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\Azr}
-% |\Azr| is the same as |\azr| except that it writes `A'
-% instead of `a'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Azr{A\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azr@}
-% |\azr@| decides if the next character is |(| and
-% in that case it calls |\azr@@@| which writes an extra |(|
-% for equation referencing. Otherwise |\azr@@| is called.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azr@{\@ifnextchar ({\azr@@@}{\azr@@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azr@@}
-% Calls |\@azr| then writes the label's expansion preceded by
-% a non-breakable space.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azr@@#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace\ref{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azr@@@}
-% Same as |\azr@@| but inserts a |(| between the
-% non-breakable space and the label expansion.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azr@@@(#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace(\ref{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@azr}
-% Calls |\hun@tempadef| to choose between the label's
-% |\hun@| or original \LaTeX{} command and to expand
-% it with accent removal and special letter substitution.
-% Then calls |\@@az|, the core macro of definite article handling.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@azr#1{%
- \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty
- \else
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@firstoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The following commands are used to generate the definite article
-% for the page number of a label.
-% \begin{macro}{\apageref}
-% |\apageref| is an alias for |\azp|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\apageref{\azp}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\Apageref}
-% |\Apageref| is an alias for |\Azp|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Apageref{\Azp}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azp}
-% Checks if the next character is |*| and calls
-% |\@azp| or |\azp@|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azp{a\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\Azp}
-% Same as |\azp| except that it writes `A' instead of `a'.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Azp{A\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azp@}
-% Calls |\@azp| then writes the label's page preceded by
-% a non-breakable space.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azp@#1{\@azp{#1}\nobreakspace\pageref{#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@azp}
-% Calls |\hun@tempadef| then takes the label's page and passes
-% it to |\@@az|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@azp#1{%
- \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty
- \else
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@secondoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The following macros are used to give the definite article to
-% citations.
-% \begin{macro}{\acite}
-% This is an alias for |\azc|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\acite{\azc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\Acite}
-% This is an alias for |\Azc|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Acite{\Azc}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azc}
-% Checks if the next character is a star and
-% calls |\@azc| or |\azc@|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azc{a\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\Azc}
-% Same as |\azc| but used at the beginning of sentences.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Azc{A\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azc@}
-% If there is no star we accept an optional argument,
-% just like the |\cite| command.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azc@{\@ifnextchar [{\azc@@}{\azc@@[]}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\azc@@}
-% First calls |\@azc| then |\cite|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\azc@@[#1]#2{%
- \@azc{#2}\nobreakspace\def\@tempa{#1}%
- \ifx\@tempa\@empty\cite{#2}\else\cite[#1]{#2}\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@azc}
-% This is an auxiliary macro to get the first cite label
-% from a comma-separated list.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@azc#1{\@@azc#1,\hbox!}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\@@azc}
-% This one uses only the first argument, that is the first
-% element of the comma-separated list of cite labels.
-% Calls |\hun@tempadef| to expand the cite label with accent
-% removal and special letter replacement.
-% Then |\@@az|, the core macro, is called.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@azc#1,#2\hbox#3!{%
- \hun@tempadef{hun@b@#1}{b@#1}{}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty
- \else
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hun@number@lehgth}
-% This macro is used to count the number of digits in its
-% argument until a non-digit character is found or
-% the end of the argument is reached.
-% It must be called as
-% |\hun@number@lehgth|\textit{arg}|\hbox\hbox!| and
-% |\count@| must be zeroed.
-% It is called by |\@@az|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hun@number@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{%
- \ifcat\noexpand#11%
- \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname>47
- \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname<58
- \advance\count@ by \@ne
- \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hun@alph@lehgth}
-% This is used to count the number of letters until a
-% non-letter is found or the end of the argument is reached.
-% It must be called as
-% |\hun@alph@lehgth|\textit{arg}|\hbox\hbox!| and
-% |\count@| must be set to zero.
-% It is called by |\@@az@string|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{%
- \ifcat\noexpand#1A%
- \advance\count@ by \@ne
- \hun@alph@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@az@string}
-% This macro is called by |\@@az| if the argument begins
-% with a letter.
-% The task of |\@@az@string| is to determine if the argument
-% starts with a vowel and in that case |\let\@tempa\@tempb|.
-% After checking if the first letter is A, E, I, O, or U,
-% |\hun@alph@lehgth| is called
-% to determine the length of the argument. If it gives 1
-% (that is the argument is a single-letter one or the second
-% character is not letter) then the letters L, M, N, R, S, X, and Y
-% are also considered as a vowel since their Hungarian pronounced
-% name starts with a vowel.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@az@string#1#2{%
- \ifx#1A%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1E%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1I%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1O%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1U%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
- \else
- \count@\z@
- \hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox\hbox!%
- \ifnum\count@=\@ne
- \ifx#1F%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1L%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1M%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1N%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1R%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1S%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1X%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1Y%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\@@az}
-% This macro is the core of definite article handling.
-% It determines if the argument needs `az' or `a' definite
-% article by setting |\@tempa| to `z' or |\@empty|.
-% It sets |\@tempa| to `z' if
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item the first character of the argument is 5; or
-% \item the first character of the argument is 1 and
-% the $\mathit{length\ of\ the\ number} \pmod 3 = 1$
-% (one--egy, thousand--ezer, million--egymilli\'o,\dots); or
-% \item the first character of the argument is
-% a, A, e, E, i, I, o, O, u, or U; or
-% \item the first character of the argument is
-% l, L, m, M, n, N, r, R, s, S, x, X, y, or Y
-% and the length of the argument is 1 or the second
-% character is a non-letter.
-% \end{itemize}
-% At the end it calls |\@tempa|, that is, it either typesets a `z'
-% or nothing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@@az#1#2\hbox#3!{%
- \let\@tempa\@empty
- \def\@tempb{z}%
- \uppercase{%
- \ifx5#1%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx1#1%
- \count@\@ne
- \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!%
- \loop
- \ifnum\count@>\thr@@
- \advance\count@-\thr@@
- \repeat
- \ifnum\count@=\@ne
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \fi
- \else
- \@@az@string{#1}{#2}%
- \fi\fi
- }%
- \@tempa}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\refstepcounter}
-% |\refstepcounter| must be redefined in order to keep
-% |\@currentlabel| unexpanded. This is necessary to enable
-% the |\label| command to write a |\hunnewlabel| command
-% to the aux file with the Roman numerals substituted by
-% their Arabic representations.
-% Of course, the original definition of |\refstepcounter| is
-% saved and restored if the Hungarian language is switched off.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\refstepcounter
- \def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}%
- \def\@currentlabel{\csname p@#1\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\label}
-% |\label| is redefined to write another line into the aux
-% file: |\hunnewlabel{ }{ }| where the Roman numerals
-% are replaced their Arabic representations.
-% The original definition of |\label| is saved into
-% |\old@label| and it is also called by |\label|.
-% On leaving the Hungarian typesetting mode |\label|'s
-% original is restored since it is added to |\noextrasmagyar|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \let\old@label\label
- \def\label#1{\@bsphack
- \old@label{#1}%
- \begingroup
- \let\romannumeral\number
- \def\@roman##1{\number ##1}%
- \def\@Roman##1{\number ##1}%
- {\toks0={\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\number}%
- \def\number##1{\the\toks0 ##1}\xdef\tempb@{\thepage}}%
- \edef\@tempa##1{\noexpand\protected@write\@auxout{}%
- {\noexpand\string\noexpand\hunnewlabel
- {##1}{{\@currentlabel}{\tempb@}}}}%
- \@tempa{#1}%
- \endgroup
- \@esphack}%
-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \let\label\old@label
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\hunnewlabel}
-% Finally, |\hunnewlabel| is defined.
-% It checks if the label's expansion (|#2|) differs from that
-% one given in the |\newlabel| command. If yes
-% (that is, the label contains some Roman numerals),
-% it defines the macro |\hun@r@|\textit{label},
-% otherwise it does nothing.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\hunnewlabel#1#2{%
- \def\@tempa{#2}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\@tempa
- \relax% \message{No need for def: #1}%
- \else
- \global\expandafter\let\csname hun@r@#1\endcsname\@tempa%
- \fi
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For Hungarian the |`| character is made active.
-% \changes{magyar-1.4c}{2001/03/05}{Make sure that the grave accent
-% has catcode 12 \emph{before} it is made \cs{active}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi}
-\initiate@active@char{`}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \languageshorthands{magyar}%
- \bbl@activate{`}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{`}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The character sequence |``| is declared as a shorthand
-% in order to produce
-% the opening quotation sign appropriate for Hungarian.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{``}{\glqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% In Hungarian there are some long double consonants which
-% must be hyphenated specially.
-% For all these long double consonants (except dzzs, that is
-% extremely very-very rare) a shortcut is defined.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{c}{cs}}{c}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{C}{CS}}{C}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{d}{dz}}{d}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{D}{DZ}}{D}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{g}{gy}}{g}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{G}{GY}}{G}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{l}{ly}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{L}{LY}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{n}{ny}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{N}{NY}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{s}{sz}}{s}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{S}{SZ}}{S}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{t}{ty}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{T}{TY}}{T}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{z}{zs}}{z}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`Z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{Z}{ZS}}{Z}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{magyar-1.3h}{1996/10/30}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index ea4b4851d12..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/magyar.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{magyar.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{magyar.ldf}{\from{magyar.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ngermanb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ngermanb.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 481a274d284..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ngermanb.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,359 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{266}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{ngermanb}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{ngermanb.dtx}
- [2008/07/06 v2.6n new German support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `ngermanb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% new Germanb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek,
-%% Walter Schmidt.
-% This file is based on german.tex version 2.5e
-% by Bernd Raichle, Hubert Partl et.al.
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
-\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{ngermanb.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{ngermanb.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{ngermanb-2.6f}{1999/03/24}{Renamed from \file{germanb.ldf};
-% language names changed from \texttt{german} and \texttt{austrian}
-% to \texttt{ngerman} and \texttt{naustrian}.}
-%
-% \section{The German language -- new orthography}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% German language with the `new orthography' introduced in
-% August 1998. This includes also the Austrian dialect of this
-% language.
-%
-% As with the `traditional' German orthography,
-% the character |"| is made active, and
-% the commands in table~\ref{tab:german-quote} can be used, except
-% for |"ck| and |"ff| etc., which are no longer required.
-%
-% The internal language names are |ngerman| and |naustrian|.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% When this file was read through the option \Lopt{ngermanb} we make
-% it behave as if \Lopt{ngerman} was specified.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{ngermanb}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \def\CurrentOption{ngerman}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{ngerman} will be an `unknown' language, so we
-% have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@ngerman| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@ngerman\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{ngerman}
- \adddialect\l@ngerman0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For the Austrian version of these definitions we just add another
-% language.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\adddialect\l@naustrian\l@ngerman
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the German language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsngerman}
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsnaustrian}
-% \changes{ngermab-v2.6n}{2008/07/06}{Corrected typo
-% \cs{captionnsgerman}}
-% Either the macro |\captionsngerman| or the macro
-% |\captionsnaustrian| will define all strings used in the four
-% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX.
-%
-% \changes{ngermanb-2.6k}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Vorwort}%
- \def\refname{Literatur}%
- \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}%
- \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Anhang}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt
- \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Abbildung}%
- \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel
- \def\partname{Teil}%
- \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n)
- \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an
- \def\headtoname{An}%
- \def\pagename{Seite}%
- \def\seename{siehe}%
- \def\alsoname{siehe auch}%
- \def\proofname{Beweis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossar}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datengerman}
-% The macro |\datengerman| redefines the command
-% |\today| to produce German dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\month@ngerman{\ifcase\month\or
- Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or
- Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi}
-\def\datengerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@ngerman
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateanustrian}
-% The macro |\datenaustrian| redefines the command
-% |\today| to produce Austrian version of the German dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datenaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month
- J\"anner\else \month@ngerman\fi \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasngerman}
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasnaustrian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasngerman}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasnaustrian}
-% Either the macro |\extrasngerman| or the macros |\extrasnaustrian|
-% will perform all the extra definitions needed for the German
-% language. The macro |\noextrasngerman| is used to cancel the
-% actions of |\extrasngerman|.
-%
-% For German (as well as for Dutch) the \texttt{"} character is
-% made active. This is done once, later on its definition may vary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \languageshorthands{ngerman}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{ngermanb-2.6j}{1999/12/16}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% German}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasngerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% In order for \TeX\ to be able to hyphenate German words which
-% contain `\ss' (in the \texttt{OT1} position |^^Y|) we have to
-% give the character a nonzero |\lccode| (see Appendix H, the \TeX
-% book).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}%
- \lccode25=25}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The umlaut accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the umlaut dots.
-% The redefinition is done with the help of |\umlautlow|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The current
-% version of the `new' German hyphenation patterns (\file{dehyphn.tex}
-% is to be used with |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{ngermanb-2.6k}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For German texts we need to make sure that |\frenchspacing| is
-% turned on.
-% \changes{ngermanb-2.6m}{2001/01/26}{Turn frenchspacing on, as in
-% \texttt{german.sty}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active
-% character. This character is then used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:german-quote}.
-%
-% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a
-% couple of `support' macros.
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep
-% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% tremas,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}%
- {\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% german es-zet (sharp s),
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"S}{\SS}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"Z}{SZ}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% german and french quotes,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{">}{\frqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqon}
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff}
-% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands
-% for reasons of compatibility with \file{german.sty}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 6fe166ca066..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,453 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-%\CheckSum{305}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{norsk.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{norsk}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{norsk.dtx}
- [2005/03/30 v2.0h Norsk support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%%File `norsk.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Norwegian language definition file. Contributions
-% were made by Haavard Helstrup (HAAVARD@CERNVM) and Alv Kjetil
-% Holme (HOLMEA@CERNVM); the `nynorsk' variant has been supplied by
-% Per Steinar Iversen (iversen@vxcern.cern.ch) and Terje Engeset
-% Petterst (TERJEEP@VSFYS1.FI.UIB.NO)
-%
-% Rune Kleveland (runekl at math.uio.no) added the shorthand
-% definitions
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{norsk.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{norsk.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{norsk-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{norsk-1.1c}{1993/11/11}{Added a couple of translations
-% (from Per Norman Oma, TeX@itk.unit.no)}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2a}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/07/12}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-%
-% \section{The Norwegian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. Contributions were made by Haavard Helstrup
-% (\texttt{HAAVARD@CERNVM)} and Alv Kjetil Holme
-% (\texttt{HOLMEA@CERNVM}); the `nynorsk' variant has been supplied
-% by Per Steinar Iversen \texttt{iversen@vxcern.cern.ch}) and Terje
-% Engeset Petterst (\texttt{TERJEEP@VSFYS1.FI.UIB.NO)}; the
-% shorthand definitions were provided by Rune Kleveland
-% (\texttt{runekl@math.uio.no}).} defines all the language definition
-% macros for the Norwegian language as well as for an alternative
-% variant `nynorsk' of this language.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:norsk-quote} an overview is given of its purpose.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{.7\textwidth}}
-% |"ff|& for |ff| to be hyphenated as |ff-f|,
-% this is also implemented for b, d, f, g, l, m, n,
-% p, r, s, and t. (|o"ppussing|) \\
-% |"ee|& Hyphenate |"ee| as |\'e-e|. (|komit"een|) \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation in the
-% composing words. Use this for compound words when the
-% hyphenation patterns fail to hyphenate
-% properly. (|alpin"-anlegg|) \\
-% \verb="|= & Like |"-|, but inserts 0.03em space. Use it if
-% the compound point is spanned by a ligature.
-% (\verb=hoff"|intriger=) \\
-% |""| & Like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign.
-% (|i""g\aa{}r|) \\
-% |"~| & Like |-|, but allows no hyphenation at all. (|E"~cup|)\\
-% |"=| & Like |-|, but allowing hyphenation in the composing
-% words. (|marksistisk"=leninistisk|) \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{norsk.sty}}\label{tab:norsk-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0a}{1998/06/24}{Describe the use of double quote as
-% active character}
-%
-% Rune Kleveland distributes a Norwegian dictionary for ispell
-% (570000 words). It can be found at
-% |http://www.uio.no/~runekl/dictionary.html|.
-%
-% This dictionary supports the spellings |spi"sslede| for
-% `spisslede' (hyphenated spiss-slede) and other such words, and
-% also suggest the spelling |spi"sslede| for `spisslede' and
-% `spissslede'.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{norsk} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@norsk| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{norsk-1.0c}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no hyphenation
-% patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to produce
-% the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@norsk\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Norsk}
- \adddialect\l@norsk0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\norskhyphenmins}
-% Some sets of Norwegian hyphenation patterns can be used with
-% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~1 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2, but
-% the most common set |nohyph.tex| can't. So we use
-% |\lefthyphenmin=2| by default.
-% \changes{norsk-1.2f}{1995/07/02}{Added setting of hyphenmin
-% parameters}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0a}{1998/06/24}{Changed setting of hyphenmin
-% parameters to 2~2}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0e}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we have to decide which version of the captions should be
-% made available. This can be done by checking the contents of
-% |\CurrentOption|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{norsk}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Norwegian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsnorsk}
-% The macro |\captionsnorsk| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} and
-% \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{norsk-1.1b}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2f}{1995/07/02}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Proof' by its
-% translation}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0e}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Glossary' by its
-% translation}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\captionsnorsk{%
- \def\prefacename{Forord}%
- \def\refname{Referanser}%
- \def\abstractname{Sammendrag}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% or Litteraturoversikt
- % or Litteratur or Referanser
- \def\chaptername{Kapittel}%
- \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks
- \def\contentsname{Innhold}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% or Figurliste
- \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% or Tabelliste
- \def\indexname{Register}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabell}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Vedlegg}%
- \def\ccname{Kopi sendt}%
- \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Side}%
- \def\seename{Se}%
- \def\alsoname{Se ogs\aa{}}%
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}%
- }
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For the `nynorsk' version of these definitions we just add a
-% ``dialect''.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \adddialect\l@nynorsk\l@norsk
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsnynorsk}
-% The macro |\captionsnynorsk| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX, but using a
-% different spelling than in the command |\captionsnorsk|.
-% \changes{norsk-1.1a}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname} and
-% \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{norsk-1.1b}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Proof' by its
-% translation}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0e}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0g}{1996/04/01}{Replaced `Glossary' by its
-% translation}
-% \changes{norks-2.0h}{2001/01/12}{Changed \cs{ccname} and \cs{alsoname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\captionsnynorsk{%
- \def\prefacename{Forord}%
- \def\refname{Referansar}%
- \def\abstractname{Samandrag}%
- \def\bibname{Litteratur}% or Litteraturoversyn
- % or Referansar
- \def\chaptername{Kapittel}%
- \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks
- \def\contentsname{Innhald}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurar}% or Figurliste
- \def\listtablename{Tabellar}% or Tabelliste
- \def\indexname{Register}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabell}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Vedlegg}%
- \def\ccname{Kopi til}%
- \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Side}%
- \def\seename{Sj\aa{}}%
- \def\alsoname{Sj\aa{} \`{o}g}%
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}%
- }
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datenorsk}
-% The macro |\datenorsk| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Norwegian dates.
-% \changes{norsk-1.2i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{norsk-1.2i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or
- juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember
- \fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasnorsk}
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasnynorsk}
-% The macro |\extrasnorsk| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Norwegian language. The macro |\noextrasnorsk| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasnorsk|.
-%
-% Norwegian typesetting requires |\frencspacing| to be in effect.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For Norsk the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary.
-% \changes{norsk-2.0a}{1998/06/24}{Made double quote character active}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \languageshorthands{norsk}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{norsk-2.0c}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Norsk}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need to define a number of
-% shorthand commands. These sharthand commands are then used as
-% indicated in table~\ref{tab:norsk-quote}.
-%
-% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a
-% couple of `support' macros.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep
-% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the discretionary shorthand commands.
-% The number of words where such hyphenation is required is for
-% each character
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{*{11}c}
-% b&d&f &g&k &l &n&p &r&s &t \\
-% 4&4&15&3&43&30&8&12&1&33&35
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% taken from a list of 83000 ispell-roots.
-%
-% \changes{norsk-2.0d}{2000/02/29}{Shorthands are the same for both
-% spelling variants, no need to use \cs{CurrentOption}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"e}{\textormath{\bbl@disc e{\'e}}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"E}{\textormath{\bbl@disc E{\'E}}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"k}{\textormath{\bbl@disc k{kk}}{k}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"K}{\textormath{\bbl@disc K{KK}}{K}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We need to treat |"f| a bit differently in order to preserve the
-% ff-ligature.
-% \changes{norsk-2.0b}{1999/11/19}{Copied the coding for \texttt{"f}
-% from germanb.dtx version 2.6g}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}}
-\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M
- \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= }
-\def\bbl@insertff{%
- \if f\bbl@nextff
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
- {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}}
-\let\bbl@nextff=f
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We now define the French double quotes and some commands
-% concerning hyphenation:
-% \changes{norsk-2.0b}{1999/11/22}{added the french double quotes}
-% \changes{norsk-2.0d}{2000/01/28}{Use \cs{bbl@allowhyphens} in
-% \texttt{"-}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"-}{\penalty\@M\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{norsk-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 9ec2729e642..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/norsk.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{norsk.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{norsk.ldf}{\from{norsk.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index a2e66978558..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,563 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{543}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{polish.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{polish}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{polish.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2l Polish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `polish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Polish Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Elmar Schalueck, Michael Janich
-% Universitaet-Gesamthochschule Paderborn
-% Warburger Strasse 100
-% 4790 Paderborn
-% Germany
-% elmar at uni-paderborn.de
-% massa at uni-paderborn.de
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Polish language definition file. It was developped
-% out of Polish.tex, which was written by Elmar Schalueck and
-% Michael Janich. Polish.tex was based on code by Leszek
-% Holenderski, Jerzy Ryll and J. S. Bie\'n from Faculty of
-% Mathematics,Informatics and Mechanics of Warsaw University, exept
-% of Jerzy Ryll (Instytut Informatyki Uniwersytetu Warszawskiego).
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{polish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{polish.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{polish-1.1c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of babel.def}
-% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Polish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language-specific macros for the
-% Polish language.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:polish-quote} an overview is given of its purpose.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"a| & or |\aob|, for tailed-a (like \c{a})\\
-% |"A| & or |\Aob|, for tailed-A (like \c{A})\\
-% |"e| & or |\eob|, for tailed-e (like \c{e})\\
-% |"E| & or |\Eob|, for tailed-E (like \c{E})\\
-% |"c| & or |\'c|, for accented c (like \'c),
-% same with uppercase letters and n,o,s\\
-% |"l| & or |\lpb{}|, for l with stroke (like \l)\\
-% |"L| & or |\Lpb{}|, for L with stroke (like \L)\\
-% |"r| & or |\zkb{}|, for pointed z (like \.z), cf.
-% pronounciation\\
-% |"R| & or |\Zkb{}|, for pointed Z (like \.Z)\\
-% |"z| & or |\'z|, for accented z\\
-% |"Z| & or |\'Z|, for accented Z\\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.\\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\
-% |"`| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |"'| & for German right double quotes. \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{polish.sty}}
-% \label{tab:polish-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{polish}\captionspolish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{polish} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@polish| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{polish-1.1c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@polish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Polish}
- \adddialect\l@polish0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Polish language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionspolish}
-% The macro |\captionspolish| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{polish-1.2b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1997/09/11}{Added translation for Proof and
-% changed translation of Contents}
-% \changes{polish-1.2i}{2000/09/19}{\cs{bibname} and \cs{refname} were
-% swapped}
-% \changes{polish-1.2i}{2000/09/19}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionspolish{%
- \def\prefacename{Przedmowa}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Streszczenie}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Rozdzia\l}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatek}%
- \def\contentsname{Spis tre\'sci}%
- \def\listfigurename{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
- \def\listtablename{Spis tablic}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Rysunek}%
- \def\tablename{Tablica}%
- \def\partname{Cz\eob{}\'s\'c}%
- \def\enclname{Za\l\aob{}cznik}%
- \def\ccname{Kopie:}%
- \def\headtoname{Do}%
- \def\pagename{Strona}%
- \def\seename{Por\'ownaj}%
- \def\alsoname{Por\'ownaj tak\.ze}%
- \def\proofname{Dow\'od}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datepolish}
-% The macro |\datepolish| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Polish dates.
-% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{polish-1.2i}{2000/01/08}{A missing comment character caused
-% an unwanted space character in the output}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datepolish{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- stycznia\or lutego\or marca\or kwietnia\or maja\or czerwca\or lipca\or
- sierpnia\or wrze\'snia\or pa\'zdziernika\or listopada\or grudnia\fi
- \space\number\year}%
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extraspolish}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextraspolish}
-% The macro |\extraspolish| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Polish language. The macro |\noextraspolish| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extraspolish|.
-%
-% For Polish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is
-% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in
-% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the polish group of shorthands
-% should be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extraspolish{\languageshorthands{polish}}
-\addto\extraspolish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{polish-1.2h}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Polish}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextraspolish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need an extra
-% active character. This character is then used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:polish-quote}.
-%
-% If you have problems at the end of a word with a linebreak, use
-% the other version without hyphenation tricks. Some TeX wizard may
-% produce a better solution with forcasting another token to decide
-% whether the character after the double quote is the last in a
-% word. Do it and let us know.
-%
-% In Polish texts some letters get special diacritical marks.
-% Leszek Holenderski designed the following code to position the
-% diacritics correctly for every font in every size. These macros
-% need a few extra dimension variables.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newdimen\pl@left
-\newdimen\pl@down
-\newdimen\pl@right
-\newdimen\pl@temp
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sob}
-% The macro |\sob| is used to put the `ogonek' in the right
-% place.
-%
-% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{This macro is meant to be used in
-% horizontal mode; so leave vertical mode if necessary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{$_\mathchar'454$}\setbox2\hbox{p}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\aob}
-% \begin{macro}{\Aob}
-% \begin{macro}{\eob}
-% \begin{macro}{\Eob}
-% The ogonek is placed with the letters `a', `A', `e', and `E'.
-% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{Use the constructed version of the
-% characters only in OT1; use proper characters in T1.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{OT1}{\sob a{.66}{.20}{0}{.90}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{OT1}{\sob A{.80}{.50}{0}{.90}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{OT1}{\sob e{.50}{.35}{0}{.93}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{OT1}{\sob E{.60}{.35}{0}{.90}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For the 'new' \texttt{T1} encoding we can provide simpler
-% definitions.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{T1}{\k a}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{T1}{\k A}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\k e}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\k E}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Construct the characters by default from the OT1 encoding.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\aob}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Aob}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\eob}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Eob}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\spb}
-% The macro |\spb| is used to put the `poprzeczka' in the
-% right place.
-%
-% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{\cs{spb} is meant to be used in
-% horizontal mode; so leave vertical mode if necessary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\spb#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'023}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \ht1=\pl@down \dp1=-\pl@down
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\skb}
-% The macro |\skb| is used to put the `kropka' in the
-% right place.
-%
-% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/08/18}{\cs{skb} is meant to be used in
-% horizontal mode; so leave vertical mode if necessary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\skb#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'056}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textpl}
-% For the `poprzeczka' and the `kropka' in text fonts we don't need
-% any special coding, but we can (almost) use what is already
-% available.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\textpl{%
- \def\lpb{\plll}%
- \def\Lpb{\pLLL}%
- \def\zkb{\.z}%
- \def\Zkb{\.Z}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Initially we assume that typesetting is done with text fonts.
-% \changes{polish-1.0a}{1993/11/05}{Initially execute `textpl}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\textpl
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\lll=\l \let\LLL=\L
-\def\plll{\lll}
-\def\pLLL{\LLL}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\telepl}
-% But for the `teletype' font in `OT1' encoding we have to take some
-% special actions, involving the macros defined above.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\telepl{%
- \def\lpb{\spb l{.45}{.5}{.4}{.8}}%
- \def\Lpb{\spb L{.23}{.5}{.4}{.8}}%
- \def\zkb{\skb z{.5}{.5}{1.2}{0}}%
- \def\Zkb{\skb Z{.5}{.5}{1.1}{0}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% To activate these codes the font changing commands as they are
-% defined in \LaTeX\ are modified. The same is done for plain
-% \TeX's font changing commands.
-%
-% When |\selectfont| is undefined the current format is spposed to be
-% either plain (based) or \LaTeX$\:$2.09.
-% \changes{polish-1.2a}{1995/06/06}{Don't modify \cs{rm} and friends for
-% \LaTeXe, take \cs{selectfont } instead}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\selectfont\@undefined
- \ifx\prm\@undefined \addto\rm{\textpl}\else \addto\prm{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\pit\@undefined \addto\it{\textpl}\else \addto\pit{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\pbf\@undefined \addto\bf{\textpl}\else \addto\pbf{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\psl\@undefined \addto\sl{\textpl}\else \addto\psl{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\psf\@undefined \else \addto\psf{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\psc\@undefined \else \addto\psc{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\ptt\@undefined \addto\tt{\telepl}\else \addto\ptt{\telepl}\fi
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% When |\selectfont| exists we assume \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter\addto\csname selectfont \endcsname{%
- \csname\f@encoding @pl\endcsname}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Currently we support the OT1 and T1 encodings. For T1 we don't
-% have to make a difference between typewriter fonts and other
-% fonts, they all have the same glyphs.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\let\csname T1@pl\endcsname\textpl
-% \end{macrocode}
-% For OT1 we need to check the current font family, stored in
-% |\f@family|. Unfortunately we need a hack as |\ttdefault| is
-% defined as a |\long| macro, while |\f@family| is not.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\csname OT1@pl\endcsname{%
- \long\edef\curr@family{\f@family}%
- \ifx\curr@family\ttdefault
- \telepl
- \else
- \textpl
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep
-% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros for diacritics,
-% \changes{polish-1.1d}{1995/01/31}{The dqmacro for C used \cs{'c}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"a}{\textormath{\aob}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"A}{\textormath{\Aob}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"c}{\textormath{\'c}{\acute c}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"C}{\textormath{\'C}{\acute C}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"e}{\textormath{\eob}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"E}{\textormath{\Eob}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"l}{\textormath{\lpb}{\ddot l}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"L}{\textormath{\Lpb}{\ddot L}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"n}{\textormath{\'n}{\acute n}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"N}{\textormath{\'N}{\acute N}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"o}{\textormath{\'o}{\acute o}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"O}{\textormath{\'O}{\acute O}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"s}{\textormath{\'s}{\acute s}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"S}{\textormath{\'S}{\acute S}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\polishrz}
-% \begin{macro}{\polishzx}
-% \changes{polish-1.2j}{2000/11/11}{Added support for two
-% notationstyles for kropka and accented z}
-% The command |\polishrz| defines the shorthands |"r|, |"z| and
-% |"x| to produce pointed z, accented z and |"x|. This is the
-% default as these shorthands were defined by this language
-% definition file for quite some time.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\polishrz}{%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot r}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot R}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute Z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\dq x}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\dq X}%
- }
-\polishrz
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The command |\polishzx| switches to a different set of
-% shorthands, |"z|, |"x| and |"r| to produce pointed z, accented z
-% and |"r|; a different shorthand notation also in use.
-% \changes{polish-1.2k}{2003/10/12}{Fixed a typo}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcommand*{\polishzx}{%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot Z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute x}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute X}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\dq r}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\dq R}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar
-% to the german and french quotation marks.
-% \changes{polish-1.2e}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% double quote and guillemot characters}
-% \changes{polish-1.2l}{2004/02/18}{Changed closing quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation
-% breakpoints that behavew a little different from |\-|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqon}
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff}
-% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands
-% for reasons of compatibility with \file{polish.tex}.
-% \changes{polish-1.2f}{1998/06/07}{Now use \cs{shorthandon} and
-% \cs{shorthandoff}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{polish-1.2d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{polish}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 00a5e50a92b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/polish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{polish.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{polish.ldf}{\from{polish.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 7797f125413..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,475 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{320}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{portuges.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{portuges}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{portuges.dtx}
- [2008/03/18 v1.2q Portuguese support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `portuges.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Portuguese Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Portuguese language definition file. The Portuguese
-% words were contributed by Jose Pedro Ramalhete, (JRAMALHE@CERNVM
-% or Jose-Pedro_Ramalhete@MACMAIL).
-%
-% Arnaldo Viegas de Lima <arnaldo@VNET.IBM.COM> contributed
-% brasilian translations and suggestions for enhancements.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{portuges.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{portuges.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{portuges-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2}{1994/02/26}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Enhanced support for brasilian}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/07/11}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Portuguese language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. Contributions were made by Jose Pedro Ramalhete
-% (\texttt{JRAMALHE@CERNVM} or
-% \texttt{Jose-Pedro\_Ramalhete@MACMAIL}) and Arnaldo Viegas de
-% Lima \texttt{arnaldo@VNET.IBM.COM}.} defines all the
-% language-specific macros for the Portuguese language as well as
-% for the Brasilian version of this language.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:port-quote} an overview is given of its purpose.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position.\\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word.\\
-% |""| & like \verb="-=, but producing no hyphen sign (for
-% words that should break at some sign such as
-% ``entrada/salida.''\\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$).\\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made by \file{portuges.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:port-quote}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{portuges} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@portuges| to see whether we have to do something here. Since
-% it is possible to load this file with any of the following four
-% options to babel: \Lopt{portuges}, \Lopt{portuguese},
-% \Lopt{brazil} and \Lopt{brazilian} we also allow that the
-% hyphenation patterns are loaded under any of these four names. We
-% just have to find out which one was used.
-%
-% \changes{portuges-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no
-% hyphenation patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@portuges\@undefined
- \ifx\l@portuguese\@undefined
- \ifx\l@brazil\@undefined
- \ifx\l@brazilian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Portuguese}
- \adddialect\l@portuges0
- \else
- \let\l@portuges\l@brazilian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@portuges\l@brazil
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@portuges\l@portuguese
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% By now |\l@portuges| is defined. When the language definition
-% file was loaded under a different name we make sure that the
-% hyphenation patterns can be found.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we have to decide whether this language definition file was
-% loaded for Portuguese or Brasilian use. This can be done by
-% checking the contents of |\CurrentOption|. When it doesn't
-% contain either `portuges' or `portuguese' we make |\bbl@tempb|
-% empty.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tempa{portuguese}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \let\bbl@tempb\@empty
-\else
- \def\bbl@tempa{portuges}
- \ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \let\bbl@tempb\@empty
- \else
- \def\bbl@tempb{brazil}
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and from)
-% the Portuguese language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsportuges}
-% The macro |\captionsportuges| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2e}{1994/11/09}{Added a few missing
-% translations}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2h}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2i}{1995/11/25}{Substituted `Prova' for `Proof'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}%
- \def\refname{Refer\^encias}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Some discussion took place around the correct translations for
-% `Table of Contents' and `Index'. the translations differ for
-% Portuguese and Brasilian based the following history:
-% \begin{quote}
-% The whole issue is that some books without a real index at the
-% end misused the term `\'Indice' as table of contents. Then,
-% what happens is that some books apeared with `\'Indice' at the
-% begining and a `\'Indice Remissivo' at the end. Remissivo is a
-% redundant word in this case, but was introduced to make up the
-% difference. So in Brasil people started using `Sum\'ario' and
-% `\'Indice Remissivo'. In Portugal this seems not to be very
-% common, therefore we chose `\'Indice' instead of `\'Indice
-% Remissivo'.
-% \end{quote}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\contentsname{Conte\'udo}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}%
- \def\indexname{\'Indice}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Anexo}%
- \def\ccname{Com c\'opia a}%
- \def\headtoname{Para}%
- \def\pagename{P\'agina}%
- \def\seename{ver}%
- \def\alsoname{ver tamb\'em}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% An alternate term for `Proof' could be `Prova'.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2p}{2003/05/23}{Substituted `Gloss\'ario' for
-% `Glossary'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}%
- \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateportuges}
-% The macro |\dateportuges| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Portuguese dates.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2n}{2001/01/27}{Removed spurious space after
-% Dezembro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or
- Janeiro\or Fevereiro\or Mar\c{c}o\or Abril\or Maio\or Junho\or
- Julho\or Agosto\or Setembro\or Outubro\or Novembro\or Dezembro%
- \fi
- \space de\space\number\year}}
-\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% For the Brasilian version of these definitions we just add a
-% ``dialect''.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \expandafter
- \adddialect\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsbrazil}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{The captions for brasilian and
-% portuguese are different now}
-%
-% The ``captions'' are different for both versions of the language,
-% so we define the macro |\captionsbrazil| here.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2i}{1995/11/25}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2q}{2008/03/18}{Substituted `Gloss\'ario' for
-% `Glossary'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}%
- \def\refname{Refer\^encias}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Refer\^encias Bibliogr\'aficas}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}%
- \def\contentsname{Sum\'ario}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}%
- \def\indexname{\'Indice Remissivo}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Anexo}%
- \def\ccname{C\'opia para}%
- \def\headtoname{Para}%
- \def\pagename{P\'agina}%
- \def\seename{veja}%
- \def\alsoname{veja tamb\'em}%
- \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}%
- \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datebrazil}
-% The macro |\datebrazil| redefines the command
-% |\today| to produce Brasilian dates, for which the names
-% of the months are not capitalized.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2n}{2001/01/27}{Removed spurious space after
-% dezembro}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or
- janeiro\or fevereiro\or mar\c{c}o\or abril\or maio\or junho\or
- julho\or agosto\or setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or dezembro%
- \fi
- \space de\space\number\year}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\portugeshyphenmins}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added setting of hyphenmin
-% values}
-% Set correct values for |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2o}{2001/02/16}{Set \cs{righthyphenmin} to 3 if
-% not provided by the pattern file.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasportuges}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added the definition of some
-% \texttt{"} shorthands}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasportuges}
-% The macro |\extrasportuges| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Portuguese language. The macro
-% |\noextrasportuges| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasportuges|.
-%
-% For Portuguese the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is
-% done once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in
-% the same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the portuguese group of shorthands
-% should be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{portuges}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2m}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Basque}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasportuges{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we define access to the guillemets for quotations,
-% \changes{portuges-1.2k}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% guillemot characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation
-% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\-}
-%
-% All that is left now is the redefinition of |\-|. The new version
-% of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while
-% allowing other hyphenation positions to be generated
-% automatically. The standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is
-% very unfortunate for languages such as Dutch and German, where
-% long compound words are quite normal and all one needs is a means
-% to indicate an extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that
-% \TeX\ can generate from the hyphenation patterns.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\-{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ord}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\ro}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\orda}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\ra}
-% \changes{portuges-1.2g}{1995/06/04}{Added macro}
-% We also provide an easy way to typeset ordinals, both in the male
-% (|\ord| or |\ro|) and the female (|orda| or |\ra|) form.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ord{$^{\rm o}$}
-\def\orda{$^{\rm a}$}
-\let\ro\ord\let\ra\orda
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{portuges-1.2j}{1996/11/03}{ow use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index e4e3c2e0296..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/portuges.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{portuges.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{portuges.ldf}{\from{portuges.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 88950570306..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,232 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{89}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{romanian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{romanian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{romanian.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2l Romanian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `romanian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Romanian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Romanian language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Umstatter Horst (hhu at cernvm.cern.ch) and Robert
-% Juhasz (robertj at uni-paderborn.de)
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{romanian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{romanian.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{romanian-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com}
-% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for LaTeX2e}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of babel.def}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2e}{1995/05/25}{Updated for babel release 3.5}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2h}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Romanian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Umstatter Horst
-% (\texttt{hhu@cernvm.cern.ch}).} defines all the
-% language-specific macros for the Romanian language.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{romanian-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{romanian}\captionsromanian
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{romanian} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@romanian| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{romanian-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of
-% \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no
-% hyphenation patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@romanian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Romanian}
- \adddialect\l@romanian0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Romanian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsromanian}
-% The macro |\captionsromanian| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/17}{Translation errors found by
-% Robert Juhasz fixed}
-% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2g}{1995/11/10}{Added translation of `Proof'}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2k}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2l}{2003/06/10}{Added translation for Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}ls
-\addto\captionsromanian{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefa\c{t}\u{a}}%
- \def\refname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\abstractname{Rezumat}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\chaptername{Capitolul}%
- \def\appendixname{Anexa}%
- \def\contentsname{Cuprins}%
- \def\listfigurename{List\u{a} de figuri}%
- \def\listtablename{List\u{a} de tabele}%
- \def\indexname{Glosar}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}% % sau Plan\c{s}a
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Partea}%
- \def\enclname{Anex\u{a}}% % sau Anexe
- \def\ccname{Copie}%
- \def\headtoname{Pentru}%
- \def\pagename{Pagina}%
- \def\seename{Vezi}%
- \def\alsoname{Vezi de asemenea}%
- \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{t}ie} %
- \def\glossaryname{Glosar}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateromanian}
-% The macro |\dateromanian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Romanian dates.
-% \changes{romanian-1.1}{1992/02/17}{Translation errors found by Robert
-% Juhasz fixed}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2i}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{romanian-1.2i}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateromanian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- ianuarie\or februarie\or martie\or aprilie\or mai\or
- iunie\or iulie\or august\or septembrie\or octombrie\or
- noiembrie\or decembrie\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasromanian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasromanian}
-% The macro |\extrasromanian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Romanian language. The macro
-% |\noextrasromanian| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasromanian| For the moment these macros are empty but they
-% are defined for compatibility with the other language definition
-% files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasromanian{}
-\addto\noextrasromanian{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{romanian-1.2h}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{romanian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 749b4561ea7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/romanian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{romanian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{romanian.ldf}{\from{romanian.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 381cb2b26a3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1238 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{1461}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{russianb.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{russianb}
- [2008/03/21 v1.1r Russian support from the babel system]
-%
-%% File `russianb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Russianb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008
-%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Adapted to the new T2 and X2 Cyrillic encodings
-%% by Vladimir Volovich TeX at vvv.vsu.ru
-%% Werner Lemberg wl at gnu.org
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand\note[1]{}
-\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{russianb.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{russianb.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1c}{1996/07/11}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1d}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1k}{1999/08/19}{replaced all \cs{penalty}\cs{@M}
-% with \cs{nobreak}}
-%
-% \section{The Russian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this section
-% has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on \filedate.
-% This file was initially derived from the original version of
-% \file{german.sty}, which has some definitions for Russian. Later the
-% definitions from \file{russian.sty} version 1.0b (for \LaTeX\ 2.09),
-% \file{russian.sty} version v2.5c (for \LaTeXe) and \file{francais.sty}
-% version 4.5c and \file{germanb.sty} version 2.5c were added.} defines
-% all the language-specific macros for the Russian language. It needs the
-% file \file{cyrcod} for success documentation with Russian encodings
-% (see below).
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:russian-quote} an overview is given of its purpose.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% Added definitions of Cyrillic emdash stuff and thinspace}
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |"---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\
-% |"--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\
-% |"--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|
-% or some other signs as ``disable/enable''). \\
-% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\
-% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing
-% hyphenation in the composing words. \\
-% |",| & thinspace for initials with a breakpoint
-% in following surname. \\
-% |"`| & for German left double quotes
-% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\
-% |"'| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A''
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{russianb}}\label{tab:russian-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:russian-quote} can also be typeset by
-% using the commands in table~\ref{tab:rmore-quote}.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |\cdash---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\
-% |\cdash--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\
-% |\cdash--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\
-% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes
-% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\
-% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A''
-% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\
-% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\
-% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined
-% by \babel}\label{tab:rmore-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% The French quotes are also available as ligatures `|<<|' and `|>>|' in
-% 8-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2*})
-% and as `|<|' and `|>|' characters in 7-bit Cyrillic font encodings
-% (\texttt{OT2} and \texttt{LWN}).
-%
-% The quotation marks traditionally used in Russian were borrowed from
-% other languages (e.g., French and German) so they keep their original
-% names.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is loaded
-% more than once, checking the category code of the \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1e}{1996/12/29}{Added closing brace to second
-% argument of \cs{LdfInit}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{russian}{captionsrussian}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{russianb} will be an `unknown' language, in which case
-% we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of |\l@russian|
-% to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@russian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Russian}
- \adddialect\l@russian0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding}
-%
-% We need to know the encoding for text that is supposed to be which is
-% active at the end of the \babel\ package. If the \pkg{fontenc} package
-% is loaded later, then\ldots too bad!
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The user may choose between different available Cyrillic
-% encodings---e.g., \texttt{X2}, \texttt{LCY}, or \texttt{LWN}.\@
-% Hopefully, \texttt{X2} will eventually replace the two latter encodings
-% (\texttt{LCY} and \texttt{LWN}).\@ If the user wants to use another
-% font encoding than the default (\texttt{T2A}), he has to load the
-% corresponding file \emph{before} \file{russianb.sty}. This may be done
-% in the following way:
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% % override the default X2 encoding used in Babel
-% \usepackage[LCY,OT1]{fontenc}
-% \usepackage[english,russian]{babel}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \unskip
-%
-% Note: for the Russian language, the \texttt{T2A} encoding is better than
-% \texttt{X2}, because \texttt{X2} does not contain Latin letters, and
-% users should be very careful to switch the language every time they
-% want to typeset a Latin word inside a Russian phrase or vice versa.
-%
-% We parse the |\cdp@list| containing the encodings known to \LaTeX\ in
-% the order they were loaded. We set the |\cyrillicencoding| to the
-% \emph{last} loaded encoding in the list of supported Cyrillic
-% encodings: \texttt{OT2}, \texttt{LWN}, \texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2},
-% \texttt{T2C}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2A}, if any.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
- \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
- \edef\reserved@c{#2}%
- \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c
- \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c
- \fi}
-\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
- \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{X2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}}
-\cdp@list
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, if |\cyrillicencoding| is undefined, then the user did not load
-% any of supported encodings. So, we have to set |\cyrillicencoding| to
-% some default value. We test the presence of the encoding definition
-% files in the order from less preferable to more preferable encodings.
-% We use the lowercase names (i.e., \file{lcyenc.def} instead of
-% \file{LCYenc.def}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If |\cyrillicencoding| is still undefined, then the user seems not to
-% have a properly installed distribution. A fatal error.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}%
- {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak
- You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We avoid |\usepackage[\cyrillicencoding]{fontenc}| because we don't
-% want to force the switch of |\encodingdefault|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \lowercase
- \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}%
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \PackageInfo{babel}
-% {Using `\cyrillicencoding' as a default Cyrillic encoding}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \unskip
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\Russian}{%
- \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\russianhyphenmins
- \language\l@russian}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{%
- \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins
- \language\l@english}%
-\let\Rus\Russian
-\let\Eng\English
-\let\cyrillictext\Russian
-\let\cyr\Russian
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Since the \texttt{X2} encoding does not contain Latin letters, we
-% should make some redefinitions of \LaTeX\ macros which implicitly
-% produce Latin letters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We put |\latinencoding| in braces to avoid problems with
-% |\@alph| inside minipages (e.g., footnotes inside minipages) where
-% |\@alph| is expanded and we get for example `|\fontencoding OT1|'
-% (|\fontencoding| is robust).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or
- i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or
- q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
- y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or
- I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or
- Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or
- Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Unfortunately, the commands |\AA| and |\aa| are not encoding dependent
-% in \LaTeX\ (unlike e.g., |\oe| or |\DH|). They are defined as |\r{A}| and
-% |\r{a}|. This leads to unpredictable results when the font encoding
-% does not contain the Latin letters `A' and `a' (like \texttt{X2}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following block redefines the character class of uppercase Greek
-% letters and some accents, if it is equal to 7 (variable family), to
-% avoid incorrect results if the font encoding in some math family does
-% not contain these characters in places of OT1 encoding. The code was
-% taken from |amsmath.dtx|. See comments and further explanation there.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1n}{2001/02/21}{As this code generates a
-% textfont 7 error it is commented out for now.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \begingroup\catcode`\"=12
-% % uppercase greek letters:
-% \def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax
-% "0000\@nil#1}
-% \def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{%
-% \ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax
-% \ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi
-% \fi}
-% \@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi
-% \@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi
-% \@tempa\Omega
-% % some accents:
-% \def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent}
-% \expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil
-% \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
-% \def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}%
-% \def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}%
-% \def\do#1"#2{}
-% \def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil
-% \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF
-% \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}%
-% \fi}
-% \@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave
-% \@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar
-% \fi
-% \endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The user should use the \pkg{inputenc} package when any 8-bit Cyrillic
-% font encoding is used, selecting one of the Cyrillic input encodings.
-% We do not assume any default input encoding, so the user should
-% explicitly call the \pkg{inputenc} package by |\usepackage{inputenc}|.
-% We also removed |\AtBeginDocument|, so \pkg{inputenc} should be used
-% before \babel.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1l}{1999/08/27}{Made not using inputenc a
-% warning instead of an error}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{%
- \def\reserved@a{LWN}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \def\reserved@a{OT2}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \PackageWarning{babel}%
- {No input encoding specified for Russian language}
- \fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch between
-% Cyrillic and Roman encodings.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cyrillictext}
-% \begin{macro}{\latintext}
-%
-% The command |\cyrillictext| will switch from Latin font encoding to the
-% Cyrillic font encoding, the command |\latintext| switches back. This
-% assumes that the `normal' font encoding is a Latin one. These commands
-% are \emph{declarations}, for shorter peaces of text the commands
-% |\textlatin| and |\textcyrillic| can be used.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1o}{2003/10/12}{\cs{latintext} is already
-% defined by the core of \babel}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{%
-% \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
-% \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}}
-\let\lat\latintext
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textcyrillic}
-% \begin{macro}{\textlatin}
-%
-% These commands take an argument which is then typeset using the
-% requested font encoding.
-% \changes{russianb-1.1o}{2003/10/12}{\cs{textlatin} already defined
-% by the core of \babel}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext}
-%\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We make the \TeX
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\ifx\ltxTeX\undefined\let\ltxTeX\TeX\fi
-%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\TeX}{\textlatin{\ltxTeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and \LaTeX\ logos encoding independent.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\ifx\ltxLaTeX\undefined\let\ltxLaTeX\LaTeX\fi
-%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\LaTeX}{\textlatin{\ltxLaTeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Russian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsrussian}
-%
-% The macro |\captionsrussian| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. The two commands |\cyr|
-% and |\lat| activate Cyrillic resp.\ Latin encoding.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsrussian{%
-% FIXME: Where is the \prefacename used?
- \def\prefacename{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyri\cyrs\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyri\cyre}}%
-% {\cyr\CYRV\cyrv\cyre\cyrd\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
- \def\refname{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
- \ \cyrl\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyrery}}%
-% \def\refname{%
-% {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\abstractname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\bibname{%
- {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
-% \def\bibname{%
-% {\cyr\CYRB\cyri\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyro
-% \cyrg\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyri\cyrya}}%
-% for reports according to GOST:
-% \def\bibname{%
-% {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
-% \ \cyri\cyrs\cyrp\cyro\cyrl\cyrsftsn\cyrz\cyro\cyrv\cyra\cyrn
-% \cyrn\cyrery\cyrh\ \cyri\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrch\cyrn\cyri
-% \cyrk\cyro\cyrv}}%
- \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}%
-% \@ifundefined{chapter}{}{%
-% \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}}%
- \def\appendixname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% There are two names for the Table of Contents that are used in Russian
-% publications. For books (and reports) the second variant is
-% appropriate, but for proceedings the first variant is preferred:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifundefined{thechapter}%
- {\def\contentsname{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}%
- {\def\contentsname{%
- {\cyr\CYRO\cyrg\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyrl\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}%
- \def\listfigurename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
- \ \cyri\cyrl\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrishrt}}%
-% \def\listfigurename{%
-% {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
-% \ \cyrr\cyri\cyrs\cyru\cyrn\cyrk\cyro\cyrv}}%
- \def\listtablename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
- \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc}}%
- \def\indexname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrm\cyre\cyrt\cyrn\cyrery\cyrishrt
- \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\authorname{%
- {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrishrt
- \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}%
- \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}%
- \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl.}}%
- \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyri\cyrs\cyrh.}}%
-% \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyri\cyrz}}%
- \def\headtoname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrh.}}%
-% \def\headtoname{{\cyr\cyrv}}%
- \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}%
-% \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr.}}%
- \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.}}%
- \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyrzh\cyre}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt
- \cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn\cyrs\cyrt\cyrv\cyro}}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\daterussian}
-%
-% The macro |\daterussian| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Russian dates.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\daterussian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- \cyrya\cyrn\cyrv\cyra\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyra\cyrl\cyrya\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\cyra\or
- \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrya\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrya\or
- \cyri\cyryu\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyri\cyryu\cyrl\cyrya\or
- \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\cyra\or
- \cyrs\cyre\cyrn\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyrn\cyro\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyra\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\fi
- \ \number\year~\cyrg.}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasrussian}
-%
-% The macro |\extrasrussian| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Russian language. The macro |\noextrasrussian| is used
-% to cancel the actions of |\extrasrussian|.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1b}{1996/02/20}{Added switch to \texttt{LWN}
-% encoding}
-%
-% The first action we define is to switch on the selected Cyrillic
-% encoding whenever we enter `russian'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasrussian{\cyrillictext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When the encoding definition file was processed by \LaTeX\ the current
-% font encoding is stored in |\latinencoding|, assuming that \LaTeX\ uses
-% \texttt{T1} or \texttt{OT1} as default. Therefore we switch back to
-% |\latinencoding| whenever the Russian language is no longer `active'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasrussian{\latintext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1b}{1996/02/20}{Added changing of
-% \cs{verbatim@font}}
-%
-% In order to get both Latin and Cyrillic letters in verbatim text we
-% need to change the definition of an internal \LaTeX\ command somewhat:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\def\verbatim@font{%
-% \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
-% \normalfont\ttfamily
-% \expandafter\def\csname\cyrillicencoding-cmd\endcsname##1##2{%
-% \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
-% \begingroup\UseTextSymbol\cyrillicencoding##1\endgroup
-% \else\noexpand##1\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The category code of the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{;}',
-% `\texttt{!}', and `\texttt{?}' is made |\active| to insert a little
-% white space.
-%
-% For Russian (as well as for German) the \texttt{"} character also is
-% made active.
-%
-% Note: It is \emph{very} questionable whether the Russian typesetting
-% tradition requires additional spacing before those punctuation signs.
-% Therefore, we make the corresponding code optional. If you need it,
-% then define the \texttt{frenchpunct} docstrip option in
-% \file{babel.ins}.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% Added a hook to insert space
-% or not before `double punctuation' (from frenchb).}
-%
-% Borrowed from french.
-% Some users dislike automatic insertion of a space before
-% `double punctuation', and prefer to decide themselves whether a
-% space should be added or not; so a hook |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP|
-% is provided: if this command is added (in file |russianb.cfg|, or
-% anywhere in a document) |russianb| will respect your typing, and
-% introduce a suitable space before `double punctuation' \emph{if
-% and only if} a space is typed in the source file before those
-% signs.
-%
-% The command |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| switches back to the
-% default behavior of |russianb|.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/03/07}{Use the new mechanism for dealing
-% with active characters}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*frenchpunct>
-\initiate@active@char{:}
-\initiate@active@char{;}
-%</frenchpunct>
-%<*frenchpunct|spanishligs>
-\initiate@active@char{!}
-\initiate@active@char{?}
-%</frenchpunct|spanishligs>
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need extra active characters.
-% The character |"| is used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:russian-quote}.
-%
-% We specify that the Russian group of shorthands should be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasrussian{\languageshorthands{russian}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may
-% vary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
-%<frenchpunct> \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}%
-%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasrussian{%
-%<frenchpunct> \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}%
-%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The \texttt{X2} and \texttt{T2*} encodings do not contain
-% |spanish_shriek| and |spanish_query| symbols; as a consequence, the
-% ligatures `|?`|' and `|!`|' do not work with them (these characters are
-% useless for Cyrillic texts anyway). But we define the shorthands to
-% emulate these ligatures (optionally).
-%
-% We do not use |\latinencoding| here (but instead explicitly use
-% \texttt{OT1}) because the user may choose \texttt{T2A} to be the primary
-% encoding, but it does not contain these characters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*spanishligs>
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{?`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textquestiondown}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{!`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textexclamdown}
-%</spanishligs>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@;@}
-% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@:@}
-% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@!@}
-% \begin{macro}{\russian@sh@?@}
-%
-% We have to reduce the amount of white space before \texttt{;},
-% \texttt{:} and \texttt{!}. This should only happen in horizontal mode,
-% hence the test with |\ifhmode|.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Use new \cs{DefineActiveNoArg}}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Use the more general mechanism of
-% \cs{declare@shorthand}}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1b}{1996/02/08}{Updated to reflect the latest
-% french definitions}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*frenchpunct>
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{;}{%
- \ifhmode
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% \thinspace changed to kern.1em (space bit thinner)}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% Added a hook to insert space
-% or not before `double punctuation' (from frenchb).}
-%
-% In horizontal mode we check for the presence of a `space', `unskip' if
-% it exists and place a |0.1em| kerning.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If no space has been typed, we add |\FDP@thinspace|
-% which will be
-% defined, up to the user's wishes, as an automatic added
-% thinspace, or as |\@empty|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we can insert a `|;|' character.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \string;}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The other definitions are very similar.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{:}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string:}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{!}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string!}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{?}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string?}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% Added a hook to insert space
-% or not before `double punctuation' (from frenchb).}
-% \begin{macro}{\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP}
-% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP}
-% \begin{macro}{\FDP@thinspace}
-% |\FDP@thinspace| is defined as unbreakable
-% spaces if |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is activated or as |\@empty| if
-% |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is in use.
-% The default is |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{%
- \def\FDP@thinspace{\nobreak\kern.1em}}
-\def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty}
-\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FDPon}
-% \begin{macro}{\FDPoff}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{One more chance to avoid
-% spaces before double punctuation}
-%
-% The next macros allow to switch on/off activeness of double
-% punctuation signs.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\FDPon{\bbl@activate{:}%
- \bbl@activate{;}%
- \bbl@activate{?}%
- \bbl@activate{!}}
-\def\FDPoff{\bbl@deactivate{:}%
- \bbl@deactivate{;}%
- \bbl@deactivate{?}%
- \bbl@deactivate{!}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@:@}
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@!@}
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@?@}
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@;@}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Added system level shorthands}
-%
-% When the active characters appear in an environment where their
-% Russian behaviour is not wanted they should give an `expected'
-% result. Therefore we define shorthands at system level as well.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;}
-%</frenchpunct>
-%<*frenchpunct&!spanishligs>
-\declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?}
-%</frenchpunct&!spanishligs>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% To be able to define the function of `|"|', we first define a couple of
-% `support' macros.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-%
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it
-% available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as `|"|'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\reserved@a{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\reserved@a
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{Use \cs{ddot} instead of
-% \cs{@MATHUMLAUT}}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: german and french quotes.
-% We use definitions of these quotes made in babel.sty.
-% The french quotes are contained in the \texttt{T2*} encodings.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{">}{\frqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some additional commands:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next two macros for |"-| and |"---| are somewhat different.
-% We must check whether the second token is a hyphen character:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"-}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If the next token is `|-|', we typeset an emdash, otherwise a hyphen
-% sign:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\russian@sh@tmp{%
- \if\russian@sh@next-\expandafter\russian@sh@emdash
- \else\expandafter\russian@sh@hyphen\fi
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \TeX\ looks for the next token after the first `|-|': the meaning of
-% this token is written to |\russian@sh@next| and |\russian@sh@tmp| is
-% called.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \futurelet\russian@sh@next\russian@sh@tmp}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here are the definitions of hyphen and emdash. First the hyphen:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\russian@sh@hyphen{%
- \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% Rearranging of cyrillic emdash stuff}
-%
-% For the emdash definition, there are the two parameters: we must `eat'
-% two last hyphen signs of our emdash\dots :
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\russian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\cdash}
-% \dots\ these two parameters are useful for another macro:
-% |\cdash|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier
-\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}%
-\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}%
- \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else
- \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% second parameter (or third for |\cdash|) shows what kind of emdash
-% to create in next step
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"---| & ordinary (plain) Cyrillic emdash inside text:
-% an unbreakable thinspace will be inserted before only in case of
-% a \textit{space} before the dash (it is necessary for dashes after
-% display maths formulae: there could be lists, enumerations etc.\
-% started with ``--- where $a$ is ...'' i.e., the dash starts a line).
-% (Firstly there were planned rather soft rules for user: he may put
-% a space before the dash or not. But it is difficult to place this
-% thinspace automatically, i.e., by checking modes because after
-% display formulae \TeX{} uses horizontal mode. Maybe there is a
-% misunderstanding? Maybe there is another way?) After a dash
-% a breakable thinspace is always placed; \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% What is more grammatically: .2em or .2\fontdimen6\font ?
-\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi
- \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"--~| & emdash in compound names or surnames
-% (like Mendeleev--Klapeiron); this dash has no space characters
-% around; after the dash some space is added
-% |\exhyphenalty| \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"--*| & for denoting direct speech (a space like |\enskip|
-% must follow the emdash); \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode
- \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}%
-%\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cyrdash}
-% Finally the macro for ``body'' of the Cyrillic emdash.
-% The |\cyrdash| macro will be defined in case this macro hasn't been
-% defined in a fontenc file. For T2* fonts, cyrdash will be placed in
-% the code of the English emdash thus it uses ligature |---|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% Is there an IF necessary?
-\ifx\cyrdash\undefined
- \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% Add macro for thinspace between initials}
-%
-% Here a really new macro---to place thinspace between initials.
-% This macro used instead of |\,| allows hyphenation in the following
-% surname.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1r}{2004/11/21}{Removed the commanet character
-% before the next code line, see R3669}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1f}{1998/06/26}{%
-% Add commands for switch on/off
-% doublequote activeness. Borrowed from german.}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqon}
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff}
-% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands
-% for |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The Russian hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin|
-% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1a}{1995/07/04}{use \cs{russianhyphenmins} to
-% store the correct values}
-% \changes{russianb-1.1m}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% temporary hack:
-\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined
- \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now the action |\extrasrussian| has to execute is to make sure that the
-% command |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the
-% execution of |\noextrasrussian| will switch it off again.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasrussian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasrussian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Next we add a new enumeration style for Russian manuscripts with
-% Cyrillic letters, and later on we define some math operator names in
-% accordance with Russian typesetting traditions.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Asbuk}
-%
-% We begin by defining |\Asbuk| which works like |\Alph|, but produces
-% (uppercase) Cyrillic letters intead of Latin ones. The letters YO,
-% ISHRT, HRDSN, ERY, and SFTSN are skipped, as usual for such
-% enumeration.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRZH\or
- \CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or
- \CYRP\or\CYRR\or\CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or
- \CYRC\or\CYRCH\or\CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYREREV\or\CYRYU\or
- \CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\asbuk}
-%
-% The macro |\asbuk| is similar to |\alph|; it produces lowercase
-% Russian letters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrzh\or
- \cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or
- \cyrp\or\cyrr\or\cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or
- \cyrc\or\cyrch\or\cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyrerev\or\cyryu\or
- \cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Set up default Cyrillic math alphabets. To use Cyrillic letters in
-% math mode user should load the |textmath| package \emph{before}
-% loading fontenc package (or \babel). Note, that by default Cyrillic
-% letters are taken from upright font in math mode (unlike Latin
-% letters).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\RequirePackage{textmath}
-\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{%
-\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we need a few commands to be able to switch to different variants.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding
- \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault
-%
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some math functions in Russian math books have other names: e.g.,
-% \texttt{sinh} in Russian is written as \texttt{sh} etc. So we define a
-% number of new math operators.
-%
-% |\sinh|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\cosh|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\tan|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\arctan|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% arcctg:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The following macro conflicts with |\th| defined in Latin~1 encoding:
-%
-% |\tanh|:
-% \changes{russianb-1.1q}{2004/05/21}{Change definition of \cs{th}
-% only for this language}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
- \babel@save{\th}%
- \let\ltx@th\th
- \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}%
- {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\cot|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\coth|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\csc|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And finally some other Russian mathematical symbols:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits}
-\def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits}
-\def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits}
-\def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits}
-\def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits}
-\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This is for compatibility with older Russian packages.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{%
- \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration file,
-% setting the main language to be switched on at |\begin{document}| and
-% resetting the category code of \texttt{@} to its original value.
-%
-% \changes{russianb-1.1d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{russian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c721f17114..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/russianb.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/03/13}
-\def\batchfile{russianb.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-\keepsilent
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-
-\generate{\file{russianb.ldf}{\from{russianb.dtx}{code}}}
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index b3d951204c7..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,232 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{120}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{samin.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{samin}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{samin.dtx}
- [2004/02/20 v1.0c North Sami support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source code for
-% the North Sami language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{samin.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{samin.dtx}
-%
-% \section{The North Sami language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. It was written by Regnor Jernsletten,
-% (\texttt{Regnor.Jernsletten@sami.uit.no}) or
-% (\texttt{Regnor.Jernsletten@eunet.no}).}
-% defines all the language definition macros for the North Sami language.
-%
-% Several Sami dialects/languages are spoken in Finland, Norway, Sweden
-% and on the Kola Peninsula (Russia). The alphabets differ, so there
-% will eventually be a need for more \texttt{.dtx} files for e.g. Lule
-% and South Sami. Hence the name \file{samin.dtx} (and not
-% \file{sami.dtx} or the like) in the North Sami case.
-%
-% There are currently no hyphenation patterns available for the North
-% Sami language, but you might consider using the patterns for Finnish
-% (\file{fi8hyph.tex}), Norwegian (\file{nohyph.tex}) or Swedish
-% (\file{sehyph.tex}). Add a line for the \texttt{samin} language to
-% the \file{language.dat} file, and rebuild the \LaTeX\ format file.
-% See the documentation for your \LaTeX\ distribution.
-%
-% A note on writing North Sami in \LaTeX: The TI encoding and EC fonts
-% do not include the T WITH STROKE letter, which you will need a
-% workaround for. My suggestion is to place the lines\\
-% |\newcommand{\tx}{\mbox{t\hspace{-.35em}-}}|\\
-% |\newcommand{\txx}{\mbox{T\hspace{-.5em}-}}|\\
-% in the preamble of your documents. They define the commands\\
-% |\txx{}| for LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T WITH STROKE and \\
-% |\tx{}| for LATIN SMALL LETTER T WITH STROKE.
-%
-% \subsection{The code of \file{samin.dtx}}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{samin}{captionssamin}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{samin} could be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@samin| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\l@samin
- \@nopatterns{Samin}
- \adddialect\l@samin0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the North Sami language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\saminhyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \changes{samin-1.0b}{2000/09/26}{use \cs{providehyphenmins}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{samin}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionssamin}
-% The macro |\captionssamin| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{samin-1.0b}{2000/09/26}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{samin-1.0c}{2000/10/04}{Provided the translation for
-% glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\captionssamin{%
- \def\prefacename{Ovdas\'atni}%
- \def\refname{\v Cujuhusat}%
- \def\abstractname{\v Coahkk\'aigeassu}%
- \def\bibname{Girjj\'ala\v svuohta}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapihttal}%
- \def\appendixname{\v Cuovus}%
- \def\contentsname{Sisdoallu}%
- \def\listfigurename{Govvosat}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabeallat}%
- \def\indexname{Registtar}%
- \def\figurename{Govus}%
- \def\tablename{Tabealla}%
- \def\partname{Oassi}%
- \def\enclname{Mielddus}%
- \def\ccname{Kopia s\'addejuvvon}%
- \def\headtoname{Vuost\'aiv\'aldi}%
- \def\pagename{Siidu}%
- \def\seename{geah\v ca}%
- \def\alsoname{geah\v ca maidd\'ai}%
- \def\proofname{Duo\dj{}a\v stus}%
- \def\glossaryname{S\'atnelistu}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datesamin}
-% The macro |\datesamin| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce North Sami dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datesamin{%
- \def\today{\ifcase\month\or
- o\dj{}\dj{}ajagem\'anu\or
- guovvam\'anu\or
- njuk\v cam\'anu\or
- cuo\ng{}om\'anu\or
- miessem\'anu\or
- geassem\'anu\or
- suoidnem\'anu\or
- borgem\'anu\or
- \v cak\v cam\'anu\or
- golggotm\'anu\or
- sk\'abmam\'anu\or
- juovlam\'anu\fi
- \space\number\day.~b.\space\number\year}%
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrassamin}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrassamin}
-% The macro |\extrassamin| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the North Sami language. The macro
-% |\noextrassamin| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrassamin|. For the moment these macros are empty but
-% they are defined for compatibility with the other
-% language definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrassamin{}
-\addto\noextrassamin{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{samin}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index e94cf6f90ab..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/samin.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{2000/09/26}
-\def\batchfile{samin.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{samin.ldf}{\from{samin.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput \ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 82613e5cd0b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,209 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{95}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{scottish.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{scottish}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{scottish.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v1.0g Scottish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `scottish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Scottish language definition file.
-%
-% The Gaidhlig or Scottish Gaelic terms were provided by Fraser
-% Grant \texttt{FRASER@CERNVM}.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{scottish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{scottish.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{scottish-1.0b}{1995/06/14}{Corrected typos (PR1652)}
-% \changes{scottish-1.0d}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Scottish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Fraser Grant
-% (\texttt{FRASER@CERNVM}).} defines all the language definition
-% macros for the Scottish language.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{scottish-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{scottish}\captionsscottish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{scottish} could be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@scottish| to see whether we have to do something
-% here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@scottish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{scottish}
- \adddialect\l@scottish0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Scottish language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsscottish}
-% The macro |\captionsscottish| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{scottish-1.0c}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{scottish-1.0g}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsscottish{%
- \def\prefacename{Preface}% <-- needs translation
- \def\refname{Iomraidh}%
- \def\abstractname{Br\`{\i}gh}%
- \def\bibname{Leabhraichean}%
- \def\chaptername{Caibideil}%
- \def\appendixname{Ath-sgr`{\i}obhadh}%
- \def\contentsname{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
- \def\listfigurename{Liosta Dhealbh }%
- \def\listtablename{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
- \def\indexname{Cl\`ar-innse}%
- \def\figurename{Dealbh}%
- \def\tablename{Cl\`ar}%
- \def\partname{Cuid}%
- \def\enclname{a-staigh}%
- \def\ccname{lethbhreac gu}%
- \def\headtoname{gu}%
- \def\pagename{t.d.}% abrv. `taobh duilleag'
- \def\seename{see}% <-- needs translation
- \def\alsoname{see also}% <-- needs translation
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datescottish}
-% The macro |\datescottish| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Scottish dates.
-% \changes{scottish-1.0e}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{scottish-1.0e}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datescottish{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or
- am Faoilteach\or an Gearran\or am M\`art\or an Giblean\or
- an C\`eitean\or an t-\`Og mhios\or an t-Iuchar\or
- L\`unasdal\or an Sultuine\or an D\`amhar\or
- an t-Samhainn\or an Dubhlachd\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasscottish}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasscottish}
-% The macro |\extrasscottish| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Scottish language. The macro
-% |\noextrasscottish| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasscottish|. For the moment these macros are empty but
-% they are defined for compatibility with the other language
-% definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasscottish{}
-\addto\noextrasscottish{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{scottish-1.0d}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{scottish}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 5937bb1c446..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/scottish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{scottish.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{scottish.ldf}{\from{scottish.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 60179088835..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,312 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{263}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{serbian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{serbian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{serbian.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v1.0d Serbocroatian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Serbocroatian language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c} (dejan@yunix.com) and Jankovic
-% Slobodan <slobodan@archimed.filfak.ac.ni.yu>
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{serbian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{serbian.dtx}
-% \changes{serbian-1.0b}{1998/06/16}{Added suggestions for shorthands
-% and so on from Jankovic Slobodan}
-%
-% \section{The Serbocroatian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. A contribution was made by Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c}
-% (\texttt{dejan@yunix.com}).} defines all the language definition
-% macros for the Serbian language, typeset in a latin script. In a
-% future version support for typesetting in a cyrillic script may
-% be added.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:serbian-quote} an overview is given of its
-% purpose. One of the reasons for this is that in the Serbian
-% language some special characters are used.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"c| & |\"c|, also implemented for the
-% lowercase and uppercase s and z. \\
-% |"d| & |\dj|, also implemented for |"D| \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\
-% |"`| & for Serbian left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |"'| & for Serbian right double quotes. \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{serbian.ldf}}\label{tab:serbian-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Apart from defining shorthands we need to make sure taht the
-% first paragraph of each section is intended. Furthermore the
-% following new math operators are defined (|\tg|, |\ctg|,
-% |\arctg|, |\arcctg|, |\sh|, |\ch|, |\th|, |\cth|, |\arsh|,
-% |\arch|, |\arth|, |\arcth|, |\Prob|, |\Expect|, |\Variance|).
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{serbian}\captionsserbian
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{serbian} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@serbian| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@serbian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Serbian}
- \adddialect\l@serbian0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Serbocroatian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsserbian}
-% The macro |\captionsserbian| defines all strings used
-% in the four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{serbian-1.0d}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsserbian{%
- \def\prefacename{Predgovor}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografija}%
- \def\chaptername{Glava}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatak}%
- \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
- \def\listfigurename{Slike}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabele}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Slika}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Deo}%
- \def\enclname{Prilozi}%
- \def\ccname{Kopije}%
- \def\headtoname{Prima}%
- \def\pagename{Strana}%
- \def\seename{Vidi}%
- \def\alsoname{Vidi tako\dj e}%
- \def\proofname{Dokaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateserbian}
-% The macro |\dateserbian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Serbocroatian dates.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateserbian{%
- \def\today{\number\day .~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or mart\or april\or maj\or
- juni\or juli\or avgust\or septembar\or oktobar\or novembar\or
- decembar\fi \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasserbian}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasserbian}
-% The macro |\extrasserbian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Serbocroatian language. The macro
-% |\noextrasserbian| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extrasserbian|.
-%
-% For Serbian the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the
-% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the serbian group of shorthands
-% should be used.
-%
-% \changes{serbian-1.0b}{1998/06/16}{Introduced the active \texttt{"}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasserbian{\languageshorthands{serbian}}
-\addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{serbian-1.0c}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Serbian}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we define shorthands to facilitate the occurence of letters
-% such as \v{c}.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"d}{\textormath{\dj}{\dj}}%%
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"D}{\textormath{\DJ}{\DJ}}%%
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar
-% to the german and french quotation marks.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation
-% breakpoints that behave a little different from |\-|.
-% \changes{serbian-1.0d}{2000/09/20}{Changed definition of \texttt{"-}
-% to be the same as for other languages}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchindent}
-% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}
-% In Serbian the first paragraph of each section should be indented.
-% Add this code only in \LaTeX.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\fmtname plain \else
- \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse
- \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI
- \@afterindentfalse}
- \addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@frenchindent}
- \addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mathserbian}
-% Some math functions in Serbian math books have other names:
-% e.g. |sinh| in Serbian is written as |sh| etc. So we define a
-% number of new math operators.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh
-\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth
-\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits}
-\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits}
-\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits}
-\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{serbian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 137084466d2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/serbian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/03/13}
-\def\batchfile{serbian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-\keepsilent
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-
-\generate{\file{serbian.ldf}{\from{serbian.dtx}{code}}}
-
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index d2d0c00a79b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1310 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{1382}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{slovak.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<+code>\ProvidesLanguage{slovak}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{slovak.dtx}
- [2008/07/06 v3.1a Slovak support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `slovak.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Slovak Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2001
-%% by Jana Chlebikova
-% Department of Artificial Intelligence
-% Faculty of Mathematics and Physics
-% Mlynska dolina
-% 84215 Bratislava
-% Slovakia
-% (42)(7) 720003 l. 835
-% (42)(7) 725882
-% chlebikj at mff.uniba.cs (Internet)
-% and Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Copyright (C) 2002-2005
-%% by Tobias Schlemmer
-% Braunsdorfer Stra\ss e 101
-% 01159 Dresden
-% Deutschland
-% Tobias.Schlemmer at web.de
-%
-%% Copyright (C) 2005-2008
-%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz)
-%
-% This file is also based on CSLaTeX
-% by Ji\v r\'i Zlatu\v ska, Zden\v ek Wagner,
-% Jaroslav \v Snajdr and Petr Ol\v s\'ak.
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik
-%% babel at tesarici.cz
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Slovak language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{slovak.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \def\CS{$\cal C\kern-.1667em
-% \lower.5ex\hbox{$\cal S$}\kern-.075em$}
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{slovak.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{slovak-1.0}{1992/07/15}{First version}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-% \changes{slovak-1.3a}{2004/02/20}{Added contributed shorthand
-% definitions}
-% \changes{slovak-3.0}{2005/09/10}{Implemented the functionality of
-% \CS\LaTeX's slovak.sty. The version number was bumped to 3.0
-% to minimize confusion by being higher than the last version
-% of \CS\LaTeX.}
-%
-% \section{The Slovak language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. It was originally written by Jana Chlebikova
-% (\texttt{chlebik@euromath.dk}) and modified by Tobias Schlemmer
-% (\texttt{Tobias.Schlemmer@web.de}). It was then rewritten by
-% Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (\texttt{babel@tesarici.cz}).} defines all the
-% language-specific macros for the Slovak language.
-%
-% For this language the macro |\q| is defined. It was used with the
-% letters (\texttt{t}, \texttt{d}, \texttt{l}, and \texttt{L}) and
-% adds a \texttt{'} to them to simulate a `hook' that should be
-% there. The result looks like t\kern-2pt\char'47. Since the the T1
-% font encoding has the corresponding characters it is mapped to |\v|.
-% Therefore we recommend using T1 font encoding. If you don't want to
-% use this encoding, please, feel free to redefine |\q| in your file.
-% I think babel will honour this |;-)|.
-%
-% For this language the characters |"|, |'| and |^| are made
-% active. In table~\ref{tab:slovak-quote} an overview is given of
-% its purpose. Also the vertical placement of the
-% umlaut can be controlled this way.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"a| & |\"a|, also implemented for the other
-% lowercase and uppercase vowels. \\
-% |^d| & |\q d|, also implemented for l, t and L. \\
-% |^c| & |\v c|, also implemented for C, D, N, n, T, Z and z. \\
-% |^o| & |\^o|, also implemented for O. \\
-% |'a| & |\'a|, also implemented for the other lowercase and
-% uppercase l, r, y and vowels. \\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\
-% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\
-% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing
-% hyphenation in the composing words. \\
-% |"`| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |"'| & for German right double quotes. \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{slovak.ldf}}\label{tab:slovak-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:slovak-quote} can also be typeset by
-% using the commands in table~\ref{tab:smore-quote}.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\
-% |\glq| & for German left single quotes (looks like ,). \\
-% |\grq| & for German right single quotes (looks like `). \\
-% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% |\flq| & for (French) left single quotes (similar to $<$). \\
-% |\frq| & for (French) right single quotes (similar to $>$). \\
-% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\
-% |\sq| & the original single quote (|'|). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined
-% by \file{slovak.ldf}}\label{tab:smore-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \subsection{Compatibility}
-%
-% Great care has been taken to ensure backward compatibility with
-% \CS\LaTeX. In particular, documents which load this file with
-% |\usepackage{slovak}| should produce identical output with no
-% modifications to the source. Additionally, all the \CS\LaTeX{}
-% options are recognized:
-%
-% \label{tab:slovak-options}
-% \begin{list}{}
-% {\def\makelabel#1{\sbox0{\Lopt{#1}}%
-% \ifdim\wd0>\labelwidth
-% \setbox0\vbox{\box0\hbox{}} \wd0=0pt \fi
-% \box0\hfil}
-% \setlength{\labelwidth}{2\parindent}
-% \setlength{\leftmargin}{2\parindent}
-% \setlength{\rightmargin}{\parindent}}
-% \item[IL2, T1, OT1]
-% These options set the default font encoding. Please note
-% that their use is deprecated. You should use the |fontenc|
-% package to select font encoding.
-%
-% \item[split, nosplit]
-% These options control whether hyphenated words are
-% automatically split according to Slovak typesetting rules.
-% With the \Lopt{split} option ``je-li'' is hyphenated as
-% ``je-/-li''. The \Lopt{nosplit} option disables this behavior.
-%
-% The use of this option is strongly discouraged, as it breaks
-% too many common things---hyphens cannot be used in labels,
-% negative arguments to \TeX{} primitives will not work in
-% horizontal mode (use \cs{minus} as a workaround), and there are
-% a few other peculiarities with using this mode.
-%
-% \item[nocaptions]
-%
-% This option was used in \CS\LaTeX{} to set up Czech/Slovak
-% typesetting rules, but leave the original captions and dates.
-% The recommended way to achieve this is to use English as the main
-% language of the document and use the environment |otherlanguage*|
-% for Czech text.
-%
-% \item[olduv]
-% There are two version of \cs{uv}. The older one allows the use
-% of \cs{verb} inside the quotes but breaks any respective kerning
-% with the quotes (like that in \CS{} fonts). The newer one honors
-% the kerning in the font but does not allow \cs{verb} inside the
-% quotes.
-%
-% The new version is used by default in \LaTeXe{} and the old version
-% is used with plain \TeX. You may use \Lopt{olduv} to override the
-% default in \LaTeXe.
-%
-% \item[cstex]
-% This option was used to include the commands \cs{csprimeson} and
-% \cs{csprimesoff}. Since these commands are always included now,
-% it has been removed and the empty definition lasts for compatibility.
-% \end{list}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% \subsection{Implementation}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{slovak-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{slovak} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@slovak| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{slovak-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@slovak\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Slovak}
- \adddialect\l@slovak0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We need to define these macros early in the process.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@iltw@{IL2}
-\newif\ifcs@splithyphens
-\cs@splithyphensfalse
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If Babel is not loaded, we provide compatibility with \CS\LaTeX.
-% However, if macro \cs{@ifpackageloaded} is not defined, we assume
-% to be loaded from plain and provide compatibility with csplain.
-% Of course, this does not work well with \LaTeX$\:$2.09, but I
-% doubt anyone will ever want to use this file with \LaTeX$\:$2.09.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined
- \let\cs@compat@plain\relax
- \message{csplain compatibility mode}
-\else
- \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{%
- \let\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \message{cslatex compatibility mode}}
-\fi
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \ProvidesPackage{slovak}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Slovak style]
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Declare \CS\LaTeX{} options (see also the descriptions on page
-% \pageref{tab:slovak-options}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}}
- \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}}
- \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}}
- \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse}
- \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue}
- \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Make |IL2| encoding the default. This can be overriden with
-% the other font encoding options.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, process the user-supplied options.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ProcessOptions
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Standard \LaTeXe{} does not include the IL2 encoding in the format.
-% The encoding can be loaded later using the fontenc package, but
-% \CS\LaTeX{} included IL2 by default. This means existing documents
-% for \CS\LaTeX{} do not load that package, so load the encoding
-% ourselves in compatibility mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \input il2enc.def
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Restore the definition of \cs{CurrentOption}, clobbered by processing
-% the options.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\CurrentOption{slovak}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Slovak language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsslovak}
-% The macro \cs{captionsslovak} defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{slovak-1.2g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2k}{1999/02/28}{Repaired a few spelling mistakes}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2l}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{slovak-3.0}{2005/12/22}{Updated some translations. Former
-% translations were: `\'Uvod' for \cs{prefacename}, `Referencie' for
-% \cs{refname}, `Index' for \cs{indexname}, `Obr\'azok' for
-% \cs{figurename}, `Pr\'ilohy' for \cs{enclname}, `CC' for \cs{ccname},
-% `Komu' for \cs{headtoname}, `Strana' for \cs{pagename}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Predhovor}%
- \def\refname{Literat\'ura}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literat\'ura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitola}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatok}%
- \def\contentsname{Obsah}%
- \def\listfigurename{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
- \def\listtablename{Zoznam tabuliek}%
- \def\indexname{Register}%
- \def\figurename{Obr.}%
- \def\tablename{Tabu\v{l}ka}%
- \def\partname{\v{C}as\v{t}}%
- \def\enclname{Pr\'{\i}loha}%
- \def\ccname{cc.}%
- \def\headtoname{Pre}%
- \def\pagename{Str.}%
- \def\seename{vi\v{d}}%
- \def\alsoname{vi\v{d} tie\v{z}}%
- \def\proofname{D\^okaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateslovak}
-% The macro \cs{dateslovak} redefines the command \cs{today}
-% to produce Slovak dates.
-% \changes{slovak-1.2j}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2j}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2k}{1999/02/28}{Repaired a spelling mistake}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- janu\'ara\or febru\'ara\or marca\or apr\'{\i}la\or m\'aja\or
- j\'una\or j\'ula\or augusta\or septembra\or okt\'obra\or
- novembra\or decembra\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasslovak}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasslovak}
-% The macro \cs{extrasslovak} will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Slovak language. The macro \cs{noextrasslovak} is
-% used to cancel the actions of \cs{extrasslovak}.
-%
-% For Slovak texts \cs{frenchspacing} should be in effect. Language
-% group for shorthands is also set here.
-% \changes{slovak-3.0}{1995/04/21}{now use \cs{bbl@frenchspacing} and
-% \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}}
-% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{move \cs{languageshorthands} here,
-% so that the language group is always initialized correctly}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing
- \languageshorthands{slovak}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \changes{slovak-1.2e}{1995/05/28}{Use \LaTeX's \cs{v} accent
-% command}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\q\let\q\v}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For Slovak three characters are used to define shorthands, they
-% need to be made active.
-% \changes{slovak-1.3a}{2004/02/20}{Make three characters available
-% for shorthands}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else
- \initiate@active@char{^}
- \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{^}}
- \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{^}}
- \initiate@active@char{"}
- \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{"}\umlautlow}
- \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{"}\umlauthigh}
- \initiate@active@char{'}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{'}}
- \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{'}}%
- }{}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\sq}
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original single and double quote characters in
-% \cs{sq} and \cs{dq} to make them available later. The math
-% accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\sq{'}
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{slovak-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added setting of left- and
-% righthyphenmin}
-%
-% The slovak hyphenation patterns should be used with
-% |\lefthyphenmin| set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~3.
-% \changes{slovak-1.2e}{1995/05/28}{Now use \cs{slovakhyphenmins}}
-% \changes{slovak-1.2l}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \changes{slovak-3.0}{2005/12/22}{Changed default \cs{righthyphenmin}
-% to 3 characters.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% In order to prevent problems with the active |^| we add a
-% shorthand on system level which expands to a `normal |^|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else
- \declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% tremas,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}\allowhyphens}{\ddot e}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}\allowhyphens}{\ddot E}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}\allowhyphens}%
- {\ddot\imath}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}\allowhyphens}{\ddot I}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% other slovak characters
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^c}{\textormath{\v{c}\allowhyphens}{\check{c}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^d}{\textormath{\q{d}\allowhyphens}{\check{d}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^l}{\textormath{\q{l}\allowhyphens}{\check{l}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^n}{\textormath{\v{n}\allowhyphens}{\check{n}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^o}{\textormath{\^{o}\allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check{s}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^t}{\textormath{\q{t}\allowhyphens}{\check{t}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check{z}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^C}{\textormath{\v{C}\allowhyphens}{\check{C}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^D}{\textormath{\v{D}\allowhyphens}{\check{D}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^L}{\textormath{\q{L}\allowhyphens}{\check{L}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^N}{\textormath{\v{N}\allowhyphens}{\check{N}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^O}{\textormath{\^{O}\allowhyphens}{\hat{O}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check{S}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^T}{\textormath{\v{T}\allowhyphens}{\check{T}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check{Z}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% acute accents,
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'a}{\textormath{\'a\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}a}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'e}{\textormath{\'e\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}e}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'i}{\textormath{\'\i{}\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}i}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'l}{\textormath{\'l\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'o}{\textormath{\'o\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}o}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'r}{\textormath{\'r\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}r}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'u}{\textormath{\'u\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}u}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'y}{\textormath{\'y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}y}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'A}{\textormath{\'A\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}A}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'E}{\textormath{\'E\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}E}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'I}{\textormath{\'I\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}I}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'L}{\textormath{\'L\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'O}{\textormath{\'O\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}O}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'R}{\textormath{\'R\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}R}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'U}{\textormath{\'U\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}U}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'Y}{\textormath{\'Y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}Y}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{''}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}}
- }{}
- % \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\v}
-% \LaTeX's normal |\v| accent places a caron over the letter that
-% follows it (\v{o}). This is not what we want for the letters d,
-% t, l and L; for those the accent should change shape. This is
-% acheived by the following.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{%
- t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{%
- d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\lcaron}
-% \begin{macro}{\Lcaron}
-% For the letters \texttt{l} and \texttt{L} we want to disinguish
-% between normal fonts and monospaced fonts.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em%
- \else
- l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-\def\Lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}%
- \else
- L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Initialize active quotes. \CS\LaTeX{} provides a way of
-% converting English-style quotes into Slovak-style ones. Both
-% single and double quotes are affected, i.e. |``text''| is
-% converted to something like |,,text``| and |`text'| is converted
-% to |,text`|. This conversion can be switched on and off with
-% \cs{csprimeson} and \cs{csprimesoff}.\footnote{By the way, the
-% names of these macros are misleading, because the handling of
-% primes in math mode is rather marginal, the most important thing
-% being the handling of quotes\ldots}
-%
-% These quotes present various troubles, e.g. the kerning is broken,
-% apostrophes are converted to closing single quote, some primitives
-% are broken (most notably the |\catcode`\|\meta{char} syntax will
-% not work any more), and writing them to \file{.aux} files cannot
-% be handled correctly. For these reasons, these commands are only
-% available in \CS\LaTeX{} compatibility mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s
- \def\csprimeson{%
- \catcode``\active \catcode`'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s}
- \def\csprimesoff{%
- \catcode``12 \catcode`'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s}
- \begingroup\catcode``\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote}
- \def\cs@openquote{%
- \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq
- \else \expandafter\clq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \begingroup\catcode`'\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote}
- {^\bgroup\prim@s}}
- \def\cs@closequote{%
- \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq
- \else \expandafter\crq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= }
- \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The way I recommend for typesetting quotes in Slovak documents
-% is to use shorthands similar to those used in German.
-%
-% \changes{3.0}{2006/04/21}{|"`| and |"'| changed from German quotes
-% to Slovak quotes}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\else
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"`}{\clqq}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"'}{\crqq}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"<}{\flqq}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{">}{\frqq}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\clqq}
-% This is the CS opening quote, which is similar to the German
-% quote (\cs{glqq}) but the kerning is different.
-%
-% For the OT1 encoding, the quote is constructed from the right
-% double quote (i.e. the ``Opening quotes'' character) by moving
-% it down to the baseline and shifting it to the right, or to the
-% left if italic correction is positive.
-%
-% For T1, the ``German Opening quotes'' is used. It is moved to
-% the right and the total width is enlarged. This is done in an
-% attempt to minimize the difference between the OT1 and T1
-% versions.
-%
-% \changes{3.0}{2006/04/20}{Added \cs{leavevmode} to allow an opening
-% quote at the beginning of a paragraph}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{%
- \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}%
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne
- \leavevmode
- \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em
- \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1}
- {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\crqq}
-% For OT1, the CS closing quote is basically the same as
-% \cs{grqq}, only the \cs{textormath} macro is not used, because
-% as far as I know, \cs{grqq} does not work in math mode anyway.
-%
-% For T1, the character is slightly wider and shifted to the
-% right to match its OT1 counterpart.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\clq}
-% \begin{macro}{\crq}
-%
-% Single CS quotes are similar to double quotes (see the
-% discussion above).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1}
- {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1}
- {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\uv}
-% There are two versions of \cs{uv}. The older one opens a group
-% and uses \cs{aftergroup} to typeset the closing quotes. This
-% version allows using \cs{verb} inside the quotes, because the
-% enclosed text is not passed as an argument, but unfortunately
-% it breaks any kerning with the quotes. Although the kerning
-% with the opening quote could be fixed, the kerning with the
-% closing quote cannot.
-%
-% The newer version is defined as a command with one parameter.
-% It preserves kerning but since the quoted text is passed as an
-% argument, it cannot contain \cs{verb}.
-%
-% Decide which version of \cs{uv} should be used. For sake
-% of compatibility, we use the older version with plain \TeX{}
-% and the newer version with \LaTeXe.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi
-\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}}
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes
- \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=}
- \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@wordlen}
-% Declare a counter to hold the length of the word after the
-% hyphen.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newcount\cs@wordlen
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@endash}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@emdash}
-% Store the original hyphen in a macro. Ditto for the ligatures.
-%
-% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{ensure correct catcode for the
-% saved hyphen}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup\catcode`\-12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@hyphen{-}
- \def\cs@endash{--}
- \def\cs@emdash{---}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@boxhyphen}
-% Provide a non-breakable hyphen to be used when a compound word
-% is too short to be split, i.e. the second part is shorter than
-% \cs{righthyphenmin}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@splithyphen}
-% The macro \cs{cs@splithyphen} inserts a split hyphen, while
-% allowing both parts of the compound word to be hyphenated at
-% other places too.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@
- \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@}
-}\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{-}
-% To minimize the effects of activating the hyphen character,
-% the active definition expands to the non-active character
-% in all cases where hyphenation cannot occur, i.e. if not
-% typesetting (check \cs{protect}), not in horizontal mode,
-% or in inner horizontal mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{-}
-\declare@shorthand{slovak}{-}{%
- \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
- \ifhmode
- \ifinner
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyphen}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@firsthyph@n}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyphen}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@secondhyph@n}
-% If we encounter a hyphen, check whether it is followed
-% by a second or a third hyphen and if so, insert the
-% corresponding ligature.
-%
-% If we don't find a hyphen, the token found will be placed
-% in \cs{cs@token} for further analysis, and it will also stay
-% in the input.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup\catcode`\-\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n}
- \def\cs@firsthyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen
- \fi}
- \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{%
- \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n}
- \def\cs@secondhyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash
- \fi}
-}\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkhyphen}
-% Check that hyphenation is enabled, and if so, start analyzing
-% the rest of the word, i.e. initialize \cs{cs@word} and \cs{cs@wordlen}
-% and start processing input with \cs{cs@scanword}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@checkhyphen{%
- \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\-
- \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword
- \else
- \cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@scanword}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@continuescan}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@gettoken}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@gett@ken}
-% Each token is first analyzed with \cs{cs@scanword}, which expands
-% the token and passes the first token of the result to
-% \cs{cs@gett@ken}. If the expanded token is not identical to the
-% unexpanded one, presume that it might be expanded further and
-% pass it back to \cs{cs@scanword} until you get an unexpandable
-% token. Then analyze it in \cs{cs@examinetoken}.
-%
-% The \cs{cs@continuescan} macro does the same thing as
-% \cs{cs@scanword}, but it does not require the first token to be
-% in \cs{cs@token} already.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken}
-\def\cs@gett@ken{%
- \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}%
- \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{cs@examinetoken}
-% Examine the token in \cs{cs@token}:
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item
-% If it is a letter (catcode 11) or other (catcode 12), add it
-% to \cs{cs@word} with \cs{cs@addparam}.
-%
-% \item
-% If it is the \cs{char} primitive, add it with \cs{cs@expandchar}.
-%
-% \item
-% If the token starts or ends a group, ignore it with
-% \cs{cs@ignoretoken}.
-%
-% \item
-% Otherwise analyze the meaning of the token with
-% \cs{cs@checkchardef} to detect primitives defined with
-% \cs{chardef}.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@examinetoken{%
- \ifcat A\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifcat 0\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifx\char\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}%
- \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}%
- \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}%
- \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkchardef}
-% Check the meaning of a token and if it is a primitive defined
-% with \cs{chardef}, pass it to \cs{\cs@examinechar} as if it were
-% a \cs{char} sequence. Otherwise, there are no more word characters,
-% so do the final actions in \cs{cs@nosplit}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{%
- \def\cs@token{#1}%
- \ifx\cs@token\@empty
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@ignoretoken}
-% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} but do not update the \cs{cs@wordlen}
-% counter. This is mainly useful for group starting and ending
-% primitives, which need to be preserved, but do not affect the word
-% boundary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{cs@addparam}
-% Add a token to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode. Note that
-% this macro can only be used for tokens which can be passed as
-% a parameter.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@addparam#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@expandchar}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@examinechar}
-% Add a \cs{char} sequence to \cs{cs@word} and check its lccode.
-% The charcode is first parsed in \cs{cs@expandchar} and then the
-% resulting \cs{chardef}-defined sequence is analyzed in
-% \cs{cs@examinechar}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=}
-\def\cs@examinechar{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@checkcode}
-% Check the lccode of a character. If it is zero, it does not count
-% to the current word, so finish it with \cs{cs@nosplit}. Otherwise
-% update the \cs{cs@wordlen} counter and go on scanning the word
-% with \cs{cs@continuescan}. When enough characters are gathered in
-% \cs{cs@word} to allow word break, insert the split hyphen and
-% finish.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@checkcode#1{%
- \ifnum0=#1
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \else
- \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne
- \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}%
- \else
- \cs@splithyphen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@word}%
- \fi
- \fi \cs@next}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@nosplit}
-% Insert a non-breakable hyphen followed by the saved word.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@hyphen}
-% The \cs{minus} sequence can be used where the active hyphen
-% does not work, e.g. in arguments to \TeX{} primitives in outer
-% horizontal mode.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\minus\cs@hyphen
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-
-% \begin{macro}{\standardhyphens}
-% \begin{macro}{\splithyphens}
-% These macros control whether split hyphens are allowed in Czech
-% and/or Slovak texts. You may use them in any language, but the
-% split hyphen is only activated for Czech and Slovak.
-%
-% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{activate with split hyphens and
-% deactivate with standard hyphens, not vice versa}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens}
-\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@splitattr}
-% Now we declare the |split| language attribute. This is
-% similar to the |split| package option of cslatex, but it
-% only affects Slovak, not Czech.
-%
-% \changes{slovak-3.1}{2006/10/07}{attribute added}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{slovak}{split}{%
- \addto\extrasslovak{\cs@splitattr}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@activatehyphens}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@deactivatehyphens}
-% These macros are defined as \cs{relax} by default to prevent
-% activating/deactivating the hyphen character. They are redefined
-% when the language is switched to Czech/Slovak. At that moment
-% the hyphen is also activated if split hyphens were requested with
-% \cs{splithyphens}.
-%
-% When the language is de-activated, de-activate the hyphen and
-% restore the bogus definitions of these macros.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
-\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}%
- \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}%
- \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \cs@deactivatehyphens
- \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
- \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@looseness}
-% \begin{macro}{\looseness}
-% One of the most common situations where an active hyphen will not
-% work properly is the \cs{looseness} primitive. Change its definition
-% so that it deactivates the hyphen if needed.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\cs@looseness\looseness
-\def\looseness{%
- \ifcs@splithyphens
- \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi
- \cs@looseness}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@selectlanguage}
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@main@language}
-% Specifying the |nocaptions| option means that captions and dates
-% are not redefined by default, but they can be switched on later
-% with \cs{captionsslovak} and/or \cs{dateslovak}.
-%
-% We mimic this behavior by redefining \cs{selectlanguage}. This
-% macro is called once at the beginning of the document to set the
-% main language of the document. If this is \cs{cs@main@language},
-% it disables the macros for setting captions and date. In any
-% case, it restores the original definition of \cs{selectlanguage}
-% and expands it.
-%
-% The definition of \cs{selectlanguage} can be shared between Czech
-% and Slovak; the actual language is stored in \cs{cs@main@language}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else
- \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption}
- \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined
- \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage
- \def\selectlanguage{%
- \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect
- \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language
- \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage
- \else
- \expandafter\selectlanguage
- \fi}
- \def\cs@selectlanguage{%
- \cs@tempdisable{captions}%
- \cs@tempdisable{date}%
- \selectlanguage}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cs@tempdisable}
-% \cs{cs@tempdisable} disables a language setup macro temporarily,
-% i.e. the macro with the name of \meta{\#1}|\bbl@main@language|
-% just restores the original definition and purges the saved macro
-% from memory.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\cs@tempdisable#1{%
- \def\@tempa{cs@#1}%
- \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname
- \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{%
- \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \noexpand\@undefined}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% These macros are not needed, once the initialization is over.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language
- \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect
- \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage
- \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The encoding of mathematical fonts should be changed to IL2. This
-% allows to use accented letter in some font families. Besides,
-% documents do not use CM fonts if there are equivalents in CS-fonts,
-% so there is no need to have both bitmaps of CM-font and CS-font.
-%
-% \cs{@font@warning} and \cs{@font@info} are temporarily redefined
-% to avoid annoying font warnings.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined
-\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else
- \def\cs@check@enc{
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble
- \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined
- \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined
- \fi
- \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined}
- \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc}
-\fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{cs@undoiltw@}
-%
-% The thing is that \LaTeXe{} core only supports the T1 encoding
-% and does not bother changing the uc/lc/sfcodes when encoding
-% is switched. :( However, the IL2 encoding \emph{does} change
-% these codes, so if encoding is switched back from IL2, we must
-% also undo the effect of this change to be compatible with
-% \LaTeXe. OK, this is not the right\textsuperscript{TM} solution
-% but it works. Cheers to Petr Ol\v s\'ak.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cs@undoiltw@{%
- \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000
- \sfcode159=1000
- \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000
- \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000
- \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000
- \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000
- \uccode181=149
- \uccode185=153
- \uccode187=155
- \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0
- \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000
- \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{@@enc@update}
-%
-% Redefine the \LaTeXe{} internal function \cs{@@enc@update} to
-% change the encodings correctly.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined
-\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else
- \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update
- \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi
- \cs@enc@update
- \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename
- \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname
- \fi
- \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-\fi\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{slovak-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index c8c7d88326d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovak.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{slovak.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{slovak.ldf}{\from{slovak.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 391f39e7f9d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,302 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{142}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{slovene.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{slovene}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{slovene.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2m Slovene support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `slovene.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Slovenian language definition file. The Slovenian
-% words were contributed by Danilo Zavrtanik, University of
-% Ljubljana (Slovenia, former Yugoslavia).
-% The usage of the active " was introduced by
-% Leon \v{Z}lajpah
-% Jo\v{z}ef Stefan Institute,
-% Jamova 39, Ljubljana,
-% Slovenia
-% e-mail: leon.zlajpah at ijs.si
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{{textsf \1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{slovene.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{slovene.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{slovene-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed babel.sty in babel.com}
-% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1995/11/03}{Replaced `Slovanian' with correct
-% `Slovenian'}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Slovenian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. Contributions were made by Danilo Zavrtanik,
-% University of Ljubljana (YU) and Leon \v{Z}lajpah
-% (\texttt{leon.zlajpah@ijs.si}).} defines all the
-% language-specific macros for the Slovenian language.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:slovene-quote} an overview is given of its
-% purpose. One of the reasons for this is that in the Slovene
-% language some special characters are used.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"c| & |\"c|, also implemented for the
-% lowercase and uppercase s and z. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|). \\
-% |"`| & for Slovene left double quotes (looks like ,,). \\
-% |"'| & for Slovene right double quotes. \\
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (similar to $<<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (similar to $>>$).\\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{slovene.ldf}}\label{tab:slovene-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{slovene}\captionsslovene
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{slovene} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@slovene| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{slovene-1.0b}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no
-% hyphenation patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@slovene\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Slovene}
- \adddialect\l@slovene0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the
-% Slovenian language. The reason for this is that a user might want
-% to switch back and forth between languages.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsslovene}
-% The macro |\captionsslovene| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{slovene-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added extra translations from
-% Josef Leydold, \texttt{leydold@statrix2.wu-wien.ac.at}}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2g}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2h}{1995/07/25}{Added translation of `Proof'}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsslovene{%
- \def\prefacename{Predgovor}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Povzetek}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Poglavje}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatek}%
- \def\contentsname{Kazalo}%
- \def\listfigurename{Slike}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabele}%
- \def\indexname{Stvarno kazalo}% used to be Indeks
- \def\figurename{Slika}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Priloge}%
- \def\ccname{Kopije}%
- \def\headtoname{Prejme}%
- \def\pagename{Stran}%
- \def\seename{glej}%
- \def\alsoname{glej tudi}%
- \def\proofname{Dokaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateslovene}
-% The macro |\dateslovene| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Slovenian dates.
-% \changes{slovene-1.2j}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{slovene-1.2j}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateslovene{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or marec\or april\or maj\or junij\or
- julij\or avgust\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasslovene}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasslovene}
-% The macro |\extrasslovene| performs all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Slovenian language. The macro |\noextrasslovene|
-% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrasslovene|.
-%
-% For Slovene the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary. Other languages in the
-% same document may also use the \texttt{"} character for
-% shorthands; we specify that the slovenian group of shorthands
-% should be used.
-%
-% \changes{slovene-1.2f}{1995/06/04}{Introduced the active \texttt{"}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasslovene{\languageshorthands{slovene}}
-\addto\extrasslovene{\bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{slovene-1.2l}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Slovene}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasslovene{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% First we define shorthands to facilitate the occurence of letters
-% such as \v{c}.
-% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/09/21}{removed shorthand for \texttt{"L}
-% as it is not needed for slovenian}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Then we define access to two forms of quotation marks, similar
-% to the german and french quotation marks.
-% \changes{slovene-1.2j}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% double quote and guillemot characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% then we define two shorthands to be able to specify hyphenation
-% breakpoints that behavew a little different from |\-|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we want to have a shorthand for disabling a ligature.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{slovene-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{slovene}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 86760a5e13f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/slovene.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{slovene.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{slovene.ldf}{\from{slovene.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/sorbian.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/sorbian.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 5fb2d701233..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/sorbian.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,149 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{sorbian.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{lsorbian.ldf}{\from{lsorbian.dtx}{code}}
- \file{usorbian.ldf}{\from{usorbian.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index a1661503d1e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,2758 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \ProvidesFile{spanish.dtx}
-% [2011/10/06 v5.0k Spanish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `spanish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2011
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Spanish Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2011
-%% Javier Bezos (www.tex-tipografia.com)
-%% and
-%% CervanTeX (www.cervantex.es)
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Javier Bezos (preferably)
-%% www.tex-tipografia.com
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% www.latex-project.org
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Spanish language definition file.
-% The original version of this file was written by Javier Bezos.
-% The latest release is available on CTAN:/language/spanish/
-% \fi
-%
-% \iffalse
-%<*filedriver>
-\let\ooverb\verb
-\documentclass[spanish,a4paper]{ltxdoc}
-\let\verb\ooverb
-\usepackage{babel}
-\usepackage{hyperref}
-
-\let\meta\emph
-
-\usepackage{pslatex,mathptmx,color}
-\usepackage[cp1252]{inputenc}
-\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-\newcommand\act[1]{%
- \\%
- \makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{green}{$\surd$}}%
- \textsf{#1}\ignorespaces}
-\newcommand\deact[1]{%
- \\%
- \makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{red}{$\times$}}%
- \texttt{#1}\ignorespaces}
-\newcommand\txt{\makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{blue}{$\Rightarrow$}}\ignorespaces}
-\newcommand\con{\makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{magenta}{$\star$}}\ignorespaces}
-\newcommand\alw{%
- \\%
- \makebox[1.5pc][l]{\textcolor{green}{$\surd$}}%
- Se define siempre, sin depender de un grupo.}
-\newcommand\opp{\qquad Opción de paquete}
-
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-
-\setlength{\arrayrulewidth}{2\arrayrulewidth}
-\newcommand\toprule[1]{\cline{1-#1}\\[-2ex]}
-\newcommand\botrule[1]{\\[.6ex]\cline{1-#1}}
-\newcommand\hmk{$\string|$}
-
-\newenvironment{decl}[1][]%
- {\par\small\addvspace{4.5ex plus 1ex}%
- \vskip-\parskip
- \ifx\relax#1\relax
- \def\@decl@date{}%
- \else
- \def\@decl@date{\NEWfeature{#1}}%
- \fi
- \noindent
- \begin{tabular}{|l|}\hline\ignorespaces}%
- {\\\hline\end{tabular}\nobreak\@decl@date\par\nobreak
- \vspace{2.3ex}\vskip-\parskip}
-
-\newcommand\New[1]{%
- \leavevmode\marginpar{\raggedleft\sffamily Nuevo en #1}}
-
-\newcommand\nm[1]{\unskip\,$^{#1}$}
-\newcommand\nt[1]{\quad$^{#1}$\,\ignorespaces}
-
-\makeatletter
- \renewcommand\@biblabel{}
-\makeatother
-
-\newcommand\DOT[1]{\lsc{DOT},~#1}
-\newcommand\DTL[1]{\lsc{DTL},~#1}
-\newcommand\MEA[1]{\lsc{MEA},~#1}
-
-\raggedright
-\setlength{\parindent}{0em}
-\setlength{\parskip}{3pt}
-
-\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-4pc}
-\addtolength{\textwidth}{7pc}
-
-\OnlyDescription
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{spanish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-%
-% \begingroup
-% \ifx\langdeffile\undefined
-%
-%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by spanish.dtx =========
-%
-%
-% \title{Estilo \textsf{spanish}\\
-% para el sistema \babel.\footnote{Este
-% archivo está actualmente en la versión
-% 5.0k con fecha 6 de octubre del 2011. ^^A@#
-% Esta copia del manual se compuso el~\today.}}
-%
-% \author{Javier Bezos\footnote{Por favor, envíen comentarios y
-% sugerencias en http://www.tex-tipografia.com/spanish.html. Han
-% colaborado de una u otra forma muchas personas, a las cuales
-% agradezco sus comentarios y sugerencias; en particular, han sido muy
-% activos Juan Luis Varona y José Luis Rivera. Para más información
-% sobre los criterios seguidos, véase la referencia: Javier Bezos,
-% \textit{Tipografía española con \TeX.} Para información sobre
-% actualizaciones: http://www.cervantex.es/}}
-%
-% \date{6 de octubre del 2011} ^^A@#
-%
-% \maketitle
-%
-% {\small\tableofcontents}
-%
-% \section*{Símbolos empleados}
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item[\textcolor{blue}{$\Rightarrow$}] Macros para
-% ser usadas en el texto (generan texto o lo estructuran).
-% \item[\textcolor{magenta}{$\star$}] Macros de
-% configuración y preferencias.
-% \item[\textcolor{green}{$\surd$}] Grupo que
-% activa la orden.
-% \item[\textcolor{red}{$\times$}] Opciones de
-% paquete que anulan la orden. En redonda van las destinadas
-% específicamente a anular ese punto, y en cursiva las que además
-% anulan otros aspectos del estilo.
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \section{Uso de \textsf{spanish} para babel}
-%
-% El estilo \textsf{spanish} para babel adapta una serie de elementos
-% de los documentos de \LaTeX\ al castellano, tanto en las
-% traducciones como en la tipografía. Para usarlo, basta con dar
-% la opción \textsf{spanish} al cargar babel: \begin{verbatim}
-% \usepackage[spanish]{babel} \end{verbatim}
-%
-% Esto es todo lo que hace falta para conseguir que el documento tenga
-% un aspecto español. En caso de estar en México, véase, además, el
-% apartado \ref{paises} (<<Opciones por países>>):\footnote{En próximas
-% versiones se añadirán más países.}
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\usepackage[spanish,mexico]{babel}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% El estilo \textsf{spanish} se puede cargar junto con otras lenguas (véase el
-% manual de babel). Si \textsf{spanish} es la última de las lenguas cargadas,
-% entonces se considera la lengua principal y se hacen una serie de
-% ajustes tipográficos adicionales. En particular, se modifican
-% órdenes y entornos como:
-%\begin{center}
-%\begin{tabular}{lll}
-% |enumerate| & |\roman| & |\section|\\
-% |itemize| & |\fnsymbol| & |\subsection|\\
-% |\%| & |\alph| & |\subsubsection|\\
-% & |\Alph| & \\
-%\end{tabular}
-%\end{center}
-%
-% El estilo está pensado para que sea muy configurable. Para ello, se
-% proporcionan una serie de opciones de paquete, que en caso de
-% emplearse deben ir \textit{después} de \textsf{spanish}. Por
-% ejemplo:
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \usepackage[french,spanish,es-noindentfirst]{babel} \end{verbatim}
-% carga los estilos para el francés y el español, esta última como
-% lengua principal; además, evita que \textsf{spanish} sangre el
-% primer párrafo tras un título. Otras opciones se pueden ajustar por
-% medio de macros, en particular aquellas que se puede desear cambiar
-% en medio del documento (por ejemplo, el formato de la fecha).
-%
-% Los cambios están organizados en una serie de grupos:
-% \textsf{captions, date, text, math} y \textsf{shorthands}.
-% Los tres ultimos corresponden a lo que en babel sería normalmente
-% \textsf{extras}.
-%
-% \section{\textsf{spanish} como lengua principal}
-%
-% Si la lengua principal es \textsf{spanish}, se introducen una serie de
-% cambios en el momento de cargar la lengua para adaptar varios
-% elementos a los usos tipográficos españoles. Estos cambios
-% funcionan con las clases estándar "+--con otras tal vez alguno de
-% ellos no tenga efecto--- y persisten durante todo el documento.
-% Ninguno de ellos es necesario para componer el documento, aunque
-% naturalmente el resultado será distinto.
-%
-% \subsection{Listas}
-%
-% \begin{decl} \txt |\begin{enumerate} ... \end{enumerate}|%
-% \deact{es-nolists, es-noenumerate, \textit{es-nolayout, es-minimal,
-% es-sloppy}} \end{decl}
-%
-% Usa la siguiente secuencia:\\
-% \quad 1.\\
-% \qquad \emph{a})\\
-% \quad\qquad 1)\\
-% \qquad\qquad \emph{a$'$})
-%
-% \begin{decl} \txt |\begin{itemize} ... \end{itemize}|%
-% \deact{es-nolists, es-noitemize, \textit{es-nolayout, es-minimal,
-% es-sloppy}} \end{decl}
-%
-% Usa la siguiente secuencia:\\
-% \quad\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex
-% {\hss\vrule height .95ex width .8ex depth -.15ex\hss}\\
-% \qquad\textbullet\\
-% \quad\qquad $\circ$\\
-% \qquad\qquad $\diamond$
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishdashitems \spanishsignitems|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Dos órdenes para cambiar a otros estilos en
-% |itemize|: rayas en todos los niveles y \textbullet{} $\circ$
-% $\diamond$ $\triangleright$, respectivamente.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-nolists|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Desactiva los cambios en las listas (aunque |\es@enumerate| y
-% |\es@itemize| siguen disponibles).
-%
-% \subsection{Contadores}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\alph \Alph|\deact{\textit{es-nolayout, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Incluyen la eñe.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\fnsymbol|\deact{\textit{es-nolayout, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Se emplean uno, dos, tres... asteriscos (*, **, ***, etc.),
-% en lugar de la sucesión angloamericana de cruces, barras,
-% etc.\footnote{\DOT{162}.}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\roman|\deact{es-ucroman, es-lcroman, \textit{es-nolayout, es-minimal, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Como en castellano no se usan números romanos en minúscula,
-% |\roman| se redefine para que los dé en
-% versalitas.\footnote{\DTL{197}.} La opción de paquete
-% |es-minimal| los desactiva con |es-ucroman|, y |es-sloppy|
-% con |es-lcroman|.
-
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-ucroman|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Opción de paquete adicional, que pasa todos los romanos a versales,
-% en caso de que no se quiera la versalita o por incompatibilidad con
-% algún paquete que use de forma indebida |\roman|.\footnote{En
-% el momento de escribir esto, como mínimo son: \textsf{dramatist,
-% epiolmec, flashcards, lipsum, ntheorem, ntheorem-hyper,
-% texmate.} Otros paquetes como \textsf{hyperref, easy} y \textsf{exam}
-% ya han sido corregidos.}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-lcroman|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Como último recurso, de haber problemas con el valor predeterminado
-% o con |es-ucroman|, con esta opción de paquete puede dejarse la
-% definición de \LaTeX, aunque en español los romanos en minúscula
-% sean una falta ortográfica.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-preindex|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% \textit{MakeIndex} no puede entender la forma en que |\roman|
-% escribe el número de página, por lo que elimina las líneas
-% afectadas. Por ello el archivo |.idx| ha de ser convertido antes de
-% procesarlo con \textit{MakeIndex}. Con este paquete se proporciona
-% la utilidad |romanidx.sty| que se encarga de ello. Simplemente se
-% compone ese archivo con \LaTeX{} y a continuación se responde a las
-% preguntas que se formulan; el archivo resultante, es decir, el que
-% hay que procesar con \textit{MakeIndex,} tiene la extensión
-% \texttt{eix}. Este proceso no es necesario si no se introdujo
-% ninguna entrada de índice en páginas numeradas con |\roman| (lo
-% cual será lo más normal). Si un símbolo propio de
-% \emph{MakeIndex} generara problemas, debe encerrarse entre llaves:
-% \verb={"|}=.
-%
-% Con la opción de paquete |es-preindex| se llama desde el
-% documento |romanidx.sty|, de forma que no es necesaria su ejecución
-% aparte. Tampoco pide ningún dato, sino que ha de darse en el
-% documento principal con la siguiente orden.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishindexchars|\marg{encap}\marg{open\_range}\marg{close\_range}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% De usarse |es-preindex| con un estilo de índice que no tiene los
-% valores predeterminados de estos tres caracteres especiales, hay que
-% darlos con esta orden (es decir, por omisión es
-% \verb+\spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}+).
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishscroman \spanishlcroman \spanishucroman|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Finalmente, tres macros permiten cambios temporales en el
-% documento de |\roman| a versalitas, minúsculas y mayúsculas,
-% respectivamente.
-%
-% \subsection{Otros}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\guillemotleft \guillemotright|\deact{\textit{es-nolayout, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Las comillas latinas para |OT1| son menos angulosas y se generan
-% con unas puntas de flecha de |lasy|. En T1 no hay cambios.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\section|, |\subsection|, etc.,
-% |\tableofcontents|\deact{es-nosectiondot, es-noindentfirst, \textit{es-nolayout,
-% es-mininal, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Los números en los títulos están seguidos de un punto
-% tanto en el texto como en el índice. Además,
-% el primer párrafo tras el título no elimina la sangría.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-nolayout|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Si no se desea ninguno de estos cambios, basta con usar esta opción
-% de paquete.
-%
-% \section{Traducciones}
-%
-% \subsection{Nombres}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\refname|, |\tablename|, |\contentsname|, etc.\\
-% \con |\spanishrefname|, |\spanishtablename|, |\spanishcontentsname|, etc.
-% \act{captions}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Establecen las traducciones al castellano de algunos términos,
-% tal y como se describe en el cuadro 1. Para cambiar el texto
-% de ellas, conviene redefinir la forma que empieza con
-% |\spanish...|, ya que, al contrario que las órdenes
-% |\refname|, |\abstractname|, etc., se pueden redefinir cuando
-% se desee y entran en acción al momento y de forma permanente, sin
-% necesidad de |\addto|.
-%
-% \begin{table}
-% \center\small
-% \newcommand\name[2]{%
-% \texttt{\textbackslash#1name}&%
-% \texttt{\textbackslash spanish#1name}&}
-% \caption{Traducciones}
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l@{\hspace{3em}}l}
-% \toprule3
-% \name{ref} & Referencias\\
-% \name{abstract} & Resumen\\
-% \name{bib} & Bibliografía\\
-% \name{chapter} & Capítulo\\
-% \name{appendix} & Apéndice\\
-% \name{contents} & índice general\nm{a}\\
-% \name{listfigure} & índice de figuras\\
-% \name{listtable} & índice de cuadros\\
-% \name{index} & índice alfabético\\
-% \name{figure} & Figura\\
-% \name{table} & Cuadro\\
-% \name{part} & Parte\\
-% \name{encl} & Adjunto\\
-% \name{cc} & Copia a\\
-% \name{headto} & A\\
-% \name{page} & página\\
-% \name{see} & véase\\
-% \name{also} & véase también\\
-% \name{proof} & Demostración
-% \botrule3
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-%
-% \begin{minipage}{10cm}\footnotesize
-% \nt{a} Pero sólo <<índice>> en \textsf{article}.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-uppernames|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Aunque sea un anglicismo,\footnote{\DOT{197}.} con esta opción de
-% paquete los sustantivos tienen mayúscula inicial.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-tabla|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% En caso de que todos los cuadros sean tablas, esta opción permite
-% cambiar \textit{cuadro} por \textit{tabla} (en cierto modo,
-% \textit{cuadro} es a \textit{tabla} lo que \texttt{table} es a
-% \texttt{tabular}).
-%
-% \subsection{Fechas}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\today \Today|
-% \act{date}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Fecha actual, en la forma \textit{1 de enero de
-% 2004.} Con |\Today| el mes va en mayúscula.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishdatedel \spanishdatede|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Con la primera se cambia el formato para que a partir del 2000 se
-% emplee \textit{del} y no \textit{de} (recomendado). La segunda
-% hace justo lo contrario (predeterminado).
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishreverseddate|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Cambia el formato de |\today| a la forma
-% \textit{enero 1 del 2004.} Con |\Today| el mes va en
-% mayúscula.
-%
-% \section{Abreviaciones (\textit{shorthands})}
-%
-% La lista completa se puede encontrar en el cuadro 2. En los
-% siguientes apartados se darán más detalles sobre algunas de
-% ellas.
-%
-% \begin{table}[!t]
-% \center\small
-% \caption{Abreviaciones}
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{3em}}l@{\hspace{3em}}l}
-% \toprule2
-% |á é í ó ú| & á é í ó ú\\
-% |á é í ó ú| & á é í ó ú\\
-% |ñ ñ| & ñ ñ\nm{a}\\
-% |"u "U| & "u "U\\
-% |"i "I| & "i "I\\
-% |"a "A "o "O| & Ordinales: 1"a, 1"A, 1"o, 1"O\\
-% |"er "ER| & Ordinales: 1"er, 1"ER\\
-% |"c "C| & "c "C\\
-% |"rr "RR| & rr, pero -r cuando se divide\\
-% |"y| & El antiguo signo para <<y>>\\
-% |"-| & Como |\-|, pero permite más divisiones\\
-% |"=| & Como |-|, pero permite mas divisiones\nm{b}\\
-% |"~| & Guión estilístico\nm{c}\\
-% |"+ "+- "+--| & Como |-|, |--| y |---|, pero sin división\\
-% |~- ~-- ~---| & Lo mismo que el anterior.\\
-% |""| & Permite mas divisiones antes y después\nm{d}\\
-% |"/| & Una barra algo más baja\\
-% \verb+"|+ & Divide un logotipo\nm{e}\\
-% |"< ">| & "< ">\\
-% |"` "'| & |\begin{quoting}| |\end{quoting}|\nm{f}\\
-% |<< >>| & Lo mismo que el anterior.\\
-% |?` !`| & ?` !`\nm{g}\\
-%|"? "!| & "? "! alineados con la linea base\nm{h}
-% \botrule2
-% \end{tabular}
-%
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-%
-% \begin{minipage}{11cm}
-% \footnotesize
-% \nt{a} La forma |~n| no está activada por omisión a partir de
-% la versión 5.
-% \nt{b} |"=| viene a ser lo mismo que |""-""|.
-% \nt{c} Esta abreviación tiene un uso distinto
-% en otras lenguas de babel.
-% \nt{d} Como en <<entrada/salida>>.
-% \nt{e} Carece de uso en castellano.
-% \nt{f} Véase sec.~2.7.
-% \nt{g} No proporcionadas por este paquete, sino por cada tipo;
-% figuran aquí como simple recordatorio.
-% \nt{h} útiles en rótulos en mayúsculas.
-% \end{minipage}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Los caracteres usados como abreviaciones se comportan
-% como otras órdenes de \TeX{} y por tanto se hace caso
-% omiso de los espacios que le puedan seguir: \verb*|' a| es lo mismo
-% que |á|. Eso también implica que tras esos caracteres no
-% puede ir una llave de cierre y que deberá escribirse
-% |{... '{}}| en lugar de |{... '}|; en modo matemático no hay
-% ningún problema y |$x^{a'}$| ($x^{a'}$) es válido.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |activeacute|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Para poder usar apóstrofos como abreviaciones de acentos es
-% necesaria esta opción en |\usepackage|. Puede cambiarse este
-% comportamiento con |\es@acuteactive| en el archivo de
-% configuración |spanish.cfg|; en ese caso los apóstrofos se activan
-% siempre.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-tilden|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Esta orden activa las abreviaciones |~n| y |~N| por compatibilidad
-% con versiones anteriores de \textsf{spanish} (y siempre que no se
-% empleado también |es-notilde|). En la versión 5 no están
-% activadas de forma predeterminada.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishdeactivate|\marg{caracteres}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Permite desactivar las abreviaciones correspondientes a los
-% caracteres dados. Para evitar entrar en conflicto con otras lenguas,
-% al salir de \textsf{spanish} se reactivan,\footnote{El punto para
-% los decimales no es estrictamente una abreviación y no se
-% reactiva.} por lo que si se desea que
-% persistan hay que añadir la orden a |\shorthandsspanish| con
-%|\addto|. La orden |\renewcommand\shorthandsspanish{}| es una
-% variante optimizada de
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \addto\shorthandsspanish{\spanishdeactivate{.'"~<>}}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-noshorthands|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% No activa ninguna abreviación.
-%
-% \subsection{Coma decimal}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |.|\textit{número}\act{shorthands}\deact{es-nodecimaldot,
-% \textit{es-noshorthands, es-minimal, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% En \textsf{spanish}, el punto en matemáticas sirve como marca decimal
-% genérica que puede representarse como coma o punto; funciona
-% por tanto como marcado lógico del signo para decimales. Por
-% omisión, se siguen las normas internacionales ISO y la legislación
-% de diversos países (como de España y México) de emplear la coma.
-% Ya que \TeX\ usa la coma como separador en intervalos o expresiones
-% similares, lo que añade un espacio fino, \textsf{spanish}
-% interpreta todo punto en modo matemático de esta forma siempre
-% que esté seguido de una cifra, pero no en otras circunstancias:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |$1\,234.567\,890$| \quad \= $1\,234.567\,890$\\
-% |$f(1,2)=12.34.$| \> $f(1,2)=12.34.$\\
-% |$1{.}000$| \> $1{.}000$, pero\\
-% |1.000| \> 1.000, pues no es modo matemático.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-%
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\decimalcomma \decimalpoint \spanishdecimal|\marg{math}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Las dos primeras establecen si se usa una coma (predeterminado)
-% o un punto, mientras que |\spanishdecimal|\marg{math}
-% permite darle una definición arbitraria.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-nodecimaldot|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Cancela el mecanismo del punto decimal.
-%
-% \subsection{División de palabras}
-%
-% \textsf{Spanish} comprueba la codificación en el momento en que se
-% usa un acento: si es |OT1|, se toman medidas para facilitar la
-% división, que pese a todo nunca será perfecta, y si es |T1|,
-% se accede directamente al carácter correspondiente.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |"- "= "~|\act{shorthands}
-% \deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Para matizar la división de palabras hay cuatro posibilidades, dos
-% de ellas con el método de abreviaciones:
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item |\-| es un guión opcional que no permite
-% más divisiones,
-%
-% \item |"-| es similar pero permite más divisiones,
-%
-% \item |-| es un guión que no permite más divisiones ni
-% antes ni después, y
-%
-% \item |"=| es el equivalente que sí las permite,\footnote{No
-% es una buena idea usar esta orden, pero en
-% medidas muy cortas puede resultar necesario.}
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-% Por ejemplo (con las posibles divisiones marcadas con \hmk):
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |Zaragoza-Barcelona|\qquad \= Zaragoza-\hmk Barcelona\\
-% |Zaragoza"=Barcelona| \>
-% Za\hmk ra\hmk go\hmk za-\hmk Bar\hmk ce\hmk lo\hmk na\\
-% |semi\-abierto| \> semi\hmk abierto\\
-% |semi"-abierto| \> se\hmk mi\hmk abier\hmk to.\footnotemark
-% \end{tabbing}\footnotetext{Justo antes y después de
-% {\ttfamily\string"\string-} y {\ttfamily\string"\string=} se
-% aplican los correspondientes
-% valores de {\ttfamily\string\...hyphenmin} lo que implica que la
-% divisón semia\hmk bierto no es posible.
-% éste es un comportamiento correcto.}
-% \end{quote}
-%
-% Con la abreviación |"~|, el guión
-% también aparece al comienzo de la siguiente línea. Por ejemplo:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |infra"~rojo| \quad \= in\hmk fra-ro\hmk jo, pero infra-\hmk-rojo.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-%\txt |"+ "+- "+--|\act{shorthands}\deact{\emph{no-shorthands,
-% es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%\vskip-1.5pc\vskip0pt
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |~- ~-- ~---|\act{shorthands}\deact{es-notilde, \emph{no-shorthands,
-% es-minimal, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-
-% Evitan divisiones: |~-|, que resulta útil para expresar una serie
-% de números sin que el guión los divida (12~-14, |12~-14|), y
-% |~---|, que es la forma que debe usarse para abrir incisos con
-% rayas, ya que de lo contrario puede haber una división entre la
-% raya de abrir y la palabra que le sigue:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-%|Los conciertos ~---o % academias--- que organizó...|
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-%
-% También pueden emplearse para esta misma función las abreviaciones
-% |"+|, |"+-| y |"+---|. Mientras que este guión evita toda posible
-% división en los elementos que une, la raya (---) y la semirraya
-% (--) las permiten en las palabras que le precedan o le sigan.
-%
-% Otra abreviación es |"rr| que sirve para el
-% único cambio de escritura del castellano en caso de haber división.
-% La \lsc{RAE} indica que al añadir un prefijo que termina en vocal a
-% una palabra que comienza con \emph{r}, ésta última debe
-% doblarse a menos que se unan por un guión. Por ejemplo:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |extra"rradio| \quad \= ex\hmk trarra\hmk dio, pero extra-\hmk
-% radio.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-% No hay acuerdo sobre si esta regla y otras similares han de
-% aplicarse o no, aunque la opinión mayoritaria actual está en
-% contra.
-%
-% \subsection{Otros}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |"/|\act{shorthands}\deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Es una utilidad tipográfica más que específicamente española.
-% En ciertos tipos, como Times, el extremo inferior de la barra está
-% en la línea de base y expresiones como <<am/pm>> resultan poco
-% estéticas. |"/| produce una barra que, de ser necesario, se baja
-% ligeramente. Computer Modern tiene una barra bien diseñada y no es
-% posible ilustrar aquí este punto, pero se escribiría
-% |am"/pm|.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |"y|\act{shorthand}\deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% El signo \textit{et tironiano}, que en español se empleó muy a
-% menudo, se puede <<imitar>> con |"y|, siempre que se haya cargado el
-% paquete |graphics|; de no ser así, se usa la letra $\tau$, aunque
-% la variante normal de \TeX{} no es demasiado apropiada.
-%
-% \section{Funciones de texto y matemáticas}
-%
-% \subsection{Abreviaturas}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\sptext|\marg{texto}\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Pone un punto y le sigue el argumento en voladitas. Para
-% abreviaturas como |adm\sptext{ón}| que da adm\sptext{ón}. Hay seis
-% abreviaciones asociadas a ordinales: |"a|, |"A|, |"o|, |"O|, |"er| y
-% |"ER| que equivalen a |\sptext{a}|, etc. Muchos tipos
-% añaden un pequeño subrayado que debe evitarse, y por tanto no se
-% deben escribir los ordinales con \textsf{inputenc}.
-%
-% Para ajustar el tamaño lo mejor posible, se usa el de
-% índices en curso. Esto funciona bien salvo para tamaños muy
-% grandes o muy pequeños, donde los resultados son meramente
-% aceptables.
-%
-% En Plain \TeX{} se ejecuta |\sptextfont| para la
-% letra voladita, de forma que |{\bf\let\sptextfont\bf 1"o}| da el
-% resultado correcto (|\mit| si es para cursiva). Para usar un tipo
-% nuevo con |\sptext| hay que definir también las variantes
-% matemáticas con |\newfam|.
-%
-% \subsection{Espaciado}
-%
-% El espaciado español difiere relativamente poco del inglés, con
-% alguna excepción; una de ellas es que en \textsf{spanish}
-% |\frenchspacing| está activo.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\...|\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Puntos suspensivos menos espaciados que |\dots|. El espacio
-% que sigue se conserva:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |\... y solo estaba\... ella.|\quad\=\... y solo estaba\... ella.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-% También podrían escribirse los tres puntos sin más |...|, y en
-% la práctica no hay diferencia, a menos que se cambie el
-% valor del espacio tras punto; en ese caso, la forma con barra
-% da los valores apropiados \emph{dentro} de una sentencia, y
-% los tres puntos \emph{al final} de ella. Esta orden no
-% interfiere con el valor original de |\.| (un punto suprascrito).
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\%|\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-minimal, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Se añade un espacio fino antes del signo (en concreto |\,|), con
-% lo cual se puede "<recuperar"> con su opuesto |\!| si |\%| no sigue
-% a una cifra; también se puede emplear |\percentsign|).
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishplainpercent|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Orden para que |\%| no añada el espacio fino. Puede ser útil
-% en cuadros, si |\%| aparece siempre entre paréntesis.
-%
-% \subsection{Fuentes}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\lsc|\marg{texto}\act{text}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Pasa \textit{texto} a versalitas:
-% \begin{quote}\small\begin{tabbing}
-% |\lsc{RAE}| \quad \= \lsc{RAE}\\
-% |\lsc{ReNFe}| \quad \= \lsc{ReNFe}.\\
-% |siglo \lsc{XVII}| \quad \= siglo \lsc{XVII}\\
-% |capítulo \lsc{II}| \quad \= capítulo \lsc{II}.
-% \end{tabbing}\end{quote}
-%
-% Para evitar que con un tipo que carece de versalitas acabe
-% apareciendo (por substitución) un texto de minúsculas se intenta
-% usar en estos casos las versales \emph{reales} de un tamaño menor
-% (\LaTeX\ tiende a sustituir versalitas por versalitas, pero hay
-% excepciones, como con las negritas).
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\í|\alw
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Lo mismo que |í|.
-%
-% \subsection{Entrecomillados}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\begin{quoting} ... \end{quoting}|\alw
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% El entorno |quoting| entrecomilla un texto, añadiendo comillas de
-% seguir al comienzo de cada párrafo en su interior.\footnote{Se puede
-% encontrar una detallada exposición de las comillas en \DTL{44 ss.}
-% De ahí se ha tomado algún ejemplo.}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |<< >>|\act{shorthands}\deact{es-noquoting, \textit{es-noshorthands, es-minimal,
-% es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%\vskip-1.5pc\vskip0pt
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |"` "'|\act{shorthands}\deact{\textit{es-noshorthands, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% También se pueden emplear las abreviaciones |<<| y |>>| (o
-% alternativamente |"`| y |"'|) que se limitan a llamar a |quoting|,
-% que por ser entorno considera sus cambios internos como locales.
-% (Es decir, |<< ... >>| implica |{<< ... >>}|.) Las abreviaciones
-% |"<| y |">| continúan dando sin más los caracteres de comillas de
-% abrir y cerrar, respectivamente.
-%
-% Por ejemplo:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% <<Se llaman <<comillas de seguir>> a las que son de cierre,
-% pero se colocan al comienzo de cada párrafo cuando se transcribe
-% un texto entrecomillado con más de un párrafo.
-%
-% En su interior, como de costumbre, se usan inglesas.>>
-%\end{verbatim}
-% cuyo resultado es:
-% \begin{quotation}\small
-% <<Se llaman <<comillas de seguir>> a las que son de cierre,
-% pero se colocan al comienzo de cada párrafo cuando se transcribe
-% un texto entrecomillado con más de un párrafo.
-%
-% En su interior, como de costumbre, se usan inglesas.>>
-% \end{quotation}
-%
-% También se añaden comillas de seguir en listas, excepto con la
-% opción \texttt{es-nolists} o cualquier otra que las desactive.
-%
-% Este entorno se puede redefinir, como por ejemplo:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \renewenvironment{quoting}{\itshape}{}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% pero en principio no implica un nuevo párrafo, ya que
-% está pensado para ser usado también en el texto.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\lquoti| |\rquoti| |\lquotii| |\rquotii| |\lquotiii|
-% |\rquotiii|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Controlan las comillas en |quoting|, según el
-% nivel en que nos encontremos. |\lquoti| son las comillas de abrir
-% más exteriores, |\lquotii| las de segundo nivel, etc., y lo mismo
-% para las de cerrar con |\rquoti|... Para las de seguir siempre se
-% usan las de cerrar. Los valores predefinidos están en el cuadro 3.
-% \begin{table}
-% \center\small
-% \caption{Entrecomillados}
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{5em}}l}
-% \toprule2
-% |\lquoti| &|"<|\\
-% |\rquoti| &|">|\\
-% |\lquotii| &|``|\\
-% |\rquotii| &|''|\\
-% |\lquotiii| &|`|\\
-% |\rquotiii| &|'|
-% \botrule2
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\activatequoting \deactivatequoting|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Las incompatibilidades potenciales de estas abreviaciones son
-% enormes. Por ejemplo, en \textsf{ifthen} se cancelan las
-% comparaciones entre números;\,\footnote{Y en \texttt{\textbackslash
-% ifnum},
-% \texttt{\textbackslash ifdim}, etc., usado por los desarrolladores en
-% los paquetes.} también
-% resultan inoperantes |@>>>| y |@<<<| de
-% \textsf{amstex}.\footnote{Aunque en
-% este caso cabe usar los sinónimos |@)))| y |@(((|.}
-% Por ello, se da la posibilidad de cancelarlas y reactivarlas con
-% estas órdenes, aunque si se está usando
-% \textsf{xmltex} ya se
-% desactivan por completo de forma automática. El entorno
-% |quoting| siempre permanece disponible.\footnote{Algunos tipos
-% disponen de esta ligadura de forma interna para
-% generar los caracteres de comillas, por lo que en ellos también
-% podemos usarlos siempre, aunque los ajustes proporcionados por
-% \textsf{spanish} se pueden perder; por otra parte, tampoco se
-% usan demasiado a menudo.}
-%
-% \subsection{Funciones matemáticas}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\lim \limsup \liminf \bmod \pmod \sen \tg|
-% etc.\act{math}\deact{\textit{es-minimal, es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Tradicionalmente, las abreviaciones de lo que en \TeX\ se conocen
-% como operadores se han formado a partir del nombre castellano, lo
-% que implica la presencia del acento en lím (en sus tres formas
-% |\lim|, |\limsup| y |\liminf|), máx, mín, ínf y mód (en sus dos
-% formas |\bmod| y |\pmod|).
-%
-% Con \textsf{spanish} pueden seguirse varias convenciones con ayuda
-% de las siguientes órdenes:
-% \begin{decl} \con |\accentedoperators| |\unaccentedoperators|
-% \end{decl}
-% Activa o desactiva los acentos.
-% Por omisión se acentúan, como por ejemplo: $\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$
-% (|$\lim_{x\to 0}(1/x)$|).
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spacedoperators| |\unspacedoperators|
-% \end{decl}
-% Activa o desactiva el espacio entre "<arc"> y la función.
-% Lo habitual ha sido con espacio; así pues, por omisión
-% se espacia.
-%
-% También se añaden |\sen|, |\arcsen|, |\tg| y |\arctg|,
-% que dan las funciones respectivas.
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\spanishoperators|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Otras funciones trigonométricas se encuentran almacenadas en el
-% parámetro |\spanishoperators|, que inicialmente incluye cotg,
-% cosec, senh y tgh. La razón por la que estas funciones se han
-% separado es porque su forma no está normalizada en el ámbito
-% hispanohablante. De esta forma se puede cambiar por otras con, por
-% ejemplo:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \renewcommand{\spanishoperators}{ctg arc\,ctg sh ch th}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% (separadas con espacio). Cuando se selecciona \textsf{spanish} se crean
-% órdenes con esos nombres
-% y que dan esas funciones (siempre con |\nolimits|). Además de
-% las letras sin acentuar se aceptan las órdenes |\,| y |\acute|, que
-% se pasan por alto para formar el nombre. Por ejemplo, |arc\,ctg|
-% se escribe en el documento con
-% |\arcctg|, |M\acute{a}x| como |\Max| y |cr\acute{i}t| como |\crit|
-% (hay que usar |i| y no |\dotlessi|).
-% La orden |\,| responde a |\|(|un|)|spacedoperators|, y |\acute|
-% a |\|(|un|)|accentedoperators|.
-%
-% Conviene que |\spanishoperators| esté en el preámbulo del
-% documento en sí, antes de |\selectspanish| o de
-% |\begin{document}|.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \txt |\dotlessi|\act{math}\deact{\textit{es-sloppy}}
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% La \textit{i} sin punto también es accesible directamente en modo
-% matemático con |\dotlessi|, de forma que se puede escribir
-% |\acute{\dotlessi}|. Por ejemplo,
-% |$V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$| da
-% $V_{\mathbf{cr\acute{\dotlessi}t}}$.
-%
-%
-% \section{Opciones generales}
-%
-% Están pensadas principalmente para documentos basados en una clase
-% o un estilo editorial muy preciso que no debe tocarse. Para conocer
-% los cambios exactos, véanse las diferentes entradas que describen
-% las funciones de \textsf{spanish}.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-minimal|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Anula la mayoría de los cambios pero deja unas cuantas utilidades
-% que pueden resultar utiles en el momento de escribir el texto.
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |es-sloppy|\opp
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Anula, además, todas las ligaduras sin excepción, la eñe en listas y los
-% grupos \textsf{text} y \textsf{math}.
-%
-% \section{Selección}
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% |\selectspanish|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Por omisión, \babel{} deja <<dormidas>> las lenguas hasta que se
-% llega a |\begin{document}| con el fin de evitar conflictos por
-% las abreviaciones; a cambio,
-% se priva de la posibilidad de usar las lenguas en el preámbulo
-% en órdenes como |\savebox|, |\title|, |\newtheorem|, etc.
-%
-% La orden |\selectspanish| permite activar \textsf{spanish} con sus
-% extensiones y abreviaciones antes de
-% |\begin{document}|.\footnote{Algunos detalles, que
-% apenas afectan a \textsf{spanish}, siguen sin activarse hasta el
-% comienzo del documento.}
-% De esta forma, podríamos decir
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \documentclass{book}
-% \usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
-% \usepackage[cp1252]{inputenc}
-% \usepackage[spanish,activeacute,es-notilde]{babel}
-% ... % Mas paquetes
-%
-% \selectspanish
-%
-% \title{Título}
-% \author{Autor}
-% \newcommand{\pste}{para"-psicológicamente}
-% ... % Mas definiciones
-%
-% \begin{document}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \section{Adaptación}
-%
-% \subsection{Opciones por países}
-% \label{paises}
-%
-% % \begin{decl} \con |mexico| \quad |mexico-com|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% La primera cambia \textit{cuadro} a \textit{tabla} y desactiva tanto
-% |<||<>||>| como el punto decimal. También cambia
-% |"`| y |"'| a ``\,`\,"<\,">\,'\,''. Es decir, aparte de
-% redefinir las comillas, equivale a:
-% a:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-%\usepackage[spanish,es-nodecimaldot,es-tabla,es-noquoting]{spanish}
-%\end{verbatim}
-% La segunda es similar
-% pero sí activa el punto decimal. (Obsérvese que no van precedidas
-% de |es-|.)
-%
-% Probablemente, esta opción también sea apropiada en algunos
-% países de América Central y del Sur.
-%
-% \subsection{Configuración}
-%
-% En sus últimas versiones, \babel{} ofrece la posibilidad
-% de cargar automáticamente un archivo con el mismo nombre que
-% el principal, pero con extensión |.cfg|. \textsf{Spanish}
-% proporciona unas pocas órdenes para ser usadas en este archivo:
-%
-% \begin{decl}
-% \con |\es@activeacute|
-% \end{decl}
-% Activa las abreviaciones con apóstrofos, sin que sea
-% necesario incluir |activeacute| como opción en |\usepackage|.
-%
-% \begin{decl} \con |\es@enumerate{<leveli>}|%
-% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\alw
-% \end{decl}
-% Cambia los valores preestablecidos por \textsf{spanish} para
-% |enumerate|. \textit{leveln} consiste en una letra, que
-% indica qué formato tendrá el número, seguida
-% de cualquier texto. La letra tiene que ser: |1| (arábigo),
-% |a| (minúscula \emph{cursiva}\,\footnote{La letra es cursiva
-% pero no los signos que le puedan seguir. Más bien debería
-% decirse destacada, ya que se usa |\string\emph|.
-% Véase \DTL{11}.}), |A| (versal),
-% |i| (romano \emph{versalita}), |I| (romano versal) o
-% finalmente |o| (ordinal\,\footnote{Lo normal es no añadir ningún
-% signo tras ordinal.}).
-%
-% Esta orden no está pensada para hacer cambios elaborados, sino
-% sólo meros reajustes. Los valores preestablecidos
-% equivalen a
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \es@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$)}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{decl} \con |\es@itemize{<leveli>}|%
-% |{<levelii>}{<leveliii>}{<leveliv>}|\alw
-% \end{decl}
-% Lo mismo para |itemize|, sólo que los argumentos se
-% usan de forma literal. Los valores originales de \LaTeX{} son
-% similares a
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \es@itemize{\textbullet}{\normalfont\bfseries\textendash}
-% {\textasteriskcentered}{\textperiodcentered}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{decl}\con |\es@operators|\act{math}
-% \end{decl}
-% Todo lo relativo a operadores se cancela con
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \let\es@operators\relax
-%\end{verbatim}
-% Es buena idea incluirlo si no se van a usar, ya que ahorra memoria.
-%
-% Otros ajustes útiles en este contexto son |\spanishoperators|,
-% |\selectspanish| y |\deactivatequoting|.
-%
-%
-% Recordemos que todos los cambios
-% operados desde este archivo restan compatibilidad al
-% documento, por lo que si se distribuye conviene adjuntarlo
-% con el entorno |filecontents|.
-%
-% \subsection{Pasar opciones desde un paquete o clase}
-%
-% \begin{decl} \con |\spanishoptions|
-% \end{decl}
-%
-% Como |\PassOptionsToPackage| añade opciones al comienzo y
-% las opciones específicas de \textsf{spanish} han de ir al final, definiendo
-% esta macro se puede controlar el comportamiento de \textsf{spanish} antes
-% de su carga.
-%
-% \subsection{Otros cambios}
-%
-% Las adaptaciones se encuentran organizadas en varios grupos, a los
-% que corresponden sendas macros:
-% |\textspanish|, |\mathspanish|,
-% |\shorthandsspanish|, |\datespanish| y |\captionsspanish|. Pueden
-% cancelarse con:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \renewcommand\textspanish{}
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% \section{Plain \TeX}
-%
-% Con Plain hay que hacer:
-%\begin{verbatim}
-% \input spanish.sty
-%\end{verbatim}
-%
-% Se incluyen: traducciones, casi todas las abreviaciones, coma
-% decimal, utilidades para división de palabras, ordinales en una
-% versión simplificada (y no muy elegante), funciones matemáticas,
-% |\í| y espaciado. La selección de la lengua es inmediata al
-% cargar el archivo.
-%
-% En cambio no están disponibles: entrecomillados,
-% |\lsc| ni las adaptaciones de lengua principal.
-%
-% \section{Compatibilidad con versiones anteriores}
-%
-% En versiones de \textsf{babel} bastante antiguas, las abreviaciones
-% con |'| se activaban por omisión, mientras que ahora es necesario
-% |activeacute|.
-%
-% En la versión 4, la abreviación |~n| se consideró para extinguir.
-% En la versión 5 sigue estando, pero \textit{no} se activa por
-% omisión, sino que hay que emplear |es-tilden|.
-%
-% En la versión 5 el grupo \textsf{layout} no se retrasa a
-% |\begin{document}|, como en la 4, sino que se ejecuta
-% inmediatamente. Esto permite cambios en el preámbulo con otros
-% paquetes. Con ello, además, |\selectspanish*| carece de utilidad.
-% La opción de paquete |es-delayed| restaura el comportamiento
-% anterior, por si hubiera alguna incompatibilidad.
-%
-% La compatibilidad con la versión 2.09 de \LaTeX{} se ha suprimido.
-%
-% \section*{Referencias}
-% \addcontentsline{toc}{section}{Referencias}
-%
-% \begingroup
-% \small
-% \leftskip1.5cm \parindent-1.5cm
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{DRAE}}\textit{Diccionario de la Academia
-% Española}, Madrid, Espasa-Calpe, 21"a ed., 1992.
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{DOT}}José Martínez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Diccionario de ortografía técnica},
-% Madrid, Germán Sánchez Ruipérez/Pirámide, 1987.
-% (Biblioteca del libro.)
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{DTL}}José Martínez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Diccionario de tipografía y del libro},
-% Madrid, Paraninfo, 3"a ed., 1992.
-%
-% \makebox[1.5cm][l]{\lsc{MEA}}José Martínez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Manual de edición y autoedición},
-% Madrid, Pirámide, 1994.
-%
-% \leftskip0pt \parindent0pt \vspace{6pt}
-%
-% {\itshape
-% Para otras cuestiones tipográficas, las referencias
-% usadas son, entre otras:}
-%
-% \parindent-1.5pc \leftskip1.5pc \vspace{3pt}
-%
-% Asociación de Academias de la Lengua Española,
-% \textit{Diccionario panhispánico de dudas}, Madrid, Santillana, 2005.
-%
-% Javier Bezos,
-% \textit{Tipografía española con \TeX}, documento electrónico
-% disponible en
-% \textsf{http://perso.wanadoo.es/jbezos/tipografia.html}.
-%
-% Javier Bezos,
-% \textit{Tipografía y notaciones científicas}, Gijón,
-% Trea, 2008.
-%
-% Bureau International des Poids et mesures,
-% \textit{Le Sist\`{e}me international dúnités},
-% 8"a ed., París, {\footnotesize BIPM}, 2006,
-% \textsf{http://www.bipm.org/""fr/""si/""si\_brochure/}, 2006-11-10.
-%
-% Jorge de Buen,
-% \textit{Manual de diseño editorial,} México, Santillana, 2000.
-%
-%
-% \textit{The Chicago Manual of Style}, Chicago, University of
-% Chicago Press, 14"a~ed., 1993, esp.~págs.~333~-335.
-%
-% José Fernández Castillo,
-% \textit{Normas para correctores y compositores tipógrafos},
-% Madrid, Espasa-Calpe, 1959.
-%
-% IRANOR [AENOR], Normas \lsc{UNE} números 5010 (<<Signos
-% matemáticos>>), 5028 (<<Símbolos
-% geométricos>>) y 5029 (<<Impresión de los
-% símbolos de magnitudes y unidades y de los números>>).
-% [Obsoletas.]
-%
-% Llerena, Mario,
-% \textit{Un manual de estilo,} Miami, Unilit, 1999.
-%
-% Real Academia Española,
-% \textit{Esbozo de una nueva gramática de la
-% lengua española}, Madrid, Espasa-Calpe, 1973.
-%
-% V.\ Martínez Sicluna,
-% \textit{Teoría y práctica de la tipografía},
-% Barcelona, Gustavo Gili, 1945.
-%
-% José Martínez de Sousa,
-% \textit{Diccionario de ortografía de la lengua española},
-% Madrid, Paraninfo, 1996.
-%
-% Juan Martínez Val, \textit{Tipografía práctica}, Madrid,
-% Laberinto, 2002.
-%
-% Juan José Morato, \textit{Guía práctica del compositor
-% tipográfico}, Madrid, Hernando, 2"a ed., 1908 (1"a ed., 1900,
-% 3"a ed., 1933).
-%
-% Marion Neubauer,
-% <<Feinheiten bei wissenschaftlichen Publikationen>>,
-% \textit{Die \TeX nisches Kom\"odie}, parte I, vol. 8, n"o 4, 1996,
-% págs. 23-40; parte II, vol. 9, n"o 1, 1997, págs.~25~-44.
-%
-% Notimex, \textit{Manual de operación y estilo editorial}, México,
-% Notimex, 1999.
-%
-% José Polo,
-% \textit{Ortografía y ciencia del lenguaje}, Madrid, Paraninfo,
-% 1974.
-%
-% Siglo 21, \textit{Libro de estilo}, México, Alda,
-% $\mathrm{^s}\!$/$\mathrm{_f}$
-% (impr. 1995).
-%
-% Pedro Valle,
-% \textit{Cómo corregir sin ofender}, Buenos Aires, Lumen, 1998.
-%
-% Hugh C. Wolfe, <<Símbolos, unidades y nomenclatura>>,
-% \textit{Enciclopedia de Física}, dir. Rita G. Lerner y George L.
-% Trigg, Madrid, Alianza, 1987, t.~2, págs.~1423~-1451.
-%
-%\endgroup
-%
-% \else
-%
-%^^A ======= Beginning of text as typeset by user.drv =========
-%
-% \GetFileInfo{spanish.dtx}
-%
-% \section{The Spanish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. The maintainer from v4.0 on is Javier Bezos
-% (http://www.tex-tipografia.com). Previous
-% versions were made by Julio S\'anchez. The English documentation
-% has been improved by José Luis Rivera; thanks to him it is now a lot
-% clearer.} defines all the language-specific macros for the Spanish
-% language.
-%
-% Spanish support is implemented following mainly the guidelines given
-% by Jos\'e Mart\'\i nez de Sousa. You may get the the full
-% documentation (more comprehensive, but regrettably only in Spanish)
-% by typesetting |spanish.dtx| directly. There are examples and some
-% additional features documented in the Spanish version only.
-% Cross-references in this section point to that document.
-%
-% \paragraph{Features} This style provides:
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-% \item Translations following the International \LaTeX{}
-% conventions, as well as |\today|.
-%
-% \item Shorthands listed in Table~\ref{tab:spanish-quote-def}.
-% Examples in subsection~3.4 are illustrative. Notice that |"~| has a
-% special meaning in \textsf{spanish} different to other languages,
-% and is used mainly in linguistic contexts.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |'a| & Acute accented a. Works for e, i, o, u, too (both
-% lowercase and uppercase).\\
-% |'n| & \~n (uppercase too).\\
-% |"i| & \"i (uppercase too).\\
-% |"u| & \"u (uppercase too).\\
-% |"a| |"o| & Ordinal numbers (uppercase |"A|, |"O| too).\\
-% |"er "ER| & Ordinal 1.\textsuperscript{er} 1.\textsuperscript{\textsc{er}}\\
-% |"c| & \c{c} (uppercase too).\\
-% |"rr| & rr, but -r when hyphenated.\\
-% |"y| & An old ligature for ``et'' (like the English \&).\\
-% |"-| & Like |\-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest
-% the word.\\
-% |"=| & Like |-|, but allowing hyphenation in the rest
-% the word.\\
-% |"~| & The hyphen is repeated at the very beginning of
-% the next line if the word is hyphenated at this
-% point.\\
-% |""| & Like |"-| but producing no hyphen sign.\\
-% |~-| & Like |"-| but with no break after the hyphen. Works for
-% en-dashes (|~--|) and em-dashes (|~---|). |"+|, |"+-|
-% and |"+--| are synonymous.\\
-% |"/| & A slash slightly lowered, if necessary.\\
-% \verb+"|+ & Disable ligatures at this point.\\
-% |"<| & Left guillemets.\\
-% |">| & Right guillemets.\\
-% |<<| |>>| & |\begin{quoting}| and |\end{quoting}|. (See below.)
-% |"`| and |"'| are synonymous.\\
-% |"? "!| & Opening question and exlamation marks (?`!`)
-% aligned on the baseline, useful for all-caps headings, etc.
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Extra definitions made by file \file{spanish.ldf}}
-% \label{tab:spanish-quote-def}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \item |\frenchspacing|.
-%
-% \item \emph{In math mode}, a dot followed by a digit is replaced
-% by a decimal comma.
-%
-% \item Spanish ordinals and abbreviations with the |\sptext|\marg{text}
-% command as, for instance, |1\sptext{er}|. The preceptive dot is included.
-%
-% \item Accented (l\'\i m, m\'ax, m\'\i n, m\'od) and spaced
-% (arc\,cos, etc.) functions.
-%
-% \item |\dotlessi| is provided for use in math mode.
-%
-% \item A |quoting| environment and a related pair of shorthands |<<|
-% and |>>|. Useful for traditional spanish multi-paragraph quoting.
-%
-% \item There is a small space before the percent |\%| sign.
-%
-% \item |\lsc| provides lowercase small caps. (See subsection~3.10.)
-%
-% \item Ellipsis is best typed as |...| or, within a sentence, as |\...|
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% If \textsf{spanish} is the main language, the command
-% |\layoutspanish| is added to the main group, modifying the standard
-% classes throughout the whole document in the following way:
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item Paragraphs are set with |\indentfirst|.
-%
-% \item Both |enumerate| and |itemize| are adapted to Spanish rules.
-%
-% \item Both |\alph| and |\Alph| include \textit{\~n} after \textit{n}.
-%
-% \item Symbol footmarks are one, two, three, etc., asterisks.
-%
-% \item |OT1| guillemets are generated with two |lasy| symbols instead
-% of small |\ll| and |\gg|.
-%
-% \item |\roman| is redefined to write small caps Roman numerals, since
-% lowercase Roman numerals are discouraged (see below).
-%
-% \item There is a dot after section numbers in titles, headings, and toc.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% A subset of these features is implemented for Plain \TeX{}
-% (accesible with the command |\input spanish.sty|). Most
-% significantly, |\lsc|, the |quoting| environment, and features
-% provided by |\layoutspanish| are missing.
-%
-% \paragraph{Customization}
-%
-% Beginning with version 5.0, customization is made following two paths:
-% via |options| or via |commands|; these options and commands override
-% the layout for Spanish documents at different levels: options are meant for
-% use at the preamble only, while commands may be used in the configuration
-% file or at document level.
-%
-% Global options control the overall appearance of the document, and may
-% be set on the |{babel}| call, right after calling |spanish|, or
-% shortly before the call to |{babel}|, to ensure their proper loading
-% at runtime. Thus, the following calls are roughly equivalent:
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \usepackage[...,spanish,es-nosectiondot,es-nodecimaldot,...]{babel}
-%
-% \def\spanishoptions{es-nosectiondot,es-nodecimaldot}
-% \usepackage[...,spanish,...]{babel}
-% \end{verbatim}
-%
-% \begin{table}
-% \centering
-% \begin{tabular}{cccc}\hline
-% Basic Options & |es-minimal| & |es-sloppy| & |es-noshorthands| \\\hline
-% |es-noindentfirst| & X & X & \\
-% |es-nosectiondot| & X & X & \\
-% |es-nolists| & X & X & \\
-% |es-noquoting| & X & X & X \\
-% |es-notilde| & X & X & X \\
-% |es-nodecimaldot| & X & X & X \\
-% |es-nolayout| & & X & \\
-% |es-ucroman| & X & & \\
-% |es-lcroman| & X & X & \\\hline
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Spanish Customization Options}
-% \label{tab:SpanishCustomizationOptions}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Some global options are built upon lower level options, and may be
-% used as shorthand for more global customizations.
-% Table~\ref{tab:SpanishCustomizationOptions} gives an overview of the
-% global options constructed this way. Most of these options are
-% self-explanatory: they disable the changes made to the basic \LaTeX\
-% layout by |spanish|. |es-lcroman| however, and a few others, need a
-% bit of explanation, and they may be described as follows:
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item Traditional Spanish typography discourages the use of
-% lowercase Roman numerals; instead, a smallcaps variant is
-% implemented. However, since |Makeindex| seems to choke on the code
-% implementing lowercase Roman numerals (via the |\lsc| macro), two
-% workarounds are implemented: the |es-ucroman| option converts all
-% Roman numerals to uppercase, and the |es-lcroman| option turns all
-% Roman numerals to lowercase; the former should be preferred over the
-% latter. Three macros control local changes to Roman numbers:
-% |\spanishscroman|, |\spanishucroman|, and |\spanishlcroman|.
-%
-% \item The |es-preindex| option calls the |romanidx.sty| package
-% automatically to fix index entries in smallcaps roman form. An
-% additional macro,
-% |\spanishindexchars|\marg{encap}\marg{openrange}\marg{closerange}
-% determines the characters delimiting index entries. Defaults are
-% \verb=\spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}=.
-%
-% \item The |es-tilden| option restores the old tilde |~| shorthand
-% for \~n. This shorthand is however \emph{strongly} deprecated.
-%
-% \item The |es-nolayout| option disables layout changes in the
-% document when |spanish| is the main language. These changes affect
-% enumerated and itemized lists, enumerations (alphabetic order
-% excludes \~n), and symbolic footnotes.
-%
-% \item The |es-noshorthands| disables the shorthand mechanism
-% completely: neither |"| nor |'| nor |<| nor |>| nor |~| nor |.| work
-% at all.
-%
-% \item The |es-noquoting| option disables the macros |<<| and |>>|
-% calling the |quoting| environment; the alternative macros |"`| and
-% |"'| are still available.
-%
-% \item The |es-uppernames| option makes uppercase versions of
-% captions for chapter, tablename, etc.
-%
-% \item The |es-tabla| option changes ``cuadro'' for ``tabla'' in
-% captions.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% Finally, the Spanish 5 series begins the implementation of national
-% variations of Spanish typography, beginning with Mexico. Thus the
-% global options |mexico| and |mexico-com| are adapted to practices
-% spread in Mexico, and perhaps Central America, the Caribbean, and
-% some countries in South America.\footnote{The main difference is
-% that |mexico| disables the |decimaldot| mechanism, while
-% |mexico-com| keeps it enabled; both change the |quoting|
-% environment, disabling the use of guillemets.}
-%
-% Many of the global options are implemented via macros, which may be
-% included in the configuration file |spanish.cfg|, in the preamble,
-% after the call to |babel|, and in the body of the document. These
-% macros are the following.
-%
-% \begin{itemize}
-%
-% \item The macros |\spanishdashitems| and |\spanishsignitems| change
-% the values of itemized lists to a series of dashes or an alternative
-% series of symbols, respectively.
-%
-% \item The command |\deactivatequoting| deactivates the |<<| and |>>|
-% shorthands if you want to use |<| and |>| in numerical comparisons
-% and some AMS\TeX\ commands.
-%
-% \item You may kill the space in spaced operators with
-% |\unspacedoperators|.
-%
-% \item You may kill the accents on accented operators with
-% |\unaccentedoperators|.
-%
-% \item The command |\decimalpoint| resets the decimal separator to
-% its default (dot) value, while |\spanishdecimal|\marg{symbol} allows
-% for an arbitrary definition.
-%
-% \item |\spanishplainpercent| prevents the addition of a thinspace before
-% the percent sign in texts. This might be useful for parenthesized percent
-% signs in tables, etc.
-%
-% \item The macros |\spanishdatedel| and |\spanishdatede| control the
-% if the article is given in years (|del| or |de|).
-%
-% \item The macro |\spanishreverseddate| sets the date of the format
-% ``Month Day del Year''.
-%
-% \item The macro |\Today| gives months in uppercase.
-%
-% \item The macros |\spanish|\textit{caption} change the value of the \emph{caption}
-% automatically (no need to add an |\addto|).
-%
-% \item The command |\spanishdeactivate|\marg{characters} disables the
-% shorthand characters listed in the argument. Elegible characters
-% are the set |.'"~<>|. These shorthand characters may be globally
-% deactivated for Spanish adding this command to |\shorthandsspanish|.
-%
-% \item Extras are divided in groups controlled by the commands
-% |\textspanish|, |\mathspanish|, |\shorthandsspanish| y
-% |\layoutspanish|; their values may be cancelled typing
-% |\renewcommand|\marg{command}|{}|, or changed at will (check the
-% Spanish documentation or the code for details).
-%
-% \item The command |\spanishoperators|\marg{operators} defines
-% command names for operators in Spanish. There is no standard name
-% for some of them, so they may be created or changed at will. For
-% instance, the command
-% |\renewcommand{\spanishoperators}{arc\,ctg m\acute{i}n}|
-% creates commands for these functions. The command
-% |\,| adds thinspaces at the appropriate places for spaced operators
-% (like |\arcctg| in this case), and the command |\acute|\marg{letter}
-% adds an accent to the letter included in the definition (thus,
-% |m\acute{i}n| defines the accented function |\min| (m\'\i{}n);
-% please notice that |\dotlessi| is not necessary).
-%
-% \item The commands
-% |\lquoti|\marg{string} |\rquoti|\marg{string}
-% |\lquotii|\marg{string} |\rquotii|\marg{string}
-% |\lquotiii|\marg{string} |\rquotiii|\marg{string}
-% set the quoting signs in the |quoting| environment,
-% nested from outside in. They may be |\renew|ed at will.
-% Default values are shown in table~\ref{tab:spanish-quote-ref}.
-% \begin{table}
-% \center\small
-% \vspace{1.5ex}
-% \begin{tabular}{l@{\hspace{5em}}l}
-% |\lquoti| &|"<|\\
-% |\rquoti| &|">|\\
-% |\lquotii| &|``|\\
-% |\rquotii| &|''|\\
-% |\lquotiii| &|`|\\
-% |\rquotiii| &|'|
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{Default quoting signs set for the \texttt{quoting} environment.}
-% \label{tab:spanish-quote-ref}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% \item The command |\selectspanish*| is obsolete: if |spanish| is the
-% main language, all its features are available right after loading
-% |babel|. The |es-delayed| option is provided to restore the
-% previous behavior and macros for backwards compatibility.
-%
-% \end{itemize}
-%
-% \fi
-% \endgroup
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-%^^A ========== End of manual ===============
-%
-% \ifx\langdeffile\undefined
-%
-% \section{The Code}
-%
-% \else
-%
-% \subsection{The Code}
-%
-% \fi
-%
-% \changes{spanish~5.0a}{2007/02/21}{Reimplemented in full, which some
-% parts rewritten from scratch. Added the es- mechanism and the mexico
-% option. Many bug fixes.}
-% \changes{spanish~5.0d}{2008/05/25}{Fixed two bugs: misplaced
-% subscripts with lim and the like; problem with \cs{roman} and hyperref.}
-% \changes{spanish~5.0h}{2009/01/02}{Removed unnecessary \cs{string}s
-% with two acutes. Added es-noenumerate, es-noitemize.}
-% \changes{spanish~5.0i}{2009/05/11}{romanidx not working. Some \cs{es@roman}
-% replaced with \cs{es@scroman}.}
-% \changes{spanish~5.0j}{2010/01/06}{Overdot \cs{.} was not robust.}
-% \changes{spanish~5.0j}{2010/04/04}{Colon in saved catcodes, because
-% babel doesn't restore it after french}
-% \changes{spanish~5.0k}{2011/08/08}{When saving ., check if
-% \cs{mathcode} is 8000}
-%
-% This file is for both \LaTeXe{} and Plain formats.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\ProvidesLanguage{spanish.ldf}
- [2011/10/06 v5.0k Spanish support from the babel system]
-\LdfInit{spanish}\captionsspanish
-
-\edef\es@savedcatcodes{%
- \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~
- \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\"
- \catcode`\noexpand\:=\the\catcode`\:}
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\catcode`\"=12
-\catcode`\:=12
-
-\ifx\undefined\l@spanish
- \@nopatterns{Spanish}
- \adddialect\l@spanish0
-\fi
-
-\def\es@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1}
-\def\es@sDRC#1{\babel@save#1\DeclareRobustCommand*#1}
-
-\@ifundefined{documentclass}
- {\let\ifes@latex\iffalse}
- {\let\ifes@latex\iftrue}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Package options for spanish. To avoid error messages dummy
-% options are created on the fly when neccessary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@latex
-
-\@ifundefined{spanishoptions}{}
-{\PassOptionsToPackage{\spanishoptions}{babel}}
-
-\def\es@genoption#1#2#3{%
- \DeclareOption{#1}{}%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{#1}%
- {\def\es@a{#1}%
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\es@b\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname
- \addto\es@b{,#2}%
- \expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\es@b
- \AtEndOfPackage{#3}}%
- {}}
-
-\es@genoption{es-minimal}
- {es-ucroman,es-noindentfirst,es-nosectiondot,es-noenumerate,%
- es-noitemize,es-noquoting,es-notilde,es-nodecimaldot}
- {\spanishplainpercent
- \let\es@operators\relax}
-\es@genoption{es-nolists}
- {es-noenumerate,es-noitemize}{}
-\es@genoption{es-sloppy}
- {es-nolayout,es-noshorthands}{}
-\es@genoption{es-noshorthands}
- {es-noquoting,es-nodecimaldot,es-notilde}{}
-\es@genoption{mexico}
- {mexico-com,es-nodecimaldot}{}
-\es@genoption{mexico-com}
- {es-tabla,es-noquoting}
- {\def\lquoti{``}\def\rquoti{''}%
- \def\lquotii{`}\def\rquotii{'}%
- \def\lquotiii{\guillemotleft{}}%
- \def\rquotiii{\guillemotright{}}}
-
-\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{%
- \DeclareOption{es-#1}{}%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{es-#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-
-\def\es@optlayout#1#2{\es@ifoption{#1}{}{\addto\layoutspanish{#2}}}
-
-\else
-
-\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{\@namedef{spanish#1}{#2}}
-
-\fi
-
-\let\es@uclc\@secondoftwo
-\es@ifoption{uppernames}{\let\es@uclc\@firstoftwo}{}
-
-\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro}
-\es@ifoption{tabla}{\def\es@tablename{Ttabla}}{}
-\es@ifoption{cuadro}{\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Captions follow a two step schema, so that, say, |\refname| is
-% defined as |\spanishrefname| which in turn contains the string
-% to be printed. The final definition of |\captionsspanish|
-% is built below.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\captionsspanish{%
- \es@a{preface}{Prefacio}%
- \es@a{ref}{Referencias}%
- \es@a{abstract}{Resumen}%
- \es@a{bib}{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}%
- \es@a{chapter}{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \es@a{appendix}{Ap\'{e}ndice}%
- \es@a{listfigure}{\'{I}ndice de \es@uclc Ffiguras}%
- \es@a{listtable}{\'{I}ndice de \expandafter\es@uclc\es@tablename s}%
- \es@a{index}{\'{I}ndice \es@uclc Aalfab\'{e}tico}%
- \es@a{figure}{Figura}%
- \es@a{table}{\expandafter\@firstoftwo\es@tablename}%
- \es@a{part}{Parte}%
- \es@a{encl}{Adjunto}%
- \es@a{cc}{Copia a}%
- \es@a{headto}{A}%
- \es@a{page}{p\'{a}gina}%
- \es@a{see}{v\'{e}ase}%
- \es@a{also}{v\'{e}ase tambi\'{e}n}%
- \es@a{proof}{Demostraci\'{o}n}%
- \es@a{glossary}{Glosario}%
- \@ifundefined{chapter}
- {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice}}%
- {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice \es@uclc Ggeneral}}}
-
-\def\es@a#1{\@namedef{spanish#1name}}
-\captionsspanish
-\def\es@a#1#2{%
- \def\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1name\endcsname
- {\expandafter\noexpand\csname spanish#1name\endcsname}}
-\edef\captionsspanish{\captionsspanish}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now two macros for dates (upper and lowercase).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\es@month#1{%
- \expandafter#1\ifcase\month\or Eenero\or Ffebrero\or
- Mmarzo\or Aabril\or Mmayo\or Jjunio\or Jjulio\or Aagosto\or
- Sseptiembre\or Ooctubre\or Nnoviembre\or Ddiciembre\fi}
-
-\def\es@today#1{%
- \ifcase\es@datefmt
- \the\day~de \es@month#1%
- \else
- \es@month#1~\the\day
- \fi
- \ de\ifnum\year>1999\es@yearl\fi~\the\year}
-
-\def\datespanish{%
- \def\today{\es@today\@secondoftwo}%
- \def\Today{\es@today\@firstoftwo}}
-\newcount\es@datefmt
-\def\spanishreverseddate{\es@datefmt\@ne}
-\def\spanishdatedel{\def\es@yearl{l}}
-\def\spanishdatede{\let\es@yearl\@empty}
-\spanishdatede
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The basic macros to select the language in the preamble or the
-% config file. Use of |\selectlanguage| should be avoided at this
-% early stage because the active chars are not yet
-% active. |\selectspanish| makes them active.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\selectspanish{%
- \def\selectspanish{%
- \def\selectspanish{%
- \PackageWarning{spanish}{Extra \string\selectspanish ignored}}%
- \es@select}}
-\@onlypreamble\selectspanish
-\def\es@select{%
- \let\es@select\@undefined
- \selectlanguage{spanish}}
-
-\let\es@shlist\@empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Instead of joining all the extras directly in |\extrasspanish|,
-% we subdivide them in three further groups.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\extrasspanish{%
- \textspanish
- \mathspanish
- \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty
- \expandafter\spanishdeactivate\expandafter{\es@shlist}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \else
- \shorthandsspanish
- \fi}
-\def\noextrasspanish{%
- \ifx\textspanish\@empty\else
- \notextspanish
- \fi
- \ifx\mathspanish\@empty\else
- \nomathspanish
- \fi
- \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty\else
- \noshorthandsspanish
- \fi
- \csname es@restorelist\endcsname}
-
-\addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\sptext{\es@sptext}}
-
-\def\es@orddot{.}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The definition of |\sptext| is more elaborated than that of
-% |\textsuperscript|. With uppercase superscript text
-% the scriptscriptsize is used. The mandatory dot is already
-% included. There are two versions, depending on the
-% format.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@sptext#1{%
- {\es@orddot
- \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.15ex
- \else
- \fontsize\ssf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.5ex
- \fi
- \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}}
-\else
- \let\sptextfont\rm
- \def\es@sptext#1{%
- {\es@orddot
- \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \advance\dimen@-0.75ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \else
- \advance\dimen@-0.8ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \fi}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Lowercase small caps. We check if the current font has small
-% caps. If not, we fakes them. \cs{selectfont} in \cs{es@lsc}
-% seems redundant, but it's not. An intermediate macro allows
-% using an optimized variant for Roman numerals.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@latex
- \addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\lsc{\es@lsc}}
- \def\es@lsc{\es@xlsc\MakeUppercase\MakeLowercase}
- \def\es@xlsc#1#2#3{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox{%
- \scshape\selectfont
- \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series
- /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont
- \PackageWarning{spanish}{Replacing `\curr@fontshape' by
- \MessageBreak faked small caps}%
- #1{#3}%
- \else
- #2{#3}%
- \fi}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The |quoting| environment (not available in Plain). Overriding
-% the default |\everypar| is a bit tricky.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\newif\ifes@listquot
-
-\ifes@latex
- \csname newtoks\endcsname\es@quottoks
- \csname newcount\endcsname\es@quotdepth
- \newenvironment{quoting}
- {\leavevmode
- \advance\es@quotdepth\@ne
- \csname lquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname%
- \ifnum\es@quotdepth=\@ne
- \es@listquotfalse
- \let\es@quotpar\everypar
- \let\everypar\es@quottoks
- \everypar\expandafter{\the\es@quotpar}%
- \es@quotpar{\the\everypar
- \ifes@listquot\global\es@listquotfalse\else\es@quotcont\fi}%
- \fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\es@quotcont}%
- \edef\es@quotcont{\the\toks@
- \expandafter\noexpand
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname}}
- {\csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname}
- \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}}
- \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}}
- \def\lquotii{``}
- \def\rquotii{''}
- \def\lquotiii{`}
- \def\rquotiii{'}
- \let\es@quotcont\@empty
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If there is a marginpar inside quoting, we don't add the
-% quotes. |\es@listqout| stores the quotes to be used before
-% item labels; otherwise they could appear after the labels.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \addto\@marginparreset{\let\es@quotcont\@empty}
- \DeclareRobustCommand\es@listquot{%
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname
- \global\es@listquottrue}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\frenchspacing|, |\...| and |\%|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\textspanish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\notextspanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\addto\textspanish{%
- \let\es@save@dot\.%
- \es@sDRC\.{\@ifnextchar.{\es@dots}{\es@save@dot}}}
-\def\es@dots..{\leavevmode\hbox{...}\spacefactor\@M}
-\def\es@sppercent{\unskip\textormath{$\m@th\,$}{\,}}
-\def\spanishplainpercent{\let\es@sppercent\@empty}
-\addto\textspanish{%
- \let\percentsign\%%
- \es@sDRC\%{\es@sppercent\percentsign{}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, the math group. It's not easy to add an accent to an
-% operator, because we must avoid using text (that is, |\mbox|)
-% where we have no control on font and size, and at the same time
-% we need |\i|, which is forbidden in math mode. |\dotlessi| must
-% be converted to uppercase if necessary in \LaTeXe. There are two
-% versions, depending on the format.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\mathspanish{\es@sDRC\dotlessi{\es@dotlessi}}
-\let\nomathspanish\relax
-
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@texti{\i}
- \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\es@texti}
-\fi
-
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@dotlessi{%
- \ifmmode
- {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne
- \imath
- \else
- \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
- \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil
- \escapechar=\count@
- \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}%
- {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}%
- \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname
- \advance\count@"7000
- \mathchar\count@
- \fi}%
- \else
- \i
- \fi}
-\else
- \def\es@dotlessi{\textormath{\i}{\mathchar"7010}}
-\fi
-
-\def\accentedoperators{%
- \def\es@op@ac##1{\acute{\if i##1\dotlessi\else##1\fi}}}
-\def\unaccentedoperators{%
- \def\es@op@ac##1{##1}}
-\accentedoperators
-\def\spacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\,}
-\def\unspacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\@empty}
-\spacedoperators
-\addto\mathspanish{\es@operators}
-
-\ifes@latex\else
- \let\operator@font\rm
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Operators are stored in |\es@operators|, which is
-% included in the math group. Since |\operator@font| is
-% defined in \LaTeXe{} only, we define it in the plain variant.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\es@operators{%
- \es@sdef\bmod{\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu
- \mathbin{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu
- \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}%
- \@ifundefined{@amsmath@err}%
- {\es@sdef\pmod##11{\allowbreak\mkern18mu
- ({\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##11)}}%
- {\es@sdef\mod##1{\allowbreak\if@display\mkern18mu
- \else\mkern12mu\fi{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##1}%
- \es@sdef\pmod##1{\pod{{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}%
- \mkern6mu##1}}}%
- \def\es@a##1 {%
- \if^##1^% empty? continue
- \bbl@afterelse
- \es@a
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- {\if&##1% &? finish
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \begingroup
- \let\,\@empty % ignore when def'ing name
- \let\acute\@firstofone % id
- \edef\es@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}%
- \def\,{\noexpand\es@op@sp}%
- \def\acute{\noexpand\es@op@ac}%
- \edef\es@a{\endgroup
- \noexpand\es@sdef\expandafter\noexpand\es@b{%
- \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\es@c}}%
- \es@a % restores itself
- \es@a
- \fi}%
- \fi}%
- \let\es@b\spanishoperators
- \addto\es@b{ }%
- \let\es@c\@empty
- \expandafter\es@a\es@b l\acute{i}m l\acute{i}m\,sup
- l\acute{i}m\,inf m\acute{a}x \acute{i}nf m\acute{i}n & %
- \def\es@c{\nolimits}%
- \expandafter\es@a\es@b sen tg arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tg & }
-\def\spanishoperators{cotg cosec senh tgh }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now comes the text shorthands. They are grouped in
-% |\shorthandsspanish| and this style performs some
-% operations before the babel shortands are called.
-% The aims are to allow espression like |$a^{x'}$|
-% and to deactivate shorthands by making them of
-% category `other.' After providing a |\'i| shorthand,
-% the new macros are defined.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}}
-
-\def\es@set@shorthand#1{%
- \expandafter\edef\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname
- {\the\catcode`#1}%
- \initiate@active@char{#1}%
- \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \if.#1\else
- \addto\es@restorelist{\es@restore{#1}}%
- \addto\es@select{\shorthandon{#1}}%
- \addto\shorthandsspanish{\es@activate{#1}}%
- \addto\es@shlist{#1}%
- \fi}
-
-\def\es@use@shorthand{%
- \if@safe@actives
- \bbl@afterelse
- \string
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- {\ifx\thepage\relax
- \bbl@afterelse
- \string
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \es@use@sh
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-
-\def\es@use@sh#1{%
- \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect
- \bbl@afterelse
- \noexpand#1%
- \else%
- \bbl@afterfi
- \textormath
- {\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- {\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- \fi}
-
-\gdef\es@activate#1{%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \def~{\es@use@shorthand~}}}
-
-\def\spanishdeactivate#1{%
- \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\es@spdeactivate\@tempa}}
-
-\def\es@spdeactivate#1{%
- \if.#1%
- \mathcode`\.=\es@period@math\relax
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let~\es@period@code}%
- \else
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \expandafter\let\expandafter~%
- \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% |\es@restore| is used in the list |\es@restorelist|, which in
-% turn restores all shorthands as defined by \babel. The latter
-% macros also has |\es@quoting|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\es@restore#1{%
- \shorthandon{#1}%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \bbl@deactivate{~}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% To selectively define the shorthands we have a couple of
-% macros, which defines a certain combination if the first
-% character has been activated as a shorthand. The second
-% one is intended for a few shorthands with an alternative
-% form.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\es@declare#1{%
- \@ifundefined{es@savecat\expandafter\string\@firstoftwo#1}%
- {\@gobble}%
- {\declare@shorthand{spanish}{#1}}}
-\def\es@declarealt#1#2#3{%
- \es@declare{#1}{#3}%
- \es@declare{#2}{#3}}
-
-\ifes@latex\else
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname}
-\fi
-
-\@ifundefined{add@accent}{\def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Instead of redefining |\'|, we redefine the internal
-% macro for the OT1 encoding.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@accent#1#2#3{%
- \expandafter\@text@composite
- \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3%
- \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}%
- \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}}
-\else
- \def\es@accent#1#2#3{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 }
-\fi
-
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{\languageshorthands{spanish}}%
-\es@ifoption{noshorthands}{}{\es@set@shorthand{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We override the default |"| of babel, intended for german.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\es@umlaut#1{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 }
-
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \babel@save\bbl@umlauta
- \let\bbl@umlauta\es@umlaut}
-\let\noshorthandsspanish\relax
-
-\ifes@latex
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\es@accent\~{126}}%
- \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\es@accent\'{19}}}
-\else
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \es@sdef\~{\es@accent\~{126}}%
- \es@sdef\'#1{\if#1i\es@accent\'{19}\i\else\es@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}}
-\fi
-
-\def\es@sptext@r#1#2{\es@sptext{#1#2}}
-\es@declare{"a}{\sptext{a}}
-\es@declare{"A}{\sptext{A}}
-\es@declare{"o}{\sptext{o}}
-\es@declare{"O}{\sptext{O}}
-\es@declare{"e}{\protect\es@sptext@r{e}}
-\es@declare{"E}{\protect\es@sptext@r{E}}
-\es@declare{"u}{\"u}
-\es@declare{"U}{\"U}
-\es@declare{"i}{\"{\i}}
-\es@declare{"I}{\"I}
-\es@declare{"c}{\c{c}}
-\es@declare{"C}{\c{C}}
-\es@declare{"<}{\guillemotleft{}}
-\es@declare{">}{\guillemotright{}}
-\def\es@chf{\char\hyphenchar\font}
-\es@declare{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"=}{\bbl@allowhyphens\es@chf\hskip\z@skip}
-\es@declare{"~}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{\es@chf}{\es@chf}{\es@chf}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"r}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{r}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"R}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{R}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"y}
- {\@ifundefined{scalebox}%
- {\ensuremath{\tau}}%
- {\raisebox{1ex}{\scalebox{-1}{\resizebox{.45em}{1ex}{2}}}}}
-\es@declare{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\es@declare{"/}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}%
- \dimen@\ht\z@
- \advance\dimen@-1ex
- \advance\dimen@\dp\z@
- \dimen@.31\dimen@
- \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@
- \ifdim\dimen@>0pt
- \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em
- \else
- \box\z@
- \fi}
-\es@declare{"?}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-\es@declare{"!}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-
-\def\spanishdecimal#1{\def\es@decimal{{#1}}}
-\def\decimalcomma{\spanishdecimal{,}}
-\def\decimalpoint{\spanishdecimal{.}}
-\decimalcomma
-\es@ifoption{nodecimaldot}{}
- {\AtBeginDocument{\bgroup\@fileswfalse}%
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup
- \let\es@period@code~%
- \es@set@shorthand{.}%
- \let~\es@period@code}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\egroup}%
- \@namedef{normal@char\string.}{%
- \@ifnextchar\egroup
- {\es@period@code}%
- {\csname active@char\string.\endcsname}}%
- \declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\es@period@code}%
- \addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}%
- \edef\es@period@math{\the\mathcode`\.}%
- \babel@save\es@period@code
- \ifnum\es@period@math="8000
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let\es@period@code~}%
- \else
- \mathchardef\es@period@code\es@period@math\relax
- \mathcode`\.="8000 %
- \fi
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\babel@save~}%
- \es@activate{.}}%
- \def\es@a#1{\es@declare{.#1}{\es@decimal#1}}%
- \es@a1\es@a2\es@a3\es@a4\es@a5\es@a6\es@a7\es@a8\es@a9\es@a0}
-
-
-\es@ifoption{notilde}{}{\es@set@shorthand{~}}
-\def\deactivatetilden{%
- \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax}
-\es@ifoption{tilden}
- {\es@declare{~n}{\~n}%
- \es@declare{~N}{\~N}}
- {\let\deactivatetilden\relax}
-\es@declarealt{~-}{"+}{%
- \leavevmode
- \bgroup
- \let\@sptoken\es@dashes % Changes \@ifnextchar behaviour
- \@ifnextchar-%
- {\es@dashes}%
- {\hbox{\es@chf}\egroup}}
-\def\es@dashes-{%
- \@ifnextchar-%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}}
-
-\es@ifoption{noquoting}%
- {\let\es@quoting\relax
- \let\activatequoting\relax
- \let\deactivatequoting\relax}
- {\@ifundefined{XML@catcodes}%
- {\es@set@shorthand{<}%
- \es@set@shorthand{>}%
- \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname}%
- \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname}%
- \addto\es@restorelist{\es@quoting}%
- \addto\es@select{\es@quoting}%
- \ifes@latex
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \es@quoting
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@nameuse{es@quoting}}%
- \fi}%
- \fi
- \def\activatequoting{%
- \shorthandon{<>}%
- \let\es@quoting\activatequoting}%
- \def\deactivatequoting{%
- \shorthandoff{<>}%
- \let\es@quoting\deactivatequoting}}{}}
-
-\es@declarealt{<<}{"`}{\begin{quoting}}
-\es@declarealt{>>}{"'}{\end{quoting}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Acute accent shorthands are stored in a macro. If |activeacute|
-% was set as an option it's executed. If not is not deleted for a
-% possible later use in the |cfg| file. In non \LaTeXe{} formats
-% it's always executed.
-%
-% \changes{spanish~5.0e}{2008/07/06}{Two acutes in a row should be
-% turned into a double right quote}
-% \changes{spanish~5.0g}{2008/07/20}{Fixed bad kerning before two
-% acutes}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\'=12
-\gdef\es@activeacute{%
- \es@set@shorthand{'}%
- \def\es@a##1{\es@declare{'##1}{\@tabacckludge'##1}}%
- \es@a a\es@a e\es@a i\es@a o\es@a u%
- \es@a A\es@a E\es@a I\es@a O\es@a U%
- \es@declare{'n}{\~n}%
- \es@declare{'N}{\~N}%
- \es@declare{''}{''}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% But \textsf{spanish} allows two category codes for |'|,
-% so both should be taken into account in \cs{bbl@pr@m@s}.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\es@pr@m@s\bbl@pr@m@s
- \def\bbl@pr@m@s{%
- \ifx'\@let@token
- \bbl@afterelse
- \pr@@@s
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \es@pr@m@s
- \fi}%
- \let\es@activeacute\relax}
-\endgroup
-
-\ifes@latex
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\es@activeacute}{}
-\else
- \es@activeacute
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And the customization. By default these macros only
-% store the values and do nothing.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{\def\es@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-\def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{\def\es@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-
-\ifes@latex
-\es@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$}
-\def\spanishdashitems{\es@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}}
-\def\spanishsymbitems{%
- \es@itemize
- {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex
- {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}%
- {\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}}
-\def\spanishsignitems{%
- \es@itemize{\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}%
- {$\m@th\triangleright$}}
-\spanishsymbitems
-\def\es@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{%
- \if#21%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2a%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}%
- \else\if#2A%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2i%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2I%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2o%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\sptext{o}}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname
- {\noexpand\es@listquot\the\toks@#3}}
-\def\es@guillemot#1#2{%
- \ifmmode#1%
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M
- \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}%
- \char#2 \kern-0.19em\char#2 }}%
- \fi}
-\def\layoutspanish{%
- \let\layoutspanish\@empty
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\ll{40}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\gg{41}}%
- \def\@fnsymbol##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or
- *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
- k\or l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or
- w\or x\or y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@Alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or
- K\or L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or
- W\or X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}
-
-\es@optlayout{noenumerate}{%
- \def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{%
- \es@enumdef{i}#1\@empty\@empty\@@
- \es@enumdef{ii}#2\@empty\@empty\@@
- \es@enumdef{iii}#3\@empty\@empty\@@
- \es@enumdef{iv}#4\@empty\@empty\@@}%
- \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}%
- \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\theenumii}%
- \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}%
- \expandafter\es@enumerate\es@enum}
-\es@optlayout{noitemize}{%
- \def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\labelitemi{\es@listquot#1}%
- \def\labelitemii{\es@listquot#2}%
- \def\labelitemiii{\es@listquot#3}%
- \def\labelitemiv{\es@listquot#4}}%
- \expandafter\es@itemize\es@item}
-\let\esromanindex\@secondoftwo
-\es@ifoption{ucroman}
- {\def\es@romandef{%
- \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\uppercase{##2}}}%
- \def\@roman{\@Roman}}}
- {\def\es@romandef{%
- \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\es@scroman{##2}}}%
- \def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\number##1}}%
- \def\es@roman##1{\es@scroman{\romannumeral##1}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\es@scroman{\es@xlsc\uppercase\@firstofone}}}
-\es@optlayout{lcroman}{\es@romandef}
-\newcommand\spanishlcroman{\def\@roman##1{\romannumeral##1}}
-\newcommand\spanishucroman{\def\@roman{\@Roman}}
-\newcommand\spanishscroman{\def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\romannumeral##1}}}
-\es@optlayout{noindentfirst}{%
- \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
-\es@optlayout{nosectiondot}{%
- \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
- \def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{#1\if&#1&\else.\fi\hfil}}}
-\es@ifoption{nolayout}{\let\layoutspanish\relax}{}
-\es@ifoption{sloppy}{\let\textspanish\relax\let\mathspanish\relax}{}
-\es@ifoption{delayed}{}{\def\es@layoutspanish{\layoutspanish}}
-\es@ifoption{preindex}{\AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{romanidx}}}{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We need to execute the following code when babel has been
-% run, in order to see if |spanish| is the main language.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
-\let\es@activeacute\@undefined
-\def\bbl@tempa{spanish}%
-\ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa
- \@nameuse{es@layoutspanish}%
- \addto\es@select{%
- \@ifstar{\PackageError{spanish}%
- {Old syntax--use es-nolayout}%
- {If you don't want changes in layout\MessageBreak
- use the es-nolayout package option}}%
- {}}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\layoutspanish}%
-\fi
-\selectspanish}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% After restoring the catcode of |~| and setting the minimal
-% values for hyphenation, the |.ldf| is finished.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\es@savedcatcodes
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\ifes@latex\else
- \es@select
-\fi
-\ldf@finish{spanish}
-\csname activatequoting\endcsname
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-% That's all in the main file.
-%
-% The |spanish| option writes a macro in the page field of
-% \textit{MakeIndex} in entries with small caps number, and they
-% are rejected. This program is a preprocessor which moves this
-% macro to the entry field. It can be called from the main
-% document as a package or with the package option |es-preindex|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*indexes>
-\makeatletter
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\def\spanishindexchars#1#2#3{%
- \edef\es@encap{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1\endcsname}%
- \edef\es@openrange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#2\endcsname}%
- \edef\es@closerange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#3\endcsname}}%
- \spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}%
- \ifx\documentclass\@twoclasseserror
- \edef\es@idxfile{\jobname}%
- \AtEndDocument{%
- \addto\@defaultsubs{%
- \immediate\closeout\@indexfile
- \input{romanidx.sty}}}%
- \expandafter\endinput
- \fi}{}
-
-\newcount\es@converted
-\newcount\es@processed
-
-\def\es@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1}
-\def\es@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2}
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J%
- (extension por omision .idx):}}
- {\let\answer\es@idxfile}
-
-\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
-\ifin@
- \edef\es@input@file{\expandafter\es@split@file\answer\@@}
- \edef\es@input@ext{\expandafter\es@split@ext\answer\@@}
-\else
- \edef\es@input@file{\answer}
- \def\es@input@ext{idx}
-\fi
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo de destino^^J%
- (archivo por omision: \es@input@file.eix,^^J%
- extension por omision .eix):}}
- {\let\answer\es@idxfile}
-\ifx\answer\@empty
- \edef\es@output{\es@input@file.eix}
-\else
- \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
- \ifin@
- \edef\es@output{\answer}
- \else
- \edef\es@output{\answer.eix}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\typein[\answer]{%
- ^^J?Se ha usado algun esquema especial de controles^^J%
- de MakeIndex para encap, open_range o close_range?^^J%
- [s/n] (n por omision)}}
- {\def\answer{n}}
-
-\if s\answer
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J%
- (\string| por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\es@encap{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J%
- (\string( por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\es@openrange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J%
- (\string) por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\es@closerange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\newwrite\es@indexfile
-\immediate\openout\es@indexfile=\es@output
-
-\newif\ifes@encapsulated
-
-\def\es@scroman#1{#1}
-\edef\es@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\}
-
-\def\indexentry{%
- \begingroup
- \@sanitize
- \es@indexentry}
-
-\begingroup
-
-\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\es@encap\relax
-\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\es@openrange\relax
-\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\es@closerange\relax
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@indexentry#1{%
- \endgroup
- \advance\es@processed\@ne
- \es@encapsulatedfalse
- \es@bar@idx#1|\@@
- \es@idxentry}%
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@idxentry#1{%
- \in@{\es@scroman}{#1}%
- \ifin@
- \advance\es@converted\@ne
- \immediate\write\es@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\es@b|\ifes@encapsulated\es@p\fi esromanindex%
- {\ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@slash\es@a\fi}}{#1}}%
- \else
- \immediate\write\es@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\es@b\ifes@encapsulated|\es@p\es@a\fi}{#1}}%
- \fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{%
- \def\es@b{#1}\def\es@a{#2}%
- \ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@encapsulatedtrue\es@bar@eat#2\fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\es@p{#1}\def\es@a{#2}%
- \edef\es@t{(}\ifx\es@t\es@p
- \else\edef\es@t{)}\ifx\es@t\es@p
- \else
- \edef\es@a{\es@p\es@a}\let\es@p\@empty%
- \fi\fi}
-}
-
-\endgroup
-
-\input \es@input@file.\es@input@ext
-
-\immediate\closeout\es@indexfile
-
-\typeout{*****************}
-\typeout{Se ha procesado: \es@input@file.\es@input@ext }
-\typeout{Lineas leidas: \the\es@processed}
-\typeout{Lineas convertidas: \the\es@converted}
-\typeout{Resultado en: \es@output}
-\ifnum\es@converted>\z@
- \typeout{Genere el indice a partir de ese archivo}
-\else
- \typeout{No se ha convertido nada. Se puede generar}
- \typeout{el .ind directamente de \es@input@file.\es@input@ext}
-\fi
-\typeout{*****************}
-
-\@ifundefined{es@sdef}{\@@end}{}
-
-\endinput
-%</indexes>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-
-
-
-
-
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index d643bded1b1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/spanish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\batchfile{spanish.ins}
-\def\filedate{2007/02/21}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
- \Msg{**********************************************}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
- \Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
- \Msg{*}
- \Msg{**********************************************}
- \errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
- \errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
- \batchmode
- \csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{spanish.ldf}{\from{spanish.dtx}{code}}%
- \file{romanidx.sty}{\from{spanish.dtx}{indexes}}}
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 6beb68787b5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,442 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{272}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{swedish.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{swedish}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{swedish.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v2.3d Swedish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `swedish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Swedish language definition file. A contribution
-% was made by Sten Hellman HELLMAN@CERNVM.CERN.CH
-%
-% Further enhancements for version 2.0 were provided by
-% Erik "Osthols <erik\_osthols@yahoo.com>
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{swedish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{swedish.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{swedish-1.0a}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} in
-% \file{babel.com}}
-% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Brought up-to-date with babel 3.2a}
-% \changes{swedish-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for LaTeX2e}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/28}{Update for release 3.5}
-% \changes{swedish-2.0}{1996/01/24}{Introduced active double quote}
-% \changes{swedish-2.1}{1996/10/10}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX, moved the definition of \cs{atcatcode} right to the
-% beginning.}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3d}{2001/11/16}{Fixed a \cs{changes} entry}
-%
-% \section{The Swedish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. Contributions were made by Sten Hellman
-% (\texttt{HELLMAN@CERNVM.CERN.CH}) and Erik \"Osthols
-% (\texttt{erik\_osthols@yahoo.com}).} defines all the
-% language-specific macros for the Swedish language. This
-% file has borrowed heavily from |finnish.dtx| and |germanb.dtx|.
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:swedish-quote} an overview is given of its
-% purpose. The vertical placement of the "umlaut" in some letters
-% can be controlled this way.
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |"a| & Gives \"a, also implemented for |"A|, |"o| and |"O|. \\
-% |"w|, |"W| & gives {\aa} and {\AA}. \\
-% |"ff| & for |ff| to be hyphenated as |ff-f|. Used for compound
-% words, such as \texttt{stra|"|ff{\aa}nge}, which
-% should be hyphenated as \texttt{straff-f{\aa}nge}.
-% This is also implemented for b, d, f, g, l, m, n,
-% p, r, s, and t. \\
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. This should be
-% used for compound words, such as
-% ``\texttt{stra|"|ffinr\"attning}'',
-% which should not have the ligature ``ffi''. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word, such as e. g. in
-% ``x|"-|axeln''. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for words that should break at some sign such as
-% \texttt{och/|""|eller}). \\
-% |"~| & for an explicit hyphen without a breakpoint; useful for
-% expressions such as ``2|"~|3 veckor'' where no linebreak
-% is desirable. \\
-% |"=| & an explicit hyphen sign allowing subsequent hyphenation,
-% for expressions such as ``studiebidrag och \newline
-% -l{\aa}n''. \\
-% |\-| & like the old |\-|, but allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{swedish.sty}}\label{tab:swedish-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% Two variations for formatting of dates are added. \cs{datesymd}
-% makes \cs{today} output dates formatted as YYYY-MM-DD, which is
-% commonly used in Sweden today. \cs{datesdmy} formats the date as
-% D/M YYYY, which is also very common in Sweden. These commands
-% should be issued after \cs{begin{document}}.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{swedish-2.1}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{swedish}\captionsswedish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{swedish} will be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@swedish| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{swedish-1.0c}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
-% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added a warning when no hyphenation
-% patterns were loaded.}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3d}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% producew the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@swedish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Swedish}
- \adddialect\l@swedish0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to the
-% Swedish language. The reason for this is that a user might want
-% to switch back and forth between languages.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsswedish}
-% The macro |\captionsswedish| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{swedish-1.0b}{1991/08/21}{removed type in definition of
-% \cs{contentsname}}
-% \changes{swedish-1.0b}{1991/08/21}{added definition for \cs{enclname}}
-% \changes{swedish-1.0b}{1991/08/21}{made definition of \cs{refname}
-% pluralis}
-% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1992/02/16}{Added \cs{seename}, \cs{alsoname}
-% and \cs{prefacename}}
-% \changes{swedish-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{swedish-1.1b}{1993/09/16}{Added translations}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3d}{1994/07/27}{Changed \cs{aa} to
-% \cs{csname}\texttt{ aa}\cs{endcsname}, to make \cs{uppercase} do
-% the right thing}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsswedish{%
- \def\prefacename{F\"orord}%
- \def\refname{Referenser}%
- \def\abstractname{Sammanfattning}%
- \def\bibname{Litteraturf\"orteckning}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Bilaga}%
- \def\contentsname{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurer}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabeller}%
- \def\indexname{Sakregister}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabell}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/19}{Added full stop after ``Bil''}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\enclname{Bil.}%
- \def\ccname{Kopia f\"or k\"annedom}%
- \def\headtoname{Till}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Sida}%
- \def\seename{se}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/29}{Changed \cs{alsoname} from
-% `\texttt{se ocks\aa}'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\alsoname{se \"aven}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3g}{1995/11/03}{Replaced `Proof' by its
-% translation}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3b}{2000/09/26}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3c}{2001/03/12}{Provided translation for
-% Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Ordlista}%
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateswedish}
-% The macro |\dateswedish| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Swedish dates.
-% \changes{swedish-2.2}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{swedish-2.2}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateswedish{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- januari\or februari\or mars\or april\or maj\or juni\or
- juli\or augusti\or september\or oktober\or november\or
- december\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datesymd}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{Command added}
-% The macro |\datesymd| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce dates in the format YYYY-MM-DD, common in Sweden.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datesymd{%
- \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datesdmy}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{Command added}
-% The macro |\datesdmy| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Swedish dates in the format DD/MM YYYY, also common in
-% Sweden.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datesdmy{%
- \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\swedishhyphenmins}
-% The swedish hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin|
-% set to~2 and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/06/02}{use \cs{swedishhyphenmins} to
-% store the correct values}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{swedish}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasswedish}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/29}{Added \cs{bbl@frenchspacing}}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasswedish}
-% \changes{swedish-1.3e}{1995/05/29}{Added \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}}
-% The macro |\extrasswedish| performs all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Swedish language. The macro |\noextrasswedish| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasswedish|.
-%
-% For Swedish texts |\frenchspacing| should be in effect. We make
-% sure this is the case and reset it if necessary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For Swedish the \texttt{"} character is made active. This is done
-% once, later on its definition may vary.
-% \changes{swedish-2.0}{1996/01/24}{Added active double quote
-% character}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\languageshorthands{swedish}}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{swedish-2.2b}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Swedish}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The ``umlaut'' accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the
-% ``umlaut'' dots. The redefinition is done with the help of
-% |\umlautlow|.
-%^^A PROBLEM:
-%^^A What happens to ``umlaut''
-%^^A characters entered using e. g. latin input encoding? They should
-%^^A be lowered as well.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\addto\noextrasswedish{\umlauthigh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need an extra active
-% character. This character is then used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:swedish-quote}.
-%
-% To be able to define the function of |"|, we first define a
-% couple of `support' macros.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep
-% it available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts and {\aa}.
-% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/20}{added \cs{allowhyphens}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"w}{\textormath{{\aa}\allowhyphens}{\ddot w}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"W}{\textormath{{\AA}\allowhyphens}{\ddot W}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% discretionary commands
-%^^A PROBLEM:
-%^^A Will these allow subsequent hyphenation? Perhaps we need to
-%^^A add \cs{allowhyphens} here as well?
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \def\indexeqs{=}
-% \changes{swedish-2.3a}{2000/01/28}{changed definition of
-% \texttt{"\protect\indexeqs}, \cs{-} and \texttt{"~}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"~}{%
- \textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\-}
-% Redefinition of |\-|. The new version of |\-| should indicate an
-% extra hyphenation position, while allowing other hyphenation
-% positions to be generated automatically. The standard behaviour
-% of \TeX\ in this respect is very unfortunate for languages such
-% as Dutch, Finnish, German and Swedish, where long compound words
-% are quite normal and all one needs is a means to indicate an
-% extra hyphenation position on top of the ones that \TeX\ can
-% generate from the hyphenation patterns.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\-}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\def\-{\allowhyphens
- \discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{swedish-2.1}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{swedish}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-%\Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 34916c0021f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/swedish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{swedish.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{swedish.ldf}{\from{swedish.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1202.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1202.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 8b8f6cd3af9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1202.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,961 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-%%% ====================================================================
-%%% @TeX-file{
-%%% author = "Johannes L. Braams",
-%%% version = "1.04",
-%%% date = "06 January 1997",
-%%% time = "23:15:14 MET",
-%%% filename = "tb1202.tex",
-%%% address = "TeXniek,
-%%% Kersengaarde 33
-%%% 2723 BP Zoetermeer
-%%% The Netherlands",
-%%% telephone = "+31 79 352 28 19",
-%%% FAX = "+31 70 343 23 95",
-%%% checksum = "19810 933 5016 39417",
-%%% email = "babel@braams.cistron.nl (Internet)",
-%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
-%%% keywords = "",
-%%% supported = "yes",
-%%% abstract = "",
-%%% docstring = "The article on babel that apeared in
-%%% TuGboat Volume 12, No. 2.
-%%%
-%%% The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
-%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the
-%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
-%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and
-%%% characters. This is produced by Robert
-%%% Solovay's checksum utility.",
-%%% }
-%%% ====================================================================
-% tb32braa.ltx
-
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\IfFileExists{ltugboat.cls}{%
- \documentclass{ltugboat}
- \def\rtitlex{TUGboat, Volume 12 (1991), No. 2}
- \def\midrtitle{}
- \def\PrelimDraftfooter{}
- \let\TBmaketitle\maketitle
- \SelfDocumenting
- \setcounter{page}{291}
- }{%
- \documentclass{article}
- \newcommand\address[1]{}
- \newcommand\netaddress[1]{}
- \newcommand\TUB{\textsl{TUGboat\/}}
- \newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}}
-\usepackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-\newcommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\makeatletter
-% -------------------------------------------------
-% Definitions copied from doc.sty by FMi
-% -------------------------------------------------
-{\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\meta{\begingroup\obeyspaces%
-\def {\egroup\space\hbox\bgroup\it}\m@ta}}
-\def\m@ta#1{\hbox\bgroup$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$\egroup\endgroup}
-
-% -------------------------------------------------
-% define \dlqq so that we can give an example of "'
-% -------------------------------------------------
-\gdef\dlqq{{\setbox\tw@=\hbox{,}\setbox\z@=\hbox{''}%
- \dimen\z@=\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@-\ht\tw@
- \setbox\z@=\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@\box\z@}\ht\z@=\ht\tw@
- \dp\z@=\dp\tw@ \box\z@\kern-.04em}}
-%
-% -------------------------------------------------
-% To demonstrate german double quotes (from german.tex)
-% -------------------------------------------------
-\def\allowhyphens{\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip}
-\def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}\dimen\z@\ht\z@
- \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@
- \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@ }
-% (this lowers the german left quotes to the same level as the comma.)
-
-\def\@glqq{{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else
- \let\@SF\empty \fi \leavevmode
- \set@low@box{''}\box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens\@SF\relax}}
-\def\glqq{\protect\@glqq}
-\def\@grqq{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else
- \let\@SF\empty \fi \kern-.07em``\kern.07em\@SF\relax}%''
-\def\grqq{\protect\@grqq}
-%
-% -------------------------------------------------
-% To demonstrate french double quotes (from german.tex)
-% -------------------------------------------------
-\def\@flqq{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else
- \let\@SF\empty \fi
- \ifmmode \ll \else \leavevmode
- \raise .2ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle \ll $}\fi \@SF\relax}
-\def\flqq{\protect\@flqq}
-\def\@frqq{\ifhmode \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\else
- \let\@SF\empty \fi
- \ifmmode \gg \else \leavevmode
- \raise .2ex \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle \gg $}\fi \@SF\relax}
-\def\frqq{\protect\@frqq}
-%+
-% Some extra definitions needed in the article
-%-
-\def\bsl{\char'134}
-\makeatother
-
-\begin{document}
-\title {Babel, a multilingual style-option system for use
- with \LaTeX's standard document styles%
- \thanks{During the development ideas from Nico Poppelier,
- Piet van Oostrum and many others have been used.}
- }
-
-\author{Johannes Braams}
-\address{%
- \TeX niek\\
- Kersengaarde 33\\
- 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\
- The Netherlands}
-\netaddress{babel@braams.cistron.nl}
-\date{06 January 1997 \\
- Version 1.04}
-
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
- The standard distribution of \LaTeX\ contains a number of document
- styles that are meant to be used, but also serve as examples for
- other users to create their own document styles. These styles have
- become very popular among \LaTeX\ users. But it should be kept in
- mind that they were designed for American tastes and contain a
- number of hard-wired texts. This article describes a set of
- document-style options that can be used in combination with the
- standard styles, which makes the latter adaptable to other
- languages.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-Although Leslie Lamport has stated~\cite{LLth} that one should not try
-and write \emph{one} document-style option to be used with \emph{all}
-the standard document styles of \LaTeX, that is exactly what I~have
-done with this system of style options. The reasons for this approach
-will be explained in section~\ref{why}.
-
-A lot of the ideas incorporated in this set of files come from the
-work of Hubert Partl~\cite{HP}, \file{german.tex}. Some parts in the
-implementation are different, others are the same. It will be shown
-that \file{german.tex} can be modified to fit into this scheme of
-style options.
-
-\section{Why \babel?}\label{why}
-
-When I~first started using \LaTeX\ I~was very happy with just the
-style files that are distributed with the standard distributions of
-\TeX\ and \LaTeX. That means, as long as I~made texts in English I~was
-happy. Then as other users found out about \LaTeX\ and its advantages,
-they started using it for texts in languages other than English. As
-I~was the most experienced \LaTeX\ user at the time, they came to me
-and asked me `When I'm writing a report in Dutch I~don't want chapters
-to be named ``Chapter'', I~want them to be named ``Hoofdstuk'', how do
-you change that?'. At that time I~didn't know, but I soon found out.
-The first thing I~found was that Leslie Lamport states~\cite[pages
-85--86]{LLbook} that you have to redefine the command |\@chapapp|
-to get the desired result. This looked rather promising to me, so
-I~had a look at the style files to find out how other such strings as
-``Figure'' might be redefined. It was then that I~found out that
-|\@chapapp| is the \emph{only} string defined this way, whereas
-all others are hard-wired into the style.
-
-My first solution to this problem was to create a new document style
-file called \file{artikel.sty} as a ``Dutch'' counterpart to
-\file{article.sty}. The same was done for \file{report.sty}. This is
-exactly what Leslie Lamport suggests~\cite{LLth}. This approach has
-one major drawback however: you get two copies of basically the same
-file to maintain. This was discovered when newer releases of the
-styles reached our site. The standard styles had to be replaced
-\emph{and} edited all over again to get the ``Dutch'' versions back.
-About the same time, in early 1988, a discussion on this subject
-appeared in \TeXhax. One of the persons commenting was Hubert Partl.
-The method he suggested was to modify the standard document styles by
-replacing the hard-wired texts by macros such as |\@chapapp|. This
-led me to my second attempt at a solution. I~modified the standard
-styles (all four of them) as suggested, but while doing that added an
-option, implemented like the option \texttt{draft}, by defining a
-command |\ds@dutch|. This command would set a variable to indicate
-which language was requested. This variable I~used later on in a
-|\case| statement. In this |\case| statement a choice is made between
-English, Dutch and possibly other languages for texts such as
-``Figure'' and ``Contents''. Unfortunately, some of this implied
-changing the secondary style files \file{xxx10.sty}, \file{xxx11.sty}
-and \file{xxx12.sty}. This was unfortunate because one of the
-research groups in our laboratories complained their document style
-didn't work properly. It turned out that their style was a modified
-\file{article.sty} that had been given a different name, but it still
-loaded \file{art10.sty} etc. I~found a temporary solution, but I
-still wasn't exactly happy with the situation. Besides this, the
-drawback of replacing the document styles with newer versions still
-existed.
-
-When after a while a new version of the \LaTeX\ distribution arrived
-at our site, I~began to think about a different way to solve the
-problem. In the meantime Hubert Partl had his \file{german.sty}
-published in \TUB~\cite{HP}. His article pointed the way to a
-different solution. Triggered by the discussion in \TeXhax\ in early
-1989 about how to detect which is the main (primary) style when
-processing a document, I~started work on what is now available as
-\file{dutch.sty} version~1.0, dated may 1989\footnote{This file is
- available from \texttt{listserv@hearn.bitnet} as file
- \file{dutch.old}.}. While working on this style option I~discovered
-that some parts could be borrowed from \file{german.sty}. This
-`discovery' and some discussions I had with others at Euro\TeX89, the
-fourth European \TeX\ Conference, held in september 1989 in Karlsruhe,
-led me towards a more universal approach. The basic idea behind it
-was, starting from the algorithm to detect the main style, to design
-an approach with one common file that contained macro definitions
-needed by a number of language-specific style options. Users specify
-the name of any of these language-specific options as an option to the
-|\documentstyle| command, and internally the common file is read.
-
-%This is the situation as it stands now. The rest of this article is
-%devoted to a description of how the system of style options described
-%above is implemented and what the possibilities are. I~realize that
-%with the new \TeX\ 3.0 around and work being done on a new version of
-%\LaTeX\ as well some of this work may become obsolete in the near
-%future. But, taking into consideration the widespread use of the
-%current versions of \TeX\ and \LaTeX\, I~think it may take some time
-%before {\em everybody} is working with the new releases.
-
-%------------------------------------------------------------
-% All text above here was copied from babel.doc, the following
-% section is new for this version of the article
-%------------------------------------------------------------
-\section{\LaTeX\ and document-style files}\label{lat-docstyle}
-
-Before the I discuss some of the code in the \babel{} system I would
-like to discuss the document-style mechanism used by \LaTeX. Every
-\LaTeX\ document should start with a line like:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentstyle[opt1,opt2,...]{docstyle}
-\end{verbatim}
-This line of code instructs \LaTeX\ to first load the file
-\file{docstyle.sty}. When that is done the `options' are processed
-\emph{in the order specified}, by reading the files
-\file{opt1.sty}\footnote{Except when the documentstyle defines the
- control sequence {\tt\bsl ds@\meta{opt1}}; in that case this control
- sequence will be executed.}, \file{opt2.sty}, etc. This implies that
-definitions, made in the file \file{docstyle.sty} can be overridden in
-one of the option files. It is even possible to redefine code from the
-very kernel of \LaTeX, but you have to know what you are doing.
-
-Some care has to be taken in writing document-style options, because a
-number of problems can occur. First of all, if a document-style option
-should be modest in size; if it tries to redefine most of the code in
-\file{docstyle.sty} I think you should write (and maintain) your own,
-complete, document style. Next, as it was possible to override
-definitions from the main file in an option file, it is of course also
-possible to override definitions made in another option file. When
-this happens, your document might depend on the order in which you
-have specified your document-style options.
-
-This mechanism of overriding definitions from the main document style
-is exploited in the \babel{} system. The macros that contain the
-hard-wired texts are redefined in the common part of \babel{},
-replacing each of these texts with a unique macro. These macros have
-to be defined in the language-specific files.
-
-\section{\LaTeX\ and multilingual documents}\label{lat-lingual}
-
-In a european environment it sometimes happens that one wants to write
-a document that contains more than \emph{one} language. I have an
-example of a document, published by the {\sc eec}, that contains 9
-(nine) different languages. Also in linguistics one can find documents
-written in more than one language, i.e. to compare two languages.
-
-If you have to write such a multilingual document you should try to
-conform to the typographical conventions in use for each language. A
-well known example is the type of quotation marks used. \TeX\ supplies
-the user with ``quoted text'', but a Dutch user might want to have
-\dlqq quoted text'', whereas a German text should contain \glqq quoted
-text\grqq\ and a frenchman would perhaps like to see something like
-\flqq quoted text\frqq. These language specific conventions should be
-implemented in a document-style option file for each language. These
-files should then be useable with \emph{all} document styles.
-
-In such a multilingual document a user would specify the languages
-used as options to the |\documentstyle| command. He would also want a
-mechanism to be able to switch between these languages in a simple
-way. When he would use \TeX\ version 3.0 for the processing of his
-document, he would also want the hyphenation to come out right for the
-different languages.
-
-\section{Overview of the \babel{} solution}
-
-\subsection{The core of the system}
-
-The problems described in sections~\ref{lat-docstyle}
-and~\ref{lat-lingual} can be solved using the \babel{} system of
-document-style options.
-
-The core of this system currently performs three functions.
-\begin{enumerate}
-
-\item\label{switch} It defines a user interface for switching between
- languages;
-
-\item\label{hyphs} It contains code to dynamically load several sets
- of hyphenation patterns;
-
-\item\label{repair} It `repairs' the document styles provided in the
- standard distribution of \LaTeX.
-
-\end{enumerate}
-
-Obviously part~\ref{hyphs} can only be used while running ini\TeX\ to
-create a new format, whereas part~\ref{repair} should \emph{not} be
-read by ini\TeX. Part~\ref{repair} should even disappear when \LaTeX\
-version 3.0 arrives, as the style files supplied with the new \LaTeX\
-will no longer be language specific. Part~\ref{switch} can either be
-loaded into the format with multiple hyphenation patterns, or it can
-be read while processing a document.
-
-For this reason the core of the \babel{} system is stored in two
-separate files, \file{babel.switch}, containing parts~\ref{switch}
-and~\ref{hyphs}, and \file{babel.sty} which contains
-part~\ref{repair}. The file \file{babel.sty} will instruct \LaTeX\ to
-load \file{babel.switch} if necessary, the file \file{babel.switch}
-checks the format to see if hyphenation patterns \emph{can} be loaded.
-
-\subsection{Language specifics}
-
-The language switching mechanism contains a couple of hooks for the
-developers of language-specific document-style options.
-
-First of all the macro |\originalTeX| should be defined. Its function
-is to disable special definitions made for a language to bring \TeX\
-into a `defined' state. A language-specific document-style option
-might, for example, introduce an extra active character. It would then
-also modify the definitions of |\dospecials| and |\@sanitize|. Such an
-option would then define a macro to restore the original definitions
-of these macros and restore the extra active character to its normal
-category code. It would then |\let \originalTeX| to this `restoration'
-macro.
-
-To enable the language-specific definitions three macros are provided
-in the switching mechanism, |\captions|\meta{language},
-|\date|\meta{language} and |\extras|\meta{language}.
-
-The macro |\captions|\meta{language} should provide definitions for
-the macros that replaced the hard-wired texts in the document style
-and the macro |\date|\meta{language} should provide a definition for
-|\today|. The real fun starts with the macro
-|\extras|\meta{language}. This macro should activate all definitions
-needed for \meta{language}.
-
-\section{The user interface}
-
-The user interface to the \babel{} system is quite simple. He should
-specify the languages he wants to use in his document in the list of
-document-style options. For instance, for a document in which both the
-English and the Dutch language are used, the first line could read:
-\begin{verbatim}
-\documentstyle[a4,dutch,english]{artikel1}
-\end{verbatim}
-Please note that in this case the Dutch-specific definitions are
-inactive when \LaTeX\ has finished processing document-style option
-files.
-
-If the user then wants to switch from English to Dutch he would
-include the command
-\begin{verbatim}
-\selectlanguage{dutch}
-\end{verbatim}
-before starting to write Dutch.
-
-If a user wants to write a document-style option of his own he might
-like to define a macro that checks which language is in use at the
-time the macro is executed. For this purpose the macro
-|\iflanguage{|\meta{language}|}{|\meta{then-clause}|}{|%
-\meta{else-clause}|}| is available.
-
-\section{Implementation of the core of the system}
-
-In this section I would like to discuss some parts of the
-implementation of the \babel{} system. Not all code will be shown,
-because some parts of it are just series of slightly modified code
-from the standard document styles. The files are fully documented and
-interested readers can print them if they have access to the
-\texttt{doc} option, described by Frank Mittelbach.
-
-The description of the macros that follows is based on an environment
-using \TeX~3.x, together with a version of \file{lplain.tex} based on
-\file{plain.tex} version~3.x. The actual implementation allows for
-other situations as well, i.e a version of \file{babel.sty} for
-\TeX~2.x will be available.
-
-\subsection{Switching languages}\label{lang-switch}
-
-For each language to be used in a document a control sequence of the
-form |\l@|\meta{language} has to be defined. This will either be done
-while loading hyphenation patterns or while loading the
-language-specific file. The implementation of
-\hbox{|\selectlanguage{|\meta{language}|}|} and\\
-\hbox{|\iflanguage{|\meta{language}|}{|\meta{then case}|}{|\meta{else
- case}|}|} is based on the existence of
-\hbox{|\l@|\meta{language}}.
-
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\selectlanguage#1{%
- \@ifundefined{l@#1}
- {\@nolanerr{#1}}
- {\originalTeX
- \language=\expandafter\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\csname captions#1\endcsname
- \expandafter\csname date#1\endcsname
- \expandafter\csname extras#1\endcsname
- \gdef\originalTeX{\expandafter\csname noextras#1\endcsname}
- }
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{The definition of {\tt\bsl selectlanguage}.}
-\label{select}
-\end{figure*}
-
-To switch from one language to another the macro |\selectlanguage| is
-available. Its definition can be seen in figure~\ref{select}. The
-first action it takes is to check whether the \meta{language} is
-known, if it is not an error is signalled. If the language is known
-|\originalTeX| is called upon to reset any previously set
-language-specific definitions. Next the register |\language| is
-updated and the three macros that should activate all
-language-specific definitions are executed. Finally the macro
-|\originalTeX| receives a new replacement text in order to be able to
-deactivate the definitions just activated.
-
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\iflanguage#1#2#3{%
- \@ifundefined{l@#1}
- {\@nolanerr{#1}}
- {\ifnum\language=\expandafter\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- #2 \else #3
- \fi}
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{The definition of {\tt\bsl iflanguage}}
-\label{if}
-\end{figure*}
-
-The macro |\iflanguage| (see figure~\ref{if}) will issue a warning
-when its argument is an `unkown' language. It then goes on to compare
-the value of |\language| and |\l@|\meta{language} and executes either
-its secon or third argument.
-
-\subsection{Dynamically loading patterns}
-
-With the advent of \TeX~3.0 it has become possible to build a format
-with more than one hyphenation pattern preloaded. The core of the
-\babel\ system provides code, to be executed by ini\TeX\ \emph{only},
-to dynamically load hyphenation patterns. The only restriction is that
-the implementation of \TeX\ that you use has to have rather high
-settings of \texttt{trie\_size} and \texttt{trie\_op\_size} to
-actually load several hyphenation patterns.
-
-For the purpose of dynamically loading hyphenation patterns a
-`configuration file' has to be introduced. This file will be read by
-ini\TeX. Each line should contain either a comment, nothing or the
-name of a language and the name of the file that contains the
-hyphenation patterns for that language. In figure~\ref{config} an
-example of such a file, instructing ini\TeX\ to load patterns for
-three languages, English, Dutch and German.
-
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-% File : language.dat
-% Purpose : tell iniTeX what files with patterns to load.
-english english.hyphenations
-
-dutch hyphen.dutch % Nederlands
-german hyphen.ger
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{An example configuration file}\label{config}
-\end{figure*}
-
-The configuration file will be read line by line using \TeX's |\read|
-primitive. Because the name of a file might be followed by a
-space-token and comment (as in the example) a macro to process each
-line is needed. The definition of this macro, |\process@language|, can
-be found in figure~\ref{process}. As can be seen in the definition of
-this macro, its second argument \emph{always} has to be followed by a
-space-token. The effect of this is that any trailing spaces are
-removed.
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\process@language#1 #2 {%
- \expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname
- \expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname
- \input #2}
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{The definition of {\tt\bsl process@language}.}
-\label{process}
-\end{figure*}
-The macro strips all spaces following its arguments. It's first
-argument is used to define |\l@|\meta{language}. The macro
-|\addlanguage| is basically a non-outer version of the plain \TeX\
-macro |\newlanguage|. The second argument of |\process@language| is
-the name of the file containing the hyphenation patterns. Before the
-file can be read, the register |\language| has to updated.
-
-The configuration file is read in a |\loop| (see figure~\ref{loop}).
-When a record is read from the input file a check is done whether the
-record was empty. If it was not, a space token is added to the end of
-the string of tokens read. The reason for this is that we have to be
-sure there always is at least \emph{one} space token present. When
-that has been taken care of the data just read can be processed. The
-last thing to do is to check the status of the input file, in order to
-decide whether \TeX\ has to continue processing the |\loop|. When all
-patterns have been processed the value of |\language| is restored.
-
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\loop
- \read1 to \@config@line
- \ifx\@config@line\empty
- \else
- \edef\@config@line{\@config@line\space}
- \expandafter\process@language\@config@line
- \fi
- \ifeof1 \@morefalse \fi
- \if@more\repeat
-\language=0
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{Reading the configuration file line by line}
-\label{loop}
-\end{figure*}
-
-\subsection{`Repairing' \LaTeX's standard document styles}
-
-A large part of the core of the \babel{} system is dedicated to
-`repair' the standard document styles. This means redefining the
-macros in table~\ref{macros}.
-
-\begin{table*}[htb]
-\DeleteShortVerb{\|}
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{l | c c c c}
-macro & article & report & book & letter \\
-\hline
-\tt\bsl fnum@figure & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ \\
-\tt\bsl fnum@table & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ \\
-\tt\bsl tableofcontents & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl listoffigures & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl listoftables & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl thebibliography & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl theindex & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl abstract & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl part & $\times$ & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl chapter & & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl appendix & & $\times$ & $\times$ & \\
-\tt\bsl cc & & & & $\times$ \\
-\tt\bsl encl & & & & $\times$ \\
-\tt\bsl ps@headings & & & & $\times$ \\
-\end{tabular}
-\caption{macros that need to be redefined for the four standard document
- styles.}
-\label{macros}
-\end{center}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-\end{table*}
-
-As an example of the way the macros have to be redefined, the
-redefinition of |\tableofcontents| is shown in figure~\ref{content}.
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\@ifundefined{contentsname}
- {\def\tableofcontents
- {\section*{\contentsname
- \@mkboth{\uppercase\expandafter{\contentsname}}
- {\uppercase\expandafter{\contentsname}}
- }
- \@starttoc{toc}
- }
- }
- {}
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{An example of redefining a command}\label{content}
-\end{figure*}
-
-The standard styles can be distinguished by checking the existence of
-the macros |\chapter| (not in \file{article} and \texttt{letter}) and
-|\opening| (only in \texttt{letter}). The result of these checks is
-stored in the macro |\doc@style|. When |\doc@style| already exists
-(which is the case when for instance \file{artikel1.sty} is
-used~\cite{BEP}) it is not superseded (see figure~\ref{maindoc}).
-
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\@ifundefined{doc@style}
- {\def\doc@style{0}
- \@ifundefined{opening}
- {\@ifundefined{chapter}
- {\def\doc@style{1}}
- {\def\doc@style{2}}
- }{\def\doc@style{3}}
- }{\relax}
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{Determining the main document style}
-\label{maindoc}
-\end{figure*}
-
-\section{Implementing a language specific document-style option file}
-
-To illustrate the way a language specific file can be implemented the
-file \file{dutch.sty} is discussed here. Note that not all of the code
-containde in the file \file{dutch.sty} is shown here, only those parts
-that are of interest for the scope of this article are included. If
-the reader would like to see the complete code, he can print all files
-in the \babel{} system, using the file \file{doc.sty}, described by
-Frank Mittelbach in~\cite{docsty}.
-
-\subsection{Compatibilty with plain \TeX}
-The file \file{german.tex}~\cite{HP} was written in such a way that it
-can be used by both plain \TeX\ users and \LaTeX\ users. This seemed a
-good idea, so all files in the \babel{} system can be processed by
-both plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX. But some of the ``useful hacks'' from
-\LaTeX\ are used, so for a plain \TeX\ user they have to be defined.
-For this purpose the format is checked at the start of a language
-specific file. If the format is \texttt{plain} an extra file, called
-\file{latexhax.sty} is read.
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-{\def\format{plain}
-\ifx\fmtname\format
- \expandafter\ifx\csname @ifundefined\endcsname\relax
- \gdef\next{latexhax.sty}
- \aftergroup\input\aftergroup\next
- \fi
-\fi}
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{Conditonal loading of \file{latexhax.sty}}
-\end{figure*}
-
-This file should be read only once, so another check is done on the
-existence of one of the commands defined there.
-
-A new group is started to keep the definition of the macro
-|\format|, which is used in the following if statement, local.
-When the current format turns out to be plain \TeX\ the file
-\file{latexhax.sty} has to be read. But the definitions in that file
-should remain valid after the group is closed. This could be
-accomplished by making all definitions \texttt{global}, but another
-solution is to tell \TeX\ to process the file \file{latexhax.sty}
-\emph{after} the current group has been closed. The command
-|\aftergroup| puts the next token on a list to be processed after
-the group.
-
-\subsection{Switching to the Dutch language}
-In section~\ref{lang-switch} the names of macros needed to switch to a
-language have been described. In figure~\ref{switchdutch} these macros
-and their definition are shown for the Dutch language.
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\captionsdutch{\gdef\refname{Referenties}%
- \gdef\abstractname{Samenvatting}%
- \gdef\bibname{Bibliografie}%
- ...
- \gdef\pagename{Pagina}}
-
-\def\datedutch{%
- \gdef\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- januari\or februari\or maart\or april\or
- mei\or juni\or juli\or augustus\or
- september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"\active
-
-\gdef\extrasdutch{%
- \global\let\dospecials\dutch@dospecials
- \global\let\@sanitize\dutch@sanitize
- \catcode`\"\active
- \gdef"{\protect\dutch@active@dq}
- \gdef\"{\protect\@umlaut}
-}\endgroup
-
-\def\noextrasdutch{%
- \catcode`\"12
- \global\let\dospecials\original@dospecials
- \global\let\@sanitize\original@sanitize
- \global\let\"\dieresis
-}
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{The macros needed to switch to the Dutch language}
-\label{switchdutch}
-\end{figure*}
-
-The definitions of |\captionsdutch| and |\datedutch| are pretty
-straightforward and need not be discussed. The macro |\extrasdutch|
-will be discussed in some more detail.
-
-First, because for Dutch (as well as for German) the \texttt{"}
-character is made active, the \LaTeX\ macros |\dospecials| and
-|\@sanitize| have to be redefined to include this character as well.
-The new definitions are implemented as two special commands, so we
-globally |\let| the originals to their new versions. Then the
-\texttt{"} character is made active and is defined. Then, to prevent
-an error when |\"| appears in a moving argument, the macro |\"| is
-redefined and made robust. All this is done inside a group to keep the
-category code change for the \texttt{"} character local.
-
-The macro |\extrasdutch| has a counterpart, |\noextrasdutch|, that
-cancels the extra definitions made by |\extrasdutch|. It changes the
-|\catcode| of the \texttt{"} character back to `other' and globally
-|\let|s the macros |\dospecials| and |\@sanitize| to their original
-definitions. The original definition of |\"| is restored as well.
-
-In figure~\ref{specials} the code needed to redefine |\dospecials| and
-|\@makeother| is shown.
-\begin{figure*}[htb]
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begingroup
- \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
- \xdef\dutch@dospecials{\dospecials\do\"}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax
-% do nothing if \@sanitize is undefined...
- \else
- \def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}%
- \xdef\dutch@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother\"}%
- \fi
-\endgroup
-
-\global\let\original@dospecials\dospecials
-\global\let\original@sanitize\@sanitize
-\end{verbatim}
-\caption{Code needed for the redefinition of {\tt\bsl dospecials} and
- {\tt\bsl @makeother}.}
-\label{specials}
-\end{figure*}
-
-\subsection{An extra active character}
-
-All the code disccussed sofar is necessary because we need an extra
-active character. This character is then used as indicated in
-table~\ref{dutch-quote}. One of the reasons for this is that in the
-Dutch language a word with an umlaut can be hyphenated just before the
-letter with the umlaut, but the umlaut has to disappear if the word is
-broken between the previous letter and the accented letter.
-
-\begin{table*}[htb]
-\centering
-\begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-\verb="a= & \verb=\"a= which hyphenates as \verb=-a=;
- also implemented for the other letters. \\
-\verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-\verb="-= & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
- in the rest of the word. \\
-\verb="`= & lowered double left quotes (see example below).\\
-\verb="'= & normal double right quotes. \\
-\verb=\-= & like the old \verb=\-=, but allowing hyphenation
- in the rest of the word.
-\end{tabular}
-\caption{The extra definitions made by \file{dutch.sty}}
-\label{dutch-quote}
-\end{table*}
-
-In~\cite{treebus} the quoting conventions for the Dutch language are
-discussed. The preferred convention is the single-quote Anglo-American
-convention, i.e. `This is a quote'. An alternative is the slightly
-old-fashioned Dutch method with initial double quotes lowered to the
-baseline, \dlqq This is a quote'', which should be typed as
-\texttt{"`This is a quote"'}.
-
-\subsubsection{Supporting macro definitions}
-
-The definition of the active \texttt{"} character needs a couple of
-support macros. The macro |\allowhyphens| is used make hyphenation of
-word possible where it otherwise would be inhibited by \TeX. Basically
-its definition is nothing more than |\nobreak \hskip 0pt plus 0pt|.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\gdef\allowhyphens{\penalty\@M \hskip\z@skip}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Then a macro is defined to lower the Dutch left double quote to the
-same level as the comma. It prepares a low double opening quote in box
-register~0. This macro was copied form \file{german.tex}.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\gdef\set@low@box#1{%
- \setbox\tw@\hbox{,} \setbox\z@\hbox{#1}
- \dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@
- \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}
- \ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@}
-\end{verbatim}
-The macro |\set@low@box| is used to define low opening quotes. Since
-it may be used in arguments to other macros it needs to be protected.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\gdef\dlqq{\protect\@dlqq}
-\gdef\@dlqq{{%
- \ifhmode
- \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}
- \else
- \let\@SF\empty
- \fi
- \leavevmode\set@low@box{''}
- \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens\@SF\relax}}
-\end{verbatim}
-For reasons of symmetry we also define |"'|. This command is defined
-similar to |\dlqq|, except that the quotes aren't lowered to the
-baseline.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\gdef\@drqq{{%
- \ifhmode
- \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}
- \else
- \let\@SF\empty
- \fi
- ''\@SF\relax}}
-\end{verbatim}
-The original double quote character is saved in the macro |\dq| to
-keep it available.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
- \gdef\dq{"}
-\endgroup
-\end{verbatim}
-The original definition of |\"| is stored as |\dieresis|. The resason
-for this is that if a font with a different encoding scheme is used
-the definition of |\"| might not be the plain \TeX\ one.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\global\let\dieresis\"
-\end{verbatim}
-
-In the Dutch language vowels with a dieresis or umlaut accent are
-treated specially. If a hyphenation occurs before a vowel-plus-umlaut,
-the umlaut should disappear. To be able to do this, the hyphenation
-break behaviour for the five vowels, both lowercase and uppercase,
-could be defined first in terms of |\discretionary|. But this results
-in a large |\if|-construct in the definition of the active |"|.
-
-As both Knuth and Lamport have pointed out, a user should not use |"|
-when he really means something like |''|. For this reason no
-distinction is made between vowels and consonants. Therefore one
-macro, |\@umlaut|, specifies the hyphenation break behaviour for all
-letters.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\@umlaut#1{%
- \allowhyphens%
- \discretionary{-}{#1}{\dieresis #1}%
- \allowhyphens}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The last support macro to be defined is |\dutch@active@dq|.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\gdef\dutch@active@dq#1{%
- \if\string#1`\dlqq{}%
-\else\if\string#1'\drqq{}%
-\else\if\string#1-\allowhyphens-\allowhyphens%
-\else\if\string#1|\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
-\else\if\string#1i\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{i}{\dieresis\i}%
- \allowhyphens%
-\else\if\string#1j\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{j}{\dieresis\j}%
- \allowhyphens%
-\else \@umlaut{#1}\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
-\end{verbatim}
-The macro reads the next token and performs some appropriate action.
-If no special action is defined, it will produce an umlaut accent on
-top of argument~1.
-
-The last definition needed is a replacement for |\-|. The new version
-of |\-| should indicate an extra hyphenation position, while allowing
-other hyphenation positions to be generated automatically. The
-standard behaviour of \TeX\ in this respect is very unfortunate for
-languages such as Dutch and German, where long compound words are
-quite normal and all one needs is a means to indicate an extra
-hyphenation position on top of the ones that \TeX\ can generate from
-the hyphenation patterns.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\def\-{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\subsection{Activating the definitions}
-
-The last action that should be performed by a language specific file,
-is activating it's definitions. Before doing that the macro
-|\originalTeX| should be definined.
-\begin{verbatim}
-\@ifundefined{originalTeX}{\let\originalTeX\relax}{}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-Also, the macro |\l@|\meta{language} should be defined. If it hasn't
-already been defined, this means that no hyphenation patterns were
-loaded for this language.
-% This means that \emph{no} hyphenation will take place
-\begin{verbatim}
-\@ifundefined{l@dutch}{\addlanguage{dutch}}{}
-\selectlanguage{dutch}
-\end{verbatim}
-
-\section{Conclusion}
-
-In this article a system of document-style option files has been
-presented that supports the multilingual use of \LaTeX. Some of the
-code involved has been discussed. The actual files will me made
-available through the international networks. They will be stored in
-the fileserver in the Netherlands (address:
-\texttt{LISTSERV@HEARN.BITNET}), the file \file{babel readme} will
-explain what you need to get to be able to use the system. The system
-was developed using the \Lopt{doc} option, so the files available are
-fully documented.
-
-\begin{thebibliography}{9}
- \bibitem{DEK} Donald E. Knuth,
- \emph{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley, 1986.
- \bibitem{LLbook} Leslie Lamport,
- \emph{\LaTeX, A document preparation System}, Addison-Wesley, 1986.
- \bibitem{treebus} K.F. Treebus.
- \emph{Tekstwijzer, een gids voor het grafisch verwerken van tekst.}
- SDU Uitgeverij ('s-Gravenhage, 1988). A Dutch book on layout
- design and typography.
- \bibitem{HP} Hubert Partl,
- \emph{German \TeX}, \emph{TUGboat} 9 (1988) \#1, p.~70--72.
- \bibitem{LLth} Leslie Lamport,
- in: \TeXhax\ Digest, Volume 89, \#13, 17 februari 1989.
- \bibitem{docsty}Frank Mittelbach,
- \emph{The \Lopt{doc}-option},
- \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#2, p.~245--273.
- \bibitem{BEP}Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout and Nico Poppelier,
- \emph{The development of national \LaTeX\ styles},
- \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#3, p.~401--406.
- \bibitem{ilatex}Joachim Schrod,
- \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use},
- \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90.
-\end{thebibliography}
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1401.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1401.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index a1f2a78d151..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1401.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,266 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-%%% ====================================================================
-%%% @TeX-file{
-%%% author = "Johannes L. Braams",
-%%% version = "1.02",
-%%% date = "06 January 1997",
-%%% time = "23:18:11 MET",
-%%% filename = "tb1401.tex",
-%%% address = "TeXniek,
-%%% Kersengaarde 33
-%%% 2723 BP Zoetermeer
-%%% The Netherlands",
-%%% telephone = "+31 79 352 28 19",
-%%% FAX = "+31 70 343 23 95",
-%%% checksum = "33086 238 1209 9472",
-%%% email = "babel@braams.cistron.nl (Internet)",
-%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
-%%% keywords = "",
-%%% supported = "yes",
-%%% abstract = "",
-%%% docstring = "The update article on babel that appeared
-%%% in TUGboat Volume 14 No 1.
-%%%
-%%% The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
-%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the
-%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
-%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and
-%%% characters. This is produced by Robert
-%%% Solovay's checksum utility.",
-%%% }
-%%% ====================================================================
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\IfFileExists{ltugboat.cls}{%
- \documentclass{ltugboat}
- \def\rtitlex{TUGboat, Volume 14 (1993), No. 1}
- \def\midrtitle{}
- \def\PrelimDraftfooter{}
- \let\TBmaketitle\maketitle
- \setcounter{page}{60}
- }{%
- \documentclass{article}
- \newcommand\address[1]{}
- \newcommand\netaddress[1]{}
- \newcommand\TUB{\textsl{TUGboat\/}}
- \newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
- \newcommand{\plain}{\texttt{plain}}}
-\usepackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-%
-\newcommand{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\makeatletter
-% -------------------------------------------------
-% Definitions copied from doc.sty by FMi
-% -------------------------------------------------
-{\obeyspaces%
-\gdef\meta{\begingroup\obeyspaces%
-\def {\egroup\space\hbox\bgroup\it}\m@ta}}
-\def\m@ta#1{\hbox\bgroup$\langle$\it#1\/$\rangle$\egroup\endgroup}
-%
-{\catcode`\|=\z@ \catcode`\\=12|gdef|bslash{\}}
-%
-\makeatother
-\newcommand{\bsl}{\protect\bslash}
-
-
-\begin{document}
-\title{An update on the \babel\ system}
-\author{Johannes Braams}
-\address{%
- \TeX niek\\
- Kersengaarde 33\\
- 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\
- The Netherlands}
-\netaddress{babel@braams.cistron.nl}
-\date{06 January 1997 \\
- Version 1.02}
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
- This article describes the changes that have been made to the
- \babel\ system, since the article describing the system appeared in
- \TUB\ Volume 12, number 2. This article announces the release of a
- new version of the \babel\ system.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{Introduction}
-
-Since the publication of the \babel\ system in \TUB~\cite{bab} several
-changes have occurred. With the new release of \LaTeX\ -- which
-appeared at the end of 1991 -- the internationalised version I\LaTeX,
-prepared by Joachim Schrod~\cite{ilatex} was withdrawn. But some of
-its functionality was still needed, so a modification of the \babel\
-system was necessary.
-
-Besides this a couple of bugs were reported and had to be fixed. The
-major problem was that the language changing commands were not
-`local', they contained global definitions. In the current version
-these commands obey grouping correctly.
-
-Some macros that formerly were in language-specific files have been
-moved to the core of the system, because they are being used in
-several language-specific files.
-
-\section{Changes to the core of \babel}
-
-The changes to the core of the \babel\ system are the most extensive.
-
-\subsection*{{\tt\bsl selectlanguage}}
-The \babel\ user-command |\selectlanguage| now also accepts a control
-sequence as its argument. This was included to provide compatibility
-for users who were used to the syntax of the original
-\file{german.tex}, but wanted to switch to \babel. The escape
-character is `peeled off' and the name of the control sequence is then
-used as the name of the language to select.
-
-Another change to the |\selectlanguage| macro is that it now stores
-the name of the current language in the control sequence
-|\languagename|. The contents of this control sequence could be tested
-in the following way:
-
-\begin{verbatim}
- \edef\tmp{\string english}
- \ifx\languagename\tmp
- ...
- \else
- ...
- \fi
-\end{verbatim}
-
-The construction with |\string| is necessary because
-|\languagename| returns the name with characters of category code
-\texttt{12} (other).
-
-\subsection*{Saving macro definitions}
-
-A new way of handling macros that are temporarily \emph{re}defined was
-developed by Bernd Raichle and included in the core of the \babel\
-system. Two new macros, for use in the language-specific files have
-been introduced.\\
-These macros, |\babel@savevariable|\meta{register} and
-|\babel@save|\meta{macro}, append code to |\originalTeX|. This code
-restores the value (or meaning) of what was saved when |\originalTeX|
-was executed.
-
-\subsection*{Special characters}
-
-Some of the language-specific files introduce one or more characters
-that are special in some way. Such characters have to be added to
-|\dospecials| (and |\@sanitize| too for \LaTeX) whenever their special
-meaning is activated. But, they may have to be removed again when
-another language, which doesn't use them, is in effect.
-
-To this end two new control sequences, that are meant to be used in
-the language-specific files are introduced. They are
-|\babel@add@special| and |\babel@remove@special| and perform the
-necessary tasks.
-
-\subsection*{Additional facilities}
-
-A specific request from Joachim Schrod for \babel, was the possibility
-to extend the definition of a control sequence on the fly. It should,
-for instance, be possible that the user adds a macro of his own to the
-definition of |\extrasenglish|.
-
-This feature is now provided by the macro\\
- |\addto{|\meta{control sequence}|}{|\meta{\TeX\ code}|}|.
- It is now used throughout the
-language-specific files to build the macros |\extras|\meta{lang} and
-|\noextras|\meta{lang}.
-
-The support macros |\allowhyphens|,\\ |\set@low@box| and |\save@sf@q|
-have been moved from the language-specific files to the core of the
-\babel\ system.
-
-\subsection{The files}
-
-In the previous release a file called \file{latexhax.com} was
-provided. This was needed to provide some macros normally defined by
-\LaTeX, to \plain~\TeX\ users. The need for this file has been removed
-in the current release of the \babel\ system.
-
-In the previous release of the system, four different files were
-provided (all derived from \file{hyphen.doc} that were needed for
-different combinations of versions of \TeX\ and \file{plain.tex} or
-\file{lplain.tex}. This has been changed. In the current version only
-two different files are derived from \file{hyphen.doc}. They are
-\file{babel.switch} and \file{babel.hyphen}.\\
-The file \file{babel.switch} is needed for people who can't build a
-new format or don't have \TeX\ version 3. The file \file{babel.hyphen}
-should be loaded into the format by ini\TeX. It provides the macros
-from \file{babel.switch}, but additionally it reads the file
-\file{language.dat}, which specifies the languages for which
-hyphenation patterns should be loaded.
-
-In the previous release the file \file{babel.com} contained
-redefinitions for a lot of \LaTeX\ macros to replace texts with
-control sequences. This has been removed, because it is no longer
-necessary for releases of \LaTeX\ dated december 1991 or later. Those
-who still have an older release of \LaTeX\ can produce a special
-version of \file{babel.com} by including the docstrip option
-\meta{names} when stripping the file \file{babel.doc}.
-
-With the release of the new version of Frank Mittelbach's \texttt{doc}
-package the stripped files are no longer distributed. The distribution
-of babel now includes a file \file{install.babel} with which you can
-produce them (give the command \file{tex install.babel}).
-
-\section{Changes to the language specific files}
-
-Bernd Raichle has invented a solution for things like |\char"45|
-when the |"| is active. His solution (from german 2.3e) has been
-included in germanb and is copied for other language specific files
-that have an active |"|.
-
-A few terms have been added to the |\captions|\meta{...} macros,
-again following \file{german.tex}. These terms are |\prefacename|,
-|\seename| and |\seealsoname|. I don't have the correct
-translations for all languages yet, but that will be repaired as soon
-as someone provides them to me.
-
-For the dutch language the behaviour of the active double quote has
-been slightly modified. It has been noted that there is a difference
-between |"e|, where a `trema' should be produced and |\"u|, where we
-should get an `umlaut'. The difference between the two is that the
-`trema' should disappear at a hyphenation point, whereas the `umlaut'
-should not.
-
-\begin{thebibliography}{9}
- \bibitem{bab} Johannes Braams,
- \emph{Babel, a multilingual style-option system for use with
- \LaTeX's standard document styles},
- \emph{TUGboat} 12 (1991) \#2, p.~291--301.
- \bibitem{ilatex}Joachim Schrod,
- \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use},
- \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90.
-\end{thebibliography}
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1604.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1604.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index f5f2b74fc4d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/tb1604.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,448 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-%%% ====================================================================
-%%% @TeX-file{
-%%% author = "Johannes",
-%%% version = "1.0",
-%%% date = "05 December 1995",
-%%% time = "22:43:54 MET",
-%%% filename = "tbstatus.tex",
-%%% address = "TeXniek,
-%%% Kersengaarde 33
-%%% 2723 BP Zoetermeer
-%%% The Netherlands",
-%%% telephone = "+31 79 352 28 19",
-%%% FAX = "+31 70 343 23 95",
-%%% checksum = "",
-%%% email = "babel@braams.cistron.nl (Internet)",
-%%% codetable = "ISO/ASCII",
-%%% keywords = "",
-%%% supported = "yes",
-%%% abstract = "",
-%%% docstring = "This article is derived from my
-%%% presentation at the EuroTeX'95 conference
-%%% and will appear in a future issue of
-%%% TuGboat.
-%%%
-%%% The checksum field above contains a CRC-16
-%%% checksum as the first value, followed by the
-%%% equivalent of the standard UNIX wc (word
-%%% count) utility output of lines, words, and
-%%% characters. This is produced by Robert
-%%% Solovay's checksum utility.",
-%%% }
-%%% ====================================================================
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\IfFileExists{ltugboat.cls}{%
- \documentclass{ltugboat}
- \def\rtitlex{TUGboat, Volume 16 (1995), No. 4}
- %\def\midrtitle{}
- %\def\PrelimDraftfooter{}
- %\let\TBmaketitle\maketitle
- %\SelfDocumenting
- \setcounter{page}{1}
- }{%
- \documentclass{article}
- \newcommand\address[1]{}
- \newcommand\netaddress[1]{}
- \newcommand\TUB{\textsl{TUGboat\/}}
- \newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}}
-\usepackage{shortvrb}
-\MakeShortVerb{\|}
-
-\newcommand\figrule{\kern3pt\hrule\kern3pt}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\cls}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\Lenv}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\opt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\meta}[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\it #1\/$\rangle$}}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\bs{\char'134}
-\let\osn\oldstylenums
-
-\begin{document}
-
-\title{The status of \babel}
-\author{Johannes L. Braams}
-\address{%
- \TeX niek\\
- Kersengaarde 33\\
- 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\
- The Netherlands}
-\netaddress{babel@braams.cistron.nl}
-\date{september 1995}
-\maketitle
-
-\begin{abstract}
- In this article I will give an overview of what has happened to
- \babel\ lately. First I will briefly describe the history of \babel;
- then I will introduce the concept of `shorthands'. New ways of
- changing the `language' have been introduced and \babel\ can now
- easily be adapted for local needs. Finally I will discuss some
- compatibility issues.
-\end{abstract}
-
-\section{A brief history of \babel}
-
-The first ideas of developing a set of macros to support typesetting
-documents with \TeX\ in languages other than English developed around
-the time of the Euro\TeX\ conference in Karls\-ruhe (\osn{1989}). Back
-then I had created support for typesetting in Dutch by stealing
-\file{german.tex} (by Hubert Partl c.s.) and modifying it for Dutch
-conventions. This worked, but I was not completely satisfied as I hate
-the duplication of code. Soon after that I found that more `copies' of
-\file{german.tex} existed to support other languages. This led me to
-the idea of creating a package that combined these kind of language
-support packages. It would have to consist of at least two `layers':
-all the code the various copies of \file{german.tex} had in common in
-one place, loaded only once by \TeX, and a set of files with the code
-needed to support language specific needs. During the Karlsruhe
-conference the name `\babel' came up in discussions I had. It seemed
-an appropriate name and I sticked to it.
-
-\begin{table}[hbt]
- \begin{center}
- \begin{tabular}{l}
- \hline
- First ideas at Euro\protect\TeX'89 Karlsruhe\\
- First published in TUGboat 12--2\\
- Update article in TUGboat 14--1\\
- Presentation of new release at Euro\protect\TeX'95\\
- \hline
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{A brief history of \babel}
- \end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-After the conference I started to work on ``\babel, a multilingual
-style-option system for use with \LaTeX' standard document styles''.
-The first release with support for about half a dozen languages
-appeared in the first half of \osn{1990}. In TUGboat volume \osn{12}
-number \osn{2} an article appeared describing \babel. Soon thereafter
-people started contributing translations for the `standard terms' for
-languages not yet present in \babel. The next big update appeared in
-\osn{1992}, accompanied by an article in TUGboat volume \osn{14}
-number \osn{1}. The main new features were that an interface was added
-to `push' and `pop' macro definitions and values of registers. Also
-some code was moved from language files to the core of \babel. In
-\osn{1994} some changes were needed to get \babel\ to work with
-\LaTeXe. As it turned out a lot of problems were still unsolved,
-amongst which the incompatibility between \babel\ and the use of
-\textsc{T}\osn{1} encoded fonts was most important.
-
-\noindent Therefore \babel\ version \osn{3}.\osn{5} has appeared.
-It's main features are:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item complete rewrite of the way active characters are dealt with;
-\item new ways to switch the language;
-\item A language switch is also written to the \file{.aux} file;
-\item possibility to `configure' the language specific files;
-\item extended syntax of \file{language.dat};
-\item compatibility with both the \pkg{inputenc} and\\
- \pkg{fontenc} packages;
-\item new languages (breton, estonian, irish, scottish, lower and
- upper sorbian).
-\end{itemize}
-
-\noindent These changes are described in the remainder of this article.
-
-\section{Shorthands and active characters}
-
-During \babel's lifetime the number of languages for which one or more
-characters were made active has grown. Until \babel\ release
-\osn{3}.\osn{4} this needed a lot of duplication of code for each
-extra active character. A situation with which I obviously was not
-very happy as I hate the duplication of code. Another problematic
-aspect of the way \babel\ dealt with active characters was the way
-\babel\ made it possible to still use them in the arguments of cross
-referencing commands. \textsf{Babel} did this with a trick that
-involves the use of |\meaning|. This resulted in the fact that the
-argument of |\label| was no longer expanded by \TeX.
-
-Because of these problems I set out to find a different implementation
-of active characters. A starting point was that a character that is
-made active should remain active for the rest of the document; only
-it's definition should change. During the development of this new
-implementation it was suggested in discussions I had within the
-\LaTeX3 team to devise a way to have `different kinds' of active
-characters. Out of this discussion came the current `shorthands'.
-
-\begin{quote}
- \textsl{A shorthand is a sequence of one or two characters that
- expands to arbitrary \TeX\ code.}
-\end{quote}
-
-These shorthands are implemented in such a way that there are three
-levels of shorthands:
-
-\begin{itemize}
-\item user level
-\item language level
-\item system level
-\end{itemize}
-
-\noindent Shorthands can be used for different kinds of things:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item the character \verb=~= is redefined by \babel\ as a one
- character, system level shorthand;
-\item In some languages shorthands such as \verb="a= are defined to be
- able to hyphenate the word;
-\item In some languages shorthands such as \verb=!= are used to insert
- the right amount of white space.
-\end{itemize}
-
-When you want to use or define shorthands you should keep the
-following in mind:
-\begin{itemize}
-\item User level takes precedence over language level;
-\item Language level takes precedence over system level;
-\item One character shorthands take precedence over two character
- shorthands;
-\item Shorthands are written unexpanded to \file{.aux} files.
-\end{itemize}
-
-\noindent In table~\ref{tab:sh-ov} an overview is given of the
-various shorthand characters that are used for different languages.
-
-\begin{table}[ht]
- \begin{center}
- \begin{tabular}{ll}
- \hline
- \texttt{\char'176} & system, catalan, estonian, galician, spanish \\
- \texttt{:} & breton, francais, turkish \\
- \texttt{;} & breton, francais \\
- \texttt{!} & breton, francais, turkish \\
- \texttt{?} & breton, francais \\
- \texttt{"} & catalan, danish, dutch, estonian, finnish\\
- & galician, german, polish, portuguese, slovene\\
- & spanish, upper~sorbian\\
- \texttt{`} & catalan (optional)\\
- \texttt{'} & catalan, galician, spanish (optional)\\
- \texttt{\char'136} & esperanto\\
- \texttt{=} & turkish \\
- \hline
- \end{tabular}
- \caption{Overview of shorthands}\label{tab:sh-ov}
- \end{center}
-\end{table}
-
-Note that the acute and grave characters are only used as shorthand
-characters when the options \opt{activeacute} and \opt{activegrave}
-are used.
-
-On the user level three additional commands are available to deal with
-shorthands:
-\begin{description}
-\item[\texttt{\bs useshorthands}] This command takes one argument, the
- character that should become a shorthand character.
-\item[\texttt{\bs defineshorthand}] This command takes two arguments,
- the first argument being the shorthand character sequence, the
- second argument being the code the shorthand should expand to.
-\item[\texttt{\bs languageshorthands}] This last command (which takes
- one argument, the name of a language) can be used to switch to the
- shorthands of another language, \emph{not} switching other language
- facilities. Of course this only works if both languages were
- specified as an option when loading the package \babel.
-\end{description}
-
-On the level of the language definition files four new commands are
-introduced to interface with the shorthand code.
-\begin{description}
-\item[\texttt{\bs initiate@active@char}] This command is used to tell
- \LaTeX\ that the character in its argument is going to be used as a
- shorthand character. It makes the character active, but lets it
- expand to its non-active self.
-\item[\texttt{\bs bbl@activate}] This can be used to switch
- the expansion of an active character to its active code.
-\item[\texttt{\bs bbl@deactivate}] This command resets the expansion
- of an active character to expand to its non-active self.
-\item[\texttt{\bs declare@shorthand}] This command is the internal
- command for (and also used by) |\defineshorthand|; it has
- \emph{three} arguments: the first argument is the name of the
- language for which to define the shorthands, the other two are the
- same as for |\defineshorthand|.
-\end{description}
-
-One of the goals of the introduction of shorthands was to reduce the
-amount of code needed in the language definition files to support
-active characters. This goal has been reached; when a language needs
-the double quote character (\texttt{"}) to be active all one has to
-put into the language definition file are code fragments such as shown
-in figure~\ref{fig:dq}.
-
-\begin{figure}[ht]
- \figrule
-\begin{verbatim}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasdutch{%
- \languageshorthands{dutch}%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-...
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}%
- {\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-...
-\end{verbatim}
- \figrule
- \caption{Example of defining a shorthand}\label{fig:dq}
-\end{figure}
-
-Apart from removing a lot of code from language definition files by
-introducing shorthands, some other code has been moved to
-\file{babel.def} as well. In some language definition files it was
-necessary to provide access to glyphs that are not normally easily
-available (such as the |\quotedblbase| in the example in
-figure~\ref{fig:dq}. Some of these glyphs have to be `constructed' for
-\textsc{ot}\osn{1} encoding while they are present in
-\textsc{t}\osn{1} encoded fonts. Having all such (encoding dependent)
-code together in one place has the advantage these glyphs are the same
-for all the language definition files of \babel; also maintenance is
-easier this way.
-
-\section{Switching the language}
-
-Until release \osn{3}.\osn{5} \babel\ only had \emph{one} command to
-switch between languages: |\selectlanguage|. It takes the name of the
-language to switch to as an argument; the command is used as a
-declaration and always switches everything\footnote{that means the
- hyphenation pattern, the \texttt{\bs lefthyphenmin} and \texttt{\bs
- righthyphenmin} parameters, the translations of the words, the
- date and the specials}. Two new ways to switch to another language
-have now been introduced.
-
-\begin{description}
-\item[\texttt{\bs selectlanguage}] This command was available in
- \babel\ from the start.
-\item[\texttt{\bs foreignlanguage}] This new command is meant to be
- used when a short piece of text (such as a quote) comes from another
- language. This text should not be longer than \emph{one} paragraph.
- For the text the hyphenation patterns and the specials are switched.
- The command has two arguments: the name of the language and the text
- from that language.
-\item[environment `otherlanguage'] This new environment switches the
- same aspects as the command |\selectlanguage| does. The difference
- is that the switches are local to the environment whereas one either
- has to use |\selectlanguage| in a group to get the same effect or
- one has to issue multiple |\selectlanguage| commands. Also the
- environment is one of the things needed to enable the development of
- language definition files that support right-to-left typesetting.
-\end{description}
-
-An aspect of some multilingual documents might be that they have
-section titles or figure captions in different languages. For this to
-work properly \babel\ now writes some information on the \file{.aux}
-file when a language switch from either |\selectlanguage| or the
-\Lenv{otherlanguage} environment occurs. \textsf{Babel} nows about
-the \file{.toc}, \file{.lof} and \file{.lot} files; if you have added
-an extra table of contents you should be aware of this.
-
-\section{Adapting \babel\ for local usage}
-
-In the past people have had to find ways to adapt \babel\ to document
-classes that have been developed locally (implementing house style for
-instance). Some have found ways to that without changing any of the
-babel files, others have modified language definition files and have
-found themselves having to make these changes each time a new release
-of \babel\ is made available\footnote{which doesn't happen too often
- \texttt{;-)}.}. It has been suggested to provide an easier way of
-doing this. Therefore I have copied the concept of configuration files
-from \LaTeXe\ and introduced language configuration files. For each
-language definition file that is loaded \LaTeX\ will try to find a
-configuration file. Such files have the same name as the language
-definition file; except for their extension which has to be
-\file{.cfg}.
-
-\section{Loading hyphenation patterns}
-
-An important change to the core of \babel\ is that the syntax of
-\file{language.dat} has been extended. This was suggested by Bernard
-Gaulle, author of the package \pkg{french}. His package supports an
-enhanced version of \file{language.dat} in which one can optionally
-indicate that a file with a list of hyphenation excpetions has to be
-loaded. It is also possible to have more than one name for the same
-hyphenation pattern register.
-
-\begin{figure}[ht]
- \figrule
-\begin{verbatim}
-% File : language.dat
-% Purpose : specify which hypenation
-% patterns to load while running
-% iniTeX
-=american
-english hyphen.english exceptions.english
-=USenglish
-french fr8hyph.tex
-english ukhyphen.tex
-=UKenglish
-=british
-dutch hyphen.dutch
-german hyphen.german
-\end{verbatim}
- \figrule
- \caption{Example of \file{language.dat}}\label{fig:l.d}
-\end{figure}
-
-As you can see in the example of \file{language.dat} in
-figure~\ref{fig:l.d}, an equals sign ($=$) on the beginning of a line
-now has a significant meaning. It tells \LaTeX\ that the name which
-follows the equals sign is to be an alternate name for the hyphenation
-patterns that were loaded last. As you probably expect, there is one
-exception to this rule: when the first (non-comment) line starts with
-an equals sign it will be an alternate name for the \emph{next}
-hyphenation patterns that will be loaded. Hence, in the example the
-hyphenation patterns stored in the file \file{hyphen.english} will be
-known to \TeX\ as: `american', `english' and `USenglish'. You can also
-see in figuree~\ref{fig:l.d} that for `english' an extra file is
-specified. It will be loaded after \file{hyphen.english} and should
-contain some hyphenation exceptions.
-
-\section{Compatibility with other formats}
-
-This release of \babel\ has been tested with \LaTeXe; with and
-without either of the packages \pkg{inputenc} or \pkg{fontenc}. There
-should no longer be any problems using one (or both) of these packages
-together with \babel.
-
-\noindent This release has also been tested with \textsc{Plain}~\TeX, it should
-not provide any problems when used with that format. Therefore
-\babel~version \osn{3}.\osn{5} should not pose any problems when used
-with any format which is based on \textsc{Plain}~\TeX; this has
-\emph{not} been tested by me though. Some provisions are made to make
-\babel~\osn{3}.\osn{5} work with \LaTeX$\:$\osn{2}.\osn{09}; but not
-all features may work as expected as I haven't tested this fully.
-
-Please note that although it was necessary to copy parts of
-\pkg{inputenc} and \pkg{fontenc} this does not mean that you get
-\textsc{t}\osn{1} support in \textsc{Plain}~\TeX, simply by adding
-\babel. To acheive that much more work is needed.
-
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 2ec69bc6bee..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,309 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{179}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{turkish.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{turkish}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{turkish.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2m Turkish support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `turkish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-%% Turkish Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005
-%% by Mustafa Burc
-%% rz6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de
-%% (40) 2503476
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Turkish language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{turkish.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{turkish.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{turkish-1.2}{1994/02/27}{Update for \LaTeXe}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2c}{1994/06/26}{Removed the use of \cs{filedate}
-% and moved identification after the loading of \file{babel.def}}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2h}{1996/07/13}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2i}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Turkish language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% Turkish language\footnote{Mustafa Burc,
-% \texttt{z6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de} provided the code for
-% this file. It is based on the work by Pierre Mackay; Turgut Uyar,
-% \texttt{uyar@cs.itu.edu.tr} supplied additional translations in
-% version 1.2j and later}.
-%
-% Turkish typographic rules specify that a little `white space'
-% should be added before the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{!}'
-% and `\texttt{=}'. In order to insert this white space
-% automatically these characters are made `active'. Also
-% |\frenhspacing| is set.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{turkish-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{ow use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{turkish}\captionsturkish
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{turkish} could be an `unknown' language in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@turkish| to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \changes{turkish-1.2c}{1994/06/26}{Now use \cs{@nopatterns} to
-% produce the warning}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@turkish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Turkish}
- \adddialect\l@turkish0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Turkish language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsturkish}
-% The macro |\captionsturkish| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{turkish-1.1}{1993/07/15}{\cs{headpagename} should be
-% \cs{pagename}}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added braces behind \cs{i} in
-% strings}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2f}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2j}{1997/09/29}{Added and modified translations}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2k}{1999/04/18}{Incorporated some more
-% corrections}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2m}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsturkish{%
- \def\prefacename{\"Ons\"oz}%
- \def\refname{Kaynaklar}%
- \def\abstractname{\"Ozet}%
- \def\bibname{Kaynak\c ca}%
- \def\chaptername{B\"ol\"um}%
- \def\appendixname{Ek}%
- \def\contentsname{\.I\c cindekiler}%
- \def\listfigurename{\c Sekil Listesi}%
- \def\listtablename{Tablo Listesi}%
- \def\indexname{Dizin}%
- \def\figurename{\c Sekil}%
- \def\tablename{Tablo}%
- \def\partname{K\i s\i m}%
- \def\enclname{\.Ili\c sik}%
- \def\ccname{Di\u ger Al\i c\i lar}%
- \def\headtoname{Al\i c\i}%
- \def\pagename{Sayfa}%
- \def\subjectname{\.Ilgili}%
- \def\seename{bkz.}%
- \def\alsoname{ayr\i ca bkz.}%
- \def\proofname{Kan\i t}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateturkish}
-% The macro |\dateturkish| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Turkish dates.
-% \changes{turkish-1.2b}{1994/06/04}{Added braces behind \cs{i} in
-% strings}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2d}{1995/01/31}{removed extra closing brace,
-% \cs{mont} should be \cs{month}}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2j}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2j}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2l}{1999/05/17}{removed dot from the date format}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateturkish{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Ocak\or \c Subat\or Mart\or Nisan\or May\i{}s\or Haziran\or
- Temmuz\or A\u gustos\or Eyl\"ul\or Ekim\or Kas\i{}m\or
- Aral\i{}k\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasturkish}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2e}{1995/05/15}{Completely rewrote macro}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextrasturkish}
-% The macro |\extrasturkish| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Turkish language. The macro |\noextrasturkish| is
-% used to cancel the actions of |\extrasturkish|.
-%
-% Turkish typographic rules specify that a little `white space'
-% should be added before the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{!}'
-% and `\texttt{=}'. In order to insert this white space
-% automatically these characters are made |\active|, so they have
-% to be treated in a special way.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{:}
-\initiate@active@char{!}
-\initiate@active@char{=}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We specify that the turkish group of shorthands should be used.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasturkish{\languageshorthands{turkish}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may
-% vary.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasturkish{%
- \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{=}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For Turkish texts |\frenchspacing| should be in effect. We
-% make sure this is the case and reset it if necessary.
-% \changes{turkish-1.2e}{1995/05/15}{now use \cs{bbl@frenchspacing}
-% and \cs{bbl@nonfrenchspacing}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasturkish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasturkish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\turkish@sh@!@}
-% \begin{macro}{\turkish@sh@=@}
-% \begin{macro}{\turkish@sh@:@}
-% The definitions for the three active characters were made using
-% intermediate macros. These are defined now. The insertion of
-% extra `white space' should only happen outside math mode, hence
-% the check |\ifmmode| in the macros.
-% \changes{turkish-1.2d}{1995/01/31}{Added missing \cs{def}}
-% \changes{turkish-1.2e}{1995/05/15}{Use the new mechanism of
-% \cs{declare@shorthand}}
-%%^^A JLB:: this code breaks during \begin{document}
-%%^^A JLB: Needs fixing!!
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{turkish}{:}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string:%
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string:%
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{turkish}{!}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string!%
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string!%
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{turkish}{=}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string=%
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\kern\fontdimen2\font
- \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font
- \fi
- \fi
- \string=%
- \fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{turkish-1.2i}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{turkish}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e7af81a31a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/turkish.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{turkish.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{turkish.ldf}{\from{turkish.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 0bd4b5537af..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1158 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{1472}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{ukraineb.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{ukraineb}
- [2008/03/21 v1.1l Ukrainian support from the babel system]
-%
-%% File `ukraineb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% ukraineb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2008
-%% by Andrij Shvaika ashv at icmp.lviv.ua
-%
-%% derived from the Russianb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008
-%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-% adapted to the new T2 and X2 Cyrillic encodings
-% by Vladimir Volovich TeX at vvv.vsu.ru
-% Werner Lemberg wl at gnu.org
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand\note[1]{}
-\newcommand\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newcommand\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{ukraineb.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{ukraineb.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1e}{1999/08/19}{replaced all \cs{penalty}\cs{@M}
-% with \cs{nobreak}}
-%
-% \section{The Ukrainian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion.
-% This file was derived from the \file{russianb.dtx} version 1.1g.}
-% defines all the language-specific macros for the Ukrainian
-% language. It needs the file \file{cyrcod} for success documentation
-% with Ukrainian encodings (see below).
-%
-% For this language the character |"| is made active. In
-% table~\ref{tab:ukrainian-quote} an overview is given of its
-% purpose.
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% \verb="|= & disable ligature at this position. \\
-% |"-| & an explicit hyphen sign, allowing hyphenation
-% in the rest of the word. \\
-% |"---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\
-% |"--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\
-% |"--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\
-% |""| & like |"-|, but producing no hyphen sign
-% (for compund words with hyphen, e.g.\ |x-""y|
-% or some other signs as ``disable/enable''). \\
-% |"~| & for a compound word mark without a breakpoint. \\
-% |"=| & for a compound word mark with a breakpoint, allowing
-% hyphenation in the composing words. \\
-% |",| & thinspace for initials with a breakpoint
-% in following surname. \\
-% |"`| & for German left double quotes
-% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\
-% |"'| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A''
-% |"<| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\
-% |">| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{The extra definitions made
-% by \file{ukraineb}}\label{tab:ukrainian-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% The quotes in table~\ref{tab:ukrainian-quote} (see, also
-% table~\ref{tab:russian-quote}) can also be typeset by using the commands
-% in table~\ref{tab:umore-quote} (see, also table~\ref{tab:rmore-quote}).
-%
-% \begin{table}[htb]
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{lp{8cm}}
-% |\cdash---| & Cyrillic emdash in plain text. \\
-% |\cdash--~| & Cyrillic emdash in compound names (surnames). \\
-% |\cdash--*| & Cyrillic emdash for denoting direct speech. \\
-% |\glqq| & for German left double quotes
-% (looks like ,\kern-0.08em,). \\
-% |\grqq| & for German right double quotes (looks like ``). \\%^^A''
-% |\flqq| & for French left double quotes (looks like $<\!\!<$). \\
-% |\frqq| & for French right double quotes (looks like $>\!\!>$). \\
-% |\dq| & the original quotes character (|"|). \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \caption{More commands which produce quotes, defined
-% by \babel}\label{tab:umore-quote}
-% \end{center}
-% \end{table}
-%
-% The French quotes are also available as ligatures `|<<|' and `|>>|' in
-% 8-bit Cyrillic font encodings (\texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2}, \texttt{T2*})
-% and as `|<|' and `|>|' characters in 7-bit Cyrillic font encodings
-% (\texttt{OT2} and \texttt{LWN}).
-%
-% The quotation marks traditionally used in Ukrainian and Russian
-% languages were borrowed from other languages (e.g. French and German)
-% so they keep their original names.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is loaded
-% more than once, checking the category code of the \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{ukrainian}{captionsukrainian}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e., by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{ukraineb} will be an `unknown' language, in which case
-% we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of |\l@ukrainian|
-% to see whether we have to do something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@ukrainian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Ukrainian}
- \adddialect\l@ukrainian0
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding}
-%
-% We need to know the encoding for text that is supposed to be which is
-% active at the end of the \babel\ package. If the \pkg{fontenc} package
-% is loaded later, then\ldots too bad!
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The user may choose between different available Cyrillic
-% encodings---e.g., \texttt{X2}, \texttt{LCY}, or \texttt{LWN}.\@
-% Hopefully, \texttt{X2} will eventually replace the two latter encodings
-% (\texttt{LCY} and \texttt{LWN}).\@ If the user wants to use another
-% font encoding than the default (\texttt{T2A}), he has to load the
-% corresponding file \emph{before} \file{ukraineb.sty}. This may be done
-% in the following way:
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% % override the default X2 encoding used in Babel
-% \usepackage[LCY,OT1]{fontenc}
-% \usepackage[english,ukrainian]{babel}
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \unskip
-%
-% Note: for the Ukrainian language, the \texttt{T2A} encoding is better than
-% \texttt{X2}, because \texttt{X2} does not contain Latin letters, and
-% users should be very careful to switch the language every time they
-% want to typeset a Latin word inside a Ukrainian phrase or vice versa.
-%
-% We parse the |\cdp@list| containing the encodings known to \LaTeX\ in
-% the order they were loaded. We set the |\cyrillicencoding| to the
-% \emph{last} loaded encoding in the list of supported Cyrillic
-% encodings: \texttt{OT2}, \texttt{LWN}, \texttt{LCY}, \texttt{X2},
-% \texttt{T2C}, \texttt{T2B}, \texttt{T2A}, if any.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
- \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
- \edef\reserved@c{#2}%
- \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c
- \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c
- \fi}
-\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
- \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{X2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}}
-\cdp@list
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now, if |\cyrillicencoding| is undefined, then the user did not load
-% any of supported encodings. So, we have to set |\cyrillicencoding| to
-% some default value. We test the presence of the encoding definition
-% files in the order from less preferable to more preferable encodings.
-% We use the lowercase names (i.e., \file{lcyenc.def} instead of
-% \file{LCYenc.def}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If |\cyrillicencoding| is still undefined, then the user seems not to
-% have a properly installed distribution. A fatal error.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}%
- {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak
- You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}%
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We avoid |\usepackage[\cyrillicencoding]{fontenc}| because we don't
-% want to force the switch of |\encodingdefault|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \lowercase
- \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}%
- \fi
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{verbatim}
-% \PackageInfo{babel}
-% {Using `\cyrillicencoding' as a default Cyrillic encoding}%
-% \end{verbatim}
-% \unskip
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\Ukrainian}{%
- \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\ukrainianhyphenmins
- \language\l@ukrainian}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{%
- \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins
- \language\l@english}%
-\let\Ukr\Ukrainian
-\let\Eng\English
-\let\cyrillictext\Ukrainian
-\let\cyr\Ukrainian
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Since the \texttt{X2} encoding does not contain Latin letters, we
-% should make some redefinitions of \LaTeX\ macros which implicitly
-% produce Latin letters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% We put |\latinencoding| in braces to avoid problems with
-% |\@alph| inside minipages (e.g., footnotes inside minipages) where
-% |\@alph| is expanded and we get for example `|\fontencoding OT1|'
-% (|\fontencoding| is robust).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or
- i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or
- q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
- y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or
- I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or
- Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or
- Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Unfortunately, the commands |\AA| and |\aa| are not encoding dependent
-% in \LaTeX\ (unlike e.g., |\oe| or |\DH|). They are defined as |\r{A}| and
-% |\r{a}|. This leads to unpredictable results when the font encoding
-% does not contain the Latin letters `A' and `a' (like \texttt{X2}).
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The following block redefines the character class of uppercase Greek
-% letters and some accents, if it is equal to 7 (variable family), to
-% avoid incorrect results if the font encoding in some math family does
-% not contain these characters in places of OT1 encoding. The code was
-% taken from |amsmath.dtx|. See comments and further explanation there.
-%
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1i}{2001/02/21}{As this code generates a
-% textfont 7 error it is commented out for now.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% \begingroup\catcode`\"=12
-% % uppercase greek letters:
-% \def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax
-% "0000\@nil#1}
-% \def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{%
-% \ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax
-% \ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi
-% \fi}
-% \@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi
-% \@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi
-% \@tempa\Omega
-% % some accents:
-% \def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent}
-% \expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil
-% \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
-% \def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}%
-% \def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}%
-% \def\do#1"#2{}
-% \def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil
-% \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF
-% \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}%
-% \fi}
-% \@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave
-% \@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar
-% \fi
-% \endgroup
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The user must use the \pkg{inputenc} package when any 8-bit Cyrillic
-% font encoding is used, selecting one of the Cyrillic input encodings.
-% We do not assume any default input encoding, so the user should
-% explicitly call the \pkg{inputenc} package by |\usepackage{inputenc}|.
-% We also removed |\AtBeginDocument|, so \pkg{inputenc} should be used
-% before \babel.
-%
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1f}{1999/08/27}{Made not using inputenc a
-% warning instead of an error}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{%
- \def\reserved@a{LWN}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \def\reserved@a{OT2}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \PackageWarning{babel}%
- {No input encoding specified for Ukrainian language}
- \fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we define two commands that offer the possibility to switch between
-% Cyrillic and Roman encodings.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cyrillictext}
-% \begin{macro}{\latintext}
-%
-% The command |\cyrillictext| will switch from Latin font encoding to the
-% Cyrillic font encoding, the command |\latintext| switches back. This
-% assumes that the `normal' font encoding is a Latin one. These commands
-% are \emph{declarations}, for shorter peaces of text the commands
-% |\textlatin| and |\textcyrillic| can be used.
-%
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1j}{2003/10/12}{\cs{latintext} is already
-% defined by the core of \babel}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{%
-% \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
-% \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}}
-\let\lat\latintext
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\textcyrillic}
-% \begin{macro}{\textlatin}
-%
-% These commands take an argument which is then typeset using the
-% requested font encoding.
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1j}{2003/10/12}{\cs{latintext} is already
-% defined by the core of \babel}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext}
-%\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% We make the \TeX
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\ifx\ltxTeX\undefined\let\ltxTeX\TeX\fi
-%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\TeX}{\textlatin{\ltxTeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and \LaTeX\ logos encoding independent.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\ifx\ltxLaTeX\undefined\let\ltxLaTeX\LaTeX\fi
-%\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\LaTeX}{\textlatin{\ltxLaTeX}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Ukrainian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsukrainian}
-%
-% The macro |\captionsukrainian| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard document classes provided with \LaTeX. The two commands |\cyr|
-% and |\lat| activate Cyrillic resp.\ Latin encoding.
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1d}{1999/04/03}{replace \cs{CYRUKRI} with
-% \cs{CYRII} in \cs{authorname} }
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1g}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1h}{2001/02/13}{Added translation for
-% `Glossary'}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\captionsukrainian{%
- \def\prefacename{{\cyr\CYRV\cyrs\cyrt\cyru\cyrp}}%
-% \def\prefacename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrm\cyro\cyrv\cyra}}%
- \def\refname{%
- {\cyr\CYRL\cyrii\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
-% \def\refname{%
-% {\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
-% \ \cyrp\cyro\cyrs\cyri\cyrl\cyra\cyrn\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\abstractname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrya}}%
-% \def\abstractname{{\cyr\CYRR\cyre\cyrf\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt}}%
- \def\bibname{%
- {\cyr\CYRB\cyrii\cyrb\cyrl\cyrii\cyro\cyrgup\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyrii\cyrya}}%
-% \def\bibname{{\cyr\CYRL\cyrii\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRR\cyro\cyrz\cyrd\cyrii\cyrl}}%
-% \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}%
- \def\appendixname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrd\cyra\cyrt\cyro\cyrk}}%
- \def\contentsname{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
- \def\listfigurename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
- \def\listtablename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\indexname{{\cyr\CYRP\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}%
- \def\authorname{{\cyr\CYRII\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyri\cyrishrt
- \ \cyrp\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}%
- \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}%
-% \def\figurename{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs\cyru\cyrn\cyro\cyrk}}%
- \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl.}}%
-% \def\tablename{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrya}}%
- \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyri\cyrn\cyra}}%
- \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl\cyra\cyrd\cyrk\cyra}}%
- \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyrii\cyrya}}%
- \def\headtoname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro}}%
- \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}%
-% \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrr\cyrii\cyrn\cyrk\cyra}}%
- \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.}}%
- \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyro\cyrzh}}
- \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrv\cyre\cyrd\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyrya}}%
- \def\glossaryname{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyrn\cyri\cyrk\ %
- \cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyrm\cyrii\cyrn\cyrii\cyrv}}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dateukrainian}
-%
-% The macro |\dateukrainian| redefines the command |\today| to produce
-% Ukrainian dates.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\dateukrainian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- \cyrs\cyrii\cyrch\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrl\cyryu\cyrt\cyro\cyrg\cyro\or
- \cyrb\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrz\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrk\cyrv\cyrii\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrch\cyre\cyrr\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrl\cyri\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrs\cyre\cyrr\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrv\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrs\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrzh\cyro\cyrv\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrl\cyri\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrp\cyra\cyrd\cyra\or
- \cyrg\cyrr\cyru\cyrd\cyrn\cyrya\fi
- \space\number\year~\cyrr.}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasukrainian}
-%
-% The macro |\extrasukrainian| will perform all the extra definitions
-% needed for the Ukrainian language. The macro |\noextrasukrainian|
-% is used to cancel the actions of |\extrasukrainian|.
-%
-% The first action we define is to switch on the selected Cyrillic
-% encoding whenever we enter `ukrainian'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\cyrillictext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When the encoding definition file was processed by \LaTeX\ the current
-% font encoding is stored in |\latinencoding|, assuming that \LaTeX\ uses
-% \texttt{T1} or \texttt{OT1} as default. Therefore we switch back to
-% |\latinencoding| whenever the Ukrainian language is no longer `active'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{\latintext}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Next we must allow hyphenation in the Ukrainian words with apostrophe
-% whenever we enter `ukrainian'. This solution was proposed by
-% Vladimir Volovich <vvv@vvv.vsu.ru>
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=`\'}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=0}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\verbatim@font}
-%
-% In order to get both Latin and Cyrillic letters in verbatim text we
-% need to change the definition of an internal \LaTeX\ command somewhat:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\def\verbatim@font{%
-% \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
-% \normalfont\ttfamily
-% \expandafter\def\csname\cyrillicencoding-cmd\endcsname##1##2{%
-% \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
-% \begingroup\UseTextSymbol\cyrillicencoding##1\endgroup
-% \else\noexpand##1\fi}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The category code of the characters `\texttt{:}', `\texttt{;}',
-% `\texttt{!}', and `\texttt{?}' is made |\active| to insert a little
-% white space.
-%
-% For Ukrainian (as well as for Russian and German) the \texttt{"}
-% character also is made active.
-%
-% Note: It is \emph{very} questionable whether the Russian typesetting
-% tradition requires additional spacing before those punctuation signs.
-% Therefore, we make the corresponding code optional. If you need it,
-% then define the \texttt{frenchpunct} docstrip option in
-% \file{babel.ins}.
-%
-% Borrowed from french.
-% Some users dislike automatic insertion of a space before
-% `double punctuation', and prefer to decide themselves whether a
-% space should be added or not; so a hook |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP|
-% is provided: if this command is added (in file |ukraineb.cfg|, or
-% anywhere in a document) |ukraineb| will respect your typing, and
-% introduce a suitable space before `double punctuation' \emph{if
-% and only if} a space is typed in the source file before those
-% signs.
-%
-% The command |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| switches back to the
-% default behavior of |ukraineb|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*frenchpunct>
-\initiate@active@char{:}
-\initiate@active@char{;}
-%</frenchpunct>
-%<*frenchpunct|spanishligs>
-\initiate@active@char{!}
-\initiate@active@char{?}
-%</frenchpunct|spanishligs>
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The code above is necessary because we need extra active characters.
-% The character |"| is used as indicated in
-% table~\ref{tab:ukrainian-quote}.
-%
-% We specify that the Ukrainian group of shorthands should be used.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\languageshorthands{ukrainian}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% These characters are `turned on' once, later their definition may
-% vary.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{%
-%<frenchpunct> \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}%
-%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{%
-%<frenchpunct> \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}%
-%<frenchpunct|spanishligs> \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The \texttt{X2} and \texttt{T2*} encodings do not contain
-% |spanish_shriek| and |spanish_query| symbols; as a consequence, the
-% ligatures `|?`|' and `|!`|' do not work with them (these characters are
-% useless for Cyrillic texts anyway). But we define the shorthands to
-% emulate these ligatures (optionally).
-%
-% We do not use |\latinencoding| here (but instead explicitly use
-% \texttt{OT1}) because the user may choose \texttt{T2A} to be the primary
-% encoding, but it does not contain these characters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*spanishligs>
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{?`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textquestiondown}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{!`}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\textexclamdown}
-%</spanishligs>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@;@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@:@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@!@}
-% \begin{macro}{\ukrainian@sh@?@}
-%
-% We have to reduce the amount of white space before \texttt{;},
-% \texttt{:} and \texttt{!}. This should only happen in horizontal mode,
-% hence the test with |\ifhmode|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*frenchpunct>
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{;}{%
- \ifhmode
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% In horizontal mode we check for the presence of a `space', `unskip' if
-% it exists and place a |0.1em| kerning.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
-% \end{macrocode}
-% If no space has been typed, we add |\FDP@thinspace|
-% which will be
-% defined, up to the user's wishes, as an automatic added
-% thinspace, or as |\@empty|.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now we can insert a `|;|' character.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \string;}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The other definitions are very similar.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{:}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string:}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{!}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string!}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{?}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\nobreak\kern.1em
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string?}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP}
-% \begin{macro}{\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP}
-% \begin{macro}{\FDP@thinspace}
-% |\FDP@thinspace| is defined as unbreakable
-% spaces if |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is activated or as |\@empty| if
-% |\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP| is in use.
-% The default is |\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{%
- \def\FDP@thinspace{\nobreak\kern.1em}}
-\def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty}
-\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\FDPon}
-% \begin{macro}{\FDPoff}
-%
-% The next macros allow to switch on/off activeness of double
-% punctuation signs.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\FDPon{\bbl@activate{:}%
- \bbl@activate{;}%
- \bbl@activate{?}%
- \bbl@activate{!}}
-\def\FDPoff{\bbl@deactivate{:}%
- \bbl@deactivate{;}%
- \bbl@deactivate{?}%
- \bbl@deactivate{!}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@:@}
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@!@}
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@?@}
-% \begin{macro}{\system@sh@;@}
-%
-% When the active characters appear in an environment where their
-% Ukrainian behaviour is not wanted they should give an `expected'
-% result. Therefore we define shorthands at system level as well.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;}
-%</frenchpunct>
-%<*frenchpunct&!spanishligs>
-\declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?}
-%</frenchpunct&!spanishligs>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% To be able to define the function of `|"|', we first define a couple of
-% `support' macros.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-%
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it
-% available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as `|"|'.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\reserved@a{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\reserved@a
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: german and french quotes.
-% We use definitions of these quotes made in babel.sty.
-% The french quotes are contained in the \texttt{T2*} encodings.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{">}{\frqq}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some additional commands:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next two macros for |"-| and |"---| are somewhat different.
-% We must check whether the second token is a hyphen character:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"-}{%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% If the next token is `|-|', we typeset an emdash, otherwise a hyphen
-% sign:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\ukrainian@sh@tmp{%
- \if\ukrainian@sh@next-\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@emdash
- \else\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@hyphen\fi
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \TeX\ looks for the next token after the first `|-|': the meaning of
-% this token is written to |\ukrainian@sh@next| and |\ukrainian@sh@tmp| is
-% called.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \futurelet\ukrainian@sh@next\ukrainian@sh@tmp}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Here are the definitions of hyphen and emdash. First the hyphen:
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ukrainian@sh@hyphen{%
- \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% For the emdash definition, there are the two parameters: we must `eat'
-% two last hyphen signs of our emdash\dots :
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ukrainian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{macro}{\cdash}
-% \dots\ these two parameters are useful for another macro:
-% |\cdash|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier
-\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}%
-\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}%
- \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else
- \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% second parameter (or third for |\cdash|) shows what kind of emdash
-% to create in next step
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"---| & ordinary (plain) Cyrillic emdash inside text:
-% an unbreakable thinspace will be inserted before only in case of
-% a \textit{space} before the dash (it is necessary for dashes after
-% display maths formulae: there could be lists, enumerations etc.\
-% started with ``--- where $a$ is ...'' i.e., the dash starts a line).
-% (Firstly there were planned rather soft rules for user: he may put
-% a space before the dash or not. But it is difficult to place this
-% thinspace automatically, i.e., by checking modes because after
-% display formulae \TeX{} uses horizontal mode. Maybe there is a
-% misunderstanding? Maybe there is another way?) After a dash
-% a breakable thinspace is always placed; \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% What is more grammatically: .2em or .2\fontdimen6\font ?
-\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi
- \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"--~| & emdash in compound names or surnames
-% (like Mendeleev--Klapeiron); this dash has no space characters
-% around; after the dash some space is added
-% |\exhyphenalty| \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \begin{center}
-% \begin{tabular}{@{}p{.1\hsize}@{}p{.9\hsize}@{}}
-% |"--*| & for denoting direct speech (a space like |\enskip|
-% must follow the emdash); \\
-% \end{tabular}
-% \end{center}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode
- \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}%
-%\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\cyrdash}
-% Finally the macro for ``body'' of the Cyrillic emdash.
-% The |\cyrdash| macro will be defined in case this macro hasn't been
-% defined in a fontenc file. For T2* fonts, cyrdash will be placed in
-% the code of the English emdash thus it uses ligature |---|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-% Is there an IF necessary?
-\ifx\cyrdash\undefined
- \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Here a really new macro---to place thinspace between initials.
-% This macro used instead of |\,| allows hyphenation in the following
-% surname.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqon}
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff}
-% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands
-% for |"|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The Ukrainian hyphenation patterns can be used with |\lefthyphenmin|
-% and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1g}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% temporary hack:
-\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined
- \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@}
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Now the action |\extrasukrainian| has to execute is to make sure that the
-% command |\frenchspacing| is in effect. If this is not the case the
-% execution of |\noextrasukrainian| will switch it off again.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Next we add a new enumeration style for Ukrainian manuscripts with
-% Cyrillic letters, and later on we define some math operator names in
-% accordance with Ukrainian and Russian typesetting traditions.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\Asbuk}
-%
-% We begin by defining |\Asbuk| which works like |\Alph|, but produces
-% (uppercase) Cyrillic letters intead of Latin ones. The letters CYRGUP,
-% and SFTSN are skipped, as usual for such enumeration.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRIE\or
- \CYRZH\or\CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRII\or\CYRYI\or\CYRISHRT\or
- \CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or\CYRP\or\CYRR\or
- \CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or\CYRC\or\CYRCH\or
- \CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYRYU\or\CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\asbuk}
-%
-% The macro |\asbuk| is similar to |\alph|; it produces lowercase
-% Ukrainian letters.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrie\or
- \cyrzh\or\cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrii\or\cyryi\or\cyrishrt\or
- \cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or\cyrp\or\cyrr\or
- \cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or\cyrc\or\cyrch\or
- \cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyryu\or\cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Set up default Cyrillic math alphabets. The math groups for cyrillic
-% letters are defined in the encoding definition files. First, declare
-% a new alphabet for symbols, |\cyrmathrm|, based on the symbol font
-% for Cyrillic letters defined in the encoding definition file. Note,
-% that by default Cyrillic letters are taken from upright font in math
-% mode (unlike Latin letters).
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%\RequirePackage{textmath}
-\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{%
-\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% And we need a few commands to be able to switch to different variants.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding
- \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault
-%
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault
-}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% Some math functions in Ukrainian and Russian math books have other
-% names: e.g., \texttt{sinh} in Russian is written as \texttt{sh} etc.
-% So we define a number of new math operators.
-%
-% |\sinh|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\cosh|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\tan|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\arctan|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% arcctg:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The following macro conflicts with |\th| defined in Latin~1 encoding:
-%
-% |\tanh|:
-% \changes{ukraineb-1.1k}{2004/05/21}{Change definition of \cs{th}
-% only for this language}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
- \babel@save{\th}%
- \let\ltx@th\th
- \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}%
- {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\cot|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\coth|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% |\csc|:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% And finally some other Ukrainian and Russian mathematical symbols:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits}
-\def\nsd{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrd.}}\nolimits}
-\def\nsk{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrk.}}\nolimits}
-\def\NSD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRD}}\nolimits}
-\def\NSK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRK}}\nolimits}
- \def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} % ??????
- \def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} % ??????
- \def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits} % ??????
- \def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits} % ??????
-\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% This is for compatibility with older Ukrainian packages.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{%
- \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a configuration file,
-% setting the main language to be switched on at |\begin{document}| and
-% resetting the category code of \texttt{@} to its original value.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{ukrainian}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index fd1c219c3e1..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/ukraineb.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,147 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/03/13}
-\def\batchfile{ukraineb.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-\keepsilent
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-
-\generate{\file{ukraineb.ldf}{\from{ukraineb.dtx}{code}}}
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.fd}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usage.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usage.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 122cd8b07e4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usage.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,243 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-\documentclass[11pt]{article}
-\usepackage[american,greek]{babel}
-\languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}
-\usepackage{athnum,grmath}
-\newcommand{\sg}{\selectlanguage{greek}}
-\newcommand{\sa}{\selectlanguage{american}}
-\begin{document}
-\show\extrasgreek
-%\show\extraspolutonikogreek
-\selectlanguage{american}
-
-\title{Writing Greek with the \ttfamily greek\rmfamily\ option of the
-\ttfamily babel\rmfamily\ package}
-\author{Apostolos Syropoulos\\
- 366, 28th October Str.\\
- GR-671 00 Xanthi, GREECE\\
- e-mail: \texttt{apostolo@platon.ee.duth.gr}}
-\date{October 15, 1997}
-\maketitle
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Overview}
-The \texttt{greek} option of the \texttt{babel} package is an attempt to
-make it possible for someone to write Greek text with \LaTeX. The current
-version of the \texttt{greek} option supports the \sg polutonik'o \sa\
-accentual system of the Greek language.
-Moreover, there is now support for Greek numerals. One can produce easily
-valid Greek numerals both in uppercase and lowercase forms, e.g,
-\textgreek{\greeknumeral{1997}}\ and \textgreek{\Greeknumeral{1997}}. The
-labels in second and fourth level enumerations are lowercase
-and uppercase Greek numerals correspondingly.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Typing Greek Text}
-\TeX\ understands only the basic ASCII characters, so it is not possible
-to enter directly Greek letters. Instead, someone enters Latin letters
-which are mapped to their Greek ``counterparts'' by \TeX. The following
-table shows the transliteration employed:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{|lllllllllllll|}\hline
-\textgreek{a}&
-\textgreek{b}&
-\textgreek{g}&
-\textgreek{d}&
-\textgreek{e}&
-\textgreek{z}&
-\textgreek{h}&
-\textgreek{j}&
-\textgreek{i}&
-\textgreek{k}&
-\textgreek{l}&
-\textgreek{m}&
-\textgreek{n}\\
-a& b& g& d& e& z& h& j& i& k& l& m& n\\
-\hline
-\textgreek{x}&
-\textgreek{o}&
-\textgreek{p}&
-\textgreek{r}&
-\textgreek{sv}&
-\textgreek{t}&
-\textgreek{u}&
-\textgreek{f}&
-\textgreek{q}&
-\textgreek{y}&
-\textgreek{w}&
-\textgreek{c}& \hbox{ } \\
-x& o& p& r& s&
-t& u& f& q& y& w& c& \hbox{ }\\ \hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-Please, note that in order to produce the letter \textgreek{sv} in isolation
-on has to type \texttt{sv}. This feature is due to the strong ligature
-that \TeX\ employs.
-In the ``modern'' \textgreek{monotonik'o} accentual system only one accent is
-used---\textgreek{oxe'ia} (acute). In the traditional \textgreek{polutonik'o}
-accentual system we
-need more accents and breathing signs. We can produce an accented letter by
-prefixing the letter with he symbol that denotes the accent, e.g.,
-\texttt{>a'erac} produces the word \sg >a'erac.\sa\footnote{For the
-technically inclined reader, we must say that \TeX\ uses the ligature table of
-the font in order to determine the character that corresponds to the
-input character sequence.} Here are the symbols that are recognized:
-
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cccc}\hline
-Accent & Symbol & Example & Output\\ \hline
-acute & \texttt{'} & \texttt{g'ata} & \textgreek{g'ata}\\
-grave & \texttt{`} & \texttt{dad`i} & \textgreek{dad`i}\\
-circumflex & \verb+~+ & \verb+ful~hc+ & \sg\textgreek{ful~hc}\sa\\
-rough breathing & \verb+<+ & \verb+<'otan+ & \sg\textgreek{<'otan}\sa\\
-smooth breathing & \verb+>+ & \verb+>'aneu+ & \sg\textgreek{>'aneu}\sa\\
-subscript & \texttt{|} & \verb+>anate'ilh|+ & \sg\textgreek{>anate'ilh|}\\
-dieresis & \texttt{"}& \texttt{qa"ide'uh|c} & \sg\textgreek{qa"ide'uh|c}\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-Note that the subscript symbol is placed \textbf{after} the letter.
-The last thing someone must know in order to be able to write normal Greek
-text is the punctuation marks used in the language:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{ccc}\hline
-Punctuation Sign & Symbol & Output\\ \hline
-period & \texttt{.} & \sg\textgreek{.}\sa\\
-semicolon & \texttt{;} & \sg\textgreek{;}\sa\\
-exclamation mark & \texttt{!} & \sg\textgreek{!}\sa\\
-comma & \texttt{,} & \sg\textgreek{,}\sa\\
-colon & \texttt{:} & \sg\textgreek{:}\sa\\
-question mark & \texttt{?} & \sg\textgreek{?}\sa\\
-left apostrophe & \texttt{``} & \sg\textgreek{``}\sa\\
-right apostrophe & \texttt{''} & \sg\textgreek{''}\sa\\
-left quotation mark & \texttt{((} & \sg\textgreek{))}\sa\\
-right quotation mark & \texttt{))} & \sg\textgreek{))}\sa\\ \hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-Using these conventions it is a straightforward exercise to write Greek
-\textgreek{polutoniko} text. For example the following excerpt from
-\textgreek{D'uskoloc} of \textgreek{M'enandroc}
-\sg
-\begin{quote}
-T'i f'hic? <Id`wn >enj'ede pa~id'' >eleuj'eran\\
-t`ac plhs'ion N'umfac stefano~usan, S'wstrate,\\
->er~wn 'ap~hljec e>uj'uc?
-\end{quote}
-\sa can be produced by the following \LaTeX\ code:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{l}
-\verb+T'i f'hic? <Id`wn >enj'ede pa~id'' >eleuj'eran+\\
-\verb+t`ac plhs'ion N'umfac stefano~usan, S'wstrate,+\\
-\verb+>er~wn 'ap~hljec e>uj'uc?+
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-\section{Producing Greek Text}
-Once the Greek language is selected with the command
-\begin{center}
-\verb+\selectlanguage{greek}+
-\end{center}
-whatever we type will be typeset with the Greek fonts. The command
-\verb+\textlatin+ can be used for short passages in some language that
-uses the Latin alphabet, while the the command \verb+\latintext+ changes
-the base fonts to the ones used by languages that use the Latin alphabet.
-However, all words will be hyphenated by following the Greek hyphenation
-rules! Similar commands are available once someone has selected some
-other language. The commands \verb+\textgreek+ and \verb+\greektext+
-behave exactly like their ``latin'' counterparts. For example, the
-word \textgreek{M'imhc} has been produced with the command
-\verb+\textgreek{M'imhc}+. Please note that certain symbols cannot have
-their expected result for Greek text, unless someone has selected the Greek
-language, e.g., \verb+~+ is such a symbol.
-
-As we have mentioned above this version of the \texttt{greek} option of the
-\texttt{babel} package supports the use of Greek numerals. The commands
-\verb+\greeknumeral+ and \verb+\Greeknumeral+ produce the lowercase and
-the uppercase Greek numeral, e.g.,
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline
-Command & Output\\ \hline
-\verb+\Greeknumeral{9999}+ & \sg\textgreek{\Greeknumeral{9999}}\\
-\verb+\greeknumeral{9999}+ & \sg\textgreek{\greeknumeral{9999}}\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-In order to correctly typeset the greek numerals the greek option file
-provides the following commands:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline
-Command & Output\\ \hline
-\verb+\qoppa+ & \textgreek{\qoppa}\\
-\verb+\sampi+ & \textgreek{\sampi}\\
-\verb+\stigma+ & \textgreek{\stigma}\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-In traditional Greek typography the first paragraph after a header is
-always indented, contrary to the habit of, say, American typography. This
-effect can be achieved by using the package \verb+indentfirst+.
-
-Additional greek symbols are available:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline
-Command & Output\\ \hline
-\verb+\Digamma+ & \sg\textgreek{\Digamma}\\
-\verb+\ddigamma+ & \sg\textgreek{\ddigamma}\\
-%\verb+\tao+ & \sg\textgreek{\tao}\\
-%\verb+\Qoppa+ & \sg\textgreek{\Qoppa}\\
-%\verb|\VarQoppa| & \sg\textgreek{\VarQoppa}\\
-%\verb+\varqoppa+ & \sg\textgreek{\varqoppa}\\
-%\verb+\Sampi+ & \sg\textgreek{\Sampi}\\
-%\verb|\Stigma| & \sg\textgreek{\Stigma}\\
-\verb|\euro| & \sg\textgreek{\euro}\\
-\verb|\permill| & \sg\textgreek{\permill}\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-The package \verb|athnum| provides the command \verb|\athnum|, with which
-one can produce the so called \textit{Athenian numerals}:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline
-Command & Output\\ \hline
-\verb|\athnum{1997}| & \sg\textgreek{\athnum{1997}}\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-
-The package \verb|grmath| renames the basic log-like functions with their
-greek counterparts:
-\begin{center}
-\begin{tabular}{cc}\hline
-Command & Output\\ \hline
-\verb|$\sin^{2}x+\cos^{2}x=1$| & $\sin^{2}x+\cos^{2}y=1$\\
-\hline
-\end{tabular}
-\end{center}
-\end{document}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usorbian.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usorbian.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 7c02a293cd8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/usorbian.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,400 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{344}
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{usorbian.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{usorbian}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{usorbian.dtx}
- [2008/03/17 v1.0k Upper Sorbian support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `usorbian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Upper Sorbian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2004
-%% by Eduard Werner
-% Werner, Eduard",
-% Serbski institut z. t.,
-% Dw\'orni\v{s}\'cowa 6
-% 02625 Budy\v{s}in/Bautzen
-% Germany",
-% (??)3591 497223",
-% edi at kaihh.hanse.de",
-%
-%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de
-%%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Upper Sorbian definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*\TeXhax{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*\langvar{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*\note[1]{}
-\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\newfont{\logo}{logo10}
-\newcommand*\MF{{\logo METAFONT}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{usorbian.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{usorbian.dtx}
-%
-% \changes{usorbian-0.1}{1994/10/10}{First version}
-% \changes{usorbian-0.1b}{1994/10/18}{Made it possible to run through
-% \LaTeX; added \cs{MF} and removed extra \cs{end{macro}}}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0d}{1996/07/13}{Replaced \cs{undefined} with
-% \cs{@undefined} and \cs{empty} with \cs{@empty} for consistency
-% with \LaTeX}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0e}{1996/10/10}{Moved the definition of
-% \cs{atcatcode} right to the beginning.}
-%
-% \section{The Upper Sorbian language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate. It was written by Eduard Werner
-% (\texttt{edi@kaihh.hanse.de}).} It defines all the
-% language-specific macros for Upper Sorbian.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{LdfInit} to perform
-% initial checks}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{This file can be loaded under
-% more than one name.}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{usorbian} will be an `unknown' language, in which
-% case we have to make it known. So we check for the existence of
-% |\l@usorbian| to see whether we have to do something here.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Check for the option
-% lowersorbian}
-% As
-% \babel\ also knwos the option \Lopt{uppersorbian} we have to
-% check that as well.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\l@uppersorbian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@usorbian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Usorbian}
- \adddialect\l@usorbian\z@
- \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian
- \else
- \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian
- \fi
-\else
- \let\l@usorbian\l@uppersorbian
-\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Upper Sorbian language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionsusorbian}
-% The macro |\captionsusorbian| defines all strings used in the four
-% standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{usorbian-0.1c}{1994/11/27}{Removed two typos (Kapitel and
-% Dodatki)}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0b}{1995/07/04}{Added \cs{proofname} for
-% AMS-\LaTeX}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0i}{2000/09/22}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Zawod}%
- \def\refname{Referency}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitl}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodawki}%
- \def\contentsname{Wobsah}%
- \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}%
- \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Wobraz}%
- \def\tablename{Tabulka}%
- \def\partname{D\'z\v el}%
- \def\enclname{P\v r\l oha}%
- \def\ccname{CC}%
- \def\headtoname{Komu}%
- \def\pagename{Strona}%
- \def\seename{hl.}%
- \def\alsoname{hl.~te\v z}
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\newdateusorbian}
-% The macro |\newdateusorbian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce Upper Sorbian dates.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or meje\or junija\or
- julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or
- nowembra\or decembra\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\olddateusorbian}
-% The macro |\olddateusorbian| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce old-style Upper Sorbian dates.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- wulkeho r\'o\v zka\or ma\l eho r\'o\v zka\or nal\v etnika\or
- jutrownika\or r\'o\v zownika\or sma\v znika\or pra\v znika\or
- \v znjenca\or po\v znjenca\or winowca\or nazymnika\or
- hodownika\fi \space \number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The default will be the new-style dates.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extrasusorbian}
-% The macro |\extrasusorbian| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the Upper Sorbian language. It's pirated
-% from |germanb.sty|. The macro |\noextrasusorbian| is used to
-% cancel the actions of |\extrasusorbian|.
-%
-% Because for Upper Sorbian (as well as for Dutch) the \texttt{"}
-% character is made active. This is done once, later on its
-% definition may vary.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{usorbian}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% Don't forget to turn the shorthands off again.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0h}{1999/12/17}{Deactivate shorthands ouside of
-% Upper Sorbian}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% In order for \TeX\ to be able to hyphenate German Upper Sorbian
-% words which contain `\ss' we have to give the character a nonzero
-% |\lccode| (see Appendix H, the \TeX book). As some of the other
-% language definitions turn the character |^| into a shorthand we
-% need to make sure that it has it's orginial definition here.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0k}{2008/03/17}{Make sure the caret has the
-% right \cs{catcdoe}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\^7
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^Y}%
- \lccode`\^^Y`\^^Y}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The umlaut accent macro |\"| is changed to lower the umlaut dots.
-% The redefinition is done with the help of |\umlautlow|.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \umlauthigh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The Upper Sorbian hyphenation patterns can be used with
-% |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| set to~2.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0i}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0a}{1995/05/27}{Removed stuff that has been
-% moved to \file{babel.def}}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\dq}
-% We save the original double quote character in |\dq| to keep it
-% available, the math accent |\"| can now be typed as |"|. Also we
-% store the original meaning of the command |\"| for future use.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% Now we can define the doublequote macros: the umlauts,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}}{\ddot U}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% tremas,
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}{\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% usorbian es-zet (sharp s),
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"s}{\textormath{\ss{}}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"S}{SS}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% german and french quotes,
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0f}{1997/04/03}{Removed empty groups after
-% double quote and guillemot characters}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% discretionary commands
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0c}{1996/01/24}{Now use \cs{bbl@disc}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% and some additional commands:
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqon}
-% \begin{macro}{\mdqoff}
-% \begin{macro}{\ck}
-% All that's left to do now is to define a couple of commands
-% for reasons of compatibility with \file{german.sty}.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0g}{1998/06/07}{Now use \cs{shorthandon} and
-% \cs{shorthandoff}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0e}{1996/11/03}{Now use \cs{ldf@finish} to wrap
-% up}
-% \changes{usorbian-1.0j}{2007/10/19}{Make this work for more than one
-% option name}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.dtx
deleted file mode 100644
index 95965fcfaed..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.dtx
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,207 +0,0 @@
-% \iffalse meta-comment
-%
-% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%
-% This file is part of the Babel system.
-% --------------------------------------
-%
-% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-% The latest version of this license is in
-% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%
-% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%
-% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
-% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-% information.
-%
-% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-% \fi
-% \CheckSum{97}
-%
-% \iffalse
-% Tell the \LaTeX\ system who we are and write an entry on the
-% transcript.
-%<*dtx>
-\ProvidesFile{welsh.dtx}
-%</dtx>
-%<code>\ProvidesLanguage{welsh}
-%\fi
-%\ProvidesFile{welsh.dtx}
- [2005/03/31 v1.0d Welsh support from the babel system]
-%\iffalse
-%% File `welsh.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%
-% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
-% code for the Welsh language definition file.
-%<*filedriver>
-\documentclass{ltxdoc}
-\newcommand*{\TeXhax}{\TeX hax}
-\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
-\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \mathit lang \rangle$}
-\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
-\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
-\begin{document}
- \DocInput{welsh.dtx}
-\end{document}
-%</filedriver>
-%\fi
-% \GetFileInfo{welsh.dtx}
-%
-% \section{The Welsh language}
-%
-% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
-% section has version number \fileversion\ and was last revised on
-% \filedate.} defines all the language definition macros for the
-% Welsh language.
-%
-% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
-% available.
-%
-% \StopEventually{}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@init| takes care of preventing that this file is
-% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
-% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\LdfInit{welsh}{captionswelsh}
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
-% command, \texttt{welsh} could be an `unknown' language in
-% which case we have to make it known. So we check for the
-% existence of |\l@welsh| to see whether we have to do
-% something here.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ifx\undefined\l@welsh
- \@nopatterns{welsh}
- \adddialect\l@welsh0\fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
-% from) the Welsh language.
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\welshhyphenmins}
-% This macro is used to store the correct values of the hyphenation
-% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
-% \changes{welsh-1.0c}{2000/09/22}{Now use \cs{providehyphenmins} to
-% provide a default value}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\captionswelsh}
-% The macro |\captionswelsh| defines all strings used in the
-% four standard documentclasses provided with \LaTeX.
-% \changes{welsh-1.0c}{2000/09/20}{Added \cs{glossaryname}}
-% \changes{welsh-1.0d}{2005/03/31}{Provided the translation for
-% Glossary}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\captionswelsh{%
- \def\prefacename{Rhagair}%
- \def\refname{Cyfeiriadau}%
- \def\abstractname{Crynodeb}%
- \def\bibname{Llyfryddiaeth}%
- \def\chaptername{Pennod}%
- \def\appendixname{Atodiad}%
- \def\contentsname{Cynnwys}%
- \def\listfigurename{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
- \def\listtablename{Rhestr Dablau}%
- \def\indexname{Mynegai}%
- \def\figurename{Darlun}%
- \def\tablename{Taflen}%
- \def\partname{Rhan}%
- \def\enclname{amgae\"edig}%
- \def\ccname{cop\"\i au}%
- \def\headtoname{At}% % `at' on letters meaning `to ( a person)'
- % `to (a place)' is `i' in Welsh
- \def\pagename{tudalen}%
- \def\seename{gweler}%
- \def\alsoname{gweler hefyd}%
- \def\proofname{Prawf}%
- \def\glossaryname{Rhestr termau}%
- }
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\datewelsh}
-% The macro |\datewelsh| redefines the command |\today| to
-% produce welsh dates.
-% \changes{welsh-1.0b}{1997/10/01}{Use \cs{edef} to define
-% \cs{today} to save memory}
-% \changes{welsh-1.0b}{1998/03/28}{use \cs{def} instead of
-% \cs{edef}}
-% \changes{welsh-1.0d}{2005/03/31}{removed `a viz' from the definition
-% of \cs{today}}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\datewelsh{%
- \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\mathrm{a\tilde{n}}}$\else
- \number\day\fi\space\ifcase\month\or
- Ionawr\or Chwefror\or Mawrth\or Ebrill\or
- Mai\or Mehefin\or Gorffennaf\or Awst\or
- Medi\or Hydref\or Tachwedd\or Rhagfyr\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% \begin{macro}{\extraswelsh}
-% \begin{macro}{\noextraswelsh}
-% The macro |\extraswelsh| will perform all the extra
-% definitions needed for the welsh language. The macro
-% |\noextraswelsh| is used to cancel the actions of
-% |\extraswelsh|. For the moment these macros are empty but
-% they are defined for compatibility with the other
-% language definition files.
-%
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\addto\extraswelsh{}
-\addto\noextraswelsh{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% \end{macro}
-% \end{macro}
-%
-% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
-% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
-% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
-% \texttt{@} to its original value.
-% \begin{macrocode}
-\ldf@finish{welsh}
-%</code>
-% \end{macrocode}
-%
-% \Finale
-%\endinput
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.ins
deleted file mode 100644
index a807ec6272b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/welsh.ins
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,148 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This file will generate fast loadable files and documentation
-%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
-%% LaTeX or TeX.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file is part of the Babel system.
-%% --------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
-%%
-\def\filedate{1999/04/11}
-\def\batchfile{welsh.ins}
-\input docstrip.tex
-
-{\ifx\generate\undefined
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* This installation requires docstrip}
-\Msg{* version 2.3c or later.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* An older version of docstrip has been input}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{**********************************************}
-\errhelp{Move or rename old docstrip.tex.}
-\errmessage{Old docstrip in input path}
-\batchmode
-\csname @@end\endcsname
-\fi}
-
-\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\endpreamble
-
-\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
-This is a generated file.
-
-Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-
-This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
----------------------------------------------------------
-
-It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-The latest version of this license is in
- http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-version 2003/12/01 or later.
-
-This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-
-This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-such generated files.
-
-The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-information.
-
-In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-
-However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-of this file under its original name.
-
-\endpreamble
-
-\keepsilent
-
-\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
-
-\usepreamble\mainpreamble
-\generate{\file{welsh.ldf}{\from{welsh.dtx}{code}}
- }
-\usepreamble\fdpreamble
-
-\ifToplevel{
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To finish the installation you have to move the following}
-\Msg{* files into a directory searched by TeX:}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* \space\space All *.def, *.fd, *.ldf, *.sty}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* To produce the documentation run the files ending with}
-\Msg{* '.dtx' and `.fdd' through LaTeX.}
-\Msg{*}
-\Msg{* Happy TeXing}
-\Msg{***********************************************************}
-}
-
-\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ccb3254716c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,7306 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
+% Copyright 1989-2012 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
+% listed elsewhere in this file.
+% All rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is part of the Babel system.
+% --------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
+% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{5011}
+%
+% \def\filename{babel.dtx}
+% \let\thisfilename\filename
+%
+%\iffalse
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/10}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from
+% December 1994}
+% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/18}{We need at least \LaTeX\ from
+% June 1998}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%% File 'babel.dtx'
+%\fi
+%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package]
+%\iffalse
+%
+% Babel DOCUMENT-STYLE option for LaTeX version 2.09 or plain TeX;
+%% Babel package for LaTeX2e.
+%
+%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams,
+%% TeXniek
+%% all rights reserved.
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
+%
+%<*filedriver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\raggedright
+\addtolength{\textwidth}{25pt}
+\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
+\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
+\newcommand*\babel{\textsf{babel}}
+\newcommand*\Babel{\textsf{Babel}}
+\newcommand*\xetex{\textsf{xetex}}
+\newcommand*\luatex{\textsf{luatex}}
+\newcommand*\nb[1]{}
+\newcommand*\m[1]{\mbox{$\langle$\normalfont\itshape#1\/$\rangle$}}
+\newcommand*\langlist{%
+ \meta{language}\texttt{,}\meta{language}\texttt{,}...}
+\newcommand*\langvar{\m{lang}}
+\newcommand*\note[1]{}
+\newcommand*\bsl{\protect\bslash}
+\newcommand*\Lopt[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*\Lenv[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*\menv[1]{\char`\{#1\char`\}}
+\newcommand*\Eenv[1]{%
+ \quad\ldots\quad
+ \texttt{\color{thered}\string\end\menv{#1}}}
+\newcommand*\file[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand*\cls[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\newcommand*\pkg[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{1em}
+\lefthyphenmin=2
+\righthyphenmin=3
+% Stolen and adapted from microtype:
+\usepackage{color}
+\definecolor{thered} {rgb}{0.65,0.04,0.07}
+\definecolor{thegreen}{rgb}{0.06,0.44,0.08}
+\definecolor{thegrey} {gray}{0.8}
+\definecolor{theshade}{rgb}{1,1,0.97}
+\definecolor{theframe}{gray}{0.6}
+\definecolor{lightgray}{gray}{0.95}
+\IfFileExists{listings.sty}{
+ \usepackage{listings}
+ \lstset{
+ % gobble=1,
+ columns=flexible,
+ keepspaces,
+ basicstyle=\MacroFont,
+ keywords=[0]{\selectlanguage,\foreignlanguage,\defineshorthand,
+ \babelhyphen,\babelhyphenation,\spanishhyphenmins,\addto,
+ \StartBabelCommands,\SetString,\EndBabelCommands,\shorthandoff,
+ \languageshorthands,\useshorthands,\AddBabelHook,\SetStringLoop,
+ \SetCase,\AfterBabelLanguage},
+ keywordstyle=[0]\color{thered},
+ keywords=[1]{ngerman,italian,dutch,english,main,esperanto,
+ frenchb,shorthands,extrasfrench,extrasrussian,extrasenglish,
+ stringprocess,afterextras,latin,medieval,spanish,notilde,
+ lcroman,danish},
+ keywordstyle=[1]\color{thegreen},
+ comment=[l]\%,
+ commentstyle=\color{thegrey}\itshape,
+ alsoother={0123456789_},
+ frame=single,
+ backgroundcolor=\color{theshade},
+ rulecolor=\color{theframe},
+ framerule=\fboxrule,
+ }
+ \let\verbatim\relax
+ \lstnewenvironment{verbatim}[1][]{\lstset{##1}}{}
+}{}
+\def\PrintDescribeMacro#1{%
+ \strut\MacroFont\color{thered}\normalsize\string#1}
+\def\Describe#1{%
+ \par\penalty-500\vskip3ex\noindent
+ \DescribeMacro{#1}\args}
+\def\DescribeOther{\vskip-4ex\Describe}
+\makeatletter
+\def\args#1{%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{#1}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty\else#1\vskip1ex\fi\ignorespaces}
+\makeatother
+\begin{document}
+\title{Babel, a multilingual package for use with \LaTeX's standard
+ document classes\thanks{During the development ideas from Nico
+ Poppelier, Piet van Oostrum and many others have been used.
+ Bernd Raichle has provided many helpful suggestions.}}
+\author{Johannes Braams\\
+ Kersengaarde 33\\
+ 2723 BP Zoetermeer\\
+ The Netherlands\\
+ \normalsize For version 3.9, Javier Bezos\\
+ \normalsize \texttt{www.tex-tipografia.com}}
+
+\date{Typeset \today}
+
+\maketitle
+
+\begin{abstract}
+ The standard distribution of \LaTeX\ contains a number of document
+ classes that are meant to be used, but also serve as examples for
+ other users to create their own document classes. These document
+ classes have become very popular among \LaTeX\ users. But it should
+ be kept in mind that they were designed for American tastes and
+ typography. At one time they even contained a number of hard-wired
+ texts.
+
+ This report describes \babel{}, a package that makes use of the
+ capabilities of \TeX\ version 3 and, to some extent, \xetex{} and
+ \luatex, to provide an environment in which documents can be typeset
+ in a language other than US English, or in more than one language.
+ However, no attempt has been done to take full advantage of the
+ features provided by the latter, which would require a completely
+ new core (as for example \file{polyglossia} or as part of \LaTeX3).
+\end{abstract}
+
+\tableofcontents
+
+\section{The user interface}\label{U-I}
+
+The user interface of this package is quite simple. It consists of a
+set of commands that switch from one language to another, and a set of
+commands that deal with shorthands. It is also possible to find out
+what the current language is.
+
+In \LaTeX2e\ the preamble of the document:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[dutch,english]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+would tell \LaTeX\ that the document would be written in two
+languages, Dutch and English, and that English would be the first
+language in use, and the main one. You can also set the main language
+explicitly:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[main=english,dutch]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+Another approach is making \Lopt{dutch} and \Lopt{english} global
+options in order to let other packages detect and use them:
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[dutch,english]{article}
+\usepackage{babel}
+\usepackage{varioref}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+In this last example, the package \texttt{varioref} will also see
+the options and will be able to use them.
+
+Languages may be set as global and as package option at the same
+time, but in such a case you should set explicitly the main language
+with the package option |main|:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass[italian]{babel}
+\usepackage[ngerman,main=italian]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\fbox{New 3.9c} The basic behaviour of some languages can be modified
+when loading \babel. Modifiers are set after the language name, and
+are prefixed with a dot (only when the language is set as package
+option -- neither global options nor the |main| key accept them). An
+example is (spaces are not significant and it can be written closed,
+too):
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[latin .medieval, spanish .notilde .lcroman, danish]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Attributes (described below) are considered modifiers, ie, you can
+set an attribute by including it in the modifiers list. However,
+modifiers is a more general mechanism.
+
+Currently \babel{} provides no standard interface for
+scripts. Languages sharing the same non-Latin script may define macros
+to switch them (eg, |\textcyrillic|), but be aware they may also set
+the language to a certain default. (Future versions might add such an
+interface.)
+
+Because of the way \babel{} has evolved, ``language'' can refer to (1)
+a set of hyphenation patters as preloaded into the format, (2) a
+package option, (3) an |ldf| file, and (4) a name used in the document
+to select a language or dialect. So, a package option refers to a
+language in a generic way -- sometimes it is the actual language name
+used to select it, sometimes it is a file name loading a language with
+a different name, sometimes it is a file name loading several
+languages. Please, read the documentation for specific languages for
+further info.
+
+Loading directly |sty| files in \LaTeX{} (ie,
+|\usepackage|\marg{language}) is deprected and you will get the error
+``You have used an old interface to call babel''.
+
+In Plain, load languages styles with |\input| and then use
+|\begindocument| (the latter is defined by \babel):
+\begin{verbatim}
+\input estonian.sty
+\begindocument
+\end{verbatim}
+Note not all languages provide a |sty| file and some of them are
+not compatible with Plain.
+
+\subsection{Selecting languages}
+
+The main language is selected automatically when the |document|
+environment begins.
+
+\Describe\selectlanguage{\marg{language}}
+When a user wants to switch from one language to another he can
+do so using the macro |\selectlanguage|. This macro takes the
+language, defined previously by a language definition file, as
+its argument. It calls several macros that should be defined in
+the language definition files to activate the special definitions
+for the language chosen.
+
+If used inside braces there might be some non-local changes, as this
+would be roughly equivalent to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+{\selectlanguage{<inner-language>} ...}\selectlanguage{<outer-language>}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you want a change which is really local, you must enclose this
+code with an additional grouping, like braces |{}|.
+
+This command can be used as environment, too.
+
+\Describe{\begin\menv{otherlanguage}}{\marg{language}\Eenv{otherlanguage}}
+
+The environment \Lenv{otherlanguage} does basically the same as
+|\selectlanguage|, except the language change is (mostly) local to the
+environment. This environment is required for intermixing
+left-to-right typesetting with right-to-left typesetting.
+The language to switch to is specified as an
+argument to |\begin{otherlanguage}|.
+
+Actually, there might be some non-local changes, as this environment
+is roughly equivalent to:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\begingroup
+\selectlanguage{<inner-language>}
+...
+\endgroup
+\selectlanguage{<outer-language>}
+\end{verbatim}
+If you want a change which is really local, you must enclose this
+environment with and additional grouping, like braces |{}|.
+
+Spaces after the environment are ignored.
+
+\Describe\foreignlanguage{\oarg{language}\marg{text}}
+The command |\foreignlanguage| takes two arguments; the second
+argument is a phrase to be typeset according to the rules of the
+language named in its first argument. This command (1) only
+switches the extra definitions and the hyphenation rules for the
+language, \emph{not} the names and dates, (2) does not send
+information about the language to auxiliary files (i.e., the
+surrounding language is still in force), and (3) it works even if
+the language has not been set as package option (but in such a
+case it only sets the hyphenation patterns).
+
+\Describe{\begin\menv{otherlanguage*}}%
+{\marg{language}\Eenv{otherlanguage*}}
+
+Same as |\foreignlanguage| but as environment. Spaces after the
+environment are \textit{not} ignored.
+
+\Describe\languagename{}
+The control sequence |\languagename| contains the name of the
+current language. However, due to some internal inconsistencies in
+catcodes it should \textit{not} be used to test its value (use
+\textsf{iflang}, by Heiko Oberdiek).
+
+\Describe\iflanguage{\marg{language}\marg{true}\marg{false}}
+
+If more than one language is used, it might be necessary to know which
+language is active at a specific time. This can be checked by a call
+to |\iflanguage|, but note here ``language'' is used in the \TeX\
+sense, as a set of hyphenation patterns, and \textit{not} as its
+\textsf{babel} name. This macro takes three arguments. The first
+argument is the name of a language; the second and third arguments are
+the actions to take if the result of the test is true or false
+respectively. The advice about |\languagename| also applies here --
+use \textsf{iflang} instead of |\iflanguage| if possible.
+
+\Describe{\begin\menv{hyphenrules}}{\marg{language}\Eenv{hyphenrules}}
+
+The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select \emph{only}
+the hyphenation rules to be used (it can be used as command,
+too). This can for instance be used to select `nohyphenation',
+provided that in \file{language.dat} the `language'
+\textsf{nohyphenation} is defined by loading \file{zerohyph.tex}. It
+deactivates language shorthands, too (but not user shorthands).
+
+Except for these simple uses, |hyphenrules| is discouraged and
+|otherlanguage*| (the starred version) is preferred, as the former
+does not take into account possible changes in encodings or characters
+like, say, |'| done by some languages (eg, \textsf{italian},
+\textsf{frenchb}, \textsf{ukraineb}). To set hyphenation exceptions,
+use |\babelhyphenation| (see below).
+
+\subsection{Shorthands}
+
+A \textit{shorthand} is a sequence of one or two characters that
+expands to arbitrary \TeX{} code.
+
+Shorthands can be used for different kinds of things, as for example:
+(1) in some languages shorthands such as |"a| are defined to be able
+to hyphenate the word if the encoding is OT1; (2) in some languages
+shorthands such as |!| are used to insert the right amount of white
+space; (3) several kinds of discretionaries and breaks can be inserted
+easily with |"-|, |"=|, etc.
+
+The package \textsf{inputenc} as well as \xetex{} an \luatex{} have
+alleviated entering non-ASCII characters, but minority languages and
+some texts can still require characters not directly available in the
+keyboards (and sometimes not even as separated or precomposed Unicode
+characters). As to the point 2, now \textsf{pdfTeX} provides
+|\knbccode|. Tools of point 3 can be still very useful in general.
+
+There are three levels of shorthands: \textit{user},
+\textit{language}, and \textit{system} (by order of
+precedence). Version 3.9 introduces the \textit{language user}
+level on top of the user level, as described below. In most
+cases, you will use only shorthands provided by languages.
+
+Please, note the following:
+\begin{enumerate}
+\item Activated chars used for two-char shorthands cannot be
+ followed by a closing brace |}| and the spaces following are
+ gobbled. With one-char shorthands (eg, |:|), they are preserved.
+\item If on a certain level (system, language, user) there is a
+ one-char shorthand, two-char ones starting with that
+ char and on the same level are ignored.
+\end{enumerate}
+
+\Describe{\shorthandon}{\marg{shorthands-list}}
+\DescribeOther{\shorthandoff}{%
+\colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}%
+\marg{shorthands-list}}
+It is sometimes necessary to switch a shorthand
+character off temporarily, because it must be used in an
+entirely different way. For this purpose, the user commands
+|\shorthandoff| and |\shorthandon| are provided. They each take a
+list of characters as their arguments.
+
+The command |\shorthandoff| sets the |\catcode| for each of the
+characters in its argument to other (12); the command |\shorthandon|
+sets the |\catcode| to active (13). Both commands only work on `known'
+shorthand characters. If a character is not known to be a shorthand
+character its category code will be left unchanged.
+
+\fbox{New 3.9} Note however, |\shorthandoff| does not behave as
+you would expect with characters like |~| or |^|, because they
+usually are not ``other''. For them |\shorthandoff*| is provided,
+so that with
+\begin{verbatim}
+\shorthandoff*{~^}
+\end{verbatim}
+|~| is still active, very likely with the meaning of a non-breaking
+space, and |^| is the superscript character. The catcodes used are
+those when the shorthands are defined, usually when language files are
+loaded.
+
+\Describe{\useshorthands}{%
+\colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}%
+\marg{char}}
+
+The command |\useshorthands| initiates the definition of user-defined
+shorthand sequences. It has one argument, the character that starts
+these personal shorthands.
+
+\fbox{New 3.9} However, user shorthands are not always alive, as they
+may be deactivated by languages (for example, if you use |"| for your
+user shorthands and switch from \textsf{german} to \textsf{french},
+they stop working). Therefore, a starred version
+|\useshorthands*|\marg{char} is provided, which makes sure shorthands
+are always activated.
+
+Currently, if the option |shorthands| is used, you must include any
+character to be activated with |\useshorthands|. This restriction will
+be lifted in a future release.
+
+\Describe\defineshorthand{\texttt{[}\langlist\texttt{]}%^^A
+ \marg{shorthand}\marg{code}}
+
+The command |\defineshorthand| takes two arguments: the first is
+a one- or two-character shorthand sequence, and the second is the
+code the shorthand should expand to.
+
+\fbox{New 3.9} An optional argument allows to (re)define language
+and system shorthands (some languages do not activate shorthands,
+so you may want to add |\languageshorthands|\marg{lang} to the
+corresponding |\extras|\m{lang}). By default, user shorthands are
+(re)defined.
+
+User shorthands override language ones, which in turn override
+system shorthands. Language-dependent user shorthands (new in
+3.9) take precedence over ``normal'' user shorthands.
+
+As an example of their applications, let's assume you want a
+unified set of shorthand for discretionaries (languages do not
+define shorthands consistently, and |"-|, |\-|, |"=| have
+different meanings). You could start with, say:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\useshorthands*{"}
+\defineshorthand{"*}{\babelhyphen{soft}}
+\defineshorthand{"-}{\babelhyphen{hard}}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, behaviour of hyphens is language dependent. For example, in
+languages like Polish and Portugese, a hard hyphen inside compound
+words are repeated at the beginning of the next line. You could set:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\defineshorthand[*polish,*portugese]{"-}{\babelhyphen{repeat}}
+\end{verbatim}
+Here, options with |*| set a language-dependent user shorthand, which
+means the generic one above only applies for the rest of languages;
+without |*| they would (re)define the language shorthands instead,
+which are overriden by user ones.
+
+Now, you have a single unified shorthand (|"-|), with a content-based
+meaning (`compound word hyphen') whose visual behavior is that
+expected in each context.
+
+\Describe\aliasshorthand{\marg{original}\marg{alias}}
+
+The command |\aliasshorthand| can be used to let another
+character perform the same functions as the default shorthand
+character. If one prefers for example to use the character |/|
+over |"| in typing Polish texts, this can be achieved by entering
+|\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|. \emph{Please note} the substitute
+character must \textit{not} have been declared before as
+shorthand (in such case, |\aliashorthands| is ignored).
+
+The following example shows how to replace a shorthand by another
+\begin{verbatim}
+\aliasshorthand{~}{^}
+\AtBeginDocument{\shorthandoff*{~}}
+\end{verbatim}
+However, shorthands remember somehow the original character, and the
+fallback value is that of the latter. So, in this example, if no
+shorthand if found, |^| expands to a non-breaking space, because this
+is the value of |~| (internally, |^| calls |\active@char~| or
+|\normal@char~|). Furthermore, if you change the |system| value of |^|
+with |\defineshorthand| nothing happens.
+
+\Describe\languageshorthands{\marg{language}} The command
+|\languageshorthands| can be used to switch the shorthands on the
+language level. It takes one argument, the name of a language or
+|none| (the latter does what its name suggests).\footnote{Actually,
+any name not corresponding to a language group does the same as
+\texttt{none}. However, follow this convention because it might be
+enforced in future releases of \babel{} to catch possible errors.}
+Note that for this to work the language should have been specified as
+an option when loading the \babel\ package. For example, you can use
+in \textsf{english} the shorthands defined by \textsf{ngerman} with
+\begin{verbatim}
+\addto\extrasenglish{\languageshorthands{ngerman}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Very often, this is a more convenient way to deactivate shorthands
+than |\shorthandoff|, as for example if you want to define a macro
+to easy typing phonetic characters with \textsf{tipa}:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\newcommand{\myipa}[1]{{\languageshorthands{none}\tipaencoding#1}}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\Describe\babelshorthand{\marg{shorthand}}
+With this command you can use shorthands even if (1) not activated in
+\texttt{shorthands} (in this case only shorthands for the current
+language are taken into account, ie, not user shorthands), (2) turned
+off with |\shorthandoff| or (3) deactivated with |\bbl@deactivate|;
+for example, \verb|\babelshorthand{"u}| or \verb|\babelshorthand{:}|.
+(You can conveniently define your own macros, or even you own user
+shorthands provided they do not ovelap.)
+
+For your records, here is a list of shorthands, but you must check
+them, as they may change:\footnote{Thanks to Enrico Gregorio}
+
+\begin{description}
+\itemsep=-\parskip
+\item[Languages with no shorthands] Croatian, English (any variety),
+ Indonesian, Hebrew, Interlingua, Irish, Lower Sorbian, Malaysian,
+ North Sami, Romanian, Scottish, Welsh
+\item[Languages with only \texttt{"} as defined shorthand character]
+ Albanian, Bulgarian, Danish, Dutch, Finnish, German (old and new
+ orthography, also Austrian), Icelandic, Italian, Norwegian, Polish,
+ Portuguese (also Brazilian), Russian, Serbian (with Latin script),
+ Slovene, Swedish, Ukrainian, Upper Sorbian
+\item[Basque] |" ' ~|
+\item[Breton] |: ; ? !|
+\item[Catalan] |" ' `|
+\item[Czech] |" -|
+\item[Esperanto] |^|
+\item[Estonian] |" ~|
+\item[French] (all varieties) |: ; ? !|
+\item[Galician] |" . ' ~ < >|
+\item[Greek] |~|
+\item[Hungarian] |`|
+\item[Kurmanji] |^|
+\item[Latin] |" ^ =|
+\item[Slovak] |" ^ ' -|
+\item[Spanish] |" . < > '|
+\item[Turkish] |: ! =|
+\end{description}
+In addition, the \babel{} core declares |~| as a one-char shorthand
+which is let, like the standard |~|, to a non breaking
+space.\footnote{This declaration serves to nothing, but it is
+preserved for backward compatibility.}
+
+
+\subsection{Package options}
+
+\fbox{New 3.9}
+These package options are processed before language options, so
+that they are taken into account irrespective of its order.
+
+\Describe{shorthands=}{\meta{char}\meta{char}...
+$\string|$ \texttt{off}}
+The only language shorthands activated
+are those given, like, eg:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[esperanto,frenchb,shorthands=:;!?]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+If \verb|'| is included, \texttt{activeacute} is set; if \verb|`|
+is included, \texttt{activegrave} is set. Active characters (like
+\verb|~|) should be preceded by \verb|\string| (otherwise they
+will be expanded by \LaTeX{} before they are passed to the package
+and therefore they will not be recognized); however, |t| is provided
+for the common case of |~| (as well as |c| for the comma).
+
+With |shorthands=off| no language shorthands are defined,
+As some languages use this mechanism for tools not available
+otherwise, a macro \verb|\babelshorthand| is defined, which allows
+using them; see above.
+
+\Describe{safe=}{\texttt{none} $\string|$ \texttt{ref}
+$\string|$ \texttt{bib}}
+Some \LaTeX{} macros are redefined so that using
+shorthands is safe. With \texttt{safe=bib} only |\nocite|, |\bibcite| and
+|\bibitem| are redefined. With |safe=ref| only |\newlabel|, |\ref|
+and |\pageref| are redefined (as well as a few macros from
+\textsf{varioref} and \textsf{ifthen}). With |safe=none| no macro is
+redefined. Of course, in such a case you cannot use shorthands in
+these macros.
+
+\Describe{math=}{\texttt{active} $\string|$ \texttt{normal}}
+Shorthands are mainly intended for text, not for math. By setting this
+option with the value |normal| they are deactivated in math mode
+(default is |active|) and things like |${a'}$| (a closing brace after
+a shorthand) are not a source of trouble any more.
+
+\Describe{config=}{\meta{file}} Instead of loading |bblopts.cfg|,
+the file \meta{file}\texttt{.cfg} is loaded.
+
+\Describe{main=}{\meta{language}} Sets the main language, as
+explained above, ie, this language is always the last loaded. The
+language may be also given as package or global option or not.
+
+\Describe{headfoot=}{\meta{language}} By default, headlines and footlines are
+not touched (only marks), and if they contain language dependent
+macros (which is not usual) there may be unexpected results. With
+this option you may set the language in heads and foots.
+
+\Describe{noconfigs}{} Global and
+language default config files are not loaded, so you can make sure
+your document is not spoilt by an unexpected \texttt{.cfg}
+file. The key |config| still works.
+
+\Describe{showlanguages}{} Prints to the log the list of languages
+loaded when the format was created: number (remember dialects can
+share it), name, hyphenation file and exceptions file.
+
+\Describe{strings=}{\texttt{generic} $\string|$ \texttt{unicode}
+$\string|$ \texttt{encoded} $\string|$ \meta{label} $\string|$ \meta{font encoding}}
+Selects the encoding
+of strings in languages supporting this feature. Predefined labels
+are |generic| (for traditional \TeX), |unicode| (for engines like
+\xetex{} and \luatex) and |encoded| (for special cases requiring mixed
+encodings). Other allowed values are font encoding codes (|T1|, |T2A|,
+|LGR|, |L7X|...), but only in languages supporting them.
+
+\vspace{3ex}
+(The following three options have been available in previous versions
+of \babel.)
+
+\Describe{KeepShorthandsActive}{}
+Tells babel not to deactivate shorthands after loading a language
+file, so that they are also availabe in the preamble.
+
+\Describe{activeacute}{} For some languages \babel\ supports this
+options to set |'| as a shorthand in case it is not done by default.
+
+\Describe{activegrave}{}
+Same for |`|.
+
+\subsection{The \texttt{base} option}
+
+With this package option \babel{} just loads some basic macros (those
+in |switch.def|), defines |\AfterBabelLanguage| and exits. It also
+selects the hyphenations patterns for the last language passed as
+option (by its name in |language.dat|). There are two main uses:
+classes and packages, and as a last resort in case there are, for some
+reason, incompatible languages. It can be used if you just want to
+select the hyphenations patterns of a single language.
+
+\Describe\AfterBabelLanguage{\marg{option-name}\marg{code}}
+
+This command is currently the only provided by |base|. Executes
+\meta{code} when the file loaded by the corresponding package option
+is finished (at |\ldf@finish|). The setting is global. So
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AfterBabelLanguage{frenchb}{...}
+\end{verbatim}
+does ... at the end of |frenchb.ldf|. It can be used in |ldf| files,
+too, but in such a case the code is executed only if
+\meta{option-name} is the same as |\CurrentOption| (which could not
+be the same as the option name as set in |\usepackage|!).
+
+For example, consider two languages \textsf{foo} and \textsf{bar}
+defining the same |\macro| with |\newcommand|. An error is raised if
+you attempt to load both. Here is a way to overcome this problem:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\usepackage[base]{babel}
+\AfterBabelLanguage{foo}{%
+ \let\macroFoo\macro
+ \let\macro\relax}
+\usepackage[foo,bar]{babel}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Hooks}
+
+\fbox{New 3.9} A hook is code to be executed at certain events. Some
+hooks are predefined when \luatex{} and \xetex{} are used.
+
+\Describe\AddBabelHook{\marg{name}\marg{event}\marg{code}}
+
+The same name can be applied to several events. Hooks may be enabled
+and disabled for all defined events with
+|\EnableBabelHook|\marg{name}, |\DisableBabelHook|\marg{name}
+
+Current events are: |adddialect|, |write|, |beforeextras|,
+|afterextras|, |patterns|, |hyphenation|, |defaultcommands|, |encodedcommands|,
+|stopcommands| and |stringprocess|. Four events are used in
+\file{hyphen.cfg}, which are handled in a quite different way for
+efficiency reasons -- these are |everylanguage|, |loadkernel|,
+|loadpatterns| and |loadexceptions|, which, unlike the precedent ones,
+only have a single hook and replace a default definition. (Names
+containing the string |babel| are reserved; they are used, for
+example, by |\useshortands*| to add a hook for the event
+|afterextras|.)
+
+In some of them you can use one or two \TeX{} parameters (|#1|, |#2|),
+with the meaning given below:
+\begin{description}
+\renewcommand\makelabel[1]{%
+ \hspace\labelsep\normalfont\ttfamily\color{thered}#1}
+\itemsep=-\parskip
+\item[everylanguage] (language) Executed before patterns are loaded.
+\item[loadkernel] (file) By default loads |switch.def|. It can be used
+ to load a different version of this files or to load nothing.
+\item[loadpatterns] (patterns file) Loads the patterns file. Used by
+ \file{luababel.def}.
+\item[loadexceptions] (exceptions file) Loads the exceptions
+ file. Used by \file{luababel.def}.
+\item[adddialect] (language name, dialect name) Used by
+ \file{luababel.def} to load the patterns if not preloaded.
+\item[patterns] (language name, language with encoding) Executed just
+ after the |\language| has been set. The second argument has the
+ patterns name actually selected (in the form of either |lang:ENC| or
+ |lang|).
+\item[hyphenation] (language name, language with encoding) Executed
+ locally just before exceptions given in |\babelhyphenation| are
+ actually set.
+\item[defaultcommands] Used (locally) in |\StartBabelCommands|.
+\item[encodedcommands] (input, font encodings) Used (locally) in
+ |\StartBabelCommands|. Both \xetex{} and \luatex{} make sure the
+ encoded text is read correctly.
+\item[stopcommands] Used to reset the the above, if necessary.
+\item[write] This event comes just after the switching commands are
+ written to the |aux| file.
+\item[beforeextras] Just before executing |\extras|\m{language}. This
+ event and the next one should not contain language-dependent code
+ (for that, add it to |\extras|\m{language}).
+\item[afterextras] Just after executing |\extras|\m{language}. For
+ example, the following deactivates shorthands in all languages:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AddBabelHook{noshort}{afterextras}{\languageshorthands{none}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\item[stringprocess] Intead of a parameter, you can manipulate the
+ macro |\BabelString| containing the string to be defined with
+ |\SetString|. For example, to use an expanded version of the string
+ in the definition, write:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AddBabelHook{myhook}{stringprocess}{%
+ \protected@edef\BabelString{\BabelString}}
+\end{verbatim}
+\end{description}
+
+\subsection{Hyphen tools}
+
+\Describe\babelhyphen{%
+ \colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}\marg{type}}
+\DescribeOther\babelhyphen{%
+ \colorbox{thegrey}{\ttfamily\hskip-.2em*\hskip-.2em}\marg{text}}
+
+\fbox{New 3.9} It is customary to classify hyphens in two types: (1)
+\textit{explicit} or \textit{hard hyphens}, which in \TeX\ are
+entered as \verb|-|, and (2) \textit{optional} or \textit{soft
+hyphens}, which are entered as \verb|\-|. Strictly, a \textit{soft
+hyphen} is not a hyphen, but just a breaking oportunity or, in
+\TeX\ terms, a ``discretionary''; a \textit{hard hyphen} is a hyphen
+with a breaking oportunity after it. A further type is a
+\textit{non-breaking hyphen}, a hyphen without a breaking
+oportunity.
+
+In \TeX, \verb|-| and \verb|\-| forbid further breaking oportunities
+in the word. This is the desired behaviour very often, but not
+always, and therefore many languages provide shorthands for these
+cases. Unfortunately, this has not been done consistently: for
+example, in Dutch, Portugese, Catalan or Danish, \verb|"-| is a hard
+hyphen, while in German, Spanish, Norwegian, Slovak or Russian, it
+is a soft hyphen. Furthermore, some of them even redefine |\-|, so
+that you cannot insert a soft hyphen without breaking oportunities
+in the rest of the word.
+
+Therefore, some macros are provide with a set of basic ``hyphens''
+which can be used by themselves, to define a user shorthand, or even
+in language files.
+\begin{itemize}
+\item |\babelhyphen{soft}| and |\babelhyphen{hard}| are self
+ explanatory.
+\item |\babelhyphen{repeat}| inserts a hard hyphen which is repeated
+ at the beginning of the next line, as done in languages like
+ Polish, Portugese and Spanish.
+\item |\babelhyphen{nobreak}| inserts a hard hyphen without a break
+ after it (even if a space follows).
+\item |\babelhyphen{empty}| inserts a break oportunity without
+ a hyphen at all.
+\item |\babelhyphen|\marg{text} is a hard ``hyphen'' using \m{text}
+ instead. A typical case is |\babelhyphen{/}|.
+\end{itemize}
+With all of them hyphenation in the rest of the word is enabled. If
+you don't want enabling it, there is a starred counterpart:
+|\babelhyphen*{soft}| (which in most cases is equivalent to the
+original |\-|), |\babelhyphen*{hard}|, etc.
+
+Note |hard| is also good for isolated prefixes (eg, \textit{anti-})
+and |nobreak| for isolated suffixes (eg, \textit{-ism}), but in both
+cases |\babelhyphen*{nobreak}| is usually better.
+
+There are also some differences with \LaTeX: (1) the character used is
+that set for the current font, while in \LaTeX{} it is hardwired to
+|-| (a typical value); (2) the hyphen to be used in fonts with a
+negative |\hyphenchar| is |-|, like in \LaTeX, but it can be changed to
+another value by redefining |\babelnullhyphen|; (3) a break after the
+hyphen is forbidden if preceded by a glue ${>}0$~pt (at the beginning
+of a word, provided it is not immediately preceded by, say, a
+parenthesis).
+
+\Describe\babelhyphenation{\texttt{[}\langlist\texttt{]}%^^A
+ \marg{exceptions}}
+
+\fbox{New 3.9} Sets hyphenation exceptions for the languages given
+or, without the optional argument, for \textit{all} languages (eg,
+proper nouns or common loan words, and of course monolingual
+documents). Language exceptions take precedence over global ones.
+
+It can be used only in the preamble, and exceptions are set when the
+language is first selected, thus taking into account changes of
+|\lccodes|'s done in |\extras|\m{lang} as well as the script specific
+encoding (not set in the preamble by default). Multiple
+|\babelhyphenation|'s are allowed. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\babelhyphenation{Wal-hal-la Dar-bhan-ga}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+Listed words are saved expanded and therefore it relies on the
+LICR. Of course, it also works without the LICR if the input and the
+font encondings are the same, like in Unicode based engines.
+
+\subsection{Language attributes}
+
+\DescribeMacro{\languageattribute}
+This is a user-level command, to be used in the preamble of a
+document (after |\usepackage[...]{babel}|), that declares which
+attributes are to be used for a given language. It takes two
+arguments: the first is the name of the language; the second,
+a (list of) attribute(s) to be used. Attributes must be set in the
+preamble and only once -- they cannot be turned on and off.
+The command checks whether the language is known in this document
+and whether the attribute(s) are known for this language.
+
+Several language definition files use their own methods to set
+options. For example, \textsf{frenchb} uses |\frenchbsetup|,
+\textsf{magyar} (1.5) uses |\magyarOptions| and \textsf{spanish}
+a set of package options (eg, |es-nolayout|). Macros settting
+options are also used (eg, |\ProsodicMarksOn| in \textsf{latin}).
+
+\subsection{Languages supported by \babel}
+
+In the following table most of the languages supported by \babel\ are
+listed, together with the names of the options which you can load
+\babel\ with for each language. Note this list is open and the
+current options may be different.
+
+\begin{description}
+\itemsep=-\parskip
+\sffamily
+\item[Afrikaans] afrikaans
+\item[Bahasa] bahasa, indonesian, indon, bahasai,
+ bahasam, malay, meyalu
+\item[Basque] basque
+\item[Breton] breton
+\item[Bulgarian] bulgarian
+\item[Catalan] catalan
+\item[Croatian] croatian
+\item[Czech] czech
+\item[Danish] danish
+\item[Dutch] dutch
+\item[English] english, USenglish, american, UKenglish,
+ british, canadian, australian, newzealand
+\item[Esperanto] esperanto
+\item[Estonian] estonian
+\item[Finnish] finnish
+\item[French] french, francais, canadien, acadian
+\item[Galician] galician
+\item[German] austrian, german, germanb, ngerman, naustrian
+\item[Greek] greek, polutonikogreek
+\item[Hebrew] hebrew
+\item[Icelandic] icelandic
+\item[Interlingua] interlingua
+\item[Irish Gaelic] irish
+\item[Italian] italian
+\item[Latin] latin
+\item[Lower Sorbian] lowersorbian
+\item[North Sami] samin
+\item[Norwegian] norsk, nynorsk
+\item[Polish] polish
+\item[Portuguese] portuges, portuguese, brazilian, brazil
+\item[Romanian] romanian
+\item[Russian] russian
+\item[Scottish Gaelic] scottish
+\item[Spanish] spanish
+\item[Slovakian] slovak
+\item[Slovenian] slovene
+\item[Swedish] swedish
+\item[Serbian] serbian
+\item[Turkish] turkish
+\item[Ukrainian] ukrainian
+\item[Upper Sorbian] uppersorbian
+\item[Welsh] welsh
+\end{description}
+
+There are more languages not listed above, including \textsf{hindi,
+thai, thaicjk, latvian, turkmen, magyar, mongolian, romansh,
+lithuanian, spanglish, vietnamese, japanese, pinyin, arabic, farsi,
+ibygreek, bgreek, serbianc, frenchle, ethiop} and \textsf{friulan}.
+
+Most of them work out of the box, but some may require extra fonts,
+encoding files, a preprocessor or even a complete framework (like
+CJK). For example, if your have the \textsf{velthuis/devnag} package,
+you can create a file with extension |.dn|:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\documentclass{article}
+\usepackage[hindi]{babel}
+\begin{document}
+{\dn devaanaa.m priya.h}
+\end{document}
+\end{verbatim}
+Then you preprocess it with |devnag| \m{file}, which creates
+\m{file}|.tex|; you can then typeset the latter with \LaTeX.
+
+\subsection{Tips, workarounds and know issues}
+
+\begin{itemize}
+\item If you use the document class \cls{book} \emph{and} you use
+ |\ref| inside the argument of |\chapter| (or just use |\ref| inside
+ |\MakeUppercase|), \LaTeX\ will keep complaining about an undefined
+ label. To prevent such problems, you could revert to using
+ uppercase labels, you can use |\lowercase{\ref{foo}}| inside the
+ argument of |\chapter|, or, if you will not use shorthands in
+ labels, set the |safe| option to |none| or |bib|.
+
+\item\catcode`\|=12\relax Both \textsf{ltxdoc} and \textsf{babel} use
+ \verb|\AtBeginDocument| to change some catcodes, and babel reloads
+ \textsf{hhline} to make sure \verb|:| has the right one, so if you
+ want to change the catcode of \verb/|/ it has to be done using the
+ same method at the proper place, with
+\begin{verbatim}
+\AtBeginDocument{\DeleteShortVerb{\|}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ \textit{before} loading babel. This way, when the document begins
+ the sequence is (1) make \verb/|/ active (\textsf{ltxdoc}); (2) make
+ it unactive (your settings); (3) make babel shorthands active
+ (\textsf{babel)}; (4) reload \textsf{hhline} (\textsf{babel}, now
+ with the correct catcodes for \verb/|/ and
+ \verb|:|).\catcode`\|=\active
+
+\item Documents with several input encodings are not frequent, but
+ sometimes are useful. You can set different encodings for different
+ languages as the following example shows:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\addto\extrasfrench{\inputencoding{latin1}}
+\addto\extrasrussian{\inputencoding{koi8-r}}
+\end{verbatim}
+ (A recent version of \textsf{inputenc} is required.)
+ \item For the hyphenation to work correctly, lccodes cannot change,
+ because \TeX{} only takes into account the values when the
+ paragraph is hyphenated, i.e., when it has been
+ finished.\footnote{This explains why \LaTeX{} assumes the lowercase
+ mapping of T1 and does not provide a tool for multiple
+ mappings. Unfortunately, \cs{savinghyphcodes} is not a solution
+ either, because lccodes for hyphenation are frozen in the format
+ and cannot be changed.} So, if you write a chunk of French text
+ with |\foreinglanguage|, the apostrophes might not be taken into
+ account. This is a limitation of \TeX, not of
+ \babel. Alternatively, you may use |\useshorthands| to activate |'|
+ and |\defineshorthand|, or redefine |\textquoteright| (the latter
+ is called by the non-ASCII right quote).
+\item \verb|\bibitem| is out of sync with \verb|\selectlanguage| in
+ the \file{.aux} file. The reason is \verb|\bibitem| uses
+ \verb|\immediate| (and others, in fact), while
+ \verb|\selectlanguage| doesn't. There is no known workaround.
+\item Babel does not take into account |\normalsfcodes| and
+ (non-)French spacing is not always properly (un)set by
+ languages. However, problems are unlikely to happen and therefore
+ this part remains untouched in version 3.9 (but it is in the `to
+ do' list).
+\item Using a character mathematically active (ie, with math code
+ |"8000|) as a shorthand can make \TeX{} enter in an infinite
+ loop. (Another issue in the `to do' list, although there is a
+ partial solution.)
+\item Also in the `to do' list is a common interface to switch
+ scripts, to avoid the current problem of languages trying to define
+ |\text|\m{script} in different ways.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\section{Preloading languages with \file{language.dat}}
+
+\TeX{} and most engines based on it (pdf\TeX, \xetex, $\epsilon$-\TeX,
+the main exception being \luatex) require hyphenation patterns to be
+loaded when a format is created (eg, \LaTeX, Xe\LaTeX,
+pdf\LaTeX). \babel{} provides a tool which has become standand in many
+distributions and based on a ``configuration file'' named
+\file{language.dat}. The exact way this file is used depends on the
+distribution, so please, read the documentation for the latter (note
+also some distributions generate the file with some tool).
+
+In that file the person who maintains a \TeX\ environment has to record
+for which languages he has hyphenation patterns \emph{and} in which
+files these are stored\footnote{This is because different operating
+systems sometimes use \emph{very} different file-naming
+conventions.}. When hyphenation exceptions are stored in a separate
+file this can be indicated by naming that file \emph{after} the file
+with the hyphenation patterns.
+
+The file can contain empty lines and comments, as well as lines which
+start with an equals (\texttt{=}) sign. Such a line will instruct
+\LaTeX\ that the hyphenation patterns just processed have to be known
+under an alternative name. Here is an example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+% File : language.dat
+% Purpose : tell iniTeX what files with patterns to load.
+english english.hyphenations
+=british
+
+dutch hyphen.dutch exceptions.dutch % Nederlands
+german hyphen.ger
+\end{verbatim}
+
+You may also set the font encoding the patterns are
+intended for by following the language name by a colon and the encoding
+code.\footnote{This in not a new feature, but in former
+versions it didn't work correctly.} For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+german:T1 hyphenT1.ger
+german hyphen.ger
+\end{verbatim}
+With the previous settings, if the enconding when the language is
+selected is |T1| then the patterns in \file{hyphenT1.ger} are
+used, but otherwise use those in \file{hyphen.ger} (note the encoding
+could be set in |\extras|\m{lang}).
+
+A typical error when using \babel{} is the following:
+\begin{verbatim}
+No hyphenation patterns were preloaded for
+the language `<lang>' into the format.
+Please, configure your TeX system to add them and
+rebuild the format. Now I will use the patterns
+preloaded for english instead}}
+\end{verbatim}
+It simply means you must reconfigure \file{language.dat}, either by
+hand or with the tools provided by your distribution.
+
+\section{The interface between the core of \babel{} and the language
+definition files}
+
+The \textit{language definition files} (ldf) must conform to a
+number of conventions, because these files have to fill in the gaps
+left by the common code in \file{babel.def}, i.\,e., the
+definitions of the macros that produce texts. Also the
+language-switching possibility which has been built into the
+\babel{} system has its implications.
+
+The following assumptions are made:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Some of the language-specific definitions might be used by plain
+ \TeX\ users, so the files have to be coded so that they can be read
+ by both \LaTeX\ and plain \TeX. The current format can be checked by
+ looking at the value of the macro |\fmtname|.
+\item The common part of the \babel{} system redefines a number of
+ macros and environments (defined previously in the document style)
+ to put in the names of macros that replace the previously hard-wired
+ texts. These macros have to be defined in the language definition
+ files.
+\item The language definition files must define five macros, used to
+ activate and deactivate the language-specific definitions. These
+ macros are |\|\langvar|hyphenmins|, |\captions|\langvar,
+ |\date|\langvar, |\extras|\langvar\ and |\noextras|\langvar (the
+ last two may be left empty); where \langvar\ is either the name of
+ the language definition file or the name of the \LaTeX\ option that
+ is to be used. These macros and their functions are discussed
+ below. You must define all or none for a language (or a dialect);
+ defining, say, |\date|\langvar\ but not |\captions|\langvar\ does
+ not raise an error but can lead to unexpected results.
+\item When a language definition file is loaded, it can define
+ |\l@|\langvar\ to be a dialect of |\language0| when |\l@|\langvar\
+ is undefined.
+\item Language names must be all lowercase. If an unknow language is
+ selected, \babel{} will attempt setting it after lowercasing its name.
+\end{itemize}
+
+Some recommendations:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item The preferred shorthand is |"|, which is not used in \LaTeX{}
+ (quotes are entered as |``| and |''|). Other good choices are
+ characters which are not used in a certain context (eg, |=| in an
+ ancient language). Note however |=|, |<|, |>|, |:| and the like
+ can be dangerous, because they may be used as part of the syntax
+ of some elements (numeric expressions, key/value pairs, etc.).
+\item Captions should not contain shorthands or encoding dependent
+ commands (the latter is not always possible, but should be clearly
+ documented). They should be defined using the LICR. You may
+ also use the new tools for encoded strings, described below.
+\item Avoid adding things to |\noextras|\m{lang} except for umlauthigh
+ and friends, |\bbl@deactivate|, |\bbl@(non)frenchspacing|, and
+ language specific macros. Use always, if possible, |\bbl@save| and
+ |\bbl@savevariable| (except if you still want to have access to the
+ previous value).
+\end{itemize}
+
+There are no special requirements for documenting your language
+files. Now they are not included in the base \babel{} manual, so
+provide a standalone document suited for your needs (and the
+corresponding PDF, if you like), as well as other files you think can
+be useful (eg, samples, readme).
+
+\subsection{Basic macros}
+
+In the core of the \babel{} system, several macros are defined for use
+in language definition files. Their purpose is to make a new language
+known. The first two are related to hyphenation patterns.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\addlanguage}
+The macro |\addlanguage| is a non-outer version of the macro
+|\newlanguage|, defined in \file{plain.tex} version~3.x. For older
+versions of \file{plain.tex} and \file{lplain.tex} a substitute
+definition is used. Here ``language'' is used in the \TeX{} sense of
+set of hyphenation patterns.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\adddialect}
+The macro |\adddialect| can be used when two languages can (or
+must) use the same hyphenation patterns. This can also be useful
+for languages for which no patterns are preloaded in the
+format. In such cases the default behaviour of the \babel{}
+system is to define this language as a `dialect' of the language
+for which the patterns were loaded as |\language0|. Here
+``language'' is used in the \TeX{} sense of set of hyphenation
+patterns.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\<lang>hyphenmins}
+The macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is used to store the values of
+the |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. Redefine this macro
+to set your own values, with two numbers corresponding to these
+two parameters. For example:
+\begin{verbatim}
+\renewcommand\spanishhyphenmins{34}
+\end{verbatim}
+(Assigning |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin| directly in
+|\extras<lang>| has no effect.)
+
+\DescribeMacro{\providehyphenmins}
+The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language
+definition files to set |\lefthyphenmin| and
+|\righthyphenmin|. This macro will check whether these parameters
+were provided by the hyphenation file before it takes any action.
+If these values have been already set, this command is ignored
+(currenty, default pattern files do \textit{not} set them).
+
+\DescribeMacro{\captions<lang>}
+The macro |\captions|\langvar\ defines the macros that
+hold the texts to replace the original hard-wired texts.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\date<lang>}
+The macro |\date|\langvar\ defines |\today|.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\extras<lang>}
+The macro |\extras|\langvar\ contains all the extra definitions needed
+for a specific language. This macro, like the following, is a hook --
+you can add thing to it, but it must not be used directly.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\noextras<lang>}
+Because we want to let the user switch
+between languages, but we do not know what state \TeX\ might be in
+after the execution of |\extras|\langvar, a macro that brings
+\TeX\ into a predefined state is needed. It will be no surprise
+that the name of this macro is |\noextras|\langvar.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@declare@ttribute}
+This is a command to be used in the language definition files for
+declaring a language attribute. It takes three arguments: the
+name of the language, the attribute to be defined, and the code
+to be executed when the attribute is to be used.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\main@language}
+To postpone the activation of the definitions needed for a
+language until the beginning of a document, all language
+definition files should use |\main@language| instead of
+|\selectlanguage|. This will just store the name of the language,
+and the proper language will be activated at the start of the
+document.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\ProvidesLanguage}
+The macro |\ProvidesLanguage| should be used to identify the
+language definition files. Its syntax is similar to the syntax
+of the \LaTeX\ command |\ProvidesPackage|.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\LdfInit}
+The macro |\LdfInit| performs a couple of standard checks that
+must be made at the beginning of a language definition file,
+such as checking the category code of the @-sign, preventing
+the \file{.ldf} file from being processed twice, etc.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\ldf@quit}
+The macro |\ldf@quit| does work needed
+if a \file{.ldf} file was processed
+earlier. This includes resetting the category code
+of the @-sign, preparing the language to be activated at
+|\begin{document}| time, and ending the input stream.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\ldf@finish}
+The macro |\ldf@finish| does work needed
+at the end of each \file{.ldf} file. This
+includes resetting the category code of the @-sign,
+loading a local configuration file, and preparing the language
+to be activated at |\begin{document}| time.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\loadlocalcfg}
+After processing a language definition file,
+\LaTeX\ can be instructed to load a local configuration
+file. This file can, for instance, be used to add strings to
+|\captions|\langvar\ to support local document
+classes. The user will be informed that this
+configuration file has been loaded. This macro is called by
+|\ldf@finish|.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\substitutefontfamily}
+(Deprecated.) This command takes three arguments, a font encoding and
+two font family names. It creates a font description file for the
+first font in the given encoding. This \file{.fd} file will instruct
+\LaTeX\ to use a font from the second family when a font from the
+first family in the given encoding seems to be needed.
+
+\subsection{Skeleton}
+
+Here is the basic structure of an |ldf| file, with a language, a
+dialect and an attribute.
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\ProvidesLanguage{<language>}
+ [2013/04/22 v0.0 <Language> support from the babel system]
+\LdfInit{<language>}{captions<language>}
+
+\ifx\undefined\l@<language>
+ \@nopatterns{<Language>}
+ \adddialect\l@<language>0
+\fi
+
+\adddialect\l@<dialect>\l@<language>
+
+\bbl@declare@ttribute{<language>}{<attrib>}{%
+ \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extras<language>
+ \expandafter{\extras<attrib><language>}%
+ \let\captions<language>\captions<attrib><language>}
+
+\providehyphenmins{<language>}{\tw@\thr@@}
+
+\def\captions<language>{}
+\let\captions<dialect>\captions<language>
+
+\def\date<language>{}
+\def\date<dialect>{}
+
+\addto\extras<language>{}
+\addto\noextras<language>{}
+\let\extras<dialect>\extras<language>
+\let\noextras<dialect>\noextras<language>
+
+\ldf@finish{<language>}
+\end{verbatim}
+
+\subsection{Support for active characters}
+
+In quite a number of language definition files, active characters are
+introduced. To facilitate this, some support macros are provided.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\initiate@active@char}
+The internal macro |\initiate@active@char| is used in language
+definition files to instruct \LaTeX\ to give a character the category
+code `active'. When a character has been made active it will remain
+that way until the end of the document. Its definition may vary.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@activate}
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@deactivate}
+The command |\bbl@activate| is used to change the way an active
+character expands. |\bbl@activate| `switches on' the active behaviour
+of the character. |\bbl@deactivate| lets the active character expand
+to its former (mostly) non-active self.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\declare@shorthand}
+The macro |\declare@shorthand| is used to define the various
+shorthands. It takes three arguments: the name for the collection of
+shorthands this definition belongs to; the character (sequence) that
+makes up the shorthand, i.e.\ |~| or |"a|; and the code to be executed
+when the shorthand is encountered. (It does \textit{not} raise an
+error if the shorthand character has not been ``initiated''.)
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@add@special}
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@remove@special}
+The \TeX book states: ``Plain \TeX\ includes a macro called
+|\dospecials| that is essentially a set macro, representing the set of
+all characters that have a special category code.'' \cite[p.~380]{DEK}
+It is used to set text `verbatim'. To make this work if more
+characters get a special category code, you have to add this character
+to the macro |\dospecial|. \LaTeX\ adds another macro called
+|\@sanitize| representing the same character set, but without the
+curly braces. The macros |\bbl@add@special|\meta{char} and
+|\bbl@remove@special|\meta{char} add and remove the character
+\meta{char} to these two sets.
+
+\subsection{Support for saving macro definitions}
+
+Language definition files may want to \emph{re}define macros that
+already exist. Therefor a mechanism for saving (and restoring) the
+original definition of those macros is provided. We provide two macros
+for this\footnote{This mechanism was introduced by Bernd Raichle.}.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\babel@save}
+To save the current meaning of any control sequence, the macro
+|\babel@save| is provided. It takes one argument, \meta{csname}, the
+control sequence for which the meaning has to be saved.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\babel@savevariable}
+A second macro is provided to save the current value of a variable.
+In this context, anything that is allowed after the |\the| primitive
+is considered to be a variable. The macro takes one argument, the
+\meta{variable}.
+
+The effect of the preceding macros is to append a piece of code to
+the current definition of |\originalTeX|. When |\originalTeX| is
+expanded, this code restores the previous definition of the control
+sequence or the previous value of the variable.
+
+\subsection{Support for extending macros}
+
+\DescribeMacro{\addto}
+The macro |\addto{|\meta{control sequence}|}{|\meta{\TeX\ code}|}| can
+be used to extend the definition of a macro. The macro need not be
+defined (ie, it can be undefined or |\relax|). This macro can, for
+instance, be used in adding instructions to a macro like
+|\extrasenglish|.
+
+Be careful when using this macro, because depending on the case the
+assignment could be either global (usually) or local (sometimes). That
+does not seems very consistent, but this behaviour is preserved for
+backward compatibility. If you are using \pkg{etoolbox}, by Philipp
+Lehman, consider using the tools provided by this package instead of
+|\addto|.
+
+\subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@allowhyphens}
+In several languages compound words are used. This means that when
+\TeX\ has to hyphenate such a compound word, it only does so at the
+`\texttt{-}' that is used in such words. To allow hyphenation in the
+rest of such a compound word, the macro |\bbl@allowhyphens| can be
+used.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\allowhyphens}
+Same as |\bbl@allowhyphens|, but does nothing if the encoding is
+|T1|. It is intended mainly for characters provided as real glyphs by
+this encoding but constructed with |\accent| in |OT1|.
+
+Note the previous command (|\bbl@allowhyphens|) has different
+applications (hyphens and discretionaries) than this one (composite
+chars). Note also prior to version 3.7, |\allowhyphens| had the
+behaviour of |\bbl@allowhyphens|.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\set@low@box}
+For some languages, quotes need to be lowered to the baseline. For
+this purpose the macro |\set@low@box| is available. It takes one
+argument and puts that argument in an |\hbox|, at the baseline. The
+result is available in |\box0| for further processing.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\save@sf@q}
+Sometimes it is necessary to preserve the |\spacefactor|. For this
+purpose the macro |\save@sf@q| is available. It takes one argument,
+saves the current spacefactor, executes the argument, and restores the
+spacefactor.
+
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@frenchspacing}
+\DescribeMacro{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
+The commands |\bbl@frenchspacing| and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing| can be
+used to properly switch French spacing on and off.
+
+\subsection{Encoding-dependent strings}
+
+\fbox{New 3.9} Babel 3.9 provides a way of defining strings in several
+encodings, intended mainly for \luatex{} and \xetex. This is the only new
+feature requiring changes in language files if you want to make use of
+it.
+
+Furthermore, it must be activated explicitly, with the package option
+|strings|. If there is no |strings|, these blocks are ignored, except
+|\SetCase|s (and except if forced with |\UseStrings|, see
+below). In other words, the old way of defining/switching strings still
+works and it's used by default.
+
+It consist is a series of blocks started with
+|\StartBabelCommands|. The last block is closed with
+|\EndBabelCommands|. Each block is a single group (ie, local
+declarations apply until the next |\StartBabelCommands| or
+|\EndBabelCommands|). An |ldf| may contain several series of this
+kind.
+
+Thanks to this new feature, string values and string language
+switching are not mixed any more. No need of |\addto|. If the language
+is german, just redefine |\germanchaptername|.
+
+\Describe\StartBabelCommands
+ {\marg{language-list}\marg{category}\oarg{selector}}
+
+The \m{language-list} specifies which languages the block is intended
+for. A block is taken into account only if the |\CurrentOption| is
+listed here.
+
+A ``selector'' is a name to be used as value in package option
+|strings|, optionally followed by extra info about the encodings to be
+used. The name |unicode| must be used for \xetex{} and \luatex{} (the
+key |strings| has also other two special values: |generic| and
+|encoded|).
+
+If a string is set several times (because several blocks are read),
+the first one take precedence (ie, it works much like
+|\providecommand|).
+
+Encoding info is |charset=| followed by a charset, which if given sets
+how the strings should be traslated to the internal representation
+used by the engine, typically |utf8|, which is the only value
+supported currently (default is no traslations).
+
+A list of font encodings which the strings are expected to work with
+can be given after |fontenc=| (separated with spaces, if two or more) --
+recommended, but not mandatory, although blocks without this key are
+not taken into account if you have requested |strings=encoded|.
+
+Blocks without a selector are read always if the key |strings| has
+been used. They provide fallback values, and therefore must be the
+last blocks; they should be provided always if possible and all
+strings should be defined somehow inside it; they can be the only
+blocks (mainly LGC scripts using the LICR). Blocks without a selector
+can be activated explicitly with |strings=generic| (no block is taken
+into account except those). With |strings=encoded|, strings in those
+blocks are set as default (internally, |?|). If there is no key
+|strings|, string definitions are ignored, but |\SetCase|s are still
+honoured (an a |encoded| way).
+
+The \m{category} is either |captions|, |date| or |extras|. You must
+stick to these three categories, even if no error is raised when using
+other name.\footnote{In future releases further categories may be
+added.\nb{like `monetary', `time', `address', `name', `case' or
+`numeric'}} It may be empty, too, but in such a case using
+|\SetString| is an error (but not |\SetCase|).
+
+\begin{verbatim}
+\StartBabelCommands\CurrentOption{captions}
+ [unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8]
+\SetString{\chaptername}{utf8-string}
+
+\StartBabelCommands\CurrentOption{captions}
+\SetString{\chaptername}{ascii-maybe-LICR-string}
+
+\EndBabelCommands
+\end{verbatim}
+
+A real example is:
+\begin{verbatim}[escapechar=\&]
+\StartBabelCommands{austrian}{date}
+ [unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8]
+ \SetString\monthiname{J&\"a&nner}
+
+\StartBabelCommands{german,austrian}{date}
+ [unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8]
+ \SetString\monthiiiname{M&\"a&rz}
+
+\StartBabelCommands{austrian}{date}
+ \SetString\monthiname{J\"{a}nner}
+
+\StartBabelCommands{german}{date}
+ \SetString\monthiname{Januar}
+
+\StartBabelCommands{german,austrian}{date}
+ \SetString\monthiiname{Februar}
+ \SetString\monthiiiname{M\"{a}rz}
+ \SetString\monthivname{April}
+ \SetString\monthvname{Mai}
+ \SetString\monthviname{Juni}
+ \SetString\monthviiname{Juli}
+ \SetString\monthviiiname{August}
+ \SetString\monthixname{September}
+ \SetString\monthxname{Oktober}
+ \SetString\monthxiname{November}
+ \SetString\monthxiiname{Dezenber}
+ \SetString\today{\number\day.~%
+ \csname month\romannumeral\month name\endcsname\space
+ \number\year}
+
+\StartBabelCommands{german,austrian}{captions}
+ \SetString\prefacename{Vorwort}
+ [etc.]
+
+\EndBabelCommands
+\end{verbatim}
+
+When used in |ldf| files, previous values of |\|\m{category}\m{language}
+are overriden, which means the old way to define strings still works
+and used by default (to be precise, is first set to undefined and then
+strings are added). However, when used in the preamble or in a
+package, new settings are added to the previous ones, if the language
+exists (in the \babel{} sense, ie, if |\date|\m{language} exists).
+
+\Describe\EndBabelCommands{}
+Marks the end of the series of blocks.
+
+\Describe\UseStrings{}
+You may also want to omit the old way of defining define strings
+altogether. Just add |\UseStrings| after the first
+|\StartBabelCommands| and the generic branchs will be taken into
+account even if there is no |strings| key. This directive applies to
+all subsequent blocks, until |\EndBabelCommands|.
+
+\Describe\SetString{\marg{macro-name}\marg{string}}
+Adds \meta{macro-name} to the current category, and defines globally
+\meta{lang-macro-name} to \meta{code} (after applying the
+transformation corresponding to the current charset or defined with
+the hook |stringprocess|).
+
+Use this command to define strings, without including any ``logic'' if
+possible, which should be a separated macro. See the example above for
+the date.
+
+\Describe\SetStringLoop{\marg{macro-name}\marg{string-list}}
+A convenient way to define several ordered names at once. For example,
+to define |\abmoniname|, |\abmoniiname|, etc. (and similarly with
+|abday|):
+\begin{verbatim}
+\SetStringLoop{abmon#1name}{en,fb,mr,ab,my,jn,jl,ag,sp,oc,nv,dc}
+\SetStringLoop{abday#1name}{lu,ma,mi,ju,vi,sa,do}
+\end{verbatim}
+|#1| is replaced by the roman numeral.
+
+\Describe\SetCase{\oarg{map-list}\marg{toupper-code}\marg{tolower-code}}
+Sets globally code to be executed at |\MakeUppercase| and
+|\MakeLowercase|. The code would be typically things like |\let\BB\bb|
+and |\uccode| or |\lccode| (although for the reasons explained above,
+changes in lc/uc codes may not work). A \meta{map-list} is a series of
+macros using the internal format of |\@uclclist| (eg,
+|\bb\BB\cc\CC|). The mandatory arguments take precedence over the
+optional one. This command, unlike |\SetString|, is executed always
+(even without |strings|), and it is intented for minor readjustments
+only.
+
+For example, as |T1| is the default case mapping in \LaTeX, we could
+set for Turkish:
+\begin{verbatim}[escapechar=\&]
+\StartBabelCommands{turkish}{}[ot1enc, fontenc=OT1]
+\SetCase
+ {\uccode"10=`I\relax}
+ {\lccode`I="10\relax}
+
+\StartBabelCommands{turkish}{}[unicode, fontenc=EU1 EU2, charset=utf8]
+\SetCase
+ {\uccode`i=`&\rmfamily\.{\ttfamily I}&\relax
+ \uccode`&\i&=`I\relax}
+ {\lccode`&\rmfamily\.{\ttfamily I}&=`i\relax
+ \lccode`I=`&\i&\relax}
+
+\StartBabelCommands{turkish}{}
+\SetCase
+ {\uccode`i="9D\relax
+ \uccode"19=`I\relax}
+ {\lccode"9D=`i\relax
+ \lccode`I="19\relax}
+
+\EndBabelCommands
+\end{verbatim}
+(Note the mapping for |OT1| is not complete.)
+
+\section{Compatibility and changes}
+
+\subsection{Compatibility with \file{german.sty}}\label{l-h}
+
+The file \file{german.sty} has been one of the sources of inspiration
+for the \babel{} system. Because of this I wanted to include
+\file{german.sty} in the \babel{} system. To be able to do that I had
+to allow for one incompatibility: in the definition of the macro
+|\selectlanguage| in \file{german.sty} the argument is used as the
+{$\langle \it number \rangle$} for an |\ifcase|. So in this case a
+call to |\selectlanguage| might look like |\selectlanguage{\german}|.
+
+In the definition of the macro |\selectlanguage| in \file{babel.def}
+the argument is used as a part of other macronames, so a call to
+|\selectlanguage| now looks like |\selectlanguage{german}|. Notice
+the absence of the escape character. As of version~3.1a of \babel{}
+both syntaxes are allowed.
+
+All other features of the original \file{german.sty} have been copied
+into a new file, called \file{germanb.sty}\footnote{The `b' is added
+to the name to distinguish the file from Partls' file.}.
+
+Although the \babel{} system was developed to be used with \LaTeX,
+some of the features implemented in the language definition files
+might be needed by plain \TeX\ users. Care has been taken that all
+files in the system can be processed by plain \TeX.
+
+\subsection{Compatibility with \file{ngerman.sty}}
+
+When used with the options \Lopt{ngerman} or \Lopt{naustrian},
+\babel{} will provide all features of the package \pkg{ngerman}.
+There is however one exception: The commands for special hyphenation
+of double consonants (|"ff| etc.) and ck (|"ck|), which are no longer
+required with the new German orthography, are undefined. With the
+\pkg{ngerman} package, however, these commands will generate
+appropriate warning messages only.
+
+\subsection{Compatibility with the \pkg{french} package}
+
+It has been reported to me that the package \pkg{french} by Bernard
+Gaulle (\texttt{gaulle@idris.fr}) works together with \babel. On the
+other hand, it seems \emph{not} to work well together with a lot of
+other packages. Therefore I have decided to no longer load
+\file{french.ldf} by default. Instead, when you want to use the
+package by Bernard Gaulle, you will have to request it specifically,
+by passing either \Lopt{frenchle} or \Lopt{frenchpro} as an option to
+\babel.
+
+\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.9}
+
+Most of changes in version 3.9 are related to bugs, either to fix them
+(there were lots), or to provide some alternatives. Even new features
+like |\babelhyphen| are intended to solve a certain problem (in this
+case, the lacking of a uniform syntax and behaviour for shorthands
+across languages). These changes are described in this manual in the
+correspondin place.
+
+\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.7}
+
+In \babel\ version 3.7 a number of bugs that were found in
+version~3.6 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions
+have occurred:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item Shorthands are expandable again. The disadvantage is that
+ one has to type |'{}a| when the acute accent is used as a
+ shorthand character. The advantage is that a number of other
+ problems (such as the breaking of ligatures, etc.) have
+ vanished.
+\item Two new commands, |\shorthandon| and |\shorthandoff| have
+ been introduced to enable to temporarily switch off one or more
+ shorthands.
+\item Support for typesetting Greek has been enhanced. Code from
+ the \pkg{kdgreek} package (suggested by the author) was added
+ and |\greeknumeral| has been added.
+\item Support for typesetting Basque is now available thanks to
+ Juan Aguirregabiria.
+\item Support for typesetting Serbian with Latin script is now
+ available thanks to Dejan Muhamedagi\'{c} and Jankovic
+ Slobodan.
+\item Support for typesetting Hebrew (and potential support for
+ typesetting other right-to-left written languages) is now
+ available thanks to Rama Porrat and Boris Lavva.
+\item Support for typesetting Bulgarian is now available thanks to
+ Georgi Boshnakov.
+\item Support for typesetting Latin is now available, thanks to
+ Claudio Beccari and Krzysztof Konrad \.Zelechowski.
+\item Support for typesetting North Sami is now available, thanks
+ to Regnor Jernsletten.
+\item The options \Lopt{canadian}, \Lopt{canadien} and
+ \Lopt{acadien} have been added for Canadian English and French
+ use.
+\item A language attribute has been added to the |\mark...|
+ commands in order to make sure that a Greek header line comes
+ out right on the last page before a language switch.
+\item Hyphenation pattern files are now read \emph{inside a
+ group}; therefore any changes a pattern file needs to make to
+ lowercase codes, uppercase codes, and category codes are kept
+ local to that group. If they are needed for the language, these
+ changes will need to be repeated and stored in |\extras...|
+\item The concept of language attributes is introduced. It is
+ intended to give the user some control over the
+ features a language-definition file provides. Its
+ first use is for the Greek language, where the user can choose
+ the $\pi o\lambda\upsilon\tau o\nu\kappa\acute{o}$
+ (``Polutoniko'' or multi-accented) Greek way of typesetting
+ texts. These attributes will possibly find wider use in future
+ releases.
+\item The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} is introduced.
+\item The syntax of the file \file{language.dat} has been
+ extended to allow (optionally) specifying the font
+ encoding to be used while processing the patterns file.
+\item The command |\providehyphenmins| should now be used in
+ language definition files in order to be able to keep any
+ settings provided by the pattern file.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.6}
+
+In \babel\ version 3.6 a number of bugs that were found in
+version~3.5 are fixed. Also a number of changes and additions
+have occurred:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item A new environment \Lenv{otherlanguage*} is introduced. it
+ only switches the `specials', but leaves the `captions'
+ untouched.
+\item The shorthands are no longer fully expandable. Some
+ problems could only be solved by peeking at the token following
+ an active character. The advantage is that |'{}a| works as
+ expected for languages that have the |'| active.
+\item Support for typesetting french texts is much enhanced; the
+ file \file{francais.ldf} is now replaced by \file{frenchb.ldf}
+ which is maintained by Daniel Flipo.
+\item Support for typesetting the russian language is again
+ available. The language definition file was originally
+ developed by Olga Lapko from CyrTUG. The fonts needed to
+ typeset the russian language are now part of the \babel\
+ distribution. The support is not yet up to the level which is
+ needed according to Olga, but this is a start.
+\item Support for typesetting greek texts is now also
+ available. What is offered in this release is a first attempt;
+ it will be enhanced later on by Yannis Haralambous.
+\item in \babel\ 3.6j some hooks have been added for the
+ development of support for Hebrew typesetting.
+\item Support for typesetting texts in Afrikaans (a variant of
+ Dutch, spoken in South Africa) has been added to
+ \file{dutch.ldf}.
+\item Support for typesetting Welsh texts is now available.
+\item A new command |\aliasshorthand| is introduced. It seems
+ that in Poland various conventions are used to type the
+ necessary Polish letters. It is now possible to use the
+ character~|/| as a shorthand character instead of the
+ character~|"|, by issuing the command |\aliasshorthand{"}{/}|.
+\item The shorthand mechanism now deals correctly with characters
+ that are already active.
+\item Shorthand characters are made active at |\begin{document}|,
+ not earlier. This is to prevent problems with other packages.
+\item A \emph{preambleonly} command |\substitutefontfamily| has
+ been added to create \file{.fd} files on the fly when the font
+ families of the Latin text differ from the families used for
+ the Cyrillic or Greek parts of the text.
+\item Three new commands |\LdfInit|, |\ldf@quit| and
+ |\ldf@finish| are introduced that perform a number of standard
+ tasks.
+\item In babel 3.6k the language Ukrainian has been added and the
+ support for Russian typesetting has been adapted to the package
+ 'cyrillic' to be released with the December 1998 release of
+ \LaTeXe.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\subsection{Changes in \babel\ version 3.5}
+
+In \babel\ version 3.5 a lot of changes have been made when compared
+with the previous release. Here is a list of the most important ones:
+\begin{itemize}
+\item the selection of the language is delayed until
+ |\begin{document}|, which means you must add appropriate
+ |\selectlanguage| commands if you include |\hyphenation| lists in
+ the preamble of your document.
+\item \babel\ now has a \Lenv{language} environment and a new
+ command |\foreignlanguage|;
+\item the way active characters are dealt with is completely
+ changed. They are called `shorthands'; one can have three
+ levels of shorthands: on the user level, the language level,
+ and on `system level'. A consequence of the new way of handling
+ active characters is that they are now written to auxiliary
+ files `verbatim';
+\item A language change now also writes information in the
+ \file{.aux} file, as the change might also affect typesetting
+ the table of contents. The consequence is that an \file{.aux} file
+ generated by a LaTeX format with babel preloaded gives errors
+ when read with a LaTeX format without babel; but I think this
+ probably doesn't occur;
+\item \babel\ is now compatible with the \pkg{inputenc} and
+ \pkg{fontenc} packages;
+\item the language definition files now have a new extension,
+ \file{ldf};
+\item the syntax of the file \file{language.dat} is extended to
+ be compatible with the \pkg{french} package by Bernard Gaulle;
+\item each language definition file looks for a configuration
+ file which has the same name, but the extension \file{.cfg}. It
+can contain any valid \LaTeX\ code.
+\end{itemize}
+
+\DocInput{babel.dtx}
+\DocInput{bbplain.dtx}
+\DocInput{bbunicode.dtx}
+
+\section{Conclusion}
+
+A system of document options has been presented that enable the user
+of \LaTeX\ to adapt the standard document classes of \LaTeX\ to the
+language he or she prefers to use. These options offer the possibility
+of switching between languages in one document. The basic interface
+consists of using one option, which is the same for \emph{all}
+standard document classes.
+
+In some cases the language definition files provide macros that can be
+useful to plain \TeX\ users as well as to \LaTeX\ users. The \babel{}
+system has been implemented so that it can be used by both groups of
+users.
+
+\section{Acknowledgements}
+
+I would like to thank all who volunteered as $\beta$-testers for their
+time. I would like to mention Julio Sanchez who supplied the option
+file for the Spanish language and Maurizio Codogno who supplied the
+option file for the Italian language. Michel Goossens supplied
+contributions for most of the other languages. Nico Poppelier helped
+polish the text of the documentation and supplied parts of the macros
+for the Dutch language. Paul Wackers and Werenfried Spit helped find
+and repair bugs.
+
+During the further development of the babel system I received much
+help from Bernd Raichle, for which I am grateful.
+
+\begin{thebibliography}{9}
+ \bibitem{DEK} Donald E. Knuth,
+ \emph{The \TeX book}, Addison-Wesley, 1986.
+ \bibitem{LLbook} Leslie Lamport,
+ \emph{\LaTeX, A document preparation System}, Addison-Wesley,
+ 1986.
+ \bibitem{treebus} K.F. Treebus.
+ \emph{Tekstwijzer, een gids voor het grafisch verwerken van
+ tekst.}
+ SDU Uitgeverij ('s-Gravenhage, 1988). A Dutch book on layout
+ design and typography.
+ \bibitem{HP} Hubert Partl,
+ \emph{German \TeX}, \emph{TUGboat} 9 (1988) \#1, p.~70--72.
+ \bibitem{LLth} Leslie Lamport,
+ in: \TeX hax Digest, Volume 89, \#13, 17 February 1989.
+ \bibitem{BEP} Johannes Braams, Victor Eijkhout and Nico Poppelier,
+ \emph{The development of national \LaTeX\ styles},
+ \emph{TUGboat} 10 (1989) \#3, p.~401--406.
+ \bibitem{ilatex} Joachim Schrod,
+ \emph{International \LaTeX\ is ready to use},
+ \emph{TUGboat} 11 (1990) \#1, p.~87--90.
+\end{thebibliography}
+\end{document}
+%</filedriver>
+%\fi
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/16}{Make multiple loading of
+% \file{babel.def} impossible}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/05/16}{Now using \cs{ldf@quit} for the test}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*core>
+\ifx\ldf@quit\@undefined
+\else
+ \expandafter\endinput
+\fi
+%</core>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%<*dtx>
+\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}
+%</dtx>
+%\fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{babel.dtx}
+%
+% \changes{babel~2.0a}{1990/04/02}{Added text about \file{german.sty}}
+% \changes{babel~2.0b}{1990/04/18}{Changed order of code to prevent
+% plain \TeX from seeing all of it}
+% \changes{babel~2.1}{1990/04/24}{Modified user interface,
+% \cs{langTeX} no longer necessary}
+% \changes{babel~2.1a}{1990/05/01}{Incorporated Nico's comments}
+% \changes{babel~2.1b}{1990/05/01}{rename \cs{language} to
+% \cs{current@language}}
+% \changes{babel~2.1c}{1990/05/22}{abstract for report fixed, missing
+% \texttt{\}}, found by Nicolas Brouard}
+% \changes{babel~2.1d}{1990/07/04}{Missing right brace in definition of
+% abstract environment, found by Werenfried Spit}
+% \changes{babel~2.1e}{1990/07/16}{Incorporated more comments from
+% Nico}
+% \changes{babel~2.2}{1990/07/17}{Renamed \cs{newlanguage} to
+% \cs{addlanguage}}
+% \changes{babel~2.2a}{1990/08/27}{Modified the documentation
+% somewhat}
+% \changes{babel~3.0}{1991/04/23}{Moved part of the code to hyphen.doc
+% in preparation for \TeX~3.0}
+% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/21}{Updated comments in various places}
+% \changes{babel~3.0b}{1991/05/25}{Removed some problems in change log}
+% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/07/15}{Renamed \file{babel.sty} and
+% \file{latexhax.sty} to \file{.com}}
+% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{Added the support for active
+% characters and for extending a macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed the need for
+% \file{latexhax}}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Some Changes by br}
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1992/02/15}{Fixups of the code and
+% documentation}
+% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/06}{Included driver file, and prepared
+% for distribution}
+% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/01/30}{Updated for \LaTeXe}
+% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/28}{Added language definition file for
+% bahasa}
+% \changes{babel~3.4b}{1994/05/18}{Added a small driver to be able to
+% process just this file}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/03}{Provided common code to handle the
+% active double quote}
+% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{corrected a few typos (PR1652)}
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Merged glyphs.dtx into this file}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/13}{repaired a typo}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{replaced \cs{tmp}, \cs{bbl@tmp} and
+% \cs{bbl@temp} with \cs{bbl@tempa}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{replaced \cs{undefined} with
+% \cs{@undefined} to be consistent with \LaTeX}
+% \changes{babel~3.7d}{1999/05/05}{Fixed a few typos in \cs{changes}
+% entries which made typesetting the code impossible}
+% \changes{babel~3.7h}{2001/03/01}{Added a number of missing comment
+% characters which caused spurious white space}
+% \changes{babel~3.8e}{2005/03/24}{Many enhancements to the text by
+% Andrew Young}
+% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/04}{Added the ``modifiers'' mechanism}
+%
+% \section{Identification and loading of required files}
+%
+% \textit{Code documentation is still under revision.}
+%
+% The file \file{babel.sty}\footnote{The file described in this
+% section is called \texttt{\filename}, has version
+% number~\fileversion\ and was last revised on~\filedate.} is meant
+% for \LaTeXe, therefor we make sure that the format file used is
+% the right one.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ProvidesLanguage}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/18}{Added macro to prevent problems
+% with unexpected \cs{ProvidesFile} in plain formats because of
+% \babel.}
+% The identification code for each file is something that was
+% introduced in \LaTeXe. When the command |\ProvidesFile| does not
+% exist, a dummy definition is provided temporarily. For use in the
+% language definition file the command |\ProvidesLanguage| is
+% defined by \babel.
+% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Redid the identification code,
+% provided dummy definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for plain \TeX}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/26}{Store version in \cs{fileversion}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/18}{Need to temporarily change the
+% definition of \cs{ProvidesFile} for December 1995 release}
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Save a few csnames; use
+% \cs{bbl@tempa} instead of \cs{\@ProvidesFile} and store message
+% in \cs{toks8}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/09}{Save info about the babel version
+% in the format (switch.def) so that it can be checked later if
+% necessary}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+\def\bbl@version{3.9e}
+\def\bbl@date{2013/04/15}
+%</kernel>
+%<*patterns>
+\xdef\bbl@format{\jobname}
+%</patterns>
+%<*core|kernel|patterns>
+\ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined
+ \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
+ \wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}%
+ \let\ProvidesFile\@undefined
+ }
+%</core|kernel|patterns>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As an alternative for |\ProvidesFile| we define
+% |\ProvidesLanguage| here to be used in the language definition
+% files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+ \def\ProvidesLanguage#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
+ \wlog{Language: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}%
+ }
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When |\ProvidesFile| is defined we give |\ProvidesLanguage| a
+% similar definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\ProvidesLanguage#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\ 10 %
+ \@makeother\/%
+ \@ifnextchar[%]
+ {\@provideslanguage{#1}}{\@provideslanguage{#1}[]}}
+ \def\@provideslanguage#1[#2]{%
+ \wlog{Language: #1 #2}%
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.ldf\endcsname{#2}%
+ \endgroup}
+%</kernel>
+%<*core|kernel|patterns>
+\fi
+%</core|kernel|patterns>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Identify each file that is produced from this source file.
+% \changes{babel~3.4c}{1995/04/28}{lhyphen.cfg has become
+% lthyphen.cfg}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/01/25}{lthyphen.cfg has become hyphen.cfg}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<package>\ProvidesPackage{babel}
+%<core>\ProvidesFile{babel.def}
+%<patterns>\ProvidesFile{hyphen.cfg}
+%<kernel>\ProvidesFile{switch.def}
+%<nil>\ProvidesLanguage{nil}
+%<driver&!user>\ProvidesFile{babel.drv}
+%<driver&user>\ProvidesFile{user.drv}
+ [2013/04/15 v3.9e %
+%<package> The Babel package]
+%<core> Babel common definitions]
+%<kernel|patterns> Babel language switching mechanism]
+%<nil> Nil language]
+%<driver>]
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now we make sure all required files are loaded. When the command
+% |\AtBeginDocument| doesn't exist we assume that we are dealing
+% with a plain-based format or \LaTeX2.09. In that case the file
+% \file{plain.def} is needed (which also defines
+% |\AtBeginDocument|, and therefore it is not loaded twice). We
+% need the first part when the format is created, and |\orig@dump|
+% is used as a flag. Otherwise, we need to use the second part, so
+% |\orig@dump| is not defined (\file{plain.def} undefines it).
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/21}{Use \cs{orig@dump} as flag instead
+% of \cs{adddialect}}
+%\begingroup
+% \catcode`&=\active
+% \gdef\MakePrivateLetters{\catcode`@=11\relax\catcode`&=\active}%
+% \gdef&#1&{\quad\colorbox{thegrey}{\textsf{#1}}}
+%\endgroup
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*core|kernel|patterns>
+\ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined
+%</core|kernel|patterns>
+%<*patterns>
+ \let\orig@dump\dump
+%</patterns>
+%<*core|kernel|patterns>
+ \input plain.def\relax
+\fi
+%</core|kernel|patterns>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Check if the current version of \file{switch.def} has been
+% previously loaded (mainly, \file{hyphen.cfg}). If not, load it
+% now. We cannot load |babel.def| here because we first need to
+% declare and process the package options.
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/11}{Now switch.def is loaded always, so
+% that there is no need to rebuild formats just to update babel}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/13}{But switch.def is loaded only if
+% loaded in a different version (or not loaded)}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/14}{Added the debug option}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/02/05}{Added \cs{bbl@add}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\@ifpackagewith{babel}{debug}
+ {\let\bbl@tempa\relax}
+ {\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e}}%
+%</package>
+%<*core>
+\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e}
+%</core>
+%<*core|package>
+\ifx\bbl@version\bbl@tempa\else
+ \input switch.def\relax
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following macros just make the code cleaner. |\bbl@add| is
+% now used internally instead of |\addto| because of the
+% unpredictable behaviour of the latter. (There are some
+% duplications, but, you know, I [JBL] never rememer where the code
+% ends up when intermingled with docstrip.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@for#1#2#3{\@for#1:=#2\do{\ifx#1\@empty\else#3\fi}}
+\def\bbl@add#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ {\def#1{#2}}%
+ {\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}}}
+\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}%
+\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1}
+\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+%</core|package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/02}{Removed \cs{babel@core@loaded}, no
+% longer needed with the advent of \cs{LdfInit}}
+%
+% \section{The Package File}
+%
+% In order to make use of the features of \LaTeXe, the \babel\
+% system contains a package file, \file{babel.sty}. This file is
+% loaded by the |\usepackage| command and defines all the language
+% options whose name is different from that of the |.ldf| file
+% (like variant spellings). It also takes care of a number of
+% compatibility issues with other packages an defines a few
+% aditional package options.
+%
+%
+% Apart from all the language options below we also have a few options
+% that influence the behaviour of language definition files.
+%
+% Many of the following options don't do anything themselves, they
+% are just defined in order to make it possible for babel and
+% language definition files to check if one of them was specified
+% by the user.
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{base}}
+%
+% The first option to be processed is |base|, which set the
+% hyphenation patterns then resets |ver@babel.sty| so that
+% LaTeX forgets about the first loading. After |switch.def| has
+% been loaded (above) and |\AfterBabelLanguage| defined, exits.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{Added options to influence
+% behaviour of active acute and grave accents}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/05}{preset option started,
+% party stolen from fontenc}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/17}{Hooks started}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/02/07}{Rejected preset, and replaced by
+% base}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{%
+ \global\expandafter\bbl@add\csname#1.ldf-h@@k\endcsname}%
+\@ifpackagewith{babel}{base}{%
+ \DeclareOption*{\bbl@patterns{\CurrentOption}}%
+ \DeclareOption{base}{}%
+ \ProcessOptions
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\relax
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname ver@babel.sty\endcsname\relax
+ \global\let\@ifl@ter@@\@ifl@ter
+ \def\@ifl@ter#1#2#3#4#5{\global\let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@@}%
+ \endinput}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{\texttt{key=value} options and other general option}
+%
+% The following macros extract language modifiers, and only real
+% package options are kept in the option list. Modifiers are saved
+% and assigned to |\BabelModifiers| at |\bbl@load@language|; when
+% no modifiers have been given, the former is |\relax|. How
+% modifiers are handled are left to language styles; they can use
+% |\in@|, loop them with |\@for| o load |keyval|).
+% \changes{babel~3.9e}{2013/04/15}{Bug fixed - a dot was added in
+% key=value pairs}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@csarg\let{tempa\expandafter}\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname
+\def\bbl@tempb#1.#2{%
+ #1\ifx\@empty#2\else,\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempb#2\fi}%
+\def\bbl@tempd#1.#2\@nnil{%
+ \ifx\@empty#2%
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}%
+ \else
+ \in@{=}{#1}\ifin@
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1.#2}%
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}%
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{mod@#1}{\bbl@tempb#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\let\bbl@tempc\@empty
+\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempa{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempd\bbl@tempa.\@empty\@nnil}
+\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\bbl@tempc
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{activeacute}{}
+\DeclareOption{activegrave}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next option tells \babel\ to leave shorthand characters
+% active at the end of processing the package. This is \emph{not}
+% the default as it can cause problems with other packages, but for
+% those who want to use the shorthand characters in the preamble of
+% their documents this can help.
+% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Added option
+% \Lopt{KeepShorthandsActive}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{No longer define the control
+% sequence \cs{KeepShorthandsActive}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{KeepShorthandsActive}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/14}{Implemented the \texttt{noconfigs}
+% option}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/26}{Implemented the
+% \texttt{showlanguages} option}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{debug}{}
+\DeclareOption{noconfigs}{}
+\DeclareOption{showlanguages}{}
+\DeclareOption{shorthands=off}{\bbl@tempa shorthands=\bbl@tempa}
+\DeclareOption{strings}{\def\bbl@opt@strings{\BabelStringsDefault}}
+\DeclareOption{strings=encoded}{\let\bbl@opt@strings\relax}
+\DeclareOption{safe=none}{\let\bbl@opt@safe\@empty}
+\DeclareOption{safe=bib}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{B}}
+\DeclareOption{safe=ref}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{R}}
+\DeclareOption{math=active}{}
+\DeclareOption{math=normal}{\def\bbl@mathnormal{\noexpand\textormath}}
+\def\BabelStringsDefault{generic}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Handling of package options is done in three passes. (I [JBL] am not
+% very happy with the idea, anyway.) The first one processes
+% options which has been declared above or follow the syntax
+% |<key>=<value>|, the second one
+% loads the requested languages, except the main one if set with
+% the key |main|, and the third one loads the latter. First, we
+% ``flag'' valid keys with a nil value.
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/10}{Added the `safe' key, including code
+% below for selecting the redefined macros}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@config\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@main\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following tool is defined temporarily to store the values of
+% options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@tempa#1=#2\bbl@tempa{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname\@nnil
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+ \else
+ \bbl@error{%
+ Bad option `#1=#2'. Either you have misspelled the\\%
+ key or there is a previous setting of `#1'}{%
+ Valid keys are `shorthands', `config', `strings', `main',\\%
+ `headfoot', `safe', `math'}
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now the option list is processed, taking into account only
+% currently declared options (including those declared with a |=|),
+% and |<key>=<value>| options (the former take precedence).
+% Unrecognized options are saved in |\bbl@language@opts|, because
+% they are language options.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bbl@language@opts\@empty
+\DeclareOption*{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string=}{\CurrentOption}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@language@opts{%
+ \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi
+ \CurrentOption}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we finish the first pass (and start over).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProcessOptions*
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Conditional loading of shorthands}
+%
+% If there is no |shorthands=<chars>|, the original \textsf{babel}
+% macros are left untouched, but if there is, these macros are
+% wrapped (in |babel.def|) to define only those given.
+%
+% A bit of optimization: if there is no |shorthands=|, then
+% |\bbl@ifshorthands| is always true, and it is always false if
+% |shorthands| is empty. Also, some code makes sense only with
+% |shorthands=...|.
+% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/07}{Added t and c for tilde and comma}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@sh@string#1{%
+ \ifx#1\@empty\else
+ \ifx#1t\string~%
+ \else\ifx#1c\string,%
+ \else\string#1%
+ \fi\fi
+ \expandafter\bbl@sh@string
+ \fi}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil
+ \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#2}%
+\else\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty
+ \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#3}%
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following macro tests if a shortand is one of the allowed
+% ones.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string#1}{\bbl@opt@shorthands}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We make sure all chars in the string are `other', with the help
+% of an auxiliary macro defined above (which also zaps spaces).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\bbl@opt@shorthands{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@sh@string\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+
+% The following is ignored with |shorthands=off|, since it is
+% intended to take some aditional actions for certain chars.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{'}%
+ {\PassOptionsToPackage{activeacute}{babel}}{}
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{`}%
+ {\PassOptionsToPackage{activegrave}{babel}}{}
+\fi\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/30}{Code setting language in
+% head/foots. Related to babel/3796}
+% With |headfoot=lang| we can set the language used in heads/foots.
+% For example, in babel/3796 just adds |headfoot=english|. It
+% misuses \cs{@resetactivechars} but seems to work.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil\else
+ \g@addto@macro\@resetactivechars{%
+ \set@typeset@protect
+ \expandafter\select@language@x\expandafter{\bbl@opt@headfoot}%
+ \let\protect\noexpand}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For the option safe we use a different approach --
+% |\bbl@opt@safe| says which macros are redefined (B for bibs and R
+% for refs). By default, both are set.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{bbl@opt@safe}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{BR}}{}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else
+ \edef\bbl@language@opts{%
+ \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi
+ \bbl@opt@main}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the format created a list of loaded languages (in
+% |\bbl@languages|), get the name of the 0-th to show the actual
+% language used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bbl@languages\@undefined\else
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^I=12
+ \@ifpackagewith{babel}{showlanguages}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{\wlog{#2^^I#1^^I#3^^I#4}}%
+ \wlog{<*languages>}%
+ \bbl@languages
+ \wlog{</languages>}%
+ \endgroup}{}
+ \endgroup
+ \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{%
+ \ifnum#2=\z@
+ \gdef\bbl@nulllanguage{#1}%
+ \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}%
+ \fi}%
+ \bbl@languages
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Language options}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \cs{LdfInit} is undefined we
+% need to load \file{babel.def} from \file{babel.sty}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6l}{1999/04/03}{Don't load \file{babel.def} now,
+% but rather define \cs{LdfInit} temporarily in order to load
+% \file{babel.def} at the right time, preventing problems with the
+% temporary definition of \cs{bbl@redefine}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6r}{1999/04/12}{We \textbf{do} need to load
+% \file{babel.def} right now as \cs{ProvidesLanguage} needs to be
+% defined before the \file{.ldf} files are read and the reason for
+% for 3.6l has been removed}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/15}{Rewritten the loading mechanism, so
+% that languages not declared are also correctly recognized, even
+% if given as global options}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/12}{Revised the loading mechanism}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/14}{Changed extension of language
+% definition files to \texttt{ldf}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load language definition files
+% \emph{after} the check for the hyphenation patterns}
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/10/04}{Added option \Lopt{afrikaans}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{acadian}}
+% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added option \Lopt{australian}}
+% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{Added option \Lopt{albanian}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Added the \Lopt{Basque} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added synonyms \Lopt{indonesian},
+% \Lopt{indon} and \Lopt{bahasai} for the original bahasa
+% (indonesia) support}
+% \changes{babel~3.8h}{2005/11/23}{added \Lopt{malay}, \Lopt{meyaluy}
+% and \Lopt{bahasam} for the Bahasa Malaysia support}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/25}{Added \Lopt{brazilian} as
+% alternative for \Lopt{brazil}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Added \Lopt{british} as an
+% alternative for \Lopt{english} with a preference for british
+% hyphenation}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/21}{Added the \Lopt{bulgarian} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/07}{Added option \Lopt{canadian}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2001/02/09}{Added option \Lopt{canadien}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/06}{Added the \Lopt{estonian} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/10}{Now use the file \file{frenchb.ldf}
+% from Daniel Flipo for french support}
+% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added option \Lopt{frenchb} an
+% alias for \Lopt{francais}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Load \file{french.ldf} when it is
+% found instead of \file{frenchb.ldf}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/07}{\emph{only} load
+% \file{frenchb.ldf}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/31}{Added the \Lopt{greek} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{polutonikogreek}
+% option}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{set the correct language attribute
+% for polutoniko greek}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Added the \Lopt{hebrew} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.7b}{1998/06/25}{Added the \Lopt{latin} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/13}{Added the \Lopt{interlingua}
+% option}
+% \changes{babel~3.6p}{1999/04/10}{Added the \Lopt{ngerman} and
+% \Lopt{naustrian} options}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/26}{Added the \Lopt{samin} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/06/12}{Added the \Lopt{newzealand} option}
+% \changes{babel~3.6e}{1997/01/08}{Added options \Lopt{UKenglish} and
+% \Lopt{USenglish}}
+%
+% Languages are loaded when processing the corresponding option
+% \textit{except} if a |main| language has been set. In such a
+% case, it is not loaded until all options has been processed.
+% The following macro inputs the ldf file and does some additional
+% checks (|\input| works, too, but possible errors are not catched).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bbl@afterlang\relax
+\let\BabelModifiers\relax
+\let\bbl@loaded\@empty
+\def\bbl@load@language#1{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1.ldf}%
+ {\edef\bbl@loaded{\CurrentOption
+ \ifx\bbl@loaded\@empty\else,\bbl@loaded\fi}%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@afterlang
+ \csname\CurrentOption.ldf-h@@k\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\BabelModifiers
+ \csname bbl@mod@\CurrentOption\endcsname}%
+ {\bbl@error{%
+ Unknow option `\CurrentOption'. Either you misspelled it\\%
+ or the language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf was not found}{%
+ Valid options are: shorthands=..., KeepShorthandsActive,\\%
+ activeacute, activegrave, noconfigs, safe=, main=, math=\\%
+ headfoot=, strings=, config=, or a language name.}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now, we set language options whose names are different from |ldf| files.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareOption{acadian}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}
+\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\bbl@load@language{dutch}}
+\DeclareOption{american}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{australian}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{austrian}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}}
+\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}}
+\DeclareOption{brazil}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}}
+\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}}
+\DeclareOption{british}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{canadian}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{canadien}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}
+\DeclareOption{francais}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}
+\DeclareOption{french}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}%
+\DeclareOption{german}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}}
+\DeclareOption{hebrew}{%
+ \input{rlbabel.def}%
+ \bbl@load@language{hebrew}}
+\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\bbl@load@language{magyar}}
+\DeclareOption{indon}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{lsorbian}}
+\DeclareOption{malay}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}}
+\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}}
+\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}}
+\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}}
+\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\bbl@load@language{norsk}}
+\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{%
+ \bbl@load@language{greek}%
+ \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}}
+\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}}
+\DeclareOption{russian}{\bbl@load@language{russianb}}
+\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\bbl@load@language{ukraineb}}
+\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{usorbian}}
+\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Another way to extend the list of `known' options for \babel\ is
+% to create the file \file{bblopts.cfg} in which one can add option
+% declarations. However, this mechanism is deprecated -- if you
+% want an alternative name for a language, just create a new |.ldf|
+% file loading the actual one. You can also set the name
+% of the file with the package option |config=<name>|, which will
+% load |<name>.cfg| instead.
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added the possibility to have a
+% \file{bblopts.cfg} file with option declarations.}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/28}{Added the \cs{AfterBabelLanguage}
+% mechanism, to be used mainly with the local cfg file.}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/31}{Now you can set the name of the
+% local cfg file.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@config\@nnil
+ \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}{}%
+ {\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}%
+ {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+ * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J%
+ *}}%
+ {}}%
+\else
+ \InputIfFileExists{\bbl@opt@config.cfg}%
+ {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+ * Local config file \bbl@opt@config.cfg used^^J%
+ *}}%
+ {\bbl@error{%
+ Local config file `\bbl@opt@config.cfg' not found}{%
+ Perhaps you misspelled it.}}%
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Recognizing global options in packages not having a closed set of
+% them is not trivial, as for them to be processed they must be
+% defined explicitly. So, package options not yet taken into
+% account and stored in |bbl@language@opts| are assumed to be
+% languages (note this list also contains the language given with
+% |main|). If not declared above, the name of the option and the
+% file are the same.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@language@opts{%
+ \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\edef\bbl@tempb{%
+ \noexpand\DeclareOption
+ {\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}%
+ \bbl@tempb}%
+ \@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now, we make sure an option is explicitly declared for any
+% language set as global option, by checking if an |ldf|
+% exists. The previous step was, in fact, somewhat redundant, but
+% that way we minimize accesing the file system just to see if the
+% option could be a language.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\@classoptionslist{%
+ \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\IfFileExists{\bbl@tempa.ldf}%
+ {\edef\bbl@tempb{%
+ \noexpand\DeclareOption
+ {\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}%
+ \bbl@tempb}%
+ \@empty}%
+ \@empty}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If a main language has been set, store it for the third pass.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else
+ \expandafter
+ \let\expandafter\bbl@loadmain\csname ds@\bbl@opt@main\endcsname
+ \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% And we are done, because all options for this pass has been
+% declared. Those already processed in the first pass are just ignored.
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/12}{Added default option}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/22}{Default option does nothing}
+%
+% The options have to be processed in the order in which the user
+% specified them (except, of course, global options, which \LaTeX{}
+% processes before):
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{%
+ \bbl@ifsamestring\CurrentOption{#1}{\global\bbl@add\bbl@afterlang}{}}
+\DeclareOption*{}
+\ProcessOptions*
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This finished the second pass. Now the third one begins, which
+% loads the main language set with the key |main|. A warning is
+% raised if the main language is not the same as the last named
+% one, or if the value of the key |main| is not a language. Then
+% execute directly the option (because it could be used only in
+% |main|). After loading all languages, we deactivate
+% |\AfterBabelLanguage|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\@classoptionslist,\bbl@language@opts}
+ \let\bbl@tempc\@empty
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempb,}{,\bbl@loaded,}%
+ \ifin@\edef\bbl@tempc{\bbl@tempb}\fi}
+ \def\bbl@tempa#1,#2\@nnil{\def\bbl@tempb{#1}}
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@loaded,\@nnil
+ \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc\else
+ \bbl@warning{%
+ Last declared language option is `\bbl@tempc,\\%
+ but the last processed one was `\bbl@tempb'.\\%
+ The main language cannot be set as both a global\\%
+ and a package option. Use `main=\bbl@tempc' as\\%
+ option. Reported}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{\bbl@loadmain}
+ \ExecuteOptions{\bbl@opt@main}
+ \DeclareOption*{}
+ \ProcessOptions*
+\fi
+\def\AfterBabelLanguage{%
+ \bbl@error
+ {Too late for \string\AfterBabelLanguage}%
+ {Languages have been loaded, so I can do nothing}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/03/13}{Added an error message for when no
+% language option was specified}
+% In order to catch the case where the user forgot to specify a
+% language we check whether |\bbl@main@language|, has become
+% defined. If not, no language has been loaded and an error
+% message is displayed.
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{No longer us a redefinition of an
+% internal macro, just check \cs{bbl@main@language} and load
+% \file{babel.def}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/24}{Now babel is not loaded to prevent
+% the document from raising errors after fixing it}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bbl@main@language\@undefined
+ \bbl@error{%
+ You haven't specified a language option}{%
+ You need to specify a language, either as a global option\\%
+ or as an optional argument to the \string\usepackage\space
+ command;\\%
+ You shouldn't try to proceed from here, type x to quit.}
+\fi
+%</package>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \section{The Kernel of Babel}
+%
+% The kernel of the \babel\ system is stored in either
+% \file{hyphen.cfg} or \file{switch.def} and \file{babel.def}. The
+% file \file{babel.def} contains most of the code, while
+% \file{switch.def} defines the language switching commands; both
+% can be read at run time. The file \file{hyphen.cfg} is a file
+% that can be loaded into the format, which is necessary when you
+% want to be able to switch hyphenation patterns (by default, it
+% also inputs \file{switch.def}, for ``historical reasons'', but it
+% is not necessary). When \file{babel.def} is loaded it checks if
+% the current version of \file{switch.def} is in the format; if not
+% it is loaded. A further file, \file{babel.sty}, contains
+% \LaTeX-specific stuff.
+%
+% Because plain \TeX\ users might want to use some of the features
+% of the \babel{} system too, care has to be taken that plain \TeX\
+% can process the files. For this reason the current format will
+% have to be checked in a number of places. Some of the code below
+% is common to plain \TeX\ and \LaTeX, some of it is for the
+% \LaTeX\ case only.
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/11}{Added \cs{bbl@for} for loops
+% ignoring empties}
+% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/06}{Normalize \cs{bbl@afterlang} to relax}
+%
+% \subsection{Tools}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*core>
+\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@undefined
+ \def\bbl@opt@safe{BR}
+ \let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+ \let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil
+\fi
+\ifx\BabelModifiers\@undefined\let\BabelModifiers\relax\fi
+\ifx\bbl@afterlang\@undefined\let\bbl@afterlang\relax\fi
+\providecommand\AfterBabelLanguage[2]{}
+\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterelse}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@afterfi}
+% Because the code that is used in the handling of active
+% characters may need to look ahead, we take extra care to `throw'
+% it over the |\else| and |\fi| parts of an
+% |\if|-statement\footnote{This code is based on code presented in
+% TUGboat vol. 12, no2, June 1991 in ``An expansion Power Lemma''
+% by Sonja Maus.}. These macros will break if another |\if...\fi|
+% statement appears in one of the arguments and it is not enclosed
+% in braces.
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/20}{Made \cs{bbl@afterelse} and
+% \cs{bbl@afterfi} \cs{long}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1}
+\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/10}{Removed the \cs{peek@token} and
+% \textsc{test@token} stuff}
+% The macro |\initiate@active@char| takes all the necessary actions
+% to make its argument a shorthand character. The real work is
+% performed once for each character.
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/30}{Only execute
+% \cs{initiate@active@char} once for each character}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{1999/04/30}{Added \cs{bbl@withactive}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@withactive#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \lccode`~=`#2\relax
+ \lowercase{\endgroup#1~}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added}
+% To redefine a command, we save the old meaning of the macro.
+% Then we redefine it to call the original macro with the
+% `sanitized' argument. The reason why we do it this way is that
+% we don't want to redefine the \LaTeX\ macros completely in case
+% their definitions change (they have changed in the past).
+%
+% Because we need to redefine a number of commands we define the
+% command |\bbl@redefine| which takes care of this. It creates a
+% new control sequence, |\org@...|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@redefine#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefine@long}
+% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Macro added}
+% This version of |\babel@redefine| can be used to redefine |\long|
+% commands such as |\ifthenelse|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
+\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@redefinerobust}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Macro added}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/09}{Define \cs*{foo } instead of
+% \cs{foo}}
+% For commands that are redefined, but which \textit{might} be
+% robust we need a slightly more intelligent macro. A robust
+% command |foo| is defined to expand to |\protect|\verb*|\foo |. So
+% it is necessary to check whether \verb*|\foo | exists. The result
+% is that the command that is being redefined is always robust
+% afterwards. Therefor all we need to do now is define \verb*|\foo |.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This command should only be used in the preamble of the document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Encoding issues}
+%
+% The first thing we need to do is to determine, at
+% |\begin{document}|, which latin fontencoding to use.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\latinencoding}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from
+% \file{.ldf} files}
+% When text is being typeset in an encoding other than `latin'
+% (\texttt{OT1} or \texttt{T1}), it would be nice to still have
+% Roman numerals come out in the Latin encoding.
+% So we first assume that the current encoding at the end
+% of processing the package is the Latin encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfPackage{\edef\latinencoding{\cf@encoding}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% But this might be overruled with a later loading of the package
+% \pkg{fontenc}. Therefor we check at the execution of
+% |\begin{document}| whether it was loaded with the \Lopt{T1}
+% option. The normal way to do this (using |\@ifpackageloaded|) is
+% disabled for this package. Now we have to revert to parsing the
+% internal macro |\@filelist| which contains all the filenames
+% loaded.
+% \changes{babel~3.6k}{1999/03/15}{Use T1 encoding when it is a known
+% encoding}
+% \changes{babel~3.6m}{1999/04/06}{Can't use \cs{@ifpackageloaded}
+% need to parse \cs{@filelist}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{moved checking for fontenc right to
+% the top of \file{babel.sty}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6n}{1999/04/07}{Added a check for `manual' selection
+% of \texttt{T1} encoding, without loading \pkg{fontenc}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6q}{1999/04/12}{Better solution then parsing
+% \cs{@filelist}, use \cs{@ifl@aded}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6u}{1999/04/20}{Moved this code to
+% \file{babel.def}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \gdef\latinencoding{OT1}%
+ \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one
+ \xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}%
+ \else
+ \@ifl@aded{def}{t1enc}{\xdef\latinencoding{\bbl@t@one}}{}%
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\latintext}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from
+% \file{.ldf} files}
+% Then we can define the command |\latintext| which is a
+% declarative switch to a latin font-encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\latintext}{%
+ \fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
+ \def\encodingdefault{\latinencoding}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textlatin}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Macro added, moved from
+% \file{.ldf} files}
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/19}{added \cs{leavevmode} to prevent a
+% paragraph starting \emph{inside} the group}
+% \changes{babel~3.7k}{2003/10/12}{Use \cs{DeclareTextFontComand}}
+% This command takes an argument which is then typeset using the
+% requested font encoding. In order to avoid many encoding switches
+% it operates in a local scope.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@undefined\DeclareTextFontCommand
+ \DeclareRobustCommand{\textlatin}[1]{\leavevmode{\latintext #1}}
+\else
+ \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textlatin}{\latintext}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The second version of this macro takes two arguments. The first
+% argument is the name of the language that will be defined in the
+% language definition file; the second argument is either a control
+% sequence or a string from which a control sequence should be
+% constructed. The existence of the control sequence indicates that
+% the file has been processed before.
+%
+% At the start of processing a language definition file we always
+% check the category code of the at-sign. We make sure that it is
+% a `letter' during the processing of the file. We also save its
+% name as the last called option, even if not loaded.
+%
+% Another character that needs to have the correct category code
+% during processing of language definition files is the equals sign,
+% `=', because it is sometimes used in constructions with the
+% |\let| primitive. Therefor we store its current catcode and
+% restore it later on.
+% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{make sure the equals sign has its
+% default category code}
+%
+% Now we check whether we should perhaps stop the processing of
+% this file. To do this we first need to check whether the second
+% argument that is passed to |\LdfInit| is a control sequence. We
+% do that by looking at the first token after passing |#2| through
+% |string|. When it is equal to |\@backslashchar| we are dealing
+% with a control sequence which we can compare with |\@undefined|.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/11}{\cs{ldf@quit} is not delayed any
+% more after \cs{fi} , since \cs{endinput} is not executed immediately}
+% If so, we call |\ldf@quit| to set the main language, restore the
+% category code of the @-sign and call |\endinput|
+%
+% When |#2| was \emph{not} a control sequence we construct one and
+% compare it with |\relax|.
+%
+% Finally we check |\originalTeX|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LdfInit#1#2{%
+ \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@
+ \catcode`\@=11\relax
+ \chardef\eqcatcode=\catcode`\=
+ \catcode`\==12\relax
+ \expandafter\if\expandafter\@backslashchar
+ \expandafter\@car\string#2\@nil
+ \ifx#2\@undefined\else
+ \ldf@quit{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax\else
+ \ldf@quit{#1}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \let\bbl@screset\@empty
+ \ifx\originalTeX\@undefined
+ \let\originalTeX\@empty
+ \else
+ \originalTeX
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ldf@quit}
+% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Macro added}
+% This macro interrupts the processing of a language definition file.
+% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of
+% the equals sign}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ldf@quit#1{%
+ \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}%
+ \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
+ \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax
+ \endinput}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ldf@finish}
+% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added}
+% This macro takes one argument. It is the name of the language
+% that was defined in the language definition file.
+%
+% We load the local configuration file if one is present, we set
+% the main language (taking into account that the argument might be
+% a control sequence that needs to be expanded) and reset the
+% category code of the @-sign.
+% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/26}{Also restore the category code of
+% the equals sign}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/01}{Added \cs{bbl@afterlang} which
+% executes the code delayed with \cs{AfterBabelLanguage}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\ldf@finish#1{%
+ \loadlocalcfg{#1}%
+ \bbl@afterlang
+ \let\bbl@afterlang\relax
+ \let\BabelModifiers\relax
+ \let\bbl@screset\relax
+ \expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}%
+ \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
+ \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% After the preamble of the document the commands |\LdfInit|,
+% |\ldf@quit| and |\ldf@finish| are no longer needed. Therefor
+% they are turned into warning messages in \LaTeX.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\LdfInit
+\@onlypreamble\ldf@quit
+\@onlypreamble\ldf@finish
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\main@language}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added}
+% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{\cs{main@language} now also sets
+% \cs{languagename} and \cs{l@languagename} for use by other
+% packages in the preamble of a document}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@main@language}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Macro added}
+% This command should be used in the various language definition
+% files. It stores its argument in |\bbl@main@language|; to be used
+% to switch to the correct language at the beginning of the
+% document.
+% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\main@language#1{%
+ \def\bbl@main@language{#1}%
+ \let\languagename\bbl@main@language
+ \bbl@patterns{\languagename}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We also have to make sure that some code gets executed at the
+% beginning of the document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\bbl@main@language}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Support for active characters}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@special}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
+% The macro |\bbl@add@special| is used to add a new character (or
+% single character control sequence) to the macro |\dospecials|
+% (and |\@sanitize| if \LaTeX\ is used).
+%
+% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we
+% redefine the macros |\do| and |\@makeother| to add themselves and
+% the given character without expansion.
+%
+% To add the character to the macros, we expand the original macros
+% with the additional character inside the redefinition of the
+% macros. Because |\@sanitize| can be undefined, we put the
+% definition inside a conditional.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@add@special#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
+ \def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
+ \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}%
+ \fi}%
+ \x}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The macro |\x| contains at this moment the following:\\
+% |\endgroup\def\dospecials{|\textit{old contents}%
+% |\do|\meta{char}|}|.\\
+% If |\@sanitize| is defined, it contains an additional definition
+% of this macro. The last thing we have to do, is the expansion of
+% |\x|. Then |\endgroup| is executed, which restores the old
+% meaning of |\x|, |\do| and |\@makeother|. After the group is
+% closed, the new definition of |\dospecials| (and |\@sanitize|) is
+% assigned.
+%
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@remove@special}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
+% The companion of the former macro is |\bbl@remove@special|. It
+% is used to remove a character from the set macros |\dospecials|
+% and |\@sanitize|.
+%
+% To keep all changes local, we begin a new group. Then we define
+% a help macro |\x|, which expands to empty if the characters
+% match, otherwise it expands to its nonexpandable input. Because
+% \TeX\ inserts a |\relax|, if the corresponding |\else| or |\fi|
+% is scanned before the comparison is evaluated, we provide a `stop
+% sign' which should expand to nothing.
+%
+% With the help of this macro we define |\do| and |\make@other|.
+%
+% The rest of the work is similar to |\bbl@add@special|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@remove@special#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\x##1##2{\ifnum`#1=`##2\noexpand\@empty
+ \else\noexpand##1\noexpand##2\fi}%
+ \def\do{\x\do}%
+ \def\@makeother{\x\@makeother}%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
+ \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
+ \fi}%
+ \x}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Shorthands}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\initiate@active@char}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/03}{Renamed macro}
+% A language definition file can call this macro to make a
+% character active. This macro takes one argument, the character
+% that is to be made active. When the character was already active
+% this macro does nothing. Otherwise, this macro defines the
+% control sequence |\normal@char|\m{char} to expand to the
+% character in its `normal state' and it defines the active
+% character to expand to |\normal@char|\m{char} by default
+% (\m{char} being the character to be made active). Later its
+% definition can be changed to expand to |\active@char|\m{char}
+% by calling |\bbl@activate{|\m{char}|}|.
+%
+% For example, to make the double quote character active one could
+% have |\initiate@active@char{"}| in a language definition file.
+% This defines |"| as |\active@prefix "\active@char"| (where the
+% first |"| is the character with its original catcode, when the
+% shorthand is created, and |\active@char"| is a single token). In
+% protected contexts, it expands to |\protect "| or |\noexpand "|
+% (ie, with the original |"|); otherwise |\active@char"| is
+% executed. This macro in turn expands to |\normal@char"| in
+% ``safe'' contexts (eg, |\label|), but |\user@active"| in normal
+% ``unsafe'' ones. The latter search a definition in the user,
+% language and system levels, in this order, but if none is found,
+% |\normal@char"| is used. However, a deactivated shorthand (with
+% |\bbl@deactivate| is defined as |\active@prefix "\normal@char"|.
+%
+% The following macro is used to define shorthands in the three
+% levels. It takes 4 arguments: the (string'ed) character,
+% |\<level>@group|, |<level>@active| and |<next-level>@active|
+% (except in |system|).
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{New macro, with code from
+% \cs{@initiate@active@char}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@active@def#1#2#3#4{%
+ \@namedef{#3#1}{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select#2#1{#3@arg#1}{#4#1}%
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname
+ \fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When there is also no current-level shorthand with an argument we
+% will check whether there is a next-level defined shorthand for
+% this active character.
+% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{pass the argument on with braces in
+% order to prevent it from breaking up}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{remove the braces again}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \long\@namedef{#3@arg#1}##1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@afterelse\csname#4#1\endcsname##1%
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname
+ \fi}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{Removed an extra hash. Now calls
+% \cs{@initiate@active@char} with 3 arguments.}
+% |\initiate@active@char| calls |\@initiate@active@char| with 3
+% arguments. All of them are the same character with different
+% catcodes: active, other (string'ed) and the original one.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\initiate@active@char#1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@withactive
+ {\expandafter\@initiate@active@char\expandafter}#1\string#1#1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.9e}{2012/08/18}{Introduced the 3-argument
+% \cs{@initiate@active@char}, with different catcodes: active,
+% string'ed, and original. Reorganized}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/19}{The catcode is saved}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/09}{The original definition is saved,
+% too}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Take into account mathematically
+% active chars, to avoid infinite loops}
+% The very first thing to do is saving the original catcode and the
+% original definition, even if not active, which is possible
+% (undefined characters require a special treatement to avoid
+% making them |\relax|).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@initiate@active@char#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oricat@#2\endcsname{%
+ \catcode`#2=\the\catcode`#2\relax}%
+ \ifx#1\@undefined
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{%
+ \let\noexpand#1\noexpand\@undefined}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{%
+ \let\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the character is already active we provide the default
+% expansion under this shorthand mechanism. Otherwise we write a
+% message in the transcript file, and define |\normal@char|\m{char}
+% to expand to the character in its default state. If the character
+% is mathematically active when \babel{} is loaded (for example
+% |'|) the normal expansion is somewhat different to avoid an
+% infinite loop (but it does not prevent the loop if the mathcode
+% is set to |"8000| \textit{a posteriori}).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx#1#3\relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname normal@char#2\endcsname#3%
+ \else
+ \bbl@info{Making #2 an active character}%
+ \ifnum\mathcode`#2="8000
+ \@namedef{normal@char#2}{%
+ \textormath{#3}{\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}}%
+ \else
+ \@namedef{normal@char#2}{#3}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To prevent problems with the loading of other packages after
+% \babel\ we reset the catcode of the character to the original one
+% at the end of the package and of each language file (except with
+% \textsf{KeepShorthandsActive}). It is re-activate again at
+% |\begin{document}|. We also need to make sure that the
+% shorthands are active during the processing of the \file{.aux}
+% file. Otherwise some citations may give unexpected results in
+% the printout when a shorthand was used in the optional argument
+% of |\bibitem| for example.
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Make shorthands active during
+% \file{.aux} file processing}. Then we
+% make it active (not strictly necessary, but done for backward
+% compatibility).
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/12/01}{Restore the category code of a
+% shorthand char at end of package}
+% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{Made restoring of the category code
+% of shorthand characters optional}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/03/21}{Use \cs{@ifpackagewith} to
+% determine whether shorthand characters need to remain active}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@restoreactive{#2}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \catcode`#2\active
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux{\catcode`\string#2\active}%
+ \fi}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@add@special\csname#2\endcsname
+ \catcode`#2\active
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we have set |\normal@char|\m{char}, we must define
+% |\active@char|\m{char}, to be executed when the character is
+% activated. We define the first level expansion of
+% |\active@char|\m{char} to check the status of the |@safe@actives|
+% flag. If it is set to true we expand to the `normal' version of
+% this character, otherwise we call |\user@active|\m{char} to start
+% the search of a definition in the user, language and system
+% levels (or eventually |normal@char|\m{char}).
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Added code for option math=normal}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo
+ \if\string^#2%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\textormath}%
+ \else
+ \ifx\bbl@mathnormal\@undefined\else
+ \let\bbl@tempa\bbl@mathnormal
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\edef\csname active@char#2\endcsname{%
+ \bbl@tempa
+ {\noexpand\if@safe@actives
+ \noexpand\expandafter
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname
+ \noexpand\else
+ \noexpand\expandafter
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname
+ \noexpand\fi}%
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Shorthands are not defined
+% directly, but with a couple of intermediate macros}
+%
+% We now define the default values which the shorthand is set to
+% when activated or deactivated. It is set to the deactivated form
+% (globally), so that the character expands to
+% \begin{center}
+% |\active@prefix| \m{char} |\normal@char|\m{char}
+% \end{center}
+% (where |\active@char|\m{char} is \emph{one} control sequence!).
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{active@#2}{%
+ \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname active@char#2\endcsname}%
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{normal@#2}{%
+ \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname bbl@normal@#2\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The next level of the code checks whether a user has defined a
+% shorthand for himself with this character. First we check for a
+% single character shorthand. If that doesn't exist we check for a
+% shorthand with an argument.
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Skip the user-level active char
+% with argument if no shorthands with arguments were defined}
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Now use \cs{bbl@sh@select}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{Instead of the ``copy-paste pattern''
+% a new macro is used}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@active@def#2\user@group{user@active}{language@active}%
+ \bbl@active@def#2\language@group{language@active}{system@active}%
+ \bbl@active@def#2\system@group{system@active}{normal@char}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In order to do the right thing when a shorthand with an argument
+% is used by itself at the end of the line we provide a definition
+% for the case of an empty argument. For that case we let the
+% shorthand character expand to its non-active self. Also, When a
+% shorthand combination such as |''| ends up in a heading \TeX\
+% would see |\protect'\protect'|. To prevent this from happening a
+% couple of shorthand needs to be defined at user level.
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/09}{Added an extra shorthand
+% combination on user level to catch an interfering \cs{protect}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/8/18}{Use \cs{user@group}, as above,
+% instead of the hardwired \texttt{user}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@@\endcsname
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@\string\protect@\endcsname
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, a couple of special cases are taken care of. (1) If we
+% are making the right quote (|'|) active we need to change |\pr@m@s| as
+% well. Also, make sure that a single |'| in math mode `does the
+% right thing'. (2) If we are using the caret (|^|) as a shorthand
+% character special care should be taken to make sure math still
+% works. Therefor an extra level of expansion is introduced with a
+% check for math mode on the upper level.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Insert a check for math mode in
+% the definition of \cs{normal@char'}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/02}{use \cs{textormath} to get rid
+% of the \cs{fi} (PR 3266)}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{The redefinition needs to take
+% place one level higher, \cs{prim@s} needs to be redefined.}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/18}{Introduced an extra
+% level of expansion in the definition of an active caret}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Make an exception for the active
+% caret which needs an extra level of expansion}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/11}{The output routine resets the quote
+% to \cs{active@math@prime}, so we redefine the latter with the new
+% ``normal'' value}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/20}{Added a couple of missing
+% comment characters (PR 4146)}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/29}{Use \cs{textormath} instead of
+% \cs{ifmath}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/11/26}{Compare the char, irrespective of
+% its catcode.}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Removed the redeclaration of
+% \cs{normal@char'} because it is handled in a generic way above}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/29}{Removed the intermediate step of
+% \cs{bbl@act@caret} and moved above}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if\string'#2%
+ \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s
+ \let\active@math@prime#1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Initiating a shorthand makes active the char. That is not
+% strictly necessary but it is still done for backward
+% compatibility. So we need to restore the original catcode at the
+% end of package \textit{and} and the end of the |ldf|.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/04}{Catcodes are also restored after
+% each language, to prevent incompatibilities. Use \cs{string} instead
+% of \cs{noexpand} and add \cs{relax}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/10/18}{Catcodes are deactivated in a separate
+% macro, which is made no-op when babel exits}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}%
+ {\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}%
+ {\def\bbl@restoreactive#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{%
+ \noexpand\AfterBabelLanguage\noexpand\CurrentOption
+ {\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}%
+ \noexpand\AtEndOfPackage{\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}}%
+ \bbl@tempa}%
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@sh@select}
+% This command helps the shorthand supporting macros to select how
+% to proceed. Note that this macro needs to be expandable as do all
+% the shorthand macros in order for them to work in expansion-only
+% environments such as the argument of |\hyphenation|.
+%
+% This macro expects the name of a group of shorthands in its first
+% argument and a shorthand character in its second argument. It
+% will expand to either |\bbl@firstcs| or |\bbl@scndcs|. Hence two
+% more arguments need to follow it.
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{Added command}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/18}{Removed \cs{string}s, because the
+% char are already string'ed}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@sh@select#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@afterelse\bbl@scndcs
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\active@prefix}
+% The command |\active@prefix| which is used in the expansion of
+% active characters has a function similar to |\OT1-cmd| in that it
+% |\protect|s the active character whenever |\protect| is
+% \emph{not} |\@typeset@protect|.
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{\cs{@protected@cmd} has vanished
+% from \file{ltoutenc.dtx}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/17}{Added handling of the situation
+% where \cs{protect} is set to \cs{@unexpandable@protect}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\active@prefix#1{%
+ \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When |\protect| is set to |\@unexpandable@protect| we make sure
+% that the active character is als \emph{not} expanded by inserting
+% |\noexpand| in front of it. The |\@gobble| is needed to remove
+% a token such as |\activechar:| (when the double colon was the
+% active character to be dealt with).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \noexpand#1%
+ \else
+ \protect#1%
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\@gobble
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\if@safe@actives}
+% In some circumstances it is necessary to be able to change the
+% expansion of an active character on the fly. For this purpose the
+% switch |@safe@actives| is available. The setting of this switch
+% should be checked in the first level expansion of
+% |\active@char|\m{char}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\if@safe@actives
+\@safe@activesfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@restore@actives}
+% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{New macro added}
+% When the output routine kicks in while the
+% active characters were made ``safe'' this must be undone in
+% the headers to prevent unexpected typeset results. For this
+% situation we define a command to make them ``unsafe'' again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@restore@actives{\if@safe@actives\@safe@activesfalse\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@activate}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@deactivate}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/11}{Added macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/11}{\cs{bbl@withactive} makes sure the
+% catcode is active}
+% Both macros take one argument, like |\initiate@active@char|. The
+% macro is used to change the definition of an active character to
+% expand to |\active@char|\m{char} in the case of |\bbl@activate|,
+% or |\normal@char|\m{char} in the case of
+% |\bbl@deactivate|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@activate#1{%
+ \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1%
+ \csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname}
+\def\bbl@deactivate#1{%
+ \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1%
+ \csname bbl@normal@\string#1\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@firstcs}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@scndcs}
+% These macros have two arguments. They use one of their arguments
+% to build a control sequence from.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@firstcs#1#2{\csname#1\endcsname}
+\def\bbl@scndcs#1#2{\csname#2\endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\declare@shorthand}
+% The command |\declare@shorthand| is used to declare a shorthand
+% on a certain level. It takes three arguments:
+% \begin{enumerate}
+% \item a name for the collection of shorthands, i.e. `system', or
+% `dutch';
+% \item the character (sequence) that makes up the shorthand,
+% i.e. |~| or |"a|;
+% \item the code to be executed when the shorthand is encountered.
+% \end{enumerate}
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/02}{Make a `note' when a shorthand with
+% an argument is defined.}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/23}{Make it possible to distinguish the
+% constructed control sequences for the case with argument}
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{We need to support shorthands with
+% and without argument in different groups; added the name of the
+% group to the storage macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/03}{Check if shorthands are redefined}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\declare@shorthand#1#2{\@decl@short{#1}#2\@nil}
+\def\@decl@short#1#2#3\@nil#4{%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{#3}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty
+ \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@scndcs
+ \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@}{}%
+ {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\endcsname\bbl@tempa
+ \else
+ \bbl@info
+ {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\\%
+ in language \CurrentOption}%
+ \fi}%
+ \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@}{#4}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@firstcs
+ \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{}%
+ {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@\endcsname\bbl@tempa
+ \else
+ \bbl@info
+ {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\string#3\\%
+ in language \CurrentOption}%
+ \fi}%
+ \@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{#4}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\textormath}
+% Some of the shorthands that will be declared by the language
+% definition files have to be usable in both text and mathmode. To
+% achieve this the helper macro |\textormath| is provided.
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/29}{Failed if an argument had a
+% condicional. Use the more robust mechanism of \cs{XXXoftwo}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\textormath{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\user@group}
+% \begin{macro}{\language@group}
+% \begin{macro}{\system@group}
+% The current concept of `shorthands' supports three levels or
+% groups of shorthands. For each level the name of the level or
+% group is stored in a macro. The default is to have a user group;
+% use language group `english' and have a system group called
+% `system'.
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/24}{Have a user group called `user' by
+% default}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\user@group{user}
+\def\language@group{english}
+\def\system@group{system}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\useshorthands}
+% This is the user level command to tell \LaTeX\ that user level
+% shorthands will be used in the document. It takes one argument,
+% the character that starts a shorthand. First note that this is
+% user level, and then initialize and activate the character for
+% use as a shorthand character (ie, it's active in the
+% preamble). Languages can deactivate shorthands, so a starred
+% version is also provided which activates them always after the
+% language has been switched.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2001/11/11}{When \TeX\ has seen a character
+% its category code is fixed; need to use a `stand-in' for the
+% call of \cs{bbl@activate}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/09/11}{The change from 11/112001 was
+% incomplete}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/05}{Now \cs{bbl@activate} makes sure
+% the catcode is active, so this part is simplified}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/12}{User shorhands can be
+% defined even with shorthands=off}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\useshorthands{%
+ \@ifstar\bbl@usesh@s{\bbl@usesh@x{}}}
+\def\bbl@usesh@s#1{%
+ \bbl@usesh@x
+ {\AddBabelHook{babel-sh-\string#1}{afterextras}{\bbl@activate{#1}}}%
+ {#1}}
+\def\bbl@usesh@x#1#2{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}%
+ {\def\user@group{user}%
+ \initiate@active@char{#2}%
+ #1%
+ \bbl@activate{#2}}%
+ {\bbl@error
+ {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)}
+ {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\%
+ turned off in the package options}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\defineshorthand}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/05}{Added optional argument, to provide
+% a way to (re)define language shorthands}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/25}{Extended for language-dependent
+% user macros, with two new auxiliary macros}
+% Currently we only support two groups of user level shorthands,
+% named internally |user| and |user@<lang>| (language-dependent
+% user shorthands). By default, only the first one is taken into
+% account, but if the former is also used (in the optional argument
+% of |\defineshorthand|) a new level is inserted for it
+% (|user@generic|, done by |\bbl@set@user@generic|); we make also
+% sure |{}| and |\protect| are taken into account in this new top
+% level.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\user@language@group{user@\language@group}
+\def\bbl@set@user@generic#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{user@generic@active#1}%
+ {\bbl@active@def#1\user@language@group{user@active}{user@generic@active}%
+ \bbl@active@def#1\user@group{user@generic@active}{language@active}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@@\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@\string\protect@\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#1\endcsname}}%
+ \@empty}
+\newcommand\defineshorthand[3][user]{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\zap@space#1 \@empty}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{%
+ \if*\expandafter\@car\bbl@tempb\@nil
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{user@\expandafter\@gobble\bbl@tempb}%
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \bbl@set@user@generic{\expandafter\string\@car#2\@nil}\bbl@tempb
+ \fi
+ \declare@shorthand{\bbl@tempb}{#2}{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\languageshorthands}
+% A user level command to change the language from which shorthands
+% are used. Unfortunately, \babel{} currently does not keep track
+% of defined groups, and therefore there is no way to catch a
+% possible change in casing.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\languageshorthands#1{\def\language@group{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\aliasshorthand}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/25}{New command}
+% First the new shorthand needs to be initialized,
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\aliasshorthand#1#2{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}%
+ {\expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax
+ \ifx\document\@notprerr
+ \@notshorthand{#2}%
+ \else
+ \initiate@active@char{#2}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/06}{Instead of letting the new shorthand to
+% the original char, which very often didn't work, we define it
+% directly}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/20}{Make sure both characters (old an
+% new) are active}
+% Then, we define the new shorthand in terms of the original
+% one, but note with |\aliasshorthands{"}{/}| is
+% |\active@prefix /\active@char/|, so we still need to let the
+% lattest to |\active@char"|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\csname active@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname active@char\string#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname
+ \bbl@activate{#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}%
+ {\bbl@error
+ {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)}
+ {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\%
+ turned off in the package options}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@notshorthand}
+% \changes{v3.8d}{2004/11/20}{Error message added}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\@notshorthand#1{%
+ \bbl@error{%
+ The character `\string #1' should be made a shorthand character;\\%
+ add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to
+ the preamble.\\%
+ I will ignore your instruction}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\shorthandon}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command}
+% \begin{macro}{\shorthandoff}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/08}{Added code fo the starred variant
+% of \cs{shorthandoff}}
+% The first level definition of these macros just passes the
+% argument on to |\bbl@switch@sh|, adding |\@nil| at the end to
+% denote the end of the list of characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh\@ne#1\@nnil}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\shorthandoff{%
+ \@ifstar{\bbl@shorthandoff\tw@}{\bbl@shorthandoff\z@}}
+\def\bbl@shorthandoff#1#2{\bbl@switch@sh#1#2\@nnil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@switch@sh}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/07}{Added command}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/02/21}{Code revised}
+% The macro |\bbl@switch@sh| takes the list of characters apart one
+% by one and subsequently switches the category code of the
+% shorthand character according to the first argument of
+% |\bbl@switch@sh|.
+%
+% But before any of this switching takes place we make sure that
+% the character we are dealing with is known as a shorthand
+% character. If it is, a macro such as |\active@char"| should
+% exist.
+%
+% Switching off and on is easy -- we just set the category
+% code to `other' (12) and |\active|. With the starred version, the
+% original catcode and the original definition, saved
+% in |@initiate@active@char|, are restored.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{%
+ \ifx#2\@nnil\else
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#2}%
+ {\bbl@error
+ {I cannot switch `\string#2' on or off--not a shorthand}%
+ {This character is not a shorthand. Maybe you made\\%
+ a typing mistake? I will ignore your instruction}}%
+ {\ifcase#1%
+ \catcode`#212\relax
+ \or
+ \catcode`#2\active
+ \or
+ \csname bbl@oricat@\string#2\endcsname
+ \csname bbl@oridef@\string#2\endcsname
+ \fi}%
+ \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh#1%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Conditional loading of shorthands}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/16}{Added code}
+%
+% Note the value is that at the expansion time, eg, in the preample
+% shorhands are usually deactivated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\babelshorthand{\active@prefix\babelshorthand\bbl@putsh}
+\def\bbl@putsh#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#1}%
+ {\bbl@putsh@i#1\@empty\@nnil}%
+ {\csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname}}
+\def\bbl@putsh@i#1#2\@nnil{%
+ \csname\languagename @sh@\string#1@%
+ \ifx\@empty#2\else\string#2@\fi\endcsname}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil\else
+ \let\bbl@s@initiate@active@char\initiate@active@char
+ \def\initiate@active@char#1{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@initiate@active@char{#1}}{}}
+ \let\bbl@s@switch@sh\bbl@switch@sh
+ \def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{%
+ \ifx#2\@nnil\else
+ \bbl@afterfi
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}{\bbl@s@switch@sh#1{#2}}{\bbl@switch@sh#1}%
+ \fi}
+ \let\bbl@s@activate\bbl@activate
+ \def\bbl@activate#1{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@activate{#1}}{}}
+ \let\bbl@s@deactivate\bbl@deactivate
+ \def\bbl@deactivate#1{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@deactivate{#1}}{}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/27}{Removed redundant system declarations}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@prim@s}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{1999/12/01}{Need to redefine \cs{prim@s} as
+% well as plain \TeX's definition uses \cs{next}}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pr@m@s}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/03/10}{Added macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/29}{\cs{bbl@pr@m@s} rewritten to
+% take into account catcodes for both the quote and the hat}
+% One of the internal macros that are involved in substituting
+% |\prime| for each right quote in mathmode is |\prim@s|. This
+% checks if the next character is a right quote. When the right
+% quote is active, the definition of this macro needs to be adapted
+% to look also for an active right quote; the hat could be active,
+% too.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@prim@s{%
+ \prime\futurelet\@let@token\bbl@pr@m@s}
+\def\bbl@if@primes#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\@let@token
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else\ifx#2\@let@token
+ \bbl@afterelse\expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi\expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi\fi}
+\begingroup
+ \catcode`\^=7 \catcode`\*=\active \lccode`\*=`\^
+ \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=\active \lccode`\"=`\'
+ \lowercase{%
+ \gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{%
+ \bbl@if@primes"'%
+ \pr@@@s
+ {\bbl@if@primes*^\pr@@@t\egroup}}}
+\endgroup
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Usually the |~| is active and expands to \verb*=\penalty\@M\ =.
+% When it is written to the \file{.aux} file it is written
+% expanded. To prevent that and to be able to use the character |~|
+% as a start character for a shorthand, it is redefined here as a
+% one character shorthand on system level. The system declaration
+% is in most cases redundant (when |~| is still a non-break space),
+% and in some cases is inconvenient (if |~| has been redefined);
+% however, for backward compatibility it is maintained (some
+% existing documents may rely on the \babel{} value).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\initiate@active@char{~}
+\declare@shorthand{system}{~}{\leavevmode\nobreak\ }
+\bbl@activate{~}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\OT1dqpos}
+% \begin{macro}{\T1dqpos}
+% The position of the double quote character is different for the
+% OT1 and T1 encodings. It will later be selected using the
+% |\f@encoding| macro. Therefor we define two macros here to store
+% the position of the character in these encodings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname OT1dqpos\endcsname{127}
+\expandafter\def\csname T1dqpos\endcsname{4}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the macro |\f@encoding| is undefined (as it is in plain
+% \TeX) we define it here to expand to \texttt{OT1}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\f@encoding\@undefined
+ \def\f@encoding{OT1}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Language attributes}
+%
+% Language attributes provide a means to give the user control over
+% which features of the language definition files he wants to
+% enable.
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1998/07/02}{Added support for language
+% attributes}
+% \begin{macro}{\languageattribute}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/07}{Use \cs{@expandtwoargs} with \cs{in@}}
+% The macro |\languageattribute| checks whether its arguments are
+% valid and then activates the selected language attribute.
+% First check whether the language is known, and then process each
+% attribute in the list.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\languageattribute[2]{%
+ \def\bbl@tempc{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempc
+ \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempc{%
+ \@for\bbl@attr:=#2\do{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We want to make sure that each attribute is selected only once;
+% therefor we store the already selected attributes in
+% |\bbl@known@attribs|. When that control sequence is not yet
+% defined this attribute is certainly not selected before.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined
+ \in@false
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we need to see if the attribute occurs in the list of
+% already selected attributes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the attribute was in the list we issue a warning; this might
+% not be the users intention.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifin@
+ \bbl@warning{%
+ You have more than once selected the attribute '\bbl@attr'\\%
+ for language #1}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we end up here the attribute is not selected before. So, we
+% add it to the list of selected attributes and execute the
+% associated \TeX-code.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{%
+ \noexpand\bbl@add@list
+ \noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}}%
+ \bbl@tempa
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@ifknown@ttrib\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}\bbl@attributes%
+ {\csname\bbl@tempc @attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}%
+ {\@attrerr{\bbl@tempc}{\bbl@attr}}%
+ \fi}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\languageattribute
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The error text to be issued when an unknown attribute is
+% selected.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{%
+ \bbl@error
+ {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}%
+ {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@declare@ttribute}
+% This command adds the new language/attribute combination to the
+% list of known attributes.
+%
+% Then it defines a control sequence to be executed when the
+% attribute is used in a document. The result of this should be
+% that the macro |\extras...| for the current language is extended,
+% otherwise the attribute will not work as its code is removed from
+% memory at |\begin{document}|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@declare@ttribute#1#2#3{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#2,}{,\BabelModifiers,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \AfterBabelLanguage{#1}{\languageattribute{#1}{#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \bbl@add@list\bbl@attributes{#1-#2}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifattributeset}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/12}{macro added}
+% This internal macro has 4 arguments. It can be used to interpret
+% \TeX\ code based on whether a certain attribute was set. This
+% command should appear inside the argument to |\AtBeginDocument|
+% because the attributes are set in the document preamble,
+% \emph{after} \babel\ is loaded.
+%
+% The first argument is the language, the second argument the
+% attribute being checked, and the third and fourth arguments are
+% the true and false clauses.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@ifattributeset#1#2#3#4{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we need to find out if any attributes were set; if not
+% we're done.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined
+ \in@false
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The we need to check the list of known attributes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#1-#2,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When we're this far |\ifin@| has a value indicating if the
+% attribute in question was set or not. Just to be safe the code to
+% be executed is `thrown over the |\fi|'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifin@
+ \bbl@afterelse#3%
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi#4%
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@add@list}
+% This internal macro adds its second argument to a comma
+% separated list in its first argument. When the list is not
+% defined yet (or empty), it will be initiated
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@add@list#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\@undefined
+ \def#1{#2}%
+ \else
+ \ifx#1\@empty
+ \def#1{#2}%
+ \else
+ \edef#1{#1,#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@ifknown@ttrib}
+% An internal macro to check whether a given language/attribute is
+% known. The macro takes 4 arguments, the language/attribute, the
+% attribute list, the \TeX-code to be executed when the attribute
+% is known and the \TeX-code to be executed otherwise.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@ifknown@ttrib#1#2{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We first assume the attribute is unknown.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\bbl@tempa\@secondoftwo
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we loop over the list of known attributes, trying to find a
+% match.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@for\bbl@tempb:=#2\do{%
+ \expandafter\in@\expandafter{\expandafter,\bbl@tempb,}{,#1,}%
+ \ifin@
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When a match is found the definition of |\bbl@tempa| is changed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \fi}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally we execute |\bbl@tempa|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@tempa
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@clear@ttribs}
+% This macro removes all the attribute code from \LaTeX's memory at
+% |\begin{document}| time (if any is present).
+% \changes{babel~3.7e}{1999/09/24}{When \cs{bbl@attributes} is
+% undefined this should be a no-op}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@clear@ttribs{%
+ \ifx\bbl@attributes\@undefined\else
+ \@for\bbl@tempa:=\bbl@attributes\do{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@clear@ttrib\bbl@tempa.
+ }%
+ \let\bbl@attributes\@undefined
+ \fi
+ }
+\def\bbl@clear@ttrib#1-#2.{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname\@undefined}
+\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@clear@ttribs}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Support for saving macro definitions}
+%
+% To save the meaning of control sequences using |\babel@save|, we
+% use temporary control sequences. To save hash table entries for
+% these control sequences, we don't use the name of the control
+% sequence to be saved to construct the temporary name. Instead we
+% simply use the value of a counter, which is reset to zero each time
+% we begin to save new values. This works well because we release
+% the saved meanings before we begin to save a new set of control
+% sequence meanings (see |\selectlanguage| and |\originalTeX|). Note
+% undefined macros are not undefined any more when saved -- they are
+% |\relax|'ed.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\babel@savecnt}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
+% \begin{macro}{\babel@beginsave}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
+% The initialization of a new save cycle: reset the counter to
+% zero.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\babel@beginsave{\babel@savecnt\z@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Before it's forgotten, allocate the counter and initialize all.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\babel@savecnt
+\babel@beginsave
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\babel@save}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
+% The macro |\babel@save|\meta{csname} saves the current meaning of
+% the control sequence \meta{csname} to
+% |\originalTeX|\footnote{\cs{originalTeX} has to be
+% expandable, i.\,e.\ you shouldn't let it to \cs{relax}.}.
+% To do this, we let the current meaning to a temporary control
+% sequence, the restore commands are appended to |\originalTeX| and
+% the counter is incremented.
+% \changes{babel~3.2c}{1992/03/17}{missing backslash led to errors
+% when executing \cs{originalTeX}}
+% \changes{babel~3.2d}{1992/07/02}{saving in \cs{babel@i} and
+% restoring from \cs{@babel@i} doesn't work very well...}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\babel@save#1{%
+ \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname#1\relax
+ \begingroup
+ \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX\let#1=}%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \expandafter\noexpand
+ \csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname\relax}}%
+ \x
+ \advance\babel@savecnt\@ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\babel@savevariable}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/10}{Added macro}
+% The macro |\babel@savevariable|\meta{variable} saves the value of
+% the variable. \meta{variable} can be anything allowed after the
+% |\the| primitive.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\babel@savevariable#1{\begingroup
+ \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX #1=}%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \the#1\relax}}%
+ \x}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@frenchspacing}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
+% Some languages need to have |\frenchspacing| in effect. Others
+% don't want that. The command |\bbl@frenchspacing| switches it on
+% when it isn't already in effect and |\bbl@nonfrenchspacing|
+% switches it off if necessary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@frenchspacing{%
+ \ifnum\the\sfcode`\.=\@m
+ \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax
+ \else
+ \frenchspacing
+ \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing
+ \fi}
+\let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\nonfrenchspacing
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Support for extending macros}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addto}
+% For each language four control sequences have to be defined that
+% control the language-specific definitions. To be able to add
+% something to these macro once they have been defined the macro
+% |\addto| is introduced. It takes two arguments, a \meta{control
+% sequence} and \TeX-code to be added to the \meta{control
+% sequence}.
+%
+% If the \meta{control sequence} has not been defined before it is
+% defined now. The control sequence could also expand to |\relax|,
+% in which case a circular definition results. The net result is a
+% stack overflow. Otherwise the replacement text for the
+% \meta{control sequence} is expanded and stored in a token
+% register, together with the \TeX-code to be added. Finally the
+% \meta{control sequence} is \emph{re}defined, using the contents
+% of the token register.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Added macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.4}{1994/02/04}{Changed to use toks register}
+% \changes{babel~3.6b}{1996/12/30}{Also check if control sequence
+% expands to \cs{relax}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\addto#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\@undefined
+ \def#1{#2}%
+ \else
+ \ifx#1\relax
+ \def#1{#2}%
+ \else
+ {\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}%
+ \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Hyphens}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\babelhyphenation}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/28}{Macro added}
+%
+% This macro saves hyphenation exceptions. Two macros are used to
+% store them: |\bbl@hyphenation@| for the global ones and
+% |\bbl@hyphenation<lang>| for language ones. See |\bbl@patterns|
+% above for further details. We make sure there is a space between
+% words when multiple commands are used.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\babelhyphenation
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \newcommand\babelhyphenation[2][\@empty]{%
+ \ifx\bbl@hyphenation@\relax
+ \let\bbl@hyphenation@\@empty
+ \fi
+ \ifx\bbl@hyphlist\@empty\else
+ \bbl@warning{%
+ You must not intermingle \string\selectlanguage\space and\\%
+ \string\babelhyphenation\space or some exception will not\\%
+ be taken into account. Reported}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#1%
+ \protected@edef\bbl@hyphenation@{\bbl@hyphenation@\space#2}%
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\zap@space#1 \@empty}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb{%
+ \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempa
+ \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempa{%
+ \bbl@csarg\protected@edef{hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}%
+ \@empty
+ {\csname bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa\endcsname\space}%
+ #2}}}%
+ \fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@allowhyphens}
+% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language
+% definition files}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \cs{allowhyphens} a no-op for
+% T1 fontencoding}
+% \changes{babel-3.9a}{2012/07/28}{Replaced many \cs{allowhyphens} by
+% \cs{bbl@allowhyphen}. They were either no-op or executed always.}
+% This macro makes hyphenation possible. Basically its definition
+% is nothing more than |\nobreak| |\hskip| \texttt{0pt plus
+% 0pt}\footnote{\TeX\ begins and ends a word for hyphenation at a
+% glue node. The penalty prevents a linebreak at this glue node.}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@allowhyphens{\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
+\def\bbl@t@one{T1}
+\def\allowhyphens{\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{babel-3.9a}{2012/08/27}{Added \cs{babelhyphen} and related
+% macros}
+% \begin{macro}{\babelhyphen}
+% Macros to insert common hyphens. Note the space before |@| in
+% |\babelhyphen|. Instead of protecting it with
+% |\DeclareRobustCommand|, which could insert a |\relax|, we use
+% the same procedure as shorthands.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\babelnullhyphen{\char\hyphenchar\font}
+\def\babelhyphen{\active@prefix\babelhyphen\bbl@hyphen}
+\def\bbl@hyphen{%
+ \@ifstar{\bbl@hyphen@i @}{\bbl@hyphen@i\@empty}}
+\def\bbl@hyphen@i#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty}%
+ {\csname bbl@#1usehyphen\endcsname{\discretionary{#2}{}{#2}}}%
+ {\csname bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty\endcsname}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following two commands are used to wrap the ``hyphen'' and
+% set the behaviour of the rest of the word -- the version with a
+% single |@| is used when further hyphenation is allowed, while
+% that with |@@| if no more hyphen are allowed. In both cases, if
+% the hyphen is preceded by a positive space, breaking after the
+% hyphen is disallowed.
+%
+% There should not be a discretionaty after a hyphen at the
+% beginning of a word, so it is prevented if preceded by a
+% skip. Unfortunately, this does handle cases like ``(-suffix)''.
+% |\nobreak| is always preceded by |\leavevmode|, in case the
+% shorthand starts a paragraph.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@usehyphen#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\nobreak\else\nobreak#1\fi
+ \hskip\z@skip}
+\def\bbl@@usehyphen#1{%
+ \leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\else#1\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following macro inserts the hyphen char.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@hyphenchar{%
+ \ifnum\hyphenchar\font=\m@ne
+ \babelnullhyphen
+ \else
+ \char\hyphenchar\font
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, we define the hyphen ``types''. Their names will not
+% change, so you may use them in |ldf|'s.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@hy@soft{\bbl@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}}
+\def\bbl@hy@@soft{\bbl@@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}}
+\def\bbl@hy@hard{\bbl@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar}
+\def\bbl@hy@@hard{\bbl@@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar}
+\def\bbl@hy@nobreak{\bbl@usehyphen{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}\nobreak}}
+\def\bbl@hy@@nobreak{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}}
+\def\bbl@hy@repeat{%
+ \bbl@usehyphen{%
+ \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}%
+ \nobreak}}
+\def\bbl@hy@@repeat{%
+ \bbl@@usehyphen{%
+ \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}}}
+\def\bbl@hy@empty{\hskip\z@skip}
+\def\bbl@hy@@empty{\discretionary{}{}{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@disc}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/24}{Macro moved from language
+% definition files}
+% For some languages the macro |\bbl@disc| is used to ease the
+% insertion of discretionaries for letters that behave `abnormally'
+% at a breakpoint.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@disc#1#2{\nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\bbl@allowhyphens}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Macros common to a number of languages}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@low@box}
+% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language
+% definition files}
+% The following macro is used to lower quotes to the same level as
+% the comma. It prepares its argument in box register~0.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}%
+ \dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@%
+ \setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\save@sf@q}
+% \changes{babel~3.2b}{1992/02/16}{Moved macro from language
+% definition files}
+% The macro |\save@sf@q| is used to save and reset the current
+% space factor.
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/19}{PR3119, don't start a paragraph in
+% a local group}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\save@sf@q#1{\leavevmode
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}#1\@SF
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/14}{Repaired a typo (itlaic, PR1652)}
+%
+% \subsection{Making glyphs available}
+%
+% The file \file{\filename}\footnote{The file described in this
+% section has version number \fileversion, and was last revised on
+% \filedate.} makes a number of glyphs available that either do not
+% exist in the \texttt{OT1} encoding and have to be `faked', or
+% that are not accessible through \file{T1enc.def}.
+%
+% \subsection{Quotation marks}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\quotedblbase}
+% In the \texttt{T1} encoding the opening double quote at the
+% baseline is available as a separate character, accessible via
+% |\quotedblbase|. In the \texttt{OT1} encoding it is not
+% available, therefor we make it available by lowering the normal
+% open quote character to the baseline.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\quotedblbase}{OT1}{%
+ \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquotedblright\/}%
+ \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
+% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotedblbase}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotedblbase}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\quotesinglbase}
+% We also need the single quote character at the baseline.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\quotesinglbase}{OT1}{%
+ \save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquoteright\/}%
+ \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
+% \texttt{T1} is used this glyph can still be typeset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotesinglbase}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotesinglbase}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\guillemotleft}
+% \begin{macro}{\guillemotright}
+% The guillemet characters are not available in \texttt{OT1}
+% encoding. They are faked.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \ll
+ \else
+ \save@sf@q{\nobreak
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
+ \fi}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%
+ \ifmmode
+ \gg
+ \else
+ \save@sf@q{\nobreak
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
+% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotleft}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotleft}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotright}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotright}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglleft}
+% \begin{macro}{\guilsinglright}
+% The single guillemets are not available in \texttt{OT1}
+% encoding. They are faked.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglleft}{OT1}{%
+ \ifmmode
+ <%
+ \else
+ \save@sf@q{\nobreak
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
+ \fi}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{OT1}{%
+ \ifmmode
+ >%
+ \else
+ \save@sf@q{\nobreak
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
+% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglleft}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglleft}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglright}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglright}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% \subsection{Letters}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ij}
+% \begin{macro}{\IJ}
+% The dutch language uses the letter `ij'. It is available in
+% \texttt{T1} encoded fonts, but not in the \texttt{OT1} encoded
+% fonts. Therefor we fake it for the \texttt{OT1} encoding.
+% \changes{dutch-3.7a}{1995/02/04}{Changed the kerning in the faked ij
+% to match the dc-version of it}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/28}{Removed the first \cs{allowhyphens}.
+% Moved the second one just after the kern.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{OT1}{%
+ i\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens j}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{OT1}{%
+ I\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens J}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{T1}{\char188}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{T1}{\char156}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
+% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\ij}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\ij}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\IJ}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\IJ}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\dj}
+% \begin{macro}{\DJ}
+% The croatian language needs the letters |\dj| and |\DJ|; they are
+% available in the \texttt{T1} encoding, but not in the
+% \texttt{OT1} encoding by default.
+%
+% Some code to construct these glyphs for the \texttt{OT1} encoding
+% was made available to me by Stipcevic Mario,
+% (\texttt{stipcevic@olimp.irb.hr}).
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/03/28}{New definition of \cs{dj}, see PR
+% 2058}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\crrtic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.3em}
+\def\crttic@{\hrule height0.1ex width0.33em}
+\def\ddj@{%
+ \setbox0\hbox{d}\dimen@=\ht0
+ \advance\dimen@1ex
+ \dimen@.45\dimen@
+ \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@
+ \advance\dimen@ii.5ex
+ \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crrtic@}}}}
+\def\DDJ@{%
+ \setbox0\hbox{D}\dimen@=.55\ht0
+ \dimen@ii\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen\@ne\font\dimen@
+ \advance\dimen@ii.15ex % correction for the dash position
+ \advance\dimen@ii-.15\fontdimen7\font % correction for cmtt font
+ \dimen\thr@@\expandafter\rem@pt\the\fontdimen7\font\dimen@
+ \leavevmode\rlap{\raise\dimen@\hbox{\kern\dimen@ii\vbox{\crttic@}}}}
+%
+\DeclareTextCommand{\dj}{OT1}{\ddj@ d}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\DJ}{OT1}{\DDJ@ D}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure that when an encoding other than \texttt{OT1} or
+% \texttt{T1} is used these glyphs can still be typeset.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\dj}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\dj}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\DJ}{%
+ \UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\DJ}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\SS}
+% For the \texttt{T1} encoding |\SS| is defined and selects a
+% specific glyph from the font, but for other encodings it is not
+% available. Therefor we make it available here.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareTextCommand{\SS}{OT1}{SS}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\SS}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\SS}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Shorthands for quotation marks}
+%
+% Shorthands are provided for a number of different quotation
+% marks, which make them usable both outside and inside mathmode.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glq}
+% \begin{macro}{\grq}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grq}
+% dependent on the font encoding}
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{glq} fontencoding
+% dependent as well}
+% The `german' single quotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{OT1}{%
+ \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\glq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\quotesinglbase}{\mbox{\quotesinglbase}}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The definition of |\grq| depends on the fontencoding. With
+% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\grq}{OT1}{%
+ \save@sf@q{\kern-.0125em%
+ \textormath{\textquoteleft}{\mbox{\textquoteleft}}%
+ \kern.07em\relax}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\glqq}
+% \begin{macro}{\grqq}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/04/25}{Make the definition of \cs{grqq}
+% dependent on the font encoding}
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{grqq} fontencoding
+% dependent as well}
+% The `german' double quotes.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{OT1}{%
+ \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\glqq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\glqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\glqq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The definition of |\grqq| depends on the % fontencoding. With
+% \texttt{T1} encoding no extra kerning is needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\grqq}{OT1}{%
+ \save@sf@q{\kern-.07em%
+ \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}%
+ \kern.07em\relax}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\grqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\grqq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flq}
+% \begin{macro}{\frq}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of
+% \cs{quilsingl...}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these
+% definitions}
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flq} and \cs{frq}
+% fontencoding dependent}
+% The `french' single guillemets.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{OT1}{%
+ \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\flq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\guilsinglleft}{\mbox{\guilsinglleft}}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{OT1}{%
+ \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\frq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\guilsinglright}{\mbox{\guilsinglright}}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\flqq}
+% \begin{macro}{\frqq}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/08/07}{corrected spelling of
+% \cs{quillemot...}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/09/05}{now use \cs{textormath} in these
+% definitions}
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/05/02}{Made \cs{flqq} and \cs{frqq}
+% fontencoding dependent}
+% The `french' double guillemets.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{OT1}{%
+ \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\flqq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\flqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\flqq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{OT1}{%
+ \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
+\ProvideTextCommand{\frqq}{T1}{%
+ \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
+\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\frqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\frqq}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Umlauts and trema's}
+%
+% The command |\"| needs to have a different effect for different
+% languages. For German for instance, the `umlaut' should be
+% positioned lower than the default position for placing it over
+% the letters a, o, u, A, O and U. When placed over an e, i, E or I
+% it can retain its normal position. For Dutch the same glyph is
+% always placed in the lower position.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\umlauthigh}
+% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to
+% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.}
+% \begin{macro}{\umlautlow}
+% To be able to provide both positions of |\"| we provide two
+% commands to switch the positioning, the default will be
+% |\umlauthigh| (the normal positioning).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\umlauthigh{%
+ \def\bbl@umlauta##1{\leavevmode\bgroup%
+ \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname
+ ##1\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}%
+ \let\bbl@umlaute\bbl@umlauta}
+\def\umlautlow{%
+ \def\bbl@umlauta{\protect\lower@umlaut}}
+\def\umlautelow{%
+ \def\bbl@umlaute{\protect\lower@umlaut}}
+\umlauthigh
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\lower@umlaut}
+% The command |\lower@umlaut| is used to position the |\"| closer
+% the the letter.
+%
+% We want the umlaut character lowered, nearer to the letter. To do
+% this we need an extra \meta{dimen} register.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifx\csname U@D\endcsname\relax
+ \csname newdimen\endcsname\U@D
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The following code fools \TeX's \texttt{make\_accent} procedure
+% about the current x-height of the font to force another placement
+% of the umlaut character.
+% First we have to save the current x-height of the font, because
+% we'll change this font dimension and this is always done
+% globally.
+% \changes{v3.8a}{2004/02/19}{Use \cs{leavevmode}\cs{bgroup} to
+% prevent problems when this command occurs in vertical mode.}
+%
+% Then we compute the new x-height in such a way that the umlaut
+% character is lowered to the base character. The value of
+% \texttt{.45ex} depends on the \MF\ parameters with which the
+% fonts were built. (Just try out, which value will look best.)
+% If the new x-height is too low, it is not changed.
+% Finally we call the |\accent| primitive, reset the old x-height
+% and insert the base character in the argument.
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/04/02}{Added a \cs{allowhyphens}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/06/25}{removed \cs{allowhyphens}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\lower@umlaut#1{%
+ \leavevmode\bgroup
+ \U@D 1ex%
+ {\setbox\z@\hbox{%
+ \expandafter\char\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname}%
+ \dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@
+ \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}%
+ \expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname
+ \fontdimen5\font\U@D #1%
+ \egroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% For all vowels we declare |\"| to be a composite command which
+% uses |\bbl@umlauta| or |\bbl@umlaute| to position the umlaut
+% character. We need to be sure that these definitions override the
+% ones that are provided when the package \pkg{fontenc} with
+% option \Lopt{OT1} is used. Therefor these declarations are
+% postponed until the beginning of the document. Note these
+% definitions only apply to some languages, but
+% babel sets them for \textit{all} languages -- you may want to
+% redefine |\bbl@umlauta| and/or |\bbl@umlaute| for a language
+% in the corresponding |ldf| (using the babel switching mechanism,
+% of course).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{a}{\bbl@umlauta{a}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{e}{\bbl@umlaute{e}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{\i}{\bbl@umlaute{\i}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{o}{\bbl@umlauta{o}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{u}{\bbl@umlauta{u}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{A}{\bbl@umlauta{A}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{E}{\bbl@umlaute{E}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{I}{\bbl@umlaute{I}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{O}{\bbl@umlauta{O}}%
+ \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{U}{\bbl@umlauta{U}}%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{Multiencoding strings}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/05}{Added tentative code for string
+% declarations}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/24}{Added hooks}
+%
+% The aim following commands is to provide a commom interface for
+% strings in several encodings. They also contains several hooks which
+% can be ued by \luatex{} and \xetex.
+%
+% This is the main command. With the first use it is redefined to
+% omit the basic setup in subsequent blocks. We make sure strings
+% contain actual letters in the range 128-255, not active characters.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@recatcode#1{%
+ \@tempcnta="7F
+ \def\bbl@tempa{%
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta>"FF\else
+ \catcode\@tempcnta=#1\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa
+ \fi}%
+ \bbl@tempa}
+\@onlypreamble\StartBabelCommands
+\def\StartBabelCommands{%
+ \begingroup
+ \bbl@recatcode{11}%
+ \def\bbl@scuse{%
+ \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil\def\bbl@opt@strings{generic}\fi}%
+ \def\UseStrings{\bbl@scuse\aftergroup\bbl@scuse}%
+ \def\SetStringLoop{\afterassignment\bbl@sclp\def\bbl@templ####1}%
+ \def\bbl@sclp##1{%
+ \count@\z@ % dangerous if a hook is used
+ \@for\bbl@tempm:=##1\do{%
+ \advance\count@\@ne
+ \toks@\expandafter{\bbl@tempm}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempn{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand
+ \csname\bbl@templ{\romannumeral\count@}\endcsname%
+ {\the\toks@}}%
+ \expandafter\SetString\bbl@tempn}}%
+ \def\SetCase{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@tolower}{%
+ \g@addto@macro\@uclclist{%
+ \reserved@b{\reserved@b\@gobble}% stops processing the list
+ \@ifundefined{\languagename @bbl@uclc}% and resumes it
+ {\reserved@a}%
+ {\csname\languagename @bbl@uclc\endcsname}%
+ {\bbl@tolower\@empty}{\bbl@toupper\@empty}}%
+ \gdef\bbl@tolower{\csname\languagename @bbl@lc\endcsname}%
+ \gdef\bbl@toupper{\csname\languagename @bbl@uc\endcsname}}{}%
+ \let\SetCase\bbl@setcase
+ \SetCase}%
+ \def\bbl@provstring##1{%
+ \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string##1}{\gdef##1}\@gobble}%
+ \def\bbl@dftstring##1##2{%
+ \@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1?{##2}%
+ \global\let##1##1}%
+ \def\bbl@encstring##1##2{%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempc\bbl@sc@fontenc{%
+ \@ifundefined{T@\bbl@tempc}%
+ \@empty
+ {\@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1\bbl@tempc{##2}%
+ \global\let##1##1}}}%
+ \let\StartBabelCommands\bbl@startcmds
+ \begingroup
+ \let\bbl@screset\@nnil % local flag - disable 1st stopcommands
+ \StartBabelCommands}
+\def\bbl@startcmds#1#2{%
+ \ifx\bbl@screset\@nnil\else
+ \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\bbl@L{\zap@space#1 \@empty}%
+ \edef\bbl@G{\zap@space#2 \@empty}%
+ \let\bbl@sc@charset\space
+ \let\bbl@sc@fontenc\space
+ \let\SetString\@gobbletwo
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\@gobbletwo
+ \bbl@startcmds@i}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Parse the encoding info to get the label, input, and font parts.
+%
+% Select the behaviour of |\SetString|. Thre are two main cases:
+% |*| blocks, which are always taken into account, and labelled
+% blocks, which are not always taken into account. With |*| and
+% |strings| set to |encoded| or |generic|, strings are defined
+% always; otherwise, they are set only if they are still undefined
+% (ie, fallback values). With labelled blocks and
+% |strings=encoded|, define the strings, but with another value,
+% define strings only if the current label or font encoding is the
+% value of |strings|; otherwise (ie, no |strings| or a block whose
+% label is not in |strings=|) do nothing.
+%
+% We presume the current block is not loaded, and therefore set
+% (above) a couple of default values to gobble the arguments. Then,
+% these macros are redefined if necessary according to several
+% parameters.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\bbl@startcmds@i[1][\@empty]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1%
+ \def\bbl@sc@label{generic}%
+ \bbl@scswitch{%
+ \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring
+ \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring
+ \else
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring
+ \fi\fi}%
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \bbl@usehooks{defaultcommands}{}%
+ \else
+ \def\bbl@tempa##1=##2\@nil{%
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{sc@\zap@space##1 \@empty}{##2 }}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempb{label=#1}{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\@nil}%
+ \def\bbl@tempa##1 ##2{%
+ ##1%
+ \ifx\@empty##2\else\ifx,##1,\else,\fi\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempa##2\fi}%
+ \edef\bbl@sc@fontenc{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@sc@fontenc\@empty}%
+ \edef\bbl@sc@label{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@label\@empty}%
+ \edef\bbl@sc@charset{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@charset\@empty}%
+ \bbl@scswitch{%
+ \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring
+ \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring
+ \else
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \in@{,\bbl@opt@strings,}{,\bbl@sc@label,\bbl@sc@fontenc,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring
+ \fi\fi\fi}%
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \bbl@usehooks{encodedcommands}{{\bbl@sc@charset}{\bbl@sc@fontenc}}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% There are two versions of |\bbl@scswitch|. The first version
+% is used when |ldf|s are read, and with it blocks not intented for
+% the current language (as set in |\CurrentOption|) are ignored; it
+% also makes sure |\|\m{group}\m{language} is reset, but only once
+% (|\bbl@screset| is used to keep track of this). The second version
+% is used in the preamble and packages loaded after \babel{} and
+% defines strings for all known languages.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@scswitch#1{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{,\bbl@L,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \let\bbl@L\CurrentOption
+ #1\relax
+ \bbl@scswitch@i
+ \ifx\bbl@G\@empty\else
+ \ifx\SetString\@gobbletwo\else
+ \edef\bbl@GL{\bbl@G\bbl@L}%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@GL,}{,\bbl@screset,}%
+ \ifin@\else
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname\bbl@GL\endcsname\@undefined
+ \xdef\bbl@screset{\bbl@screset,\bbl@GL}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\def\bbl@scswitch@i{%
+ \ifx\bbl@G\@empty
+ \def\SetString##1##2{%
+ \bbl@error{Missing group for string \string##1}%
+ {You must assign strings to some category, typically\\%
+ captions or extras, but you set none}}%
+ \fi}
+\AtEndOfPackage{\def\bbl@scswitch#1{#1\relax\bbl@scswitch@i}}
+\@onlypreamble\EndBabelCommands
+\def\EndBabelCommands{%
+ \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% First save the ``switcher''. Create it if undefined. Strings are
+% defined only if undefined (ie, like |\providescommmand|). With
+% the event |stringprocess| you can preprocess the string by
+% manipulating the value of |\BabelString|. If there are several
+% hooks assigned to this event, preprocessing is done in the same
+% order as defined. Finally, the string is set.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@scset#1#2{\def#1{#2}}
+\def\bbl@setstring#1#2{%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{%
+ \edef\bbl@LC{\bbl@tempa\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{\bbl@LC}% eg, \germanchaptername
+ {\global\expandafter
+ \bbl@add\csname\bbl@G\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter
+ {\expandafter\bbl@scset\expandafter#1\csname\bbl@LC\endcsname}}%
+ {}%
+ \def\BabelString{#2}%
+ \bbl@usehooks{stringprocess}{}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@LC\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\BabelString}}}
+\newcommand\bbl@setcase[3][]{%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uclc\endcsname{\reserved@a#1}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uc\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@lc\endcsname{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Hooks}
+%
+% Note they are loaded in babel.def. switch.def only provides a
+% ``hook'' for hooks (with a default value which is a no-op,
+% below). Admittedly, the current implementation is a somewhat
+% simplistic and does vety little to catch errors, but it is intended
+% for developpers, after all. |\bbl@usehooks| is the commands used by
+% babel to execute hooks defined for an event.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\AddBabelHook#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hk@#1}{\EnableBabelHook{#1}}{}%
+ \def\bbl@tempa##1,#2=##2,##3\@empty{\def\bbl@tempb{##2}}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@evargs,#2=,\@empty
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@ev@#1@#2}%
+ {\bbl@csarg\bbl@add{ev@#2}{\bbl@elt{#1}}%
+ \bbl@csarg\newcommand}%
+ {\bbl@csarg\renewcommand}%
+ {ev@#1@#2}[\bbl@tempb]}
+\def\EnableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@firstofone}
+\def\DisableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@gobble}
+\def\bbl@usehooks#1#2{%
+ \def\bbl@elt##1{%
+ \@nameuse{bbl@hk@##1}{\@nameuse{bbl@ev@##1@#1}#2}}%
+ \@nameuse{bbl@ev@#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% To ensure forward compatibility, arguments in hooks are set
+% implicitly. So, if a further argument is added in the future,
+% there is no need to change the existing code. Note events
+% intended for \textsf{hyphen.cfg} are also loaded (just in
+% case you need them).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@evargs{,% don't delete the comma
+ everylanguage=1,loadkernel=1,loadpatterns=1,loadexceptions=1,%
+ adddialect=2,patterns=2,defaultcommands=0,encodedcommands=2,write=0,%
+ beforeextras=0,afterextras=0,stopcommands=0,stringprocess=0,%
+ hyphenation=2}
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+ \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else
+ \input xebabel.def
+ \fi
+\else
+ \input luababel.def
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{The redefinition of the style commands}
+%
+% The rest of the code in this file can only be processed by
+% \LaTeX, so we check the current format. If it is plain \TeX,
+% processing should stop here. But, because of the need to limit
+% the scope of the definition of |\format|, a macro that is used
+% locally in the following |\if|~statement, this comparison is done
+% inside a group. To prevent \TeX\ from complaining about an
+% unclosed group, the processing of the command |\endinput| is
+% deferred until after the group is closed. This is accomplished by
+% the command |\aftergroup|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+{\def\format{lplain}
+\ifx\fmtname\format
+\else
+ \def\format{LaTeX2e}
+ \ifx\fmtname\format
+ \else
+ \aftergroup\endinput
+ \fi
+\fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Cross referencing macros}
+%
+% The \LaTeX\ book states:
+% \begin{quote}
+% The \emph{key} argument is any sequence of letters, digits, and
+% punctuation symbols; upper- and lowercase letters are regarded as
+% different.
+% \end{quote}
+% When the above quote should still be true when a document is
+% typeset in a language that has active characters, special care
+% has to be taken of the category codes of these characters when
+% they appear in an argument of the cross referencing macros.
+%
+% When a cross referencing command processes its argument, all
+% tokens in this argument should be character tokens with category
+% `letter' or `other'.
+%
+% The only way to accomplish this in most cases is to use the trick
+% described in the \TeX book~\cite{DEK} (Appendix~D, page~382).
+% The primitive |\meaning| applied to a token expands to the
+% current meaning of this token. For example, `|\meaning\A|' with
+% |\A| defined as `|\def\A#1{\B}|' expands to the characters
+% `|macro:#1->\B|' with all category codes set to `other' or
+% `space'.
+% \begin{macro}{\newlabel}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
+% The macro |\label| writes a line with a |\newlabel| command
+% into the |.aux| file to define labels.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%\bbl@redefine\newlabel#1#2{%
+% \@safe@activestrue\org@newlabel{#1}{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@newl@bel}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{Now redefine \cs{@newl@bel} instead
+% of \cs{@lbibitem} and \cs{newlabel}}
+% We need to change the definition of the \LaTeX-internal macro
+% |\@newl@bel|. This is needed because we need to make sure that
+% shorthand characters expand to their non-active version.
+%
+% First we open a new group to keep the changed setting of
+% |\protect| local and then we set the |@safe@actives| switch to
+% true to make sure that any shorthand that appears in any of the
+% arguments immediately expands to its non-active self.
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1997/12/19}{Call \cs{@safe@activestrue}
+% directly}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@safe\@empty\else
+ \def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{%
+ {\@safe@activestrue
+ \@ifundefined{#1@#2}%
+ \relax
+ {\gdef\@multiplelabels{%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}}%
+ \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@testdef}
+% An internal \LaTeX\ macro used to test if the labels that have
+% been written on the |.aux| file have changed. It is called by
+% the |\enddocument| macro. This macro needs to be completely
+% rewritten, using |\meaning|. The reason for this is that in some
+% cases the expansion of |\#1@#2| contains the same characters as
+% the |#3|; but the character codes differ. Therefor \LaTeX\ keeps
+% reporting that the labels may have changed.
+% \changes{babel~3.4g}{1994/08/30}{Moved the \cs{def} inside the
+% macrocode environment}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/09}{Complete rewrite of this macro as
+% the same character ended up with different category codes in the
+% labels that are being compared. Now use \cs{meaning}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/16}{Use \cs{strip@prefix} only on
+% \cs{bbl@tempa} when it is not \cs{relax}}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/28}{Make sure that shorthands don't get
+% expanded at the wrong moment.}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/01}{\cs{@safe@activesfalse} is now
+% part of the label definition}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/13}{Removed \cs{@safe@activesfalse}
+% from the label definition}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{%
+ \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@#2\endcsname\reserved@a
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now that we made sure that |\@testdef| still has the same
+% definition we can rewrite it. First we make the shorthands
+% `safe'.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@testdef#1#2#3{%
+ \@safe@activestrue
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we use |\bbl@tempa| as an `alias' for the macro that
+% contains the label which is being checked.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we define |\bbl@tempb| just as |\@newl@bel| does it.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bbl@tempb{#3}%
+ \@safe@activesfalse
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When the label is defined we replace the definition of
+% |\bbl@tempa| by its meaning.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We do the same for |\bbl@tempb|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% If the label didn't change, |\bbl@tempa| and |\bbl@tempb| should
+% be identical macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \fi}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ref}
+% \begin{macro}{\pageref}
+% The same holds for the macro |\ref| that references a label
+% and |\pageref| to reference a page. So we redefine |\ref| and
+% |\pageref|. While we change these macros, we make them robust as
+% well (if they weren't already) to prevent problems if they should
+% become expanded at the wrong moment.
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/07}{Made \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref}
+% robust (PR1353)}
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/07/04}{use a different control sequence
+% while making \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} robust}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/06}{redefine \cs*{ref } if it exists
+% instead of \cs{ref}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefinerobust}}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/19}{redefine \cs{\@setref} instead of
+% \cs{ref} and \cs{pageref} in \LaTeXe.}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/01/21}{Reverse the previous change as it
+% inhibits the use of active characters in labels}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe
+\ifin@
+ \bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+ \bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+\else
+ \let\org@ref\ref
+ \let\org@pageref\pageref
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@citex}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
+% The macro used to cite from a bibliography, |\cite|, uses an
+% internal macro, |\@citex|.
+% It is this internal macro that picks up the argument(s),
+% so we redefine this internal macro and leave |\cite| alone. The
+% first argument is used for typesetting, so the shorthands need
+% only be deactivated in the second argument.
+% \changes{babel~3.7g}{2000/10/01}{The shorthands need to be
+% deactivated for the second argument of \cs{@citex} only.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@expandtwoargs\in@{B}\bbl@opt@safe
+\ifin@
+ \bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse
+ \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Unfortunately, the packages \pkg{natbib} and \pkg{cite} need a
+% different definition of |\@citex|...
+% To begin with, \pkg{natbib} has a definition for |\@citex| with
+% \emph{three} arguments... We only know that a package is loaded
+% when |\begin{document}| is executed, so we need to postpone the
+% different redefinition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Notice that we use |\def| here instead of |\bbl@redefine| because
+% |\org@@citex| is already defined and we don't want to overwrite
+% that definition (it would result in parameter stack overflow
+% because of a circular definition).
+%
+% (Recent versions of natbib change dynamically |\@citex|, so PR4087
+% doesn't seem fixable in a simple way. Just load natbib before.)
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#3}\@safe@activesfalse
+ \org@@citex[#1][#2]{\@tempa}}%
+ }{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The package \pkg{cite} has a definition of |\@citex| where the
+% shorthands need to be turned off in both arguments.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{%
+ \def\@citex[#1]#2{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}%
+ }{}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nocite}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
+% The macro |\nocite| which is used to instruct BiB\TeX\ to
+% extract uncited references from the database.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@redefine\nocite#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bibcite}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
+% The macro that is used in the |.aux| file to define citation
+% labels. When packages such as \pkg{natbib} or \pkg{cite} are not
+% loaded its second argument is used to typeset the citation
+% label. In that case, this second argument can contain active
+% characters but is used in an environment where
+% |\@safe@activestrue| is in effect. This switch needs to be reset
+% inside the |\hbox| which contains the citation label. In order to
+% determine during \file{.aux} file processing which definition of
+% |\bibcite| is needed we define |\bibcite| in such a way that it
+% redefines itself with the proper definition.
+% \changes{babel~3.6s}{1999/04/13}{Need to determine `online' which
+% definition of \cs{bibcite} is needed}
+% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Also check for \pkg{cite} it can't
+% handle \cs{@safe@activesfalse} in its second argument}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@redefine\bibcite{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We call |\bbl@cite@choice| to select the proper definition for
+% |\bibcite|. This new definition is then activated.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@cite@choice
+ \bibcite}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@bibcite}
+% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@bibcite} added}
+% The macro |\bbl@bibcite| holds the definition of |\bibcite|
+% needed when neither \pkg{natbib} nor \pkg{cite} is loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{%
+ \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@cite@choice}
+% \changes{babel~3.6v}{1999/04/21}{Macro \cs{bbl@cite@choice} added}
+% The macro |\bbl@cite@choice| determines which definition of
+% |\bibcite| is needed.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bbl@cite@choice{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First we give |\bibcite| its default definition.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then, when \pkg{natbib} is loaded we restore the original
+% definition of |\bibcite| .
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% For \pkg{cite} we do the same.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Make sure this only happens once.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When a document is run for the first time, no \file{.aux} file is
+% available, and |\bibcite| will not yet be properly defined. In
+% this case, this has to happen before the document starts.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@bibitem}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/15}{Now use \cs{bbl@redefine}}
+% One of the two internal \LaTeX\ macros called by |\bibitem|
+% that write the citation label on the |.aux| file.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+\else
+ \let\org@nocite\nocite
+ \let\org@@citex\@citex
+ \let\org@bibcite\bibcite
+ \let\org@@bibitem\@bibitem
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Marks}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\markright}
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/03/15}{Added redefinition of \cs{mark...}
+% commands}
+% Because the output routine is asynchronous, we must
+% pass the current language attribute to the head lines, together
+% with the text that is put into them. To achieve this we need to
+% adapt the definition of |\markright| and |\markboth| somewhat.
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/08}{Removed the use of \cs{head@lang}
+% (PR 2990)}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/09}{Avoid expanding the arguments by
+% storing them in token registers}
+% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to
+% the mark}
+% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to
+% an empty mark; prevented this by checking the contents of the
+% argument}
+% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of
+% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing
+% it into the token registers}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@redefine\markright#1{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% First of all we temporarily store the language switching command,
+% using an expanded definition in order to get the current value of
+% |\languagename|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect
+ \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then, we check whether the argument is empty; if it is, we
+% just make sure the scratch token register is empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\bbl@arg{#1}%
+ \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty
+ \toks@{}%
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Next, we store the argument to |\markright| in the scratch token
+% register, together with the expansion of |\bbl@tempb| (containing
+% the language switching command) as defined before. This way
+% these commands will not be expanded by using |\edef| later
+% on, and we make sure that the text is typeset using the
+% correct language settings. While doing so, we make sure that
+% active characters that may end up in the mark are not disabled by
+% the output routine kicking in while \cs{@safe@activestrue} is in
+% effect.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{%
+ \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}%
+ \fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we define a temporary control sequence using |\edef|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When |\bbl@tempa| is executed, only |\languagename| will be
+% expanded, because of the way the token register was filled.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \noexpand\org@markright{\the\toks@}}%
+ \bbl@tempa
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\markboth}
+% \begin{macro}{\@mkboth}
+% The definition of |\markboth| is equivalent to that of
+% |\markright|, except that we need two token registers. The
+% documentclasses \cls{report} and \cls{book} define and set the
+% headings for the page. While doing so they also store a copy of
+% |\markboth| in |\@mkboth|. Therefor we need to check whether
+% |\@mkboth| has already been set. If so we neeed to do that again
+% with the new definition of |\makrboth|.
+% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/15}{added \cs{bbl@restore@actives} to
+% the mark}
+% \changes{babel~3.8c}{2004/05/26}{No need to add \emph{anything} to
+% an empty mark, prevented this by checking the contents of the
+% arguments}
+% \changes{babel~3.8f}{2005/05/15}{Make the definition independent of
+% the original definition; expand \cs{languagename} before passing
+% it into the token registers}
+% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/21}{Added setting of \cs{@mkboth} (PR
+% 3826)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@mkboth\markboth
+ \def\bbl@tempc{\let\@mkboth\markboth}
+\else
+ \def\bbl@tempc{}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can start the new definition of |\markboth|
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@redefine\markboth#1#2{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect
+ \noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}%
+ \def\bbl@arg{#1}%
+ \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty
+ \toks@{}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\toks@\expandafter{%
+ \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#1}}%
+ \fi
+ \def\bbl@arg{#2}%
+ \ifx\bbl@arg\@empty
+ \toks8{}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\toks8\expandafter{%
+ \bbl@tempb{\protect\bbl@restore@actives#2}}%
+ \fi
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{%
+ \noexpand\org@markboth{\the\toks@}{\the\toks8}}%
+ \bbl@tempa
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and copy it to |\@mkboth| if necesary.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@tempc
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Preventing clashes with other packages}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{ifthen}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\ifthenelse}
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/11}{Redefinition of \cs{ifthenelse}
+% added to circumvent problems with \cs{pageref} in the argument of
+% \cs{isodd}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/07}{Redefine only if `ref' is `safe'}%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/03}{Moved to babel.def}
+% Sometimes a document writer wants to create a special effect
+% depending on the page a certain fragment of text appears on. This
+% can be achieved by the following piece of code:
+% \begin{verbatim}
+% \ifthenelse{\isodd{\pageref{some:label}}}
+% {code for odd pages}
+% {code for even pages}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% In order for this to work the argument of |\isodd| needs to be
+% fully expandable. With the above redefinition of |\pageref| it is
+% not in the case of this example. To overcome that, we add some
+% code to the definition of |\ifthenelse| to make things work.
+%
+% The first thing we need to do is check if the package
+% \pkg{ifthen} is loaded. This should be done at |\begin{document}|
+% time.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe
+\ifin@
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we can redefine |\ifthenelse|:
+% \changes{babel~3.6f}{1997/01/14}{\cs{ifthenelse} needs to be long}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/22}{\cs{ref} is also taken into account}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% We want to revert the definition of |\pageref| and |\ref| to
+% their original definition for the duration of |\ifthenelse|,
+% so we first need to store their current meanings.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \let\bbl@tempa\pageref
+ \let\pageref\org@pageref
+ \let\bbl@tempb\ref
+ \let\ref\org@ref
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we can set the |\@safe@actives| switch and call the original
+% |\ifthenelse|. In order to be able to use shorthands in the
+% second and third arguments of |\ifthenelse| the resetting of the
+% switch \emph{and} the definition of |\pageref| happens inside
+% those arguments. When the package wasn't loaded we do nothing.
+% \changes{babel~3.6i}{1997/02/25}{Now reset the @safe@actives switch
+% inside the 2nd and 3rd arguments of \cs{ifthenelse}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/06/29}{\cs{pageref} needs to have its
+% babel definition reinstated in the second and third arguments}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \@safe@activestrue
+ \org@ifthenelse{#1}{%
+ \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
+ \let\ref\bbl@tempb
+ \@safe@activesfalse
+ #2}{%
+ \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
+ \let\ref\bbl@tempb
+ \@safe@activesfalse
+ #3}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{varioref}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@@vpageref}
+% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/29}{Redefinition of \cs{@@vpageref}
+% added to circumvent problems with active \texttt{:} in the
+% argument of \cs{vref} when \pkg{varioref} is used}
+% \begin{macro}{\vrefpagenum}
+% \changes{babel~3.7o}{2003/11/18}{Added redefinition of
+% \cs{vrefpagenum} which deals with ranges of pages}
+% \begin{macro}{\Ref}
+% \changes{babel~3.8g}{2005/05/21}{We also need to adapt \cs{Ref}
+% which needs to be able to uppercase the first letter of the
+% expansion of \cs{ref}}
+% When the package varioref is in use we need to modify its
+% internal command |\@@vpageref| in order to prevent problems when
+% an active character ends up in the argument of |\vref|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{%
+ \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{%
+ \@safe@activestrue
+ \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}%
+ \@safe@activesfalse}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The same needs to happen for |\vrefpagenum|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{%
+ \@safe@activestrue
+ \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}%
+ \@safe@activesfalse}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The package \pkg{varioref} defines |\Ref| to be a robust command
+% wich uppercases the first character of the reference text. In
+% order to be able to do that it needs to access the exandable form
+% of |\ref|. So we employ a little trick here. We redefine the
+% (internal) command \verb*|\Ref | to call |\org@ref| instead of
+% |\ref|. The disadvantgage of this solution is that whenever the
+% derfinition of |\Ref| changes, this definition needs to be updated
+% as well.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{%
+ \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa}
+ }{}%
+ }
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{hhline}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\hhline}
+% Delaying the activation of the shorthand characters has introduced
+% a problem with the \pkg{hhline} package. The reason is that it
+% uses the `:' character which is made active by the french support
+% in \babel. Therefor we need to \emph{reload} the package when
+% the `:' is an active character.
+%
+% So at |\begin{document}| we check whether \pkg{hhline} is loaded.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Then we check whether the expansion of |\normal@char:| is not
+% equal to |\relax|.
+% \changes{babel~3.8b}{2004/04/19}{added \cs{string} to prevent
+% unwanted expansion of the colon}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax
+ \else
+% \end{macrocode}
+% In that case we simply reload the package. Note that this happens
+% \emph{after} the category code of the @-sign has been changed to
+% other, so we need to temporarily change it to letter again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother
+ \fi}%
+ {}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{hyperref}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\pdfstringdefDisableCommands}
+% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Inform \pkg{hyperref} to use
+% shorthands at system level (PR4006)}
+%
+% A number of interworking problems between \pkg{babel} and
+% \pkg{hyperref} are tackled by \pkg{hyperref} itself. The
+% following code was introduced to prevent some annoying warnings
+% but it broke bookmarks. This was quickly fixed in \pkg{hyperref},
+% which essentially made it no-op. However, it will not removed for
+% the moment because \pkg{hyperref} is expecting it, .
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}%
+ {}%
+ {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
+ \languageshorthands{system}}%
+ }%
+}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{\pkg{fancyhdr}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}
+% The package \pkg{fancyhdr} treats the running head and fout lines
+% somewhat differently as the standard classes. A symptom of this is
+% that the command |\foreignlanguage| which \babel\ adds to the
+% marks can end up inside the argument of |\MakeUppercase|. To
+% prevent unexpected results we need to define |\FOREIGNLANGUAGE|
+% here.
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/05/23}{Define \cs{FOREIGNLANGUAGE}
+% unconditionally}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{%
+ \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\substitutefontfamily}
+% The command |\substitutefontfamily| creates an
+% \file{.fd} file on the fly. The first argument is an encoding
+% mnemonic, the second and third arguments are font family names.
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/06/15}{create file with lowercase name}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{%
+ \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}%
+ \immediate\write15{%
+ \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}%
+ [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day}
+ \space generated font description file]^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J
+ }%
+ \closeout15
+ }
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This command should only be used in the preamble of a document.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Encoding issues (part 2)}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/16}{Removed redefinition of \cs{@roman}
+% and \cs{@Roman}}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\TeX}
+% \begin{macro}{\LaTeX}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Make \TeX\ and \LaTeX\ logos
+% encoding-independent}
+% Because documents may use font encodings other than one of the
+% latin encodings, we make sure that the logos of \TeX\ and
+% \LaTeX\ always come out in the right encoding.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}}
+\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\nfss@catcodes}
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/08/18}{Need to add the double quote and
+% acute characters to \cs{nfss@catcodes} to prevent problems when
+% reading in .fd files}
+% \LaTeX's font selection scheme sometimes wants to read font
+% definition files in the middle of processing the document. In
+% order to guard against any characters having the wrong
+% |\catcode|s it always calls |\nfss@catcodes| before loading a
+% file. Unfortunately, the characters |"| and |'| are not dealt
+% with. Therefor we have to add them until \LaTeX\ does that
+% itself.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\bbl@add\nfss@catcodes{%
+ \@makeother\'%
+ \@makeother\"}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \subsection{Local Language Configuration}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\loadlocalcfg}
+% At some sites it may be necessary to add site-specific actions to
+% a language definition file. This can be done by creating a file
+% with the same name as the language definition file, but with the
+% extension \file{.cfg}. For instance the file \file{norsk.cfg}
+% will be loaded when the language definition file \file{norsk.ldf}
+% is loaded.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Added macro}
+% For plain-based formats we don't want to override the definition
+% of |\loadlocalcfg| from \file{plain.def}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\loadlocalcfg\@undefined
+ \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}%
+ {\let\loadlocalcfg\@gobble}%
+ {\def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg}%
+ {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+ * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J%
+ *}}%
+ \@empty}}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Just to be compatible with \LaTeX$\:$2.09 we add a few more lines
+% of code:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@unexpandable@protect\@undefined
+ \def\@unexpandable@protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}
+ \long\def\protected@write#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\thepage\relax
+ #2%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, the default is to use English as the main language.
+% \changes{babel~3.6c}{1997/01/05}{When \file{hyphen.cfg} is not
+% loaded in the format \cs{l@english} might not be defined; assume
+% english is language 0}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012-05-17}{Languages are best assigned with
+% \cs{chardef}, not \cs{let}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\l@english\@undefined
+ \chardef\l@english\z@
+\fi
+\main@language{english}
+%</core>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+%
+% Now that we're sure that the code is seen by \LaTeX\ only, we
+% have to find out what the main (primary) document style is
+% because we want to redefine some macros. This is only necessary
+% for releases of \LaTeX\ dated before December~1991. Therefor
+% this part of the code can optionally be included in
+% \file{babel.def} by specifying the \texttt{docstrip} option
+% \texttt{names}.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*names>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The standard styles can be distinguished by checking whether some
+% macros are defined. In table~\ref{styles} an overview is given of
+% the macros that can be used for this purpose.
+% \begin{table}[htb]
+% \begin{center}
+% \DeleteShortVerb{\|}
+% \begin{tabular}{|lcp{8cm}|}
+% \hline
+% article & : & both the \verb+\chapter+ and \verb+\opening+
+% macros are undefined\\
+% report and book & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is defined and
+% the \verb+\opening+ is undefined\\
+% letter & : & the \verb+\chapter+ macro is undefined and
+% the \verb+\opening+ is defined\\
+% \hline
+% \end{tabular}
+% \caption{How to determine the main document style}\label{styles}
+% \MakeShortVerb{\|}
+% \end{center}
+% \end{table}
+%
+% \noindent The macros that have to be redefined for the
+% \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles happen to be
+% the same, so there is no need to distinguish between those two
+% styles.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\doc@style}
+% First a parameter |\doc@style| is defined to identify the current
+% document style. This parameter might have been defined by a
+% document style that already uses macros instead of hard-wired
+% texts, such as \file{artikel1.sty}~\cite{BEP}, so the existence of
+% |\doc@style| is checked. If this macro is undefined, i.\,e., if
+% the document style is unknown and could therefore contain
+% hard-wired texts, |\doc@style| is defined to the default
+% value~`0'.
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/29}{Removed use of \cs{@ifundefined}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@undefined\doc@style
+ \def\doc@style{0}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This parameter is defined in the following \texttt{if}
+% construction (see table~\ref{styles}):
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \ifx\@undefined\opening
+ \ifx\@undefined\chapter
+ \def\doc@style{1}%
+ \else
+ \def\doc@style{2}%
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \def\doc@style{3}%
+ \fi%
+\fi%
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/11/05}{Removed definition of
+% \cs{if@restonecol}}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Redefinition of macros}
+%
+% Now here comes the real work: we start to redefine things and
+% replace hard-wired texts by macros. These redefinitions should be
+% carried out conditionally, in case it has already been done.
+%
+% For the \texttt{figure} and \texttt{table} environments we have
+% in all styles:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{figurename}{\def\fnum@figure{\figurename{} \thefigure}}{}
+\@ifundefined{tablename}{\def\fnum@table{\tablename{} \thetable}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The rest of the macros have to be treated differently for each
+% style. When |\doc@style| still has its default value nothing
+% needs to be done.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifcase \doc@style\relax
+\or
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This means that \file{babel.def} is read after the
+% \texttt{article} style, where no |\chapter| and |\opening|
+% commands are defined\footnote{A fact that was pointed out to me
+% by Nico Poppelier and was already used in Piet van Oostrum's
+% document style option~\texttt{nl}.}.
+%
+% First we have the |\tableofcontents|,
+% |\listoffigures| and |\listoftables|:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{contentsname}%
+ {\def\tableofcontents{\section*{\contentsname\@mkboth
+ {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}%
+ \@starttoc{toc}}}{}
+\@ifundefined{listfigurename}%
+ {\def\listoffigures{\section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth
+ {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}%
+ \@starttoc{lof}}}{}
+\@ifundefined{listtablename}%
+ {\def\listoftables{\section*{\listtablename\@mkboth
+ {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}%
+ \@starttoc{lot}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Then the |\thebibliography| and |\theindex| environments.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{refname}%
+ {\def\thebibliography#1{\section*{\refname
+ \@mkboth{\uppercase{\refname}}{\uppercase{\refname}}}%
+ \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth
+ \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+ \usecounter{enumi}}%
+ \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}%
+ \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty
+ \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{}
+\@ifundefined{indexname}%
+ {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\section*{\indexname}]%
+ \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@\let\item\@idxitem}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The |abstract| environment:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{abstractname}%
+ {\def\abstract{\if@twocolumn
+ \section*{\abstractname}%
+ \else \small
+ \begin{center}%
+ {\bf \abstractname\vspace{-.5em}\vspace{\z@}}%
+ \end{center}%
+ \quotation
+ \fi}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And last but not least, the macro |\part|:
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{partname}%
+{\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart
+ \hspace{1em}#1}\else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi
+ {\parindent\z@ \raggedright
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
+ \Large \bf \partname{} \thepart
+ \par \nobreak
+ \fi
+ \huge \bf
+ #2\markboth{}{}\par}%
+ \nobreak
+ \vskip 3ex\@afterheading}%
+}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This is all that needs to be done for the \texttt{article} style.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\or
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The next case is formed by the two styles \texttt{book} and
+% \texttt{report}. Basically we have to do the same as for the
+% \texttt{article} style, except now we must also change the
+% |\chapter| command.
+%
+% The tables of contents, figures and tables:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{contentsname}%
+ {\def\tableofcontents{\@restonecolfalse
+ \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth
+ {\uppercase{\contentsname}}{\uppercase{\contentsname}}}%
+ \@starttoc{toc}%
+ \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn
+ \csname fi\endcsname}}{}
+\@ifundefined{listfigurename}%
+ {\def\listoffigures{\@restonecolfalse
+ \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth
+ {\uppercase{\listfigurename}}{\uppercase{\listfigurename}}}%
+ \@starttoc{lof}%
+ \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn
+ \csname fi\endcsname}}{}
+\@ifundefined{listtablename}%
+ {\def\listoftables{\@restonecolfalse
+ \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn
+ \fi\chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth
+ {\uppercase{\listtablename}}{\uppercase{\listtablename}}}%
+ \@starttoc{lot}%
+ \csname if@restonecol\endcsname\twocolumn
+ \csname fi\endcsname}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Again, the |bibliography| and |index| environments; notice that
+% in this case we use |\bibname| instead of |\refname| as in the
+% definitions for the \texttt{article} style. The reason for this
+% is that in the \texttt{article} document style the term
+% `References' is used in the definition of |\thebibliography|. In
+% the \texttt{report} and \texttt{book} document styles the term
+% `Bibliography' is used.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{bibname}%
+ {\def\thebibliography#1{\chapter*{\bibname
+ \@mkboth{\uppercase{\bibname}}{\uppercase{\bibname}}}%
+ \list{[\arabic{enumi}]}{\settowidth\labelwidth{[#1]}%
+ \leftmargin\labelwidth \advance\leftmargin\labelsep
+ \usecounter{enumi}}%
+ \def\newblock{\hskip.11em plus.33em minus.07em}%
+ \sloppy\clubpenalty4000\widowpenalty\clubpenalty
+ \sfcode`\.=1000\relax}}{}
+\@ifundefined{indexname}%
+ {\def\theindex{\@restonecoltrue\if@twocolumn\@restonecolfalse\fi
+ \columnseprule \z@
+ \columnsep 35pt\twocolumn[\@makeschapterhead{\indexname}]%
+ \@mkboth{\uppercase{\indexname}}{\uppercase{\indexname}}%
+ \thispagestyle{plain}%
+ \parskip\z@ plus.3pt\parindent\z@ \let\item\@idxitem}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Here is the |abstract| environment:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{abstractname}%
+ {\def\abstract{\titlepage
+ \null\vfil
+ \begin{center}%
+ {\bf \abstractname}%
+ \end{center}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% And last but not least the |\chapter|, |\appendix| and
+% |\part| macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{chaptername}{\def\@chapapp{\chaptername}}{}
+%
+\@ifundefined{appendixname}%
+ {\def\appendix{\par
+ \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
+ \setcounter{section}{0}%
+ \def\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
+ \def\thechapter{\Alph{chapter}}}}{}
+%
+\@ifundefined{partname}%
+ {\def\@part[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \refstepcounter{part}%
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart
+ \hspace{1em}#1}\else
+ \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}\fi
+ \markboth{}{}%
+ {\centering
+ \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
+ \huge\bf \partname{} \thepart
+ \par
+ \vskip 20pt \fi
+ \Huge \bf
+ #1\par}\@endpart}}{}%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\or
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Now we address the case where \file{babel.def} is read after the
+% \texttt{letter} style. The \texttt{letter} document style
+% defines the macro |\opening| and some other macros that are
+% specific to \texttt{letter}. This means that we have to redefine
+% other macros, compared to the previous two cases.
+%
+% First two macros for the material at the end of a letter, the
+% |\cc| and |\encl| macros.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{ccname}%
+ {\def\cc#1{\par\noindent
+ \parbox[t]{\textwidth}%
+ {\@hangfrom{\rm \ccname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{}
+\@ifundefined{enclname}%
+ {\def\encl#1{\par\noindent
+ \parbox[t]{\textwidth}%
+ {\@hangfrom{\rm \enclname : }\ignorespaces #1\strut}\par}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The last thing we have to do here is to redefine the
+% \texttt{headings} pagestyle:
+% \changes{babel~3.3}{1993/07/11}{\cs{headpagename} should be
+% \cs{pagename}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifundefined{headtoname}%
+ {\def\ps@headings{%
+ \def\@oddhead{\sl \headtoname{} \ignorespaces\toname \hfil
+ \@date \hfil \pagename{} \thepage}%
+ \def\@oddfoot{}}}{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% This was the last of the four standard document styles, so if
+% |\doc@style| has another value we do nothing and just close the
+% \texttt{if} construction.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\fi
+%</names>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here ends the code that can be optionally included when a version
+% of \LaTeX\ is in use that is dated \emph{before} December~1991.
+%
+%
+% We also need to redefine a number of commands to ensure that the
+% right font encoding is used, but this can't be done before
+% \file{babel.def} is loaded.
+% \changes{babel~3.6o}{1999/04/07}{Moved the rest of the font encoding
+% related definitions to their original place}
+%
+% \subsection{Multiple languages}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\language}
+% Plain \TeX\ version~3.0 provides the primitive |\language| that
+% is used to store the current language. When used with a pre-3.0
+% version this function has to be implemented by allocating a
+% counter.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel|patterns>
+\ifx\language\@undefined
+ \csname newcount\endcsname\language
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\last@language}
+% Another counter is used to store the last language defined. For
+% pre-3.0 formats an extra counter has to be allocated.
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\addlanguage}
+%
+% To add languages to \TeX's memory plain \TeX\ version~3.0
+% supplies |\newlanguage|, in a pre-3.0 environment a similar macro
+% has to be provided. For both cases a new macro is defined here,
+% because the original |\newlanguage| was defined to be |\outer|.
+%
+% For a format based on plain version~2.x, the definition of
+% |\newlanguage| can not be copied because |\count 19| is used for
+% other purposes in these formats. Therefor |\addlanguage| is
+% defined using a definition based on the macros used to define
+% |\newlanguage| in plain \TeX\ version~3.0.
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added a \texttt{\%}, removed
+% \texttt{by}}
+%
+% For formats based on plain version~3.0 the definition of
+% |\newlanguage| can be simply copied, removing |\outer|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined
+ \csname newcount\endcsname\last@language
+ \def\addlanguage#1{%
+ \global\advance\last@language\@ne
+ \ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi
+ \else
+ \errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}%
+ \fi
+ \global\chardef#1\last@language
+ \wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% plain \TeX\ version 3.0 uses |\count 19| for this purpose.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\else
+ \countdef\last@language=19
+ \def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi}
+\fi
+%</kernel|patterns>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\adddialect}
+% The macro |\adddialect| can be used to add the name of a dialect
+% or variant language, for which an already defined hyphenation
+% table can be used.
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Added \cs{relax}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*kernel>
+\def\adddialect#1#2{%
+ \global\chardef#1#2\relax
+ \bbl@usehooks{adddialect}{{#1}{#2}}%
+ \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/07}{Added macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/23}{New macro to normalize
+% a macro (eg, \cs{languagename}) to lowercase if necessary}
+%
+% |\bbl@iflanguage| executes code only of the language
+% exists. Otherwise raises and error.
+%
+% The argument of |\bbl@fixname| has to be a macro name, as it may get
+% ``fixed'' if casing (lc/uc) is wrong. It's intented to fix a
+% long-standing bug when |\foreignlanguage| and the like appear in
+% a |\MakeXXXcase|. However, a lowercase form is not imposed to
+% improve backward compatibility (perhaps you defined a language
+% named |MYLANG|, but unfortunately mixed case names cannot be
+% trapped).
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@fixname#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\bbl@tempe{l@}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempd{\noexpand\@ifundefined{\noexpand\bbl@tempe#1}}%
+ \bbl@tempd
+ {\lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}%
+ {\uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}%
+ \@empty
+ {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}%
+ \uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}%
+ {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}%
+ \lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}%
+ \@empty
+ \edef\bbl@tempd{\endgroup\def\noexpand#1{#1}}%
+ \bbl@tempd}
+\def\bbl@iflanguage#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{l@#1}{\@nolanerr{#1}\@gobble}\@firstofone}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\iflanguage}
+% Users might want to test (in a private package for instance)
+% which language is currently active. For this we provide a test
+% macro, |\iflanguage|, that has three arguments. It checks
+% whether the first argument is a known language. If so, it
+% compares the first argument with the value of |\language|. Then,
+% depending on the result of the comparison, it executes either the
+% second or the third argument.
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Rephrased \cs{ifnum} test}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/06/10}{Now evaluate the \cs{ifnum} test
+% \emph{after} the \cs{fi} from the \cs{ifx} test and use
+% \cs{@firstoftwo} and \cs{@secondoftwo}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\iflanguage#1{%
+ \bbl@iflanguage{#1}{%
+ \ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\selectlanguage}
+% The macro |\selectlanguage| checks whether the language is
+% already defined before it performs its actual task, which is to
+% update |\language| and activate language-specific definitions.
+%
+% To allow the call of |\selectlanguage| either with a control
+% sequence name or with a simple string as argument, we have to use
+% a trick to delete the optional escape character.
+%
+% To convert a control sequence to a string, we use the |\string|
+% primitive. Next we have to look at the first character of this
+% string and compare it with the escape character. Because this
+% escape character can be changed by setting the internal integer
+% |\escapechar| to a character number, we have to compare this
+% number with the character of the string. To do this we have to
+% use \TeX's backquote notation to specify the character as a
+% number.
+%
+% If the first character of the |\string|'ed argument is the
+% current escape character, the comparison has stripped this
+% character and the rest in the `then' part consists of the rest of
+% the control sequence name. Otherwise we know that either the
+% argument is not a control sequence or |\escapechar| is set to a
+% value outside of the character range~$0$--$255$.
+%
+% If the user gives an empty argument, we provide a default
+% argument for |\string|. This argument should expand to nothing.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.0c}{1991/06/06}{Made \cs{selectlanguage}
+% robust}
+% \changes{babel~3.2}{1991/11/11}{Modified to allow arguments that
+% start with an escape character}
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Simplified the modification to
+% allow the use in a \cs{write} command}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Store the name of the current
+% language in a control sequence instead of passing the whole macro
+% construct to strip the escape character in the argument of
+% \cs{selectlanguage }.}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/16}{Moved check for escape character
+% one level down in the expansion}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/11/16}{\cs{bbl@select@type} keep tracks of
+% the selection method: 0 is select, 1 is foreign}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bbl@select@type\z@
+\edef\selectlanguage{%
+ \noexpand\protect
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because the command |\selectlanguage| could be used in a moving
+% argument it expands to \verb*=\protect\selectlanguage =.
+% Therefor, we have to make sure that a macro |\protect| exists.
+% If it doesn't it is |\let| to |\relax|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% As \LaTeX$\:$2.09 writes to files \textit{expanded} whereas
+% \LaTeXe\ takes care \textit{not} to expand the arguments of
+% |\write| statements we need to be a bit clever about the way we
+% add information to \file{.aux} files. Therefor we introduce the
+% macro |\xstring| which should expand to the right amount of
+% |\string|'s.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
+ \def\xstring{\string\string\string}
+\else
+ \let\xstring\string
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/04}{Changed the name of the internal
+% macro to \cs{selectlanguage }.}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/03/05}{Added an extra level of expansion to
+% separate the switching mechanism from writing to aux files}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Use \cs{aftergroup} to keep the
+% language grouping correct in auxiliary files {PR3091}}
+% Since version 3.5 \babel\ writes entries to the auxiliary files in
+% order to typeset table of contents etc. in the correct language
+% environment.
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language}
+% \emph{But} when the language change happens \emph{inside} a group
+% the end of the group doesn't write anything to the auxiliary
+% files. Therefor we need \TeX's |aftergroup| mechanism to help
+% us. The command |\aftergroup| stores the token immediately
+% following it to be executed when the current group is closed. So
+% we define a temporary control sequence |\bbl@pop@language| to be
+% executed at the end of the group. It calls |\bbl@set@language|
+% with the name of the current language as its argument.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Introduce the language stack
+% mechanism}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@language@stack}
+% The previous solution works for one level of nesting groups, but
+% as soon as more levels are used it is no longer adequate. For
+% that case we need to keep track of the nested languages using a
+% stack mechanism. This stack is called |\bbl@language@stack| and
+% initially empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@language@stack{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When using a stack we need a mechanism to push an element on the
+% stack and to retrieve the information afterwards.
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@push@language}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@language}
+% The stack is simply a list of languagenames, separated with a `+'
+% sign; the push function can be simple:
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@push@language{%
+ \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Retrieving information from the stack is a little bit less simple,
+% as we need to remove the element from the stack while storing it
+% in the macro |\languagename|. For this we first define a helper function.
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@pop@lang}
+% This macro stores its first element (which is delimited by the
+% `+'-sign) in |\languagename| and stores the rest of the string
+% (delimited by `-') in its third argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{%
+ \edef\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% The reason for the somewhat weird arrangement of arguments to the
+% helper function is the fact it is called in the following way.
+% This means that before |\bbl@pop@lang| is executed \TeX\ first
+% \emph{expands} the stack, stored in |\bbl@language@stack|. The
+% result of that is that the argument string of |\bbl@pop@lang|
+% contains one or more language names, each followed by a `+'-sign
+% (zero language names won't occur as this macro will only be
+% called after something has been pushed on the stack) followed by
+% the `-'-sign and finally the reference to the stack.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@pop@language{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack
+ \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Once the name of the previous language is retrieved from the stack,
+% it is fed to |\bbl@set@language| to do the actual work of
+% switching everything that needs switching.
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{Now use the language stack mechanism}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{%
+ \bbl@push@language
+ \aftergroup\bbl@pop@language
+ \bbl@set@language{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/12}{Removed the superfluous empty
+% definition of \cs{bbl@pop@language}}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@set@language}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/09/25}{Macro \cs{bbl@set@language}
+% introduced}
+%
+% The macro |\bbl@set@language| takes care of switching the
+% language environment \emph{and} of writing entries on the
+% auxiliary files. For historial reasons, language names can be
+% either |language| of |\language|. To catch either form a trick is
+% used, but unfortunately as a side effect the catcodes of letters
+% in |\languagename| are not well defined. The list of auxiliary
+% files can be extended by redefining |\BabelContentsFiles|, but
+% make sure they are loaded inside a group (as |aux|, |toc|,
+% |lof|, and |lot| do) or the last language of the document will
+% remain active afterwards.
+%
+% We also write a command to change the current language in the
+% auxiliary files.
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/17}{Write the language change to the
+% auxiliary files}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/09}{Added hook}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/11/07}{Use a loop for contents files, with
+% the help of \cs{BabelContentsFiles}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/03/08}{Don't write to aux if language is
+% unknown}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\BabelContentsFiles{toc,lof,lot}%
+\def\bbl@set@language#1{%
+ \edef\languagename{%
+ \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty
+ \else\string#1\@empty\fi}%
+ \select@language{\languagename}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax\else
+ \if@filesw
+ \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\BabelContentsFiles{%
+ \addtocontents{\bbl@tempa}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}}%
+ \bbl@usehooks{write}{}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\def\select@language#1{%
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\languagename
+ \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@error
+ {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet}%
+ {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}%
+ \else
+ \let\bbl@select@type\z@
+ \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}%
+ \fi}}
+% A bit of optmization:
+\def\select@language@x#1{%
+ \ifcase\bbl@select@type
+ \bbl@ifsamestring\languagename{#1}{}{\select@language{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \select@language{#1}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% First, check if the user asks for a known language. If so,
+% update the value of |\language| and call |\originalTeX|
+% to bring \TeX\ in a certain pre-defined state.
+% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/05/29}{Added \cs{@bsphack} and
+% \cs{@esphack}}
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous
+% \cs{expandafter}}
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Removed space hacks and use of
+% \cs{@ifundefined}}
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added \cs{relax} as first command
+% to stop an expansion if \cs{protect} is empty}
+% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/11/07}{Check for the existence of
+% \cs{date...} instead of \cs{l@...}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Check for the existence of both
+% \cs{l@...} and \cs{date...}}
+% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/27}{Moved \cs{bbl@patterns} to the
+% correct place, after setting the extras for the current
+% language}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/01}{Created \cs{bbl@swith} with code
+% shared by \cs{select@language} and \cs{foreing@language}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The name of the language is stored in the control sequence
+% |\languagename|.
+%
+% Then we have to \emph{re}define |\originalTeX| to compensate for
+% the things that have been activated. To save memory space for
+% the macro definition of |\originalTeX|, we construct the control
+% sequence name for the |\noextras|\langvar\ command at definition
+% time by expanding the |\csname| primitive.
+%
+% Now activate the language-specific definitions. This is done by
+% constructing the names of three macros by concatenating three
+% words with the argument of |\selectlanguage|, and calling these
+% macros. \nb{What if \cs{hyphenation} was used in |extras|? Patch
+% temply set@hyphenmins and hyphenation. It can be done in hooks if
+% necessary.}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/05/13}{Separated the setting of the
+% hyphenmin values}%
+% \changes{babel~3.9c}{2013/04/08}{Removed an extra empty line}
+%
+% The switching of the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and
+% |\righthyphenmin| is somewhat different. First we save their
+% current values, then we check if |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is
+% defined. If it is not, we set default values (2 and 3), otherwise
+% the values in |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| will be used.
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/06/05}{Addedd default setting of hyphenmin
+% parameters}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/01}{Adddd \cs{bbl@iflanguagename} and
+% \cs{select@language@x}, which is no-op if the language is the same}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/23}{\cs{select@language} sets
+% \textsc{languagename} so that it has the correct value in the aux
+% file (eg, shorthand expansion was wrong)}
+% \changes{babel~3.0a}{1991/06/06}{Replaced \cs{gdef} with \cs{def}}
+% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/10/31}{\cs{originalTeX} should only be
+% executed once}
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/17}{Added three \cs{expandafter}s
+% to save macro space for \cs{originalTeX}}
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Moved definition of
+% \cs{originalTeX} before \cs{extras\langvar}}
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to
+% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.}
+% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{set the language shorthands to
+% `none' before switching on the extras}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/14}{Make sure the save counter is reset
+% even in \cs{originalTeX} is used in other contexts}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@switch#1{%
+ \originalTeX
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX\expandafter{%
+ \csname noextras#1\endcsname
+ \let\originalTeX\@empty
+ \babel@beginsave}%
+ \languageshorthands{none}%
+ \ifcase\bbl@select@type
+ \csname captions#1\endcsname
+ \csname date#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+ \bbl@usehooks{beforeextras}{}%
+ \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@usehooks{afterextras}{}%
+ \bbl@patterns{#1}%
+ \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin
+ \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
+ \else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
+ \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@ifsamestring#1#2{%
+ \protected@edef\bbl@tempb{#1}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}%
+ \protected@edef\bbl@tempc{#2}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempc}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage}
+% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment can be used as an
+% alternative to using the |\selectlanguage| declarative
+% command. When you are typesetting a document which mixes
+% left-to-right and right-to-left typesetting you have to use this
+% environment in order to let things work as you expect them to.
+%
+% The first thing this environment does is store the name of the
+% language in |\languagename|; it then calls
+% \verb*=\selectlanguage = to switch on everything that is needed for
+% this language The |\ignorespaces| command is necessary to hide
+% the environment when it is entered in horizontal mode.
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{environment added}
+% \changes{babel~3.5e}{1995/07/07}{changed name}
+% \changes{babel~3.7j}{2003/03/18}{rely on \cs{selectlanguage } to
+% keep track of the nesting}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/31}{Removed \cs{originalTeX}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\otherlanguage#1{%
+ \csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}%
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% The |\endotherlanguage| part of the environment tries to hide
+% itself when it is called in horizontal mode.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\long\def\endotherlanguage{%
+ \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{otherlanguage*}
+% The \Lenv{otherlanguage} environment is meant to be used when a
+% large part of text from a different language needs to be typeset,
+% but without changing the translation of words such as `figure'.
+% This environment makes use of |\foreign@language|.
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1996/05/29}{environment added}
+% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{%
+ \foreign@language{#1}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% At the end of the environment we need to switch off the extra
+% definitions. The grouping mechanism of the environment will take
+% care of resetting the correct hyphenation rules and ``extras''.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\let\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname\relax
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\foreignlanguage}
+% The |\foreignlanguage| command is another substitute for the
+% |\selectlanguage| command. This command takes two arguments, the
+% first argument is the name of the language to use for typesetting
+% the text specified in the second argument.
+%
+% Unlike |\selectlanguage| this command doesn't switch
+% \emph{everything}, it only switches the hyphenation rules and the
+% extra definitions for the language specified. It does this within
+% a group and assumes the |\extras|\langvar\ command doesn't make
+% any |\global| changes. The coding is very similar to part of
+% |\selectlanguage|.
+% \changes{babel~3.5d}{1995/06/22}{Macro added}
+% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{Introduced \cs{foreign@language}}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/12}{Added executing \cs{originalTeX}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/30}{Removed unnecesary \cs{noextras}
+% just before closing the group}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/31}{Moved \cs{originalTeX} to
+% \cs{foreing@language} so that it's also used in
+% \texttt{otherlanguage*}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/24}{\cs{foreignlanguage} defined
+% similarly to \cs{selectlanguage}, protecting the whole macro}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\foreignlanguage{%
+ \noexpand\protect
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname}
+\expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \foreign@language{#1}%
+ #2%
+ \endgroup}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\foreign@language}
+% \changes{babel~3.6d}{1997/01/07}{New macro} This macro does the
+% work for |\foreignlanguage| and the \Lenv{otherlanguage*}
+% environment. First we need to store the name of the language and
+% check that it is a known language. Then it just calls
+% |bbl@switch|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\foreign@language#1{%
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\languagename
+ \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@warning
+ {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet\\%
+ I'll proceed, but expect unexpected results.\\%
+ Reported}%
+ \fi
+ \let\bbl@select@type\@ne
+ \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@patterns}
+% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Macro added}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/08/28}{Extended to set hyphenation
+% exceptions as defined with \cs{babelhyphenation}}
+% This macro selects the hyphenation patterns by changing the
+% \cs{language} register. If special hyphenation patterns
+% are available specifically for the current font encoding,
+% use them instead of the default.
+%
+% It also sets hyphenation exceptions, but only once, because they
+% are global (here language |\lccode|'s has been set,
+% too). |\bbl@hyphenation@| is set to relax until the very first
+% |\babelhyphenation|, so do nothing with this value. If the
+% exceptions for a language (by its number, not its name, so that
+% |:ENC| is taken into account) has been set, then use
+% |\hyphenation| with both global and language exceptions and empty
+% the latter to mark they must not be set again.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bbl@hyphlist\@empty
+\let\bbl@hyphenation@\relax
+\def\bbl@patterns#1{%
+ \language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
+ \csname l@#1\endcsname
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{#1}%
+ \else
+ \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{#1:\f@encoding}%
+ \fi\relax
+ \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{patterns}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@}{}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\number\language,}{,\bbl@hyphlist}%
+ \ifin@\else
+ \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{hyphenation}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}%
+ \hyphenation{%
+ \bbl@hyphenation@
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@#1}%
+ \@empty
+ {\space\csname bbl@hyphenation@#1\endcsname}}%
+ \xdef\bbl@hyphlist{\bbl@hyphlist\number\language,}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{environment}{hyphenrules}
+% \changes{babel~3.7e}{2000/01/28}{Added environment hyphenrules}
+% The environment \Lenv{hyphenrules} can be used to select
+% \emph{just} the hyphenation rules. This environment does
+% \emph{not} change |\languagename| and when the hyphenation rules
+% specified were not loaded it has no effect. Note however,
+% |\lccode|'s and font encodings are not set at all, so in most
+% cases you should use |otherlanguage*|.
+% \changes{babel~3.8j}{2008/03/16}{Also set the hyphenmin parameters to
+% the correct value (PR3997)}
+% \changes{babel~3.8l}{2008/07/06}{Use \cs{bbl@patterns}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\hyphenrules#1{%
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\languagename
+ \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@patterns\expandafter{\languagename}%
+ \languageshorthands{none}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
+ \else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
+ \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \fi}}
+\let\endhyphenrules\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{environment}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\providehyphenmins}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{added macro}
+% The macro |\providehyphenmins| should be used in the language
+% definition files to provide a \emph{default} setting for the
+% hyphenation parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|. If
+% the macro |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| is already defined this command
+% has no effect.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\providehyphenmins#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\set@hyphenmins}
+% This macro sets the values of |\lefthyphenmin| and
+% |\righthyphenmin|. It expects two values as its argument.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\relax\righthyphenmin#2\relax}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\LdfInit}
+% \changes{babel~3.6a}{1996/10/16}{Macro added}
+% This macro is defined in two versions. The first version is to be
+% part of the `kernel' of \babel, ie. the part that is loaded in
+% the format; the second version is defined in \file{babel.def}.
+% The version in the format just checks the category code of the
+% ampersand and then loads \file{babel.def}.
+%
+% The category code of the ampersand is restored and the macro
+% calls itself again with the new definition from
+% \file{babel.def}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LdfInit{%
+ \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@
+ \catcode`\@=11\relax
+ \input babel.def\relax
+ \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
+ \LdfInit}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\originalTeX}
+% The macro|\originalTeX| should be known to \TeX\ at this moment.
+% As it has to be expandable we |\let| it to |\@empty| instead of
+% |\relax|.
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/24}{Set \cs{originalTeX} to
+% \cs{empty}, because it should be expandable.}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Because this part of the code can be included in a format, we
+% make sure that the macro which initialises the save mechanism,
+% |\babel@beginsave|, is not considered to be undefined.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\@nolanerr}
+% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Use \cs{PackageError} in \LaTeXe\
+% mode}
+% \begin{macro}{\@nopatterns}
+% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/25}{Macro added}
+% The \babel\ package will signal an error when a documents tries
+% to select a language that hasn't been defined earlier. When a
+% user selects a language for which no hyphenation patterns were
+% loaded into the format he will be given a warning about that
+% fact. We revert to the patterns for |\language|=0 in that case.
+% In most formats that will be (US)english, but it might also be
+% empty.
+% \begin{macro}{\@noopterr}
+% \changes{babel~3.7m}{2003/11/16}{Macro added}
+% When the package was loaded without options not everything will
+% work as expected. An error message is issued in that case.
+%
+% When the format knows about |\PackageError| it must be \LaTeXe,
+% so we can safely use its error handling interface. Otherwise
+% we'll have to `keep it simple'.
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/07}{Added a percent sign to remove
+% unwanted white space}
+% \changes{babel~3.5a}{1995/02/15}{Added \cs{@activated} to log active
+% characters}
+% \changes{babel~3.5c}{1995/06/19}{Added missing closing brace}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/07/30}{\cs{newcommand}s replaced by
+% \cs{def}'s, so that the file can be loaded twice}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2013/01/26}{Define generic variants instead of
+% duplicating each predefined message}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\bbl@nulllanguage{\string\language=0}
+\ifx\PackageError\@undefined
+ \def\bbl@error#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar=`\^^J
+ \def\\{^^J(babel) }%
+ \errhelp{#2}\errmessage{\\#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@warning#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar=`\^^J
+ \def\\{^^J(babel) }%
+ \message{\\#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@info#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar=`\^^J
+ \def\\{^^J}%
+ \wlog{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+\else
+ \def\bbl@error#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\\{\MessageBreak}%
+ \PackageError{babel}{#1}{#2}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@warning#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\\{\MessageBreak}%
+ \PackageWarning{babel}{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@info#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\\{\MessageBreak}%
+ \PackageInfo{babel}{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+\fi
+\def\@nolanerr#1{%
+ \bbl@error
+ {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}%
+ {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
+\def\@nopatterns#1{%
+ \bbl@warning
+ {No hyphenation patterns were preloaded for\\%
+ the language `#1' into the format.\\%
+ Please, configure your TeX system to add them and\\%
+ rebuild the format. Now I will use the patterns\\%
+ preloaded for \bbl@nulllanguage\space instead}}
+\let\bbl@usehooks\@gobbletwo
+%</kernel>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The following code is meant to be read by ini\TeX\ because it
+% should instruct \TeX\ to read hyphenation patterns. To this end
+% the \texttt{docstrip} option \texttt{patterns} can be used to
+% include this code in the file \file{hyphen.cfg}. Code is at lower
+% level than the rest.
+%
+% |toks8| stores info to be shown when the program is run.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*patterns>
+\toks8{Babel <3.9e> and hyphenation patterns for }%
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Removed the use of
+% \cs{patterns@loaded} altogether}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\process@line}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro}
+% Each line in the file \file{language.dat} is processed by
+% |\process@line| after it is read. The first thing this macro does
+% is to check whether the line starts with \texttt{=}.
+% When the first token of a line is an \texttt{=}, the macro
+% |\process@synonym| is called; otherwise the macro
+% |\process@language| will continue.
+% \changes{babel~3.5g}{1996/07/09}{Simplified code, removing
+% \cs{bbl@eq@}}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/12}{Use spaces as delimiters, to avoid
+% extra spaces. Once parsed, pass them in the traditional way}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\process@line#1#2 #3 #4 {%
+ \ifx=#1%
+ \process@synonym{#2}%
+ \else
+ \process@language{#1#2}{#3}{#4}%
+ \fi
+ \ignorespaces}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\process@synonym}
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{added macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Use a token register to temporarily
+% store a command to set hyphenmin parameters for the synonym which
+% is defined \emph{before} the first pattern file is processed}
+%
+% This macro takes care of the lines which start with an
+% \texttt{=}. It needs an empty token register to begin with.
+% |\bbl@languages| is also set to empty.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\toks@{}
+\def\bbl@languages{}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% When no languages have been loaded yet, the name following the
+% \texttt{=} will be a synonym for hyphenation register 0. So, it is stored
+% in a token register and executed when the first pattern file has
+% been processed. (The |\relax| just helps to the |\if| below
+% catching synonyms without a language.)
+%
+% Otherwise the name will be a synonym for the language loaded last.
+%
+% We also need to copy the hyphenmin parameters for the synonym.
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Now also store hyphenmin parameters
+% for language synonyms}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/25}{Added \cs{bbl@languages}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\process@synonym#1{%
+ \ifnum\last@language=\m@ne
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\relax\process@synonym{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname\last@language
+ \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname
+ \let\bbl@elt\relax
+ \edef\bbl@languages{\bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\last@language}{}{}}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\process@language}
+% The macro |\process@language| is used to process a non-empty line
+% from the `configuration file'. It has three arguments, each
+% delimited by white space. The first argument is the `name' of a
+% language; the second is the name of the file that contains the
+% patterns. The optional third argument is the name of a file
+% containing hyphenation exceptions.
+%
+% The first thing to do is call |\addlanguage| to allocate a
+% pattern register and to make that register `active'.
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/08}{Removed superfluous
+% \cs{expandafter}}
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/08/21}{Reinserted \cs{expandafter}}
+% \changes{babel~3.0d}{1991/10/27}{Added the collection of pattern
+% names.}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Also store \cs{languagename} for
+% possible later use in \cs{process@synonym}}
+% Then the `name' of the language that will be loaded now is
+% added to the token register |\toks8|. and finally
+% the pattern file is read.
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Allow for the encoding to be used
+% as part of the language name}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/10}{Removed \cs{selectfont} (I presume
+% it was intended to catch wrong encoding codes, but I don't think
+% this is necessary and as a side effect it might preload fonts)}
+%
+% For some hyphenation patterns it is needed to load them with a
+% specific font encoding selected. This can be specified in the
+% file \file{language.dat} by adding for instance `\texttt{:T1}' to
+% the name of the language. The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the
+% font encoding from the language name and stores it in
+% |\bbl@hyph@enc|. The latter can be used in hyphenation files if
+% you need to set a behaviour depending on the given encoding (it
+% is set to empty if no encoding is given).
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.4e}{1994/06/24}{Added code to detect assignments to
+% left- and righthyphenmin in the patternfile.}
+% \changes{babel~3.7a}{1998/03/27}{Read pattern files in a group}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/05}{need to set hyphenmin values
+% globally}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/22}{Set \cs{lefthyphenmin} to \cs{m@ne}
+% \emph{inside} the group; explicitly set the hyphenmin parameters
+% for language 0}
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/25}{Only set hyphenmin values when the
+% pattern file changed them}
+% Pattern files may contain assignments to |\lefthyphenmin| and
+% |\righthyphenmin|. \TeX\ does not keep track of these
+% assignments. Therefor we try to detect such assignments and
+% store them in the |\|\langvar|hyphenmins| macro. When no
+% assignments were made we provide a default setting.
+%
+% Some pattern files contain changes to the |\lccode| en |\uccode|
+% arrays. Such changes should remain local to the language;
+% therefor we process the pattern file in a group; the |\patterns|
+% command acts globally so its effect will be remembered.
+%
+% Then we globally store the settings of |\lefthyphenmin| and
+% |\righthyphenmin| and close the group.
+%
+% When the hyphenation patterns have been processed we need to see
+% if a file with hyphenation exceptions needs to be read. This is
+% the case when the third argument is not empty and when it does
+% not contain a space token. (Note however there is no need to save
+% hyphenation exceptions into the format.)
+% \changes{babel~3.5b}{1995/04/28}{Added optional reading of file with
+% hyphenation exceptions}
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/07/25}{Use \cs{empty} instead of
+% \cs{@empty} as the latter is unknown in plain}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/06/25}{Added \cs{bbl@languages}}
+% \cs{bbl@languages} saves a snapshot of the loaded languagues in the
+% form \cs{bbl@elt}\marg{language-name}\marg{number}%
+% \marg{patterns-file}\marg{exceptions-file}. Note the last 2
+% arguments are empty in `dialects' defined in |language.dat| with
+% |=|. Note also the language name can have encoding info.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.7c}{1999/04/27}{Added the execution of the contents
+% of \cs{toks@}}
+% Finally, if the counter |\language| is equal to zero we execute the
+% synonyms stored.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\process@language#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@hook@everylanguage{#1}%
+ \bbl@get@enc#1::\@@@
+ \begingroup
+ \lefthyphenmin\m@ne
+ \bbl@hook@loadpatterns{#2}%
+ \ifnum\lefthyphenmin=\m@ne
+ \else
+ \expandafter\xdef\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname{%
+ \the\lefthyphenmin\the\righthyphenmin}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \def\bbl@tempa{#3}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty\else
+ \bbl@hook@loadexceptions{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \let\bbl@elt\relax
+ \edef\bbl@languages{%
+ \bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\language}{#2}{\bbl@tempa}}%
+ \ifnum\the\language=\z@
+ \the\toks@
+ \toks@{}%
+ \fi}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@get@enc}
+% \changes{babel~3.7f}{2000/02/18}{Added macro}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/11}{Code much simplified}
+% \begin{macro}{\bbl@hyph@enc}
+% The macro |\bbl@get@enc| extracts the font encoding from the
+% language name and stores it in |\bbl@hyph@enc|. It uses delimited
+% arguments to achieve this.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2:#3\@@@{\def\bbl@hyph@enc{#2}}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% Now, hooks are defined. For efficiency reasons, they are dealt
+% here in a special way. Besides \luatex, format specific
+% configuration files are taken into account.
+% \changes{babel~3.9b}{2013/03/25}{Fixed an idiot slip: \cs{def}
+% intead of \cs{let}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\bbl@hook@everylanguage#1{}
+\def\bbl@hook@loadpatterns#1{\input #1\relax}
+\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\bbl@hook@loadpatterns
+\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\bbl@hook@loadpatterns
+\begingroup
+ \def\AddBabelHook#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname\relax
+ \def\next{\toks1}%
+ \else
+ \def\next{\expandafter\gdef\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname####1}%
+ \fi
+ \next}
+ \ifx\directlua\@undefined
+ \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else
+ \input xebabel.def
+ \fi
+ \else
+ \input luababel.def
+ \fi
+ \openin1 = babel-\bbl@format.cfg
+ \ifeof1
+ \else
+ \input babel-\bbl@format.cfg\relax
+ \fi
+ \closein1
+\endgroup
+\bbl@hook@loadkernel{switch.def}
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \begin{macro}{\readconfigfile}
+% The configuration file can now be opened for reading.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\openin1 = language.dat
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% See if the file exists, if not, use the default hyphenation file
+% \file{hyphen.tex}. The user will be informed about this.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\languagename{english}%
+\ifeof1
+ \message{I couldn't find the file language.dat,\space
+ I will try the file hyphen.tex}
+ \input hyphen.tex\relax
+ \chardef\l@english\z@
+\else
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Pattern registers are allocated using count register
+% |\last@language|. Its initial value is~0. The definition of the
+% macro |\newlanguage| is such that it first increments the count
+% register and then defines the language. In order to have the
+% first patterns loaded in pattern register number~0 we initialize
+% |\last@language| with the value~$-1$.
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.1}{1991/05/21}{Removed use of \cs{toks0}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \last@language\m@ne
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% We now read lines from the file until the end is found
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \loop
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% While reading from the input, it is useful to switch off
+% recognition of the end-of-line character. This saves us stripping
+% off spaces from the contents of the control sequence.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \endlinechar\m@ne
+ \read1 to \bbl@line
+ \endlinechar`\^^M
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/14}{Test simplified and moved}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/12}{Use only spaces as delimiters and
+% not /, as previouly done}
+%
+% If the file has reached its end, exit from the loop here. If not,
+% empty lines are skipped. Add 3 space characters to the end of
+% |\bbl@line|. This is needed to be able to recognize the arguments
+% of |\process@line| later on. The default language should be the
+% very first one.
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \if T\ifeof1F\fi T\relax
+ \ifx\bbl@line\@empty\else
+ \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space\space\space}%
+ \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line\relax
+ \fi
+ \repeat
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% Check for the end of the file. We must reverse the test for
+% |\ifeof| without |\else|. Then reactivate the default patterns,
+% \changes{babel~3.8m}{2008/07/08}{Also restore the name of the
+% language in \cs{languagename} (PR 4039)}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+ \begingroup
+ \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{%
+ \global\language=#2\relax
+ \gdef\languagename{#1}%
+ \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}}%
+ \bbl@languages
+ \endgroup
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% and close the configuration file.
+% \changes{babel~3.2a}{1991/11/20}{Free macro space for
+% \cs{process@language}}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\closein1
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \changes{babel~3.5f}{1995/11/08}{Moved the fiddling with \cs{dump}
+% to \file{bbplain.dtx} as it is no longer needed for \LaTeX}
+% We add a message about the fact that babel is loaded in the
+% format and with which language patterns to the \cs{everyjob}
+% register.
+% \changes{babel~3.6h}{1997/01/23}{Added a couple of \cs{expandafter}s
+% to copy the contents of \cs{toks8} into \cs{everyjob} instead of
+% the reference}
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/09/25}{The list of languages is not
+% printed every job any more (it is saved in \cs{bbl@languages}).}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\if/\the\toks@/\else
+ \errhelp{language.dat loads no language, only synonyms}
+ \errmessage{Orphan language synonym}
+\fi
+\ifx\addto@hook\@undefined
+\else
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{%
+ \noexpand\typeout{\the\toks8 \the\last@language\space languages
+ loaded.}}%
+ \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Also remove some macros from memory and raise an error
+% if |\toks@| is not empty. Finally load \file{switch.def}, but the
+% letter is not required and the line inputting it may be commented out.
+% \changes{babel~3.9a}{2012/12/11}{Raise error if there are synonyms
+% without languages}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\bbl@line\@undefined
+\let\process@line\@undefined
+\let\process@synonym\@undefined
+\let\process@language\@undefined
+\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hyph@enc\@undefined
+\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@everylanguage\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@loadpatterns\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\@undefined
+%</patterns>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% Here the code for ini\TeX\ ends.
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% \section{The `nil' language}
+%
+% This `language' does nothing, except setting the hyphenation patterns to
+% nohyphenation.
+%
+% For this language currently no special definitions are needed or
+% available.
+%
+% The macro |\LdfInit| takes care of preventing that this file is
+% loaded more than once, checking the category code of the
+% \texttt{@} sign, etc.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*nil>
+\LdfInit{nil}{datenil}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% When this file is read as an option, i.e. by the |\usepackage|
+% command, \texttt{nil} could be an `unknown' language in which
+% case we have to make it known.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined
+ \@nopatterns{nil}
+ \adddialect\l@nil0
+\else
+ \let\l@nil\l@nohyphenation
+\fi
+% \end{macrocode}
+% This macro is used to store the values of the hyphenation
+% parameters |\lefthyphenmin| and |\righthyphenmin|.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\m@ne\m@ne}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% The next step consists of defining commands to switch to (and
+% from) the `nil' language.
+% \begin{macro}{\captionnil}
+% \begin{macro}{\datenil}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\let\captionsnil\@empty
+\let\datenil\@empty
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \end{macro}
+% \end{macro}
+%
+% The macro |\ldf@finish| takes care of looking for a
+% configuration file, setting the main language to be switched on
+% at |\begin{document}| and resetting the category code of
+% \texttt{@} to its original value.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\ldf@finish{nil}
+%</nil>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
+\endinput
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/base.ins b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins
index ea88bd97fd1..1ddc7d9f07f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/base.ins
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/babel.ins
@@ -3,6 +3,7 @@
%% driver files from the doc files in this package when run through
%% LaTeX or TeX.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -19,7 +20,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% The list of all files belonging to the LaTeX base distribution is
%% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
@@ -31,6 +32,7 @@
%%
%% --------------- start of docstrip commands ------------------
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 2005-2008 Johannes L. Braams
%%
%% This file is part of the `babel' system.
@@ -40,8 +42,8 @@
%%
%% You are not allowed to modify its contents.
%%
-\def\filedate{2008/03/21}
-\def\batchfile{base.ins}
+\def\filedate{2013/04/10}
+\def\batchfile{babel.ins}
\input docstrip.tex
{\ifx\generate\undefined
@@ -59,29 +61,10 @@
\csname @@end\endcsname
\fi}
-% The following command will be added to dostrip in the next LaTeX
-% release ...
-\ifx\askonceonly\undefined
- \let\OriginalAsk\Ask
- \def\askonceonly{%
- \def\Ask##1##2{%
- \OriginalAsk{##1}{##2}%
- \global\let\Ask\OriginalAsk
- \Ask\noprompt{%
- By default you will be asked this question for every file.^^J%
- If you enter `y' now,^^J%
- I will asssume `y' for all future questions^^J%
- without prompting.}%
- \ifx\y\noprompt\let\noprompt\yes\fi
- \ifx\yes\noprompt\gdef\Ask####1####2{\def####1{y}}\fi}}
- }
-\fi
-%% This is the preamble that will be placed on
-%% unpacked files
-
\declarepreamble\mainpreamble
This is a generated file.
+Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
@@ -98,7 +81,7 @@ version 2003/12/01 or later.
This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -116,6 +99,7 @@ extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
\declarepreamble\fdpreamble
This is a generated file.
+Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
@@ -132,7 +116,7 @@ version 2003/12/01 or later.
This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -155,6 +139,7 @@ of this file under its original name.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
---------------------------------------------------------
+Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved.
To produce the documentation in the way you like you are allowed
@@ -166,6 +151,7 @@ to change this driver file.
This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
---------------------------------------------------------
+Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
Copyright (C) 2008 Johannes Braams. All rights reserved.
This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program
@@ -181,16 +167,23 @@ This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program
\usepreamble\mainpreamble
\usedir{tex/generic/babel}
+\askforoverwritefalse
+
\generate{\file{babel.sty}{\from{babel.dtx}{package}}
\file{babel.def}{\from{babel.dtx}{core}}
\file{switch.def}{\from{babel.dtx}{kernel}}
- \file{hyphen.cfg}{\from{babel.dtx}{kernel,patterns}}
+ \file{hyphen.cfg}{\from{babel.dtx}{patterns}}
+ \file{nil.ldf}{\from{babel.dtx}{nil}}
}
% Support for plain users
\generate{\file{plain.def}{\from{bbplain.dtx}{code}}
\file{bplain.tex}{\from{bbplain.dtx}{bplain}}
\file{blplain.tex}{\from{bbplain.dtx}{blplain}}
}
+% Support for Unicode-based engines
+\generate{\file{xebabel.def}{\from{bbunicode.dtx}{xetex}}
+ \file{luababel.def}{\from{bbunicode.dtx}{luatex}}
+ }
% compatibility files
@@ -259,15 +252,6 @@ This file is a style file for the MakeIndex program
\compatfile{bahasam}
}
-% driver files
-
-\usepreamble\drvpreamble
-
-\usedir{source/generic/babel}
-
-\generate{\file{babel.drv}{\from{babel.dtx}{driver}}
- \file{user.drv}{\from{babel.dtx}{driver,user}}}
-
% MakeIndex style files
\usepreamble\istpreamble
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbcompat.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx
index 895223cbed6..bf9c637eaeb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbcompat.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbcompat.dtx
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%
% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbidxglo.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbidxglo.dtx
index 787b52d01fb..58a43d9adbf 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbidxglo.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbidxglo.dtx
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%
% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbplain.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbplain.dtx
index dc4516aa865..b454b897fd6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/source/generic/babel/bbplain.dtx
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbplain.dtx
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
% \iffalse meta-comment
%
+% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%
@@ -16,7 +17,7 @@
%
% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%
-% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%
% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
@@ -31,16 +32,18 @@
% \iffalse
%<*dtx>
\ProvidesFile{bbplain.dtx}
- [2008/03/21 v1.0r Babel support for plain-based formats]
+ [2013/04/10 v1.0t Babel support for plain-based formats]
%</dtx>
%
%% File `bbplain.dtx'
%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
%% by Johannes Braams
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
%
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
%
% This file is part of the babel system, it provides the source
% code for the extra definitions needed to be able to use babel
@@ -66,7 +69,9 @@
% \changes{bbplain-1.0n}{1998/06/08}{Added the source for the format
% wrapper files}
%
-% \section{Not renaming \file{hyphen.tex}}
+% \section{Support for Plain \TeX}
+%
+% \subsection{Not renaming \file{hyphen.tex}}
% As Don Knuth has declared that the filename \file{hyphen.tex} may
% only be used to designate \emph{his} version of the american
% English hyphenation patterns, a new solution has to be found in
@@ -154,7 +159,7 @@
% make a copy of blplain.tex, rename it and replace \file{plain.tex}
% with the name of your format file.
%
-% \section{Support for formats based on \textsc{plain}\TeX}
+% \subsection{Emulating some \LaTeX{} features}
%
% The following code duplicates or emulates parts of \LaTeXe\ that
% are needed for \babel.
@@ -164,45 +169,19 @@
% \changes{bbplain-1.0f}{1996/07/09}{added \cs{@empty}}
% \changes{bbplain-1.0h}{1996/10/07}{Only load the necessary parts
% into the format, let this file be read agian by babel.def}
-% \begin{macrocode}
-%<*code>
-\ifx\adddialect\@undefined
-% \end{macrocode}
+% \changes{bbplain-1.0h}{2012/12/21}{Use \cs{orig@dump} as flag to
+% decide if we are building the format, defined in hyphen.cfg}
+%
% When |\adddialect| is still undefined we are making a
% format. In that case only the first part of this file is needed.
% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\@empty{}
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We need to define |\loadlocalcfg| for plain users as the
-% \LaTeX\ definition uses |\InputIfFileExists|.
-% \changes{bbplain-1.0c}{1995/07/26}{Added definition of
-% \cs{loadlocalcfg}}
-% \changes{bbplain-1.0d}{1996/01/08}{Also reset category codes after
-% loading the configuration file as \cs{AtEndOfPackage} is
-% undefined in this case}
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
- \openin0#1.cfg
- \ifeof0
- \closein0
- \else
- \closein0
- {\immediate\write16{*************************************}%
- \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}%
- \immediate\write16{*}%
- }
- \input #1.cfg\relax
- \fi
-% \end{macrocode}
-% We have to execute \cs{@endofldf} in this case
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \@endofldf
- }
+%<*code>
+\def\@empty{}
+\ifx\orig@dump\@undefined\else
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \changes{bbplain-1.0c}{1995/11/08}{Moved the \cs{dump} code here from
% \file{babel.dtx}}
-%
% \changes{bbplain-0.1}{1991/10/31}{Added redefinition of \cs{dump} to
% add a message to \cs{everyjob}}
% We want to add a message to the message \LaTeX$\:$2.09 puts in
@@ -220,7 +199,8 @@
% in order to be able to add something to the current contents of
% the register. This is necessary because the processing of
% hyphenation patterns happens long before \LaTeX\ fills the
-% register.\\
+% register.
+%
% There are some problems with this approach though.
% \begin{itemize}
% \item When someone wants to use several hyphenation patterns with
@@ -234,10 +214,7 @@
% only processed when creating a new format file there is one
% command that is sure to be used, |\dump|. Therefore the original
% |\dump| is saved in |\org@dump| and a new definition is supplied.
-% \begin{macrocode}
- \let\orig@dump=\dump
- \def\dump{%
-% \end{macrocode}
+%
% To make sure that \LaTeX$\:$2.09 executes the
% |\@begindocumenthook| we would want to alter |\begin{document}|,
% but as this done too often already, we add the new code at the
@@ -251,6 +228,7 @@
% \changes{bbplain-1.0j}{1997/01/07}{Add the definition of
% \cs{@begindocumenthook} to the \LaTeX2.09 format}
% \begin{macrocode}
+ \def\dump{%
\ifx\@ztryfc\@undefined
\else
\toks0=\expandafter{\@preamblecmds}
@@ -276,9 +254,37 @@
% \end{macrocode}
% The rest of this file is not processed by ini\TeX\ but during the
% normal document run.
+%
+% We need to define |\loadlocalcfg| for plain users as the
+% \LaTeX\ definition uses |\InputIfFileExists|. We have to execute
+% \cs{@endofldf} in this case.
+% \changes{bbplain-1.0c}{1995/07/26}{Added definition of
+% \cs{loadlocalcfg}}
+% \changes{bbplain-1.0d}{1996/01/08}{Also reset category codes after
+% loading the configuration file as \cs{AtEndOfPackage} is
+% undefined in this case}
+% \changes{bbplain-1.0s}{2012/12/21}{\cs{loadlocalcfg} not loaded in
+% the format}
+% \begin{macrocode}
+\def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
+ \openin0#1.cfg
+ \ifeof0
+ \closein0
+ \else
+ \closein0
+ {\immediate\write16{*************************************}%
+ \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}%
+ \immediate\write16{*}%
+ }
+ \input #1.cfg\relax
+ \fi
+ \@endofldf}
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
% A number of \LaTeX\ macro's that are needed later on.
% \changes{bbplain-1.0n}{1998/06/10}{Added \cs{@secondoftwo}}
% \changes{bbplain-1.0q}{1999/09/16}{Added \cs{@ifundefined}}
+% \changes{bbplain-1.0t}{2013/04/10}{Added \cs{@expandtwoargs}}
% \begin{macrocode}
\long\def\@firstofone#1{#1}
\long\def\@firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
@@ -299,12 +305,15 @@
\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}%
\xdef#1{\the\toks@}}}
\def\@namedef#1{\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname}
+\def\@nameuse#1{\csname #1\endcsname}
\def\@ifundefined#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\@firstoftwo
\else
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
\fi}
+\def\@expandtwoargs#1#2#3{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand#1{#2}{#3}}\reserved@a}
% \end{macrocode}
% \LaTeXe\ has the command |\@onlypreamble| which adds commands to
% a list of commands that are no longer needed after
@@ -348,6 +357,7 @@
\@onlypreamble\AtEndOfPackage
\def\@endofldf{}
\@onlypreamble\@endofldf
+\let\bbl@afterlang\@empty
% \end{macrocode}
% \LaTeX\ needs to be able to switch off writing to its auxiliary
% files; plain doesn't have them by default.
@@ -428,17 +438,18 @@
% inside conditionally executed code is not possible, hence the
% construct with the temporary definition of |\bbl@tempa|.
% \changes{bbplain-1.0o}{1998/07/02}{Added definition of \cs{in@}}
+% \changes{bbplain-1.0s}{2013/01/15}{Use \cs{bbl@tempa} as documented}
% \begin{macrocode}
-\def\bbl@tmpa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@}
+\def\bbl@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@}
\ifx\in@\@undefined
\def\in@#1#2{%
\def\in@@##1#1##2##3\in@@{%
\ifx\in@##2\in@false\else\in@true\fi}%
\in@@#2#1\in@\in@@}
\else
- \let\bbl@tmpa\@empty
+ \let\bbl@tempa\@empty
\fi
-\bbl@tmpa
+\bbl@tempa
% \end{macrocode}
%
% \LaTeX\ has a macro to check whether a certain package was loaded
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbunicode.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbunicode.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..79677ae1edb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/source/latex/babel/bbunicode.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,180 @@
+% \iffalse meta-comment
+%
+% Copyright 2013 Javier Bezos and any individual authors
+% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
+%
+% This file is part of the Babel system.
+% --------------------------------------
+%
+% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+% The latest version of this license is in
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%
+% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
+%
+% The list of all files belonging to the Babel system is
+% given in the file `manifest.bbl. See also `legal.bbl' for additional
+% information.
+%
+% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+% \fi
+% \CheckSum{795}
+%
+% \iffalse
+%<*dtx>
+\ProvidesFile{bbunicode.dtx}
+ [2013/04/22 v1.0b Babel hooks for Unicode engines]
+%</dtx>
+%
+%% File `bbunicode.dtx'
+%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
+%% Copyright (C) 2103
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%
+%<*filedriver>
+\documentclass{ltxdoc}
+\font\manual=logo10 % font used for the METAFONT logo, etc.
+\newcommand*\MF{{\manual META}\-{\manual FONT}}
+\newcommand*{\babel}{\textsf{babel}}
+\newcommand*{\langvar}{$\langle \it lang \rangle$}
+\newcommand*{\note}[1]{}
+\newcommand*{\pkg}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\Lopt}[1]{\textsf{#1}}
+\newcommand*{\file}[1]{\texttt{#1}}
+\begin{document}
+ \DocInput{bbunicode.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</filedriver>
+% \fi
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{bbunicode.dtx}
+% \StopEventually{}
+%
+% \section{Hooks for XeTeX and LuaTeX}
+%
+% \subsection{XeTeX}
+%
+% Unfortunately, the current encoding cannot be retrieved and
+% therefore it is reset always to |utf8|, which seems a sensible default.
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*xetex>
+\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode}
+\let\xebbl@stop\relax
+\AddBabelHook{xetex}{encodedcommands}{%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{#1}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty
+ \XeTeXinputencoding"bytes"%
+ \else
+ \XeTeXinputencoding"#1"%
+ \fi
+ \def\xebbl@stop{\XeTeXinputencoding"utf8"}}
+\AddBabelHook{xetex}{stopcommands}{%
+ \xebbl@stop
+ \let\xebbl@stop\relax}
+%</xetex>
+% \end{macrocode}
+% \subsection{LuaTeX}
+%
+% This part relies on the |lua| stripts in \pkg{luatex-hyphen} by Khaled
+% Hosny, \'{E}lie Roux, and Manuel
+% P\'{e}gouri\'{e}-Gonnard. \'{E}lie also improved the code below.
+% \changes{bbunicode~1.0b}{2013/04/22}{luatex-hyphen is loaded
+% with require. Changes supplied by \'{E}lie Roux.}
+%
+% \begin{macrocode}
+%<*luatex>
+\directlua{%
+ require("luatex-hyphen")
+ Babel = {}
+ function Babel.bytes(line)
+ return line:gsub("(.)",
+ function (chr) return unicode.utf8.char(string.byte(chr)) end)
+ end
+ function Babel.begin_process_input()
+ if luatexbase and luatexbase.add_to_callback then
+ luatexbase.add_to_callback('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes,'Babel.bytes')
+ else
+ Babel.callback = callback.find('process_input_buffer')
+ callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes)
+ end
+ end
+ function Babel.end_process_input ()
+ if luatexbase and luatexbase.remove_from_callback then
+ luatexbase.remove_from_callback('process_input_buffer','Babel.bytes')
+ else
+ callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.callback)
+ end
+ end
+}
+\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode}
+\let\luabbl@stop\relax
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{encodedcommands}{%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{utf8}\def\bbl@tempb{#1}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\else
+ \directlua{Babel.begin_process_input()}%
+ \def\luabbl@stop{%
+ \directlua{Babel.end_process_input()}}%
+ \fi}%
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{stopcommands}{%
+ \luabbl@stop
+ \let\luabbl@stop\relax}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{patterns}{%
+ \ifx\directlua\relax\else
+ \ifcsname lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language\endcsname \else
+ \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}%
+ \directlua{
+ luatexhyphen.loadlanguage('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}',
+ '\the\language')}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{adddialect}{%
+ \ifx\directlua\relax\else
+ \directlua{
+ luatexhyphen.adddialect('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}',
+ '\luatexluaescapestring{\string#2}')
+ }%
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{everylanguage}{%
+ \directlua{
+ processnow = (tex.language == 0) or
+ (luatexhyphen.lookupname('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}') == nil)}%
+ \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax
+ \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}%
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadpatterns}{%
+ \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax
+ \input #1\relax
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadexceptions}{%
+ \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax
+ \input #1\relax
+ \fi
+ \directlua{processnow = nil}}
+%</luatex>
+% \end{macrocode}
+%
+\endinput
+%%
+%% \CharacterTable
+%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
+%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
+%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
+%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
+%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
+%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
+%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
+%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
+%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
+%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
+%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/8859-8.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/8859-8.def
deleted file mode 100644
index da8ab9e3241..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/8859-8.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,171 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `8859-8.def',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `8859-8')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
- \ProvidesFile{8859-8.def}
- [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file]
-%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\makeatletter
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcurrency}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcurrency}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar}
-\providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}}
-\providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}}
-\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
-%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the
-%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file.
-\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
-\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
-\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
-\DeclareInputText{164}{\textcurrency}
-\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen}
-\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar}
-\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
-\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
-\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright}
-\DeclareInputMath{170}{\times}
-\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
-\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot}
-\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
-\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered}
-\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
-\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
-\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
-\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
-\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
-\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
-\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
-\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
-\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
-\DeclareInputText{184}{\c\ }
-\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior}
-\DeclareInputMath{186}{\div}
-\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
-\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
-\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
-\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters}
-\DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef}
-\DeclareInputText{225}{\hebbet}
-\DeclareInputText{226}{\hebgimel}
-\DeclareInputText{227}{\hebdalet}
-\DeclareInputText{228}{\hebhe}
-\DeclareInputText{229}{\hebvav}
-\DeclareInputText{230}{\hebzayin}
-\DeclareInputText{231}{\hebhet}
-\DeclareInputText{232}{\hebtet}
-\DeclareInputText{233}{\hebyod}
-\DeclareInputText{234}{\hebfinalkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{235}{\hebkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{236}{\heblamed}
-\DeclareInputText{237}{\hebfinalmem}
-\DeclareInputText{238}{\hebmem}
-\DeclareInputText{239}{\hebfinalnun}
-\DeclareInputText{240}{\hebnun}
-\DeclareInputText{241}{\hebsamekh}
-\DeclareInputText{242}{\hebayin}
-\DeclareInputText{243}{\hebfinalpe}
-\DeclareInputText{244}{\hebpe}
-\DeclareInputText{245}{\hebfinaltsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{246}{\hebtsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{247}{\hebqof}
-\DeclareInputText{248}{\hebresh}
-\DeclareInputText{249}{\hebshin}
-\DeclareInputText{250}{\hebtav}
-\newcommand{\DisableNikud}{%
- \DeclareInputText{192}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{193}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{194}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{195}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{196}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{197}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{198}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{199}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{200}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{201}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{203}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{204}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{205}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{206}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{207}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{208}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{209}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{210}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{211}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{212}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{213}{}%
- \DeclareInputText{214}{}%
-}
-\makeatother
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `8859-8.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty
index f03265330da..7da72f23079 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/UKenglish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `UKenglish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty
index 76ba93b37b6..1a7cef61597 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/USenglish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `USenglish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty
index e0807fc5516..677aefaf5b0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/afrikaans.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `afrikaans')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 363feabb3d4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,136 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `albanian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% albanian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{albanian}
- [2007/10/20 v1.0c albanian support from the babel system]
-\LdfInit{albanian}\captionsalbanian
-\ifx\l@albanian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Albanian}
- \adddialect\l@albanian0\fi
-\addto\captionsalbanian{%
- \def\prefacename{Parathenia}%
- \def\refname{Referencat}%
- \def\abstractname{P\"ermbledhja}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitulli}%
- \def\appendixname{Shtesa}%
- \def\contentsname{P\"ermbajta}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurat}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabelat}%
- \def\indexname{Indeksi}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Pjesa}%
- \def\enclname{Lidhja}%
- \def\ccname{Kopja}%
- \def\headtoname{P\"er}%
- \def\pagename{Faqe}%
- \def\seename{shiko}%
- \def\alsoname{shiko dhe}%
- \def\proofname{V\"ertetim}%
- \def\glossaryname{P\"erhasja e Fjal\"eve}%
- }%
-\def\datealbanian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Janar\or Shkurt\or Mars\or Prill\or Maj\or
- Qershor\or Korrik\or Gusht\or Shtator\or Tetor\or N\"entor\or
- Dhjetor\fi \space \number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasalbanian{\languageshorthands{albanian}}
-\addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"e}{\textormath{\v e}{\check e}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"E}{\textormath{\v E}{\check E}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{albanian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\ifx\fmtname plain \else
- \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse
- \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI
- \@afterindentfalse}
- \addto\extrasalbanian{\bbl@frenchindent}
- \addto\noextrasalbanian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}
-\fi
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh
-\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth
-\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits}
-\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits}
-\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits}
-\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\ldf@finish{albanian}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `albanian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty
index 5f0c385ea80..fa5e1a44c3e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/albanian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `albanian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty
index 8f6d370e595..21e6a01f55c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/american.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `american')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/athnum.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/athnum.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index ae42f15a2da..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/athnum.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,102 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `athnum.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% athnum.dtx (with options: `package')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% \CheckSum{125}
-%% This is file `athnum.dtx'
-%% (c) 1997-2007 Apostolos Syropoulos.
-%% All rights reserved.
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[1996/01/01]
-\ProvidesPackage{athnum}[2003/08/24\space v1.1]
-\typeout{Package: `athnum' v1.1\space <2003/08/24> (A. Syropoulos)}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{%
- \PackageError{athnum}{%
- `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak
- package hasn't been loaded}{%
- The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak
- are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak
- typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak
- it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax
- }}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiDelta}{LGR}{\char"02\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiEta}{LGR}{\char"03\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiChi}{LGR}{\char"04\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\PiMu}{LGR}{\char"05\relax}
-\newcount\@ath@num
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\@@athnum}[1]{%
- \@ath@num#1\relax
- \ifnum\@ath@num<\@ne%
- \space%
- \PackageWarning{athnum}{%
- Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}%
- \else\ifnum\@ath@num>249999%
- \space%
- \PackageWarning{athnum}{%
- Illegal value (\the\@ath@num) for athenian numeral}%
- \else
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>49999\do{%
- \PiMu\advance\@ath@num-50000}%
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>9999\do{%
- M\advance\@ath@num-\@M}%
- \ifnum\@ath@num>4999%
- \PiChi\advance\@ath@num-5000%
- \fi\relax
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>999\do{%
- Q\advance\@ath@num-\@m}%
- \ifnum\@ath@num>499%
- \PiEta\advance\@ath@num-500%
- \fi\relax
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>99\do{%
- H\advance\@ath@num-100}%
- \ifnum\@ath@num>49%
- \PiDelta\advance\@ath@num-50%
- \fi\relax
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>9\do{%
- D\advance\@ath@num by-10}%
- \@whilenum\@ath@num>4\do{%
- P\advance\@ath@num-5}%
- \ifcase\@ath@num\or I\or II\or III\or IIII\fi%
- \fi\fi}
-\def\@athnum#1{%
- \expandafter\@@athnum\expandafter{\the#1}}
-\def\athnum#1{%
- \@ath@num#1\relax
- \@athnum{\@ath@num}}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `athnum.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty
index 189be4f1d52..2c1d97af0a8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/austrian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `austrian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def
index 6ba9f816321..840bebbc8a9 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.def
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% babel.dtx (with options: `core')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -36,18 +37,19 @@
%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
%% File 'babel.dtx'
-%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package]
+%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package]
%% Babel package for LaTeX2e.
%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams,
%% TeXniek
%% all rights reserved.
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\ifx\bbl@afterfi\@undefined
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
+\ifx\ldf@quit\@undefined
\else
- \bbl@afterfi\endinput
+ \expandafter\endinput
\fi
\ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined
\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
@@ -56,14 +58,60 @@
}
\fi
\ProvidesFile{babel.def}
- [2008/07/08 v3.8m %
- Babel common definitions]
+ [2013/04/15 v3.9e %
+ Babel common definitions]
\ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined
\input plain.def\relax
\fi
-\ifx\iflanguage\@undefined
+\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e}
+\ifx\bbl@version\bbl@tempa\else
\input switch.def\relax
\fi
+\def\bbl@for#1#2#3{\@for#1:=#2\do{\ifx#1\@empty\else#3\fi}}
+\def\bbl@add#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ {\def#1{#2}}%
+ {\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}}}
+\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}%
+\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1}
+\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@undefined
+ \def\bbl@opt@safe{BR}
+ \let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+ \let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil
+\fi
+\ifx\BabelModifiers\@undefined\let\BabelModifiers\relax\fi
+\ifx\bbl@afterlang\@undefined\let\bbl@afterlang\relax\fi
+\providecommand\AfterBabelLanguage[2]{}
+\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}%
+\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1}
+\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+\def\bbl@withactive#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \lccode`~=`#2\relax
+ \lowercase{\endgroup#1~}}
+\def\bbl@redefine#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
+\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine
+\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
+\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long
+\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}
+\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust
\AtEndOfPackage{\edef\latinencoding{\cf@encoding}}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\gdef\latinencoding{OT1}%
@@ -86,20 +134,17 @@
\catcode`\@=11\relax
\chardef\eqcatcode=\catcode`\=
\catcode`\==12\relax
- \let\bbl@tempa\relax
\expandafter\if\expandafter\@backslashchar
\expandafter\@car\string#2\@nil
- \ifx#2\@undefined
- \else
- \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}}
+ \ifx#2\@undefined\else
+ \ldf@quit{#1}%
\fi
\else
- \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \def\bbl@tempa{\ldf@quit{#1}}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#2\endcsname\relax\else
+ \ldf@quit{#1}%
\fi
\fi
- \bbl@tempa
+ \let\bbl@screset\@empty
\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined
\let\originalTeX\@empty
\else
@@ -109,215 +154,166 @@
\expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}%
\catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
\catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax
- \endinput
-}
+ \endinput}
\def\ldf@finish#1{%
\loadlocalcfg{#1}%
+ \bbl@afterlang
+ \let\bbl@afterlang\relax
+ \let\BabelModifiers\relax
+ \let\bbl@screset\relax
\expandafter\main@language\expandafter{#1}%
\catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
- \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax
- }
+ \catcode`\==\eqcatcode \let\eqcatcode\relax}
\@onlypreamble\LdfInit
\@onlypreamble\ldf@quit
\@onlypreamble\ldf@finish
\def\main@language#1{%
\def\bbl@main@language{#1}%
\let\languagename\bbl@main@language
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- }
-\ifx\l@english\@undefined
- \let\l@english\z@
-\fi
-\main@language{english}
+ \bbl@patterns{\languagename}}
\AtBeginDocument{%
\expandafter\selectlanguage\expandafter{\bbl@main@language}}
-\def\bbl@add@special#1{\begingroup
+\def\bbl@add@special#1{%
+ \begingroup
\def\do{\noexpand\do\noexpand}%
\def\@makeother{\noexpand\@makeother\noexpand}%
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
- \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}%
- \fi}%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials\do#1}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
+ \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize\@makeother#1}%
+ \fi}%
\x}
-\def\bbl@remove@special#1{\begingroup
+\def\bbl@remove@special#1{%
+ \begingroup
\def\x##1##2{\ifnum`#1=`##2\noexpand\@empty
\else\noexpand##1\noexpand##2\fi}%
\def\do{\x\do}%
\def\@makeother{\x\@makeother}%
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
- \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
- \fi}%
+ \edef\x{\endgroup
+ \def\noexpand\dospecials{\dospecials}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname @sanitize\endcsname\relax \else
+ \def\noexpand\@sanitize{\@sanitize}%
+ \fi}%
\x}
-\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1}
-\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+\def\bbl@active@def#1#2#3#4{%
+ \@namedef{#3#1}{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select#2#1{#3@arg#1}{#4#1}%
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\endcsname
+ \fi}%
+ \long\@namedef{#3@arg#1}##1{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@afterelse\csname#4#1\endcsname##1%
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi\csname#2@sh@#1@\string##1@\endcsname
+ \fi}}%
\def\initiate@active@char#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string##1\endcsname\relax
- \bbl@afterfi{\@initiate@active@char{#1}}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@withactive
+ {\expandafter\@initiate@active@char\expandafter}#1\string#1#1%
\fi}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\~\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@initiate@active@char##1{%
- \ifcat\noexpand##1\noexpand~\relax
- \@ifundefined{normal@char\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname##1%
- \expandafter\gdef
- \expandafter##1%
- \expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1%
- \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}{}%
- \else
- \@activated{##1}%
- \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{##1}%
- \ifx##1'%
- \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s
- \@namedef{normal@char\string##1}{%
- \textormath{##1}{^\bgroup\prim@s}}%
- \fi
- \ifx##1^%
- \gdef\bbl@act@caret{%
- \ifmmode
- \csname normal@char\string^\endcsname
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- {\if@safe@actives
- \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \fi}
- \fi
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}{}{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\catcode`\noexpand##1\the\catcode`##1}%
- \expandafter\AtEndOfPackage\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}}%
- \@tempcnta=\lccode`\~
- \lccode`~=`##1%
- \lowercase{%
- \catcode`~\active
- \expandafter\bbl@add@special
- \csname \string##1\endcsname
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \catcode`##1\active
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{%
- \string\catcode`##1\string\active}%
- \fi}%
- \expandafter\gdef
- \expandafter~%
- \expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix\expandafter##1%
- \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}}%
- \lccode`\~\@tempcnta
- \fi
- \ifx##1^%
- \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{\bbl@act@caret}%
- \else
- \@namedef{active@char\string##1}{%
- \if@safe@actives
- \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname user@active\string##1\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \fi
- \@namedef{user@active\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\user@group##1%
- {user@active@arg\string##1}{language@active\string##1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \long\@namedef{user@active@arg\string##1}####1{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse
- \csname language@active\string##1\endcsname####1%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \user@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@%
- \endcsname
- \fi}%
- \@namedef{\user@group @sh@\string##1@@}{%
- \csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname}
- \@namedef{language@active\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\language@group##1%
- {language@active@arg\string##1}{system@active\string##1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \long\@namedef{language@active@arg\string##1}####1{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse
- \csname system@active\string##1\endcsname####1%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \language@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@%
- \endcsname
- \fi}%
- \@namedef{system@active\string##1}{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@sh@select\system@group##1%
- {system@active@arg\string##1}{normal@char\string##1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \long\@namedef{system@active@arg\string##1}####1{%
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \relax
- \bbl@afterelse\csname normal@char\string##1\endcsname####1%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \csname \system@group @sh@\string##1@\string####1@\endcsname
- \fi}%
- \@namedef{user@sh@\string##1@\string\protect@}{%
- \csname user@active\string##1\endcsname}%
- }%
- }\x
+\def\@initiate@active@char#1#2#3{%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oricat@#2\endcsname{%
+ \catcode`#2=\the\catcode`#2\relax}%
+ \ifx#1\@undefined
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{%
+ \let\noexpand#1\noexpand\@undefined}%
+ \else
+ \expandafter\let\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname#1%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@oridef@#2\endcsname{%
+ \let\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx#1#3\relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname normal@char#2\endcsname#3%
+ \else
+ \bbl@info{Making #2 an active character}%
+ \ifnum\mathcode`#2="8000
+ \@namedef{normal@char#2}{%
+ \textormath{#3}{\csname bbl@oridef@@#2\endcsname}}%
+ \else
+ \@namedef{normal@char#2}{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \bbl@restoreactive{#2}%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \catcode`#2\active
+ \if@filesw
+ \immediate\write\@mainaux{\catcode`\string#2\active}%
+ \fi}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@add@special\csname#2\endcsname
+ \catcode`#2\active
+ \fi
+ \let\bbl@tempa\@firstoftwo
+ \if\string^#2%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\textormath}%
+ \else
+ \ifx\bbl@mathnormal\@undefined\else
+ \let\bbl@tempa\bbl@mathnormal
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \expandafter\edef\csname active@char#2\endcsname{%
+ \bbl@tempa
+ {\noexpand\if@safe@actives
+ \noexpand\expandafter
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname
+ \noexpand\else
+ \noexpand\expandafter
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname
+ \noexpand\fi}%
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}}%
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{active@#2}{%
+ \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname active@char#2\endcsname}%
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{normal@#2}{%
+ \noexpand\active@prefix\noexpand#1%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname bbl@normal@#2\endcsname
+ \bbl@active@def#2\user@group{user@active}{language@active}%
+ \bbl@active@def#2\language@group{language@active}{system@active}%
+ \bbl@active@def#2\system@group{system@active}{normal@char}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@@\endcsname
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#2\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname\user@group @sh@#2@\string\protect@\endcsname
+ {\expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#2\endcsname}%
+ \if\string'#2%
+ \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s
+ \let\active@math@prime#1%
+ \fi}
+\@ifpackagewith{babel}{KeepShorthandsActive}%
+ {\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}%
+ {\def\bbl@restoreactive#1{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{%
+ \noexpand\AfterBabelLanguage\noexpand\CurrentOption
+ {\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}%
+ \noexpand\AtEndOfPackage{\catcode`#1=\the\catcode`#1\relax}}%
+ \bbl@tempa}%
+ \AtEndOfPackage{\let\bbl@restoreactive\@gobble}}
\def\bbl@sh@select#1#2{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\relax
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname\relax
\bbl@afterelse\bbl@scndcs
\else
- \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname
- \fi
-}
+ \bbl@afterfi\csname#1@sh@#2@sel\endcsname
+ \fi}
\def\active@prefix#1{%
\ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
\else
\ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterfi\noexpand#1\@gobble
+ \noexpand#1%
\else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterfi\protect#1\@gobble
+ \protect#1%
\fi
+ \expandafter\@gobble
\fi}
\newif\if@safe@actives
\@safe@activesfalse
\def\bbl@restore@actives{\if@safe@actives\@safe@activesfalse\fi}
\def\bbl@activate#1{%
- \expandafter\def
- \expandafter#1\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix
- \expandafter#1\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}%
-}
+ \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1%
+ \csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname}
\def\bbl@deactivate#1{%
- \expandafter\def
- \expandafter#1\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\active@prefix
- \expandafter#1\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
-}
+ \bbl@withactive{\expandafter\let\expandafter}#1%
+ \csname bbl@normal@\string#1\endcsname}
\def\bbl@firstcs#1#2{\csname#1\endcsname}
\def\bbl@scndcs#1#2{\csname#2\endcsname}
\def\declare@shorthand#1#2{\@decl@short{#1}#2\@nil}
@@ -325,98 +321,161 @@
\def\bbl@tempa{#3}%
\ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty
\expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@scndcs
+ \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@}{}%
+ {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\endcsname\bbl@tempa
+ \else
+ \bbl@info
+ {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\\%
+ in language \CurrentOption}%
+ \fi}%
\@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@}{#4}%
\else
\expandafter\let\csname #1@sh@\string#2@sel\endcsname\bbl@firstcs
+ \@ifundefined{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{}%
+ {\def\bbl@tempa{#4}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@\endcsname\bbl@tempa
+ \else
+ \bbl@info
+ {Redefining #1 shorthand \string#2\string#3\\%
+ in language \CurrentOption}%
+ \fi}%
\@namedef{#1@sh@\string#2@\string#3@}{#4}%
\fi}
-\def\textormath#1#2{%
+\def\textormath{%
\ifmmode
- \bbl@afterelse#2%
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
\else
- \bbl@afterfi#1%
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
\fi}
\def\user@group{user}
\def\language@group{english}
\def\system@group{system}
-\def\useshorthands#1{%
- \def\user@group{user}%
- \initiate@active@char{#1}%
- \@tempcnta\lccode`\~
- \lccode`~=`#1%
- \lowercase{\catcode`~\active\bbl@activate{~}}%
- \lccode`\~\@tempcnta}
-\def\defineshorthand{\declare@shorthand{user}}
+\def\useshorthands{%
+ \@ifstar\bbl@usesh@s{\bbl@usesh@x{}}}
+\def\bbl@usesh@s#1{%
+ \bbl@usesh@x
+ {\AddBabelHook{babel-sh-\string#1}{afterextras}{\bbl@activate{#1}}}%
+ {#1}}
+\def\bbl@usesh@x#1#2{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}%
+ {\def\user@group{user}%
+ \initiate@active@char{#2}%
+ #1%
+ \bbl@activate{#2}}%
+ {\bbl@error
+ {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)}
+ {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\%
+ turned off in the package options}}}
+\def\user@language@group{user@\language@group}
+\def\bbl@set@user@generic#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{user@generic@active#1}%
+ {\bbl@active@def#1\user@language@group{user@active}{user@generic@active}%
+ \bbl@active@def#1\user@group{user@generic@active}{language@active}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@@\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname normal@char#1\endcsname}%
+ \expandafter\edef\csname#2@sh@#1@\string\protect@\endcsname{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname user@active#1\endcsname}}%
+ \@empty}
+\newcommand\defineshorthand[3][user]{%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\zap@space#1 \@empty}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{%
+ \if*\expandafter\@car\bbl@tempb\@nil
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{user@\expandafter\@gobble\bbl@tempb}%
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \bbl@set@user@generic{\expandafter\string\@car#2\@nil}\bbl@tempb
+ \fi
+ \declare@shorthand{\bbl@tempb}{#2}{#3}}}
\def\languageshorthands#1{\def\language@group{#1}}
\def\aliasshorthand#1#2{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax
- \ifx\document\@notprerr
- \@notshorthand{#2}
- \else
- \initiate@active@char{#2}%
- \@tempcnta\lccode`\~
- \lccode`~=`#2%
- \lowercase{\let~#1}%
- \lccode`\~\@tempcnta
- \fi
- \fi
-}
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}%
+ {\expandafter\ifx\csname active@char\string#2\endcsname\relax
+ \ifx\document\@notprerr
+ \@notshorthand{#2}%
+ \else
+ \initiate@active@char{#2}%
+ \expandafter\let\csname active@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname active@char\string#1\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\csname normal@char\string#2\expandafter\endcsname
+ \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname
+ \bbl@activate{#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}%
+ {\bbl@error
+ {Cannot declare a shorthand turned off (\string#2)}
+ {Sorry, but you cannot use shorthands which have been\\%
+ turned off in the package options}}}
\def\@notshorthand#1{%
- \PackageError{babel}{%
- The character `\string #1' should be made
- a shorthand character;\MessageBreak
- add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to
- the preamble.\MessageBreak
- I will ignore your instruction}{}%
- }
-\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{on}#1\@nil}
-\newcommand*\shorthandoff[1]{\bbl@switch@sh{off}#1\@nil}
-\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2#3\@nil{%
- \@ifundefined{active@char\string#2}{%
- \PackageError{babel}{%
- The character '\string #2' is not a shorthand character
- in \languagename}{%
- Maybe you made a typing mistake?\MessageBreak
- I will ignore your instruction}}{%
- \csname bbl@switch@sh@#1\endcsname#2}%
- \ifx#3\@empty\else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh{#1}#3\@nil
+ \bbl@error{%
+ The character `\string #1' should be made a shorthand character;\\%
+ add the command \string\useshorthands\string{#1\string} to
+ the preamble.\\%
+ I will ignore your instruction}{}}
+\newcommand*\shorthandon[1]{\bbl@switch@sh\@ne#1\@nnil}
+\DeclareRobustCommand*\shorthandoff{%
+ \@ifstar{\bbl@shorthandoff\tw@}{\bbl@shorthandoff\z@}}
+\def\bbl@shorthandoff#1#2{\bbl@switch@sh#1#2\@nnil}
+\def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{%
+ \ifx#2\@nnil\else
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#2}%
+ {\bbl@error
+ {I cannot switch `\string#2' on or off--not a shorthand}%
+ {This character is not a shorthand. Maybe you made\\%
+ a typing mistake? I will ignore your instruction}}%
+ {\ifcase#1%
+ \catcode`#212\relax
+ \or
+ \catcode`#2\active
+ \or
+ \csname bbl@oricat@\string#2\endcsname
+ \csname bbl@oridef@\string#2\endcsname
+ \fi}%
+ \bbl@afterfi\bbl@switch@sh#1%
\fi}
-\def\bbl@switch@sh@off#1{\catcode`#112\relax}
-\begingroup
- \catcode`\~\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\bbl@switch@sh@on##1{%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`~=`##1%
- \lowercase{\endgroup
- \catcode`~\active
- }%
- }%
- }
-\x
-\declare@shorthand{system}{"}{\csname normal@char\string"\endcsname}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{'}{%
- \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}%
- {\sp\bgroup\prim@s}}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{`}{\csname normal@char\string`\endcsname}
+\def\babelshorthand{\active@prefix\babelshorthand\bbl@putsh}
+\def\bbl@putsh#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@active@\string#1}%
+ {\bbl@putsh@i#1\@empty\@nnil}%
+ {\csname bbl@active@\string#1\endcsname}}
+\def\bbl@putsh@i#1#2\@nnil{%
+ \csname\languagename @sh@\string#1@%
+ \ifx\@empty#2\else\string#2@\fi\endcsname}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil\else
+ \let\bbl@s@initiate@active@char\initiate@active@char
+ \def\initiate@active@char#1{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@initiate@active@char{#1}}{}}
+ \let\bbl@s@switch@sh\bbl@switch@sh
+ \def\bbl@switch@sh#1#2{%
+ \ifx#2\@nnil\else
+ \bbl@afterfi
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#2}{\bbl@s@switch@sh#1{#2}}{\bbl@switch@sh#1}%
+ \fi}
+ \let\bbl@s@activate\bbl@activate
+ \def\bbl@activate#1{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@activate{#1}}{}}
+ \let\bbl@s@deactivate\bbl@deactivate
+ \def\bbl@deactivate#1{%
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{#1}{\bbl@s@deactivate{#1}}{}}
+\fi
\def\bbl@prim@s{%
\prime\futurelet\@let@token\bbl@pr@m@s}
+\def\bbl@if@primes#1#2{%
+ \ifx#1\@let@token
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else\ifx#2\@let@token
+ \bbl@afterelse\expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \bbl@afterfi\expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi\fi}
\begingroup
- \catcode`\'\active\let'\relax
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\bbl@pr@m@s{%
- \ifx'\@let@token
- \expandafter\pr@@@s
- \else
- \ifx^\@let@token
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\pr@@@t
- \else
- \egroup
- \fi
- \fi}%
- }
-\x
+ \catcode`\^=7 \catcode`\*=\active \lccode`\*=`\^
+ \catcode`\'=12 \catcode`\"=\active \lccode`\"=`\'
+ \lowercase{%
+ \gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{%
+ \bbl@if@primes"'%
+ \pr@@@s
+ {\bbl@if@primes*^\pr@@@t\egroup}}}
+\endgroup
\initiate@active@char{~}
\declare@shorthand{system}{~}{\leavevmode\nobreak\ }
\bbl@activate{~}
@@ -426,48 +485,46 @@
\def\f@encoding{OT1}
\fi
\newcommand\languageattribute[2]{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
+ \def\bbl@tempc{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempc
+ \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempc{%
\@for\bbl@attr:=#2\do{%
\ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined
\in@false
\else
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-\bbl@attr,}%
- {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}%
- \bbl@tempa
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}%
\fi
\ifin@
- \PackageWarning{Babel}{%
- You have more than once selected the attribute
- '\bbl@attr'\MessageBreak for language #1}%
+ \bbl@warning{%
+ You have more than once selected the attribute '\bbl@attr'\\%
+ for language #1}%
\else
\edef\bbl@tempa{%
- \noexpand\bbl@add@list\noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{#1-\bbl@attr}}%
+ \noexpand\bbl@add@list
+ \noexpand\bbl@known@attribs{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}}%
\bbl@tempa
- \edef\bbl@tempa{#1-\bbl@attr}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\bbl@tempc-\bbl@attr}%
\expandafter\bbl@ifknown@ttrib\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}\bbl@attributes%
- {\csname#1@attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}%
- {\@attrerr{#1}{\bbl@attr}}%
- \fi
- }
- \fi}
+ {\csname\bbl@tempc @attr@\bbl@attr\endcsname}%
+ {\@attrerr{\bbl@tempc}{\bbl@attr}}%
+ \fi}}}
\@onlypreamble\languageattribute
- \newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}%
- {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
+\newcommand*{\@attrerr}[2]{%
+ \bbl@error
+ {The attribute #2 is unknown for language #1.}%
+ {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
\def\bbl@declare@ttribute#1#2#3{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#2,}{,\BabelModifiers,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \AfterBabelLanguage{#1}{\languageattribute{#1}{#2}}%
+ \fi
\bbl@add@list\bbl@attributes{#1-#2}%
- \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}%
- }
+ \expandafter\def\csname#1@attr@#2\endcsname{#3}}
\def\bbl@ifattributeset#1#2#3#4{%
\ifx\bbl@known@attribs\@undefined
\in@false
\else
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\noexpand\in@{,#1-#2,}%
- {,\bbl@known@attribs,}}%
- \bbl@tempa
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,#1-#2,}{,\bbl@known@attribs,}%
\fi
\ifin@
\bbl@afterelse#3%
@@ -511,9 +568,9 @@
\newcount\babel@savecnt
\babel@beginsave
\def\babel@save#1{%
- \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname #1\relax
+ \expandafter\let\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname#1\relax
\begingroup
- \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX \let#1=}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\originalTeX\let#1=}%
\edef\x{\endgroup
\def\noexpand\originalTeX{\the\toks@ \expandafter\noexpand
\csname babel@\number\babel@savecnt\endcsname\relax}}%
@@ -540,32 +597,88 @@
\def#1{#2}%
\else
{\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}%
- \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}%
+ \xdef#1{\the\toks@}}%
\fi
- \fi
-}
-\def\bbl@t@one{T1}
-\def\allowhyphens{%
- \ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi}
+ \fi}
+\@onlypreamble\babelhyphenation
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \newcommand\babelhyphenation[2][\@empty]{%
+ \ifx\bbl@hyphenation@\relax
+ \let\bbl@hyphenation@\@empty
+ \fi
+ \ifx\bbl@hyphlist\@empty\else
+ \bbl@warning{%
+ You must not intermingle \string\selectlanguage\space and\\%
+ \string\babelhyphenation\space or some exception will not\\%
+ be taken into account. Reported}%
+ \fi
+ \ifx\@empty#1%
+ \protected@edef\bbl@hyphenation@{\bbl@hyphenation@\space#2}%
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\zap@space#1 \@empty}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb{%
+ \bbl@fixname\bbl@tempa
+ \bbl@iflanguage\bbl@tempa{%
+ \bbl@csarg\protected@edef{hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa}%
+ \@empty
+ {\csname bbl@hyphenation@\bbl@tempa\endcsname\space}%
+ #2}}}%
+ \fi}}
\def\bbl@allowhyphens{\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
+\def\bbl@t@one{T1}
+\def\allowhyphens{\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one\else\bbl@allowhyphens\fi}
+\newcommand\babelnullhyphen{\char\hyphenchar\font}
+\def\babelhyphen{\active@prefix\babelhyphen\bbl@hyphen}
+\def\bbl@hyphen{%
+ \@ifstar{\bbl@hyphen@i @}{\bbl@hyphen@i\@empty}}
+\def\bbl@hyphen@i#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty}%
+ {\csname bbl@#1usehyphen\endcsname{\discretionary{#2}{}{#2}}}%
+ {\csname bbl@hy@#1#2\@empty\endcsname}}
+\def\bbl@usehyphen#1{%
+ \leavevmode
+ \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\nobreak\else\nobreak#1\fi
+ \hskip\z@skip}
+\def\bbl@@usehyphen#1{%
+ \leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\mbox{#1}\else#1\fi}
+\def\bbl@hyphenchar{%
+ \ifnum\hyphenchar\font=\m@ne
+ \babelnullhyphen
+ \else
+ \char\hyphenchar\font
+ \fi}
+\def\bbl@hy@soft{\bbl@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}}
+\def\bbl@hy@@soft{\bbl@@usehyphen{\discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{}{}}}
+\def\bbl@hy@hard{\bbl@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar}
+\def\bbl@hy@@hard{\bbl@@usehyphen\bbl@hyphenchar}
+\def\bbl@hy@nobreak{\bbl@usehyphen{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}\nobreak}}
+\def\bbl@hy@@nobreak{\mbox{\bbl@hyphenchar}}
+\def\bbl@hy@repeat{%
+ \bbl@usehyphen{%
+ \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}%
+ \nobreak}}
+\def\bbl@hy@@repeat{%
+ \bbl@@usehyphen{%
+ \discretionary{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}{\bbl@hyphenchar}}}
+\def\bbl@hy@empty{\hskip\z@skip}
+\def\bbl@hy@@empty{\discretionary{}{}{}}
+\def\bbl@disc#1#2{\nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\bbl@allowhyphens}
\def\set@low@box#1{\setbox\tw@\hbox{,}\setbox\z@\hbox{#1}%
\dimen\z@\ht\z@ \advance\dimen\z@ -\ht\tw@%
\setbox\z@\hbox{\lower\dimen\z@ \box\z@}\ht\z@\ht\tw@ \dp\z@\dp\tw@}
-\def\save@sf@q #1{\leavevmode
- \begingroup
- \edef\@SF{\spacefactor \the\spacefactor}#1\@SF
- \endgroup
-}
-\def\bbl@disc#1#2{%
- \nobreak\discretionary{#2-}{}{#1}\allowhyphens}
+\def\save@sf@q#1{\leavevmode
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\@SF{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}#1\@SF
+ \endgroup}
\ProvideTextCommand{\quotedblbase}{OT1}{%
\save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquotedblright\/}%
- \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}}
+ \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}}
\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotedblbase}{%
\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotedblbase}}
\ProvideTextCommand{\quotesinglbase}{OT1}{%
\save@sf@q{\set@low@box{\textquoteright\/}%
- \box\z@\kern-.04em\allowhyphens}}
+ \box\z@\kern-.04em\bbl@allowhyphens}}
\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\quotesinglbase}{%
\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\quotesinglbase}}
\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%
@@ -573,14 +686,14 @@
\ll
\else
\save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\allowhyphens}%
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
\fi}
\ProvideTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%
\ifmmode
\gg
\else
\save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\allowhyphens}%
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
\fi}
\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guillemotleft}{%
\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guillemotleft}}
@@ -591,23 +704,23 @@
<%
\else
\save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\allowhyphens}%
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle<$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
\fi}
\ProvideTextCommand{\guilsinglright}{OT1}{%
\ifmmode
>%
\else
\save@sf@q{\nobreak
- \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\allowhyphens}%
+ \raise.2ex\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle>$}\bbl@allowhyphens}%
\fi}
\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglleft}{%
\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglleft}}
\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\guilsinglright}{%
\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\guilsinglright}}
\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{OT1}{%
- \allowhyphens i\kern-0.02em j\allowhyphens}
+ i\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens j}
\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{OT1}{%
- \allowhyphens I\kern-0.02em J\allowhyphens}
+ I\kern-0.02em\bbl@allowhyphens J}
\DeclareTextCommand{\ij}{T1}{\char188}
\DeclareTextCommand{\IJ}{T1}{\char156}
\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\ij}{%
@@ -685,7 +798,7 @@
\def\umlauthigh{%
\def\bbl@umlauta##1{\leavevmode\bgroup%
\expandafter\accent\csname\f@encoding dqpos\endcsname
- ##1\allowhyphens\egroup}%
+ ##1\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}%
\let\bbl@umlaute\bbl@umlauta}
\def\umlautlow{%
\def\bbl@umlauta{\protect\lower@umlaut}}
@@ -718,6 +831,192 @@
\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{O}{\bbl@umlauta{O}}%
\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{U}{\bbl@umlauta{U}}%
}
+\def\bbl@recatcode#1{%
+ \@tempcnta="7F
+ \def\bbl@tempa{%
+ \ifnum\@tempcnta>"FF\else
+ \catcode\@tempcnta=#1\relax
+ \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa
+ \fi}%
+ \bbl@tempa}
+\@onlypreamble\StartBabelCommands
+\def\StartBabelCommands{%
+ \begingroup
+ \bbl@recatcode{11}%
+ \def\bbl@scuse{%
+ \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil\def\bbl@opt@strings{generic}\fi}%
+ \def\UseStrings{\bbl@scuse\aftergroup\bbl@scuse}%
+ \def\SetStringLoop{\afterassignment\bbl@sclp\def\bbl@templ####1}%
+ \def\bbl@sclp##1{%
+ \count@\z@ % dangerous if a hook is used
+ \@for\bbl@tempm:=##1\do{%
+ \advance\count@\@ne
+ \toks@\expandafter{\bbl@tempm}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempn{%
+ \expandafter\noexpand
+ \csname\bbl@templ{\romannumeral\count@}\endcsname%
+ {\the\toks@}}%
+ \expandafter\SetString\bbl@tempn}}%
+ \def\SetCase{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@tolower}{%
+ \g@addto@macro\@uclclist{%
+ \reserved@b{\reserved@b\@gobble}% stops processing the list
+ \@ifundefined{\languagename @bbl@uclc}% and resumes it
+ {\reserved@a}%
+ {\csname\languagename @bbl@uclc\endcsname}%
+ {\bbl@tolower\@empty}{\bbl@toupper\@empty}}%
+ \gdef\bbl@tolower{\csname\languagename @bbl@lc\endcsname}%
+ \gdef\bbl@toupper{\csname\languagename @bbl@uc\endcsname}}{}%
+ \let\SetCase\bbl@setcase
+ \SetCase}%
+ \def\bbl@provstring##1{%
+ \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string##1}{\gdef##1}\@gobble}%
+ \def\bbl@dftstring##1##2{%
+ \@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1?{##2}%
+ \global\let##1##1}%
+ \def\bbl@encstring##1##2{%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempc\bbl@sc@fontenc{%
+ \@ifundefined{T@\bbl@tempc}%
+ \@empty
+ {\@dec@text@cmd\gdef##1\bbl@tempc{##2}%
+ \global\let##1##1}}}%
+ \let\StartBabelCommands\bbl@startcmds
+ \begingroup
+ \let\bbl@screset\@nnil % local flag - disable 1st stopcommands
+ \StartBabelCommands}
+\def\bbl@startcmds#1#2{%
+ \ifx\bbl@screset\@nnil\else
+ \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup
+ \begingroup
+ \edef\bbl@L{\zap@space#1 \@empty}%
+ \edef\bbl@G{\zap@space#2 \@empty}%
+ \let\bbl@sc@charset\space
+ \let\bbl@sc@fontenc\space
+ \let\SetString\@gobbletwo
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\@gobbletwo
+ \bbl@startcmds@i}
+\newcommand\bbl@startcmds@i[1][\@empty]{%
+ \ifx\@empty#1%
+ \def\bbl@sc@label{generic}%
+ \bbl@scswitch{%
+ \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring
+ \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@dftstring
+ \else
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring
+ \fi\fi}%
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \bbl@usehooks{defaultcommands}{}%
+ \else
+ \def\bbl@tempa##1=##2\@nil{%
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{sc@\zap@space##1 \@empty}{##2 }}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempb{label=#1}{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\@nil}%
+ \def\bbl@tempa##1 ##2{%
+ ##1%
+ \ifx\@empty##2\else\ifx,##1,\else,\fi\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempa##2\fi}%
+ \edef\bbl@sc@fontenc{\expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@sc@fontenc\@empty}%
+ \edef\bbl@sc@label{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@label\@empty}%
+ \edef\bbl@sc@charset{\expandafter\zap@space\bbl@sc@charset\@empty}%
+ \bbl@scswitch{%
+ \ifx\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring
+ \else\ifx\bbl@opt@strings\relax
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@encstring
+ \else
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \in@{,\bbl@opt@strings,}{,\bbl@sc@label,\bbl@sc@fontenc,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \let\SetString\bbl@setstring
+ \let\bbl@stringdef\bbl@provstring
+ \fi\fi\fi}%
+ \@expandtwoargs
+ \bbl@usehooks{encodedcommands}{{\bbl@sc@charset}{\bbl@sc@fontenc}}%
+ \fi}
+\def\bbl@scswitch#1{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\CurrentOption,}{,\bbl@L,}%
+ \ifin@
+ \let\bbl@L\CurrentOption
+ #1\relax
+ \bbl@scswitch@i
+ \ifx\bbl@G\@empty\else
+ \ifx\SetString\@gobbletwo\else
+ \edef\bbl@GL{\bbl@G\bbl@L}%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@GL,}{,\bbl@screset,}%
+ \ifin@\else
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname\bbl@GL\endcsname\@undefined
+ \xdef\bbl@screset{\bbl@screset,\bbl@GL}%
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\def\bbl@scswitch@i{%
+ \ifx\bbl@G\@empty
+ \def\SetString##1##2{%
+ \bbl@error{Missing group for string \string##1}%
+ {You must assign strings to some category, typically\\%
+ captions or extras, but you set none}}%
+ \fi}
+\AtEndOfPackage{\def\bbl@scswitch#1{#1\relax\bbl@scswitch@i}}
+\@onlypreamble\EndBabelCommands
+\def\EndBabelCommands{%
+ \bbl@usehooks{stopcommands}{}%
+ \endgroup
+ \endgroup}
+\def\bbl@scset#1#2{\def#1{#2}}
+\def\bbl@setstring#1#2{%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{%
+ \edef\bbl@LC{\bbl@tempa\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ \@ifundefined{\bbl@LC}% eg, \germanchaptername
+ {\global\expandafter
+ \bbl@add\csname\bbl@G\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter
+ {\expandafter\bbl@scset\expandafter#1\csname\bbl@LC\endcsname}}%
+ {}%
+ \def\BabelString{#2}%
+ \bbl@usehooks{stringprocess}{}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@LC\expandafter\endcsname\expandafter{\BabelString}}}
+\newcommand\bbl@setcase[3][]{%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@L{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uclc\endcsname{\reserved@a#1}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@uc\endcsname{#2}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@stringdef
+ \csname\bbl@tempa @bbl@lc\endcsname{#3}}}
+\def\AddBabelHook#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hk@#1}{\EnableBabelHook{#1}}{}%
+ \def\bbl@tempa##1,#2=##2,##3\@empty{\def\bbl@tempb{##2}}%
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@evargs,#2=,\@empty
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@ev@#1@#2}%
+ {\bbl@csarg\bbl@add{ev@#2}{\bbl@elt{#1}}%
+ \bbl@csarg\newcommand}%
+ {\bbl@csarg\renewcommand}%
+ {ev@#1@#2}[\bbl@tempb]}
+\def\EnableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@firstofone}
+\def\DisableBabelHook#1{\bbl@csarg\let{hk@#1}\@gobble}
+\def\bbl@usehooks#1#2{%
+ \def\bbl@elt##1{%
+ \@nameuse{bbl@hk@##1}{\@nameuse{bbl@ev@##1@#1}#2}}%
+ \@nameuse{bbl@ev@#1}}
+\def\bbl@evargs{,% don't delete the comma
+ everylanguage=1,loadkernel=1,loadpatterns=1,loadexceptions=1,%
+ adddialect=2,patterns=2,defaultcommands=0,encodedcommands=2,write=0,%
+ beforeextras=0,afterextras=0,stopcommands=0,stringprocess=0,%
+ hyphenation=2}
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined
+ \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else
+ \input xebabel.def
+ \fi
+\else
+ \input luababel.def
+\fi
{\def\format{lplain}
\ifx\fmtname\format
\else
@@ -727,95 +1026,83 @@
\aftergroup\endinput
\fi
\fi}
-\def\bbl@redefine#1{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1
- \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
-\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine
-\def\bbl@redefine@long#1{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1
- \expandafter\long\expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname}
-\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefine@long
-\def\bbl@redefinerobust#1{%
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname \bbl@tempa\space\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\endcsname#1
- \expandafter\edef\csname\bbl@tempa\endcsname{\noexpand\protect
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}%
- \else
- \expandafter\let\csname org@\bbl@tempa\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname
- \fi
- \expandafter\def\csname\bbl@tempa\space\endcsname}
-\@onlypreamble\bbl@redefinerobust
-\def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{%
- {%
- \@safe@activestrue
+\ifx\bbl@opt@safe\@empty\else
+ \def\@newl@bel#1#2#3{%
+ {\@safe@activestrue
\@ifundefined{#1@#2}%
- \relax
- {%
- \gdef \@multiplelabels {%
+ \relax
+ {\gdef\@multiplelabels{%
\@latex@warning@no@line{There were multiply-defined labels}}%
- \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}%
- }%
- \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}%
- }%
- }
-\CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{%
- \def\reserved@a{#3}%
- \expandafter \ifx \csname #1@#2\endcsname \reserved@a
- \else
- \@tempswatrue
- \fi}
-\def\@testdef #1#2#3{%
- \@safe@activestrue
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname
- \def\bbl@tempb{#3}%
- \@safe@activesfalse
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax
- \else
- \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}%
- \fi
- \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}%
- \ifx \bbl@tempa \bbl@tempb
- \else
- \@tempswatrue
- \fi}
-\bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
-\bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
-\bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{%
- \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse
- \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
+ \@latex@warning@no@line{Label `#2' multiply defined}}%
+ \global\@namedef{#1@#2}{#3}}}
+ \CheckCommand*\@testdef[3]{%
+ \def\reserved@a{#3}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname#1@#2\endcsname\reserved@a
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \fi}
+ \def\@testdef#1#2#3{%
+ \@safe@activestrue
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@tempa\csname #1@#2\endcsname
+ \def\bbl@tempb{#3}%
+ \@safe@activesfalse
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\relax
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempa}%
+ \fi
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb
+ \else
+ \@tempswatrue
+ \fi}
+\fi
+\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe
+\ifin@
+ \bbl@redefinerobust\ref#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@ref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+ \bbl@redefinerobust\pageref#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@pageref{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+\else
+ \let\org@ref\ref
+ \let\org@pageref\pageref
+\fi
+\@expandtwoargs\in@{B}\bbl@opt@safe
+\ifin@
+ \bbl@redefine\@citex[#1]#2{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#2}\@safe@activesfalse
+ \org@@citex[#1]{\@tempa}}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{%
\def\@citex[#1][#2]#3{%
\@safe@activestrue\edef\@tempa{#3}\@safe@activesfalse
\org@@citex[#1][#2]{\@tempa}}%
}{}}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{%
- \def\@citex[#1]#2{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}%
- }{}}
-\bbl@redefine\nocite#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
-\bbl@redefine\bibcite{%
- \bbl@cite@choice
- \bibcite}
-\def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{%
- \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}}
-\def\bbl@cite@choice{%
- \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite
- \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
- \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
- \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax
- }
-\AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice}
-\bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{%
- \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{%
+ \def\@citex[#1]#2{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@@citex[#1]{#2}\@safe@activesfalse}%
+ }{}}
+ \bbl@redefine\nocite#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@nocite{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+ \bbl@redefine\bibcite{%
+ \bbl@cite@choice
+ \bibcite}
+ \def\bbl@bibcite#1#2{%
+ \org@bibcite{#1}{\@safe@activesfalse#2}}
+ \def\bbl@cite@choice{%
+ \global\let\bibcite\bbl@bibcite
+ \@ifpackageloaded{natbib}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{cite}{\global\let\bibcite\org@bibcite}{}%
+ \global\let\bbl@cite@choice\relax}
+ \AtBeginDocument{\bbl@cite@choice}
+ \bbl@redefine\@bibitem#1{%
+ \@safe@activestrue\org@@bibitem{#1}\@safe@activesfalse}
+\else
+ \let\org@nocite\nocite
+ \let\org@@citex\@citex
+ \let\org@bibcite\bibcite
+ \let\org@@bibitem\@bibitem
+\fi
\bbl@redefine\markright#1{%
\edef\bbl@tempb{\noexpand\protect
\noexpand\foreignlanguage{\languagename}}%
@@ -857,37 +1144,111 @@
\bbl@tempa
}
\bbl@tempc
-\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}}
-\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}}
-\ifx\nfss@catcodes\@undefined
-\else
- \addto\nfss@catcodes{%
- \@makeother\'%
- \@makeother\"%
+\@expandtwoargs\in@{R}\bbl@opt@safe
+\ifin@
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{%
+ \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{%
+ \let\bbl@tempa\pageref
+ \let\pageref\org@pageref
+ \let\bbl@tempb\ref
+ \let\ref\org@ref
+ \@safe@activestrue
+ \org@ifthenelse{#1}{%
+ \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
+ \let\ref\bbl@tempb
+ \@safe@activesfalse
+ #2}{%
+ \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
+ \let\ref\bbl@tempb
+ \@safe@activesfalse
+ #3}%
+ }%
+ }{}%
+ }
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{%
+ \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{%
+ \@safe@activestrue
+ \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}%
+ \@safe@activesfalse}%
+ \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{%
+ \@safe@activestrue
+ \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}%
+ \@safe@activesfalse}%
+ \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{%
+ \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa}
+ }{}%
}
\fi
+\AtEndOfPackage{%
+ \AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}%
+ {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax
+ \else
+ \makeatletter
+ \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother
+ \fi}%
+ {}}}
+\AtBeginDocument{%
+ \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}%
+ {}%
+ {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
+ \languageshorthands{system}}%
+ }%
+}
+\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{%
+ \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}}
+\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{%
+ \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}%
+ \immediate\write15{%
+ \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}%
+ [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day}
+ \space generated font description file]^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J
+ \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J
+ }%
+ \closeout15
+ }
+\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily
+\bbl@redefine\TeX{\textlatin{\org@TeX}}
+\bbl@redefine\LaTeX{\textlatin{\org@LaTeX}}
+\bbl@add\nfss@catcodes{%
+ \@makeother\'%
+ \@makeother\"}
\ifx\loadlocalcfg\@undefined
- \def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
- \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg}
- {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
- * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J%
- *}%
- }
- {}}
+ \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}%
+ {\let\loadlocalcfg\@gobble}%
+ {\def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1.cfg}%
+ {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+ * Local config file #1.cfg used^^J%
+ *}}%
+ \@empty}}
\fi
\ifx\@unexpandable@protect\@undefined
\def\@unexpandable@protect{\noexpand\protect\noexpand}
- \long\def \protected@write#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup
- \let\thepage\relax
- #2%
- \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
- \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
- \reserved@a
- \endgroup
- \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi
- }
+ \long\def\protected@write#1#2#3{%
+ \begingroup
+ \let\thepage\relax
+ #2%
+ \let\protect\@unexpandable@protect
+ \edef\reserved@a{\write#1{#3}}%
+ \reserved@a
+ \endgroup
+ \if@nobreak\ifvmode\nobreak\fi\fi}
\fi
+\ifx\l@english\@undefined
+ \chardef\l@english\z@
+\fi
+\main@language{english}
%%
%% \CharacterTable
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty
index add9ef8b471..1fd791be7f7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/babel.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% babel.dtx (with options: `package')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -36,185 +37,294 @@
%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}[2005/12/01]
%% File 'babel.dtx'
-%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package]
+%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package]
%% Babel package for LaTeX2e.
%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams,
%% TeXniek
%% all rights reserved.
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
\ProvidesPackage{babel}
- [2008/07/08 v3.8m %
+ [2013/04/15 v3.9e %
The Babel package]
-\ifx\LdfInit\@undefined\input babel.def\relax\fi
-\DeclareOption{acadian}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{albanian}{\input{albanian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\input{dutch.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{american}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{australian}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{austrian}{\input{germanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{indon}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\input{bahasai.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{malay}{\input{bahasam.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\input{bahasam.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\input{bahasam.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{basque}{\input{basque.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{brazil}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{breton}{\input{breton.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{british}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{bulgarian}{\input{bulgarian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{canadian}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{canadien}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{catalan}{\input{catalan.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{croatian}{\input{croatian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{czech}{\input{czech.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{danish}{\input{danish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{dutch}{\input{dutch.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{english}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{esperanto}{\input{esperanto.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{estonian}{\input{estonian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{finnish}{\input{finnish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{francais}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{frenchb}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{french}{\input{frenchb.ldf}}%
-\DeclareOption{galician}{\input{galician.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{german}{\input{germanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{germanb}{\input{germanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{greek}{\input{greek.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{%
- \input{greek.ldf}%
- \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}}
-\DeclareOption{hebrew}{%
- \input{rlbabel.def}%
- \input{hebrew.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\input{magyar.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{icelandic}{\input{icelandic.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{interlingua}{\input{interlingua.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{irish}{\input{irish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{italian}{\input{italian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{latin}{\input{latin.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\input{lsorbian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{magyar}{\input{magyar.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\input{ngermanb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{norsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{samin}{\input{samin.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\input{norsk.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{polish}{\input{polish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{portuges}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\input{portuges.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{romanian}{\input{romanian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{russian}{\input{russianb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{scottish}{\input{scottish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{serbian}{\input{serbian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{slovak}{\input{slovak.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{slovene}{\input{slovene.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{spanish}{\input{spanish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{swedish}{\input{swedish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{turkish}{\input{turkish.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\input{ukraineb.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\input{usorbian.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{welsh}{\input{welsh.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\input{english.ldf}}
-\DeclareOption*{%
- \InputIfFileExists{\CurrentOption.ldf}{}{%
- \PackageError{babel}{%
- Language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf not found}{%
- Maybe you misspelled the language option?}}%
- }
-\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}{%
- \typeout{*************************************^^J%
- * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J%
- *}%
- }{}
+\@ifpackagewith{babel}{debug}
+ {\let\bbl@tempa\relax}
+ {\def\bbl@tempa{3.9e}}%
+\ifx\bbl@version\bbl@tempa\else
+ \input switch.def\relax
+\fi
+\def\bbl@for#1#2#3{\@for#1:=#2\do{\ifx#1\@empty\else#3\fi}}
+\def\bbl@add#1#2{%
+ \@ifundefined{\expandafter\@gobble\string#1}%
+ {\def#1{#2}}%
+ {\expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}}}
+\def\bbl@csarg#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname bbl@#2\endcsname}%
+\long\def\bbl@afterelse#1\else#2\fi{\fi#1}
+\long\def\bbl@afterfi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{%
+ \global\expandafter\bbl@add\csname#1.ldf-h@@k\endcsname}%
+\@ifpackagewith{babel}{base}{%
+ \DeclareOption*{\bbl@patterns{\CurrentOption}}%
+ \DeclareOption{base}{}%
+ \ProcessOptions
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\relax
+ \global\expandafter\let\csname ver@babel.sty\endcsname\relax
+ \global\let\@ifl@ter@@\@ifl@ter
+ \def\@ifl@ter#1#2#3#4#5{\global\let\@ifl@ter\@ifl@ter@@}%
+ \endinput}{}%
+\bbl@csarg\let{tempa\expandafter}\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname
+\def\bbl@tempb#1.#2{%
+ #1\ifx\@empty#2\else,\bbl@afterfi\bbl@tempb#2\fi}%
+\def\bbl@tempd#1.#2\@nnil{%
+ \ifx\@empty#2%
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}%
+ \else
+ \in@{=}{#1}\ifin@
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1.#2}%
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\ifx\bbl@tempc\@empty\else\bbl@tempc,\fi#1}%
+ \bbl@csarg\edef{mod@#1}{\bbl@tempb#2}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\let\bbl@tempc\@empty
+\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempa{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempd\bbl@tempa.\@empty\@nnil}
+\expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\bbl@tempc
\DeclareOption{activeacute}{}
\DeclareOption{activegrave}{}
\DeclareOption{KeepShorthandsActive}{}
+\DeclareOption{debug}{}
+\DeclareOption{noconfigs}{}
+\DeclareOption{showlanguages}{}
+\DeclareOption{shorthands=off}{\bbl@tempa shorthands=\bbl@tempa}
+\DeclareOption{strings}{\def\bbl@opt@strings{\BabelStringsDefault}}
+\DeclareOption{strings=encoded}{\let\bbl@opt@strings\relax}
+\DeclareOption{safe=none}{\let\bbl@opt@safe\@empty}
+\DeclareOption{safe=bib}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{B}}
+\DeclareOption{safe=ref}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{R}}
+\DeclareOption{math=active}{}
+\DeclareOption{math=normal}{\def\bbl@mathnormal{\noexpand\textormath}}
+\def\BabelStringsDefault{generic}
+\let\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@config\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@main\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@strings\@nnil
+\let\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil
+\def\bbl@tempa#1=#2\bbl@tempa{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname\@nnil
+ \expandafter\edef\csname bbl@opt@#1\endcsname{#2}%
+ \else
+ \bbl@error{%
+ Bad option `#1=#2'. Either you have misspelled the\\%
+ key or there is a previous setting of `#1'}{%
+ Valid keys are `shorthands', `config', `strings', `main',\\%
+ `headfoot', `safe', `math'}
+ \fi}
+\let\bbl@language@opts\@empty
+\DeclareOption*{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string=}{\CurrentOption}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
+ \else
+ \edef\bbl@language@opts{%
+ \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi
+ \CurrentOption}%
+ \fi}
\ProcessOptions*
+\def\bbl@sh@string#1{%
+ \ifx#1\@empty\else
+ \ifx#1t\string~%
+ \else\ifx#1c\string,%
+ \else\string#1%
+ \fi\fi
+ \expandafter\bbl@sh@string
+ \fi}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@nnil
+ \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#2}%
+\else\ifx\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty
+ \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1#2#3{#3}%
+\else
+ \def\bbl@ifshorthand#1{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{\string#1}{\bbl@opt@shorthands}%
+ \ifin@
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+ \fi}
+ \edef\bbl@opt@shorthands{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@sh@string\bbl@opt@shorthands\@empty}%
+
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{'}%
+ {\PassOptionsToPackage{activeacute}{babel}}{}
+ \bbl@ifshorthand{`}%
+ {\PassOptionsToPackage{activegrave}{babel}}{}
+\fi\fi
+\ifx\bbl@opt@headfoot\@nnil\else
+ \g@addto@macro\@resetactivechars{%
+ \set@typeset@protect
+ \expandafter\select@language@x\expandafter{\bbl@opt@headfoot}%
+ \let\protect\noexpand}
+\fi
+\@ifundefined{bbl@opt@safe}{\def\bbl@opt@safe{BR}}{}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else
+ \edef\bbl@language@opts{%
+ \ifx\bbl@language@opts\@empty\else\bbl@language@opts,\fi
+ \bbl@opt@main}
+\fi
+\ifx\bbl@languages\@undefined\else
+ \begingroup
+ \catcode`\^^I=12
+ \@ifpackagewith{babel}{showlanguages}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{\wlog{#2^^I#1^^I#3^^I#4}}%
+ \wlog{<*languages>}%
+ \bbl@languages
+ \wlog{</languages>}%
+ \endgroup}{}
+ \endgroup
+ \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{%
+ \ifnum#2=\z@
+ \gdef\bbl@nulllanguage{#1}%
+ \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}%
+ \fi}%
+ \bbl@languages
+\fi
+\let\bbl@afterlang\relax
+\let\BabelModifiers\relax
+\let\bbl@loaded\@empty
+\def\bbl@load@language#1{%
+ \InputIfFileExists{#1.ldf}%
+ {\edef\bbl@loaded{\CurrentOption
+ \ifx\bbl@loaded\@empty\else,\bbl@loaded\fi}%
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\bbl@afterlang
+ \csname\CurrentOption.ldf-h@@k\endcsname
+ \expandafter\let\expandafter\BabelModifiers
+ \csname bbl@mod@\CurrentOption\endcsname}%
+ {\bbl@error{%
+ Unknow option `\CurrentOption'. Either you misspelled it\\%
+ or the language definition file \CurrentOption.ldf was not found}{%
+ Valid options are: shorthands=..., KeepShorthandsActive,\\%
+ activeacute, activegrave, noconfigs, safe=, main=, math=\\%
+ headfoot=, strings=, config=, or a language name.}}}
+\DeclareOption{acadian}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}
+\DeclareOption{afrikaans}{\bbl@load@language{dutch}}
+\DeclareOption{american}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{australian}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{austrian}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}}
+\DeclareOption{bahasa}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{bahasai}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{bahasam}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}}
+\DeclareOption{brazil}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}}
+\DeclareOption{brazilian}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}}
+\DeclareOption{british}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{canadian}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{canadien}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}
+\DeclareOption{francais}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}
+\DeclareOption{french}{\bbl@load@language{frenchb}}%
+\DeclareOption{german}{\bbl@load@language{germanb}}
+\DeclareOption{hebrew}{%
+ \input{rlbabel.def}%
+ \bbl@load@language{hebrew}}
+\DeclareOption{hungarian}{\bbl@load@language{magyar}}
+\DeclareOption{indon}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{indonesian}{\bbl@load@language{bahasai}}
+\DeclareOption{lowersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{lsorbian}}
+\DeclareOption{malay}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}}
+\DeclareOption{meyalu}{\bbl@load@language{bahasam}}
+\DeclareOption{naustrian}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}}
+\DeclareOption{newzealand}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{ngerman}{\bbl@load@language{ngermanb}}
+\DeclareOption{nynorsk}{\bbl@load@language{norsk}}
+\DeclareOption{polutonikogreek}{%
+ \bbl@load@language{greek}%
+ \languageattribute{greek}{polutoniko}}
+\DeclareOption{portuguese}{\bbl@load@language{portuges}}
+\DeclareOption{russian}{\bbl@load@language{russianb}}
+\DeclareOption{UKenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\DeclareOption{ukrainian}{\bbl@load@language{ukraineb}}
+\DeclareOption{uppersorbian}{\bbl@load@language{usorbian}}
+\DeclareOption{USenglish}{\bbl@load@language{english}}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@config\@nnil
+ \@ifpackagewith{babel}{noconfigs}{}%
+ {\InputIfFileExists{bblopts.cfg}%
+ {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+ * Local config file bblopts.cfg used^^J%
+ *}}%
+ {}}%
+\else
+ \InputIfFileExists{\bbl@opt@config.cfg}%
+ {\typeout{*************************************^^J%
+ * Local config file \bbl@opt@config.cfg used^^J%
+ *}}%
+ {\bbl@error{%
+ Local config file `\bbl@opt@config.cfg' not found}{%
+ Perhaps you misspelled it.}}%
+\fi
+\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\bbl@language@opts{%
+ \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\edef\bbl@tempb{%
+ \noexpand\DeclareOption
+ {\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}%
+ \bbl@tempb}%
+ \@empty}
+\bbl@for\bbl@tempa\@classoptionslist{%
+ \@ifundefined{ds@\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\IfFileExists{\bbl@tempa.ldf}%
+ {\edef\bbl@tempb{%
+ \noexpand\DeclareOption
+ {\bbl@tempa}%
+ {\noexpand\bbl@load@language{\bbl@tempa}}}%
+ \bbl@tempb}%
+ \@empty}%
+ \@empty}
+\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil\else
+ \expandafter
+ \let\expandafter\bbl@loadmain\csname ds@\bbl@opt@main\endcsname
+ \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{}
+\fi
+\def\AfterBabelLanguage#1{%
+ \bbl@ifsamestring\CurrentOption{#1}{\global\bbl@add\bbl@afterlang}{}}
+\DeclareOption*{}
+\ProcessOptions*
+\ifx\bbl@opt@main\@nnil
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{\@classoptionslist,\bbl@language@opts}
+ \let\bbl@tempc\@empty
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempa{%
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\bbl@tempb,}{,\bbl@loaded,}%
+ \ifin@\edef\bbl@tempc{\bbl@tempb}\fi}
+ \def\bbl@tempa#1,#2\@nnil{\def\bbl@tempb{#1}}
+ \expandafter\bbl@tempa\bbl@loaded,\@nnil
+ \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc\else
+ \bbl@warning{%
+ Last declared language option is `\bbl@tempc,\\%
+ but the last processed one was `\bbl@tempb'.\\%
+ The main language cannot be set as both a global\\%
+ and a package option. Use `main=\bbl@tempc' as\\%
+ option. Reported}%
+ \fi
+\else
+ \DeclareOption{\bbl@opt@main}{\bbl@loadmain}
+ \ExecuteOptions{\bbl@opt@main}
+ \DeclareOption*{}
+ \ProcessOptions*
+\fi
+\def\AfterBabelLanguage{%
+ \bbl@error
+ {Too late for \string\AfterBabelLanguage}%
+ {Languages have been loaded, so I can do nothing}}
\ifx\bbl@main@language\@undefined
- \PackageError{babel}{%
+ \bbl@error{%
You haven't specified a language option}{%
- You need to specify a language, either as a global
- option\MessageBreak
+ You need to specify a language, either as a global option\\%
or as an optional argument to the \string\usepackage\space
- command; \MessageBreak
+ command;\\%
You shouldn't try to proceed from here, type x to quit.}
- \input{babel.def}
\fi
-\def\substitutefontfamily#1#2#3{%
- \lowercase{\immediate\openout15=#1#2.fd\relax}%
- \immediate\write15{%
- \string\ProvidesFile{#1#2.fd}%
- [\the\year/\two@digits{\the\month}/\two@digits{\the\day}
- \space generated font description file]^^J
- \string\DeclareFontFamily{#1}{#2}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{n}{<->ssub * #3/m/n}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{it}{<->ssub * #3/m/it}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/m/sl}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{m}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/m/sc}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{n}{<->ssub * #3/bx/n}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{it}{<->ssub * #3/bx/it}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sl}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sl}{}^^J
- \string\DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{b}{sc}{<->ssub * #3/bx/sc}{}^^J
- }%
- \closeout15
- }
-\@onlypreamble\substitutefontfamily
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{ifthen}{%
- \bbl@redefine@long\ifthenelse#1#2#3{%
- \let\bbl@tempa\pageref
- \let\pageref\org@pageref
- \@safe@activestrue
- \org@ifthenelse{#1}{%
- \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
- \@safe@activesfalse
- #2}{%
- \let\pageref\bbl@tempa
- \@safe@activesfalse
- #3}%
- }%
- }{}%
- }
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{varioref}{%
- \bbl@redefine\@@vpageref#1[#2]#3{%
- \@safe@activestrue
- \org@@@vpageref{#1}[#2]{#3}%
- \@safe@activesfalse}%
- \bbl@redefine\vrefpagenum#1#2{%
- \@safe@activestrue
- \org@vrefpagenum{#1}{#2}%
- \@safe@activesfalse}%
- \expandafter\def\csname Ref \endcsname#1{%
- \protected@edef\@tempa{\org@ref{#1}}\expandafter\MakeUppercase\@tempa}
- }{}%
- }
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{hhline}%
- {\expandafter\ifx\csname normal@char\string:\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \makeatletter
- \def\@currname{hhline}\input{hhline.sty}\makeatother
- \fi}%
- {}}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}%
- {}%
- {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
- \languageshorthands{system}}%
- }%
-}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\FOREIGNLANGUAGE}[1]{%
- \lowercase{\foreignlanguage{#1}}}
%%
%% \CharacterTable
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty
index d7a49e98aa6..556237aacd0 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasa.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `bahasa')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasai.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasai.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 5cfe93aa9b6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasai.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,137 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `bahasai.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% bahasa.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{bahasa}
- [2008/03/15 v1.0l Bahasa Indonesia support from the babel system]
-%% File `bahasa.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Bahasa Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008
-%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de)
-%% Please report errors to: J"org Knappen
-%% knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indon\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined
- \ifx\l@malay\@undefined
- \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Bahasa Indonesia}
- \adddialect\l@bahasa0\relax
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@meyalu
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@malay
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasam
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@indonesian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@indon
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@bahasa\l@bahasai
- \fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname
- \l@bahasa
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Pendahuluan}%
- \def\refname{Pustaka}%
- \def\abstractname{Ringkasan}% (sometime it's called 'intisari'
- % or 'ikhtisar')
- \def\bibname{Bibliografi}%
- \def\chaptername{Bab}%
- \def\appendixname{Lampiran}%
- \def\contentsname{Daftar Isi}%
- \def\listfigurename{Daftar Gambar}%
- \def\listtablename{Daftar Tabel}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Gambar}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Bagian}%
- \def\enclname{Lampiran}%
- \def\ccname{cc}%
- \def\headtoname{Kepada}%
- \def\pagename{Halaman}%
- \def\seename{lihat}%
- \def\alsoname{lihat juga}%
- \def\proofname{Bukti}%
- \def\glossaryname{Daftar Istilah}%
- }
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Januari\or Pebruari\or Maret\or April\or Mei\or Juni\or
- Juli\or Agustus\or September\or Oktober\or Nopember\or Desember\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `bahasai.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index eb737cb2109..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `bahasam.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% bahasam.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{bahasam}
- [2008/01/27 v1.0k Bahasa Malaysia support from the babel system]
-%% File `bahasam.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Bahasa Malaysia Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008
-%% by J"org Knappen, (joerg.knappen at alpha.ntp.springer.de)
-%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008
-%% by Bob Margolis, (bob.margolis at ntlworld.com)
-%% [With help from Awangku Merali Pengiran Mohamed (Sarawak)]
-%% Please report errors to: Bob Margolis
-%% bob.margolis at ntlworld.com
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@malay\@undefined
- \ifx\l@meyalu\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasam\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasa\@undefined
- \ifx\l@bahasai\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indon\@undefined
- \ifx\l@indonesian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Bahasa Malaysia}
- \adddialect\l@malay0\relax
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@indonesian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@indon
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@bahasai
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@bahasa
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@bahasam
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@malay\l@meyalu
- \fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\CurrentOption\endcsname
- \l@malay
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Prakata}%
- \def\refname{Rujukan}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrak}% (sometime it's called 'intisari'
- % or 'ikhtisar')
- \def\bibname{Bibliografi}%
- \def\chaptername{Bab}%
- \def\appendixname{Lampiran}%
- \def\contentsname{Kandungan}%
- \def\listfigurename{Senarai Gambar}%
- \def\listtablename{Senarai Jadual}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Gambar}%
- \def\tablename{Jadual}%
- \def\partname{Bahagian}%
- \def\enclname{Lampiran}%
- \def\ccname{sk}% (short form for 'Salinan Kepada')
- \def\headtoname{Kepada}%
- \def\pagename{Halaman}%
- \def\seename{sila rujuk}%
- \def\alsoname{rujuk juga}%
- \def\proofname{Bukti}%
- \def\glossaryname{Istilah}%
- }
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Januari\or Februari\or Mac\or April\or Mei\or Jun\or
- Julai\or Ogos\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Disember\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `bahasam.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty
index 5f16558cad3..4fde909d21a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bahasam.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `bahasam')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 62163a65297..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,151 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `basque.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% basque.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{basque}
- [2005/03/29 v1.0f Basque support from the babel system]
-%% File `Basque.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Basque Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2005
-%% by Juan M. Aguirregabiria
-%% Please report errors to: Juan M. Aguirregabiria <wtpagagj at lg.ehu.es>
-%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl>)
-\LdfInit{basque}\captionsbasque
-\ifx\l@basque\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Basque}
- \adddialect\l@basque0
-\fi
-\addto\captionsbasque{%
- \def\prefacename{Hitzaurrea}%
- \def\refname{Erreferentziak}%
- \def\abstractname{Laburpena}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitulua}%
- \def\appendixname{Eranskina}%
- \def\contentsname{Gaien Aurkibidea}%
- \def\listfigurename{Irudien Zerrenda}%
- \def\listtablename{Taulen Zerrenda}%
- \def\indexname{Kontzeptuen Aurkibidea}%
- \def\figurename{Irudia}%
- \def\tablename{Taula}%
- \def\partname{Atala}%
- \def\enclname{Erantsia}%
- \def\ccname{Kopia}%
- \def\headtoname{Nori}%
- \def\pagename{Orria}%
- \def\seename{Ikusi}%
- \def\alsoname{Ikusi, halaber}%
- \def\proofname{Frogapena}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glosarioa}%
- }%
-\def\datebasque{%
- \def\today{\number\year.eko\space\ifcase\month\or
- urtarrilaren\or otsailaren\or martxoaren\or apirilaren\or
- maiatzaren\or ekainaren\or uztailaren\or abuztuaren\or
- irailaren\or urriaren\or azaroaren\or
- abenduaren\fi~\number\day}}
-\addto\extrasbasque{\languageshorthands{basque}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\initiate@active@char{~}
-\addto\extrasbasque{%
- \bbl@activate{"}%
- \bbl@activate{~}}
-\addto\noextrasbasque{
- \bbl@deactivate{"}\bbl@deactivate{~}}
-\addto\extrasbasque{%
- \babel@save\"%
- \babel@save\~%
- \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}%
- \def\~{\protect\@tilde}}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\let\dieresia\"
-\let\texttilde\~
-\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined
- \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens}
-\else
- \edef\bbl@next{T1}
- \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@next
- \let\@umlaut\dieresia
- \let\@tilde\texttilde
- \else
- \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space
- instead of T1.}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresia{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \def\@tilde#1{\allowhyphens\texttilde{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \fi
-\fi
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
- \declare@shorthand{basque}{''}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{~n}{\textormath{\~n}{\@tilde n}}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{~N}{\textormath{\~N}{\@tilde N}}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{"-}{%
- \nobreak\discretionary{-}{-}{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{basque}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\ldf@finish{basque}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `basque.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty
index 21d65f169c5..58cf1784e79 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/basque.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `basque')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index bc70cff0643..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,181 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `breton.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% breton.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{breton}
- [2005/03/29 v1.0h Breton support from the babel system]
-%% File `breton.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Breton Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005
-%% by Christian Rolland
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{breton}\captionsbreton
-\ifx\l@breton\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Breton}
- \adddialect\l@breton0\fi
-\addto\captionsbreton{%
- \def\prefacename{Rakskrid}%
- \def\refname{Daveenno\`u}%
- \def\abstractname{Dvierra\~n}%
- \def\bibname{Lennadurezh}%
- \def\chaptername{Pennad}%
- \def\appendixname{Stagadenn}%
- \def\contentsname{Taolenn}%
- \def\listfigurename{Listenn ar Figurenno\`u}%
- \def\listtablename{Listenn an taolenno\`u}%
- \def\indexname{Meneger}%
- \def\figurename{Figurenn}%
- \def\tablename{Taolenn}%
- \def\partname{Lodenn}%
- \def\enclname{Diello\`u kevret}%
- \def\ccname{Eilskrid da}%
- \def\headtoname{evit}
- \def\pagename{Pajenn}%
- \def\seename{Gwelout}%
- \def\alsoname{Gwelout ivez}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-\def\datebreton{%
- \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$\else
- \number\day\fi \space a\space viz\space\ifcase\month\or
- Genver\or C'hwevrer\or Meurzh\or Ebrel\or Mae\or Mezheven\or
- Gouere\or Eost\or Gwengolo\or Here\or Du\or Kerzu\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{:}
-\initiate@active@char{;}
-\initiate@active@char{!}
-\initiate@active@char{?}
-\addto\extrasbreton{\languageshorthands{breton}}
-\addto\extrasbreton{%
- \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}%
- \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}}
-\addto\noextrasbreton{%
- \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}%
- \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}}
-\addto\extrasbreton{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasbreton{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{;}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string;\space
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string;\space
- \fi}%
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{:}{%
- \ifmmode\string:\space
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi
- \fi
- \string:\space
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{!}{%
- \ifmmode\string!\space
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace\fi
- \fi
- \string!\space
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{breton}{?}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string?\space
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip
- \kern\fontdimen2\font
- \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font
- \fi
- \fi
- \string?\space
- \fi}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{OT1}{64}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{OT1}{92}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\boi}{T1}{16}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\boi}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{OT1}{94}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{2}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{OT1}{126}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{3}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{OT1}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{OT1}{23}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\degre}{T1}{6}
-\DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\degre}{OT1}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\^}{OT1}{i}{\^\i}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\"}{OT1}{i}{\"\i}}
-\def\kentan{1\/${}^{\rm a\tilde{n}}$}
-\def\eil{2\/${}^{\rm l}$}
-\def\re{\/${}^{\rm re}$}
-\def\trede{3\re}
-\def\pevare{4\re}
-\def\vet{\/${}^{\rm vet}$}
-\def\pempvet{5\vet}
-\ldf@finish{breton}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `breton.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty
index 3efbc192e83..8c9cf8cf920 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/breton.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `breton')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty
index d65787f0662..6e89fd173cf 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/british.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `british')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 389e8588be0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,365 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `bulgarian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% bulgarian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{bulgarian}
- [2008/03/21 v1.0g Bulgarian support from the babel system]
-%% File `bulgarian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989-2008
-%% by Johannes Braams,TeXniek
-%% Bulgarian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1995-2008
-%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk>
-%% Johannes Braams,TeXniek
-%% Adapted from russianb.dtx
-%% by Georgi.Boshnakov <georgi.boshnakov at umist.ac.uk>
-%% Please report errors to:J.L.Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\LdfInit{bulgarian}{captionsbulgarian}
-\ifx\l@bulgarian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Bulgarian}
- \adddialect\l@bulgarian0
-\fi
-\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding
-\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
- \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
- \edef\reserved@c{#2}%
- \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c
- \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c
- \fi}
-\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
- \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{X2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}}
-\cdp@list
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}%
- {Your installation is incomplete. \MessageBreak
- You need at least one of the following files: \MessageBreak
- \space\space
- x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def, \MessageBreak
- \space\space
- lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}%
- \else
- \lowercase
- \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}%
- \fi
-\fi
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\Bulgarian}{%
- \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\bulgarianhyphenmins
- \language\l@bulgarian}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{%
- \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins
- \language\l@english}
-\let\Bul\Bulgarian
-\let\Bg\Bulgarian
-\let\cyrillictext\Bulgarian
-\let\cyr\Bulgarian
-\let\Eng\English
-\def\selectenglanguage{\selectlanguage{english}}
-\def\selectbglanguage{\selectlanguage{bulgarian}}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else
- \def\@Alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or
- K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or
- X\or Y\or Z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \def\@alph@eng#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
- k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or
- x\or y\or z\else \@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \let\@Alph\@Alph@eng
- \let\@alph\@alph@eng
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a}
-\fi
-\begingroup\catcode`\"=12
-\def\@tempa#1{\expandafter\@tempb\meaning#1\relax\relax\relax\relax
- "0000\@nil#1}
-\def\@tempb#1"#2#3#4#5#6\@nil#7{%
-\ifnum"#2=7 \count@"1#3#4#5\relax
-\ifnum\count@<"1000 \else \global\mathchardef#7="0#3#4#5\relax \fi
- \fi}
-\@tempa\Gamma\@tempa\Delta\@tempa\Theta\@tempa\Lambda\@tempa\Xi
-\@tempa\Pi\@tempa\Sigma\@tempa\Upsilon\@tempa\Phi\@tempa\Psi
-\@tempa\Omega
-\def\@tempa#1#2\@nil{\def\@tempc{#1}}\def\@tempb{\mathaccent}
-\expandafter\@tempa\hat\relax\relax\@nil
-\ifx\@tempb\@tempc
-\def\@tempa#1\@nil{#1}%
-\def\@tempb#1{\afterassignment\@tempa\mathchardef\@tempc=}%
-\def\do#1"#2{}
-\def\@tempd#1{\expandafter\@tempb#1\@nil
- \ifnum\@tempc>"FFF
- \xdef#1{\mathaccent"\expandafter\do\meaning\@tempc\space}%
- \fi}
-\@tempd\hat\@tempd\check\@tempd\tilde\@tempd\acute\@tempd\grave
-\@tempd\dot\@tempd\ddot\@tempd\breve\@tempd\bar
-\fi
-\endgroup
-\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{%
-\def\reserved@a{LWN}%
-\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
-\def\reserved@a{OT2}%
-\ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
-\PackageWarning{babel}%
-{No input encoding specified for Bulgarian language}\fi\fi}
-\let\lat\latintext
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext}
-\addto\captionsbulgarian{%
- \def\prefacename{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrg\cyro\cyrv\cyro\cyrr}}%
- \def\refname{%
- {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\abstractname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrb\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrk\cyrt}}%
- \def\bibname{%
- {\cyr\CYRB\cyri\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyro\cyrg\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\chaptername{%
- {\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}%
- \def\appendixname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
- \def\contentsname{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrhrdsn\cyrd\cyrhrdsn\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
- \def\listfigurename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrf\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
- \def\listtablename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrk\ \cyrn\cyra\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyri\cyrt\cyre}}%
- \def\indexname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrz\cyrb\cyru\cyrch\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}%
- \def\authorname{%
- {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyre\cyrn\ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl}}%
- \def\figurename{%
- {\cyr\CYRF\cyri\cyrg\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\tablename{%
- {\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}%
- \def\partname{%
- {\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt}}%
- \def\enclname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\ccname{%
- {\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\headtoname{%
- {\cyr\CYRZ\cyra}}%
- \def\pagename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrt\cyrr.}}%
- \def\seename{%
- {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.}}%
- \def\alsoname{%
- {\cyr\cyrv\cyrzh.\ \cyrs\cyrhrdsn\cyrshch\cyro\ \cyri}}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- Needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-%%
-\def\datebulgarian{%
- \def\month@bulgarian{\ifcase\month\or
- \cyrya\cyrn\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyru\cyra\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\or
- \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrishrt\or
- \cyryu\cyrn\cyri\or
- \cyryu\cyrl\cyri\or
- \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\or
- \cyrs\cyre\cyrp\cyrt\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyro\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrn\cyro\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\or
- \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyre\cyrm\cyrv\cyrr\cyri\fi}%
- \def\month@Roman{\expandafter\@Roman\month}%
- \def\today{\number\day~\month@bulgarian\ \number\year~\cyrg.}%
- \def\todayRoman{\number\day.\,\month@Roman.\,\number\year~\cyrg.}%
-}
-\def\Romannumeral#1{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral #1}}
-\def\todayRoman{\number\day.\Romannumeral{\month}.\number\year~\cyrg.}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\cyrillictext}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\latintext}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\languageshorthands{bulgarian}}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\reserved@a{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019}
- \def\dq{"}}
-\reserved@a
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"|}{%
-\textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
-\allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{"-}{%
- \def\bulgarian@sh@tmp{%
- \if\bulgarian@sh@next-\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@emdash
- \else\expandafter\bulgarian@sh@hyphen\fi
- }%
- \futurelet\bulgarian@sh@next\bulgarian@sh@tmp}
-\def\bulgarian@sh@hyphen{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\def\bulgarian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2}
-\ifx\cdash\undefined % should be defined earlier
-\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}%
-\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}%
- \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else
- \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi
-\cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}%
-\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}%
-\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode
- \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}%
-\ifx\cyrdash\undefined
-\def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}}
-\fi
-\declare@shorthand{bulgarian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\fi
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\def\enumBul{\let\@Alph\@Alph@bul \let\@alph\@alph@bul}
-\def\enumEng{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng}
-\def\enumLat{\let\@Alph\@Alph@eng \let\@alph\@alph@eng}
-\addto\extrasbulgarian{\enumBul}
-\addto\noextrasbulgarian{\enumLat}
-\def\@Alph@bul#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- \CYRA\or \CYRB\or \CYRV\or \CYRG\or \CYRD\or \CYRE\or \CYRZH\or
- \CYRZ\or \CYRI\or \CYRK\or \CYRL\or \CYRM\or \CYRN\or \CYRO\or
- \CYRP\or \CYRR\or \CYRS\or \CYRT\or \CYRU\or \CYRF\or \CYRH\or
- \CYRC\or \CYRCH\or \CYRSH\or \CYRSHCH\or \CYRYU\or \CYRYA\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-\def\@Alph@eng#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or
- N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or Y\or Z\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-\def\@alph@bul#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- \cyra\or \cyrb\or \cyrv\or \cyrg\or \cyrd\or \cyre\or \cyrzh\or
- \cyrz\or \cyri\or \cyrk\or \cyrl\or \cyrm\or \cyrn\or \cyro\or
- \cyrp\or \cyrr\or \cyrs\or \cyrt\or \cyru\or \cyrf\or \cyrh\or
- \cyrc\or \cyrch\or \cyrsh\or \cyrshch\or \cyryu\or \cyrya\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-\def\@alph@eng#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or
- a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or
- n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or y\or z\else
- \@ctrerr\fi
- }
-\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{%
-\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters}
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding
- \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault
-}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits}
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits}
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits}
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
- \babel@save{\th}%
- \let\ltx@th\th
- \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}%
- {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}%
- }
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits}
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits}
-\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{%
- \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi}
-\ldf@finish{bulgarian}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `bulgarian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty
index 1e79966e6e6..01a88fccdbb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/bulgarian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `bulgarian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 05edbcd2f89..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,263 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `catalan.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% catalan.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{catalan}
- [2005/03/29 v2.2p Catalan support from the babel system]
-%% File `catalan.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Catalan Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2005
-%% by Goncal Badenes <badenes at imec.be>
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%%
-\LdfInit{catalan}\captionscatalan
-\ifx\l@catalan\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Catalan}
- \adddialect\l@catalan0
-\fi
-\providehyphenmins{catalan}{\tw@\tw@}
-\addto\captionscatalan{%
- \def\prefacename{Pr\`oleg}%
- \def\refname{Refer\`encies}%
- \def\abstractname{Resum}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tol}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\`endix}%
- \def\contentsname{\'Index}%
- \def\listfigurename{\'Index de figures}%
- \def\listtablename{\'Index de taules}%
- \def\indexname{\'Index alfab\`etic}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Taula}%
- \def\partname{Part}%
- \def\enclname{Adjunt}%
- \def\ccname{C\`opies a}%
- \def\headtoname{A}%
- \def\pagename{P\`agina}%
- \def\seename{Vegeu}%
- \def\alsoname{Vegeu tamb\'e}%
- \def\proofname{Demostraci\'o}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossari}%
-}
-\def\datecatalan{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- de gener\or de febrer\or de mar\c{c}\or d'abril\or de maig\or
- de juny\or de juliol\or d'agost\or de setembre\or d'octubre\or
- de novembre\or de desembre\fi
- \space de~\number\year}}
-\addto\extrascatalan{%
- \lccode`'=`'}
-\addto\noextrascatalan{%
- \lccode`'=0}
-\addto\extrascatalan{\languageshorthands{catalan}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi}
- \initiate@active@char{`}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{`}}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \initiate@active@char{'}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\bbl@activate{'}}%
- }{}
-\addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{`}}}{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \addto\noextrascatalan{\bbl@deactivate{'}}}{}
-\addto\extrascatalan{%
- \babel@save\"%
- \def\"{\protect\@umlaut}}%
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \babel@save\`%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\def\`{\protect\@grave}}
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \babel@save\'%
- \addto\extrascatalan{\def\'{\protect\@acute}}
- }{}
-\let\dieresis\"
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{\let\textgrave\`}{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\let\textacute\'}{}
-\ifx\DeclareFontShape\@undefined
- \wlog{Warning: You are using an old LaTeX}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
-\else
- \ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one
- \let\@umlaut\dieresis
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \let\@acute\textacute}{}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \let\@grave\textgrave}{}
- \else
- \wlog{Warning: You are using encoding \f@encoding\space
- instead of T1.}
- \wlog{Some word breaks will not be found.}
- \def\@umlaut#1{\allowhyphens\dieresis{#1}\allowhyphens}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \def\@acute#1{\allowhyphens\textacute{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \def\@grave#1{\allowhyphens\textgrave{#1}\allowhyphens}}{}
- \fi
-\fi
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"i}{\textormath{\@umlaut\i}{\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"l}{\lgem{}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"u}{\textormath{\@umlaut u}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"I}{\textormath{\@umlaut I}{\ddot I}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"L}{\Lgem{}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"U}{\textormath{\@umlaut U}{\ddot U}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"c}{\textormath{\c c}{^{\prime} c}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"C}{\textormath{\c C}{^{\prime} C}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activegrave}{%
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`a}{\textormath{\@grave a}{\grave a}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`e}{\textormath{\@grave e}{\grave e}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`o}{\textormath{\@grave o}{\grave o}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`A}{\textormath{\@grave A}{\grave A}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`E}{\textormath{\@grave E}{\grave E}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{`O}{\textormath{\@grave O}{\grave O}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{``}{\textquotedblleft}%''
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'a}{\textormath{\@acute a}{^{\prime} a}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'e}{\textormath{\@acute e}{^{\prime} e}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'i}{\textormath{\@acute\i{}}{^{\prime} i}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'o}{\textormath{\@acute o}{^{\prime} o}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'u}{\textormath{\@acute u}{^{\prime} u}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'A}{\textormath{\@acute A}{^{\prime} A}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'E}{\textormath{\@acute E}{^{\prime} E}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'I}{\textormath{\@acute I}{^{\prime} I}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'O}{\textormath{\@acute O}{^{\prime} O}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'U}{\textormath{\@acute U}{^{\prime} U}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{'|}{%
- \textormath{\csname normal@char\string'\endcsname}{^{\prime}}}
- \declare@shorthand{catalan}{''}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}}
- }{}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{catalan}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\addto\extrascatalan{%
- \babel@save{\-}%
- \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-\newdimen\leftllkern \newdimen\rightllkern \newdimen\raiselldim
-\def\lgem{%
- \ifmmode
- \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname l%
- \else
- \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt%
- \setbox0\hbox{l}\setbox1\hbox{l\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}%
- \advance\raiselldim by \the\fontdimen5\the\font
- \advance\raiselldim by -\ht2%
- \leftllkern=-.25\wd0%
- \advance\leftllkern by \wd1%
- \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0%
- \rightllkern=-.25\wd0%
- \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1%
- \advance\rightllkern by \wd0%
- \allowhyphens\discretionary{l-}{l}%
- {\hbox{l}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}%
- \kern\rightllkern\hbox{l}}\allowhyphens
- \fi
- }
-\def\Lgem{%
- \ifmmode
- \csname normal@char\string"\endcsname L%
- \else
- \leftllkern=0pt\rightllkern=0pt\raiselldim=0pt%
- \setbox0\hbox{L}\setbox1\hbox{L\/}\setbox2\hbox{.}%
- \advance\raiselldim by .5\ht0%
- \advance\raiselldim by -.5\ht2%
- \leftllkern=-.125\wd0%
- \advance\leftllkern by \wd1%
- \advance\leftllkern by -\wd0%
- \rightllkern=-\wd0%
- \divide\rightllkern by 6%
- \advance\rightllkern by -\wd1%
- \advance\rightllkern by \wd0%
- \allowhyphens\discretionary{L-}{L}%
- {\hbox{L}\kern\leftllkern\raise\raiselldim\hbox{.}%
- \kern\rightllkern\hbox{L}}\allowhyphens
- \fi
- }
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \let\lslash\l
- \let\Lslash\L
- \DeclareRobustCommand\l{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@l\lslash}
- \DeclareRobustCommand\L{\@ifnextchar.\bbl@L\Lslash}}
-\def\bbl@l#1#2{\lgem}
-\def\bbl@L#1#2{\Lgem}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
-\ldf@finish{catalan}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `catalan.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty
index 94433d4ffcb..a4f15610c4c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/catalan.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `catalan')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp1255.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp1255.def
deleted file mode 100644
index c5c563b5738..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp1255.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,190 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `cp1255.def',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `cp1255')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
- \ProvidesFile{cp1255.def}
- [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file]
-%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\makeatletter
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textthreequarters}{\ensuremath{\frac34}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\newsheqel}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\newsheqel}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textbrokenbar}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textbrokenbar}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textperthousand}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textperthousand}
-\providecommand{\mathonesuperior}{{^1}}
-\providecommand{\maththreesuperior}{{^3}}
-\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
-%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the
-%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file.
-\DeclareInputText{130}{\quotesinglbase}
-\DeclareInputText{131}{\textflorin}
-\DeclareInputText{132}{\quotedblbase}
-\DeclareInputText{133}{\dots}
-\DeclareInputText{134}{\dag}
-\DeclareInputText{135}{\ddag}
-\DeclareInputText{136}{\^{}}
-\DeclareInputText{137}{\textperthousand}
-\DeclareInputText{139}{\guilsinglleft}
-\DeclareInputText{145}{\textquoteleft}
-\DeclareInputText{146}{\textquoteright}
-\DeclareInputText{147}{\textquotedblleft}
-\DeclareInputText{148}{\textquotedblright}
-\DeclareInputText{149}{\textbullet}
-\DeclareInputText{150}{\textendash}
-\DeclareInputText{151}{\textemdash}
-\DeclareInputText{152}{\~{}}
-\DeclareInputText{153}{\texttrademark}
-\DeclareInputText{155}{\guilsinglright}
-\DeclareInputText{160}{\nobreakspace}
-\DeclareInputText{162}{\textcent}
-\DeclareInputText{163}{\pounds}
-\DeclareInputText{164}{\newsheqel}
-\DeclareInputText{165}{\textyen}
-\DeclareInputText{166}{\textbrokenbar}
-\DeclareInputText{167}{\S}
-\DeclareInputText{168}{\"{}}
-\DeclareInputText{169}{\textcopyright}
-\DeclareInputText{171}{\guillemotleft}
-\DeclareInputMath{172}{\lnot}
-\DeclareInputText{173}{\-}
-\DeclareInputText{174}{\textregistered}
-\DeclareInputText{175}{\@tabacckludge={}}
-\DeclareInputText{176}{\textdegree}
-\DeclareInputMath{177}{\pm}
-\DeclareInputMath{178}{\mathtwosuperior}
-\DeclareInputMath{179}{\maththreesuperior}
-\DeclareInputText{180}{\@tabacckludge'{}}
-\DeclareInputMath{181}{\mu}
-\DeclareInputText{182}{\P}
-\DeclareInputText{183}{\textperiodcentered}
-\DeclareInputMath{185}{\mathonesuperior}
-\DeclareInputText{187}{\guillemotright}
-\DeclareInputText{188}{\textonequarter}
-\DeclareInputText{189}{\textonehalf}
-\DeclareInputText{190}{\textthreequarters}
-\DeclareInputText{192}{\hebsheva}
-\DeclareInputText{193}{\hebhatafsegol}
-\DeclareInputText{194}{\hebhatafpatah}
-\DeclareInputText{195}{\hebhatafqamats}
-\DeclareInputText{196}{\hebhiriq}
-\DeclareInputText{197}{\hebtsere}
-\DeclareInputText{198}{\hebsegol}
-\DeclareInputText{199}{\hebpatah}
-\DeclareInputText{200}{\hebqamats}
-\DeclareInputText{201}{\hebholam}
-\DeclareInputText{203}{\hebqubuts}
-\DeclareInputText{204}{\hebdagesh}
-\DeclareInputText{205}{\hebmeteg}
-\DeclareInputText{206}{\hebmaqaf}
-\DeclareInputText{207}{\hebrafe}
-\DeclareInputText{208}{\hebpaseq}
-\DeclareInputText{209}{\hebshindot}
-\DeclareInputText{210}{\hebsindot}
-\DeclareInputText{211}{\hebsofpasuq}
-\DeclareInputText{212}{\hebdoublevav}
-\DeclareInputText{213}{\hebvavyod}
-\DeclareInputText{214}{\hebdoubleyod}
-\DeclareInputText{224}{\hebalef}
-\DeclareInputText{225}{\hebbet}
-\DeclareInputText{226}{\hebgimel}
-\DeclareInputText{227}{\hebdalet}
-\DeclareInputText{228}{\hebhe}
-\DeclareInputText{229}{\hebvav}
-\DeclareInputText{230}{\hebzayin}
-\DeclareInputText{231}{\hebhet}
-\DeclareInputText{232}{\hebtet}
-\DeclareInputText{233}{\hebyod}
-\DeclareInputText{234}{\hebfinalkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{235}{\hebkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{236}{\heblamed}
-\DeclareInputText{237}{\hebfinalmem}
-\DeclareInputText{238}{\hebmem}
-\DeclareInputText{239}{\hebfinalnun}
-\DeclareInputText{240}{\hebnun}
-\DeclareInputText{241}{\hebsamekh}
-\DeclareInputText{242}{\hebayin}
-\DeclareInputText{243}{\hebfinalpe}
-\DeclareInputText{244}{\hebpe}
-\DeclareInputText{245}{\hebfinaltsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{246}{\hebtsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{247}{\hebqof}
-\DeclareInputText{248}{\hebresh}
-\DeclareInputText{249}{\hebshin}
-\DeclareInputText{250}{\hebtav}
-\DeclareInputText{253}{\lefttorightmark}
-\DeclareInputText{254}{\righttoleftmark}
-\makeatother
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `cp1255.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp862.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp862.def
deleted file mode 100644
index 3c3c2f0b48d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/cp862.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,166 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `cp862.def',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `cp862')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
- \ProvidesFile{cp862.def}
- [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file]
-%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\makeatletter
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textdegree}{\ensuremath{{^\circ}}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonehalf}{\ensuremath{\frac12}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textonequarter}{\ensuremath{\frac14}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textflorin}{\textit{f}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textpeseta}{Pt}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textblacksquare}
- {\vrule \@width .3em \@height .4em \@depth -.1em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textcent}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textcent}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\textyen}
- {\TextSymbolUnavailable\textyen}
-\providecommand{\mathtwosuperior}{{^2}}
-\providecommand{\mathordmasculine}{{^o}}
-\providecommand{\mathordfeminine}{{^a}}
-%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the
-%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file.
-\DeclareInputText{128}{\hebalef}
-\DeclareInputText{129}{\hebbet}
-\DeclareInputText{130}{\hebgimel}
-\DeclareInputText{131}{\hebdalet}
-\DeclareInputText{132}{\hebhe}
-\DeclareInputText{133}{\hebvav}
-\DeclareInputText{134}{\hebzayin}
-\DeclareInputText{135}{\hebhet}
-\DeclareInputText{136}{\hebtet}
-\DeclareInputText{137}{\hebyod}
-\DeclareInputText{138}{\hebfinalkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{139}{\hebkaf}
-\DeclareInputText{140}{\heblamed}
-\DeclareInputText{141}{\hebfinalmem}
-\DeclareInputText{142}{\hebmem}
-\DeclareInputText{143}{\hebfinalnun}
-\DeclareInputText{144}{\hebnun}
-\DeclareInputText{145}{\hebsamekh}
-\DeclareInputText{146}{\hebayin}
-\DeclareInputText{147}{\hebfinalpe}
-\DeclareInputText{148}{\hebpe}
-\DeclareInputText{149}{\hebfinaltsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{150}{\hebtsadi}
-\DeclareInputText{151}{\hebqof}
-\DeclareInputText{152}{\hebresh}
-\DeclareInputText{153}{\hebshin}
-\DeclareInputText{154}{\hebtav}
-\DeclareInputText{155}{\textcent}
-\DeclareInputText{156}{\pounds}
-\DeclareInputText{157}{\textyen}
-\DeclareInputText{158}{\textpeseta}
-\DeclareInputText{159}{\textflorin}
-\DeclareInputText{160}{\@tabacckludge'a}
-\DeclareInputText{161}{\@tabacckludge'\i}
-\DeclareInputText{162}{\@tabacckludge'o}
-\DeclareInputText{163}{\@tabacckludge'u}
-\DeclareInputText{164}{\~n}
-\DeclareInputText{165}{\~N}
-\DeclareInputMath{166}{\mathordfeminine}
-\DeclareInputMath{167}{\mathordmasculine}
-\DeclareInputText{168}{\textquestiondown}
-\DeclareInputMath{170}{\lnot}
-\DeclareInputText{171}{\textonehalf}
-\DeclareInputText{172}{\textonequarter}
-\DeclareInputText{173}{\textexclamdown}
-\DeclareInputText{174}{\guillemotleft}
-\DeclareInputText{175}{\guillemotright}
-\DeclareInputMath{224}{\alpha}
-\DeclareInputText{225}{\ss}
-\DeclareInputMath{226}{\Gamma}
-\DeclareInputMath{227}{\pi}
-\DeclareInputMath{228}{\Sigma}
-\DeclareInputMath{229}{\sigma}
-\DeclareInputMath{230}{\mu}
-\DeclareInputMath{231}{\tau}
-\DeclareInputMath{232}{\Phi}
-\DeclareInputMath{233}{\Theta}
-\DeclareInputMath{234}{\Omega}
-\DeclareInputMath{235}{\delta}
-\DeclareInputMath{236}{\infty}
-\DeclareInputMath{237}{\phi}
-\DeclareInputMath{238}{\varepsilon}
-\DeclareInputMath{239}{\cap}
-\DeclareInputMath{240}{\equiv}
-\DeclareInputMath{241}{\pm}
-\DeclareInputMath{242}{\ge}
-\DeclareInputMath{243}{\le}
-\DeclareInputMath{246}{\div}
-\DeclareInputMath{247}{\approx}
-\DeclareInputText{248}{\textdegree}
-\DeclareInputText{249}{\textperiodcentered}
-\DeclareInputText{250}{\textbullet}
-\DeclareInputMath{251}{\surd}
-\DeclareInputMath{252}{\mathnsuperior}
-\DeclareInputMath{253}{\mathtwosuperior}
-\DeclareInputText{254}{\textblacksquare}
-\DeclareInputText{255}{\nobreakspace}
-\makeatother
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `cp862.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 8f912ec77ce..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,100 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `croatian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% croatian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{croatian}
- [2005/03/29 v1.3l Croatian support from the babel system]
-%% File `croatian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{croatian}\captionscroatian
-\ifx\l@croatian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Croatian}
- \adddialect\l@croatian0\fi
-\addto\captionscroatian{%
- \def\prefacename{Predgovor}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografija}%
- \def\chaptername{Poglavlje}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatak}%
- \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
- \def\listfigurename{Popis slika}%
- \def\listtablename{Popis tablica}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Slika}%
- \def\tablename{Tablica}%
- \def\partname{Dio}%
- \def\enclname{Prilozi}%
- \def\ccname{Kopije}%
- \def\headtoname{Prima}%
- \def\pagename{Stranica}%
- \def\seename{Vidjeti}%
- \def\alsoname{Vidjeti i}%
- \def\proofname{Dokaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Kazalo}%
- }%
-\def\datecroatian{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- sije\v{c}nja\or velja\v{c}e\or o\v{z}ujka\or travnja\or svibnja\or
- lipnja\or srpnja\or kolovoza\or rujna\or listopada\or studenog\or
- prosinca\fi \space \number\year.}}
-\addto\extrascroatian{}
-\addto\noextrascroatian{}
-\ldf@finish{croatian}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `croatian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty
index a42823dbe5d..7cdf2051db8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/croatian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `croatian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 1c4a22186a5..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,452 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `czech.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% czech.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{czech}
- [2008/07/06 v3.1a Czech support from the babel system]
-%% File `czech.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Copyright (C) 2005, 2008
-%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz)
-%%
-%% Czech Language Definition File
-%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik
-%% babel at tesarici.cz
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@czech\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Czech}
- \adddialect\l@czech0\fi
-\def\cs@iltw@{IL2}
-\newif\ifcs@splithyphens
-\cs@splithyphensfalse
-\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined
- \let\cs@compat@plain\relax
- \message{csplain compatibility mode}
-\else
- \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{%
- \let\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \message{cslatex compatibility mode}}
-\fi
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \ProvidesPackage{czech}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Czech style]
- \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}}
- \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}}
- \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}}
- \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse}
- \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue}
- \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax}
- \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@}
- \ProcessOptions
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \input il2enc.def
- \fi
- \def\CurrentOption{czech}
-\fi
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{P\v{r}edmluva}%
- \def\refname{Reference}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitola}%
- \def\appendixname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}%
- \def\contentsname{Obsah}%
- \def\listfigurename{Seznam obr\'azk\r{u}}%
- \def\listtablename{Seznam tabulek}%
- \def\indexname{Rejst\v{r}\'{\i}k}%
- \def\figurename{Obr\'azek}%
- \def\tablename{Tabulka}%
- \def\partname{\v{C}\'ast}%
- \def\enclname{P\v{r}\'{\i}loha}%
- \def\ccname{Na v\v{e}dom\'{\i}}%
- \def\headtoname{Komu}%
- \def\pagename{Strana}%
- \def\seename{viz}%
- \def\alsoname{viz tak\'e}%
- \def\proofname{D\r{u}kaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}%
- }%
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or ledna\or \'unora\or
- b\v{r}ezna\or dubna\or kv\v{e}tna\or \v{c}ervna\or \v{c}ervence\or
- srpna\or z\'a\v{r}\'\i\or \v{r}\'{\i}jna\or listopadu\or
- prosince\fi \space\number\year}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing
- \languageshorthands{czech}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\q\let\q\v
- \babel@save\w\let\w\r}
-\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\sq{'}
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{%
- t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{%
- d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}}
-\def\lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em%
- \else
- l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-\def\Lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}%
- \else
- L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s
- \def\csprimeson{%
- \catcode`\`\active \catcode`\'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s}
- \def\csprimesoff{%
- \catcode`\`12 \catcode`\'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s}
- \begingroup\catcode`\`\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote}
- \def\cs@openquote{%
- \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq
- \else \expandafter\clq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \begingroup\catcode`\'\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote}
- {^\bgroup\prim@s}}
- \def\cs@closequote{%
- \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq
- \else \expandafter\crq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= }
- \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= }
-\else
- \initiate@active@char{"}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
- \expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"`}{\clqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"'}{\crqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"<}{\flqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{">}{\frqq}
- \declare@shorthand{czech}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen}
-\fi
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{%
- \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}%
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne
- \leavevmode
- \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em
- \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1}
- {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1}
- {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1}
- {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq}
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi
-\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}}
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes
- \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=}
- \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax}
-\fi
-\newcount\cs@wordlen
-\begingroup\catcode`\-12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@hyphen{-}
- \def\cs@endash{--}
- \def\cs@emdash{---}
- \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}}
- \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@
- \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@}
-}\x
-\initiate@active@char{-}
-\declare@shorthand{czech}{-}{%
- \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
- \ifhmode
- \ifinner
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-\begingroup\catcode`\-\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n}
- \def\cs@firsthyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen
- \fi}
- \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{%
- \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n}
- \def\cs@secondhyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash
- \fi}
-}\x
-\def\cs@checkhyphen{%
- \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\-
- \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword
- \else
- \cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken}
-\def\cs@gett@ken{%
- \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}%
- \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-\def\cs@examinetoken{%
- \ifcat A\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifcat 0\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifx\char\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}%
- \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}%
- \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}%
- \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next}
-\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{%
- \def\cs@token{#1}%
- \ifx\cs@token\@empty
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= }
-\def\cs@addparam#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}}
-\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=}
-\def\cs@examinechar{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}}
-\def\cs@checkcode#1{%
- \ifnum0=#1
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \else
- \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne
- \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}%
- \else
- \cs@splithyphen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@word}%
- \fi
- \fi \cs@next}
-\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word}
-\let\minus\cs@hyphen
-
-\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens}
-\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens}
-\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{czech}{split}{%
- \addto\extrasczech{\cs@splitattr}}
-\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
-\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}%
- \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}%
- \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \cs@deactivatehyphens
- \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
- \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax}
-\let\cs@looseness\looseness
-\def\looseness{%
- \ifcs@splithyphens
- \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi
- \cs@looseness}
-\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else
- \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption}
- \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined
- \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage
- \def\selectlanguage{%
- \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect
- \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language
- \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage
- \else
- \expandafter\selectlanguage
- \fi}
- \def\cs@selectlanguage{%
- \cs@tempdisable{captions}%
- \cs@tempdisable{date}%
- \selectlanguage}
- \def\cs@tempdisable#1{%
- \def\@tempa{cs@#1}%
- \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname
- \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{%
- \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \noexpand\@undefined}}
- \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language
- \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect
- \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage
- \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined
-\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else
- \def\cs@check@enc{
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble
- \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined
- \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined
- \fi
- \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined}
- \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc}
-\fi
-\fi
-\def\cs@undoiltw@{%
- \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000
- \sfcode159=1000
- \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000
- \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000
- \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000
- \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000
- \uccode181=149
- \uccode185=153
- \uccode187=155
- \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0
- \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000
- \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000}
-\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined
-\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else
- \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update
- \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi
- \cs@enc@update
- \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename
- \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname
- \fi
- \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-\fi\fi
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `czech.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty
index a6291603982..d9ce4b85624 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/czech.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `czech')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 98e36d4cdcf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,126 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `danish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% danish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{danish}
- [2009/09/19 v1.3r Danish support from the babel system]
-%% File `danish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\LdfInit{danish}\captionsdanish
-\ifx\l@danish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Danish}
- \adddialect\l@danish0\fi
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\addto\captionsdanish{%
- \def\prefacename{Forord}%
- \def\refname{Litteratur}%
- \def\abstractname{Resum\'e}%
- \def\bibname{Litteratur}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Bilag}%
- \def\contentsname{Indhold}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurer}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabeller}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Vedlagt}%
- \def\ccname{Kopi til}% or Kopi sendt til
- \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Side}%
- \def\seename{Se}%
- \def\alsoname{Se ogs{\aa}}%
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Gloseliste}%
- }%
-\def\datedanish{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or marts\or april\or maj\or juni\or
- juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasdanish{\languageshorthands{danish}}
-\addto\extrasdanish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasdanish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{danish}{"/}{\textormath
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-\ldf@finish{danish}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `danish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty
index 48cc01b3475..e8ccb844ebc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/danish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `danish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index af35926f37d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,186 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `dutch.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% dutch.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{dutch}
- [2005/03/30 v3.8i Dutch support from the babel system]
-%% File `dutch.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Dutch Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-\def\bbl@tempa{dutch}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \ifx\l@dutch\undefined
- \@nopatterns{Dutch}
- \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined
- \adddialect\l@dutch0
- \else
- \adddialect\l@dutch\l@afrikaans
- \fi
- \fi
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\"\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def\captionsdutch{%
- \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}%
- \def\refname{Referenties}%
- \def\abstractname{Samenvatting}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\chaptername{Hoofdstuk}%
- \def\appendixname{B"ylage}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgave}%
- \def\listfigurename{L"yst van figuren}%
- \def\listtablename{L"yst van tabellen}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Figuur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Deel}%
- \def\enclname{B"ylage(n)}%
- \def\ccname{cc}%
- \def\headtoname{Aan}%
- \def\pagename{Pagina}%
- \def\seename{zie}%
- \def\alsoname{zie ook}%
- \def\proofname{Bew"ys}%
- \def\glossaryname{Verklarende Woordenl"yst}%
- }
- }\x
- \def\datedutch{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- januari\or februari\or maart\or april\or mei\or juni\or
- juli\or augustus\or september\or oktober\or november\or
- december\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\else
- \ifx\l@afrikaans\undefined
- \@nopatterns{Afrikaans}
- \ifx\l@dutch\undefined
- \adddialect\l@afrikaans0
- \else
- \adddialect\l@afrikaans\l@dutch
- \fi
- \fi
- \def\captionsafrikaans{%
- \def\prefacename{Voorwoord}%
- \def\refname{Verwysings}%
- \def\abstractname{Samevatting}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\chaptername{Hoofstuk}%
- \def\appendixname{Bylae}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhoudsopgawe}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lys van figure}%
- \def\listtablename{Lys van tabelle}%
- \def\indexname{Inhoud}%
- \def\figurename{Figuur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Deel}%
- \def\enclname{Bylae(n)}%
- \def\ccname{a.a.}%
- \def\headtoname{Aan}%
- \def\pagename{Bladsy}%
- \def\seename{sien}%
- \def\alsoname{sien ook}%
- \def\proofname{Bewys}%
- }
- \def\dateafrikaans{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Januarie\or Februarie\or Maart\or April\or Mei\or Junie\or
- Julie\or Augustus\or September\or Oktober\or November\or
- Desember\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\fi
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{dutch}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \umlautlow\umlautelow}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{%
- \umlauthigh}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-\def\@trema#1{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{#1}{\"{#1}}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"a}{\textormath{\@trema a}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"e}{\textormath{\@trema e}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"i}{\textormath
- {\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{i}{\"{\i}}\allowhyphens}%
- {\ddot \imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"o}{\textormath{\@trema o}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"u}{\textormath{\@trema u}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"y}{\textormath{\ij{}}{\ddot y}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"Y}{\textormath{\IJ{}}{\ddot Y}}
-\declare@shorthand{dutch}{"/}{\textormath
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{/}{}{/}\bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `dutch.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty
index ebfde1f3685..2e4c72ddcb8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/dutch.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `dutch')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index b4fac6a90f3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,202 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `english.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% english.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{english}
- [2005/03/30 v3.3o English support from the babel system]
-%% File 'english.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@english\@undefined
- \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined
- \ifx\l@british\@undefined
- \ifx\l@american\@undefined
- \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined
- \ifx\l@canadian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@australian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{English}
- \adddialect\l@english0
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@newzealand
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@australian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@canadian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@USenglish
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@american
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@british
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@english\l@UKenglish
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\l@british\@undefined
- \ifx\l@UKenglish\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@british\l@english
- \adddialect\l@UKenglish\l@english
- \else
- \let\l@british\l@UKenglish
- \fi
-\else
- \let\l@UKenglish\l@british
-\fi
-\ifx\l@american\@undefined
- \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@american\l@english
- \else
- \let\l@american\l@USenglish
- \fi
-\else
- \ifx\l@USenglish\@undefined
- \let\l@USenglish\l@american
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\ifx\l@canadian\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@canadian\l@american
-\fi
-\ifx\l@australian\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@australian\l@british
-\fi
-\ifx\l@newzealand\@undefined
- \adddialect\l@newzealand\l@british
-\fi
-
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Preface}%
- \def\refname{References}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstract}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliography}%
- \def\chaptername{Chapter}%
- \def\appendixname{Appendix}%
- \def\contentsname{Contents}%
- \def\listfigurename{List of Figures}%
- \def\listtablename{List of Tables}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Figure}%
- \def\tablename{Table}%
- \def\partname{Part}%
- \def\enclname{encl}%
- \def\ccname{cc}%
- \def\headtoname{To}%
- \def\pagename{Page}%
- \def\seename{see}%
- \def\alsoname{see also}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}%
- }
-\def\bbl@tempa{british}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{UKenglish}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{UK}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{american}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{USenglish}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{canadian}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{US}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{australian}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{newzealand}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa\def\bbl@tempb{AU}\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{UK}
-\ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\ifcase\day\or
- 1st\or 2nd\or 3rd\or 4th\or 5th\or
- 6th\or 7th\or 8th\or 9th\or 10th\or
- 11th\or 12th\or 13th\or 14th\or 15th\or
- 16th\or 17th\or 18th\or 19th\or 20th\or
- 21st\or 22nd\or 23rd\or 24th\or 25th\or
- 26th\or 27th\or 28th\or 29th\or 30th\or
- 31st\fi~\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or
- December\fi\space \number\year}}
-\else
- \def\bbl@tempa{AU}
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or
- December\fi\space \number\year}}
- \else
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\ifcase\month\or
- January\or February\or March\or April\or May\or June\or
- July\or August\or September\or October\or November\or
- December\fi \space\number\day, \number\year}}
- \fi
-\fi
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `english.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty
index 73f7cacd1cf..3109bdd2d4a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/english.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `english')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 02e9ed9c2cc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `esperanto.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% esperanto.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{esperanto}
- [2007/10/20 v1.4t Esperanto support from the babel system]
-%% File 'esperanto.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl
-\LdfInit{esperanto}\captionsesperanto
-\ifx\l@esperanto\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Esperanto}
- \adddialect\l@esperanto0\fi
-\addto\captionsesperanto{%
- \def\prefacename{Anta\u{u}parolo}%
- \def\refname{Cita\^\j{}oj}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografio}%
- \def\chaptername{{\^C}apitro}%
- \def\appendixname{Apendico}%
- \def\contentsname{Enhavo}%
- \def\listfigurename{Listo de figuroj}%
- \def\listtablename{Listo de tabeloj}%
- \def\indexname{Indekso}%
- \def\figurename{Figuro}%
- \def\tablename{Tabelo}%
- \def\partname{Parto}%
- \def\enclname{Aldono(j)}%
- \def\ccname{Kopie al}%
- \def\headtoname{Al}%
- \def\pagename{Pa\^go}%
- \def\subjectname{Temo}%
- \def\seename{vidu}% a^u: vd.
- \def\alsoname{vidu anka\u{u}}% a^u vd. anka\u{u}
- \def\proofname{Pruvo}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glosaro}%
- }
-\def\dateesperanto{%
- \def\today{\number\day{--a}~de~\ifcase\month\or
- januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or
- julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or
- decembro\fi,\space \number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{^}
-\addto\extrasesperanto{\languageshorthands{esperanto}}
-\addto\extrasesperanto{\bbl@activate{^}}
-\addto\noextrasesperanto{\bbl@deactivate{^}}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^c}{\^{c}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^C}{\^{C}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^g}{\^{g}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^G}{\^{G}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^h}{h\llap{\^{}}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^H}{\^{H}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^j}{\^{\j}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^J}{\^{J}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^s}{\^{s}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^S}{\^{S}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^u}{\u u\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^U}{\u U\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{esperanto}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}
-\def\esper#1{\@esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}}
-\def\Esper#1{\@Esper{\@nameuse{c@#1}}}
-\def\@esper#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or c\or \^c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or \^g\or
- h\or h\llap{\^{}}\or i\or j\or \^\j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or
- p\or r\or s\or \^s\or t\or u\or \u{u}\or v\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\def\@Esper#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or A\or B\or C\or \^C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or \^G\or
- H\or \^H\or I\or J\or \^J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or
- P\or R\or S\or \^S\or T\or U\or \u{U}\or V\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\addto\dateesperanto{\def\hodiau{la \today}}
-\def\hodiaun{la \number\day --an~de~\ifcase\month\or
- januaro\or februaro\or marto\or aprilo\or majo\or junio\or
- julio\or a\u{u}gusto\or septembro\or oktobro\or novembro\or
- decembro\fi, \space \number\year}
-\ldf@finish{esperanto}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `esperanto.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty
index 63802eb61e4..31743fb5be7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/esperanto.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `esperanto')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index e6d95b898ba..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,187 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `estonian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% estonian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{estonian}
- [2009/03/08 v1.0k Estonian support from the babel system]
-%% File `estonian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2009
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Estonian language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1991 - 2009
-%% by Enn Saar, Tartu Astrophysical Observatory
-%% Please report errors to: Jaan Vajakas jv at ut.ee
-%% (or Enn Saar saar at aai.ee
-%% or J. L. Braams babel at braams.xs4all.nl)
-\LdfInit{estonian}\captionsestonian
-\ifx\l@estonian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Estonian}
- \adddialect\l@estonian0
-\fi
-\addto\captionsestonian{%
- \def\prefacename{Sissejuhatus}%
- \def\refname{Viited}%
- \def\bibname{Kirjandus}%
- \def\appendixname{Lisa}%
- \def\contentsname{Sisukord}%
- \def\listfigurename{Joonised}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabelid}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Joonis}%
- \def\tablename{Tabel}%
- \def\partname{Osa}%
- \def\enclname{Lisa(d)}%
- \def\ccname{Koopia(d)}%
- \def\headtoname{}%
- \def\pagename{Lk.}%
- \def\seename{vt.}%
- \def\alsoname{vt. ka}%
- }
-\begingroup \catcode`\"\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
-\addto\captionsestonian{%
- \def\abstractname{Kokkuv~ote}%
- \def\chaptername{Peat"ukk}%
- \def\proofname{T~oestus}%
- \def\glossaryname{S~onastik}%
-}}\x
-\begingroup \catcode`\"\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\month@estonian{\ifcase\month\or
- jaanuar\or veebruar\or m"arts\or aprill\or mai\or juuni\or
- juuli\or august\or september\or oktoober\or november\or
- detsember\fi}}
-\x
-\def\dateestonian{%
- \def\today{\number\day.\space\month@estonian
- \space\number\year.\space a.}}
-\def\et@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1}
-
-\@ifundefined{documentclass}
- {\let\ifet@latex\iffalse}
- {\let\ifet@latex\iftrue}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\initiate@active@char{~}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\languageshorthands{estonian}}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@activate{"}\bbl@activate{~}}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasestonian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\addto\extrasestonian{\umlautlow}
-\addto\noextrasestonian{\umlauthigh}
-\ifet@latex
- \addto\extrasestonian{%
- \expandafter\et@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\et@gentilde}}
-\else
- \addto\extrasestonian{\et@sdef\~{\et@gentilde}}
-\fi
-\def\et@gentilde#1{%
- \if#1s\v{#1}\else\if#1S\v{#1}\else%
- \if#1z\v{#1}\else\if#1Z\v{#1}\else%
- \et@newtilde{#1}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\et@newtilde#1{%
- \leavevmode\bgroup\U@D 1ex%
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{\char126}\dimen@ -.45ex\advance\dimen@\ht\z@
- \ifdim 1ex<\dimen@ \fontdimen5\font\dimen@ \fi}%
- \accent126\fontdimen5\font\U@D #1%
- \egroup}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand\dq{"}
- \def\noexpand\til{~}}
-\x
-\ifx\f@encoding\bbl@t@one
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{s}{178}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{S}{146}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{z}{186}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\~}{T1}{Z}{154}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{'}{17}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{`}{18}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{<}{19}
- \DeclareTextComposite{\"}{T1}{>}{20}
-\else
- \wlog{Warning: Hyphenation would work better for the T1 encoding.}
-\fi
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~o}{\textormath{\~{o}\allowhyphens}{\tilde o}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~O}{\textormath{\~{O}\allowhyphens}{\tilde O}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check s}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check S}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check z}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check Z}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{""}{\dq}
-\declare@shorthand{estonian}{~~}{\til}
-\ldf@finish{estonian}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `estonian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty
index 24c298f4774..3b7eea14d45 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/estonian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `estonian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 827aade8c79..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,132 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `finnish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% finnish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2007 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{finnish}
- [2007/10/20 v1.3q Finnish support from the babel system]
-%% File `finnish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2007
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl
-\LdfInit{finnish}\captionsfinnish
-\ifx\l@finnish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Finnish}
- \adddialect\l@finnish0\fi
-\addto\captionsfinnish{%
- \def\prefacename{Esipuhe}%
- \def\refname{Viitteet}%
- \def\abstractname{Tiivistelm\"a}
- \def\bibname{Kirjallisuutta}%
- \def\chaptername{Luku}%
- \def\appendixname{Liite}%
- \def\contentsname{Sis\"alt\"o}% /* Could be "Sis\"allys" as well */
- \def\listfigurename{Kuvat}%
- \def\listtablename{Taulukot}%
- \def\indexname{Hakemisto}%
- \def\figurename{Kuva}%
- \def\tablename{Taulukko}%
- \def\partname{Osa}%
- \def\enclname{Liitteet}%
- \def\ccname{Jakelu}%
- \def\headtoname{Vastaanottaja}%
- \def\pagename{Sivu}%
- \def\seename{katso}%
- \def\alsoname{katso my\"os}%
- \def\proofname{Todistus}%
- \def\glossaryname{Sanasto}%
- }%
-\def\datefinnish{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- tammikuuta\or helmikuuta\or maaliskuuta\or huhtikuuta\or
- toukokuuta\or kes\"akuuta\or hein\"akuuta\or elokuuta\or
- syyskuuta\or lokakuuta\or marraskuuta\or joulukuuta\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{%
- \babel@savevariable\hyphenpenalty\hyphenpenalty=30%
- \babel@savevariable\exhyphenpenalty\exhyphenpenalty=30%
- \babel@savevariable\doublehyphendemerits\doublehyphendemerits=5000%
- \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits\finalhyphendemerits=5000%
- }
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\languageshorthands{finnish}}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\umlautlow\umlautelow}
-\addto\noextrasfinnish{\umlauthigh}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{finnish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\babel@save\-}
-\addto\extrasfinnish{\def\-{\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{-}{}{}\bbl@allowhyphens}}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\ldf@finish{finnish}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `finnish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty
index 8fd60acee53..d00dbe9eddc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/finnish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `finnish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty
index 73f6c505cf0..4f848e4d963 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/francais.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `francais')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.cfg
deleted file mode 100644
index f83b7ca1136..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.cfg
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,15 +0,0 @@
-%% frenchb.cfg: configuration file for frenchb.ldf
-%% Daniel Flipo daniel.flipo at free.fr
-%% File `frenchb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
-%%%%%%%%% WARNING: THIS FILE SHOULD NO LONGER BE USED %%%%%%%%%
-%% If you want to customise frenchb, please DO NOT hack into the code!
-%% Do no put any code in this file either, please use the new command
-%% \frenchbsetup{} with the proper options to customise frenchb.
-%%
-%% Add \frenchbsetup{ShowOptions} to your preamble to see the list of
-%% available options and/or read the documentation.
-%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index ebe446e025c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/frenchb.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,1217 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `frenchb.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% frenchb.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{frenchb}
- [2010/08/21 v2.5a French support from the babel system]
-%% File `frenchb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Frenchb language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2010
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg
-%% Please report errors to: Daniel Flipo, GUTenberg
-%% daniel.flipo at free.fr
-\def\CurrentOption{french}
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption\datefrench
-\newif\ifLaTeXe
-\let\bbl@tempa\relax
-\ifx\magnification\@undefined
- \ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined
- \PackageError{frenchb.ldf}
- {LaTeX-2.09 format is no longer supported.\MessageBreak
- Aborting here}
- {Please upgrade to LaTeX2e!}
- \let\bbl@tempa\endinput
- \else
- \LaTeXetrue
- \fi
-\fi
-\bbl@tempa
-\ifx\l@french\@undefined
- \ifx\l@francais\@undefined
- \ifx\l@canadien\@undefined
- \ifx\l@acadian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{French}
- \adddialect\l@french0
- \else
- \let\l@french\l@acadian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@french\l@canadien
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@french\l@francais
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\l@francais\@undefined
- \let\l@francais\l@french
-\fi
-\ifx\l@frenchb\@undefined
- \let\l@frenchb\l@french
-\fi
-\ifx\l@canadien\@undefined
- \let\l@canadien\l@french
-\fi
-\ifx\l@acadian\@undefined
- \let\l@acadian\l@french
-\fi
-\def\datefrancais{\datefrench}
-\def\datefrenchb{\datefrench}
-\def\extrasfrancais{\extrasfrench}
-\def\extrasfrenchb{\extrasfrench}
-\def\noextrasfrancais{\noextrasfrench}
-\def\noextrasfrenchb{\noextrasfrench}
-\newif\ifFBunicode
-\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname luatexversion\endcsname\relax
-\else
- \FBunicodetrue
-\fi
-\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXrevision\endcsname\relax
-\else
- \FBunicodetrue
-\fi
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=`\'
- \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019="2019\fi}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\lccode`\'=0
- \ifFBunicode\lccode"2019=0\fi}
-\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\long\def\STD@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip
- \sbox\@tempboxa{#1: #2}%
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
- #1: #2\par
- \else
- \global \@minipagefalse
- \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- \fi
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
-\newcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\space}
-\newcommand*{\Fthinspace}{\thinspace}
-\newif\ifFB@active@punct \FB@active@puncttrue
-\newif\ifFB@xetex@punct
-\begingroup\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endgroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname XeTeXinterchartokenstate\endcsname\relax
-\else
- \FB@xetex@puncttrue\FB@active@punctfalse
-\fi
-\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue
-\ifFB@xetex@punct
- \PackageInfo{frenchb.ldf}{No need for active punctuation characters
- \MessageBreak with this version of XeTeX! reported}
- \@ifundefined{@for}{%
- \def\@nnil{\@nil}%
- \def\@empty{}%
- \def\@fornoop#1\@@#2#3{}%
- \long\def\@for#1:=#2\do#3{%
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\@fortmp\expandafter{#2}%
- \ifx\@fortmp\@empty \else
- \expandafter\@forloop#2,\@nil,\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}%
- \long\def\@forloop#1,#2,#3\@@#4#5{\def#4{#1}\ifx #4\@nnil \else
- #5\def#4{#2}\ifx #4\@nnil \else#5\@iforloop #3\@@#4{#5}\fi\fi}%
- \long\def\@iforloop#1,#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
- \expandafter\@fornoop \else
- #4\relax\expandafter\@iforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}%
- \def\@tfor#1:={\@tf@r#1 }%
- \long\def\@tf@r#1#2\do#3{\def\@fortmp{#2}\ifx\@fortmp\space\else
- \@tforloop#2\@nil\@nil\@@#1{#3}\fi}%
- \long\def\@tforloop#1#2\@@#3#4{\def#3{#1}\ifx #3\@nnil
- \expandafter\@fornoop \else
- #4\relax\expandafter\@tforloop\fi#2\@@#3{#4}}%
- }{}%
- \newcount\FB@interchartokenstateORI
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthick
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctthin
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctnul
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilo
- \newXeTeXintercharclass\FB@punctguilf
- \def\FB@charclassesORI{}
- \def\empty{}
- \def\FB@parse#1,#2\endparse{\def\FB@class{#1}%
- \def\FB@charclassesORI{#2}}%
- \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@french}{%
- \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty
- \FB@interchartokenstateORI=\XeTeXinterchartokenstate
- \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do
- {\edef\FB@charclassesORI{\FB@charclassesORI%
- \the\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char,}}%
- \let\shorthandonORI\shorthandon
- \let\shorthandoffORI\shorthandoff
- \fi
- \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=1
- \XeTeXcharclass `\: = \FB@punctthick
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthick = {%
- \ifhmode\FDP@colonspace\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthick = {%
- \FDP@colonspace}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthick = {%
- \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace\fi}%
- \@for\FB@char:={`\;,`\!,`\?}\do
- {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctthin}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctthin = {%
- \ifhmode\FDP@thinspace\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilf \FB@punctthin = {%
- \FDP@thinspace}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctthin = {%
- \ifhmode\unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace\fi}%
- \@for\FB@char:={`\[,`\(}\do
- {\XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@punctnul}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctnul \FB@punctthin = {}%
- \XeTeXcharclass"00AB = \FB@punctguilo
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo \z@ = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctguilo 255 = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\ignorespaces\fi}%
- \XeTeXcharclass"00BB = \FB@punctguilf
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \z@ \FB@punctguilf = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks \FB@punctthin \FB@punctguilf = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
- \XeTeXinterchartoks 255 \FB@punctguilf = {%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\unskip\FBguill@spacing\fi}%
- \def\shorthandoff##1{%
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{\protect\shorthandoff{;:!?} is
- helpless with XeTeX,\MessageBreak use \protect\NoAutoSpacing
- \space *inside a group* instead;\MessageBreak reported}%
- }%
- \def\shorthandon##1{}%
- }
- \newcommand*{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench}{%
- \ifx\FB@charclassesORI\empty
- \else
- \@for\FB@char:={`\:,`\;,`\!,`\?,`\[,`\(,"00AB,"00BB}\do
- {\expandafter\FB@parse\FB@charclassesORI\endparse
- \XeTeXcharclass\FB@char=\FB@class}%
- \def\FB@charclassesORI{}%
- \XeTeXinterchartokenstate=\FB@interchartokenstateORI
- \let\shorthandon\shorthandonORI
- \let\shorthandoff\shorthandoffORI
- \fi
- }
- \addto\extrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@french}
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\FB@xetex@punct@nonfrench}
-\fi
-\ifFB@active@punct
- \initiate@active@char{:}%
- \initiate@active@char{;}%
- \initiate@active@char{!}%
- \initiate@active@char{?}%
- \declare@shorthand{french}{;}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string;}
- \declare@shorthand{french}{!}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string!}
- \declare@shorthand{french}{?}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fthinspace
- \else
- \FDP@thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string?}
- \declare@shorthand{french}{:}{%
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace
- \else
- \FDP@colonspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string:}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{:}{\string:}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{!}{\string!}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{?}{\string?}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{;}{\string;}
- \addto\extrasfrench{%
- \languageshorthands{french}%
- \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{;}%
- \bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{?}%
- }
- \addto\noextrasfrench{%
- \bbl@deactivate{:}\bbl@deactivate{;}%
- \bbl@deactivate{!}\bbl@deactivate{?}}
-\fi
-\newif\ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue
-\def\autospace@beforeFDP{%
- \def\FDP@thinspace{\penalty\@M\Fthinspace}%
- \def\FDP@colonspace{\penalty\@M\Fcolonspace}}
-\def\noautospace@beforeFDP{\let\FDP@thinspace\@empty
- \let\FDP@colonspace\@empty}
-\ifLaTeXe
- \def\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\autospace@beforeFDP
- \FBAutoSpacePunctuationtrue}
- \def\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP{\noautospace@beforeFDP
- \FBAutoSpacePunctuationfalse}
-\else
- \let\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP\autospace@beforeFDP
- \let\NoAutoSpaceBeforeFDP\noautospace@beforeFDP
- \fi
-\AutoSpaceBeforeFDP
-\ifLaTeXe
- \let\ttfamilyORI\ttfamily
- \let\rmfamilyORI\rmfamily
- \let\sffamilyORI\sffamily
- \DeclareRobustCommand\ttfamilyFB{%
- \FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse
- \noautospace@beforeFDP\ttfamilyORI}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\rmfamilyFB{%
- \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue
- \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation
- \autospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI
- \else
- \noautospace@beforeFDP\rmfamilyORI
- \fi}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\sffamilyFB{%
- \FBAutoSpaceGuilltrue
- \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation
- \autospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI
- \else
- \noautospace@beforeFDP\sffamilyORI
- \fi}%
-\fi
-\newcommand*{\NoAutoSpacing}{\FBAutoSpaceGuillfalse
- \ifFB@active@punct\shorthandoff{;:!?}\fi
- \ifFB@xetex@punct\XeTeXinterchartokenstate=0\fi}
-\newcommand*{\og}{\@empty}
-\newcommand*{\fg}{\@empty}
-
-\ifLaTeXe
-\else
- \ifFBunicode
- \def\guillemotleft{\char"00AB}
- \def\guillemotright{\char"00BB}
- \def\textquotedblleft{\char"201C}
- \def\textquotedblright{\char"201D}
- \else
- \def\guillemotleft{\leavevmode\raise0.25ex
- \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\ll$}}
- \def\guillemotright{\raise0.25ex
- \hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\gg$}}
- \def\textquotedblleft{``}
- \def\textquotedblright{''}
- \fi
- \let\xspace\relax
-\fi
-\newcommand*{\FBguill@spacing}{\penalty\@M\hskip.8\fontdimen2\font
- plus.3\fontdimen3\font
- minus.8\fontdimen4\font}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@og}{\leavevmode\guillemotleft
- \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \ifFB@xetex@punct\else\FBguill@spacing\fi
- \guillemotright\xspace}
-\ifLaTeXe
- \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\FB@og}%
- \renewcommand*{\fg}{\FB@fg}}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\renewcommand*{\og}{\textquotedblleft}%
- \renewcommand*{\fg}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \textquotedblright}}
-\else
- \def\bbl@frenchguillemets{\let\og\FB@og
- \let\fg\FB@fg}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets{\def\og{\textquotedblleft}%
- \def\fg{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi\textquotedblright}}
-\fi
-\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchguillemets}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchguillemets}
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{{\number\day}\ifnum1=\day {\ier}\fi \space
- \ifcase\month
- \or janvier\or f{\FBeacute}vrier\or mars\or avril\or mai\or
- juin\or juillet\or ao{\FBucirconflexe}t\or septembre\or
- octobre\or novembre\or d{\FBeacute}cembre\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\newif\ifFB@poorman
-\newdimen\FB@Mht
-\ifLaTeXe
- \AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{scalefnt}}
- \newcommand*{\FBsupR}{-0.12}
- \newcommand*{\FBsupS}{0.65}
- \newcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{\MakeLowercase{#1}}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up@fake}[1]{%
- \settoheight{\FB@Mht}{M}%
- \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{\FBsupR \FB@Mht}%
- \addtolength{\FB@Mht}{-\FBsupS ex}%
- \raisebox{\FB@Mht}{\scalefont{\FBsupS}{\FB@lc{#1}}}%
- }
- \def\FB@split#1#2#3#4\@nil{\def\FB@firstthree{#1#2#3}%
- \def\FB@suffix{#4}}
- \def\FB@x{x}
- \def\FB@j{j}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\FB@up}[1]{%
- \bgroup \FB@poormantrue
- \expandafter\FB@split\f@family\@nil
- \edef\reserved@a{\lowercase{%
- \noexpand\IfFileExists{\f@encoding\FB@firstthree -sup.fd}}}%
- \reserved@a
- {\ifx\FB@suffix\FB@x \FB@poormanfalse\fi
- \ifx\FB@suffix\FB@j \FB@poormanfalse\fi
- \ifFB@poorman \FB@up@fake{#1}%
- \else \FB@up@real{#1}%
- \fi}%
- {\FB@up@fake{#1}}%
- \egroup}
- \newcommand*{\FB@up@real}[1]{\bgroup
- \fontfamily{\FB@firstthree -sup}\selectfont \FB@lc{#1}\egroup}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\fup}[1]{%
- \@ifundefined{realsuperscript}%
- {\FB@up{#1}\let\realsuperscript\undefined}%
- {\bgroup\let\fakesuperscript\FB@up@fake
- \realsuperscript{\FB@lc{#1}}\egroup}}
- \providecommand*{\up}{\relax}
-\else
- \providecommand*{\up}[1]{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\sevenrm #1}}
-\fi
-\def\ieme{\up{\lowercase{e}}\xspace}
-\def\iemes{\up{\lowercase{es}}\xspace}
-\def\ier{\up{\lowercase{er}}\xspace}
-\def\iers{\up{\lowercase{ers}}\xspace}
-\def\iere{\up{\lowercase{re}}\xspace}
-\def\ieres{\up{\lowercase{res}}\xspace}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchEnumerate}[1]{%
- #1\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.3em}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchPopularEnumerate}[1]{%
- #1\up{\lowercase{o}})\kern+.3em}
-\def\primo{\FrenchEnumerate1}
-\def\secundo{\FrenchEnumerate2}
-\def\tertio{\FrenchEnumerate3}
-\def\quarto{\FrenchEnumerate4}
-\def\fprimo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate1}
-\def\fsecundo){\FrenchPopularEnumerate2}
-\def\ftertio){\FrenchPopularEnumerate3}
-\def\fquarto){\FrenchPopularEnumerate4}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\No}{N\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\no}{n\up{\lowercase{o}}\kern+.2em}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\Nos}{N\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\nos}{n\up{\lowercase{os}}\kern+.2em}
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bsc}[1]{\leavevmode\begingroup\kern0pt
- \scshape #1\endgroup}
-\ifLaTeXe\else\let\scshape\relax\fi
-\ifLaTeXe
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\at}{T1}{64}
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\circonflexe}{T1}{94}
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\tild}{T1}{126}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\at}{T1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\circonflexe}{T1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\tild}{T1}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\boi}{\textbackslash}
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degre}{\r{}}
-\else
- \def\T@one{T1}
- \ifx\f@encoding\T@one
- \newcommand*{\degre}{\char6}
- \else
- \newcommand*{\degre}{\char23}
- \fi
- \newcommand*{\at}{\char64}
- \newcommand*{\circonflexe}{\char94}
- \newcommand*{\tild}{\char126}
- \newcommand*{\boi}{$\backslash$}
-\fi
-\newcommand*{\FBagrave}{\`a}
-\newcommand*{\FBegrave}{\`e}
-\newcommand*{\FBeacute}{\'e}
-\newcommand*{\FBucirconflexe}{\^u}
-\ifFBunicode
- \ifLaTeXe
- \else
- \def\degre{\char"00B0}
- \def\FBagrave{\char"00E0}
- \def\FBegrave{\char"00E8}
- \def\FBeacute{\char"00E9}
- \def\FBucirconflexe{\char"00FB}
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifLaTeXe
- \newcommand*{\degres}{\degre}
- \def\Warning@degree@TSone{%
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{%
- Degrees would look better in TS1-encoding:
- \MessageBreak add \protect
- \usepackage{textcomp} to the preamble.
- \MessageBreak Degrees used}}
- \ifFBunicode\global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax\fi
- \AtBeginDocument{\expandafter\ifx\csname M@TS1\endcsname\relax
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{%
- \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}%
- \Warning@degree@TSone
- \global\let\Warning@degree@TSone\relax}%
- \let\textdegree\degres
- \else
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\degres}{%
- \hbox{\UseTextSymbol{TS1}{\textdegree}}}%
- \fi}
-\else
- \newcommand*{\degres}{%
- \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\degre\hss}}
-\fi
-\newcount\std@mcc
-\newcount\dec@mcc
-\std@mcc=\mathcode`\,
-\dec@mcc=\std@mcc
-\@tempcnta=\std@mcc
-\divide\@tempcnta by "1000
-\multiply\@tempcnta by "1000
-\advance\dec@mcc by -\@tempcnta
-\newcommand*{\DecimalMathComma}{\iflanguage{french}%
- {\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}{}%
- \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\dec@mcc}}
-\newcommand*{\StandardMathComma}{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc
- \addto\extrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc}}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\mathcode`\,=\std@mcc}
-\newcommand*{\nombre}[1]{{#1}\message{%
- *** \noexpand\nombre no longer formats numbers\string! ***}}%
-\let\FBstop@here\relax
-\def\FBclean@on@exit{\let\ifLaTeXe\undefined
- \let\LaTeXetrue\undefined
- \let\LaTeXefalse\undefined}
-\ifx\magnification\@undefined
-\else
- \def\FBstop@here{\let\STD@makecaption\relax
- \FBclean@on@exit
- \ldf@quit\CurrentOption\endinput}
-\fi
-\FBstop@here
-\renewcommand*{\nombre}[1]{\Warning@nombre\numprint{#1}}
-\newcommand*{\Warning@nombre}{%
- \@ifundefined{numprint}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{%
- \protect\nombre\space now relies on package numprint.sty,
- \MessageBreak add \protect
- \usepackage[autolanguage]{numprint}\MessageBreak
- to your preamble *after* loading babel, \MessageBreak
- see file numprint.pdf for other options.\MessageBreak
- \protect\nombre\space called}%
- \global\let\Warning@nombre\relax
- \global\let\numprint\undefined
- }{}%
-}
-\newcommand*{\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}{%
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}{%
- Type \protect\frenchbsetup{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}
- \MessageBreak Command \protect\ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers\space
- is no longer\MessageBreak defined in frenchb v.2,}}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\refname{R{\FBeacute}f{\FBeacute}rences}%
- \def\abstractname{R{\FBeacute}sum{\FBeacute}}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliographie}%
- \def\prefacename{Pr{\FBeacute}face}%
- \def\chaptername{Chapitre}%
- \def\appendixname{Annexe}%
- \def\contentsname{Table des mati{\FBegrave}res}%
- \def\listfigurename{Table des figures}%
- \def\listtablename{Liste des tableaux}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{{\scshape Figure}}%
- \def\tablename{{\scshape Table}}%
- \def\partname{\protect\@Fpt partie}%
- \def\@Fpt{{\ifcase\value{part}\or Premi{\FBegrave}re\or
- Deuxi{\FBegrave}me\or Troisi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Quatri{\FBegrave}me\or Cinqui{\FBegrave}me\or
- Sixi{\FBegrave}me\or Septi{\FBegrave}me\or Huiti{\FBegrave}me\or
- Neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or Dixi{\FBegrave}me\or Onzi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Douzi{\FBegrave}me\or Treizi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Quatorzi{\FBegrave}me\or Quinzi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Seizi{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-septi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Dix-huiti{\FBegrave}me\or Dix-neuvi{\FBegrave}me\or
- Vingti{\FBegrave}me\fi}\space\def\thepart{}}%
- \def\pagename{page}%
- \def\seename{voir}%
- \def\alsoname{voir aussi}%
- \def\enclname{P.~J. }%
- \def\ccname{Copie {\FBagrave} }%
- \def\headtoname{}%
- \def\proofname{D{\FBeacute}monstration}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossaire}%
- }
-\AtBeginDocument{\let\captions@French\captionsfrench
- \@ifundefined{captionsfrenchb}%
- {\let\captions@Frenchb\relax}%
- {\let\captions@Frenchb\captionsfrenchb}%
- \@ifundefined{captionsfrancais}%
- {\let\captions@Francais\relax}%
- {\let\captions@Francais\captionsfrancais}%
- \def\captionsfrench{\captions@French
- \captions@Francais\captions@Frenchb}%
- \def\captionsfrancais{\captionsfrench}%
- \def\captionsfrenchb{\captionsfrench}%
- \iflanguage{french}{\captionsfrench}{}%
- }
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{canadien}{%
- \def\captionscanadien{\captionsfrench}%
- \def\datecanadien{\datefrench}%
- \def\extrascanadien{\extrasfrench}%
- \def\noextrascanadien{\noextrasfrench}%
- }{}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{acadian}{%
- \def\captionsacadian{\captionsfrench}%
- \def\dateacadian{\datefrench}%
- \def\extrasacadian{\extrasfrench}%
- \def\noextrasacadian{\noextrasfrench}%
- }{}
-\newcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\PackageWarning{#1}{#2}}
-\def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space}
-\long\def\FB@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip
- \sbox\@tempboxa{#1\CaptionSeparator #2}%
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
- #1\CaptionSeparator #2\par
- \else
- \global \@minipagefalse
- \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- \fi
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \ifx\@makecaption\STD@makecaption
- \global\let\@makecaption\FB@makecaption
- \else
- \@ifundefined{@makecaption}%
- {\let\@makecaption\undefined}%
- {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {The definition of \protect\@makecaption\space
- has been changed,\MessageBreak
- frenchb will NOT customise it;\MessageBreak reported}%
- }%
- \fi
- \let\FB@makecaption\relax
- \let\STD@makecaption\relax
-}
-\addto\extrasfrench{%
- \def\CaptionSeparator{\space\textendash\space}}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{%
- \def\CaptionSeparator{\string:\space}}
-\let\listORI\list
-\let\endlistORI\endlist
-\def\FB@listsettings{%
- \setlength{\itemsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}%
- \setlength{\topsep}{0.8ex plus 0.4ex minus 0.4ex}%
- \setlength{\partopsep}{0.4ex plus 0.2ex minus 0.2ex}%
- \@tempdima=\parskip
- \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}%
- \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}%
-\def\listFB#1#2{\listORI{#1}{\FB@listsettings #2}}%
-\let\endlistFB\endlist
-\newcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{\textendash}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-\newcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{\FrenchLabelItem}
-\newif\ifFB@enterFrench \FB@enterFrenchtrue
-\def\bbl@frenchlabelitems{%
- \ifFB@enterFrench
- \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi
- \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii
- \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii
- \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv
- \let\labelitemi\Frlabelitemi
- \let\labelitemii\Frlabelitemii
- \let\labelitemiii\Frlabelitemiii
- \let\labelitemiv\Frlabelitemiv
- \FB@enterFrenchfalse
- \fi
-}
-\let\itemizeORI\itemize
-\let\enditemizeORI\enditemize
-\let\enditemizeFB\enditemize
-\def\itemizeFB{%
- \ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
- \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
- \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
- \expandafter
- \listORI
- \csname\@itemitem\endcsname
- {\settowidth{\labelwidth}{\csname\@itemitem\endcsname}%
- \setlength{\leftmargin}{\labelwidth}%
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\labelsep}%
- \ifnum\@listdepth=0
- \setlength{\itemindent}{\parindent}%
- \else
- \addtolength{\leftmargin}{\parindent}%
- \fi
- \setlength{\itemsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\parsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\topsep}{\z@}%
- \setlength{\partopsep}{\z@}%
- \@tempdima=\parskip
- \addtolength{\topsep}{-\@tempdima}%
- \addtolength{\partopsep}{\@tempdima}}%
- \fi}
-\def\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems{%
- \ifFB@enterFrench
- \else
- \let\Frlabelitemi\labelitemi
- \let\Frlabelitemii\labelitemii
- \let\Frlabelitemiii\labelitemiii
- \let\Frlabelitemiv\labelitemiv
- \let\labelitemi\@ltiORI
- \let\labelitemii\@ltiiORI
- \let\labelitemiii\@ltiiiORI
- \let\labelitemiv\@ltivORI
- \FB@enterFrenchtrue
- \fi
-}
-\def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
-\def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI
- \@afterindentfalse}
-\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}%
- {\FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {bigfoot package in use.\MessageBreak
- frenchb will NOT customise footnotes;\MessageBreak
- reported}}%
- {\let\@footnotemarkORI\@footnotemark
- \def\@footnotemarkFB{\leavevmode\unskip\unkern
- \,\@footnotemarkORI}%
- \ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes
- \let\@footnotemark\@footnotemarkFB
- \fi}%
- }
-\newcommand*{\dotFFN}{.}
-\newcommand*{\kernFFN}{\kern .5em}
-\newdimen\parindentFFN
-\parindentFFN=10in
-\def\ftnISsymbol{\@fnsymbol\c@footnote}
-\long\def\@makefntextFB#1{\ifx\thefootnote\ftnISsymbol
- \@makefntextORI{#1}%
- \else
- \parindent=\parindentFFN
- \rule\z@\footnotesep
- \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{\@thefnmark}%
- \ifdim\wd\@tempboxa>\z@
- \llap{\@thefnmark}\dotFFN\kernFFN
- \fi #1
- \fi}%
-\AtBeginDocument{\@ifpackageloaded{bigfoot}{}%
- {\ifdim\parindentFFN<10in
- \else
- \parindentFFN=\parindent
- \ifdim\parindentFFN<1.5em\parindentFFN=1.5em\fi
- \fi
- \let\@makefntextORI\@makefntext
- \long\def\@makefntext#1{%
- \ifFBFrenchFootnotes
- \@makefntextFB{#1}%
- \else
- \@makefntextORI{#1}%
- \fi}%
- }%
- }
-\newcommand*{\AddThinSpaceBeforeFootnotes}{\FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotestrue}
-\newcommand*{\StandardFootnotes}{\FBFrenchFootnotesfalse}
-\newcommand*{\FrenchLayout}{%
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {\protect\FrenchLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak
- \protect\frenchbsetup{GlobalLayoutFrench} instead.}%
-}
-\newcommand*{\StandardLayout}{%
- \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
- \FBIndentFirstfalse
- \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {\protect\StandardLayout\space is obsolete. Please use\MessageBreak
- \protect\frenchbsetup{StandardLayout} instead.}%
-}
-\@onlypreamble\FrenchLayout
-\@onlypreamble\StandardLayout
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\FBtextellipsis}{LY1}{133}
-\DeclareTextCommandDefault{\FBtextellipsis}{%
- .\kern\fontdimen3\font.\kern\fontdimen3\font.\xspace}
-\newcommand*{\Tdots@ORI}{\@xp\textellipsis}
-\newcommand*{\Tdots@}{\Tdots@ORI}
-\newcommand*{\Mdots@}{\@xp\mdots@}
-\AtBeginDocument{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\dots}{\relax
- \csname\ifmmode M\else T\fi dots@\endcsname}%
- \@ifundefined{@xp}{\let\@xp\relax}{}%
- \@ifundefined{mdots@}{\let\Tdots@ORI\textellipsis
- \let\Mdots@\mathellipsis
- \let\mdots@\undefined}{}}
-\def\bbl@frenchdots{\let\Tdots@\FBtextellipsis}
-\def\bbl@nonfrenchdots{\let\Tdots@\Tdots@ORI}
-\addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchdots}
-\addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchdots}
-\newif\ifFBStandardLayout \FBStandardLayouttrue
-\newif\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse
-\newif\ifFBReduceListSpacing \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
-\newif\ifFBCompactItemize \FBCompactItemizefalse
-\newif\ifFBStandardItemLabels \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
-\newif\ifFBStandardLists \FBStandardListstrue
-\newif\ifFBIndentFirst \FBIndentFirstfalse
-\newif\ifFBFrenchFootnotes \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse
-\newif\ifFBAutoSpaceFootnotes \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse
-\newif\ifFBOriginalTypewriter \FBOriginalTypewriterfalse
-\newif\ifFBThinColonSpace \FBThinColonSpacefalse
-\newif\ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers \FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbersfalse
-\newif\ifFBFrenchSuperscripts \FBFrenchSuperscriptstrue
-\newif\ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts \FBLowercaseSuperscriptstrue
-\newif\ifFBPartNameFull \FBPartNameFulltrue
-\newif\ifFBSuppressWarning \FBSuppressWarningfalse
-\newif\ifFBShowOptions \FBShowOptionsfalse
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \iflanguage{french}{\FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \FBIndentFirsttrue
- \FBFrenchFootnotestrue
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchtrue}%
- {}%
-}
-\newcommand*{\frenchbsetup}[1]{%
- \setkeys{FB}{#1}%
-}%
-\@onlypreamble\frenchbsetup
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \RequirePackage{keyval}%
- \define@key{FB}{StandardLayout}[true]%
- {\csname FBStandardLayout#1\endcsname
- \ifFBStandardLayout
- \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
- \FBIndentFirstfalse
- \FBFrenchFootnotesfalse
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotesfalse
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse
- \else
- \FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \FBIndentFirsttrue
- \FBFrenchFootnotestrue
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue
- \fi}%
- \define@key{FB}{GlobalLayoutFrench}[true]%
- {\csname FBGlobalLayoutFrench#1\endcsname
- \ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \iflanguage{french}%
- {\FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \FBIndentFirsttrue
- \FBFrenchFootnotestrue
- \FBAutoSpaceFootnotestrue}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Option `GlobalLayoutFrench' skipped:
- \MessageBreak French is *not*
- babel's last option.\MessageBreak}%
- \FBGlobalLayoutFrenchfalse}%
- \fi}%
- \define@key{FB}{ReduceListSpacing}[true]%
- {\csname FBReduceListSpacing#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{CompactItemize}[true]%
- {\csname FBCompactItemize#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{StandardItemLabels}[true]%
- {\csname FBStandardItemLabels#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabels}{%
- \renewcommand*{\FrenchLabelItem}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeli}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemi}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabelii}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemii}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliii}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiii}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{ItemLabeliv}{%
- \renewcommand*{\Frlabelitemiv}{#1}}%
- \define@key{FB}{StandardLists}[true]%
- {\csname FBStandardLists#1\endcsname
- \ifFBStandardLists
- \FBReduceListSpacingfalse
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBStandardItemLabelstrue
- \else
- \FBReduceListSpacingtrue
- \FBCompactItemizetrue
- \FBStandardItemLabelsfalse
- \fi}%
- \define@key{FB}{IndentFirst}[true]%
- {\csname FBIndentFirst#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{FrenchFootnotes}[true]%
- {\csname FBFrenchFootnotes#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{AutoSpaceFootnotes}[true]%
- {\csname FBAutoSpaceFootnotes#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{AutoSpacePunctuation}[true]%
- {\csname FBAutoSpacePunctuation#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{OriginalTypewriter}[true]%
- {\csname FBOriginalTypewriter#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{ThinColonSpace}[true]%
- {\csname FBThinColonSpace#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers}[true]%
- {\csname FBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{FrenchSuperscripts}[true]%
- {\csname FBFrenchSuperscripts#1\endcsname}
- \define@key{FB}{LowercaseSuperscripts}[true]%
- {\csname FBLowercaseSuperscripts#1\endcsname}
- \define@key{FB}{PartNameFull}[true]%
- {\csname FBPartNameFull#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{SuppressWarning}[true]%
- {\csname FBSuppressWarning#1\endcsname
- \ifFBSuppressWarning
- \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{\relax}%
- \else
- \renewcommand{\FBWarning}[2]{%
- \PackageWarning{##1}{##2}}%
- \fi}
- \define@key{FB}{ShowOptions}[true]%
- {\csname FBShowOptions#1\endcsname}%
- \define@key{FB}{og}{%
- \newcommand*{\FB@@og}{%
- \iflanguage{french}%
- {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@og\ignorespaces
- \else\guillemotleft
- \fi}%
- {\guillemotleft}}%
- \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}%
- {\AtBeginDocument
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Option `og' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}%
- \let\DeclareInputText\undefined
- }%
- {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}%
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}%
- {\@tempcnta`#1\relax
- \@ifundefined{mule@def}%
- {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{\FB@@og}%
- \let\mule@def\undefined}%
- {\mule@def{11}{{\FB@@og}}}%
- \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined
- }%
- {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\FB@@og}}%
- \let\uc@dclc\undefined
- }%
- {\uc@dclc{171}{default}{\FB@@og}}%
- }%
- }%
- \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined
- }%
- {\ifFB@xetex@punct
- \else
- \catcode`#1=\active
- \bgroup
- \uccode`\~`#1%
- \uppercase{%
- \egroup
- \def~%
- }{\FB@@og}%
- \fi
- }%
- }%
- \define@key{FB}{fg}{%
- \newcommand*{\FB@@fg}{%
- \iflanguage{french}%
- {\ifFBAutoSpaceGuill\FB@fg
- \else\guillemotright
- \fi}%
- {\guillemotright}}%
- \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}%
- {\AtBeginDocument
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareInputText}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Option `fg' requires package inputenc.\MessageBreak}%
- \let\DeclareInputText\undefined
- }%
- {\@ifundefined{uc@dclc}%
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareUnicodeCharacter}%
- {\@tempcnta`#1\relax
- \@ifundefined{mule@def}%
- {\DeclareInputText{\the\@tempcnta}{{\FB@@fg}}%
- \let\mule@def\undefined
- }%
- {\mule@def{27}{{\FB@@fg}}}%
- \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\undefined
- }%
- {\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{{\FB@@fg}}%
- }%
- \let\uc@dclc\undefined
- }%
- {\uc@dclc{187}{default}{{\FB@@fg}}}%
- }%
- }%
- \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined
- }%
- {\ifFB@xetex@punct
- \else
- \catcode`#1=\active
- \bgroup
- \uccode`\~`#1%
- \uppercase{%
- \egroup
- \def~%
- }{{\FB@@fg}}%
- \fi
- }%
- }%
-}
-\newcommand*{\FBprocess@options}{%
- \ifFBReduceListSpacing
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listFB
- \let\endlist\endlistFB}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \let\list\listFB
- \let\endlist\endlistFB
- \else
- \let\list\listORI
- \let\endlist\endlistORI
- \fi}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\list\listORI
- \let\endlist\endlistORI}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\list\listORI
- \let\endlist\endlistORI}%
- \fi
- \@ifpackageloaded{enumitem}{%
- \FBCompactItemizefalse
- \FBWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Setting CompactItemize=false for compatibility\MessageBreak
- with enumitem package,}}%
- {}%
- \ifFBCompactItemize
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeFB
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \let\itemize\itemizeFB
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeFB
- \else
- \let\itemize\itemizeORI
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI
- \fi}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\let\itemize\itemizeORI
- \let\enditemize\enditemizeORI}%
- \fi
- \ifFBStandardItemLabels
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchlabelitems}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \bbl@frenchlabelitems
- \else
- \bbl@nonfrenchlabelitems
- \fi}%
- \fi
- \ifFBIndentFirst
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@frenchindent}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\ifFBGlobalLayoutFrench
- \bbl@frenchindent
- \else
- \bbl@nonfrenchindent
- \fi}%
- \else
- \addto\extrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}%
- \addto\noextrasfrench{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}%
- \fi
- \ifFBAutoSpacePunctuation
- \autospace@beforeFDP
- \else
- \noautospace@beforeFDP
- \fi
- \ifFBOriginalTypewriter
- \else
- \let\ttfamily\ttfamilyFB
- \let\rmfamily\rmfamilyFB
- \let\sffamily\sffamilyFB
- \fi
- \ifFBThinColonSpace\renewcommand*{\Fcolonspace}{\Fthinspace}\fi
- \@ifpackageloaded{numprint}%
- {\ifnprt@autolanguage
- \providecommand*{\npstylefrench}{}%
- \ifFBThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers
- \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{%
- \npthousandsep{\,}%
- \npdecimalsign{,}%
- \npproductsign{\cdot}%
- \npunitseparator{\,}%
- \npdegreeseparator{}%
- \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}%
- }%
- \else
- \renewcommand*\npstylefrench{%
- \npthousandsep{~}%
- \npdecimalsign{,}%
- \npproductsign{\cdot}%
- \npunitseparator{\,}%
- \npdegreeseparator{}%
- \nppercentseparator{\nprt@unitsep}%
- }%
- \fi
- \npaddtolanguage{french}{french}%
- \fi}{}%
- \ifFBFrenchSuperscripts
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}{\fup}}%
- \else
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\up}{\@ifstar{\FB@up@fake}%
- {\textsuperscript}}%
- \fi
- \ifFBLowercaseSuperscripts
- \else
- \renewcommand*{\FB@lc}[1]{##1}%
- \fi
- \ifFBPartNameFull
- \else\addto\captionsfrench{\def\partname{Partie}}\fi
- \ifFBShowOptions
- \GenericWarning{* }{%
- * **** List of possible options for frenchb ****\MessageBreak
- [Default values between brackets when frenchb is loaded *LAST*]%
- \MessageBreak
- ShowOptions=true [false]\MessageBreak
- StandardLayout=true [false]\MessageBreak
- GlobalLayoutFrench=false [true]\MessageBreak
- StandardLists=true [false]\MessageBreak
- IndentFirst=false [true]\MessageBreak
- ReduceListSpacing=false [true]\MessageBreak
- CompactItemize=false [true]\MessageBreak
- StandardItemLabels=true [false]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabels=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabeli=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabelii=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabeliii=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- ItemLabeliv=\textemdash, \textbullet,
- \protect\ding{43},... [\textendash]\MessageBreak
- FrenchFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak
- AutoSpaceFootnotes=false [true]\MessageBreak
- AutoSpacePunctuation=false [true]\MessageBreak
- OriginalTypewriter=true [false]\MessageBreak
- ThinColonSpace=true [false]\MessageBreak
- ThinSpaceInFrenchNumbers=true [false]\MessageBreak
- FrenchSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak
- LowercaseSuperscripts=false [true]\MessageBreak
- PartNameFull=false [true]\MessageBreak
- SuppressWarning=true [false]\MessageBreak
- og= <left quote character>, fg= <right quote character>
- \MessageBreak
- *********************************************
- \MessageBreak\protect\frenchbsetup{ShowOptions}}
- \fi
-}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \ifx\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \let\@aifORI\@afterindenttrue
- \else \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse
- \fi
- \let\listORI\list
- \let\endlistORI\endlist
- \let\itemizeORI\itemize
- \let\enditemizeORI\enditemize
- \let\@ltiORI\labelitemi
- \let\@ltiiORI\labelitemii
- \let\@ltiiiORI\labelitemiii
- \let\@ltivORI\labelitemiv
- \providecommand*{\xspace}{\relax}%
- \@ifundefined{pdfstringdefDisableCommands}{}%
- {\pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
- \let\up\relax
- \def\ieme{e\xspace}%
- \def\iemes{es\xspace}%
- \def\ier{er\xspace}%
- \def\iers{ers\xspace}%
- \def\iere{re\xspace}%
- \def\ieres{res\xspace}%
- \def\FrenchEnumerate#1{#1\degre\space}%
- \def\FrenchPopularEnumerate#1{#1\degre)\space}%
- \def\No{N\degre\space}%
- \def\no{n\degre\space}%
- \def\Nos{N\degre\space}%
- \def\nos{n\degre\space}%
- \def\og{\guillemotleft\space}%
- \def\fg{\space\guillemotright}%
- \let\bsc\textsc
- \let\degres\degre
- }%
- \let\pdfstringdefDisableCommands\undefined}%
- \FBprocess@options
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI\bbl@nonfrenchspacing
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\relax
- \iflanguage{french}{\extrasfrench\captionsfrench}{\noextrasfrench}%
- \let\bbl@nonfrenchspacing\bbl@nonfrenchspacingORI
- \@ifundefined{XeTeXrevision}%
- {\begingroup \newcommand{\FBOTone}{OT1}%
- \ifx\encodingdefault\FBOTone
- \PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {OT1 encoding should not be used for French.
- \MessageBreak
- Add \protect\usepackage[T1]{fontenc} to the
- preamble\MessageBreak of your document,}%
- \fi
- \endgroup
- \let\XeTeXrevision\undefined
- }%
- {\@ifundefined{DeclareUTFcharacter}%
- {\PackageWarning{frenchb.ldf}%
- {Add \protect\usepackage{xltxtra} to the\MessageBreak
- preamble of your document,}%
- \let\DeclareUTFcharacter\undefined}%
- {}%
- }%
-}
-\loadlocalcfg{frenchb}
-\FBclean@on@exit
-\ldf@quit\CurrentOption
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `frenchb.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index d060c6c72e3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,845 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `galician.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% galician.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `galician.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Galcian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006
-%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008
-%% by Javier A. M\'ugica
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably)
-%% jmugica at digi21.net
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal}
-
-\ProvidesLanguage{galician.ldf}
- [2008/07/06 v4.3c Galician support from the babel system]
-\LdfInit{galician}\captionsgalician
-\ifx\undefined\l@galician
- \@nopatterns{Galician}
- \adddialect\l@galician0
-\fi
-\edef\gl@savedcatcodes{%
- \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~
- \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\"}
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\catcode`\"=12
-\long\def\gl@delayed#1\then#2\else#3\fi{%
- #1%
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi
- {#2}{#3}}
-\gl@delayed
-\expandafter\ifx\csname documentclass\endcsname\relax\then
- \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iffalse
-\else
- \let\ifes@LaTeXe\iftrue
-\fi
-\gl@delayed
-\expandafter\ifx\csname newenvironment\endcsname\relax\then
- \let\ifes@plain\iftrue
-\else
- \let\ifes@plain\iffalse
-\fi
-\addto\captionsgalician{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefacio}%
- \def\refname{Referencias}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\'endice}%
- \def\listfigurename{\'Indice de figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{\'Indice de cadros}%
- \def\indexname{\'Indice alfab\'etico}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Cadro}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Adxunto}%
- \def\ccname{Copia a}%
- \def\headtoname{A}%
- \def\pagename{P\'axina}%
- \def\seename{v\'exase}%
- \def\alsoname{v\'exase tam\'en}%
- \def\proofname{Demostraci\'on}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glosario}}
-
-\expandafter\ifx\csname chapter\endcsname\relax
- \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice}}
-\else
- \addto\captionsgalician{\def\contentsname{\'Indice xeral}}
-\fi
-\def\dategalician{%
- \def\today{\the\day~de \ifcase\month\or xaneiro\or febreiro\or
- marzo\or abril\or maio\or xu\~no\or xullo\or agosto\or
- setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or decembro\fi
- \ \ifnum\year>1999\gl@yearl\else de\fi~\the\year}}
-\def\galiciandatedo{\def\gl@yearl{do}}
-\def\galiciandatede{\def\gl@yearl{de}}
-\galiciandatedo
-\def\selectgalician{%
- \def\selectgalician{%
- \def\selectgalician{%
- \PackageWarning{galician}{Extra \string\selectgalician ignored}}%
- \gl@select}}
-
-\@onlypreamble\selectgalician
-
-\def\gl@select{%
- \let\gl@select\@undefined
- \selectlanguage{galician}%
- \catcode`\"\active\catcode`\~=\active}
-\def\extrasgalician{%
- \textgalician
- \mathgalician
- \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty
- \galiciandeactivate{."'~<>}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \else
- \shorthandsgalician
- \fi}
-\def\noextrasgalician{%
- \ifx\textgalician\@empty\else
- \notextgalician
- \fi
- \ifx\mathgalician\@empty\else
- \nomathgalician
- \fi
- \ifx\shorthandsgalician\@empty\else
- \noshorthandsgalician
- \fi
- \gl@reviveshorthands}
-\addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\sptext
- \def\sptext{\protect\gl@sptext}}
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{%
- {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.15ex
- \else
- \fontsize\ssf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.5ex
- \fi
- \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \let\sptextfont\rm
- \newcommand\gl@sptext[1]{%
- {.\setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \advance\dimen@-0.75ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \else
- \advance\dimen@-0.8ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \fi}}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\lsc
- \def\lsc{\protect\gl@lsc}
- \babel@save\msc
- \def\msc{\protect\gl@msc}}
-
- \def\gl@@msc{\expandafter\@tempdima\f@size pt \divide\@tempdima by 200 \multiply\@tempdima by 219
- \edef\f@size{\strip@pt\@tempdima}\selectfont}
- \def\gl@msc{\let\gl@do@msc\gl@@msc\lsc}
- \let\gl@do@msc\relax
-
- \def\gl@lsc#1{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox{\gl@do@msc\scshape\selectfont
- \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series
- /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont
- \PackageInfo{galician}{Replacing undefined sc font\MessageBreak
- shape by faked small caps}%
- \MakeUppercase{#1}%
- \else
- \MakeLowercase{#1}%
- \fi}\let\gl@do@msc\relax}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-\newif\ifgl@listquot
-
-\ifes@plain\else %<<<<<<
- \csname newtoks\endcsname\gl@quottoks
- \csname newcount\endcsname\gl@quotdepth
-
- \ifx\quoting\c@undefined\def\next{\let\next\relax\newenvironment}
- \else\def\next{\PackageInfo{galician}{Redefining quoting}\let\next\relax\renewenvironment}
- \fi
- \next{quoting}
- {\leavevmode
- \advance\gl@quotdepth1
- \csname lquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname%
- \ifnum\gl@quotdepth=\@ne
- \gl@listquotfalse
- \let\gl@quotpar\everypar
- \let\everypar\gl@quottoks
- \everypar\expandafter{\the\gl@quotpar}%
- \gl@quotpar{\the\everypar
- \ifgl@listquot\global\gl@listquotfalse\else\gl@quotcont\fi}%
- \fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\gl@quotcont}%
- \edef\gl@quotcont{\the\toks@
- \expandafter\noexpand
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname}}
- {\csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname}
-
- \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}}
- \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}}
- \def\lquotii{``}
- \def\rquotii{''}
- \def\lquotiii{`}
- \def\rquotiii{'}
-
- \let\gl@quotcont\@empty
- \addto\@marginparreset{\let\gl@quotcont\@empty}
-
- \def\gl@listquot{%
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\gl@quotdepth\endcsname
- \global\gl@listquottrue}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-\addto\textgalician{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\notextgalician{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-
-\mathchardef\gl@cdot="0201
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
-\addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\textellipsis
- \babel@save\ldotp
- \babel@save\cdotp%
- \def\textellipsis{\hbox{...}\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} }%
- \mathchardef\ldotp="013A%
- \mathchardef\cdotp="0201%
-}
-\else %<<<<<<
-\addto\textgalician{%
- \babel@save\dots
- \babel@save\ldotp
- \babel@save\cdotp
- \mathchardef\ldotp="013A%
- \mathchardef\cdotp="0201%
- \def\dots{\ifmmode\ldots\else...\spacefactor\sfcode`.{} \fi}%
-}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \addto\textgalician{%
- \let\percentsign\%%
- \babel@save\%%
- \def\%{\unskip\,\percentsign{}}}
-\else
- \addto\textgalician{%
- \let\percentsign\%%
- \babel@save\%%
- \def\%{\unskip\ifmmode\,\else$\m@th\,$\fi\percentsign{}}}
-\fi
-\addto\mathgalician{%
- \babel@save\dotlessi
- \def\dotlessi{\protect\gl@dotlessi}}
-
-\let\nomathgalician\relax %% Unused, but called
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@texti{\i}
- \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\gl@texti}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@dotlessi{%
- \ifmmode
- {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne
- \imath
- \else
- \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
- \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil
- \escapechar=\count@
- \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}%
- {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}%
- \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname
- \advance\count@"7000
- \mathchar\count@
- \fi}%
- \else
- \i
- \fi}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@dotlessi{%
- \ifmmode
- \mathchar"7010
- \else
- \i
- \fi}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-\def\accentedoperators{%
- \def\gl@op@ac##1{\acute{##1}}%
- \def\gl@op@i{\acute{\dotlessi}}}
-\def\unaccentedoperators{%
- \def\gl@op@ac##1{##1}%
- \def\gl@op@i{i}}
-\accentedoperators
-
-\def\spacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\,}
-\def\unspacedoperators{\let\gl@op@sp\@empty}
-\unspacedoperators
-\addto\mathgalician{%
- \gl@operators}
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe\else %<<<<<<
- \let\operator@font\rm
- \def\@empty{}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\def\gl@operators{%
- \babel@save\lim \def\lim{\mathop{\operator@font l\protect\gl@op@i m}}%
- \babel@save\limsup \def\limsup{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,sup}}%
- \babel@save\liminf \def\liminf{\mathop{\operator@font l\gl@op@i m\,inf}}%
- \babel@save\max \def\max{\mathop{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac ax}}%
- \babel@save\inf \def\inf{\mathop{\operator@font \protect\gl@op@i nf}}%
- \babel@save\min \def\min{\mathop{\operator@font m\protect\gl@op@i n}}%
- \babel@save\bmod
- \def\bmod{%
- \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu%
- \mathbin{\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu%
- \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}%
- \babel@save\pmod
- \def\pmod##1{%
- \allowbreak\mkern18mu({\operator@font m\gl@op@ac od}\,\,##1)}%
- \def\gl@a##1 {%
- \gl@delayed
- \if^##1^\then % is it empty? do nothing and continue
- \gl@a
- \else
- \gl@delayed
- \if&##1\then % is it &? do nothing and finish
- \else
- \begingroup
- \let\,\@empty % \, is ignored when def'ing the macro name
- \let\acute\@firstofone % same
- \edef\gl@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}%
- \def\,{\noexpand\gl@op@sp}%
- \def\acute####1{%
- \if i####1%
- \noexpand\gl@op@i
- \else
- \noexpand\gl@op@ac####1%
- \fi}%
- \edef\gl@a{\endgroup
- \noexpand\babel@save\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b
- \def\expandafter\noexpand\gl@b{%
- \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\nolimits}}%
- \gl@a % It restores itself
- \gl@a
- \fi
- \fi}%
- \let\gl@b\galicianoperators
- \addto\gl@b{ }%
- \expandafter\gl@a\gl@b sen tx cosec arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tx senh & %\, will be set to \gl@op@sp
- %
- \babel@save\sin \let\sin\sen
- \babel@save\arcsin \let\arcsin\arcsen
- \babel@save\sinh \let\sinh\senh
-}
-
-\def\galicianoperators{cotx txh}
-\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}}
-
-\def\gl@set@shorthand#1{%
- \expandafter\edef\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname
- {\the\catcode`#1}%
- \initiate@active@char{#1}%
- \catcode`#1=\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname gl@math\string#1\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\gl@use@shorthand{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifx\thepage\relax\then
- \string
- \else{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect\then
- \noexpand
- \else
- \gl@use@sh
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-
-\def\gl@text@sh#1{\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}
-\def\gl@math@sh#1{\csname gl@math\string#1\endcsname}
-
-\def\gl@use@sh{%
- \gl@delayed
- \if@safe@actives\then
- \string
- \else{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifmmode\then
- \gl@math@sh
- \else
- \gl@text@sh
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-
-\gdef\gl@activate#1{%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \def~{\gl@use@shorthand~}}}
-
-\def\galiciandeactivate#1{%
- \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\gl@spdeactivate\@tempa}}
-
-\def\gl@spdeactivate#1{%
- \if.#1%
- \mathcode`\.=\gl@period@code
- \else
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \expandafter\let\expandafter~%
- \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- \catcode`#1\csname gl@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-
-\def\gl@reviveshorthands{%
- \gl@restore{"}\gl@restore{~}%
- \gl@restore{<}\gl@restore{>}%
- \gl@quoting}
-
-\def\gl@restore#1{%
- \catcode`#1=\active
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \bbl@deactivate{~}}}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\'=12
-\lccode`~=`' \lccode`'=`'
-\lowercase{%
-\gdef\bbl@pr@m@s{%
- \gl@delayed
- \ifx~\@let@token\then
- \pr@@@s
- \else
- {\gl@delayed
- \ifx'\@let@token\then
- \pr@@@s
- \else
- {\gl@delayed
- \ifx^\@let@token\then
- \pr@@@t
- \else
- \egroup
- \fi}%
- \fi}%
- \fi}}
-\endgroup
-\expandafter\ifx\csname @tabacckludge\endcsname\relax
- \let\gl@tak\a
-\else
- \let\gl@tak\@tabacckludge
-\fi
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\expandafter\gl@tak\string#1}
- \let\a\@tabacckludge
-\else\ifes@plain %<<<<<<
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname a\string#1\endcsname}
-\fi\fi %<<<<<<
-
-\expandafter\ifx\csname add@accent\endcsname\relax
- \def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2}
-\fi
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{%
- \expandafter\@text@composite
- \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3%
- \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}%
- \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \def\gl@accent#1#2#3{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 }
-\fi %<<<<<<
-\addto\shorthandsgalician{\languageshorthands{galician}}
-\let\noshorthandsgalician\relax
-\def\galiciandecimal#1{\def\gl@decimal{{#1}}}
-\def\decimalcomma{\galiciandecimal{,}}
-\def\decimalpoint{\galiciandecimal{.}}
-\decimalcomma
-
-\gl@set@shorthand{.}
-
-\@namedef{gl@math\string.}{%
- \@ifnextchar\egroup
- {\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax}%
- {\gl@text@sh.}}
-
-\declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\mathchar\gl@period@code\relax}
-\addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \mathchardef\gl@period@code\the\mathcode`\.%
- \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}%
- \mathcode`\.="8000 %
- \gl@activate{.}}
-
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \catcode`\.=12
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{%
- \string\catcode`\string\.=12}%
- \fi}
-
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.1}{\gl@decimal1}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.2}{\gl@decimal2}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.3}{\gl@decimal3}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.4}{\gl@decimal4}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.5}{\gl@decimal5}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.6}{\gl@decimal6}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.7}{\gl@decimal7}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.8}{\gl@decimal8}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.9}{\gl@decimal9}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{.0}{\gl@decimal0}
-\gl@set@shorthand{"}
-\def\gl@umlaut#1{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 }
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \gl@activate{"}%
- \gl@activate{~}%
- \babel@save\bbl@umlauta
- \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut
- \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname
- \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\gl@accent\~{126}}%
- \expandafter\babel@save\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname
- \expandafter\def\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\gl@accent\'{19}}}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \gl@activate{"}%
- \gl@activate{~}%
- \babel@save\bbl@umlauta
- \let\bbl@umlauta\gl@umlaut
- \babel@save\~%
- \def\~{\gl@accent\~{126}}%
- \babel@save\'%
- \def\'#1{\if#1i\gl@accent\'{19}\i\else\gl@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}}
-\fi %<<<<<<
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"a}{\protect\gl@sptext{a}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"A}{\protect\gl@sptext{A}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"o}{\protect\gl@sptext{o}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"O}{\protect\gl@sptext{O}}
-
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"u}{\"u}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"U}{\"U}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"i}{\"i}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"I}{\"I}
-
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"<}{\begin{quoting}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{">}{\end{quoting}}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"=}%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\char\hyphenchar\font\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"~}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}%
- {\char\hyphenchar\font}{\char\hyphenchar\font}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"r}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}%
- {}{r}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"R}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\discretionary{\char\hyphenchar\font}%
- {}{R}\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"/}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}%
- \dimen@\ht\z@
- \advance\dimen@-1ex
- \advance\dimen@\dp\z@
- \dimen@.31\dimen@
- \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@
- \ifdim\dimen@>0pt
- \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em
- \else
- \box\z@
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"?}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{"!}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-
-\gl@set@shorthand{~}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{~n}{\~n}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{~N}{\~N}
-\declare@shorthand{galician}{~-}{%
- \leavevmode
- \bgroup
- \let\@sptoken\gl@dashes % This assignation changes the
- \@ifnextchar-% \@ifnextchar behaviour
- {\gl@dashes}%
- {\hbox{\char\hyphenchar\font}\egroup}}
-\def\gl@dashes-{%
- \@ifnextchar-%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}}
-
-\def\deactivatetilden{%
- \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname galician@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax}
-\expandafter\ifx\csname XML@catcodes\endcsname\relax
- \addto\gl@select{%
- \catcode`\<\active\catcode`\>=\active
- \gl@quoting}
-
- \gl@set@shorthand{<}
- \gl@set@shorthand{>}
-
- \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname}
- \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname}
-
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{%
- \gl@activate{<}%
- \gl@activate{>}}
- \ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \gl@quoting
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\gl@quoting}%
- \fi}%
- \fi %<<<<<<
-
- \def\activatequoting{%
- \catcode`>=\active \catcode`<=\active
- \let\gl@quoting\activatequoting}
- \def\deactivatequoting{%
- \catcode`>=12 \catcode`<=12
- \let\gl@quoting\deactivatequoting}
-
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{<<}{\guillemotleft{}}
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{>>}{\guillemotright{}}
-\fi
-
-\let\gl@quoting\relax
-\let\deactivatequoting\relax
-\let\activatequoting\relax
-\def\gl@activeacute{%
- \gl@set@shorthand{'}%
- \addto\shorthandsgalician{\gl@activate{'}}%
- \addto\gl@reviveshorthands{\gl@restore{'}}%
- \addto\gl@select{\catcode`'=\active}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'a}{\@tabacckludge'a}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'A}{\@tabacckludge'A}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'e}{\@tabacckludge'e}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'E}{\@tabacckludge'E}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'i}{\@tabacckludge'i}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'I}{\@tabacckludge'I}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'o}{\@tabacckludge'o}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'O}{\@tabacckludge'O}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'u}{\@tabacckludge'u}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'U}{\@tabacckludge'U}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'n}{\~n}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{'N}{\~N}%
- \declare@shorthand{galician}{''}{\textquotedblright}%
- \let\gl@activeacute\relax}
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\gl@activeacute}{}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \gl@activeacute
-\fi %<<<<<<%
-\def\gl@enumerate#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\gl@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-
-\def\gl@itemize#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\gl@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
-
-\gl@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$}
-\def\galiciandashitems{\gl@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}}
-\def\galiciansymbitems{%
- \gl@itemize
- {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex
- {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}%
- {\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}}
-\def\galiciansignitems{%
- \gl@itemize
- {\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}%
- {$\m@th\triangleright$}}
-\galiciansymbitems
-
-\def\gl@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{%
- \if#21%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2a%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}%
- \else\if#2A%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2i%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2I%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2o%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\protect\gl@sptext{o}}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname}
- \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname
- {\noexpand\gl@listquot\the\toks@#3}}
-
-\addto\layoutgalician{%
- \def\gl@enumerate##1##2##3##4{%
- \gl@enumdef{i}##1\@empty\@empty\@@
- \gl@enumdef{ii}##2\@empty\@empty\@@
- \gl@enumdef{iii}##3\@empty\@empty\@@
- \gl@enumdef{iv}##4\@empty\@empty\@@}%
- \def\gl@itemize##1##2##3##4{%
- \def\labelitemi{\gl@listquot##1}%
- \def\labelitemii{\gl@listquot##2}%
- \def\labelitemiii{\gl@listquot##3}%
- \def\labelitemiv{\gl@listquot##4}}%
- \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}%
- \def\p@enumiii{\theenumi\theenumii}%
- \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}%
- \expandafter\gl@enumerate\gl@enum
- \expandafter\gl@itemize\gl@item
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode\ll
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M
- \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}%
- \char40 \kern-0.19em\char40 }}%
- \fi}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{%
- \ifmmode\gg
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M
- \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}%
- \char41 \kern-0.19em\char41 }}%
- \fi}%
- \def\@fnsymbol##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or
- *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or
- l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or
- x\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@Alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or
- L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or
- X\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue
- \def\@seccntformat##1{\csname the##1\endcsname.\quad}%
- \def\numberline##1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{##1\if&##1&\else.\fi\hfil}}%
- \def\@roman##1{\protect\gl@roman{\number##1}}%
- \def\gl@roman##1{\protect\gl@msc{\romannumeral##1}}%
- \def\glromanindex##1##2{##1{\protect\gl@msc{##2}}}}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \let\gl@activeacute\@undefined
- \def\bbl@tempa{galician}%
- \ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa
- \AtBeginDocument{\layoutgalician}%
- \addto\gl@select{%
- \@ifstar{\let\layoutgalician\relax}%
- {\layoutgalician\let\layoutgalician\relax}}%
- \fi
- \selectgalician}
-
-\fi %<<<<<<
-\gl@savedcatcodes
-
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-
-\ifes@LaTeXe %<<<<<<
- \ldf@finish{galician}
-\else %<<<<<<
- \gl@select
- \ldf@finish{galician}
- \csname activatequoting\endcsname
-\fi %<<<<<<
-
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `galician.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty
index ebd06b05761..73c95d310ed 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/galician.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `galician')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 0253009bd8c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,196 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `germanb.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% germanb.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{germanb}
- [2008/06/01 v2.6m German support from the babel system]
-%% File `germanb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Germanb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\def\bbl@tempa{germanb}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \def\CurrentOption{german}
- \ifx\l@german\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{German}
- \adddialect\l@german0
- \fi
- \let\l@germanb\l@german
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \let\captionsgermanb\captionsgerman
- \let\dategermanb\dategerman
- \let\extrasgermanb\extrasgerman
- \let\noextrasgermanb\noextrasgerman
- }
-\fi
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@german\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{German}
- \adddialect\l@german0
-\fi
-\adddialect\l@austrian\l@german
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Vorwort}%
- \def\refname{Literatur}%
- \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}%
- \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Anhang}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt
- \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Abbildung}%
- \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel
- \def\partname{Teil}%
- \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n)
- \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an
- \def\headtoname{An}%
- \def\pagename{Seite}%
- \def\seename{siehe}%
- \def\alsoname{siehe auch}%
- \def\proofname{Beweis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossar}%
- }
-\def\month@german{\ifcase\month\or
- Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or
- Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi}
-\def\dategerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@german
- \space\number\year}}
-\def\dateaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month
- J\"anner\else \month@german\fi \space\number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \languageshorthands{german}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasgerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}%
- \lccode25=25}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}%
- {\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"S}{\SS}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"Z}{SZ}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}}
-\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M
- \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= }
-\def\bbl@insertff{%
- \if f\bbl@nextff
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
- {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}}
-\let\bbl@nextff=f
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{german}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `germanb.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty
index 329cbc0473e..9880a670669 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/germanb.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `germanb')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glbst.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glbst.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 1ede741a457..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glbst.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `glbst.tex',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% galician.dtx (with options: `bblbst')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `galician.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Galcian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006
-%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008
-%% by Javier A. M\'ugica
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably)
-%% jmugica at digi21.net
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal}
-
-\def\bbland{e}
-\def\bbleditors{directores} \def\bbleds{dirs.\@}
-\def\bbleditor{director} \def\bbled{dir.\@}
-\def\bbledby{dirixido por}
-\def\bbledition{edici\'on} \def\bbledn{ed.\@}
-\def\bbletal{e outros}
-\def\bblvolume{volumen} \def\bblvol{vol.\@}
-\def\bblof{de}
-\def\bblnumber{n\'umero} \def\bblno{n\sptext{o}}
-\def\bblin{en}
-\def\bblpages{p\'axinas} \def\bblpp{p\'axs.\@}
-\def\bblpage{p\'axina} \def\bblp{p\'ax.\@}
-\def\bblchapter{cap\'itulo} \def\bblchap{cap.\@}
-\def\bbltechreport{informe t\'ecnico}
-\def\bbltechrep{inf.\@ t\'ec.\@}
-\def\bblmthesis{proxecto de fin de carreira}
-\def\bblphdthesis{tesis doutoral}
-\def\bblfirst {primeira} \def\bblfirsto {1\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblsecond{segunda} \def\bblsecondo{2\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblthird {terceira} \def\bblthirdo {3\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblfourth{cuarta} \def\bblfourtho{4\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblfifth {quinta} \def\bblfiftho {5\sptext{a}}
-\def\bblth{\sptext{a}}
-\let\bblst\bblth \let\bblnd\bblth \let\bblrd\bblth
-\def\bbljan{xaneiro} \def\bblfeb{febreiro} \def\bblmar{marzo}
-\def\bblapr{abril} \def\bblmay{maio} \def\bbljun{xu\~no}
-\def\bbljul{xullo} \def\bblaug{agosto} \def\bblsep{setembro}
-\def\bbloct{outubro}\def\bblnov{novembro}\def\bbldec{decembro}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `glbst.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glromidx.tex b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glromidx.tex
deleted file mode 100644
index 3133cc020f0..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/glromidx.tex
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,216 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `glromidx.tex',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% galician.dtx (with options: `indexgl')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `galician.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Galcian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2006
-%% by Manuel Carriba mcarriba at eunetcom.net
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Copyright (C) 2007 - 2008
-%% by Javier A. M\'ugica
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: Javier A. Mugica (preferably)
-%% jmugica at digi21.net
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%% \section{\textsf{galician} coma lingua principal}
-
-\makeatletter
-
-\newcount\gl@converted
-\newcount\gl@processed
-
-\def\gl@encap{`\|}
-\def\gl@openrange{`\(}
-\def\gl@closerange{`\)}
-
-\def\gl@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1}
-\def\gl@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2}
-
-\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J%
- (extension por omision .idx):}
-
-\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
-\ifin@
- \edef\gl@input@file{\expandafter\gl@split@file\answer\@@}
- \edef\gl@input@ext{\expandafter\gl@split@ext\answer\@@}
-\else
- \edef\gl@input@file{\answer}
- \def\gl@input@ext{idx}
-\fi
-
-\typein[\answer]{^^JArquivo de destino^^J%
- (arquivo por omision: \gl@input@file.eix,^^J%
- extension por omision .eix):}
-\ifx\answer\@empty
- \edef\gl@output{\gl@input@file.eix}
-\else
- \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
- \ifin@
- \edef\gl@output{\answer}
- \else
- \edef\gl@output{\answer.eix}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\typein[\answer]{%
- ^^J?Usouse algun esquema especial de controles^^J%
- de MakeIndex para encap, open_range ou close_range?^^J%
- [s/n] (n por omision)}
-
-\if s\answer
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J%
- (\string| por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\gl@encap{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J%
- (\string( por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\gl@openrange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J%
- (\string) por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\gl@closerange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\newwrite\gl@indexfile
-\immediate\openout\gl@indexfile=\gl@output
-
-\newif\ifgl@encapsulated
-
-\def\gl@roman#1{\romannumeral#1 }
-\edef\gl@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\}
-
-\def\indexentry{%
- \begingroup
- \@sanitize
- \gl@indexentry}
-
-\begingroup
-
-\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\gl@encap\relax
-\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\gl@openrange\relax
-\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\gl@closerange\relax
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@indexentry#1{%
- \endgroup
- \advance\gl@processed\@ne
- \gl@encapsulatedfalse
- \gl@bar@idx#1|\@@
- \gl@idxentry}%
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@idxentry#1{%
- \in@{\gl@roman}{#1}%
- \ifin@
- \advance\gl@converted\@ne
- \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\gl@b|\ifgl@encapsulated\gl@p\fi glromanindex%
- {\ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@slash\gl@a\fi}}{#1}}%
- \else
- \immediate\write\gl@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\gl@b\ifgl@encapsulated|\gl@p\gl@a\fi}{#1}}%
- \fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{%
- \def\gl@b{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}%
- \ifx\gl@a\@empty\else\gl@encapsulatedtrue\gl@bar@eat#2\fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\gl@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\gl@p{#1}\def\gl@a{#2}%
- \edef\gl@t{(}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p
- \else\edef\gl@t{)}\ifx\gl@t\gl@p
- \else
- \edef\gl@a{\gl@p\gl@a}\let\gl@p\@empty%
- \fi\fi}
-}
-
-\endgroup
-
-\input \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext
-
-\immediate\closeout\gl@indexfile
-
-\typeout{*****************}
-\typeout{procesouse: \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext }
-\typeout{Li'nas lidas: \the\gl@processed}
-\typeout{Li'nas convertidas: \the\gl@converted}
-\typeout{Resultado en: \gl@output}
-\ifnum\gl@converted>\z@
- \typeout{Xenere o 'indice a partir deste arquivo}
-\else
- \typeout{Non se realizou ning'un tipo de conversi'on}
- \typeout{P'odese xenerar o arquivo directamente^^J%
- de \gl@input@file.\gl@input@ext}
-\fi
-\typeout{*****************}
-\@@end
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `glromidx.tex'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 44b5509a88a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,274 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `greek.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{greek}
- [2005/03/30 v1.3l Greek support from the babel system]
-%% File `greek.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Greek language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997, 2005
-%% by Apostolos Syropoulos
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: Apostolos Syropoulos
-%% apostolo at platon.ee.duth.gr or
-%% apostolo at obelix.ee.duth.gr
-%% (or J.L. Braams <babel at braams.cistron.nl)
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-\gdef\CurrentOption{greek}%
-\ifx\l@greek\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{greek}
- \adddialect\l@greek0\fi
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{greek}{polutoniko}{%
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extrasgreek
- \expandafter{\extraspolutonikogreek}%
- \let\captionsgreek\captionspolutonikogreek
- \let\gr@month\gr@c@month
- \let\l@polutonikogreek\l@greek
- \let\datepolutonikogreek\dategreek
- \let\extraspolutonikogreek\extrasgreek
- \let\noextraspolutonikogreek\noextrasgreek
- }
-\InputIfFileExists{lgrenc.def}{%
- \message{Loading the definitions for the Greek font encoding}}{%
- \errhelp{I can't find the lgrenc.def file for the Greek fonts}%
- \errmessage{Since I do not know what the LGR encoding means^^J
- I can't typeset Greek.^^J
- I stop here, while you get a suitable lgrenc.def file}\@@end
- }
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\greektext}{%
- \fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont
- \def\encodingdefault{LGR}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\textgreek}[1]{\leavevmode{\greektext #1}}
-\def\outlfamily{\usefont{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n}}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textol}{\outlfamily}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\@ne\@ne}
-\addto\captionsgreek{%
- \def\prefacename{Pr'ologos}%
- \def\refname{Anafor'es}%
- \def\abstractname{Per'ilhyh}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliograf'ia}%
- \def\chaptername{Kef'alaio}%
- \def\appendixname{Par'arthma}%
- \def\contentsname{Perieq'omena}%
- \def\listfigurename{Kat'alogos Sqhm'atwn}%
- \def\listtablename{Kat'alogos Pin'akwn}%
- \def\indexname{Euret'hrio}%
- \def\figurename{Sq'hma}%
- \def\tablename{P'inakas}%
- \def\partname{M'eros}%
- \def\enclname{Sunhmm'ena}%
- \def\ccname{Koinopo'ihsh}%
- \def\headtoname{Pros}%
- \def\pagename{Sel'ida}%
- \def\seename{bl'epe}%
- \def\alsoname{bl'epe ep'ishs}%
- \def\proofname{Ap'odeixh}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glwss'ari}%
- }
-\let\captionspolutonikogreek\captionsgreek
-\addto\captionspolutonikogreek{%
- \def\refname{>Anafor`es}%
- \def\indexname{E<uret'hrio}%
- \def\figurename{Sq~hma}%
- \def\headtoname{Pr`os}%
- \def\alsoname{bl'epe >ep'ishs}%
- \def\proofname{>Ap'odeixh}%
-}
-\def\gr@month{%
- \ifcase\month\or
- Ianouar'iou\or Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or April'iou\or
- Ma'"iou\or Ioun'iou\or Ioul'iou\or Augo'ustou\or
- Septembr'iou\or Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi}
-\def\dategreek{%
- \def\today{\number\day \space \gr@month\space \number\year}}
-\def\gr@c@month{%
- \ifcase\month\or >Ianouar'iou\or
- Febrouar'iou\or Mart'iou\or >April'iou\or Ma"'iou\or
- >Ioun'iou\or >Ioul'iou\or A>ugo'ustou\or Septembr'iou\or
- >Oktwbr'iou\or Noembr'iou\or Dekembr'iou\fi}
-\def\Grtoday{%
- \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\day}\space
- \gr@c@month \space
- \expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the\year}}
-\addto\extrasgreek{\greektext}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{\latintext}
-\def\gr@ill@value#1{%
- \PackageWarning{babel}{Illegal value (#1) for greeknumeral}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@false{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand\anw@true{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\anw@print{\anwtonos}}
-\anw@true
-\def\greeknumeral#1{%
- \ifnum#1<\@ne\space\gr@ill@value{#1}%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<10\expandafter\gr@num@i\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<100\expandafter\gr@num@ii\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<\@m\expandafter\gr@num@iii\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<\@M\expandafter\gr@num@iv\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<100000\expandafter\gr@num@v\number#1%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<1000000\expandafter\gr@num@vi\number#1%
- \else
- \space\gr@ill@value{#1}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-}
-\def\Greeknumeral#1{%
- \expandafter\MakeUppercase\expandafter{\greeknumeral{#1}}}
-\let\latin@alph\@alph
-\let\latin@Alph\@Alph
-\def\greek@alph#1{\expandafter\greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}}
-\def\greek@Alph#1{\expandafter\Greeknumeral\expandafter{\the#1}}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \let\@alph\greek@alph
- \let\@Alph\greek@Alph}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{%
- \let\@alph\latin@alph
- \let\@Alph\latin@Alph}
-\let\latin@roman\@roman
-\let\latin@Roman\@Roman
-\def\greek@roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@roman{#1}}}
-\def\greek@Roman#1{\textlatin{\latin@Roman{#1}}}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \let\@roman\greek@roman
- \let\@Roman\greek@Roman}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{%
- \let\@roman\latin@roman
- \let\@Roman\latin@Roman}
-\let\ltx@amp\&
-\def\greek@amp{\textlatin{\ltx@amp}}
-\addto\extrasgreek{\let\&\greek@amp}
-\addto\noextrasgreek{\let\&\ltx@amp}
-\def\gr@num@i#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\anw@print}
-\def\gr@num@ii#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@i}
-\def\gr@num@iii#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi
- \ifnum#1=\z@\anw@false\else\anw@true\fi\gr@num@ii}
-\def\gr@num@iv#1{%
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi
- \ifcase#1\or a\or b\or g\or d\or e\or \stigma\or z\or h\or j\fi
- \gr@num@iii}
-\def\gr@num@v#1{%
- \ifnum#1=\z@\else\katwtonos\fi
- \ifcase#1\or i\or k\or l\or m\or n\or x\or o\or p\or \qoppa\fi
- \gr@num@iv}
-\def\gr@num@vi#1{%
- \katwtonos
- \ifcase#1\or r\or sv\or t\or u\or f\or q\or y\or w\or \sampi\fi
- \gr@num@v}
-\begingroup
- \@ifundefined{active@char\string!}{}{\catcode`!=12\relax}
- \catcode`\~=12
- \lccode`\!=`\~
- \lowercase{\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\greek@tilde{!}}\x}
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{%
- \babel@save\~\let\~\greek@tilde}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`v}\lccode`v=`v%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\'}\lccode`\'=`\'%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\"}\lccode`\"=`\"}
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\<}\lccode`\<=`\<%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\>}\lccode`\>=`\>%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\~}\lccode`\~=`\~%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\|}\lccode`\|=`\|%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\`}\lccode`\`=`\`}
-\addto\extrasgreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\"}\uccode`\"=`\"%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\'}\uccode`\'=159} %% 159 == ^^9f
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\~}\uccode`\~=159%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\>}\uccode`\>=159%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\<}\uccode`\<=159%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\|}\uccode`\|=`\|%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\`}\uccode`\`=159}
-\@tempcnta=\lccode`\~
-\lccode`\~=159
-\lowercase{%
- \initiate@active@char{~}%
- \declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{}}
-\lccode`\~=\@tempcnta
-\addto\extraspolutonikogreek{\languageshorthands{greek}}%
-\declare@shorthand{greek}{~}{\greek@tilde}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\anwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FE\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\katwtonos}{LGR}{\char"FF\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\qoppa}{LGR}{\char"12\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\stigma}{LGR}{\char"06\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\sampi}{LGR}{\char"1B\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax}
-\ldf@finish{\CurrentOption}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `greek.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty
index fe5bdab7ad0..0cdf1ac7ae7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/greek.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `greek')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grmath.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grmath.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index aeff09bdc8d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grmath.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,84 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `grmath.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% grmath.dtx (with options: `package')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% \CheckSum{126}
-%% This is file `grmath.sty'
-%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos.
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesPackage{grmath}[2001/02/12\space v1.2]
-\typeout{Package: `grmath' v1.2\space <2001/02/12> (A. Syropoulos)}
-\DeclareOption{grlog}{%
- \def\log{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_{10}}\nolimits}
- \def\ln{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators log_%
- {\mathgroup\symoperators e}}\nolimits}
-}
-\DeclareOption{enlog}{%
- \def\log{\mathop{\operator@font log}\nolimits}
- \def\ln{\mathop{\operator@font ln}\nolimits}
-}
-\ExecuteOptions{grlog}
-\ProcessOptions
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{polutonikogreek}{}{%
- \PackageError{grmath}{%
- `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak
- package hasn't been loaded}{%
- The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak
- are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak
- typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak
- it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax
- }}
-\DeclareSymbolFont{groperators}{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\SetSymbolFont{groperators}{bold}{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n}
-\def\sin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators hm}\nolimits}
-\def\cos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sun}\nolimits}
-\def\tan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators ef}\nolimits}
-\def\arcsin{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxhm}\nolimits}
-\def\arccos{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsun}\nolimits}
-\def\arctan{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxef}\nolimits}
-\def\cot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators sf}\nolimits}
-\def\sec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators tem}\nolimits}
-\def\csc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators stem}\nolimits}
-\def\gcd{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators MKD}\nolimits}
-\def\lcm{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators EKP}\nolimits}
-\def\arccot{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxsf}\nolimits}
-\def\arcsec{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxtem}\nolimits}
-\def\arccsc{\mathop{\mathgroup\symgroperators toxstem}\nolimits}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `grmath.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grsymb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grsymb.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f54c8a9c91..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/grsymb.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `grsymb.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% grsymb.dtx (with options: `package')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% \CheckSum{55}
-%% This is file `grsymb.sty'
-%% (c) 1997-2005 Apostolos Syropoulos.
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesPackage{grsymb}[1997/09/21\space v1.0]
-\typeout{Package: `grsymb' v1.0\space <1997/09/21> (A. Syropoulos)}
-\@ifpackagewith{babel}{greek}{}{%
- \PackageError{grsymb}{%
- `greek' option of the `babel'\MessageBreak
- package hasn't been loaded}{%
- The commands provided by this package\MessageBreak
- are specially designed for greek language\MessageBreak
- typesetting with the `babel' package. Load\MessageBreak
- it with at least the `greek' option.}\relax
- }
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Digamma}{LGR}{\char"C3\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ddigamma}{LGR}{\char"93\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\tao}{LGR}{\char"01\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Qoppa}{LGR}{\char"14\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\varqoppa}{LGR}{\char"13\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Sampi}{LGR}{\char"1A\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\vardigamma}{LGR}{\char"07\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Stigma}{LGR}{\char"08\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\VarQoppa}{LGR}{\char"15\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\euro}{LGR}{\char"18\relax}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\permill}{LGR}{\char"19\relax}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `grsymb.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8OmegaHebrew.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8OmegaHebrew.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 898577c2f1c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8OmegaHebrew.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8OmegaHebrew.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8OmegaHebrew,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8OmegaHebrew.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew font from the Omega project (by ???)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\OmegaHebrewscale{0.9}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{OmegaHebrew}{m}{n}{<-> [\OmegaHebrewscale] OmegaHebrew }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8OmegaHebrew.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8aharoni.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8aharoni.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 85943b84d92..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8aharoni.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8aharoni.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8aharoni,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8aharoni.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\Aharoniscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{aharoni}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharoni}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{b}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{aharoni}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Aharoniscale] aharonibi}{}
-
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8aharoni.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmr.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index df66a5e5a9e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmr.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8cmr.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8cmr,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8cmr.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew default font
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}
- {<-> david }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{it}
- {<-> davidi }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sl}
- {<-> davidi }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{m}{sc}
- {<-> david }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- {<-> davidb }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{b}{n}
- {<-> davidb }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> davidbi }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- {<-> davidbi }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8cmr.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmss.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 8dee0d27919..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmss.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8cmss.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8cmss,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8cmss.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew sans-serif font
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{n}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{it}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sl}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{m}{sc}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{b}{n}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmss}{bx}{it}
- {<-> nachlieli }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8cmss.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmtt.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 7f5e826a01e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8cmtt.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8cmtt.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8cmtt,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8cmtt.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew typewriter font
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{it}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sl}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{m}{sc}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{b}{n}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
- {<-> miriam }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8cmtt.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8david.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8david.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index e2d8089c8ef..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8david.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,87 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8david.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8david,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8david.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew serif font (Culmus)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\Davidscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{david}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] david}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{b}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{david}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Davidscale] davidbi}{}
-
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8david.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8drugulin.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8drugulin.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 23d0e26f991..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8drugulin.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8drugulin.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8drugulin,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8drugulin.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew old serif font (Culmus)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\Drugulinscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{drugulin}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{b}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{drugulin}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Drugulinscale] drugulinbi}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8drugulin.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8enc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8enc.def
deleted file mode 100644
index 033b35ed965..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8enc.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,138 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8enc.def',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8enc')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8enc.def}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- 8-bit Hebrew font encoding
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontEncoding{HE8}{}{}
-\DeclareFontSubstitution{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\DeclareErrorFont{HE8}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape%
- \@latin{r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{HE8}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{HE8}{\textcircled{\scshape%
- \@latin{r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{HE8}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\sheva}{HE8}{192}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafsegol}{HE8}{193}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafpatah}{HE8}{194}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hatafqamats}{HE8}{195}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hiriq}{HE8}{196}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\tsere}{HE8}{197}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\segol}{HE8}{198}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\patah}{HE8}{199}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\qamats}{HE8}{200}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\holam}{HE8}{201}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\qubuts}{HE8}{203}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\dagesh}{HE8}{204}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\meteg}{HE8}{205}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\maqaf}{HE8}{206}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\rafe}{HE8}{207}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\paseq}{HE8}{208}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\shindot}{HE8}{209}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\sindot}{HE8}{210}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\sofpasuq}{HE8}{211}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\doublevav}{HE8}{212}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\vavyod}{HE8}{213}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\doubleyod}{HE8}{214}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{HE8}{224}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{HE8}{225}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{HE8}{226}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{HE8}{227}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{HE8}{228}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{HE8}{229}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{HE8}{230}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{HE8}{231}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{HE8}{232}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{HE8}{233}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{HE8}{234}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{HE8}{235}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{HE8}{236}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{HE8}{237}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{HE8}{238}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{HE8}{239}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{HE8}{240}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{HE8}{241}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{HE8}{242}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{HE8}{243}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{HE8}{244}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{HE8}{245}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{HE8}{246}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{HE8}{247}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{HE8}{248}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{HE8}{249}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{HE8}{250}
-\let\hebsin=\hebshin
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8enc.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8frankruehl.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8frankruehl.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 082914a1c27..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8frankruehl.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8frankruehl.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8frankruehl,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8frankruehl.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew serif font (Culmus)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\FrankRuehlscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{frank}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frank}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{m}{sl} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] franki}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{b}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{n} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{frank}{bx}{it} {<-> [\FrankRuehlscale] frankbi}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8frankruehl.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8miriam.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8miriam.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index d19b4b181f9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8miriam.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,86 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8miriam.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8miriam,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8miriam.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew monospaced font (Culmus)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\MiriamMonoscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{miriam}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriam}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{m}{sl} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriami}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{b}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{n} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriamb}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{miriam}{bx}{it} {<-> [\MiriamMonoscale] miriambi}{}
-
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8miriam.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8nachlieli.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8nachlieli.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 6d3a62847cb..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8nachlieli.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8nachlieli.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8nachlieli,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8nachlieli.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew sans-serif font (Culmus)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\Nachlieliscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{nachlieli}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlieli}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{m}{sl} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{b}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{n} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielib}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{nachlieli}{bx}{it} {<-> [\Nachlieliscale] nachlielibi}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8nachlieli.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8yad.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8yad.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 07367eabab8..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/he8yad.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,85 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `he8yad.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `HE8yad,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{HE8yad.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew handwriting font (Culmus)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\KtavYadscale{1.0}
-\DeclareFontFamily{HE8}{yad}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{m}{sl} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{b}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{n} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{HE8}{yad}{bx}{it} {<-> [\KtavYadscale] yadbi}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `he8yad.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebcal.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebcal.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 2f89eec3eb3..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebcal.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,441 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `hebcal.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.dtx (with options: `calendar')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-%% TeX & LaTeX macros for computing Hebrew date from Gregorian one
-%% Copyright (C) 1991 by Michail Rozman, misha@iop.tartu.ew.su
-%%
-\ProvidesPackage{hebcal}
- [2005/03/30 v2.3h %
- Hebrew calendar
- Hebrew language support from the babel system]
-\newif\if@full@hebrew@year
-\@full@hebrew@yearfalse
-\DeclareOption{full}{\@full@hebrew@yeartrue}
-\ProcessOptions
-\newcount\Hebrewday \newcount\Hebrewmonth \newcount\Hebrewyear
-\def\Hebrewdate#1#2#3{%
- \HebrewFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3}
- {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}%
- \ifundefined{if@rl}%
- \FormatForEnglish{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}%
- \else%
- \FormatDate{\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}%
- \fi}
-\def\Hebrewtoday{\Hebrewdate{\day}{\month}{\year}}
-\let\hebrewtoday=\Hebrewtoday
-\def\Hebrewsetreg{%
- \HebrewFromGregorian{\day}{\month}{\year}
- {\Hebrewday}{\Hebrewmonth}{\Hebrewyear}}
-\def\FormatDate#1#2#3{%
- \if@rl%
- \FormatForHebrew{#1}{#2}{#3}%
- \else%
- \FormatForEnglish{#1}{#2}{#3}
- \fi}
-\def\HebrewYearName#1{{%
- \@tempcnta=#1\divide\@tempcnta by 1000\multiply\@tempcnta by 1000
- \ifnum#1=\@tempcnta\relax % divisible by 1000: disambiguate
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(%
- \else % not divisible by 1000
- \ifnum#1<1000\relax % first millennium: disambiguate
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}\ )\heblamed\hebpe"\hebgimel(%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<5000
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}%
- \else
- \ifnum#1<6000 % current millenium, print without thousands
- \@tempcnta=#1\relax
- \if@full@hebrew@year\else\advance\@tempcnta by -5000\fi
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{\@tempcnta}%
- \else % #1>6000
- \Hebrewnumeralfinal{#1}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}}
-\def\HebrewMonthName#1#2{%
- \ifnum #1 = 7 %
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}%
- \if@HebrewLeap \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'%
- \else \hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \ifcase#1%
- % nothing for 0
- \or\hebtav\hebshin\hebresh\hebyod%
- \or\hebhet\hebshin\hebvav\hebfinalnun%
- \or\hebkaf\hebsamekh\heblamed\hebvav%
- \or\hebtet\hebbet\hebtav%
- \or\hebshin\hebbet\hebtet%
- \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebalef'%
- \or\hebalef\hebdalet\hebresh\ \hebbet'%
- \or\hebnun\hebyod\hebsamekh\hebfinalnun%
- \or\hebalef\hebyod\hebyod\hebresh%
- \or\hebsamekh\hebyod\hebvav\hebfinalnun%
- \or\hebtav\hebmem\hebvav\hebzayin%
- \or\hebalef\hebbet%
- \or\hebalef\heblamed\hebvav\heblamed%
- \fi%
- \fi}
-\def\HebrewDayName#1{\Hebrewnumeral{#1}}
-\def\FormatForHebrew#1#2#3{%
- \HebrewDayName{#1}~\hebbet\HebrewMonthName{#2}{#3},~%
- \HebrewYearName{#3}}
-\def\HebrewMonthNameInEnglish#1#2{%
- \ifnum #1 = 7%
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}%
- \if@HebrewLeap Adar II\else Adar\fi%
- \else%
- \ifcase #1%
- % nothing for 0
- \or Tishrei%
- \or Heshvan%
- \or Kislev%
- \or Tebeth%
- \or Shebat%
- \or Adar I%
- \or Adar II%
- \or Nisan%
- \or Iyar%
- \or Sivan%
- \or Tammuz%
- \or Av%
- \or Elul%
- \fi
- \fi}
-\def\FormatForEnglish#1#2#3{%
- \HebrewMonthNameInEnglish{#2}{#3} \number#1,\ \number#3}
-\newcount\@common
-\def\Remainder#1#2#3{%
- #3 = #1% % c = a
- \divide #3 by #2% % c = a/b
- \multiply #3 by -#2% % c = -b(a/b)
- \advance #3 by #1}% % c = a - b(a/b)
-\newif\if@Divisible
-\def\CheckIfDivisible#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmp = 0% \tmp == \count0 - temporary variable
- \Remainder{#1}{#2}{\tmp}%
- \ifnum \tmp = 0%
- \global\@Divisibletrue%
- \else%
- \global\@Divisiblefalse%
- \fi}}
-\def\ifundefined#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax}
-\newif\if@GregorianLeap
-\def\IfGregorianLeap#1{%
- \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{4}%
- \if@Divisible%
- \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{100}%
- \if@Divisible%
- \CheckIfDivisible{#1}{400}%
- \if@Divisible%
- \@GregorianLeaptrue%
- \else%
- \@GregorianLeapfalse%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \@GregorianLeaptrue%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \@GregorianLeapfalse%
- \fi%
- \if@GregorianLeap}
-\def\GregorianDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{%
- {%
- #3 = \ifcase #1%
- 0 \or% % no month number 0
- 0 \or%
- 31 \or%
- 59 \or%
- 90 \or%
- 120 \or%
- 151 \or%
- 181 \or%
- 212 \or%
- 243 \or%
- 273 \or%
- 304 \or%
- 334%
- \fi%
- \IfGregorianLeap{#2}%
- \ifnum #1 > 2% % if month after February
- \advance #3 by 1% % add leap day
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \global\@common = #3}%
- #3 = \@common}
-\def\GregorianDaysInPriorYears#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpc = 4% % \tmpc==\count4
- \countdef\tmpb = 2% % \tmpb==\count2
- \tmpb = #1% %
- \advance \tmpb by -1% %
- \tmpc = \tmpb% % \tmpc = \tmpb = year-1
- \multiply \tmpc by 365% % Days in prior years =
- #2 = \tmpc% % = 365*(year-1) ...
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \divide \tmpc by 4% % \tmpc = (year-1)/4
- \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus Julian leap days ...
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \divide \tmpc by 100% % \tmpc = (year-1)/100
- \advance #2 by -\tmpc% % ... minus century years ...
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \divide \tmpc by 400% % \tmpc = (year-1)/400
- \advance #2 by \tmpc% % ... plus 4-century years.
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-\def\AbsoluteFromGregorian#1#2#3#4{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpd = 0% % \tmpd==\count0
- #4 = #1% % days so far this month
- \GregorianDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{\tmpd}%
- \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior months
- \GregorianDaysInPriorYears{#3}{\tmpd}%
- \advance #4 by \tmpd% % add days in prior years
- \global\@common = #4}%
- #4 = \@common}
-\newif\if@HebrewLeap
-\def\CheckLeapHebrewYear#1{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0
- \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1
- \tmpa = #1%
- \multiply \tmpa by 7%
- \advance \tmpa by 1%
- \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}%
- \ifnum \tmpb < 7% % \tmpb = (7*year+1)%19
- \global\@HebrewLeaptrue%
- \else%
- \global\@HebrewLeapfalse%
- \fi}}
-\def\HebrewElapsedMonths#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0
- \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1
- \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2
- \tmpa = #1% %
- \advance \tmpa by -1% %
- #2 = \tmpa% % #2 = \tmpa = year-1
- \divide #2 by 19% % Number of complete Meton cycles
- \multiply #2 by 235% % #2 = 235*((year-1)/19)
- \Remainder{\tmpa}{19}{\tmpb}% \tmpa = years%19-years this cycle
- \tmpc = \tmpb% %
- \multiply \tmpb by 12% %
- \advance #2 by \tmpb% % add regular months this cycle
- \multiply \tmpc by 7% %
- \advance \tmpc by 1% %
- \divide \tmpc by 19% % \tmpc = (1+7*((year-1)%19))/19 -
- \advance #2 by \tmpc% % add leap months
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-\def\HebrewElapsedDays#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpa = 0% % \tmpa==\count0
- \countdef\tmpb = 1% % \tmpb==\count1
- \countdef\tmpc = 2% % \tmpc==\count2
- \HebrewElapsedMonths{#1}{#2}%
- \tmpa = #2% %
- \multiply \tmpa by 13753% %
- \advance \tmpa by 5604% % \tmpa=MonthsElapsed*13758 + 5604
- \Remainder{\tmpa}{25920}{\tmpc}% \tmpc == ConjunctionParts
- \divide \tmpa by 25920%
- \multiply #2 by 29%
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \advance #2 by \tmpa% % #2 = 1 + MonthsElapsed*29 +
- \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek
- \ifnum \tmpc < 19440%
- \ifnum \tmpc < 9924%
- \else% % New moon at 9 h. 204 p. or later
- \ifnum \tmpa = 2% % on Tuesday ...
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% of a common year
- \if@HebrewLeap%
- \else%
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \ifnum \tmpc < 16789%
- \else% % New moon at 15 h. 589 p. or later
- \ifnum \tmpa = 1% % on Monday ...
- \advance #1 by -1%
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#1}% at the end of leap year
- \if@HebrewLeap%
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \else%
- \advance #2 by 1% % new moon at or after midday
- \fi%
- \Remainder{#2}{7}{\tmpa}% % \tmpa == DayOfWeek
- \ifnum \tmpa = 0% % if Sunday ...
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \else% %
- \ifnum \tmpa = 3% % Wednesday ...
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \else%
- \ifnum \tmpa = 5% % or Friday
- \advance #2 by 1%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-\def\DaysInHebrewYear#1#2{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpe = 12% % \tmpe==\count12
- \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{\tmpe}%
- \advance #1 by 1%
- \HebrewElapsedDays{#1}{#2}%
- \advance #2 by -\tmpe%
- \global\@common = #2}%
- #2 = \@common}
-\def\HebrewDaysInPriorMonths#1#2#3{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpf= 14% % \tmpf==\count14
- #3 = \ifcase #1% % Days in prior month of regular year
- 0 \or% % no month number 0
- 0 \or% % Tishri
- 30 \or% % Heshvan
- 59 \or% % Kislev
- 89 \or% % Tebeth
- 118 \or% % Shebat
- 148 \or% % Adar I
- 148 \or% % Adar II
- 177 \or% % Nisan
- 207 \or% % Iyar
- 236 \or% % Sivan
- 266 \or% % Tammuz
- 295 \or% % Av
- 325 \or% % Elul
- 400% % Dummy
- \fi%
- \CheckLeapHebrewYear{#2}%
- \if@HebrewLeap% % in leap year
- \ifnum #1 > 6% % if month after Adar I
- \advance #3 by 30% % add 30 days
- \fi%
- \fi%
- \DaysInHebrewYear{#2}{\tmpf}%
- \ifnum #1 > 3%
- \ifnum \tmpf = 353% %
- \advance #3 by -1% %
- \fi% % Short Kislev
- \ifnum \tmpf = 383% %
- \advance #3 by -1% %
- \fi% %
- \fi%
- \ifnum #1 > 2%
- \ifnum \tmpf = 355% %
- \advance #3 by 1% %
- \fi% % Long Heshvan
- \ifnum \tmpf = 385% %
- \advance #3 by 1% %
- \fi% %
- \fi%
- \global\@common = #3}%
- #3 = \@common}
-\def\AbsoluteFromHebrew#1#2#3#4{%
- {%
- #4 = #1%
- \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#2}{#3}{#1}%
- \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior months this year
- \HebrewElapsedDays{#3}{#1}%
- \advance #4 by #1% % Add days in prior years
- \advance #4 by -1373429% % Subtract days before Gregorian
- \global\@common = #4}% % 01.01.0001
- #4 = \@common}
-\def\HebrewFromGregorian#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
- {%
- \countdef\tmpx= 17% % \tmpx==\count17
- \countdef\tmpy= 18% % \tmpy==\count18
- \countdef\tmpz= 19% % \tmpz==\count19
- #6 = #3% %
- \global\advance #6 by 3761% approximation from above
- \AbsoluteFromGregorian{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}%
- \tmpz = 1 \tmpy = 1%
- \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}%
- \ifnum \tmpx > #4% %
- \global\advance #6 by -1% Hyear = Gyear + 3760
- \AbsoluteFromHebrew{\tmpz}{\tmpy}{#6}{\tmpx}%
- \fi% %
- \advance #4 by -\tmpx% % Days in this year
- \advance #4 by 1% %
- #5 = #4% %
- \divide #5 by 30% % Approximation for month from below
- \loop% % Search for month
- \HebrewDaysInPriorMonths{#5}{#6}{\tmpx}%
- \ifnum \tmpx < #4%
- \advance #5 by 1%
- \tmpy = \tmpx%
- \repeat%
- \global\advance #5 by -1%
- \global\advance #4 by -\tmpy}}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `hebcal.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebfont.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebfont.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 8656da7b20d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebfont.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,129 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `hebfont.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `hebfont')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesPackage{hebfont}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew font switching commands
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\def\ivritex@tmp{HE8}
-\ifx\ivritex@tmp\HeblatexEncoding %
- % compatibility with hebfonts:
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont}
-
- % an attempt to give some replacements to the original hebfonts:
- %
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{frank}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont}
- % note that redis is larger than shstk
-
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textaha}{\fontfamily{aharoni}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdav}{\fontfamily{david}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textdru}{\fontfamily{drugulin}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textel} {\fontfamily{ellinia}\selectfont}
- % \textfr is already declared above
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textmir}{\fontfamily{miriam}\selectfont}
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textna} {\fontfamily{nachlieli}\selectfont}
- % is this necessary:
- \DeclareTextFontCommand{\textyad} {\fontfamily{yad}\selectfont}
-
-\else%
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textjm}{\rmfamily\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textds}{\bfseries\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textoj}{\itshape\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textta}{\sffamily\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcrml}{\fontfamily{crml}\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textfr}{\fontfamily{fr}\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textredis}{\fontfamily{redis}\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textclas}{\fontfamily{clas}\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshold}{\fontfamily{shold}\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshscr}{\fontfamily{shscr}\selectfont}
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textshstk}{\fontfamily{shstk}\selectfont}
-\fi
-\if@compatibility
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\jm}{\normalfont\rmfamily\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\jm}
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ds}{\normalfont\bfseries\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\ds}
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\oj}{\normalfont\itshape\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\oj}
- \DeclareOldFontCommand{\ta}{\normalfont\sffamily\selectfont}%
- {\@nomath\ta}
-\fi
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `hebfont.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index dba5ea2a2eb..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,297 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `hebrew.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.dtx (with options: `hebrew')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{hebrew.ldf}
- [2005/03/30 v2.3h %
- Hebrew language definition from the babel system
- Hebrew language support from the babel system]
-\LdfInit{hebrew}{captionshebrew}
-\ifx\l@hebrew\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Hebrew}%
- \adddialect\l@hebrew0
-\fi
-\providecommand{\HeblatexEncoding}{LHE}%
-\providecommand{\HeblatexEncodingFile}{lheenc}%
-\newcommand{\heblatex@set@encoding}[2]{
-}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{fontenc}{%
- \@ifl@aded{def}{%
- \HeblatexEncodingFile}{\def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}}{}%
- }{%
- \input{\HeblatexEncodingFile.def}%
- \def\hebrewencoding{\HeblatexEncoding}%
- }}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
- \@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc}}}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\addto\captionshebrew{%
- \def\prefacename{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebbet\hebvav\hebalef}}%
- \def\refname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
- \hebmem\hebqof\hebvav\hebresh\hebvav\hebtav}}%
- \def\abstractname{\@ensure@R{\hebtav\hebqof\hebtsadi\hebyod\hebresh}}%
- \def\bibname{\@ensure@R{\hebbet\hebyod\hebbet\heblamed\hebyod\hebvav%
- \hebgimel\hebresh\hebpe\hebyod\hebhe}}%
- \def\chaptername{\@ensure@R{\hebpe\hebresh\hebqof}}%
- \def\appendixname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun\hebsamekh\hebpe\hebhet}}%
- \def\contentsname{\@ensure@R{%
- \hebtav\hebvav\hebkaf\hebfinalnun\ %
- \hebayin\hebnun\hebyod\hebyod\hebnun\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
- \def\listfigurename{\@ensure@R{%
- \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\ %
- \hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh\hebyod\hebfinalmem}}%
- \def\listtablename{\@ensure@R{%
- \hebresh\hebshin\hebyod\hebmem\hebtav\
- \hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebalef\hebvav\hebtav}}%
- \def\indexname{\@ensure@R{\hebmem\hebpe\hebtav\hebhet}}%
- \def\figurename{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\hebyod\hebvav\hebresh}}%
- \def\tablename{\@ensure@R{\hebtet\hebbet\heblamed\hebhe}}%
- \def\partname{\@ensure@R{\hebhet\heblamed\hebqof}}%
- \def\enclname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}}%
- \def\ccname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof\hebyod%
- \hebfinalmem}}%
- \def\headtoname{\@ensure@R{\hebalef\heblamed}}%
- \def\pagename{\@ensure@R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}}%
- \def\psname{\@ensure@R{\hebnun.\hebbet.}}%
- \def\seename{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe}}%
- \def\alsoname{\@ensure@R{\hebresh\hebalef\hebhe \hebgimel%
- \hebmemesof}}%
- \def\proofname{\@ensure@R{\hebhe\hebvav\hebkaf\hebhet\hebhe}}
- \def\glossaryname{\@ensure@L{Glossary}}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-\@ifclassloaded{seminar}{%
- \def\slidelabel{\bf \if@rl\R{\hebshin\hebqof\hebfinalpe{} \theslide}%
- \else\L{Slide \theslide}%
- \fi}%
-}{}
-\def\hebmonth#1{%
- \ifcase#1\or \hebyod\hebnun\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or %
- \hebpe\hebbet\hebresh\hebvav\hebalef\hebresh\or %
- \hebmem\hebresh\hebfinaltsadi\or %
- \hebalef\hebpe\hebresh\hebyod\heblamed\or %
- \hebmem\hebalef\hebyod\or \hebyod\hebvav\hebnun\hebyod\or %
- \hebyod\hebvav\heblamed\hebyod\or %
- \hebalef\hebvav\hebgimel\hebvav\hebsamekh\hebtet\or %
- \hebsamekh\hebpe\hebtet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or %
- \hebalef\hebvav\hebqof\hebtet\hebvav\hebbet\hebresh\or %
- \hebnun\hebvav\hebbet\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\or %
- \hebdalet\hebtsadi\hebmem\hebbet\hebresh\fi}
-\def\hebdate#1#2#3{%
- \beginR\beginL\number#1\endL\ \hebbet\hebmonth{#2}
- \beginL\number#3\endL\endR}
-\def\hebday{\hebdate{\day}{\month}{\year}}
-\def\datehebrew{\let\today=\hebday}
-\addto\extrashebrew{%
- \tohebrew%
- \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginR\fi\fi}
-\addto\noextrashebrew{%
- \fromhebrew%
- \ifhmode\ifinner\else\beginL\fi\fi}
-\def\sethebrew{\setrllanguage{hebrew}}
-\def\unsethebrew{\unsetrllanguage{hebrew}}
-\if@compatibility
- \let\hebrewtext=\sethebrew
- \let\nohebrewtext=\unsethebrew
-\fi
-\def\tohebrew{\@torl{hebrew}}%
-\def\fromhebrew{\@fromrl}
-\def\@@hebrew#1{\beginR{{\tohebrew#1}}\endR}
-\def\@hebrew{\protect\@@hebrew}
-\newif\if@gim@apost % whether we print apostrophes
-\newif\if@gim@final % whether we use final or initial letters
-\newcommand*{\hebrewnumeral}[1] % no apostrophe, no final letters
- {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@apostfalse\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}}
-\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeral}[1] % apostrophe, no final letters
- {{\@gim@finalfalse\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}}
-\newcommand*{\Hebrewnumeralfinal}[1] % apostrophe, final letters
- {{\@gim@finaltrue\@gim@aposttrue\@hebrew@numeral{#1}}}
-\addto\extrashebrew{%
- \let\saved@alph=\@alph%
- \let\saved@Alph=\@Alph%
- \renewcommand*{\@alph}[1]{\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}%
- \renewcommand*{\@Alph}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number#1}}%
- \def\Alphfinal#1{\expandafter\@Alphfinal\csname c@#1\endcsname}%
- \providecommand*{\@Alphfinal}[1]{\protect\Hebrewnumeralfinal{\number#1}}}
-\addto\noextrashebrew{%
- \let\@alph=\saved@alph%
- \let\@Alph=\saved@Alph}
-\renewcommand{\theenumii}
- {\if@rl\protect\hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumii}%
- \else\protect\L{\protect\@@alph{\number\c@enumii}}\fi}
-\renewcommand{\theenumiv}
- {\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@enumiv}%
- \else\protect\L{\protect\@@Alph{\number\c@enumiv}}\fi}
-\def\label#1{\@bsphack
- \if@rl
- \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii)\theenumii(}%
- \protected@write\@auxout{}%
- {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginR\@currentlabel\endR}{\thepage}}}%
- \else
- \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii(\theenumii)}%
- \protected@write\@auxout{}%
- {\string\newlabel{#1}{{\beginL\@currentlabel\endL}{\thepage}}}%
- \fi
- \@esphack}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{%
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{%
- \let\@@appendix=\appendix%
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{%
- \renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix%
- \renewcommand\thesection
- {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@section}%
- \protect\else\@@Alph\c@section\protect\fi}}}
- {\renewcommand\appendix{\@@appendix%
- \renewcommand\thechapter
- {\protect\if@rl\protect\Hebrewnumeral{\number\c@chapter}%
- \protect\else\@@Alph\c@chapter\protect\fi}}}}}
-\newcommand*{\@hebrew@numeral}[1]
-{\@hebrew{\@tempcnta=#1\@tempcntb=#1\relax
- \divide\@tempcntb by 1000
- \ifnum\@tempcntb=0\gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax
- \else{\@gim@apostfalse\@gim@finalfalse\@hebrew@numeral\@tempcntb}'%
- \multiply\@tempcntb by 1000\relax
- \advance\@tempcnta by -\@tempcntb\relax
- \gim@nomil\@tempcnta\relax
- \fi
-}}
-\newcommand*{\gim@nomil}[1]{\@tempcnta=#1\@gim@prevfalse
- \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 100\relax % hundreds digit
- \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no hundreds
- \or\gim@print{100}{\hebqof}%
- \or\gim@print{200}{\hebresh}%
- \or\gim@print{300}{\hebshin}%
- \or\gim@print{400}{\hebtav}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{500}{\hebqof}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{600}{\hebresh}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{700}{\hebshin}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\gim@print{800}{\hebtav}%
- \or\hebtav\@gim@prevtrue\hebtav\gim@print{900}{\hebqof}%
- \fi
- \@tempcntb=\@tempcnta\divide\@tempcntb by 10\relax % tens digit
- \ifcase\@tempcntb % print nothing if no tens
- \or % number between 10 and 19
- \ifnum\@tempcnta = 16 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-zayin
- \else\ifnum\@tempcnta = 15 \gim@print {9}{\hebtet}% tet-vav
- \else \gim@print{10}{\hebyod}%
- \fi % \@tempcnta = 15
- \fi % \@tempcnta = 16
- \or\gim@print{20}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalkaf\else\hebkaf\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{30}{\heblamed}%
- \or\gim@print{40}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalmem\else\hebmem\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{50}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalnun\else\hebnun\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{60}{\hebsamekh}%
- \or\gim@print{70}{\hebayin}%
- \or\gim@print{80}{\if@gim@final\hebfinalpe\else\hebpe\fi}%
- \or\gim@print{90}{\if@gim@final\hebfinaltsadi\else\hebtsadi\fi}%
- \fi
- \ifcase\@tempcnta % print nothing if no ones
- \or\gim@print{1}{\hebalef}%
- \or\gim@print{2}{\hebbet}%
- \or\gim@print{3}{\hebgimel}%
- \or\gim@print{4}{\hebdalet}%
- \or\gim@print{5}{\hebhe}%
- \or\gim@print{6}{\hebvav}%
- \or\gim@print{7}{\hebzayin}%
- \or\gim@print{8}{\hebhet}%
- \or\gim@print{9}{\hebtet}%
- \fi
-}
-\newif\if@gim@prev % flag if a previous letter has been typeset
-\newcommand*{\gim@print}[2]{% #2 is a letter, #1 is its value.
- \advance\@tempcnta by -#1\relax% deduct the value from the remainder
- \ifnum\@tempcnta=0% if this is the last letter
- \if@gim@prev\if@gim@apost"\fi#2%
- \else#2\if@gim@apost'\fi\fi%
- \else{\@gim@finalfalse#2}\@gim@prevtrue\fi}
-\let\hebr=\alph
-\let\gim=\alph
-\def\hebcopy{\protect\R{\hebhe\hebayin\hebtav\hebqof}}
-\def\hebincl{\protect\R{\hebresh\hebtsadi"\hebbet}}
-\def\hebpage{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebmem\hebvav\hebdalet}}
-\def\hebto{\protect\R{\hebayin\hebdalet}}
-\def\hadgesh#1{\leavevmode\setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
- \kern-.025em\copy0\kern-\wd0
- \kern.05em\copy0\kern-\wd0
- \kern-.025em\raise.0433em\box0 }
-\if@compatibility
- \def\piska#1{\item{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent}
- \def\piskapiska#1{\itemitem{#1}\hangindent=-\hangindent}
-\fi
-\let\makafgadol=\textendash
-\let\makafanak=\textemdash
-\let\geresh=\textquoteright
-\let\opengeresh=\textquoteright
-\let\closegeresh=\textquoteleft
-\let\openquote=\textquotedblright
-\let\closequote=\textquotedblleft
-\let\leftquotation=\textquotedblright
-\let\rightquotation=\textquotedblleft
-\AtBeginDocument{\def\@rllanguagename{hebrew}}
-\ldf@finish{hebrew}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `hebrew.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty
index d21249581ed..45bb222d6eb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `hebrew')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_newcode.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_newcode.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index b20c9b6e44a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_newcode.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `hebrew_newcode.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% heb209.dtx (with options: `newcode')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_newcode.sty}
-\RequirePackage[8859-8]{inputenc}
-\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `hebrew_newcode.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_p.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_p.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index 8edf90be28e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_p.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `hebrew_p.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% heb209.dtx (with options: `pccode')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_p.sty}
-\RequirePackage[cp862]{inputenc}
-\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `hebrew_p.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg
index 9605c61b658..b2aa4446012 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hyphen.cfg
@@ -4,9 +4,10 @@
%%
%% The original source files were:
%%
-%% babel.dtx (with options: `kernel,patterns')
+%% babel.dtx (with options: `patterns')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -36,45 +37,28 @@
%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
%% File 'babel.dtx'
-%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package]
+%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package]
%% Babel package for LaTeX2e.
%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams,
%% TeXniek
%% all rights reserved.
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
+\xdef\bbl@format{\jobname}
\ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined
\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
\wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}%
- \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }%
\let\ProvidesFile\@undefined
}
- \def\ProvidesLanguage#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
- \wlog{Language: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}%
- }
-\else
- \let\bbl@tempa\ProvidesFile
- \def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
- \toks8{Babel <#3> and hyphenation patterns for }%
- \bbl@tempa#1[#2 #3 #4]%
- \let\ProvidesFile\bbl@tempa}
- \def\ProvidesLanguage#1{%
- \begingroup
- \catcode`\ 10 %
- \@makeother\/%
- \@ifnextchar[%]
- {\@provideslanguage{#1}}{\@provideslanguage{#1}[]}}
- \def\@provideslanguage#1[#2]{%
- \wlog{Language: #1 #2}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname ver@#1.ldf\endcsname{#2}%
- \endgroup}
\fi
\ProvidesFile{hyphen.cfg}
- [2008/07/08 v3.8m %
- Babel language switching mechanism]
+ [2013/04/15 v3.9e %
+ Babel language switching mechanism]
\ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined
+ \let\orig@dump\dump
\input plain.def\relax
\fi
\ifx\language\@undefined
@@ -82,12 +66,8 @@
\fi
\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined
\csname newcount\endcsname\last@language
-\else
- \countdef\last@language=19
-\fi
-\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined
\def\addlanguage#1{%
- \global\advance\last@language \@ne
+ \global\advance\last@language\@ne
\ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi
\else
\errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}%
@@ -95,302 +75,134 @@
\global\chardef#1\last@language
\wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}}
\else
+ \countdef\last@language=19
\def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi}
\fi
-\def\adddialect#1#2{%
- \global\chardef#1#2\relax
- \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}}
-\def\iflanguage#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi{\ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo
- \else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-\edef\selectlanguage{%
- \noexpand\protect
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname
- }
-\ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi
-\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
- \def\xstring{\string\string\string}
-\else
- \let\xstring\string
-\fi
-\xdef\bbl@language@stack{}
-\def\bbl@push@language{%
- \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}%
- }
-\def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{%
- \def\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}%
- }
-\def\bbl@pop@language{%
- \expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack
- \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}%
- }
-\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{%
- \bbl@push@language
- \aftergroup\bbl@pop@language
- \bbl@set@language{#1}}
-\def\bbl@set@language#1{%
- \edef\languagename{%
- \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty
- \else \string#1\@empty\fi}%
- \select@language{\languagename}%
- \if@filesw
- \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \fi}
-\def\select@language#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \expandafter\ifx\csname date#1\endcsname\relax
- \@noopterr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- \originalTeX
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX
- \expandafter{\csname noextras#1\endcsname
- \let\originalTeX\@empty}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \babel@beginsave
- \csname captions#1\endcsname
- \csname date#1\endcsname
- \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax
- \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin
- \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-\long\def\otherlanguage#1{%
- \csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}%
- \ignorespaces
- }
-\long\def\endotherlanguage{%
- \originalTeX
- \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces
- }
-\expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{%
- \foreign@language{#1}%
- }
-\expandafter\def\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname{%
- \csname noextras\languagename\endcsname
- }
-\def\foreignlanguage{\protect\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname}
-\expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{%
- \begingroup
- \originalTeX
- \foreign@language{#1}%
- #2%
- \csname noextras#1\endcsname
- \endgroup
- }
-\def\foreign@language#1{%
- \def\languagename{#1}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \csname extras#1\endcsname
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- }
-\def\bbl@patterns#1{%
- \language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
- \csname l@#1\endcsname
- \else
- \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname
- \fi\relax
-}
-\def\hyphenrules#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\@undefined
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@patterns{#1}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- }
-\def\endhyphenrules{}
-\def\providehyphenmins#1#2{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}%
- \fi}
-\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\righthyphenmin#2}
-\def\LdfInit{%
- \chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@
- \catcode`\@=11\relax
- \input babel.def\relax
- \catcode`\@=\atcatcode \let\atcatcode\relax
- \LdfInit}
-\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi
-\ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi
-\ifx\PackageError\@undefined
- \def\@nolanerr#1{%
- \errhelp{Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}%
- \errmessage{You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}}
- \def\@nopatterns#1{%
- \message{No hyphenation patterns were loaded for}%
- \message{the language `#1'}%
- \message{I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0
- instead}}
- \def\@noopterr#1{%
- \errmessage{The option #1 was not specified in \string\usepackage}
- \errhelp{You may continue, but expect unexpected results}}
- \def\@activated#1{%
- \wlog{Package babel Info: Making #1 an active character}}
-\else
- \newcommand*{\@nolanerr}[1]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}%
- {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
- \newcommand*{\@nopatterns}[1]{%
- \PackageWarningNoLine{babel}%
- {No hyphenation patterns were loaded for\MessageBreak
- the language `#1'\MessageBreak
- I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0
- instead}}
- \newcommand*{\@noopterr}[1]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {You haven't loaded the option #1\space yet}%
- {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}}
- \newcommand*{\@activated}[1]{%
- \PackageInfo{babel}{%
- Making #1 an active character}}
-\fi
-\def\process@line#1#2 #3/{%
- \ifx=#1
- \process@synonym#2 /
+\toks8{Babel <3.9e> and hyphenation patterns for }%
+\def\process@line#1#2 #3 #4 {%
+ \ifx=#1%
+ \process@synonym{#2}%
\else
- \process@language#1#2 #3/%
+ \process@language{#1#2}{#3}{#4}%
\fi
- }
+ \ignorespaces}
\toks@{}
-\def\process@synonym#1 /{%
+\def\bbl@languages{}
+\def\process@synonym#1{%
\ifnum\last@language=\m@ne
- \expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname0\relax
- \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language0}
- \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@
- \expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname}%
+ \toks@\expandafter{\the\toks@\relax\process@synonym{#1}}%
\else
\expandafter\chardef\csname l@#1\endcsname\last@language
- \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language}
+ \wlog{\string\l@#1=\string\language\the\last@language}%
\expandafter\let\csname #1hyphenmins\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname
- \fi
- }
-\def\process@language#1 #2 #3/{%
+ \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname
+ \let\bbl@elt\relax
+ \edef\bbl@languages{\bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\last@language}{}{}}%
+ \fi}
+\def\process@language#1#2#3{%
\expandafter\addlanguage\csname l@#1\endcsname
\expandafter\language\csname l@#1\endcsname
- \def\languagename{#1}%
- \global\toks8\expandafter{\the\toks8#1, }%
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@hook@everylanguage{#1}%
+ \bbl@get@enc#1::\@@@
\begingroup
- \bbl@get@enc#1:\@@@
- \ifx\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty
- \else
- \fontencoding{\bbl@hyph@enc}\selectfont
- \fi
\lefthyphenmin\m@ne
- \input #2\relax
+ \bbl@hook@loadpatterns{#2}%
\ifnum\lefthyphenmin=\m@ne
\else
\expandafter\xdef\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname{%
\the\lefthyphenmin\the\righthyphenmin}%
\fi
\endgroup
+ \def\bbl@tempa{#3}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty\else
+ \bbl@hook@loadexceptions{#3}%
+ \fi
+ \let\bbl@elt\relax
+ \edef\bbl@languages{%
+ \bbl@languages\bbl@elt{#1}{\the\language}{#2}{\bbl@tempa}}%
\ifnum\the\language=\z@
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname
- \fi
\the\toks@
- \fi
- \toks@{}%
- \def\bbl@tempa{#3}%
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty
- \else
- \ifx\bbl@tempa\space
+ \toks@{}%
+ \fi}
+\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2:#3\@@@{\def\bbl@hyph@enc{#2}}
+\def\bbl@hook@everylanguage#1{}
+\def\bbl@hook@loadpatterns#1{\input #1\relax}
+\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\bbl@hook@loadpatterns
+\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\bbl@hook@loadpatterns
+\begingroup
+ \def\AddBabelHook#1#2{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname\relax
+ \def\next{\toks1}%
\else
- \input #3\relax
+ \def\next{\expandafter\gdef\csname bbl@hook@#2\endcsname####1}%
+ \fi
+ \next}
+ \ifx\directlua\@undefined
+ \ifx\XeTeXinputencoding\@undefined\else
+ \input xebabel.def
\fi
+ \else
+ \input luababel.def
\fi
- }
-\def\bbl@get@enc#1:#2\@@@{%
- \def\bbl@tempa{#1}%
- \def\bbl@tempb{#2}%
- \ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty
- \let\bbl@hyph@enc\@empty
+ \openin1 = babel-\bbl@format.cfg
+ \ifeof1
\else
- \bbl@get@enc#2\@@@
- \edef\bbl@hyph@enc{\bbl@tempa}%
- \fi}
+ \input babel-\bbl@format.cfg\relax
+ \fi
+ \closein1
+\endgroup
+\bbl@hook@loadkernel{switch.def}
\openin1 = language.dat
+\def\languagename{english}%
\ifeof1
\message{I couldn't find the file language.dat,\space
I will try the file hyphen.tex}
\input hyphen.tex\relax
- \def\l@english{0}%
- \def\languagename{english}%
+ \chardef\l@english\z@
\else
\last@language\m@ne
\loop
\endlinechar\m@ne
\read1 to \bbl@line
\endlinechar`\^^M
- \ifx\bbl@line\@empty
- \else
- \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space/}%
- \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line
- \ifx\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined
- \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\languagename
+ \if T\ifeof1F\fi T\relax
+ \ifx\bbl@line\@empty\else
+ \edef\bbl@line{\bbl@line\space\space\space}%
+ \expandafter\process@line\bbl@line\relax
\fi
- \fi
- \iftrue \csname fi\endcsname
- \csname if\ifeof1 false\else true\fi\endcsname
\repeat
- \language=0
- \let\languagename\bbl@defaultlanguage
- \let\bbl@defaultlanguage\@undefined
+ \begingroup
+ \def\bbl@elt#1#2#3#4{%
+ \global\language=#2\relax
+ \gdef\languagename{#1}%
+ \def\bbl@elt##1##2##3##4{}}%
+ \bbl@languages
+ \endgroup
\fi
\closein1
-\let\process@language\@undefined
-\let\process@synonym\@undefined
-\let\process@line\@undefined
-\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined
-\let\bbl@tempb\@undefined
-\let\bbl@eq@\@undefined
-\let\bbl@line\@undefined
-\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined
+\if/\the\toks@/\else
+ \errhelp{language.dat loads no language, only synonyms}
+ \errmessage{Orphan language synonym}
+\fi
\ifx\addto@hook\@undefined
\else
- \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{%
- \expandafter\typeout\expandafter{\the\toks8 loaded.}}
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{%
+ \noexpand\typeout{\the\toks8 \the\last@language\space languages
+ loaded.}}%
+ \expandafter\addto@hook\expandafter\everyjob\expandafter{\bbl@tempa}
\fi
+\let\bbl@line\@undefined
+\let\process@line\@undefined
+\let\process@synonym\@undefined
+\let\process@language\@undefined
+\let\bbl@get@enc\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hyph@enc\@undefined
+\let\bbl@tempa\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@loadkernel\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@everylanguage\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@loadpatterns\@undefined
+\let\bbl@hook@loadexceptions\@undefined
%%
%% \CharacterTable
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 04712c23bb2..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,267 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `icelandic.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% icelandic.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{icelandic}
- [2005/03/30 v1.1g Icelandic support from the babel system]
-%% File iceland.dtx
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989--2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Icelandic Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1996--2005
-%% by Einar \'Arnason <einar@lif.hi.is>
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: Einar \'Arnason
-%% einar at lif.hi.is
-%% or to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%%
-\def\bbl@tempa{icelandic}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \def\CurrentOption{icelandic}
-\fi
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@icelandic\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Icelandic}
- \adddialect\l@icelandic0
-\fi
-\newif\if@Two@E \@Two@Etrue
-\def\@FI@{\fi}
-\ifx\@compatibilitytrue\@undefined
- \@Two@Efalse \def\@FI@{\relax}
-\else
- \if@compatibility \@Two@Efalse \fi
-\@FI@
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \languageshorthands{icelandic}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasicelandic{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Form\'{a}li}%
- \def\refname{Heimildir}%
- \def\abstractname{\'{U}tdr\'{a}ttur}%
- \def\bibname{Heimildir}%
- \def\chaptername{Kafli}%
- \def\appendixname{Vi{\dh}auki}%
- \def\contentsname{Efnisyfirlit}%
- \def\listfigurename{Myndaskr\'{a}}%
- \def\listtablename{T\"{o}fluskr\'{a}}%
- \def\indexname{Atri{\dh}isor{\dh}askr\'{a}}%
- \def\figurename{Mynd}%
- \def\tablename{Tafla}%
- \def\partname{Hluti}%
- \def\enclname{Hj\'{a}lagt}%
- \def\ccname{Samrit}%
- \def\headtoname{Til:}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Bla{\dh}s\'{\i}{\dh}a}%
- \def\seename{Sj\'{a}}%
- \def\alsoname{Sj\'{a} einnig}%
- \def\proofname{S\"{o}nnun}%
- \def\glossaryname{Or{\dh}alisti}%
- }
-\def\dateicelandic{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- jan\'{u}ar\or febr\'{u}ar\or mars\or apr\'{\i}l\or ma\'{\i}\or
- j\'{u}n\'{\i}\or j\'{u}l\'{\i}\or \'{a}g\'{u}st\or september\or
- okt\'{o}ber\or n\'{o}vember\or desember\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\let\ilq\grq
-\let\irq\grq
-\let\iflq\frq
-\let\ifrq\flq
-\let\ilqq\glqq
-\let\irqq\grqq
-\let\iflqq\frqq
-\let\ifrqq\flqq
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\newdimen\pl@left
-\newdimen\pl@down
-\newdimen\pl@right
-\newdimen\pl@temp
-\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\k{}}\setbox2\hbox{p}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\oob}{T1}{\sob {o}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Oob}{T1}{\sob {O}{.7}{0}{0}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\ooob}{T1}{\sob {^^f3}{.85}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\OOob}{T1}{\sob {^^d3}{.7}{0}{0}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\sob {e}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\sob {E}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eeob}{T1}{\sob {^^e9}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\EEob}{T1}{\sob {^^c9}{1}{0}{.04}{0}}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"o}{\oob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"O}{\Oob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^f3}{\ooob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^d3}{\OOob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"e}{\eob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"E}{\Eob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^e9}{\eeob}
-\declare@shorthand{icelandic}{"^^c9}{\EEob}
-\mathchardef\m@comma="013B \def\@comma@{\ifmmode\m@comma\else,\fi}
-\def\f@thousandsep{\ifmmode\mskip5.5mu\else\penalty\@M\kern.3em\fi}
-\newcommand{\decimalsep}{.} \newcommand{\thousandsep}{\@comma@}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\decimalsep{\@comma@}%
- \def\thousandsep{\f@thousandsep}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\decimalsep{.}%
- \def\thousandsep{\@comma@}}
-\if@Two@E
- \newcommand{\tala}[2][\decimalsep]{%
- \def\@decimalsep{#1}\@tala#2\@empty,\@empty,\@nil}
-\else
- \newcommand{\tala}[1]{%
- \def\@decimalsep{\decimalsep}\@tala#1\@empty,\@empty,\@nil}
-\fi
-\def\@tala#1,#2,#3\@nil{%
- \ifx\@empty#2%
- \@integerpart{#1}%
- \else
- \@integerpart{#1}\@decimalsep\@decimalpart{#2}%
- \fi}
-\def\@decimalpart#1{\@@decimalpart#1\@empty\@empty\@empty}
-\def\@@decimalpart#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3%
- \ifx\@empty#4%
- \else
- \thousandsep\expandafter\@@decimalpart\expandafter#4%
- \fi}
-\def\@integerpart#1{\@@integerpart{}#1\@empty\@empty\@empty}
-\def\@@integerpart#1#2#3#4{%
- \ifx\@empty#2%
- \@addthousandsep#1\relax
- \else
- \ifx\@empty#3%
- \@addthousandsep\@empty\@empty#1#2\relax
- \else
- \ifx\@empty#4%
- \@addthousandsep\@empty#1#2#3\relax
- \else
- \@@integerpartafterfi{#1#2#3#4}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-\def\@@integerpartafterfi#1\fi\fi\fi{\fi\fi\fi\@@integerpart{#1}}
-\def\@addthousandsep#1#2#3#4{#1#2#3%
- \if#4\relax
- \else
- \thousandsep\expandafter\@addthousandsep\expandafter#4%
- \fi}
-\ifx\sevenrm\@undefined
- \ifx\@ptsize\@undefined
- \let\upp@size\small
- \else
- \ifx\selectfont\@undefined
- \ifcase\@ptsize
- \let\upp@size\ixpt\or
- \let\upp@size\xpt\or
- \let\upp@size\xipt
- \fi
- \else
- \ifcase\@ptsize
- \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@ixpt{10pt}\selectfont}\or
- \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xpt{11pt}\selectfont}\or
- \def\upp@size{\fontsize\@xipt{12pt}\selectfont}
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-\else
- \let\upp@size\sevenrm
-\fi
-\if@Two@E
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{\textsuperscript{#1}}
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\upp}[1]{%
- \leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\upp@size#1}}
-\fi
-\ifx\fmtname\LaTeXeFmtName
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{T1}{6}
- \DeclareTextSymbol{\grada}{OT1}{23}
-\else
- \def\T@one{T1}
- \ifx\f@encoding\T@one
- \newcommand{\grada}{\char6}
- \else
- \newcommand{\grada}{\char23}
- \fi
-\fi
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\gradur}{%
- \leavevmode\hbox to 0.3em{\hss\grada\hss}}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `icelandic.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty
index eaac6a6627a..a333115ac6c 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/icelandic.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `icelandic')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 458cb61347f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `interlingua.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% interlingua.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{interlingua}
- [2005/03/30 v1.6 Interlingua support from the babel system]
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{interlingua}{captionsinterlingua}
-\ifx\undefined\l@interlingua
- \@nopatterns{Interlingua}
- \adddialect\l@interlingua0\fi
-
-\providehyphenmins{interlingua}{\tw@\tw@}
-\def\captionsinterlingua{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefacio}%
- \def\refname{Referentias}%
- \def\abstractname{Summario}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliographia}%
- \def\chaptername{Capitulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Appendice}%
- \def\contentsname{Contento}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lista de figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{Lista de tabellas}%
- \def\indexname{Indice}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabella}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Incluso}%
- \def\ccname{Copia}%
- \def\headtoname{A}%
- \def\pagename{Pagina}%
- \def\seename{vide}%
- \def\alsoname{vide etiam}%
- \def\proofname{Prova}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossario}%
- }
-
-\def\dateinterlingua{%
- \def\today{le~\number\day\space de \ifcase\month\or
- januario\or februario\or martio\or april\or maio\or junio\or
- julio\or augusto\or septembre\or octobre\or novembre\or
- decembre\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-
-\addto\extrasinterlingua{}
-\addto\noextrasinterlingua{}
-\ldf@finish{interlingua}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `interlingua.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty
index 60357554a1d..4be3bc71758 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/interlingua.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `interlingua')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 47a505f095c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `irish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% irish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{irish}
- [2005/03/30 v1.0h Irish support from the babel system]
-%% File `irish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{irish}\captionsirish
-\ifx\l@irish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{irish}
- \adddialect\l@irish0\fi
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-\addto\captionsirish{%
- \def\prefacename{R\'eamhr\'a}% <-- also "Brollach"
- \def\refname{Tagairt\'{\i}}%
- \def\abstractname{Achoimre}%
- \def\bibname{Leabharliosta}%
- \def\chaptername{Caibidil}%
- \def\appendixname{Aguis\'{\i}n}%
- \def\contentsname{Cl\'ar \'Abhair}%
- \def\listfigurename{L\'ear\'aid\'{\i}}%
- \def\listtablename{T\'abla\'{\i}}%
- \def\indexname{Inn\'eacs}%
- \def\figurename{L\'ear\'aid}%
- \def\tablename{T\'abla}%
- \def\partname{Cuid}%
- \def\enclname{faoi iamh}%
- \def\ccname{cc}% abrv. `c\'oip chuig'
- \def\headtoname{Go}%
- \def\pagename{Leathanach}%
- \def\seename{f\'each}%
- \def\alsoname{f\'each freisin}%
- \def\proofname{Cruth\'unas}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }
-\def\dateirish{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or
- Ean\'air\or Feabhra\or M\'arta\or Aibre\'an\or
- Bealtaine\or Meitheamh\or I\'uil\or L\'unasa\or
- Me\'an F\'omhair\or Deireadh F\'omhair\or
- M\'{\i} na Samhna\or M\'{\i} na Nollag\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\addto\extrasirish{}
-\addto\noextrasirish{}
-\ldf@finish{irish}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `irish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty
index 95d5ec26475..22a350213e7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/irish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `irish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 28faf1b8485..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,244 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `italian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% italian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{italian}
- [2008/03/14 v1.2t Italian support from the babel system]
-%% File `italian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%% Claudio Beccari
-%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it
-\LdfInit{italian}{captionsitalian}%
-\ifx\l@italian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Italian}%
- \adddialect\l@italian0\fi
-\addto\captionsitalian{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefazione}%
- \def\refname{Riferimenti bibliografici}%
- \def\abstractname{Sommario}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Capitolo}%
- \def\appendixname{Appendice}%
- \def\contentsname{Indice}%
- \def\listfigurename{Elenco delle figure}%
- \def\listtablename{Elenco delle tabelle}%
- \def\indexname{Indice analitico}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabella}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Allegati}%
- \def\ccname{e~p.~c.}%
- \def\headtoname{Per}%
- \def\pagename{Pag.}% % in Italian the abbreviation is preferred
- \def\seename{vedi}%
- \def\alsoname{vedi anche}%
- \def\proofname{Dimostrazione}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossario}%
- }%
-\def\dateitalian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- gennaio\or febbraio\or marzo\or aprile\or maggio\or giugno\or
- luglio\or agosto\or settembre\or ottobre\or novembre\or
- dicembre\fi\space \number\year}}%
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty
- \clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000\@clubpenalty\clubpenalty}%
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits
- \finalhyphendemerits50000000}%
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \lccode`'=`'}%
-\addto\noextrasitalian{%
- \lccode`'=0}%
-\initiate@active@char{"}%
-\addto\extrasitalian{\bbl@activate{"}\languageshorthands{italian}}%
-\declare@shorthand{italian}{"}{%
-\ifmmode
- \def\it@next{''}%
-\else
- \def\it@next{\futurelet\it@temp\it@cwm}%
-\fi
-\it@next
-}%
-\def\it@@cwm{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}%
-\def\it@@ocap#1{\it@ocap}\def\it@@ccap#1{\it@ccap}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@cwm}{\let\it@@next\relax
-\ifcat\noexpand\it@temp a%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm}%
-\else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp \string|%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@cwm\@gobble}%
- \else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp \string<%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@ocap}%
- \else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp \string>%
- \def\it@@next{\it@@ccap}%
- \else
- \if\noexpand\it@temp\string/%
- \def\it@@next{\slash\@gobble}%
- \else
- \ifx\it@temp"%
- \def\it@@next{``\@gobble}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-\it@@next}%
-\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@unit}[1]{%
- \textormath{\,\mbox{#1}}{\,\mathrm{#1}}}%
- }%
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ap}[1]{%
- \textormath{\textsuperscript{#1}}{^{\mathrm{#1}}}}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand*{\bbl@ped}[1]{%
- \textormath{$_{\mbox{\fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \selectfont#1}}$}{_\mathrm{#1}}}%
-\@ifpackageloaded{units}{}{%
- \addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@save\unit\let\unit\bbl@unit}%
- }%
-\addto\extrasitalian{%
- \babel@save\ap\let\ap\bbl@ap
- \babel@save\ped\let\ped\bbl@ped
- }%
-\def\LtxSymbCaporali{%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{\mbox{%
- \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont(\kern-0.20em(}%
- \ignorespaces}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \mbox{%
- \fontencoding{U}\fontfamily{lasy}\selectfont)\kern-0.20em)}}%
-}%
-\def\CaporaliFrom#1#2#3#4{%
- \DeclareFontEncoding{#1}{}{}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{T1}{%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{T1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ocap}{OT1}{%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#3\ignorespaces}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\it@ccap}{OT1}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi%
- {\fontencoding{#1}\fontfamily{#2}\selectfont\char#4}}}
-\def\get@ae#1#2#3!{\def\bbl@ae{#1#2}}%
-\def\@ifT@one@noCap{\expandafter\get@ae\f@family!%
-\def\bbl@temp{ae}\ifx\bbl@ae\bbl@temp\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else
- \expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi}%
-\newif\if@CBgreekEncKnown
-\IfFileExists{lgrcmr.fd}%
- {\@CBgreekEncKnowntrue}{\@CBgreekEncKnownfalse}
-\newif\if@CyrEncKnown
-\IfFileExists{ot2cmr.fd}%
- {\@CyrEncKnowntrue}{\@CyrEncKnownfalse}%
-\def\CBgreekCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{%
- \IfFileExists{lgrlcmss.fd}{\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}%
- {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- {\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}%
- {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}%
- {\LtxSymbCaporali}}%
- {\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}%
- {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip
- \fi{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont))}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}%
- {{\fontencoding{LGR}\selectfont((}\ignorespaces}}%
- }%
-\def\CyrillicCaporali{\@ifclassloaded{slides}{\relax}%
- {\DeclareFontEncoding{OT2}{}{}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}%
- {\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- {\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char62\relax}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}%
- {{\fontencoding{OT2}\selectfont\char60\relax}\ignorespaces}}}%
-\@onlypreamble{\CBgreekCaporali}\@onlypreamble{\CyrillicCaporali}%
-\def\T@unoCaporali{\DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ocap}{<<\ignorespaces}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand*{\it@ccap}{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi>>}}%
-\ifx\cf@encoding\bbl@t@one
- \@ifT@one@noCap{%
- \if@CBgreekEncKnown
- \CBgreekCaporali
- \else
- \if@CyrEncKnown
- \CyrilicCaporali
- \else
- \LtxSymbCaporali
- \fi
- \fi}%
- {\T@unoCaporali}%
-\else
- \if@CBgreekEncKnown
- \CBgreekCaporali
- \else
- \if@CyrEncKnown
- \CyrilicCaporali
- \else
- \LtxSymbCaporali
- \fi
- \fi
-\fi
-\ldf@finish{italian}%
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `italian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty
index f268e3e5f72..b33f346d483 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/italian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `italian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/kurmanji.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/kurmanji.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 0d9353ed9ae..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/kurmanji.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,164 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `kurmanji.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% kurmanji.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2009 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{kurmanji}
- [2009/06/25 v1.1 Kurmanji support from the babel system]
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2009
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\LdfInit{kurmanji}{captionskurmanji}
-\ifx\undefined\l@kurmanji
- \@nopatterns{Kurmanji}
- \adddialect\l@kurmanji0\fi
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{kurmanji}{<attrib>}{%
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraskurmanji
- \expandafter{\extras<attrib>kurmanji}%
- \let\captionskurmanji\captions<attrib>kurmanji
- }
-\providehyphenmins{kurmanji}{\tw@\tw@}
-\def\captionskurmanji{%
- \def\prefacename{Pe\c{s}gotin}% % Gotina Pe\c{s}\^i
- \def\refname{Pirtuken bijart{\^\i}}%
- \def\abstractname{Kurteb{\^\i}r}% % En\c{c}am
- \def\bibname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya Pirtukan}%
- \def\chaptername{Ser\^e}%
- \def\appendixname{Teb{\^\i}n{\^\i}ya}%
- \def\contentsname{Nav\^erok}% % Navedank
- \def\listfigurename{Hejmara Dimena}%
- \def\listtablename{Hejmara Kevalen}%
- \def\indexname{Endeks}%
- \def\figurename{Dimen\^e}% % Weney\^e
- \def\tablename{Kevala}%
- \def\partname{B\^e\c{s}a}%
- \def\enclname{Dumahik}% % Duvik
- \def\ccname{Belavker}%
- \def\headtoname{Ji bo}% % Ji ... re
- \def\pagename{R\^upel\^e}%
- \def\seename{bin\^era}% % bala xwe bida
- \def\alsoname{le v\^eya ji bin\^era}%
- \def\proofname{Del{\^\i}l}%
- \def\glossaryname{\c{C}avkan{\^\i}ya l\^ekol{\^\i}n\^e}%
-}
-\def\datekurmanji{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or
- \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or
- \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or
- \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi~\number\year}%
- \def\ontoday{\number\day'\^e~\ifcase\month\or
- \januaryname\or \februaryname\or \marchname\or \aprilname\or
- \mayname\or \junename\or \julyname\or \augustname\or
- \septembername\or \octobername\or \novembername\or
- \decembername\or \@ctrerr\fi\^e~\number\year}%
- \def\januaryname{\c{C}ileya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
- \def\februaryname{Sibat}%
- \def\marchname{Adar}%
- \def\aprilname{N\^{\i}san}%
- \def\mayname{Gulan}%
- \def\junename{Hez{\^\i}ran}%
- \def\julyname{T{\^\i}rmeh}%
- \def\augustname{Tebax}%
- \def\septembername{\^Ilon}%
- \def\octobername{\c{C}iriya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
- \def\novembername{\c{C}iriya Pa\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
- \def\decembername{\c{C}ileya P\^e\c{s}{\^\i}n}%
-}
-\def\datekurmanjialternate{%
- \datekurmanji
- \def\januaryname{R\^ebendan}%
- \def\februaryname{Re\c{s}emih}%
- \def\aprilname{Cotan}% % Avr\^el
- \def\junename{P\^u\c{s}per}%
- \def\augustname{Gelav\^ej}%
- \def\septembername{Gelarezan}% % Rezber
- \def\octobername{Kew\c{c}\^er}%
- \def\novembername{Sermawez}%
- \def\decembername{Berfandar}%
-}
-\def\datesymd{%
- \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}%
- }
-\def\datesdmy{%
- \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}%
- }
-\def\dategdmy{%
- \def\today{\number\day.\space\number\month.\space\number\year}%
- }
-\initiate@active@char{^}
-\addto\extraskurmanji{\languageshorthands{kurmanji}}
-\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@activate{^}}
-\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@deactivate{^}}
-\declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^c}{\c{c}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^C}{\c{C}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^e}{\^e\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^E}{\^E\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^i}{{\^\i}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^I}{\^I\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^s}{\c{s}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^S}{\c{S}\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^u}{\^u\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^U}{\^U\allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{kurmanji}{^|}{\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}
-\addto\extraskurmanji{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextraskurmanji{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-
-\ldf@finish{kurmanji}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `kurmanji.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 0ba24cc5c66..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,229 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `latin.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% latin.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1999-2007 Claudio Beccari All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{latin.ldf}
- [2008/07/06 v2.0l Latin support from the babel system]
-%% File `latin.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-%% Claudio Beccari
-%% claudio.beccari at gmail.it
-\LdfInit{latin}{captionslatin}
-\ifx\l@latin\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Latin}
- \adddialect\l@latin0\fi
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{medieval}{%
- \addto\captionslatin{\def\prefacename{Pr{\ae}fatio}}%
- \def\november{Nouembris}%
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin
- \expandafter{\extrasmedievallatin}%
- }
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{latin}{withprosodicmarks}{%
- \expandafter\addto\expandafter\extraslatin
- \expandafter{\extraswithprosodicmarks}%
- }
-\@namedef{captionslatin}{%
- \def\prefacename{Praefatio}%
- \def\refname{Conspectus librorum}%
- \def\abstractname{Summarium}%
- \def\bibname{Conspectus librorum}%
- \def\chaptername{Caput}%
- \def\appendixname{Additamentum}%
- \def\contentsname{Index}%
- \def\listfigurename{Conspectus descriptionum}%
- \def\listtablename{Conspectus tabularum}%
- \def\indexname{Index rerum notabilium}%
- \def\figurename{Descriptio}%
- \def\tablename{Tabula}%
- \def\partname{Pars}%
- \def\enclname{Adduntur}% Or " Additur" ? Or simply Add.?
- \def\ccname{Exemplar}% Use the recipient's dative
- \def\headtoname{\ignorespaces}% Use the recipient's dative
- \def\pagename{Charta}%
- \def\seename{cfr.}%
- \def\alsoname{cfr.}% R.Tabacco never saw "cfr. atque" or similar forms
- \def\proofname{Demonstratio}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossarium}%
- }
-\def\datelatin{%
- \def\november{Novembris}%
- \def\today{%
- {\check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont
- \uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\day}}~\ifcase\month\or
- Ianuarii\or Februarii\or Martii\or Aprilis\or Maii\or Iunii\or
- Iulii\or Augusti\or Septembris\or Octobris\or \november\or
- Decembris\fi
- \space{\uppercase\expandafter{\romannumeral\year}}}}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\addto\extraslatin{%
- \babel@savevariable\clubpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\@clubpenalty
- \babel@savevariable\widowpenalty
- \clubpenalty3000\@clubpenalty3000\widowpenalty3000}
-\addto\extraslatin{%
- \babel@savevariable\finalhyphendemerits
- \finalhyphendemerits50000000}
-\addto\extrasmedievallatin{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\V}%
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\u}%
- \lccode`\V=`\u \uccode`\u=`\V}
-\addto\extrasmedievallatin{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^e6}% T1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^c6}% T1 \AE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^f7}% T1 \oe
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^f7}% T1 \OE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^d7}% T1 \OE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1a}% OT1 \ae
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1d}% OT1 \AE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \oe
- \babel@savevariable{\uccode`\^^1b}% OT1 \OE
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^1e}% OT1 \OE
- \SetLatinLigatures}
-\providecommand\SetLatinLigatures{%
- \def\@tempA{T1}\ifx\@tempA\f@encoding
- \catcode`\^^e6=11 \lccode`\^^e6=`\^^e6 \uccode`\^^e6=`\^^c6 % \ae
- \catcode`\^^c6=11 \lccode`\^^c6=`\^^e6 % \AE
- \catcode`\^^f7=11 \lccode`\^^f7=`\^^f7 \uccode`\^^f7=`\^^d7 % \oe
- \catcode`\^^d7=11 \lccode`\^^d7=`\^^f7 % \OE
- \else
- \catcode`\^^1a=11 \lccode`\^^1a=`\^^1a \uccode`\^^1a=`\^^1d % \ae
- \catcode`\^^1d=11 \lccode`\^^1d=`\^^1a % \AE (^^])
- \catcode`\^^1b=11 \lccode`\^^1b=`\^^1b \uccode`\^^1b=`\^^1e % \oe
- \catcode`\^^1e=11 \lccode`\^^1e=`\^^1b % \OE (^^^)
- \fi
- \let\@tempA\@undefined
- }
-\addto\extraslatin{\def\ProsodicMarksOn{%
- \GenericError{(latin)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}%
- {Latin language error: \string\ProsodicMarksOn\space
- is defined by setting the\MessageBreak
- language attribute to `withprosodicmarks'\MessageBreak
- If you continue you are likely to encounter\MessageBreak
- fatal errors that I can't recover}%
- {See the Latin language description in the babel
- documentation for explanation}{\@ehd}}}
-\addto\extraslatin{\let\ProsodicMarksOff\relax}
-\@tempcnta=\catcode`\=
-\@tempcntb=\catcode`\^
-\catcode`\= \active
-\catcode`\^ \active
-\addto\extraslatin{\languageshorthands{latin}}%
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{^}}%
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@activate{=}}%
-\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{^}}%
-\addto\noextraswithprosodicmarks{\bbl@deactivate{=}}%
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\ProsodicMarks}
-\def\ProsodicMarks{%
- \def\ProsodicMarksOn{\catcode`\^ \active\catcode`\= \active}%
- \def\ProsodicMarksOff{\catcode`\^ 7\catcode`\= 12\relax}%
- \initiate@active@char{^}%
- \initiate@active@char{=}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^a}{%
- \textormath{\u{a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{a}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^e}{%
- \textormath{\u{e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{e}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^i}{%
- \textormath{\u{\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{\imath}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^o}{%
- \textormath{\u{o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{^u}{%
- \textormath{\u{u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\hat{u}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=a}{%
- \textormath{\={a}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{a}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=e}{%
- \textormath{\={e}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{e}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=i}{%
- \textormath{\={\i}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{\imath}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=o}{%
- \textormath{\={o}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{o}}}%
- \declare@shorthand{latin}{=u}{%
- \textormath{\={u}\bbl@allowhyphens}{\bar{u}}}%
-}
-\catcode`\= \@tempcnta
-\catcode`\^ \@tempcntb
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOn\ProsodicMarksOn}
-\addto\extraswithprosodicmarks{\let\LatinMarksOff\ProsodicMarksOff}
-\initiate@active@char{"}%
-\addto\extraslatin{\bbl@activate{"}%
-}
-\declare@shorthand{latin}{"}{%
- \ifmmode
- \def\lt@@next{''}%
- \else
- \def\lt@@next{\futurelet\lt@temp\lt@cwm}%
- \fi
- \lt@@next
-}%
-\def\lt@allowhyphens{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{}\nobreak\hskip\z@skip}
-\newcommand*{\lt@cwm}{\let\lt@n@xt\relax
- \ifcat\noexpand\lt@temp a%
- \let\lt@n@xt\lt@allowhyphens
- \else
- \if\noexpand\lt@temp\string|%
- \def\lt@n@xt{\lt@allowhyphens\@gobble}%
- \fi
- \fi
- \lt@n@xt}%
-\ldf@finish{latin}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `latin.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty
index 2b8c1dba4fb..fcdf667135d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/latin.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `latin')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmr.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index e3a1bb5e28b..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmr.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,73 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrcmr.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmr')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrcmr.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Computer Modern]
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmr}{}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n} {grmn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sl} {grmo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{it} {grmi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{sc} {grmc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ui} {grmu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{li} {grml}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{rs} {gmmn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{m}{ro} {gmmo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sc} {grxc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{n} {grxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{sl} {grxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{it} {grxi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ui} {grxu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{li} {grxl}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{rs} {gmxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{bx}{ro} {gmxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmr}{b}{li} {grbl}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{n}
- {<->ssub*cmr/bx/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmr}{b}{sc}
- {<->ssub*cmr/bx/sc}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrcmr.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmro.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmro.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 5e0d352da4f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmro.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrcmro.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmro')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrcmro.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Computer Modern Outline]
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmro}{}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{n} {gomn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sl} {gomo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{it} {gomi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{sc} {gomc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{m}{ui} {gomu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sc} {goxc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{n} {goxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{sl} {goxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{it} {goxi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmro}{bx}{ui} {goxu}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{n}
- {<->ssub*cmro/bx/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmro}{b}{sc}
- {<->ssub*cmro/bx/sc}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrcmro.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmss.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 1926c007edc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmss.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,66 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrcmss.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmss')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrcmss.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif]
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmss}{}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{n} {gsmn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sl} {gsmo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{sc} {gsmc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{it} {gsmi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{ui} {gsmu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{iv} {gsme}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{m}{uv} {gsma}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{n} {gsxn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sl} {gsxo}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{sc} {gsxc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{it} {gsxi}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{ui} {gsxu}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{iv} {gsxe}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmss}{bx}{uv} {gsxa}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrcmss.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmtt.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 24440bf434e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrcmtt.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,67 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrcmtt.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRcmtt')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrcmtt.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Computer Modern Typewriter]
-\providecommand{\EC@family}[5]{%
- \DeclareFontShape{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}
- {<5><6><7><8><9><10><10.95><12><14.4>%
- <17.28><20.74><24.88><29.86><35.83>genb*#5}{}}
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}% \hyphenchar = -1
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{n} {gttn}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sl} {gtto}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{sc} {gttc}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{it} {gtti}
-\EC@family{LGR}{cmtt}{m}{ui} {gttu}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sl}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sl}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/it}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{sc}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/sc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{cmtt}{bx}{ui}
- {<->ssub*cmtt/m/ui}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrcmtt.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmss.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 427a66f351c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmss.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrlcmss.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlcmss')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmss.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Computer Modern Sans Serif slide sizes]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmss}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{n}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{In}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glin}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glio}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{it}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Iit}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glii}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{ui}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmu}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{n}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{In}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{it}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Iit}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwi}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{sc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glmc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{m}{Isc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glic}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{sc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glxc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmss}{bx}{Isc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glwc}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrlcmss.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmtt.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index b2dbd3ae457..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlcmtt.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,72 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrlcmtt.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlcmtt')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrlcmtt.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Computer Modern Typewriter slide sizes]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lcmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{n}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gltn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{In}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gljn}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{it}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * glto}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Iit}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gljo}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- ssub * lcmtt/m/it}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isl}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- ssub * lcmtt/m/Iit}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{sc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gltc}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lcmtt}{m}{Isc}{%
- <7><8><10><12><13.82><16.59><19.91><23.89><28.66><34.4><41.28>
- genb * gljc}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrlcmtt.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmr.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 14cb1ae47c4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmr.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,133 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrlmr.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmr')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrlmr.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Latin Modern]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmr}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{n}%
- {<-5.5> grmn0500 <5.5-6.5> grmn0600
- <6.5-7.5> grmn0700 <7.5-8.5> grmn0800
- <8.5-9.5> grmn0900 <9.5-11> grmn1000
- <11-15> grmn1200 <15-> grmn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{rs}%
- {<-5.5> gmmn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmmn0600
- <6.5-7.5> gmmn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmmn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gmmn0900 <9.5-11> gmmn1000
- <11-15> gmmn1200 <15-> gmmn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sl}%
- {<-8.5> grmo0800 <8.5-9.5> grmo0900
- <9.5-11> grmo1000 <11-15> grmo1200
- <15-> grmo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ro}%
- {<-8.5> gmmo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmmo0900
- <9.5-11> gmmo1000 <11-15> gmmo1200
- <15-> gmmo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{it}%
- {<-7.5> grmi0700
- <7.5-8.5> grmi0800 <8.5-9.5> grmi0900
- <9.5-11> grmi1000 <11-15> grmi1200
- <15-> grmi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{li}%
- {<-7.5> grml0700
- <7.5-8.5> grml0800 <8.5-9.5> grml0900
- <9.5-11> grml1000 <11-15> grml1200
- <15-> grml1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{ui}%
- {<-7.5> grmu0700
- <7.5-8.5> grmu0800 <8.5-9.5> grmu0900
- <9.5-11> grmu1000 <11-15> grmu1200
- <15-> grmu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> grmc0700
- <7.5-8.5> grmc0800 <8.5-9.5> grmc0900
- <9.5-11> grmc1000 <11-15> grmc1200
- <15-> grmc1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{m}{scsl}%
- {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{}
-%%%%%%%% bold and bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{n}
- {<-5.5> grxn0500 <5.5-6.5> grx0600
- <6.5-7.5> grxn0700 <7.5-8.5> grxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> grxn0900 <9.5-11> grxn1000
- <11-15> grxn1200 <15-> grxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{rs}
- {<-5.5> gmxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gmx0600
- <6.5-7.5> gmxn0700 <7.5-8.5> gmxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gmxn0900 <9.5-11> gmxn1000
- <11-15> gmxn1200 <15-> gmxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{it}
- {<-7.5> grxi0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxi0800 <8.5-9.5> grxi0900
- <9.5-11> grxi1000 <11-15> grxi1200
- <15-> grxi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{b}{li}
- {<-7.5> grbl0700
- <7.5-8.5> grbl0800 <8.5-9.5> grbl0900
- <9.5-11> grbl1000 <11-15> grbl1200
- <15-> grbl1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{li}
- {<-7.5> grxl0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxl0800 <8.5-9.5> grxl0900
- <9.5-11> grxl1000 <11-15> grxl1200
- <15-> grxl1728
- }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ui}
- {<-7.5> grxu0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxu0800 <8.5-9.5> grxu0900
- <9.5-11> grxu1000 <11-15> grxu1200
- <15-> grxu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sl}
- {<-8.5> grxo0800 <8.5-9.5> grxo0900
- <9.5-11> grxo1000 <11-15> grxo1200
- <15-> grxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{ro}
- {<-8.5> gmxo0800 <8.5-9.5> gmxo0900
- <9.5-11> gmxo1000 <11-15> gmxo1200
- <15-> gmxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmr}{bx}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> grxc0700
- <7.5-8.5> grxc0800 <8.5-9.5> grxc0900
- <9.5-11> grxc1000 <11-15> grxc1200
- <15-> grxc1728}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrlmr.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmro.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmro.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index cbfa0c8f97e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmro.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,99 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrlmro.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmro')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrlmro.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Latin Modern Outline]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmro}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{n}%
- {<-5.5> gomn0500 <5.5-6.5> gomn0600
- <6.5-7.5> gomn0700 <7.5-8.5> gomn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gomn0900 <9.5-11> gomn1000
- <11-15> gomn1200 <15-> gmr1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sl}%
- {<-8.5> gomo0800 <8.5-9.5> gomo0900
- <9.5-11> gomo1000 <11-15> gomo1200
- <15-> gomo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{it}%
- {<-7.5> gomi0700
- <7.5-8.5> gomi0800 <8.5-9.5> gomi0900
- <9.5-11> gomi1000 <11-15> gomi1200
- <15-> gomi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{ui}%
- {<-7.5> gomu0700
- <7.5-8.5> gomu0800 <8.5-9.5> gomu0900
- <9.5-11> gomu1000 <11-15> gomu1200
- <15-> gomu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> gomc0700
- <7.5-8.5> gomc0800 <8.5-9.5> gomc0900
- <9.5-11> gomc1000 <11-15> gomc1200
- <15-> gomc1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{m}{scsl}%
- {<-> ssub*lmr/m/sc}{}
-%%%%%%%% bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{n}
- {<-5.5> goxn0500 <5.5-6.5> gox0600
- <6.5-7.5> goxn0700 <7.5-8.5> goxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> goxn0900 <9.5-11> goxn1000
- <11-15> goxn1200 <15-> goxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{it}
- {<-7.5> goxi0700
- <7.5-8.5> goxi0800 <8.5-9.5> goxi0900
- <9.5-11> goxi1000 <11-> goxi1200
- <15-> goxi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{ui}
- {<-7.5> goxu0700
- <7.5-8.5> goxu0800 <8.5-9.5> goxu0900
- <9.5-11> goxu1000 <11-> goxu1200
- <15-> goxu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sl}
- {<-8.5> goxo0800 <8.5-9.5> goxo0900
- <9.5-11> goxo1000 <11-15> goxo1200
- <15-> goxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmro}{bx}{sc}%
- {<-7.5> goxc0700
- <7.5-8.5> goxc0800 <8.5-9.5> goxc0900
- <9.5-11> goxc1000 <11-15> goxc1200
- <15-> goxc1728}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrlmro.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmss.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 45829bcb14d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmss.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,112 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrlmss.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmss')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrlmss.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Latin Modern Sans Serif]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmss}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{n}
- {<-8.5> gsmn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmn0900 <9.5-11> gsmn1000
- <11-15.5> gsmn1200 <15.5-> gsmn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{it}
- {<-8.5> gsmi0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmi0900 <9.5-11> gsmi1000
- <11-15.5> gsmi1200 <15.5-> gsmi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{iv}
- {<-8.5> gsme0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsme0900 <9.5-11> gsme1000
- <11-15.5> gsme1200 <15.5-> gsme1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{ui}
- {<-8.5> gsmu0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmu0900 <9.5-11> gsmu1000
- <11-15.5> gsmu1200 <15.5-> gsmu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{uv}
- {<-8.5> gsma0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsma0900 <9.5-11> gsma1000
- <11-15.5> gsma1200 <15.5-> gsma1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sl}
- {<-8.5> gsmo0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmo0900 <9.5-11> gsmo1000
- <11-15.5> gsmo1200 <15.5-> gsmo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{m}{sc}
- {<-8.5> gsmc0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsmc0900 <9.5-11> gsmc1000
- <11-15.5> gsmc1200 <15.5-> gsmc1728}{}
-%%%%%%%% semibold condensed series substituted with medium series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{n}
-{<-> ssub*lmss/m/n}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{sl}
-{<-> ssub*/lmss/m/sl}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{sbc}{it}
-{<->ssub*lmss/m/sl}{}
-%%%%%%%%% bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{n}
- {<-8.5> gsxn0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxn0900 <9.5-11> gsxn1000
- <11-15.5> gsxn1200 <15.5-> gsxn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sl}
- {<-8.5> gsxo0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxo0900 <9.5-11> gsxo1000
- <11-15.5> gsxo1200 <15.5-> gsxo1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{it}
- {<-8.5> gsxi0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxi0900 <9.5-11> gsxi1000
- <11-15.5> gsxi1200 <15.5-> gsxi1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{iv}
- {<-8.5> gsxe0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxe0900 <9.5-11> gsxe1000
- <11-15.5> gsxe1200 <15.5-> gsxe1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{ui}
- {<-8.5> gsxu0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxu0900 <9.5-11> gsxu1000
- <11-15.5> gsxu1200 <15.5-> gsxu1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{uv}
- {<-8.5> gsxa0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxa0900 <9.5-11> gsxa1000
- <11-15.5> gsxa1200 <15.5-> gsxa1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmss}{bx}{sc}
- {<-8.5> gsxc0800
- <8.5-9.5> gsxc0900 <9.5-11> gsxc1000
- <11-15.5> gsxc1200 <15.5-> gsxc1728}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrlmss.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmtt.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 1571a3aa1f9..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrlmtt.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,63 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lgrlmtt.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `fd,LGRlmtt')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrlmtt.fd}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Latin Modern Typewriter]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LGR}{lmtt}{\hyphenchar\font\m@ne}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{n}
- {<-8.5> gttn0800 <8.5-9.5> gttn0900
- <9.5-11> gttn1000 <11-15> gttn1200
- <15-> gttn1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{it}
- {<-> ssub*lgr/lmtt/m/sl}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sl}
- {<-8.5> gtto0800 <8.5-9.5> gtto0900
- <9.5-11> gtto1000 <11-15> gtto1200
- <15-> gtto1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{sc}
- {<-8.5> gttc0800 <8.5-9.5> gttc0900
- <9.5-11> gttc1000 <11-15> gttc1200
- <15-> gttc1728}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LGR}{lmtt}{m}{scsl}{<-> ssub*lmtt/m/sc}{}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lgrlmtt.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheclas.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheclas.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index dfba8d4fcbd..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheclas.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lheclas.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEclas,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lheclas.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew classic font (by Joel M. Hoffman)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{clas}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{n}
- {<-> s * [0.83345] hclassic }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sc}
- {<->ssub * clas/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{sl}
- {<-> s * [0.69389] hcaption }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{clas}{m}{it}
- {<->ssub * clas/m/sl}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lheclas.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmr.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 9690d512b60..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmr.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,97 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lhecmr.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcmr,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lhecmr.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew default font
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmr}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}
- {<-> jerus10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{it}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sl}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{m}{sc}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{b}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended (Italic) series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{sl}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lhecmr.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmss.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmss.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 6a572714e51..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmss.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lhecmss.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcmss,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lhecmss.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew sans-serif font
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmss}{\hyphenchar\font45}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{n}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sc}
- {<->ssub * cmss/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{it}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{m}{sl}
- {<->ssub * cmss/m/it}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{b}{n}
- {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{sl}
- {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmss}{bx}{it}
- {<->ssub * cmss/bx/n}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lhecmss.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmtt.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmtt.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 1cfb0e3025a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecmtt.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,95 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lhecmtt.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcmtt,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lhecmtt.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew typewriter font
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{cmtt}{\hyphenchar \font\m@ne}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- {<-> telav10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sc}
- {<->ssub * cmtt/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Italicized shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{it}
- {<-> oldjaf10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{m}{sl}
- {<->ssub * cmtt/m/it}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{n}
- {<-> deads10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{cmtt}{bx}{it}
- {<->ssub * cmtt/bx/n}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lhecmtt.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecrml.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecrml.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 619e55dc892..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhecrml.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lhecrml.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEcrml,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lhecrml.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew carmel font (by Dr. Samy Zafrany)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{crml}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{n}
- {<-> crml10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sc}
- {<->ssub * crml/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{sl}
- {<-> crmlsl10 }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{crml}{m}{it}
- {<->ssub * crml/m/sl}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lhecrml.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheenc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheenc.def
deleted file mode 100644
index 0a62af88f2c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheenc.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,113 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lheenc.def',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEenc')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lheenc.def}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- 7-bit Hebrew font encoding
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontEncoding{LHE}{}{}
-\DeclareFontSubstitution{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\DeclareErrorFont{LHE}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LHE}{\textcircled{\@latin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LHE}{\textcircled{\scshape%
- \@latin{r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LHE}{\textsuperscript{\@latin{TM}}}
-\lccode``=``
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebalef}{LHE}{96}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebbet}{LHE}{97}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebgimel}{LHE}{98}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebdalet}{LHE}{99}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhe}{LHE}{100}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebvav}{LHE}{101}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebzayin}{LHE}{102}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebhet}{LHE}{103}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtet}{LHE}{104}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebyod}{LHE}{105}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalkaf}{LHE}{106}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebkaf}{LHE}{107}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\heblamed}{LHE}{108}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalmem}{LHE}{109}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebmem}{LHE}{110}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalnun}{LHE}{111}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebnun}{LHE}{112}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebsamekh}{LHE}{113}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebayin}{LHE}{114}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinalpe}{LHE}{115}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebpe}{LHE}{116}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebfinaltsadi}{LHE}{117}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtsadi}{LHE}{118}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebqof}{LHE}{119}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebresh}{LHE}{120}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebshin}{LHE}{121}
-\DeclareTextSymbol{\hebtav}{LHE}{122}
-\let\hebsin=\hebshin
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lheenc.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhefr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhefr.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 1e1bee281fc..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lhefr.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,101 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lhefr.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEfr,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lhefr.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew frank-ruehl font
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{fr}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{n}
- {<-> fr }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sc}
- {<->ssub * fr/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{sl}
- {<-> frsl }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{m}{it}
- {<->ssub * fr/m/sl}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{n}
- {<-> frbx }{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{b}{n}
- {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{sl}
- {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{fr}{bx}{it}
- {<->ssub * fr/bx/n}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lhefr.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheredis.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheredis.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e5c8cb41ed..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheredis.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lheredis.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEredis,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lheredis.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew redis font (by Prof. Jacques J. Goldberg)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{redis}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{n}{%
- <5> <6> redis7
- <7> <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * redis
- <10.95> redis10
- <14.4> redis12
- <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redis17}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sc}
- {<->ssub * redis/m/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Slanted shape
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{sl}{%
- <5> <6> <7> rediss8
- <8> <9> <10> <12> gen * rediss
- <10.95> rediss10
- <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> rediss12}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{m}{it}
- {<->ssub * redis/m/sl}{}
-%%%%%%% Bold extended series
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{n}{%
- <5> <6> <7> <8> <9> <10> <10.95> <12>
- <14.4> <17.28> <20.74> <24.88> redisb10}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{b}{n}
- {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{sl}
- {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%%%%%%% Font/shape undefined, therefore substituted
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{redis}{bx}{it}
- {<->ssub * redis/bx/n}{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lheredis.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshold.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshold.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index 9e47d3e5d7d..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshold.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lheshold.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEshold,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lheshold.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew shalom old font (by Jonathan Brecher)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shold}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shold}{m}{n}
- {<-> shold10 }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lheshold.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshscr.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshscr.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index aa0ebe5b628..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshscr.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lheshscr.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEshscr,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lheshscr.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew shalom script font (by Jonathan Brecher)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shscr}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shscr}{m}{n}
- {<-> shscr10 }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lheshscr.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshstk.fd b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshstk.fd
deleted file mode 100644
index be2e9a3de71..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lheshstk.fd
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,80 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lheshstk.fd',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.fdd (with options: `LHEshstk,nowarn')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-%% File `hebrew.fdd' for installing the Hebrew encodings and fonts.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{lheshstk.fd}
- [2005/05/20 v1.2c %
- Hebrew shalom stick font (by Jonathan Brecher)
- (test version: still liable to change)]
-\DeclareFontFamily{LHE}{shstk}{}
-\DeclareFontShape{LHE}{shstk}{m}{n}
- {<-> shstk10 }{}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lheshstk.fd'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index ee5c589c14c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,129 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `lsorbian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% lsorbian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{lsorbian}
- [2008/03/17 v1.0g Lower Sorbian support from the babel system]
-%% File `lsorbian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Lower Sorbian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2008
-%% by Eduard Werner
-%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de
-%%
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@lowersorbian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@lsorbian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Lsorbian}
- \adddialect\l@lsorbian\z@
- \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian
- \else
- \let\l@lowersorbian\l@lsorbian
- \fi
-\else
- \let\l@lsorbian\l@lowersorbian
-\fi
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Zawod}%
- \def\refname{Referency}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitl}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodawki}%
- \def\contentsname{Wop\'simje\'se}%
- \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}%
- \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Wobraz}%
- \def\tablename{Tabulka}%
- \def\partname{\'Z\v el}%
- \def\enclname{P\'si\l oga}%
- \def\ccname{CC}%
- \def\headtoname{Komu}%
- \def\pagename{Strona}%
- \def\seename{gl.}%
- \def\alsoname{gl.~teke}%
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or maja\or
- junija\or julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or
- nowembra\or decembra\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- wjelikego ro\v zka\or
- ma\l ego ro\v zka\or
- nal\v etnika\or
- jat\v sownika\or
- ro\v zownika\or
- sma\v znika\or
- pra\v znika\or
- \v znje\'nca\or
- po\v znje\'nca\or
- winowca\or
- nazymnika\or
- godownika\fi \space \number\year}}
-\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `lsorbian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty
index 48f75de8165..b0707008b43 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lsorbian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `lsorbian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/luababel.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/luababel.def
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..ba35d0551bf
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/luababel.def
@@ -0,0 +1,113 @@
+%%
+%% This is file `luababel.def',
+%% generated with the docstrip utility.
+%%
+%% The original source files were:
+%%
+%% bbunicode.dtx (with options: `luatex')
+%% This is a generated file.
+%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
+%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
+%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
+%%
+%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
+%% ---------------------------------------------------------
+%%
+%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
+%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
+%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
+%% The latest version of this license is in
+%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
+%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
+%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
+%%
+%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
+%%
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
+%%
+%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
+%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
+%% such generated files.
+%%
+%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
+%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
+%% information.
+%%
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%% File `bbunicode.dtx'
+%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
+%% Copyright (C) 2103
+%% by Javier Bezos
+\directlua{%
+ require("luatex-hyphen")
+ Babel = {}
+ function Babel.bytes(line)
+ return line:gsub("(.)",
+ function (chr) return unicode.utf8.char(string.byte(chr)) end)
+ end
+ function Babel.begin_process_input()
+ if luatexbase and luatexbase.add_to_callback then
+ luatexbase.add_to_callback('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes,'Babel.bytes')
+ else
+ Babel.callback = callback.find('process_input_buffer')
+ callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.bytes)
+ end
+ end
+ function Babel.end_process_input ()
+ if luatexbase and luatexbase.remove_from_callback then
+ luatexbase.remove_from_callback('process_input_buffer','Babel.bytes')
+ else
+ callback.register('process_input_buffer',Babel.callback)
+ end
+ end
+}
+\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode}
+\let\luabbl@stop\relax
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{encodedcommands}{%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{utf8}\def\bbl@tempb{#1}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\bbl@tempb\else
+ \directlua{Babel.begin_process_input()}%
+ \def\luabbl@stop{%
+ \directlua{Babel.end_process_input()}}%
+ \fi}%
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{stopcommands}{%
+ \luabbl@stop
+ \let\luabbl@stop\relax}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{patterns}{%
+ \ifx\directlua\relax\else
+ \ifcsname lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language\endcsname \else
+ \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}%
+ \directlua{
+ luatexhyphen.loadlanguage('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}',
+ '\the\language')}%
+ \fi
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{adddialect}{%
+ \ifx\directlua\relax\else
+ \directlua{
+ luatexhyphen.adddialect('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}',
+ '\luatexluaescapestring{\string#2}')
+ }%
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{everylanguage}{%
+ \directlua{
+ processnow = (tex.language == 0) or
+ (luatexhyphen.lookupname('\luatexluaescapestring{\string#1}') == nil)}%
+ \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax
+ \global\@namedef{lu@texhyphen@loaded@\the\language}{}%
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadpatterns}{%
+ \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax
+ \input #1\relax
+ \fi}
+\AddBabelHook{luatex}{loadexceptions}{%
+ \ifnum0=\directlua{tex.sprint(processnow and "0" or "1")}\relax
+ \input #1\relax
+ \fi
+ \directlua{processnow = nil}}
+\endinput
+%%
+%% End of file `luababel.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 532d8be5d7f..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,640 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `magyar.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% magyar.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{magyar}
- [2005/03/30 v1.4j Magyar support from the babel system]
-%% File `magyar.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Magyar Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% \'Arp\'ad B\'IR\'O
-%% J\'ozsef B\'ERCES
-\LdfInit{magyar}{caption\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@magyar\@undefined
- \ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Magyar}
- \adddialect\l@magyar0
- \else
- \let\l@magyar\l@hungarian
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\l@hungarian\@undefined
- \let\l@hungarian\l@magyar
-\fi
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{El\H osz\'o}%
- \def\refname{Hivatkoz\'asok}%
- \def\abstractname{Kivonat}%
- \def\bibname{Irodalomjegyz\'ek}%
- \def\chaptername{fejezet}%
- \def\appendixname{F\"uggel\'ek}%
- \def\contentsname{Tartalomjegyz\'ek}%
- \def\listfigurename{\'Abr\'ak jegyz\'eke}%
- \def\listtablename{T\'abl\'azatok jegyz\'eke}%
- \def\indexname{T\'argymutat\'o}%
- \def\figurename{\'abra}%
- \def\tablename{t\'abl\'azat}%
- \def\partname{r\'esz}%
- \def\enclname{Mell\'eklet}%
- \def\ccname{K\"orlev\'el--c\'\i mzettek}%
- \def\headtoname{C\'\i mzett}%
- \def\pagename{oldal}%
- \def\seename{l\'asd}%
- \def\alsoname{l\'asd m\'eg}%
- \def\proofname{Bizony\'\i t\'as}%
- \def\glossaryname{Sz\'ojegyz\'ek}%
- }%
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or
- janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or
- \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or
- j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or
- okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi
- \space\number\day.}}
-\@namedef{ondate\CurrentOption}{%
- \number\year.\nobreakspace\ifcase\month\or
- janu\'ar\or febru\'ar\or m\'arcius\or
- \'aprilis\or m\'ajus\or j\'unius\or
- j\'ulius\or augusztus\or szeptember\or
- okt\'ober\or november\or december\fi
- \space\ifcase\day\or
- 1-j\'en\or 2-\'an\or 3-\'an\or 4-\'en\or 5-\'en\or
- 6-\'an\or 7-\'en\or 8-\'an\or 9-\'en\or 10-\'en\or
- 11-\'en\or 12-\'en\or 13-\'an\or 14-\'en\or 15-\'en\or
- 16-\'an\or 17-\'en\or 18-\'an\or 19-\'en\or 20-\'an\or
- 21-\'en\or 22-\'en\or 23-\'an\or 24-\'en\or 25-\'en\or
- 26-\'an\or 27-\'en\or 28-\'an\or 29-\'en\or 30-\'an\or
- 31-\'en\fi}
- \@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\ontoday
- \csname ondate\CurrentOption\endcsname}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\let\ontoday\@undefined}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\fnum@figure
- \def\fnum@figure{\thefigure.\nobreakspace\figurename}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\fnum@table
- \def\fnum@table{\thetable.\nobreakspace\tablename}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@makecaption
- \def\@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip
- \sbox\@tempboxa{#1. #2}%
- \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
- {#1. #2\csname par\endcsname}
- \else
- \global \@minipagefalse
- \hb@xt@\hsize{\hfil\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
- \fi
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@caption
- \long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
- \csname par\endcsname
- \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}{\ignorespaces #2}}%
- \begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \if@minipage
- \@setminipage
- \fi
- \normalsize
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #3}\csname par\endcsname
- \endgroup}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@seccntformat
- \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@sect
- \def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
- \let\@svsec\@empty
- \else
- \refstepcounter{#1}%
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
- \fi
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup
- #6{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
- \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{%
- #6{\hskip #3\relax
- \@svsec #8.}%
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname.}%
- \fi
- #7}}%
- \fi
- \@xsect{#5}}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@ssect
- \def\@ssect#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \@tempskipa #3\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup
- #4{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #1}%
- \interlinepenalty \@M #5\@@par}%
- \endgroup
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{#4{\hskip #1\relax #5.}}%
- \fi
- \@xsect{#3}}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@begintheorem
- \def\@begintheorem#1#2{\trivlist
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1.}]\itshape}%
- \babel@save\@opargbegintheorem
- \def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{\trivlist
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #2.\ #1\ (#3).}]\itshape}}
-\@ifclassloaded{book}{%
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \fi}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@part
- \def\@part[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart.\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
- \fi
- \markboth{}{}%
- {\centering
- \interlinepenalty \@M
- \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \huge\bfseries \thepart.\nobreakspace\partname
- \csname par\endcsname
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \Huge \bfseries #2\csname par\endcsname}%
- \@endpart}}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@chapter
- \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \refstepcounter{chapter}%
- \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \chaptermark{#1}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@makechapterhead
- \def\@makechapterhead#1{%
- \vspace*{50\p@}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \if@mainmatter
- \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{}
- \csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \fi
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 40\p@
- }}}%
-}{}
-\@ifclassloaded{report}{%
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thechapter. \@chapapp. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \fi}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@chapter
- \def\@chapter[#1]#2{\ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \refstepcounter{chapter}%
- \typeout{\thechapter.\space\@chapapp.}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter.}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \chaptermark{#1}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\@makechapterhead
- \def\@makechapterhead#1{%
- \vspace*{50\p@}%
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \huge\bfseries \thechapter.\nobreakspace\@chapapp{}
- \csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \Huge \bfseries #1\csname par\endcsname\nobreak
- \vskip 40\p@
- }}}%
-}{}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{%
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\thepage\hfil\slshape\leftmark}%
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection.\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\subsectionmark##1{%
- \markright {%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
- \thesubsection.\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}%
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thesection.\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}}%
- \fi}%
-}{}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{%
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\ps@headings}
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname
- \hfil \@date
- \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}%
- \let\@evenhead\@oddhead}
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\slshape\headtoname{:} \ignorespaces\toname
- \hfil \@date
- \hfil \thepage.\nobreakspace\pagename}}
- \fi}%
-}{}
-\def\az{a\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}}
-\def\Az{A\@ifstar{\@az}{\az@}}
-\def\az@#1{\@az{#1}\nobreakspace#1}
-\def\@az#1{%
- \hun@tempadef{relax}{relax}{#1}%
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb}
-\def\hun@tempadef#1#2#3{%
- \begingroup
- \def\@safe@activesfalse{}%
- \def\setbox ##1{}% to get rid of accents and special letters
- \def\hbox ##1{}%
- \def\accent ##1 ##2{##2}%
- \def\add@accent ##1##2{##2}%
- \def\@text@composite@x ##1##2{##2}%
- \def\i{i}\def\j{j}%
- \def\ae{a}\def\AE{A}\def\oe{o}\def\OE{O}%
- \def\ss{s}\def\L{L}%
- \def\d{}\def\b{}\def\c{}\def\t{}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
- \xdef\@tempa{#3}%
- \else
- \xdef\@tempa{\csname #2\endcsname}%
- \fi
- \else
- \xdef\@tempa{\csname #1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- \endgroup}
-\def\aref{\azr}
-\def\Aref{\Azr}
-\def\azr{a\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}}
-\def\Azr{A\@ifstar{\@azr}{\azr@}}
-\def\azr@{\@ifnextchar ({\azr@@@}{\azr@@}}
-\def\azr@@#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace\ref{#1}}
-\def\azr@@@(#1{\@azr{#1}\nobreakspace(\ref{#1}}
-\def\@azr#1{%
- \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty
- \else
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@firstoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb
- \fi
-}
-\def\apageref{\azp}
-\def\Apageref{\Azp}
-\def\azp{a\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}}
-\def\Azp{A\@ifstar{\@azp}{\azp@}}
-\def\azp@#1{\@azp{#1}\nobreakspace\pageref{#1}}
-\def\@azp#1{%
- \hun@tempadef{hun@r@#1}{r@#1}{}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty
- \else
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\expandafter\@secondoftwo\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb
- \fi
-}
-\def\acite{\azc}
-\def\Acite{\Azc}
-\def\azc{a\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}}
-\def\Azc{A\@ifstar{\@azc}{\azc@}}
-\def\azc@{\@ifnextchar [{\azc@@}{\azc@@[]}}
-\def\azc@@[#1]#2{%
- \@azc{#2}\nobreakspace\def\@tempa{#1}%
- \ifx\@tempa\@empty\cite{#2}\else\cite[#1]{#2}\fi}
-\def\@azc#1{\@@azc#1,\hbox!}
-\def\@@azc#1,#2\hbox#3!{%
- \hun@tempadef{hun@b@#1}{b@#1}{}%
- \ifx\@tempa\empty
- \else
- \edef\@tempb{\noexpand\@@az\@tempa\hbox!}%
- \@tempb
- \fi}
-\def\hun@number@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{%
- \ifcat\noexpand#11%
- \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname>47
- \ifnum\expandafter`\csname#1\endcsname<58
- \advance\count@ by \@ne
- \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox#3!{%
- \ifcat\noexpand#1A%
- \advance\count@ by \@ne
- \hun@alph@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!\fi}
-\def\@@az@string#1#2{%
- \ifx#1A%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1E%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1I%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1O%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1U%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \ifx\@tempa\@tempb
- \else
- \count@\z@
- \hun@alph@lehgth#1#2\hbox\hbox!%
- \ifnum\count@=\@ne
- \ifx#1F%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1L%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1M%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1N%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1R%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1S%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1X%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx#1Y%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \fi
- \fi}
-\def\@@az#1#2\hbox#3!{%
- \let\@tempa\@empty
- \def\@tempb{z}%
- \uppercase{%
- \ifx5#1%
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \else\ifx1#1%
- \count@\@ne
- \hun@number@lehgth#2\hbox\hbox!%
- \loop
- \ifnum\count@>\thr@@
- \advance\count@-\thr@@
- \repeat
- \ifnum\count@=\@ne
- \let\@tempa\@tempb
- \fi
- \else
- \@@az@string{#1}{#2}%
- \fi\fi
- }%
- \@tempa}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\refstepcounter
- \def\refstepcounter#1{\stepcounter{#1}%
- \def\@currentlabel{\csname p@#1\endcsname\csname the#1\endcsname}}%
-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \let\old@label\label
- \def\label#1{\@bsphack
- \old@label{#1}%
- \begingroup
- \let\romannumeral\number
- \def\@roman##1{\number ##1}%
- \def\@Roman##1{\number ##1}%
- {\toks0={\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\number}%
- \def\number##1{\the\toks0 ##1}\xdef\tempb@{\thepage}}%
- \edef\@tempa##1{\noexpand\protected@write\@auxout{}%
- {\noexpand\string\noexpand\hunnewlabel
- {##1}{{\@currentlabel}{\tempb@}}}}%
- \@tempa{#1}%
- \endgroup
- \@esphack}%
-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \let\label\old@label
-}
-\def\hunnewlabel#1#2{%
- \def\@tempa{#2}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname r@#1\endcsname\@tempa
- \relax% \message{No need for def: #1}%
- \else
- \global\expandafter\let\csname hun@r@#1\endcsname\@tempa%
- \fi
-}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \if@filesw\immediate\write\@auxout{\catcode096=12}\fi}
-\initiate@active@char{`}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \languageshorthands{magyar}%
- \bbl@activate{`}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{`}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{``}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{c}{cs}}{c}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{C}{CS}}{C}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{d}{dz}}{d}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{D}{DZ}}{D}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{g}{gy}}{g}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{G}{GY}}{G}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{l}{ly}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{L}{LY}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{n}{ny}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{N}{NY}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{s}{sz}}{s}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{S}{SZ}}{S}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{t}{ty}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{T}{TY}}{T}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{z}{zs}}{z}}
-\declare@shorthand{magyar}{`Z}{\textormath{\bbl@disc{Z}{ZS}}{Z}}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `magyar.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty
index 39c641f3d0c..73fd232d227 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/magyar.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `magyar')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty
index 610c736d84a..d1c94a3c242 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/naustrian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `naustrian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 1b42f7d9056..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,162 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `ngermanb.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% ngermanb.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{ngermanb}
- [2008/07/06 v2.6n new German support from the babel system]
-%% File `ngermanb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% new Germanb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Bernd Raichle raichle at azu.Informatik.Uni-Stuttgart.de
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek,
-%% Walter Schmidt.
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\def\bbl@tempa{ngermanb}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \def\CurrentOption{ngerman}
-\fi
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@ngerman\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{ngerman}
- \adddialect\l@ngerman0
-\fi
-\adddialect\l@naustrian\l@ngerman
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Vorwort}%
- \def\refname{Literatur}%
- \def\abstractname{Zusammenfassung}%
- \def\bibname{Literaturverzeichnis}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Anhang}%
- \def\contentsname{Inhaltsverzeichnis}% % oder nur: Inhalt
- \def\listfigurename{Abbildungsverzeichnis}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabellenverzeichnis}%
- \def\indexname{Index}%
- \def\figurename{Abbildung}%
- \def\tablename{Tabelle}% % oder: Tafel
- \def\partname{Teil}%
- \def\enclname{Anlage(n)}% % oder: Beilage(n)
- \def\ccname{Verteiler}% % oder: Kopien an
- \def\headtoname{An}%
- \def\pagename{Seite}%
- \def\seename{siehe}%
- \def\alsoname{siehe auch}%
- \def\proofname{Beweis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossar}%
- }
-\def\month@ngerman{\ifcase\month\or
- Januar\or Februar\or M\"arz\or April\or Mai\or Juni\or
- Juli\or August\or September\or Oktober\or November\or Dezember\fi}
-\def\datengerman{\def\today{\number\day.~\month@ngerman
- \space\number\year}}
-\def\datenaustrian{\def\today{\number\day.~\ifnum1=\month
- J\"anner\else \month@ngerman\fi \space\number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{%
- \languageshorthands{ngerman}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasngerman{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode25}%
- \lccode25=25}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\umlauthigh}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}%
- {\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"s}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"S}{\SS}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"z}{\textormath{\ss}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"Z}{SZ}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{ngerman}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `ngermanb.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty
index 90262dba4a0..ed372645c58 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ngermanb.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `ngermanb')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_oldcode.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/nil.ldf
index cefe013873a..cbcaea124fd 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/hebrew_oldcode.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/nil.ldf
@@ -1,19 +1,14 @@
%%
-%% This is file `hebrew_oldcode.sty',
+%% This is file `nil.ldf',
%% generated with the docstrip utility.
%%
%% The original source files were:
%%
-%% heb209.dtx (with options: `oldcode')
-%%
+%% babel.dtx (with options: `nil')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
+%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
@@ -29,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -42,16 +37,30 @@
%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `heb209.dtx' - obsolete LaTeX 2.09 compatible style files.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2004 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004 by Johannes Braams,
+%% File 'babel.dtx'
+%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package]
+%% Babel package for LaTeX2e.
+%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams,
+%% TeXniek
+%% all rights reserved.
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
-\@obsoletefile{hebrew.sty}{hebrew_oldcode.sty}
-\RequirePackage[si960]{inputenc}
-\RequirePackage[english,hebrew]{babel}
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
+\ProvidesLanguage{nil}
+ [2013/04/15 v3.9e %
+ Nil language]
+\LdfInit{nil}{datenil}
+\ifx\l@nohyphenation\@undefined
+ \@nopatterns{nil}
+ \adddialect\l@nil0
+\else
+ \let\l@nil\l@nohyphenation
+\fi
+\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\m@ne\m@ne}
+\let\captionsnil\@empty
+\let\datenil\@empty
+\ldf@finish{nil}
%%
%% \CharacterTable
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
@@ -70,4 +79,4 @@
%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
\endinput
%%
-%% End of file `hebrew_oldcode.sty'.
+%% End of file `nil.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 6b5ae7ef9f6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,185 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `norsk.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% norsk.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{norsk}
- [2005/03/30 v2.0h Norsk support from the babel system]
-%%File `norsk.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@norsk\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Norsk}
- \adddialect\l@norsk0\fi
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\def\bbl@tempa{norsk}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \def\captionsnorsk{%
- \def\prefacename{Forord}%
- \def\refname{Referanser}%
- \def\abstractname{Sammendrag}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografi}% or Litteraturoversikt
- % or Litteratur or Referanser
- \def\chaptername{Kapittel}%
- \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks
- \def\contentsname{Innhold}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurer}% or Figurliste
- \def\listtablename{Tabeller}% or Tabelliste
- \def\indexname{Register}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabell}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Vedlegg}%
- \def\ccname{Kopi sendt}%
- \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Side}%
- \def\seename{Se}%
- \def\alsoname{Se ogs\aa{}}%
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}%
- }
-\else
- \adddialect\l@nynorsk\l@norsk
- \def\captionsnynorsk{%
- \def\prefacename{Forord}%
- \def\refname{Referansar}%
- \def\abstractname{Samandrag}%
- \def\bibname{Litteratur}% or Litteraturoversyn
- % or Referansar
- \def\chaptername{Kapittel}%
- \def\appendixname{Tillegg}% or Appendiks
- \def\contentsname{Innhald}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurar}% or Figurliste
- \def\listtablename{Tabellar}% or Tabelliste
- \def\indexname{Register}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabell}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Vedlegg}%
- \def\ccname{Kopi til}%
- \def\headtoname{Til}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Side}%
- \def\seename{Sj\aa{}}%
- \def\alsoname{Sj\aa{} \`{o}g}%
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Ordliste}%
- }
-\fi
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or mars\or april\or mai\or juni\or
- juli\or august\or september\or oktober\or november\or desember
- \fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\@namedef{noextras\CurrentOption}{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \languageshorthands{norsk}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"e}{\textormath{\bbl@disc e{\'e}}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"E}{\textormath{\bbl@disc E{\'E}}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"k}{\textormath{\bbl@disc k{kk}}{k}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"K}{\textormath{\bbl@disc K{KK}}{K}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@discff}{f}}
-\def\bbl@discff{\penalty\@M
- \afterassignment\bbl@insertff \let\bbl@nextff= }
-\def\bbl@insertff{%
- \if f\bbl@nextff
- \expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
- {\relax\discretionary{ff-}{f}{ff}\allowhyphens}{f\bbl@nextff}}
-\let\bbl@nextff=f
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"-}{\penalty\@M\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{norsk}{"=}{\penalty\@M-\hskip\z@skip}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `norsk.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty
index 76a81f60762..d201d8a07bb 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/norsk.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `norsk')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def
index 9469b7473a3..e593ec7448e 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/plain.def
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbplain.dtx (with options: `code')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -40,25 +41,12 @@
%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
%% by Johannes Braams
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\ifx\adddialect\@undefined
- \def\@empty{}
- \def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
- \openin0#1.cfg
- \ifeof0
- \closein0
- \else
- \closein0
- {\immediate\write16{*************************************}%
- \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}%
- \immediate\write16{*}%
- }
- \input #1.cfg\relax
- \fi
- \@endofldf
- }
- \let\orig@dump=\dump
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
+\def\@empty{}
+\ifx\orig@dump\@undefined\else
\def\dump{%
\ifx\@ztryfc\@undefined
\else
@@ -71,6 +59,19 @@
\let\dump\orig@dump\let\orig@dump\@undefined\dump}
\expandafter\endinput
\fi
+\def\loadlocalcfg#1{%
+ \openin0#1.cfg
+ \ifeof0
+ \closein0
+ \else
+ \closein0
+ {\immediate\write16{*************************************}%
+ \immediate\write16{* Local config file #1.cfg used}%
+ \immediate\write16{*}%
+ }
+ \input #1.cfg\relax
+ \fi
+ \@endofldf}
\long\def\@firstofone#1{#1}
\long\def\@firstoftwo#1#2{#1}
\long\def\@secondoftwo#1#2{#2}
@@ -90,12 +91,15 @@
\toks@\expandafter{#1#2}%
\xdef#1{\the\toks@}}}
\def\@namedef#1{\expandafter\def\csname #1\endcsname}
+\def\@nameuse#1{\csname #1\endcsname}
\def\@ifundefined#1{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax
\expandafter\@firstoftwo
\else
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
\fi}
+\def\@expandtwoargs#1#2#3{%
+ \edef\reserved@a{\noexpand#1{#2}{#3}}\reserved@a}
\ifx\@preamblecmds\@undefined
\def\@preamblecmds{}
\fi
@@ -119,6 +123,7 @@
\@onlypreamble\AtEndOfPackage
\def\@endofldf{}
\@onlypreamble\@endofldf
+\let\bbl@afterlang\@empty
\ifx\if@filesw\@undefined
\expandafter\let\csname if@filesw\expandafter\endcsname
\csname iffalse\endcsname
@@ -175,16 +180,16 @@
\def\@x@protect#1\fi#2#3{%
\fi\protect#1%
}
-\def\bbl@tmpa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@}
+\def\bbl@tempa{\csname newif\endcsname\ifin@}
\ifx\in@\@undefined
\def\in@#1#2{%
\def\in@@##1#1##2##3\in@@{%
\ifx\in@##2\in@false\else\in@true\fi}%
\in@@#2#1\in@\in@@}
\else
- \let\bbl@tmpa\@empty
+ \let\bbl@tempa\@empty
\fi
-\bbl@tmpa
+\bbl@tempa
\def\@ifpackagewith#1#2#3#4{%
#3}
\def\@ifl@aded#1#2#3#4{}
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index d05c1384dd4..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,228 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `polish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% polish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{polish}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2l Polish support from the babel system]
-%% File `polish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Polish Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Elmar Schalueck, Michael Janich
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{polish}\captionspolish
-\ifx\l@polish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Polish}
- \adddialect\l@polish0\fi
-\addto\captionspolish{%
- \def\prefacename{Przedmowa}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Streszczenie}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Rozdzia\l}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatek}%
- \def\contentsname{Spis tre\'sci}%
- \def\listfigurename{Spis rysunk\'ow}%
- \def\listtablename{Spis tablic}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Rysunek}%
- \def\tablename{Tablica}%
- \def\partname{Cz\eob{}\'s\'c}%
- \def\enclname{Za\l\aob{}cznik}%
- \def\ccname{Kopie:}%
- \def\headtoname{Do}%
- \def\pagename{Strona}%
- \def\seename{Por\'ownaj}%
- \def\alsoname{Por\'ownaj tak\.ze}%
- \def\proofname{Dow\'od}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-\def\datepolish{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- stycznia\or lutego\or marca\or kwietnia\or maja\or czerwca\or lipca\or
- sierpnia\or wrze\'snia\or pa\'zdziernika\or listopada\or grudnia\fi
- \space\number\year}%
-}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extraspolish{\languageshorthands{polish}}
-\addto\extraspolish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextraspolish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\newdimen\pl@left
-\newdimen\pl@down
-\newdimen\pl@right
-\newdimen\pl@temp
-\def\sob#1#2#3#4#5{%parameters: letter and fractions hl,ho,vl,vo
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{$_\mathchar'454$}\setbox2\hbox{p}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \pl@temp=-\pl@down \advance\pl@temp by\dp2 \dp1=\pl@temp
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{OT1}{\sob a{.66}{.20}{0}{.90}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{OT1}{\sob A{.80}{.50}{0}{.90}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{OT1}{\sob e{.50}{.35}{0}{.93}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{OT1}{\sob E{.60}{.35}{0}{.90}}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\aob}{T1}{\k a}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Aob}{T1}{\k A}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\eob}{T1}{\k e}
-\DeclareTextCommand{\Eob}{T1}{\k E}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\aob}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Aob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Aob}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\eob}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\Eob}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}{\Eob}}
-\def\spb#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'023}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \ht1=\pl@down \dp1=-\pl@down
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-\def\skb#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \setbox0\hbox{#1}\setbox1\hbox{\char'056}%
- \pl@right=#2\wd0 \advance\pl@right by-#3\wd1
- \pl@down=#5\ht1 \advance\pl@down by-#4\ht0
- \pl@left=\pl@right \advance\pl@left by\wd1
- \leavevmode
- \kern\pl@right\lower\pl@down\box1\kern-\pl@left #1}
-\def\textpl{%
- \def\lpb{\plll}%
- \def\Lpb{\pLLL}%
- \def\zkb{\.z}%
- \def\Zkb{\.Z}}
-\textpl
-\let\lll=\l \let\LLL=\L
-\def\plll{\lll}
-\def\pLLL{\LLL}
-\def\telepl{%
- \def\lpb{\spb l{.45}{.5}{.4}{.8}}%
- \def\Lpb{\spb L{.23}{.5}{.4}{.8}}%
- \def\zkb{\skb z{.5}{.5}{1.2}{0}}%
- \def\Zkb{\skb Z{.5}{.5}{1.1}{0}}}
-\ifx\selectfont\@undefined
- \ifx\prm\@undefined \addto\rm{\textpl}\else \addto\prm{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\pit\@undefined \addto\it{\textpl}\else \addto\pit{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\pbf\@undefined \addto\bf{\textpl}\else \addto\pbf{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\psl\@undefined \addto\sl{\textpl}\else \addto\psl{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\psf\@undefined \else \addto\psf{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\psc\@undefined \else \addto\psc{\textpl}\fi
- \ifx\ptt\@undefined \addto\tt{\telepl}\else \addto\ptt{\telepl}\fi
-\else
- \expandafter\addto\csname selectfont \endcsname{%
- \csname\f@encoding @pl\endcsname}
-\fi
-\expandafter\let\csname T1@pl\endcsname\textpl
-\expandafter\def\csname OT1@pl\endcsname{%
- \long\edef\curr@family{\f@family}%
- \ifx\curr@family\ttdefault
- \telepl
- \else
- \textpl
- \fi}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"a}{\textormath{\aob}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"A}{\textormath{\Aob}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"c}{\textormath{\'c}{\acute c}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"C}{\textormath{\'C}{\acute C}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"e}{\textormath{\eob}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"E}{\textormath{\Eob}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"l}{\textormath{\lpb}{\ddot l}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"L}{\textormath{\Lpb}{\ddot L}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"n}{\textormath{\'n}{\acute n}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"N}{\textormath{\'N}{\acute N}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"o}{\textormath{\'o}{\acute o}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"O}{\textormath{\'O}{\acute O}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"s}{\textormath{\'s}{\acute s}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"S}{\textormath{\'S}{\acute S}}
-\newcommand*{\polishrz}{%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot r}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot R}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute Z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\dq x}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\dq X}%
- }
-\polishrz
-\newcommand*{\polishzx}{%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"z}{\textormath{\zkb}{\ddot z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"Z}{\textormath{\Zkb}{\ddot Z}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"x}{\textormath{\'z}{\acute x}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"X}{\textormath{\'Z}{\acute X}}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"r}{\dq r}%
- \declare@shorthand{polish}{"R}{\dq R}%
- }
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\mbox{\textquotedblright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{polish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-\ldf@finish{polish}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `polish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty
index 434612354fd..3d63fe60099 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/polish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `polish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 181d7a8923a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,185 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `portuges.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% portuges.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{portuges}
- [2008/03/18 v1.2q Portuguese support from the babel system]
-%% File `portuges.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Portuguese Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{captions\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@portuges\@undefined
- \ifx\l@portuguese\@undefined
- \ifx\l@brazil\@undefined
- \ifx\l@brazilian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Portuguese}
- \adddialect\l@portuges0
- \else
- \let\l@portuges\l@brazilian
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@portuges\l@brazil
- \fi
- \else
- \let\l@portuges\l@portuguese
- \fi
-\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges
-\fi
-\def\bbl@tempa{portuguese}
-\ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \let\bbl@tempb\@empty
-\else
- \def\bbl@tempa{portuges}
- \ifx\CurrentOption\bbl@tempa
- \let\bbl@tempb\@empty
- \else
- \def\bbl@tempb{brazil}
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\bbl@tempb\@empty
- \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}%
- \def\refname{Refer\^encias}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografia}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}%
- \def\contentsname{Conte\'udo}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}%
- \def\indexname{\'Indice}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Anexo}%
- \def\ccname{Com c\'opia a}%
- \def\headtoname{Para}%
- \def\pagename{P\'agina}%
- \def\seename{ver}%
- \def\alsoname{ver tamb\'em}%
- \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}%
- \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}%
- }
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or
- Janeiro\or Fevereiro\or Mar\c{c}o\or Abril\or Maio\or Junho\or
- Julho\or Agosto\or Setembro\or Outubro\or Novembro\or Dezembro%
- \fi
- \space de\space\number\year}}
-\else
- \expandafter
- \adddialect\csname l@\CurrentOption\endcsname\l@portuges
- \@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Pref\'acio}%
- \def\refname{Refer\^encias}%
- \def\abstractname{Resumo}%
- \def\bibname{Refer\^encias Bibliogr\'aficas}%
- \def\chaptername{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \def\appendixname{Ap\^endice}%
- \def\contentsname{Sum\'ario}%
- \def\listfigurename{Lista de Figuras}%
- \def\listtablename{Lista de Tabelas}%
- \def\indexname{\'Indice Remissivo}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Parte}%
- \def\enclname{Anexo}%
- \def\ccname{C\'opia para}%
- \def\headtoname{Para}%
- \def\pagename{P\'agina}%
- \def\seename{veja}%
- \def\alsoname{veja tamb\'em}%
- \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{c}\~ao}%
- \def\glossaryname{Gloss\'ario}%
- }
- \@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day\space de\space\ifcase\month\or
- janeiro\or fevereiro\or mar\c{c}o\or abril\or maio\or junho\or
- julho\or agosto\or setembro\or outubro\or novembro\or dezembro%
- \fi
- \space de\space\number\year}}
-\fi
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{portuges}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasportuges{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{portuges}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\-}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\-{\allowhyphens\discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}}
-\def\ord{$^{\rm o}$}
-\def\orda{$^{\rm a}$}
-\let\ro\ord\let\ra\orda
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `portuges.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty
index aab3ddcd3e9..2aa67457fe8 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/portuges.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `portuges')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/rlbabel.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/rlbabel.def
deleted file mode 100644
index ceb2eb38aef..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/rlbabel.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,812 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `rlbabel.def',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebrew.dtx (with options: `rightleft')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% Hebrew language definition and additional packages.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\ProvidesFile{rlbabel.def}
- [2005/03/30 v2.3h %
- Right-to-Left support from the babel system
- Hebrew language support from the babel system]
-\ifx\TeXXeTstate\undefined\else%
- \TeXXeTstate=1
-\fi
-\ifx\beginL\@undefined%
- \newlinechar`\^^J
- \typeout{^^JTo avoid this error message,^^J%
- run TeX--XeT or e-TeX engine instead of regular TeX.^^J}
- \errmessage{Right-to-Left Support Error: use TeX--XeT or e-TeX
- engine}%
-\fi
-\newif\if@rl
-\AtBeginDocument{% Here we set the main document direction
- \newif\if@rlmain%
- \if@rl% e.g: if the options to babel were [english,hebrew]
- \@rlmaintrue%
- \else% e.g: if the options to babel were [hebrew,english]
- \@rlmainfalse%
- \fi%
-}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\@torl}[1]{%
- \if@rl\else%
- \let\lr@encodingdefault=\encodingdefault%
- \fi%
- \def\@rllanguagename{#1}%
- \def\encodingdefault{\csname#1encoding\endcsname}%
- \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}%
- \selectfont%
- \@rltrue}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\@fromrl}{%
- \if@rl%
- \let\encodingdefault=\lr@encodingdefault%
- \fi%
- \fontencoding{\encodingdefault}%
- \selectfont%
- \@rlfalse}
-\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{%
- \edef\languagename{%
- \ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty
- \else \string#1\@empty\fi}%
- \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}}
-\def\@@selectlanguage#1{%
- \select@language{#1}%
- \if@filesw
- \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{#1}}%
- \if@rl%
- \addtocontents{cot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{fol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{tol}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \else%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{#1}}%
- \fi%
- \fi}
-\let\other@languagename=\languagename
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\setrllanguage}[1]{%
- \if@rl\else%
- \let\other@languagename=\languagename%
- \fi%
- \def\languagename{#1}%
- \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\unsetrllanguage}[1]{%
- \if@rl%
- \let\languagename=\other@languagename%
- \fi
- \@@selectlanguage{\languagename}}
-\let\next=\
-\def\HeblatexRedefineL{%
- \def\L{\protect\pL}%
-}
-\HeblatexRedefineL
-\def\pL{\protect\afterassignment\moreL \let\next= }
-\def\moreL{\bracetext \aftergroup\endL \beginL\csname
- from\@rllanguagename\endcsname}
-\def\R{\protect\pR}
-\def\pR{\protect\afterassignment\moreR \let\next= }
-\def\moreR{\bracetext \aftergroup\endR \beginR\csname
- to\@rllanguagename\endcsname}
-\def\bracetext{\ifcat\next{\else\ifcat\next}\fi
- \errmessage{Missing left brace has been substituted}\fi \bgroup}
-\everydisplay{\if@rl\aftergroup\beginR\fi }
-\def\@ensure@R#1{\if@rl#1\else\R{#1}\fi}
-\def\@ensure@L#1{\if@rl\L{#1}\else#1\fi}
-\def\rl@everypar{\if@rl{\setbox\z@\lastbox\beginR\usebox\z@}\fi}
-\let\o@everypar=\everypar
-\def\everypar#1{\o@everypar{\rl@everypar#1}}
-\newcommand{\hmbox}[1]{\mbox{\R{#1}}}
-\newcommand{\embox}[1]{\mbox{\L{#1}}}
-\def\@brackets#1#2#3{\protect\if@rl #3#2#1\protect\else
- #1#2#3\protect\fi}
-\def\@@number#1{\ifmmode\else\beginL\fi#1\ifmmode\else\endL\fi}
-\def\@@latin#1{\@@number{{\@fromrl#1}}}
-\def\@number{\protect\@@number}
-\def\@latin{\protect\@@latin}
-\let\@@arabic=\@arabic
-\let\@@roman=\@roman
-\let\@@Roman=\@Roman
-\let\@@alph=\@alph
-\let\@@Alph=\@Alph
-\def\@arabic#1{\@number{\@@arabic#1}}
-\def\@roman#1{\@latin{\@@roman#1}}
-\def\@Roman#1{\@latin{\@@Roman#1}}
-\def\arabicnorl#1{\expandafter\@@arabic\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\make@lr#1{\begingroup
- \toks@=\expandafter{#1}%
- \edef\x{\endgroup
- \def\noexpand#1{\noexpand\@number{\the\toks@}}}%
- \x}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{%
- \@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{%
- \make@lr\thesection
- \make@lr\thesubsection
- \make@lr\thesubsubsection
- \make@lr\theparagraph
- \make@lr\thesubparagraph
- \make@lr\thefigure
- \make@lr\thetable
- }
- \make@lr\theequation
-}
-\let\@@TeX\TeX
-\def\TeX{\@latin{\@@TeX}}
-\let\@@LaTeX\LaTeX
-\def\LaTeX{\@latin{\@@LaTeX}}
-\let\@@LaTeXe\LaTeXe
-\def\LaTeXe{\@latin{\@@LaTeXe}}
-\def\list#1#2{%
- \ifnum \@listdepth >5\relax
- \@toodeep
- \else
- \global\advance\@listdepth\@ne
- \fi
- \rightmargin\z@
- \listparindent\z@
- \itemindent\z@
- \csname @list\romannumeral\the\@listdepth\endcsname
- \def\@itemlabel{#1}%
- \let\makelabel\@mklab
- \@nmbrlistfalse
- #2\relax
- \@trivlist
- \parskip\parsep
- \parindent\listparindent
- \advance\linewidth -\rightmargin
- \advance\linewidth -\leftmargin
- \if@rl
- \advance\@totalleftmargin \rightmargin
- \else
- \advance\@totalleftmargin \leftmargin
- \fi
- \parshape \@ne \@totalleftmargin \linewidth
- \ignorespaces}
-\def\labelenumii{\@brackets(\theenumii)}
-\def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\@brackets(\theenumii)}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article
- \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{%
- \section*{\contentsname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}}
- \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{%
- \section*{\listfigurename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}}
- \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{%
- \section*{\listtablename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}}}%
- {% else report or book
- \newcommand\@tableofcontents[1]{%
- \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn%
- \fi\chapter*{\contentsname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\contentsname}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
- \newcommand\@listoffigures[1]{%
- \@restonecolfalse\if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn%
- \fi\chapter*{\listfigurename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listfigurename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}
- \newcommand\@listoftables[1]{%
- \if@twocolumn\@restonecoltrue\onecolumn\else\@restonecolfalse\fi%
- \chapter*{\listtablename\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}%
- {\MakeUppercase\listtablename}}%
- \@starttoc{#1}\if@restonecol\twocolumn\fi}}%
- \newcommand\lrtableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{toc}}%
- \newcommand\lrlistoffigures{\@listoffigures{lof}}%
- \newcommand\lrlistoftables{\@listoftables{lot}}%
- \newcommand\rltableofcontents{\@tableofcontents{cot}}%
- \newcommand\rllistoffigures{\@listoffigures{fol}}%
- \newcommand\rllistoftables{\@listoftables{tol}}%
- \renewcommand\tableofcontents{\if@rl\rltableofcontents%
- \else\lrtableofcontents\fi}
- \renewcommand\listoffigures{\if@rl\rllistoffigures%
- \else\lrlistoffigures\fi}
- \renewcommand\listoftables{\if@rl\rllistoftables%
- \else\lrlistoftables\fi}}}
-\def\@dottedtocline#1#2#3#4#5{%
- \ifnum #1>\c@tocdepth \else
- \vskip \z@ \@plus.2\p@
- {\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi #2\relax
- \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@tocrmarg \parfillskip
- -\if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi
- \parindent #2\relax\@afterindenttrue
- \interlinepenalty\@M
- \leavevmode
- \@tempdima #3\relax
- \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi \@tempdima
- \null\nobreak\hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi
- {#4}\nobreak
- \leaders\hbox{$\m@th
- \mkern \@dotsep mu\hbox{.}\mkern \@dotsep
- mu$}\hfill
- \nobreak
- \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hfil\normalfont \normalcolor \beginL#5\endL}%
- \par}%
- \fi}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
-\renewcommand*\l@part[2]{%
- \ifnum \c@tocdepth >-2\relax
- \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
- \addvspace{2.25em \@plus\p@}%
- \begingroup
- \setlength\@tempdima{3em}%
- \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth
- \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
- {\leavevmode
- \large \bfseries #1\hfil \hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}}\par
- \nobreak
- \global\@nobreaktrue
- \everypar{\global\@nobreakfalse\everypar{}}%
- \endgroup
- \fi}}}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{% article class
- \def\@part[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}%
- \fi
- {\parindent \z@ \raggedright
- \interlinepenalty \@M
- \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \Large\bfseries \partname~\thepart
- \par\nobreak
- \fi
- \huge \bfseries #2%
- \markboth{}{}\par}%
- \nobreak
- \vskip 3ex
- \@afterheading}%
-}{% report and book classes
- \def\@part[#1]#2{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \refstepcounter{part}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{\thepart\hspace{1em}#1}%
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{part}{#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{part}{#1}%
- \fi
- \markboth{}{}%
- {\centering
- \interlinepenalty \@M
- \normalfont
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >-2\relax
- \huge\bfseries \partname~\thepart
- \par
- \vskip 20\p@
- \fi
- \Huge \bfseries #2\par}%
- \@endpart}}
-\def\@sect#1#2#3#4#5#6[#7]#8{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth
- \let\@svsec\@empty
- \else
- \refstepcounter{#1}%
- \protected@edef\@svsec{\@seccntformat{#1}\relax}%
- \fi
- \@tempskipa #5\relax
- \ifdim \@tempskipa>\z@
- \begingroup
- #6{%
- \@hangfrom{\hskip #3\relax\@svsec}%
- \interlinepenalty \@M #8\@@par}%
- \endgroup
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \else
- \def\@svsechd{%
- #6{\hskip #3\relax
- \@svsec #8}%
- \csname #1mark\endcsname{#7}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{#1}{%
- \ifnum #2>\c@secnumdepth \else
- \protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- \fi
- #7}}%
- \fi
- \@xsect{#5}}
-\long\def\@caption#1[#2]#3{%
- \par
- \addcontentsline{\csname ext@#1\endcsname}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #2}}%
- \def\@fignm{figure}
- \ifx#1\@fignm\addcontentsline{fol}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi%
- \def\@tblnm{table}
- \ifx#1\@tblnm\addcontentsline{tol}{#1}%
- {\protect\numberline{\csname the#1\endcsname}%
- {\ignorespaces #2}}\fi%
- \begingroup
- \@parboxrestore
- \if@minipage
- \@setminipage
- \fi
- \normalsize
- \@makecaption{\csname fnum@#1\endcsname}{\ignorespaces #3}\par
- \endgroup}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{%
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{%
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{}{%
- \renewcommand*\l@chapter[2]{%
- \ifnum \c@tocdepth >\m@ne
- \addpenalty{-\@highpenalty}%
- \vskip 1.0em \@plus\p@
- \setlength\@tempdima{1.5em}%
- \begingroup
- \parindent \z@ \if@rl\leftskip\else\rightskip\fi \@pnumwidth
- \parfillskip -\@pnumwidth
- \leavevmode \bfseries
- \advance\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi\@tempdima
- \hskip -\if@rl\rightskip\else\leftskip\fi
- #1\nobreak\hfil \nobreak\hb@xt@\@pnumwidth{\hss#2}\par
- \penalty\@highpenalty
- \endgroup
- \fi}}}}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{%
-\renewcommand*\l@section{\@dottedtocline{1}{1.5em}{2.3em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subsection{\@dottedtocline{2}{3.8em}{3.2em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subsubsection{\@dottedtocline{3}{7.0em}{4.1em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@paragraph{\@dottedtocline{4}{10em}{5em}}
-\renewcommand*\l@subparagraph{\@dottedtocline{5}{12em}{6em}}}{}
-\let\@@outputdblcol\@outputdblcol
-\renewcommand{\@outputdblcol}{%
- \if@rlmain%
- \rl@outputdblcol%
- \else%
- \@@outputdblcol%
- \fi%
-}
-\newcommand{\rl@outputdblcol}{%
- \if@firstcolumn
- \global \@firstcolumnfalse
- \global \setbox\@leftcolumn \box\@outputbox
- \else
- \global \@firstcolumntrue
- \setbox\@outputbox \vbox {\hb@xt@\textwidth {%
- \hskip\columnwidth%
- \hfil\vrule\@width\columnseprule\hfil
- \hb@xt@\columnwidth {%
- \box\@leftcolumn \hss}%
- \hb@xt@\columnwidth {%
- \hskip-\textwidth%
- \box\@outputbox \hss}%
- \hskip\columnsep%
- \hskip\columnwidth}}%
- \@combinedblfloats
- \@outputpage
- \begingroup
- \@dblfloatplacement
- \@startdblcolumn
- \@whilesw\if@fcolmade \fi
- {\@outputpage
- \@startdblcolumn}%
- \endgroup
- \fi}
-\let\@@footnoterule=\footnoterule
-\def\footnoterule{\if@rl\hb@xt@\hsize{\hss\vbox{\@@footnoterule}}%
- \else\@@footnoterule\fi}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{%
- \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\headtoname{}
- \ignorespaces\toname
- \hfil \@date
- \hfil \pagename{} \thepage\protect\if@rl\endR\fi}
- \if@twoside
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}
- \let\@evenhead\@oddhead}
- \else
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}}
- \fi
- \def\headfirst{\protect\if@rl\beginR\fi\fromlocation \hfill %
- \telephonenum\protect\if@rl\endR\fi}
- \def\ps@firstpage{%
- \let\@oddhead\@empty
- \def\@oddfoot{\raisebox{-45\p@}[\z@]{%
- \hb@xt@\textwidth{\hspace*{100\p@}%
- \ifcase \@ptsize\relax
- \normalsize
- \or
- \small
- \or
- \footnotesize
- \fi
- \select@language{\headlanguage}\headfirst}}\hss}}
- \renewcommand{\opening}[1]{%
- \let\headlanguage=\languagename%
- \ifx\@empty\fromaddress%
- \thispagestyle{firstpage}%
- {\raggedleft\@date\par}%
- \else % home address
- \thispagestyle{empty}%
- {\raggedleft
- \if@rl\begin{tabular}{@{\beginR\csname%
- to\@rllanguagename\endcsname}r@{\endR}}\ignorespaces
- \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]%
- \@date \end{tabular}\par%
- \else\begin{tabular}{l}\ignorespaces
- \fromaddress \\*[2\parskip]%
- \@date \end{tabular}\par%
- \fi}%
- \fi
- \vspace{2\parskip}%
- {\raggedright \toname \\ \toaddress \par}%
- \vspace{2\parskip}%
- #1\par\nobreak}
-}
-{% article, report, book
- \def\headeven{\protect\if@rl\beginR\thepage\hfil\rightmark\endR
- \protect\else\thepage\hfil{\slshape\leftmark}
- \protect\fi}
- \def\headodd{\protect\if@rl\beginR\leftmark\hfil\thepage\endR
- \protect\else{\slshape\rightmark}\hfil\thepage
- \protect\fi}
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article
- \if@twoside % two-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}%
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markboth {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\subsectionmark##1{%
- \markright{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\@ne
- \thesubsection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}
- \else % one-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thesection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \thesection\quad
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
- \fi
- \def\ps@myheadings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}%
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \let\sectionmark\@gobble
- \let\subsectionmark\@gobble
- }}{% report and book
- \if@twoside % two-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}{}}%
- \def\sectionmark##1{%
- \markright {\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\z@
- \thesection. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
- \else % one-sided
- \def\ps@headings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}
- \let\@mkboth\markboth
- \def\chaptermark##1{%
- \markboth{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}{\MakeUppercase{%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \@chapapp\ \thechapter. \ %
- \fi
- ##1}}}}
- \fi
- \def\ps@myheadings{%
- \let\@oddfoot\@empty\let\@evenfoot\@empty
- \def\@evenhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headeven}%
- \def\@oddhead{\select@language{\headlanguage}\headodd}%
- \let\@mkboth\@gobbletwo
- \let\chaptermark\@gobble
- \let\sectionmark\@gobble
- }}}
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- %I assume that \@textcolor is only defined by the package color
- \ifx\@textcolor\@undefined\else%
- % If that macro was defined before the beginning of the document,
- % that is: the package was loaded: redefine it with bidi support
- \def\@textcolor#1#2#3{%
- \if@rl%
- \beginL\protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}\beginR#3\endR}\endL%
- \else%
- \protect\leavevmode{\color#1{#2}#3}%
- \fi%
- }%
- \fi%
-}
-\@ifclassloaded{prosper}{%
- \def\thetrueSlideCounter{\arabicnorl{trueSlideCounter}}
-}{}
-\def\raggedright{%
- \let\\\@centercr
- \leftskip\z@skip\rightskip\@flushglue
- \parindent\z@\parfillskip\z@skip}
-\let\@@raggedleft=\raggedleft
-\let\@@raggedright=\raggedright
-\renewcommand\raggedleft{\if@rl\@@raggedright%
- \else\@@raggedleft\fi}
-\renewcommand\raggedright{\if@rl\@@raggedleft%
- \else\@@raggedright\fi}
-\let\@@author=\author
-\renewcommand{\author}[1]{\@@author{\if@rl\beginR #1\endR\else #1\fi}}
-\let\@@MakeUppercase=\MakeUppercase
-\def\MakeUppercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeUppercase{#1}\fi}
-\let\@@MakeLowercase=\MakeLowercase
-\def\MakeLowercase#1{\if@rl#1\else\@@MakeLowercase{#1}\fi}
-\let\@@@underline=\underline
-\def\underline#1{\@@@underline{\if@rl\R{#1}\else #1\fi}}
-\if@compatibility
- \let\undertext=\underline
-\fi
-\def\@xnthm#1#2[#3]{%
- \expandafter\@ifdefinable\csname #1\endcsname
- {\@definecounter{#1}\@addtoreset{#1}{#3}%
- \expandafter\xdef\csname the#1\endcsname{\noexpand\@number
- {\expandafter\noexpand\csname the#3\endcsname \@thmcountersep
- \@thmcounter{#1}}}%
- \global\@namedef{#1}{\@thm{#1}{#2}}%
- \global\@namedef{end#1}{\@endtheorem}}}
-\def\@opargbegintheorem#1#2#3{%
- \trivlist
- \item[\hskip \labelsep{\bfseries #1\ #2\
- \@brackets({#3})}]\itshape}
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{}{%
- % For pretty priniting
- \def\@@chapapp{Chapter}
- \def\@@thechapter{\@@arabic\c@chapter}
- \def\@chapter[#1]#2{%
- \let\headlanguage=\languagename%
- %\set@outputdblcol%
- \ifnum \c@secnumdepth >\m@ne
- \refstepcounter{chapter}%
- \typeout{\@@chapapp\space\@@thechapter.}%
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}
- \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}%
- {\protect\numberline{\thechapter}#1}
- \else
- \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{#1}%
- \addcontentsline{cot}{chapter}{#1}%
- \fi
- \chaptermark{#1}
- \addtocontents{lof}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{fol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \addtocontents{tol}{\protect\addvspace{10\p@}}%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makechapterhead{#2}]%
- \else
- \@makechapterhead{#2}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}
- %
- \def\@schapter#1{%
- \let\headlanguage=\languagename%
- %\set@outputdblcol%
- \if@twocolumn
- \@topnewpage[\@makeschapterhead{#1}]%
- \else
- \@makeschapterhead{#1}%
- \@afterheading
- \fi}}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
- \@ifclassloaded{article}{% article
- \renewcommand\appendix{\par
- \setcounter{section}{0}%
- \setcounter{subsection}{0}%
- \renewcommand\thesection{\@Alph\c@section}}
- }{% report and book
- \renewcommand\appendix{\par
- %\set@outputdblcol%
- \setcounter{chapter}{0}%
- \setcounter{section}{0}%
- \renewcommand\@chapapp{\appendixname}%
- % For pretty priniting
- \def\@@chapapp{Appendix}%
- \def\@@thechapter{\@@Alph\c@chapter}
- \renewcommand\thechapter{\@Alph\c@chapter}}}}}
-\def\@cite#1#2{\@brackets[{#1\if@tempswa , #2\fi}]}
-\def\@biblabel#1{\@brackets[{#1}]}
-\def\@lbibitem[#1]#2{\item[\@biblabel{#1}\hfill]\if@filesw
- {\let\protect\noexpand
- \immediate
- \if@rl\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\R{#1}}}%
- \else\write\@auxout{\string\bibcite{#2}{\L{#1}}}\fi%
- }\fi\ignorespaces}
-\@ifclassloaded{letter}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{slides}{}{% other
-\@ifclassloaded{article}{%
- \renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]
- {\section*{\refname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\refname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\refname}}%
- \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
- \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth
- \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep
- \@openbib@code
- \usecounter{enumiv}%
- \let\p@enumiv\@empty
- \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- \sloppy
- \clubpenalty4000
- \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
- \widowpenalty4000%
- \sfcode`\.\@m}
- {\def\@noitemerr
- {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
- \endlist}}%
-{\renewenvironment{thebibliography}[1]{%
- \chapter*{\bibname\@mkboth%
- {\MakeUppercase\bibname}%
- {\MakeUppercase\bibname}}%
- \list{\@biblabel{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- {\settowidth\labelwidth{\@biblabel{#1}}%
- \if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelwidth
- \advance\if@rl\leftmargin\else\rightmargin\fi\labelsep
- \@openbib@code
- \usecounter{enumiv}%
- \let\p@enumiv\@empty
- \renewcommand\theenumiv{\@arabic\c@enumiv}}%
- \sloppy
- \clubpenalty4000
- \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
- \widowpenalty4000%
- \sfcode`\.\@m}
- {\def\@noitemerr
- {\@latex@warning{Empty `thebibliography' environment}}%
- \endlist}}}}
-\def\@verbatim{%
- \let\do\@makeother \dospecials%
- \obeylines \verbatim@font \@noligs}
-\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
- \vskip\abovecaptionskip%
- \begin{center}%
- #1: #2%
- \end{center} \par%
- \vskip\belowcaptionskip}
-\newcommand{\bpart}[2]{\part{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-\newcommand{\bchapter}[2]{\chapter{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-\newcommand{\bsection}[2]{\section{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-\newcommand{\bsubsection}[2]{\subsection{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-\newcommand{\bsubsubsection}[2]{\subsubsection{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-\newcommand{\bcaption}[2]{%
- \caption[\protect\if@rl \R{#1}\protect\else \L{#2}\protect\fi]{%
- \if@rl\R{#1}\protect\\ \L{#2}
- \else\L{#2}\protect\\ \R{#1}\fi}}
-\newcommand{\bchapternn}[2]{\chapter*{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-\newcommand{\bsectionnn}[2]{\section*{\protect\if@rl%
- #1 \protect\else #2 \protect\fi}}
-\AtEndOfPackage{\rlAtEndOfPackage}
-\def\rlAtEndOfPackage{%
- \global\let\headlanguage=\languagename%\set@outputdblcol%
-}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `rlbabel.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 7e8d24b026e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,105 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `romanian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% romanian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{romanian}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2l Romanian support from the babel system]
-%% File `romanian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Romanian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{romanian}\captionsromanian
-\ifx\l@romanian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Romanian}
- \adddialect\l@romanian0\fi
-\addto\captionsromanian{%
- \def\prefacename{Prefa\c{t}\u{a}}%
- \def\refname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\abstractname{Rezumat}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografie}%
- \def\chaptername{Capitolul}%
- \def\appendixname{Anexa}%
- \def\contentsname{Cuprins}%
- \def\listfigurename{List\u{a} de figuri}%
- \def\listtablename{List\u{a} de tabele}%
- \def\indexname{Glosar}%
- \def\figurename{Figura}% % sau Plan\c{s}a
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Partea}%
- \def\enclname{Anex\u{a}}% % sau Anexe
- \def\ccname{Copie}%
- \def\headtoname{Pentru}%
- \def\pagename{Pagina}%
- \def\seename{Vezi}%
- \def\alsoname{Vezi de asemenea}%
- \def\proofname{Demonstra\c{t}ie} %
- \def\glossaryname{Glosar}%
- }%
-\def\dateromanian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- ianuarie\or februarie\or martie\or aprilie\or mai\or
- iunie\or iulie\or august\or septembrie\or octombrie\or
- noiembrie\or decembrie\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\addto\extrasromanian{}
-\addto\noextrasromanian{}
-\ldf@finish{romanian}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `romanian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty
index eb6609622c7..d2b1e670cc1 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `romanian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanidx.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanidx.sty
deleted file mode 100644
index a6b284f5b41..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/romanidx.sty
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,215 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `romanidx.sty',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% spanish.dtx (with options: `indexes')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `spanish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2011
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Spanish Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2011
-%% Javier Bezos (www.tex-tipografia.com)
-%% and
-%% CervanTeX (www.cervantex.es)
-%% Please report errors to: Javier Bezos (preferably)
-%% www.tex-tipografia.com
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% www.latex-project.org
-
-
-\makeatletter
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\def\spanishindexchars#1#2#3{%
- \edef\es@encap{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#1\endcsname}%
- \edef\es@openrange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#2\endcsname}%
- \edef\es@closerange{`\expandafter\noexpand\csname\string#3\endcsname}}%
- \spanishindexchars{|}{(}{)}%
- \ifx\documentclass\@twoclasseserror
- \edef\es@idxfile{\jobname}%
- \AtEndDocument{%
- \addto\@defaultsubs{%
- \immediate\closeout\@indexfile
- \input{romanidx.sty}}}%
- \expandafter\endinput
- \fi}{}
-
-\newcount\es@converted
-\newcount\es@processed
-
-\def\es@split@file#1.#2\@@{#1}
-\def\es@split@ext#1.#2\@@{#2}
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo que convertir^^J%
- (extension por omision .idx):}}
- {\let\answer\es@idxfile}
-
-\@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
-\ifin@
- \edef\es@input@file{\expandafter\es@split@file\answer\@@}
- \edef\es@input@ext{\expandafter\es@split@ext\answer\@@}
-\else
- \edef\es@input@file{\answer}
- \def\es@input@ext{idx}
-\fi
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\typein[\answer]{^^JArchivo de destino^^J%
- (archivo por omision: \es@input@file.eix,^^J%
- extension por omision .eix):}}
- {\let\answer\es@idxfile}
-\ifx\answer\@empty
- \edef\es@output{\es@input@file.eix}
-\else
- \@expandtwoargs\in@{.}{\answer}
- \ifin@
- \edef\es@output{\answer}
- \else
- \edef\es@output{\answer.eix}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\@ifundefined{es@idxfile}
- {\typein[\answer]{%
- ^^J?Se ha usado algun esquema especial de controles^^J%
- de MakeIndex para encap, open_range o close_range?^^J%
- [s/n] (n por omision)}}
- {\def\answer{n}}
-
-\if s\answer
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'encap'^^J%
- (\string| por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\es@encap{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'open_range'^^J%
- (\string( por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\es@openrange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
- \typein[\answer]{^^JCaracter para 'close_range'^^J%
- (\string) por omision)}
- \ifx\answer\@empty\else
- \edef\es@closerange{%
- `\expandafter\noexpand\csname\expandafter\string\answer\endcsname}
- \fi
-\fi
-
-\newwrite\es@indexfile
-\immediate\openout\es@indexfile=\es@output
-
-\newif\ifes@encapsulated
-
-\def\es@scroman#1{#1}
-\edef\es@slash{\expandafter\@gobble\string\\}
-
-\def\indexentry{%
- \begingroup
- \@sanitize
- \es@indexentry}
-
-\begingroup
-
-\catcode`\|=12 \lccode`\|=\es@encap\relax
-\catcode`\(=12 \lccode`\(=\es@openrange\relax
-\catcode`\)=12 \lccode`\)=\es@closerange\relax
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@indexentry#1{%
- \endgroup
- \advance\es@processed\@ne
- \es@encapsulatedfalse
- \es@bar@idx#1|\@@
- \es@idxentry}%
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@idxentry#1{%
- \in@{\es@scroman}{#1}%
- \ifin@
- \advance\es@converted\@ne
- \immediate\write\es@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\es@b|\ifes@encapsulated\es@p\fi esromanindex%
- {\ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@slash\es@a\fi}}{#1}}%
- \else
- \immediate\write\es@indexfile{%
- \string\indexentry{\es@b\ifes@encapsulated|\es@p\es@a\fi}{#1}}%
- \fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@bar@idx#1|#2\@@{%
- \def\es@b{#1}\def\es@a{#2}%
- \ifx\es@a\@empty\else\es@encapsulatedtrue\es@bar@eat#2\fi}
-}
-
-\lowercase{
-\gdef\es@bar@eat#1#2|{\def\es@p{#1}\def\es@a{#2}%
- \edef\es@t{(}\ifx\es@t\es@p
- \else\edef\es@t{)}\ifx\es@t\es@p
- \else
- \edef\es@a{\es@p\es@a}\let\es@p\@empty%
- \fi\fi}
-}
-
-\endgroup
-
-\input \es@input@file.\es@input@ext
-
-\immediate\closeout\es@indexfile
-
-\typeout{*****************}
-\typeout{Se ha procesado: \es@input@file.\es@input@ext }
-\typeout{Lineas leidas: \the\es@processed}
-\typeout{Lineas convertidas: \the\es@converted}
-\typeout{Resultado en: \es@output}
-\ifnum\es@converted>\z@
- \typeout{Genere el indice a partir de ese archivo}
-\else
- \typeout{No se ha convertido nada. Se puede generar}
- \typeout{el .ind directamente de \es@input@file.\es@input@ext}
-\fi
-\typeout{*****************}
-
-\@ifundefined{es@sdef}{\@@end}{}
-
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `romanidx.sty'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index b18b530f751..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,327 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `russianb.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% russianb.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{russianb}
- [2008/03/21 v1.1r Russian support from the babel system]
-%% File `russianb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Russianb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008
-%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Adapted to the new T2 and X2 Cyrillic encodings
-%% by Vladimir Volovich TeX at vvv.vsu.ru
-%% Werner Lemberg wl at gnu.org
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams dot xs4all dot nl
-\LdfInit{russian}{captionsrussian}
-\ifx\l@russian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Russian}
- \adddialect\l@russian0
-\fi
-\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding
-\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
- \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
- \edef\reserved@c{#2}%
- \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c
- \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c
- \fi}
-\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
- \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{X2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}}
-\cdp@list
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax
- \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}%
- {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak
- You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}%
- \else
- \lowercase
- \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}%
- \fi
-\fi
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\Russian}{%
- \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\russianhyphenmins
- \language\l@russian}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{%
- \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins
- \language\l@english}%
-\let\Rus\Russian
-\let\Eng\English
-\let\cyrillictext\Russian
-\let\cyr\Russian
-\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else
- \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or
- i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or
- q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
- y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or
- I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or
- Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or
- Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A}
-\fi
-\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{%
- \def\reserved@a{LWN}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \def\reserved@a{OT2}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \PackageWarning{babel}%
- {No input encoding specified for Russian language}
- \fi\fi}
-\let\lat\latintext
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext}
-\addto\captionsrussian{%
- \def\prefacename{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyri\cyrs\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyri\cyre}}%
- \def\refname{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
- \ \cyrl\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyrery}}%
- \def\abstractname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrya}}%
- \def\bibname{%
- {\cyr\CYRL\cyri\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRG\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyra}}%
- \def\appendixname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyri\cyrl\cyro\cyrzh\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}%
- \@ifundefined{thechapter}%
- {\def\contentsname{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyro\cyrd\cyre\cyrr\cyrzh\cyra\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}%
- {\def\contentsname{%
- {\cyr\CYRO\cyrg\cyrl\cyra\cyrv\cyrl\cyre\cyrn\cyri\cyre}}}%
- \def\listfigurename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
- \ \cyri\cyrl\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyri\cyrishrt}}%
- \def\listtablename{%
- {\cyr\CYRS\cyrp\cyri\cyrs\cyro\cyrk
- \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc}}%
- \def\indexname{%
- {\cyr\CYRP\cyrr\cyre\cyrd\cyrm\cyre\cyrt\cyrn\cyrery\cyrishrt
- \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\authorname{%
- {\cyr\CYRI\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyro\cyrishrt
- \ \cyru\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt\cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}%
- \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyra}}%
- \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl.}}%
- \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyri\cyrs\cyrh.}}%
- \def\headtoname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrh.}}%
- \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}%
- \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.}}%
- \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrs\cyrm.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyrzh\cyre}}%
- \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrz\cyra\cyrt
- \cyre\cyrl\cyrsftsn\cyrs\cyrt\cyrv\cyro}}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }
-\def\daterussian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- \cyrya\cyrn\cyrv\cyra\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyrf\cyre\cyrv\cyrr\cyra\cyrl\cyrya\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrr\cyrt\cyra\or
- \cyra\cyrp\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrya\or
- \cyrm\cyra\cyrya\or
- \cyri\cyryu\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyri\cyryu\cyrl\cyrya\or
- \cyra\cyrv\cyrg\cyru\cyrs\cyrt\cyra\or
- \cyrs\cyre\cyrn\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyro\cyrk\cyrt\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyrn\cyro\cyrya\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\or
- \cyrd\cyre\cyrk\cyra\cyrb\cyrr\cyrya\fi
- \ \number\year~\cyrg.}}
-\addto\extrasrussian{\cyrillictext}
-\addto\noextrasrussian{\latintext}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasrussian{\languageshorthands{russian}}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasrussian{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\reserved@a{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\reserved@a
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{"-}{%
- \def\russian@sh@tmp{%
- \if\russian@sh@next-\expandafter\russian@sh@emdash
- \else\expandafter\russian@sh@hyphen\fi
- }%
- \futurelet\russian@sh@next\russian@sh@tmp}
-\def\russian@sh@hyphen{%
- \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\def\russian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2}
-\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}%
-\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}%
- \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else
- \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi
- \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}%
-\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}%
-\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode
- \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}%
-\ifx\cyrdash\undefined
- \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}}
-\fi
-\declare@shorthand{russian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}
-\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined
- \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@}
-\fi
-\addto\extrasrussian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasrussian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRZH\or
- \CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or
- \CYRP\or\CYRR\or\CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or
- \CYRC\or\CYRCH\or\CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYREREV\or\CYRYU\or
- \CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrzh\or
- \cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or
- \cyrp\or\cyrr\or\cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or
- \cyrc\or\cyrch\or\cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyrerev\or\cyryu\or
- \cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{%
-\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters}
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding
- \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault
-}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits}
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits}
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits}
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
- \babel@save{\th}%
- \let\ltx@th\th
- \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}%
- {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}%
- }
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits}
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits}
-\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits}
-\def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits}
-\def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits}
-\def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits}
-\def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits}
-\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{%
- \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi}
-\ldf@finish{russian}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `russianb.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty
index 2f00cda724d..22f61e609c7 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/russianb.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `russianb')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index bb6fff6bf60..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,111 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `samin.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% samin.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{samin}
- [2004/02/20 v1.0c North Sami support from the babel system]
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2004
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{samin}{captionssamin}
-\ifx\undefined\l@samin
- \@nopatterns{Samin}
- \adddialect\l@samin0\fi
-\providehyphenmins{samin}{\tw@\tw@}
-\def\captionssamin{%
- \def\prefacename{Ovdas\'atni}%
- \def\refname{\v Cujuhusat}%
- \def\abstractname{\v Coahkk\'aigeassu}%
- \def\bibname{Girjj\'ala\v svuohta}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapihttal}%
- \def\appendixname{\v Cuovus}%
- \def\contentsname{Sisdoallu}%
- \def\listfigurename{Govvosat}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabeallat}%
- \def\indexname{Registtar}%
- \def\figurename{Govus}%
- \def\tablename{Tabealla}%
- \def\partname{Oassi}%
- \def\enclname{Mielddus}%
- \def\ccname{Kopia s\'addejuvvon}%
- \def\headtoname{Vuost\'aiv\'aldi}%
- \def\pagename{Siidu}%
- \def\seename{geah\v ca}%
- \def\alsoname{geah\v ca maidd\'ai}%
- \def\proofname{Duo\dj{}a\v stus}%
- \def\glossaryname{S\'atnelistu}%
-}%
-\def\datesamin{%
- \def\today{\ifcase\month\or
- o\dj{}\dj{}ajagem\'anu\or
- guovvam\'anu\or
- njuk\v cam\'anu\or
- cuo\ng{}om\'anu\or
- miessem\'anu\or
- geassem\'anu\or
- suoidnem\'anu\or
- borgem\'anu\or
- \v cak\v cam\'anu\or
- golggotm\'anu\or
- sk\'abmam\'anu\or
- juovlam\'anu\fi
- \space\number\day.~b.\space\number\year}%
-}%
-\addto\extrassamin{}
-\addto\noextrassamin{}
-\ldf@finish{samin}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `samin.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty
index 3e7648a3b5f..339c1fc89df 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/samin.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `samin')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index cdac51f98cf..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,103 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `scottish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% scottish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{scottish}
- [2005/03/31 v1.0g Scottish support from the babel system]
-%% File `scottish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{scottish}\captionsscottish
-\ifx\l@scottish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{scottish}
- \adddialect\l@scottish0\fi
-\addto\captionsscottish{%
- \def\prefacename{Preface}% <-- needs translation
- \def\refname{Iomraidh}%
- \def\abstractname{Br\`{\i}gh}%
- \def\bibname{Leabhraichean}%
- \def\chaptername{Caibideil}%
- \def\appendixname{Ath-sgr`{\i}obhadh}%
- \def\contentsname{Cl\`ar-obrach}%
- \def\listfigurename{Liosta Dhealbh }%
- \def\listtablename{Liosta Chl\`ar}%
- \def\indexname{Cl\`ar-innse}%
- \def\figurename{Dealbh}%
- \def\tablename{Cl\`ar}%
- \def\partname{Cuid}%
- \def\enclname{a-staigh}%
- \def\ccname{lethbhreac gu}%
- \def\headtoname{gu}%
- \def\pagename{t.d.}% abrv. `taobh duilleag'
- \def\seename{see}% <-- needs translation
- \def\alsoname{see also}% <-- needs translation
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}
-\def\datescottish{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\day\space \ifcase\month\or
- am Faoilteach\or an Gearran\or am M\`art\or an Giblean\or
- an C\`eitean\or an t-\`Og mhios\or an t-Iuchar\or
- L\`unasdal\or an Sultuine\or an D\`amhar\or
- an t-Samhainn\or an Dubhlachd\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\addto\extrasscottish{}
-\addto\noextrasscottish{}
-\ldf@finish{scottish}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `scottish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty
index 8fe2fff5e00..08f8ca2939a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/scottish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `scottish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index cde349e6805..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,140 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `serbian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% serbian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{serbian}
- [2005/03/31 v1.0d Serbocroatian support from the babel system]
-\LdfInit{serbian}\captionsserbian
-\ifx\l@serbian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Serbian}
- \adddialect\l@serbian0\fi
-\addto\captionsserbian{%
- \def\prefacename{Predgovor}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Sa\v{z}etak}%
- \def\bibname{Bibliografija}%
- \def\chaptername{Glava}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatak}%
- \def\contentsname{Sadr\v{z}aj}%
- \def\listfigurename{Slike}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabele}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Slika}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Deo}%
- \def\enclname{Prilozi}%
- \def\ccname{Kopije}%
- \def\headtoname{Prima}%
- \def\pagename{Strana}%
- \def\seename{Vidi}%
- \def\alsoname{Vidi tako\dj e}%
- \def\proofname{Dokaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-\def\dateserbian{%
- \def\today{\number\day .~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or mart\or april\or maj\or
- juni\or juli\or avgust\or septembar\or oktobar\or novembar\or
- decembar\fi \space \number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasserbian{\languageshorthands{serbian}}
-\addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"d}{\textormath{\dj}{\dj}}%%
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"D}{\textormath{\DJ}{\DJ}}%%
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase{}}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft{}}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft{}}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright{}}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{serbian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\ifx\fmtname plain \else
- \let\@aifORI\@afterindentfalse
- \def\bbl@frenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
- \def\bbl@nonfrenchindent{\let\@afterindentfalse\@aifORI
- \@afterindentfalse}
- \addto\extrasserbian{\bbl@frenchindent}
- \addto\noextrasserbian{\bbl@nonfrenchindent}
-\fi
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits} % same as \sinh
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits} % same as \cosh
-\def\th{\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits} % same as \tanh
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits} % same as \coth
-\def\arsh{\mathop{\operator@font arsh}\nolimits}
-\def\arch{\mathop{\operator@font arch}\nolimits}
-\def\arth{\mathop{\operator@font arth}\nolimits}
-\def\arcth{\mathop{\operator@font arcth}\nolimits}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits} % same as \tan
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits} % same as \cot
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits} % same as \arctan
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\mathsf P\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Expect{\mathop{\mathsf E\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\mathsf D\hskip0pt}\nolimits}
-\ldf@finish{serbian}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `serbian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty
index eaca180563f..db6e4afd98d 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/serbian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `serbian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/si960.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/si960.def
deleted file mode 100644
index bdc1a62a807..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/si960.def
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,75 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `si960.def',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% hebinp.dtx (with options: `si960')
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1997-2004 Boris Lavva and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
- \ProvidesFile{si960.def}
- [2004/02/20 v1.1b Hebrew input encoding file]
-%% File `hebinp.dtx' for installing the input hebrew encodings.
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 -- 2005 Boris Lavva.
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005 by Johannes Braams,
-%% TeXniek
-%% All rights reserved.
-\makeatletter
-%% The SI-960 or ``old-code'' encoding only allows characters in the
-%% range 32--127, so we only need to provide an empty |si960.def| file.
-\makeatother
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `si960.def'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 8940617958a..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,520 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `slovak.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% slovak.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{slovak}
- [2008/07/06 v3.1a Slovak support from the babel system]
-%% File `slovak.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Slovak Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2001
-%% by Jana Chlebikova
-%% Copyright (C) 2002-2005
-%% by Tobias Schlemmer
-%% Copyright (C) 2005-2008
-%% by Petr Tesa\v r\'ik (babel at tesarici.cz)
-%% Please report errors to: Petr Tesa\v r\'ik
-%% babel at tesarici.cz
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@slovak\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Slovak}
- \adddialect\l@slovak0\fi
-\def\cs@iltw@{IL2}
-\newif\ifcs@splithyphens
-\cs@splithyphensfalse
-\ifx\@ifpackageloaded\@undefined
- \let\cs@compat@plain\relax
- \message{csplain compatibility mode}
-\else
- \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{}{%
- \let\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \message{cslatex compatibility mode}}
-\fi
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \ProvidesPackage{slovak}[2008/07/06 v3.1a CSTeX Slovak style]
- \DeclareOption{IL2}{\def\encodingdefault{IL2}}
- \DeclareOption {T1}{\def\encodingdefault {T1}}
- \DeclareOption{OT1}{\def\encodingdefault{OT1}}
- \DeclareOption{nosplit}{\cs@splithyphensfalse}
- \DeclareOption{split}{\cs@splithyphenstrue}
- \DeclareOption{nocaptions}{\let\cs@nocaptions=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{olduv}{\let\cs@olduv=\relax}
- \DeclareOption{cstex}{\relax}
- \ExecuteOptions{\cs@iltw@}
- \ProcessOptions
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \input il2enc.def
- \fi
- \def\CurrentOption{slovak}
-\fi
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Predhovor}%
- \def\refname{Literat\'ura}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literat\'ura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitola}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatok}%
- \def\contentsname{Obsah}%
- \def\listfigurename{Zoznam obr\'azkov}%
- \def\listtablename{Zoznam tabuliek}%
- \def\indexname{Register}%
- \def\figurename{Obr.}%
- \def\tablename{Tabu\v{l}ka}%
- \def\partname{\v{C}as\v{t}}%
- \def\enclname{Pr\'{\i}loha}%
- \def\ccname{cc.}%
- \def\headtoname{Pre}%
- \def\pagename{Str.}%
- \def\seename{vi\v{d}}%
- \def\alsoname{vi\v{d} tie\v{z}}%
- \def\proofname{D\^okaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Slovn\'{\i}k}%
- }%
-\@namedef{date\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- janu\'ara\or febru\'ara\or marca\or apr\'{\i}la\or m\'aja\or
- j\'una\or j\'ula\or augusta\or septembra\or okt\'obra\or
- novembra\or decembra\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@frenchspacing
- \languageshorthands{slovak}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\q\let\q\v}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else
- \initiate@active@char{^}
- \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{^}}
- \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{^}}
- \initiate@active@char{"}
- \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{"}\umlautlow}
- \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{"}\umlauthigh}
- \initiate@active@char{'}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \addto\extrasslovak{\bbl@activate{'}}
- \addto\noextrasslovak{\bbl@deactivate{'}}%
- }{}
-\fi
-\begingroup\catcode`\"=12\catcode`\'=12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\sq{'}
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax\else
- \declare@shorthand{system}{^}{\csname normal@char\string^\endcsname}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}\allowhyphens}{\ddot u}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}\allowhyphens}{\ddot U}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}\allowhyphens}{\ddot e}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}\allowhyphens}{\ddot E}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}\allowhyphens}%
- {\ddot\imath}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}\allowhyphens}{\ddot I}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^c}{\textormath{\v{c}\allowhyphens}{\check{c}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^d}{\textormath{\q{d}\allowhyphens}{\check{d}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^l}{\textormath{\q{l}\allowhyphens}{\check{l}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^n}{\textormath{\v{n}\allowhyphens}{\check{n}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^o}{\textormath{\^{o}\allowhyphens}{\hat{o}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^s}{\textormath{\v{s}\allowhyphens}{\check{s}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^t}{\textormath{\q{t}\allowhyphens}{\check{t}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^z}{\textormath{\v{z}\allowhyphens}{\check{z}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^C}{\textormath{\v{C}\allowhyphens}{\check{C}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^D}{\textormath{\v{D}\allowhyphens}{\check{D}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^L}{\textormath{\q{L}\allowhyphens}{\check{L}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^N}{\textormath{\v{N}\allowhyphens}{\check{N}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^O}{\textormath{\^{O}\allowhyphens}{\hat{O}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^S}{\textormath{\v{S}\allowhyphens}{\check{S}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^T}{\textormath{\v{T}\allowhyphens}{\check{T}}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{^Z}{\textormath{\v{Z}\allowhyphens}{\check{Z}}}
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{%
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'a}{\textormath{\'a\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}a}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'e}{\textormath{\'e\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}e}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'i}{\textormath{\'\i{}\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}i}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'l}{\textormath{\'l\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'o}{\textormath{\'o\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}o}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'r}{\textormath{\'r\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}r}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'u}{\textormath{\'u\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}u}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'y}{\textormath{\'y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}y}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'A}{\textormath{\'A\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}A}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'E}{\textormath{\'E\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}E}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'I}{\textormath{\'I\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}I}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'L}{\textormath{\'L\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}l}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'O}{\textormath{\'O\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}O}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'R}{\textormath{\'R\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}R}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'U}{\textormath{\'U\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}U}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{'Y}{\textormath{\'Y\allowhyphens}{^{\prime}Y}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{''}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblright}{\sp\bgroup\prim@s'}}
- }{}
- % \end{macrocode}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\penalty\@M\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"=}{\cs@splithyphen}
-\fi
-\AtBeginDocument{%
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{t}{%
- t\kern-.23em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{d}{%
- d\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{l}{\lcaron{}}
- \DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\v}{OT1}{L}{\Lcaron{}}}
-\def\lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- l\kern-.13em\raise.24ex\hbox{'}\kern-.11em%
- \else
- l\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.35em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-\def\Lcaron{%
- \setbox0\hbox{M}\setbox\tw@\hbox{i}%
- \ifdim\wd0>\wd\tw@\relax
- L\raise.24ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.28em'\hss}%
- \else
- L\raise.45ex\hbox to\z@{\kern-.40em '\hss}%
- \fi}
-\ifx\cs@compat@latex\relax
- \let\cs@ltxprim@s\prim@s
- \def\csprimeson{%
- \catcode``\active \catcode`'\active \let\prim@s\bbl@prim@s}
- \def\csprimesoff{%
- \catcode``12 \catcode`'12 \let\prim@s\cs@ltxprim@s}
- \begingroup\catcode``\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def`{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@openquote}
- \def\cs@openquote{%
- \ifx`\cs@next \expandafter\cs@opendq
- \else \expandafter\clq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \begingroup\catcode`'\active
- \def\x{\endgroup
- \def'{\textormath{\futurelet\cs@next\cs@closequote}
- {^\bgroup\prim@s}}
- \def\cs@closequote{%
- \ifx'\cs@next \expandafter\cs@closedq
- \else \expandafter\crq
- \fi}%
- }\x
- \def\cs@opendq{\clqq\let\cs@next= }
- \def\cs@closedq{\crqq\let\cs@next= }
-\else
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"`}{\clqq}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"'}{\crqq}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{"<}{\flqq}
- \declare@shorthand{slovak}{">}{\frqq}
-\fi
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{OT1}{%
- \set@low@box{\textquotedblright}%
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l\/}\dimen\@ne=\wd\@ne
- \setbox\@ne=\hbox{l}\advance\dimen\@ne-\wd\@ne
- \leavevmode
- \ifdim\dimen\@ne>\z@\kern-.1em\box\z@\kern.1em
- \else\kern.1em\box\z@\kern-.1em\fi\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clqq}{T1}
- {\kern.1em\quotedblbase\kern-.0158em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clqq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern-.07em\textquotedblleft\kern.07em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crqq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\kern.06em\textquotedblleft\kern.024em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crqq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crqq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{OT1}
- {\set@low@box{\textquoteright}\box\z@\kern.04em\allowhyphens}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\clq}{T1}
- {\quotesinglbase\kern-.0428em\relax}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\clq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\clq}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{OT1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\crq}{T1}
- {\save@sf@q{\nobreak\textquoteleft\kern.17em}}
-\ProvideTextCommandDefault{\crq}{\UseTextSymbol{OT1}\crq}
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined\else\let\cs@olduv=\relax\fi
-\ifx\cs@olduv\@undefined
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv[1]{{\leavevmode\clqq#1\crqq}}
-\else
- \DeclareRobustCommand\uv{\bgroup\aftergroup\closequotes
- \leavevmode\clqq\let\cs@next=}
- \def\closequotes{\unskip\crqq\relax}
-\fi
-\newcount\cs@wordlen
-\begingroup\catcode`\-12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@hyphen{-}
- \def\cs@endash{--}
- \def\cs@emdash{---}
- \def\cs@boxhyphen{\hbox{-}}
- \def\cs@splithyphen{\kern\z@
- \discretionary{-}{\char\hyphenchar\the\font}{-}\nobreak\hskip\z@}
-}\x
-\initiate@active@char{-}
-\declare@shorthand{slovak}{-}{%
- \ifx\protect\@typeset@protect
- \ifhmode
- \ifinner
- \bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\bbl@afterelse\cs@firsthyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\bbl@afterelse\cs@hyphen
- \fi
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-\begingroup\catcode`\-\active
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\cs@firsthyphen{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@firsthyph@n}
- \def\cs@firsthyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@secondhyphen
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@checkhyphen
- \fi}
- \def\cs@secondhyphen ##1{%
- \futurelet\cs@token\cs@secondhyph@n}
- \def\cs@secondhyph@n{%
- \ifx -\cs@token
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@emdash\@gobble
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi\cs@endash
- \fi}
-}\x
-\def\cs@checkhyphen{%
- \ifnum\expandafter\hyphenchar\the\font=`\-
- \def\cs@word{}\cs@wordlen\z@
- \bbl@afterelse\cs@scanword
- \else
- \cs@hyphen
- \fi}
-\def\cs@scanword{\let\cs@lasttoken= \cs@token\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@continuescan{\let\cs@lasttoken\@undefined\expandafter\cs@gettoken}
-\def\cs@gettoken{\futurelet\cs@token\cs@gett@ken}
-\def\cs@gett@ken{%
- \ifx\cs@token\cs@lasttoken \def\cs@next{\cs@examinetoken}%
- \else \def\cs@next{\cs@scanword}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-\def\cs@examinetoken{%
- \ifcat A\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifcat 0\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@addparam}%
- \else\ifx\char\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@expandchar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else\ifx\bgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\bgroup}%
- \else\ifx\egroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\egroup}%
- \else\ifx\begingroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\begingroup}%
- \else\ifx\endgroup\cs@token
- \def\cs@next{\cs@ignoretoken\endgroup}%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter\meaning\expandafter\cs@token\string\char\end}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\cs@next}
-\expandafter\def\expandafter\cs@checkchardef
- \expandafter#\expandafter1\string\char#2\end{%
- \def\cs@token{#1}%
- \ifx\cs@token\@empty
- \def\cs@next{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\let\cs@token= }%
- \else
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \fi \cs@next}
-\def\cs@ignoretoken#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \afterassignment\cs@continuescan\let\cs@token= }
-\def\cs@addparam#1{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word#1}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode`#1}}
-\def\cs@expandchar{\afterassignment\cs@examinechar\chardef\cs@token=}
-\def\cs@examinechar{%
- \edef\cs@word{\cs@word\char\the\cs@token\space}%
- \cs@checkcode{\lccode\cs@token}}
-\def\cs@checkcode#1{%
- \ifnum0=#1
- \def\cs@next{\cs@nosplit}%
- \else
- \advance\cs@wordlen\@ne
- \ifnum\righthyphenmin>\the\cs@wordlen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@continuescan}%
- \else
- \cs@splithyphen
- \def\cs@next{\cs@word}%
- \fi
- \fi \cs@next}
-\def\cs@nosplit{\cs@boxhyphen\cs@word}
-\let\minus\cs@hyphen
-
-\def\standardhyphens{\cs@splithyphensfalse\cs@deactivatehyphens}
-\def\splithyphens{\cs@splithyphenstrue\cs@activatehyphens}
-\def\cs@splitattr{\babel@save\ifcs@splithyphens\splithyphens}
-\bbl@declare@ttribute{slovak}{split}{%
- \addto\extrasslovak{\cs@splitattr}}
-\let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
-\let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \def\cs@activatehyphens{\bbl@activate{-}}%
- \def\cs@deactivatehyphens{\bbl@deactivate{-}}%
- \ifcs@splithyphens\cs@activatehyphens\fi}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \cs@deactivatehyphens
- \let\cs@activatehyphens\relax
- \let\cs@deactivatehyphens\relax}
-\let\cs@looseness\looseness
-\def\looseness{%
- \ifcs@splithyphens
- \cs@deactivatehyphens\afterassignment\cs@activatehyphens \fi
- \cs@looseness}
-\ifx\cs@nocaptions\@undefined\else
- \edef\cs@main@language{\CurrentOption}
- \ifx\cs@origselect\@undefined
- \let\cs@origselect=\selectlanguage
- \def\selectlanguage{%
- \let\selectlanguage\cs@origselect
- \ifx\bbl@main@language\cs@main@language
- \expandafter\cs@selectlanguage
- \else
- \expandafter\selectlanguage
- \fi}
- \def\cs@selectlanguage{%
- \cs@tempdisable{captions}%
- \cs@tempdisable{date}%
- \selectlanguage}
- \def\cs@tempdisable#1{%
- \def\@tempa{cs@#1}%
- \def\@tempb{#1\bbl@main@language}%
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter \csname\expandafter \@tempa \expandafter\endcsname
- \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\edef\csname \@tempb \endcsname{%
- \let \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempb \endcsname
- \expandafter\noexpand \csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \let \expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa \endcsname
- \noexpand\@undefined}}
- \@onlypreamble\cs@main@language
- \@onlypreamble\cs@origselect
- \@onlypreamble\cs@selectlanguage
- \@onlypreamble\cs@tempdisable
- \fi
-\fi
-\ifx\cs@compat@plain\@undefined
-\ifx\cs@check@enc\@undefined\else
- \def\cs@check@enc{
- \ifx\encodingdefault\cs@iltw@
- \let\cs@warn\@font@warning \let\@font@warning\@gobble
- \let\cs@info\@font@info \let\@font@info\@gobble
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{normal}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathbf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathit{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{it}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathrm{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmr}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathsf{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmss}{bx}{n}
- \SetMathAlphabet\mathtt{bold}{\cs@iltw@}{cmtt}{m}{n}
- \let\@font@warning\cs@warn \let\cs@warn\@undefined
- \let\@font@info\cs@info \let\cs@info\@undefined
- \fi
- \let\cs@check@enc\@undefined}
- \AtBeginDocument{\cs@check@enc}
-\fi
-\fi
-\def\cs@undoiltw@{%
- \uccode158=208 \lccode158=158 \sfcode158=1000
- \sfcode159=1000
- \uccode165=133 \lccode165=165 \sfcode165=1000
- \uccode169=137 \lccode169=169 \sfcode169=1000
- \uccode171=139 \lccode171=171 \sfcode171=1000
- \uccode174=142 \lccode174=174 \sfcode174=1000
- \uccode181=149
- \uccode185=153
- \uccode187=155
- \uccode190=0 \lccode190=0
- \uccode254=222 \lccode254=254 \sfcode254=1000
- \uccode255=223 \lccode255=255 \sfcode255=1000}
-\ifx\cs@enc@update\@undefined
-\ifx\@@enc@update\@undefined\else
- \let\cs@enc@update\@@enc@update
- \def\@@enc@update{\ifx\cf@encoding\cs@iltw@\cs@undoiltw@\fi
- \cs@enc@update
- \expandafter\ifnum\csname l@\languagename\endcsname=\the\language
- \expandafter\ifx
- \csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\let
- \expandafter\csname
- \expandafter l\expandafter @\expandafter\languagename
- \expandafter\endcsname\csname l@\languagename:\f@encoding\endcsname
- \fi
- \language=\csname l@\languagename\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-\fi\fi
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `slovak.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty
index dadf76e0e85..48928613bcc 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovak.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `slovak')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index b0c44cb2d6e..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,121 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `slovene.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% slovene.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{slovene}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2m Slovene support from the babel system]
-%% File `slovene.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{slovene}\captionsslovene
-\ifx\l@slovene\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Slovene}
- \adddialect\l@slovene0\fi
-\addto\captionsslovene{%
- \def\prefacename{Predgovor}%
- \def\refname{Literatura}%
- \def\abstractname{Povzetek}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Poglavje}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodatek}%
- \def\contentsname{Kazalo}%
- \def\listfigurename{Slike}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabele}%
- \def\indexname{Stvarno kazalo}% used to be Indeks
- \def\figurename{Slika}%
- \def\tablename{Tabela}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Priloge}%
- \def\ccname{Kopije}%
- \def\headtoname{Prejme}%
- \def\pagename{Stran}%
- \def\seename{glej}%
- \def\alsoname{glej tudi}%
- \def\proofname{Dokaz}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-\def\dateslovene{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januar\or februar\or marec\or april\or maj\or junij\or
- julij\or avgust\or september\or oktober\or november\or december\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasslovene{\languageshorthands{slovene}}
-\addto\extrasslovene{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasslovene{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"c}{\textormath{\v c}{\check c}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"s}{\textormath{\v s}{\check s}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"z}{\textormath{\v z}{\check z}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"C}{\textormath{\v C}{\check C}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"S}{\textormath{\v S}{\check S}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"Z}{\textormath{\v Z}{\check Z}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{slovene}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}}{}}
-\ldf@finish{slovene}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `slovene.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty
index 1f4948ae483..9cf43eca4b4 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/slovene.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `slovene')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 73f2493886c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,799 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `spanish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% spanish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2011 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%% File `spanish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2011
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Spanish Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2011
-%% Javier Bezos (www.tex-tipografia.com)
-%% and
-%% CervanTeX (www.cervantex.es)
-%% Please report errors to: Javier Bezos (preferably)
-%% www.tex-tipografia.com
-%% J.L. Braams
-%% www.latex-project.org
-
-
-\ProvidesLanguage{spanish.ldf}
- [2011/10/06 v5.0k Spanish support from the babel system]
-\LdfInit{spanish}\captionsspanish
-
-\edef\es@savedcatcodes{%
- \catcode`\noexpand\~=\the\catcode`\~
- \catcode`\noexpand\"=\the\catcode`\"
- \catcode`\noexpand\:=\the\catcode`\:}
-\catcode`\~=\active
-\catcode`\"=12
-\catcode`\:=12
-
-\ifx\undefined\l@spanish
- \@nopatterns{Spanish}
- \adddialect\l@spanish0
-\fi
-
-\def\es@sdef#1{\babel@save#1\def#1}
-\def\es@sDRC#1{\babel@save#1\DeclareRobustCommand*#1}
-
-\@ifundefined{documentclass}
- {\let\ifes@latex\iffalse}
- {\let\ifes@latex\iftrue}
-\ifes@latex
-
-\@ifundefined{spanishoptions}{}
-{\PassOptionsToPackage{\spanishoptions}{babel}}
-
-\def\es@genoption#1#2#3{%
- \DeclareOption{#1}{}%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{#1}%
- {\def\es@a{#1}%
- \expandafter\let\expandafter\es@b\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname
- \addto\es@b{,#2}%
- \expandafter\let\csname opt@babel.sty\endcsname\es@b
- \AtEndOfPackage{#3}}%
- {}}
-
-\es@genoption{es-minimal}
- {es-ucroman,es-noindentfirst,es-nosectiondot,es-noenumerate,%
- es-noitemize,es-noquoting,es-notilde,es-nodecimaldot}
- {\spanishplainpercent
- \let\es@operators\relax}
-\es@genoption{es-nolists}
- {es-noenumerate,es-noitemize}{}
-\es@genoption{es-sloppy}
- {es-nolayout,es-noshorthands}{}
-\es@genoption{es-noshorthands}
- {es-noquoting,es-nodecimaldot,es-notilde}{}
-\es@genoption{mexico}
- {mexico-com,es-nodecimaldot}{}
-\es@genoption{mexico-com}
- {es-tabla,es-noquoting}
- {\def\lquoti{``}\def\rquoti{''}%
- \def\lquotii{`}\def\rquotii{'}%
- \def\lquotiii{\guillemotleft{}}%
- \def\rquotiii{\guillemotright{}}}
-
-\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{%
- \DeclareOption{es-#1}{}%
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{es-#1}{#2}{#3}}%
-
-\def\es@optlayout#1#2{\es@ifoption{#1}{}{\addto\layoutspanish{#2}}}
-
-\else
-
-\def\es@ifoption#1#2#3{\@namedef{spanish#1}{#2}}
-
-\fi
-
-\let\es@uclc\@secondoftwo
-\es@ifoption{uppernames}{\let\es@uclc\@firstoftwo}{}
-
-\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro}
-\es@ifoption{tabla}{\def\es@tablename{Ttabla}}{}
-\es@ifoption{cuadro}{\def\es@tablename{Ccuadro}}{}
-\def\captionsspanish{%
- \es@a{preface}{Prefacio}%
- \es@a{ref}{Referencias}%
- \es@a{abstract}{Resumen}%
- \es@a{bib}{Bibliograf\'{\i}a}%
- \es@a{chapter}{Cap\'{\i}tulo}%
- \es@a{appendix}{Ap\'{e}ndice}%
- \es@a{listfigure}{\'{I}ndice de \es@uclc Ffiguras}%
- \es@a{listtable}{\'{I}ndice de \expandafter\es@uclc\es@tablename s}%
- \es@a{index}{\'{I}ndice \es@uclc Aalfab\'{e}tico}%
- \es@a{figure}{Figura}%
- \es@a{table}{\expandafter\@firstoftwo\es@tablename}%
- \es@a{part}{Parte}%
- \es@a{encl}{Adjunto}%
- \es@a{cc}{Copia a}%
- \es@a{headto}{A}%
- \es@a{page}{p\'{a}gina}%
- \es@a{see}{v\'{e}ase}%
- \es@a{also}{v\'{e}ase tambi\'{e}n}%
- \es@a{proof}{Demostraci\'{o}n}%
- \es@a{glossary}{Glosario}%
- \@ifundefined{chapter}
- {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice}}%
- {\es@a{contents}{\'Indice \es@uclc Ggeneral}}}
-
-\def\es@a#1{\@namedef{spanish#1name}}
-\captionsspanish
-\def\es@a#1#2{%
- \def\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1name\endcsname
- {\expandafter\noexpand\csname spanish#1name\endcsname}}
-\edef\captionsspanish{\captionsspanish}
-\def\es@month#1{%
- \expandafter#1\ifcase\month\or Eenero\or Ffebrero\or
- Mmarzo\or Aabril\or Mmayo\or Jjunio\or Jjulio\or Aagosto\or
- Sseptiembre\or Ooctubre\or Nnoviembre\or Ddiciembre\fi}
-
-\def\es@today#1{%
- \ifcase\es@datefmt
- \the\day~de \es@month#1%
- \else
- \es@month#1~\the\day
- \fi
- \ de\ifnum\year>1999\es@yearl\fi~\the\year}
-
-\def\datespanish{%
- \def\today{\es@today\@secondoftwo}%
- \def\Today{\es@today\@firstoftwo}}
-\newcount\es@datefmt
-\def\spanishreverseddate{\es@datefmt\@ne}
-\def\spanishdatedel{\def\es@yearl{l}}
-\def\spanishdatede{\let\es@yearl\@empty}
-\spanishdatede
-\def\selectspanish{%
- \def\selectspanish{%
- \def\selectspanish{%
- \PackageWarning{spanish}{Extra \string\selectspanish ignored}}%
- \es@select}}
-\@onlypreamble\selectspanish
-\def\es@select{%
- \let\es@select\@undefined
- \selectlanguage{spanish}}
-
-\let\es@shlist\@empty
-\def\extrasspanish{%
- \textspanish
- \mathspanish
- \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty
- \expandafter\spanishdeactivate\expandafter{\es@shlist}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \else
- \shorthandsspanish
- \fi}
-\def\noextrasspanish{%
- \ifx\textspanish\@empty\else
- \notextspanish
- \fi
- \ifx\mathspanish\@empty\else
- \nomathspanish
- \fi
- \ifx\shorthandsspanish\@empty\else
- \noshorthandsspanish
- \fi
- \csname es@restorelist\endcsname}
-
-\addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\sptext{\es@sptext}}
-
-\def\es@orddot{.}
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@sptext#1{%
- {\es@orddot
- \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.15ex
- \else
- \fontsize\ssf@size\z@
- \selectfont
- \advance\dimen@-1.5ex
- \fi
- \math@fontsfalse\raise\dimen@\hbox{#1}}}
-\else
- \let\sptextfont\rm
- \def\es@sptext#1{%
- {\es@orddot
- \setbox\z@\hbox{8}\dimen@\ht\z@
- \edef\@tempa{\def\noexpand\@tempc{#1}%
- \lowercase{\def\noexpand\@tempb{#1}}}\@tempa
- \ifx\@tempb\@tempc
- \advance\dimen@-0.75ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \else
- \advance\dimen@-0.8ex
- \raise\dimen@\hbox{$\scriptscriptstyle\sptextfont#1$}%
- \fi}}
-\fi
-\ifes@latex
- \addto\textspanish{\es@sDRC\lsc{\es@lsc}}
- \def\es@lsc{\es@xlsc\MakeUppercase\MakeLowercase}
- \def\es@xlsc#1#2#3{%
- \leavevmode
- \hbox{%
- \scshape\selectfont
- \expandafter\ifx\csname\f@encoding/\f@family/\f@series
- /n/\f@size\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname
- \csname S@\f@size\endcsname
- \fontsize\sf@size\z@\selectfont
- \PackageWarning{spanish}{Replacing `\curr@fontshape' by
- \MessageBreak faked small caps}%
- #1{#3}%
- \else
- #2{#3}%
- \fi}}
-\fi
-\newif\ifes@listquot
-
-\ifes@latex
- \csname newtoks\endcsname\es@quottoks
- \csname newcount\endcsname\es@quotdepth
- \newenvironment{quoting}
- {\leavevmode
- \advance\es@quotdepth\@ne
- \csname lquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname%
- \ifnum\es@quotdepth=\@ne
- \es@listquotfalse
- \let\es@quotpar\everypar
- \let\everypar\es@quottoks
- \everypar\expandafter{\the\es@quotpar}%
- \es@quotpar{\the\everypar
- \ifes@listquot\global\es@listquotfalse\else\es@quotcont\fi}%
- \fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\es@quotcont}%
- \edef\es@quotcont{\the\toks@
- \expandafter\noexpand
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname}}
- {\csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname}
- \def\lquoti{\guillemotleft{}}
- \def\rquoti{\guillemotright{}}
- \def\lquotii{``}
- \def\rquotii{''}
- \def\lquotiii{`}
- \def\rquotiii{'}
- \let\es@quotcont\@empty
- \addto\@marginparreset{\let\es@quotcont\@empty}
- \DeclareRobustCommand\es@listquot{%
- \csname rquot\romannumeral\es@quotdepth\endcsname
- \global\es@listquottrue}
-\fi
-\addto\textspanish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\notextspanish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\addto\textspanish{%
- \let\es@save@dot\.%
- \es@sDRC\.{\@ifnextchar.{\es@dots}{\es@save@dot}}}
-\def\es@dots..{\leavevmode\hbox{...}\spacefactor\@M}
-\def\es@sppercent{\unskip\textormath{$\m@th\,$}{\,}}
-\def\spanishplainpercent{\let\es@sppercent\@empty}
-\addto\textspanish{%
- \let\percentsign\%%
- \es@sDRC\%{\es@sppercent\percentsign{}}}
-\addto\mathspanish{\es@sDRC\dotlessi{\es@dotlessi}}
-\let\nomathspanish\relax
-
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@texti{\i}
- \addto\@uclclist{\dotlessi\es@texti}
-\fi
-
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@dotlessi{%
- \ifmmode
- {\ifnum\mathgroup=\m@ne
- \imath
- \else
- \count@\escapechar \escapechar=\m@ne
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
- \split@name\expandafter\string\the\textfont\mathgroup\@nil
- \escapechar=\count@
- \@ifundefined{\f@encoding\string\i}%
- {\edef\f@encoding{\string?}}{}%
- \expandafter\count@\the\csname\f@encoding\string\i\endcsname
- \advance\count@"7000
- \mathchar\count@
- \fi}%
- \else
- \i
- \fi}
-\else
- \def\es@dotlessi{\textormath{\i}{\mathchar"7010}}
-\fi
-
-\def\accentedoperators{%
- \def\es@op@ac##1{\acute{\if i##1\dotlessi\else##1\fi}}}
-\def\unaccentedoperators{%
- \def\es@op@ac##1{##1}}
-\accentedoperators
-\def\spacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\,}
-\def\unspacedoperators{\let\es@op@sp\@empty}
-\spacedoperators
-\addto\mathspanish{\es@operators}
-
-\ifes@latex\else
- \let\operator@font\rm
-\fi
-\def\es@operators{%
- \es@sdef\bmod{\nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip\mkern5mu
- \mathbin{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\penalty900\mkern5mu
- \nonscript\mskip-\medmuskip}%
- \@ifundefined{@amsmath@err}%
- {\es@sdef\pmod##11{\allowbreak\mkern18mu
- ({\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##11)}}%
- {\es@sdef\mod##1{\allowbreak\if@display\mkern18mu
- \else\mkern12mu\fi{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}\,\,##1}%
- \es@sdef\pmod##1{\pod{{\operator@font m\es@op@ac od}%
- \mkern6mu##1}}}%
- \def\es@a##1 {%
- \if^##1^% empty? continue
- \bbl@afterelse
- \es@a
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- {\if&##1% &? finish
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \begingroup
- \let\,\@empty % ignore when def'ing name
- \let\acute\@firstofone % id
- \edef\es@b{\expandafter\noexpand\csname##1\endcsname}%
- \def\,{\noexpand\es@op@sp}%
- \def\acute{\noexpand\es@op@ac}%
- \edef\es@a{\endgroup
- \noexpand\es@sdef\expandafter\noexpand\es@b{%
- \mathop{\noexpand\operator@font##1}\es@c}}%
- \es@a % restores itself
- \es@a
- \fi}%
- \fi}%
- \let\es@b\spanishoperators
- \addto\es@b{ }%
- \let\es@c\@empty
- \expandafter\es@a\es@b l\acute{i}m l\acute{i}m\,sup
- l\acute{i}m\,inf m\acute{a}x \acute{i}nf m\acute{i}n & %
- \def\es@c{\nolimits}%
- \expandafter\es@a\es@b sen tg arc\,sen arc\,cos arc\,tg & }
-\def\spanishoperators{cotg cosec senh tgh }
-\DeclareTextCompositeCommand{\'}{OT1}{i}{\@tabacckludge'{\i}}
-
-\def\es@set@shorthand#1{%
- \expandafter\edef\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname
- {\the\catcode`#1}%
- \initiate@active@char{#1}%
- \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \if.#1\else
- \addto\es@restorelist{\es@restore{#1}}%
- \addto\es@select{\shorthandon{#1}}%
- \addto\shorthandsspanish{\es@activate{#1}}%
- \addto\es@shlist{#1}%
- \fi}
-
-\def\es@use@shorthand{%
- \if@safe@actives
- \bbl@afterelse
- \string
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- {\ifx\thepage\relax
- \bbl@afterelse
- \string
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \es@use@sh
- \fi}%
- \fi}
-
-\def\es@use@sh#1{%
- \ifx\protect\@unexpandable@protect
- \bbl@afterelse
- \noexpand#1%
- \else%
- \bbl@afterfi
- \textormath
- {\csname active@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- {\csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- \fi}
-
-\gdef\es@activate#1{%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \def~{\es@use@shorthand~}}}
-
-\def\spanishdeactivate#1{%
- \@tfor\@tempa:=#1\do{\expandafter\es@spdeactivate\@tempa}}
-
-\def\es@spdeactivate#1{%
- \if.#1%
- \mathcode`\.=\es@period@math\relax
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let~\es@period@code}%
- \else
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \expandafter\let\expandafter~%
- \csname normal@char\string#1\endcsname}%
- \catcode`#1=\csname es@savecat\string#1\endcsname\relax
- \fi}
-\def\es@restore#1{%
- \shorthandon{#1}%
- \begingroup
- \lccode`\~=`#1
- \lowercase{%
- \endgroup
- \bbl@deactivate{~}}}
-\def\es@declare#1{%
- \@ifundefined{es@savecat\expandafter\string\@firstoftwo#1}%
- {\@gobble}%
- {\declare@shorthand{spanish}{#1}}}
-\def\es@declarealt#1#2#3{%
- \es@declare{#1}{#3}%
- \es@declare{#2}{#3}}
-
-\ifes@latex\else
- \def\@tabacckludge#1{\csname\string#1\endcsname}
-\fi
-
-\@ifundefined{add@accent}{\def\add@accent#1#2{\accent#1 #2}}{}
-\ifes@latex
- \def\es@accent#1#2#3{%
- \expandafter\@text@composite
- \csname OT1\string#1\endcsname#3\@empty\@text@composite
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \setbox\@tempboxa\hbox{#3%
- \global\mathchardef\accent@spacefactor\spacefactor}%
- \spacefactor\accent@spacefactor}}
-\else
- \def\es@accent#1#2#3{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{#2}{#3}\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#3 }
-\fi
-
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{\languageshorthands{spanish}}%
-\es@ifoption{noshorthands}{}{\es@set@shorthand{"}}
-\def\es@umlaut#1{%
- \bbl@allowhyphens\add@accent{127}#1\bbl@allowhyphens
- \spacefactor\sfcode`#1 }
-
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \babel@save\bbl@umlauta
- \let\bbl@umlauta\es@umlaut}
-\let\noshorthandsspanish\relax
-
-\ifes@latex
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\~\endcsname{\es@accent\~{126}}%
- \expandafter\es@sdef\csname OT1\string\'\endcsname{\es@accent\'{19}}}
-\else
-\addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \es@sdef\~{\es@accent\~{126}}%
- \es@sdef\'#1{\if#1i\es@accent\'{19}\i\else\es@accent\'{19}{#1}\fi}}
-\fi
-
-\def\es@sptext@r#1#2{\es@sptext{#1#2}}
-\es@declare{"a}{\sptext{a}}
-\es@declare{"A}{\sptext{A}}
-\es@declare{"o}{\sptext{o}}
-\es@declare{"O}{\sptext{O}}
-\es@declare{"e}{\protect\es@sptext@r{e}}
-\es@declare{"E}{\protect\es@sptext@r{E}}
-\es@declare{"u}{\"u}
-\es@declare{"U}{\"U}
-\es@declare{"i}{\"{\i}}
-\es@declare{"I}{\"I}
-\es@declare{"c}{\c{c}}
-\es@declare{"C}{\c{C}}
-\es@declare{"<}{\guillemotleft{}}
-\es@declare{">}{\guillemotright{}}
-\def\es@chf{\char\hyphenchar\font}
-\es@declare{"-}{\bbl@allowhyphens\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"=}{\bbl@allowhyphens\es@chf\hskip\z@skip}
-\es@declare{"~}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{\es@chf}{\es@chf}{\es@chf}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"r}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{r}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"R}
- {\bbl@allowhyphens
- \discretionary{\es@chf}{}{R}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}
-\es@declare{"y}
- {\@ifundefined{scalebox}%
- {\ensuremath{\tau}}%
- {\raisebox{1ex}{\scalebox{-1}{\resizebox{.45em}{1ex}{2}}}}}
-\es@declare{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\es@declare{"/}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{/}%
- \dimen@\ht\z@
- \advance\dimen@-1ex
- \advance\dimen@\dp\z@
- \dimen@.31\dimen@
- \advance\dimen@-\dp\z@
- \ifdim\dimen@>0pt
- \kern.01em\lower\dimen@\box\z@\kern.03em
- \else
- \box\z@
- \fi}
-\es@declare{"?}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{?`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-\es@declare{"!}
- {\setbox\z@\hbox{!`}%
- \leavevmode\raise\dp\z@\box\z@}
-
-\def\spanishdecimal#1{\def\es@decimal{{#1}}}
-\def\decimalcomma{\spanishdecimal{,}}
-\def\decimalpoint{\spanishdecimal{.}}
-\decimalcomma
-\es@ifoption{nodecimaldot}{}
- {\AtBeginDocument{\bgroup\@fileswfalse}%
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup
- \let\es@period@code~%
- \es@set@shorthand{.}%
- \let~\es@period@code}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\egroup}%
- \@namedef{normal@char\string.}{%
- \@ifnextchar\egroup
- {\es@period@code}%
- {\csname active@char\string.\endcsname}}%
- \declare@shorthand{system}{.}{\es@period@code}%
- \addto\shorthandsspanish{%
- \babel@savevariable{\mathcode`\.}%
- \edef\es@period@math{\the\mathcode`\.}%
- \babel@save\es@period@code
- \ifnum\es@period@math="8000
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\let\es@period@code~}%
- \else
- \mathchardef\es@period@code\es@period@math\relax
- \mathcode`\.="8000 %
- \fi
- \begingroup\lccode`\~=`\.\lowercase{\endgroup\babel@save~}%
- \es@activate{.}}%
- \def\es@a#1{\es@declare{.#1}{\es@decimal#1}}%
- \es@a1\es@a2\es@a3\es@a4\es@a5\es@a6\es@a7\es@a8\es@a9\es@a0}
-
-\es@ifoption{notilde}{}{\es@set@shorthand{~}}
-\def\deactivatetilden{%
- \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@n@\endcsname\relax
- \expandafter\let\csname spanish@sh@\string~@N@\endcsname\relax}
-\es@ifoption{tilden}
- {\es@declare{~n}{\~n}%
- \es@declare{~N}{\~N}}
- {\let\deactivatetilden\relax}
-\es@declarealt{~-}{"+}{%
- \leavevmode
- \bgroup
- \let\@sptoken\es@dashes % Changes \@ifnextchar behaviour
- \@ifnextchar-%
- {\es@dashes}%
- {\hbox{\es@chf}\egroup}}
-\def\es@dashes-{%
- \@ifnextchar-%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{---}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup\@gobble}%
- {\bbl@allowhyphens\hbox{--}\bbl@allowhyphens\egroup}}
-
-\es@ifoption{noquoting}%
- {\let\es@quoting\relax
- \let\activatequoting\relax
- \let\deactivatequoting\relax}
- {\@ifundefined{XML@catcodes}%
- {\es@set@shorthand{<}%
- \es@set@shorthand{>}%
- \declare@shorthand{system}{<}{\csname normal@char\string<\endcsname}%
- \declare@shorthand{system}{>}{\csname normal@char\string>\endcsname}%
- \addto\es@restorelist{\es@quoting}%
- \addto\es@select{\es@quoting}%
- \ifes@latex
- \AtBeginDocument{%
- \es@quoting
- \if@filesw
- \immediate\write\@mainaux{\string\@nameuse{es@quoting}}%
- \fi}%
- \fi
- \def\activatequoting{%
- \shorthandon{<>}%
- \let\es@quoting\activatequoting}%
- \def\deactivatequoting{%
- \shorthandoff{<>}%
- \let\es@quoting\deactivatequoting}}{}}
-
-\es@declarealt{<<}{"`}{\begin{quoting}}
-\es@declarealt{>>}{"'}{\end{quoting}}
-\begingroup
-\catcode`\'=12
-\gdef\es@activeacute{%
- \es@set@shorthand{'}%
- \def\es@a##1{\es@declare{'##1}{\@tabacckludge'##1}}%
- \es@a a\es@a e\es@a i\es@a o\es@a u%
- \es@a A\es@a E\es@a I\es@a O\es@a U%
- \es@declare{'n}{\~n}%
- \es@declare{'N}{\~N}%
- \es@declare{''}{''}%
- \let\es@pr@m@s\bbl@pr@m@s
- \def\bbl@pr@m@s{%
- \ifx'\@let@token
- \bbl@afterelse
- \pr@@@s
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi
- \es@pr@m@s
- \fi}%
- \let\es@activeacute\relax}
-\endgroup
-
-\ifes@latex
- \@ifpackagewith{babel}{activeacute}{\es@activeacute}{}
-\else
- \es@activeacute
-\fi
-\def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{\def\es@enum{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-\def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{\def\es@item{{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}}}
-
-\ifes@latex
-\es@enumerate{1.}{a)}{1)}{a$'$}
-\def\spanishdashitems{\es@itemize{---}{---}{---}{---}}
-\def\spanishsymbitems{%
- \es@itemize
- {\leavevmode\hbox to 1.2ex
- {\hss\vrule height .9ex width .7ex depth -.2ex\hss}}%
- {\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}}
-\def\spanishsignitems{%
- \es@itemize{\textbullet}%
- {$\m@th\circ$}%
- {$\m@th\diamond$}%
- {$\m@th\triangleright$}}
-\spanishsymbitems
-\def\es@enumdef#1#2#3\@@{%
- \if#21%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2a%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\emph{\alph{enum#1}}}%
- \else\if#2A%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Alph{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2i%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2I%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\Roman{enum#1}}%
- \else\if#2o%
- \@namedef{theenum#1}{\arabic{enum#1}\sptext{o}}%
- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
- \toks@\expandafter{\csname theenum#1\endcsname}%
- \expandafter\edef\csname labelenum#1\endcsname
- {\noexpand\es@listquot\the\toks@#3}}
-\def\es@guillemot#1#2{%
- \ifmmode#1%
- \else
- \save@sf@q{\penalty\@M
- \leavevmode\hbox{\usefont{U}{lasy}{m}{n}%
- \char#2 \kern-0.19em\char#2 }}%
- \fi}
-\def\layoutspanish{%
- \let\layoutspanish\@empty
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotleft}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\ll{40}}%
- \DeclareTextCommand{\guillemotright}{OT1}{\es@guillemot\gg{41}}%
- \def\@fnsymbol##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or*\or**\or***\or****\or
- *****\or******\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or i\or j\or
- k\or l\or m\or n\or \~n\or o\or p\or q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or
- w\or x\or y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}%
- \def\@Alph##1%
- {\ifcase##1\or A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or I\or J\or
- K\or L\or M\or N\or \~N\or O\or P\or Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or
- W\or X\or Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}
-
-\es@optlayout{noenumerate}{%
- \def\es@enumerate#1#2#3#4{%
- \es@enumdef{i}#1\@empty\@empty\@@
- \es@enumdef{ii}#2\@empty\@empty\@@
- \es@enumdef{iii}#3\@empty\@empty\@@
- \es@enumdef{iv}#4\@empty\@empty\@@}%
- \def\p@enumii{\theenumi}%
- \def\p@enumiii{\p@enumii\theenumii}%
- \def\p@enumiv{\p@enumiii\theenumiii}%
- \expandafter\es@enumerate\es@enum}
-\es@optlayout{noitemize}{%
- \def\es@itemize#1#2#3#4{%
- \def\labelitemi{\es@listquot#1}%
- \def\labelitemii{\es@listquot#2}%
- \def\labelitemiii{\es@listquot#3}%
- \def\labelitemiv{\es@listquot#4}}%
- \expandafter\es@itemize\es@item}
-\let\esromanindex\@secondoftwo
-\es@ifoption{ucroman}
- {\def\es@romandef{%
- \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\uppercase{##2}}}%
- \def\@roman{\@Roman}}}
- {\def\es@romandef{%
- \def\esromanindex##1##2{##1{\es@scroman{##2}}}%
- \def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\number##1}}%
- \def\es@roman##1{\es@scroman{\romannumeral##1}}%
- \DeclareRobustCommand\es@scroman{\es@xlsc\uppercase\@firstofone}}}
-\es@optlayout{lcroman}{\es@romandef}
-\newcommand\spanishlcroman{\def\@roman##1{\romannumeral##1}}
-\newcommand\spanishucroman{\def\@roman{\@Roman}}
-\newcommand\spanishscroman{\def\@roman##1{\es@roman{\romannumeral##1}}}
-\es@optlayout{noindentfirst}{%
- \let\@afterindentfalse\@afterindenttrue
- \@afterindenttrue}
-\es@optlayout{nosectiondot}{%
- \def\@seccntformat#1{\csname the#1\endcsname.\quad}%
- \def\numberline#1{\hb@xt@\@tempdima{#1\if&#1&\else.\fi\hfil}}}
-\es@ifoption{nolayout}{\let\layoutspanish\relax}{}
-\es@ifoption{sloppy}{\let\textspanish\relax\let\mathspanish\relax}{}
-\es@ifoption{delayed}{}{\def\es@layoutspanish{\layoutspanish}}
-\es@ifoption{preindex}{\AtEndOfPackage{\RequirePackage{romanidx}}}{}
-\AtEndOfPackage{%
-\let\es@activeacute\@undefined
-\def\bbl@tempa{spanish}%
-\ifx\bbl@main@language\bbl@tempa
- \@nameuse{es@layoutspanish}%
- \addto\es@select{%
- \@ifstar{\PackageError{spanish}%
- {Old syntax--use es-nolayout}%
- {If you don't want changes in layout\MessageBreak
- use the es-nolayout package option}}%
- {}}%
- \AtBeginDocument{\layoutspanish}%
-\fi
-\selectspanish}
-\fi
-\es@savedcatcodes
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\ifes@latex\else
- \es@select
-\fi
-\ldf@finish{spanish}
-\csname activatequoting\endcsname
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `spanish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty
index c1b609b54aa..84dbb260f44 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/spanish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `spanish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index a0446c49a40..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,160 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `swedish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% swedish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{swedish}
- [2005/03/31 v2.3d Swedish support from the babel system]
-%% File `swedish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{swedish}\captionsswedish
-\ifx\l@swedish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Swedish}
- \adddialect\l@swedish0\fi
-\addto\captionsswedish{%
- \def\prefacename{F\"orord}%
- \def\refname{Referenser}%
- \def\abstractname{Sammanfattning}%
- \def\bibname{Litteraturf\"orteckning}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitel}%
- \def\appendixname{Bilaga}%
- \def\contentsname{Inneh\csname aa\endcsname ll}%
- \def\listfigurename{Figurer}%
- \def\listtablename{Tabeller}%
- \def\indexname{Sakregister}%
- \def\figurename{Figur}%
- \def\tablename{Tabell}%
- \def\partname{Del}%
- \def\enclname{Bil.}%
- \def\ccname{Kopia f\"or k\"annedom}%
- \def\headtoname{Till}% in letter
- \def\pagename{Sida}%
- \def\seename{se}%
- \def\alsoname{se \"aven}%
- \def\proofname{Bevis}%
- \def\glossaryname{Ordlista}%
- }%
-\def\dateswedish{%
- \def\today{%
- \number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- januari\or februari\or mars\or april\or maj\or juni\or
- juli\or augusti\or september\or oktober\or november\or
- december\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\def\datesymd{%
- \def\today{\number\year-\two@digits\month-\two@digits\day}%
- }
-\def\datesdmy{%
- \def\today{\number\day/\number\month\space\number\year}%
- }
-\providehyphenmins{swedish}{\tw@\tw@}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\languageshorthands{swedish}}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasswedish{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\addto\noextrasswedish{\umlauthigh}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"w}{\textormath{{\aa}\allowhyphens}{\ddot w}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}\allowhyphens}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}\allowhyphens}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"W}{\textormath{{\AA}\allowhyphens}{\ddot W}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}\allowhyphens}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}\allowhyphens}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"b}{\textormath{\bbl@disc b{bb}}{b}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"B}{\textormath{\bbl@disc B{BB}}{B}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"d}{\textormath{\bbl@disc d{dd}}{d}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"D}{\textormath{\bbl@disc D{DD}}{D}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"g}{\textormath{\bbl@disc g{gg}}{g}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"G}{\textormath{\bbl@disc G{GG}}{G}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"r}{\textormath{\bbl@disc r{rr}}{r}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"R}{\textormath{\bbl@disc R{RR}}{R}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"s}{\textormath{\bbl@disc s{ss}}{s}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"S}{\textormath{\bbl@disc S{SS}}{S}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"-}{\nobreak-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \bbl@allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"~}{%
- \textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}\bbl@allowhyphens}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{swedish}{"=}{\hbox{-}\allowhyphens}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\babel@save\-}
-\addto\extrasswedish{\def\-{\allowhyphens
- \discretionary{-}{}{}\allowhyphens}}
-\ldf@finish{swedish}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `swedish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty
index 6b20c534e1b..b3e1577dfd6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/swedish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `swedish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def
index 2f0ab6227a5..d8fb0240f4f 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/switch.def
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% babel.dtx (with options: `kernel')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -36,15 +37,18 @@
%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-%%
%% File 'babel.dtx'
-%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2008/07/08 v3.8m The Babel package]
+%%\ProvidesFile{babel.dtx}[2013/04/15 v3.9e The Babel package]
%% Babel package for LaTeX2e.
%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2008 by Johannes Braams,
%% TeXniek
%% all rights reserved.
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
+%% Copyright (C) 2013 by Johannes Braams
+%% TeXniek
+%% by Javier Bezos
+%% all rights reserved.
+\def\bbl@version{3.9e}
+\def\bbl@date{2013/04/15}
\ifx\ProvidesFile\@undefined
\def\ProvidesFile#1[#2 #3 #4]{%
\wlog{File: #1 #4 #3 <#2>}%
@@ -66,26 +70,18 @@
\endgroup}
\fi
\ProvidesFile{switch.def}
- [2008/07/08 v3.8m %
- Babel language switching mechanism]
+ [2013/04/15 v3.9e %
+ Babel language switching mechanism]
\ifx\AtBeginDocument\@undefined
- \def\adddialect{}
\input plain.def\relax
\fi
-\expandafter\ifx\csname iflanguage\endcsname\relax \else
-\expandafter\endinput
-\fi
\ifx\language\@undefined
\csname newcount\endcsname\language
\fi
\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined
\csname newcount\endcsname\last@language
-\else
- \countdef\last@language=19
-\fi
-\ifx\newlanguage\@undefined
\def\addlanguage#1{%
- \global\advance\last@language \@ne
+ \global\advance\last@language\@ne
\ifnum\last@language<\@cclvi
\else
\errmessage{No room for a new \string\language!}%
@@ -93,150 +89,194 @@
\global\chardef#1\last@language
\wlog{\string#1 = \string\language\the\last@language}}
\else
+ \countdef\last@language=19
\def\addlanguage{\alloc@9\language\chardef\@cclvi}
\fi
\def\adddialect#1#2{%
- \global\chardef#1#2\relax
- \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}}
+ \global\chardef#1#2\relax
+ \bbl@usehooks{adddialect}{{#1}{#2}}%
+ \wlog{\string#1 = a dialect from \string\language#2}}
+\def\bbl@fixname#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\bbl@tempe{l@}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempd{\noexpand\@ifundefined{\noexpand\bbl@tempe#1}}%
+ \bbl@tempd
+ {\lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}%
+ {\uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}%
+ \@empty
+ {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}%
+ \uppercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}%
+ {\edef\bbl@tempd{\def\noexpand#1{#1}}%
+ \lowercase\expandafter{\bbl@tempd}}}%
+ \@empty
+ \edef\bbl@tempd{\endgroup\def\noexpand#1{#1}}%
+ \bbl@tempd}
+\def\bbl@iflanguage#1{%
+ \@ifundefined{l@#1}{\@nolanerr{#1}\@gobble}\@firstofone}
\def\iflanguage#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@afterfi{\ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language
+ \bbl@iflanguage{#1}{%
+ \ifnum\csname l@#1\endcsname=\language
\expandafter\@firstoftwo
\else
\expandafter\@secondoftwo
- \fi}%
- \fi}
+ \fi}}
+\let\bbl@select@type\z@
\edef\selectlanguage{%
\noexpand\protect
- \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname
- }
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname selectlanguage \endcsname}
\ifx\@undefined\protect\let\protect\relax\fi
\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
\def\xstring{\string\string\string}
\else
\let\xstring\string
\fi
-\xdef\bbl@language@stack{}
+\def\bbl@language@stack{}
\def\bbl@push@language{%
- \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}%
- }
+ \xdef\bbl@language@stack{\languagename+\bbl@language@stack}}
\def\bbl@pop@lang#1+#2-#3{%
- \def\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}%
- }
+ \edef\languagename{#1}\xdef#3{#2}}
\def\bbl@pop@language{%
\expandafter\bbl@pop@lang\bbl@language@stack-\bbl@language@stack
- \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}%
- }
+ \expandafter\bbl@set@language\expandafter{\languagename}}
\expandafter\def\csname selectlanguage \endcsname#1{%
\bbl@push@language
\aftergroup\bbl@pop@language
\bbl@set@language{#1}}
+\def\BabelContentsFiles{toc,lof,lot}%
\def\bbl@set@language#1{%
\edef\languagename{%
\ifnum\escapechar=\expandafter`\string#1\@empty
- \else \string#1\@empty\fi}%
+ \else\string#1\@empty\fi}%
\select@language{\languagename}%
- \if@filesw
- \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{toc}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{lof}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
- \addtocontents{lot}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax\else
+ \if@filesw
+ \protected@write\@auxout{}{\string\select@language{\languagename}}%
+ \bbl@for\bbl@tempa\BabelContentsFiles{%
+ \addtocontents{\bbl@tempa}{\xstring\select@language{\languagename}}}%
+ \bbl@usehooks{write}{}%
+ \fi
\fi}
\def\select@language#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \expandafter\ifx\csname date#1\endcsname\relax
- \@noopterr{#1}%
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\languagename
+ \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@error
+ {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet}%
+ {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}%
\else
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- \originalTeX
- \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX
- \expandafter{\csname noextras#1\endcsname
- \let\originalTeX\@empty}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \babel@beginsave
- \csname captions#1\endcsname
- \csname date#1\endcsname
- \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax
- \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin
- \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
+ \let\bbl@select@type\z@
+ \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}%
+ \fi}}
+\def\select@language@x#1{%
+ \ifcase\bbl@select@type
+ \bbl@ifsamestring\languagename{#1}{}{\select@language{#1}}%
+ \else
+ \select@language{#1}%
+ \fi}
+\def\bbl@switch#1{%
+ \originalTeX
+ \expandafter\def\expandafter\originalTeX\expandafter{%
+ \csname noextras#1\endcsname
+ \let\originalTeX\@empty
+ \babel@beginsave}%
+ \languageshorthands{none}%
+ \ifcase\bbl@select@type
+ \csname captions#1\endcsname
+ \csname date#1\endcsname
+ \fi
+ \bbl@usehooks{beforeextras}{}%
+ \csname extras#1\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@usehooks{afterextras}{}%
+ \bbl@patterns{#1}%
+ \babel@savevariable\lefthyphenmin
+ \babel@savevariable\righthyphenmin
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
+ \else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
+ \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \fi}
+\def\bbl@ifsamestring#1#2{%
+ \protected@edef\bbl@tempb{#1}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempb{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempb}%
+ \protected@edef\bbl@tempc{#2}%
+ \edef\bbl@tempc{\expandafter\strip@prefix\meaning\bbl@tempc}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempb\bbl@tempc
+ \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+ \else
+ \expandafter\@secondoftwo
\fi}
\long\def\otherlanguage#1{%
\csname selectlanguage \endcsname{#1}%
- \ignorespaces
- }
+ \ignorespaces}
\long\def\endotherlanguage{%
- \originalTeX
- \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces
- }
+ \global\@ignoretrue\ignorespaces}
\expandafter\def\csname otherlanguage*\endcsname#1{%
- \foreign@language{#1}%
- }
-\expandafter\def\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname{%
- \csname noextras\languagename\endcsname
- }
-\def\foreignlanguage{\protect\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname}
+ \foreign@language{#1}}
+\expandafter\let\csname endotherlanguage*\endcsname\relax
+\edef\foreignlanguage{%
+ \noexpand\protect
+ \expandafter\noexpand\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname}
\expandafter\def\csname foreignlanguage \endcsname#1#2{%
\begingroup
- \originalTeX
\foreign@language{#1}%
#2%
- \csname noextras#1\endcsname
- \endgroup
- }
+ \endgroup}
\def\foreign@language#1{%
- \def\languagename{#1}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\relax
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@patterns{\languagename}%
- \languageshorthands{none}%
- \csname extras#1\endcsname
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\languagename
+ \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{%
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname date\languagename\endcsname\relax
+ \bbl@warning
+ {You haven't loaded the language #1\space yet\\%
+ I'll proceed, but expect unexpected results.\\%
+ Reported}%
\fi
- \fi
- }
+ \let\bbl@select@type\@ne
+ \expandafter\bbl@switch\expandafter{\languagename}}}
+\let\bbl@hyphlist\@empty
+\let\bbl@hyphenation@\relax
\def\bbl@patterns#1{%
\language=\expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname\relax
- \csname l@#1\endcsname
- \else
- \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname
- \fi\relax
-}
+ \csname l@#1\endcsname
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{#1}%
+ \else
+ \csname l@#1:\f@encoding\endcsname
+ \edef\bbl@tempa{#1:\f@encoding}%
+ \fi\relax
+ \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{patterns}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}%
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@}{}{%
+ \begingroup
+ \@expandtwoargs\in@{,\number\language,}{,\bbl@hyphlist}%
+ \ifin@\else
+ \@expandtwoargs\bbl@usehooks{hyphenation}{{#1}{\bbl@tempa}}%
+ \hyphenation{%
+ \bbl@hyphenation@
+ \@ifundefined{bbl@hyphenation@#1}%
+ \@empty
+ {\space\csname bbl@hyphenation@#1\endcsname}}%
+ \xdef\bbl@hyphlist{\bbl@hyphlist\number\language,}%
+ \fi
+ \endgroup}}
\def\hyphenrules#1{%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname l@#1\endcsname\@undefined
- \@nolanerr{#1}%
- \else
- \bbl@patterns{#1}%
+ \edef\languagename{#1}%
+ \bbl@fixname\languagename
+ \bbl@iflanguage\languagename{%
+ \expandafter\bbl@patterns\expandafter{\languagename}%
\languageshorthands{none}%
- \expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
- \else
- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
- \csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
- \fi
- \fi
- }
-\def\endhyphenrules{}
+ \expandafter\ifx\csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \set@hyphenmins\tw@\thr@@\relax
+ \else
+ \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\set@hyphenmins
+ \csname\languagename hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
+ \fi}}
+\let\endhyphenrules\@empty
\def\providehyphenmins#1#2{%
\expandafter\ifx\csname #1hyphenmins\endcsname\relax
\@namedef{#1hyphenmins}{#2}%
\fi}
-\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\righthyphenmin#2}
+\def\set@hyphenmins#1#2{\lefthyphenmin#1\relax\righthyphenmin#2\relax}
\def\LdfInit{%
\chardef\atcatcode=\catcode`\@
\catcode`\@=11\relax
@@ -245,39 +285,55 @@
\LdfInit}
\ifx\originalTeX\@undefined\let\originalTeX\@empty\fi
\ifx\babel@beginsave\@undefined\let\babel@beginsave\relax\fi
+\edef\bbl@nulllanguage{\string\language=0}
\ifx\PackageError\@undefined
- \def\@nolanerr#1{%
- \errhelp{Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}%
- \errmessage{You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}}
- \def\@nopatterns#1{%
- \message{No hyphenation patterns were loaded for}%
- \message{the language `#1'}%
- \message{I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0
- instead}}
- \def\@noopterr#1{%
- \errmessage{The option #1 was not specified in \string\usepackage}
- \errhelp{You may continue, but expect unexpected results}}
- \def\@activated#1{%
- \wlog{Package babel Info: Making #1 an active character}}
+ \def\bbl@error#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar=`\^^J
+ \def\\{^^J(babel) }%
+ \errhelp{#2}\errmessage{\\#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@warning#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar=`\^^J
+ \def\\{^^J(babel) }%
+ \message{\\#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@info#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \newlinechar=`\^^J
+ \def\\{^^J}%
+ \wlog{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
\else
- \newcommand*{\@nolanerr}[1]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}%
- {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
- \newcommand*{\@nopatterns}[1]{%
- \PackageWarningNoLine{babel}%
- {No hyphenation patterns were loaded for\MessageBreak
- the language `#1'\MessageBreak
- I will use the patterns loaded for \string\language=0
- instead}}
- \newcommand*{\@noopterr}[1]{%
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {You haven't loaded the option #1\space yet}%
- {You may proceed, but expect unexpected results}}
- \newcommand*{\@activated}[1]{%
- \PackageInfo{babel}{%
- Making #1 an active character}}
+ \def\bbl@error#1#2{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\\{\MessageBreak}%
+ \PackageError{babel}{#1}{#2}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@warning#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\\{\MessageBreak}%
+ \PackageWarning{babel}{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
+ \def\bbl@info#1{%
+ \begingroup
+ \def\\{\MessageBreak}%
+ \PackageInfo{babel}{#1}%
+ \endgroup}
\fi
+\def\@nolanerr#1{%
+ \bbl@error
+ {You haven't defined the language #1\space yet}%
+ {Your command will be ignored, type <return> to proceed}}
+\def\@nopatterns#1{%
+ \bbl@warning
+ {No hyphenation patterns were preloaded for\\%
+ the language `#1' into the format.\\%
+ Please, configure your TeX system to add them and\\%
+ rebuild the format. Now I will use the patterns\\%
+ preloaded for \bbl@nulllanguage\space instead}}
+\let\bbl@usehooks\@gobbletwo
%%
%% \CharacterTable
%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 0750a5a53ee..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,150 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `turkish.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% turkish.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{turkish}
- [2005/03/31 v1.2m Turkish support from the babel system]
-%% File `turkish.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-%% Turkish Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2005
-%% by Mustafa Burc
-%% rz6001@rziris01.rrz.uni-hamburg.de
-%% (40) 2503476
-\LdfInit{turkish}\captionsturkish
-\ifx\l@turkish\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Turkish}
- \adddialect\l@turkish0\fi
-\addto\captionsturkish{%
- \def\prefacename{\"Ons\"oz}%
- \def\refname{Kaynaklar}%
- \def\abstractname{\"Ozet}%
- \def\bibname{Kaynak\c ca}%
- \def\chaptername{B\"ol\"um}%
- \def\appendixname{Ek}%
- \def\contentsname{\.I\c cindekiler}%
- \def\listfigurename{\c Sekil Listesi}%
- \def\listtablename{Tablo Listesi}%
- \def\indexname{Dizin}%
- \def\figurename{\c Sekil}%
- \def\tablename{Tablo}%
- \def\partname{K\i s\i m}%
- \def\enclname{\.Ili\c sik}%
- \def\ccname{Di\u ger Al\i c\i lar}%
- \def\headtoname{Al\i c\i}%
- \def\pagename{Sayfa}%
- \def\subjectname{\.Ilgili}%
- \def\seename{bkz.}%
- \def\alsoname{ayr\i ca bkz.}%
- \def\proofname{Kan\i t}%
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
-}%
-\def\dateturkish{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- Ocak\or \c Subat\or Mart\or Nisan\or May\i{}s\or Haziran\or
- Temmuz\or A\u gustos\or Eyl\"ul\or Ekim\or Kas\i{}m\or
- Aral\i{}k\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\initiate@active@char{:}
-\initiate@active@char{!}
-\initiate@active@char{=}
-\addto\extrasturkish{\languageshorthands{turkish}}
-\addto\extrasturkish{%
- \bbl@activate{:}\bbl@activate{!}\bbl@activate{=}}
-\addto\extrasturkish{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasturkish{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-%%^^A JLB:: this code breaks during \begin{document}
-%%^^A JLB: Needs fixing!!
-\declare@shorthand{turkish}{:}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string:%
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string:%
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{turkish}{!}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string!%
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\penalty\@M\thinspace
- \fi
- \fi
- \string!%
- \fi}
-\declare@shorthand{turkish}{=}{%
- \ifmmode
- \string=%
- \else\relax
- \ifhmode
- \ifdim\lastskip>\z@
- \unskip\kern\fontdimen2\font
- \kern-1.4\fontdimen3\font
- \fi
- \fi
- \string=%
- \fi}
-\ldf@finish{turkish}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `turkish.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty
index 51de47caea4..04d59fd4b33 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/turkish.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `turkish')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index cbd1d6d5fff..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,321 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `ukraineb.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% ukraineb.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{ukraineb}
- [2008/03/21 v1.1l Ukrainian support from the babel system]
-%% File `ukraineb.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% ukraineb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1997 - 2008
-%% by Andrij Shvaika ashv at icmp.lviv.ua
-%% derived from the Russianb Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1995 - 2008
-%% by Olga Lapko cyrtug at mir.msk.su
-%% Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.xs4all.nl
-\LdfInit{ukrainian}{captionsukrainian}
-\ifx\l@ukrainian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Ukrainian}
- \adddialect\l@ukrainian0
-\fi
-\let\latinencoding\cf@encoding
-\def\reserved@a#1#2{%
- \edef\reserved@b{#1}%
- \edef\reserved@c{#2}%
- \ifx\reserved@b\reserved@c
- \let\cyrillicencoding\reserved@c
- \fi}
-\def\cdp@elt#1#2#3#4{%
- \reserved@a{#1}{OT2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LWN}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{LCY}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{X2}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2C}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2B}%
- \reserved@a{#1}{T2A}}
-\cdp@list
-\ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \IfFileExists{ot2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{OT2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lwnenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LWN}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{lcyenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{LCY}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{x2enc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{X2}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2cenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2C}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2benc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2B}}\relax
- \IfFileExists{t2aenc.def}{\def\cyrillicencoding{T2A}}\relax
- \ifx\cyrillicencoding\undefined
- \PackageError{babel}%
- {No Cyrillic encoding definition files were found}%
- {Your installation is incomplete.\MessageBreak
- You need at least one of the following files:\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- x2enc.def, t2aenc.def, t2benc.def, t2cenc.def,\MessageBreak
- \space\space
- lcyenc.def, lwnenc.def, ot2enc.def.}%
- \else
- \lowercase
- \expandafter{\expandafter\input\cyrillicencoding enc.def\relax}%
- \fi
-\fi
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\Ukrainian}{%
- \fontencoding\cyrillicencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\cyrillicencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\ukrainianhyphenmins
- \language\l@ukrainian}%
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\English}{%
- \fontencoding\latinencoding\selectfont
- \let\encodingdefault\latinencoding
- \expandafter\set@hyphenmins\englishhyphenmins
- \language\l@english}%
-\let\Ukr\Ukrainian
-\let\Eng\English
-\let\cyrillictext\Ukrainian
-\let\cyr\Ukrainian
-\expandafter\ifx\csname T@X2\endcsname\relax\else
- \def\@alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- a\or b\or c\or d\or e\or f\or g\or h\or
- i\or j\or k\or l\or m\or n\or o\or p\or
- q\or r\or s\or t\or u\or v\or w\or x\or
- y\or z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \def\@Alph#1{{\fontencoding{\latinencoding}\selectfont
- \ifcase#1\or
- A\or B\or C\or D\or E\or F\or G\or H\or
- I\or J\or K\or L\or M\or N\or O\or P\or
- Q\or R\or S\or T\or U\or V\or W\or X\or
- Y\or Z\else\@ctrerr\fi}}%
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\AA}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextSymbolDefault{\aa}{OT1}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\aa}{OT1}{\r a}
- \DeclareTextCommand{\AA}{OT1}{\r A}
-\fi
-\@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{}{%
- \def\reserved@a{LWN}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \def\reserved@a{OT2}%
- \ifx\reserved@a\cyrillicencoding\else
- \PackageWarning{babel}%
- {No input encoding specified for Ukrainian language}
- \fi\fi}
-\let\lat\latintext
-\DeclareTextFontCommand{\textcyrillic}{\cyrillictext}
-\addto\captionsukrainian{%
- \def\prefacename{{\cyr\CYRV\cyrs\cyrt\cyru\cyrp}}%
- \def\refname{%
- {\cyr\CYRL\cyrii\cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyra\cyrt\cyru\cyrr\cyra}}%
- \def\abstractname{%
- {\cyr\CYRA\cyrn\cyro\cyrt\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrya}}%
- \def\bibname{%
- {\cyr\CYRB\cyrii\cyrb\cyrl\cyrii\cyro\cyrgup\cyrr\cyra\cyrf\cyrii\cyrya}}%
- \def\chaptername{{\cyr\CYRR\cyro\cyrz\cyrd\cyrii\cyrl}}%
- \def\appendixname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrd\cyra\cyrt\cyro\cyrk}}%
- \def\contentsname{{\cyr\CYRZ\cyrm\cyrii\cyrs\cyrt}}%
- \def\listfigurename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrii\cyrl\cyryu\cyrs\cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrc\cyrii\cyrishrt}}%
- \def\listtablename{{\cyr\CYRP\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrl\cyrii\cyrk
- \ \cyrt\cyra\cyrb\cyrl\cyri\cyrc\cyrsftsn}}%
- \def\indexname{{\cyr\CYRP\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}%
- \def\authorname{{\cyr\CYRII\cyrm\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyri\cyrishrt
- \ \cyrp\cyro\cyrk\cyra\cyrzh\cyrch\cyri\cyrk}}%
- \def\figurename{{\cyr\CYRR\cyri\cyrs.}}%
- \def\tablename{{\cyr\CYRT\cyra\cyrb\cyrl.}}%
- \def\partname{{\cyr\CYRCH\cyra\cyrs\cyrt\cyri\cyrn\cyra}}%
- \def\enclname{{\cyr\cyrv\cyrk\cyrl\cyra\cyrd\cyrk\cyra}}%
- \def\ccname{{\cyr\cyrk\cyro\cyrp\cyrii\cyrya}}%
- \def\headtoname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro}}%
- \def\pagename{{\cyr\cyrs.}}%
- \def\seename{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.}}%
- \def\alsoname{{\cyr\cyrd\cyri\cyrv.\ \cyrt\cyra\cyrk\cyro\cyrzh}}
- \def\proofname{{\cyr\CYRD\cyro\cyrv\cyre\cyrd\cyre\cyrn\cyrn\cyrya}}%
- \def\glossaryname{{\cyr\CYRS\cyrl\cyro\cyrv\cyrn\cyri\cyrk\ %
- \cyrt\cyre\cyrr\cyrm\cyrii\cyrn\cyrii\cyrv}}%
- }
-\def\dateukrainian{%
- \def\today{\number\day~\ifcase\month\or
- \cyrs\cyrii\cyrch\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrl\cyryu\cyrt\cyro\cyrg\cyro\or
- \cyrb\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrz\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrk\cyrv\cyrii\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrt\cyrr\cyra\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrch\cyre\cyrr\cyrv\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrl\cyri\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrs\cyre\cyrr\cyrp\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrv\cyre\cyrr\cyre\cyrs\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrzh\cyro\cyrv\cyrt\cyrn\cyrya\or
- \cyrl\cyri\cyrs\cyrt\cyro\cyrp\cyra\cyrd\cyra\or
- \cyrg\cyrr\cyru\cyrd\cyrn\cyrya\fi
- \space\number\year~\cyrr.}}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\cyrillictext}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{\latintext}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=`\'}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{\lccode`\'=0}
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\languageshorthands{ukrainian}}
-\addto\extrasukrainian{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\reserved@a{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\reserved@a
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"`}{\glqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"'}{\grqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"<}{\flqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{">}{\frqq}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"~}{\textormath{\leavevmode\hbox{-}}{-}}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"=}{\nobreak-\hskip\z@skip}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{"-}{%
- \def\ukrainian@sh@tmp{%
- \if\ukrainian@sh@next-\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@emdash
- \else\expandafter\ukrainian@sh@hyphen\fi
- }%
- \futurelet\ukrainian@sh@next\ukrainian@sh@tmp}
-\def\ukrainian@sh@hyphen{%
- \nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\def\ukrainian@sh@emdash#1#2{\cdash-#1#2}
-\def\cdash#1#2#3{\def\tempx@{#3}%
-\def\tempa@{-}\def\tempb@{~}\def\tempc@{*}%
- \ifx\tempx@\tempa@\@Acdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempb@\@Bcdash\else
- \ifx\tempx@\tempc@\@Ccdash\else
- \errmessage{Wrong usage of cdash}\fi\fi\fi}
-\def\@Acdash{\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\nobreak\hskip.2em\fi
- \cyrdash\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}%
-\def\@Bcdash{\leavevmode\ifdim\lastskip>\z@\unskip\fi
- \nobreak\cyrdash\penalty\exhyphenpenalty\hskip\z@skip\ignorespaces}%
-\def\@Ccdash{\leavevmode
- \nobreak\cyrdash\nobreak\hskip.35em\ignorespaces}%
-\ifx\cyrdash\undefined
- \def\cyrdash{\hbox to.8em{--\hss--}}
-\fi
-\declare@shorthand{ukrainian}{",}{\nobreak\hskip.2em\ignorespaces}
-\def\mdqon{\bbl@activate{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\ifx\englishhyphenmins\undefined
- \def\englishhyphenmins{\tw@\thr@@}
-\fi
-\addto\extrasukrainian{\bbl@frenchspacing}
-\addto\noextrasukrainian{\bbl@nonfrenchspacing}
-\def\Asbuk#1{\expandafter\@Asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@Asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \CYRA\or\CYRB\or\CYRV\or\CYRG\or\CYRD\or\CYRE\or\CYRIE\or
- \CYRZH\or\CYRZ\or\CYRI\or\CYRII\or\CYRYI\or\CYRISHRT\or
- \CYRK\or\CYRL\or\CYRM\or\CYRN\or\CYRO\or\CYRP\or\CYRR\or
- \CYRS\or\CYRT\or\CYRU\or\CYRF\or\CYRH\or\CYRC\or\CYRCH\or
- \CYRSH\or\CYRSHCH\or\CYRYU\or\CYRYA\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\def\asbuk#1{\expandafter\@asbuk\csname c@#1\endcsname}
-\def\@asbuk#1{\ifcase#1\or
- \cyra\or\cyrb\or\cyrv\or\cyrg\or\cyrd\or\cyre\or\cyrie\or
- \cyrzh\or\cyrz\or\cyri\or\cyrii\or\cyryi\or\cyrishrt\or
- \cyrk\or\cyrl\or\cyrm\or\cyrn\or\cyro\or\cyrp\or\cyrr\or
- \cyrs\or\cyrt\or\cyru\or\cyrf\or\cyrh\or\cyrc\or\cyrch\or
- \cyrsh\or\cyrshch\or\cyryu\or\cyrya\else\@ctrerr\fi}
-\@ifundefined{sym\cyrillicencoding letters}{}{%
-\SetSymbolFont{\cyrillicencoding letters}{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareSymbolFontAlphabet\cyrmathrm{\cyrillicencoding letters}
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathbf\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathit\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\mddefault\itdefault
-\DeclareMathAlphabet\cyrmathtt\cyrillicencoding
- \ttdefault\mddefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathsf{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \sfdefault\bfdefault\updefault
-\SetMathAlphabet\cyrmathit{bold}\cyrillicencoding
- \rmdefault\bfdefault\itdefault
-}
-\def\sh{\mathop{\operator@font sh}\nolimits}
-\def\ch{\mathop{\operator@font ch}\nolimits}
-\def\tg{\mathop{\operator@font tg}\nolimits}
-\def\arctg{\mathop{\operator@font arctg}\nolimits}
-\def\arcctg{\mathop{\operator@font arcctg}\nolimits}
-\addto\extrasrussian{%
- \babel@save{\th}%
- \let\ltx@th\th
- \def\th{\textormath{\ltx@th}%
- {\mathop{\operator@font th}\nolimits}}%
- }
-\def\ctg{\mathop{\operator@font ctg}\nolimits}
-\def\cth{\mathop{\operator@font cth}\nolimits}
-\def\cosec{\mathop{\operator@font cosec}\nolimits}
-\def\Prob{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{P}}\nolimits}
-\def\Variance{\mathop{\kern\z@\mathsf{D}}\nolimits}
-\def\nsd{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrd.}}\nolimits}
-\def\nsk{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyrs.\cyrk.}}\nolimits}
-\def\NSD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRD}}\nolimits}
-\def\NSK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRS\CYRK}}\nolimits}
- \def\nod{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrd.}}\nolimits} % ??????
- \def\nok{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\cyrn.\cyro.\cyrk.}}\nolimits} % ??????
- \def\NOD{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRD}}\nolimits} % ??????
- \def\NOK{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRN\CYRO\CYRK}}\nolimits} % ??????
-\def\Proj{\mathop{\cyrmathrm{\CYRP\cyrr}}\nolimits}
-\DeclareRobustCommand{\No}{%
- \ifmmode{\nfss@text{\textnumero}}\else\textnumero\fi}
-\ldf@finish{ukrainian}
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `ukraineb.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty
index 1a4ff994e93..83f6289463a 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/ukraineb.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `ukraineb')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index d1a5de345a6..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,183 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `usorbian.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% usorbian.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{usorbian}
- [2008/03/17 v1.0k Upper Sorbian support from the babel system]
-%% File `usorbian.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 - 2008
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Upper Sorbian Language Definition File
-%% Copyright (C) 1994 - 2004
-%% by Eduard Werner
-%% Please report errors to: Eduard Werner edi at kaihh.hanse.de
-%%
-\LdfInit\CurrentOption{date\CurrentOption}
-\ifx\l@uppersorbian\@undefined
- \ifx\l@usorbian\@undefined
- \@nopatterns{Usorbian}
- \adddialect\l@usorbian\z@
- \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian
- \else
- \let\l@uppersorbian\l@usorbian
- \fi
-\else
- \let\l@usorbian\l@uppersorbian
-\fi
-\@namedef{captions\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\prefacename{Zawod}%
- \def\refname{Referency}%
- \def\abstractname{Abstrakt}%
- \def\bibname{Literatura}%
- \def\chaptername{Kapitl}%
- \def\appendixname{Dodawki}%
- \def\contentsname{Wobsah}%
- \def\listfigurename{Zapis wobrazow}%
- \def\listtablename{Zapis tabulkow}%
- \def\indexname{Indeks}%
- \def\figurename{Wobraz}%
- \def\tablename{Tabulka}%
- \def\partname{D\'z\v el}%
- \def\enclname{P\v r\l oha}%
- \def\ccname{CC}%
- \def\headtoname{Komu}%
- \def\pagename{Strona}%
- \def\seename{hl.}%
- \def\alsoname{hl.~te\v z}
- \def\proofname{Proof}% <-- needs translation
- \def\glossaryname{Glossary}% <-- Needs translation
- }%
-\@namedef{newdate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- januara\or februara\or m\v erca\or apryla\or meje\or junija\or
- julija\or awgusta\or septembra\or oktobra\or
- nowembra\or decembra\fi
- \space \number\year}}
-\@namedef{olddate\CurrentOption}{%
- \def\today{\number\day.~\ifcase\month\or
- wulkeho r\'o\v zka\or ma\l eho r\'o\v zka\or nal\v etnika\or
- jutrownika\or r\'o\v zownika\or sma\v znika\or pra\v znika\or
- \v znjenca\or po\v znjenca\or winowca\or nazymnika\or
- hodownika\fi \space \number\year}}
-\expandafter\let\csname date\CurrentOption\expandafter\endcsname
- \csname newdate\CurrentOption\endcsname
-\initiate@active@char{"}
-\@namedef{extras\CurrentOption}{\languageshorthands{usorbian}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@activate{"}}
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \bbl@deactivate{"}}
-\begingroup \catcode`\^7
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@savevariable{\lccode`\^^Y}%
- \lccode`\^^Y`\^^Y}}
-\x
-\expandafter\addto\csname extras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \babel@save\"\umlautlow}
-\expandafter\addto\csname noextras\CurrentOption\endcsname{%
- \umlauthigh}
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\tw@}
-\begingroup \catcode`\"12
-\def\x{\endgroup
- \def\@SS{\mathchar"7019 }
- \def\dq{"}}
-\x
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"a}{\textormath{\"{a}}{\ddot a}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"o}{\textormath{\"{o}}{\ddot o}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"u}{\textormath{\"{u}}{\ddot u}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"A}{\textormath{\"{A}}{\ddot A}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"O}{\textormath{\"{O}}{\ddot O}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"U}{\textormath{\"{U}}{\ddot U}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"e}{\textormath{\"{e}}{\ddot e}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"E}{\textormath{\"{E}}{\ddot E}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"i}{\textormath{\"{\i}}{\ddot\imath}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"I}{\textormath{\"{I}}{\ddot I}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"s}{\textormath{\ss{}}{\@SS{}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"S}{SS}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"`}{%
- \textormath{\quotedblbase}{\mbox{\quotedblbase}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"'}{%
- \textormath{\textquotedblleft}{\mbox{\textquotedblleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"<}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotleft}{\mbox{\guillemotleft}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{">}{%
- \textormath{\guillemotright}{\mbox{\guillemotright}}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"c}{\textormath{\bbl@disc ck}{c}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"C}{\textormath{\bbl@disc CK}{C}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"f}{\textormath{\bbl@disc f{ff}}{f}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"F}{\textormath{\bbl@disc F{FF}}{F}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"l}{\textormath{\bbl@disc l{ll}}{l}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"L}{\textormath{\bbl@disc L{LL}}{L}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"m}{\textormath{\bbl@disc m{mm}}{m}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"M}{\textormath{\bbl@disc M{MM}}{M}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"n}{\textormath{\bbl@disc n{nn}}{n}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"N}{\textormath{\bbl@disc N{NN}}{N}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"p}{\textormath{\bbl@disc p{pp}}{p}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"P}{\textormath{\bbl@disc P{PP}}{P}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"t}{\textormath{\bbl@disc t{tt}}{t}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"T}{\textormath{\bbl@disc T{TT}}{T}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"-}{\nobreak\-\bbl@allowhyphens}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{"|}{%
- \textormath{\nobreak\discretionary{-}{}{\kern.03em}%
- \allowhyphens}{}}
-\declare@shorthand{usorbian}{""}{\hskip\z@skip}
-\def\mdqon{\shorthandon{"}}
-\def\mdqoff{\shorthandoff{"}}
-\def\ck{\allowhyphens\discretionary{k-}{k}{ck}\allowhyphens}
-\ldf@finish\CurrentOption
-%%
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `usorbian.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty
index 0e4927573e7..769381874e3 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/usorbian.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `usorbian')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.ldf b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.ldf
deleted file mode 100644
index 58bc629496c..00000000000
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.ldf
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,104 +0,0 @@
-%%
-%% This is file `welsh.ldf',
-%% generated with the docstrip utility.
-%%
-%% The original source files were:
-%%
-%% welsh.dtx (with options: `code')
-%% This is a generated file.
-%%
-%% Copyright 1989-2005 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
-%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
-%%
-%% This file was generated from file(s) of the Babel system.
-%% ---------------------------------------------------------
-%%
-%% It may be distributed and/or modified under the
-%% conditions of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3
-%% of this license or (at your option) any later version.
-%% The latest version of this license is in
-%% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt
-%% and version 1.3 or later is part of all distributions of LaTeX
-%% version 2003/12/01 or later.
-%%
-%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
-%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
-%%
-%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
-%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
-%% such generated files.
-%%
-%% The list of all files belonging to the Babel distribution is
-%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
-%% information.
-%%
-%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
-%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
-%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
-\ProvidesLanguage{welsh}
- [2005/03/31 v1.0d Welsh support from the babel system]
-%% File `welsh.dtx'
-%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
-%% Copyright (C) 1989 -- 2005
-%% by Johannes Braams, TeXniek
-%% Please report errors to: J.L. Braams
-%% babel at braams.cistron.nl
-\LdfInit{welsh}{captionswelsh}
-\ifx\undefined\l@welsh
- \@nopatterns{welsh}
- \adddialect\l@welsh0\fi
-\providehyphenmins{\CurrentOption}{\tw@\thr@@}
-\def\captionswelsh{%
- \def\prefacename{Rhagair}%
- \def\refname{Cyfeiriadau}%
- \def\abstractname{Crynodeb}%
- \def\bibname{Llyfryddiaeth}%
- \def\chaptername{Pennod}%
- \def\appendixname{Atodiad}%
- \def\contentsname{Cynnwys}%
- \def\listfigurename{Rhestr Ddarluniau}%
- \def\listtablename{Rhestr Dablau}%
- \def\indexname{Mynegai}%
- \def\figurename{Darlun}%
- \def\tablename{Taflen}%
- \def\partname{Rhan}%
- \def\enclname{amgae\"edig}%
- \def\ccname{cop\"\i au}%
- \def\headtoname{At}% % `at' on letters meaning `to ( a person)'
- % `to (a place)' is `i' in Welsh
- \def\pagename{tudalen}%
- \def\seename{gweler}%
- \def\alsoname{gweler hefyd}%
- \def\proofname{Prawf}%
- \def\glossaryname{Rhestr termau}%
- }
-\def\datewelsh{%
- \def\today{\ifnum\day=1\relax 1\/$^{\mathrm{a\tilde{n}}}$\else
- \number\day\fi\space\ifcase\month\or
- Ionawr\or Chwefror\or Mawrth\or Ebrill\or
- Mai\or Mehefin\or Gorffennaf\or Awst\or
- Medi\or Hydref\or Tachwedd\or Rhagfyr\fi
- \space\number\year}}
-\addto\extraswelsh{}
-\addto\noextraswelsh{}
-\ldf@finish{welsh}
-%% \CharacterTable
-%% {Upper-case \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
-%% Lower-case \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
-%% Digits \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
-%% Exclamation \! Double quote \" Hash (number) \#
-%% Dollar \$ Percent \% Ampersand \&
-%% Acute accent \' Left paren \( Right paren \)
-%% Asterisk \* Plus \+ Comma \,
-%% Minus \- Point \. Solidus \/
-%% Colon \: Semicolon \; Less than \<
-%% Equals \= Greater than \> Question mark \?
-%% Commercial at \@ Left bracket \[ Backslash \\
-%% Right bracket \] Circumflex \^ Underscore \_
-%% Grave accent \` Left brace \{ Vertical bar \|
-%% Right brace \} Tilde \~}
-%%
-\endinput
-%%
-%% End of file `welsh.ldf'.
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty
index 21e55d35949..cd8ace831b6 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/welsh.sty
@@ -7,6 +7,7 @@
%% bbcompat.dtx (with options: `welsh')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrenc.def b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/xebabel.def
index 7f96aa73ea8..289874aa2e2 100644
--- a/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/lgrenc.def
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/tex/generic/babel/xebabel.def
@@ -1,12 +1,13 @@
%%
-%% This is file `lgrenc.def',
+%% This is file `xebabel.def',
%% generated with the docstrip utility.
%%
%% The original source files were:
%%
-%% greek.fdd (with options: `LGRenc')
+%% bbunicode.dtx (with options: `xetex')
%% This is a generated file.
%%
+%% Copyright 2012-2013 Javier Bezos and Johannes L. Braams.
%% Copyright 1989-2008 Johannes L. Braams and any individual authors
%% listed elsewhere in this file. All rights reserved.
%%
@@ -23,7 +24,7 @@
%%
%% This work has the LPPL maintenance status "maintained".
%%
-%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Johannes Braams.
+%% The Current Maintainer of this work is Javier Bezos.
%%
%% This file may only be distributed together with a copy of the Babel
%% system. You may however distribute the Babel system without
@@ -33,26 +34,26 @@
%% given in the file `manifest.bbl'. See also `legal.bbl for additional
%% information.
%%
-%% In particular, permission is granted to customize the declarations in
-%% this file to serve the needs of your installation.
-%%
-%% However, NO PERMISSION is granted to distribute a modified version
-%% of this file under its original name.
-%%
-\ProvidesFile{lgrenc.def}
- [2008/06/17 v2.3 %
- Greek Encoding]
-\DeclareFontEncoding{LGR}{}{}
-\DeclareFontSubstitution{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}
-\DeclareErrorFont{LGR}{cmr}{m}{n}{10}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textcopyright}{LGR}{%
- \textcircled{\textlatin{c}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\textregistered}{LGR}{%
- \textcircled{\textlatin{\textsc r}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\texttrademark}{LGR}{%
- \textsuperscript{\textlatin{TM}}}
-\ProvideTextCommand{\SS}{LGR}{%
- \textlatin{SS}}
+%% The list of derived (unpacked) files belonging to the distribution
+%% and covered by LPPL is defined by the unpacking scripts (with
+%% extension .ins) which are part of the distribution.
+%% File `bbunicode.dtx'
+%% Babel package for LaTeX version 2e
+%% Copyright (C) 2103
+%% by Javier Bezos
+\def\BabelStringsDefault{unicode}
+\let\xebbl@stop\relax
+\AddBabelHook{xetex}{encodedcommands}{%
+ \def\bbl@tempa{#1}%
+ \ifx\bbl@tempa\@empty
+ \XeTeXinputencoding"bytes"%
+ \else
+ \XeTeXinputencoding"#1"%
+ \fi
+ \def\xebbl@stop{\XeTeXinputencoding"utf8"}}
+\AddBabelHook{xetex}{stopcommands}{%
+ \xebbl@stop
+ \let\xebbl@stop\relax}
\endinput
%%
-%% End of file `lgrenc.def'.
+%% End of file `xebabel.def'.